Skip to main content

Full text of "A critical and exegetical commentary on the book of Psalms"

See other formats 


r^> 


ff* 


ARY 


f  nltrnaiinnarl  Critical  Cnmttuniarg 

rrn  %  |)ob  gtripturis  of  %  $fo  anfr 
|lctn  (Ltstamimts. 


UNDER   THE   EDITORSHIP  OF 

The   Rev.  SAMUEL   ROLLES    DRIVER,  D.D.,  D.Litt., 

Regius  Professor  of  Hebrew,  Oxford; 

The    Rev.  ALFRED  PLUMMER,  M.A.,  D.D., 

Master  of  University  College,  Durham; 


The  Rev.  CHARLES  AUGUSTUS  BRIGGS,  D.D.,  D.LriT., 

Professor  of  Theological  Encyclopedia  and  Symbolics, 
Union   Theological  Seminary,  New  York. 


THE    INTERNATIONAL    CRITICAL    COMMENTARY 


CRITICAL  AND  EXEGETICAL 
COMMENTARY 


ON 


THE  BOOK  OF  PSALMS 


BY 
CHARLES  AUGUSTUS  BRIGGS,  D.D.,  D.Litt. 

PROFESSOR   OF  THEOLOGICAL   ENCYCLOPEDIA  AND    SYMBOLICS 
UNION  THEOLOGICAL   SEMINARY,   NEW  YORK 

AND 

EMILIE   GRACE   BRIGGS,   B.D. 


(In  Two  Volumes) 
Vol.  I. 


EDINBURGH 
T.    &    T.    CLARK,    38    GEORGE    STREET 


PRINTED    IN    GREAT    BRITAIN    BY 
MORRISON     AND      CIBB     LIMITED 

FOR 

T     &   T.    CLARK,    EDINBURGH 

NKW   YORK  :    CHARLES    SCRIBNER's   SONS 


MAY  16 1964 

First  Edition    ....     ig06 

Latest  Reprint  .     .     .     .     Ige0 


&0 

JOHN   CROSBY   BROWN 

AND 

D.   WILLIS  JAMES 

PRESIDENT  AND   VICE-PRESIDENT   OF  THE   BOARD   OF  DIRECTORS 
OF 

THE  UNION  THEOLOGICAL   SEMINARY 

THIS  WORK   IS   DEDICATED 
IN   RECOGNITION   OF  THEIR    EMINENT   SERVICES  TO  THEOLOGICAL 
EDUCATION   AND   TO   LIBERTY   OF  CHRISTIAN  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP DURING  THE  THIRTY-THREE  YEARS  OF 
THE  AUTHOR'S    PROFESSORATE 


PREFACE 

This  Commentary  is  the  fruit  of  forty  years  of  labour.  In 
1867,  when  making  special  studies  in  Berlin  with  Dr.  Emil 
Rodiger,  I  began  a  critical  Commentary  on  the  Psalms,  the  Ms. 
of  which  is  still  in  my  possession.  In  1872  the  translation  of 
Moll's  "  Commentary  on  the  Psalms  "  in  Lange's  Bibelwerk  was 
published  in  the  series  edited  by  Philip  Schaff.  I  translated 
and  enlarged  the  Commentary  on  Pss.  1-41  51-72  with  twenty- 
five  per  cent  additional  matter,  and  edited  the  Introduction 
with  additional  notes.  In  1874  I  began  teaching  as  professor 
of  Hebrew  and  cognate  languages  in  Union  Theological  Semi- 
nary, and  lectured  on  the  Psalms  every  year  until  1890  when 
I  became  Edward  Robinson  Professor  of  Biblical  Theology,  in 
which  position  I  continued  to  lecture  on  the  Criticism  and  The- 
ology of  the  Psalter  until  1904,  when  I  was  transferred  to  my 
present  chair.  In  the  plan  of  the  International  Critical  Com- 
mentary I  undertook  the  volumes  on  the  Psalms,  and  have 
been  at  work  upon  them  ever  since.  In  addition  to  my  work  on 
the  theological  terms  of  the  new  edition  of  Robinson's  Gesenius' 
Hebrezv  Lexicon,  BDB.,  I  have  made  a  complete  lexicon  to  the 
Psalter,  based  on  a  revised  Hebrew  text,  which  I  hope  ere  long 
to  publish.  I  have  spared  no  pains  upon  the  text  of  the  Psalter, 
not  only  in  the  study  of  the  Versions,  but  also  in  the  detection 
and  elimination  of  the  glosses  in  the  search  for  the  original  texts 
as  they  came  from  their  authors.  The  Theology  of  the  Psalter 
has  been  carefully  investigated ;  only  the  limits  of  space  pre- 
vent me  from  giving  it  in  this  volume. 

I  have  made  a  careful  study  of  the  chief  commentaries  and 
have  referred  to  them  so  far  as  practicable  in  the  notes,  but  the 
most  that  could  be  done  was  to  distribute  credit  to  my  predeces- 
sors in  fair  proportions.  The  amount  of  literature  is  so  vast 
that  no  other  course  was  possible.     The  Commentary  will  show 


Vlii  PREFACE 

that  Roman  Catholic  Commentators  have  rendered  valuable  ser- 
vice which  has  been  too  often  neglected  by  modern  Protestants ; 
and  that  the  older  British  interpreters  are  the  real  fathers  of 
much  of  the  material  for  which  modern  Germans  usually  receive 
the  credit.  For  more  than  thirty  years  I  have  given  much  atten- 
tion to  Hebrew  poetry.  For  a  long  time  I  had  to  battle  for  it 
alone  against  unreasoning  prejudice.  I  have  lived  to  see  a 
large  proportion  of  American  scholars  adopt  essentially  the  views 
which  I  represent.  All  of  the  Psalms  have  been  arranged  in 
this  Commentary  in  measured  lines,  and  the  great  majority  of 
them  in  equal  strophes.  Their  literary  character  has  thereby 
been  greatly  improved  and  their  historical  propriety  become 
more  evident.  The  translations  are  based  on  the  English  offi- 
cial Versions,  but  whenever  important  I  have  not  hesitated  to 
forsake  them  in  order  to  conform  to  that  original  which  I  have 
determined  by  the  principles  of  textual  criticism.  I  have  not 
attempted  to  give  a  Version  for  public  or  private  use,  but  simply 
one  to  set  forth  the  original  text  as  I  have  determined  it. 
A  public  Version,  in  my  opinion,  should  be  less  pedantic  and 
literal  than  the  Revised  Version,  and  not  so  slavish  in  its  adhe- 
rence to  the  Massoretic  text.  In  this  respect  the  older  Versions, 
especially  the  Version  of  the  Book  of  Common  Prayer,  is  to  be 
preferred ;  for  while  it  is  less  accurate  than  the  later  Versions, 
it  preserves  many  readings  of  the  Greek  and  Vulgate  Versions 
which  later  English  Versions  unwisely  rejected,  and  it  is  con- 
cerned to  give  the  sense  of  the  original  in  rhythmical  devotional 
language  well  suited  to  the  character  of  a  book  of  prayer  and 
praise. 

The  results  which  have  been  reached  in  Textual  Criticism, 
Higher  Criticism,  Hebrew  Poetry,  Historical  Criticism,  Biblical 
Theology,  and  Interpretation  of  the  Psalter  have  not  been  stated 
without  long  and  careful  consideration.  If  I  could  spend  more 
years  in  preparation,  doubtless  I  would  do  much  better  work. 
But  there  is  a  limit  to  all  things,  and  I  cannot  longer  withhold 
my  Commentary  from  the  press.  Whatever  is  true  and  sound 
in  this  work  will  endure,  whatever  is  mistaken  and  unsound  will 
soon  be  detected  and  will  perish.     I  would  not  have  it  otherwise. 

The  Psalms  are  among  the  most  wonderful  products  of  human 


PREFACE  IX 

genius.  No  other  writings  but  the  Gospels  can  compare  with 
them  in  grandeur  and  importance.  The  Gospels  are  greater 
because  they  set  forth  the  life  and  character  of  our  Lord  and 
Saviour.  The  Psalter  expresses  the  religious  experience  of  a 
devout  people  through  centuries  of  communion  with  God. 
I  cannot  explain  either  Gospels  or  Psalms  except  as  Books  of 
God,  as  products  of  human  religious  experience,  inspired  and 
guided  by  the  Divine  Spirit. 

I  could  not  have  completed  these  volumes  without  the  help 
of  my  daughter,  Emilie  Grace  Briggs,  B.D.,  who  has  laboured 
with  me  on  the  Hebrew  Lexicon  and  in  the  preparation  of  this 
Commentary.  It  is  simple  justice  to  add  her  name  to  mine  on 
the  title-page.  I  have  dedicated  these  volumes  to  John  Crosby 
Brown,  Esq.,  and  D.  Willis  James,  Esq.,  who  have  for  more 
than  the  thirty-three  years  of  my  professorship  served  Union 
Seminary  on  its  Board  of  Directors.  Their  services  to  Theolog- 
ical Education  and  especially  to  the  liberty  of  theological  scholar- 
ship cannot  be  too  highly  estimated. 

C.  A.  BRIGGS. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

ABBREVIATIONS xiii 

INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  BOOK  OF  PSALMS          .        .        .  xix 

§  i .  The  Names  of  the  Book  of  Psalms xix 

A.    The  Text 

§  2.  The  Text  of  Hebrew  Mss xxii 

§  3.  The  Massora xxiii 

§  4.   Printed  Editions xxiv 

§  5.  The  Septuagint xxv 

§  6.   Other  Greek  Versions xxix 

§  7.  The  Syriac  Peshitto xxx 

§  8.   Version  of  Jerome ""xxi 

§  9.   The  Targum xxxii 

§  10.   The  Original  Text xxxiii 

§11.   Psalms  with  Double  Texts xxxiv 

§12.    Poetry  of  the  Psalter xxxiv 

§  13.   Psalms  Divided xlviii 

§  14.    Psalms  Composite         .                  xlix 

§  15.  Textual  Glosses    .         .                 xlix 

§  16.   Textual  Errors .                 .  li 

§  17.   Editorial  Glosses .  lii 


B.    Higher  Criticism 

§18.   Ancient  Jewish  Opinions  of  the  Psalms 

§  19.   References  in  the  New  Testament 

§  20.   Traditions  in  the  Church      .... 

§21.   Opinions  of  Times  of  the  Reformation 

§  22.   Modern  Critical  Theories     .... 

§  23.   Higher  Criticism  of  the  Psalms    . 

§  24.   Ancient  Songs 

§  25.   The  Miktamim 

xi 


liv 

lv 

lvi 

lvi 

lvii 

lvii 

lix 

Ix 


Xll 


CONTENTS 


§  26.  The  Maskilim 

§  27.    Psalter  of  David  . 

§  28.    Psalter  of  the  Korahites 

§  29.    Psalter  of  Asaph  . 

§  30.   Pseudonyms 

§  31.    The  Mizmorim     . 

§  32.    Psalter  of  the  Elohist  . 

§  33.   Psalter  of  the  Director 

§  34.    Musical  Directions 

§  35-   The  Ilallels 

§  36.   The  Pilgrim  Psalter      . 

§37.    Orphan  Psalms     . 

§  38.   The  Final  Psalter 

§  39.    Liturgical  Assignments 

§  40.    Doxologies  . 

§41.    Selah   .... 

§  42.   Numbering  of  Psalms  and  Books 

§43.    Evolution  of  the  Psalter 


PAGE 

lxi 
lxii 
lxv 
lxvi 
Ixvii 
lxviii 
lxix 
Ixxii 
lxxv 
lxxviii 
lxxix 
lxxx 
lxxxi 
lxxxii 
lxxxiii 
lxxxiv 
lxxxviii 
lxxxix 


C.     Canon  icity 

§  44-   Canonical  Recognition  of  the  Psalter xciii 

§  45-    Religious  Contents  of  the  Psalter xciv 

§  46.    Objections  to  Canonicity  Answered xcvii 

D.    Interpretation 

§  47.   Of  Jesus  and  His  Apostles ci 

§  48.   Of  the  Catholic  and  Greek  Fathers cii 

§  49.    Of  the  Latin  Fathers 

§  50.    Of  the  Middle  Ages 

§51.   Of  Mediaeval  Jewish  Scholars cv 

§52.    Of  the  Period  of  the  Reformation cvi 

§  53-    Of  the  Seventeenth  Century          ......  Cvii 

§54-   Of  the  Eighteenth  Century cvii 

§55.    Of  the  Nineteenth  Century cviii 

§  56.    English  Versions ciy 

COMMEXTARY.     Pss.  I-L o  ,_422 


ABBREVIATIONS, 


I.  Texts  and  Versions. 


&  =  The  Psalter  of  Asaph. 

Aid  =  Aldine  text  of  (g. 

Aq.  =  Version  of  Aquila. 

AV.  =  Authorized  Version. 


BD.      =  Baer  &  Delitzsch,  Heb.  text. 

Chr. 

Comp. 


The   Chronicler,   author   of 

Ch.  Ezr.  Ne. 
Complutensian  text. 


IB  =  The  Psalter  of  David. 

D.  =  The  Deuteronomist  in  Dt.,in 

other  books  Deuteronomic 
author  or  Redactor. 
©H      =  The  Psalter  of  the  Director. 

5E  =  The  Elohistic  Psalter. 

EVS.     =  English  Versions. 

E.  =  Ephraemitic  sources  of  Hex- 

ateuch. 

(3  =  Greek    Septuagint   Version. 

(gB        =  The  Vatican  text  of  Swete. 

(3  v        =  The  Alexandrine  text. 

<gi  -;        =  The  Sinaitic  text. 

(gR        =  Psalterium   Graeco-Latinum 

Veronense. 
(HT        =  Psalterium  Turicense. 
<J5U        =  Fragmenta  papyrocea  Lon- 

donensia. 
(gA.        =r  Leipziger  Papyrusfragmente. 


^  =  Hebrew  consonantal  text. 

H.         =  Code    of    Holiness    of    the 

Hexateuch. 
H  P.      =  Texts  of  Holmes  and  Parsons. 
Hex.     =  The  Hexateuch. 

3  =  Latin  Version  of  Jerome. 

J.  =  Judaic  sources  of  the  Hexa- 

teuch. 

JPSV.  =  Jewish  Publication  Society 
Version. 

£t  =  The  Korahite  Tsalter. 

Kt.  =  Kethib,  the  Hebrew  te  t  as 
written. 

%  =  Old  Latin  Version. 

£ff        =  The  Psalter  of  the  Mizmorim. 

Mas.     =  Masora. 

MT.      =  The  Massoretic  pointed  text 

NT.      =  The  New  Testament. 
OT.       =  The  Old  Testament. 

P.  =  The  priestly  sources  of  the 

Hexateuch. 

PBV.  =  Version  of  the  Book  of  Com- 
mon Prayer, 

Qr.  =  Qere,  the  Hebrew  text  as 
read. 


XIV 


ABBREVIATIONS 


R.  =  The  Redactor,  or  editor. 

RV.        =  The  Revised  Version. 
RV.m      =  The  margin  of  the  Revised 
Version. 

&  =  The  Syriac  Peshitto Version. 

2  =  The  Version  of  Symmachus. 

&  =  The   Targum    or   Aramaic 

Version. 


H  =  The  Vulgate  Version. 

Vrss.         =  Versions,  usually  ancient 

WL         =  The    Wisdom    Literature 
of  the  OT. 

0  =  TheVersionof  Theodotian. 

\j/  =  The  Psalter  in  its  present 

form. 


II.   Books  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 


Am. 

=  Amos. 

Jb. 
Je. 

=  Job. 

=  Jeremiah. 

BS. 

=  Ecclesiasticus  of  Ben  Sira. 

Jn. 

=  John. 

Jo. 

=  Joel. 

i,  2Ch. 

=  1,2  Chronicles. 

Jon. 

=  Jonah. 

Col. 

=  Colossians. 

Jos. 

=  Joshua. 

i,  2  Cor 

.=  I,  2  Corinthians. 

Ju. 

=  Judges. 

Ct 

=  Canticles  =  The 

Song    of 

Songs. 

I,2K. 

=  I,  2  Kings. 

Dn. 

=  Daniel. 

La. 

=  Lamentations. 

Dt. 

=  Deuteronomy. 

Lk. 
Lv. 

=  Luke. 
=  Leviticus. 

Ec. 

=  Ecclesiastes. 

Mai. 

=  Malachi. 

Eph. 

=  Ephesians. 

i,  2  Mac 

.=  1,2  Maccabees. 

Est. 

=  Esther. 

Mi. 

=  Micah. 

Ex. 

=  Exodus. 

Mk. 

=  Mark. 

Ez. 

=  Ezekiel. 

Mt. 

=  Matthew. 

Ezr. 

=  Ezra. 

Na. 

=  Nahum. 

Gal. 

=  Galatians. 

Ne. 

=  Nehemiah. 

Gn. 

=  Genesis. 

Nu. 

=  Numbers. 

Hb. 

=  Habakkuk. 

Ob. 

=  Obadiah. 

lleb. 
Hg. 

=  Hebrews. 
=  Haggai. 

Phil. 
Pr. 

=  Philippians. 
=  Proverbs. 

Ho. 

=  Hosea. 

Ps. 

=  Psalms. 

Is. 

=  early  parts  of  Isaiah. 

Rev. 

=  Revelation. 

IS.2 

=  exilic  parts  of  Isaiah, 

Rom. 

=  Romans. 

IS.8 

=  postexilic  parts  of  Isaiah. 

Ru. 

=  Ruth. 

I,  2S. 

I,  2  Thes. 
I,  2  Tim. 


AUTHORS  AND   WRITINGS 
I,  2  Samuel. 


XV 


=  i,  2  Thessalonians. 
=  i,  2  Timothy. 


Zc.  =  Zechariah. 

Zp.  =  Zephaniah. 

Wisd.  =  Wisdom  of  Solomon. 


III.   Authors  and  Writings. 


AE. 

=  Aben  Ezra. 

DB. 

=  Hastings's     Dictionary 

Ains. 

=  Ainsworth. 

of  the  Bible. 

Aug. 

=  Augustine. 

De. 

=  Franz  Delitzsch. 

DeR. 

=  De  Rossi. 

Ba. 

=:  F.  Baethgen. 

De  W. 

=  De  Wette. 

BDB. 

=  Hebrew    and     English 

Dr. 

=  S.   R.   Driver,    Parallel 

Lexicon  of  the  OT., 

Psalter. 

edited  by  F.  Brown, 

Dr.0 

=  Heb.  Tenses. 

S.   R.  Driver,   C.  A. 

Dr.Intr 

=  Introduction  to  Litera- 

Briggs.    The    editor 

ture  of  OT. 

specially  referred  to  is 

Dru. 

=  Drusius. 

designated   by  2?DB. 

Du. 

=  B.  Duhm. 

F.  Brown,  BDB.  S.  R. 

Dy. 

=  J.  Dyserinck. 

Bar  Heb. 

Driver. 

=  Bar  Hebraeus. 

EB. 

Ehr. 

=  Encyclopaedia  Biblica. 
=  Ehrlich. 

Be. 

=  G.  Beer. 

Bi. 

=  G.  Bickell. 

Eph.  Syr. 

=  Ephraem  Syrus. 

Ew. 

=  H.  Ewald. 

Bo. 

=  F.  Bottcher. 

Ew.8 

=  his     Lehrb.    der     Heb,. 

B6.§ 

=  his     Lehrb.     der     Heb. 

Sprache. 

Sprache. 

Br. 

=  C.  A.  Briggs. 

Fu. 

=  J.  Fiirst. 

Br.MP 

=  Messianic  Prophecy. 

Br.MG 

=  Messiah  of  the  Gospels. 

Genebr. 

=  Genebradus. 

Br.MA 

=  Messiah  of  the  Apostles. 

Ges. 

=  Gesenius,  Thesaurus. 

Br.SHS 

=  Study  of  Holy  Scripture. 

Ges.i 

=  his     Heb.     Gram.     ed. 

BrHex 

=  Higher  Criticism  of  the 

Kautzsch. 

Hexateuch. 

Ges.L 

=  his  Lehrgebaude. 

Bu. 

=  F.  Buhl. 

Gi. 

—  Ginsburg. 

Bud. 

=  K.  Budde. 

Gr. 

=  Gratz. 

Bux. 

=  Buxtorf. 

Grot. 

=  Grotius. 

Calv. 

=  John  Calvin. 

Hengst. 

=  Hengstenberg. 

Cap. 

=  Cappellus. 

Hi. 

=  F.  Hitzig. 

Che. 

=  T.  K.  Cheyne. 

Houb. 

=  C.  F.  Houbigant. 

ChWB. 

=  Levy,    Chald.    Worter- 

Hu. 

=  H.  Hupfeld,  Psalmen. 

buch. 

Hu.R* 

—  Psalmen2  ed.  Riehm. 

Co. 

-  C.  H.  Cornill. 

Hu.8 

=  Psalmen3  ed.  Nowack. 

XVI 


ABBREVIATIONS 


JBL. 

=  Journal  of  Biblical  Lit- 

Ra. 

=  Rashi. 

erature. 

Reu. 

=  Ed.  Reuss. 

JE. 

=  Jewish  Encyclopaedia. 

Ri. 

=  E.  Riehm. 

Jer. 

=  Jerome. 

Ri.-H^  =  Riehm's  Handw'brtcrbuch. 

Jos. 

=  Fl.  Josephus. 

R6. 

=  E.  Rodiger. 

JQR. 

=  Jewish    Quarterly    Re- 

Rob. 

=  E.    Robinson,    Biblical    Re- 

view. 

searches. 

Ros. 

=  Rosenmiiller. 

Kau. 

=  E.  Kautzsch. 

RS. 

=  W.  Robertson  Smith. 

Kenn. 

=  B.  Kennicott. 

Ki. 

=  Daniel   Kimchi   (Qam- 

Siev. 

=  E.  Sievers. 

chi). 

Sin. 

=  R.  Smend. 

Kirk. 

=  A.  F.  Kirkpatrick. 

SS. 

=  Siegfried    and    Stade,    Heb. 

Ko. 

=  F.  E.  Konig. 

Worterbuch, 

Kue. 

=  A.  Kuenen. 

Sta. 

=  B.  Stade. 

Lag. 

=  P.  de  Lagarde. 

Talm. 

—  The  Talmud. 

Lag.™ 

=  his    Bilditng    der    No- 

Tisch. 

=  C.  Tischendorf. 

mina. 

Tr. 

=  Tristram,  Natural  History  of 

Luz. 

=  S.  D.  Luzzato. 

the  Bible. 

Mich. 

=  J.  D.  Michaelis. 

We. 

=  J.  Wellhausen. 

Mish. 

=  The  Mishna. 

We.^ 

=  his  Skizzen  und  Vorarbeiien. 

NHWB. 

—  Levy,    Neuhebr.    Wor- 

ZAW. 

-  Zeitschrift   f.    alttest.    IVis- 

terbuch. 

senschaft. 

ZMG. 

=  Z.  d.   deutsch.   Morgenland. 

Ols. 

=  J.  Olshausen. 

Gesellschaft. 

ZPV. 

=  Z.  d.  deutsch.  Pal.  Vcreins. 

Pe. 

=  J.  J.  S.  Perowne. 

IV.     General,  especially  Grammatical. 


abr. 

=  abbreviation. 

a.X. 

=  aira£  XeyS/xevov,  word  or  phr 

abs. 

=  absolute. 

used  once. 

abstr. 

=  abstract. 

al. 

=  et  aliter,  and  elsw. 

ace. 

=  accusative. 

alw. 

=  always. 

ace.  cog. 

=  cognate  uc'j. 

antith. 

~  anthesis,  antithetical. 

ace.  pers. 

=  ace.  of  person. 

apod. 

=  apodosis. 

ace.  rei 

=  ace.  of  thing. 

Ar. 

=  Arabic. 

ace.  to 

=  according  to. 

Aram. 

=  Aramaic. 

act. 

=  active. 

art. 

=  article. 

adj. 

=  adjective. 

As. 

=  Assyrian. 

adv. 

=  adverb. 

GENERAL,   ESPECIALLY  GRAMMATICAL 


XV11 


Bab. 

=  Babylonian. 

impf. 

=  imperfect. 

B.  Aram. 

=  Biblical  Aramaic. 

imv. 

—  imperative. 

indef. 

=  indefinite. 

c. 

s=  circa,  about ;  also  cum, 

inf. 

—  infinitive. 

with. 

i.p. 

=  in  pause. 

caus. 

=  causative 

M 

.  :  id  quod,  the  same  with. 

cf. 

=  confer,  compare. 

intrans. 

--  intransitive. 

cod.,  codd 

.  =  codex,  codices. 

cog. 

=  cognate. 

juss. 

=  jussive. 

coll. 

=  collective. 

comm. 

=  commentaries. 

lit. 

=  literal,  literally. 

comp. 

=  compare. 

loc. 

—  local,  locality. 

concr. 

=  concrete. 

conj. 

=  conjunction. 

m. 

=  masculine. 

consec. 

=  consecutive. 

metaph. 

=  metaphor,  metaphorical. 

contr. 

=  contract,  contracted. 

mng. 

=  meaning. 

cstr. 

=  construct. 

mpl. 

=  masculine  plural. 

ms. 

=  masculine  singular. 

d.f. 

=  dagesh  forte. 

def. 

=  defective. 

n. 

=  noun. 

del. 

=  dele,  strike  out. 

n.  p. 

=  proper  name. 

dittog. 

=  dittography. 

n.  pr.  loc. 

=  proper  noun  of  place. 

dub. 

=  dubious,  doubtful. 

n.  unit. 

=  noun  of  unity. 

NH. 

=  New  Hebrew. 

elsw. 

=  elsewhere. 

Niph. 

=  Niphal  of  verb. 

emph. 

=  emphasis,  emphatic. 

esp. 

=  especially. 

obj. 

=  object. 

Eth. 

=  Ethiopic. 

opp. 

=  opposite,  as  opposed  to 

exc. 

=  except. 

or  contrasted  with. 

exil. 

=  exilic. 

P- 

=  person. 

f. 

=  feminine. 

parall. 

=  parallel  with. 

fig. 

=  figurative. 

part. 

=  particle. 

fpl. 

=  feminine  plural. 

pass. 

=  passive. 

fr. 

s=  from. 

Pf. 

=  perfect. 

freq. 

=  frequentative. 

Ph. 

=  Phoenician. 

fs. 

=  feminine  singular. 

phr. 

=  phrase. 

Pi. 

=  Piel  of  verb. 

gent. 

=  gentilic. 

pi. 

=  plural. 

gl. 

=  gloss,  glossator. 

post  B. 

=  post  Biblical. 

postex. 

=  postexilic. 

haplog. 

=  haplography. 

pred. 

=  predicate. 

Heb. 

=  Hebrew. 

preex. 

=  preexilic. 

Hiph. 

=  Hiphil  of  verb. 

preg. 

=  pregnant. 

Hithp. 

=  Hithpael  of  verb. 

prep. 

=  preposition. 

XV111 


ABBREVIATIONS 


prob. 

=  probable. 

str. 

=  strophe. 

pron. 

=  pronoun. 

subj. 

=  subject. 

ptc. 

=s  participle. 

subst. 

=  substantive. 

Pu. 

=  Pual  of  verb. 

s.v. 

=  sub  voce. 

syn. 

=  synonymous. 

qu. 

=  question. 

synth. 

=  synthetic. 

q.v. 

=  quod  vide. 

Syr. 

=  Syriac. 

Rf. 

=  refrain. 

t. 

=  times  (following  a  num- 

rd. 

=  read. 

ber). 

refl. 

=  reflexive. 

tr. 

=  transfer. 

rel. 

=  relative. 

trans. 

=  transitive. 

txt. 

=  text. 

sf. 

=  suffix. 

txt.  err. 

=  textual  error. 

sg- 

=  singular. 

si  vera 

=  si  vera  lectio. 

v. 

=  verse. 

sim. 

=  simile. 

V. 

=  vide,  see. 

sq. 

=  followed  by. 

vb. 

=  verb. 

St. 

=  status,  state,  stative. 

V.     Other  Signs. 


t     prefixed     indicates    all     passages 

cited. 
X     prefixed  indicates  all  passages  in 

^  cited. 
II      parallel,  of  words  or  clauses  chiefly 

synonymous. 
=    equivalent,  equals. 
+    plus  denotes  that   other  passages 

might  be  cited. 
[  ]  indicates  that  the  form  enclosed 


is  not  in  the  Hebrew,  so  far  as 

known. 
y/=  the  root,  or  stem. 
'    =  sign  of  abbreviation  in  Hebrew 

words. 
'"  =  Yahweh. 
(  )     Indicates    that    Massoretic    text 

has    not    been    followed,   but 

either     Vrss.     or     conjectural 

emendations. 


VI.     Remarks. 


Biblical  passages  are  cited  according  to  the  verses  of  the  Hebrew  text. 

Numerals  raised  above  the  line  (i)  after  numerals  designating  chapters 
indicate  verses  (Gn.  63) ;  (2)  after  numerals  designating  lines  of  strophe 
indicate  measures  (2  Str.  64);  (3)  after  proper  names  refer  to  sections  of 
grammars  or  pages  of  books  (Ges.§42). 

Proper  names  usually  refer  to  works  upon  the  Psalter  given  in  the  History 
of  Interpretation.  * 

In  notes  numbers  in  italics  (Ps.  /2)  indicate  passages  in  which  the  word  has 
been  fully  discussed. 


INTRODUCTION. 


§  1.  The  Psalter  belongs  to  the  third  division  of  the  Hebrew 
Canon,  entitled  Hymns  or  Prayers,  from  its  chief  contents.  The 
Greek  Version  named  it  Psalms  from  the  most  frequent  sub-title, 
and  in  this  has  been  followed  by  other  Versions. 

The  Hebrew  OT.  consists  of  three  divisions,  the  Law,  the 
Prophets,  and  the  Writings,  representing  three  layers  of  successive 
canonical  recognition.  The  Writings  were  of  indefinite  extent 
until  their  limits  were  defined  by  the  Synod  of  Jamnia.  Prior  to 
that  time  there  were  disputes  as  to  several  of  the  Writings,  such 
as  Chronicles,  Song  of  Songs,  and  Ecclesiastes ;  but,  so  far  as  we 
are  able  to  discover,  there  never  was  any  dispute  as  to  the  canon- 
icity  of  the  Psalter  as  a  whole,  or  as  to  any  one  of  the  Psalms. 
In  the  Greek  Septuagint  ((3)  these  divisions  of  the  Canon  were 
broken  up  and  the  books  were  rearranged  on  topical  principles. 
The  Apocrypha  were  mingled  with  the  books  of  the  Hebrew 
Canon,  doubtless  from  a  wider  and  looser  view  of  its  character 
and  extent  (Br.SHS  U4"M0).  EV8.  follow  the  order  of  the  books 
of  the  Latin  Vulgate  (U)  of  the  sixteenth  century,  which  was 
based  on  (3,  but  with  several  important  differences.  This  order 
for  the  three  great  poetical  books  is  Job,  Psalter,  Proverbs. 

The  most  ancient  order  of  the  Writings,  preserved  in  Literature,  is  that  of 
the  Baba  Bathra  of  the  Talmud  (f.  146),  which  placed  Ruth  first,  because 
of  the  theory  that  it  gave  the  genealogy  of  David,  and  therefore  should 
precede  the  Psalms  of  David  (v.  Br.SHS252).  The  modern  Hebrew  Bibles 
follow  the  order  of  the  German  codd.,  which,  though  of  comparatively  late 
date,  doubtless  preserve  the  original  order  in  putting  the  Psalter  (1//)  first. 
The  breaking  up  of  the  triple  division  of  the  Canon  in  (g,  followed  by  other 
Vrss.  ancient  and  modern,  occasioned  various  other  rearrangements  of  the 
books  in  accordance  with  different  theories  about  them.  The  books  which 
were  supposed  to  be  historical,  Ch.,  Ezr.,  Ne.,  and  Est.,  were  arranged  with 


XX  INTRODUCTION 

the  prophetic  histories.  Ruth  was  attached  to  Judges.  These  all  therefore 
preceded  \f/.  The  three  great  poetical  books,  which  in  the  German  codd.  are 
in  the  natural  order,  \f/,  Pr.,  Jb.,  were  given  in  H  in  the  order  Jb.,  \f/,  Pr.,  in 
accordance  with  a  mistaken  theory  as  to  their  historical  order  of  composition. 
La.  was  attached  to  Je.,  in  accordance  with  a  theory  as  to  date,  authorship, 
or  character  of  the  composition.  Thus,  of  the  five  rolls  which  in  the  Hebrew 
Canon  belonged  together,  only  Ec.  and  Ct.  were  left  to  follow  Pr.  The  most 
serious  change,  however,  was  the  placing  of  the  three  greater  poetical  books 
and  these  two  rolls  in  the  middle,  between  the  Historical  and  the  Prophetical 
Books. 

In  the  Hebrew  Canon  the  Psalter  bears  the  title  Praises,  or  Book 
of  Praises,  because  of  the  conception  that  it  was  essentially  a  col- 
lection of  songs  of  praise,  or  hymn  book,  to  be  used  in  the  worship 
of  God ;  or  else  Prayers,  because  it  was  a  collection  of  prayers,  a 
prayer  book.  In  (3  it  is  entitled  Psalms,  doubtless  because  the 
word  "psalm  "  was  in  the  titles  of  such  a  large  proportion  of  the 
poems.  In  early  Greek  writers  it  received  the  name  Psalter, 
which  seems  a  more  appropriate  name  for  a  collection  of  Pss. 
for  use  in  public  worship. 

(A)  The  Hebrew  title  was  either  o^?r\  or  O'Snn  -ibd  N.H.  or  pSnn  Aramaic 
for  the  proper  Hebrew  nlSnr,  pi.  of  n^nn  n.f.  a  song  of  praise,  formed  by  n  from 
SSn  vb.  praise  in  sacred  song.  The  nucleus  of  the  Pss.  90-150  is  composed 
of  Ilallels,  with  the  title  rmV?n,  originally  a  collection  of  songs  of  praise  or 
hymns  (v.  §  35).  Only  Ps.  145  has  the  title  nS"ir.  This  title  of  \p  appears 
in  a  writing  ascribed  to  Hippolytus  (ed.  Lagarde,  p.  188)  as  2<?0pa  0e\eln 
(cf.  the  gloss  <re<f>p  ddeWifj.  in  Mercati's  Un  Palimpsesto  Ambrosiano  dei 
Salmi  Esap/i,  Turin,  1898);  in  Origen  (Euseb.  Hist.  Eccl.  VI.  25,  ed.  Mc- 
Giffert)  20ap0e\\ei/u  ;  and  Jerome  {Psalterum  iuxta  Hebraeos,  ed.  Lagarde, 
p.  2)  sephar  tallim,  quod  inter pretatur  volumen  hymnorum.  So  also  Philo 
always  uses  the  term  \\xvoi  or  one  of  its  compounds  in  his  citation  of  Pss. 
(Hatch,  Essays  in  Biblical  Greek,  p.  174),  and  in  the  De  vita  contempt.  (II. 
475),  an  early  writing  attributed  to  Philo  {v.  Br.8IIS- x-6),  the  same  usage  ap- 
pears. Josephus  (Anliq.  VII.  12)  refers  to  the  psalms  as  songs  and  hymns 
{v.  §  12). 

(/?)  [^Sn]  vb.  Qal  only  in  mng.  be  boastful,  which  also  appears  in  Pi.  and 
Hiph.  make  one's  boast  (v.  j6  56s-  n).  Pi.  Upraise:  (i)  obj.  God  63s  69^ 
119175;  c.  Sr,  on  account  of,  119164;  in  summons  I481-1-13;  often  of  public 
worship  in  holy  place  2223-  27  84s  10732  14612;  ||  rp">M  3518  10930;  c.  2  instr. 
1493;  (2)  obj.  ov,  of  God  6931  7421  11311  I351-1  1452  1485.  Imv.  used  of 
temple  worship  2224,  cf.  v.23-25,  1  tjo2- 2- 8- 8- 4  4-  5-  5,  in  summons  to  angels  and 
all  creatures  I482- 2-  3-  8-  4- 7  ISO1*1;    addressed  to  all  nations  1171;    to  Zion 


NAMES   OF  THE   BOOK   OF  PSALMS  xxi 

14712.  Liturgical  use:  rwSSn  1353;  elsw.  as  titles  of  Hallels,  at  the  begin- 
ning 1061  in1  1121  1131  1351  1461  1471  1481  1491  1501;  at  the  end  10435 
10545  10648  1139  11518  Ii619  1172  13521  14610  14720  14814  1499  1506;  in  other 
forms  10219  1151"  1506.  Pu.  be  praised :  (1)  maidens  in  song  78s3;  (2)  elsw. 
of  God,  in  ptc.  with  gerundive  force,  to  be  praised,  worthy  of  praise,  184 
(=  2  S.  224)  48'2  96*  (=  1  Ch.  1625)  1453;   of  His  name  1133.  —  $  nWi  n.f. 

(1)  praise,  adoration,  paid  to  Yahweh,  224  34s  48 n  5117  716.8.14  I09i  I];iio 
119171  14521;  as  sung  404  10612,  cf.  331  14814  (?);  (2)  act  of  general  public 
praise  2226  652  662- 8  ioo4  1471  1491,  cf,  also  224  331  1061*2;  (3)  song  of  praise 
in  title  1451;  (4)  qualities,  deeds,  etc.,  of  Yahweh  demanding  praise  915  35s8 
784  7913  10222  io62- 47. 

(  C)  The  term  niSpn  is  used  in  Ps.  7220  as  a  sub-title  of  the  Davidic  Psalter 
(v.  §  27).  %  n^n  n.f.  prayer,  is  used  in  the  titles  of  Pss.  17,  86,  90,  102,  142, 
and  also  lib.  31.  In  all  these  cases  it  was  original  before  the  Pss.  were  taken 
up  into  any  of  the  Psalters.  nSon  is  used  elsw.  in  \js  for  prayer  3513  6620  805 
8814  10218  io94-7  1415,  c.  ■?  42s  6914,  ^jflS  883  1412.  Phrs.  for  hearing  prayer: 
c.  yr.v  42  3913  544  65s  84s  1022  1431;  aiffpn  612  6619;  runun  171  55s  866;  npS 
610,  Sn  hjd  10218.  The  vb.  J  [?Vi>]  is  not  used  in  Qal.  It  prob.  had  the  fun- 
damental mng.  intervene,  interpose,  and  accordingly  the  derivatives,  arbitrate, 
judge,  not  used  in  \f/ ;  and  intercede,  pray,  Pi.  io63),  Hithp.  c.  ^n  5s  32s,  "ipa 
7215.  The  term  n^cn  was  indeed  the  most  appropriate  title  for  13,  as  the 
great  majority  of  its  psalms  are  prayers.  But  the  term  nSnn  ultimately  pre- 
vailed among  the  Hebrews  as  among  Christians;  for  prayers  when  sung  in 
worship  naturally  are  regarded  as  hymns.  Thus,  in  place  of  nV?cn  7220  of 
Hebrew  text  ©  has  iixvoi,  so  Ttf  laudes,  showing  that  at  the  date  of  the  origin 
of  (3  the  conception  of  the  Psalms  as  hymns  had  already,  among  Hellenistic 
Jews,  displaced  the  older  conception.  Gr.  does  not  hesitate  to  regard  <S  as 
giving  the  original  text.  £J>  omits  the  passage  as  an  editorial  note.  But  Aq., 
2,  0,  3,  agree  with  |^,  which  certainly  gives  the  true  reading. 

(D)  In  <3,  \p  bore  the  title  ypaX/xoi,  pi.  \f/a\fj.6s,  so  Lk.  2444,  or  Book  of 
Psalms  Lk.  2042  Acts  I20;  \J/a\iJ.6s  is  the  translation  of  "flDTt;  used  in  the  titles 
of  fifty-seven  Pss.  in  ffy,  a  n.  formed  by  d  from  [ict]  vb.  denom.  [*VDT]  n.m. 
song  or  poem,  with  trimmed,  measured  words  and  ornate  style,  from  f  ID?  vb. 
trim,  prune.  Qal  Lv.  25s4.  Niph.  Is.  56.  f  "VCT  sg.  cstr.  Is.  25s,  elsw.  pi. 
2  S.  231  Is.  241G  Jb.  3510  Pss.  952  11954.  t  n7?t  n-f-  idem,  accompanied  with 
instrumental  music  Am.  5s3  Pss.  813  98s;  prob.  also,  though  not  mentioned, 
Ex.  152  Is.  122  513  Ps.  11814.  t[iDT]  denom.  vb.  only  Pi.:  (i)  sing,  c.  u, 
to  God  912  27s  305  664  7123  7510  1011  10433  1052  1462  Ju.  53.  zv^  Pss.  1850  92s 
1353;  c.  Sn  5918;  c.  ace.  sfs.  3013  5710  (?)  1084  (?)  1381;  c.  ace.  God  6883  1471 
Is.  125;  dv  Pss.  718  93  619  662-4  685;  -p-vm  2114;  Swd  47s;  abs.  57s  984  1082; 

(2)  play,  musical  instruments  33s  477-  7-  7-  7  7122  985  1477  1493,  cf.  1449.  "YiETD 
is  a  more  technical  form  for  n>cr,  mcr,  and  indicates  a  poem  with  measured 
lines  and  strophes,  selected  for  public  worship.  It  seems  probable  that  all 
these  annrn  were  gathered  in  an  early  collection  for  this  purpose  (v.  §  31). 
The  title  of  this  early  Psalter  subsequently  became  the  title  of  the  whole 


xxii  INTRODUCTION 

Psalter.  The  term  of  <S  has  been  followed  by  most  Vrss.  In  @A  the  title 
\pa\Trjpiov  appears;  also  in  Hippolytus,  Athanasius,  Epiphanius,  and  other 
Fathers.  On  the  whole,  this  seems  to  be  the  most  appropriate  title.  Hb.  47 
£p  AavLd  seems  to  be  a  title  of  the  Psalter,  reflecting  the  popular  usage  as 
reflected  elsw.  in  NT.  and  in  ancient  and  modern  usage  as  a  popular  personi- 
fication of  the  book  that  bears  his  name.  Here,  again,  the  early  Psalter  of 
David  gave  the  name  to  the  entire  collection  of  the  Psalter. 

A.   THE   TEXT   OF  THE   PSALTER. 

§  2.  The  original  text  of  the  Psalter  was  written  in  the  Hebrew 
language,  and  in  letters  which  were  subsequently  abandoned  for  the 
Aramaic  script.  This  latter  text  has  been  preserved  in  Afss.,  none 
of  which  are  older  than  the  tenth  century  ;  but  they  rest  upon  two 
important  revisions  of  that  century,  those  of  Ben  Asher  and  Ben 
Naftali,  which  differ  chiefly  in  Massoretic  material. 

The  text  of  the  Psalter,  as  that  of  all  the  OT.,  was  written  in 
the  ancient  Hebrew  language.  The  Pss.  were  written  by  many 
different  authors  at  different  periods  of  time,  and  also  passed 
through  the  hands  of  many  different  editors.  They  therefore  show 
traces  of  several  stages  in  the  development  of  the  Hebrew  language. 
The  most  if  not  all  of  the  Pss.  were  written  in  letters  resembling 
those  of  the  Samaritan  language,  preserved  elsewhere  only  in  in- 
scriptions and  on  coins.  They  were  subsequently  transliterated 
into  the  square  Aramaic  letters  through  an  intermediate  form  of 
current  Aramaic  script  (Br.SIIS170"173).  In  all  these  processes  of 
copying,  editing,  and  transliteration,  changes  occurred,  some 
of  which  were  intentional,  others  unintentional,  due  to  mistakes 
of  various  kinds.  The  Hebrew  text  has  been  preserved  in  a  large 
number  of  Mss.  The  earliest  text  of  the  entire  OT.  is  the 
St.  Petersburg  Codex,  1009  a.d.  There  are  a  number  of  codd.  of 
the  Psalter,  but  none  of  an  early  date.  All  these  rest  upon  a 
revision  of  the  text  made  by  the  Rabbi  Ben  Asher  in  the  early 
part  of  the  tenth  century,  who  undoubtedly  used  material  no 
longer  accessible,  and  made  such  excellent  use  of  it  that  his  text 
has  remained  the  standard  authority  for  the  Massoretic  text  until 
the  present  day ;  although  the  variations  in  pointing  of  his  co- 
temporary,  Ben  Naftali,  representing  another  tradition,  have  been 
preserved  in  the  Massoretic  apparatus  which  is  usually  given  in 
Hebrew  Bibles. 


THE   MASSORA  XX111 

The  earliest  text  of  the  OT.  preserved  is  the  St.  Petersburg  Codex  of  the 
Prophets,  916  A.D.,  but  this  does  not  contain  the  Psalter.  Ginsburg  (  Text  of 
the  Heb.  Bible,  p.  469  sq.)  thinks  that  a  Ms.  of  the  British  Museum  was  writ- 
ten in  820-850  A.D.,  but,  so  far  as  we  know,  he  has  found  no  one  to  agree  with 
him.  Most  Hebrew  codd.,  that  have  been  preserved,  rest  upon  a  text  revised 
by  Rabbi  Ben  Asher  in  the  early  part  of  the  tenth  century,  and  this  is  the  text 
that  has  been  taken  as  a  standard  in  all  printed  editions.  The  recently  dis- 
covered codd.  of  St.  Petersburg  gives  an  earlier  and  simpler  system  of  vowel 
points  and  accents,  but  only  slight  variations  in  the  unpointed  text.  The 
variations  in  the  most  important  codd.  are  given  by  Baer  in  his  text  of  \f/  from 
two  codd.  Curtisianus,  three  codd.  Erfurtensis,  one  cod.  each  Francofurtensis, 
Heidenheimianus,  Petropolitanus,  and  Sappiri  Parisiensis.  The  Massora  also 
contains  13  traditional  variations  between  the  Palestinian  and  Babylonian 
tradition,  and  299  variations  between  Ben  Asher  and  Ben  Naftali,  none  of 
which  are  of  any  serious  importance  for  the  interpretation  of  the  \p. 

§  3.  The  Massora  also  gives  evidences  of  variations  of  text, 
going  back  to  primitive  times,  in  marginal  notes  and  signs,  where 
the  text  remains  unchanged.  Citations  in  the  Talmud  and  other 
early  Jewish  writings  give  little  evidence  of  other  variations  of 
text. 

The  Massorites  devoted  themselves  to  the  study  of  the  tra- 
ditional text  of  the  OT.  When  the  knowledge  of  ancient  Hebrew 
was  confined  to  scholars,  they  endeavoured  to  perpetuate  and 
stereotype  the  traditional  pronunciation,  the  method  of  recitation 
of  the  OT.  in  the  synagogue,  and  the  connection  of  words  and 
clauses  in  the  sentence,  by  the  use  of  vowel  points,  accents,  and 
other  signs.  This  was  necessary  because  the  Hebrew,  like  other 
Semitic  languages,  was  in  ancient  times  written  only  so  far  as  the 
consonants  were  concerned. 

These  Massorites  were  so  called  as  masters  of  Massora,  or  tradition.  Their 
work  was  based  upon  the  methods  of  the  Syrian  schools  with  reference  to 
Syriac  Literature.  The  differences  between  the  so-called  Babylonian  and 
Palestinian  systems  of  vocalisation  and  accentuation  show  various  stages  in 
their  work,  which  continued  for  several  centuries.  The  earliest  stages  have 
left  no  record,  but  they  may  be  inferred  from  the  simpler  forms  of  Syriac  and 
Arabic  Literature  (Br.SHS- 18°-183).  It  is  important  to  notice  that  all  these 
vowel  points  and  accents  are  comparatively  late  in  origin,  and,  although  they 
rest  on  tradition  going  back  to  primitive  times,  they  were  still  matters  of 
opinion,  and  by  no  means  have  the  venerahle  authority  of  the  consonantal 
text.     The  view  that  they  were  equally  inspired  with  the  consonantal  text, 


xxiv  INTRODUCTION 

held  commonly  in  the  sixteenth  century,  has  been  universally  abandoned. 
There  are  several  Massoretic  notes  and  signs  which  are  of  great  importance, 
for  they  indicate  variations  of  text  in  ancient  tradition  which  the  Massorites 
felt  obliged  to  record,  although  they  did  not  venture  to  change  the  traditional 
text.  These  are:  (i)  The  variation  between  the  np,  that  which  should  be 
read,  and  the  a*na,  that  which  is  written.  There  are  seventy  of  these  in  \p. 
(2)  The  inverted  J,  parentheses,  107s3- «*.».«. 27.88. 40  („,  Qchla  veochla™; 
Dikduke  hateamini%m\  Gemara,  Rosch  hashanav;b).  (3)  The  Paseq,  which 
calls  attention  to  a  peculiarity  of  text  that  sometimes  needs  correction.  There 
are  forty-seven  of  these  in  \f/  (v.  Grimme,  Psalmenprobleme,  s.  166  sq.;  Ken- 
nedy, Note  Line  in  Biblical  Hebrew,  commonly  called  Paseq  or  Pesiq).  This 
sign  was  neglected  by  the  older  critics,  but  has  been  carefully  considered  by 
many  moderns,  and  is  often  found  to  be  a  sign  of  a  corrupt  text.  (4)  The 
change  of  the  form  of  letters  also  probably  indicates  variations  of  text,  the 
m»jn  'i  24*,  nnai  'a  8o16,  nnai  'p  84*,  rmSn  7  8o14.  (5)  The  superfluous  let- 
ters: dSjjj  'h  996  10412  n6r>,  'i  *vp>  51*,  'i  "vn>  262  3821  8c/29  1016  14413  1458, 
'>  "vn>  1610  212  772)  II9147- 161.  These  all  need  attention  as  suggesting  varia- 
tions in  the  text.  (6)  The  extraordinary  points  mark  letters  as  doubtful  2713. 
There  are  large  numbers  of  citations  of  \p  in  the  Talmud  and  other  early 
Jewish  writings,  but  so  far  as  they  have  been  examined  and  collated  they 
give  no  evidence  of  any  important  variations  besides  those  indicated  in  the 
Mas.,  which  doubtless  took  the  most,  if  not  all  of  them,  into  consideration. 

§  4.  The  earliest  printed  edition  of  the  Hebrew  Psalter  was 
published  at  Bologna  in  1477.  Independent  texts  based  on  Mss. 
were  published  at  Soncino,  in  the  Complutensian  Polyglot,  and  the 
second  Rabbinical  Bible.  All  subsequent  editions  were  mixed  texts, 
until  those  of  Baer  and  Ginsburg,  which  give  accurate  forms  of  the 
Massoretic  text  of  Ben  Asher. 

(1)  The  earliest  edition  of  the  Hebrew  text  of  \p  was  printed  at  Bologna, 
1477.  The  whole  Bible  was  first  printed  at  Soncino,  Lombardy,  in  1488; 
then  at  Naples,  1491-1493.  Another  edition  was  printed  at  Brescia  in  1494. 
This  was  used  by  Luther  in  making  his  version.  The  same  text  is  used  in 
Bomberg's  first  Rabbinical  Bible,  15 16-15 1 7,  edited  by  Felix  Pratensis,  and  in 
his  manual  editions  15 17  sq.;  and  also  by  Stephens,  1539  sq.,  and  Sebastian 
Munster.  (2)  The  second  independent  text  was  issued  in  the  Complutensian 
Polyglot,  1 5 14-15 1 7,  of  Cardinal  Ximenes.  (3)  The  third  independent  text 
was  edited  by  Jacob  ben  Chayim  in  the  second  Rabbinical  Bible  of  Bomberg, 
1 524-1 525.  This  was  carefully  revised  after  the  Massora.  All  the  printed 
texts  from  that  time  until  recent  times  are  mixtures  of  these  three  texts. 
(4)  Baer  and  Delitzsch  undertook  a  fourth  independent  text  by  the  use  of 
the  entire  Massoretic  apparatus  accessible.  The  Liber  Psalmorum  was  pub- 
lished in  1880.     (5)  A  fifth  independent  text  was  published    by  Ginsburg, 


THE   SEPTUAGINT  XXV 

1894.  It  is  essentially  "based  upon  the  first  edition  of  Jacob  ben  Chayim's 
Massoretic  recension."  (6)  A  sixth  independent  text  is  in  process  of  publica- 
tion by  R.  Kittel  (1905),  with  critical  notes,  using  ancient  Vrss.  and  con- 
jectural emendations.     The  vol.  containing  \J/  has  not  yet  appeared. 

§  5.  The  earliest  Version  of  the  Psalter  was  that  of  the  Greek 
Septuagint,  translated  from  the  Hebrew  in  the  second  century  B.C. 
at  Alexandria,  and  preserved  in  many  ancient  codices,  the  earliest 
of  the  fourth  century  A.D.,  giving  evidence  as  to  an  original  Hebrew 
text,  many  centuries  prior  to  any  Hebrew  authorities.  The  ancient 
Latin,  Coptic,  Gothic,  Armenian,  a?id  Ethiopic  Versions  are  based 
upon  the  Greek  Version. 

The  OT.  was  translated  for  the  use  of  Egyptian  and  Greek  Jews. 
The  earliest  writings  translated  were  the  five  books  of  the  Law  in 
the  third  century.  The  Psalter  was  probably  translated  in  the 
early  second  century,  for  use  in  public  prayer  and  praise  in  the 
Egyptian  synagogues.  It  was  made  from  the  best  Mss.  accessible 
at  the  time,  and  gives  evidence  as  to  the  original  Hebrew  text  of 
early  second  century  B.C.,  three  centuries  earlier  than  the  text 
fixed  by  the  school  of  Jamnia,  and  twelve  centuries  earlier  than 
the  Mass.  text  as  fixed  by  Ben  Asher  and  preserved  in  the  earliest 
Hebrew  codd.  It  is  usually  called  the  Septuagint  because  of  the 
legend  that  it  was  prepared  by  seventy  chosen  Hebrew  scholars 
(Br.SHS188sq).  The  Septuagint  Version  of  the  Psalter,  referred  to 
in  the  abbr.  (3,  is  one  of  the  best  translations  of  the  OT.  It 
shows  an  excellent  knowledge  of  the  original  Hebrew,  and  a  good 
knowledge  of  Alexandrine  Greek.  The  translator  appreciated 
the  poetic  character  of  the  Psalter,  and  also  the  fact  that  it  was 
for  public  use  in  the  worship  of  the  synagogue.  He  was  con- 
cerned, therefore,  to  preserve  as  far  as  practicable  the  metrical 
form,  and  to  give  the  sense  of  the  original  in  intelligible  Greek. 
Where  a  literal  rendering  interferes  with  these  objects  he  departs 
from  the  letter  and  gives  the  spirit  of  his  original,  and  so  tends 
toward  the  method  of  the  later  Targums.  He  shares  in  the  re- 
ligious and  theological  prejudices  of  his  times.  He  has  an  undue 
awe  of  God,  and  conceives  of  Him  as  essentially  transcendent. 
He  shrinks  from  the  anthropomorphisms  and  anthropopathisms 
of  the  earlier  writers. 


xxvi  INTRODUCTION 

The  text  of  (S  has  been  preserved  in  several  types  enabling  us  to  go  back, 
on  the  genealogical  principle  of  textual  criticism,  to  an  original  earlier  than 
any  of  the  codices  (v.  Br.s,IS-  23l8i).  (i)  The  earliest  codex  is  one  preserved 
in  the  Vatican  Library,  usually  indicated  by  B.  Pss.  I0527-I376  are  missing. 
This  cod.  was  written  in  the  fourth  century  a.d.  It  was  the  basis  of  the 
Sixtine  edition  of  the  Septuagint  of  1586(7).  It  was  used  in  the  London 
Polyglot,  with  critical  notes  making  use  of  the  other  known  codd. ;  and  so  in 
many  manual  editions,  especially  Van  Ess,  1823,  1854,  and  Tischendorf,  1850, 
1856.  B  was  published  by  Mai  in  1857,  and  a  facsimile  edition  by  Vercel- 
lone  and  Cozza  in  1866  sq.,  a  photographic  lithographic  edition,  1890.  The 
hands  of  several  later  editors  may  be  traced  in  the  text,  indicated  by  Babc. 

(2)  About  the  same  time,  and  under  essentially  the  same  influence,  the  Sina- 
itic  codex  was  written.  It  was  discovered  by  Tischendorf  in  1844- 1859,  in 
the  convent  of  S.  Catharine,  on  Mt.  Sinai,  and  was  deposited  in  the  Imperial 
Library  at  St.  Petersburg.  It  gives  \j/  complete.  It  is  known  usually  as  n, 
but  by  many  Germans  as  S  {v.  Gregory,  Prolegomena,  pp.  345  sq.).  Tischen- 
dorf issued  a  facsimile  edition  in  1862  {Bibliorium  Codex  Sinaiticus  Petro- 
polilanitSy  Tom  I.-IV.).  He  also  used  K  in  his  manual  editions  of  i860,  1869, 
continued  after  his  death  by  Nestle,  1875,  x8So»  1887.  The  best  text  of  B 
has  been  issued  by  Swete  (3  vols.  1 887-1 894,  1895- 1899),  wno  uses  N  to  SUP~ 
ply  the  missing  Pss.  The  references  to  B  will  be  given  simply  as  <SB,  those 
to  n  will  appear  as  (S*  {v.  Intr.  Swete's  edition).  These  two  codices  give 
what  Westcott  and  Hort  term  the  Neutral  Text,  based  on  a  text  written  on 
separate  rolls  in  the  early  part  of  the  second  century  a.d.  (v.  Br.sns197). 

(3)  The  Alexandrian  codex  (@A),  now  in  the  British  Museum,  was  written 
in  the  fifth  century.  Pss.  4919~7910  are  missing  from  its  text.  This  codex  rep- 
resents an  Alexandrian  official  text,  but  later  than  the  revisions  of  Hesychius 
and  Origen.  This  text  was  published  by  Grabe  and  his  associates  in  1707- 
1720).  HP.  also  cite  the  Psalteriiim  purpureum  7'uricense  ((ST)  as  Ms.  262. 
It  has  been  preserved  in  the  Municipal  Library  of  Zurich.  It  was  published 
by  Tischendorf  in  his  Monamenta  Sacra  inedita,  IV.  It  was  evidently  writ- 
ten in  the  seventh  century.  According  to  Swete  its  readings  are  in  frequent 
agreement  with  A.  The  following  Pss.  are  missing:  1-25  30*2-36'20  4i6-433 
5814-595  599-10  S^-^1  6412-7i*  92s-937  9612-978.  (4)  The  text  of  Origen 
is  represented  in  the  fragments  of  his  Hexapla  which  have  been  preserved. 
A  Syriac  translation  of  the  text  of  the  Hexapla  (Syr.  Hex.)  was  made  by  Paul 
of  Telia  in  616  a.d.  A  Ms.  of  this  text  of  the  eighth  century  was  discovered 
by  Ceriani  in  the  Ambrosian  Library  of  Milan,  and  issued  in  1874.  (5)  Lucian 
the  martyr  (311  +)  made  an  independent  revision  of  the  entire  Greek  Bible 
at  Antioch.  Lagarde  issued  this  text  for  the  Historical  books  of  the  OT.  in 
1883,  but  died  before  he  was  able  to  publish  the  rest  of  the  OT.  This  text 
rests  upon  a  parent  text  which  is  the  basis  of  the  old  Latin  version,  is  near 
the  Syriac  version,  and  resembles  that  used  in  the  citations  in  Josephus  (v. 
Br.sns.  203-2O4).  Tne  Codex  Vaticanus  330  (HP.  108)  was  recognised  by  Field 
and  Lagarde  as  giving  essentially  this  text.     It  was  the  chief  authority  for  the 


THE  SEPTUAGINT  XXVli 

text  of  the  Complutensian  Polyglot;  but  this  cod.  does  not  contain  \f/.  Swete 
regards  144,  147,  185  HP.  as  Lucian  in  their  characteristics.  (6)  The  Re- 
vision of  Hesychius  is  not  so  easy  to  determine.  Cornill  (Ezekiel,  79)  and 
Swete  {Introduction  to  Old  Test,  in  Greek,  486)  think  that  the  Aldine  text 
gives  essentially  the  text  of  Hesychius.  Four  other  codices  have  come  into 
importance  in  recent  times.  (7)  The  Psalterium  Graeco-Latinum  Vero- 
nense,  <3R,  generally  attributed  to  the  sixth  century,  is  preserved  in  Verona. 
It  was  published  by  Bianchini  in  his  Vinaiciae  canonicarum  scripiurarum,  I., 
Rome,  1740  ;  but  was  not  used  in  HP.  It  is  highly  valued  by  Tisch.,  Swete, 
and  others.  Swete  says:  "A  few  portions  of  the  Psalms  (i1-27  652)-683 
6g-26-33  io543-io6'2)  have  been  replaced  or  supplied  by  a  hand  of  the  tenth 
century,  to  which  the  corrections  throughout  the  Ms.  are  generally  due." 
(8)  The  Fragmenta papyracea  Londinensia  (<SU).  These  are  in  the  British 
Museum.  Only  two  portions  of  ^  have  been  preserved:  io2-i8G  2014~346. 
It  was  published  by  Tisch.  in  his  Monumenta  sacra  inedita,  Nov.  Coll.,  1855. 
Tisch.  ascribes  it  to  the  sixth  or  seventh  century.  "  Its  readings  are  often 
unique,  or  agree  with  the  Hebrew  or  the  Vrss.  or  patristic  citations,  against 
all  other  known  Mss."  (Swete,  p.  xiii).  (9)  The  Leipzig  papyrus  fragments 
of  the  Psalter  contain  Pss.  3o5"14- 18"25  311  3218J-339a  3313~342  3424~353  36*- 
5514.  They  have  been  published  by  Heinrici,  in  Beitr'dge  zur  Geschichte  und 
Erklarung  des  N.T.,  IV.,  Leipzig,  1903.  According  to  this  scholar,  these 
fragments  resemble  those  of  (§u,  and  both  represent  the  common  text,  used 
by  Christians  and  cited  by  the  early  Fathers,  as  described  by  Jerome  and 
Origen,  before  the  latter  undertook  to  purify  it  and  establish  a  correct  text 
(pp.  9,  13,  25). 

Many  ancient  Vrss.  were  translated  from  (3.  The  oldest  of 
these  was  the  ancient  Latin.  Many  Latin  Psalters  have  been 
preserved,  but  so  far  as  known,  none  of  them  give  early  texts.  We 
are  for  the  most  part  dependent  on  citations  in  the  early  Fathers. 
Jerome  made  a  revision  of  the  Latin  Psalter  under  the  auspices 
of  Pope  Damasus  I.  in  383.  This  is  the  Roman  Psalter  still  used  in 
St.  Peter's  at  Rome.  About  392  Jerome  made  a  second  revision 
on  the  basis  of  the  Hexapla.  This  is  known  as  the  Gallican 
Psalter,  and  is  still  in  use  in  the  Vulgate  and  the  Roman  Catholic 
Breviaries.  The  Coptic  Vrss.  were  made  from  (3.  The  Bohairic 
Vrs.  of  the  Psalter  is  of  the  sixth  century  (edited  by  Lagarde, 
1875).  The  Sahidic  Vrs.  is  older,  but  of  uncertain  date.  The 
Psalter  has  been  edited  by  Bridge,  1898.  It  seems  to  represent 
a  text  of  (3  corresponding  closely  to  (&v  (v.  Brightman,  Journal 
of  Theol.  Studies,  II.,  275).  The  old  Gothic  Vrs.  of  the  sixth 
and  the  Slavonic  of  the  ninth  century  were  made  from   (S>  of 


xxviii  INTRODUCTION 

Lucian.  The  Armenian  and  Ethiopic  Vrss.  in  their  present  form 
are  based  on  mixed  texts,  in  which  Syriac  and  Hebraic  elements 
are  mingled  with  the  Greek. 

The  texts  of  the  Psalter  in  the  several  codd.  of  (3  are  not  always 
homogeneous  with  the  texts  of  other  parts  of  OT.,  especially  in 
the  early  codd.  This  was  due  to  the  fact  that  the  Psalter  was 
usually  on  a  separate  roll,  and  that  the  most  of  these  rolls  were 
prepared  for  ecclesiastical  use.  Swete  remarks  quite  truly  that 
Pss.  of  (&x  "  are  evidently  copied  from  a  Psalter  written  for  ecclesi- 
astical use,  and  it  is  interesting  to  notice  how  constantly  A  here 
appears  in  company  with  the  later  liturgical  Psalters,  R  and  T,  and 
with  the  seventh  century  corrections  of  S  known  as  Kc-\"  He  also 
says :  "The  first  hand  of  X  often  agrees  with  A  against  B,  and  the 
combinations  X,  A,  R,  T  in  the  Psalms  are  not  uncommon  "  {Intr. 
to  OT.  in  Greek,  p.  490).  To  this  may  be  added  that  in  fact  it 
is  just  these  liturgical  Psalters  which  seem  to  have  preserved  the 
most  accurate  text  of  (£,  whether  that  was  due  to  the  well-known 
conservatism  of  liturgical  texts,  or  to  a  more  conservative  revision 
of  the  ancient  faulty  texts  by  Origen  and  Lucian  than  has  gener- 
ally been  supposed,  limited  chiefly  to  the  correction  of  errors. 
The  text  of  i&  where  there  is  a  consensus  of  readings  has  a  value 
which  has  not  been  estimated  by  critics  as  highly  as  it  ought  to 
be,  so  far  as  the  Psalter  is  concerned.  In  a  very  large  number 
of  cases  this  common  text  is  to  be  preferred  to  J^.  Where  the 
ancient  codd.  (&B  M  differ  from  the  other  codd.  they  are  almost 
invariably  at  fault.  It  is  altogether  misleading  to  take  them  as 
the  norms  of  a  correct  text  of  the  Psalter. 

I  have  carefully  examined  all  the  most  important  variations,  and  the  result 
is  the  following.  I.  Where  <!£  i  stands  alone  :  (1)  there  are  nine  corruptions 
of  Greek  words,  1714  27s  3520  3728  7115  74s  76s  8411  10536.  (2)  There  are  four- 
teen omissions  of  words  or  clauses  of  ft?  required  by  measure  or  else  earlier 
Heb.  glosses,  162  64s  6$*-*  7112  7318  744  757  8819  9016  10216  13912  1438  1452. 
(3)  There  is  one  insertion  injuring  the  measure,  76*.  (4)  There  is  only  a 
single  instance  in  which  the  text  is  correct.  That  is  the  omission  of  a  clause 
of  |^,  41'2,  which  injures  the  measure.  But  this  may  be  merely  an  accidental 
coincidence  in  which  a  careless  scribe  happened  to  omit  a  passage  which  was 
a  real  gloss.  II.  Where  Gs  stands  alone  there  are  many  cases  of  error,  e.  g. 
no«-6-«  1 158  U61-2-6  i222-6-9  1294  1306  1 38s. 


OTHER   GREEK   VERSIONS  XXIX 

The  earliest  printed  editions  of  the  Psalter  of  (§  rested  upon  codd.  which 
have  not,  so  far  as  I  know,  been  determined:  Milan,  1481;  Venice,  i486, 
1489;  Basel,  15 16.  Justinianus  issued  in  15 16  at  Genoa  his  Octaplum  Psal- 
terium.  The  text  of  the  Complutensian  Polyglot,  1514-1517,  was  followed  by 
four  other  polyglots :  Antwerp,  1569-1572;  Heidelberg,  1 586-1 587;  Hamburg, 
1596;  Paris,  1645  -f.  The  Aldine  text  of  1518,  the  text  of  the  Complutensian 
Polyglot  and  of  the  Octaplum,  all  agree  for  the  most  part  with  144,  185,  264, 
of  HP;  and  although  based  on  late  codd.,  in  fact  are  much  nearer  the  orig- 
inal <g  than  the  earliest  codd.  <J|B-  N.  In  a  few  instances  the  Octaplum  differs 
from  the  Complutensian  text,  but  in  these,  so  far  as  the  most  important  read- 
ings are  concerned,  it  agrees  with  144  HP,  which  is  regarded  as  Lucian's. 
A  valuable  discussion  of  texts  and  versions  of  (H  is  given  by  Swete,  Intro- 
duction to  the  Study  of  the  O  T.  in  Greek,  and  by  Nestle,  Urtext  und  Ueber- 
setzungen,  pp.  64-65.  A  cautious  but  valuable  study  of  the  reading  of  <&  of 
Swete's  edition  is  given  by  F.  W.  Mozley,  The  Psalter  of  the  Church,  1905. 
There  remains  much  work  to  be  done  in  the  study  of  these  codd. 


§  6.  Several  other  Greek  Versions  were  made  in  the  second, 
third,  and  fourth  centuries  A.D.,  that  of  Aquila  front  the  official 
Hebrew  text  of  the  school  ofjamnia,  that  of  Theodotion  to  improve 
(3  in  the  direction  of  that  text ;  and  that  of  Symmachus  to  give  a 
better  Greek  style.  Other  minor  Versions,  indicated  as  Quinta 
and  Sexta,  were  also  composed.  None  of  these  have  been  preserved, 
except  in  fragments. 

(3  was  used  in  a  large  proportion  of  the  citations  in  the  NT. 
and  Christian  writings  of  the  second  and  third  centuries.  The 
Jews  of  the  school  of  Rabbi  Akiba,  owing  to  a  literalistic  tendency, 
threw  discredit  upon  (3  among  the  Jews,  and  so  gradually  under- 
mined the  confidence  even  of  Christians  in  its  accuracy.  Accord- 
ingly, many  attempts  were  made  to  make  a  better  Version.  The 
first  of  these  came  from  Aquila,  a  pupil  of  Akiba,  who  made  a  new 
translation  from  the  official  text  established  by  the  school  of  Jamnia. 
This  is  exceedingly  literal  and  pedantic,  and  frequently  transliter- 
ates rather  than  translates.  This  Version,  indicated  by  Aq.,  is 
chiefly  valuable  for  its  evidence  as  to  the  official  text  which  it 
translates.  Theodotion  (©)  undertook  a  revision  of  (3  to  make 
it  more  conformable  to  the  Hebrew  text  of  Jamnia.  Its  variations 
from  (3  also  help  to  the  official  Hebrew  text  of  the  second  century 
rather  than  to  an  earlier  text.  Symmachus  (2)  had  a  later  and  a 
different  purpose  ;  namely,  to  improve  the  style  and  character  of  (3. 


XXX  INTRODUCTION 

It  is  therefore  of  value  in  helping  to  a  text  of  (3.  It  is  difficult  to 
determine  the  purpose  of  Quinta  and  Sexta,  but  so  far  as  appears 
they  do  not  give  evidence  of  any  knowledge  of  early  Hebrew 
codd.  These  efforts  did  not  succeed  in  producing  a  text  suitable 
for  universal  adoption ;  they  in  fact  increased  the  confusion  and 
corruption  among  the  Greek  codd.  by  mixed  texts.  This  evil  was 
the  chief  reason  for  the  masterly  work  of  Origen  in  his  Hexapla. 
Origen's  Hexapla  was  the  most  important  Biblical  work  in  ancient 
times.  It  gave  in  six  parallel  columns  the  original  Hebrew  text, 
the  same  transliterated,  a  purified  text  of  (3,  the  Versions  of  Aq., 
2,  0,  and  also,  as  a  sort  of  appendix,  Quinta,  Sexta. 

The  Hexapla  has  been  preserved  only  in  parts.  The  Syriac  translation 
was  discovered  by  Ceriani  in  the  Ambrosian  Library  of  Milan,  and  published 
in  1874.  Mercati,  in  the  same  library,  discovered  the  original  Hexapla  of 
Ps.  45  and  parts  of  17,  27-31,  34,  35,  48,  88,  of  which  he  gives  an  account 
in  Un  Palimpsesto  Ambrosiano  dei  Salmi  Esapli,  1898.  He  has  recently  dis- 
covered additional  material  in  the  Vatican.  The  publication  of  all  this  mate- 
rial is  announced  for  one  of  the  forthcoming  parts  of  Studi  e  Tesii,  Roma, 
under  the  title  Psalmorum  Hexaploriim  reliquiae  e  codice  rescripto  Ambrosi- 
ano, etc.  The  parts  of  the  several  Greek  Vrss.,  so  far  as  they  were  known 
to  exist  at  the  time,  were  published  by  Field,  Origenis  Hexaplorum  quae 
super  sunt,  2  vols.,  Oxford,  1875.  Dr.  Schechter  discovered  some  fragments 
of  Aq.,  portions  of  Pss.  22,  90,  91,  in  the  Genizah  at  Cairo. 

§  7.  The  Syriac  Peshitto  Version  was  made  from  a  comparison 
of  the  Hebrew  text  with  (3,  and  shows  the  influence  of  an  early 
Aramaic  Targum.  It  has  maintained  its  integrity  since  the  fourth 
century. 

At  an  early  date,  probably  in  the  second  or  third  century,  a 
translation  of  the  Psalter  was  made  for  the  use  of  Syrian  Christians 
(<&).  It  was  based  upon  a  Hebrew  text,  but  kept  (3  constantly  in 
view.  It  also  shows  traces  of  the  influence  of  an  oral  Aramaic 
Targum  earlier  than  the  existing  Targum  (v.  §  13).  The  author 
was  a  good  Hebrew  scholar,  but  his  purpose  was  to  give  a  Vrs.  for 
practical  use,  rather  than  an  exact  verbal  rendering.  He  therefore 
takes  liberties  with  the  original  from  a  dogmatic  as  well  as  a  prac- 
tical point  of  view.  &  passed  through  a  number  of  revisions,  but 
has  kept  its  integrity  since  the  fourth  century,  as  Aphraates  in  his 
Homilies  uses  it  essentially  in  the  same  form  that  we  now  have. 


OTHER  VERSIONS  XXXI 

The  first  edition  of  the  Psalter  of  B  was  published  by  Erpenius,  Leyden, 
1625,  from  two  late  codd.  Gabriel  Sionita  in  the  same  year  issued  a  Syriac 
text  based  on  three  other  codd.,  with  a  Latin  translation.  This  edition  was 
used  in  the  Paris  Polyglot,  1629-1645,  and  the  London  Polyglot,  1654-1657. 
In  the  latter,  Herbert  Thorndyke  in  his  critical  apparatus  used  two  codd.  of 
late  date.  Dathe  in  1768  reissued  the  text  of  Erpenius,  with  variations  from 
the  London  Polyglot.  The  text  of  the  London  Polyglot  was  reissued  by  Lee 
in  1823,  and  was  translated  into  English  with  critical  notes  by  Andrew  Oliver, 
Boston,  1861.  The  American  missionaries,  in  1852,  published  at  Urumia,  Per- 
sia, a  Nestorian  text  of  much  value.  This  has  been  the  basis  of  other  texts 
for  use  in  the  East.  The  Codex  Ambrosianus  was  published  by  Ceriani,  Milan, 
1 876-1 883.  F.  Bathgen,  in  1878,  made  a  collation  of  this  codex  and  three 
later  codd.  in  his  Untersuchungen.  In  1879,  in  his  Psalterium  Tetraglottam, 
Nestle  reissued  the  Codex  Ambrosianus  ;  and  this  edition  has  been  reprinted 
by  W.  E.  Barnes,  in  his  Peshitta  Psalter  according  to  the  West  Syrian  Text, 
1904.  Barnes,  however,  corrects  it  occasionally  from  early  West  Syrian  codd., 
and  gives  a  rich  critical  apparatus  derived  from  a  collation  of  a  large  number 
of  codd.  The  best  estimate  of  the  text  of  j$  is  given  by  Ba.  in  the  Jahrbiicher 
fur  Protestanische  Theologie,  1882.  The  influence  of  <§  upon  J5  was  so  great 
that  when  these  agree  it  is  doubtful  whether  the  testimony  of  %  as  to  the 
original  text  of  f§  is  independent.  Especially  was  «S  influenced  by  <SL  ;  but, 
on  the  other  hand,  it  belongs  to  the  same  family  of  texts.  Agreement  with 
f^  is  of  greater  importance,  and  disagreement  with  p£  and  ©L  more  impor- 
tant still.  It  should  also  be  remembered,  as  Barnes  justly  says,  "  We  have  to 
deal  in  the  Psalter  with  a  text  which  was  specially  transcribed  for  ecclesiastical 
use,  and  accordingly  we  must  not  be  surprised,  if  we  find  it  coloured  by  eccle- 
siastical phraseology"  (p.  xxxv).  On  the  one  side,  it  may  be  said  that  because 
of  its  ecclesiastical  use  it  is  more  difficult  to  revise  the  Psalter  than  any  other 
book  of  the  Bible  ;  on  the  other  side,  that  the  Vrss.  often  preserve  early  read- 
ings. My  study  of  the  text  of  the  Psalter  shows  that  while  J5  tends  to  an 
agreement  with  (&L,  it  nevertheless  often  agrees  with  |$  against  <&,  and  some- 
times with  3  against  <S  and  MT.  It  not  infrequently  has  independent  read- 
ings, a  fair  proportion  of  which  are  to  be  preferred  as  nearer  the  original  text 
than  those  of  any  other  Vrss.,  even  of  J^  ;  cf.  27- 12  162  1713  27s  32*  466  74s, 
but  especially  48  17s-4  5910  69s  8013  1124  13916. 

§  8.  Jerome  in  the  early  fifth  century  issued  his  Latin  transla- 
tion, made  from  the  Hebreiu  text  of  his  times,  but  with  all  the  other 
ancient  Versions  and  Origen's  Hexapla  in  view. 

Jerome,  after  the  completion  of  the  two  revisions  of  the  old 
Latin  Psalter  already  mentioned  (§  5),  undertook  c.  389  a  transla- 
tion of  the  entire  OT.  from  the  original  Hebrew,  which  he  com- 
pleted in  390-405  at  Bethlehem.     This  Vrs.  took  the  place  of 


XXXll  INTRODUCTION 

the  old  Latin  Vrss.  in  all  the  books  except  the  Psalter,  and  is 
known  as  the  Vulgate  (U).  This  new  Vrs.  of  the  Psalter  could 
not  overcome  the  use  of  the  Gallican  Psalter  in  the  usage  of  the 
Church.  Accordingly,  U  of  the  Psalter  is  the  Gallican  Version, 
and  the  Version  of  Jerome  is  distinguished  from  it  in  reference  by 
the  abbreviation  3.  This  Vrs.  is  exceedingly  valuable,  especially 
in  the  study  of  the  Psalter;  for  Jerome  was  not  only  an  able 
Hebrew  scholar,  using  the  best  Hebrew  texts  accessible  to  him 
in  Palestine,  at  the  time  when  the  Rabbinical  School  at  Tiberius 
was  in  its  bloom ;  but  he  was  also  familiar  with  Origen's  Hexapla, 
and  the  full  text  of  all  the  ancient  Vrss.  in  earlier  Mss.  than  those 
now  existing.  3  in  the  main  gives  evidence  as  to  the  Hebrew  text 
of  the  fourth  Christian  century.  Where  it  differs  from  %fy  and  (S 
its  evidence  is  especially  valuable  as  giving  the  opinion  of  the  best 
Biblical  scholar  of  ancient  times  as  to  the  original  text,  based  on 
the  use  of  a  wealth  of  critical  material  vastly  greater  than  that  in 
the  possession  of  any  other  critic,  earlier  or  later. 

The  text  of  3  is  best  given  in  Lagarde's  Psalierium  juxta  Hebraeos  Hie- 
ronymi,  1874,  and  also  in  Nestle's  Psalierium  Tetraglottum,  1879. 

§  9.  The  Aramaic  Targum  of  the  Psalter  in  its  prese?it  form 
dates  from  the  ninth  century,  but  it  rests  upon  a?i  oral  Targum 
used  in  the  synagogue  from  the  most  ancient  times. 

The  Targum  on  the  Psalter  (&)  represents  a  traditional  oral 
translation,  used  in  the  services  of  the  synagogue  from  the  first  cen- 
tury a.d.  The  original  Hebrew  text  was  constantly  kept  in  view, 
for  it  was  the  custom  to  read  the  original  before  the  Targum  was 
read.  Therefore  the  Targum  gives  evidence  as  to  the  traditional 
Hebrew  text,  with  all  the  development  that  that  tradition  had  from 
the  first  till  the  ninth  century,  ever  restrained,  however,  by  the 
original  text.  The  Targum,  however,  was  not  simply  a  translation, 
but  at  the  same  time  an  explanation  of  the  original,  enlarging  upon 
it  to  give  the  sense  by  way  of  paraphrase.  It  avoids  anthropo- 
morphism, and  entirely  disregards  the  poetic  form  and  style. 

&  of  \p  was  first  published  by  Bomberg,  15 17,  with  Jb.,  Pr.,  and  the  Rolls. 
Lagarde's  edition  Hagiographa  Chaldaice,  1873,  is  based  on  that  of  Bomberg. 
It  was  republished  by  Nestle,  in  his  Psalterium  Tetraglottum*  1879.     Bacher 


THE   ORIGINAL  TEXT  XXXlll 

{Das   Targum  zu  den  Psalmen,  Gratz,  Monatsschrift,  1872)  states  that  the 
&  of  yj/  and  Jb.  came  from  the  same  hand. 

§  10.  The  critical  use  of  Hebrew  texts  and  versions  leads  back 
in  several  stages  from  the  official  text  of  Ben  Asher  of  the  tenth 
century,  through  the  text  used  by  Jerome  of  the  fourth  century,  the 
official  text  of  the  School  of  Jam ni a  of  the  second  century,  to 
the  unofficial  codices  of  the  second  century  B.C.,  which  gave  the 
Canonical  Psalter  in  its  final  edition.  But  it  had  already  passed 
through  centuries  of  transmission  by  the  hands  of  copyists  and 
editors.  We  have  to  distinguish,  therefore,  betzueen  the  original 
text  of  the  Psalter  of  the  Canon  and  the  original  text  of  the  psalms 
themselves  as  they  came  from  their  authors. 

The  existing  Hebrew  codd.  lead  us  to  the  official  MT.  of  the  tenth 
century  as  edited  by  Ben  Asher,  with  Massoretic  notes  indicating 
traditional  variations  in  the  text  coming  down  from  ancient  times. 
3  takes  us  back  to  a  Hebrew  text  of  the  fourth  century  prior  to  the 
work  of  the  Massorites,  and  therefore  to  a  text  composed  of  con- 
sonants only.  The  Hebrew  text  of  Origen's  Hexapla,  and  %>,  also 
tend  in  the  same  direction,  although  they  are  to  be  used  with 
more  reserve,  because  of  modifying  influences  traceable  in  these 
Vrss.  The  Greek  translations  of  Aq.,  ©,  are  all  important  helps 
to  determine  the  official  Hebrew  text  of  the  Synod  of  Jamnia  of  the 
second  Christian  century.  The  text  of  (3  carries  us  still  farther 
back,  to  a  Hebrew  text  of  the  second  century  B.C.,  very  soon  after 
the  Psalter  had  received  its  final  editing.  In  this  way,  by  the  use 
of  the  genealogical  principle  of  Textual  Criticism  the  original  He- 
brew text  of  the  Psalter  may  be  determined,  at  the  time  when  it 
was  finally  edited  for  use  in  the  synagogue  and  temple,  and  took 
its  place  in  the  Canon  of  the  Writings.  But  it  is  evident  that  even 
then  we  are  a  long  distance  from  the  original  text  of  the  Pss.  as 
composed  by  their  authors.  The  Pss.  had  passed  through  the  hands 
of  a  multitude  of  copyists,  and  of  many  editors,  who  had  made 
changes  of  various  kinds,  partly  intentional  and  partly  uninten- 
tional. The  Pss.  were  changed  and  adapted  for  public  worship, 
just  as  has  ever  been  the  case  with  hymns,  prayers,  and  other 
liturgical  forms.  The  personal,  local,  and  historical  features  were 
gradually  effaced,  and  additions  of  various  kinds  were  made  to 


XXXIV  INTRODUCTION 

make  them  more  appropriate  for  congregational  use.  The  text 
of  the  Psalter  is  one  thing,  the  text  of  the  original  Pss.  is  another 
thin,  determined  the  former  as  far  as  possible,  we 

still  have  to  determine  the  latter  by  the  use  of  additional  internal 
evidence  in  the  Psalter  itself,  and  of  external  evidence  from  other 
books  of  OT. 

There  are  several  Psalms  which  appear  in  different  texts 
in  the  Psalter  itself,  or  in  the  Psalter  and  other  Bocks  of  the  Old 
Testament  These  give  evidence  of  originals  differing  in  some 
respects  from  the  varying  texts  that  have  been  pres< 

s.  14  and  53  are  evidently  the  same  Ps.  in  different  texts.    The  latter 
betrays  more  dearly  its  historical  origin,  although  the  original  divine  name 
-as  been  changed  to  sviSt,  as  in  other  Pss.  of  E  I  ne  former 

has  been  generalised  and  made  smoother  and  more  didactic  They  both  show 
editorial  changes  as  well  as  errors  of  copyists.  (2)  Ps.  iS  is  the  same  song 
as  that  given  in  2  S.  22.  The  text  of  the  latter  is  more  archaic,  although  it 
has  many  of  the  same  late  glosses  as  the  Ps.  The  Ps*,  however,  received  still 
later  revision,  making  it  more  suitable  for  public  use.  (These  variations  are 
given  in  the  Massora  of  Baers  text,  pp.  150-135.)  (3)  Ps.  70  is  the  same 
essentially  as  4DU-1T.  It  was  appended  to  Ps.  40  for  liturgical  purposes. 
adapted  to  its  context.  (4)  An  early  Ps.  has  been  used  both  by  57*-"  and 
ioS*-«,  another  by  oo7-*4  and  ioS7"14,  these  three  Pss.  being  all  composite 
(5)  I  Ch.  16s-*  gives  a  Song  of  thanksgiving,  which  is  composed 
of  Pss.  ioc^1*  and  96.  The  former  is  part  of  a  tetralogy,  104-107  ;  the  latter 
is  a  part  of  the  royal  Ps.  broken  up  into  93,  96-100.  The  Song  of  Ch.  is 
therefore  a  mosaic  of  parts  of  two  Pss.,  to  which  a  doxology  was  added  by  a 
hte  editor  of  Ql,  who  inserted  it  as  a  specimen  of  the  temple  Pss.  of  his  time. 

§  12.  The  Psalms  were  composed  in  the  parallelisms,  measures, 
and  strophical  organisations  of  lyric  poetry.  When  these  have  been 
determined  with  reference  to  any  particular  Psalm  it  is  not  aiffuult 
to  see  the  changes  that  have  been  made  in  the  original  text. 

(A)  Hebrew  poetry  is  dominated  by  the  principle  of  parallelism 
of  members-  The  simplest  form  is  seen  in  the  couplet ;  but  it  is 
extended  to  a  considerable  number  of  lines.  There  are  three 
primary  forms  of  parallelism:  (1)  the  synonymous,  (2)  the 
thetic,  and  (3)  the  antithetic  ;  the  synonymous  having  a  more 
ornate  variety  which  may  be  called  (4)  emblematic  ;  the  synthetic 
a  more  vigorous  variety  which  is  (5)  stairiike  in  character.     An 


POETRY  OF  THE   PSALTER  XXXV 

important  variation  appears  in  what  is  called  (6)  introverted  paral- 
lelism. But  within  these  six  varieties  there  are  still  a  great  number 
of  combinations  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of  the  parallelism, 
whether  it  extends  to  entire  lines  or  to  the  more  emphatic  words 
in  them. 

Bishop  Lowth  (De  sacra  Poesi  Heb.  1753 ;  ct  Prebminary  Dissertation  to 
Isaiah,  1778)  was  the  first  to  establish  the  principle  of  parallrfisni  in  Hebrew 
poetry,  although  he  based  his  conclusions  on  older  writers,  Rabbi  Asarias  and 
especially  Schdttgen  (Horar  Heb.  Diss.  VL  De  ExergasU  Sacra).  Lowths 
views  were  at  once  accepted  and  bare  maintained  themselves.  Lowtb  dis- 
tingnished  three  kinds  of  paraDensm,  —  the  lyawyaw,  the  anffthrriraL  and 
the  synthetic  Bishop  Jebb  {Sacred  Literature*  §  IV.  1820)  called  atten- 
tion to  a  fourth  kind,  which  he  properly  named  -  introverted."  Lowth  bad 
already  recognised  it  (Prelim.  Diss.  Isaiah  xiv),  but  did  not  name  k  or 
emphasize  it.  Other  scholars  hare  noted  the  stairiike  and  the 
p.Br.*«  ■5-«  . 

Attention  may  be  called  to  the  following 


(1)  Synonjmons. 

YAHWEH.  who  shaD  be  a  guest  in  Thy  tent  ? 

Who  shan  dwell  on  Thy  hoiy  mount  ? 
17:i-iw   q  RISE,  Yahweh,  confront  him.  cast  him  down; 

0  defiverme  from  the  wicked,  destroy  with  Thy  sword: 

May  they  be  slain  with  Thy  hand.  Yahweh;  steam  from  the  world. 
7ia-M       jf  not.  He  whets  His  sword. 

Doth  tread  His  bow  and  make  it  ready. 

A- 1  i:::  rrrr-ire  :::'-.-    :t_:  ;■    ■■-:■:": 

His  arrows  He  maketh  into  fiery  ones. 
6M  pOR  I  am  weary  with  my  groaning; 

I  must  com  plain  every  nnjht  on  wej  bed ; 

1  make  dissolve  whh  my  tears  «r  couch. 
Wasteth  away  because  of  grief  mime  eye. 
Waxeth  old  because  of  all  wume  adversaries. 

\z^'--       *Y  HE  Law  of  Yahweh  is  perfect,  refreshing  the  soul; 

The  Tesc-mD-T  o:  Yahweh  is  trusnrorr-T.  r-jkr-g  wise  me  simple 
~  e  :Tr;fr-5  ::"  Vi".  •  .  ~  :■-' r  r.z ' :    ^; :     :~  Z  "t  ----- 
The  Commandment  of  Yahweh  is  pure,  enfiglmmmg  the  eyes; 
T"r  5.-.;.  "  r  ::  Vi"  ■:':    s  :     ^ 


y.-.}-:".VZ:-:         -;:-:-:     :-:-  --v-  --.p.--  :he  >:r?  ::"  =iri.-i 


They  purpose  to  camp  in  the  tend,  they 


XXXVI  INTRODUCTION 

2g&-6        'T'HOU  spreadest  before  me  a  table  in  the  presence  of  mine  adversaries. 

Hast  thou  anointed  my  head  with  oil ;  my  cup  is  exhilarating. 

Surely  goodness  and  kindness  pursue  me  all  the  days  of  my  life, 

And  I  shall  dwell  in  the  house  of  Yahweh  for  length  of  days. 
402-4        T  WAITED  steadfastly  on  Yahweh,  and  He  inclined  unto  me; 

And  brought  me  up  from  the  pit  of  desolation,  from  the  clay  of  the 
mire ; 

And  set  my  feet  upon  a  rock ;    He  established  my  steps ; 

And  gave  a  new  song  in  my  mouth,  a  song  of  praise  to  my  God. 

Many  see  and  they  fear,  and  they  trust  in  Yahweh. 

(3)  Antithetical. 

3712-13     THE  wicked  deviseth  against  the  righteous  and  gnasheth  his  teeth  at  him. 

The  Lord  laugheth  at  him  ;  for  He  seeth  that  his  day  cometh. 
!7i46-i5    t   ex  their  portion  be  during  life;  their  belly  fill  Thou  with  Thy  stored  up 
penalty. 
May  their  sons  be  sated,  may  they  leave  their  residue  to  their  children. 
But  as  for  me,  let  me  behold  Thy  face ;  let  me  be  satisfied  with  Thy 
favour. 
12646      C\  RESTORE,  Yahweh,  our  prosperity,  as  streams  do  in  the  south  country. 
They  that  sow  seed  in  tears,  may  they  reap  with  jubilation. 
He  may  go  forth  weeping,  bearing  the  load  of  seed ; 
Let  him  come  home  with  jubilation,  bearing  the  load  of  sheaves. 
37&-H       T70R  evil-doers  will  be  cut  off;  but  those  that  wait  on  Yahweh  will  inherit 
the  land. 
And  yet  a  little  while,  and  the  wicked  will  be  no  more,  and  thou  wilt 

attentively  consider  his  place,  and  he  will  be  no  more; 
But  the  afflicted  will  inherit  the  land,  and  take  delight  in  abundance 
of  peace. 
3818-15     'pHEY  also  that  seek  my  life  lay  snares ; 
Of  my  distress  they  speak,  of  ruin; 
And  utter  deceits  all  the  day. 
But  I  am  like  a  deaf  man  that  heareth  not, 
And  as  a  dumb  man  that  openeth  not  his  mouth, 
And  in  whose  mouth  are  no  arguments. 

(4)  Emblematic. 

37I-2        pRET  not  thyself  because  of  evil-doers,  and  be  not  envious  against  them 
that  do  wrong ; 
As  grass  they  will  speedily  wither,  and  like  the  fresh  grass  fade. 
1246-8      "DLESSED  be  Yahweh!  who  hath  not  given  us  over  as  a  prey  to  their 
teeth. 
Lo,  we  are  like  a  bird,  that  has  escaped  out  of  the  trap  of  the  fowler. 
Lo,  the  trap  was  broken,  and  we  escaped  from  it. 
Our  help  is  in  the  name  of  Yahweh,  maker  of  heaven  and  earth. 
I296-8a     t   ET  them  be  put  to  shame,  and  let  them  be  turned  backward,  all  the 
#       haters  of  Zion, 

Let  them  become  as  grass  of  the  housetops,  which,  before  one  can 
draw  the  scythe,  withereth. 


POETRY  OF  THE   PSALTER  XXXV11 

Wherewith  the  reaper  does  not  fill  his  hand,  or  he  that  bindeth  sheaves 

his  bosom. 
And  they  who  pass  by  say  not,  "  The  blessing  of  Yahweh  unto  you." 

(5)  Stair  like. 

2486.  c      YAHWEH-  strong  and  mighty, 

Yahweh,  7nighty  in  battle. 
32-3  VAHWEH,  how  many  are  mine  adversaries! 

Many  are  rising  up  against  me ; 
Many  are  saying  of  me  : 
"There  is  no  salvation  for  him." 
251-7        TJNTO  Thee,  Yahweh,  I   lift  up  my  soul;    O  my  God,  let  me  not  be 

ashamed. 
In  Thee  I  trust,  therefore  let  not  mine  enemies  exult,  even  mine. 
Yea,  let  none  that  wait  on  Thee  be  ashamed ;  let  them  be  ashamed  that 

deal  treacherously  without  effect. 
Thy  ways  make  me  know,  Yahweh,  and  Thy  thoughts  teach  me; 
Lead  me  in  Thy  faithfulness,  and  teach  me ;  for  Thou  art  the  God  of 

my  salvation. 
Remember  Thy  compassion,  Yahweh,  and  Thy  kindness,  for  they  are 

of  old. 
The  sins  of  my  youth  remember  not;   according  to  Thy  kindness 

remember  me. 

In  the  other  two  Strs.  of  this  Ps.  the  stairlike  parall.  is  carried  out  on  the 
scheme :  2  +  2  +  3,  Str.  II.;  3  +  2  +  2,  Str.  III.,  as  Str.  I.  In  every  tristich 
the  middle  line  does  not  have  the  catchword. 

I2i-5        MAY  Yahweh  cut  off  every  flattering  lip, 

And  every  tongue  speaking  great  words ; 
Those  who  say,  "To  our  tongues  we  give  might, 
Our  lip  is  our  own ;  who  is  lord  over  us." 

(6)  Introverted. 

309-11       TJNTO  Thee  I  was  crying,  and  unto  my  God  I  was  making  supplication 
for  favour : 
"  What  profit  is  there  in  my  blood,  when  I  go  down  to  the  Pit  ? 
Will  the  dust  praise  Thee,  declare  Thy  faithfulness  ? 
Hear  and  be  gracious,  become  helper  to  me." 
6»-ll         J^EPART,  ye  workers  of  trouble,  from  me; 

For  He  hath  heard  the  voice  of  my  weeping, 
Yahweh  hath  heard  my  supplication, 
Yahweh  accepteth  my  prayer. 
They  will  turn  back,  they  will  be  put  to  shame  in  a  moment. 
34I&-22     yHE  face  of  Yahweh  is  against  them  that  do  evil,  to  cut  off  their  memory 
from  the  land. 
The  eyes  of  Yahweh  are  unto  the  righteous,  and  His  ears  unto  their 

cry  for  help ; 
They  cry  and  Yahweh  heareth,  and  delivereth  them  out  of  all  their 
distresses. 


XXXV111  INTRODUCTION 

Yahweh  is  nigh  unto  the  brokenhearted,  and  the  crushed  in  spirit 
saveth. 

Many  are  the  misfortunes  of  the  righteous,  but  out  of  them  all  Yah- 
weh delivereth  him ; 

He  keepeth  all  his  bones ;  not  one  of  them  is  broken. 
Misfortune  shall  slay  the  wicked,  and  they  that  hate  the  righteous  shall 
suffer  punishment. 

(B)  The  Pss.,  as  Philo,  Josephus,  Origen,  Eusebius,  and  Jerome 
tell  us,  were  composed  in  several  kinds  of  meter.  The  measures, 
however,  were  not  of  feet,  as  in  classic  Latin  and  Greek,  or  of 
syllables  as  in  Syriac  poetry ;  but  of  words  or  word  accents,  as  in 
Assyrian,  Babylonian,  Egyptian,  and  the  most  ancient  poetry  of 
other  nations.  The  simplest  measure  is  :  (i)  the  trimeter,  meas- 
ured by  three  tonic  beats;  (2)  the  tetrameter,  which  has  four 
tones,  usually  with  a  caesura  in  the  middle;  (3)  the  pentameter, 
which  has  five  tones,  the  caesura  usually  coming  after  the  third 
tone,  but  sometimes  for  variety  of  effect  after  the  second  ;  (4)  the 
hexameter,  which  has  six  tones,  with  the  caesura  usually  in  the 
middle,  but  sometimes  for  variety  after  the  second  or  the  fourth 
tones,  and  occasionally  with  two  caesuras  dividing  the  line  into 
three  parts.  In  the  estimation  of  tones  we  have  to  consider  that 
on  the  one  side  monosyllabic  words  are  usually  not  counted,  but 
are  attached  to  the  following  word  and  not  accented  ;  and  on  the 
other  side  that  words  of  four  or  more  syllables  have  a  secondary 
accent  which  is  counted  in  the  measures.  This  is  true  occasionally 
of  words  of  three  syllables. 

The  statements  of  Josephus  {Ant.  II.  16  (4);  IV.  8  (44);  VII.  12  (30)) 
that  Hebrew  poetry  was  composed  of  trimeters  and  pentameters  and  hexame- 
ters are  so  distinct  that  they  cannot  justly  be  questioned.  He  is  sustained  by 
Philo  (de  Vita  Mosis,  I.  5).  Although  it  may  be  said  that  Origen  (on 
Ps.  118,  Pitra,  Analecta  Sacra,  II.  341),  Eusebius  {De  praep.  Evang.  XI.  5 
Migne,  XXI.  852),  and  Jerome  (in  librum  Job,  praef.*)  depended  upon 
Josephus,  yet  they  were  near  enough  to  the  original  Hebrew  text  to  have  an 
independent  judgment  in  this  matter;  and  their  judgment  has  been  confirmed 
by  modern  investigation  in  the  teeth  of  a  stubborn  traditional  opposition.  As 
Ley  shows  {ZATIV.  XII.  212),  Origen  distinguishes  between  the  Hebrew 
pentameter  and  hexameter  written  in  one  line  and  the  Greek  method  of 
dividing  them  into  two.  I.  Many  efforts  have  been  made  to  measure  syllables 
after  classic  models:  (1)  Franc.  Gomarus  {Davidis  lyra,  1637),  followed  by 
Heinsius,  De  Dieu,  Hottinger,  and  the  younger  Buxtorf.     (2)  Marc.  Maibon 


POETRY   OF  THE   PSALTER  XXXIX 

(Davidis  Psalmi  X.  item  VI.  1690).  (3)  Francis  Hare  (Psalmorum  libri  in 
versiculos  metrice  divisus,  1736),  followed  especially  by  Weisse.  The  treatises 
of  Gomarus,  Maibon,  and  Hare  were  republished  in  Ugolino,  Thesaurus 
(XXXI.).  Lowth  severely  criticised  Hare's  measures.  He  had  no  doubt  that 
Hebrew  poetry  had  measured  lines,  and  he  distinguished  between  long  and 
short  measures,  in  the  former  recognizing  the  "  small  rest  or  interval ";  but  he 
thought  that  it  would  be  impracticable  to  find  more  definite  measures  because 
the  original  pronunciation  of  the  Hebrew  language  could  not  be  known  (v. 
Prelim.  Diss,  to  Isaiah,  xxv.).  (4)  William  Jones  (Poeseos  Asiaticae  com- 
mentariorum,  1776)  applied  the  rules  of  Arabic  meter  to  Hebrew  poetry, 
involving  the  doing  away  with  the  Massoretic  system  of  vowels.  So,  essen- 
tially, E.  J.  Greve.  (5)  J.  J.  Bellermann  (  Versuch  uber  die  Meirik  der 
Hebrder,  181 3),  applied  the  system  of  morae  to  Hebrew  poetry.  (6)  J.  L. 
Saalschiitz  (Von  der  Form  der  Hebr'dischen  Poesie,  1853)  rejected  the  Masso- 
retic system  and  built  on  the  pronunciation  of  the  Polish  and  German  Jews, 
after  the  Aramaic  method.  II.  G.  Bickell  (Metrices  Biblicae,  1879;  Car- 
mina  Veteris  Metrici,  1882;  Dichtungen  der  Hebr'der,  1882- 1884),  followed 
by  G.  Gietmann  (de  re  metrica  Hebraeorum,  1880),  finds  a  Hebrew  meter  in 
the  number  of  syllables  after  the  method  of  Syriac  poetry.  There  is  a  con- 
stant alternation  of  rise  and  fall,  so  that  only  iambic  and  trochaic  feet  are 
possible.  The  Massoretic  system  is  rejected  and  the  Aramaic  virtually  put 
in  its  place.  The  accent  is  generally,  as  in  Syriac,  on  the  penult.  An  elaborate 
criticism  of  BickelPs  theory  is  given  by  Ecker  (Porta  Sion,  1903,  pp.  147  sq.). 
Doubtless  the  original  Hebrew  pronunciation  was  different  from  that  of  the 
Massoretic  system,  but  Hebrew  was  not  a  mere  dialect  of  the  Aramaic,  still 
less  of  so  late  a  form  of  it  as  the  Syriac.  It  has  recently  been  shewn  that  the 
earliest  Syriac  poetry  did  not  measure  by  number  of  syllables.  III.  The 
measurement  of  Hebrew  verse  by  the  beat  of  the  accent  has  been  maintained 
by  a  great  number  of  scholars  with  increasing  conviction.  This  is  indepen- 
dent of  the  doctrine  of  syllables,  whether  more  like  the  Arabic,  Aramaic,  or 
the  Massoretic  system.  Moreover,  it  is  independent  of  the  theory  on  what 
syllable  of  the  word  the  accent  should  fall.  In  any  case,  we  have  just  so  many 
accents  in  the  verse.  The  earliest  writer  to  make  the  accent  the  determin- 
ing principle  of  measurement,  so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  discover,  was 
C.  G.  Anton  (conjectura  de  metro  Hebraeorum,  1 770,  Specimen  editionis 
Psalmorum,  1780).  In  this  he  was  followed  by  Leutwein  (Versuch  einer 
richtigen  Theorie  von  der  Biblischen  Verskunst,  1775),  Ernst  Meier  (Die  Form 
der  Hebr.  Poesie,  1853),  but  especially  Julius  Ley  (Die  metrischen  Formen  der 
Hebr.  Poesie,  1866  ;  Grundzuge  des  Rhythmus  des  Vers-  tmd  Strophenbaues 
in  der  Hebr.  Poesie,  1875  ;  Leiifaden  der  Metrik  der  Hebr.  Poesie,  1887,  and 
other  minor  writings).  To  Ley,  more  than  to  any  other  scholar,  is  due  the 
credit  of  leading  to  a  correct  conception  of  the  measures  of  Hebrew  poetry. 
I  accepted  the  principle  of  measurement  of  Hebrew  poetry  by  accents  soon 
after  I  began  to  teach  as  Professor  of  Hebrew  and  cognate  languages  in 
Union  Theological  Seminary,  in  1874  ;   and  from  that  time  I  have  given  much 


xl  INTRODUCTION 

attention  to  the  subject.  My  views  were  published  in  1881  {Homiletic  Quar- 
terly, pp.  398  sq.,  555  sq.  ;  Biblical  Study,  first  edition,  1883,  pp.  262  sq.).  The 
principles  were  applied  in  the  study  of  the  Poem  of  the  Fall  of  Mankind 
{Reformed  Quarterly  Review,  1866),  Poem  of  the  Creation  {Old  7'estamenl 
Student,  1884),  and  of  all  the  poetic  Messianic  passages  {Messianic  Prophecy, 
1886).  My  views  were  more  fully  stated  in  five  articles  {Hebraica,  1886- 
1888),  and  in  the  tenth  edition  of  Biblical  Study,  enlarged  under  the  title 
General  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Holy  Scripture,  1899.  In  1883  I  criti- 
cised Ley's  octameters  and  decameters  as  simply  double  tetrameters  and  pen- 
tameters, and  objected  to  his  theory  of  substitution  and  compensation,  which 
he  has  since  abandoned.  This  principle  of  tonic  measures  was  adopted  by 
Francis  Brown  {Measures  of  Heb.  Poetry  as  an  Aid  to  Literary  Analysis, 
JBL.  IX.  pp.  91-106)  and  many  other  Americans.  C.  H.  Toy  {Commentary 
on  Proverbs,  1899)  uses  the  tonic  principle,  but  objects  to  the  terms  trimeter 
and  tetrameter,  and  uses  ternary,  quaternary,  etc.  \V.  R.  Harper  used  the 
method  on  the  basis  of  my  article  in  Hebraica,  in  the  preparation  of  his  Com- 
mentary on  Amos  and  Hosea,  1905  {v.  Preface,  ix.).  Cheyne  employs  the 
tonic  principle  (in  his  commentaries  on  the  Psalms1-  8,  Book  of  the  Prophet 
Isaiah,  SBOT.  1899).  Most  Biblical  scholars  since  Jebb  have  been  reac- 
tionary in  their  views  of  Hebrew  poetry.  Budde  {Das  Hebraische  Klagelied, 
ZATW.  1882)  deserves  great  credit  for  his  investigation  of  the  pentameter 
in  the  Old  Testament  ;  but  the  name,  Kina  verse,  that  he  gave  to  it,  though 
adopted  by  many  scholars,  has  little  to  justify  it,  for  the  earliest  Kina  uses  the 
tetrameter  measure  (2  S.  i17_2;),  and  the  pentameter  measure  is  used  for  all 
kinds  of  poems,  especially  for  those  in  praise  of  the  Law,  19*-15  119,  which 
are  the  reverse  of  Kind's.  Budde's  long  hesitation  to  accept  other  measures 
is  difficult  to  understand.  He  says,  however  (article  Hebrew  Poetry,  DB.), 
"  The  vastly  preponderating  probability  appears  to  belong  to  the  theory  of 
Ley,  who  counts  the  «  rises'  without  taking  account  of  the  *  falls.'  "  Duhm,  in 
his  Commentaries  on  Isaiah,  1892,  and  the  Psalter,  1899,  also  uses  the  tonic 
principle,  but  without  any  explanation  of  his  principles  or  his  relation  to  others. 
It  is  astonishing  how  exactly  his  views,  as  to  many  passages,  correspond  with 
those  given  previously  in  my  Messianic  Prophecy,  1886.  In  the  meanwhile  the 
principle  of  tonic  measure  was  greatly  strengthened  by  the  discovery  that  the 
same  principle  determined  the  structure  of  the  more  ancient  Egyptian,  Baby- 
lonian, and  Assyrian  poetry.  F.  Brown  {Religious  Poetry  of  Babylonia,  Pres- 
byterian Review,  1888),  among  other  examples,  shewed  that  the  epic  of  the 
descent  of  Istar  to  Sheol  is  pentameter.  The  Hymn  to  the  Nile  was  recognised 
as  measured  by  the  tonic  accent,  by  Guieysse  {Records  of  the  Past,  new  ed.,  III. 
47-48).  Erman  also  {Life  in  Ancient  Egypt,  p.  395)  stated  that  Egyptian 
poetry  was  measured  by  the  tonic  accent.  Two  recent  scholars  have  endeav- 
oured to  fortify  the  tonic  principle  by  a  closer  study  of  the  syllable.  H.  Grimme 
{Abriss  der  Bib.  Hebr.  Metrik,  ZDMG.  1895;  Grundziige  der  Hebr.  Akzent 
und  Vokallehre,  1896;  Psalmen  Probleme,  1902)  revives  the  use  of  morae, 
but  builds  essentially  on  the  accents  for  measurement  of  lines.     His  last  book 


POETRY   OF  THE   PSALTER  xli 

has  only  come  into  my  hands  since  I  completed  my  Ms.  for  this  Com- 
mentary. Our  independent  work  agrees  as  to  the  measures  of  Pss.  1-50, 
except  in  7,  9-10,  11,  17,  19"  23,  25,  31,  32,  34,  37,  38.  Pss.  25,  34,  37, 
hexameters,  he  interprets  as  trimeters,  dividing  the  lines  at  the  caesuras. 
The  other  Pss.  are  full  of  difficulty,  due  chiefly  to  glosses  where  there  is 
room  for  difference  in  reconstruction.  E.  Sievers  in  1901  published  his 
Metrische  Studien.  While  building  on  the  tonic  principle,  he  fortifies  it 
by  giving  it  a  foundation  in  the  laws  of  speech,  song,  and  music,  and  by 
a  careful  study  of  the  unaccented  syllables.  His  principles  have  been 
adopted  for  the  most  part  in  Bathgen's  Psalmeri*,  1904.  Sievers,  in  his 
double  fours  and  sevens,  falls  into  an  error  similar  to  that  of  Ley.  His 
double  fours  of  Ex.  15,  2  S.  I,  Ju.  5  are  nothing  but  tetrameters,  and  his 
sevens  limited,  so  far  as  xp  is  concerned,  to  4,  9-10,  are  due  to  mistaken 
interpretation  of  the  measures,  which  in  both  cases  in  the  original  Pss. 
were  trimeters,  disturbed,  however,  by  many  glosses.  Those  who  have 
used  the  principle  of  tonic  measure  since  Anton,  have  not  failed  to  rec- 
ognise that  the  stress  of  the  accent  alternates  with  a  falling  of  the  voice  in 
one,  two,  or  three  syllables,  in  varied  relation  to  the  tonic  syllable ;  but  they 
have  not  thought  it  needful  to  count  these  syllables  as  Sievers  does.  Indeed, 
Sievers  (p.  77)  recognises  that  Anton  instinctively  came  nearest  the  truth, 
that  his  theory  needs  few  modifications,  and  that  he  only  failed  in  working  it 
out  in  detail.  But  it  is  just  this  detail  in  Sievers'  method  which  is  of  doubtful 
value.  It  is  based  on  the  essential  accuracy  of  the  Massoretic  system,  which, 
as  is  evident  from  the  transliterations  in  Origen's  Hexapla,  was  artificial ;  and, 
as  many  Hebrew  scholars  since  Lowth  have  recognised,  is  of  doubtful  origi- 
nality. And  in  fact  Sievers'  measures,  as  those  of  Grimme,  really  depend 
upon  the  tonic  accents,  which  alone  are  of  any  great  importance  even 
in  his  system.  In  the  use  of  the  natural  laws  of  speech  and  music  as  the 
basis  of  the  measures  of  poetry,  Sievers  was  anticipated  by  the  eminent 
American  poet,  Sydney  Lanier  (Science  of  English  Verse,  1880),  whom  I 
used  at  an  early  date.  A  most  thoroughgoing  and  invariably  hostile  criti- 
cism of  metrical  theories  of  Hebrew  poetry  is  given  by  Ecker  (Porta  Sion, 
22-181  ;  1903).  A  more  recent,  less  complete,  more  sympathetic,  yet  uncer- 
tain criticism  is  given  by  W.  H.  Cobb  (Criticism  of  Systems  of  Hebrew 
Metre,  1905). 

The  following  is  the  result  of  my  study  of  the  measures  of  the  Psalms :  — 

I.   There  are  eighty-nine  trimeter  Pss.  in  the  Psalter.     This  is  a  favourite 

measure  for  lyrics.     These  Pss.  are  2,  3,  6,  7,  8,  9-10,  II,  15,  18,  192-7  20,  21, 

22,  241-6  24^-10  26,  27-12  33>  366-10  38,  44,  47,  49,  51,  54,552-3.5-*  56,  572-s 

57e.8-i2  (_  IQ82-6)  59f  6o3-"-!26-i4  6o8-i2a   (=io88"14)   63,  661"9  6613"19  67, 

698-14.20-29  ?I>  73>  75>  y6f  772-16  7717-20  78>  79>  8^  gl2-66  8l6c-15  $2,  83,  85,  88, 
g94-5.  18-46  90>  9I>  ^2,  93  +  96-IOO,  94,  951"6  957-11  I022-12  I03,  104,  IO5-I06,  IO7, 
I09l-5.  16-18.  21-27  j 096-16  nlj  ll2f  „3)  II4>  ,^1-8  n59-16  H6,  117,  u8,  I35, 
I36,  I38,    139W.  18-16.  28-24    I397-12    I3917-22    I42>    j^l-S.  7-11    ^  ,471-6.  7-11.  12-21 

148,  149,  150.     We  may  give  as  a  specimen  2^-^ :  — 


Xlii  INTRODUCTION 

hniSdi  f\Nn  nvrS 

na  >3!fM  San 

mo^  o^-Sy  Nin-»3 

njjia>  nnnj   Sjn 

nin>  -ina   nSp-^D 
UBHp    DlpD3    Olp^D 
3aS    131    »pj 
WDJ    NIB'S    NCJ-nS 

mn>o  nana   ns» 
W2»  \-iSnd  n,-nxi 

ism   nn  nr 
apjn  vjd  »rp3D 

II.  There  are  twenty  tetrameters  in  the  Psalter:   I,  4,  12,  13,  16,  29,  30,  41, 

46,  58,  61,  64,  68,  74,  86,  892-3-6-i*  89*^2  ,40>  I4I>  I44i2-i5#     Ps>  I3  may  be 
given  as  a  specimen.     The  caesura  is  always  in  the  middle  when  it  occurs. 

wwn   nxj  —  mn>   njn-ip 

^cja    nixj;   PTN   NjN-np 

o^n   >Sj?  on>   njn— 17 

^jy  noon —  tiSn  nrp 

wj;  n^Nn  —  nion  ?b»n-id 

nx   B1CN    >3   Sj>~jd 

III.  There  are  twenty-five  pentameters  in  the  Psalter:  5,  14  (=  53),  17, 

,98-15     27l-6     2g>     32>    35>    362-6    39    402-l2    ^.^    ^     ^     55l0_i6.  21_22.  M     ^ 
6Q2-7.  16-19.  80-32  40H-18(=70)>    ^    g^    IOI>    ^    „9>    ^    ^        pg     ^    may 

be  given  as  a  specimen.     The  caesura  usually  comes  after  the  third  beat,  but 
occasionally  for  variety  after  the  second. 

otiSn  ]"h  —  taVa  S33  iDM 
a)B~n»j;-^N  —  nS^S?  la^nn   in^rwn 

oviSn    Clt  —  S»3W    C",n    DSlS 

viSnj  nn>  —  jd   ->d  San 

TIN  DJ  pN  —  awnpjrpM 

>Qy  iSaN  —  jhH>j»  ijn>  NSn 

w-ip   nS  mn> —  onS  iSa« 

ditd  7103  —  nno  hpid  ne» 

ddnd  nin>  -o  —  e>an  orxp 

IV.  There  are  twenty-five  hexameters:  the  alphabetical  25,  34,  37,  145  ; 
the  pilgrim  Pss.  120,  121,  122,  123,  124,  125,  126,  1271-2  1273-6  128,  129,  130, 


POETRY   OF  THE   PSALTER  xliii 

131.  132,  133,  134;   and  31,  50,  62,  72,  I0213"23-29.     Pss.  124,  125  illustrate 
the  varied  use  of  the  caesura. 

S*ne»  w ' idki  —  uS  rww  iw  <W> 

wSy  Dipa  —  vh  nTus*  mm  >SV? 

ua  ddn  nnna  —  wj^a  D"n  v« 

UB'flj  nap  rrVru  —  "dbmv  wen  nM 

onijc1?  tpo  ijjpj   nW  —  mm  ynz 

B*vpv  non  ntaSnj  —  naxa  upm  (njn) 

(njoc)  uoSdj  umxi —  naw  non  (nan) 

jnsi  d^dc  ns?;*  —  mm  ots>a   unrj; 

d?^  bwkS —  jrx  "via  —  mma  0"nBan 

nh   3'3D  onn  —  o»%rni   ats" 

dSij?  tjn  nnjna —  idjjS  aoD  nwi 

a"|i>nxn  "mrS? —  jwnn  Bats'  nw  KT^a 

V.  There  are  long  Pss.  of  varying  measures.  Ps.  23  has  three  Strs.  of 
three,  four,  and  five  tones,  increasing  with  each  Str.  Ps.  45  is  essentially 
a  tetrameter,  but  it  uses  occasional  trimeters  with  striking  effect  for  a  more 
rapid  movement  of  the  thought.  In  this  it  resembles  the  Song  of  Deborah, 
Ju.  5.  Some  scholars,  as  Toy  and  Duhm,  recognise  dimeters  of  two  tones, 
but  these  are  parts  of  tetrameters  or  hexameters.  The  division  made  by  these 
scholars  are  at  the  caesuras.  There  are  no  dimeters  except  in  broken  lines 
used  at  times  for  a  metrical  pause  (e.g.  Pss.  I1-4  82-10).  Many  of  Grimme's 
trimeters  are  really  hexameters.  Sievers'  double  threes  and  double  fours  are 
trimeters  and  tetrameters. 

VI.  The  Hebrew  poets  seldom  accent  a  monosyllable.  It  usually  loses 
its  tone  by  being  attached  to  the  previous  or  the  subsequent  word.  Two 
successive  tonic  syllables  make  very  bad  euphony,  especially  at  the  end  of  1. 
There  were  various  devices  for  overcoming  this  difficulty.  At  the  end  of  1., 
the  accent  of  the  word  before  the  monosyllable  was  retracted ;  e.g.  y-\n  ^Bfiit' 
2!0,  "»a  'Din  212,  ]w  San*  "XW  nS;i  715,  >a  yen  1820,  na  »a«^i  241.  Two  tones 
were  gained  by  attaching  three  short  words  ;  e.g.  ^arno"*?  511,  ia~*C»n-??  512, 
iSi~*a«P^"Sa  492.  The  insertion  of  the  conj.  1  before  a  monosyllable  makes  a 
sufficient  vocalic  utterance  to  justify  giving  the  word  a  tone.  It  is  sometimes 
used  to  make  it  easier  to  give  a  long  word  two  tones  ;  e.g.  nS>,  3731  419,  Sni  25s 
371,  hp  39,  in  all  cases  given  by  (5  but  omitted  by  |^. 

(  C)  The  Hebrew  poets,  as  poets  of  other  nations,  used  archaic 
words  and  forms  for  metrical  purposes :  (a)  The  archaic  case 
endings  softened  the  transition  from  word  to  word  and  made  the 
language  more  melodious,     (b)  The  archaic  suffixes  and  modal 


xliv  INTRODUCTION 

forms  were  used  partly  for  the  same  purpose  and  partly  to  give  the 
tone  a  more  melodious  position,  (c)  The  archaic  prepositions 
were  employed  in  order  to  get  independent  words  or  variation  in 
the  tonic  syllable  (Ley.^^^.s.ioo^. .  Bnsas  my 

{a)  \  5010  792  10420  1148. 

\  1231. 

nn*  for  n„  33  44s7  63s  803  9216  9417  1201  1253. 
(£)    uTT518  2512414+. 

n'510  ii2-8  i2935"  36s  +  . 

*D-  sf.  28-5  II7  2I10-  n- 13  225  +  ;   to1?  for  an1,  24  444-  u  4914  -f . 
(<■)     >E3  for  2  II2. 

ID}  for  ^  296  58s-  8- 10  63s  7813  909  92s  +  . 

np  for  nj;  10428. 

^V  for  S;;  50s-  *«  92*  94s1. 

*J0  for  jd  4411  459  78s. 

*Sa  for  S3  194  63s  727. 

(D)  The  Hebrew  poets  ornamented  their  lines  by  various  devices 
at  the  beginning,  in  the  middle,  before  caesuras,  and  at  the  end. 
At  the  beginning  the  order  of  the  alphabet  was  followed  and  acros- 
tics were  made  of  various  kinds.  Certain  important  words  were 
repeated  in  several  successive  lines.  At  the  ends  of  lines  a  kind 
of  assonance  or  rhyme  was  made,  especially  by  the  use  of  identical 
suffixes.    The  same  device  was  also  used  at  times  before  caesuras. 

(a)  The  Alphabetic  Pss.  are  9-10,  25,  34,  37,  III,  112,  119,  145.  Usually 
the  letter  of  the  alphabet  begins  a  1.,  a  couplet,  or  a  Str.;  but  in  g'2-3  it  is 
repeated  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  the  four  11.  of  the  Str.,  and  in  119 
throughout  the  twenty-two  alphabetical  Strs.  it  is  repeated  eight  times  (cf. 
La.  3).  (b)  Ps.  132"5  has  ruK~tJ  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  the  four  lines  of 
the  Str. ;  and  v.4-5  has  jd  at  the  beginning  of  three  of  the  four  11.  Ps.  29  re- 
peats mm  Sip  eight  times  and  on  thrice.  Ps.  62  repeats  "]H  eight  times.  Ps.  148 
repeats  VllSSn  six  times,  and  Ps.  150  the  same  nine  times,  (c)  Rhyming  with 
identical  suffixes  is  used  as  an  ornament,  rather  than  as  in  modern  poetry  to 
mark  the  ends  of  all  11.  of  the  poem.     The  following  examples  may  suffice.  — 

,D_   2**.  «•».**   _ ,_    I3    throughout,    27B  7-8.9.11-12  22206-22  3Q2.4    ^    ^A    ,42 

—  q_  92'3  151  202"0  454.—  V  4511.  —  s_  152-3.  — n_  241-2  4513-16  (6  1.).— 
The  Pss.  that  use  this  method  usually  vary  in  their  use  of  it.  —  Ps.  6  has 

*_    for   the   most   part    ()^ob.3ab.4ab.5a.  7a6c.8ac.9aft .10a6    DU£    -,    v  56.  Gab    ,_  v  86.11a 

Ps.  31  has  »,  v.  *■",  but  x\  v.20-21-  23.  —  Ps.  35  has  »_  v.1^-  "-14,  but  o_  v.6^. 

—  Ps.  119  has  a  variation,  some  Strs.  ending  in  r\,  others  in  '•_..  —  (d)  Ps.  no 
has  "_  after  caesura  and  at  end  of  1.  1,  but  7\  in  11.  2,  3,  4,  5  ;   D_  1.  6 ;  1  1.  7  ;   d<_ 


POETRY   OF  THE   PSALTER  xlv 

11.  8,  10  ;  n_  1.  9.  At  the  beginning  of  six  11.  of  4513"16  the  words  end  in  m_. 
—  Ps.  143  has  in  ten  11.  the  first  and  last  words  in  >_,  before  caesuras  r\. — 
144s  has  assonance  in  every  word  of  the  tetrameter  hexastich  ;  all  the  words 
of  11.  I,  3,  5  end  in  3^_;  those  of  2,  4,  6  in  n'\  The  later  scribes  and  editors 
did  not  care  for  this  ornament  of  style,  and  so  obscured  it  and  even  effaced 
it  partly  by  changing  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence,  or  by  glosses  of 
various  kinds. 

(E)  The  Pss.  were  also  arranged  in  regular  strophical  organiza- 
tion, as  was  indeed  almost  necessary  for  musical  rendering  in  early 
lyric  forms  of  song.  The  reason  why  this  has  not  been  evident  is 
that  the  liturgical  glosses  of  later  times  have  obscured  or  destroyed 
them.  These  strophes  are  of  great  variety  as  coming  from  so 
many  different  authors  and  so  many  different  periods  of  time. 
Strophes  may  be  simple  or  complex,  just  as  in  the  case  of  parallel- 
ism of  lines.  The  simple  strophes  are  of  few  lines  of  one  kind  of 
parallelism.  The  complex  strophes  have  more  lines  and  two  or 
more  kinds  of  parallelism.  In  this  case  the  connection  of  thought 
is  usually  clear.  The  strophical  divisions  may  be  determined  by 
a  more  decided  separation  in  the  thought  of  the  poem.  Some- 
times it  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  between  the  lesser  and  greater 
separations  because  of  a  lack  of  familiarity  of  modern  scholars  with 
the  delicate  shades  of  parallelism,  which  constituted  the  most  char- 
acteristic feature  of  Hebrew  thought ;  and  because  of  the  prejudices 
due  to  other  rhetorical  and  logical  uses  of  Western  races  and  mod- 
ern times.  The  simple  strophes  of  one  kind  of  parall.  only  are  not 
common.  They  tend  to  a  monotonous  style.  The  usual  method 
in  the  strophe  is  to  combine  the  several  kinds.  This  puts  at  the 
disposal  of  the  poet  a  very  great  variety  of  combinations.  These 
will  appear  in  the  commentary  on  the  particular  Pss.  As  Lowth 
well  says  :  "  A  happy  mixture  of  the  several  sorts  gives  an  agreeable 
variety,  and  they  serve  mutually  to  recommend  and  set  off  one 
another."  (Prelim.  Diss,  to  Isaiah,  p.  xxvi.)  I  may,  however, 
sum  up  the  results  of  my  investigation  of  the  strophical  structure 
of  the  Pss.  as  follows  :  — 

The  Strs.  are  arranged  on  the  same  principles  of  parallelism  as  the  11.,  in  all 
its  varieties.  Poems  of  single  Strs.  are  uncommon.  The  most  frequent  structure 
is  the  pair  of  Strs.  frequently  doubled  in  two  pairs,  rarely  as  eight  and  sixteen 
Strs.     The  triplet  of  Strs.  is  also  common,  less  frequent  its  multiples  of  six, 


xlvi  INTRODUCTION 

nine,  and  twenty-four  Strs.  There  are  also  poems  of  five,  and  its  multiples, 
ten,  fifteen,  and  twenty  Strs.  Poems  of  seven  Strs.  are  uncommon.  Poems 
of  eleven  and  twenty-two  Strs.  are  limited  to  alphabetical  poems.  I  do  not 
attempt  to  separate  the  glosses  in  the  verses  given  below.  Duplicates  are  not 
counted,  (i)  Poems  of  single  Strs.  are  the  Pilgrim  Pss.,  123,  125,  1271-2 
!  273-5  128,  131,  133,  134.  There  are  only  four  others:  15,  362-0  117,  14412-15, 
which  have  special  reasons.  (2)  Poems  with  a  pair  of  Strs.  are  fifty  in 
number:  I,  7,  8,  II,  13,  192-7  198-15  20,  21,  241-6  247-10  271-6  32,  36s"10  39, 
4o»-"  (=  70),  49,  52,  54,  57*-  8-12  (=  1082-6),  58,  59,  62,  65,  6613-2J  72,  79, 
812-66  Sg*"-52  951-6  957"11  101,  10213-29  no,  114,  120,  121,  122,  124,  126,  129, 
130,  136,  13917-22  142,  143,  I441"2-  7_n  1471"0  1477"11  150.  Poems  with  four 
Strs.  are  thirty-one  in  number:  2,  3,  4,  6,  12,  26,  30,  33,  402-12  41,  44,  48,  51, 
56,  6o:J"7- 126-"  6o8-12«  (=  io88"14)  71,  7717-20  8i<*-15  83,  85,  91,  92,  1022-12  107, 
113,  1151-8  ii82-7-  10"12  132,  141,  148.  Poems  of  eight  Strs.  are:  17,  68,  116; 
of  sixteen  Strs.  Sg4"5-  18_46.  (3)  Poems  of  three  Strs.  are  thirty-six  in  number: 
16,  23,  25,  2f12  28,  34,  35,  42-43,  45,  46,  50,  552"j-  5"9a  5596"16-  21"24  Sf2-*  61, 
63,  64,  661"9  67,  69s-7- 14-19-  so-32  76,  82,  84,  87,  88, 1159-16  11819-26  135, 137,  138, 
I397"12  140,  145,  146,  14712-'21  149.  Poems  of  six  Strs.  are  :  18,  75,  89'-"3-  *-16 
90,  94,  I091"5-  16"18-  2I"27  I391"6- 13_16-  23_24.  Poems  of  nine  Strs. :  74  ;  of  twenty- 
four  Strs. :  105-106.  (4)  There  are  twelve  poems  of  five  Strs. :  5,  14  (  =  53), 
22,  29,  31,  38,  47,  69s-13-  2j-->9  77'2-ig  g0,  86,  1096-15.  There  is  also  one  of 
ten  Strs. :  73  ;  one  of  fifteen  Strs.  :  93  -f  96-100;  and  one  of  twenty  :  78. 
(5)  There  are  three  poems  of  seven  Strs. :  37,  103,  104.  (6)  Alphabetical 
poems  are  two  of  eleven  Strs.:  Ill,  112  ;  and  two  of  twenty-two:  9-10,  119. 
These  Strs.  vary  in  number  of  11.  and  in  combinations  of  parall.  The 
Refrains  are  not  counted  in  the  Strs.  (1)  The  only  apparent  monostichs  are 
in  alphabetical  Pss.  :  25,  34,  in,  112,  145.  But  these  are  not  really  mono- 
stichs, but  11.  grouped  in  several  kinds  of  stichs:  25,  34,  145  heptastichs  ;  III, 
112,  distichs.  (2)  Distichs  are  not  common  in  the  Psalter.  They  are  more 
appropriate  to  sentences  of  Wisdom.     There  are,  however,  five  :   14  (=  53), 

62,  661-9  in,  112.  (3)  Tristichs  are  not  common:  17,  74,  75,  7717-20  g^ 
116.  (4)  The  tetrastich  is  the  most  frequent  lyric  form.  There  are  sixty- 
two  of  them  :  3,  4,  5,  9-10,  12,  13,  23,  26,  277-12  28,  29,  30,  4014-18  (=70), 
47,  48,  552-3-6"90  S72-5  576-8"12  (=  I082-*),  6o»-7- 12^14  6o8-12a  (=  1088-14),  61, 

63,  65»  73,  78,  8l6c'16  82,  86»  892-3-6-15  894-518"43  94,  101,  103,  105-106, 
1096-15  I091"5- 16-18- 21~27  113,  1151-8  117,  11819-'26  120,  121,  122,  123,  124,  125, 

126,     I271-2    I273-5    128,    129,    I3O,    I3I,    I32,    I33,    I34,     I37,     139I-6.  13-10.  23-24 

I397"12  13917"22  141,  I441"2-  7_n.  (5)  There  are  thirteen  pentastichs  :  6,  31, 
32,  366"104O2-12  41,  5596-16.  21-24  64(  67,  &\^h  90,  no,  143.  (6)  There  are 
forty-three  hexastichs :   1,  192-7  198-15  271-6  362-6  37,  38,  46,  50,  52,  54,  56,  68, 

692-7.  14-19.  30-32  ^S-l*.  2)-29  ?6>  ^2-16    ^    8o>    g4>   g5j    g947-62    ^    93  +  96-IOO, 

95^5  957-n  I022-i2  to^s-29  114,  H59-!*  H82-7-  w-m  135,  1 36,  1 38,  140,  I4412"15 
146,  I471"6  I477-11  14712-21  148,  149,  150.  (7)  There  are  nine  heptastichs:  2, 
25,  34,  39,  6618-20  71,  72,  91,  145.  (8)  There  are  nine  octastichs:  8,  II,  16, 
20,  44,  58,  83,  104,  119.    (9)  There  is  one  nonastich :  42-43.     (10)  There  are 


POETRY   OF  THE   PSALTER  xlvii 

seven  decastichs :  7,  15,  22,  33,  35,  51,  142.  (11)  There  are  four  duodeca- 
stichs  :  21,  59,  88,  107.  (12)  There  are  two  fourteen-lined  Strs. :  18,  49. 
(13)  There  are  several  Pss.  with  varying  Strs.,  241-6  247-10,  with  responsive 
choirs.  Ps.  45  has  Strs.  of  increasing  length  with  Rfs.  and  measures  varying 
as  the  Song  of  Deborah,  Ju.  5. 

The  credit  of  calling  the  attention  of  scholars  to  the  strophical  organisation 
of  Hebrew  poetry  is  usually  given  to  Koster  (Das  Buck  Hiob  und  der  Prediger 
Solomos  nach  ihrer  strophischen  Anordnung,  1813;  Die  Psalmen  nach  ihrer 
strophischen  Anordnung,  1S37  ;  and  especially  Die  Strophen  oder  Parallelisnms 
der  Verse  der  Heb.  Poesie,  S.  K.  1831).  But  in  fact  many  older  scholars  had 
recognised  the  strophe  and  antistrophe  in  Hebrew  poetry ;  so  especially 
Anton.  Even  Lowth  pointed  out  that  there  were  stanzas  of  different  numbers 
of  lines  (Prelim.  Diss,  to  Isaiah).  Koster  builds  on  Lowth's  system  of  par- 
allelism and  maintains  that  groups  of  verses  are  arranged  on  the  same  princi- 
ples of  parallelism  as  the  verses  themselves,  and  thus  he  gets  various  kinds  of 
strophic  parallelism  corresponding  with  the  various  kinds  of  parallels  of  lines. 
He  distinguishes  (1)  word  strophes,  (2)  thought  strophes,  (a)  synonymous, 
(b)  antithetical,  (c)  synthetic,  and  (d)  identical.  In  this  he  is  essentially 
correct.  De  Wette,  in  the  fourth  edition  of  his  Commentary,  1836,  recognises 
that  about  all  the  Psalms  are  divided  into  strophes ;  so  Ewald,  Olshausen, 
Delitzsch,  and  others  in  their  Commentaries.  There  were,  however,  great 
differences  of  opinion  as  to  the  principles  for  determining  the  strophical 
organisation,  as  these  scholars,  one  and  all,  made  the  strophical  divisions 
dependent  upon  their  opinions  of  the  most  important  breaks  in  the  thought  of 
the  poems.  If  they  had  built  on  Koster  they  would  have  been  more  success- 
ful. D.  H.  Miiller  (Die  Propheten  in  ihrer  ursprtinglichen  Form,  1895,  Stro- 
phenbau  und  Responsion,  1898)  classified  the  strophes  under  the  terms, 
responsion,  concatenation,  and  inclusion.  As  I  said  in  1899  (SHS-  3")  :  "There 
is  nothing  new  in  his  theory  but  the  terminology  and  some  of  the  illustrations. 
Responsion  is  simply  the  antithetical  parallelism  of  strophes,  concatenation  is 
the  stairlike  parallelism  of  lines  used  in  strophical  relations,  and  inclusion  is 
the  introverted  parallelism  of  strophes.  I  have  taught  all  this  for  thirty  years 
and  given  the  doctrine  of  the  strophe  in  the  writings  above  referred  to." 
Miiller  was  hardly  justified  in  objecting  to  Zenner  (Chorges'dnge  im  Buche 
der  Psalmen,  1 896)  as  appropriating  his  ideas,  for  they  were  common  prop- 
erty, the  inevitable  result  of  the  application,  since  Koster,  of  the  principles  of 
parallelism  to  strophes.  Rather  Miiller  himself  was  to  blame  for  not  properly 
recognising  the  work  of  his  predecessors,  which  would  have  shown  him  that 
his  views  were  not  as  original  as  he  supposed. 

(F}  There  are  also  Refrains  which  some  poets  use  in  connec- 
tion with  the  various  strophes  of  their  poems.     These  are  of  sev- 
eral kinds  :  (a)  they  are  often  identical  in  thought  and  expression  ; 
(b)   the  thought  is  the  same  but  its  expression  varies ;    (V)   the 
d 


xlviii  INTRODUCTION 

thought  and  expression  both  vary;  (a7)  a  number  of  Pss.  were 
composed  and  arranged  for  singing  by  responsive  choirs;  and 
(e)  some  for  solo  voices  and  choruses. 

(a)  Ps.  39  has  2  Str.  75  with  identical  Rf.  I5;  Ps.  42-43  has  3  Str.  g5  with 
identical  Rf.  35.  The  following  also  have  identical  Rfs. :  46,  49,  56,  59,  62,  80, 
85,  116,  I44A.  (b)  Ps.  8  has  an  identical  couplet  of  Rf. ;  but  it  is  before  the  first 
Str.  and  after  the  second  Str.,  on  the  principle  of  inclusion  or  introverted 
parallelism,  so  57B(=  io8A),  cf.  58.  Ps.  107  has  double  Rfs.  (c)  Ps.  45  has 
3  Str.  of  increasing  length,  2,  6,  18,  with  a  Rf.  of  one  line  at  the  close  of  each 
beginning  with  an  identical  term,  but  varying  in  thought  and  expression  in 
other  respects.  Ps.  66A  has  two  Str.  couplets,  each  introduced  by  a  Rf.  varying 
only  in  expression.  The  following  Pss.  are  uniform  in  structure,  with  varying 
Rfs.,  50,  84.  (d)  Pss.  20,  21  were  sung  by  responsive  choirs.  The  Rfs.  vary 
in  expression.  They  are  trimeter  couplets  following  2  Str.  S3  in  Ps.  20,  and 
2  Str.  123  in  Ps.  21.  Ps.  24"-10  was  also  arranged  for  responsive  choirs  with  Rfs. 
in  which  there  is  identical  expression  in  part,  and  in  part  variation.  Pss.  n8A 
n8B  were  also  arranged  for  responsive  choirs,  (e)  Ps.  15  has  a  couplet  of 
inquiry,  followed  by  a  decalogue  of  moral  requirement  and  a  monostich  of 
conclusion.  Ps.  241"6  has  a  similar  variety  of  inquiry,  response,  and  statement. 
The  recognition  of  Refrains  and  responsive  choirs  in  the  Psalter  has  been  quite 
general.  But  there  has  been  a  great  difference  of  opinion  as  to  particular 
Pss.  Zenner  (  Chorges'dngc  im  Buche  der  Psalmen,  1896)  pushes  responsion  to 
extraordinary  lengths,  and  includes  in  his  scheme  a  large  number  of  Pss.  that 
give  no  other  suggestion  of  responsive  choirs  than  the  principle  of  responsion, 
which  is,  as  we  have  seen,  rather  a  characteristic  of  one  kind  of  parallelism  of 
Strophes  as  well  as  lines  of  Hebrew  poetry.  At  the  same  time  it  is  quite 
possible  that  the  choirs  of  temple  and  synagogues  made  a  more  extended  use 
of  responsive  singing  than  has  ordinarily  been  supposed.  This  feature  of 
responsion  of  Strophes  certainly  made  such  responsive  singing  easier;  cf. 
Condamin,  Le  Livre  dWsaie,  1905.  The  attempt  of  Baumann  (ZDMG.  1905, 
S.  I29sq.)  to  discredit  the  Rf.  is  based  on  false  conceptions  of  the  nature  of  a 
Rf.,  and  is  made  in  such  a  way  as  to  discredit  rather  the  author. 

§  13.  Several  Pss.  give  evidence  that  they  were  parts  of  longer 
Pss. 

(1)  Pss.  9  and  10  were  originally  one  alphabetical  Ps.,  as  indeed  they  are 
given  in  ©,  "B,  and  in  the  uses  of  the  Roman  Catholic,  Greek,  and  Syriac 
Churches,  making  a  difference  of  numbering  of  one  less  Ps.  from  Pss.  10- 113. 
Ps.  9  in  the  order  of  the  alphabet  reaches  the  Str.  with  0,  Ps.  10  begins  with  *? 
and  continues  the  alphabetical  structure  to  the  end.  However,  there  are 
several  Strs.  in  which  the  letter  has  been  lost,  partly  through  mistake,  partly 
from  the  intentional  substitution  of  other  words  and  sentences  by  editors. 


PSALMS   DIVIDED   OR  COMPOSITE  xlix 

(2)  Pss.  42  and  43  were  originally  one.  This  is  evident  from  the  Rf.,  which 
comes  twice  in  42  and  once  in  43,  and  from  the  fact  that  the  measures, 
strophical   organisation,    and    entire    character   of    the    Pss.    are    the    same. 

(3)  Pss.  93,  96-100  were  originally  parts  of  a  great  royal  advent  Ps.  of  fifteen 
trimeter  hexastichs.  It  was  broken  into  six  Pss.,  and  these  were  edited  with 
many  changes  for  liturgical  purposes.  Even  in  f^  in  twelve  codd.  93  is  part 
of  92,  in  nine  codd.  95  of  94,  in  four  codd.  96  of  95,  in  fourteen  codd.  97  of 
96,  in  eight  codd.  99  of  98.  (4)  Pss.  105  and  106  were  originally  one,  each 
having  twelve  trimeter  tetrastichs.  (5)  (3  also  divides  116  and  147  into  two 
Pss.  each,  followed  by  U,  so  that  1 17-147  f^,  EV8.,  are  numbered  differently 
from  (3,  1J.     148-150  have  the  same  number  in  all. 

§  14.  Many  Pss.  are  composite  of  two  or  more  original  Pss. 
or  parts  of  Pss.  combined  for  liturgical  purposes.  Usually  the 
original  Pss.  were  of  different  poetic  structure,  and  they  are  com- 
bitied  in  various  ways  by  editorial  seams. 

(1)  Ps.  19  is  composed  of  an  early  trimeter  morning  hymn  in  praise 
of  the  sun,  v.2-7,  and  a  late  pentameter  in  praise  of  the  divine  Law,  v.8-16. 
(2)  Ps.  24  is  composed  of  an  original  choral,  v.7-10,  and  a  later  ethical  Ps., 
v.1-5.  (3)  Ps.  40  is  composed  of  an  original  Ps.,  v.2-12,  of  four  pentameter  pen- 
tastichs,  to  which  was  appended  v.13s<i-  =  Ps.  70  with  editorial  modifications. 

(4)  Ps.  60  is  composed  of  v.8_12a,  an  ancient  piece,  and  v.3-7- 12b"14,  a  more 
modern  one.  Ps.  108  is  composed  of  v.1_c  =  578"12  and  v.7-14  =  6o7-14,  not 
that  this  Ps.  actually  used  parts  of  57  and  60,  but  that  it  used  one  of  the  orig- 
inals of  each  of  these  Pss.  (5)  Ps.  89  is  composed  of  a  paraphrase  of  the 
Davidic  covenant  in  four  parts,  each  of  four  trimeter  tetrastichs,  v.4-5-18"46; 
a  much  later  tetrameter  poem  of  six  tetrastichs  in  praise  of  the  fidelity  of 
Yahweh  in  the  creation  and  government  of  the  world,  v.2-3-  6_15.  These  were 
combined  at  a  still  later  date,  and  given  a  conclusion  of  two  tetrameter  hexa- 
stichs expressing  an  intense  longing  for  divine  interposition,  v.47-02.  (6)  ©, 
5$,  and  even  Ki.  combine  114  with  115  in  their  113  ;  but  in  fact  115  is  com- 
posed of  four  trimeter  tetrastichs,  v.1-8,  and  three  trimeter  hexastichs,  v.9-16. 
(7)  The  following  Pss.  are  also  composite  of  two  or  three  earlier  Pss. :  27, 
36,  55»  57»  66>  69,  77,  81,  95,  102,  109,  118,  127,  139,  144,  147. 

§  15.  Many  early  Pss.  have  been  adapted  by  editors  of  the  several 
minor  and  major  Psalters  for  later  use  by  glosses  of  various  hinds. 
These  are  usually  i?i  different  measures  from  those  of  the  Pss.  ;  and 
frequently  the  persons  and  numbers  of  nouns  and  verbs  differ  from 
those  of  the  original  poems,  as  if  the  editors  would  carefully  distin- 
guish their  additions  from  the  originals. 


1  INTRODUCTION 

These  glosses  are  of  several  kinds.  The  simplest  and  most 
natural  are  liturgical  in  character,  petitions,  intercessions,  calls  to 
worship,  expressions  of  praise  and  the  like.  Pss.  expressive  of 
piety  and  protestations  of  integrity  are  modified  by  the  insertions 
of  confessions  of  sin  and  pleas  for  forgiveness.  Protestations  of 
innocence  are  inserted  in  Pss.  which  lament  the  sufferings  of  the 
people  of  God  from  vindictive  and  cruel  enemies.  Personal,  local, 
and  earlier  national  relations  are  generalised  so  that  earlier  Pss. 
might  with  propriety  be  used  in  the  public  worship  of  late  times. 
Early  Pss.  were  adapted  to  the  time  of  the  supremacy  of  Law  by 
legal  glosses,  to  the  times  of  Hebrew  Wisdom  by  legal  glosses,  to 
the  Maccabean  times  by  lamentations  for  defeat,  imprecations 
upon  enemies,  and  other  warlike  expressions  appropriate  to  a 
period  of  persecution  and  conflict.  Early  Pss.  were  enriched  by 
illustrations  from  earlier  literature,  or  by  fuller  and  expansive 
statements.  Several  Pss.  were  given  a  Messianic  reference  in  this 
way.  Thus  the  editors  of  the  various  Psalters  did  exactly  what 
the  editors  of  prayer-books,  liturgies,  and  hymn-books  have  always 
done.  They  had  greater  interest  in  editing  the  Pss.  for  public 
worship  than  in  preserving  their  original  literary  form  and  mean- 
ing. Accordingly,  many  of  the  Pss.  have  lost  their  original  literary 
form.  They  express  varied  states  of  mind,  differences  of  experi- 
ence, inconsistent  situations ;  there  are  sudden  and  unexpected 
changes  in  tense  of  verbs,  and  in  person  and  number  of  pronouns 
and  suffixes.  All  this  makes  the  Pss.  richer  in  the  expression  of 
religious  experience,  and  in  this  respect  more  suited  to  the  varied 
needs  of  the  congregation,  but  greatly  injures  their  literary  and 
historical  value. 

It  will  be  sufficient  to  call  attention  to  several  Pss.  in  which  editorial  work 
of  various  kinds  appears. 

(i)  The  alphabetic  Pss.  show  signs  of  changes  of  the  text.  Ps.  9  has  the 
alphabetical  structure  preserved  with  Strs.  n  ,  2,  \  r,  n.  But  the  Strs.  J,  n,  c, 
\  3  have  been  modified.  Ps.  10  has  the  alphabetic  structure  in  S,  p,  1,  y,  p. 
But  the  Strs.  D,  J,  D,  >,  X  are  confused.  Ps.  25  has  an  additional  line  with 
l  for  an  original  p.  Ps.  34  adds  two  tetrameters.  Ps.  37  has  the  Str.  >'  con- 
fused. Ps.  119  shows  evidence  of  a  great  number  of  changes  in  the  uses  of 
terms  for  divine  Law  and  in  their  order  in  the  Strs.  Ps.  145  lacks  the  Str.  1. 
The  alphabetic  form  of  La.  has  been  well  preserved,  but  that  of  Na.  1  has 
been  confused  still  more  than  that  of  Pss.  9-10.      (2)   Ps.  I3  is  a  mosaic 


TEXTUAL  GLOSSES   AND    ERRORS  li 

from  Je.  175-8  Ez.  4712  Jos.  I8  interposed  between  two  antithetical  Strs.>  mak- 
ing a  metrical  arrangement  of  the  present  Ps.  impracticable.  (3)  Ps.  18  was 
a  graphic  ode  of  the  time  of  David,  preserved  in  another  edition  1  S.  22.  An 
editor  prefixed  a  protestation  of  love,  v.2.  Another  inserted  an  assertion  of 
fidelity  to  the  Deuteronomic  Law,  v.21-24;  still  another  of  fidelity  to  the  morals 
of  Hebrew  Wisdom,  v.25-28,  and  there  are  other  expressions  indicating  a  later 
attitude  of  Israel  to  the  nations  than  that  represented  in  the  original  ode, 
v36.456.46  50#  (^)  pS-  22  was  a  graphic  plea  of  suffering  Israel.  A  later  editor 
appended  a  liturgical  gloss,  v.24-25- 27,  another  v.28-32,  to  give  the  sufferings  a 
world-wide  and  Messianic  significance.  (5)  Ps.  32,  a  simple  penitential  Ps., 
was  enlarged  by  an  ethical  gloss,  v.2,  a  gloss  of  intensification,  v.",  a  gloss  of 
warning,  v.8-9,  and  a  concluding  liturgical  gloss.  (6)  Ps.  44,  an  original  Ps. 
of  3&  was  edited  in  f£  with  a  gloss  of  adaptation,  v.5- 7.  Maccabean  glosses 
appear  in  v.G- 8_9,  the  exultation  of  victory,  and  in  v.10- 12,  by  another  hand,  the 
humiliation  of  defeat.  (7)  Ps.  65  is  an  ancient  song  of  praise  in  the  temple, 
v#2.  3a.  5. 6a.  7. 8a  9'^  a  gloss  makes  the  worship  universal,  v.35-  66;  another  makes 
the  divine  wonders  in  nature  an  object  of  fear,  v.9a;  another  thinks  of  the 
covering  over  of  transgression,  v.4.  Later  editors  add  fragments  of  two  har- 
vest songs,  the  one,  v.10-11,  of  the  grain  harvest;  the  other  of  the  richness  of 
flocks,  v.12-14.  (8)  Ps.  728-12  is  a  mosaic  of  citations  from  Zee.  910  Is.2  Jb.  2912. 
A  large  proportion  of  the  Pss.  have  such  glosses  as  these,  adapting  early  Pss. 
to  later  uses,  in  the  several  successive  editings  of  the  Psalter. 

§  16.  The  text  of  the  Psalter  shows  a  large  number  of  errors, 
just  such  as  o?ie  would  expect  from  its  transmission  through  the 
hands  of  many  different  editors  and  copyists.  There  are  essentially 
the  same  kinds  of  errors  and  subject  to  the  same  rules  and  principles 
of  classification  as  those  that  are  found  in  all  Literature. 

The  most  of  the  Pss.  were  composed  in  the  ancient  Hebrew 
script,  resembling  the  Samaritan  letters.  They  were  transliterated 
into  the  Egyptian  Aramaic  script,  and  finally  into  the  later  square 
Aramaic  letters.  In  each  of  these  scripts  errors  arose  from  mistakes 
as  to  similar  letters  both  in  form  and  in  sound ;  the  transposition 
of  letters  in  a  word  or  of  words  in  a  sentence ;  the  wrong  attach- 
ment of  letters  to  words,  or  of  words  to  sentences ;  the  trans- 
position of  clauses ;  and  conjectures  in  the  case  of  defective  or 
illegible  Mss. 

(1)  There  is  a  large  number  of  mistakes  of  letters.  A  list  of  these  is  given 
in  Or.  {Com.  on  Pss.,  Vol.  I.  128  sq.);  cf.  Baumgartner  (£tude  Critique 
sur  Vetat  du  texte  du  livre  des  Proverbes,  2'j'j  sq.).  The  following  speci- 
mens of  a  very  large  number  may  suffice:  126  r\w,  <&,  J5,  2,  j?dn.  146  Dnn 
=  536  DXD.      l64  D.-PrDj;    <S  WilO}.      l8n  NT  =  2  S.  22u  K"V.     287  nVDj    <&,  &, 


Ui  INTRO  DUCriON 

nva.  292  n*nn;  ©  msn.  308  nvi;  (5  mn.  4016  hjb*  =  704  )2V\  42s  d-hn; 
6  dtw.  405  oom;  (5  D^an.  6816  |*a;  <S,  &,  jm.  7121  aon;  <g,  3,  &,  a»n. 
905  dhd-it;  (5,  &,  onjnT.  9 113  W;  (5,  S,  3,  ^nr.  9711  jnr;  @,  3,  Sb,  m?. 
10910  rfflj   <S  W"U\      10911  rpr;   <S,  3,  B»p3\     10913  inn;   (5  ins. 

(2)  Transposition  of  letters  :  io°  jna  n"?  for  ©,  3,  jn  nS:j.  i  ic  ano;  2  >cno. 
1813  nay  =  2  S.  2218  nya.  1848  na"vi  =  2  S.  2248  -p-ci,  so  144'2.  25s  n^;  <&  h*. 
26s  pjro;  (5  djh.  4510  "^h;  @»  &»  ion;  3  inc.  4912  oanp;  <S,  &,  &,  onap. 
725  -px-P'1;   @  "jniw.     1046  WD3j    <J5  irrD. 

(3)  Letters  differently  connected :  4s  no^aS  maa  for  <g  ncS  3V  H33.  II1 
"lies  D3*Vi  nu,  Vrss.  -no*  1D3  in  HU.  85°  hSddS  taw"  Ski  for  <S  nS  D3S  o«»  n*o. 
1067  d^  S>'  for  ©  O'Sjj. 

(4)  Verses  differently  connected:    2231   ma* :  inS;    but  <S,  U,  Kiai  nnS. 

251  *Phn  I  KVH,  but  <S  ^nSM    NfrK.       426  n^N  :  VJD,  but  V.12  43s  \"ISN1   >JD. 

(5)  7^r*?  tf/v  many  examples  of  dittography :  io10  DnSS"  O'KaSn;  io14 
nnN  »3  finm;   327  \n  »ywn;   444  >j  after  r,  so  v.20. 

(6)  The  following  specimens  of  haplography  may  be  given  :  38°  ^m  (n)ol,j 
422  n>'P  (n)?*N3;   2822  *?*  (,1?n);  454  "p>  for  rp-p  required  for  assonance. 

(7)  Displacements :  518  fl«3  displaced  from  lonp  "pr,  making  a  confusion 
of  similes. 

(8)  Conflation  by  error :  328  pi  nxo  for  piso  confused  with  nWD  ;  44s 
T*  nn*»  but  nnH  not  in  ©,  <£ ;   2713  nSiS,  <g  only  n. 

(9)  Compression  by  omission:  39  nwS  for  mrv  "|St  needed  for  measure; 
42  1x3  for  h  -\?2,  needed  for  measure  ;  73  pnb  for  pic  ps  <S,  J5,  required 
for  measure ;  143  ~*D  =  jd  534  for  jd  nD,  both  needed  for  measure  ;  195  en  for 
oSn  @,  3,  2  ;  23s  H?a«n  for  »l?ari  <S,  2,  for  »nae«l  3,  S,  C  required  by  con- 
text ;  2410  P)N3X  mni  for  niN3X  vV?K  nw,  required  for  measure,  so  46s- 12; 
28s  idS  for  >epS  <S,  io ;  392  morn  for  n:c«  <S,  U ;  45s  nwD<  for  nw  ^d"1  <S, 
Aq.,  2,  £>,  3,  required  for  measure. 

§  17.  A  very  large  proportion  of  the  changes  in  the  text  of  the 
Psalms  7cas  due  to  corrections  of  the  scribes  and  glossators,  who  for 
various  reasons  endeavoured  to  improve  the  text  to  make  it  more 
intelligible  and  useful. 

The  scribes  corrected  the  text  to  make  it  more  intelligible. 
The  older  writers  were  concise,  and  left  many  things  to  be  inferred 
by  the  attentive  reader.  In  the  unpointed  consonant  text  the 
words  were  not  distinctly  separated,  and  forms  were  written  as 
briefly  as  possible,  so  that  various  interpretations  were  possible. 
There  were  also  many  abbreviations  which  might  easily  have  been 
misunderstood. 

(A)  There  is  a  large  number  of  grammatical  glosses.  (1)  The  most  fre- 
quent change  was  the  addition  of  suffixes  to  the  noun  or  verb.     In  this  <S 


EDITORIAL  GLOSSES  liii 

and  f^  differ  so  frequently  that  it  is  improbable  that  they  used  different  texts. 
It  seems  evident  that  they  appended  different  suffixes  to  an  original  text, 
which  was  without  them.  The  article  in  Hebrew,  as  in  Greek,  often  expresses 
the  possessive,  and  in  poetry  the  article  is  frequently  omitted.  (2)  The 
variations  of  number  in  nouns  and  verbs  is  due  to  the  failure  to  distinguish 
numbers  in  the  originals  and  the  various  interpretations  of  the  scribes.  It  is 
probable  that  in  the  most  ancient  Hebrew  texts,  as  in  Syriac,  the  number 
of  nouns  and  verbs  was  not  always  distinguished.  (3)  The  same  form  is 
sometimes  interpreted  as  a  noun,  sometimes  as  a  verb,  which  was  quite  pos- 
sible when  only  the  consonants  of  the  form  were  written.  It  is  precisely  the 
same  in  unpointed  Syriac  texts.  (4)  In  ^  and  Vrss.  forms  are  interpreted 
differently,  as  pf.,  impf.,  or  ptc,  all  often  for  an  original  inf.  abs.  (5)  Prepo- 
sitions were  often  inserted  in  order  to  make  the  relation  of  nouns  and  verbs 
more  definite,  especially  after  the  older  case  distinctions  had  been  lost. 
(6)  Particles  were  inserted  to  make  the  connection  of  clauses  more  distinct, 
especially  the  relative  "Y&x  and  the  conjunctions  "o  and  \  (7)  The  divine 
names  were  inserted  very  often  in  order  to  make  it  evident  that  God  was  the 
subject  or  object  of  the  verb.  (8)  Personal  and  emphatic  pronouns  are  frequent 
additions  to  the  text.  (9)  Other  subjects  and  objects  were  also  inserted  in 
order  to  make  the  meaning  of  the  sentences  more  clear.  In  all  these  cases 
even  f£j  has  been  changed  from  a  simpler  original.  In  a  very  large  number 
of  instances  the  ancient  Vrss.,  especially  <S5  and  3,  are  more  correct  than 
ffi.  Modern  scholars  have  greatly  erred  in  a  too  exalted  estimate  of  the 
correctness  of  the  unpointed  Hebrew  text  in  this  regard.  The  measures 
make  it  evident  that  even  $?,  by  its  numerous  additions  and  changes  of 
the  original,  is  as  truly  an  interpretation  of  an  older  text  as  ©  and  other 
ancient  Vrss. 

(B)  The  glossators  are  responsible  for  many  changes  in  the  text.  The  earliest 
and  simplest  glosses  are  those  originally  put  on  the  margins  of  Mss.,  which  sub- 
sequently crept  into  the  text.  (1)  These  were  often  explanations  of  rare  and 
obsolete  words  by  more  familiar  ones.  In  this  way  doublets  arose  which  are 
easily  detected,  especially  when  they  make  the  line  overfull.  These  sometimes 
extend  to  phrases,  sentences,  and  even  lines.  (2)  There  are  many  ejacula- 
tions of  prayer,  or  praise,  or  pious  exclamation  on  the  part  of  devout  scribes, 
which  were  proper  on  the  margin,  but  make  confusion  with  measure  and 
sense  in  the  text  itself.  Many  imprecations  maybe  thus  explained.  (3)  There 
are  many  minor  glosses  due  to  the  desire  of  the  scribes  to  make  the  expres- 
sions stronger  or  clearer,  and  so  they  enlarge  upon  the  original,  intensify  it, 
and  elaborate  it.  (4)  There  are  many  Qrs.  of  the  divine  name  in  accordance 
with  the  uses  of  Elohim  and  Adonay  in  different  periods  for  an  original 
Yahweh ;  and  not  infrequently  both  readings  appear  as  a  conflation  of  the 
original  text.  (5)  Citations  of  older  Scriptures  were  made  to  illustrate  and 
strengthen  the  force  of  the  original.  Sometimes  these  were  originally  in  the 
margin  and  afterward  crept  into  the  text.  (6)  Some  of  these  glosses  were 
absent  from  <g  and  other  Vrss.,  and  sometimes  <g  and  other  Vrss.  have  similar 


liv  INTRODUCTION 

glosses  which  are  not  in  f^.     The  measures  and  strophical  organisation  give 
great  help  in  the  detection  of  all  such  glosses. 

(C)  By  far  the  larger  proportion  of  variations  between  |$  and  the  Vrss. 
consists  in  differences  of  interpretation  of  the  same  forms  in  the  unpointed 
text.  With  these  should  be  associated  the  variations  in  the  use  of  the  vowel 
letters  and  difference  of  interpretation  as  to  their  place  in  the  form.  It  is 
altogether  probable  that  vowel  letters  were  much  more  sparingly  used  in  the 
codd.  of  the  first  century  B.C.  than  in  |^.  26  'i?30£,  but  <&  'naojj  77  *Sh,  but 
<S  *V*»  914  n!Pi  but  Acl-»  $>  n?"J5  917  **&*»  but  ®»  Aq.,  J5,  C  0g*j;  921  htid, 
but  @,  &,  ?rV>D;  io8  Vvrr,  but  j(,  Aq.,  lVirr,  @,  j&,  Es  **v>;  12-  DWDK,  but  © 
D^DK;  147  njW»,but  53s  rtynr*;  18'26  -oj,  but  2  S.  22^  niaj;  224  Brtnp,  but 
<S,  3,  e>7.p;  2210  'woac,  but  ©,  3,  S,  'noar,  as  716;  27s  dw,  but  <@,  3,  D»*v; 
299  rwW,  but  niSn;  3111  ^>',  but  ©,  5,  »JF,  2  "jjr;  32*  ni6,  but  <S,  3,  S 
prep,  and  nr,  &  IB';  324  f*p,  but  @  fip;  32s  «Sp,  (5  »Vy;  36s2  JKP9,  <g  p»a. 
These  are  a  few  specimens  only  of  a  very  great  number  throughout  the 
Psalter. 

B.    HIGHER   CRITICISM   OF  THE   PSALTER. 

§  18.  Ancient  Jewish  opinion  regarded  David  as  the  editor  of  the 
Psalter  and  the  author  of  a  great  portion  of  the  Psalms,  so  that 
David  and  the  Psalter  were  essentially  synonymous  terms. 

In  a  Beraitha  of  the  tract  Baba  Bathra  of  the  Talmud,  the 
Psalter  is  placed  second  in  the  roll  of  Writings ;  and  it  is  said, 
"  David  wrote  the  Book  of  Psalms  with  the  aid  of  the  ten  ancients, 
with  the  aid  of  Adam  the  first,  Melchizedek,  Abraham,  Moses, 
Heman,  Jeduthun,  Asaph,  and  the  three  sons  of  Koran."  The 
writing  of  David  here  is  evidently  editorship,  and  the  Psalter  is 
represented  as  containing  Psalms  from  these  ten  worthies  as  well 
as  from  David.  This  statement  comes  from  the  second  century 
a.d.,  and  is  stereotyped  in  Jewish  tradition.  But  it  will  not  sustain 
the  test  of  criticism.  Moses'  name  is  in  the  title  of  Ps.  90;  He- 
man's  in  88  ;  those  of  Asaph  and  the  sons  of  Korah  in  groups  of 
Pss.  j  Jeduthun's  in  Pss.  39,  62,  77  ;  but  in  none  of  these  cases  can 
we  think  of  authorship  {v.  §§  28,  29,  34).  The  names  of  Adam 
and  Melchizedek  do  not  appear  in  the  titles,  but  Melchizedek's 
name  is  in  no4.  Adam's  name  was  possibly  thought  of  in  con- 
nection with  the  Ps.  of  creation,  104.  But  it  is  impossible  to 
think  of  either  of  them  as  authors  of  Pss.  Moreover,  as  will  soon 
appear,  no  Ps.  can  be  regarded  as  earlier  than  David,  and  few 
belong  to  his  time. 


REFERENCES  IN  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT  lv 

The  apocalypse  of  Ezra  represents  that  the  ancient  Psalter  was  destroyed 
with  the  other  Writings  and  restored  by  Ezra,  but  that  does  not  affect  the 
question  of  original  authorship.  Josephus  says  that,  "  David,  being  freed 
from  wars  and  dangers  and  enjoying  a  profound  peace,  composed  songs  and 
hymns  to  God  of  various  sorts  of  meter.  Some  of  those  which  he  made  were 
trimeters  and  some  pentameters."  David  here  stands  essentially  for  the 
Psalter.  This  statement  is  not  inconsistent  with  the  Jewish  tradition  already 
given  that  David  was  aided  by  others  in  the  composition  of  Pss.,  for  it  is  a 
general  and  comprehensive  statement. 

§  19.  In  the  New  Testament  David  is  used  as  the  equivalent 
of  the  Psalter,  and  as  such  personified  in  the  references  to  particular 
Psalms.     Questions  were  not  raised  as  to  authorship  or  editorship. 

The  Psalter  is  referred  to  as  the  Psalms,  Lk.  2444,  the  Book  of 
Psalms,  Lk.  2042,  Acts  i20,  and  David,  Heb.  4/.  The  latter  passage 
cites  from  Ps.  95,  which  has  no  title.  There  are  in  the  NT.  many 
citations,  direct  or  indirect,  from  the  Psalter.  Six  are  cited  under 
the  name  of  David,  2,  16,  32,  69,  109,  no,  and  these  simply  use 
the  name  as  a  common  designation  which  amounts  to  nothing 
more  than  "  the  Psalter  "  itself.  Only  one  of  these  Pss.  could  by 
any  possibility  have  come  from  the  time  of  David,  and  that  is 
altogether  improbable. 

Ps.  21-2  is  cited  in  Acts  4C5-2~  as  by  "the  mouth  of  our  father  David";  but  27 
is  cited,  Acts  13s3  as  "  in  the  second  Ps.,"  and  in  Heb.  I5  55  as  a  word  of  God. 
Ps.  i68_n  is  cited  in  Acts  225~28  as  "David  saith  "  ;  but  16106  in  Acts  1335  as 
"in  another  (Ps.)."  Ps.  321-2  is  cited  in  Rom.  47-8  as  David's  blessing. 
Ps.  69'2?"24  is  cited  in  Rom.  u9"10  as  "David  saith"  ;  but  695  in  Jn.  1525  as 
"written  in  their  Law";  6910a  in  Jn.  217  as  "it  was  written";  69106  in 
Rom.  153  as  "  it  is  written"  ;  69s2  in  Jn.  19^-29  as  "that  the  scripture  might 
be  accomplished";  69'2'3  in  Acts  i2)  as  "written  in  the  Book  of  Psalms," 
though  doubtless  included  under  the  general  statement  Acts  i16"by  the 
mouth  of  David."  The  same  is  true  of  1098  cited  in  the  same  passage. 
Ps.  no1  is  cited  by  our  Lord  as  "  David  himself  said  in  the  Holy  Spirit," 
Mk.  1236.  Cf.  Mt.  2243"44;  but  Lk.  2042-43  as  "David  himself  saith  in  the 
Book  of  Psalms";  and  so  Acts  234~36  "(David)  saith  himself";  and  in 
Heb.  i13  as  God's  words.  Jesus  and  Peter  were  arguing  with  the  Pharisees 
in  the  Halacha  method  on  the  basis  of  received  opinion.  There  were  no  good 
reasons  why  Jesus  and  his  apostles  should  depart  from  these  opinions,  even  if 
they  did  not  share  them.  There  was  no  reason  why  Jesus  as  a  teacher  should 
have  come  to  any  other  opinion  on  this  subject  than  his  contemporaries  held. 
This  was  not  a  matter  in  which  his  divine  knowledge  would  have  influenced 


lvi  INTRODUCTION 

his  human  training.  He  was  doubtless  not  informed  as  to  matters  of  criticism 
which  did  not  confront  him  in  his  day.  We  cannot,  therefore,  regard  this 
single  statement  of  Jesus  as  decisive  of  the  authorship  of  Ps.  1 10  {v.  Br.  He«-  »• 
Gore,  Lux  Afundi,  360).  The  other  citations  (a  table  of  which  is  given  by 
Kirk.  vol.  III.  838  sq.)  will  be  considered  in  connection  with  the  History  of 
the  Interpretation  of  the  Psalter  ;   v.  §  47. 

§  20.  There  zvas  no  consensus  of  the  Fathers,  and  there  was  no 
decision  of  the  Church,  as  to  questions  of  the  Higher  Criticism  of 
the  Psalter,  although  the  common  traditional  opinion,  in  the  ancient 
and  medieval  Church,  was  that  David  was  its  author. 

Jerome  (Ep.  140  ad  Cyprianum)  held  that  Moses  wrote  besides 
Ps.  90  also  91-100,  on  the  theory  that  anonymous  Pss.  are  to  be 
attributed  to  the  author  last  nanred.  In  this  he  follows  Jewish 
opinion  that  the  Psalter  was  edited  as  well  as  written  by  David. 
Augustine  (Be  Civitate  Dei  1714)  held  that  the  more  credible 
opinion  was  that  David  was  the  author  of  the  Psalter.  Theodore 
of  Mopsuestia  explains  seventeen  Pss.  as  referring  to  the  Macca- 
bean  age,  but  he  seems  to  suppose  that  they  were  written  by  David 
in  the  spirit  of  prophecy. 

§  21.  Calvin  among  the  Refonners  regarded  Ezra  as  the  editor 
of  the  Psalter,  and  in  this  was  followed  by  Du  Pin  and  others  ; 
but  the  prevailing  opinion  until  the  eighteenth  centujy  was  that 
David  wrote  the  entire  Psalter. 

Calvin  held  that  Ezra  or  some  one  else  edited  the  Psalter,  and 
made  the  first  Ps.  an  introduction  to  the  collection.  Andrew 
Rivetus  says  :  "  This  only  is  to  be  held  as  certain,  whether  Moses 
or  David  or  any  other  composed  the  Psalms,  they  themselves  were 
as  pens,  but  the  Holy  Spirit  wrote  through  them  "  (prolog,  to  his 
Com.  on  the  Psalms).  Casaubon  says,  "  The  truth  is  they  are  not 
all  David's  Psalms,  some  having  been  made  before  and  some  long 
after  him,  as  shall  be  shown  in  due  place  "  (preface  to  Com.  on 
Psalms).  Du  Pin  said,  "  Though  the  Psalms  are  commonly  called 
the  Psalms  of  David,  or  rather  the  Book  of  the  Psalms  of  David, 
yet  'tis  certain,  as  St.  Jerome  has  observed  in  many  places,  that 
they  are  not  all  of  'em  his,  and  that  there  are  some  written  long 
after  his  death.  'Tis  therefore  a  collection  of  songs  that  was  made 
by  Ezra  "  (Dissert.  Prelim.  Bib.  des  Auteurs  eccl.  1696,  pp.  1-5). 
These  represent  Protestant  and  Roman  Catholic  opinions,  freely 


CRITICAL  THEORIES  lvii 

expressed  without  censure,  against  the  still  prevailing  traditional 
opinion  that  David  was  the  author  of  all  the  Psalms  {v.  Br/HS-262). 

§  22.  With  the  rise  of  the  Higher  Criticism,  the  traditio7ial 
opinion  as  to  the  Davidic  authorship  of  the  Psalter  was  questioned, 
and  soon  abandoned  by  all  critics.  At  first  editorship  by  Ezra  and 
the  Davidic  authorship  of  only  those  Psalms  which  have  David  in 
their  titles  was  proposed ;  but  subsequently  ijiternal  evidence  showed 
this  to  be  impossible,  so  that  critical  opinion  gradually  came  to  the 
result  that  the  final  editorship  of  the  Psalter  could  not  have  been 
earlier  than  the  Maccabean  period,  and  that  David  wrote  few,  if 
any,  of  the  Psalms,  the  most  of  them  being postexilic. 

After  the  Davidic  authorship  of  the  entire  Psalter  had  been 
generally  abandoned,  an  effort  was  made  to  rally  about  the  Davidic 
authorship  of  those  Pss.  which  have  TTI7  in  their  title,  on  the 
theory  that  the  7  is  ?  of  ascription  to  an  author.  But  this  position 
could  not  be  maintained ;  for  a  constantly  increasing  number  of 
scholars,  such  as  Eichhorn,  Ros.,  Bauer,  Jahn,  De  W.,  al.,  recognised 
many  of  these  Pss.  as  later  than  David.  Horsley  says,  "  The  mis- 
application of  the  Psalms  to  the  literal  David  has  done  more  mis- 
chief than  the  misapplication  of  any  other  part  of  the  Scriptures, 
among  those  who  profess  the  Christian  religion  "  {Book  of  Psalms, 
Vol.  L,  Pref.  14).  Ewald  recognised  11  Pss.  of  David,  besides  a 
few  fragments  taken  up  into  later  Pss. ;  Hi.  found  14,  Schultz 
36,  De.  44.  After  De.  had  abandoned  the  Davidic  authorship  of 
30  of  the  74,  and  Schultz  38  of  them,  it  was  no  longer  possible  to 
urge  Davidic  authorship  from  the  titles,  and  scholars  had  to  depend 
on  internal  evidence  alone.  Many  recent  critics  refuse  to  recog- 
nise a  single  Psalm  as  written  by  David ;  so  Gr.,  Ku.,  Reu.,  Stade, 
Che.,  Du. ;  and  the  most  of  them  no  preexilic  Pss.  But  other 
critics,  such  as  Ba\,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  rightly  refuse  this  extreme  position, 
and  still  think  of  preexilic  and  even  Davidic  Psalms. 

§  23.  The  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Psalter  depends  chiefly  upon 
the  internal  evidence  of  the  Psalms  themselves.  The  titles  are  valu- 
able for  traces  of  the  history  of  their  use  ;  but  their  contents,  their 
interrelation,  and  their  relation  to  other  writings  of  the  OT,  give 
the  only  reliable  evidence  as  to  their  origin  a?id  transmission. 

The  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Psalter  has  made  it  evident  that 
there  is  no  dependence  to  be  placed  upon  any  of  the  traditional 


lviii  INTRODUCTION 

theories ;  for  it  is  manifest  that  they  were  all  conjectural,  and  rested 
upon  insufficient  evidence.  We  are  thrown  back  first  upon  the 
titles.  These  came  from  the  hands  of  editors,  and  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a  few  words,  were  not  attached  to  the  original  Pss.  They 
therefore  give  evidence  of  the  different  stages  in  the  editing  and 
use  of  the  Pss. ;  and  not  of  the  authorship,  date,  or  character  of 
the  originals.  For  these  questions  we  must  depend  on  a  few 
external  evidences  of  citation  and  silence,  but  for  the  most  part 
on  internal  evidence  alone  :  the  poetic  form  and  spirit,  the  subject 
matter  in  its  relation  to  the  development  of  religion,  faith,  and 
morals,  the  slight  traces  of  historic  circumstances  and  conditions, 
citations  from  earlier  writings,  the  use  of  words  and  phrases  in 
their  relation  to  the  development  of  the  Hebrew  language  and 
literature,  and  other  like  evidences  used  in  the  Higher  Criticism 
of  all  literature  (v.  Br.8HS-Wi*). 

The  Pss.  are  divided  into  two  great  classes,  those  with  titles  and  those 
without.  The  latter  are  usually  designated  as  "  orphans."  The  titles  cer- 
tainly came  from  the  hands  of  editors.  There  are  a  few  instances  in  which 
parts  of  the  titles  may  have  been  attached  to  the  original  Pss.,  but  these  are 
comparatively  unimportant.  The  titles  represent  several  stages  of  editing. 
This  process  still  continued  in  <@  and  j§  after  the  Hebrew  text  became  stereo- 
typed. These  Vrss.  do  not  hesitate  to  make  conjectural  additions  to  the 
titles,  and  even,  in  some  cases,  to  make  substitutions.  The  neglect  into 
which  the  titles  fell,  soon  after  their  traditional  interpretation  was  abandoned, 
was  really  discreditable  to  Criticism  ;  for  they  give  the  opinion  and  show  the 
methods  of  a  number  of  different  editors.  They  are,  as  it  were,  the  prints  of 
their  fingers,  which  give  important  evidence  as  to  the  condition  and  use  of  the 
Pss.,  at  several  different  periods.  Much  work  has  been  given  to  the  subject 
in  more  recent  times.  The  views  which  I  shall  present  are  based  chiefly 
on  my  own  private  study  during  the  past  forty  years.  I  cannot  agree  with 
my  friend  Cheyne  in  his  opinion  that  the  titles  are  chiefly  corruptions  of 
original  local  and  personal  references  which  he  restores  by  purely  specu- 
lative criticism.  Undoubtedly  we  must  resort  to  speculative  criticism  when 
all  other  means  fail  us,  but  there  is  no  such  necessity  as  regards  the  titles 
of  the  Pss.  All  the  evidences  used  in  the  Higher  Criticism  come  into  play 
in  the  investigation  of  the  Pss.  There  are  many  citations  in  the  NT.  and 
other  later  literature,  but  there  are  few  citations  in  the  OT.  books  themselves, 
or  in  the  Apocrypha  or  Pseudepigrapha.  So  far  as  those  in  the  Apocrypha 
or  Pseudepigrapha  are  concerned,  they  give  no  help  back  of  the  Maccabean 
period.  The  argument  from  silence  has  little  part  in  the  study  of  the  Psalter, 
because  of  the  special  lyric  character  and  the  limited  extent  of  the  Pss.    Very 


ANCIENT   SONGS  lix 

great  importance  must  be  attached  to  the  study  of  words  and  phrases.  These 
give  evidence  of  relative  position  in  the  development  of  the  Hebrew  language 
and  literature.  We  have  to  take  account  of  the  archaic  character  of  poetic 
composition ;  but  with  due  allowance  for  this  feature,  great  help  has  been 
found  in  this  study.  I  have  made  a  lexicon  of  the  Psalter,  giving  every  word 
and  every  use  of  every  word,  and  comparing  these  with  the  uses  of  other  OT. 
literature.  This  has  cost  me  an  immense  labour  for  some  years,  but  has 
amply  repaid  me  by  the  fresh  light  cast  upon  the  Pss.  The  study  of  Biblical 
Theology  in  its  historical  development,  to  which  I  have  given  many  years  of 
labour  and  teaching,  has  also  aided  in  the  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Psalter. 
There  are  comparatively  few  historical  traces,  but  these,  though  often  obscure, 
have  sometimes  been  found  illuminating. 

§  24.  The  earliest  term  to  appear  in  the  titles  was  doubtless 
"  Song"  which,  in  some  cases  at  least,  was  attached  to  the  originals. 
It  indicated  a  lyric  poem  used  for  singing,  especially  on  joyous  occa- 
sions ;  in  later  times  especially  in  religious  worship  of  praise,  and 
by  the  Levitical  choirs. 

Ps.  181  (=2  S.  221)  has  in  the  title,  f  ITVttf  n.f.,  a  song,  espe- 
cially an  ode,  as  that  of  the  crossing  of  the  Red  Sea,  Ex.  151;  the 
Song  of  the  Fountain,  Nu.  2 117 ;  the  Song  of  Moses,  Ut.  3 119- 19  2L  22- » 
3244 ;  the  Song  of  the  Vineyard,  Is.  51 ;  love  songs  accompanied  by 
a  lyre,  Is.  2315.  This  ancient  term,  not  used  after  the  time  of  Heze- 
kiah,  was  in  all  probability  attached  to  this  earliest  of  the  Pss. 

\  "vc;  n.  i?i.  song :  (1)  of  a  lyric  character,  distinguished  from  bun  I  K.  512, 
antith.  to  nyp  Am.  810,  sung  on  joyous  occasions  Gn.  3i27+;  of  love  songs 
Ps.  451  n-p-p  "pit,  cf.  Ct.  i1  title  ;  not  suited  to  sorrow  Ps.  1373  ;  (2)  of  a 
religious  type  used  in  worship  of  God  :  ||  nSon  42s  ;  usually  of  praise  "veto  ^Sn 
698I;  -yiPD  mm  287,  cf.  Ne.  1246;  nw  'v  Ps.  1374,  cf.  2  Ch.  2a/27 ;  pw  'V 
Ps.  1373;  Bhn  'V  333  404  961  981  1449  1491,  cf.  Is.  4210  (indicating  a  fresh 
outburst  of  song)  ;  so  in  titles  of  Pss.  :  "vtf  461 ;  rrrVynn  ne  pilgrim  songs  in 
titles  of  120-134  ;  -iidtd  'tf  481  661  831  881  1081 ;  -ptf  1TOTD  301  651  671  681 
751  761  871  921 ;  'tf  S'ofc'D  451  v.  supr.  sub  (1).  In  all  these  cases  except  301 
921  1081  other  terms  are  added  to  an  original  "va*  (v.  Br.JBL-  xvin.  138) 

Ps.  301  has  nun  rojn  "V3>  song  for  the  dedication  of  the  house  or  temple  ; 
Ps.  921  navn  z\h  "\*>v  song  for  the  Sabbath  day.  These  indicate  liturgical 
uses,  and  must  have  come  from  editors  and  not  from  authors.  Ps.  108  is  a 
late  composite  Ps.,  and  -v:r  in  the  title  may  have  come  from  the  title  of  the 
original,  v.  8~14  =  6o8"14,  which  is  an  early  song  of  triumph.  The  character  of 
8^,  88  does  not  seem  to  suit  the  term,  for  the  former  is  essentially  an  impre- 
cation upon  enemies  of  the  time  of  Nehemiah,  the  latter  a  lament  of  the  early 
exile.     At  the  same  time  these  terms  seem  to  be  original  to  the   Pss.  and 


lx  INTRODUCTION 

probably  imply  a  more  comprehensive  meaning  for  W,  such  as  is  certainly 
found  in  the  nV?;'-'"1  "V*%  Pss.  120-134,  a  collection  of  Pss.  of  great  variety, 
hymns,  prayers,  and  didactic  Pss. ;  a  little  social  song  book  for  pilgrims  to  the 
great  feasts  (v.  §  36).  (3  also  uses  yb-fi  for  "vs>  in  Pss.  91,  93,  95,  96,  for 
reasons  difficult  to  discover,  for,  while  it  is  appropriate  enough  in  93,  95,  96, 
it  seems  not  appropriate  to  39,  91. 

§  25.  Miktam  hi  the  titles  of  seven  Psalms  indicates  that  they 
7vere  tahen  from  an  early  collection  of  choice  pieces,  made  in  the 
middle  Persian  period. 

Pss.  56-60  have  Miktam  in  their  titles,  so  also  Ps.  16.  To  these 
must  be  added  Is.  389_:20.  There  were  probably  other  pieces  which 
have  been  lost  because  they  were  not  used  by  the  editors  of  the 
early  Psalters.  These  all  bear  on  their  faces  evidences  of 
antiquity.  None  of  them  were  composed  later  than  the  early 
Persian  period. 

The  most  of  the  Rabbis  rightly  interpret  DD3D,  as  formed  by  prefix  d  from 
the  noun  DPS  gold,  and  thus  think  of  golden  piece,  in  accordance  with  the 
ancient  custom  to  name  select  poems,  gems,  jewels,  choice  pieces,  and  the 
like.  This  indeed  indicates  their  character,  for  they  are  artistic  in  form  and 
choice  in  their  contents.  Pss.  56,  57,  59,  60,  are  trimeters;  16,  58,  are  tetram- 
eters. Is.  389"20  is  a  pentameter.  56,  57,  58,  59,  have  refrains,  catch  words, 
and  other  ornaments  of  style.  They  all  have  rare  words,  strange  combina- 
tions, and  a  vigorous  roughness  of  style,  and  express  strong  emotions.  They 
resemble  in  this  respect  the  preexilic  prophets,  and  are  among  the  most 
ancient  of  the  Pss.  Ps.  60°  belongs  to  the  early  monarchy;  58,  Is.  389-20,  to 
the  middle  monarchy;  56  to  the  late  monarchy;  16,  57",  59,  to  the  early 
Persian  period.  Five  have  editorial  assignments:  56,  57,  59,  60,  to  circum- 
stances of  David's  career  ;  Is.  389~2:i  of  Hezekiah's.  The  3nos  of  Is.  38°  is 
probably  an  error  for  DH3D.  Pss.  16,  56-60,  were  taken  up  into  TB,  the  earliest 
Psalter  (v.  §  27)  ;  Pss.  56-60  were  also  used  in  12  and  Q&  (v.  §§  36,  37), 
but  16  was  not  included  in  these  Psalters.  This  doubtless  explains  the  sepa- 
ration of  16  from  the  group.  (3  interprets  DroD  as  arrfKoypa^la,  inscription 
on  a  tablet,  tituli  inscriptio,  V ;  so  &  as  if  it  were  arOD.  De.  suggests  on 
this  basis,  a  memorial  or  catchword  poem.  Ps.  60  has  also  no^1?  after  "in?. 
This  was  evidently  ancient,  and,  standing  by  itself,  is  meaningless.  It  probably 
has  the  same  meaning  as  in  the  title  of  the  Lament  of  David  over  Jonathan, 
2  S.  i18,  and  probably  was  originally  with  it  and  others  of  the  same  kind  in 
the  Book  of  Yashar. 

§  26.  Maskil,  in  the  titles  of  thirteen  Psalms,  indicates  a  collectio?i 
of  meditations  made  in  the  late  Persian  period. 


THE   MASKILIM  lxi 

Pss.  32,  42-45,  52-55,  74,  78,  88,  89,  142,  have  Maskil  in  their 
titles.  These  were  separated  because  of  the  selections  made  by 
the  editors  of  the  several  minor  and  major  Psalters.  None  of 
them,  in  their  original  forms,  were  composed  later  than  the  Persian 
period,  and  therefore  they  were  probably  collected  not  later  than 
the  late  Persian  period. 

b^yc'TZ  was  formed  by  the  prefix  0  from  Safer  in  the  Hiph.  consider,  contem- 
plate, and  is,  therefore,  probably  a  meditation,  meditative  poem,  so  De.  "pious 
meditation,"  cf.  Ps.  47s  SwD  IDT.  So  essentially  <3  aw4(reus  or  els  cvveaiv; 
TiJ  intellectus,  or  ad  intellectum  ;  3  eruditio.  This  suits  the  character  of  these 
Pss.  essentially ;  so  Ges.,  De  W.,  Hi.,  regard  them  as  poems  to  enforce  piety 
and  wisdom.  ^SPD  is  defined  by  Ew.  as  a  song  with  cheerful  music  to  be 
accompanied  with  clear-sounding  cymbals,  and  in  this  is  followed  by  many 
moderns  ;  so  Kirk.  "  a  cunning  Psalm  "  ;  but  this  does  not  suit  the  internal 
character  of  many  of  these  Pss.  These  Pss.  were  all  comparatively  early  in 
their  original  forms:  45  middle  monarchy;  52,  54,  55,  late  monarchy;  42- 
43,  74,  88,  89°,  142,  exile ;  32,  53,  78,  early  Persian  period ;  44  late  Persian. 
Pss.  32,  52-55,  142,  were  taken  up  into  13  ;  42-45  into  H£;  74,  78,  into  %.  Of 
these,  42-45,  52-55,  were  also  in  H32&,  and  these  with  74-78  in  3S.  Moreover, 
these  two  pseudonyms  are  Maskilim ;  88  of  Heman,  which  was  also  in  ©3ft, 
and  89"  of  Ethan,  which  was  not  in  any  of  the  minor  Psalters.  None  of 
these  Pss.  are  orphans.  It  is  quite  probable  that  there  were  other  Pss.  in  the 
original  collection,  which  have  been  lost. 

§  27.  David  in  the  titles  of  seventy-four  Psabjis  indicates,  not 
authorship,  but,  with  few  exceptions,  the  first  of  the  minor  Psalters, 
gathered  under  the  name  of  David  in  the  late  Persia?i  period,  from 
which  these  Psalms  were  take?i  by  later  editors  of  the  major  Psalters. 

1.  It  is  evident  from  the  internal  character  of  these  Pss.,  with 
a  few  possible  exceptions,  that  David  could  not  have  written  them. 
It  is  improbable  that  the  word  David  was  designed  by  the  early 
editors  to  indicate  their  opinion  that  these  Psalms  were  Davidic  in 
authorship.  The  v  is  not  the  7  of  authorship,  as  has  generally 
been  supposed.  The  earliest  collection  of  Pss.  for  use  in  the  syna- 
gogue was  made  under  the  name  of  David,  the  traditional  father 
of  religious  poetry  and  of  the  temple  worship.  The  later  editors 
left  this  name  in  the  titles,  with  the  preposition  ?  attached,  to 
indicate  that  these  Psalms  belonged  to  that  collection.  This 
explains  all  the  facts  of  the  case  and  the  position  of  these  Pss.  in 
the  Psalter.     This  view  is  confirmed  by  Ps.  7220,  which  states  that 


Ixii  INTRODUCTION 

this  Ps.  was  the  conclusion  of  the  prayers  of  David,  and  implies 
that  the  collection  was  a  prayer-book.  This  statement  is  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  contents  of  these  Psalms,  for  they  are  for  the 
most  part  prayers.  Some  of  the  Pss.  with  David  in  the  titles  could 
not,  however,  have  been  in  the  Davidic  Prayer-book.  Pss.  86, 
103,  108,  122,  124,  131,  133,  145,  all  belong  to  the  Greek  period. 
David  was  for  various  reasons  inserted  in  the  titles  by  later 
editors.  Still  later  editors  continued  to  attach  David's  name  to 
other  Pss.  in  (3,  <£,  and  @L  All  the  other  Pss.  which  bear  the 
name  of  David  were  composed,  in  their  original  form,  with  a  single 
exception,  not  later  than  the  middle  Persian  period.  Ps.  68  seems 
to  belong  to  the  late  Persian  period,  to  which,  therefore,  we  may 
assign  the  final  collection  of  the  Davidic  Psalter  (Q).  Thirteen 
of  these  Pss.  have  in  their  titles  references  to  incidents  in  the  life 
of  David.  It  seems  probable  that  they  were  an  original  collection 
by  themselves,  which  the  editor  of  13  used  as  his  nucleus. 

The  Pss.  with  -rnS  are  the  following  :  3-9,  11-32,  34-41,  51-65,  68-70,  86, 
101,  103,  108-110,  122,  124,  131,  133,  138-145.  To  these  we  must  add  10, 
whose  title  does  not  appear  because  it  was  really,  as  in  ©,  the  conclusion  of  9. 
<S  also  gives  David  in  the  titles  of  ^2>  43»  67,  71,  91,  93~99,  104,  137,  fourteen 
others  ;  but  43  is  a  part  of  42  of  It ;  93,  96-99  are  parts  of  the  royal  Advent 
Ps. ;  104  is  part  of  the  group  104-107;  137  is  a  Ps.  of  the  captivity  not 
suited  to  a  prayer-book,  asQ;  71  is  dependent  on  earlier  Pss.  of  Q  ;  ^  was 
given  the  title  as  in  the  midst  of  Pss.  of  ©.  It  is  improbable  that  this  would 
have  been  omitted  in  |^  if  genuine.  67,  91,  94,  95,  have  no  claim  to  have  been 
in  Q.  These  insertions  of  <S  are  all  conjectures  of  later  editors.  But  such 
conjectures  appear  also  in  |t?.  The  four  pilgrim  Pss.  122,  124,  131,  133,  could 
not  have  been  in  3.  David  came  into  the  title  of  145  from  its  connection 
with  the  group  138-144.  Ps.  108  is  composite  of  earlier  Pss.  of  Q  ;  86,  103, 
received  David  into  the  titles  because  of  resemblance  and  use  of  Pss.  of  Q. 
None  of  these  Pss.  is  earlier  than  the  Greek  period.  All  the  other  Pss.  with 
David  in  the  titles  in  |^  were  probably  in  Q  ;  and  it  may  be  that  other  Pss. 
were  therein  which  have  been  lost,  or  placed  ultimately  elsewhere  in  the  OT. 
Ps.  72,  in  its  original  form,  was  at  the  conclusion  of  the  Davidic  prayer-book, 
as  sufficiently  indicated  by  the  subscription  v.20.  It  is  also  probable  that  Ps.  2 
was  its  introduction,  as  is  most  suitable  on  account  of  its  reference  to  the 
Davidic  covenant.  If  now  we  remove  the  duplicate  53  (=  14),  there  are 
68  Pss.  which  we  may  regard  as  in  Q.  These  Pss.  have  been  disturbed  from 
their  original  order  by  the  selections  from  them  made  by  later  editors.  Among 
the  Mizmorim  appear  :  3-6,  8-10,  12-13,  15,  19-24,  29-31,  38-41,  51,  62-65, 
68,  101,  109-110,  139-141,  143.     For  OK  were  selected:  4-6,  8-14,  18-22, 


PSALTER   OF   DAVID  lxiii 

31*  36,  39-4 1 1  5!-52>  54-62,  64-65,  68-70,  109,  139-140.    In  E  were  selected 
51-65,  68-70,  72. 

(2)  Thirteen  Pss.  of  IB  have  in  their  titles  references  to  certain  incidents 
in  the  life  of  David.  These  statements  all  depend  upon  the  narratives  of 
Samuel,  and  were  subsequent  to  the  Deuteronomic  redaction  of  the  prophetic 
histories  :  Ps.  3,  "  when  he  fled  from  Absalom  his  son,"  cf.  2  S.  15.  Ps.  7, 
"  which  he  sang  to  Yahweh  concerning  the  words  of  Cush  a  Benjamite,"  cf. 
2  S.  16.  Ps.  18,  "  in  the  day  that  Yahweh  delivered  him  from  the  hand  of  all 
his  enemies  and  from  the  hand  of  Saul,"  cf.  2  S.  221.  Ps.  34,  "when  he 
changed  his  behaviour  before  Abimelech  who  drove  him  away  and  he 
departed,"  cf.  1  S.  2i10scK  Ps.  51,  "when  Nathan  the  prophet  came  unto 
him  after  he  had  gone  in  to  Bathsheba,"  cf.  2  S.  12.  Ps.  52,  "when  Doeg  the 
Edomite  came  and  told  Saul,  and  said  unto  him,  David  is  come  to  the  house 
of  Abimelech,"  cf.  I  S.  229  8<K  Ps.  54,  "  when  the  Ziphites  came  and  said  to 
Saul,  Doth  not  David  hide  himself  with  us  ?  "  cf.  I  S.  2319  «J-  ||  261 8(i-.  Ps.  56, 
"when  the  Philistines  took  him  in  Gath,"  cf.  I  S.  27.  Ps.  57,  "when  he  fled 
from  Saul,  in  the  cave,"  cf.  I  S.  22.  Ps.  59,  "  when  Saul  sent,  and  they 
watched  the  house  to  kill  him,"  cf.  I  S.  19s-17.  Ps.  60,  "  when  he  strove  with 
Aram  Naharaim  and  with  Aram-zobah,  and  Joab  returned  and  smote  of  Edom 
(error  for  Aram)  in  the  Valley  of  Salt  twelve  thousand,"  cf.  2  S.  813  10. 
Ps.  63,  "  when  he  was  in  the  wilderness  of  Judah,"  I  S.  225  8<J-.  Ps.  142,  "  when 
he  was  in  the  cave,"  cf.  1  S.  24.  These  thirteen  Pss.  were  all  in  0,  but  only 
52,  54,  142,  are  Maskilim  ;  56,  57,  59,  60,  Miktamim  ;  3,  51,  63,  Mizmorim. 
Therefore  the  statements  can  have  nothing  to  do  with  these  collections. 
Furthermore  IE  uses  eight:  51,  52,  54,  56,  57,  59,  60,  63,  omitting  five  ;  02ft 
also  uses  eight :  18,  51,  52,  54,  56,  57,  59,  60,  omitting  five  ;  3,  7,  34,  142,  were 
used  by  neither.  Therefore  these  notices  could  not  have  come  from  these 
editors.  0  is  thus  the  only  collection  in  which  all  are  found,  and  therefore 
either  the  editor  of  0  must  have  been  responsible  for  them,  or  these  state- 
ments must  have  been  in  his  sources.  It  is  improbable  that  he  would  assign 
historical  occasions  to  only  thirteen  out  of  his  collection  of  sixty-eight.  We 
must  therefore  seek  them  in  his  sources.  But  it  is  evident  that  they  do  not 
belong  to  the  original  Pss.,  for  the  only  one  that  comes  from  the  time  of 
David  is  the  original  of  Ps.  18,  which  gets  its  title  from  2  S.  221.  2  S.  231 
gives  another  poem  which  is  attributed  to  David  in  the  same  way.  These 
titles  of  the  Pss.  came  from  an  editor  of  the  same  type  as  the  one  who  inserted 
these  poems  in  the  book  of  Samuel.  It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  these  thir- 
teen Pss.  constituted  a  little  collection  of  Davidic  Psalms.  The  editor  of  0 
used  them  just  as  he  found  them,  with  these  titles  as  the  nucleus  of  his  collec- 
tion. They  are  not,  however,  in  their  original  order,  if  designed  to  illustrate 
the  life  and  experience  of  David.  Their  order,  according  to  the  narratives  of 
Samuel,  would  be  rather:  59,  57,  63,  52,  54,  142,  56,  34,  6oa,  51,  3,  7,  18.  It 
is  quite  possible  that  2  S.  23ls<i-  was  originally  at  the  end,  and  the  lament  of 
David  over  Jonathan,  2  S.  i19"27,  in  the  middle  before  60,  making  fifteen  in 
all.     One  of  these,  Ps.  6oa,  was  probably  in  the  book  of  Yashar  as  well 


lxiv  INTRODUCTION 

as  2  S.  I19-27.  These  Pss.  originated  in  different  periods  and  in  different  circum- 
stances, such  as  accord  only  in  some  respects  with  these  titles.  Ps.  18  in  its 
original  form  was  probably  Davidic,  and  possibly  Pss.  7,  6oa.  Ps.  3  was  from 
the  middle  monarchy  ;  52,  54,  56,  the  late  monarchy ;  63,  142,  from  the 
exile;  34,  57°,  59,  the  early  Persian;  and  51  probably  from  the  time  of 
Nehemiah.  It  is  altogether  improbable,  therefore,  that  an  editor  of  the 
middle  Persian  period  could  have  thought  that  his  references  to  experiences 
of  David  were  historical.  He  made  them  to  illustrate  the  Pss.,  as  the  editor 
of  2  S.  22-23  used  the  Pss.  to  illustrate  the  close  of  David's  career  (cf.  the  use 
of  Pss.  in  1  Ch.  16).  It  is  noteworthy  that  not  long  before  the  Pseudonyms, 
Ps.  72,  88,  89,  appeared  {v.  §  34). 

(3)  We  may  determine  the  original  order  of  the  Pss.  in  Q  only  by  the  most 
careful  review  of  all  these  facts.  Ps.  72  was  originally  the  concluding  Ps.  of 
D  (v.20).  We  shall  have  to  suppose,  therefore,  that  101,  109-110,  138-144, 
were  removed  from  their  original  positions  before  72.  It  is  altogether  prob- 
able that  16  was,  in  Q,  still  connected  with  the  group  56-60.  The  groups  51- 
65,  68-70,  72,  selected  by  IE  from  Q,  are  not  in  their  original  places.  The 
Pss.  with  historical  references  3,  7,  18,  34,  51,  52,  54,  56,  57,  59,  60,  63,  142, 
were,  as  we  have  seen,  originally  in  the  same  group.  The  key  to  their  order 
is  doubtless  in  18,  originally  the  last  of  the  series.  It  is  probable  that  Q3& 
followed  the  original  order  for  the  most  part,  so  far  as  4-6,  8-14,  19-22,  31, 
36,  39-41,  are  concerned,  but  the  order  of  £  in  51-62,  64-65,  68-70.  That 
109,  139-140,  appear  so  late  must  be  due  to  a  still  later  editor.  The  order 
of  £ft  is  also  substantially  original:  3-6,  8-10,  12-13,  x5»  I9-24>  29~3l>  3&- 
41,51,62-65,68,  101,  109-110,  139-141,  143,  except  as  disturbed  by  later 
editors.  The  Pss.  with  nnS  alone,  17,  25-28,  34-35,  37,  138,  144,  which,  there- 
fore, did  not  appear  in  the  intermediate  Psalters,  and  those  used  by  Q&  only, 
n,  14,  36,  and  by  Q&  and  B  only,  61,  69-70,  are  probably  out  of  their 
original  order.  Inasmuch  as  70  was  attached  to  the  end  of  40,  it  is  probable 
that  the  original  order  of  Q  was  69,  40,  70.  The  following  may  therefore  be 
given  as  a  provisional  theory  of  the  original  order,  2,  4-6,  8-13,  14  (=  53), 
16,  17,  59,  63,  52,  57,  54,  142,  56,  34,  60,  51,  3,  7,  18  (30,  55,  58,  61-62,  64- 
65),  19-24  (15,  101),  25-28  (35,  37,  138-141,  143,  144),  29,  31-32,  36,  38,  39 
(68,  109,  no,  69,  40,  70),  41,  72. 

The  Pss.  of  Q,  in  their  original,  may  be  dated  as  follows:  (1)  The  early 
monarchy,  7,  13,  18,  23,  24*  60°  no.  (2)  The  middle  monarchy,  beginning 
with  Tehoshaphat,  3,  20,  21,  2ja  58,  61.  (3)  The  late  monarchy,  beginning 
with  Josiah,  19"  28,  36"  52,  54,  55,  56,  6o^  62,  72.  (4)  The  exile,  63,  142. 
(5)  The  early  Persian  period,  before  Nehemiah's  reforms,  4,  6,  9-10,  n,  12, 
14  (=  53).  16,  17,  22,  25,  31,  32,  34,  35,  37,  38,  39,  40^  (=  70),  41,  57°  59, 

64,  69°  101,  109"  140°  143,  144°.  (6)  Middle  Persian  period  of  internal 
and  external  peace  after  Nehemiah's  reforms,  5,  8,  15,  26,  29,  30,  406  51,  576 

65,  69^  138,  1396  141.  (7)  Late  Persian  period  of  strife  and  confusion,  68. 
It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  Q  was  edited  toward  the  close  of  the  Persian 
period,  in  Palestine,  for  use  in  the  synagogues.     To  these   Pss.  other  Pss. 


PSALTER  OF  THE   KORAHITES  lxv 

and  glosses  were  added  by  later  editors,  for  practical  purposes  in  public 
worship. 

§  28.  The  term  "  sons  of  Korah  "  in  the  titles  of  eleven  Psalms 
indicates  a  collection  of  religious  poems,  made  in  the  early  Greek 
period,  from  which  these  were  taken. 

Two  groups  of  Pss.,  42-49,  and  84,  85,  87,  88,  have  in  their 
titles  "  belonging  to  the  Sons  of  Korah."  The  separation  of  the  two 
groups  was  due  to  a  selection  of  the  former  group  by  an  editor, 
who  united  them  with  50-83.  The  other  group  was  appended  from 
the  original  collection  by  the  final  editor  of  the  Psalter.  These 
Pss.  have  common  features  which  are  not  sufficient  to  imply  the 
same  author  or  authors,  but  yet  imply  careful  selection.  These 
are  (1)  a  desire  to  engage  in  the  worship  of  the  sacred  places ; 
(2)  confidence  in  Yahweh,  the  king  enthroned  in  Jerusalem,  who 
watches  over  the  people  from  thence  and  saves  them  ;  (3)  a  highly 
artistic  finish  and  symmetrical  poetic  forms.  These  Pss.  were 
selected  from  a  collection  of  Pss.  gathered  under  the  name  of  the 
Sons  of  Korah,  in  Palestine,  in  the  early  Greek  period. 

nip  iJ3  is  doubtless  the  same  as  cmpn  ya,  2  Ch.  2019,  a  guild  of  temple 
singers  distinguished  from  DTinpn  >ja,  another  guild.  According  to  I  Ch. 
518  sq.  (33  sq.^  Heman,  a  Kohathite,  Asaph,  a  descendant  of  Gershom,  and 
Ethan,  of  the  sons  of  Merari,  represented  the  three  sons  of  Levi.  According 
to  1  Ch.  2619  the  doorkeepers  of  the  temple  were  Sons  of  Korah  and  Merari. 
Ezr.  241  Ne.  744  mention  only  sons  of  Asaph  as  singers.  According  to 
1  Ch.  67-  18s(J-  Heman  was  mp  p,  a  grandson  of  Kohath,  and  so  both  Kohathite 
and  Korahite.  The  term  "  Korahite  "  seems  to  have  been  substituted  for  "  Ko- 
hathite," and  Heman  was  the  representative  of  the  line,  as  Asaph  was  of  the 
line  of  Gershom.  Both  were  guilds  of  temple  singers  in  the  temple  of  the 
Restoration.  All  of  these  Pss.  except  48  and  87  were  taken  up  into  2B3£. 
These  have  the  title  nsjoS  at  the  beginning,  but  88  has  two  titles,  and  mjr1? 
is  at  the  beginning  of  the  second.  This  singularity  makes  it  probable  that 
the  first  title  was  a  later  addition,  due  to  the  conjecture  that,  inasmuch  as 
Heman  mentioned  in  the  second  title  was  the  chief  of  the  Korahites,  his  Ps. 
should  have  that  title  also.  Ps.  88  was  simply  a  Maskil  of  Heman,  as  89  was 
a  Maskil  of  Ethan.  Ps.  49  differs  so  much  in  character  from  the  other  Kora- 
hite Pss.  that  it  seems  probable  that  it  was  not  Griginally  with  that  collection, 
and  that  the  name  came  into  the  title  by  txt.  err.  or  editorial  conjecture, 
because  the  Ps.  was  attached  to  the  group  42-48,  immediately  before  50  of 
Asaph.  It  represents  an  early  type  of  WL.  Ps.  43  was  originally  the  third 
Str.  of  42,  as  is  evident  from  the  common  Rf.  and  from  internal  characteristics 


lxvi  INTRODUCTION 

which  are  common.  The  remaining  nine  Pss.  have  been  preserved  from  1st. 
We  are  unable  to  say  whether  It  had  more  of  them,  or  not.  The  group 
42-49  differs  from  the  group  84-85,  87-88,  by  the  use  of  the  divine  name 
Elohim  in  the  former  and  Yahweh  in  the  latter.  This  difference  was  not  in 
1st,  but  was  due  to  IE,  who  changed  Yahweh  into  Elohim.  I&  originally  used 
Yahweh  throughout.  These  Pss.  represent  different  periods  of  history :  45 
from  the  time  of  Jehu;  46,  87,  time  of  Josiah;  42-43,  84,  time  of  Jehoiachin; 
47,  middle  Persian  period  after  Nehemiah;  44,  48,  85,  late  Persian  period; 
42-43,  44,  45  were  taken  from  the  collection  of  o^3»c.  As  none  of  these  Pss. 
are  later  than  the  Persian  period,  and  so  many  are  late  in  that  period,  it  is 
probable  that  the  collection  was  made  early  in  the  Greek  period.  These  Pss. 
are  highly  artistic  in  form.  Five  of  them  have  Refrains:  42-43,  45,  46,  84, 
85;  three  are  trimeters,  44,  47,  85;  one  tetrameter,  46;  four  pentameters, 
42-43,  48,  84,  87,  and  one  varies  between  tetrameter  and  trimeter,  45.  They 
are  all  highly  poetic  in  content,  and  on  the  whole  the  choicest  collection  in 
the  Psalter  from  a  literary  point  of  view. 

§  29.  The  term  "  Asaph  "  in  the  titles  of  twelve  Psalms  indicates 
a  collection  of  religious  poems  made  in  Babylonia  in  the  early  Greek 
period,  fro?n  which  these  Psalms  were  derived. 

The  group  of  Pss.  73-83  and  the  detached  50  have  Asaph  in 
their  titles.  The  separation  of  50  from  the  group  was  due  to  a 
later  editor,  probably  in  order  to  make  an  appropriate  concluding 
Ps.  to  the  first  division  of  50.  These  Pss.  have  common  features  : 
( 1 )  vivid  descriptions  of  nature  ;  (2)  emphasis  of  divine  providence 
in  the  life  of  the  individual ;  (3)  use  of  history  with  a  didactic  pur- 
pose; (4)  exalted  spiritual  conceptions  of  God;  (5)  sublimity  of 
style.  These  features  are  not  sufficient  to  show  a  common  author 
or  guild  of  authors,  but  imply  careful  selection  by  an  editor  with 
a  plan  and  purpose  to  set  forth  those  features.  The  Pss.  were 
originally  in  a  collection  by  themselves,  made  in  the  early  Greek 
period,  probably  in  Babylonia. 

f|Dx  was  a  Levite,  the  son  of  Berechiah,  1  Ch.  624  W\  one  of  the  three  chiefs 
of  the  Levitical  choir,  1  Ch.  1517;  a  seer,  2  Ch.  2930;  associated  with  David 
Ne.  1246.  p|DN  ^3  are  mentioned  I  Ch.  251-2  as  set  apart  to  prophesy  with 
musical  instruments.  It  is  evident  that  this  Asaph  could  not  have  been  the 
author  of  the  collection,  or,  indeed,  of  any  of  its  Pss.,  for  they  are  all  of 
a  much  later  date.  "Asaph"  is  used  as  a  name  of  the  collection,  just  as 
"  David  "  and  "  Sons  of  Korah  "  of  the  other  collections.  Only  five  of  the 
twelve  Pss.  were  used  in  TB1&,  but  all  by  IE.  The  Pss.  of  <&  are  chiefly 
religious  poems,  in  which  the  didactic  element  prevails.     These  Pss.,  apart 


PSALTER   OF  ASAPH  Ixvii 

from  glosses,  were  composed  probably  as  follows:  74,  77"  79,  8ift  82,  during 
the  Exile ;  75,  76,  78,  80,  83,  in  the  early  Persian  period;  50  in  the  late  Per- 
sian; and  73  in  the  early  Greek  period.  We  may  therefore  assign  the  collec- 
tion to  the  early  Greek  period.  There  are  additions,  77^  and  8ia,  besides 
glosses  from  the  later  Greek  and  Maccabean  periods.  There  is  nothing  in 
the  originals  that  is  opposed  to  the  dates  given  above.  All  of  the  Pss.  of  % 
were  taken  up  into  25,  and  were  probably  used  as  the  basis  of  that  collection. 
The  divine  name  cnn^x  seems  to  have  been  original  to  %,  and  is  not  to  be 
ascribed  to  the  editor  of  IE.  This  was  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
collection  was  made  in  Babylonia,  where  the  use  of  that  divine  name  pre- 
vailed. In  this  21  agrees  with  P  of  the  Hexateuch,  which  came  from  the  same 
region.  Two  of  the  Pss.  of  %%  74,  78,  in  their  original  form  were  taken  from 
the  collection  of  D^3B>D.  These  Pss.  received  many  glosses,  and  in  these 
cases  d^h^n  seems  not  to  have  been  original. 

§  30.  The  other  proper  names  in  the  Psalter,  Solomon,  Ps.  J  2  ; 
Moses,  Ps.  go;  Neman,  Ps.  88;  Ethan,  Ps.  80 ;  'Ani,  Ps.  102, 
are  pseudonyms. 

The  name  of  Solomon  is  in  the  title  of  Ps.  72,  the  closing  Ps. 
of  the  original  ©  ;  doubtless  placed  there  as  a  pseudonym  by  the 
author,  composing  from  the  point  of  view  of  Solomon,  for  it  could 
not  have  been  written  by  Solomon  himself,  even  in  its  original 
form.  Three  pseudonyms  are  together  in  the  midst  of  the  Psalter, 
doubtless  by  editorial  design  :  88  ascribed  to  Heman,  89  to  Ethan, 
90  to  Moses ;  all  alike  with  the  same  purpose,  to  compose  Pss.  in 
the  name  and  from  the  point  of  view  of  these  ancient  worthies. 
In  no  case  is  the  name  of  an  author  attached  to  a  Ps.  eAni,  Ps. 
102,  is  probably  a  pseudonym  for  the  suffering  pious  of  Israel.  The 
Pss.  are  all,  with  the  exception  of  these  pseudonyms,  anonymous. 

(a)  Solomon's  name  is  attached  to  72,  but  it  really  belongs  only  to  the 
original  v.1"7  l*-W«,  two  hexameter  heptastichs  constituting  a  prayer  for  a  king 
on  his  accession,  probably  from  the  time  of  Josiah,  and  therefore  appropriately 
put  into  the  mouth  of  Solomon,  who  might  be  supposed  to  have  just  such 
aspirations  for  his  son.  It  was  originally  a  Yahwistic  Ps.  Solomon  is  also  in 
the  title  of  127  in  f^»  but  not  in  <§>.  This  is  a  pilgrim  Ps.,  and  we  must  ascribe 
the  insertion  to  the  conjecture  of  a  late  scribe,  (b)  Heman,  the  Ezrahite,  is 
in  the  title  of  88,  originally  in  the  collection  of  cSuar.  It  is  a  Ps.  of  national 
lamentation  during  the  extreme  distress  of  the  Exile,  and  could  not  have  been 
written  either  by  the  sage  of  Solomon,  1  K.  511  (431),  or  the  singer  of  David, 
1  Ch.  1517" 19  25s.  It  was  put  into  his  mouth  by  the  author  as  a  pseudonym. 
(<r)  Ethan,  the  Ezrahite,  is  in  the  title  of  Ps.  89.     He  was  one  of  the  sages  of 


Ixviii  INTRODUCTION 

Solomon,  I  K.  511  (431).  The  Ps.  in  its  original  form  (v.18"46)  is  a  paraphrase 
of  the  Davidic  covenant  and  a  lament  as  to  its  failure.  It  came  from  one 
of  the  companions  of  Jehoiachin  in  his  exile.  It  could  not  have  been  written 
by  Ethan.  It  was  put  into  his  mouth  as  a  pseudonym,  (d)  Moses,  the  man 
of  God,  is  in  the  title  of  the  prayer  Ps.  90,  which  imitates  purposely  Dt.  32,  33, 
songs  ascribed  to  Moses,  with  the  view  of  putting  the  Ps.  in  his  mouth.  It 
could  not  have  been  written  by  Moses.  It  is  not  an  early  Ps.,  but  dates 
probably  from  the  later  years  of  the  Exile.  (<r)  Ps.  102  has  in  the  title, 
WV  ")D&i  mm  ijdVi  rpp  >2  »jpS  rrVan  =  rrayer  of  the  afflicted  one  when  he  was 
fainting  and  before  Yahweh  pouring  out  his  complaint,  t;  is  probably  a 
pseudonym.  The  author  writes  in  the  name  of  afflicted  Israel.  The  Ps.  is 
composite :  v.2"12  seems  to  come  from  the  closing  years  of  the  Persian  period, 
but  v.1*48*89  is  a  Maccabean  Ps.  (/)  Some  codd.  (S  of  65,  137,  so  U,  have 
Jeremiah  in  the  titles  ;  conjectures  of  late  scribes,  based  on  the  similarity  of 
the  circumstances  of  the  Ps.  with  those  of  Je.  and  La.  (g)  @  inserts  Haggai 
and  Zechariah  in  the  titles  of  146,  147,  148,  149,  <SA  also  Zechariah  in  the 
titles  of  138,  139,  doubtless  for  similar  reasons.  Authorship  is  not  to  be 
thought  of  in  these  cases,  and  not  even  pseudonyms. 

§  31.  Afizmor,  in  the  titles  of  fifty-seven  Psalms,  indicates  a  col- 
lection made  for  singing  in  public  worship  in  the  early  Greek  period, 
from  which  these  Psalms  were  taken. 

The  term  Mizmor,  like  the  terms  Miktam  and  Maskil,  implies 
a  selection  or  collection  of  Pss.  of  this  class.  They  were  made,  as 
the  name  implies,  for  public  worship  in  song  in  the  synagogue. 
As  all  those  whose  Tlfittt  is  genuine  were  derived  from  the  earlier 
Psalters  of  Q,  1&,  &,  with  the  exception  of  the  exilic  pseudonym 
88  and  two  orphan  Pss.,  66-67,  of  tne  early  Greek  period,  it  is 
probable  that  the  collection  was  made  about  that  time. 

(a)  There  are  57  Pss.  in  ^,  with  "UDTD  (v.  §  1)  ;  of  these  there  were  de- 
rived from  B,  35  (36)  Pss.:  3-6;  8-9  (+  10),  12-13,  15.  19-24,  29-31,  38-41, 
51,  62-65,  68»  IOI»  '09,  no,  1 39-141,  143  J  from  U  5  Pss.:  47-48,  84-85,  87  ; 
from  &  9:  50,  73,  75-77,  79-80,  82-83.  To  these  were  added  5  orphan  Pss. : 
66,  67,  92,  98,  100,  the  pseudonym  88,  the  gnomic  49,  and  the  composite  108. 
But  the  term  in  92,  98,  100,  was  doubtless  from  later  scribes,  98,  100,  being 
parts  of  the  royal  advent  Ps.,  which  could  not  have  been  written,  still  less 
broken  up,  in  time  to  be  included  in  the  collection ;  92  doubtless  received 
this  title  in  connection  with  its  liturgical  assignment.  66  is  a  composite  Ps., 
but  in  its  earliest  form  v.10-12,  like  67,  was  probably  composed  early  in  the 
Greek  period,  possibly  for  use  in  this  Psalter  by  its  editor.  There  is  no 
ground,  therefore,  on  which  to  go  later  than  this  period  for  this  collection 
of  Pss. 


THE   MIZMORIM  lxix 

(Z>)  <g  also  attaches  ^aXyuo'j  to  ten  other  Pss. :  7,  II,  14,  25  of  IB  ;  43,  44, 
46  of  5& ;  81  of  3ti  and  94,  99,  orphans,  but  omits  it  from  4,  39  of  HB,  using 
y5?7  instead.  Of  these  it  may  be  rejected  from  99  for  the  same  reasons  as  from 
98,  100,  of  f$.  43  was  originally  a  part  of  42,  and  doubtless  was  not  sepa- 
rated in  iftfl.  In  46  mnrc  is  a  later  substitution  for  "vtf.  No  good  reason  can 
be  assigned  for  the  omission  from  II,  14,  25,  94  of  |^  or  44  of  f&  or  81  of  &. 
"YiDrD  was  more  likely  to  have  been  inserted  by  assimilation  to  the  groups  in 
which  they  occur. 

(V)  In  Ps.  7  the  use  is  peculiar,  for  "\)rz^  of  <5  represents  the  enigmatical 
]^yj  of  f$.  This  term  is  used  elsw.  only  Hb.  31,  in  pi.  niJ^J"',  where  it  is 
doubtless  an  error  for  rmj,  cf.  (@>  /xerd.  cpdijs.  It  is  derived  by  Aq.,  2,  J,  &, 
from  iXP  and  rendered  error,  confusion.  Most  moderns,  as  Ew.,  De.,  Kirk.,  al., 
derive  from  nyy  go  astray,  reel,  and  think  of  the  wild,  passionate  dithyrambs, 
with  rapid  change  of  rhythm,  cf.  Lag.5iV;201f-.  But  this  Ps.  does  not  really 
have  these  characteristics.  It  is  indeed  confused  by  many  glosses  from  differ- 
ent periods,  but  the  original  Ps.  was  less  passionate  and  rambling  than  many 
other  Pss.  The  word  is  doubtless  a  txt.  err.,  which  may  have  stood  for  an 
original  nwjj,  as  in  Hb.  3 ;  but  in  this  case  it  could  not  have  belonged  to  this 
Ps.,  which  was  not  in  S$£,and  must  have  come  in  by  mistake  from  the  previous 
Ps.  6. 

(d)  The  original  Mizmorim  were  probably,  therefore,  54(5).  Of  these 
©iE  used  34.  The  original  order  of  these  Pss.  in  that  collection  was  doubtless 
different  in  many  instances  from  their  order  in  the  present  Psalter. 

§  32.  The  group  of  Pss.  4.2-83,  characterised  by  the  use  of  the 
divine  name  Elohim  instead  of  Yahweh,  was  originally  in  a  major 
Psalter,  edited  probably  in  Babylonia  in  the  middle  Greek  period, 
and  made  up  chiefly  of  selections  fro?n  the  previous  minor  Psalters. 

This  group  of  42  Pss.  in  the  midst  of  the  Psalter  differs  from 
the  preceding  group,  Pss.  1-41,  and  from  the  following,  84-150, 
by  the  use  of  the  divine  name  Elohim,  which  is  seldom  used  in  the 
other  Pss.,  and  by  an  avoidance  of  Yahweh,  which  is  used  ordinarily 
by  them.  This  use  was  evidently  designed,  and  in  the  case  of  the 
selections  from  33  and  it,  was  not  original,  but  editorial.  These 
Pss.  therefore  constituted  a  selection  of  Pss.  made  by  an  editor 
from  the  earlier  collections.  Inasmuch  as  31  is  given  complete  so 
far  as  known,  Pss.  50,  73-83,  <E  was  probably  the  basis  of  the 
collection.  Selections  from  i\,  42-48,  49  (?),  and  from  J9,  51-65, 
68-70,  72,  were  prefixed  to  &,  and  three  orphan  Pss.,  66,  67,  71, 
were  added.  The  changed  order  of  these  last  and  of  50  is  due  to 
later  editors.  This  collection  was  probably  made  in  Babylonia,  as 
that  of  &  before  it,  and  for  similar  reasons. 


lxx  INTRODUCTION 

It  is  convenient  to  give  in  this  connection  the  use  of  the  divine  names  in  \f/. 

I.  mm  is  used  c.  6823  t.  in  OT.  mm  Qr.  =  ^ix  =  6  Kvpios  in  (3,  for  an 
original  mm  =  Yahweh  {v.  BDZ?.).  It  is  the  proper  name  of  the  God  of 
Israel,  first  revealed  to  Moses  according  to  35  as  "  the  One  ever  with  His 
people  "  Ex.  31-"15.  It  is  not  used  by  P  until  Ex.  68.  But  J  uses  it  from  the 
beginning  of  his  narrative,  and  possibly  explains  it  as  meaning  "  the  everlast- 
ing God,"  Gn.  2133.  It  is  used  cautiously  by  E  (c.  163  t.),  but  constantly  by 
J  (c.  449  t.)  and  by  P  after  Ex.  63  (c.  781  t.).  D  uses  it  apart  from  his  phrases 
c.  211  t.  In  the  prophetic  histories  it  is  used  sparingly  by  E,  but  constantly  by 
J,  D,  R.  The  Chr.  uses  it  in  his  sources,  but  avoids  it  in  his  own  composition. 
It  is  used  throughout  the  prophetic  literature,  but  in  various  proportions,  and 
in  some  writers  chiefly  in  combination  with  other  divine  names.  The  book 
of  Jb.  uses  it  only  in  the  Prologue  and  Epilogue  (27  t.),  the  seams  (4  t.),  and 
in  a  proverbial  expression  129;  but  in  Pr.  it  is  the  characteristic  divine  name. 
In  Dn.  it  is  used  only  in  ch.  9  (7  t.)  (source),  and  in  Ec.  not  at  all.  It  is  con- 
stantly used  in  \j/,  except  in  the  group  42-83  (E),  where  it  is  used  44  t.  (chiefly 
glosses). 

nw  is  frequently  combined  with  other  divine  names.  Ti^*  "*  K  a  Pnr-  OI" 
D  (c.  239  t.)  used  by  Chr.  6  t.,  Is.2  4  t,  elsw.  seldom  ;  Ps.  8111  in  citation  from 
Ex.  202;  OTtjhn  1  is  a  phr.  of  D2  (c.  70  t.)  and  of  H  (c.  30  t.),  in  Jo.  7  t., 
Chr.  11  t.,  elsw.  seldom,  Ps.  7612  (the  law  of  vows);  Wfbyt  'i  is  also  a  phr.  of 
D2  (28  t.)  used  by  Chr.  16  t.,  Je.  18  t.,  elsw.  not  uncommon ;  in  \J/  208  g^2* 
996-8-9-9  1057  10647  1135  1229  1232.  Uses  of  mm  with  cnSx  and  other  sfs. 
are  characteristic  of  Je.  (11  t.)  and  Ch.  (26  t.);  in  $  >fhn  1  72-4  1829  35s4 
1041  (all  dub.)  13*  30s- 18  3822406  10926,  vn\x  1  33I'2  144^  1465.  The  com- 
binations mm  Sx  118'27,  mm  dtiSx  Sx  501,  are  conflations  of  an  original 
mm. 

fm  is  a  poetic  contraction  of  mm,  earliest  use  Ex.  152  (cited  Is.  122  Ps. 
US14-")  Ex.  I716  Is.  3811  Ct.  86;  nw  m  Is.  26*  (?);  >DB>  m  Ps.  685  (?); 
o>n^x  m  6819  (?);  elsw.  m  Wyn  10435  10545  io6i-48  in1  1121  U31-9  11518 
11619  1172  1351-3.21  I46i-io  1471-20  1481- 1*  i49i-9  i5oi-6;  m  V?m  102I9; 
m  Mm  115I7;  m  SSnr.  1506.  In  other  phrs.  7712  899  947- 12  11518  1196.6.17.18.19 
1224  1303  1354. 

II.  $Sk  n.m.  strong  one:  (1)  angels,  D^x  ^a  29I  897;  (2)  gods,  ni  Sx 
442i  8ii°,  "UJ  Sx  8 i10  Dt.  32I2  Mai.  211;  (3)  mighty  things  in  nature,  Sk  mn 
Ps.  367,  Sx  ^nx  80H;  (4)  used  of  God  as  the  most  primitive  term,  c.  217  OT. 
as  the  Strong  One.  Sxn  the  true  God  I831-33-48  6820- 2i  7715  85s,  cf.  Is.  42s; 
>Sx  my  God  Pss.  183  222-  2-  »  63s  6S26  89"  10225  11828  1407,  cf.  Ex.  152  Is.  44I7; 
htnw  Sx  Ps.  68:J6;  apjn  Sx  1465;  o^Drn  Kx  13626;  >}ho  Sx  4210,  cf.  434; 
liayi  Sx  29*;  «n  Sx  42s  (prob. also  42*  84s  for  ^n  Sk);  rex  Sx  316;  niDpj  sx 
941- 1;  Snj  Sx  77I4  953  Dt.  72i;  Dim  ^x  Ps.  86I5  Ex.  34s  (J)  Dt.  4";  X'^j  Sx 
Ps.  998;  (5)  Sx  without  article,  of  God:  indef.  56,  elsw.  def.  7X2  io1U2  i6x 
176  192  52s-7  5520  573  682i  7311-17  74s  7710  787- 8- 18- 19-  s4- 41  821  832  89s  902 
I042i  io6i4-2i  107H  11827  I39i7-23  1496  150I;  (6)  divine  name  50I  (gl.),  as 
Gn.  33™  (E)  Dt.  3218  33^;  mS*  Sx  Ps.  78s6. 


PSALTER   OF  THE   ELOHIST  lxxi 

III.  t  ^^  n.m.  real  pi. :  (i)  rulers  Ex.  2i6  22*- 8- 8- 27  Jn.  58  Pss.  821-  6  138*; 

(2)  superhuman  beings,  including  God  and  angels,  Gn.  I27  Ps.  86  (cf.  Jb.  387); 

(3)  angels,  ovftM(n)  >i2  Jb.  i°  21  387  Gn.  62-4  (J),  cf.  D^M  »J3;  (4)  gods 
Pss.  868  1362;  D>D>'n  >nhn  96s  Dt.  614  138  +;  d\-iSn  •?:>  Pss.  95s  96*  977-9  1355. 
(5)  7#£  God  of  Israel,  pi.  intensive,  originally  with  article,  the  All  Strong, 
retaining  this  mng.  when  the  article  was  omitted  in  usage,  but  subsequently 
losing  its  mng.  and  standing  as  a  common  name  for  the  Divine  Being, 
like  6e6s,  deus,  God  {v.  BDi?.).  It  is  used  with  article  in  f  only  in  phrs.  : 
DTiSiO  v*x  title  of  90,  DTiSttn  mp  87s,  where  the  article  really  defines  the  pre- 
vious n.  It  is  used  in  the  cstr.  in  phr.  on-ox  >hSn  4710,  phr.  of  J,  htnw  ^nSs 
4114  7218  10648  (benedictions)  59s  689  697,  phr.  of  E,  Je.,  Chr. ;  apjp  >rb*  a 
poetic  phr.  202  46s-12  7510  767  8i2-5  84s  947;  JKS"  >tbH  with  various  sfs.  1847 
24s  25s  27s  65s  799  85s;  *njn8»n  'N  5116;  t^is"  'n  882;  «pTJ  'n  42;  nDn  'n 
5911-18;  »nj7D  'n  432  (?);  rnxux  \-iSn  'i  89°;  *nSnn  'n  1091;  DViSitn  's  1362. 
dtiSn  is  used  with  sfs.  frequently  in  \f/,  because  of  the  emphasis  upon  personal 
relations  with  God  in  lyric  poetry.  'rt*?«  38  58  i87-  «■  30  252  3115  35s3  409- 18  427- 12 
435  59'2  094  7i4- 12- 22  8314  844-  n  862  912  9422  10433  11828 119U5  143W  1451  1462; 
:p;f?K  424-  n  6829;  tjVjSw  14610  14712;  vrt?H  3731  14415;  UV}Sk  1832  206  404  4421 
4829'503  668  9214  957  983  1153  1165  l&lZl1*  ';  DmrtSg  7910"ii52.  For  other 
uses  of  d^hSk  with  mm  and  '•j-'N,  z>.  I.  IV.  dtiSx  is  used  alone  for  God  in  U 
c.  180  t.,  elsw.  \f>  c.  22  t. ;  v.  VII.  J  r^Sx  is  a  poetic  sg.  of  dti^x,  used  Dt. 
3215- 17,  and  on  this  basis  as  an  archaism  in  late  poetry  Pss.  1832  (for  Sk  2  S. 
2232)  5022  (gl.)  1147  (err.)  13919  (gl.).     It  is  characteristic  of  Jb.  (41  t.). 

IV.  %  ^i?  divine  name,  originating  in  Judah  ;  syn.  of  Baal,  used  in  North 
Israel  (v.  BDB.);  always  6  Kvpios  in  (3-  AV.,  Lord,  to  be  distinguished  from 
Lord  for  mm;  also  6  actios  in  @.  The  pointing  -  was  to  distinguish  the 
divine  name  from  'HN  as  applied  to  men.  It  is  intensive  pi.  sovereign  lord. 
In  the  oldest  usage  it  was  :  my  sovereign  Lord,  so  24  162  3713  5912  863-  4-  5- 12- 15 
1408;  later  a  proper  name  Adonay  5510  5710  (=  mm  1084)  71s-  16  8950-  51 
I302-  8-  6.  Its  use  in  \p  elsw.  is  questionable.  It  is  not  certain  whether  ij"in 
5 117  was  original  in  either  sense  or  a  substitute  for  mm.  *>jin  is  certainly  a 
substitute  for  an  original  mm  4018  54s  6823  901.  Seventeen  codd.  Kenn.  rd. 
mm  no5,  "ij-in  either  precedes  or  follows  mm  in  conflation  of  text  for  earlier 
Qr.  6821  697  73s8  10921  1418.  It  is  a  real  gl.,  not  in  <g  3810  ;  and  though  in  <S 
a  gl.  in  2231  3517- »•  as  38I6  398  4424  6gi2.  is.  33  773  (<g  D,nsx)  778  358.  It  {s  part 
of  a  larger  gl.  in  38s3  6213  6618  6820-  27  7320  78s5  7912  869  9017.  The  tendency 
to  use  it  as  Qr.  for  mm  in  later  times,  and  also  its  general  use  for  other  divine 
names  is  illustrated  by  these  editorial  changes. 

V.  pins*  is  given  2410. 

VI.  tr1??.  n-  m-  highest  (1)  name  of  God,  Nu.  2416  Dt.  32s  Ps.  1814 
(=  2  S.  2214j,  used  as  an  archaism  93  218  5014  7311  7711  7817  8319  9I1-  9  922 
10711  Is.  1414  La.  335-  88;  with  other  divine  names  ]vhy  h«  Gn.  141s-  *9-  20-  22 
Pss.  78s5  87s  (?),?vSp  mm  7"  (?)  46*  (?)  473979;  ]vhy  o^nSx  573  7856  ;  (2)  of 
rulers,  either  monarchs  or  angel  princes :  \vhy  ija  826. 

VII.  The  group  of  Elohistic  Pss.  is  composed  of  selections :  — 


lxxii  INTRODUCTION 

O)  From  !&  42-48,  49  (?).  These  use  0>nSx  36  t.;  some  doubtless  glosses, 
a  few  possibly  original  in  3ft,  but  the  great  majority  editorial  substitutions  for 
an  original  mm.  niKas.mm  was  retained  in  the  Rf.  46s-  12,  but  in  48°  it  is  a 
gl.  mm  in  42s  46s  473-  6  4s2  is  either  a  gl.  or  a  substitution  of  later  editors  for 
the  vrhn  of  35.  In  the  Pss.  of  3&  not  in  35,  D^nSw  is  used :  84s-  10  (all  glosses 
or  txt.  err.),  but  mm  v.3-  12-  12  nutax  IW  v.2-  4-  13.  x  D^nSw  1  v.9  is  txt.  err.  for 
nwas  ^nSs  '\    D^nSun  is  used  87s,  but  mm  v.2-  6.     D^nSs  is  not  used  in  85  (but 

nini  v.2.  8.  9.  llf  SNn  y.9^  or  in   g8  (?)f  but   „„,  v#2.  10.  14.  15.      There    can    be    no 

doubt,  therefore,  that  mm  was  the  divine  name  of  1&,  and  that   wnhn  was 
substituted  for  it  by  the  editor  of  15. 

(b)  From  Q  were  taken  51-65,  68-70,  72.  In  these,  dtiSn  is  used  102  t. 
mm  is  used :  54s  5517-  n  5611  5S7  59*-  9  6411  6817  6914-  »•  32-  84  70'--  6.  All  these 
are  glosses,  or  substitutions  of  a  still  later  editor.  It  is  evident  that  D>nhn  of 
53  has  been  substituted  for  mm  of  14.  In  most  other  cases  it  was  so  also  ; 
for  in  the  other  Pss.  of  IB,  D»nf?n  is  used  but  15  t. :  33  511  j™-  n.  12  918  io4-  13 
,4l.  2.  5  2522  36a.  8  I44o .  besides  6  t.in  io82-6-  8-  12- 12-  14  +,  which  is  a  mosaic 
of  two  Elohistic  Pss.  Ps.  86  uses  wrh*  v.8-  10-  14,  mm  v.1-  6-  n-  n,  *j-ik 
v 8.  4.  6.  8.  9.  12. 15  jhis  ps  js  aiso  a  mosaic  0f  glosses  of  different  date.  The 
Pss.  of  S  in  35  also  use  \hn  5117  54s  5510  57W  5912  6213  6812-  18-  2<>-  23-  27-  88. 
•■j-ix  ">  6821  is  gl.  msax  OViSn  ^  59s  and  nwax  '•>  >jin  697  are  conflations  of 
late  scribes.     dtiSn  mn<  7218  is  conflation  in  the  doxology. 

(c)  All  of  &  that  have  been  preserved  were  taken  up  into  35 :  50,  73-83. 
The  separation  of  50  from  the  group  was  not  made  in  35,  but  by  a  later  editor. 
These  Pss.  used  the  divine  name  cnSx  40  t.  mm  is  used  501  7418  75°  7612 
yg4.  21  ygb  g^i.  16  g^n.  19^  jn  an  cases  either  glosses  themselves  or  in  larger 
glosses.  Besides  <jin  is  used  7320  77s-  8  7865  7912;  mm  ijin  7328.  nwax  d\"iSk 
8o8- 15,  and  nisax  0*nSn  1  8o5- 20  were  originally  mitas  '\ 

(</)  The  orphan  Pss.  66,  67,  71,  use  cviSn  18  t.,  mm  only  711;  a  later 
substitution  for  dvtSh  used  v.11- 12-  17-  18-  19-  19.  ijin  and  mm  in  v.6- 16  belong  to 
different  11.  >rw  is  used  6618.  These  Pss.  in  15  doubtless  followed  72.  It  is 
improbable  that  an  editor  who  kept  the  Pss.  of  3ft  and  %  together  would  not 
have  done  the  same  with  the  Pss.  of  IB.  These  were  the  only  Pss.  not  in 
D,  1ft,  (3l.  Pss.  66  and  67  were  in  fR  of  the  early  Greek  period;  Ps.  71  in 
its  original  form,  v.4-9-  14~19,  from  the  Greek  period.  The  Psalter  of  35  could 
not  therefore  have  been  earlier,  or  indeed  much  later. 

§  33.  Fifty -five  (57)  Psalms  have  in  their  titles  a  reference  to  the 
director  or  choir  master,  which  indicates  that  they  were  taken  from 
a  major  Psalter  which  bore  this  title.  They  were  collected  in  the 
middle  Greek  period  in  Palestine,  as  a  prayer  book  for  the  syna- 
gogues, selected  from  the  previous  minor  Psalters. 

The  Pss.  with  HSMft  ;  are  scattered  through  the  Psalter.  The 
term  means,  "  Belonging  to  the  Director."  These  Pss.  were  taken 
from  a  Psalter  bearing  the  Director's  name.     Thirty-five  of  the 


PSALTER  OF  THE   DIRECTOR  Ixxiii 

fifty-four  Mizmorim  were  probably  taken  as  a  basis.  To  these 
were  added  sixteen  Pss.  from  ©,  four  (5)  from  It,  and  one  from  3L 
As  no  Ps.  later  than  the  previous  minor  Psalters  was  used,  it  is 
probable  that  the  collection  was  made  in  the  middle  Greek  period, 
not  long  after  fH.  As  the  divine  name  Yahweh  was  retained,  this 
Psalter  was  doubtless  collected  in  Palestine.  The  term  Director 
also  suggests  the  period  of  the  Chronicler,  who  alone  elsewhere  uses 
the  term.  The  great  majority  of  these  Pss.  are  prayers.  The 
collection  was,  therefore,  like  29,  designed  as  a  prayer-book  for 
use  in  the  synagogues.  Hb.  3  also  attaches  ffettE?  as  part  of  the 
title  of  the  song  therein  contained.  This  was  originally  a  part  of 
the  Psalter  of  the  Director  (JB3&)  and  was  subsequently  removed 
to  Hb.  The  Psalter  of  ©&  must  therefore  have  been  earlier 
than  the  final  editing  of  Hb.  and  the  close  of  the  Canon  of  the 
Prophets.  This  also  points  to  the  middle  Greek  period,  prior 
to  Simon  II.  219-198  B.C. 

nxjnS  is  Pi.  ptc.  with  prep.  S  from  mi  vb.  denom.  of  rwj,  v.  96.  The  vb.  is 
not  used  in  Qal,  but  only  in  Pi.,  with  the  exception  of  a  single  Niph.  ptc. 
nnxj,  Je.  85,  enduring  (of  apostasy),  and  in  Pi.  only  in  Chr.  and  titles  of  Pss., 
in  the  mngs.  act  as  overseer,  superintendent,  director  :  (1)  in  building  or  repair- 
ing the  temple,  c.  iy  2  Ch.  21  Ezr.  38, 9,  c.  ^  2  Ch.  341'5,  c.  s  inf.  2  Ch.  217,  abs. 
2  Ch.  3412;  (2)  in  the  ministry  of  the  temple,  c.  h';  I  Ch.  23*;  (3)  in  the  organ- 
ised liturgical  service,  I  Ch.  1521,  six  of  them  overseeing  the  basses,  nTE^n  h';, 
leading  them  with  nru3,  and  eight  over  the  sopranos,  nwSp  %',  leading  them 
with  harps  (y.  §  34).  Heman,  Asaph,  and  Ethan  were  over  them  all,  leading 
with  cymbals.  This  doubtless  represents  the  temple  service  of  the  middle 
Greek  period,  and  it  is  altogether  probable  that  mirh  in  the  titles  of  the  Pss. 
has  the  same  meaning,  especially  as  these  and  other  musical  terms  are  associated 
with  it  in  the  titles.  We  may  therefore  take  it  as  meaning  director,  or  choir 
master.  The  preposition  ^  has  the  same  meaning  here  as  in  other  uses  in  the 
titles,  and  indicates  that  these  Pss.  were  taken  from  a  Psalter  collected  under 
the  name  of  the  Director  or  choir  master.  The  modern  view  that  ?  indicates 
assignment  to  the  care  of  the  choir  master  is  improbable,  because,  as  Ols.  says, 
this  was  a  matter  of  course,  and  would  not  be  specified  in  titles.  And  this 
would  not  explain  its  use  in  some  Pss.  rather  than  in  others.  <&  interprets 
rvtiu?  as  late  form  for  rw'j  =  els  rd  t£\os.  This  is  explained  by  Eusebius  and 
Theodoret  in  an  eschatological  sense:  unto  the  end  (of  the  world).  1&  renders 
NrairS  to  sing  in  liturgy,  taking  it  as  Aram.  inf.  with  the  mng.  use  constantly, 
perpetually,  thinking  of  perpetual  use  in  the  liturgy.  The  explanation  of  De., 
"  for  the  accomplishment,  fulfilment,  rendering  fully,"  is  improbable.  It  seems 
most  probable  that  @  and  %  agree  in  thinking  of  these  Pss.  as  selected  for 


lxxiv  INTRODUCTION 

perpetual  use  unto  the  end,  in  the  liturgy.  Another  tradition  is  given  in  Aq. 
t£  inKowoiip,  S  iwcvLKios,  9  et's  t6  vLkos,  3  victor e.  These  follow  a  conceit  of 
the  school  of  Rabbi  Akiba  (due  probably  to  the  Messianic  hopes  of  that 
period)  that  they  were  the  triumphal  songs  of  Israel.  But  this  does  not  suit 
the  character  of  these  Pss.,  which  are  prayers  rather  than  hymns.  The  2T 
preserves  the  older  tradition  of  <g,  which  is  essentially  correct  so  far  as  the  use 
of  the  collection  is  concerned,  though  it  misses  the  exact  sense  of  the  term 
which  is  given  by  the  Chronicler. 

Fifty-five  Pss.  have  rciV2>  in  the  titles.  To  these  we  may  add  10  and  43, 
which  belong  to  the  previous  Pss.,  9  and  42.  Of  these  thirty-five  were  Miz- 
morim:  4-6,  8-10,  12-13,  '9-22,  31,  39-41  of  ©  ;  47,  49  (?)  of  It;  51,  62, 
64,  65  of  Q;  66-67  orphans  ;  68of©(?)  {y.  §27);  75-77,  80  of  %  ;  84-85, 
88(?)  {v.  §  28)  of  It;  109,  139-140  of  B.  To  these  were  added  sixteen 
Pss.  from  13  (four  Maskilim,  52-55,  five  Miktamim,  56-60;  one  Shir,  18, 
and  six  others,  II,  14,  36,  61,  69-70)  ;  moreover  five  (six)  Pss.  were  added 
from  1st ;  (four  (five)  Maskilim,  42-45,  88,  and  the  Shir,  46)  ;  one  also  from 
<E,  81.  All  of  these  Pss.  were  used  in  previous  Psalters,  though  they  were 
adapted  by  this  editor  for  use  in  his  time.  These  Pss.  are  chiefly  prayers,  the 
great  majority  of  them,  thirty-three,  being  of  this  kind,  as  compared  with 
eleven  hymns  and  thirteen  religious  poems.  This  Psalter  was  therefore  essen- 
tially a  prayer  book,  on  the  basis  of  the  earlier  Q  and  fft,  for  use  in  the 
synagogues  of  the  Greek  period.  This  is  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  mj:s, 
in  the  sense  of  director  or  choir  master,  is  characteristic  of  the  service  of 
the  temple  as  described  by  Chr.  1  Ch.  15,  and  belongs  to  his  period.  It  is 
used  elsewhere  only  in  Hb.  319,  as  part  of  the  title  of  that  ode  which,  doubt- 
less also  originally  was  in  $3&,  but  was  separated  from  it  and  inserted  in 
Hb.  The  collection  of  the  Twelve  Minor  Prophets  was  closed  and  fixed  in 
the  Canon  in  the  time  of  Ben  Sira  (BS.  4910)  because  he  mentions  the 
Twelve  by  that  technical  name.  Daniel  g2  seems  to  imply  that  the  Canon 
of  the  Prophets  was  closed.  The  Psalter  of  the  Director  must  therefore  have 
been  made  in  the  middle  Greek  period. 

§  34.  The  Director  attached  to  his  prayer  book  instructions  to 
the  choir  with  reference  to  the  tones,  the  voices,  and  the  musical 
instruments  to  be  used  in  the  rendering  of  certain  psalms  in 
public  worship. 

Twenty-nine  of  the  Pss.  of  B3&  have  musical  directions  attached. 
Several  tones  are  mentioned  to  which  special  Pss.  were  to  be 
sung,  indicated  usually  by  the  initial  words  of  some  familiar  song. 
There  are  several  special  references  to  the  kind  of  voice  that 
was  most  appropriate.  There  are  also  several  kinds  of  musical 
instruments  mentioned  as  suitable  for  accompanying  the  singing. 
These  are,  in  all  cases,  special  directions.     Where  such  do  not 


MUSICAL   DIRECTIONS  lxxv 

appear,  it  is  a  reasonable  inference  that  the  choirs  were  left  free  in 
their  choice  in  these  respects.  This  collection  of  ©3ft  was  doubt- 
less made  for  the  use  of  some  great  synagogue  in  Jerusalem,  where 
it  was  possible  to  fulfil  these  directions.  There  is  no  reference 
to  those  instruments  of  music  that  were  especially  characteristic 
of  the  feasts  and  of  the  more  ornate  worship  in  the  temple. 

Inasmuch  as  all  the  musical  directions  are  attached  to  Pss.  of  I33&,  it  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  they  were  first  attached  to  this  Psalter.  They  are 
of  three  kinds:  (i)  designation  of  tone  or  melody,  (2)  of  voice,  (3)  of  musi- 
cal instrument. 

(1)  The  tones  are  usually  referred  to  by  the  use  of  initial  words  of  some 
well-known  song,  in  accordance  with  an  ancient  usage  which  continues  until 
the  present  time.  The  preposition  by  precedes  these  words,  with  the  mng. 
in  accordance  with,  after  (the  tone  of).  In  some  cases  bn  is  used  instead 
of  it,  in  accordance  with  a  not  infrequent  misuse  of  this  prep,  for  V:  {v.  BZ)B.). 

(a)  nna>n  bn  is  used  in  the  titles  of  Pss.  57-59,  Miktamim  of  B,  and  75  of 
21.  The  bn  is  pointed  as  negative  in  MT.,  and  so  the  two  words  seem  to  mean 
Destroy  not ;  but  the  omission  of  by  is  striking  and  improbable.  It  should  be 
Sn  for  by  as  usual,  and  the  original  piece  probably  began  with  Destroy,  refer- 
ring to  enemies  of  the  nation.  RV.  does  not  translate,  but  transliterates. 
These  Pss.  have  a  variety  of  measures.  It  is  hardly  possible  that  the  refer- 
ence could  have  been  to  a  melody.  It  was  doubtless  to  a  tone  for  cantilation, 
as  the  tones  of  the  early  synagogue  and  early  Church,  which  are  capable  of 
use  in  pieces  of  different  measure  and  different  strophical  length. 

(b)  D^pm  dSn  DiV  by  is  in  the  title  of  the  Miktam,  Ps.  56.  The  first  line  of 
the  piece  referred  to  was  probably,  The  silent  dove  of  them  that  are  afar  off, 
as  in  RV.m.  RV.  transliterates,  but  does  not  translate.  @  virkp  rod  Xaov  tov 
d-rrb  t&v  ayLuv  pLep.aKpvjxp.ivov  =for  the  people  retnoved  far  from  the  sanctuary, 
is  doubtless  a  paraphrase. 

(<r)  nnj?  ]VW  by  is  in  the  title  of  Ps.  60,  a  trimeter  Miktam  of  $3.  DWW  by 
is  in  the  title  of  Ps.  45,  Maskil  of  Ifc,  and  of  69  of  IB;  m-iy  QWV  Sn  is  in  the 
title  of  80  of  &.  These  all  undoubtedly  refer  to  the  same  piece,  a  Ps.  in 
praise  of  the  Law,  whose  first  line  was,  my  testimony  is  a  beautiful  anemone. 
The  view  that  it  referred  to  an  instrument  of  music  shaped  like  a  lily  has 
nothing  in  its  favour,  not  even  the  mng.  "  lily,"  which  cannot  be  proved  in 
the  usage  of  this  word.  The  pi.  is  the  pi.  of  intensity,  "  beautiful  anemone." 
It  is  not  translated  in  the  text  of  RV.,  but  RV.m  has  it  essentially  as  I  have 
given  it.  (3  virep  tQ>v  aXkoiu)dr]<Top.e't>(>)v  or  tois  aXhoutidyGop.e'voLS  -=for  those 
who  shall  be  changed,  is  a  misinterpretation. 

(d)  nSnD  by  in  the  title  of  53,  a  Maskil  of  ©,  and  map*?  nSnn  by  in  the 
title  of  88,  Maskil  of  Heman,  both  in  ©&,  are  doubtless  the  same.  <f§  virep 
MaeXed  rod  airoKpidijvai  takes  the  first  word  as  a  proper  name  and  the  second 
as  inf.  cstr.  r\y;  answer,  respond.     Aq.,  0,  3,  "  for  the  dance,"  is  inappropriate 


lxxvi  INTRODUCTION 

to  the  sadness  of  these  Pss.  M  T.  rhnq  n.  cstr.  before  inf.  is  improbable. 
$  rd.  r>S«ft  A  ;.  -t.  v-v<:<-<?,  so  essentially  t>,  1".  3.  from  SSt\  It  is  most  prob- 
able that  we  should  rd.  r*»nr  n.f.  wounu:  .,  .  from  *>Soj  and  ""u;"'  inf. 
ufer  dilution.  Two  words  only  of  the  original  are  preserved,  For 
wounding  suffering  affliction.     It  is  transliterated  in  RV. 

(<f)  Ps.  22  has  in  the  title  inr*i  -  *  Sj  hind  of  the  dawn.  The  third  word 
is  missing.  We  might  supply  the  vb.  leaps*  thinking  of  the  fresh  vigour  of 
the  hind  in  the  early  morning  ;  but  that  does  not  suit  the  character  of  the  Ps. 
It  is  more  appropriate  to  think  of  the  hind  hunted  to  death  in  the  early  morn- 
ing. 2T  and  Midrash  regard  it  as  referring  to  the  lamb  of  the  Booming  sacri- 
fice But  it  is  improbable  that  the  hind  would  represent  the  lamb.  The  hind 
was  not  used  for  sacrifice  in  the  OT.     This  Ps.  was  in  13,  J'fl,  | 

(/)  $  adds  to  Ps.  70  the  title  eis  rd  Suwou  /ac  Kv/wo*,  .  0  Lordy 

showing  that  another  tone  was  added  at  so  late  a  date.  For  it  is  improbable 
that  it  was  original  and  was  omitted  from  the  text  in  ]^. 

(g)  --  —  -     1  in  the  title  of  Ps    3        D.  jjH.  Si        S  54  of  It,  JH. 

0  and  2  irrip  nir  \rjtn2»;   so  Y,  3,  pro  torcularibus,  for  the  wine  presses, 
read.  _:ers  therefore  to  a  harvest  song  at  the  vintage  or  treadi- 
grapes.    This  suits  the  triumphant,  joyous  character  oi  these  Pss.,  and  is  prob- 
ably correct.      They  were  to  be  sung  to  the  tone  of  some  well-known  vintage 
song.     Aq.,  6,  have  in  Ps.  irwtp  rijs  yerOLTidos,  but  the  Syr. -Hex.  of  Aq.  in 

3 1  M  tqO  \yfvoO  or  iirl  t2p  \if»w».  This  is  more  probable  than  a  Git- 
tite  musical  instrument.  £  ■  the  harp  which  David  brought  from  Gath,"  or 
a  tone  of  Gath,  the  march  of  the  Gittite  guard        -  ,  explanation  of  r\"\i 

Ml'.,  both  equally  improbable. 

1    v  in  62  of  3,  ill,  pn*T  Sj  in  77  of  &,  fR,,  plW?  in  39  of  E,  Jft, 
all  doubtless  refer  to  the  same  thing.     S  in  59  is  doubtless  err.  for  >7,  and  the 
ion  of  '  and  1  in  the  penult  is  a  variation  of  MT.,  not  of  the  original 
of  J£.     It  is  probable  that  Jeduthun,  the  choir  master,  is  referred  to,  v.  1  Ch. 
-'  his  choir,  I  Ch  .  u;";   but  it  is  im- 

probable that  this  name  is  in  apposition  with  hs:?^  as  De.,  in  which  case  **;* 
would  be  err.  for  ";  rather  it  refers  to  a  tone  of  this  choir.  The  reference  to 
a  lily-shaped  musical  instrument  of  seme  Rabbis,  though  followed  by  Gcs*, 
is  without  justification. 

(2)  There  are  two  voices  referred  to.  the  falsetto  and  the  b. 

(<*)   ~ '    '     -      -  in  the  title  of  Ps.  46,  tetrameter  of  It.     6  interprets  it  as 
irrip  tQp  Kpv$l<av  —  Y  pro  arcanis,  deriving  from  rrchy  n.f.  in  the  sens 
secret,  hidden.     This  was  interpreted  as  in  a  gentle,  quiet  style.     -   \nckp  tQv 
aiu/yiwv  derives  as  pi.  of  zh*T9  ever,  in  the  late  sense  of  ages.     Aq.  hrl  p*a>io- 
r-irrtnv  an  i    |  t-entutibus  follow  MT.  and  derive  from  ncSy  n.f.  abst., 

youth.      These  last  are  nearer  the  correct  view,  for  the  explanation  is  found  in 

1  Ch.  1520,  where  it  refers  to  the  maidenlike  style.  Some  think  of  maidens,  as 
Ps.  6S*,  where  they  play  upon  timbrels  in  the  march  of  Yahweh  ;  but  maidens 
took  no  part  in  the  service  of  song.  Bo.  thinks  of  the  tenor  voice  ;  but  more 
probably  it  was  the  falsetto  male  voice.     At  the  end  of  Ps.  4S  ?     >cems 


MUSICAL   DIRECTIONS  lxxvii 

out  of  place-  It  probably  belongs  to  49,  from  the  title  of  which  it  has  been 
detached  by  error,  the  r;  being  omitted  as  snpposed  dittog.,  or  for  the  oppo- 
site reason.  It  is  also  probable  that  pV  nc  ";  in  the  title  of  Ps.  9  belongs 
here.  It  is  usually  interpreted  on  the  basis  of  MT.  as  a  reference  to  a  tone  in 
accordance  irith  (1);  this  tone  being  designated  by  two  words  of  the  first 
line,  **  Death  to  the  son,"  or,4*  Death  for  the  son  ";  bat  this  is  in  itself  improb- 
able and  has  no  support  in  Vrss^  which  all  rd.  rr:-*;.  ©  vwkp  rHo  Kpm+Uow 
tov  viou,  Aq.  HanSnrrot  rou  viov,  9  owep  axjeff  to*  viov.  These  are  donbtless 
correct  as  to  the  form.  But  then  we  most  follow  them  in  interpreting  it  in 
the  same  way  as  in  46,  and  refer  it  to  the  falsetto  Yoke.  \2*f  is  then  the 
fuller  designation,  showing  that  it  was  the  maiienUke  voice  of  a  son,  think- 
ing of  a  boy  or  a  youth. 

-.:.--,  is  in  the  titles  of  Pss.  6,  12,  both  prayers  of  fH  and  8. 
6  interprets  it  as  vwip  rif%  07009*,  on  the  octave,  so  Y  pro  octava.  This  is 
donbtless  correct,  as  it  is  in  accord  with  1  Ch.  15°,  which  refers  to  the  lower 
octave  or  the  bass  roice.  The  opinion  of  some  that  it  refers  to  an  instrument 
of  eight  strings  is  a  mere  conceit,  without  support  in  the  OT. 

(3)  There  are  references  to  two  kinds  of  musical  instruments — stringed 
instruments  and  wind  instruments. 

(<j)  rvx  is  in  the  titles  of  Pss.  4,  6,  54,  53,  67,  76,  with  2  of  accompani- 
ment, and  in  61  (sg.)  with  *♦?.  Of  these,  54,  55,  were  Masldhm ;  4,  6,  67, 
76,  in  fH  ;  4,  6,  54,  55,  in  B  ;  76  in  %  ;  4,  6,  54,  55,  61,  are  prayers ;  67,  a 
hymn  ;  76,  a  poem.  They  are  of  different  measures.  0  has  cV  Spates  in  6* 
34,  55,  61,  67,  76,  and  r>  faXfioU  in  4.  The  form  is  pL  f.  of  Tri:  njf.  stringed 
instrument.  •::  vb.  denom.  PL  to  play  on  stringed  instruments^  r*2"  flayers 
on  stringed  instruments,  Ps.  68".  Hb.  31-  *•  hare  in  6  the  same  word, donbt- 
less in  both  cases  mrjfc  correct  for  £•  ITiese  seven  Pss.  and  Hb.  3 
were  to  be  accompanied  by  stringed  instruments,  such  as  the  lyre  and  harp. 

ib) ~         5  in  the  title  of  Ps.  5,  a  morning  prayer  of  fH  and  B.    It  is 

interpreted  by  6  and  6  as  inrip  rHp  mXnpmmpwtan*,  If  pro  ea  quae  kereditatem 
consequitur,  Ao^,  2,  3,  pro  kereditatious,  all  deriving  the  form  as  pL  nX  from 
— :  inherit.  The  ~*  is  doubtless  variation  for  "7  as  often.  No  reasonable 
explanation  of  this  term  has  yet  been  given.     It  is  probable  that  it  is  a  n. 

formed  by  2  from  tt,  a  variation  of I  P*P**  **  Hil,  or  abstr.,  as 

De.,  MolL,  forfiute  playing,  cf  1  S.  to*  1  K.  i*»  Is.  30*.  It  is  probable  that 
instruments  of  the  class  of  the  pipe  or  simple  Ante  are  referred  to. 

It  is  noteworthy  that  these  references  are  not  only  few,  bat  in  general 
terms,  and  that  no  particular  musical  instrument  is  referred  to.  The  music 
especially  characteristic  of  festivals  in  the  temple  worship  does  not  appear. 
The  music  was  probably  that  of  a  simple  orchestra  of  two  or  four  pieces  of  the 
'■  j''  :-:  --■:-  z  ir. :  •.  -  :  ;--•;.----:?.  ;.-  ;  -  ;  ; -  :  ;  .  .  •  -•  -_?::  _--  '  "  :'~t 
temple  courts.  And  it  is  also  probable  that  musical  instruments  were  seldom 
used  in  the  synagogues,  or  we  would  have  had  more  assignments  of  this  kind. 

(d)  There  is  little  reference  to  musical  instruments  in  the  earner  minor 
Psalters.    There  is  no  reference  in  B,  for  57*  =  io8»  =  144*  were  not  originally 


lxxviii  INTRODUCTION 

in  D  (v.  §  27).  In  21  the  only  reference  is  in  Si^4  to  a  ne.v  moon  celebration, 
doubtless  in  the  temple  courts,  with  the  use  of  the  Ssj  and  11:3  the  harp  and 
lyre,  the  two  chief  kinds  of  stringed  instruments  usually  associated  ;  the  new 
the  horn,  and  the  ^n  timbrel.  In  |&  43*  the  tu:>  is  used  in  temple  worship  ; 
so  in  the  orphan  3$2  92*  both  iu:>  and  Sij.  This  probably  represents  the 
ordinary  worship  of  the  Greek  period.  On  great  occasions,  such  as  feasts  or 
celebrations  of  victories,  more  instruments  of  music  were  used  ;  so  in  the 
royal  advent  Ps.  47s  (It)  the  new,  and  in  98s-6  the  nuD,  the  new,  and  the 
mssn  the  straight  trumpet.  In  the  Maccabean  Hallels  a  greater  number  and 
variety  of  instruments  appear  ;  due  to  the  reorganisation  of  the  temple  wor- 
ship with  greater  pomp  than  ever  before.  1477  mentions  only  the  nur,  1493 
the  nij3  and  f|n,  but  I50:i_5  the  1U3  and  Ssj,  the  "\BW  and  qr,  and  also  the 
instruments  not  mentioned  earlier  :  2ir;  the  small  organ,  D^JD  stringed  instru- 
ments, and  D^SxSx  cymbals.  The  Pss.  also  mention  the  use  of  musical  instru- 
ments by  minstrels  apart  from  public  worship  ;  so  the  1U3  in  49s  of  I&  (  ?)  and 
in  the  orphan  137-  ;  and  both  the  "»U3  and  ^21  in  the  orphan  ji*2  57s  (=  1083 
=  1449  all  glosses). 

§  35.  A  collection  0/  Hallels,  or  songs  of  praise,  was  made  for 
the  temple  sennce  in  the  Greek  period.  It  was  subsequently  en- 
larged in  the  Maccabean  period.  These  Psalms  have  in  their 
titles  the  term  Hallelujah. 

The  term  r^iSSn  =  Praise  ye  Yah  is  found  at  the  close  of  Pss.  104,  105,  115, 
116,  117,  and  the  beginning  of  Pss.  Ill,  112,  and  at  both  beginning  and  end 
of  Pss.  106,  113,  135,  146,  147,  148,  149,  150.  <S  gives  it  also  at  the  begin- 
ning of  105,  107,  114,  116,  117,  118,  119,  136.  In  the  case  of  105,  107,  114, 
116,  117,  136,  it  seems  to  have  been  detached  by  error  from  the  beginning 
of  these  Pss.  and  attached  to  the  close  of  the  previous  Pss.  in  ^.  All  of  these 
Pss.  are  Hallels  except  118  and  119,  which  are  only  so  given  in  <&,  the  former 
being  a  triumphal  Maccabean  song,  the  latter  the  great  alphabetical  praise 
of  the  Law.  Both  of  these  were  regarded  as  Hallels  in  later  usage.  These 
Hallels  are  in  the  present  Psalter  in  four  groups:  104-107,  m-117,  135-136, 
146-150.  This  separation  was  due  to  the  final  editor  of  the  Psalter.  104-107 
constitute  a  tetralogy,  104  being  a  Ps.  of  creation,  105  telling  the  early  history 
of  Israel,  106  of  the  Exodus,  107  of  the  Restoration.  The  second  group  begins 
with  1 1 1-1 1 2,  a  pair  complementary  in  subject  and  alphabetic  in  structure; 
113  begins  the  special  Hallel  of  the  great  feasts,  according  to  later  liturgical 
assignment.  At  the  Passover  the  order  was  11 3-1 14  before  supper,  11 5-1 18 
after  supper.  In  the  third  group  136  is  the  ordinary  Great  Hallel,  with  its 
Rf.  repeated  twenty-six  times  in  the  present  Ps.,  though  the  earliest  text  was 
much  simpler.  In  later  times  Pss.  1 19-136  were  likewise  called  the  Great 
Hallel  in  distinction  from  the  ordinary  Hallel  11 3-1 18.  The  last  group  of 
Hallels  consisted  of  the  doxologies  146-150.     All  of  these  Hallels  except  147, 


HALLELS   AND   PILGRIM   PSALTER  lxxix 

149,  belong  to  the  Greek  period  and  were  doubtless  in  their  original  form  in 
the  collection  of  that  period,  composed  for  public  use  by  the  choirs  especially 
on  the  great  feasts.  The  collection  consisted  of  sixteen  Pss.  A  Maccabean 
editor  added  147,  149.  The  final  editor  of  \f/  distributed  these  Hallels  in  the 
present  four  groups.  In  later  liturgical  use  118  and  119  were  regarded  as 
Hallels  and  still  later  120-134.  The  technical  terms  of  the  Hallels  are  rmSSn, 
nin,  and  ma.  For  SSn  and  nSnn  v.  §  1 ;  for  rv  v.  §  32  (I.) ;  for  wa  v.  Pss. 
513  18W.  nm  Hiph.  imv.  2  pi.  %  [it].  Qal  is  not  in  \p,  but  only  Hiph. 
t(l)  con/ess,  a  late  usage  Ps.  32*,  cf.  Pr.  2813  I  K.  $*>• 35  =  2  Ch.  624-26. 
(2)  praise:  (a)  the  king  Ps.  4518,  the  rich  4919;  elsw.  (b)  Yahweh  in  the 
ritual:  c.  ace.  nvv  718  g2  10980  III1,  n;  11819,  '>  W  449  54s  993  1382  1428, 
1  a^D  89s;  sfs.  referring  to  mm  1850  287  3o10- 18  3518  42*- u  43*- 6  5211  5710 

674.4.6.6  7I22  7611  8612  ggll  I0g4  „  821.  28  ug7  ^L*  139^  ^jM  .  c.  S,  nwS 
332  922    IO51    IO61    107!- 8- 15- 21- 31    Il8L29    I361,    Cf.    V.2-3.26,    1   DirS    IQ647    122* 

14014;  sfs.  referring  to  Yahweh  66(?),  cf.  Is.  3818,  Pss.  752- 2  7913  ioo4  11962; 
abs.  w~\p  ~\yh  305  9712. 

§  36.  A  collection  of  songs  for  the  use  of  pilgrims  on  their  way 
to  the  three  great  feasts  was  made  in  the  middle  Greek  period. 
These  Psalms  have  in  their  titles,  "  Songs  of  Pilgrimage ." 

Pss.  120-134  have  in  their  titles  nnyon  T^.  This  is  rendered  in  ©  ySr; 
tCjv  avafiadix&v,  ode  of  ascents,  U  and  3  canticum  graduum,  gradual  psalms, 
Aq.,  S  eis  tAs  avafidcreis,  6  g-cr/xa  tG>v  avafiaaeuv.  These  variations  have  given 
rise  to  three  different  theories:  (i)  The  phrase  refers  to  the  fifteen  steps  in 
the  temple  leading  up  from  the  court  of  the  women  to  the  court  of  the  men 
of  Israel  upon  which  these  Pss.  were  chanted ;  so  Lyra,  Luther,  Horsley,  Gr. 
The  Talmud  indeed  mentions  these  Pss.  in  that  connection  (Middoth,  II.  5, 
Sukka,  51  b),  but  simply  to  compare  them  with  those  steps  on  which  the  music 
resounded  on  the  first  day  of  the  feast  of  Tabernacles ;  it  does  not  explain  the 
Pss.  as  used  thereon  {v.  De.,  p.  780).  Furthermore,  the  contents  of  these  Pss. 
were  not  suited  to  that  purpose.  They  are  not  temple  Pss.  (2)  The  term 
has  metrical  significance  indicating  the  stairlike  parallelism,  advancing  by 
steps  or  degrees ;  so  Ges.,  Koster,  De.,  Moll.,  De  W.  This  is  a  modern 
theory  based  on  the  fact  that  this  method  of  parallelism  is  frequently  used  in 
these  Pss.  But  it  is  not  used  in  them  all,  and  not  in  a  thoroughgoing  manner 
in  any ;  and  certainly  not  to  such  an  extent  as  to  give  titles  to  the  group. 
There  are  other  Pss.  which  use  this  method  of  parallelism  in  a  more  thorough- 
going manner,  v.  §  12.  (3)  The  term  refers  to  the  ascents  of  pilgrimage 
(a)  j5  and  the  ancient  Fathers  thought  of  the  ascent  from  the  Babylonian  exile. 
Ew.,  in  1839,  called  them  "the  songs  of  the  homeward  marches."  (b)  Agel- 
lius,  Herder,  Eichhorn,  Ew.  in  1866,  and  most  modern  scholars,  think  of  the 
ascents  to  the  feasts  of  the  Law.  Street  thought  that  they  were  simply  proces- 
sionals. Is.  3029  Ps.  42s  shew  that  it  was  the  custom  to  make  pilgrimages  to 
f 


lxxx  INTRODUCTION 

the  temple  with  song  and  music,  and  even  sacred  dances  and  shoutings.  We 
would  expect,  therefore,  that  a  collection  of  songs  suitable  for  this  purpose 
would  be  made.  These  songs  have  a  common  social  and  patriotic  character. 
They  are  all  hexameters  composed  of  one  or  more  hexastichs.  They  could  all 
have  been  sung  to  the  same  tone.  They  were  all  composed  in  the  Greek 
period,  except  129,  which  is  Maccabean.  It  is  probable  that  this  last  Ps.  was 
added  to  the  collection,  which  originally  consisted  of  fourteen  Pss.  made  in 
the  middle  Greek  period. 

§  37.  A  considerable  number  of  Psalms,  especially  those  of  the 
Greek  period,  did  not  find  their  way  into  any  of  the  minor  or  major 
Psalters,  but  were  used  at  last  by  the  editor  of  the  present  Psalter. 

(a)  Ps.  1,  composed  in  the  middle  Greek  period,  is  didactic  in  character. 
It  was  probably  used  for  the  first  time  by  the  editor  of  the  Psalter  as  its 
introduction. 

{b)  Ps.  33  was  probably  from  the  Maccabean  period.  It  was  given  its 
present  position  by  the  final  editor  of  the  Psalter. 

(c)  The  pseudonyms,  Pss.  88,  89,  90,  102  (v.  §  30),  were  given  their 
present  position  by  the  final  editor. 

(d)  Ps.  91  was  probably  from  the  early  Greek  period.  It  was  given  its 
present  position  because  it  was  conceived  as  a  counterpart  to  90. 

(<•)  Ps.  92  was  probably  from  the  later  Greek  period.  It  was  originally  a 
song  composed  for  liturgical  use.     Its  contents  justify  its  present  position. 

(/)  Pss.  94,  95,  were  probably  from  the  Greek  period.  They  were  given 
their  present  position  for  liturgical  reasons. 

(g)  Pss.  93,  96-100,  were  originally  one  great  advent  hymn  from  the  early 
Greek    period.      It  was  broken   up  into   little    Pss.  for   liturgical   purposes 

(f.  §  13). 

(h)  Pss.  86,  103,  145,  from  the  late  Greek  period,  were  given  their  present 
position  because  of  resemblances  to  Pss.  of  13,  and,  for  that  reason,  0  subse- 
quently crept  into  the  titles. 

(*')  Ps.  137  from  the  early  exile  was  not  taken  up  into  any  of  the  earlier 
Psalters  because  of  its  inappropriateness  for  worship.  It  was  used  by  the 
final  editor  of  the  Psalter  as  an  ancient  piece  which  he  thought  should  be 
preserved.  It  was  inserted  after  136  as  an  appropriate  place,  on  account  of 
the  historical  references  in  both  Pss. 

§  38.  The  editor  of  the  present  Psalter  used  the  two  ?najor 
Psalters  as  the  nucleus  of  his  work.  The  Babylonian  Elohistic 
Psalter,  42-83,  was  placed  in  the  middle,  and  appropriate  Pss. 
84-89  were  added  thereto.  The  first  part  was  based  on  the  Pal- 
estinian Director's  Psalter,  in  which  were  inserted  chiefly  Psalms 
from  the  Davidic  Psalter.      The  third  part  was  arranged  about 


THE   FINAL   PSALTER  lxxxi 

the  temple  Halle  Is  and  the  Pilgrim  Psalter,  to  which  were  added 
the  remaining  Psalms  of  the  Director's  Psalter  and  other  appro- 
priate Psalms,  chiefly  of  late  date.  This  work  was  accomplished 
in  the  Maccabean  period,  after  the  reorganisation  of  the  worship. 

There  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  editor  of  the  present  Psalter 
used  ©3ft,  the  prayer-book  of  the  Greek  period  in  Palestine,  as  the 
basis  of  his  work.  He  was  compelled  to  do  so  if  he  would  pro- 
duce a  collection  which  would  take  its  place  in  public  use.  He 
also  used  25,  because  that  was  the  Psalter  in  familiar  use  in 
Babylonia  and  among  the  Jews  of  the  Dispersion  all  through  the 
East.  It  was  necessary  to  combine  that  collection  with  the 
other  if  he  would  secure  his  book  a  public  use  in  the  Orient. 
He  must  indeed  enlarge  both  collections  by  the  introduction 
of  Pss.  old  and  new,  in  order  to  justify  his  task.  The  editor  was 
probably  called  to  his  work  by  public  authority  and  by  an  under- 
standing between  the  Jews  of  the  East  and  the  West.  It  was  also 
in  the  plan  to  combine  the  Pss.  used  in  synagogue  worship  with 
those  used  in  the  worship  of  the  temple.  And  so  the  Hallels  and 
the  Pilgrim  Psalter  were  made  the  nucleus  of  a  much  larger  col- 
lection, suited  for  this  purpose.  The  editor  also  added  a  number 
of  older  Pss.  of  a  national  character,  even  though  they  had  not 
previously  been  used  in  public  worship.  It  was  just  because 
he  thus  satisfied  all  interests  in  a  most  comprehensive  way,  that 
his  book  supplanted  all  others  and  at  once  attained  universal 
recognition. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  arrangement  of  the  present  Psalter  on  the 
basis  of  what  has  already  been  determined  as  to  the  several  minor  and  major 
Psalters  and  the  Pss.  not  included  in  them,  enables  us  to  trace,  to  a  great 
extent,  the  methods  of  the  editor  of  \p. 

The  first  part  of  \p  is  1-41  based  on  IB2&.  (a)  Ps.  1  was  made  the  general 
introduction  to  \p,  followed  by  2,  the  original  introduction  to  IB,  followed  by  3, 
the  first  prayer  of  IB,  ffll.  Then  came  4-6  of  IB&.  The  enigmatic  7  of  IB 
was  then  inserted.  {b)  Pss.  8-14  of  B&  are  followed  by  15  of  IB,  iJH, 
describing  the  true  citizen  of  Zion  (in  antithesis  with  the  wicked  fool  of  14), 
and  16,  a  Miktam  of  IB,  and  17,  a  prayer  of  IB.  (c)  Ps.  18,  the  ode  of 
David,  introduces  the  next  group  of  I31&,  19-22.  To  these  were  added  the  fol- 
lowing :  the  shepherd  Ps.  23  of  IB,  fft,  the  choral  24  of  IB,  ffl,  and  the  group 
of  prayers  25-28  from  IB  only,  and  of  hymns  29-30  from  IB,  JH.  (d)  To  31, 
the  prayer  of  331ft,  was  appended  32,  the  penitential  Maskil  of  IB  ;   and  ^, 


lxxxii  INTRODUCTION 

an  anon,  hymn ;  34,  an  alphabetical  hymn  of  IB  ;  and  35,  a  prayer  of  13. 
Then  follows  36  of  IB3& ;  37,  a  poem  of  IB  ;  and  38,  a  penitential  Ps.  of 
IB,  fH,  concluding  with  39-41  of  IBlft.  Thus  the  editor  of  ^  used  20  Pss. 
from  IBIct,  to  which  he  added  in  appropriate  places,  19  of  0  (including 
Ps.  2),  and  2,  anon.  Pss.  not  used  in  any  previous  Psalter. 

The  second  part  of  \p  was  42-89  based  on  IE.  (a)  42-48  I&  49  (It?)  con- 
cluding with  50  of  &,  which  was  transferred  to  this  place  for  the  purpose  of 
giving  an  appropriate  liturgical  close  to  this  group  before  the  penitential  51. 
(d)  The  group  of  IB,  51-65,  after  which  66-67  of  fH,  I3&,  followed  by  68-70 
of  IB,  followed  by  71,  peculiar  to  3B,  and  72,  the  original  conclusion  of  IB. 

(c)  The  group  of  &  73-83.  Pss.  42-83  were  taken  from  15,  which  was  thus 
inserted  bodily  in  the  middle  of  ^,  without   additions,   except   in   glosses. 

(d)  \f/  now  appended  84-85  from  1st  used  by  £H,  I33&,  then  86,  a  prayer, 
later  ascribed  to  IB,  but  really  anon,  (see  §§  27,  37),  87  from  5&,  £ft,  and 
the  pseudonyms  88,  89,  the  latter  being  the  conclusion  of  this  second  part. 

The  third  part  of  $  was  90-150,  based  on  the  Hallels  and  the  Pilgrim 
Psalter,  (a)  Ps.  90,  the  pseudonym,  was  prefixed,  91,  92,  94,  95,  anon,  were 
added,  then  the  great  advent  Ps.  93,  96-100,  was  broken  up  for  liturgical 
reasons,  101  of  IB  and  £ft,  and  102,  a  pseudon.  prayer,  follow  ;  then  103  an 
anonym.,  a  late  hymn  kindred  to  the  first  group  of  Hallels,  104-107,  which  it 
precedes.  (b)  To  the  second  group  of  Hallels,  111-117,  was  prefixed  108 
of  fH,  109  of  13,  £H,  Q&,  and  no  of  IB,  £fl.  To  these,  the  Maccabean 
Hodn  1 18  was  added,  (c)  The  group  of  Pilgrim  Psalms,  120-134,  was  placed 
in  the  midst  of  the  third  part,  preceded  by  119,  the  alphabetical  praise  of  the 
Law.  (d)  To  the  Hallels  135-136  were  added  137,  the  anon,  exilic  Ps.  of 
vengeance,  and  138  of  IB,  139,  140  of  IB,  £H,  I3&,  141  of  D,  £H,  142  Maskil 
of  D,  143  of  IB,  fH,  144,  145,  anon,  alphabetical  Pss.  (the  latter  ascribed  to  IB, 
v-  §§  27»  37)«     (e)  The  concluding  Hallels,  146-150. 

§  39.  Liturgical  assignments  appear  in  several  titles,  referring 
to  days  of  week,  kinds  of  sacrifice,  and  festivals.  These  are  so  few 
that  they  must  have  been  prefixed,  not  by  the  final  editor,  but  by 
late  scribes. 

(a)  Assignment  to  days  of  the  week  in  the  temple  service,  naan  D^S  = 
for  the  Sabbath  Day,  in  the  title  of  92,  indicates  its  assignment  for  use  on  the 
Sabbath.  <S  gives  several  other  titles  of  this  kind  :  in  24,  for  the  first  day  of 
the  week  ;  in  38,  the  Sabbath  ;  48,  for  the  second  day  of  the  week  ;  94,  for  the 
fourth  day  of  the  week  ;  93,  for  the  day  before  the  Sabbath.  Doubtless  in  late 
liturgical  use  each  day  of  the  week  had  its  appropriate  Ps.,  but  only  the  ear- 
liest assignment,  that  to  the  Sabbath,  appears  in  f^.  In  BS.  5014  "<*•  there  is 
an  account  of  these  temple  services. 

(b)  Assignments  to  sacrifices  in  the  temple.  minS  for  the  thank-offering 
is  attached  to  100.     The  Ps.  was  to  be  used  in  connection  with  that  kind  of  a 


DOXOLOGIES  lxxxiii 

sacrifice.  The  word  might  mean  for  praise,  but  it  would  be  meaningless  in 
the  midst  of  a  multitude  of  Pss.  which,  of  their  very  nature,  are  hymns  of 
praise.  T??nS  in  the  titles  of  38,  70,  is  a  Hiph.  denom.  (Lv.  22  +  68  Nu.  526) 
from  n-o?N,  the  technical  term  for  the  offering  of  the  Mincha.  It  doubtless 
means  to  make  the  Azkarah.  These  Fss.  were  designated  for  use  at  that 
sacrifice.  Doubtless  other  Pss.  were  used  on  sacrificial  occasions,  but  refer- 
ences to  their  use  did  not  make  their  way  into  the  titles  of  the  Pss. 

(c)  Assignments  to  festivals,  n*>an  najn  "VV  in  the  title  of  30  indicates  its 
assignment  to  a  festival  of  the  dedication  of  the  temple,  probably  that  of  Judas 
the  Maccabee,  B.C.  164,  when  the  temple  was  rededicated  after  its  desecration 
by  Antiochus,  1  Mace.  459  Jn.  io22.  (3  gives  in  the  title  of  Ps.  29  i^odiov  <ricr)- 
vrjs,  U  in  consummatione  tabernaculi,  referring  to  its  use  on  the  last  day  of 
Tabernacles. 

§  40.  There  are  doxologies  at  the  close  of  the  five  books  into 
which  Jfy  divides  the  Psalter.  But  these  were  designed  to  be  used 
at  the  conclusion  of  every  psalm  in  liturgical  service. 

Although  these  doxologies  are  counted  in  the  verses  of  the  Pss. 
in  MT.,  so  are  the  titles,  and  the  former  are  no  more  parts  of  the 
original  than  the  latter.  These  doxologies  are  benedictions,  or 
ascriptions  of  blessedness  to  the  God  of  Israel.  A  series  of  such 
benedictions  has  been  preserved  as  the  earliest  part  of  the  Jewish 
Liturgy  apart  from  the  Psalter.  Such  are  also  of  frequent  occur- 
rence in  the  citations  from  the  early  Rabbis  in  the  Misnayoth  and 
Beraithoth.  Though  given  usually  only  at  the  close  of  the  books, 
the  doxologies  were  really  used  at  the  conclusion  of  every  Ps.  or 
part  of  Ps.  sung  in  the  liturgy. 

These  are  the  benedictions  in  \f/ :  — 

Ps.  41 14  pNi  pi*  I  oSiyn  njn  aSiynn  |  hxw  tnSs  mrn  |  ym 

7218-19  naS  nwhoi  rwy  |  haw  >rhn   (o*nS«)  mm  j  -p-o 

jdni  }dn  I  pNn-,?a-(nN)  maa  nSdm  |  oh^h  maa  ov  j  "|nai 

89s3  |dni  jdn  I  dSi^S  I  nvn  \  -jna 

10648  J   thxfn  ijn  dSwhd  |  ^tnw  ^hn  nw  \  *n->a 

We  also  find  the  last  of  these  in  I  Ch.  1636,  where  it  was  used  as  one  of  the 
doxologies  of  the  temple  service.  It  was  not  cited  from  this  Ps.  Rather  the 
reverse  is  the  case  :  that  the  doxology  was  added  to  \f/  from  the  Chronicler ; 
for  it  could  not  have  been  used  by  the  editor  of  ^  in  the  time  of  Judas 
the  Maccabee,  the  early  part  of  the  second  century  B.C.,  because  it  divides 
the  group  of  Hallels  104-107,  which  were  designed  as  a  tetralogy  to  be  used 


lxxxiv  INTRODUCTION 

together.  These  four  doxologies  began  with  *jn3  Qal  ptc.  pass.,  Blessed, 
which  was  probably  uttered  by  a  solo  voice,  followed  by  a  metrical  pause. 
They  close  with  the  double  Amen  ;  verily,  sung  by  the  choir  or  by  the  people 
according  to  the  rubric  10648,  "  Let  all  the  people  say  A  men."  The  inter- 
vening material  is  a  trimeter  couplet,  as  4114  =  10648.  These  differ  only  in 
the  scribal  variation  71  \rz  for  7ID,  the  former  destroying  the  measure  preserved 
by  the  latter.  89s3  is  evidently  an  abridgment  of  the  same  couplet.  j21&-1* 
gives  a  double  benediction,  and  therefore  a  couplet  in  each  v.  nw  is  a  Qr. 
for  dviSn  at  the  close  of  Ps.  of  £.  rs  is  a  prosaic  insertion  at  the  expense  of 
the  measure  without  affecting  the  sense.  There  are  virtually,  therefore  only 
two  doxologies  :  — 

(1)  Blessed  be  \  Yahxoeh  the  God  of  Israel  \  From  everlasting  even  unto  everlasting. 

Amen  and  Amen. 

(2)  Blessed  be  \   Yahweh  the  God  of  Israel,  \  Doer  of  wonders  alone. 

Blessed  be  \  His  glorious  name  for  ever  \  And  may  the  whole  earth  be  filled  with 

His  glory. 

A  men  and  Amen. 

The  first  of  these  is  the  ancient  benediction,  and  it  was  probably  used  in  \p 
at  the  close  of  the  first  and  second  divisions.  The  third  division  needed  no 
such  benediction  because  it  ended  with  a  series  of  Hallel  doxologies.  The 
more  elaborate  benediction  of  7218-19  and  that  of  10648  were  appended  subse- 
quently when  \f/  was  divided  into  five  books. 

§  41.  Selah  indicates  the  abbreviation  of  a  ptalm  in  liturgical 
use,  and  marks  the  place  where  the  dosing  benediction  might  be 
sung.  The  word  itself  means  :  Lift  up  {the  voice  in  praise) .  This 
interpretation  explains  the  tradition  of  (5  that  it  called  for  an 
"  interlude,"  and  the  Palestinian  tradition,  which  represents  it 
by  the  last  word  of  the  doxology,  "forever"  The  term  was  first 
attached  to  psalms  in  the  Psalter  of  the  Mizmorim.  It  was  used 
in  the  Director's  Psalter,  and  in  the  Collection  of  the  Elohist,  and 
it  continued  in  use  at  least  until  the  time  of  the  Psalter  of  Solomon 
and  the  earliest  portions  of  the  Jewish  Liturgy. 

Selah  is  used  in  J^  71  t.  in  thirty-nine  Pss.  It  is  also  found 
3  t.  in  Hb.  3.  As  it  is  used  frequently  in  ©&,  it  was  probably 
attached  to  Hb.  3  before  the  removal  of  that  Ps.  from  ©&  to  its 
present  position.  It  is  used  in  all  the  major  Psalters,  and  in 
32,  89,  in  addition.  The  latest  uses  of  Selah  in  the  Psalter  of 
5^  are  in  666  67  from  the  early  Greek  period;  and  in  24°  89°, 
parts  of  composite  Pss.  which  belong  to  the  later  Greek  period. 


SELAH  1XXXV 

But  Selahs  continued  to  be  added  in  (3  after  the  completion  of 
that  translation.  They  also  appear  twice  in  the  Psalter  of  Solo- 
mon, and  twice  in  the  Jewish  Benedictions.  This  late  use  makes 
it  impossible  to  think  that  the  term  was  misunderstood  either  in 
the  Alexandrian  or  the  Palestinian  tradition.  The  former  translates 
the  word  by  htaxl/aXfxa,  interlude,  the  latter  by  forever.  Both  ren- 
derings depend  on  the  same  usage,  regarded  from  different  points 
of  view.  The  former  indicates  an  interlude  at  which  the  benedic- 
tion should  be  sung,  and  the  Ps.  concluded  for  that  particular 
service.  The  latter  gives  the  last  word  of  the  benediction  as  an 
abbreviation  for  the  benediction  itself.  The  word  TbO  calls  for 
the  lifting  up  of  the  voice  in  praise.  This  interpretation  satisfies 
all  the  conditions  of  the  problem,  and  is  in  accord  with  the  actual 
position  occupied  by  Selah  in  the  Psalms. 

n^p  is  used  :  (a)  at  the  close  of  a  Str. :  in  Pss.  f- 5-  9  43- 5  f  917-  21  24s- 10 
324  396.  12  464-  8- 12  475  48s  506  (before  Ef.)  15  («)  ^  596- 14  (before  lit.)  foe  £615 
675  76*.  10  774. 10.  ig  g0s  (®)  g22  s39  84*  gf  89s-  38-  46- 49  14c)4- 6-  9  (43  t.  in 
25  Pss.).  This  is  evidently  the  prevailing  use.  (6)  At  the  close  of  a  peri- 
cope  made  without  regard  to  measure  :  in  Pss.  204  2I3  32s  4914  52s  672  84s  85s 
87s  888-  n  (°m-  •>  1436  (12  t.  in  11  Pss.).  Five  of  these  Pss.  have  also  'D  at 
close  of  Str. :  32,  52,  67,  84,  87.  It  seems  unlikely  that  both  uses  came  from 
the  same  hand.  The  Selahs  at  end  of  Strs.  are  presumably  earlier  than  the 
others.  (<r)  At  the  close  of  a  gloss  :  in  Pss.  327  44°  49^  54s  55s- 20  574ot- 7  615 
62s-  9  664- 7  6820  754  818  (16  t.  in  12  Pss.).  In  more  than  half  of  these  Pss.  'D  may 
have  been  earlier  than  the  gl.,  and  may  have  stood  originally  at  the  close  of 
a  Str.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that  this  is  the  case  in  54^  62s  667  754; 
it  may  well  have  been  so  in  327  615.  The  Selah  in  682)  may  also  originally 
have  followed  the  last  1.  of  Str.  if  v.21  be  an  independent  gl.;  but  if  these  vs. 
form  one  gl.  'D  is  probably  the  insertion  of  a  later  editor.  The  use  of  the  term 
in  558  574a  is  difficult  to  explain,  as  the  gl.  is  short  and  the  'D  immediately 
precedes  the  last  1.  of  Str.  Was  the  gl.  intended  to  take  the  place  of  the 
closing  1.?  or  are  these  examples  of  displacement?  <S  gives  Selah  in  573  in 
some  codd.,  showing  a  fluctuating  usage  for  this  Ps.  It  is  possible  that  these 
Selahs  also  stood  originally  at  close  of  Str.  In  any  case  there  are  upward  of 
six  Selahs  to  be  added  to  the  list  given  above  under  (a).  There  remain 
seven  Selahs  that  seem  inseparable  from  the  glosses  which  they  follow : 
449  4916  5521  577  °29  664  818.  As  these  Selahs  cannot  be  earlier  than  their 
gls.,  the  use  must  be  a  late  one.  491G  may  be  a  gl.  of  %  or  it  may  come  from 
a  later  hand.  818  is  a  gl.  of  816,  577  of  57^.  These  Pss.  were  probably  joined 
to  their  present  mates  in  3E,  and  these  Selahs  may  all  be  due  to  IE.  So  5520  and 
629  also  preserve  late  gls.  and  late  uses  of  'D.     449  664  are  gls.  later  than  £» 


lxxxvi  INTRODUCTION 

and  their  Selahs  may  be  later  still.  The  use  of  D  in  688-  33  is  probably  due  to 
error,  v.3?  to  txt.  err.  (v.  Ps.),  and  v.8  to  err.  of  transposition,  as  'D  stands 
here  in  the  midst  of  a  citation  from  Dt.  54-6.  It  may  have  stood  originally  at 
end  of  citation,  or  else  of  Str.,  or  it  may  be  due  to  dittog.  So  many  uses  of 
the  term  in  this  Ps.  have  been  preserved  in  the  different  Versions,  that  it  is 
difficult  to  form  any  opinion  as  to  its  genuineness  in  $f .  nSo  was  used  in  all 
three  of  the  major  Psalters,  (i)  There  are  28  (26)  of  the  Selah  Pss.  in  j/ft : 
3-4.  7  (©)»  9.  20-21,  24,  39,  47-5°.  62»  66-68,  75-77,  80  (0),  82-85,  87-88, 
140,  143.  The  term  is  used  in  these  Pss. :  (a)  at  close  of  Str.:  3-4,  9,  24,  39, 
47-48,  50,  66-67,  76-77,  80,  82-84,  87»  l4°  (*9  Pss.);  and  prob.  also  in  62s 
667  6820  754  before  the  insertion  of  gl.  (/>)  Regardless  of  measure  :  204  213 
49"  672  84°  853  87s  888-  "  1436  (9  Pss.).  As  this  usage  could  hardly  have  come 
from  the  same  hand,  it  must  be  regarded  as  later  than  £ft.  (V)  At  close  of 
gloss  :  in  4916  629  66*.  These  gls.  are  all  from  time  of  35  or  later,  so  that  these 
Selahs  could  not  have  been  in  £$L  The  characteristic  use  of  D  in  the  Miz- 
morim  is  therefore  at  the  close  of  Str.,  and  the  editor  of  fH,  when  he  would 
shorten  a  Ps.,  did  so  by  leaving  off  one  or  more  Strs.  (2)  There  are  29  of 
the  Selah  Pss.  in  DK.  All  of  these  are  found  in  fH  save :  44,  46,  52,  54,  55, 
57,  59,  60,  61,  81  (10  Pss.).  In  this  collection  D  stands:  (a)  at  close  of  Sir.  : 
in  4,  9,  39,  46-47, 52,  59-60,  62,  66-68,  75-77,  80  (<S),  84,  140  (18  Pss.).  Four 
of  these  Pss.  were  not  in  fft :  46,  52,  59,  60.  Q&  seems  therefore  to  have 
continued  the  use  of  D  begun  in  jJH.  To  these  may  be  added  Pss.  54s  615, 
as  D  prob.  antedates  gl.,  and  stood  originally  at  end  of  Str.  The  use  in  55s 
574a  is  doubtful,  as  has  been  seen,  and  may  be  rather  that  of  (c)  or  (t>)  re- 
gardless of  measure:  20,  21,  49,  52,  67,  84,  85,  88  (8  Pss.).  All  of  these  are 
in  £ft  save  52  ;  but  as  it  seems  unreasonable  to  ascribe  a  regard  for  measure 
and  a  disregard  of  it  to  the  same  editor,  it  is  necessary  to  consider  this  usage 
as  later  than  £ft,  and  hence  as  due  to  Q&.  It  is  true  that  two  of  the  exam- 
ples given  in  Pss.  of  fft  are  lacking  in  ©&,  87s  1436;  but  87  has  another  Selah 
at  close  of  Str.,  so  that  the  use  of  the  term  in  v.6  must  in  any  case  be  due  to 
a  later  hand.  As  to  1436,  there  is  no  special  propriety  in  the  use  of  D  here, 
and  if  genuine,  it  may  well  be  late.  A  similar  use  is  to  be  found  in  32,  one 
of  two  Selah  Pss.  outside  the  major  Psalters,  (c)  At  the  close  of  gl. :  44s  4916 
5520  577  629  664  818.  All  of  these  Selahs  are  in  Pss.  of  E&  ;  but,  as  has  been 
shown,  they  can  hardly  be  separated  from  their  gls.  and  must  therefore  belong 
to  the  time  of  £  or  later.  The  Selahs  added  by  JB&  seem  to  have  been  placed 
with  less  regard  for  the  strophical  organisation  of  the  Ps.  than  was  shown  by 
£H,  the  musical  or  liturgical  interest  being  paramount.  It  is  worthy  of  note 
that  TB1&  has  added  musical  notes  to  the  titles  of  many  of  the  Selah  Pss., 
including  all  those  wanting  in  fft,  excepting  52,  61,  and  44  (whose  D  is  too 
late  for  B&).  (3)  Twenty-four  of  the  Selah  Pss.  appear  in  15:  44,  46-50,  52, 
54-55,  57,  59-62,  66-68,  75-77,  80-83.  AM  °f  these  Pss.  are  also  in  Q& 
save  48,  50,  82,  83,  which  are  Pss.  of  JjH  and  use  D  only  at  close  of  Str. 
There  seems  to  be  no  independent  use  of  'o  in  15  apart  from  gls.  All  the 
examples  of  'D  at  end  of  gl.  are  in  Pss.  of  IE:  449  4916  5520  577  629  664  818. 


SELAH  Ixxxvii 

These  could  hardly  have  been  earlier  than  15,  and  may  all  have  been  later. 
The  Selahs  in  4916  5520  577  629  Si8  are  possibly  due  to  15.  Those  in  44°  66* 
seem  to  be  from  a  later  hand.  It  is  possible  that  15  is  responsible  for  some 
of  the  gls.  inserted  between  Selah  and  the  last  1.  of  the  Str.  in  Pss.  of  $3ift.  If 
15  added  any  Selahs  to  his  Psalter,  he  did  so  only  at  the  close  of  gls.  Thus  of 
the  three  distinct  uses  of  'D,  one  is  characteristic  of  each  of  the  major  Psalters. 
There  remain  for  consideration  2  Pss.  excluded  from  the  major  Psalters:  32, 
89.  Both  are  Maskilim;  32  was  in  B,  and  89  was  a  pseudonym.  In  32* 
'D  stands  at  close  of  Str.  ;  so  also  in  v.7,  the  gl.  being  a  later  insertion.  In 
v.5  Selah  appears  in  the  midst  of  a  Str.,  though  at  an  appropriate  place  in 
liturgical  use.  This  Selah  is  doubtless  later  than  the  others.  The  usage  of 
the  Ps.  corresponds  with  that  of  fH,  ©&.  It  is  classed  among  the  Mizmorim 
in  <gA.  89  is  a  composite  Ps.  89^  is  from  the  time  of  the  Exile,  89°  from 
the  late  Greek  period.  This  Ps.  and  24a  are  the  only  Selah  Pss.  later 
than  the  major  Psalters.  All  of  the  Selahs  in  89  stand  at  the  close  of  Strs. 
The  'D  in  89°  and  that  at  the  close  of  24"  imply  a  continuation  of  the  use  of 
the  term  through  the  Greek  period.  Additional  late  uses  are  furnished  by 
the  Versions.  <@>  always  translates  hSd  by  5id\pa\/j.a,  interlude  (917  dia\pd\- 
/jLaros).  It  omits  the  term  from  3°  2410  4612  at  close  of  Ps.,  and  would  doubt- 
less have  done  so  in  921,  if  it  had  not  combined  9-10  in  one.  <J£  also  omits 
'D  from  8811,  but  some  cod.  H  and  P  give  it  in  8813.  <@>  gives  'D  in  57s  instead 
of  544,  and  in  6i5ct  instead  of  6i5,).  It  also  inserts  the  term  in  22  3411  5016 
684- 14  808  9415.  Of  these,  Pss.  2,  34,  94  certainly  represent  a  late  Alexan- 
drian usage.  Other  uses  are  to  be  found  in  codd.  of  H  and  P,  and  in  Psal- 
terium  Vetus.  The  Psalter  of  Solomon  uses  did\f/a\/j.a  in  1731  1810.  Many 
codd.  begin  a  new  Ps.  at  the  latter  passage.  The  use  in  1781  corresponds 
with  those  in  the  Psalter.  It  is  evident  that  this  editor  must  have  under- 
stood the  mng.  and  use  of  Selah ;  so  also  the  later  scribes  of  (§.  There  are 
additional  uses  of  the  term  in  the  Jewish  Liturgy.  The  Selahs  in  the  third 
and  eighteenth  benedictions  of  Shemoneh  Esreh  or  Eighteen  Benedictions 
stand  in  the  earliest  portions  of  the  Liturgy,  and  are,  in  all  likelihood,  genuine 
and  ancient. 

nSo  is  imv.  SSd  to  lift  up  (the  voice  in  praise),  cf.  Ps.  685  and  it  indicates 
that  a  benediction  might  be  sung  after  the  pericope  thus  designated.  The 
explanations  of  Ew.  "  loud,"  a  strengthening  of  the  voice  or  instruments, 
De.  forte,  as  opposed  to  piano,  Bo.  "a  playing  with  full  power,"  do  not  suit 
all  the  passages  where  it  is  used,  and  imply  a  use  of  instrumental  music 
which  is  not  justified  by  the  titles  of  the  Pss.,  or  by  their  contents.  The 
explanation  of  Ges.,  after  Rosenmuller,  deriving  it  from  n^D  =  rest,  be  quiet, 
and  thinking  of  a  pause,  is  conjectural,  and  does  not  explain  the  problem. 
Fiirst,  followed  by  Ley,  derives  from  nSo  =  separate,  and  thinks  it  indicates 
section.  None  of  these  theories  explain  the  Jewish  traditions.  2,  6,  usually 
follow  <&  in  the  rendering  5id\pa\/xa.  V  does  not  translate,  but  omits.  &  usu- 
ally abbreviates.  <5  5id\pa\ixa  indicates  an  interlude,  but  does  not  imply  its 
purpose.     Aq.  del  followed  by  Quinta,  Sexta,  J5  occasionally,  and  always  by 


lxxxviii  INTRODUCTION 

3  semper,  iugiter,  also  T&  and  Jewish  tradition  cannot  be  explained  by  any 
of  the  older  theories.  A  hint  is,  however,  given  by  Jerome  in  his  letter  to 
Marcella  (Ep.  28),  where  he  compares  the  use  of  the  word  with  that  of  Amen 
or  Shalom  to  mark  the  end  of  a  passage  and  confirm  its  contents.  So  Jacub 
of  Edessa,  as  cited  by  Bar  Heb.  in  his  Com.  on  Ps.  io1  in  a  passage  quoted 
but  not  understood  by  Ba.  (Lagarde's  Praetermissorum,  p.  109).  The  del  = 
oSy  was  an  abbreviation  of  the  second  line  of  the  couplet  of  the  Benediction 
oS)j?  "i;'i  Dsi>r:,  used  for  the  benediction  itself,  which  was  to  be  sung  at  this 
place.  This  interpretation  for  Selah  agrees  with  and  harmonises  the  ancient 
traditions,  the  Alexandrian  and  the  Palestinian  ;  it  is  in  accordance  with  the 
most  natural  explanation  of  the  Hebrew  word,  and  it  accounts  for  every  in- 
stance of  its  use  as  standing  at  the  close  of  a  pericope  or  liturgical  selection. 

§  42.  The  Psalter  in  the  middle  of  the  second  century,  shortly 
before  its  translation  into  Greek,  was  divided  into  five  books,  after 
the  division  of  the  Pentateuch,  and  was  numbered  as  130  psalms, 
with  variation  of  numbering  to  suit  the  variations  needed  for  the 
three  years'  course  of  Sabbath  readings. 

The  division  of  the  Psalter  into  five  books  was  doubtless  made  to 
accord  with  the  five-fold  division  of  the  Law,  and  was  in  some  way 
connected  with  the  five  great  feasts  of  Judaism.  Subsequently  the 
Five  Rolls  were  arranged  in  the  same  way  and  assigned  for  read- 
ing at  these  feasts.  The  second  division  of  the  Psalter  was  divided 
into  two  at  72,  and  a  doxology  was  inserted.  The  third  division 
of  the  Psalter  was  also  divided  at  106  and  a  doxology  added. 

The  Pss.  of  |^  are  150  in  number.  But,  as  we  have  seen,  the  numbering 
in  |fcj  differs  from  that  in  <S.  This  has  caused  endless  confusion  in  citations, 
as  Jewish  and  Protestant  Vrss.  and  usage  follow  |§;  Roman  Catholics,  Greeks, 
and  Orientals  @.  But  neither  $  nor  @  number  according  to  the  originals. 
The  arrangement  of  the  numbering  of  both  was  for  liturgical  purposes.  The 
differences  appear:  (1)  at  Ps.  10  (|^),  which  in  6  goes  with  9,  but  in  $ 
is  separated.  This  makes  ©  number  one  less  than  |Q  until  we  come  to 
(2)  114  ($|),  which  is  combined  with  115  to  make  113  of  <S.  But  this 
difference  is  at  once  adjusted  in  (3)  116  of  $?,  which  combines  114,  115  of 
<@.  The  difference  of  one  now  continues  till  (4)  147  of  |§,  which  combines 
146,  147  of  <5.  The  concluding  Pss.,  148-150,  have  the  same  number.  We 
then  have  in  four  cases  variations  which  make  it  possible  to  number  the  Pss. 
from  148  to  152.  These  variations  were  probably  indicated  in  Mss.  which 
lie  at  the  basis  of  |^  and  <S.  They  remind  us  of  the  153  lections  of  the 
Thorah,  the  oldest  division  of  sections,  made  for  a  three  years'  course  of 
Sabbath  readings.  It  is  probable  that  the  numbering  of  the  Pss.  and  the 
variations  recognised  was  for  the  same  purpose.     Each  reading  of  the  Thorah 


EVOLUTION   OF  THE   PSALTER  Ixxxix 

had  its  accompanying  Ps.  It  should  be  noted  that  (3  adds  Ps.  151,  which 
evidently  is  a  late  composition,  probably  to  give  an  additional  variation 
for  Sabbath  readings.  It  was  originally  written  in  Hebrew,  and  describes  the 
anointing  of  David  and  his  combat  with  Goliath.  It  was  probably  of  Macca- 
bean  origin. 

§  43.  The  Psalter  represents  many  centuries  of  growth  in  the 
historical  origin  doth  of  its  Psalms,  extending  from  the  time  of 
David  to  the  Maccabean  period,  and  of  the  various  minor  and 
major  Psalters  through  which  they  passed,  from  the  early  Persian 
to  the  late  Greek  period,  before  the  present  Psalter  was  finally 
edited  and  arranged,  in  the  middle  of  the  second  century  B.C. 

We  may  assign  seven  Pss.  in  their  original  form  to  the  early  He- 
brew monarchy,  before  Jehoshaphat :  7,  13,  18,  23,  24^  6oa  no; 
seven  to  the  middle  monarchy  :  3,  20,  21,  27°  45,  58,  61  ;  and  thir- 
teen to  the  late  monarchy  :  2, 19"  28,  360  46,  52,  54,  55,  56,  60^  62, 
72,  87  ;  thus  twenty-seven  to  the  period  of  the  Hebrew  monarchy. 
During  the  Exile  thirteen  were  composed  :  42-43,  63,  74,  77°  79, 
816  82,  84,  88,  89*  90,  137,  142.  In  the  early  Persian  period  there 
was  a  great  outburst  of  psalmody.  As  many  as  thirty-three  Pss. 
were  composed:  4,  6,  9-10,  n,   12,  14   (=53),  16,  17,  22,  25, 

31,  32,  34,  35,  37,  38>  39,  4*,  Sf  59,  64,  69"  70  (=  40")  75,  7$, 
78,  80,  S3,  101,  109"  140,  143,  144°.  This  was  due  to  several 
influences.  The  conquest  of  Babylon  by  Cyrus,  which  aroused 
the  enthusiasm  of  the  exilic  Isaiah,  called  forth  lyric  songs.  The 
rebuilding  of  the  altar  and  temple,  with  the  restoration  of  the 
worship  in  Jerusalem,  as  it  was  accompanied  by  prophetic  voices, 
so  also  by  those  of  lyric  poets.  The  struggles  of  the  pious  with 
the  unfaithful  in  the  community,  and  with  the  neighbouring  little 
nations,  whose  jealousy  and  hatred  constantly  interfered  with  the 
growth  and  prosperity  of  the  people  in  Jerusalem,  also  naturally 
expressed  itself  in  song.  Toward  the  close  of  this  period  the  col- 
lection of  Mikta?ni?n,  or  golden  poems,  was  made  after  the  example 
of  the  older  collection  of  the  book  of  Yashar.  To  the  middle 
Persian  period,  the  times  of  Nehemiah,  we  may  assign  sixteen  Pss.  : 
5,  8,  15,  26,  29,  30,  40"  47,  51,  st  65,  66a  69b  138,  139"  141  j  to 
the  late  Persian  period,  in  which  internal  and  external  trouble  was 
renewed,  eleven  Pss. :  27*  36*  44,  48,  49,  50,  68,  8ia  85,  89"  i02a. 
In  this  last  period  the  collection  of  Maskilim,  or  religious  medita- 


xc 


INTRODUCTION 


THE  EVOLUTION  OF 


Dates. 

Pss.  APART. 

MlKTAM. 

Maskil. 

David. 

Early  Monarchy. 

6oa. 

7,  13,  18,  23,  24" 
6oa    no. 

Middle  Monarchy. 

58. 

45- 

3,  20,  21,  27°  58, 
61. 

Late  Monarchy. 

56. 

52,54,55- 

2,  I9«  28,  36*52,  54, 
55,  56,  60*  62,  72. 

Exile. 

90.  137- 

42-43, 74, 
88,       89" 
142. 

63,  142. 

Early  Persian. 

16,  57«  59. 

32,  53  (  = 
14),  78. 

4,6,9-10,  11,  12,  14 

(  =  53).  16,17,22,25, 
31.32,34,35.37.38, 
39,  40*  (  =  70),  41, 
57a  59,  64,  69*  101, 
io9«  140,  143,  i44«. 

Middle  Persian. 

5,  8,  15,  26,  29,  30, 
40«  51,  57"  65,  69" 
138,  i39«  141. 

Late  Persian. 

890     102°. 

44. 

27"  36",  68. 

Early  Greek. 

86,  91,  95, 

93   +  96- 
100,    108, 

H5- 

Later  Greek. 

i,  196  24° 

77"  89°  92, 
94,       103, 
119,     139" 
i44>. 

Maccabean. 

33,      i°2ft, 
1096     118, 
I39c- 

The  final  collection  of  the  Present 
The  division  into  five 


EVOLUTION  OF  THE   PSALTER 


XC1 


THE   PSALTER. 


Asaph. 

KORAH. 

MlZMOR. 

Director. 

Elohist. 

Hallel. 

Pilgrim. 

n 

a" 
0 

O* 

3 

M 

=r 
0 
3 
® 

+ 

^ 

w 
n 
nT 
0 

0' 
3 
c/i 

O 

3 
P 

h 

3 

a 

+ 

n> 
?T 
0 

0" 
3 
t/i 

0 
3 

tt 

S* 

3 

5 

l 

3* 

£L 

0 

5 
+ 

45- 

46,  87. 

74,  77a  79, 
8i&  82. 

42-43,84. 

75,  76,  78, 
80,  83. 

47- 

66«. 

5°,49(?). 

44,48,85. 

8i°. 

73- 

67. 

66\ 

7»- 

104-107, 

IU-117, 

i35-!36, 
146, 148, 
150. 

I20-I28, 

130-134. 

147,  149. 

129. 

Psalter  out  of  all  the  above  material, 
books  and  150  Psalms. 


XC11  INTRODUCTION 

tions,  was  made ;  also  ©  was  edited  as  a  prayer-book  for  use  in 
the  synagogues,  and  soon  after  f&,  more  ornate  in  character.  The 
conquest  of  Alexander  introduced  the  Greek  period,  which  in  its 
early  part  was  advantageous  to  the  Jews.  At  the  beginning  of 
this  period  the  great  royal  advent  Ps.  was  composed,  93,  96-100, 
and  soon  after  eight  other  Pss.  :  66''  67,  73,  86,  91,  95,  108,  145. 
The  Psalter  of  &  was  prepared  in  Babylonia  ;  and  later  in  Palestine 
the  Psalter  of  the  Mizmorim,  the  first  of  the  major  Psalters,  as  a 
hymn-book  for  use  in  the  synagogues.  Toward  the  close  of  this 
period  ©&  was  made,  using  all  the  earlier  Psalters,  as  a  prayer- 
book  for  the  synagogues,  and  directions  were  given  for  musical 
rendering.  The  later  Greek  period  was  troublous  in  Palestine, 
owing  to  the  constant  strife  between  the  kings  of  Egypt  and  Syria, 
and  to  internal  dissensions  resulting  therefrom.  But  in  the  East 
the  Jews  were  less  troubled.  There  in  the  early  part  of  this  period 
1£  was  prepared  for  synagogue  use.  To  this  period  we  may  ascribe 
eleven  Pss. :  1,  196  24"  71,  77*  89*  92,  94,  103,  139''  144'',  and  the 
elaborate  praise  of  the  Law,  119.  In  addition  fourteen  Pilgrim 
Pss.,  120-128,  130-134,  were  composed,  and  the  Pilgrim  Psalter 
collected  in  this  period.  Also  sixteen  of  the  Hallels,  104-107, 
111-117,  135-136,  146,  148,  150,  were  composed  and  edited  in 
a  collection.  The  Maccabean  period  began  with  the  persecution 
of  Antiochus  and  the  rise  of  the  Maccabees  at  the  head  of  the 
patriotic  party.  They  gradually  triumphed,  and  organised  the 
Maccabean  dynasty  and  kingdom.  To  this  period  we  may  ascribe 
Pss.  33,  1026  109''  118,  139°;  also  129  of  the  Pilgrim  Psalter,  and 
147,  149  of  the  Hallels.  After  the  rededication  of  the  temple  the 
present  Psalter  was  prepared,  combining  Pss.  appropriate  for  use 
in  the  synagogue  and  in  the  temple,  and  using  all  the  previous 
Psalters,  especially  D,  D£,  IS,  the  Hallels,  and  the  Pilgrim  Pss. 
The  collection  was  divided  into  three  books.  Toward  the  close 
of  the  second  century  the  final  editor  divided  it  into  five  books 
and  150  Pss.,  in  accordance  with  the  same  divisions  of  the  Law, 
allowing  for  variations  in  usage. 


CANONICITY  xciil 


C.     CANONICITY   OF  THE   PSALTER. 

§  44.  The  Psalter  was  the  first  of  the  Writings  to  win  canonical 
recognition,  and  it  has  maintained  this  recognition  in  the  unanimous 
consent  of  Jew  and  Christian  until  the  present  day.  The  testimony 
of  representative  Jews  and  Christians  in  all  ages  is  that  the  Psalter 
is  a  holy  Book,  divinely  authoritative,  the  norm  and  guide  of  worship 
and  religious  experience. 

The  Pss.  were  collected  for  the  purpose  of  public  worship  in  the 
synagogues  and  in  the  temple,  some  being  appropriate  for  the 
latter,  but  the  most  of  them  evidently  more  suitable  for  the  former. 
There  were  several  minor  Psalters,  and  then  later  several  major 
Psalters,  long  before  the  present  Psalter  was  edited.  These  col- 
lections were  all  made  for  use  in  public  worship,  and  it  is  alto- 
gether probable  that  each  one,  as  it  was  adopted,  gained  recognition 
as  canonical.  This  gave  the  Pss.  their  first  place  in  the  Canon  of 
the  Writings,  though  they  did  not  receive  their  final  form  until 
a  long  time  after  others  of  the  Writings  had  been  composed  and 
had  also  been  received  into  the  Canon.  The  division  of  the 
Psalter  into  five  Books  is  doubtless  based  on  the  same  division  of 
the  Pentateuch,  and  it  is  probable  that  the  numbering  of  the  Pss. 
had  a  similar  motive  to  the  arrangement  of  the  Pentateuch  for 
a  three  years'  course  of  Sabbath  readings.  These  liturgical  motives 
are  strong  indirect  evidences  of  canonical  recognition. 

The  Psalter  was  used  in  the  synagogues  in  the  time  of  Jesus  and  his  apostles 
alongside  of  the  Law  and  the  Prophets,  and  is  quoted  by  him  and  his  apostles 
as  prophetic  and  authoritative  (Lk.  204*2  2444  Acts  I20),  and  used  by  them  in 
worship  (Mt.  263)  Acts  1625  James  513  I  Cor.  1426  Eph.  519  Col.  316).  The 
Jews  have  always  used  the  Pss.  in  the  worship  of  the  synagogue  and  still  con- 
tinue its  use  (Schiller  Szinessy,  in  Prayer  Book  Interleaved,  p.  255).  The 
Christian  Church  in  all  its  branches  has  used  the  Pss.  as  the  basis  of  its  ritual 
and  the  common  expression  of  divine  worship.  It  is  a  tradition  of  the  Church 
of  Antioch  that  Ignatius  introduced  antiphonal  singing  of  the  Pss.  (Socrates, 
Hist.  Eccl.  68).  At  all  events  it  is  certain  that  the  use  of  the  Pss.  in  the  syna- 
gogues passed  over  into  the  Christian  churches  in  all  parts  of  the  world  (Tert. 
Apol.  c.  39  ;  Jerome,  Ep.  Marcella,  xlvi. ),  and  has  continued  in  unbroken 
succession  to  the  present  time.  In  the  celebration  of  the  Eucharist,  the  most 
sacred  institution  of  the  Christian  religion,  the  use  of  appropriate  Pss.  has 
continued  as  an  essential  part  of  the  liturgy  from  the  most  primitive  times, 


XC1V  INTRODUCTION 

doubtless  based  on  their  use  at  the  Jewish  feasts,  especially  the  Passover. 
Chrysostom  thus  describes  the  use  of  the  Pss.  in  his  day :  "  If  we  keep  vigil  in 
the  church,  David  comes  first,  last,  and  midst.  If  early  in  the  morning,  we 
seek  for  the  melody  of  hymns,  first,  last,  and  midst  is  David  again.  If  we  are 
occupied  with  the  funeral  solemnities  of  the  departed,  if  virgins  sit  at  home 
and  spin,  David  is  first,  last,  and  midst.  ...  In  monasteries,  amongst  those 
holy  choirs  of  angelic  armies,  David  is  first,  midst,  and  last.  In  the  convents 
of  virgins,  where  are  bands  of  them  that  imitate  Mary ;  in  the  deserts,  where 
are  men  crucified  to  this  world  and  having  their  conversations  with  God,  first, 
midst,  and  last  is  he  "  (Neale  and  Littledale,  Com.  on  the  Psalms,  p.  i).  In 
the  Ambrosian  rite,  still  used  in  Milan,  the  Psalter  is  recited  at  the  hours  of 
prayer,  once  a  fortnight  ;  in  the  Roman  or  Gregorian  rite  once  a  week :  Pss. 
1-109  at  Matins,  1 10-150  at  Vespers;  and  fixed  Pss.  are  assigned  for  use  at 
Lauds,  Prime,  Tierce,  Sext,  Nones,  and  Complines.  So  also  the  Benedictine 
rite  prescribes  a  weekly  recitation  of  the  Pss.,  and  this  usage  has  been  fol- 
lowed by  monastic,  mendicant,  and  other  religious  orders  in  the  Roman  Church. 
In  the  Greek  Church  the  Psalter  is  recited  once  a  week,  except  in  Lent,  when 
it  is  recited  twice.  Similar  uses  are  in  the  Coptic,  Syrian,  Armenian,  Abyssin- 
ian, and  other  Churches.  Proper  Pss.,  or  parts  of  Pss.,  are  also  assigned  for 
the  Mass  in  all  rites  ;  some  fixed,  others  varying  with  the  kind  of  Mass  or  the 
feasts  and  fasts  of  the  ecclesiastical  year.  The  Church  of  England,  when  it 
condensed  the  hours  of  prayer  into  two,  matins  and  vespers,  arranged  the 
Pss.  for  recitation  once  a  month,  besides  assigning  proper  Pss.  for  use  daily, 
or  for  the  varying  sacred  days  of  the  ecclesiastical  year  at  Holy  Communion. 
The  Lutheran  and  Reformed  Churches  also  make  the  Psalter  an  essential  part 
of  their  Liturgies.  In  the  Reformed  Churches  in  the  sixteenth  and  seven- 
teenth centuries,  and,  in  some  of  them  even  in  the  eighteenth  and  nineteenth 
centuries,  the  Psalter  was  the  only  hymn-book  apart  from  a  few  paraphrases 
of  Holy  Scripture.  The  multiplication  of  Christian  hymns  in  the  eighteenth 
and  nineteenth  centuries  brought  about  a  gradual  disuse  of  the  Psalter  in  Great 
Britain  and  America  in  several  religious  denominations,  but  toward  the  close 
of  the  century  a  reaction  began  in  the  form  of  responsive  readings  of  the 
Psalter,  for  which  purpose  many  arrangements  have  been  prepared. 

§  45.  The  canonicity  of  the  Psalter  is  attested  by  its  contents. 
Its  religious,  doctrinal,  and  ethical  materials  give  evidence  to  its 
holy  character  as  coming  from  God  and  leading  to  God. 

The  Psalter  contains,  in  the  usual  numbering,  150  Psalms,  of 
great  variety  of  form  and  content ;  but  all  within  the  limits  of  a 
hymn-book  and  prayer-book,  composed  for  religious  worship, 
public  in  the  synagogue  and  temple,  and  private  in  the  house- 
hold and  in  the  closet.  It  is  therefore  by  its  very  nature  essentially 
religious,  and  indeed  in  the  lyric  form.     (A)   Its  religion  is  at 


RELIGIOUS   CONTENTS  XCV 

once  simple  and  comprehensive,  equally  appropriate  to  all  classes 
and  conditions  of  mankind  in  all  nations  and  in  all  ages.  It  ex- 
presses the  child-like  yearnings  of  the  simple-minded,  and  the 
loftiest  aspirations  of  the  mature  man  of  God.  It  plays  upon  all 
the  chords  of  the  human  soul,  and  evokes  from  each  and  all  that 
which  is  most  appropriate  to  union  and  communion  of  the  indi- 
vidual or  the  community  with  God. 

Many  of  the  Pss.  in  their  original  form  were  composed  as  an  expression 
of  private  devotion.  These  features  remained  even  after  they  were  adapted 
by  editorial  revision  for  use  in  the  synagogues.  Many  others  were  composed 
for  use  in  public  worship  in  the  synagogues,  to  express  the  worship  of  the 
congregation.  In  the  synagogue  the  ceremonies  of  religion  were  reduced 
to  a  minimum,  and  therefore  such  ceremonies  do  not  appear  in  these  two 
classes  of  Pss.,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  most  of  them  were  composed 
long  after  the  fully  developed  ritual  of  the  Priest's  code  had  become  fixed  in 
usage  in  the  temple  service.  Only  a  few  of  the  Pss.  were  composed  for  or 
even  adapted  to  worship  in  the  temple,  and  these,  especially  the  Hallels,  were 
songs  of  praise  suited  to  the  ritual  of  the  thank-offerings,  votive  offerings,  or 
whole  burnt  offerings.  These  offerings  are  mentioned  in  appropriate  places 
in  the  Psalter.  The  sin-offerings  and  the  trespass-offerings  do  not  appear, 
even  in  the  Penitential  Pss.,  doubtless  because  these  offerings  were  not  accom- 
panied with  sacred  song.  Furthermore,  local  and  temporal  references  were 
gradually  eliminated  by  editorial  revision  from  the  older  Pss.,  making  them 
more  and  more  appropriate  for  worship.  Therefore  the  Psalter  became  a 
hymn-book  and  prayer-book,  having  so  little  of  the  ceremonial  side  of  reli- 
gion that  it  was  lifted  above  all  that  was  local,  temporal,  and  occasional,  and 
made  appropriate  for  the  worship  of  all  places,  all  times,  and  all  occasions 
and  persons. 

(E)  The  doctrines  of  the  Psalter  do  not  appear  in  a  dogmatic 
form,  demanding  acceptance  by  the  intellect  and  will ;  but  in  a 
concrete  form,  expressing  the  faith  already  entertained  or  estab- 
lished. From  this  point  of  view,  while  on  the  one  side  the  doc- 
trines are  not  so  complete  in  detail  and  not  so  clearly  denned  in 
their  relations  as  in  the  Prophets,  yet  on  the  other  side  they  rise 
to  the  loftiest  heights  in  their  conception  of  God,  sink  to  the  lowest 
depths  in  searching  the  soul  of  man,  expand  to  the  greatest  breadths 
in  their  comprehension  of  the  union  of  God  and  man  and  the 
world  in  the  divine  ideals  of  redemption.  For  these  reasons  the 
Psalter  is  the  nearest  to  the  NT.  of  all  the  writings  of  the  OT. 
g 


XCVl  INTRODUCTION 

Few  of  the  Pss.  are  didactic,  and  these  are  ethical  rather  than  dogmatic. 
The  Pss.  are  chiefly  lyrics,  expressing  religious  emotions,  experiences,  aspira- 
tions. They  are  contemplative  or  intuitive,  using  the  religious  imagination 
and  fancy  rather  than  the  logical  faculty  and  the  reasoning  powers.  They 
are  also  with  few  exceptions  quite  limited  in  extent,  and  doctrines  appear  in 
them  in  bold,  graphic,  realistic  statement,  in  detached  form,  and  out  of  con- 
nection with  any  system  of  belief.  The  Psalter  represents  in  its  various  Pss. 
many  different  periods  of  Hebrew  Literature.  The  temporal  characteristics 
have  to  a  great  extent  been  obscured  by  editorial  revisions;  but  at  the  same 
time  these  are  in  fact,  though  not  on  the  surface,  really  embedded  in  the  Pss., 
so  that  it  is  quite  possible  to  distinguish  the  several  stages  in  the  development 
of  doctrine  in  correspondence  with  those  that  appear  in  the  Prophets. 

The  doctrine  of  God  is  especially  rich  in  the  attributes.  The  kindness, 
goodness,  and  love  of  God  stand  out  more  distinctly  in  the  Psalter  than  in 
any  other  part  of  the  OT.  The  vindicatory,  saving  righteousness  of  Yahweh 
and  His  discriminating  justice  are  no  less  prominent.  The  doctrine  of  creation 
appears  in  simple,  beautiful,  poetic  conceptions,  which  might  have  modified 
the  rigid  dogma  of  the  theologians,  based  on  the  early  chapters  of  Genesis, 
if  the  theologians  had  been  sufficiently  comprehensive  in  their  study  of  the 
Bible  to  take  account  of  it.  It  is  the  divine  providence  in  history  as  well 
as  the  experience  of  the  individual  upon  which  religious  poets  delight  to 
dwell. 

The  doctrine  of  man  is  especially  prominent  in  the  Psalter  from  the  very 
fact  that  the  Pss.  give  expression  to  human  experience,  whether  of  the  indi- 
vidual, or  of  the  nation.  This  is  well  expressed  by  Calvin.  "  This  Book  not 
unreasonably  am  I  wont  to  style  an  anatomy  of  all  parts  of  the  soul,  for  no 
one  will  discover  in  himself  a  single  feeling  whereof  the  image  is  not  reflected 
in  this  mirror.  Nay  all  griefs,  sorrows,  doubts,  fears,  hopes,  cares,  and  anxie- 
ties, in  short  all  those  tumultuous  agitations  wherewith  the  minds  of  men  are 
wont  to  be  tossed,  the  Holy  Ghost  hath  here  represented  to  the  life.  The 
rest  of  Scripture  contains  the  commands  which  God  gave  to  His  servants  to 
be  delivered  unto  us.  But  here  the  prophets  themselves  holding  converse  with 
God,  inasmuch  as  they  lay  bare  all  their  inmost  feelings,  invite  or  impel  every 
one  of  us  to  self-examination,  that  of  all  the  infirmities  to  which  we  are  liable 
and  all  the  sins  of  which  we  are  so  full  none  may  remain  hidden." 

The  doctrine  of  redemption  is  richly  unfolded,  especially  on  its  experi- 
mental side,  in  the  personal  deliverance  of  the  individual  from  sin  and  evil. 
The  Penitential  Pss.  have  always  been  and  still  are  found  to  be  the  most 
suitable  expression  of  Christian  penitence  and  the  joy  of  divine  forgiveness. 
The  elegies  express  the  depths  of  woe  that  surge  up  about  the  reflective  soul 
in  all  ages  as  he  contemplates  the  brevity  of  life,  the  limitations  of  man,  and 
the  certainty  and  speedy  approach  of  death.  The  Pss.  of  expostulation  ex- 
press, though  often  in  a  daring  way,  venturing  close  upon  the  brink  of  irrev- 
erence and  despair,  the  writhings  of  the  soul  under  the  sense  of  injustice  and 
wrongs  that  the  faithful  servants  of  God  have  so  often  to  suffer  in  this  life. 


RELIGIOUS  CONTENTS  XCV11 

The  Pilgrim  Pss.  are  the  most  suitable  expression  of  social  religion  that  have 
ever  been  composed.  The  Guest  Pss.  sound  a  note  of  religious  joy  in  the 
communion  with  God  that  has  been  attained  by  no  other  poets  so  thoroughly 
well. 

In  the  Psalter  the  Messianic  ideal  is  in  some  respects  richer  than  in  the 
Prophets.  The  royal  Messiah,  the  son  of  David,  appears  in  most  vivid, 
dramatic  situations  in  Pss.  2  and  no,  which  find  their  only  realisation  in  the 
resurrection,  enthronement,  and  reign  of  Jesus  Christ.  The  suffering  servant 
of  Pss.  22,  40,  69,  transcends  that  of  Is.  53  in  his  vivid,  lifelike  picture  of  the 
suffering  Saviour.  The  royal  Pss.  have  ever  been  used  in  the  Church  as  the 
most  suitable  expression  of  her  longing  for  the  second  advent  of  her  Lord. 
The  future  life  of  man  in  a  state  of  redemption  after  death  is  more  clearly 
depicted  in  Pss.  16,  49,  73,  than  anywhere  else  in  the  OT.  It  is  not  sur- 
prising therefore  that  Jesus  and  his  apostles  used  the  Psalter  so  much  as 
reflecting  and  depicting  the  Messianic  redemption. 

(C)  The  ethics  of  the  Psalter  are  relatively  not  so  high  as  in  the 
Wisdom  Literature,  which  is  essentially  ethical.  And  yet  from  the 
point  of  view  of  ethical  experience  they  are  rich  enough  to  give 
very  important  complementary  material  to  the  Law,  the  Prophets, 
and  even  Hebrew  Wisdom.  The  ethics  of  the  Law  are  summed 
up  in  the  terse  and  comprehensive  experience  depicted  in  Pss.  1, 
19,  while  Ps.  119  presents  the  Law  as  a  mirror  in  which  the  pious 
man  sees  himself  and  others  in  such  a  wondrous  variety  of  ethical 
experience  that  he  is  overwhelmed  with  a  sense  of  a  divine  presence 
and  influence.  The  ethics  of  the  Prophets  are  summed  up  in  that 
chaste  and  beautiful  guest  of  Yahweh  of  Ps.  15. 

All  along  the  line  of  religion,  doctrines,  and  morals  the  contents 
of  the  Pss.  have  always  been  found  to  be  just  what  they  are  to- 
day ;  such  unique,  exalted,  comprehensive,  and  satisfactory  expres- 
sions in  lyric  form  of  what  mankind  needs  for  union  and  communion 
with  God,  that  men  in  all  ages  and  countries  have  been  convinced 
that  the  Psalter  is  a  divinely  inspired  Book,  a  rule  of  faith  and  life. 

§  46.  The  only  objections  to  the  canonicity  of  the  Psalter  seriously 
entertained  are  based  on  a  number  of  imprecations  upon  enemies 
and  protestations  of  righteousness  on  the  part  of  suffering  servants 
of  God.  These  objections  are  invalid  because  they  fail  to  appre- 
hend that  these  imprecations  and  protestations  belong  necessarily  to 
earlier  stages  of  religion  and  to  certain  historic  situations  where 
they  have  their  essential  propriety. 


xcviii  INTRODUCTION 

These  objections  to  the  canonicity  of  the  Psalter  are  quite  mod- 
ern. They  have  arisen  in  the  Protestant  world  in  connection  with 
the  stress  laid  upon  the  doctrine  of  justification  by  faith  only, 
which  makes  any  form  of  self-righteousness  impossible ;  and  by  the 
growth  of  individualism,  with  its  liberty  of  conscience  and  opinion, 
which  is  necessarily  opposed  to  any  kind  of  persecution  or  violence, 
even  toward  the  enemies  of  religion. 

The  protestations  of  righteousness  are  in  the  Pss.  which  appeal 
to  God  for  help  from  sufferings  of  body  or  of  mind  in  connection 
with  the  experience  of  injustice  and  wrong.  These  protestations 
do  not  imply  sinless  perfection,  or  absolute  conformity  to  the 
divine  ideal  of  conduct,  for  they  not  infrequently  are  connected 
with  the  confession  of  sin  ;  they  are  rather  protestations  of  fidelity 
to  God  and  His  religion,  which  is  essentially  righteousness  (cf. 
Gn.  156  Hb.  24).  Such  fidelity  demands  divine  interposition  on 
its  behalf,  vindication  from  enemies  and  deliverance  from  sufferings 
and  trouble.  Though  these  protestations  sometimes  rise  from 
plaintive  expostulation  with  God  to  complaint  of  injustice  and 
wrong,  which  seem  in  their  intensity  of  passion  to  the  modern 
mind  to  come  close  to  irreverence,  they  do  not  really  go  so  far,  for 
it  is  in  these  very  Pss.  that  are  found  the  most  sublime  conceptions 
of  the  righteousness  and  justice  of  God,  and  it  is  to  their  God  that 
they  appeal  in  sublime  confidence  as  they  plead  in  intense  and 
agonising  petitions  which  will  not  be  refused. 

It  is  not  without  significance  that  the  strongest  protestations  of  this  kind 
are  found  in  Pss.  22,  40,  69,  which  are  usually  regarded  as  Messianic,  and 
which  Jesus  himself  used  to  express  his  own  feelings  in  his  most  trying  hours, 
and  which  his  apostles  regarded  as  most  aptly  suited  to  the  situation  of  the 
Passion  of  their  Lord.  It  is  quite  true  that  Jesus  Christ  was  exceptional  in 
his  righteousness ;  but  that  does  not  in  any  way  impair  their  propriety  of 
use  for  others,  for  Jesus  and  his  apostles  used  these  Pss.  as  familiar  to  them 
from  the  liturgical  use  of  the  synagogue  and  the  home,  and  thereby  gave  their 
sanction  to  the  legitimacy  of  this  experience  for  suffering  Christians.  Not- 
withstanding the  fact  that  these  protestations  of  righteousness  seem  to  be 
inconsistent  with  the  experience  of  sin  and  ill-desert  that  are  felt  by  many 
of  the  best  of  men,  yet  there  is  no  real  inconsistency  between  general  fidelity 
to  God  and  occasional  faults  and  failures.  The  Christian  Church,  in  the  greater 
part  of  its  history  and  in  the  greater  part  of  its  membership  at  the  pres- 
ent time,  finds  no  inconsistency  between  the  experience  of  merit  and  the 


OBJECTIONS  TO  CANONICITY  xcix 

experience  of  sin.  Such  a  sense  of  inconsistency  is  a  peculiarity  of  the  Protes- 
tant world.  And  even  among  Protestants  it  is  the  common  experience,  not- 
withstanding the  recognition  of  personal  sinfulness  and  that  justification  is  by 
faith  only,  that  suffering  and  trouble  are  not  in  accord  with  demerit,  and  that 
there  is  injustice  and  wrong  in  the  sufferings  that  the  God-fearing  often  have 
to  endure,  and  which  the  wicked  often  escape.  Jesus  Christ  in  the  endur- 
ance of  suffering  and  wrong  taught  his  disciples  how  to  undergo  the  sad 
experience,  but  that  does  not  remove  from  him  or  from  his  disciples  the 
injustice  that  there  is  in  the  sufferings  of  the  righteous  and  the  inconsistency 
that  there  is  in  the  greater  welfare  of  the  wicked  and  their  triumph  over  the 
righteous.  The  pious  are  justified,  as  Jesus  was,  in  pleading  with  God  against 
it,  and  it  is  not  self-righteousness  to  do  so. 

It  is  an  exaggeration  of  the  doctrine  of  justification  by  faith  only,  which 
excludes  from  Christian  experience  the  consciousness  of  personal  righteous- 
ness and  merit.  Luther  misled  in  his  interpretation  of  Gn.  156  and  Hb.  24. 
The  former  represents  that  God  accounted  Abraham  as  really  righteous  be- 
cause of  his  trust  in  Him.  The  latter  states  that  the  pious  live  by  fidelity, 
faithfulness,  djidn,  and  not  by  faith  only.  When  Nehemiah  prayed  to  God 
to  remember  his  faithfulness  and  acts  of  kindness  in  His  behalf  and  spare 
him  in  the  greatness  of  His  kindness,  Ne.  I314-22,  he  was  not  self-righteous, 
but  acting  in  accordance  with  the  common  experience  of  the  OT.  His  prayer 
of  penitence  (Ne.  9)  is  among  the  finest  in  the  Bible.  Jesus  distinctly  taught 
the  meritoriousness  of  deeds  of  love.  The  only  passage  that  can  be  adduced 
to  the  contrary  in  his  teaching,  Lk.  1710,  is  wrongly  interpreted  in  this  regard 
(v.  Br.  Ethical  Teaching  of  Jesus,  pp.  218  sq.).  St.  Paul,  the  apostle  of  jus- 
tification by  faith,  did  not  hesitate  to  say,  as  his  hour  of  martyrdom  drew  near, 
"  I  have  fought  the  good  fight,  I  have  finished  the  course,  I  have  kept  the 
faith  ;  henceforth  there  is  laid  up  for  me  the  crown  of  righteousness  which 
the  Lord,  the  righteous  judge,  will  give  me  at  that  day:  and  not  only  to 
me,  but  also  to  all  them  that  have  loved  his  appearing,"  2  Tim.  47-8,  cf.  Acts 

2^26  sq.  23I. 

The  imprecations  are  not  so  frequent  in  the  Pss.  as  in  the  Law 
and  the  Prophets.  Although  they  have  a  lyric  intensity  of  passion, 
they  are  not  more  bitter  than  those  of  other  parts  of  the  OT. 
If  imprecations  are  inconsistent  with  canonicity,  the  whole  OT.  is 
excluded,  and  not  the  Psalter  especially.  The  imprecations  of  the 
OT.  are  connected  with  the  sense  of  the  solidarity  of  the  interests 
of  the  individual  servant  of  God  with  those  of  the  nation  of  Israel, 
and  with  the  religion  of  God  itself;  so  that  all  personal  and  national 
considerations  are  merged  in  those  of  the  kingdom  of  God,  whose 
aggressive,  unscrupulous,  and  deadly  foes  must  be  remorselessly 
crushed  in  order  that  the  holy  religion  may  continue  to  exist  and 


C  INTRODUCTION 

accomplish  its  sacred  mission  to  the  world.  Whenever  and  wher- 
ever this  sense  of  solidarity  of  interests  has  existed,  or  still  exists, 
these  imprecations  express  the  religious  feelings  of  God's  people 
toward  the  enemies  of  God. 

It  is  the  modern  discrimination  between  the  religion  of  the  individual  and 
that  of  the  nation,  and  between  both  of  these  and  the  ideal  religion  of  man- 
kind that  makes  these  imprecations  impossible  to  the  experience  of  many 
moderns.  These  discriminations  certainly  belong  to  a  later  stage  in  the 
development  of  religion  than  the  indiscriminating  sense  of  solidarity.  But 
individualism,  however  important,  whether  we  think  of  the  person  or  the 
denomination  or  the  nation,  ought  not  to  impair  the  higher  interests  of 
the  organism  of  the  kingdom  of  God,  as  the  embodiment  of  the  divine  religion 
of  mankind.  It  is  indeed  excessive  individualism  with  its  lack  of  appreciation 
of  organic  religion,  that  sees  no  place  for  imprecations  against  the  enemies  of 
the  kingdom  of  God.  Jesus  Christ  taught  the  exceeding  value  of  the  soul  of 
the  individual  and  gave  an  example  of  self-sacrificing  love  in  dying  for  his 
enemies  with  the  prayer  for  their  forgiveness  upon  his  lips ;  but  these  ene- 
mies knew  not  the  wrong  they  did  to  him,  to  the  world,  and  to  themselves. 
Jesus  Christ  distinguishes  between  sins  of  ignorance  and  sins  of  self-will,  sins 
repented  of  and  sins  glossed  over  by  self-righteousness  and  hypocrisy.  He 
pronounced  woes  upon  the  Pharisees  because  they  were  hypocrites,  tempters 
to  sin,  and  obstructors  to  the  kingdom  of  God.  He  denounced  them  as  blind 
guides  and  serpents,  and  dooms  them  to  Gehenna  (Br.,  Ethical  Teaching  of 
Jesus,  pp.  1 75  sq.,  184  sq.).  He  announced  the  doom  of  the  traitor  Judas.  He 
proclaimed  the  judgment  of  the  cities  that  rejected  him  and  his  apostles,  cul- 
minating in  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and  the  world.  The  Apocalypse 
does  not  misinterpret  the  spirit  of  Christ,  when  it  tells  of  the  wrath  of  the 
Lamb  and  describes  him  in  his  second  Advent  as  treading  the  wine-press  of 
the  wrath  of  Almighty  God  ;  and  when  it  pictures  the  martyrs  underneath 
the  altar  crying  aloud :  "  How  long,  O  Master,  the  holy  and  true,  dost  thou 
not  judge  and  avenge  our  blood  on  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth?  "  (Rev.  610). 
The  righteousness  of  God  is  on  the  one  side  vindicatory  and  saving,  on  the 
other  retributive  and  destructive.  The  unfolding  of  vindicatory  righteousness 
into  the  highest  conception  of  self-sacrificing  love  is  accompanied  with  the 
development  of  retribution  into  the  most  intense  hatred  and  awful  wrath.  No 
one  knows  what  love  is,  who  cannot  truly  hate.  It  is  a  weak  and  sickly 
individualism  which  shuts  its  eyes  against  the  wrath  of  God,  and  of  the  Lamb, 
and  of  the  Church,  the  Bride  of  the  Lamb,  against  evil  and  incorrigible  sin. 
There  is  a  place,  therefore,  for  imprecation  in  the  highest  forms  of  Chris- 
tianity, only  it  is  more  discriminating  than  in  the  OT.  religion  and  much  more 
refined.  In  substance,  the  imprecations  of  the  Psalter  are  normal  and  valid  ; 
in  their  external  form  and  modes  of  expression  they  belong  to  an  age  of 
religion  which  has  been  displaced  by  Christianity. 


INTERPRETATION  CI 

The  imprecations  of  the  Psalter  belong  to  four  historic  situations:  (i)  The 
persecutions  of  Jeremiah  and  his  associates  by  those  who  were  pushing  the 
national  religion  to  destruction,  Ps.  52*  8(J-,  cf.  Je.  n18«i-  1515  K-  1718  i819s(i- 
2011  S(J-.  (2)  The  brutal  cruelty  of  Edom  and  Moab  toward  the  Jews  at  the 
time  of  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Babylonians,  Ps.  137,  cf.  Ob.10  8i\ 
(3)  The  treachery  of  Sanballat  and  Tobiah,  Ne.  2-6,  which  threatened  the  very 
existence  of  the  congregation  of  the  Restoration.  The  imprecations  of  Ne. 
44-5  6u  I329  are  in  acCord  with  those  of  Pss.  92;*-21  io15  60/23-29  83l°-18.  (4)  The 
persecution  of  Antiochus,  which  aimed  at  the  extermination  of  the  worship- 
pers of  Yahweh.  To  this  period  the  majority  of  the  imprecations  belong, 
many  of  them  glosses  in  older  Pss.  At  that  time,  if  ever,  imprecations  were 
appropriate,  cf.  Pss.  7910- 12  i096-15- 19-'20-  28_29.  Thus  all  the  imprecations  of 
the  Pss.  are  upon  just  such  treacherous  hypocrites,  traitors,  and  bloodthirsty 
enemies  of  the  kingdom  of  God,  as  Jesus  himself  pronounces  imprecations 
upon,  who  aim  at  nothing  else  than  the  wilful  destruction  of  the  true  religion. 
It  is  the  form  and  general  character  of  these  imprecations  which  are  most 
obnoxious  to  the  modern  mind,  especially  the  physical  sufferings  that  are 
invoked,  the  dishonouring  of  wives  and  daughters,  and  the  slaughter  of  babes, 
even  of  the  unborn.  This  is  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  solidarity  of  interest 
in  the  family,  tribe,  and  nation  ;  and  especially  from  the  ancient  principle  of 
the  duty  of  revenge  which  was  inherited  by  sons  and  kinsmen  ;  so  that  the 
only  way  to  avoid  future  peril  of  revenge  was  the  extermination  of  all  who 
would  be  likely  in  the  future  to  undertake  it. 


D.     THE   INTERPRETATION   OF   THE   PSALTER. 

§  47.  Jesus  and  his  apostles  interpreted  the  Psalter  usually  in 
accordance  with  the  methods  of  their  time,  literally  or  allegoric  ally, 
as  they  had  need.  But  they  chiefly  used  it  either  for  practical  ex- 
hortation, for  dogmatic  or  ethical  instruction,  or  for  prophetic 
anticipations  of  the  life  and  work  of  Jesus  and  his  Church. 

(1)  Jesus  used  the  Psalter  more  than  any  other  part  of  the  OT.  He  used 
it  to  describe  his  own  state  of  mind :  Ps.  64  in  Jn.  1227,  Ps.  222  in  Mt.  2746  = 
Mk.  1534,  Ps.  316  in  Lk.  2346,  Ps.  3519  (=  69s)  in  Jn.  1525,  Ps.  42s  in  Mt.  26s8 
=  Mk.  1434;  his  actions,  Ps.  69  in  Mt.  723  =  Lk.  1327;  and  the  actions  of 
others  in  his  time,  Ts.  83  in  Mt.  2116,  Ps.  4110  in  Jn.  1318.  He  also  used  it  for 
authoritative  teaching,  Ps.  3711  in  Mt.  55,  Ps.  48s  in  Mt.  5s5,  and  for  historical 
reference,  Ps.  7824  in  Jn.  681.  He  used  Ps.  826  in  argument  with  the  Pharisees 
after  the  Halacha  method  in  Jn.  io34,  arguing  from  less  to  greater.  He  used 
Ps.  no1  in  Mt.  2244  =  Mk.  1286  =  Lk.  2042-43,  in  argument  with  the  Phari- 
sees, to  show  that  the  Messianic  son  of  David  must  be  at  the  same  time  his 
Lord;    cf.  1  Cor.  1525  Eph.  i20  Col.  31  Heb.  i3  81  122  1  Pet.  322.     Pie  also 


Cll  INTRODUCTION 

applied  Ps.  n822-23  to  himself  as  the  headstone  of  the  spiritual  temple, 
Mt.  2142  =  Mk.  I210-11  =  Lk.  20"  (cf.  Acts  411  1  Pet.  2*-7). 

(2)  The  Gospels  use  the  Pss.  freely,  applying  them  to  Jesus  and  his  work : 
{a)  to  his  entrance  into  the  world.  Ps.  9111-12  is  cited  by  the  devil  Mt.  46  = 
Lk.  410-  n;  {b)  to  his  experience  in  life  Ps.  6910  in  Jn.  217,  his  teaching  Ps.  782 
in  Mt.  1335,  his  entrance  into  Jerusalem  Ps.  iiS25-2'5  in  Mt.  219  23s9  Mk.  n9 
Lk.  1336  1938  Jn.  1213;  (c)  to  his  passion  Pss.  228"9- 19  Jn.  1924,  cf.  Mt.  27s5-  "• 43 
=  Mk.  i52429  =  Lk.  23:i*-35,  Ps.  3421  in  Jn.  1936,  Ps.  6922  in  Mt.  27s4- 48  = 
Mk.  1526  =  Lk.  23%  =  Jn.  1928-29,  Ps.  10925  in  Mt.  2739.  The  canticles  Lk.  1 
are  also  chiefly  mosaics  of  the  Pss.  (3)  In  the  book  of  Acts  :  (a)  Ps.  8920  is 
cited  by  Paul  in  Acts  1322  in  historical  reference,  so  Ps.  1325  by  Stephen 
Acts  746;  (b)  Ps.  21-2  in  Acts  4-5-'20  is  applied  to  the  persecution  of  Christ 
in  his  disciples,  Ps.  6926  1098  in  Acts  I20  as  fulfilled  in  Judas;  Ps.  2'  is 
applied  in  Acts  1333  to  the  resurrection  of  Jesus;  so  Ps.  168"11  in  Acts  228~8a 
1335,  and  Ps.  no1  in  Acts  234-30,  Ps.  13211  in  Acts  230  to  his  reign;  (c)  in  litur- 
gical use  Ps.  1466  in  Acts  4™,  cf.  1415.  (4)  In  the  epistles  of  Peter  :  (a)  as 
practical  exhortation  Ps.  3413-17  in  1  Pet.  310"12,  Ps.  55s*  in  1  Pet.  57;  as  real- 
ised in  Christian  experience,  Ps.  34s  in  1  Pet.  23;  (7)  as  authoritative  doc- 
trine Ps.  904  in  2  Pet.  38. 

(5)  St.  Paul  uses  the  Psalter  freely:  (a)  as  practical  exhortation  Ps.  45  in 
Eph.  42c,  Ps.  1129  in  2  Cor.  99,  Ps.  11610  in  2  Cor.  413;  (b)  as  authoritative 
teaching  Ps.  241  in  1  Cor.  io26  W\  Ps.  321-2  in  Rom.  47-8,  Ps.  516  in  Rom.  34, 
Ps.  9411  in  1  Cor.  320.  P  s.  510  io7  141-3  (=  532-1)  362  1404  are  cited  as  descrip- 
tive of  the  utter  wickedness  of  mankind,  in  Rom.  310-18;  (c)  Ps.  4423  is  cited 
Rom.  8s6  as  realised  in  Christian  experience;  (d)  Ps.  6910  is  cited  Rom.  153 
and  applied  to  the  humiliation  of  Christ.  Ps.  87  is  cited  in  1  Cor.  1527  Eph.  I22 
and  applied  to  the  resurrection  and  reign  of  Christ ;  so  Ps.  6819  in  Eph.  48. 
Ps.  0923-24  is  cited  Rom.  1 19"10  and  applied  to  the  fall  of  Israel.  Pss.  1850  1 1 71 
are  cited  Rom.  159"11  and  applied  to  the  conversion  of  the  Gentiles.  Ps.  195 
in  Rom.  io18  is  applied  to  the  preaching  of  the  Gospel.  (6)  The  epistle  to  the 
Hebrews  makes  great  use  of  the  Pss. :  (a)  as  practical  exhortation  Ps.  957"11 
in  Heb.  S7  Bq*  ?s-  ll%e'  m  Heb.  136;  (b)  as  authoritative  teaching  Ps.  1044  in 
Heb.  i7;  Ps.  13514  in  Heb.  io80;  (c)  Ps.  27  is  applied  to  the  resurrection  and 
reign  of  Christ  Heb.  I5  55;  so  Ps.  S^1  in  Heb.  26"8,  Ps.  977  in  Heb.  I6,  Ps.  457"8 
I0226-28  in  Heb.  i8"13,  Ps.  no*  in  Heb.  5s  620  71721.  Ps.  183  2223  are  applied 
to  his  redemptive  work  in  Heb.  212"13;  so  Ps.  407-9  in  Heb.  io5-7.  In  Heb.  41-11 
Ps.  957"11  is  interpreted  at  length  in  an  allegorical  way.  (7)  In  the  Apocalypse  : 
the  Psalter  is  often  used  in  hymns  and  incidental  allusions.  Besides  these  it 
is  cited  as  predictive  of  the  reign  of  Christ,  Ps.  2s"9  in  Rev.  226"27  126  1915. 

§  48.  In  the  ancient  Catholic  Church  the  Apostolic  Fathers  and 
Apologists  used  the  Psalter  for  practical  purposes.  The  School  of 
Alexandria  emphasized  the  allegorical  method  of  interpretation,  the 
School  of  Antioch  the  typical  method. 


INTERPRETATION  OF  CATHOLIC   CHURCH  cm 

The  Christian  writers  of  the  second  Christian  century  followed 
the  example  of  the  apostles  in  using  the  Psalter  for  practical  pur- 
poses. Nothing  at  all  resembling  a  Commentary,  so  far  as  we 
know,  was  composed  by  any  of  them.  The  citations  of  the  Pss. 
in  the  Apostolic  Fathers,  Apologists,  and  early  Fathers,  Tertullian, 
Irenaeus,  Cyprian,  and  others,  are  similar  to  those  in  the  New 
Testament,  using  the  same  methods  of  interpretation,  with  a  more 
decided  tendency  to  the  allegorical  method  and  less  restraint  from 
its  exaggeration.  The  School  of  Alexandria  was  established  by 
Pantaenus,  c.  200,  and  made  famous  by  the  great  teachers  and 
theologians,  Clement  and  Origen.  Pantaenus  is  said  to  have  com- 
posed the  first  Commentary  (Eusebius,  Ecc.  Hist.  510).  Clement 
distinguished  between  the  body  and  soul  of  Scripture,  and  called 
attention  to  its  fourfold  use.  Origen  made  a  Commentary  on  the 
Psalms,  using  the  allegorical  method  of  Philo,  which  he  worked 
out  in  a  Christian  form  and  became  its  father  in  the  Church.  He 
distinguished  a  threefold  sense,  body,  soul,  and  spirit,  and  used 
thirteen  of  Philo's  rules  (v.  Br.SHS  448"449).  The  School  of  Antioch 
was  established  by  Lucian  and  Dorotheus  at  the  close  of  the  third 
century.      Its    fundamental    principles   of   interpretation   were : 

( 1 )  Every  passage  has  its  literal  meaning  and  only  one  meaning  j 

(2)  alongside  of  the  literal  sense  is  the  typical  sense  which  arises 
out  of  the  relation  of  the  Old  Covenant  to  the  New  (Kihn,  Theodor 
von  Mopsuestia,  s.  29).  The  most  of  the  Commentators  on  the 
Pss.  in  the  Greek  Church  were  from  writers  of  this  school.  Jerome 
occupied  an  intermediate  and  not  altogether  consistent  position. 
He  strives  for  historical  and  grammatical  exposition,  yet  it  is  easy 
to  see  that  at  the  bottom  he  is  more  inclined  to  the  allegorical 
method.  Thus  there  grew  up  in  the  ancient  Church  three  exe- 
getical  tendencies,  the  literal  and  traditional,  the  allegorical  and 
mystical,  the  historical  and  ethical,  and  these  became  gradually 
interwoven  in  the  writings  of  the  Fathers,  and  in  all  sorts  of 
abnormal  forms  of  exegesis  in  others  {v.  Br.SHS- 453) . 

Corderius  {Expositio  Patrum  Graecorum  in  Psalmos,  3  Tom.  1643)  uses 
the  following  Greek  Commentators:  Athanasius,  Ammonius,  Anonymous, 
Apollinarius,  Asterius,  Basilius,  Gennadius,  Geo.  Alexandrinus,  Gregorius 
Nazianzenus,  Gregorius  Nyssenus,  Didymus,  Dionysius  Areopag.,  Eusebius 
Caesariensis,    Hesychius,    Theodoretus,    Theodorus   Antiochenus,   Theodorus 


Civ  INTRODUCTION 

Heracleota,  Isidorus,  Cyrillus  Alexandrinus,  Maximus,  Pachymera,  Chrysosto- 
mms,  Psellus,  Origincs.  I  have  italicised  those  most  frequently  cited.  Jerome 
(ep.  ad  August,  cxii.)  mentions  the  following  Greek  interpreters  of  the  Psalter 
up  to  his  time  :  Origen,  Eusebius  of  Caesarea,  Theodore  of  Heraklea  (the  Anon- 
ymous of  Corderius),  Astelios  of  Skythopolis,  Apollinaris  of  Laodicea,  Didymos 
of  Alexandria.  All  of  these  interpretations  of  the  Psalter,  so  far  as  preserved, 
are  given  by  Migne  in  his  Greek  Patrology.  For  additional  information  we 
may  refer  to  Pitra,  Analecta  Sacra,  Bathgen,  ZA  TfV.,  1886,  Lietzmann,  Der 
Psalmencommentar  Theodore  von  Mopsuestia,  1902.  The  work  of  the  great 
Syrian  scholar,  Gregory  Bar  Hebraeus  (fi286,  given  by  Lagarde,  Prae- 
termissorum,  1S79),  must  be  added  here  as  the  noblest  representation  of  the 
late  Syrian  School.  The  work  of  Jerome  on  the  Pss.  is  given  in  his  Epistles, 
XX.,  XXVIII.,  XXX.,  XXXIV.,  LXV.,  CVI.,  CXL.  (Migne,  XXII.),  and  his 
commentary  (edited  by  Morin,  Anecdota  Afaredso/ana,  III.,  1895). 

§  49.  In  the  Latin  Church  the  allegorical  method  of  interpreting 
the  Psalter  prevailed,  chiefly  through  the  influence  of  Ambrose  and 
Augustine,  although  Junilius  and  Cassiodorus  exerted  a  modifying 
influence  in  the  use  of  the  principles  of  the  Antiochan  School. 

Ambrose  may  be  regarded  as  the  father  of  the  interpretation 
of  the  Psalter  in  the  Western  Church ;  but  Augustine,  his  pupil, 
was  the  one  who  dominated  all  subsequent  times.  He  distinguishes 
four  kinds  of  exegesis,  —  the  historical,  aetiological,  analogical,  and 
allegorical,  —  and  laid  down  the  principle  that  whatever  cannot 
be  referred  to  good  conduct  or  truth  of  faith  must  be  regarded  as 
figurative.  Junilius,  and  still  more  Cassiodorus,  exerted  a  whole- 
some influence  by  the  introduction  into  the  West  of  the  principles 
of  the  Schools  of  Antioch  and  Nisibis.  He  urged  the  comparison 
of  Scripture  with  Scriptures,  and  points  out  that  frequent  and 
intense  meditation  is  the  way  to  a  true  understanding  of  them 
(v.  Br.sns  449_45s). 

Jerome  {ep.  ad  August,  cxii.)  mentions  the  following  Latin  interpreters  of 
the  Pss.  :  (1)  Hilary  of  Poitiers,  based  on  Origen  and  Eusebius  ;  (2)  Eusebius 
of  Vercelli,  who  translated  the  Commentary  of  Eusebius  of  Caesarea  ;  (3)  Am- 
brose. Ambrose  (f  397)  is  the  only  one  who  was  independent  and  original. 
Ambrose  was  a  practical  prelate,  possessed  of  the  true  Roman  spirit,  and  he 
gave  the  allegorical  method  a  Western  practical  turn.  His  Enarrationes  have 
had  great  influence  on  the  Church.  Augustine  (f43o)  built  his  Enarrationes 
on  those  of  Ambrose,  and  became  the  basal  authority  for  all  subsequent  writers. 
The  most  wholesome  commentary  of  the  times  is  that  of  Cassiodorus  (1563). 
Other  early  Western  writers  on  the  Psalter  were  Hippolytus  (t^35),  Arnobius 


INTERPRETATION   IN   MIDDLE   AGES  CV 

(fc.  406),  Asterius  (f4io),  Gregory  of  Tours  (t  594)>  Gregory  the  Great 
(too4),  Prudentius  (eighth  century).  All  of  these  are  given  by  Migne  in 
his  Latin  Patrology. 

§  50.  In  the  Middle  Ages  the  Commentaries  were  chiefly  com- 
pilations of  the  earlier  writers,  called  Epitomes,  Glosses,  Pos titles, 
Chains,  which  appeared  in  great  numbers,  all  under  the  do?ninatio7i 
of  the  allegorical  principles  of  Augustine,  often  in  exaggerated 
forms. 

The  compilers  of  the  Oriental  Church  were  Euthymius  Zigabenus  (f  1118, 
v.  Pitra,  Analecta,  IV.);  Nicephorus,  thirteenth  century  (given  by  Migne). 
A  host  of  writers  on  the  Pss.  appear  in  the  West:  Beda  (f  735) ;  Alcuin 
(f8o4);  Walafrid  Strabo  (f849);  Haymo  (f853);  Rhabamus  Maurus 
(1856);  Paschasius  Radbertus  (f866);  Hincmar  (f882);  Remigius  (ninth 
century);  Bruno  Herb.  (11045);  Romualdus  (fi027);  Anselm  (fno9); 
Bruno  Carth.  (fuoi);  Richard  St.  Victor  (f  1 173) ;  Jnnocentius  III. 
(t  1216)  ;  Hugo  S.  Caro,  Postillae  (fi263)  (commentaries  1496  attributed 
wrongly  to  Alexander  Hales,  f  1245);  Antonius  Patavinus  (f  1231,  Sermones 
in  Pss.,  1757);  Thomas  Aquinas  (11274,  In  Psalmos  Expositio,  1876); 
Albertus  Magnus  (f  1280,  Comm.  on  Pss.,  Col.  1536);  Ayguanus  (11396, 
Com.  on  Ps.,  1524 +);  Nicolaus  de  Lyra  (f  1340,  Postillae,  Rom.  1471; 
Biblia  cum  glossa  ordinaria,  6  v.,  Basel,  1506);  Herenthal  (f  1400,  Catena, 
Col.  1483)  ;  Turrecremata(f  1468,  Expositio,  1474).  Those  italicised  are  found 
in  Migne's  Patrology. 

§  51.  In  the  Middle  Ages  Jewish  Commentators  distinguished 
themselves  as  compared  with  the  Christian  by  a  fuller  use  of  the 
literal  and  historical  methods  of  interpretation,  although  no  less 
dependent  on  Rabbinical  tradition  than  Christian  scholars  were 
on   Christian  tradition. 

The  earliest  important  interpreter  of  the  Pss.  whose  writings  have  been 
preserved  was  Saadia  (1942),  author  of  the  Arabic  translation  of  the  OT. 
His  Commentary  was  published  in  Cracow  in  1660.  Raschi's  Commentary 
(R.  Solomon  Isaaki,  f  1 105)  was  published  in  the  Rabbinical  Bibles,  also  a 
Latin  translation  by  Breithaupt,  1710.  Aben  Ezra's  Commentary  (fn67) 
was  published  in  the  Rabbinical  Bibles.  His  Commentary  on  the  first  ten  Pss. 
was  published  in  Latin  and  Hebrew  by  P.  Fagius,  1542.  David  Kimchi's  Com- 
mentary (f  1235)  was  published,  Naples,  1487;  Venice,  15 18;  Isny,  1541  ; 
Amsterdam,  1765  ;  Latin  translation  by  Janvier,  1566.  The  first  book  of 
Psalms  was  published  according  to  the  text  of  the  Cambridge  Ms.  Bible  with 
the  larger  Commentary  of  R.  David  Kimchi,  critically  edited  from  nineteen 


CV1  INTRODUCTION 

Mss.  and  early  editions  by  Schiller  Szinessy,  Cambridge,  1883.  The  most 
important  of  later  commentaries  was  by  Obadiah  Sforno,  teacher  of  Reuchlin, 
Venice,  1586;   Amsterdam,  1724. 

§  52.  The  Reformation  involved  a  great  revival  of  Biblical  study, 
and  especially  of  the  Psalter,  the  chief  book  of  the  OT.  The  alle- 
gorical'method  was  pushed  in  the  background  by  the  Humanists  in 
the  interests  of  the  grammatical  sense,  and  so  by  Roman  Catholics 
as  well,  and  Protestants  who  were  ififluenced  by  them.  The  chief 
difference  was  that  the  Protestants  resorted  to  the  Hebrew  text  as 
the  original  supreme  authority,  the  Roman  Catholics  based  them- 
selves on  the  Vulgate  Version,  a?id  interpreted  it  in  submission  to 
the  authority  of  the  Church  and  the  Fathers.  The  successors  of 
the  Reformers  fell  back  into  pedantic  and  dogmatic  methods. 

The  Humanists  revived  the  study  of  the  ancient  languages  and  the  ancient 
literatures,  and  thus  the  grammatical  and  literary  study  of  the  original  texts 
was  employed  over  against  the  allegorical  method.  Lyra  and  the  Jewish 
Commentators  were  used  more  than  the  Christian  Commentators  of  the 
Middle  Ages.  The  Protestant  Reformers  were  great  exegetes.  Luther  began 
his  academic  lectures  with  an  exposition  of  the  Psalter  in  15 13.  These  lec- 
tures were  published  by  Seidemann  in  1876,  under  the  title,  Dr.  Martin 
Lut/ier's  erste  und  alteste  Vorlesungen  iiber  die  Psalmen  aus  den  Jahren 
13/3-/5/6  nach  der  eigenh'dndigen  lateinischen  Handschrift  Luther s  auf  der 
Koniglichen  offentlichen  Bibliothek  zu  Dresden.  Reuchlin  published  his 
Auslegung  der  sieben  Psalmi  poenitentiales,  1512;  Bugenhagen,  his  in  lib. 
Psalmorum,  1524;  Bucer  (Aretius),  Psalmorum  libri  3,  1526.  Calvin's 
Commentary  on  the  Psalms,  1564,  was  by  far  the  best  up  to  his  own  time. 
Other  commentators  of  the  time  of  the  Reformation  were  Pellican,  1532; 
Miinster,  1534— 1535  ;  Musculus,  1550 ;  Castalio,  1551  +  ;  Marloratus,  1562. 
The  Moravian  Riidinger  also  issued  a  valuable  Commentary  in  1 580-1 581. 
The  Protestants  of  the  next  generation  fell  back  from  the  vital  principle  of 
the  Reformers  and  became  dependent  on  Protestant  rules  of  faith,  and  were 
dogmatic  and  pedantic  in  their  Commentaries.  In  the  following  lists,  I  give, 
so  far  as  I  know,  the  first  edition  ;  when  there  were  subsequent  editions,  it  is 
indicated  by  -f.  The  works  of  Selnecker,  1581  ;  Moller,  1573;  Menzel, 
1594;  Gesner,  1609;  Piscator,  1646+ ;  Quistorp,  1648 ;  Amyraldus,  1662 ; 
Bakius,  1664+  ;  Geier,  1668  +  ;  Carlov,  16724-,  though  with  valuable  and 
useful  material  are  reactionary  and  of  no  permanent  value.  The  Roman 
Catholics  vied  with  the  Protestants  in  the  sixteenth  century  in  their  work  on 
the  Psalter  :  Clarius,  1542  +  ;  Vatablus,  1545  ;  Palisse,  1548  ;  Cajetan,  1530  ; 
Campensis,  1533  +  ;  Flaminius,  1558;  Gennebradus,  1577  +  ;  Jansenius, 
1586.      In  the  early  seventeenth  century   R.  C.   exegetes   employed   better 


INTERPRETATION   SINCE  THE   REFORMATION  cvii 

methods,  and  were  more  able  and  fruitful  than  Protestants,  as  is  evident  in 

Agellius,   1606+  ;    Faber  Stapulensis,  1609;    Lorinus,   1612+;  Bellarmin, 

1611  +  ;    Mariana,   1619  +  ;    Torinus,   1632  +  ;    Muis,    1636+ ;  Corderius, 
1643 +  ;   Drexelius,  1643;   Hulsius,  1650;   Heser.  1654 +. 

§  53.  In  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century  the  English  Puri- 
tans emphasized  gra?nmatical  and  practical  exegesis ;  Grotius, 
Hammond  and  the  Arminians,  the  historical  method ;  Cocceius 
and  the  Federalists,  the  allegorical.  The  dogmatic  method  still  pre- 
vailed to  some  extent. 

Ainsworth  is  the  prince  of  Puritan  Commentators.  His  Commentary  on 
the  Pss.,  issued  in  1626,  is  a  monument  of  learning.  He  was  too  much  influ- 
enced by  Rabbinical  subtilties,  but  he  employed  the  grammatical  method  with 
great  practical  skill.  Thomas  Smith,  Thomas  Pierson,  and  especially  William 
Gouge  issued  practical  commentaries  introducing  a  long  and  valuable  series 
in  Great  Britain.  Hugo  Grotius  in  Holland  and  Henry  Hammond  in  Eng- 
land revived  the  Humanistic  spirit  and  laid  stress  on  the  literal  and  historical 
sense.  The  Commentaries  on  the  Pss.  of  Grotius,  1645,  and  of  Hammond, 
1653,  especially  the  latter,  introduce  a  new  epoch  in  the  interpretation  of  the 
Psalter.  Cocceius,  the  founder  of  the  Federal  School  of  Holland,  1660, 
revived  the  allegorical  method,  but  with  sobriety  and  practical  sense.  The 
Criticorum  Sacrorum,  1660,  sums  up  the  chief  material  of  previous  authors, 
using  Munster,  Vatablus,  Castalio,  Clarius,  Drusius,  and  Grotius.  This  was 
followed  by  Poole's  Synopsis  Criticorum,  1669,  which  uses  Muis,  Geier,  Ains- 
worth, Hammond,  Rivetus,  Cocceius,  Genebradus,  Calovius.  The  Biblia 
Magna,  1643,  and  the  Biblia  Maxima,  Paris,  1660,  both  by  John  de  la  Haye, 
are  a  magnificent  summing  up  of  R.  C.  exegesis,  embracing  a  thorough  study 
of  texts  and  Vrss.,  and  the  expositions  of  Nic.  de  Lyra,  Gagnae,  Estii,  Me- 
nochii,  and  Tirini.  Vol.  VI.  of  the  latter  contains  the  Psalter.  There  was 
then  a  lull  in  work  on  the  Pss.  which  continued  for  a  century.  We  may  men- 
tion, however,  the  R.  C,  Le  Blanc,  1682  +  ;  Ferrandus,  1683  ;  Bossuet,  1691 ; 
Berthier,  1788 +  ;  Calmet,  1791  +  ;  Camponi,  1692  +  ;  the  Protestants, 
Bythner,  1664;  J.  H.  Michaelis,  1720;   Clericus,  1731  ;  Venema,  1762. 

§  54.  The  study  of  the  Psalter  was  enriched  through  the  work 
of  Kennicott  upon  the  text  and  of  Hare  and  Lowth  upon  Hebrew 
poetry,  connected  in  all  these  with  original  work  upon  the  Psalter 
which  influenced  all  subsequent  scholars. 

I  have  already  called  attention  to  the  work  of  Hare,  Lowth,  and  Kenni- 
cott on  the  text  and  Hebrew  Poetry.  These  scholars  carried  on  the  gram- 
matical and  historical  exegesis  of  Grotius  and  Hammond.    Lowth  in  his  notes 


CV111  INTRODUCTION 

attached  to  Merrick's  Version,  1768,  supported  also  by  an  Anonymous,  made 
contributions  which  were  often  original  and  of  great  value.  Kennicott,  in 
his  notes  on  the  Psalms,  1772,  also  greatly  advanced  the  study  of  the  Psalter. 
All  this  material  was  used  by  Street,  1790,  with  independent  and  excellent 
judgment,  resulting  in  the  best  Commentary  on  the  Psalms  of  the  eighteenth 
century.  Bishop  Horsley,  1815  (posthumous),  inherited  their  spirit.  These 
scholars  are  the  real  fathers  of  a  large  number  of  emendations  of  the  text  and 
of  new  interpretations  for  which  later  scholars,  especially  Germans,  have  re- 
ceived the  credit.  Many  practical  commentaries  of  great  value  appeared  in 
this  period,  such  as  Henry,  17 10  ;  Home,  1771  ;  Gill,  1 774-1 776.  The  Com- 
mentaries of  Dathe,  1787,  and  especially  Rosenmuller,  1 798-1804,  represented 
this  period  in  Germany. 

§  55.  The  study  of  the  Psalter  has  been  improved  in  the  last 
century  by  a  more  comprehensive  and  thoroughgoing  study  of  all  the 
material  by  Textual  Criticism,  Higher  Criticism,  Historical  Criti- 
cism, and  Biblical  Theology,  with  a  just  estimate  of  Exegesis  in 
its  different  phases. 

De  Wette,  181 1  +,  began  this  most  fruitful  period,  and  was  followed  by 
Ewald,  1836  -f ,  both  with  remarkable  critical  sagacity  and  profound  historical 
sense.  Hitzig,  1836 -f,  and  Olshausen,  1853  +,  opened  wide  the  field  of 
Textual  Criticism;  Hupfeld,  1855  +,  and  Bottcher,  1864,  grammatical  and 
lexicographical  exegesis.  Delitzsch,  1859 -f,  shows  a  deep  spiritual  sense 
and  a  thorough  understanding  of  the  genius  of  the  ancient  Hebrew  people. 
Hengstenberg,  1842 -f,  is  the  father  of  the  reactionaries.  On  these  princes 
of  modern  German  exegesis  a  great  number  of  scholars  build.  Among  these 
we  may  mention  on  the  continent  of  Europe:  Tholuck,  1843+  '■>  Koster, 
1837;  Vaihinger,  1845;  Reuss,  1879+  ;  Gratz,  1 882-1 883  ;  Hirsch,  1882; 
Moll,  1884  +  ;  Schultz,  18S8  +  ;  Bachmann,  1891  ;  Bathgen,  1892  +  ; 
Wellhausen,  1895  >  Duhm,  1899  ;  Valeton,  1903.  Among  R.  C.  scholars,  we 
may  mention  Alioli,  1832 -f  ;  Aigner,  1850  ;  Schegg,  1857- ;  Crelier,  1858  ; 
Rohling,  1 87 1  ;  Thalhofer,  18S95.  Migne,  Cur  sits  Computus,  1 841,  and  Cor- 
nely,  Knabenbauer,  and  Hammelauer  in  Cursus  Completus,  1885,  give  a  the- 
saurus of  interpretation  of  many  scholars,  ancient  and  modern.  Many  British 
and  American  interpreters  of  the  Pss.  have  been  reactionary  in  the  spirit  of 
Hengstenberg,  such  as  Phillips,  1846;  Neale,  i860;  Wordsworth,  1867;  Alex- 
ander, 1868+  ;  Murphy,  1875;  Cowles,  1872.  The  Puritan  spirit  was  inherited 
in  Spurgeon,  1870,  and  Barnes,  1871.  Perowne,  1864 -f,  deserves  the  credit 
for  the  introduction  into  the  English-speaking  world  of  the  modern  spirit, 
w  hich  indeed  is  only  a  rebuilding  on  the  work  of  the  older  English  scholars  of 
the  eighteenth  century.  The  following  Commentators  deserve  mention  :  The 
Psalms  Chronologically  arranged  by  Four  Friends,  1867  ;  Kay,  187 1  ;  Cook, 
1873;  Jennings  and  Low,  1875;  Burgess,  1879;  Aglen,  1884;  Cheyne,  1888+ ; 


ENGLISH   VERSIONS  C1X 

Maclaren,  1893-1894  +  ;  Montefiore,  1901  ;  Kirkpatrick,  1903  ;  W.T.  David- 
son, 1903  -f  ;  Ehrlich,  1904.  Cheyne  and  Kirkpatrick  are  preeminent,  the 
former  for  his  brave  investigation  of  the  most  difficult  problems  and  his  gener- 
ous recognition  of  the  work  of  other  scholars,  the  latter  for  his  sound  judg- 
ment and  excellent  exegetical  method.  These  scholars  easily  outrank  all  their 
predecessors.  Their  occasional  faults  and  failures  are  cordially  overlooked  in 
view  of  their  magnificent  contributions  to  Biblical  Science. 

§  56.  English  Versions  of  the  Psalms  began  with  Wy cliff e  in 
1382.  The  Version  of  Coverdale  of  1535,  revised  for  the  great 
Bible  of  1539,  has  been  used  since  as  the  Version  of  the  Book  of 
Common  Prayer.  The  Version  of  1611  was  made  from  the  He- 
brew',  with  a  limited  study  of  other  versions.  It  supplanted  all  other 
English  Versions  except  that  of  PB  V.  The  Version  of  1885  was 
a  revision  of  that  of  1611,  in  closer  conformity  to  the  Massoretic 
text.     The  R.  C.  Version  is  that  of  Douay. 

John  Wycliffe  made  the  first  English  translation  of  the  Bible  from  the  Vul- 
gate Version,  1382.  It  was  revised  by  John  Purvey  in  1388  (v.  Forshall  and 
Madden's  text,  4  v.,  1850;  Skeats,  reprint  of  Purvey's  revision  in  1879V 
Coverdale  published  a  translation  of  the  whole  Bible  in  1535.  His  translation 
of  the  Psalter  was  taken  up  into  Matthew's  Bible  in  1537,  and  into  the  Great 
Bible  in  1539-1541.  Coverdale,  in  his  dedicatory  Epistle  to  the  King  and 
in  Prologue,  states  that  he  had  followed  largely  five  sundry  interpreters ;  to 
judge  from  internal  evidence,  the  Vulgate,  Luther,  the  Zurich  Version,  Pagninus, 
and  Tyndale,  the  latter  not  giving  the  Psalter.  The  Zurich  Version  was  com- 
pleted in  1529  by  Zwingli,  Pellican,  Leo  Juda,  and  others.  Pagninus' version 
was  a  translation  of  the  Psalter  into  Latin  (1527).  The  Psalter  of  the  PBV.  is 
from  the  last  revision  of  the  Great  Bible  of  1540  (v.  Westcott,  The  Paragraph 
Psalter ;  Earle,  The  Psalter  of  fjjg  a  Landmark  in  English  Literature, 
1892  ;  Driver,  The  Parallel  Psalter,  Int.  19042;  Fry,  Description  of  the  Great 
Psalter,  1865).  The  Genevan  Version  of  1560  was  translated  into  Eng- 
lish and  used  by  the  Puritans  from  that  time  onward.  The  Bishop's  Bible 
of  1568  was  used  in  the  scriptural  readings  in  the  Church  of  England,  but 
not  in  the  recitations  of  the  Psalter.  In  161 1  the  Authorized  Version  was 
made  by  a  select  company  of  scholars  under  the  authority  of  the  crown.  It 
displaced  all  other  Vrss.  for  Protestants  in  the  public  and  private  reading 
of  the  Scripture :  but  did  not  succeed  in  displacing  the  Vrs.  of  the  Great 
Bible  in  the  recitation  of  the  Psalter.  The  Roman  Catholics  continued  to 
adhere  to  the  Douay  Version,  which  was  a  literal  translation  of  the  Vulgate, 
whereas  the  AV.  was  translated  from  the  Hebrew.  The  AV.  has  maintained 
its  hold  on  the  English  Protestant  world  until  the  present  time.  The  RV.  0/ 
1885,  prepared  by  a  joint  British  and  American  Committee,  under  the  authority 


CX  INTRODUCTION 

of  the  convocation  of  Canterbury,  has  thus  far  been  unable  to  replace  it.  The 
RV.  is  a  more  accurate  rendering  of  the  Hebrew  text  of  Ben  Asher  ;  but  it  is 
literalistic  and  pedantic.  It  was  prepared  in  a  period  of  transition  of  Hebrew 
scholarship  and  does  not  satisfy  the  present  conditions  of  OT.  scholarship  or 
the  needs  of  the  Church  or  people.  Furthermore,  it  does  not  sufficiently  con- 
sider the  Ancient  Vrss.,  and  is  not  based  on  a  revision  of  the  Hebrew  text. 
The  margin  of  the  RV.  gives  the  most  important  part  of  the  work  of  the 
Revisers  and  is  of  great  value.  Several  independent  versions  have  been  made 
in  recent  times:  John  De  Witt,  1884  ;  T.  K.  Cheyne,  1888  ;  Furness,  1898  ; 
S.  R.  Driver,  The  Parallel  Psalter,  19042  (an  important  and  valuable  revision 
of  FBV.).  The  Jewish  Publication  Society  of  America,  1903,  gave  a  new  and 
excellent  translation  from  the  Massoretic  text.  There  is  no  sound  reason  why 
Roman  Catholics,  Protestants,  and  Jews  should  not  unke  and  agree  in  a  Ver- 
sion far  better  than  any  that  has  yet  been  made. 

Many  metrical  versions  of  the  Psalter  have  been  made  for  use  in  Christian 
worship  in  the  service  of  song,  the  chief  of  which  are  those  of  Sternhold  and 
Hopkins,  and  Tate  and  Brady,  used  in  England;  Rouse,  used  in  Scotland;  and 
Watts,  used  by  the  Nonconformists  of  England  and  their  children  in  America. 
From  a  literary  point  of  view  the  most  valuable  paraphrase  is  still  that  of  Mer- 
rick, 1765.  The  fault  of  all  these  versions  is  that  they  are  based  either  upon 
English  Versions  or  the  Massoretic  text.  None  of  them  were  made  with  any 
knowledge  whatever  of  the  measures  of  Hebrew  poetry.  It  is  now  quite  pos- 
sible to  reproduce  the  poetry  of  the  Psalms  in  essentially  the  same  measures 
in  English  poetry.  Scholars  who  have  the  poetic  gift  should  undertake  this 
task,  which  when  accomplished  will  greatly  enlarge  the  use  of  the  Psalter  for 
English-speaking  peoples,  and  enrich  their  devotion,  public  and  private,  with 
a  finer  literary  flavour. 


A   COMMENTARY   ON   THE   BOOK   OF 

PSALMS. 


A   COMMENTARY   ON   THE   BOOK   OF 
PSALMS. 


PSALM   I.,   2  str.  64. 

Ps.  i  is  a  didactic  Ps.  of  the  Greek  period,  introductory  to  the 
Psalter.  In  two  antith.  Strs.  it  contrasts  the  happiness  of  the 
righteous  man  (v.12)  with  the  ultimate  ruin  of  the  wicked  (v.4-6) . 
The  righteous  man  avoids  the  company  of  wicked  men,  and  dili- 
gently studies  the  Law.  An  intermediate  gloss  compares  the 
righteous  to  a  fruitful  tree  in  a  well-watered  garden  (v.3) . 

J-[APPY  the  man! 

Who  doth  not  walk  in  the  counsel  of  wicked  men, 

And  in  the  way  of  sinners  doth  not  stand, 

And  in  the  session  of  scorners  doth  not  sit  down ; 

But  rather  in  the  Law  of  Yahweh  is  his  delight, 

And  in  His  Law  he  studies  day  and  night. 
JS^OT  so  the  wicked! 

But  rather  they  are  as  the  chaff  which  the  wind  driveth  away; 

Therefore  wicked  men  will  not  rise  up  in  the  Judgment, 

And  sinners  (will  not  enter)  into  the  congregation  of  righteous  men ; 

For  Yahweh  knoweth  the  way  of  righteous  men, 

But  the  way  of  wicked  men  will  perish  (everlastingly). 

Ps.  i  is  orphan  (Intr.S 37)  and  therefore  was  not  in  any  of  the  Psalters 
prior  to  the  last.  It  was  doubtless  later  than  any  of  them.  It  was  not  counted 
originally,  for  2  codd.  DeR.  do  not  number  it;  and  5  codd.  Kenn.,  3  DeR., 
some  codd.  <£,  Justin  (Ap.  I40),  and  many  fathers  (especially  Western),  and 
rabbis,  combine  it  with  Ps.  2;  according  to  the  ancient  saying  that  the  first 
Ps.  begins  and  closes  with  beatitude  (Talm.  Berakoth  f.  c/).  In  Western 
texts  and  Vrss.  of  Acts  1333,  Ps.  2  is  cited  as  Ps.  I  ;  so  Meyer,  Tisch.,  Blass  ; 
but  the  great  Uncials  have  Sevrtpy,  so  Westcott  and  Hort,  and  Wendt.  It 
was  selected  as  an  introduction  to  \p  by  the  final  editor.  The  date  of  Ps.  I 
maybe  determined  by  the  following  considerations:  (1)  It  is  characteristic 
of  late  writings  that  they  make  much  use  of  earlier  ones.  V.3  is  based  on 
Je.  1 7^-8  and  Ez.  4712,  and  is  therefore  postexilic.     If  v.3  be  original,  it  gives 

3 


4  PSALMS 

evidence  of  date  of  Ps.;  if  a  gloss,  only  as  to  date  of  the  gloss.  The  argument 
of  Ba.  that  the  prose  writer  uses  the  poet  and  not  the  poet  the  prose,  is  with- 
out force  if  v.3  is  a  prosaic  gloss.  V.26  is  based  on  Jos.  I8  (D),  and  is  post- 
deuteronomic ;  for  the  Ps.  substitutes  for  the  external,  "  depart  out  of  thy 
mouth,"  the  first  clause  of  Jos.  I8,  the  internal  "delight  in,"  indicating  a  later 
and  more  matured  conception.  The  language  of  the  Ps.  is  that  of  the  Greek 
period :  oyvh  nxj?  v.15,  D>xS  nvho  v.ld,  q^d  ^b  v.3*.  The  syntax  is  also  late : 
mm  v.3*,  jnv  v.6.  (2)  The  o^ch  and  o\*>ns  are  classes  in  the  Jewish  com- 
munity. The  earlier  antitheses  between  wicked  rulers  and  an  oppressed  peo- 
ple, characteristic  of  preexilic  writings;  and  of  righteous  Israel  and  her  wicked 
foes,  characteristic  of  the  long  period  of  foreign  domination,  do  not  appear; 
the  antithesis  is  between  two  classes  among  the  Jews,  the  righteous,  the 
strict  students  of  the  Law,  who  keep  apart  from  the  company  of  the  wicked  ; 
and  the  wicked,  who  scorn  the  ethical  teachings  of  Wisdom  and  transgress 
the  Law.  All  this  implies  a  fully  developed  school  of  Wisdom,  as  well  as  an 
intense  scribal  devotion  to  the  Law.  There  is  not  that  exclusive  devotion  to 
the  Law  of  Pss.  198-15  119,  or  to  Wisdom  of  Pr.  1-9;  but  the  author  blends 
the  teachings  and  practice  of  these  two  types.  He  lived  in  peaceful  times 
before  the  antagonisms  of  religious  parties,  and  thus  probably  in  the  late 
Greek  period.  A  similar  situation  is  in  BS  637  1420"21,  which  seem  to  be  based 
on  this  Ps.  (3)  The  reference  to  the  Judgment,  v.5°,  implies  a  judicial  inter- 
ference of  Yahweh  ;  not  as  between  Israel  and  her  oppressors,  as  in  the  pro- 
phetic books,  but  as  between  the  righteous  and  wicked  in  Israel  itself.  As 
the  result  of  that  Judgment  the  righteous  will  rise  up,  an  organized  congrega- 
tion, v.5*,  from  which  the  wicked  will  be  excluded.  The  wicked  will  not  rise. 
If  the  rising  here  is  to  be  interpreted  as  a  resurrection,  then  the  exclusion  of 
the  wicked  implies  an  earlier  date  tn*n  Dn.,  which  includes  wicked  Israelites 
in  the  resurrection,  Dn.  122,  and  is  more  in  accord  with  Is.  2614"19,  where  the 
wicked  oppressors  do  not  rise  with  God's  people.  The  apocalypse,  Is.  24-27, 
seems  to  belong  to  the  time  of  Alexander  the  Great.  The  resemblance  in 
doctrine  between  Ps.  1  and  Is.  26  would  favour  the  putting  of  our  Ps.  between 
that  apocalypse  and  Dn. ;  that  is,  in  the  Greek  period  before  the  persecutions 
of  Antiochus.  This  Ps.  was  probably  the  basis  of  the  doctrine  of  the  Two 
Ways  which  plays  such  an  important  part  in  Jewish  and  early  Christian  Litera- 
ture (Mt.  713-14.      V.  Br.  Ethical  Teaching  of  Jesus,  pp.  82  sq.). 

The  Ps.  has  two  antith.  Strs.  of  s:x  tetrameter  lines  each.  This  has 
not  been  observed  by  Du.  or  Siev.,  both  of  whom  regard  v.8  as  original  to 
the  Ps.  The  former  says :  "  Keine  Strophen,  wie  mir  scheint,  sondern  nur 
unregelmassig  gebildete  Stichen,  die  sich  auch  in  Stil  und  Ausdruck  der  Prosa 
nahern."  The  latter  says :  "  Ps.  1  enthalt  so  viel  metrisch  Anstossiges  oder 
Auffalliges,  dass  man  nicht  fiber  den  Zweifel  herauskommt  wie  viel  davon 
spaterer  Verderbnis  oder  personlichem  Form-ungeschick  des  Verfassers  ent- 
stammt."  The  real  difficulty  is  with  both  that  they  did  not  discern  the  gloss, 
and  so  could  not  understand  the  measure,  which  is  really  one  of  the  simplest 
and  finest  in  the  Psalter. 


PSALM  I.  5 

Str.  I.  1.  The  poet,  in  view  of  the  description  of  the  righteous 
man  he  is  about  to  give,  exclaims  :  Happy  the  man  /     He  uses  a 
dimeter,  or  half  line,  to  allow  a  metrical  pause  after  the  exclama- 
tion.    He  is  not  thinking  of  mankind,  men,  women,  and  children  j 
but  of  men  only.     He  has  not  in  mind  all  men,  or  all  Jews,  or  all 
pious  men;    but  specifically  that  kind  of  a  man  he  is  about  to 
describe,  one  devoting  his  whole  time,  night  and  day,  to  the  study 
of  the  Law ;   that  is,  the  ideal  scribe  such  as  Ezra.     Jerome  tells 
us  the  pious  Jews  thought  of  King  Josiah  as  the  ideal.    The  right- 
eous man  is  described  first  negatively  in  three  syn.  tetrameters 
which  yet  gradually  became  more  intense,  reaching  a  climax  in 
the  last  line  :    who  doth  not  walk\    cf.  Mi.  616  Je.  724 ;    doth  not 
stand^   cease  from  walking  and  so  remain  standing  j   doth  not  sit 
down~\  continual  participation  in.  —  in  the  counsel]  while  walking, 
listening  to  and  receiving  counsel  or  advice,  in  the  way]  the  moral 
conduct,  the  course  of  life,  in  the  session]  not  settling  down  in  the 
session,  or  assembly  of  the  scorners,  and  so  being  in  entire  accord 
with  them. —  Wicked  men]  a  class  in  antithesis  to  righteous  men, 
who  studied  and  practised  the  Law ;  sinners']  antith.  to  upright,  a 
more  general  term  referring  to  all  who  fail  from  or  do  not  conform 
to  the  ethical  and  religious  goal  or  way  of  life ;    scorners]   antith. 
to  wise  men ;    those  who  mock  at  and  scorn  the  discipline  of 
wisdom.     The  righteous  man  abstains  from  all  such  conduct  and 
avoids  the  company  of  all  such  men.  —  2.   The  righteous  man 
is  described  positively  in  two  syn.  lines  antith.  to  the  previous 
three.  —  In  the  Law  of  Yahweh]  embracing  the  entire  legislation 
compacted  in  the  Pentateuch,  and  so  called  the  Law  as  the  first 
layer  of  the  Canon,  in  the  Greek  period  when  this  Ps.  was  com- 
posed {v.  Br.SHS120),  repeated  for  emphasis.  —  his  delight]  the  good 
pleasure  the  righteous  man  took  in  the  Law,  ||  studies  day  and 
night]  reading  it  over  and  over  again  in  the  low,  murmuring  tone 
of  one  reading  to  oneself,  to  impress  it  upon  the  mind  and  com- 
mit it  to  memory,  a  method  characteristic  of  oriental  students, 
rather  than  meditating  or  musing  upon  what  had  been  previously 
read.     This  study  is  habitual  not  only  during  the  day  but  also 
during  the  night.     The  second  line  is  cited  from  Jos.  i8  (D). 

3.  The  editor  of  \p  inserts  four  lines  of  illustration  before  the 
antistrophe. 


6  PSALMS 

^ND  he  is  like  a  tree  transplanted  beside  channels  of  water, 
Which  yieldeth  his  fruit  in  his  season, 
Whose  leaf  withers  not ; 
So  all  that  he  doeth,  he  carries  through  successfully. 

The  happiness  of  the  righteous  man  is  illustrated  by  the  simile 
of  a  tree,  which  is  removed  from  its  native  soil  and  transplanted 
to  the  most  favoured  soil,  in  a  fertile  garden  irrigated  by  many 
channels  of  water,  such  as  Wady  Urtas,  where  were  the  gardens 
of  Solomon;  Engedi,  famed  for  its  fertility  (Rob.1477,01550)  ;  the 
gardens  of  Damascus,  Egypt,  and  Babylon,  irrigated  by  canals 
drawn  from  the  great  rivers ;  and  it  is  probable  that  the  story  of 
the  streams  of  Eden,  Gn.  2,  was  in  the  mind  of  the  poet ;  for  he 
adapts  and  combines  from  Je.  1 7s  the  beautiful  and  fully  stated 
simile  of  the  man  trusting  in  Yahweh ;  from  Ez.  47126  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  living  trees  on  the  banks  of  the  river  of  life  in  the 
future  paradise,  which  bear  fruit  monthly  and  whose  leaves  are 
ever  green  and  medicinal  (cf.  Rev.  2  22)  ;  with  the  irrigated  gar- 
dens of  his  own  time,  for  a  condensed  simile,  suggesting  a  com- 
prehensive ideal  to  one  familiar  with  the  sacred  writings.  He 
then  interprets  the  simile  of  the  last  line  by  an  adaptation  of 
Jos.  i86.  The  righteous  man  has  in  him  such  life  and  vigour  from 
his  study  of  God's  word  that  he  makes  everything  that  he  does  to 
succeed  and  be  prosperous.  This  verse  is  thus  a  mosaic  of  three 
earlier  passages.  The  lines  are  irregular  and  prosaic  (5.4.  3.4). 
The  two  middle  lines  are  synonymous  but  synthetic  to  the  first 
line,  and  the  last  line  is  a  synthetic  explanation  of  the  simile. 

Str.  II.  is  an  antistrophe  to  Str.  I.  V.4  is  composed  (a)  of  a 
dimeter  line,  v.4a,  with  metrical  pause  antithetical  to  v.la,  con- 
trasting the  wicked  with  the  righteous  man ;  and  of  a  tetrameter 
simile,  v.46,  likening  the  wicked  to  chaff  on  the  threshing  floor. 
This,  in  Palestine,  is  usually  on  flat,  open  places  on  hilltops,  so 
that  when  the  ears  of  grain  are  thrown  up,  the  heavy  grain  falls 
to  the  ground,  while  the  wind  drives  away  the  light  chaff.  This 
simile  is  antith.  to  that  in  v.3,  so  far  as  a  fruit-bearing  tree  may  be 
to  chaff  of  grain  j  but  the  original  antith.  was  probably  of  "  driveth 
away"  to  deliberate  walking  in  counsel,  v.16.  —  5.  Rise  up  in  the 
Judgment]  is  antith.  to  standing  in  the  way,  v.lc ;  enter  into  the  con- 
gregation'] antith.  to  the  sitting  down  in  the  session,  v.7d.     Wicked 


PSALM  I.  7 

men  will  not  rise  up,  that  is,  in  the  resurrection  which  takes  place 
in  the  Judgment,  at  the  end  of  the  age  of  the  world.  Only  the 
righteous  share  in  that  resurrection.  So  Is.  2614"19,  the  people  of 
God  rise,  their  wicked  oppressors  do  not.  So  Jesus  speaks  of  the 
resurrection  of  the  just,  Lk.  1414,  without  mentioning  that  of  the 
unjust ;  and  St.  Paul  sets  forth  the  resurrection  of  Christians 
1  Cor.  15,  those  who  are  not,  apparently,  being  in  the  back- 
ground of  his  thoughts  and  so  unmentioned  {v.  Br.MA113sq).  The 
resurrection  of  the  wicked  appears  in  OT.  only  Dn.  122,  and 
in  NT.  explicitly  only  Jn.  5s8-99  Rev.  2011-15  {v.  Br.MG273).  This 
interpretation,  given  by  <&,  F,  2T,  Ba\,  is  more  suitable,  in  view  of 
the  late  date  of  the  Ps.,  than  the  usual  modern  interpretation, 
"  stand  in  the  judgment,"  that  is,  God's  providential  judgment  in 
the  course  of  human  history.  The  congregation  of  the  righteous 
men  may  be  conceived  as  the  congregation  of  the  zealous  Jews 
from  which  the  wicked  would  be  kept  apart  by  divine  judg- 
ment ;  but  better,  of  the  congregation  after  the  judgment  of  the 
resurrection,  in  which  there  can  be  no  wicked,  for  they  have  not 
been  permitted  to  rise.  —  6.  The  Str.  concludes  with  two  antith. 
tetrameters  summing  up  the  contrast  already  drawn.  There  are 
two  ways.  The  way  of  the  righteous  is  a  way  which  Yahweh 
knoweth  ;  not  merely  theoretically  and  ideally,  but  practically  and 
really  by  personal  acquaintance  with  and  attentive  supervision  of 
it,  so  that  it  is  Yahweh's  way,  leading  unto  true  and  lasting  hap- 
piness. The  way  of  wicked  men  is  a  way  which  goeth  on  to  ever- 
lasting ruin,  cf.  6c)29.  The  Ps.  begins  with  happiness  and  concludes 
with  ruin,  cf.  Ps.  112.  All  is  comprehended  between  these  two 
ends  and  in  these  two  ways. 

1.  fneta]  cstr.  pi.  abstr.  wx  or  nm<  y/-\v«  Ew.*™  Lag.BN143,  BDB., 
33  t.  always  exclam.,  of  man  (never  of  God),  O  the  happiness,  happy  is  or  be, 
c.  BhH  elsw.  1121;  D1K  32s  846-13  Pr.  313  8s4  2814;  n^j  Pss.  34s  405  9412  1275; 
njn  3312;  o;*n  8916  I4415- 15;  ptc.  212  321  412  84s  1063  1192  1281  Is.  3018 
Dn.  1212;  other  words  Dt.  33^  1  K.  io8-8(  =  2  C.  97-7)  Jb.  517  Pss.  65s  1191 
1282  1378-9  1465  Pr.  832  1421  1620  207  2918  Ec.  io17  Is.  3220  56s.  —  -v^n]  rel. 
pron.,  usually  omitted  in  \p,  dub.  here;  often  gloss  of  prosaic  copyists.  —  "\hn, 
"icy,  nvi]  Pfs.  abstr.  emphatic  presents  of  characteristic  and  established  state 
or  condition,  Ew.§ 135,  Ges.§ m  2,  usually  expressed  in  Eng.  by  auxiliary  do.  — 
cyan  nxj?]  Jb.  io3  2116  2218.  %  nxp  counsel,  either  as  (1)  advice,  guidance,  when 
used  of  God,  Pss.  3311  7324  10613  10711,  cf.  1192*  of  His  Law;    or  (2)  purpose, 


8  PSALMS 

design,  plan,  of  men,  i1  I33(?)  I46(?)  205  3310  10648.  —  %  rah  adj.  wicked; 
in  ^  either  (1)  guilty  of  hostility  to  God  or  His  people,  syn.  enemies  ;  sg. 
1713  714  1092*7  14059;    coll.  96-i7  io2. 3. 4. 13. 15  554  5gn  94i3  I39i9.    pl>  3»  7io 

918  „2.  6  I29  I79  2g8  3,18  58*  688  75s-  ll  822- 4  9I8  928  943-  3  97IO  I0436 
II95361.95.110.112  I294  ,4I10   I4520   ^76.     or    (2)    guilty    of  sin    against    God    Or 

man,  ethically  wicked:    sg.  n5  3210  362  3  710. 12.  21. 32. 35  II2w    con.  342-2  3^ 

pi.  jl.i.5.6   2&    3612    37M.  16- 17.  20.  28.  34.  38.  40    5016    733. 12    jofclS    II210    I46».     ,?eh 

p«(n)  759  1018  119119.  This  word  is  little  used  in  preex.  Lit.  and  not  at  all  in 
sense  (2).  It  is  chiefly  used  in  Ez.,  W.  L.,  and  \p,  antith.  p>ix.  —  d^kbh  ^via] 
phr.  a.X.  %  l\y\  in  \p,  (1)  way,  road,  path,  212  7720  8013  89*2  10747*0  no7, 
(2)  fig.  of  course  of  life  or  action,  undertaking  io5  1833  35s  37s-  7-  &  9111 
10224  11987  1281  1398  1469,  (3)  esp.  of  moral  action  and  character  5°  39s  4914 
5023  1195.26.59.168^  (4)  0f  duty  (commanded  by  God)  25s-12  32s  119I  1438, 
(5)  specif,  in  good  sense  i6  3714  ioi2-6  11930  13924,  or  (6)  in  bad  sense 
jl.6  365  I07n  II929  i3924.  (7)  way  0f  God,  His  moral  administration,  1831 
7714  8514  1037  1385  14517,  or  His  commands  1822  254-9  2711  37s4  51^  67s  8114 
8611  9510  ii93.i4.27.32.33._jD,^n  pi.  adj.  [Nan].  Sg.  only  f.  nxun  Am.  98; 
alw.  in  \p  in  ethical  sense,  more  comprehensive  than  D^pcn,  and  antith.  onc;% 
those  who  fail  or  err  from  the  norm  of  right  i1-5  25s  269  5116  10435;  used 
both  in  earliest  and  latest  Lit.  —  o^xS  ac^oa]  phr.  d.X.  J  atf»D  might  be  seat, 
place  of  sitting  down,  as  (5,  V,  cf.  attOD  "vp  city  as  dwelling-place  I074-7-36,  or 
Zion  as  place  of  enthronement  of  God  13213;  but  better  sitting,  session, 
assembly,  as  10782,  Aim,  Kirk.  —  ffS  scorner  Pr.  I22  334  9?- 8  13I  146  1512 
192529  20i  2In.24  22io  249  js#  2920t  a  term  characteristic  of  fully  developed 
Wisdom,  not  used  prob.  till  Greek  period.  @  \oiy.G>v  is  interpret,  and  does 
not  imply  a  different  text.  U  pestilentiae,  takes  the  word  as  abstr.  =  homines 
pestiferi.  Aug.  "whose  word  spreadeth  as  a  canker."  —  2.  on  13]  =  v.4 
£w/  rather,  on  the  contrary,  stronger  than  »a,  but,  BDB.  Makkeph  alw.  used 
after  on  except  Gn.  154  Nu.  35s*  Ne.  22  (v.  Intr.  §  12).  —  1  n"Y*na]  cstr.  sg. 
X  fTYifl  n.f.  y'n'v  (1)  the  Law  in  its  completion,  as  198  78s- 10  8931  9412  10546 
1191  +  21  t.  (v.  txt.);  min  elsw.  \f/,  (2)  of  instruction  of  poet  781,  (3)  of 
divine  teaching,  in  the  mind  3731  409.  Lag.  Du.  rd.  PK*va,  cf.  1910,  on  ground 
that  the  poet  would  not  repeat  himself  in  syn.  lines.  But  the  use  of  identical 
words  in  syn.  lines  is  not  uncommon  to  emphasize  the  variation  in  other 
words.  —  X  TP1?]  c.  a.  (1)  delight  as  1 6s,  so  usually,  but  (2)  ©  dt\-qixa, 
TB  voluntas,  will,  purpose,  as  Is.  44s8  4610  4814;  elsw.  (3)  desire,  longing, 
Ps.  10780.  —  Jos.  i8  has  nVSi  odv  1a  n\m  yen  nrn  rrnnn  -\bd  vxa>  kS.  The 
change  from  ">a  to  tmwa  was  necess.  because  of  omission  of  noD  in  previous 
line,  otherwise  it  would  have  furnished  a  good  tetrameter.  —  njrrj  Qal 
impf.  frequentative  Jnjn:  (1)  growl,  groan,  moan,  not  in  \j/.  (2)  utter 
c.  ace.  rei.  3813,  subj.  \vdh  3528  7124;  dd  3780  speak  abs.  1157.  (3)  utter 
indistinct  sound  as  in  soliloquy,  meditations,  c.  a,  ||  rri?  637  7713;  so  prob. 
777  as  <g  for  ffy  *rmu  1435;  so  possibly  Jos.  I8  and  here.  (4)  But  better  of 
the  low,  murmuring  sound  of  reading  aloud  to  oneself,  or  the  repetition 
of  study,  Ains.  ;    (5)  imagine,  devise,  c.  ace.  2'1,  as  Pr.  1528  242.  —  J  DD^] 


PSALM  I.  9 

=  o"n  +  o_  adv.  in  the  daytime,  by  day,  sq.  rh>h,  also  32*  42*  5511,  possibly 
133  &,  also  882  (for  or  rd.  ddv);  ||  nS>S  223  429  7814  916  1215.  — 3.  rum] 
cannot  be  1  consec,  for  there  is  no  previous  impf.  upon  which  it  can  depend. 
The  only  previous  impf.  is  frequentative.  It  cannot  be  consec.  to  the  str. 
as  a  whole,  for  it  introduces  a  simile,  not  a  consequence.  In  fact,  it  is  a 
simple  citation  from  Je.  178,  where  it  is  l  consec.  in  its  context.  But  taken 
from  its  context  it  can  only  be  1  conj.  of  late  style,  introducing  a  new  and 
independent  clause.  —  o^D  ijho  Sj?  Sintf  pp]  is  the  same  as  Je.  178  except  for 
the  insertion  of  >J*?D.  Je.  cannot  have  cited  from  Ps.,  for  the  clause  in  Je.  is 
part  of  a  beautiful  simile,  and  necessary  both  in  syntax  and  idea;  whereas  it 
is  loosely  attached  to  Ps.,  the  first  clause  of  a  mosaic  of  three  earlier  passages, 
without  measure  and  disturbing  the  symmetry  of  Ps.  —  Sinr  Ptc.  pass.  = 
Je.  178.  Vt  "?ntf  transplant  (not  plant)  9214  Ez.  178.10.22.23  IOH)T.i3  Ho.  Q13(?). 
f  rVntr]  transplanted  shoot  Ps.  1283.  —  f  d^d  vjSs  artificial  watercourses  used 
to  irrigate  gardens,  parks,  and  arable  land;  so  here  Is.  32s  Pr.  516  211,  cf. 
Ps.  46s;  fig.  of  tears  from  eyes  Ps.  119136  La.  348,  cf.  Jb.  29s  of  outrun  of 
oil  from  vat;  D'uSd  elsw.  of  overflow  of  river  Is.  3025,  sg.  of  downfall  of  rain 
Ps.  6510.  —  inj?3  jm  vnc]  is  generalization  of  Ez.  4712a.  —  t  W2  it  his  season, 
i.e.  of  ripe  fruit  Ho.  211  Jb.  526,  when  food  is  needed  Ps.  10427  14515,  of  rain 
Dt.  II14  2812  Je.  524  Ez.  3426,  appearance  of  constellation  Jb.  3832,  appropriate 
time  Pr.  1523  Ec.  311.  —  hm  nS  vrhy\]  direct  citation  from  Ez.  47126.  —  inSp 
archaic  poetic  sf.  J  Thy  leaf,  foliage,  only  here  \f/,  usually  of  fading  Is.  I30  34* 
64s  Je.  813  Ez.  4712.— \w  Qal  impf.  fSai  (1)  sink,  drop  down,  1846  = 
2  S.  2246,  of  exhaustion  of  Israel's  foes  Ex.  1818  (E)  Jb.  1418.  (2)  fall  like 
leaf  or  flower,  wither,  fade  Is.  I30  24*  281-4  344  4078  645  Je.  813  Ps.  372,  so 
here  and  Ez.  4712.  —  Sdi]  not  subj.  as  AV.  after  (S,  which  prob.  rd.  Qal  of 
Vb.;  but  obj.  after  Hiph.,  60  Dr.  accord,  to  Jos.  I8  on  which  the  clause  is 
based.  See  v.26.  —  n>*?*i]  Hiph.  impf.  %  nSx  Qal  have  success  45s,  Hiph. 
carry  a  thing  through  to  success  or  victory,  of  man  377  as  here;   of  God  11825. 

—  4.  p"**1?]  not  so,  strong  antithesis  to  v.la.  It  is  repeated  in  <&.  So  We., 
Oort,  Ba.,  Che.,  but  by  dittog. :  exact  antith.  to  v.la  requires  dimeter.  —  D^isnn] 
article,  here  only  in  Ps.  because  of  antithesis  to  tt"xn  v.la.  —  ffD?]  as  chaff, 
always  as  driven  by  wind,  and  c.  3  of  sim.;  of  wicked  35s  Ho.  133  Jb.  2118  as 
here;  of  hostile  nations  Is.  1713  295,  of  Judah's  power  Is.  41 16,  of  passing 
time  Zp.  22.  —  "V£>n]  relative  unnecessary  prosaic  gloss,  destroys  measure.  — 
WOTFi]  Qal  impf.  3  f.  with  strong  sf.,  Ges.?58^).  -y/t  rpj  Qal  drive  about,  here 
chaff,  but  smoke  683,  man  Jb.  3213,  Niph.  be  driven,  of  smoke  by  wind  Ps.  683, 
cf.  Pr.  216;  various  things  Lv.  2636  Is.  197  412  Jb.  1325.  <£,  IB,  PBV  add  d7r6 
irpoad)Trov  ttjs  yrjs,  so  Bi.,  Du.,  in  order  to  get  rid  of  abruptness  of  first  line. 
But  <3  is  an  explanatory  gloss.  —  5.  J  l.?"^]  "  upon  ground  of  such  conditions, 
therefore,  introducing,  more  generally  than  \"h,  the  statement  of  a  fact,  rather 
than  a  declaration  "  BDB;    also  1850  25s  42'  45s-  «• 18  46s  I  io7  1 19104- 127- 128- 129. 

—  •1DP'»]  def.  written  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  rise  up,  of  resurrection,  (3  avavT-fiaovTai, 
7B  resurgunt,  &,  8811  Is.  2614-19;  most  moderns,  because  of  supposed  early 
date  of  Ps.,  stand,  abide,  c.  3  as  24s;  no  other  mng.  of  Qal  suits  context. — 


tO  PSALMS 

Bscb?]  in  the  judgment,  the  time  when  God  will  pronounce  His  final  judg- 
ment at  His  advent,  as  Ec.  1 19  1214  =  pi  Dn.  710-22-26.  It  is  usually  inter- 
preted by  moderns  of  any  historic  judgment.  J  osc'p  (1)  act  of  judgment, 
deciding  a  case,  by  God,  in  historic  time  98  3523  7610,  of  Davidic  kings  1225; 
(2)  the  process,  procedure,  litigation,  before  the  judge  II25  1432;  (3)  the 
sentence  or  decision  7"  (if  n«  is  used,  otherwise  as  (1),  so  possibly  original), 
172;  (4)  the  execution  of  the  judgment  9517  11984  1467  1499,  acts  in  execution 
of  io5  4812  978  1036  105s- 7.  (5)  attribute  of  the  Dotf,  justice ;  of  God  33s 
3728  ^4.4  j,^  aiso  ^67  721  (|^  pi.),  T3i  p-ix  bases  of  divine  throne  8915  =  97s; 
of  man  37s30  722  9416  1011  1068;  (6)  ordinance  promulgated  by  Dec,  judg- 
ment as  law  1910  25s  816  ii97  +  2it  14720,  (7)  decision  of  the  optf  in  a  case 
of  law  {v.  Br.IIex2528q-);  pi.  of  series  of  decisions;  in  Covt.  code  and  D, 
collection  of  pentades  in  conditional  or  temporal  clauses,  c.  *o  or  dn  in  D,  in 
combination  'si  oipn  Dt.  4*  +  ,  in  Code  of  H  and  after  in  combin.  rnpn 
Ti  Lv.  1 8*  +  ,  cf.  Ps.  1823  (=  2  S.  2223)  8981  14719;  (8)  that  which  belongs 
to  one  by  justice  or  law,  his  right,  due,  14018;  (9)  the  time  of  judgment, 
only  here  ^  as  above.  For  other  uses  than  those  of  \f/  see  BDB.  — 
rma]  cstr.  sg.  J  rn?  congregation,  or  company,  properly  assembled  by  ap- 
pointment, y/^T>  (1)  of  nations  78,  of  angels  821,  of  evil-doers  2217,  cf. 
1061718,  of  bulls,  fig.  nobles  6831,  D^>i;  y  8614;  (2)  specif,  of  the  congrega- 
tion of  Israel.  <S  o-vvayuy-f)  74s  as  usual  in  P,  also  62°  (<S),  in1  (||  iid),  so 
here.  (S  has  here  iv  /3ou\^  as  v.16.  rxyj,  by  editorial  assimilation  is  error. 
This  line  is  trimeter;  we  should  probably  supply  vb.  inu\  It  is  improb.  that 
poet  shortened  his  line  to  make  both  lines  dependent  on  XDp\  That  looks 
more  like  the  work  of  a  prosaic  copyist.  —  D,f?,7*]  pi.  Jp,7?i  (0  just, 
righteous  in  government,  of  God,  in  general  119137  1294,  in  discrimination 
yio.  12  II7)  jn  redemption  1166,  in  all  His  ways  14517;  (2)  righteous,  as  vindi- 
cated and  justified  by  God,  (a)  his  people  over  against  enemies  sg.  coll.  n3  5 

,45  3,19    5523    5811.12   6411    7511    Q213   Q421    ^11    I4I5f    pl#  33I    528    684    OQ29   ^12 

1 1 815-  2°  I253-3  14014  1428  1468,  passing  over  into,  and  not  always  distinguish- 
able from,  (b)  because  of  zeal  for  righteousness  of  Law,  sg.  coll.  371" 16- 2L  25-  30. 32 
3420.  22^  pi#  34ie  37i7.29.39  an(|  here  i5&;  (3)  just,  righteous  in  conduct  and 
character,  more  ethical  than  above,  as  in  W.  L.  sg.  coll.  518  710  727  11246, 
pi.  3211.  —  6.  £^]  Qal  ptc.  In  classic  usage  ptc.  would  imply  continuous 
knowledge  as  disting.  fr.  impf.  frequentative,  oft-repeated  action,  but  ||  impf. 
nasn  suggests  in  such  a  late  Ps.  the  late  Heb.  usage  of  ptc.  for  verbal  action 
without  distinction  of  kind  or  sphere  of  time.  jn»,  vb.  J  Qal  in  \p  has  but  two 
classes  of  mng.,  (i)  know,  learn  to  know  things,  of  man  know,  understand 
7316  749  8i'\  know  so  as  to  estimate  and  tell  7115,  know  by  experience  921  144 
(=  535)  39s-7  7322  78s- 6  82s  8916  9011  927  13914;  be  conscious,  aware  0/3511  15, 
recognize,  admit,  acknoxvledge  5 16,  anticipate,  expect  35s,  know  that  c.  >3  44  207 
4i1246n  5610  5914  8319  1003  10927  U975i52  I355  I40i3.  the  sun  knows  his 
setting  10419;  (2)  know  a  person,  be  acquainted  with  him  and  his  affairs, 
(a)  subj.  man,  know  God  in  intelligent  worship  and  obedience  36u  79s  874, 
His  name  911  9114,  His  ways  67s  9510,  His  testimonies  U979-125,  His  judg- 


PSALM   II.  II 

ments  14720;  be  acquainted  with  men  1844  ioi4;  (b)  sub].  God,  know  a  per- 
son, be  acquainted  with  him,  personally  interested  in  his  actions  and  affairs, 
taking  notice  of  him  and  regarding  him,  c.  ace.,  so  here  as  3718  44s2  6920 
9411  10314  1386  1392.4.23,23  I424  1443,  fowls  5011,  c.  >VDi  nnxa  318,  c.  S  69s, 
abs.  4010  7311  1391.  —  na«n]  Qal  impf.  i.p.  for  "QKn,  c.  yxi  only  here,  elsw.  -on 
vb.  J  Qal,  (1)  perish,  vanish  away,  die  4911  1 1992,  emphasis  on  mortality  1464, 
the  wicked  by  divine  judgment  372)  683  73127  9210  so  here;  stronger  meaning 
be  exterminated,  of  Israel  8o17,  other  nations  21'2  &318,  cf.  9*;  of  inanimate 
things,  a  vessel  3113,  heavens  and  earth  102'27;  (2)  fig.  the  memory  9",  name 
416,  hope  919,  desire  11210,  place  of  flight  1425;  (3)  be  tost,  strayed,  of  sheep, 
fig.  119176.  A  trimeter  line  at  the  end  is  possible,  but  not  probable.  The 
inf.  abs.  -on  has  probably  been  lost  by  copyist  error  because  of  identity  of 
letters  with  "Onp.  This  is  so  appropriate  metrically  and  intensively  that  it 
is  altogether  probable. 

PSALM   II.,   4  str.  f. 

Ps.  2.  was  the  Messianic  introduction  to  ©,  It  describes  the 
nations  plotting  against  Yahweh  and  His  Messiah  (v.1-3)  ;  and  in 
antistr.  Yahweh  Himself  laughing  at  them  and  telling  them  of  His 
installation  of  His  king  (v.4~7a).  The  Messiah  then  cites  the  word 
of  Yahweh  constituting  him  Son  of  God  and  giving  him  the  nations 
as  his  inheritance  (v.76-9) ;  and  in  antistr.  warns  them  to  serve 
Yahweh  (v.10~12c).  A  liturgical  addition  pronounces  all  happy  who 
seek  refuge  in  Him  (v.12d). 

Yy  HY  do  nations  consent  together, 

And  peoples  devise  plans  in  vain  ? 

Kings  of  earth  take  their  stand, 

And  princes  do  consult  together, 

Against  Yahweh  and  against  His  anointed: 

"  Let  us  tear  apart  their  bands, 

And  let  us  cast  away  from  us  their  cords." 
(~)NE  throned  in  heaven  laughs  (at  them), 

My  sovereign  Lord  mocks  at  them  : 

Then  in  His  anger  He  speaks  unto  them, 

And  in  His  burning  anger  terrifies  them  : 

(Declaring)  the  decree  (of  Yahweh), 

"  Now  I,  I  have  set  My  king, 

Upon  Zion,  My  sacred  mount." 
yAHWEH  said  unto  me: 

"  My  son  art  thou, 

I,  to-day,  have  begotten  thee; 

\  will  give  nations  for  thine  inheritance, 

And  for  thy  possession  the  ends  of  the  earth. 


12  PSALMS 

Thou  shalt  rule  them  with  an  iron  sceptre, 
As  a  potter's  vessel  thou  shalt  dash  them  in  pieces." 
"  MOW  therefore  act  prudently,  O  kings, 
Be  admonished,  governors  of  earth, 
Serve  Yahweh  with  fear, 
And  rejoice  in  Him  with  trembling. 
Kiss  sincerely,  lest  He  be  angry. 
And  ye  perish  from  the  right  way, 
For  quickly  His  anger  will  be  kindled." 

Pss.  2  and  72  are  without  Q  in  titles  in  $.  But  <g  has  Tj/a\nbs  t£  AavlS  in 
title  of  Ps.  2  in  <gR  Aid.  Compl.,  and  in  title  of  Ps.  72  in  42  codd.  HP.  none 
earlier  than  eleventh  century.  These  rest  probably  on  editorial  conjecture. 
Ps.  722)  after  doxology,  and  therefore  after  attachment  of  doxologies  to  \p, 
ends  with  a  statement  which  implies  that  Ps.  72  concluded  IB  (z>.  Intr.  §27). 
Ps.  2  was  therefore  introductory  to  Q  and  Ps.  72  its  conclusion,  and  being 
used  for  the  same  purpose  by  the  editor  of  ^,  he  omits  the  reference  to  Q. 
The  Ps.  describes  an  ideal  situation,  in  the  universal  dominion  of  the  monarch 
and  the  vain  plotting  of  the  nations.  Such  a  situation  never  emerged  in  the 
history  of  Israel  before  the  exile,  in  David  and  his  successors ;  or  subsequent 
to  the  exile,  in  the  Greek  kings  of  Palestine  or  the  Maccabean  princes.  The 
situation  is  rather  that  of  the  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  world-powers,  against 
which  there  was  continual  vain  rebellion,  according  to  the  Hebrew  prophets, 
and  the  cuneiform  monuments  of  these  kings.  The  same  world-wide  dominion 
was  held  by  Persia  and  Alexander,  but  there  was  not  the  same  situation 
of  plotting  and  rebellion.  It  is  probable  that  the  poet  idealizes  the  dynasty 
of  David  into  just  such  a  world-power  as  Assyria  or  Babylonia,  and  that  he 
wrote  during  the  supremacy  of  one  of  them.  The  seat  of  the  dominion  is 
Mt.  Zion,  and  therefore  we  cannot  think  with  Hi.  of  a  Greek  king,  such  as 
Alexander  Jannaeus,  or  with  Du.  of  Aristobulus  I.  The  king  cites  a  divine 
word  as  his  title  to  his  dominion.  This  is  based  on  the  covenant  made  by 
Yahweh  with  David,  2  S.  711-16  =  1  Ch.  1710-14,  adopting  the  seed  of  David  as 
son  of  God.  This  is  paraphrased  Pss.  89s" «»•  i32"-i2  (Br.Mp  126  ■*  258  "«•)• 
The  king,  Messiah  and  Son  of  God,  of  this  Ps.  must  be  of  the  dynasty  of 
David.  Therefore  we  cannot  think  of  Maccabean  princes  who  were  not  of 
the  line  of  David.  The  Ps.  refers  to  a  birthday,  a  time  of  the  installation 
of  the  king  on  Zion.  We  must  therefore  think  of  the  day  of  the  institution  of 
the  covenant,  which  is  ideally  combined  with  the  installation  of  the  dynasty 
in  Jerusalem.  It  is  probable  that  the  Ps.  represents  David  as  himself  speaking 
for  himself  and  his  seed  in  Strs.  III.  and  IV.;  just  as  in  Str.  II.  Yahweh  speaks, 
in  Str.  I.  the  nations.  It  is  true  that,  in  fact,  David  was  not  installed  in  Jeru- 
salem and  on  Zion,  but  at  Hebron  first  by  Judah  2  S.  21-4,  and  then  some 
years  after  by  all  the  tribes  51-3  ;  after  seven  years'  reign  in  Hebron  he 
captured  Jerusalem  and  removed  his  capitol  thither  54-*  without  any  further 
installation  ;  and  the  covenant  established  by  Yahweh  confirmed  him  in  his 
dominion  there.     But  the  poet  combines  all  these  several  things  in  one  pic- 


PSALM  IL  13 

ture  and  regards  them  all  as  the  installation  of  the  dynasty  on  Zion.  Undei 
these  circumstances,  it  is  not  so  important  to  determine  when  the  Ps.  was 
written,  for  in  any  case  the  Messianic  dynasty  is  in  view.  It  must,  however, 
be  later  than  the  covenant  which  thinks  only  of  an  everlasting  dominion  and 
not  of  a  world-wide  dominion  ;  and  so  must  be  in  the  period  of  the  supremacy 
of  the  world-powers,  when  first  universal  dominion  could  be  conceived  in 
connection  with  the  universal  rule  of  God.  Therefore  we  cannot  think  of  the 
time  of  David  (older  scholars  even  Pe.),  or  of  Solomon  (Ew.,  Bleek,  Kirk.), 
or  of  Uzziah  (Meier),  or  the  time  of  the  prophecy  of  Immanuel  (De.).  The 
earliest  time  conceivable  would  be  the  reign  of  Hezekiah  (Maurer,  Gr.);  but 
many  arguments  point  rather  to  the  reign  of  Josiah,  or  the  time  of  Jeremiah. 
These  are  also  against  the  views  that  it  was  composed  in  the  pre-Maccabean 
times  (Che.)  or  the  Maccabean  (Ba.).  The  language  does  not  favour  a  late 
date,  unless  itfjn  v.1,  Djpn  v.9  and  13  v.12  be  Aramaisms.  But  they  are  all 
good  Heb.  words  appropriate  to  the  age  of  Je.,  to  which  also  the  phrase 
iD>nnDio  nt*  npruj  v.3  points.  There  is  no  departure  from  strict  classic  style  of 
syntax.  The  style,  rhythm,  and  poetic  conception  are  of  the  best  types.  There 
is  no  dependence  on  other  Lit.;  the  Ps.  is  throughout  original  in  conception. 
Ps.  599  has  essentially  the  same  two  lines  as  24  quoting  our  Ps.;  Ps.  59  is  a 
Droc,  probably  the  oldest  group  in  ^  (z\  Intr.  §  25).  This  would  prove  the 
preex.  date  of  the  Ps.,  were  it  not  that  Ps.  59°  is  probably  a  gloss.  Ps.  1 10 
has  the  same  essential  theme.  There  is  a  possible  connection  between  the 
pn  of  v.7°  and  the  mm  dnj  no1,  nirp  jd#j  no4,  although  the  situation  of  the 
king  is  dissimilar.  There  is  possibly  a  verbal  correspondence  between  ^R^h* 
v.7c  and  "|mSi  no36.  It  is  difficult  to  show  dependence;  but  probably  no 
is  earlier  ;  at  least  it  reflects  a  more  warlike  condition  of  the  Davidic  mon- 
archy. Ps.  89s8  has  the  same  idea  of  extensive  dominion  and  sonship  in  "113:1 
firstborn  and  ynN  "oSd1?  f"hy.  However,  with  Ps.  132  it  laments  the  failure 
to  realize  the  covenant  and  is  probably  later  than  Ps.  2,  which  is  so  con- 
fident of  its  realization.  The  Ps.  is  composed  of  four  strs.  of  7  trimeters  each. 
There  are  two  parts  each  of  two  antith.  strs.  The  two  parts  are  in  introverted 
parall.  or  inclusion.  Str.  IV.  is  synon.  with  Str.  I. ;  these  include  Str.  III.  synon. 
with  Str.  II.  The  parall.  of  the  lines  of  strs.  with  the  corresponding  lines  of 
synon.,  or  antith.  strs.  has  nothing  to  surpass  it.  A  number  of  lines  are  in 
assonance  in  "id — v.3a  6<4a  6>5a  b.  The  Ps.  is  Messianic  because  it  presents  a 
world-wide  dominion  of  the  Son  of  David,  such  as  was  not  a  historical  reality 
in  the  time  of  the  poet  or  in  any  previous  or  subsequent  time  in  history,  but 
remains  an  ideal  at  the  goal  of  history.  Jesus  of  Nazareth  is  represented  in 
the  NT.  as  the  Son  of  David  and  heir  of  this  ideal.  God  at  his  baptism  recog- 
nized him,  "  Thou  art  my  beloved  Son'"  (that  is,  Messianic  Son)  Mk.  I11,  and 
at  his  transfiguration  (Mk.  92"8).  In  his  reign  from  heaven  over  the  world  he 
is  gradually  fulfilling  it.  When  he  ascended  into  heaven  and  sat  down  on 
the  right  hand  of  God,  he  was  installed  as  Son  of  God  in  his  world-wide 
dominion  as  Messiah.  So  St.  Paul  Acts  1338,  Rom.  I4,  applies  this  Ps.  to  him. 
Also  Heb.  i6  combines  our  Ps.  with  2  S.  714,  and  refers  them  to  the  enthroned 


14  PSALMS 

Christ,  cf.  Heb.  56.  Acts  4s6  applies  the  fruitless  rebellion  of  the  nations  to 
the  gathering  together  of  Herod  and  Pilate,  the  Gentiles  and  the  people 
of  Israel  against  the  crown  rights  of  Jesus.  The  universal  dominion  of  the 
Messiah  is  stated  in  connection  with  the  enthronement  Phil.  21(M1.  It  is  only 
gradually  realized,  for  he  must  reign  until  he  hath  put  all  his  enemies  under 
his  feet,  1  Cor.  1520-28.  At  the  Second  Advent  he  is  to  rule  with  a  rod  of  iron, 
Rev.  227  126  1916.     The  Ps.  is  a  proper  Ps.  for  Easter. 

Str.  I.  The  Ps.  conceives  of  Yahweh  as  sovereign  of  all  na- 
tions ;  and  of  the  king  anointed  by  Him,  as  ruling  over  the  kings 
of  the  earth.  His  kingdom  is  world-wide,  cf.  89s8.  The  nations, 
like  those  subjected  by  the  world-power  Babylon,  are  impatient 
of  this  dominion,  and  accordingly  they  secretly  plot  together  to 
throw  it  off.  This  is  graphically  described  in  4  syn.  lines. — 
1.  Why  do  nations  consent  together  ?~\  meet  in  council  and  come 
to  a  common  agreement  in  their  desire  of  rebellion ;  so  most 
probably  from  mng.  of  Heb.  stem  and  context ;  "  rage  "  AV.,  RV., 
JPSV,  "  rage  furiously  "  PBV,"  tumultously  assemble  "  RVm,  Kirk., 
and  so  variously,  most  moderns,  are  not  sustained  by  usage  or  con- 
text. — peoples  devise  plans]  to  make  their  rebellion  successful  all 
in  vain]  for  no  plan  that  they  can  think  of,  is  possible  of  realiza- 
tion. 2.  Kings  of  earth  take  their  stand]  at  the  head  of  their  na- 
tions, to  embolden  them  and  arouse  their  courage  ;  finally,  princes 
do  consu/t  together]  in  order  for  common  action  in  real  rebellion. 
They  regard  themselves  as  in  bondage,  bound  by  bands  and  tied 
by  cords,  as  captives  and  slaves  ;  and  with  one  voice  they  resolve  : 
3.  Let  us  tear  apart  their  bands  ||  And  let  us  cast  away  from  us 
their  cords]  This  is  the  outcome  of  their  plotting,  the  climax  of 
their  efforts,  words  and  nothing  more.  They  never  get  so  far  as 
actual  rebellion.     The  reason  appears  in  the  antistrophe. 

Str.  II.  describes,  in  4  syn.  lines,  4-5,  One  throned  in  heaven] 
in  sublime  contrast  with  the  plotting  nations.  He  laughs  at  them] 
those  nations  consenting  together. — My  sovereign  Lord]  giving 
the  word  its  original  mng.  which  is  more  suited  to  the  context 
than  the  proper  name  Adonayy  of  Vrss.  —  mocks  at  them]  those 
peoples  devising  plans  in  vain.  —  Ln  Bis  anger  He  speaks  unto 
them]  those  kings  taking  their  stand  ;  and  finally  in  His  burning 
anger  terrifies  them]  those  princes  consulting  together.  Nothing 
more  is  necessary.     The  nations  are  ready  to  revolt,  but  Yahweh 


PSALM   II.  15 

is  ready  for  war ;  and  He  terrifies  the  plotters  so  that  they  can  do 
nothing.  Yahweh's  words  sound  forth  in  antithesis  to  the  words 
of  the  plotters.  6.  7,  I  have  set  My  king~]  he  is  already  installed, 
Yahweh's  response  to  v.3"  —  upon  Zion,  My  sacred  mount,']  the  sa- 
cred capitol,  to  which  the  vassal  nations  and  kings  are  bound,  His 
response  to  their  resolution,  v.36.  7a.  Declaring  the  decree  of  Yah- 
weh]  so  (3 ;  these  are,  however,  the  words  of  the  poet  depending 
on  v.6,  and  probably  originally  immediately  following  it,  the  decree 
being  the  words  of  Yahweh  v.6,  the  inviolable  law  binding  all  vas- 
sals to  His  dominion  :  in  antith.  to  v.2c.  The  transposition  of  this 
line  led  (3  to  interpret  it  as  words  of  the  king  beginning,  however, 
v.6,  and  f^  to  make  the  words  of  the  king  begin  with  v.7,  both  at  the 
expense  of  the  parall.  and  strs.  The  Ps.  in  this  decree  is  thinking  of 
the  covenant  which  Yahweh  made  with  David  through  Nathan  the 
prophet,  constituting  David  and  his  seed  an  everlasting  dynasty. 
That  dynasty  was  set  or  installed  in  David,  and  continued  in  his 
seed  forever.  This  covenanted  dominion  cannot  be  thrown  off. 
Though  it  be  limited  in  the  time  of  the  poet  to  a  small  territory 
and  to  a  small  people,  it  is,  in  his  ideal,  world-wide,  universal,  over 
all  the  nations  and  kings  of  the  earth.  The  ideal  will  certainly  be 
realized,  for  it  is  a  divine  decree ;  and  though  nations  and  kings 
may  plot  to  overthrow  the  dominion,  as  they  did  that  of  the  world- 
powers  of  Assyria  and  Babylonia,  they  will  not  succeed ;  for  the 
world-power  of  the  king  is  so  identified  with  Yahweh's  dominion 
that  that  very  thought  will  terrify  the  rebellious  into  submission. 
Zion  the  sacred  mount,  consecrated  by  the  theophanic  presence  of 
Yahweh  in  His  temple,  is  the  seat  of  the  dominion,  the  residence, 
of  the  anointed  king,  the  capitol  of  the  world,  to  which  all  nations 
and  kings  are  bound,  whether  by  cords  of  love  or  bands  of  iron, 
cf.  Is.  22-4 ;  Mi.  41"4  where  the  mountain  of  the  house  of  Yahweh 
is  the  resort  of  all  nations  for  instruction  and  government,  in  order 
to  universal  peace. 

Str.  III.  7b.  Yahweh  said  unto  me~\  David  himself  speaks  as  the 
father  and  representative  of  his  dynasty,  quoting  Yahweh's  words 
to  him  by  Nathan  the  prophet.  These  words  are  in  three  pro- 
gressive couplets,  each  in  syn.  parall.  within  itself.  —  My  son  art 
thou  ||  I,  to-day,  have  begotten  thee~\  David  and  his  seed  were 
adopted  as  Yahweh's  Son  on  the  day  of  the  institution  of  the 


16  PSALMS 

Davidic  covenant,  when  first  David  reigned  by  right  of  divine 
sonship.  The  poet  ideally  combines  the  installation  of  David, 
2  S.  24,  with  the  covenant  recognition  of  sonship,  2  S.  711"16 ;  al- 
though the  former  took  place  some  years  earlier.  This  was  an 
unfolding  of  the  earlier  covenant  with  Israel  which  constituted 
Israel  as  a  people,  the  firstborn  son  of  God,  Ex.  42^23  (J.),  a 
kingdom  of  priests,  Ex.  19s-6  (E.).  Now  the  Davidic  line,  by 
divine  institution,  becomes  the  son  and  king  in  a  nation,  which 
remains  both  son  and  kingdom  in  larger  relations.  —  8.  The 
nations  ||  the  ends  of  the  earth]  A  universal,  world-wide  dominion 
over  them  was  not  contemplated  in  the  covenant  with  David.  The 
i?iherita?ice  || possession  of  the  kingdom  of  Israel  was  the  holy  land, 
Gen.  121-3,  4910Bq-  {v.  Br.MP48lBq)  ;  that  of  David's  seed,  the  holy 
land  and  holy  people.  The  rule  of  David  extended  over  Ammon, 
Moab,  Edom,  Syria,  Philistia ;  but  never  reached  the  extent  of  the 
old  empires  of  Egypt,  Babylonia,  or  the  Hittites.  Subsequently 
the  kingdom  of  David  was  divided,  each  section  was  reduced,  and 
finally  destroyed,  the  Northern  kingdom  by  Assyria,  the  Southern 
by  Babylon.  These  arose  successively  as  the  great  world-powers ; 
making  it  evident  that  if  the  Davidic  kingdom  was  to  be  in  fact 
an  everlasting  kingdom,  it  must  be  a  world-power,  and  have  ulti- 
mate and  universal  dominion.  This  logical  result  of  the  Davidic 
covenant,  in  the  light  of  the  history  of  Babylonia,  becomes  to  the 
poets  of  Pss.  2,  89  an  essential  part  of  the  original  covenant,  and 
is  put  here  ideally  in  the  mouth  of  David  himself.  —  9.  The  rule 
of  the  Messiah  is  to  be  with  an  iron  sceptre,  because  he  has  to  do 
with  rebellious  nations,  and  these  will  only  obey  an  iron  rule ; 
even  though  all  their  array  of  kings  and  nations  are  as  a  potter's 
vessel  when  brought  in  conflict  with  the  power  of  the  one  king 
who  rules  as  the  son  of  God. 

Str.  IV.  If  we  take  the  last  line  of  the  Psalm  as  original,  it  is 
necessary  to  think  of  the  poet  as  speaking  the  warning ;  but  then 
we  are  struck  by  the  absence  of  the  Messiah.  If,  however,  we 
regard  that  line  as  a  liturgical  addition,  it  is  better  to  think  of 
David  himself  as  warning  the  kings.  There  are  three  couplets 
of  warning,  with  a  concluding  line  giving  the  reason  for  it.  The 
first  and  second  are  syn.  couplets,  progressive  one  to  the  other ; 
the  third  is  a  synth.  couplet  progressive  to  the  second.     Line  by 


PSALM   II.  17 

line  this  antistr.  corresponds  with  its  str.  10-11.  Act  prudently,  O 
kings'].  You  have  to  deal  with  Yahweh's  words,  v.7a  ||  be  admonished, 
governors  of  earth] .  You  have  to  do  with  Yahweh's  son,  v.75  ||  Serve 
Yahweh  with  /ear],  as  vassals,  not  in  the  usual  religious  sense  of 
worship  and  obedience  to  the  Law;  to  serve  Yahweh's  son  is  to 
serve  Him,  v.7c.  —  rejoice  in  Him  with  trembling].  Yahweh  has 
given  the  nations  for  the  king's  inheritance,  v.8*,  that  is  a  reason 
for  rejoicing ;  but  that  joy  should  be  accompanied  with  trembling 
lest  He  be  displeased.  — 12.  Kiss  sincerely]  the  kiss  of  the  hands 
in  worship,  cf.  Jb.  3127.  Worship  in  purity  and  fidelity,  "with  a 
pure  heart "  JPSV.  because  He  has  given  the  ends  of  the  earth  for 
the  possession  of  His  king,  v.86.  (3  paraphrases  or  had  a  different 
text  in  rendering  "  lay  hold  of  instruction."  EV8.  "  kiss  the  son," 
the  Messiah,  cannot  be  justified  by  usage  or  context,  and  is  based 
on  a  misinterpretation  due  to  Syriac  and  x^ramaic  influence.  If 
the  rulers  do  not  render  sincere  homage,  they  may  fear  lest  He  be 
angry  ||  lest  ye  perish].  He  rules  with  an  iron  sceptre,  v.9a  ;  you 
cannot  resist  it  successfully,  you  will  perish  if  you  try,  therefore 
submit  in  joy  and  fear.  The  reason  for  this  warning  is  now  given, 
For  quickly  His  anger  will  be  kindled].  This  is  the  climax  corre- 
sponding with  the  climax  of  the  previous  str.,  v.96.  A  liturgical 
editor  adds  a  general  statement  which  does  not  suit  the  ideal 
situation  of  the  Ps.,  but  which  is  appropriate  to  the  congregation 
when  they  use  it  in  worship.  —  Happy  are  all  seeking  refuge  in 
Him. 

1.  Jn$]  *1  42™  432  4424.  25  49e  68n  74n  79io  80I3  1152;  but  JnpS 
iol  222  4210  432  741  8815 ;  no  satisfactory  explanation  of  difference  has  yet 
been  given  (Ges.§ 102 (2)  \  Ges.L49-2R; 102R,  Ko.  i-P.i44;il.Pp.  4616, 517 (2)f  B£>B.). 
(a)  expostulation,  for  what  reason,  why,  wherefore :  c.  pf.  of  God  222  4210 
432  74I  8013  ;  of  nations  ** ;  impf.  of  God  io1  4424- 25  7411  8815  ;  of  man  4210 
=  432 ;  mountains  6817.  (b)  Deprecating,  why  should,  c.  impf.  of  man  49s 
7910  =  1152.  —  fv^n]  a.X.  Qal  pf.  3  pi.  yjvr\  usually  explained  as  cog.  with 
Efyn  and  so  a  noisy,  tumultuous  assembling,  after  U  turbabuntur  ;  but  in  late 
Heb.  this  mng.  is  confined  to  Hithp.,  and  it  is  doubtful  whether  the  mng. 
tumultuatus  est  of  j$  is  early.  At  all  events  this  mng.  is  not  suited  to  the 
context  in  any  of  the  forms  from  the  stem  in  the  Heb.  or  Aram,  of  OT.  The 
ordinary  mng.  of  the  simple  form  of  the  stem  in  Aram,  and  Syr.  is  observe, 
experience,  so  Hiph.  of  late  Heb.  It  is  better  to  build  on  this.  The  noun 
[^Tl]  II 11D  5515  must  mean  either  company,  companionship,  or  concord;  so 
C 


1 8  PSALMS 

(S  iv  buovolq.  in  concord,  AV.  in  company  ;  but  3  cum  lerrore,  RV.  with  the 
throng  are  both  unsuited  to  the  intimate  fellowship  of  friendship  in  syn.  line. 
The  noun  ['"»tfjn]  ||  "^D  64s  =  3  a  tumultu,  <S  dirb  wX-^dovs,  AV.  insurrec- 
tion, RV.  tumult ;  but  none  of  these  is  so  appropriate  as  companionship,  con- 
cord, or  possibly  conspiracy,  for  some  such  mng.  seems  to  be  required  by  the 
synonymous  td.  It  is  noteworthy  that  in  our  Ps.  tfjn  vb.  is  synonymous 
with  hdu  from  -iD"1  denom.  -no  (see  below),  and  the  syn.  parall.  urges  a 
similar  mng.  such  as  be  in  concord,  consent  together,  for  consensus  is  an  easy 
derivative  from  sensus,  the  normal  mng.  of  stem  in  Aram.  This  mng.  best 
suits  the  context.  Such  a  poet  as  the  author  of  our  Ps.  would  hardly  begin 
with  an  anticlimax.  It  should  also  be  said  that  these  three  uses,  the  only 
ones  in  Bibl.  Heb.,  are  all  in  Q.  It  may  also  be  said  that  the  Aphel  of  tfn 
Aram.  Dn.  67- 12- 16  cannot  with  propriety  have  the  strong  mng.  of  tumultuous 
assembling.  The  Persian  officials  would  hardly  come  to  their  king  ty  s  v.7- 16 
in  such  a  fashion,  nor  would  they  be  likely  in  this  way  to  assemble  to  watch 
Daniel  at  prayer,  v.1'2.  The  context  and  the  situation  would  suit  better  their 
coming  together  in  concord  or  in  common  consent,  with  one  accord,  to  watch 
Daniel  and  to  influence  the  king.  <S  icppva^av  behave  arrogantly  seems  to 
be  a  paraphrase,  rather  than  a  translation.  Since  writing  the  above  I  have 
noticed  that  Ehr.  takes  essentially  the  same  view  with  me.  —  d^j]  pi.  53  t. 
in  \f/,  always  of  foreign  nations  ;  sg.  coll.  of  foreign  nations  431  I0513- 13  14720; 
of  Israel  3312  83s  1066.  —  d^nS]  pi.  of  J  cs^  prop,  common,  vulgar  people 
(BDB.);  poet.  sg.  people,  both  of  Israel  and  Edom  Gn.  2528  (J),  elsw.  of 
Israel  Is.  514  ;  usually  pi.  of  foreign  peoples  21  7s  99  44s- 15  47*  5710  65s  67s-  6 
10544  1084  14811  1497.  —  «n;]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  run  (see  i2)  frequentative  of 
repeated  action,  in  the  discussion  and  elaboration  of  devices  over  against  the 
emphatic  present  tw*\  The  tetrastich  begins  and  closes  with  pf.,  including 
the  two  impfs.  The  change  of  tense  is  awkward  in  a  question.  It  is  proba- 
ble that  the  question  closes  with  v.1,  and  that  v.2  is  a  statement  of  fact.  —  pn 
and  pn]  are  mixed  in  MT.,  both  adj.  [pn]  vb.  Hiph.  (1)  pour  out  or  down, 
of  rain,  empty  vessels,  not  in  \p.  (2)  c.  ace.  draw  sword,  either  from  scabbard 
(emptying  it)  or  as  using  to  pour  out  blood,  common  in  Ez.,  not  in  \p,  which 
uses,  however,  ||  draw  out  lance  Pss.  35s  1843  (text  err.),  pn  adj.  is  not  used 
in  $J  of  \p  either  in  mng.  empty  of  vessels,  or  vain,  idle,  worthless  of  persons 
or  things,  pn  adj.  is  usually  f  adverbial  pnS  in  vain,  of  labour  without 
benefit  or  advantage  Lv.  2616-  20  (H.)  Is.  4c;4  65s3  Jb.  3916,  abbreviated  pn 
Ps.  7318  Is.  307  Je.  5 158  =  Hb.  218.  It  is  prob.  that  pn  in  Ps.  21  belongs  here 
=  in  vain,  and  that  pn  48  should  be  pointed  pn  vain,  unprofitable  thing 
||  3TD  as  Pr.  1211  =  2819.  If  Ps.  21  is  to  have  that  mng.,  it  also  should  be 
pointed  p>-\  —  2.  !a*Mi»]  Hithp.  impf.  of  graphic  description  -^[a^],  Niph., 
Hiph.,  Hoph.  are  derived  from  [2*:].  Both  Niph.  (Va*0  anc*  Hithp. 
(V/3X'1)  have  the  same  mng.,  station  oneself,  take  one's  stand.  %  Hithp.  abs. 
here  (22)  and  I  S.  1716  taking  a  stand  to  fight,  elsw.  in  \f/  taking  a  stand  for 
one  against  the  workers  of  iniquity  9416  ;  holding  one's  ground  cf> ;  in  a  way  of 
life  366.    %  Kxyh.take  one's  stand:  c.  2  of  place,  God  to  plead  821 ;  queen  at  right 


PSALM   II.  19 

hand  of  monarch  in  ceremony  of  marriage  4510  ;  stand  firm,  of  man  39s  (text 
dub.) ;  of  Yahweh's  word  1 1989.  %  Hiph.  (1)  set,  station  4113  ;  (2)  fix,  estab- 
lish, boundary  7417,  cf.  Dt.  32s ;  (3)  cause  to  stand  erect,  of  waters  7813. 
There  is  no  sufficient  reason  to  substitute  here  wjprn  as  Lag.,  We.,  Oort. — 
tr??  \pkp]  te"gs  of  earth  :  a*  7613  8928  14811  Ez.  27s3  La.  412;  with  ^  prefixed 
Pss.10216  1384  1  K.  io23  =  2  Ch.  922-  23;  earlier  kings  of  the  land  Jos.  I21-7; 
similar  f  pN  *BB#]  Ps.  210  Is.  4023,  with  hD  prefixed  Ps.  14811  Pr.  816  ;  also 
tH«?  niD'?!?'?  ^  al1  the  kingdoms  of  earth  Dt.  2825  2  K.  1915.19  (-ls. 
3716'-20)  Ezr.!  i2  (=  2  C.  3623)  Is.  23I7  Je.  15*  249  25*  2918  341- ",  without  Sa 
Ps.  6833.  Chr.  uses  rather  f  rrtrwn  n"»i»DO  (Sd)  i  Ch.  2930  2  Ch.  1 28  1 710  2029. 
The  phrases  centre  in  the  time  of  Jeremiah,  f  D*J»"h]  princes,  Qal  ptc. 
[V?n],  only  pi.  ||  d^Sd  here  (22)  Ju.  53  Hb.  I10  Pr.  816'  314;    p^DV  Is.  4023. 

—  t-Vto'ij]  Niph.  pf.  emphatic  present  nD>  denom.  niD  Ges.§78  (z>.  £;.n 
above),  /r<?#/  about,  discuss,  consult,  3  traclabunt,  2  av<XKiirTOVTai,  so  Ba\, 
Bu.,  Du.,  so  D^D-in  3 114.  (g  (of  2'2)  <rwrix&V(rav  seems  to  have  rd.  VWty  so 
Lag.,  Oort,  BDB. ;  Ges.,  SS.,  al.  derive  from  nD"'  fix,  establish,  Niph.  sit  in 
conclave.  %  nrv]  as  adv.  together :  (1)  community,  in  action,  consult.  22  3114; 
place,  in  same  place  8818  1331 ;  in  time,  at  the  same  time  14110.  (2)  all  to- 
gether, altogether  3315  4015  418  6210  74° • 8  98s.  (3)  together  in  the  sense  of 
alike,  the  one  as  well  as  the  other  49s-  n.  See  BDB.  —  Sjj]  against,  repeated 
before  ^rvi?D,  separates  him  emphatically  from  mn\  There  are  two  beats 
of  accent  on  Tr^D'Spi. —  "irvtfo]  n.  m.  sf.  His  anointed,  sf.  referring  to  Yah- 
weh.  y/nvn  anoint,  spec,  consecrate  to  an  office,  f  H^tto  is  used  of  high 
priest  of  Israel  Lv.  43- 6- 16  615  <p>  Ps.  8410  ;  of  Cyrus  as  commissioned  by  Yah- 
weh  Is.  451 ;  of  the  prince  Dn.  925-  26 ;  of  patriarchs  Ps.  10515  =  1  Ch.  1622; 
elsw.  of  kings  of  Israel  anointed  by  divine  command  1  S.  I23-  &  i6G  207  247- 7-  u 
269- "• 16-23,  2S.  iu  • 16  1922  231  La.  420  Hb.  313  Pss.  207  28s,  and  esp.  of  Davidic 
dynasty  with  Messianic  ideals  Pss.  22  1851  (=  2  S.  2251)  89s9-  &2  13210  (=  2  Ch. 
642)17,  1  S.  210- 35. —  3.  npnjj]  Piel  impf.  cohort.  I  pi.,  expressing  resolution, 
we  willy  or  exhortation,  let  us  tear  apart.  Jpnj  Piel  tear  apart,  snap:  c. 
ace.  rvnt^D  Je.  220  55  308  Na.  i13  Ps.  2s  10714.  —  'iD^rYiTD'iD]  3  pi.  sf.,  fuller 
form  for  on\_,  used  to  soften,  make  more  euphonious  the  ending;  espec.  for 
the  assonance  which  continues  for  six  successive  lines,  f  ^o]  =  npND  bond 
( -ypDN  tie,  bind) ;  subj.  bonds  made  strong  (those  imposed  by  Assyria)  Is.  2822 ; 
elsw.  obj.  made  to  symbolize  those  of  Babylon  Je.  27s  ;  'D  rwfl  loose  bonds  Ps. 
1166  Is.  52s  Jb.  395;   cf.   1218;    elsw.  'D  pFiJ  2*  10714  Je.  220  55  308  Na.   I13. 

—  nrr^ji]  Waw  coord,  with  Hiph.  cohort.  I  pi.  —  MJ??]  reduplication  of  p 
with  strong  sf.  1  pi.  2s  10312;  same  as  3  mpl.  (but  Orientals  point  I  pi.  W^D 
BaerJb-P-57,  Ko.L29!)).  —  %  nh}?  twisted  cord,  rope:  2s  11827  1294.  — 4.  38^] 
Qal  ptc.  nominal  force :  the  ordinary  mngs.,  sit,  sit  down,  dwell,  do  not  suit 
here,  only  the  %  pregn.  one  sitting  enthroned :  (1)  usually  of  God  98  2910  5520 
10213  13214;  also  matf  pan  place  of  His  sitting  enthroned  (heaven)  3314  ; 
nat^S  wajon  He  who  exalts  to  sit  enthroned  1135;  inatrS  nDn  inn  the 
mount  on  which  He  desired  to  sit  enthroned  6817 ;  D'Dtfa  21*  1231 ;  c.  h  loci 
nd^S  96;  VudS  2910j  c.  iy  loci  ndd  h?  479;  ace.  loci  ]Vi  912;   oona(n)  802 


20  PSALMS 

991 ;  Ssnfc"  mSnn  22*.  (2)  of  Davidic  king,  before  God  618  ;  at  His  right 
hand  no1;  successive  kings  NDaS  13212;  c.  ace.  nwDo  1226.  —  pryf;]  impf. 
Qal  i.  p.  graphic  description,  y/  J  pnir  laugh  at,  of  God,  c.  S  3718  59s;  of  man, 
c.  *??  52s.  As  599  depends  on  ,?•*,  it  is  prob.  that  IDS  followed  pnt">  in  original 
text.  This  is  sustained  by  <&  and  rhyme  of  previous  and  subsequent  lines. 
Piel  sport,  play  10426.  —  >fv*  (pointing  »T  to  disting.  from  \,  used  of 
men):  originally  my  sovereign  lord  162  868-4-6;  so  here  ||  one  enthroned 
(though  599  cites  as  nw);  subsequently  Adonay,  as  proper  name  {v.  Intr. 
§  32).  —  jj?^]  Qal  impf.  3  p.  cited  as  2  p.  59s  y/%  JJ?S  mock,  deride  ;  also  807 
and  prob.  3516  (<S).  Hiph.  228  same  mng.,  prob.  also  Qal  originally. — 
5.  Jtn]  adv.  v.  BZ>B.  (1)  temporal  (a)  past,  //&<?«,  sq.  pf.  8920;  (£)  future, 
sq.  impf.  5610(?);  (c)  emph.  of  particular  features  of  description  2s  408(?) 
9612 ;  (d)  pointing  back  with  emph.  to  inf.  with  a  I26'2-2;  (2)  logical 
sequence,  sq.  impf.  1914  51s1- 21  69s(?)  U96-92. —  >D'Vk]  full  sf.  for  rhyme, 
prob.  therefore  original  close  of  line  :  usual  prep,  with  n3"\  —  ^nis]  prep.  3  and 
sf.  J«]N:  (i)  nostril  as  organ  of  breathing  i89-16,  smelling  II56;  CCN  "pN 
prolonged  breathing,  long suffering  of  God  8615  1038  1458,  based  on  Ex.  34s  (J) ; 
elsw.  (2)  anger,  {a)  of  man  Pss.  37s  55*  1243  1 3s7;  usually  (b)  of  God  212 
IO4  741  76s  7821'  81-  **•  *>  85s  OO11  I0640  IIO6,  t]H2   2$&f  2I10  27s  3O6  56s  7710 

907  9511,  «ik  jnn  69s5  7s49  85*;  denom.  vb.  f  1JN  is  term  of  D.  Qal  be  angry, 
of  Yahweh,  c.  2  85s  1  K.  846  (=2  C.  6s6)  Is.  121  Ezr.  914,  abs.  Ps.  2™  608 
796  Hithp.  id.  of  Yahweh  c.  3  Dt.  i87  421  98-  2°  1  K.  II9  2  K.  1718. — 
Wvij]  prep.  2  sf.  jnn  nm. -y/J  rnn  with  i)H  subj.  10640  1243  anger  burn  agst., 
but  without  and  so  impers.,  c.  7  188;  term  of  EJD.  chiefly  with  preexilic 
writers,  not  of  HP.,  Je.,  Ez.,  Is.2  f  Hithp.  >&^/  oneself 'in  vexation  Ps.  371- 7- 8 
Pr.  2419,  J  pnn  alw.  of  God's  burning  anger,  usually  in  phr.  r\n  jnn  6926  7849 
854  as  Ex.  3212  Nu.  254  3214  Jos.  726  (all  J)+,  phr.  chiefly  preexilic  prophets; 
IN  is  omitted  only  Ex.  157  (song)  Ne.  1318  Ez.  712  (del.  Co.)14  Ps.  5810  (dub. 
text)  8817  (pi.  bursts  0/ burning  anger).  It  is  quite  prob.  that  in  25  originally 
the  text  was  ifiN  jnn  which  is  certainly  more  rhythmical.  —  toSn^]  Piel 
impf.  full  sf.  for  rhyme.  J  LaA"13]  not  in  Qal  but  Niph.  be  disturbed,  dis- 
mayed, terrified  68-  4- "  308  48s  8318  907  10429  Gn.  45s  (E)  Ex.  1516  (song). 
Piel  subj.  Yahweh,  dismay,  terrify  Pss.  25  8316,  elsw.  late  2  C.  3218  Dn.  1 144 
Jb.  2210.  —  6.  *jni]  1  introd.  <S,  U,  3,  pron.  emphatic,  solemn  proclamation. 
—  t  ^Di]  pf-  Qal  aorist  of  single  historic  act.  Vb.  variously  explained : 
(1)  pour  out,  of  libation  and  of  molten  metal,  and  so  anoint  king;  so  % 
2  «xpto-a  (cf.  Acts  427  6xpt<ras)  Ges.,  Ew.,  JPSV.  (2)  weave  a  web,  after 
Is.  257,  so  idtaadfirjv  Aq.  Quinta  3.  (3)  <S  Kareardd^p,  V  ordinatus  sum, 
j&  set,  install,  cf.  As.  nasaku,  whence  nasiku  prince,  cf.  Heb.  f  [TPj>]  Jos- 
I32J  Ez-  3230  Mi.  54  Ps.  8312  ;  so  AV.,  RV.,  most  moderns,  who  differ  only  as 
to  whether  (3)  is  derived  from  (1)  as  De.,  Pe.,  Bu.,  SS.,  or  whether  it  was 
an  independent  original  stem,  BDB.  There  are  but  two  examples :  here  (2*) 
Qal  pf.  and  Pr.  823  Niph.  pf.  Vl3©}j  but  <S  rds.  Niph.  here  also  tyw  8t  /care- 
o-Tddrjv  /Sao-tXevs  vir  avrov  =  ^Sd  >F\3Q)  ^ni  now  I,  I  was  installed  His  king. 
This  is  preferred  by  Du.    There  has  been  an  assimilation  by  (g  of  Ps.  2s  to 


PSALM   II.  21 

Pr.  823,  which  required  ittnp  for  >Bhp  of  ^  v65  and  subordination  of  rnspN  in 
ptc.  clause.  However,  U  rds.  sanctum  eius.  f^  suits  context  and  division 
of  strophes.  Introduction  of  the  king,  as  speaking  in  v.6  instead  of  Yahweh, 
destroys  parall.  with  Str.  I.  and  makes  v.76  tautological.  —  %sho]  my  king,  so 
as  Yahweh's  representative  =  VWD  v.2 ;  <£  "dVd  =  It  both  interp.  of  origi 
nal  -j^Dn. —  TjSg  nm.  (i)  for  kings  other  than  the  line  of  David  3316  4514 
IO520.80(rd.8?:.)'i35n-11  =  I3619-20 ;  pi.  see  v.2  \  (2)  for  king  of  David's  line 
(either  real  or  ideal  of  Mess,  promise)  ^  1851  2010  2i2-  8  45s- 6- 12- 15-  ™  617  6312 
721- l  8919  14410  (rd.  sg.  d_).  X  (3)  of  God  as  the  king  53  io16  24'- 8- 9- 10- 10 
2910  445  472- 7-  8  48s  6S25  7412  84*  953  98s  99*  1451  1492.  There  is  no  usage  in  \f/ 
justifying  the  opinion  of  some  recent  scholars  that  "|Sd  was  used  for  the  nation 
as  the  kingdom  of  God.  —  j>>nf  Sy]  upon  Zion,  poetic  name  for  the  city  of 
God,  where  He  resides  as  king  and  from  whence  in  theophanic  presence  He 
rules.     %  p»j  usually  in  rj/  alone  912-15  4813  5120  6f  69s6  76s  84s  87s-5  97s  992 

I0214.17.22  I2D1    i295  13213  I37L8  I4610  I4712;   JVXD    I47(=  537)  20s   5O2    I  IO2 

1285  1343  13521  1492;  fvx  nn  483-12  742  78s8  1251  Is.  24s3  +  ;  x  n-\n  1338. 
—  nehp  -in]  /wy  >fo/j/  mount ;  cstr.  best  translated  in  Eng.  by  adj.,  not  mount  of 
my  holiness.  (3  dyiop  ai/rov  is  a  diff.  interp.  from  "$%  of  an  original  Bhpn. 
fchp  "»n  as  seat  of  Yahweh's  presence  3s  151  43s  482  99s,  elsw.  Is.  n9  2718 
567  5713  6511-25  662),  Zp.  311  Jo.  21  Ob.16  Zc.  83  Ez.  2040  Je.  3123  Dn.  916-  20; 
in  Ez.  28s4  the  reference  is  to  the  Oriental  Olympus  in  N.W.  Asia ;  Bhp  nn  p>* 
ouly  Ps.  2s  Jo.  417,  uhp  ox  "VI  Dn.  n45.  The  sacred  mount  elsw.  jvx  in 
(see  above),  rwii  nn  24s,  OTiSsn  -in  6816,  and  vi(n)  defined  by  context  6817 
78s4;  cf.  'p  nnn  871  no3  (?)  also  308  (?)  765(?).  — 7.  -Tjsdn]  Pi.  impf. 
I  sg.  cohort.  "idD;  attached  by  O  as  ptc.  clause  to  previous  v.;  so  Aq.,  U,  Du., 
and  by  j$  as  a  final  clause  impf.  3  sg.  As  usual  in  such  cases  they  are  varied 
interpretations  of  an  original  text  which  in  this  case  would  be  ncD  inf.  abs., 
v.  Ges.§ 113.  Str.  II.  is  one  line  too  short,  which  is  improb.  in  such  an  artistic 
poem.  Either  it  has  been  omitted  by  copyist,  or  is  to  be  found  in  v.7,  which 
is  too  long.  v.7a  seems  more  appropriate  before  v.6,  where  it  gives  fine  antith. 
to  v.2c ;  so  Bi.,  Che. ;  prob.  it  was  transposed  by  scribal  error.  This  occa- 
sioned all  the  difficulties.  —  pn  Sx]  J  pn  n.  m.  something  prescribed,  a  statute,  or 
due,  (1)  prescribed  limit,  boundary,  of  heavens  1486,  (2)  enactment,  decree, 
ordinance,  law  of  festival  815  ;  so  here,  decree  of  Yahweh  respecting  Mess. 
king ;  covenant  with  Jacob  10510  ;  law  in  general  9420  997,  pi.  D^pn  statutes, 
of  the  Law  5016  10546  1196  +  21^  (em.txt.)  147W.  rrtpn  pi.  of  r\pn  n.f.  statutes 
of  type  of  Holiness  code  (see  Br.1^*-251)  1828  89s2  11916  (?).  It  is  prob.  that, 
with  Houb.,  Bi.,  Gr.,  We.,  Du.,  Oort,  original  reading  here  was  mn>  pn  de- 
cree of  Yahweh,  which  is  favoured  by  Vrss. ;  rb  irpdaTay/xa  Kvpiov.  ictpios 
elirev  <g>,  praeceptum  eius.  dominus  dixit  3J,  dei  praeceptum.  dominus  dixit  3. 
pn  without  article  is  too  indefinite.  Sn  is  prob.  interp.  of  f$,  as  it  was  not  in 
text  of  (&  and  is  a  late  use  of  Ss  for  hy.  The  emendation  nx,  Houb.,  Bi., 
We.,  is  improbable.  Jf,  Aq.,  0,  J5,  4  codd.  De  R.  have  Sn  =  God,  which  may 
be,  by  an  error  of  transposition,  for  an  original  hx  pn.  This,  however,  gives 
bad  measure.     ©  is  in  all  respects  the  best  reading.  —  nnN  <pa]  is  a  defec- 


22  PSALMS 

tive  line  ;  add  n«n  after  2  S.  714  (pS  >S  mm  ton)) ;  the  vb.  omitted  by 
prosaic  copyist  because  unnecessary  to  the  sense,  the  copula  often  being 
implied  in  pers.  pronouns.  nn«  with  pattach  in  pause,  for  nnN,  an  early 
copyist's  mistake  to  which  attention  is  called  by  Mas.  —  >jn]  emph.  as  above, 
v.6*.—  Jo^n]  to-day,  this  day  :  2*  957  1 19M.  —  TPnS<]  Qal  perf.  of  completed 
action  in  time  of  speaker  for  Tn^".,  which  is  explained  by  Ew.§1996  from 
attraction  of  antecedent  ';  by  Ges.S44**  as  possibly  derived  from  tV ;  by  Hu. 
as  due  to  removal  of  accent  (cf.  wfy  Je.  1510;  •wrnL,;>  Nu.  II12);  prob. 
copyist's  mistake.  \  "k>  vb.  Qal  used  (1)  c.  208  t.  for  mother  bearing  child, 
so  Ps.  487,  fig.  715;  (2)  of  father  begetting  child,  in  J  II  t  (=  I  C  i10  +  5t) 
Dt.  3218  (song)  Nu.  II12  (E  both  dub.)  ;  elsw.  only  Pr.  1721  2322-24  Dn.  u6  ; 
P.  and  Ch.  use  Hiph.  "vSn  in  this  sense,  so  Ru.  418  +  8t.  ju#  ni2K.  2018  = 
Is.  39T  Je.  163  29s  Ez.  i810- 14  47"  Ec.  518  68  Is.  45W.  The  usage  of  our  Ps. 
is  either  early  or  very  late,  not  in  accord  with  that  of  exilic  literature.  Niph. 
be  born  :  Pss.  2232  78°.  Pual  be  born  :  87*-  6- 6  902.  —  8.  "»jpp  ^Ntr]  is  prob.  a 
gloss.  It  makes  line  too  long,  however  we  may  divide  vers. ;  and  str.  is  com- 
plete without  it  as  additional  line.  It  was  natural  that  a  gloss  of  petition 
should  come  on  the  margin  of  such  a  divine  promise  yet  unrealized  ;  cf.  for 
similar  gloss  no23.  —  ^nto]  i  introducing  apodosis  of  Skit,  but  prob.  it  came 
into  text  with  gloss ;  vb.  Qal  impf.  cohort,  of  |PJ,  corresponding  with  cohorta- 
tive  of  two  previous  strophes  v.3- 7a. —  n*?!^*]  inheritance,  cf.  Ill6;  a  term  esp. 
characteristic  of  D.  and  Je.,  but  also  used  by  P.  and  later  writers.  \  ninn] 
possession,  a.X.  \j/,  but  term  of  P.,  Ez.,  Chr.  —  tr™-"'!??*]  ends,  extreme  limits 
of  earth.  There  should  be  a  secondary  accent  here.  The  phr.  elsw.  2228  5914 
67s  72s  (=  Zc.  910)  98^  (=  Is.  52106)  Is.  45122  Je.  1619  Dt.  3317  1  S.  210  Mi.  58 
Pr.  304.  —  9.  opn]  Qal  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  pi.  of  j?jn  break  in  pieces,  so  2,  3T, 
Aram,  of  psn,  not  used  elsw.  in  \f/ ;  Qal  only  Jb.  3424  and  other  very  late  pas- 
sages of  Greek  period  (see  BDB.)  Je.  n16  1512  Pr.  2519.  Hithpo.  only  Is. 
2419  (  ?)  Pr.  1824.  But  &  Rev.  2™  Troifxaveiv,  op.i  &,YJ,  3  rule  as  shepherd  king 
over  them,  is  more  suited  to  the  context  of  the  sceptre,  even  if  it  be  of  iron ; 
so  787i-72,  cf.  289  491*  802  2  S.  52  77   Je.  315    Mi.  5s    Ez.  37^   Na.  3i8  +  . 

—  kn3  03U-]  phr.  a.X.  \  D3tf  n.  rod :  (i)  sceptre  of  monarch  ^  457-  7  1258,  of 
rod*  of  Yahweh  23*  %<y*  ;  (2)  tribe  742  1%^- 67-68  10537  I224-  4.  —  DX^r-]  Piel 
impf.  sf.  ^fyo:.  Qal  shatter,  vessels  Ju.  719,  fig.  Je.  22s8  Dn.  127  (possibly 
Piel).  Piel  dash  in  pieces,  c.  ace.  infants,  Ps.  1379  agst.  rock;  nations  with 
Babylon  as  a  war  club  Je.  5i20  +  8t-,  people  like  jars  Je.  1314  4812,  so  here  like 
pottery  cf.  1  K.  523.  Pual  pass.  Is.  27°  altar  stones  pulverized.  —  f  n*""  "'So]  pot- 
ter's vessel,  made  by  the  potter  out  of  clay,  and  so  easily  broken  2  S.  1728  Je.  1911. 

—  10.  Jnrw]  as  27s  39s  11967,  cf.  i"«oi  74s  \  nnj  126  1711  207.  \  nnj:p  1132 
115I8  I2i8  ^52  I^I8#  —  y^3irn]  Hiph.  imv.  2  pi.  y/\  Syo  (1)  consider,  regard, 
give  attention  to,  c.  ace.  6410  1067,  c.  S*»  pers.  4I2(?),  c.  2  rei  1012,  abs.  94s; 
(2)  have  insight  11999  ;  (3)  act  with  circumspection,  prudence,  insight  210  364, 
ptc.  S^icc  142  =  538  Am.  518  Pr.  io6  +  5t  Pr.  Jb.  222  ;  (4)  later,  give  insight, 
teach  Ps.  32s;  cf.  Swd  n.  in  titles  {v.  Intr.i26).  —  nenn]  imv.  Niph.  \  "^ 
Qal  discipline,  subj.  God  9490  Ho.  IO10.    t  Niph.  let  oneself  be  admonished,  cor- 


PSALM   II.  23 

reeled  Vs.  210  as  Pr.  2919,  chastened  by  discipline  of  God  Je.  68  3118  Lv.  2623. 
Piel  (1)  discipline,  correct  the  moral  nature,  with  more  or  less  severity  ace. 
to  circumstances,  subj.  God  9412  u818-18,  subj.  man's  reins  167;  (2)  more 
severely,  chasten,  chastise,  subj.  God  62  (=  38s)  3912  Je.  io24  3011  3118  46s8 
Lv.  2618-28;  common  in  WL.  —  yy*,  >Bfl^]  retracted  accent  on  acct.  of  fol- 
lowing monosyl.;  so  ri3Kn  v.  12a,  •'Din  v.12c :  for  phr.  v.  v.2.  —  11.  nin*-nK  nr;] 
Qal  imv.  y/%  "\2}J  (i)  the  primitive  mng.  serve  with  service,  work,  is  not  in  \p; 
but  (2)  as  vassals  of  Davidic  king  1844  7211,  of  Yahweh  211  10223 ;  (3)  with 
worship,  as  His  people  2231  ioo2 ;  so  idols  <)f  10633.  —  n**V3]  X  nx"v  n-f- 
(1)  fear,  terror  211  55s;  usually  (2)  fear  of  God,  reverence,  piety  58  3412 
9011  in10  119"8;  so  for  NllD,  the  Law  as  object  of  reverence  1910,  cf.  7612. 
—  V?^]  Qal  imv.  \  S\>  vb.  Qal  rejoice:  abs.  135  5110  ;  ||  rofr  147  169  3211  4812 
537  9611  971-8;  c.  3  1492 ;  injnva  915  136  212;  nwa  35°;  1  oeta  8917; 
3  nvt'i  hi)  318  11824  Ct.  I4  Is.  259  Jo.  223;  all  these  with  pers.  subj.,  but  subj. 
^2  Ps.  136,  U'dj  359,  1133  (II  tfflj)  169,  pnx  9611  971;  such  overwhelming  usage 
makes  it  improb.  that  211  and  Hos.  io5  should  have  the  exceptional  mng. 
tremble  (cf.  Ar.  stems  with  the  mng.^0  round  or  aboitt,  be  excited  to  levity,  etc.), 
although  supported  by  Ges.,  Ew.,  Hi.,  Che.  for  Ps.  211  and  by  Ges.  and  most 
moderns  for  Ho.  io5  ;  but  (g,  Hu.,  De.,  Pe.,  AV.,  RV.,  rejoice  for  Ps.  211,  and 
AV.,  RV.  for  Ho.  io5  (the  latter  possibly  error  for  S*n  Ew.,  Gr.).  J1?^  n. 
rejoicing:  434  4516  6513.  <&  rds.  ayaWiaade  clvt$,  which  implies  "13  -lS^. 
This  completes  the  line  and  makes  it  entirely  synonymous  with  the  preceding. 
^3  was  omitted  by  txt.  err.  because  of  confusion  of  13  with  lS  in  iS^j. — 
frnpj  n.f.,  c.  3;  cf.  556;  ||  ins  Jb.  414;  elsw.  Ps.  487,  cf.  Is.  3314  also  Ex.  1515. 
— 12.  lptfj]  Pi.  imv.  of  fptfj  Qal  hiss  (1)  of  affection,  usually  c.  h  pers. 
Gn.  2726-27"  29U  501  Ex.  427  (J)  Gn.  4810  Ex.  187  (E)  2  S.  1433  155  1940  209 
1  K.  1920  Pr.  713  Ru.  i9- 14 ;  c.  ace.  pers.  Gn.  334  (JE  dub.  form)  1  S.  io1  2041 
Ct.  i2  81 ;  lips  Pr.  2426  ;  of  divine  attributes,  abs.  Ps.  8511 ;  (2)  of  idolatrous 
worship:  c.  *?  I  K.  1918  Jb.  3127  (hand  to  the  mouth);  c.  ace.  calves  Ho.  132: 
id  Vy  Gn.  4140  (dub.).  Pi.  kiss:  (1)  of  affection;  c.  h  pers.  Gn.  2913  (J) 
3128  321  45 15  (E)  ;  (2)  here  only  of  worship  ;  Aq.  KaracpCk-qaaTe,  2  irpoaKV- 
vrjaare,  3  adorate.  Hiph.  kiss  :  c.  hx  of  wings  of  cherubim  gently  touching 
Ez.  313.  But  Hu.  regards  vb.  in  our  Ps.  as  from  other  stem  pm  with  sup- 
posed mng.  lay  hold  of,  handle,  which  is  elsewhere  in  Heb.  only  as  Qal  ptc. 
pi.  cstr.  ntfp  ipm  equipped  with  bow  I  C.  122  2  C.  1717  (possibly  also  Ps.  78s, 
BDB.);  so  here  submit  yourselves  sincerely,  " fuget  euch  aufrichtig" ;  and 
thus  he  explains  (g  dpd^aade,  "S  apprehendite  ;  so  Ew.,  Hi.,  Reuss.  —  "13]  dub. 
mng.  son  (£>,  AE.,  Maimonides,  Ges.,  De  W.,  Pe.,  Ba.,  and  most  moderns), 
elsw.  only  Pr.  312.2.2  (a  passage  very  late,  full  of  Aramaisms) ;  absence  of 
article  and  use  of  p  v.7  insuperable  objections,  and  no  reference  to  the  king 
in  this  str.,  the  following  as  well  as  preceding  context  referring  to  Yahweh. 
Rd.  f  nb  n.  cleanness  :  of  hands  Ps.  i821-25  (=  2  S.  2221- 25)  Jb.  930  2230;  so  Aq., 
2,  %  here  worship  in  purity,  possibly  reading  133  ||  mjn3,  PIKT3;  <3  dpd^aade 
iraideias,  VL  njdsin  iSop  rest  upon  a  different  text.  Ba.  thinks  the  &  para- 
phrases in  reference  to  Law,  for  it  translates  in  the  same  way  mm  j?Di?  Is.  309. 


24  PSALMS 

Possibly  -o  of  the  Law  in  Ps.  199  suggested  this  reference.  -rratSda.  of  © 
might  rest  upon  id^d  or  be  a  paraphrase  as  5T.  Lag.  rds.  id^d  as  v.8,  ^D  of  -\Din 
having  fallen  out  after  lp  of  tptrj,  so  Now.  Marti  suggests  *o  as  abbr.  mjn:j 
and  then  lpafa  as  variant  of  iSm  ;  so  Prince  ;  but  these  radical  changes  are  un- 
necessary. Dy.,  Oort,  IIu. :  >3  Iptfj  has  little  in  its  favour.  —  jd]  lest:  final 
clause  with  subj.  r|JN\  (5  inserts  Ktfptos.  J  JD  conj.  always  neg.  with  impf. 
subj.  212  73  1346  ;?<?*  3817  5022  5912  9112.  — TON'nV]  1  coord,  impf.  ||  subjunctive 
dependent  on  jd.  —  !p"i]  ace.  of  reference  Ri.,  Ba.,  Du.,  ace.  of  limitation  Hi., 
De.,  local  ace.  on  the  xvay.  <3  £$■  65ov  Sikcuos  =  n,-jn*  yyi.  This  might  be  inter- 
pretation, but  it  makes  the  line  a  trimeter,  and  gives  a  complete  and  excel- 
lent parall.  ">3  »B*n  cstr.  before  prep.  Ges.§ 13°-  W.  f  non  vb.  Qal  seek  refuge 
in:  c.  3,  always  in  ^  in  God  2™  512  72  u1  161  i88-81  (=  2  S.  22881)  2520 
312.20  349.28  3740  572  6411  7Ii  n8«-9  1418  1442  ;  a  to  be  supplied  in  thought 
at  least  177;  q^DJD  Sx3  36s  572  ;  "vms  v»Oa  615  ;  vdjd  nnn  914  (=  Ru.  21'2); 
apart  from  i/'  seldom  used  :  Sx3  Ju.  916  Is.  302 ;  in  Zion  Is.  1432;  in  gods 
Dt.  32s7  (poem);  in  God  Is.  5718  Nu.  i7  Pr.  305  1482  (without  2);  1  oeta  Zp. 
312.  f  npna  «.  m.  also  common  in  i/'  of  God  as  refuge  of  His  people  146  46s 
614  62s- 9  7 17  7328  9i2-  9  9422  1426  Pr.  1426  Je.  1717  Jo.  416  ;  so  rocks  for  conies 
Ps.  10418 ;  falsehood  as  refuge  Is.  2815-  n ;  from  rain  and  storm  Is.  46  25* 
Jb.  248. 

PSALM   III.,   4STR.48. 

Ps.  3  is  a  morning  prayer ;  the  first  in  the  order  of  the  Davidic 
prayer  book.  The  poet  exclaims  at  the  number  of  his  adversaries 
and  their  denying  salvation  to  him  from  God  (v.2-3)  ;  asserts  that 
Yahweh  was  his  shield  and  had  answered  him  (v.4"5).  He  had 
slept  without  fear  sustained  by  Yahweh  (v.6-7),  Who  had  smitten 
all  his  enemies,  and  was  his  salvation  (v.8"9). 

VAHWEH,  how  many  are  mine  adversaries! 

Many  are  rising  up  against  me ; 

Many  are  saying  of  me, 

There  is  no  salvation  for  him. 
DUT  Thou  art  a  shield  about  me, 

My  glory  and  the  lifter-up  of  my  head. 

Unto  Yahweh  I  called  with  my  voice, 

And  He  answered  me  from  His  holy  mountain. 
T  LAID  me  down  and  slept; 

I  awaked,  for  He  kept  sustaining  me. 

I  am  not  afraid  of  myriads  of  people, 

Which  round  about  were  arrayed  against  me. 
T70R  Thou  hast  smitten  all  my  enemies, 

The  teeth  of  the  wicked  Thou  hast  broken  of! 

To  Thee  Yahweh  belongeth  my  salvation ; 

And  upon  Thy  people  rests  Thy  blessing. 


PSALM   III.  25 

The  Ps.  was  in  ©  (in1?  v.  Intr.  §27)  and  M  (niDTD  v.  Intr.  §31).  The 
title  mentions  an  event  in  the  life  of  David  which  in  many  respects  suits  the 
experience  of  the  poet.  His  derision  as  one  forsaken  by  God  2  S.  i67-8, 
the  danger  by  night  2  S.  171 8i-,  the  myriads  of  people  2  S.  1513,  1711,  and  his 
high  and  honourable  position.  The  Ps.  certainly  expresses  the  experience  of  a 
monarch,  or  some  chief  of  the  people,  whose  blessing  was  wrapt  up  in  his 
salvation  v.9  and  whose  enemies  were  a  myriad,  in  arms  against  him  v.7.  He 
is  a  Davidic  chief  far  from  the  holy  hill  of  Zion.  Yahweh  has  answered  him 
v.6  and  smitten  his  enemies  v.8.  The  language  and  style  of  the  Ps.  are  simple 
and  of  the  best  type.  There  is  no  reference  to  other  scripture  unless  possibly 
to  Gen.  151  (E)  in  the  imagery  of  the  shield;  but  though  the  word  is  the 
same,  the  construction  is  different.  The  expression  "  sacred  hill "  is  used  in 
preex.  writings.  The  use  of  rptf  v.7  in  the  sense  of  set  in  battle  array,  is 
elsewhere  Is.  22".  The  Ps.  is  one  of  the  earliest,  and  cannot  well  be  later 
than  the  period  of  the  monarchy,  when  it  was  exposed  to  the  attack  of  the 
minor  surrounding  nations.  It  would  suit  well  the  situation  of  Jehoshaphat 
2  Ch.  20.  But,  as  this  is  only  given  in  Chr.  and  not  in  the  parallel  of  K.,  it  is 
probable  that  many  other  historical  experiences,  such  as  that  in  our  Ps.,  are 
not  recorded  in  the  condensed  narratives  of  the  historians.  The  Ps.  gives 
individual  experience,  but  this  became  characteristic  for  the  nation,  and  so 
the  Ps.  was  adapted  to  common  use,  although  the  language  was  left  in  its 
individual  form. 

Str.  I.  2-3.  The  poet  vividly  describes  adversaries  in  four 
synth.  trimeters  as  many,  as  rising  up  against  him,  as  saying  of  him, 
and  what  they  say,  There  is  no  salvation  for  him']  he  does  not 
possess  it,  and  there  is  no  prospect  of  his  ever  having  it. 

Str.  II.  4-5.  The  antistr.,  in  four  synth.  trimeters,  contrasts 
his  real  experience  with  the  actions  and  words  of  the  adversaries : 
Yahweh  a  shield  about  me~\  antith.  v.2a ;  my  glory  and  the  lifter  up 
of  my  head],  that  is,  the  one  in  whom  I  glory,  and  the  one  who 
has  exalted  my  head  in  victory  over  adversaries,  antith.  v.25 ;  — 
Unto  Yahweh  I  called]  in  oft-repeated  pleading,  aloud  with  my 
voice]  antith.  v.3*;  He  answered  me]  as  an  historical  fact,  the 
climax,  antith.  v.36.  —  From  His  holy  mountain]  from  Zion  {v. 
26)  ;  salvation  has  come  in  response  to  my  prayer  and  I  am  in 
possession  of  it. 

Str.  III.  6-7  has  two  synth.  couplets.  The  poet  had  not 
been  in  such  peril  and  anxiety  as  his  adversaries  supposed.  He 
had  not  been  wakeful  during  the  night :  far  otherwise,  he  says,  / 
laid  me  down],  calm  and  undisturbed ;  and  slept]  ;  and  when  I 
had  sufficient  refreshment,  /  awaked,  for],  all  night  long  Yahweh 


26  PSALMS 

kept  sustaining  me].  Under  such  an  experience  of  the  support  of 
Yahweh,  /  am  not  afraid,  even  of  myriads  of  people.  The  poet 
is  a  king,  these  myriads  are  enemies  who  have  come  up  against 
him  in  war ;  they  are  foreign  people  in  very  great  numbers. 
They  are  round  about],  so  numerous  are  they,  they  surround  the 
king  and  his  army. — they  were  arrayed']  his  adversaries  put 
these  myriads  in  battle  array  against  him. 

8  a.  O  rise  up,  Yahweh,  Save  ?ne,  my  God~]  appeal  to  Yahweh 
to  rise  up  to  activity  :  a  gloss,  giving  the  plea  of  the  people  of 
Israel  in  troublous  times,  when  surrounded  by  myriads  of  enemies, 
and  when  they  were  in  a  less  calm  and  confident  frame  of  mind 
than  the  author  of  the  Ps. 

Str.  IV.  8i>-9.  The  antistr.  gives  the  well-grounded  reason  for 
the  calm  confidence  expressed  in  the  previous  str.  Yahweh  had 
already  given  victory  and  wrought  salvation.  Thou  hast  smitten 
all  ?nine  enemies]  they  have  been  defeated  in  battle  ;  that  is  a 
reason  why  he  has  had  a  calm  and  refreshing  sleep  v.6" ;  —  The 
teeth  of  the  wicked  Thou  hast  broken  off],  so  severely  have  they 
been  smitten,  that  they  are  no  longer  able  to  bite.  This  is  the 
reason  for  the  assurance  that  God  kept  sustaining  him  all  night 
long,  v.66.  —  To  Thee  belongeth  my  salvation]  Yahweh  was  his  pro- 
tector, and  it  was  His  affair  to  save  him.  Therefore  he  was  not 
afraid  of  the  myriads  of  enemies,  v.7a.  —  Upon  Thy  people  rests 
Thy  blessing]  ;  What  matters  it  then  if  the  enemies  are  arrayed 
in  arms  against  them,  v.76?  Yahweh's  blessing  not  only  saves  them 
from  evil,  but  bestows  upon  them  every  good  that  is  needful. 

2-3.  nn]  adv.  X  how  exclam.  as  82- 10  2i2  3120  36s  668  842  92s  10424  1 19s7- 108 
'331' l  I3917, 17»  in  indirect  questions  396,  why  42s- 12- 12  43s-  6  52s.  —  «n]  Qal 
pf.  3  pi.  y/X  331  be  many  in  numbers,  of  enemies  j2  2519  38'20  69s,  works  of 
Yahweh  10424,  be  much  in  quantity  48. — nx]  n.  pi.  sf.  i.p.  %  -is  n.  m.  sg. 
coll.,  adversaries  4411  7410  7842-  61 1072,  pi.  J2I35  27s- 12  44s-  8  6014  (=  10814)  8l16 

8924.43  IQ524  Io6U  II28  n9189.  157  ,3^  agst  Qod  78s5  97s.  —  D^  DnDfc]  ptCS. 

of  continual  action  Dr.&135.  —  X  ^  "*CN]  usually  say  to  II1  162  (=  1407)  35s 
4016  (?)  4210  5012  522  542  668  755  1221;  but  also  of,  about,  concerning  j3  416 
7110  912.  —  "'f?^]  +  paraphrase  for  personal  pronoun  me  JPSV.  so  js  73  n1  1718 

26»  318  348  358.7.12  4I5  546  ^2.5  022.  6  6616  69I9  Jl™  862  8815  9417  I031- 2- 22 
I041-35    109^    Il67    ll925.129.  167   I2o2-6    1308.6   I4I8    I425.  8    143II.  12   1461  ;    *\VD2 

thee  1217,  v^;d:  he  2518  10518  10931,  ucdj  we  3320  1247  {v.  BD^.,  Br.  JBL. 
1897,  l7  sq0-  —  r^J  n«  cstr-  W*  t  (0  nothing,  naught,  seldom,  ]\t<D  as  nothing 


PSALM   III.  27 

396  732»  (2)  cs^r-  or  WRLh  s^s-  frequent  in  sense  of  denial  of  thing,  %  sq.  ?  of 
possession  j3  3410  5520  119165  1463  v.  BZ>B.  — nnjntjH]  n.  f.,  fuller  form  nyw> 
ancient  case  ending  (K6.111  §124(3)  Ges.S90^2),  Dr.§182°5-)  not  used  with  gram- 
matical mng.  but  euphonic  to  retract  accent  before  iS.  %  ^'^\  n.  f.  [-y/yw"] 
(1)  salvation  from  God  j3-9  147  (—  537)  222  35s  622  67s  6930  705  (=  njwn 
4017)  7s22  803  91"  962  98s-  3  1064  ii9123- 155- 166- 174  1408,  with  vbs.  of  rejoicing 
c.  a  915  136  359,  '««  \-iSn  882  (dub.).  W>  t»  Dt.  3215  Ps.  8927,  cf.  62s- 7,  pi. 
saving  acts  426- 12  43s  11613.  (2)  victory  wrought  by  God  for  His  people 
Ex.  152  Is.  122  Hb.  38  Pss.  206  2i2-6  6820  n814-15-21  1494,  pi.  1851  28s  44s 
7412.  The  cognate  yvfr  see  183,  njntfn  3317  BDi?.  — D^nS»<a]  is  gloss;  makes 
line  too  long  and  is  improbable  in  $9.  <3  £v  r£  0e<j  avrov  =  t?  DTiSlG  shows 
that  some  codd.  inserted  the  divine  name  before,  others  after  v?.  —  4.  nnxi] 
emphatic  is  sufficiently  definite  in  reference  to  Yahweh  without  need  of  mm 
which  is  gloss,  making  line  too  long.  —  %  pD]  shield  carried  by  warrior  for 
defence  76* ;  of  "»  as  warrior  352 ;  fig.  of  king  8919,  rulers  4710,  elsw.  of 
Yahweh's  defence  of  His  people  j*  711  i83-  «•  36  287  3320  5912  8410-  12  1159- 10-  n 
119114  1442.  —  Hjn]  about  me  %  *ipa  always  with  sfs.,  here  of  shield  ;  13911  of 
light;  7215  1 38s  on  behalf  of :  other  mngs.  though  more  fundamental  not  in 
\p  BZ>B. —  H^a]  my  glory,  the  one  in  whom  I  glory,  cf.  omaa  10620. — 
Dn.v?]  Hiph.  ptc.  on  I  with  e>»n  elsw.  27s  no7  {v.  <p1J>). — 5.  ^p]  ace.  of 
closer  definition,  with  my  voice  (most)  as  I422- 2  cf.  77s- 2.  Hi.,  Bo.,  Hu.  regard 
it  as  giving  vb.  double  subj.,  active  member  coming  first.  The  emph.  position 
of  "hyp  is  without  good  reason.  The  lines  rhyme  in  ■>_  and  it  is  prob.  *yip 
originally  came  last  in  line. — tnpN  Qal  impf.  freq.  oft  repeated  calling  with 
the  result  expressed  by  1  consec.  impf.  >}W*}.  aorist  single  act.  —  %  top] 
(1)  usually  in  \p,  cry,  call  out  for  help  to  God  1478  (ravens),  in  prayer,  abs. 
42  2010  223  277  347  5610  69*  818  1023  1162  (?)  119145  1201  1383;  c.  ace.  sf.  176 
3ii85o15865-7  8810  9i15ii9146  130* 1411  H518-18;  mm  i4«(=omSn  53s)  i84-7, 
m  Ii85  ;  c.  \  pers.  57s  1411,  "™  J5  44  281  309  5517  613  6617  863  99s,  in  worship 
Otfa  'p  796  8019  1051  n64-13-17,  cf.  DS7  *¥nj>  99s.  (2)  call  unto  c.  hu  one  to 
another  42s.  (3)  call,  summon  c.  ace.  501,  c.  hn  504,  c.  h'j  10516.  (4)  call, 
name  4912  89s7  1474.  —  %  nj"]  (0  usually  God's  answer  to  prayer,  abs.  3816 
c.  ace.  pers.  134  202- 7  2222  6o7(=  1087)  6914- 17  818  99s  11821  11926  1431, 
%«y  VJD  6918  1023  1437,  after  H"\p  j5  42  176  2010  223  867  9115  99s  1023  1185 
119145  1201  1383,  other  vbs.  1842  277  34s  55s-20  861.  (2)  respond,  c.  ace. 
pers.  1836  (?)  1194*2,  ace.  rei.  65°.  —  6.  y«]  emph.  antith.  nnxi  v.  4a. — 
Viaatf]  pf.  aorist  sq.  l  consec.  impf.  result  :  mt^jn  cohort,  for  jussive  1st  p. 
1 astf  vb.  lie  down  to  sleep  j6  4°,  in  ease  6814,  prostrate  in  peril  57s,  in  death 
419,  in  the  grave  886.  —  XV^l  yb-  go  to  sleep,  be  asleep,  sleep  j6  49  of  ">  44s- 
1214,  in  death  134  cf.  J  ??;;  adj.  '•>  7865.  —  *nl*V»n]  Hiph.  pf.  aorist  J  y/V\>  only 
Hiph.  awake  from  sleep  j6  7320  13918,  of  death  1715,  "»  subj.  3523  4424  59s. — 
y3DD^]  Qal  impf.  freq.  oft  repeated,  sustain  during  the  night  Dr.30"1104336. 
X 1JM  Qal  (1)  trans,  lean  or  lay  hand  upon  888.  (2)  God  upholds,  sustains 
His  people  j6  3717,  24  5114  546  119116  14514,  pass.  ptc.  in8  (Yahweh's  Law) 
1128  the  mind.     Niph.  support  oneself  716.™ 7.    ntm  *r]  Qal  impf.  present 


28  PSALMS 

%c.  p  afraid  of  3!  271  65°  916  1127  119120.  —  rvo:n]  cstr.  pi.  fnaan  n.  f. 
myriad  c.  f  917,  Gn.  2460  Nu.  io86  (J)  Lv.  26s  Dt  3280  33s  (?)  Jil2oM 
Is.  i87-8  2112  295  Ct.  510  Ez.  i67-17  Mi.  67,  cf.  denom.  Pual  Ps.  14413.— 
%  o>]  /«>//*  in  \p  (1)  sg.  coll.  M*  /«>//*  0/  6W  39  1447  (=  536- 7)  1828  28s 
2911. 11  3312  35i8  ^13  so4. 7  59i2  6o5  629  68s- »  72* 8- 4  7310  7716- 21  781- 20- 62- 62- 71 
7918  806  8i9-12-14  83*  85s- 7-9  8916-20  946-14  957- 10  ioo3  I0524-26-43  io64-40-48 
10732  in6-9  1138  u614-18  1252  1351214  13616  I4415-15  i4814-14  1494,  the  future 
generation  2232  10219,  so  people  of  king  no3;  in  no  case  hostile  to  king  or 
God,  and  therefore  it  cannot  be  interpreted  in  v.7  of  that  portion  of  Israel 
hostile  to  David.  (2)  sg.  coll.  of  foreign  nations  i844-44  4710  7418  94s  10513 
so  dj?  viT3  227  and  j7  of  hostile  foreign  people,  also  1442  ('D?  for  D^DJf)  1848 
as  J5,  Aq.,  3,  K.  (3)  sg.  of  single  people  4511,  prob.  also  4513  1141  [d>">xS  dv 
7414  dub.).  (4)  pi.  d^dj;  always  foreign  nations  79  1848  3310  456-  18  474- 10  56s 
67s  6831- 81  8951  96s-  7- 10- 18  98s  10520  10634,  often  conceived  as  taking  part  ulti- 
mately in  worship  of  1  668  87s  991  10228,  subj.  vr»jn  912  rnn  5710  674- 4- 6- 6  1084, 
jp-nn  7715  1051,  D*IFI  S3  472  492  96s  97s  99s.  —  "^;n]  is  unnecessary  and  dub. 

—  3"OD]  adv.  round-about,  emph.  ^5?  rr]  phr.  a.X.  Qal  real  pf.  indef.  subj^ 
they  have  arrayed  against  me,  cf.  Is.  22",  best  given  in  English  as  passive. 
The  context  indicates  an  army  composed  of  myriads  set  or  put  in  battle  array. 

—  8.   HMp]  Qal  imv.  cohort.,  urgent  entreaty.  —  vrV"1,1]  Hiph.  imv.  sf.  1  sg. 

—  V*  ['-''J  Niph.  be  saved,  placed  in  freedom  (1)  from  evils  by  God  8o4-8,20 
I19117  c.  p  184,  (2)  in  battle  and  so  be  victorious  331*.  Hiph.  (1)  deliver^ 
save  in  peril  367  7218  c.  S  pers.  724  Ii66  from  evils  1842,  of  heroic  man,  frequent 
in  early  Lit. ;  usually  of  God,  who  saves  His  people  from  external  evils  289 
69s6  1068  11825,  or  the  pious  among  them  f  65  72- "  122  177  1828  3419  3740  54s 
5517  $j*  692  7128  7610  862  16  10647  109*  ii994- 146  1387  14519,  the  king  207- 10. 
God  is  saviour  10621  and  is  with  His  people  to  save  them  318;  Israel  prays, 
O  save  with  Thy  right  hand,  607  =  1087  cf.  Is.  591.  That  from  which  one  is 
saved  c.  p  22M  347  44s  59s  10610  io718-  19  10931 ;  there  is  no  other  salvation, 
the  sword  saves  not  447 ;  (2)  save  from  moral  troubles  or  sin  ;  not  in  ^  or  OT. 
except  Ez.  36M  37s3 ;  (3)  give  victory,  of  man  3117  444,  God  981.  — n\?n  *o] 
the  reason  with  Hiph.  pf.  2  m.  action  just  completed.  —  V^]  Hiph-  smite 
(1)  with  a  single  blow  j8,  if  tiS  original,  as  La.  3s0  but  it  is  not  found  elsw. 
in  \f/,  it  is  not  in  <S  which  rds.  fmralus  =  °fi?.  Both  are  glosses,  |$  to  make 
the  enemies  into  later  religious  enemies;  therefore  the  smiting  is  the  defeat 
of  enemies  as  in  battle  as  78^  13510  13617.  —  ♦a**"4??]  Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  1  p.  J  [:tn] 
Qal  pf.  only  ^np^N  Ex.  23s2  (E)  elsw.  ptc.  enemy  (1)  sg.  of  nation  97  74s- 10- 18 
89^  10610  colk  f  319  4210  432  554  614  64s  1438,  individual  only  5518  (but  cf. 
554)  ^s  is  always  coll.  13s-6  1818  4112  (possibly  all  should  be  pointed  ^_) 
B&nrp  3*H  88  =  4417;  (2)  pi.  preceded  by  Vd  38  611  181  219  mm  *a»n  37^ 
Y?Dn  >a>N  456,  elsw.  simply  general  94  179  i84- 88- «• 49  252- 19  272- 6  302  3116  3519 
3820  41s-  6  549  5610  592  668  682- K-  24  69s- 19  7110  72*  7858  807  8116  S39  8911- 48- 62 
92io.io  I029  ioo42  IIOi.2  II998  ^  13218  1387  13922  1439  u.  —  rn|tf  >;r]  phr. 
o.X.  cf.  587  La.  316  also  comparison  of  their  teeth  with  weapons  Ps.  57s  cf.  Pr.  3014, 
other  phr.  (S>')  D'JT  pin  gnashed  teeth  upon  3516  3712  11210  La.  216  cf.  Jb.  169 


PSALM   IV.  29 

DmcS  *pa  1246.  —  9.   nin^1?]  rd.  mm  :p  to  get  the  missing  word  of  measure 

^DJT^y]   <t§  has  *pj?  Sj?>  which  gives  us  the  missing  accent  for  measure. 

In  both  lines  rpfi  is  understood  in  the  sense  of  present  and  abiding  experi- 
ence.—  Jno->3]  n.  f.  (1)  blessing  of  God  j>9  214  24s  1298  1333,  of  the  people  in 
recognition  of  good  men  10917 ;  (2)  source  of  blessing,  seed  of  righteous  3726, 
king  217;  (3)  blessing,  prosperity  $>£, 


PSALM   IV.,   4  str.  44. 

Ps.  4  is  an  evening  prayer.  The  poet  is  confident  that  the 
God  of  his  right  has  answered  his  prayer  (v.2-3).  He  tells  his 
adversaries  that  Yahweh  hath  shewn  extraordinary  kindness  to 
him,  and  warns  them  to  tremble  and  not  sin  (v.4*5).  He  then 
urges  his  followers  to  offer  the  right  sacrifices,  trust  in  Yahweh, 
and  pray  for  prosperity  and  the  priestly  benediction  (v.6-7);  then 
affirms  his  own  gladness  and  peace  and  goes  to  sleep  in  safety 
(v.^9). 

VAfHEN  I  call,  answer  me,  O  God  of  my  right; 

In  my  distress  Thou  hast  made  room ;  shew  me  favour  (by  hearing)  my  prayer. 

Ye  sons  of  men,  how  long  shall  my  honour  be  a  reproach, 

Will  ye  love  a  vain  thing,  seek  after  a  lie? 
"PUT  know  that  Yahweh  hath  shewn  extraordinary  kindness, 

Yahweh  heareth  when  I  call  unto  Him. 

Tremble  and  sin  not  (ye  sons  of  men). 

Say  (it)  in  your  heart,  (lying)  upon  your  bed,  and  be  still. 
(VE  sons  of  mankind)  sacrifice  right  sacrifices, 

And  trust  unto  Yahweh,  ye  many. 

Keep  saying:  "  O  that  He  would  shew  us  prosperity, 

Lift  the  light  of  Thy  countenance  upon  us." 
VAHWEH,  Thou  hast  put  gladness  in  my  heart 

More  than  that  of  the  season  when  their  corn  and  new  wine  were  abundant. 

In  peace  at  once  will  I  lay  me  down  and  I  will  sleep, 

For  Thou  makest  me  dwell  apart,  in  safety. 

Ps.  4  was  originally  in  IB  as  a  mate  to  Ps.  3,  an  evening  prayer  following 
naturally  a  morning  prayer.  It  was  then  taken  up  into  jftfl  and  JB1&  and  assigned 
for  rendering  with  the  music  of  stringed  instruments  mj\U3.  (See  Intr.  §  39.) 
The  date  of  the  Ps.  depends  upon  a  variety  of  considerations  :  (1)  The 
high  priestly  benediction  Nu.  624-26  is  familiar  to  the  author,  for  two  of  its 
clauses  melt  together  in  yiD  tin  hdj  v.7&  ;  and  DlSa»a  v.9**  is  suggested  by  it 
This  blessing  belongs  to  the  sources  of  P,  and  was  familiar,  especially  in 
priestly  circles,  long  before  the  Exile.  (2)  The  blessing  of  Moses  Dt.  33  is 
familiar  to  the  author  in  the  phrs.  pw  ^m?  v.6  =  Dt.  3319  ;  DPWni  djjt  v.86; 


30  PSALMS 

»j3»nn  nssS  TiaS  v.96  =  Dt.  3328.  These  favour  an  early  date.  (3)  The 
language  is  of  best  classic  type.  tt"N  >J3  v.3  men  of  high  degree  in  antith.  with 
onN  U3  men  of  low  degree,  elsw.  in  Pss.  49s  6210 ;  nDn  nScn  v.4  elsw.  Ps.  177  = 
N^Son  Ps.  3 i2i.  If  nSen  were  from  y/n^D  a  dependence  upon  Ex.  818  94  1 17  (J) 
would  appear ;  but  this  derivation  is  improbable.  izhi  icn  v.6  is  a  phr.  of  D, 
here  only  in  \f/.  There  are  two  resemblances  to  previous  Ps.,  cf.  v.7a  with  3s, 
and  v.9a  with  3r,a  ;  but  these  are  not  sufficient  to  establish  common  author 
or  date.  The  language  favours  a  date  not  earlier  than  Je.  (4)  The  historical 
situation  is  entirely  different  from  that  of  Ps.  3,  where  a  monarch  was  in  peril 
from  hostile  peoples.  Here  a  ruler,  probably  not  a  king,  is  sustained  by  the 
people,  but  oppressed  by  men  of  station  and  influence.  By  lying,  and  empty, 
baseless  misrepresentation,  they  have  changed  his  position  of  honour  to  one 
of  reproach.  This  docs  not  suit  the  experience  of  David  during  the  rebellion 
of  Absalom ;  for  the  adversaries  were  not  men  of  rank.  These  were  with 
David,  but  the  common  people  were  against  him,  having  been  seduced  by 
Absalom  2  S.  151"6;  and  David  was  not  in  fact  in  peace  and  safety  2  S.  1 724— 18. 
The  experience  of  the  Ps.  is  that  of  a  reformer.  The  language  of  the  Ps. 
favours  a  priest  such  as  Amariah  2  C.  1911,  Jehoiada  2  K.  1 1,  Hilkiah  2  K.  22  ; 
but  all  of  these  excepting  the  last  are  too  early  and  none  of  them  were  prob- 
ably sustained  by  the  people  over  against  the  princes.  The  situation  is  well 
given  in  Ezr.  4,  where  Zerubbabel  and  Jeshua  were  opposed  at  the  court  of 
Persia  by  lies  and  slanders,  which  had  no  basis  in  fact;  and  their  honour  was 
clouded  by  such  attacks  and  their  work  really  stayed.  This  would  suit  all  the 
conditions  of  the  Ps. 

Str.  I.  2.  The  poet  prays  that  when  he  calls,  Yahweh  will  answer 
him.  It  is  just  because  Yahweh  is  the  God  of  my  right]  the  God 
who  vindicates  his  cause  against  his  adversaries  and  establishes 
his  right,  that  he  can  so  address  Him  and  pray  with  confidence 
to  Him.  This  is  fortified  in  the  syn.  line  by  past  experience ; 
the  God  of  his  right  has  vindicated  his  right,  when  in  distress, 
and  has  made  room  for  him.  Distress  is  here  a  being  constrained 
into  narrow  limits ;  pressed  from  rightful  freedom,  and  shut  in 
on  every  side.  The  antith.  is  the  removal  of  such  restraint  and 
pressure,  giving  room  and  freedom.  The  request  for  answer  is 
strengthened  into  shew  me  favour  (by  hearing)  my  prayer.  "  The 
word  suggests  the  free  bestowal  of  favour  rather  than  the  exercise 
of  forgiving  clemency"  (Kirk);  or  pity  for  sufferers.  —  3.  The 
call  upon  God  is  followed  by  antith.  remonstrance  with  his  adver- 
saries, who  refuse  his  right  and  have  brought  him  into  distress. 
They  are  sons  of  men\  men  of  rank,  of  high  degree,  and  so  have 
had  the  power  to  reduce  his  honour  ||  right,  to  reproach,  ||  distress. 


PSALM  IV.  31 

They  have  done  this  because  they  are  themselves  false  and  dis- 
honourable men.  —  Will  ye  love  a  vain  thing  f\  empty  and  without 
reality,  more  specific  —  seek  after  a  lie].  The  reproach  that  they 
have  brought  upon  him  is  thus  branded  as  false,  without  founda- 
tion, and  a  lie.  The  charge  is  concrete  and  specific ;  "  false- 
hood "  (RV.,  Dr.,  JPSV)  is  too  general ;  "  leasing  "  (PBV,  AV.)  is 
obsolete  for  lie. 

Str.  II.  4.  In  the  antistr.,  the  poet  gives  his  adversaries  to  know, 
in  the  first  syn.  couplet,  that  Yahweh  hath  shewn  extraordinary 
kindness]  as  177  3122  renewing  the  experience  of  v.2.  J^,  though 
sustained  by  Vrss.  ancient  and  modern  and  most  critics  with  the 
mng. :  hath  separated,  set  apart,  or  distinguished,  for  Himself,  the 
pious,  godly  man,  is  not  so  well  suited  to  context  and  is  not  sus- 
tained by  good  usage.  —  Yahweh  heareth  when  I  call  unto  Him] 
constant  experience  resuming  v.2a.  5.  In  the  second  syn.  couplet, 
he  warns  them  that  had  brought  his  honour  to  reproach,  to 
trejnble  and  not  sin~\  by  taking  the  steps  necessary  to  realise  their 
thoughts,  make  them  effective  in  conduct.  Over  against  their 
loving  a  vain  thing  and  seeking  out  a  lie  against  him,  the  poet 
warns  them ;  say  (what  you  have  to  say)  in  your  heart,  to  your- 
selves, in  secret,  while  lying  upon  your  bed,  and  be  still]  give  no 
expression  to  your  wicked  thoughts. 

Str.  III.  The  poet  now  turns  to  his  discouraged  people.  6.  They 
are  sons  0/  mankind]  men  of  low  degree  over  against  the  sons  of 
men,  men  of  high  degree  v.3 ;  the  measure  as  well  as  the  antith. 
requires  this  insertion.  He  exhorts  them  to  sacrifice  right  sacri- 
fices] while  he  is  calling  on  the  God  of  his  right,  v.2a.  These  were 
the  normal  sacrifices,  in  accordance  with  law  and  custom  (Du., 
Ba\),  rather  than  "  of  righteousness  "  offered  in  a  right  spirit  (Pe., 
De.,  Hu.,  Kirk)  or  symb.  of  righteous  acts  (Aug,  Chrysostom)  or 
which  justify,  cf.  v.2,  Genebr.  7.  He  reminds  his  followers  that  they 
are  many  in  numbers,  and  they  should  trust  unto  Yahweh,  Who 
has  made  room  for  him  in  the  past  and  Who  shews  favour  to  him 
in  his  prayer  v.2*.  He  urges  them  to  keep  saying]  expressing  the 
wish,  the  strong  desire,  "O  that  He  would  shew  us  prosperity  "],  so 
JPSV,  antith.  to  the  reproach  that  has  come  upon  their  chiefs,  cf. 
v.3a.  This  is  better  suited  to  the  context  than  the  question  "  Who 
will  shew  us?"  of  EVS.     They  should  beg  the  bestowal  of  the 


32  PSALMS 

divine  benediction,  Lift  the  light  of  Thy  countenance  upon  us,  in 
place  of  the  vain  thing  and  the  lie,  that  the  adversaries  have 
sought  out  against  him.  The  poet  is  thinking  of  the  blessing  of 
the  high  priest,  Nu.  624-26  (P),  which  wishes  that  the  light  of  Yah- 
weh's  face  may  shine  upon  His  people  with  favour,  bestowing 
peace  and  prosperity.  This  blessing  the  Psalmist  seeks  directly 
from  Yahweh  Himself,  so  6f~,  cf.  44*  8916. 

Str.  IV.  The  antistr.  asserts  the  poet's  gladness,  peace,  and 
safety,  over  against  the  prayers  of  his  people  in  the  previous  str., 
in  introverted  parallel  clauses.  Yahweh ,  Thou  hast  put  gladness 
in  my  hearty  the  response  to  the  prayer  v.76.  This  joy  is  greater 
than  that  of  those  who  in  harvest  season  rejoice  that  their  corn 
and  new  zvine  were  abundant].  This  is  in  response  to  the  peti- 
tion v.7a.  He  resolves  to  lay  him  down  and  go  to  sleep  at  once,  in 
peace,  in  the  experience  of  that  same  trusting  unto  Yahweh  which 
he  has  commended  to  his  followers  v.66.  He  enjoys  the  calm 
peace  which  is  imparted  in  the  priestly  benediction  for  which 
they  had  asked.  Thou  makest  me  dwell  apart  in  safety']  response 
to  the  offering  of  right  sacrifices  by  his  people  v.6*.  In  calm, 
peaceful  trust  he  goes  to  sleep  upon  his  bed  with  this  evening 
prayer  upon  his  lips. 

2.  'MTQa]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  sf.  1  p.,  temporal  clause  ;  imv.  Qal  sf.  1  p.  in  apodosis 
UJi?  v.  j5.  —  ifryt  vV?«]  phr.  a.X.  God  of  my  right,  who  rights  me,  vindicates 
my  right,  cf.  v«"  >hSn  1847;  hdq  'N  5911- 18.  J  p??.  n.m. :  (1)  what  is  right, 
just,'*  •hijfB  right  paths  23s,  x  >r\2\  46  5121  Dt.  3319;  (2)  righteousness  in 
government  (a)  of  rulers  58s  9416,  (d)  of  laws  1 I97-  62-  76- 106- 188- 144- 16°- 164- 172, 
(c)  of  king  456  722  Is.  n4-6,  (d)  of  God's  attitude  as  sovereign:  personified 
agent  8511, 12- 14,  foundation  of  His  throne  8915  =  972,  in  His  government 
99  °56  9613  =  989,  administration  of  justice  718  4811  506  =  97°,  vindication 
of  His  people  95  3524,  ^  ^pis  t6n  42,  it  is  everlasting  119142.  (3)  right- 
eousness, justice  in  a  cause  3527  Is.  59S  '3  vdv  79,  '3  Sdj  1821,  '3  3*e>n  v.25, 
'X  yev  171,  '*  K»SV1  376;  (4)  Tightness  in  speech  525;  (5)  ethically  right 
'716  458  Je-  2218  Ho.  io12  W.L.  x  ncp  119121,  'x  S^d  152;  (6)  righteous- 
ness as  vindicated  in  deliverance  4010  119128;  (7)  p-rs  nj?c;  gates  of  the 
God  Zedek  u819;  cf.  Is.  I26  Je.  3123  507. —  -155]  emphatic  position;  2 
temporal  c.  yt  for  usual  J  ~tt  n.  in  \j/  straits,  distress  yi1  6013  10813  119143, 
alw.  elsw.  either  h  -rca  187  6614  10644  107°- 18- 19- 28  =  h  "t|  d»3  5917  1023, 
or  *•?  ->x  *3  3110  69I8:  therefore  here  also  »S— wa,  the  transposition  of  »S  a 
copyist's  error.  Moreover,  this  construction  improves  the  measure,  for  the 
superfluous  tone  disappears.  —  n3rnn]  Hiph.  pf.  2  sg.  hast  made  room,  only 


PSALM  IV.  33 

here  in  this  fig.  sense,  but  cf.  1837.  The  pf.  prob.  refers  to  past  experience, 
Dr.§9.  It  is  tempting  with  Bo.§939^>  947(sr>  to  think  of  a  precative  pf.  here; 
but,  as  Dr.§20,  there  is  lack  of  evidence  of  such  a  usage  in  Heb.,  v.  Ges.  §  i°6(3i); 
although  Ew.§2236  sustains  it.  —  >jan]  Qal  imv.  sf.  I  p.  \  ^J\v\  (i)  shew  favour, 
be  gracious ;  so  usually  of  God  as  bestowing  redemption  from  enemies,  evils 
and  sins  c.  ace.  4*  63  914  2516  2611  2?  3011  3110  41s-  n  513  562  57s-  2  59s  863- 16, 
all  IB;  elsw.  672  1021*  11988.182  i232-3-3;  not  used  in  It  or  a  exc.  abs.  7710; 
(2)  of  God  in  bestowal  of  favours  in  more  general  sense  :  'jan  !pvV>fl  preg. 
with  two  ace.  be  gracious  to  me  (in  giving)  Thy  Law  119'29;  (3)  of  man  in 
dealing  with  poor,  alw.  ptc,  abs.  \i}T\  37s1'  *  II25,  c.  S  1091'2.  Poel  direct 
favour  toward  io21&  as  Pr.  1421.  Hithp.  Sn  t^nriN  seek  or  implore  favour  of 
God  309  1422.  —  ypc'i]  makes  line  too  long;  is  a  gloss,  being  implied  in 
pregnant  clause;  cf.  11929.  —  nSen]  v.  Intr.  §  1.  — 3.  \  Vh*  \j3]  pi.  cstr., 
vocative,  n.  of  relation  c.  coll.  sg.  B*K.  This  phr.  in  \p  elsw.  only  antith. 
D-tN  »33  493  62D,  where  men  of  high  degree  are  contrasted  with  men  of  low 
degree  :  so  here,  esp.  if  we  insert  din  >J3  in  v.6.  In  fact  V">t<  in  \p  usually 
means  man  as  a  self-respecting  individual  with  a  certain  amount  of  dignity 
624,  having  talent  10517,  sometimes  pious  2512  3413  10916  II21-5,  sometimes  an 
enemy  or  wicked  3121  377  3815  927.  %  d^n  \)3  in  \p  alw.  mankind  n4  i22-9 
142  (=  533)  2111  3120  3313  36s  453  665  8948T908  107s- 15- 2L  31  11510  14512.  In 
575  582  it  must  have  the  special  sense  of  &"N  *J3  if  subj.,  but  this  is  improb. 
It  is  obj.,  and  so  has  same  mng.  as  all  other  passages.  —  %  TO— ip]  how  long 
as  749  (?)  795  8947.  —  nos]  antith.  with  noSs,  only  here  \}/.  1133  in  the  mng. 
honour,  reputation,  character  of  man  is  elsewhere  only  2  Ch.  2618  Pr.  203  21 * 
2527  Ec.  io1;   but  cf.  76.  —  h~\  before  T\rhs  is  preg.,  implying  mn  become. — 

1  ns^p]  n.  f.  in  its  original  sense  of  insult,  not  in  \f/,  but  as  reproach;  elsw. 
3526  (44I6  69s-20  7113  IO929;  cf.  8951.  <g  £ws  7r6r€  papvK&pSioi  ha  tl  = 
naS  3S  >n33,  though  sustained  by  Houb.,  Genebr.,  We.,  is  better  explained  as 
due  to  a  mistake  quite  common,  esp.  in  Egyptian  Aramaic  script,  of  3  for 
3;  J  incliti  mei  after  Aq.  oi  £v8o£oL  jxov  n33  =  H33}  \\$>  my  honourable  men. 
But  MT  followed  by  2,  {£,  J2>  suits  rhythm  and  context.  —  p3HKn]    Qal  impf. 

2  pi.  3DN,  fuller  archaic  form  to  get  full-toned  penult  before  monosyl.;  obj. 
pn  (v.  21)  :  cf.  II5  52s-  6  10917  for  loving  other  forms  of  evil.  —  3T3  1#p3fl] 
phr.  a.X.  Vb.  Piel  impf.  2  pi.  cf.  jn  '3  Ps.  1711.  J  3T3  /*>,  falsehood  4s,  57  405 
58*  625-  10. — 4.  >h  -rDn  '>  nSon]  phr.  a.X.  vb.  Hiph.  pf.  aorist.  The  line  is 
too  long  in  p£,  either  ">  or  'h  must  be  a  gloss.  But  it  is  the  latter,  bee.  we 
should  rd.  \  "\pn  xSsn  as  177  3122,  shew  extraordinary  kindness.  The  mis- 
interpretation as  -PDn  occasioned  the  addition  of  ^S;  37  cedd.  Ken.  28  De  Rossi 
rd.  Ktan.  Most  recent  critics,  Dy.,  Che.,  Gr.,  We.,  Oort,  Du.  rd.  npn,  but 
differ  as  to  "h  non  or  h  nDn  or  >S  iDn.  The  use  of  iDn  is  so  important 
in  \p  that  it  seems  best  to  give  the  complete  usage  here.  t("*Dn)  vb.  denom. 
only  Hithp.  shew  oneself  kind :  Ps.  1826  =  2  S.  2226.  J  ipn  n.m.  (1)  of  man 
kindness  (a)  toward  men  in  doing  favours  and  benefits  1415,  (b)  especially  as 
extended  to  the  lowly,  needy,  and  miserable  I0912- 16;  (2)  of  God  kindness, 
lovingkindness,  in  condescension  to  the  needs  of  His  creatures.     He  is  non 

D 


34  PSALMS 

1442;  non  vfy|  5918;  HDn  >hSn  5911  (so<g,lJ,  Ew.,  Hup.,  De.,  Pe.,  Che.,Ba.); 
His  is  the  kindness  6218;  it  is  with  Him  1307;  specifically  (a)  in  redemption 
frorn  enemies  and  troubles :  2i8  3i17-  22  (=  ^4)32i0  332'2  36s  42s  4427  4810  59'17 
6620  85s  9014  9418  107s- 18-  21-  31  143s- 12;  men  should  trust  in  it  136  5210;  rejoice 
in  it  3 18;  hope  in  it  3318  14711.  (b)  in  preservation  of  life  from  death:  66 
8618.  0)  in  quickening  spiritual  life:  10926  no"- 76.  88.  124. 149.  i59#  ^)  in 
redemption  from  sin  :  25"  513.  (e)  in  keeping  the  covenants  with  David  and 
his  dynasty  :  1861  8929-  84.  (/)  grouped  with  other  divine  attributes:  DDNi  ion 
Pss.  25 10  4011-  12  57*  618  8511  8916  H51  i382Gn.  24s7  (J);  POM  -iDn  an  Ex.  34s 
(J)  Ps.  8615;  ||  DDK  Pss.  26s  1 1 72  Mi.  720;  ||  njiDM  Pss.  8812  89s-  *  92s;  ||  D'crn  77' 
98s  1034;  eectal  ->Dn  1011  Je.  928;  ||  np~\v  Ps.  3611;  -iDm  arj  23s.  (£•)  The 
kindness  of  God  is  (a)  abundant:  "iDn  an  abundant,  plenteous  in  kindness 
Nu.  1418  (J)  Ne.  917  (Qr.) Jo.  218  Jon.  42  Ps.  866  1038  (cf.  Ex.  34°  (J)  Ps.  8615) ; 
ri-tDn  an  Ne.  1322  Pss.  58  6914  1067  (®,  F,  Aq.,  &  to  be  preferred  to  MT. 
T7!?n);  i^pn  a^  La.  3s2  Ps.  10645  (Kt.,  (8  in  both  preferable),  (b)  great  in 
extent:  ^Dn  Sru  1458;  great  as  the  heavens  5711  10311;  cf.  36s  1085;  the 
earth  is  full  of  it  ^  1 1964.  (c)  everlasting:  nDn  dSi>*S  Je.  3311  I  Ch.  16s4- 41 
2Ch.  513  78-62021Ezr.311Pss.  ioo6  1061  1071  u8i-2- s-4-29  1361-2* (»».).  cf.  52s 
10317  1 38s.  (d)  good:  634  6917  10921.  (h)  pi.  mercies,  deeds  of  kindness  .• 
the  historic  displays,  mostly  late:  Pss.  25s  89s  Is.  637;  promised  in  Davidic 
covenant  Ps.  8950;  in  general  La.  322  Ps.  177;  cf.  3122  41*  (sg.)  10748. 
J  -n?n  adj.  (1)  kind :  of  man  18'26  =  2  S.  2226  ;  of  nation  Ps.  431 ;  of  God,  only 
14517  Je.  312.  (2)  as  n.  pious,  godly  :  because  kindness,  as  prominent  in  the 
godly,  comes  to  imply  other  attributes  and  be  a  designation  of  the  godly 
character,  piety;  sg.  44  122  (?)  32s  862;  Thy  pious  one  1610  (Kt.  pi.)  pi.  the 
pious,  godly,  those  of  the  people  who  were  faithful,  devoted  to  God's  service, 
only  in  \f>  and  chiefly  if  not  entirely  in  late  Pss.  I491-  6  ;  His  pious  ones  306  3124 
37'28  85s  9710  11616  14814  1499;  Thy  pious  ones  5211  79s  8920  1329  14510;  My 
pious  ones  505  ;  her  (Zion's)  pious  ones  13216.  In  the  Maccabean  age  <rvpay(»ryr) 
'A<xi8alwv  denoted,  technically,  the  party  of  the  pious  who  opposed  the  Helleni- 
sation  of  Judaea.  See  1  Mace.  242  718  2  Mace.  146;  so  perhaps  Pss.  11616 
1491-6.9.  —  5.  1T_n]  imv.  Qal  2  pi.  refers  to  b^m  \ja  v.8  J  m  Qal  be  agitated, 
quiver,  tremble,  of  foundations  of  mountains  188,  depths  of  sea  7717,  of  the  earth 
7719,  peoples  991,  so  here  most  suitably.  (S,  2  dpyt^eo-de  =  Eph.  4s6,  3,  be  angry, 
AV.  is  sustained  by  Is.  2821  of  God's  anger  and  Pr.  29s  of  man's.  But  in  these 
cases  it  is  rather  the  quivering  and  trembling  of  passion,  which  is  justifiable; 
and  is  regarded  by  many  as  Hiph.  v.  BDB.  —  wanrrSw]  two  tones,  neg. 
Qal  impf.  pi.  2  m.  jussive  1  conj.  and  not  advers.  but,  as  required  by  interp.  of 
&,  3.  3  nolile  (peccare)  might  imply  la^n  and  so  give  us  the  missing  word  of 
this  tetrameter.  But  <S  has  d  \tyere.  This  may  be  an  interp.  to  get  an  obj.  for 
now  or  it  may  rest  upon  an  original  "HP*  =  J  nv^x  step,  going,  for  mode  of  life 
as  176  3731  408  4419  732  cf.  1711.  Probably  d-<n  p  is  the  missing  word  which 
must  be  supplied  in  thought  and  might  have  been  omitted  by  prosaic  copyist  as 
unnecessary.  X  sari  vb.  Qal  in  \p  alw.  miss  the  goal  or  path  of  right  and  duty, 
sin  (agst.  God):   abs.  <f  78s2,  in  confession  1066;    c.  S  7817  11911  in  con- 


PSALM  IV.  35 

fession  415  516  j  c.  a  of  instr.  3Q2  cf.  Jb.  210.  Piel  in  \p  only  f  purify  from 
uncleanness  519;  elsw.  in  this  sense  Lv.  i449-62  Nu.  1919  (P).  Hiph.  bring  to 
condemnation  or  punishment  Dt.  24*  Is.  2921,  possibly  Ps.  5913  (insertion  in 
text).  —  oaaaVa  nDK].  t  aa^a  id«  phr.  a.X.  ^,  but  Dt.  717  817  9*  1821  Is.  1413  47s 

4921    je<     5'24*I322   Zp.    il2    215    Cf.     HO.  72    (?),    cf.    \  2^2   "»DM    Ps.    IO6-  n-  13    I41 

(=532)  3525  748>  elsw.  Gn.  1717  (P)  2741  (JE)  1  K.  1226  Est.  66  Ec.  21- 15 
317.  is  is.  47io  ob.3  Zc.  125  cf.  Gn.  821  (J)  1  S.  271.  t  aaVa  nan  Ps.  152  aSa  Ec. 
215.  The  use  of  aa^  is  so  important  in  ^  that  the  entire  usage  is  given  below : 
Jaa^  n.m.  the  inner,  middle  or  central  part :  usually  of  men  (1)  the  inner 
man  in  contrast  with  the  outer,  aaSi  nN*tf  73s6;  hands  7313  (La.  341?); 
speech  28s  7818.  (2)  the  inner  man  indef.  the  soul,  comprehending  mind, 
affections  and  will ;  or  in  connection  with  certain  vbs.  having  more  specif, 
reference  to  some  one  of  them  629  7326  8611  13923;  asS  noa  8612  in1  I  S.  73 
I220.24  j  k.  148  2  K.  :o31  2  Ch.  1515  229  3121  Je.  2913  Jo.  212  j  abbr.  from  phr. 
tsterSaai  VSaa  characteristic  of  D.  '?a  Ps.  84°  (?);  'S  D}?  777  (rd.  c.  mr\  as 
<S)  ;  'Va  205  1  S.  1314  147.  (3)  specif,  ref.  to  mind  (characteristic  of  aa?)  ; 
(a)  knowledge:  ncan  'h  9012  (cf.  Jb.  94).  (^)  thinking,  reflection:  737 
(777  supra  <?).  (4)  specif,  ref.  to  moral  character  (charact.  of  337)  : 
'S  ntf.  H97(?)  Dt.  95  1  Ch.  2917,  cf.  2  Ch.  2934  1  K.  36  2  K.  io15;  Vdfi  Ps.  7872 
ioi2  Gn.  205-6  (E)  1  K.  94  ;  'S  -ia  Ps.  24*,  cf.  "S  na  731;  as  seat  of  erring 
9510 ;  as  froward  ioi4  ;  as  seat  of  pride  ioi5;  'V  ntppn  95s.  (5)  =  the  man 
himself  (mng.  charact.  of  vdi);  so  here  (^r5)  and  in  all  uses  of  phrases  with 
33S  given  above,  including  152;  also  DaaaS  >rv  let  your  heart  (you  yourselves) 
live  (late)  2227  69s3,  cf.  119175.  (6)  specif,  as  seat  of  the  appetites  (for  which 
usually  tfflj)  10415;  'S  TJp  slay  the  heart  (with  food)  10415  (Ju.  I98(?)). 
(7)  specif,  z.%  seat  of  the  emotions  and  passions  (for  which  usually  trsj);  of 
trouble  133  2517  7321  10916.  (8)  seat  of  courage  (for  which  usually  Dn)  3125, 
elsw.  only  Dn.  n25.  —  Daa3#D~Sj?]  preg.  lying  upon  your  bed,  %  api^p  n.m. 
45  36s  414  1495.  —  rani]  t  conj.,  Qal  imv.  2  p. ;  %  DD1  vb.  (1)  be  silent,  still  .fi 
3013  3515  (prob.) ;  (2)  be  still  =  perish  3118  ;  c.  S  resigned  to  377  62°  (  ?) .  Poal 
A?  quieted,  composed 1312.  —  6.  <rj3|  maj]  Qal  imv.  2  pi.  The  subj.  cannot 
be  a»N  >ja,  but  their  antithesis.  That  is  elsewhere  DnN  ^3,  v.3.  It  was 
omitted  by  prosaic  copyist  in  text,  making  measure  at  fault.  %  nar  vb.  slaughter 
sacrifice,  espec.  for  communion  meals  ;  c.  ace.  of  the  kind  of  sacrifice  <fi  27s 
5014-23  1072'2  11617,  c.  a,  54s ;  all  made  to  God,  but  of  sons  and  daughters 
offered  to  idols  10637  (Qal)  88  (Piel,  as  usual  of  such  sacrifices).  %  rOT  n.m.  sac- 
rifice, esp.  of  the  class,  peace  offerings  (a)  for  communion  meals  ||  nSip,  nruD 
407  5118 ;  (b)  covenant  505,  cf.  v.8  ;  (c)  mtn  (vna?  thank  offerings  10722  11617  ; 
(d)  njjnn  ••nar  for  festivals  27s;  (e)  phrs.  cnSs  ''nar  5119;  pn|  *ria?  right, 
normal  sacrifices  here  as  Dt.  3319  Ps.  5121;  (/)  heathen  sacrifices  10628. — 
fnvr  ?k  tfwai]  Qal  imv.  2  p.  phr.  2  K.  1822  (=  Is.  367)  Pss.  /  317  564  862 
Pr.  35  to  God ;  to  persons  Ju.  2036  ;  things  Je.  74  ;  disting.  from  a  naa,  v.  Ps. 
911;  hy  nsa  rely  upon,  v.  J/15.  This  line  is  also  defective.  Gr.  attaches  D^an 
in  sense  of  nobles  ;  but  these  were  the  B»H  i}2,  v.3a,  and  that  mng.  of  Don  is 
rare  and  very  late.     We  might,  however,  take  it  in  the  usual  sense  of  the 


36  PSALMS 

many,  the  common  multitude  ||  d^n  \n.  The  displacement  was  due  to  the 
influence  of  32  upon  copyist.  —  7.  D»"\DK]  ptc.  pi.  verbal  force  as  yi.  —  WK"V  ""d] 
Makkeph  should  be  stricken  out ;  for  there  are  two  tones,  not  one,  if  D>ai 
goes  with  previous  line.  The  ^  might  be  question :  Who  can  or  will  shew 
us?  expressing  discontent  and  despair;  but  better  as  wish,  GesJ151*1). 
%  3T3  n.m.  (i)  welfare,  happiness,  obj.  nsn  4I  3413  Ec.  224  313  Jb.  f  (cf.  Je. 
29s2),  ppa  Ps.  1229,  cf.  3411  8412  8513,  torn  ana  23s,  aioa  in  prosperity  2513, 
a^BD  afar  from  happiness  39s;  (2)  ^tW  things,  sg.  coll.  214,  obj.  j?afc>  10428, 
cf.  1035,  n?d  1079;  (3)  good,  benefit,  11966.122.  ^  moral  good  in  antith.  to 
P  3415  3727  525  Dt.  30l&  Is.  520  Am.  514- 15,  31a  rwy  Ps.  h1-3  (  =  53a-*)  37s-27 
Ec.  312  (?)  720,  3W  l"*"1  pursue  good  Ps.  3821.  —  npl]  a.X.  Qal  imv.  cohort.; 
incorrect  for  n^3  -y/DDj  denom.  Di  banner,  standard,  and  so  wave  the  same, 
2  ewlarj/xov  iroir)<xov.  ©  ia-rj/jLeiudrj,  U  signatum  est  =  hdj  Niph.  pf.,  so 
Genebr.,  cf.  606.  DD^jnnS  Hithp.  that  it  may  be  displayed,  of  the  banner,  (g 
£5u>/ca5  o-rjfxetwo-iv.  This  suits  S7,  but  not  the  light  of  the  divine  countenance. 
Moderns  after  iirapov  Aq.,  G,  leva,  3,  &,  AE.,  De  W.,  Ges.§7G<2>°,  Ew.82276, 
K5#I.4i(iO)c  regard  it  as  error  for  xirj  jo12,  so  cod.  245  Kenn.,  nirj  cod.  30,  usu- 
ally Nr  2518,  wir  247-9  813  96s  1342.  It  refers  to  the  blessing  of  the  high 
priest,  Nu.  624-26  (source  of  P)  in  the  syn.  clause  rj'S*  V}*  nN^-p^N  vjs  su"1 
Nu.  626,  the  two  melting  together  in  the  phr.  y:o  -vx  xirj,  cf.  67s ;  the  prep. 
hy  is  a  late  inexactness  for  ss,  cf.  also  44*  8916.  J  -pn  n.m.  (1)  light  as  dif- 
fused, created  1042  ;  (2)  light  of  luminaries,  stars  1483,  cf.  1367 ;  (3)  day- 
light 4920,  cf.  13911 ;  (4)  light  of  fire  7814  ;  (5)  of  life  5614  ;  (6)  of  prosperity 
9711  1124;  (7)  of  instruction  37s  119105;  (8)  of  face  3811,  of  God's  enlightening 
face  47  444  8916,  cf.  271  3610  43s.  —  D^f  as  used  X  of  God  in  anthropomorphic 
and  theophanic  sense  (a)  His  face  in  favour  'D  nix  4?  444  8916,  'd  "nKD 
908,  'fi -vm  3117  67s  8o4-8-20  119135,  indifference  (|d)  'd  n\-iDn  io11  132 
2225  279  308  ^26  5Iu  6918  8816  I023  10429  1437,  in  hostility  c.  a  3417 
8o17;  (b)  His  presence  'D  trpa  24s  27s-8  1054,  'c  nSn  11958,  d  Dip  8916  952, 
'D  dn-is  42s,  '£>  nin  117  1715,  'd  n.~D  3121,  in  anger  2110  La.  416,  'd  •?;•  in 
judgment  Ps.  920.  —  nw]  at  close  of  line  makes  it  too  long.  It  should 
go  with  next  line  to  make  that  a  tetrameter;  so  £>,  Che.,  Du. — 
8.  nnrj]  fully  written  Qal  pf.  2  m.  y/]n},  —  nn^r]  n.f.  joy,  gladness  4s  1611 
217  3012  434  4516  5110  684  9711  ioo2  1066  137s- 6-  —  *3Sa]  short  form;  cf.  long 
form  DD33^  v.6.  The  difference  was  due  to  the  carelessness  of  a  copyist. 
The  long  form  is  unusual  in  \J/,  therefore  more  prob.  original  here.  The  2J? 
as  X  seat  of  emotions  and  passions;  of  joy  in  some  form  of  ncir  4s  169  199  3321 
1058  (=  1  Ch.  1610)  Ex.  414  (J)  Pr.  i518-3o  1722  279-  "  Ec.  21(>- 10  519  Ct.  3" 
Is.  247  Zc.  io7  (cf.  aaS  Dt.  2847  Is.  3029  Je.  1516  Ez.  36*),  fertfr  Ps.  119111,  S\> 
136,  rSy  287;  of  desire  218  374;  of  trouble  389-  n  55s;  other  emotions  2215 
273  394  4°18  618  10712  10922  1434;  of  courage  2714  76s  11982.  —  n;'r]  pregn. 
=  ~\vx  npn  nnD2>D  3W;  <!£,  5  add  i\aiov  =  tn.TTO.    This  makes  line  too  long, 

and  is  gloss  to  make  statement  of  harvest  more  complete,  as  Ho.  224  D_ 

sf.  indef.,  ace.  to  Ew.,  Ol.,  Ba.,  as  proverbial  comparison  of  the  Psalmist's 
personal  joy  in  God  with  the  harvest  joy  of  others,  cf.  Is.  92.    Moll.,  Pe.,  think 


PSALM  V.  37 

of  the  prosperous  harvest  of  the  enemy  as  contrasted  with  the  joy  in  God  of 
the  Psalmist.  It  is  better  to  think  of  the  former  prosperity  in  harvest,  and 
that  which  they  have  been  urged  to  pray  for  =  310  v.7a.  — 9.  B^8T3]  emph. 
suggested  by  oV?is>  "|S  D£"  Nu.  623,  the  other  parts  of  formula  used  v.76  (v.  28s). 
J  hit]  adv.  together:  (1)  of  community  of  action  34*  5515  7110  S^(?)  10228; 
of  parts  of  building  1223;  (2)  at  once,  at  one  and  the  same  time,  joining  both 
vbs.  in  action  of  same  persons,  only  here  49  in  this  sense,  elsewhere  (3)  emph. 
all  together  143  (=  53*)  1910  3526  37s8  48s.  —  nasp^]  Qal  impf.  1  p.  s.  cohort, 
resolution  /  will  lie  down  or  lay  me  down.  |8^Kl|  because  of  adv.  coordinating 
two  vbs.  must  be  i  coord,  and  the  form  should  be  mtr>N,  as  36.  Coordination 
may  be  expressed  by  repeating  the  subj.  in  English.  —  ^n^]  emph.  pr.  2  m. 
referring  to  mm  v.8"  <76),  therefore  mm,  unnecessary  in  this  line  and  making  it 
too  long,  is  a  gloss.  —  "naV]  adv.  apart,  in  solitariness,  Nu.  23s  Mi.  714  (both 
with  pi?),  here  emphasized  by  rwg^  in  security  n.m.  with  S  prep.,  with  2th 
not  elsw.  x/s,  but  Lv.  2518- 19  266  Ju.  187  1  K.  55  Je.  32s"  4931  Zp.  215,  c.  33W 
Pr.  3^  Is.  478  Ez.  2826  3425-  28  38s-  n- 14  39s-  *  Zc.  1411  Dt.  3312  Ps.  169  Je.  23s 
3316;  S  omitted  with  aan  Dt.  1210  1  S.  1211  with  p*  Dt.  3328  Pr.  I33.  This 
passage  is  prob.  based  on  Dt.  3328,  espec.  as  there  it  is  in  a  land  anmm  \:n  as 
v.8 "^S^fl]   Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  sf.  I  s.  make  to  dwell  as  in  Je.  3237, 


PSALM   V.,    5  str.  45. 

Ps.  5  is  a  prayer  composed  for  public  worship.  The  choir,  at 
morning  sacrifice,  prays  Yahweh  to  hearken  to  the  cry  for  help 
(v.2-4)  ;  for  evil  and  wickedness  of  speech  and  action  have  no  place 
in  His  presence  and  are  abhorrent  to  Him  (v.5"7).  Standing  in 
the  court  and  worshipping  towards  the  temple,  they  pray  for  guid- 
ance (v.8-9) ;  because  the  adversaries  have  abundant  wickedness 
in  mind,  speech,  and  act,  they  plead  that  God  would  thrust 
them  forth  from  His  people  (v.10-11)  ;  and  they  intercede  for  bless- 
ing upon  all  who  seek  refuge  in  Him  (v.12-13) . 

C\    GIVE  ear  to  my  words,  Yahweh  ;  consider  my  murmuring; 

0  hearken  to  the  voice  of  my  crying  for  help,  my  King,  and  my  God; 
For  unto  Thee  I  pray  in  the  morning,  Thou  hearest  my  voice ; 

In  the  morning  I  set  in  order  (my  prayer)  for  Thee  and  I  keep  watch  (for  Thee). 
ThOR  Thou  art  not  a  God  taking  delight  in  wickedness,  evil  cannot  be  Thy  guest ; 

Boasters  cannot  take  their  stand  before  Thine  eyes ; 

Thou  dost  hate  all  workers  of  trouble,  speakers  of  a  lie ; 

Men  of  blood  and  deceit  Thou  abhorrest,  Yahweh. 
"RUT  as  for  me  through  the  abundance  of  Thy  kindness  I  enter  Thy  house ; 

1  worship  with  the  reverence  that  is  due  Thee,  towards  Thy  holy  temple. 
Yahweh  lead  me  in  Thy  righteousness  because  of  those  lying  in  wait  for  me; 
Even  before  me  Thy  way :  (before  Thee  are  my  ways). 


38  PSALMS 

J70R  there  is  no  right  in  their  mouth,  in  their  heart  is  ruin ; 

An  open  grave  is  their  throat,  with  their  tongue  they  flatter. 

Declare  them  guilty,  O  (my)  God,  let  them  fall  from  their  plans : 

In  the  abundance  of  their  wickedness  thrust  them  out,  for  they  rebelled  against 
Thee. 
gUT  let  all  that  seek  refuge  in  Thee,  rejoice,  forever  shout  for  joy; 

And  let  them  exult  in  Thee,  all  that  love  Thy  name ; 

For  Thou  on  Thy  part  blessest  the  righteous,  Yahweh, 

And  Thou  coverest  them  over  with  a  great  shield,  with  favour  crownest  them. 

Ps.  5  was  in  Q  as  the  2d  morning  prayer,  then  in  fH  and  also  in  Qlft 
as  its  ist  morning  prayer  (v.  Intr.  §  27.  31.  33).  There  seems  to  be  a  designed 
antithesis  between  the  assignment  of  Ps.  4,  an  evening  prayer  rn^jjj  with 
stringed  instruments,  and  Ps.  5  a  morning  prayer  m^run  ^n  for  flute  playing 
(v.  Intr.  §  39),  probably  because  the  former  was  regarded  as  more  suited 
to  evening  prayer,  the  preparation  for  sleep;  and  the  latter  to  morning 
prayer,  the  preparation  for  work.  The  antith.  between  the  righteous  and 
the  wicked  differs  much  from  that  of  Ps.  1  and  implies  a  much  earlier  date. 
The  Ps.  lacks  the  personal  experience  of  Pss.  3-4,  and  is  throughout  that  of 
the  congregation  of  righteous  worshippers.  The  wicked  are  wicked  men  in 
Israel  itself.  They  are  chiefly  wicked  in  tongue :  expressions  are  heaped  up 
for  this,  boasters,  v.6,  speakers  of  a  lie,  men  of  deceits?,  no  right  in  their  mouth, 
an  open  grave  their  throat,  with  their  tongue  they  flatter,  v.10.  Such  do  not 
appear  in  Preex.  or  Exil.  Literature  ;  but  in  the  peaceful  times  of  Persian  and 
Greek  dominion.  They  are  also  men,  who  in  their  mind  plot  ruin,  v.10,  and 
have  plans  against  the  righteous,  v.11,  and  they  are  also  workers  of  trouble,  v.6, 
men  of  blood,  v.7;  they  rebel  against  Yahweh,  v.11.  The  righteous  on  the  other 
hand  are  those  who  observe  morning  prayer  and  sacrifice  in  the  courts  of  the 
temple,  v.4'8,  from  which  evil  is  excluded  from  being  a  guest,  v.5;  they  seek 
refuge  in  Yahweh  and  love  His  name,  v.12.  The  author  may  have  been  one 
of  the  Levitical  singers  of  the  2d  temple.  If  so,  his  Ps.  must  have  been  com- 
posed earlier  than  those  Levitical  Pss.  which  appear  in  Jet  and  21.  It  must 
have  been  written  in  times  of  external  peace  and  internal  strife  ;  after  the 
second  temple  had  been  long  built;  and  sacrifices  were  habitual  in  its  courts  — 
thus  in  the  middle  Persian  period. 

Str.  I.  2.  The  choir,  standing  in  the  court  of  the  temple,  v.8, 
prays  :  O  give  ear  to  my  words,  Yahweh~\,  those  of  this  Ps.,  which 
has  as  its  complement,  consider  my  murmuring~\,  the  faint  utterance 
which  accompanies  the  words,  and  also  has  its  petition.  This 
makes  better  parall.  than  EV*  "  meditation."  — 3.  The  syn.  clause 
is  O  hearken  to  the  voice  of  my  crying  for  help~\.  The  righteous 
need  help  as  the  next  Str.  shows ;  and  their  words  are  a  cry,  aloud 
with  the  voice  to  Yahweh  for  it.     The  complement  of  1.  2  is  syn. 


PSALM  V.  39 

with  Yahweh,  who  is  here  in  the  plea,  my  King  and  my  God],  in 
personal  special  relations  to  the  righteous  petitioners,  and  in  the 
double  relation  as  King  of  the  kingdom  of  Israel,  and  God  of  His 
people.  —  4.  The  reason  for  hearing  is  given  in  the  syn.  couplet, 
which  is  also  syn.  to  the  previous  couplet.  For  unto  Thee  I  pray 
in  the  morning'],  at  the  appointed  hour  of  sacrifice,  when  Yahweh 
was  accustomed  to  hear  the  voice  of  His  worshippers  in  the  litur- 
gical morning  prayer  at  the  morning  sacrifice.  —  /  set  in  order] 
arrange,  supplying  "  my  prayer "  EV8-  JPSV,  "  my  case,"  Dr., 
"  cause,"  Kirk,  possibly  of  the  parts  of  prayer  with  an  allusion  to 
the  parts  of  the  sacrifice.  —  and  I  keep  watch],  for  God's  manifes- 
tation of  His  acceptance  of  the  prayer  as  it  ascends  to  Him,  with 
the  flame  of  the  sacrifice  of  the  altar. 

Str.  II.  5-7.  The  reason  for  the  prayer  for  help  is  given  in 
four  syn.  lines.  Those  who  occasion  the  cry  for  help  are  de- 
scribed as  having  wickedness  and  its  complement  evil,  syn.  with 
which  are  boasters  of  the  evil  which  they  plan  and  do,  workers  of 
trouble,  with  its  complement,  speakers  of  a  lie  ;  and  men  of  blood 
and  deceit.  Wickedness  and  evil  of  speech  are  chiefly  emphasized 
in  these  boasters,  characteristics  of  wickedness  in  postex.  Israel ; 
but  wickedness  of  violent  action  is  also  involved  in  men  of  blood 
and  workers  of  trouble.  God's  attitude  towards  these  men  is  graph- 
ically stated  in  the  syn.  clauses  :  Thou  art  not  a  God  taking  delight 
in],  but  the  very  reverse,  as  is  brought  out  in  the  complementary 
statement,  evil  cannot  be  Thy  guest],  be  welcome  in  the  house,  in 
the  courts  of  Yahweh,  among  His  worshippers  j  ||  stand  before 
Thine  eyes],  in  the  choir  of  worshippers,  standing  before  the 
temple  building;  followed  by  the  positive  statement,  Thou  dost 
hate ;  and  the  climax,  abhor.  This  attitude  of  God  towards  those 
against  whom  the  choir  of  Israel  cries  for  help,  gives  strong  reason 
for  the  assurance  that  He  will  give  that  help. 

Str.  III.  8.  The  choir  returns  to  the  direct  petition  of  the  first 
Str. ;  stating  in  a  syn.  couplet,  parall.  to  the  second  couplet  of  the 
first  Str.,  the  fact :  I  enter  Thy  house  ||  I  worship  towards  Thy  holy 
temple],  indicating  with  sufficient  clearness  that  the  choir  is  in 
the  precincts  of  the  temple,  and  prostrating  themselves  in  the 
court,  looking  towards  the  temple,  the  throne  room  of  Yahweh's 
abode.     These  clauses  are  qualified  with  the  recognition  of  the 


40  PSALMS 

abundance  of  kindness  of  Yahweh  which  permitted  this  entrance, 
and  a  devout  statement  of  the  reverence  with  which  the  worship 
was  accompanied. — 9.  The  second  couplet  is  parallel  with  the 
first  couplet  of  Str.  I.,  only  the  petition,  "  give  ear,  consider, 
hearken,"  advances  to,  lead  me,  with  its  syn.,  even  before  me,  and 
the  sphere  of  it,  Thy  righteousness  ||  Thy  way.  Guidance  in  life  is 
needed  because  of  those  lying  in  wait,  the  insidious  foes  described 
above  in  the  previous  Str.  and  again  in  the  following.  The  last 
clause  omitted  by  MT.,  but  suggested  by  Vrss.,  is  the  climax,  be- 
fore Thee  are  my  ways']  complementary  of,  Even  before  me  77iy 
way,]  even  them,  make  them  Thy  way.] 

Str.  IV.  10-11  is  syn.  with  the  second  Str.  and  is  a  stronger 
representation  of  the  attitude  of  God  towards  the  wicked.  There 
are  two  couplets,  making  four  syn.  lines.  The  emphasis  upon 
wickedness  of  speech  is  still  stronger ;  There  is  no  right  in  their 
mouth],  with  its  complement  in  their  heart],  that  is  in  their 
mind,  —  ruin],  the  plan  in  their  mind  is  to  engulf  the  righteous 
in  ruins ;  cf.  5  24  and  so  ||  an  open  grave  is  their  throat,  with  its 
complement,  with  their  tongue  they  flatter.  There  is  yet  in  the 
last  line  wickedness  of  action,  in  the  abundance  of  their  wicked- 
ness, with  its  complement,  for  they  rebelled  against  Thee.  The 
attitude  of  God  towards  them  passes  over,  from  their  exclusion 
from  the  temple  worship,  God's  hatred  and  abhorrence  of  them, 
in  Str.  II.,  to  the  stronger  and  more  aggressive  ;  declare  them 
guilt}',  with  its  complement,  let  them  fall  from  their  plans],  fail  in 
them,  and  the  climax,  thrust  them  out. 

Str.  V.  12-13  is  a  final  intercession  which  is  parall.  with 
Str.  I.  and  III.;  but  needs  no  subsequent  Str.  parall.  with  II. 
and  IV. ;  for  the  wicked  have  been  left  behind,  thrust  out  from 
the  community,  as  well  as  excluded  from  the  temple.  The  choir 
accordingly  rises,  from  petition  for  help,  to  intercession  for  the 
righteous.  This  is  in  two  couplets,  which  again  are  syn.  through- 
out. They  are  described  as  those  that  seek  refuge  in  Thee],  in 
the  temple  worship  ||  ;  love  Thy  name],  the  holy  name  of  Yahweh, 
as  connected  with  His  holy  temple.  They  are  finally  designated 
as  the  righteous.  These,  in  the  syn.  clauses ;  rejoice,  with  its 
complement,  forever  shout  for  joy ;  ||  exult  in  Thee;  three  terms 
for  the  liturgy  of  temple  worship.     The  climax  is  reached  in  the 

(iniusr) 


PSALM  V.  41 

more  comprehensive  blessest,  and  its  specific  double  simile  of 
tender  care  and  loving  attention  ;  coverest  them  over  with  a  great 
shield\  so  guarding  from  all  evil  and  adversaries ;  and  its  com- 
plement, with  favour  crownest  them~],  as  favoured  guests  rejoicing 
at  a  feast  in  their  honour,  cf.  23s,  1034. 

2.  ,HO*$]  pi.  sf.  1.  p.  emph.  \  nps  n.m.  (1)  utterance,  word  194,  of  men 
esp.  in  prayer  52  1416.  ^  nn«  Dt.  zzl  Ps.  1915  54*  781  1384,  fig.  day  to  day  193; 
of  God,  ^n  ncs  10711.  (2)  promise  of  God  77s,  command  6812.  —  nrrxn] 
Hiph.  imv.  cohort.  —  tV  [?!*<]  denom.  fT«  n.f.  ear,  only  Hiph.  (1)  give  ear 
to,  of  God's  listening  to  prayer,  c.  ace.  rei  52  171  55^  866  1407  1411,  c.  Sx 
rei  3913  1431,  c.  S  rei  54*;  bn  pers.  77s,  Dt.  I45,  abs.  Pss.  802  84°.  (2)  per- 
ceive by  ear,  hear,  abs.  13517,  listen  to;  of  men,  abs.  49s,  c.  ty  rei  781. — 
hpd]  Qal  imv.  cohort,  pa  observe,  mark,  give  heed  to,  c.  ace.  as  Dt.  327  Pss. 
5022  947- 8,  but  only  here  in  connection  with  prayer.  —  f  \rjn]  j2  ^9*  my 
musing,  my  murmuring,  faint  utterance,  rather  than  meditation  of  EV8. 
(3  icpavyrjs  /xov,  U  clamorem  meum.  The  former  is  too  weak,  the  latter  too 
strong.  —  3.  na^n]  Hiph.  imv.  cohort.  %  [atfp]  Hiph.  hearken,  Sip1?  only 
here ;  but  c.  S  pers.  55s,  c.  h>p2  6619  866,  c.  Sn  1427,  c.  ace.  171  612,  abs.  with 
qjTN  io17,  dub.  (jtn  gloss),  cf.  1302.  —  ^c;]  Piel  inf.  cstr.  BDB.,  01s.§182<i,  so 
Du.  for  7-Vty.  fV  O^]  only  Piel  cry  for  help,  abs.  53  1842  7212  119147  Jb. 
197  2412  2912  3028  359  3613  Is.  5s9  La.  f,  Jon.  23  Hb.  i2,  so  prob.  882,  c.  h* 
pers.  Pss.  187  2225  282(=  3123)  303  8814  Jb.  3020  3841.  Ba.  regards  it  as  n., 
for  usual  vyntf  i8T,  cf.  Ko.11-  L  p-  «>.  —  %  »nSin  ^0]  =  84*,  D'n*?i«  ^D  44s 
(@  inhw).  ^9  J  God  as  King  of  Israel,  Dt  33s  Pss.  io16  2910  48s  68s5  7412 
1451  1492,  -naan  -jSd  247-  8-  9- 10- 10,  universal  king  47s- 7- 8  95s  98s  994  Je.  io7  10. 
—  t^Sn-is  emph.  beginning  a  new  line.  —  ^dpn]  Hiph.  impf.  I  sg.  present. 
$  SSonn  c.  Sn  pray  unto,  elsw.  32s,  c.  "»M  intercede  for  7215. — 4.  nw]  is 
attached  by  <&  Du.  to  previous  clause,  and  properly,  if  original,  but  it  is  a 
gloss  making  line  too  long. — typ  POtfn  npaj  belongs  with  previous  clause  to 
complete  pentameter.  1£3  ace.  time  in  the  morning,  the  hour  of  prayer,  so 
5917  8814  92s,  the  three  hours  of  prayer  5518.  It  belongs  with  ^enx  and  not 
with  PD8T.  —  "P?j*]  shortened  form  due  to  Makkeph,  which,  however,  is  an 
erroneous  combination.  Separate  words  are  needed  for  measure.  \  ~\yj 
(1)  arrange,  used  Gn.  229  (E)  for  arranging  wood  of  sacrifice,  Ex.  404- 23, 
(P)  of  shew  bread,  so  here  in  fig.  sense  as  most,  or  as  Jb.  3214  33s  3719 
arrange,  set  forth,  words  in  order;  elsw.  arrange  lamp  Ps.  13217,  table  23s  7810, 
set  forth  in  order  thoughts  406,  a  case  5021.  (2)  c.  S  resemble  897  (||  hdi). — 
r;S]  should  be  repeated  with  hsxn  for  the  completion  of  the  line.  This  is 
necess.  to  get  two  tones  after  caesura,  and  gives  better  euphony.  Moreover, 
this  prep,  is  required  by  the  vb.  —  !"»?*«]  Piel  impf.  1  p.  \  nas  Qal  watch, 
c.  b  3732,  c.  3  667.  Piel  c.  S*t  La.  417,  c.  a  Mi.  77,  so  c.  )  Ps.  jl.  —  5.  This  v.  Is 
too  long,  a  Makkeph  should  combine  Vn'nS,  and  if  original  »3  also,  npN  if 
original,  is  out  of  place  separated  from  so.     It  is  doubtless  a  prosaic  gloss.  — 


42  PSALMS 

Sn]  n.m.  archaic  name  of  God  as  the  Strong  one  (for  use  in  \p  v.  Intr.  §  36). — 
X  yon]  vb.  adj.  cstr.  ace.  of  God  only  here,  but  of  man  3413  3527,  pi.  cstr.  before 
names  3527  4015  =  703  with  sf.  1 1 i2.  The  vb.  itself  J  used  of  God,  c.  with  2  pers. 
1820  22J  4112,  rei.  14710,  c  ace.  rei.  3728  407  51s- 18-  21  1158  1356,  all  in  mng. 
delight  in, have  pleasure  in.  For  syn.  pm  v.  v.18.  —  \  >?cn]  n.m.  wickedness  ( 1)  in 
violence  and  crime  1414  Pr.  123;  (2)  of  enemies  Ps.  1258  (but  <S  SS.  >"tp) ; 
(3)  in  ethical  sense  j5  io15  45s  8411  (?),  cf.  Pr.  87  Jb.  34s- 10  358  Ec.  72°T88. 
(For  pah  v.  Ps.  i1.) — t^j  ]  Qal  impf.  3  sg.  sf.  2  sg.  defective  for  :pw  poten- 
tial mood,  Ges.§ 107  (®>,  Dr.§37.  J  "WJ  Qal  (1)  sojourn  in  land,  c.  3  loci 
105 12-23,  of  Israel  in  Egypt  and  patriarchs  in  Canaan,  cf.  Gn.  263(J);  (2)  fig. 
be  a  guest  of  Yahweh,  c.  3  loci,  in  Flis  temple  Pss.  151  616,  c.  ace.  pers.  fig.  j5, 
cf.  1205.  JlJ  n.m.  only  in  sense  of  sojourner,  c  3  loci  11919,  c.  oy  pers.  3913: 
abs.  ||  widow  and  orphan  94°  1469.  —  yn]  either  adj.  evil  man  @,  3,  Hu.,  De., 
Ki.,  al.  as  io15  ||  D'9w  v.6;  or  n.m.  evil  ||  ?#?,  EV8.,  Dr.  most, in  accord  with  com- 
plementary part  of  a  pentameter.  —  J  jn]  adj. :  (1)  bad,  disagreeable,  malignant 
I4410  (sword)  ;  fierce  7849  (messenger  of  God).  (2)  unpleasant  1127  Je. 
4923«  (3)  ^'A  wicked  ethically,  of  pers.  37*1  ms  Ps.  1402,  pn  «*7  w««  /c^5  Jb. 
2i80  Pr.  II21  1213,  thing  >iy2  pn  WjJ  Ps.  516  phr.  of  D.  Dt.  425-f  ,c.  60  t.;  of 
deeds  Pss.  5516  64s  1414.  $  >?  n.m.:  (1)  evil  distress,  adversity  23*;  t  jn  <D* 
49°  9413,  cf.  Am.  63 ;  jna  in  adversity  Ps.  io6,  cf.  1217  14012.  (2)  evil,  injury, 
wrong  75  416  547  73s  10920;  >ns  for  harm  56s  Je.  7°  257  Is.  597.  (3)  evil,  in 
ethical  sense,  Pss.  710  3414- n  365  52s  9710  1014  119101,  prob.  also  j5  (others 
adj.  evil  man)  ;  jng  ^d  3416  3727  Is.  59I5  Pr.  37  13W  14W  i66- 17  Jb.  i*-8  23  2^, 
cf.  njn  Ps.  2112.  —  6.  taxing]  Hithp.  impf.  3  pi.  potential  v.  22. —  oMvi]  ptc.pl. 
X  [sL,n]  VD«  Qa^  oe  boastful  75s,  elsw.  only  ptc.  boasters  j6  73s  75s;  Piel  same 
mng.,  c.  S?  io3  (  ?)  and  in  good  sense,  c.  2  449  56s-  n  ;  Hithp.  make  one's  boast 
c.  3  in  bad  sense  497  523  97s  in  good  sense  34s  1058,  abs.  6312  C411  1065.  v.  Intr. 
§  35  for  the  use  of  vb.  in  the  sense  of  praise.  —  \  jpjpg  "UjlS]  before  Thine  eyes, 
locally,  in  temple  worship  ;  elsw.  ideally  of  God  1825,  of  man  263  362  1013. — 
rNr-]  Qal  pf.  2  sg.  emph.  present  y/  njc  hate,  cf.  1 15  where  alone,  elsw.  in  ^  God 
hates  evil.  But  the  idea  is  common  in  Prophets.  The  vb.  is  frequently  used 
of  righteous  men  hating  evil  265  317  +  iot.f.  —  f  H*  'J?^"^;]  a^  workers  of 
trouble,  Qal  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  nominal  force  phr.  69  I44(=  535  without  sd)  92s  944 
1018  (without  Sa)  283  3613  598  64s  9416  1256  I4I4-  9,  elsw.  Ho.  68  Is.  312  Jb.  318 
348-22  Pr.  io29  2116.  Text  is  wrongly  divided  here,  giving  only  first  part  of 
pentameter.  The  second  or  complementary  part  is  v.7a.  an  nan.  The  separa- 
tion, or  else  prosaic  view  of  a  copyist,  occasioned  the  insertion  of  the  vb. 
laxn,  which  is  inappropriate  between  Njir  and  a?n. — 7.  J  an  nai]  =  584  Qal 

ptc.  pi.  V["a"']  sPeak  Qal  only  inf-  and  Ptc-  cf-  antitn-  PDN  'n  l52>  elsw-  2g3 
3119  516  6312  1017  io92);  v.  £  for  an.  —  f  cct  C"n]  n.  of  relation  coll.,  cf.  2  S. 
i67-8,  for  usual  f  3^7  'ins  Mow  ^"zV/y  of  bloodshed  Pss.  269  55"  593  13919  Pr. 
2910,  cf.  Pss.  913  5 116.  There  should  be  no  Makkeph  after  r<N,  and  possibly 
we  should  rd.  >vf)H  as  usual. —  J  npnw]  is  also  dependent  on  r"N,  cf.  Pss.  431 
5524.  Other  uses  of  n?n?  deceit  ii*  171  24*  3414  3520  36*  3&18  5°19  52<i  5512 
1092.  —  aym]    Piel  impf.   3  sg.  nw  subj.  is  an  unnatural  change  of  tense 


PSALM  V.  43 

though  in  ffy,  <3.  But  3  abominaberis  has  preserved  the  original  a?nfi;  the 
weak  n  having  been  omitted  in  other  texts  by  txt.  err.  on  acct.  of  the  follow- 
ing P,  which  would  then  very  easily  be  interp.  as  3  pers.  \  [V:i>r]  not  m 
Qal,  but  Piel  :  abhor  (1)  in  ritual  sense,  of  God,  Israel  10640  ;  (2)  in  ethical 
sense,  of  God  5~,  man  lie;163;  (3)  in  physical  sense  10718.  Hiph.  in  ethical 
sense  14*  =  532  make  abowinab/e,  catise  their  evil  deeds  to  be  abhorred.  —  8.  ijni  ] 
emph.  antith.  2  pers.  v.5.  —  f  -^Dn  a**]  abundance  of  kindness  as  6914  1067  (<5§,3J, 
Aq.  %  to  be  preferred  to  |$  -p-tDn)  Ne.  1322,  HDn  31  10645  (?)  La.  33'2,  cf. 
f-iDn  an  865*15  1038  based  on  Ec.  34s  Nu.  1418  (J.)  and  later  Ne.  917  Jo.  213 
Jon.  42.  —  inoj  ace.  loci  after  nun  Qal  impf.  I  p.  sg.  present,  /  enter  Thy 
house  for  ordinary  worship,  so  6613,  cf.  entrance  of  processions  42s  5515  1221, 
in  other  phr.  see  23s.  Ni3  c.  ace.  loci  seldom  in  \p,  elsw.  713  10523,  more 
common  with  a  or  ^n  (26^. —  ninnipNt]  Hithp.  impf.  I  p.  \  y^nnt?)  only 
Hithp.  (1)  do  homage  to  a  king  c.  S  4512  7211 ;  (2)  {a)  bow  down  in  worship 
of  God  c.  \3D7  2228-30  869,  c.  *?n,  looking  towards  s8  l3%2>  c-  *>  996,  9  x327; 

(b)  in  the  more  general  sense  of  worship,  abs.  95s,  c.  S  292  664  96°  977; 

(c)  idolatrous  worship,  c.  s  8110  10619.  —  riBhj}  ^n]  refers  to  the  hall  of  the 
temple  into  which  priests  only  were  admitted  to  worship  with  the  holy  incense, 
as  the  place  unto  which  worship  was  directed,  j8  =  1382  Jon.  25- 8  without 
prep.;  as  place  defiled  by  enemy  Ps.  791.  tSdti  uhp  as  source  of  blessing  65s. 
i«hp  Sdti  is  used  n4  Mi.  I2  Hb.  220  in  more  general  sense  for  the  heavenly 
temple  in  which  God  resides.  Other  uses  of  J  ^n  without  Bhp  are  (1)  palace 
of  king  Ps.  4510,  fig.  of  ivory  boxes  45s,  of  well-shaped  daughters  14412;  (2)  of 
the  hall  of  the  temple  274  4810,  of  the  heavenly  temple  1S7  29s  6880.  —  rp^] 
obj.  sf.  Ges.§135<4>  reverence  due  Thee,  cf.  3412  9011  in10  11938,  v.  2^. — 
9.  ^nj]  Qal  imv.  sf.  I  p.  sq.  \  nru  Qa^  lead  sq.  ace.  usually,  God  subj.  Ex.  1518 
Ps.  7721,  fig.  j9  2711,  c.  a  13924,  man  subj.  c.  "9  6on=:  10811,  Hiph.  lead,  guide 
7814- 53- 72  10730,  esp.  in  path  of  blessing  23s  314  613  67s,  73s4,  cf.  43s  13910  14310. 
%  npix  n.f.  righteousness :  (1)  in  government  of  king  721-  3,  of  God,  as  attri- 
bute 335  367  7 119  994  Je.  923  ;  (2)  righteousness,  as  ethically  right  Ps.  io63-  31, 
cf.  Gn.  156  ( JE) ;  (3)  as  vindicated,  justification,  salvation  (a)  of  God  || 
nana  246,  iDn  3611  10317.  Tta  He  guides,  delivers,  exalts  His  people  j9  312  712 
8917  11940  I431,  u,  cf.  6928  (denied  to  wicked).     His  saving  righteousness  2232 

40"  5  1 16  7ll5-  16.24  9g2  I457>    3  y-p  ggl8f  -0   nnDJ;  m3  II23.  9}  cf>  „9142  .    (4)  pl# 

the  righteous  acts  (a)  of  God  in  vindication  of  right  1036  ;  (b)  of  man's  moral 
conduct  n7  (si  vera)  Is.  64s  Je.  5110.  —  IE?1?]  prep,  because  of,  referring  to 
enemies,  Dnw/2711,  Dmw  83,  ao^  6019.  —  "^ir]  Polel  ptc.  pi.  sf.  I  p.  sg. 
d  prefix  elided  BDB.  Ges.§ 52.  J  y/  iic;,  always  in  same  form  59  =  2711  54' 
56s  5911 ;  (3  ixdp&v  3  insidiatores,  Dr.  watchful  foes  =  more  strictly  Hers  in 
wait  for  me.  —  m\&r\~\  Kt.  tthn  Qr.  Ges.§"°(2>  Hiph.  imv.  t  y/'Vfr  Qal  be 
smooth,  straight,  right,  Piel  estee?n  right  II9128,  t  Hiph.  make  smooth,  even  only 
here,  elsw.  look  straight,  only  Pr.  425.  Vrss.  differ  (J5,  Bar.  Heb.  ivdoiribv  aov  ttjv 
686v  fj.ov,  some  codd.  <&  iv&iribv  \wv,  few  6S6v  <rov,  Aq.  2,  3,  Sb,  %  agree  with  |§. 
It  is  prob.  as  the  line  is  defective,  that  the  difference  represents  two  parts  of 
an  original  complete  line  >am  yish  p"n  *jfiS  ltf">n.     This  gives  us  rhyme  in 


44  PSALMS 

-kd  and  4.  — 10.  we]  txt.  err.  for  *D>fi  1710  as  <S,  3;  sg.  improb.  in  the  midst  of 
pis.  —  '">^3JJ  Niph.  ptc.  fem.  y/  pa  v.  710  what  is  right,  as  Jb.  427-  8  <5  dXrjdeia 
3  rectum.  —  D|np]  their  inward  part  (@  tcapdla  interprets,  3  interiora  is 
literal),  as  the  seat  of  thought,  and  so  local  ace.  antith.  no  491"-  (?)  62s  64J  (?) 
9419  1031;  seat  of  aS  39*  555  10922,  of  nn  5112,  ih  anpa  36s.  —  nun]  pi.  J  mn 
n.f.  in  \f/  always  pi.  of  intensity,  ruin  into  which  one  has  fallen  and  been 
engulfed,  either  as  meditated  310  52*,  spoken  3813,  or  accomplished  5512  57-,  all 
$B;  elsw.  of  pestilence  913 and  of  wicked  throne  9420.  Ps.  52s  irin  ]fy  error  for 
"ijin  (5, 2T  and  most  moderns.  —  f  rnno  157]  There  should  be  no  Makkeph, 
phr.  elsw.  Je.  516  (of  quiver),  J  135  n.  tomb  886, 12,  cf.  4912  (Vrss.  not  f§). — 
ft'vSrn]  Hiph.  impf.  3  pi.  fuller  form.  f  y/  pSn  Qal  <k  smooth,  slippery,  of 
deceptive  words  5522.  Hiph.  flatter  with  tongue  510  Pr.  2823,  abs.  deal  smoothly, 
c.  Sk  Ps.  363.  — 11.  Dg'ftan]  a.\.  Hiph.  imv.  sf.  3  pi.  y/zvt*  Qal  (1)  commit 
an  offence,  do  a  wrong  ;  (2)  be  or  become  guilty,  not  in  i/'  ;  but  (3)  be  held  guilty, 
bear  punishment  3422-23.  Hiph.  declare  guilty  511.  <S  /c/nj'oj'  ai/rovs,  Aq.  S 
Kardicpipov  clvtovs,  3  condemna  eos.  —  d^hSn]  is  surprising  in  a  petition  of  S, 
though  sustained  by  <3,  3  al.  It  is  probable  that  the  original  was  *.tV?k.  — 
'D  isp"']  Qal  impf.  juss.  pi.  3  m.  either  (1)  fall  from,  as  (3,  3,  DeW., 
Ew.,  Hi.,  Ba.,  as  BS.  142  \f/  Solomon  416  ;  or  (2)  fall,  perish,  because  of 
by,  as  Pe.,  Che.,  Dr.,  Kirk,  Du.,  which  suits  parall.,  so  27s.  —  onvrtxpbo] 
should  have  two  accents  in  measure,  pi.  sf.  3  pi.  with  prep.  fp.  —  f  [nx^c] 
n.f.  only  pi.  counsels,  plans  $n  8l18  Mi.  618  Ho.  II6  Je.  724  Pr.  I81  22*°".— 
Dniyirc  3^d]  is  attached  by  <S  to  previous  clause,  but  that  destroys  the 
measure.  ©,  3  Kara,juxta  =  s  not  so  good  as  2  $£. —  t  J7Bta]  n.m.  trans- 
gression against  God  10717,  personified  as  evil  spirit  36s,  recognised  by  sinner 
325  5 16,  God  visits  it  89s3,  forgives  321,  removes  10312,  covers  it  over  65*, 
blots  it  out  5 13,  remembers  it  not  257,  delivers  from  it  39s;  (2)  guilt  of 
transgression  j11  1914  59*.  —  l»Drp%n]  Hiph.  imv.  with  full  sounding  sf.  3  pi. 
for  D_  above.  tVn",J  thrust  out,  banish,  here  the  wicked,  but  625  the  good 
man  from  his  position.  Hiph.  be  thrust  out  1472.  —  !ja  nO"'a]  should  have 
two  accents  for  measure,  nn  because  of  following  monosyl.  (3  adds  /ctfpie 
=  3  domine,  but  this  is  gloss  making  line  too  long.  \  mo  vb.  Qal  be  dis- 
obedient, rebellious,  c.  3  Ho.  141  and  here,  elsw.  c.  ace.  pers.,  also  words  of  God 
Ps.  10528  abs.  78s.  Hiph.  shew  disobedience,  alw.  towards  God,  abs.  io67-  48, 
c.  ace.  7817-40-56  10633  10711,  prob.  also  13920  (ace.  3,  2,  Aq.,  not  $).— 
12.  i]  adversative  to  previous  Str.  —  inDtr,J  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  juss.  nzfr  vb. 
Qal  be  glad,  rejoice  :  %  in  relation  to  God  and  sacred  things :  (a)  abs.  j12  g8  147 
(=  537)  169  348  3527  4812  67s  684  69s3  90"  96"  97*- 8  1053  10742  1 1974;  (b)  c.  3 
rei  velpers.  318  3211  3321  4017  (=  705)  6312  6411  666  857  9712  10434  11824  1492; 
in  other  relations  v.  BDB. — M  >Dyn~\  Qal  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  with  retracted  accent, 
v.  212.  —  un*]  Piel  impf.  juss.  %  P^  yb.  Qal  be  jubilant,  shout  for  joy: 
only  3527,  for  which  4017  =  705  substitute  trftf.  But  Qal  is  8  t.  in  Is.  2-  3.  Piel 
same  mng.  more  intensive  (1)  abs.  512  63s  67s  7128  9014  9612  984- 8  i329«16-16 
1495;  (2)  c.  a  of  theme  206  331  8913  92s,  c.  ace.  5116  5917  1457,  c.  S  951, 
c.  *?H  848(?).    Hiph.  (1)  same  mng.:  abs.  3211,  c.  i  Si2;   (2)  cause  to  jubilate 


PSALM  VI.  45 

659.  For  nouns  v.  if1. —  >D*Vj7  }Dni]  is  out  of  place,  destroying  the  measure 
of  this  line  and  making  the  construction  difficult.  It  is  needed  in  v.136  to 
complete  the  line  and  give  an  appropriate  vb.  to  HJ*. —  *ip~i]  Hiph.  impf 
2  p.  juss.  form  appropriate  to  its  present  context;  but  it  should  correspond  with 
ij~ia>n  v.13  if  transferred,  and  be  pointed  as  indicative.  %  -jdd  vb.  Qal  screen, 
cover,  c.  S  I408(?)  usually  c.  Sy  in  other  Lit.  Hiph.  same  c.  SjJ,  here,  h  914. — 
«*?JP]  Qal  impf.  juss.  as  syn.  verbs,  f  1^2  VD-  exult  c.  3  512  93  1  S.  21,  abs. 
Ps.:252  68*  Pr.  nio  2812  1  C.  1632  (=  hy  Ps~9612),  cf.  hy  287,  dSj?  Jb.  2018,  diff. 
forms  of  same  word,  softened  in  later  usage.  —  qp^  *3?"U«]  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  nominal 
force  jjhn.  Phr.  elsw.  6937  119132,  cf.  911  616  8317.  (3  has  irdw-es,  which 
represents  an  original  hi,  needed  for  measure.  J  Love  to  God  is  post  Deuter- 
onomic  3124  9710  1 161 14520,  to  house  26s,  to  salvation  4017  706,  to  law  1 1947  + 10t, 
Jerusalem  1 22°. — 13.  nns  "o]  causal  with  emph.  pro.  There  should  be  no 
Makkeph  :  the  two  tones  are  needed  for  measure.  <&,  3  attach  nw  to  second 
clause,  f^  to  first;  that  suits  the  measure.  —  pnx  T]!11'?]  Piel  impf.  2  ms., 
general  statement.  This  phr.  is  a.\.,  but  cf.  Ii513"»  *K*V  '2.  J  T]3  (1)  bless 
Yahweh  167  2612  342  63^  103!- 2-  2<>-  »•  »• 22  104!- 35  11518  V^1-  2  135™" 20  M52- 10, 
Dtf  '2  962  ioo4  I451-21,  Elohim  668  6827;  (2)  Piel  used  of  God  abs.  10928, 
c.  ace.  the  king  45s,  the  people  2911  67s- 7-8  10738  11512. 12.  is  I2$z>  1343  14713, 
His  inheritance  289,  house  of  Aaron  11512,  vegetation  6511,  provisions  I3215- 15, 
as  well  as  those  given  above;  (3)  used  of  men,  bless  11826  1298;  (4)  con- 
gratulation io3(?)  4919  62s,  homage  7215.  For  Qal  v.  i1.  —  nisp]  belongs  to 
W?y  "pri  v.  v.12.  \  T\vi  is  the  large  shield  ;  j:n  34,  the  smaller  one,  elsw.  35'2  914. 
—  X  T"1*^]  II  •  n?*  (0  °f tne  g°°d  will,  favour  of  God,  elsw.  30s-  8  5 120  6914  8918 
1064  Is.  49s ;  (2)  acceptance  of  persons  offering  sacrifice,  \1S*fo  Ps.  1915  as 
Je.  620  Lv.  2221  Is.  567  ;  (3)  of  God's  will  Pss.  409  10321  14310,  of  man's  desire 
I4516- 19  as  2  C.  1515.  —  M"V9j;n]  Qal  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  pi.  f  [nay]  vb.  surround, 
elsw.  only  1  S.  2326.  This  is  necessary  according  to  arrangement  of  |^,  but  if 
not  connected  with  rnx  it  is  better  to  take  it  as  %  [ntoy]  vb.  crown  Pss.  86  65 12 
1034,  denom.  of  %  n^.  crown  214,  and  point  as  Piel  •unt^n.    So  @,  3. 


PSALM   VI.,  4  str.  53. 

Ps.  6  is  a  penitential  prayer.  The  congregation  prays 
Yahweh  not  to  chasten  in  anger;  but  to  heal  the  long-continued 
languishing  and  dismay  (v.2_4a)  ;  pleads  that  the  peril  of  death 
may  cease,  for  there  can  be  no  ritual  commemoration  of  Yahweh 
in  Sheol  (v.46-6).  The  sufferings  are  indeed  extreme :  weariness, 
nights  of  complaining,  bursts  of  tears,  and  eye  wasting  because 
of  the  adversaries  (v.7-8).  But  Yahweh  has  heard  the  prayer,  and 
the  enemies  must  depart  in  shame  (y.9~n). 


46  PSALMS 

Y^HWEH,  do  not  in  Thine  anger  rebuke  ifie: 

Do  not  in  Thy  rage  chasten  me  : 

Be  gracious  to  me,  for  /  am  languishing; 

Heal  me,  for  dismayed  are  my  bones; 

Yea  exceedingly  dismayed  is  my  soul. 
J3UT  Thou,  O  Yahweh,  how  long  (shall  it  continue)? 

0  return,  deliver  my  life; 

Save  me  for  the  sake  of  Thy  kindness ; 
For  in  death  there  is  no  commemoration  of  Thee; 
In  Sheol  who  can  give  Thee  (ritual)  praise  ? 
(T-TOR)  I  am  weary  with  my  groaning; 

1  must  complain  every  night  on  my  bed; 
I  make  dissolve  with  my  tears  my  couch* 
Wasteth  away  because  of  grief  mine  eye ; 
Waxeth  old  because  of  all  mine  adversaries. 

T)EPART,  ye  workers  of  trouble  from  me  ; 
For  He  hath  heard  the  voice  of  my  weeping, 
Yahweh  hath  heard  my  supplication, 
Yahweh  accepteth  my  prayer ; 
They  will  turn  back,  they  will  be  put  to  shame  in  a  moment. 

Ps.  6  was  in  TB,  its  first  penitential  prayer.  It  was  taken  up  into  £H  and 
Q&  {v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  23),  and  appointed  to  be  sung  with  the  bass  voice 
n^^Drn'S;'  to  the  accompaniment  of  stringed  instruments  mrjj3  (v.  Intr. 
§  39).  botn  peculiarly  appropriate  to  the  musical  expression  of  penitence. 
The  Ps.  was  composed  for  the  congregation,  and  there  is  no  trace  in  it  of  the 
experience  of  an  individual.  It  is  doubtless  the  earliest  of  the  seven  peni- 
tential Pss.  6,  32,  38,  51,  102,  130,  143,  and  prior  to  the  penitential  prayers 
Ezr.  9;  Ne.  9;  Dn.  9.  The  church  appropriately  assigns  these  Pss.  to  Ash 
Wednesday.  Ps.  6  is  related  to  several  other  passages  of  OT.  (1)  v.2  differs 
from  Ps.  382  only  in  that  the  latter  omits  ^s  in  second  clause,  and  substitutes 
the  late  H?P  for  the  earlier  and  simpler  p|N.  Je.  io21  has  a  similar  thought, 
and  possibly  was  in  the  mind  of  the  author.  (2)  v.66  is  similar  to  Is.  3818 
(aros  =  onac,  v.  Intr.  §  25),  where  we  have  r^n  V«Ntf  sS  •o  =  "is~"H'n',D  S'mtfa 
v.65;  but  the  measure  shows  that  we  must  read  r\^\  Is.  38  is  pentameter, 
Ps.  6,  trimeter,  therefore  changes  were  necessary.  In  ||  line  of  Ps.  6  -or  is 
used,  and  in  the  other  half  of  line  of  Is.  3818  S^n.  The  latter  is  the  simpler  and 
probably  the  earlier  usage,  -it?  in  the  sense  of  commemoration  is  only  elsw. 
Pss.  305  9712  10213  in4.  The  thought  is  more  natural  and  more  appropriate 
to  the  context  of  Is.  38  than  to  Ps.  6;  it  was  essential  there,  but  not  so  essen- 
tial here.  The  Ps.  is  therefore  later.  (3)  v.7a  is  identical  with  Je.,  which 
latter  is  certainly  original.  (4)  v.8a  is  the  same  as  Ps.  31 106,  except  that  p 
takes  the  place  of  3.  We  may  safely  conclude  that  Ps.  6  was  later  than  Je. 
and  Is.  38,  but  earlier  than  Pss.  31  and  38.  The  adversaries,  who  caused  so 
much  grief  to  the  congregation,  were  not  wicked  rulers  of  Israel  or  hostile 
nations,  but  workers  of  trouble  in  Israel  itself.  They  are  not  represented  as  a 
class  over  against  the  D^pnx  and  an^on  (cf.  Ps.  I8);  but  in  a  simpler  and 


PSALM  VI.  47 

more  primitive  way.  They  were  probably  the  enemies  of  the  congregation  of 
the  Restoration,  who  were  restoring  the  ritual  worship  in  Jerusalem,  in  the 
midst  of  great  hostility  on  the  part  of  their  neighbours  and  also  of  the  lower 
grade  of  people,  who  did  not  cordially  unite  in  their  reform.  The  Ps.  is  one 
of  the  choicest  specimens  of  the  use  of  assonance.  The  lines  require  but  few 
transpositions  to  have  them  all  end  in  •>_,  except  in  the  Str.  II.  v.56-6o~5,  which 
purposely  end  in  q  for  the  expression  of  formal  antithesis,  and  in  the  last 
lines  of  Strs.  III.  and  IV.  v.86-  lla,  where  intentionally  pi.  »_  takes  the  place 
of  sing,  v  for  the  other  four  lines  of  these  strs.  Besides,  there  is  assonance 
in  n_  in  v.76-0'8**-6.  Several  trimeters  were  injured  by  later  scribes  by  the 
insertion  of  nvr  for  greater  clearness  of  meaning,  v.30-6  (not  in  @)  5a- 9&,  and 
by  amplification,  by  insertion  of  S3  v.8a  and  tnd  v.n°.  Only  one  line  is  too 
short  in  $%,  occasioned  by  the  omission  of  "O  after  r\h. 

Str.  I.  2.  The  congregation  prays  Yahweh  in  two  syn.  couplets  ; 
negatively,  do  not  rebuke  ||  do  not  chasten,  in  thine  anger  ||  in  thy 
rage ;  thus  recognising  that  Yahweh  had  sufficient  reason  to  be 
angry  with  them  and  to  be  in  rage  against  them ;  and  that  their 
sufferings  were  due  to  His  rebuke  and  chastisement.  —  3.  They 
have  now  suffered  sufficiently,  and  so,  in  a  second  syn.  couplet, 
also  syn.  to  the  first,  they  pray  positively  be  gracious  to  me,  more 
specifically,  heal  me,  the  reason  for  which  is  their  great  need  : 
I  am  languishing  \  I  am  dismayed.  This  latter  is  in  the  last  line 
limited  to  the  bones,  which  does  not  imply  physical  injury ;  but, 
as  in  other  Pss.  of  penitence  and  lamentation,  the  sympathy  of 
nerves  and  bones  with  the  emotions  and  passions ;  and  so  the 
aching  of  the  bodily  frame  in  accord  with  the  internal  emotional 
agony,  which  now  is  expressed  in  climax.  —  4a.  yea  exceedingly 
dismayed  is  my  soul. 

Str.  II.  4&.  The  prayer  becomes  more  intense.  The  first  line 
expostulates  with  Yahweh  for  the  long  continuance  of  the  chastise- 
ment, with  its  suffering  and  peril.  —  How  long  ?]  shall  it  yet 
continue?  This  is  followed  by  two  syn.  couplets,  the  second 
synth.  to  the  first,  giving  the  reason  for  it.  —  5.  In  the  first 
couplet  is  the  plea,  —  O  return]  with  favour,  condensing  the 
thought  of  the  previous  line.  The  long  continuance  of  suffering 
seems  to  imply  divine  absence  or  inattention.  —  Deliver  ||  save] 
make  the  return  effective  by  redemptive  interposition.  It  is  the 
life  of  the  congregation  that  is  in  peril  by  the  continuance  of  this 
chastisement,  and  the  kindness  of  Yahweh  which  is  strained  by 


48  PSALMS 

it.  —  6.  The  motive  proposed  for  this  deliverance  is,  that  if  the 
life  of  the  community  is  destroyed,  the  commemoration  of  Yah- 
weh  ||  His  praise,  in  the  worship  of  the  ritual,  will  be  destroyed ; 
and  though  the  congregation  may  continue  their  existence  in  the 
realm  of  Death  and  the  cavern  of  Sheol,  the  abode  of  the  dead, 
they  will  be  no  longer  a  congregation  worshipping  Yahweh  in  the 
ritual  of  the  temple,  as  prescribed  by  Yahweh  in  His  Law,  and  so 
well  pleasing  to  Him.  The  Sheol  of  the  Hebrews  corresponds 
with  Hades  of  the  Greeks,  the  subterranean  region  whither  aUU 
mankind  go  at  death  and  live  in  a  shadowy  state  of  existence. 

Str.  III.  7.  The  congregation  now  intensifies  the  plea  in  five 
syn.  lines,  describing  their  sad  condition,  which  again  subdivides 
into  an  introductory  line  and  two  syn.  couplets.  The  groaning 
has  continued  so  long,  and  has  become  so  intense,  that  they  are 
weary,  worn  out  with  it.  —  Every  night  on  the  bed,  ||  the  couch, 
they  must  complain,  and  with  such  an  intensity  of  grief,  that  tears 
burst  from  the  eyes  in  a  flood,  wet  the  couch,  and  cause  it  to 
dissolve,  as  in  a  stream  of  rushing  water.  The  figure  seems  extrav- 
agant to  Western  taste,  but  not  to  the  Oriental.  But  it  is  still 
more  extravagant  in  MT.  and  Vrss.  in  the  previous  line  :  "  make 
my  bed  swim."  This,  by  a  change  of  vocalisation  merely,  gives 
the  more  suitable  mng.  "  must  complain,"  as  we  have  given  it 
above.  —  8.  The  eye  wasteth  away  by  this  continual  weeping, 
because  of  grief  ;  and  it  waxeth  old,  becomes  like  the  weakened, 
enfeebled  eye  of  an  old  man,  with  little  power  of  vision,  —  because 
of  all  mine  adversaries^  whose  actions  cause  such  grief  "and  such 
bursts  of  tears. 

Str.  IV.  9-11.  —  The  congregation  have  not  been  overwhelmed 
by  their  grief  and  the  divine  chastisement ;  their  prayer  receives 
its  answer  while  they  are  making  it.  They  express  their  confi- 
dence in  a  Str.  of  introverted  parall.  wherein  the  first  and  last 
lines  are  syn.,  and  find  their  reason  in  the  intervening  syn.  triplet. 
The  reason  is  that  Yahweh  hath  heard  (repeated  in  emphasis)  || 
accepteth\  That  which  he  heard  was  the  voice  of  my  weeping  || 
my  supplication  \\  my  prayer.  Therefore  the  congregation  warns 
the  workers  of  trouble  =  adversaries,  v.86 :  Depart  from  me  ;  and 
expresses  the  assurance  that  they  will  turn  back,  they  will  be  put 
to  sha?ne}  and  that  in  a  mo?nenti  instantly  without  delay.     This 


PSALM  VI.  49 

shaming  of  the  enemies  in  the  climax  is  in  striking  antith.  to  the 
anxiety  they  have  caused  the  congregation,  v.36-4a.  A  later  editor, 
wishing  to  emphasise  this  still  more,  inserts  v.lla. 

They  shall  be  shamed,  and  they  shall  be  dismayed  exceedingly,  all 
mine  enemies. 

2.  Sn]  with  Hiph.  juss.  ^rnrnn  is  usually  attached  to  vb.,  here  separated  for 
assonance  in  >j  so  1.2.  — %  r\y~\  vb.  Hiph.  (i)  decide,  judge  9410 ;  (2)  convince, 
convict  5021 ;  (3)  reprove,  chide  508  105 14;  (4)  correct,  rebuke  62=382  1415 
Jb.  517  i310-10  Pr.  312.  —  ^nona"1?*^]  has  two  beats.  %  n^n  n.f.  (1)  venom,  of 
serpents  585(5?),  as  Dt.  3224,  33,  of  arrows  1404;  (2)  burning  anger,  rage,  of 
man  37s  7611-  n,  of  God  62  382  5914  7838  790  888  8g47  907  10623.  —  mm]  is  a 
gloss  in  both  lines.  In  36  it  is  not  in  <g. —  3.  t'?l?D*]  a-^-  adj.  =  +  ^Snx 
Ne.  334  ;  but  better  ptc.  S^dno  with  0  omitted  as  frequently  in  intensives  when 
with  shewa.  —  ^K9"\]  Qal  imv.  J  Nan  vb.  heal  from  peril  of  death  as  303  415 
1033  I072),  more  general  mng.  1473.  —  JOH]  n«f«  bone  for  bodily  suffering  as 
22i5.  is  ^i11  32s  3421  3510  384  4211  5110  I024-6  10918,  for  skeleton  of  the  dead 
536  1417.  —  4.   IKE]  adv.  exceedingly  35  t.  in  \p.  —  n*o]  Kt.  nn*o  Qr  (3  <ri>  dub. 

—  >nD~nj?]  <&  £ws  tt6t€,  abs.  how  long  (shall  it  be).  J  \~d  adv.  when  416  42s 
948  ioi2  1198284. —  *no— 1>?  until  when,  how  long?  sq.  pf.  So5,  impf.  7410  822 
943,  abs.  64  9013  94s.  It  is  difficult  to  see  with  this  interp.  why  |^  connects 
with  previous  line.  By  connecting  with  subsequent  context  we  get  2  str.  of 
5  1.  each,  which  is  evidently  correct.  We  might  read  vib~-i£  riNM  Qal  impf.  1 
consec.  %  nn«  vb.  come  Ps.  6832  Dt.  3321,  c.  "ij?  Mi.  48  and  *nb  n.  I  sf.  my 
death  (v.  v.6)  and  render,  And  so  it  is  come  unto  my  death,  I  am  at  the  point 
of  death,  which  admirably  suits  the  context  (Br.SHS  374).  —  5.  naitf]  Qal. 
imv.  cohort.  3-ltf  as  78  8015  903  all  of  God.  — mm]  is  a  gloss  as  v.3"5.  —  nxSn] 
Piel  imv.  cohort.  %  Vr,L,n  Qal  draw  off,  not  in  \p  but  f  Niph.  be  delivered 
60"  =  1087  Pr.  II8-9  Piel  rescue,  deliver  sq.  Bfal  life  65  1168,  c.  ace.  p.  1820 
(=2  S.  2220)  348  5015  818  9115  119153  1402  (Ps.  f  dub.).  — tfei]  I  in  the 
sense  of  life,  elsw.  'j  h^n  2221  3319  5614,  0  bVd  8949  1164,  'J  mo  34s3  5519  7123, 
cf.  49°,  -j  isc*  2520  9710,  '}  vp2  354  3813  4015  545  6310  703  8614;  other  uses  f 
3114  567  594  69s  7110  7213-14  7419  7850  119109  I244-5.  For  u;dj  with  other 
mngs.  v.  f  io3  1610  179  2230  £DR.  Br.JBL  1897> 17  s<i-.  —  rnpn  flgS]  =  4427v.  ^. 

—  6.  nijM]  3  local,  in  the  place  or  state  of  death.  J  niD  n.m.  (1)  ofca^ 
as  opp.  life  134  3319  4918  5614  6821  734  7850  Ii68-15;  (2)  death  by  violence 
714  1853  2216  555  1163,  as  penalty  11818;  f  (3)  state  or  place  of  death  W  4915 
Is.  2815-18  3818  Ho.  1314  Hb.  25  Ct.  86  Pr.  5s  727||.  jna«  Jb.  2822,  tj  nytf 
£#tey  of  death  Pss.  914  10718  Jb.  3817.  —  f^T  n«£  ^  underworld  Dt.  3222 
Is  149  Pr.  1524;  under  mts.  and  sea  Jb.  266  Jon.  23,  contrasted  with  height  of 
heaven  Am.  92  Jb.  n8  Ps.  1398  Is.  711.  Thither  men  descend  at  death 
Gn.  37^  (E)  4238  4429-3i  (J)  1  S.  26  1  K.  2*-  9  Jb.  79  2i*3  Is.  14U.  ™  Ps.  884, 
Korah  and  his  associates  by  divine  judgment  Nu.  i630-33  (J)  cf.  Ps.  5516.  It 
has  a  mouth  Ps.  1417  and  is  a  city  with  gates  Is.  3810  and  has  bars  Jb.  I716(?>. 

E 


50  PSALMS 

It  is  syn.  with  mn  Pr.  5*  f  Ct.  8G  Ps.  8949.  It  is  personified  Is.  2815- 18,  as 
insatiable  monster  514  Hb.  2s  Pr.  Iu  2720  3010,  and  has  snares  Ps.  18° 
(=  2  S  22'),  cf.  1163.  It  is  dark  and  gloomy  and  from  it  there  is  no  return 
Jb.  1718  (cf.  v.16  79);  earthly  distinctions  cease  there  Jb.  317"19  2I23-20. 
Ec.  95- 6- 10  represent  the  dead  as  without  work  or  knowledge  or  wisdom :  but 
these  gloomy  passages  of  Jb.  and  Ec.  are  not  to  be  taken  too  seriously,  for 
they  do  not  correspond  with  the  ordinary  representation  of  other  passages. 
In  postex.  Lit.  the  condition  of  the  righteous  and  the  wicked  is  often  dis- 
tinguished. The  wicked,  whether  nations  or  individuals,  descend  to  Sheol 
Pss.  918  3 118  (cf.  Nu.  I630-38);  death  acts  as  their  shepherd,  and  they  waste 
away  without  power  or  honour  Ps.  4915' 15.  Sheol  consumes  them  as  drought- 
water  Jb.  2419.  The  righteous  dread  to  go  thither  because  there  is  no  ritual 
worship  there  Ps.  66,  cf.  88s  Is.  j818;  deliverance  from  Sheol  is  a  blessing 
Pss.  304  8613  Pr.  2314.  In  Ez.  it  is  a  place  of  reproach,  the  abode  of  uncircum- 
cised  31I6. 16. 17  -j221-27.  The  righteous  will  not  be  abandoned  to  Sheol 
Ps.  1610,  cf.  1715,  but  will  be  ransomed  from  it  4916,  cf.  73J3- -25  Is.  571-2 
Jb.  1418  1713.  In  latest  Lit.  there  is  a  distinction  in  Sheol.  It  has  depths 
to  which  the  wicked  fools  descend  Pr.  918.  It  is  contrasted  with  jvon 
Pr.  1511.  "N3,  ~nr  when  ||  sinu;  are  in  the  bad  sense  of  a  pit  or  place  of  the 
lost  v.  716  which  prepares  the  way  for  local  distinction  in  later  Judaism  as  re- 
flected in  Lk.  1619"81.  *?wtf  is  also  used  fig.  of  degradation  in  sin  Is.  57s  and  of 
place  of  exile  for  Israel  Ho.  I314- 14.  — T^l]  sf.  obj.  X  ~\y  n.m.  (1)  remembrance, 
memory  of  person  or  people  1 126  blotted  out  by  their  destruction  g1  3417  10916; 

(2)  commemoration  of  Vahweh  in  the  ritual  (fi  305  9712   10218    III4    1457; 

(3)  memorial  by  which  one  is  remembered  1358.  —  <p]  who  can,  implying 
neg.  answer  (v.  <p). — iS  n-V»»]  Hiph.  impf.  3  m.  irv  (v.  Intr.  §  39).  -^ 
makes  the  line  too  long.  It  is  an  error  of  late  style  for  earlier  rpfti  of  Is.  3818. — 
7.  »£J?J*]  Qal  pf.  I  p.,  of  state  or  condition  Dr.  § n  %  yv  c.  a  67  694  Is.  43s2 
5710  Je.  453.  — ♦I?*1??]  n.f.  sf.  I  p.  JnmM  n.f.  sighing,  groaning,  in  distress, 
physical  or  mental  67  3111  3810  1028.  The  line  lacks  a  word.  Du.  rightly 
prefixes  '3,  giving  reason  of  foregoing.  It  was  omitted  because  of  previous  "j1-. 
—  •T^'n]  Hiph.  impf.  I  p.  frequentative,  VTr'  v^*  SW2mt  elsw.  Is.  251] 
Ez.  475,  so  here  (S  Xovcxu),  3  natare  faciam.  This  suits  subsequent  context,  but 
not  the  previous,  or  mention  of  time,  and  is  indeed  an  extravagant  metaphor. 
It  is  more  natural  to  take  it  as  parallel  with  the  next  line.  Therefore  we 
should  point  it  rirrirN,  Qal  impf.  cohort,  rvir  as  5518  774  Jb.  23s.  —  nS^-Saa]  in 
every  night,  phr.  a.X.  dub.,  a  later  intensification  by  inserting  Ss.  Rd.  %  r,l?,i?3 
as  429  777  882  9011  11955  1216  1369.  —  y~:'?r~\  n.f.  sf.  my  couch  %  nwp  n.f.  a.X.  \p 
||  \  trip  67  414  1328.  —  ngDM]  Hiph.  impf.  freq.,  tr.  to  beginning  of  1.  in  order  to 
assonance,  of  ","i->"  in  ,_.  f  hd*:  vb.  melt  for  usual  DD2  Hiph.  cause  to  melt, 
dissolve  elsw.  of  ice  14718,  cause  to  vanish  3912,  fig.  ^h,  intimidate  Jos.  148. 
ddo  Hiph.  only  Dt.  I28.  It  is  possible  that  we  should  rd.  here  cohort,  nrrs 
IJnrpirN  in  order  to  assonance  with  nrrr,  n^~r.  —  8.  fn^p]  vb.  Qal  pf.  3  f. 
denom.  r?  n.m.  moth,  as  waster,  consumer  3912 ;  vb.  elsw.  311011.  —  +  D*r] 
n.m    vexation,  as  (1)  grief  &  io14  3110  Ec.  I18  2128  78  II10;   (2)  as  anger  of 


PSALM   VII.  51 

X  nprw]  vb.  Qal  pf.  sf. 

advance  in  years,  grow  old,  as  Jb.  217. —  nmx]  Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  I  p.  f  -nx  vb. 
be  an  adversary  Nu.  io9  2517- 18  33s5  (allP)  Is.  II13  Ps.  I2Q1-2  Est.  310  81 
910-  24 ;  ptc.  sg.,  usually  single  person,  but  Ps.  7s  prob.  coll. ;  pi.  of  God's 
adversaries  83  744- 23,  man's  Ex.  2322  (E)  Am.  51*2  Pss.  f  235  3112  4211;  c.  Sj 
io5  6923  14312 ;  so  prob.  here  except  that  assonance  in  ■>_  is  then  abandoned. — 

9.  '2  niD]  Qal  imv.  J  i-id  vb.  Qal  (1)  turn  aside  Ps.  119102,  fjPO  3415  3727  Jb. 
2828  Pr.  37  1319  i66- 7,  revolt  Ps.  143  Je.  523  Dt.  n16  1717 ;  (2)  depart,  c.  p  pers. 
Ps.  6s  119115  13919;  (3)  &?  removed,  c.  p  pers.  ioi4.  Hiph.  (1)  remove,  take 
away,  c.  p  1823  3911  817  1 1929  Ex.  84- 27  (J)  23s5  (E)  Is.  31;  (2)  put  aside,  reject, 
Ps.  6620,  cf.  Is.  312.  —  fix  *hvp]  v.  j6.  Sa  is  gloss,  as  28s  3613  59s  64s  1256 
I4i4-9  unnecessary  amplification.  —  ^DD]  should  be  tr.  to  the  end  of  the  line 
for  assonance.  —  mm]  is  a  gloss,  destroying  the  measure.  —  «aa  S'^p  ypir] 
phr.  a.\.  but  Sip  J?DB>  187  5518  64s  1 19149  v.  ^4.     J  13a  n.m.  weeping  306  10210.  — 

10.  »P3rw  jptf]  cf.  »yurn  Sip  'tf  282-°  3123  I161.  J^runri  n.f.  sf.  1  p.  alw.  this 
form  Pss.  552  H917).  — 11.  iSmn  icb;]  Qal  impf.  tfia  coordinate  by  simple 
l  with  Niph.  impf.  Sna  as  S^18.  For  other  uses  of  Sna  v.  v.3  ^.  J  Bha  vb.  Qal 
(1)  feel  shame  226  25s-3  3118  3719  8617  977  10928  1196. 46. 78.  so  I2y»(  nroN  l,x 
312  (=  711)18  25s,  cf.  2520;  (2)  be  ashamed,  put  to  shame  6n  7113,  sq.  dSdh 
354  097  Je.  143  2222  Is.  4111  4516- 17  Ez.  1652  36s2  Ezr.  gG,  nan  Pss.  35s6  4015  708 
7 124  Je.  159  Mi.  37  Jb.  620,  JD  Ps.  1295,  Snaj  6"-  8318.  Hiph.  put  to  shame  146 
H931,11G,  enemies  by  defeat  44s  536.  —  ^aj  or]  impfs.  without  1  coordinate 
more  emphatic.  1  is  given,  however,  (&.  B"a  preceded  by  3-iir  a.X.  It  evi- 
dently has  the  mng.  here  of  turn  back  in  defeat,  as  9*- 18  5610.  —  yn]  i.p. 
X  yn  n.m.  moment  of  time  306,  elsw.  adv.  ace.  in  a  moment  611,  >'J~o  7319  as 
Nu.  1621  =  1710.  <3  inserts  (r<p68pa  nxp  as  above.  Du.  thinks  v.10a  a  gloss  as 
variation  of  v.95.  It  suits  the  measure  and  assonance  better  than  v.lla.  The 
Str.  is  just  one  line  too  long,  and  one  of  the  lines  must  be  thrown  out.  V.lla 
is  a  pentameter  and  least  suitable  to  the  context. 


PSALM   VII.,    2  str.  io3. 

Ps.  7  is  a  prayer  for  deliverance  from  a  personal  enemy :  (i)  a 
petition  for  salvation  from  his  pursuer,  with  an  imprecation  of 
death  upon  himself,  if  he  had  done  the  wrong  charged  against 
him  (v.2-6) ;  (2)  expressing  confidence  that  Yahweh  was  prepar- 
ing weapons  against  his  pursuer,  and  that  his  mischief  and 
treachery  would  receive  just  retribution  (v.13-17).  Subsequent 
editors  inserted  a  plea  for  the  judgment  of  the  nations  in  an 
ultimate  world  judgment  (v.7-8),  a  judgment  between  the  right- 
eous and  wicked  in  Israel  (v.96-12),  and  a  liturgical  couplet  of 
praise  (v.18). 


52  PSALMS 

A/TYGod,  in  Thee  do  I  seek  refuge; 

Save  me  from  him  that  pursues,  and  deliver  me; 
Lest,  like  a  lion,  he  tear  me, 

While  there  be  (none)  to  tear  away  and  none  to  deliver. 
My  God,  if  I  have  done  this, 
If  there  be  iniquity  in  my  palms, 

If  I  requited  him  that  was  at  peace  with  me  with  evil; 
Let  him  pursue  me,  and  let  him  overtake  me, 
And  let  him  tread  to  the  earth  my  life, 
And  my  honour  let  him  lay  in  the  dust. 
TF  not,  He  whets  His  sword, 

Doth  tread  His  bow  and  make  it  ready. 

And  doth  prepare  for  him  deadly  weapons; 

His  arrows  He  maketh  into  fiery  ones. 

Lo!  he  travaileth  with  iniquity, 

And  conceiveth  mischief  and  bringeth  (it)  forth. 

A  pit  he  hath  dug  and  dug  out, 

And  he  will  fall  into  the  hole  he  is  making. 

His  mischief  will  return  on  his  own  head, 

And  upon  his  own  pate  his  violence  come  down. 

Ps.  7  was  in  Q,  but  only  in  its  original  form.  In  that  form  the  historical 
reference  in  the  title  "which  he  sang  to  Yahweh  because  of  the  words  of 
Cush,  the  Benjamite"  has  some  propriety;  although  there  is  no  mention 
of  such  a  person  in  the  history  of  the  times  of  David.  This  fact  gives  some 
force  to  the  correctness  of  a  tradition  only  preserved  here;  for  we  know  of 
nothing  in  the  Literature  upon  which  it  could  be  based.  There  is  nothing 
in  the  original  form  of  the  Ps.  that  prevents  the  composition  by  David  under 
some  such  circumstances,  when  he  was  pursued  by  Saul  and  his  Ben- 
jamite warriors.  The  traditional  circumstance  may,  however,  have  been  an 
editorial  conjecture.  This  prayer  appropriately  follows  Ps.  6  in  Q.  It  was 
not  included  in  15  or  Q&.  Accordingly,  no  musical  assignment  was  made. 
<@,  U  have  n)DTC,  implying  its  use  in  £H  {v.  Intr.  §  j/)  instead  of  ]VW  of  $ 
which  was  probably  a  txt.  err.  The  word  has  not  yet  been  explained  (v.  Intr. 
§  34).  There  is  a  striking  inconsistency  between  the  plea  for  interposition 
against  an  individual  enemy  in  v.2"6- 13"17  and  the  judgment  of  nations  v.79a, 
and  between  the  righteous  and  wicked  in  Israel  v.10"1-  (v.  Bi.,  Che.).  This 
can  only  be  explained  by  the  insertion  of  these  latter  as  glosses,  to  give  the 
Ps.  a  more  general  reference  for  congregational  use  under  later  circumstances. 
Moreover  v.2"6- 13_17  are  trimeters :  v.7-12  in  the  main  at  least  pentameters. 
Che.  is  mistaken  in  regarding  v.7-12  as  homogeneous.  There  is  a  difference 
between  Yahweh's  judgment  of  the  nations  v.7"8  and  Elohim's  judgment  of 
the  wicked  in  Israel  v.10"12.  The  original  Ps.  is  very  early,  possibly  as  early 
as  David;  the  Yahwistic  gloss  belongs  to  the  Persian  period,  the  Elohistic 
gloss  to  the  Greek  period.  Other  minor  glosses  harmonized  in  a  measure  the 
differences,  and  a  liturgical  addition  made  the  Ps.  more  appropriate  for  use 


PSALM  VII.  53 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  a  trimeter  tetrastich  followed  by  two 
trimeter  tristichs.  —  2-3.  The  tetrastich  has  a  synth.  couplet  stat- 
ing, My  God,  in  Thee  do  I  seek  refuge~\  followed  by  the  petition, 
save  me  from  him  that  pursues  me  and  deliver  me] .  The  poet 
was  pursued  by  a  personal  enemy,  an  individual ;  and  has  sought 
refuge  in  Yahweh  for  deliverance,  possibly  at  the  sanctuary  itself. 
A  synth.  couplet  gives  the  reason  for  the  plea,  lest,  like  a  lion,  he 
tear  me].  The  pursuer  will  tear  him,  as  a  lion  his  prey,  unless  his 
God  saves  him.  There  is  none  (other)  to  tear  him  away,  from 
this  lion,  and  none  (else)  to  deliver  him.  The  pursuer  seems  to 
have  some  pretext  for  this  pursuit :  he  charges  the  poet  with  viola- 
tion of  covenant  and  personal  injury.  This  the  poet  repudiates 
before  his  God,  in  a  syn.  tristich  of  conditional  clauses,  followed 
by  a  syn.  tristich  of  imprecation  upon  himself  if  the  condition 
which  he  denies  be  true.  —  4-5a.  If  I  have  done  this]  the 
specific  thing  charged  against  him  by  his  pursuer ;  if  there  be  ini- 
quity in  my  palms]  a  phr.  usually  referring  to  the  acceptance 
of  bribes :  it  can  hardly  be  physical  injury  by  the  hands,  for  there 
could  be  no  dispute  about  that.  —  if  I  requited  him  that  was  at 
peace  with  me  with  evil]  that  is,  one  in  a  covenant  of  peace,  a 
friend  who  had  a  right  to  look  for  good  treatment,  involving  there- 
fore treacherous  breach  of  friendship  and  covenant,  justly  exciting 
the  penalty  of  pursuit  and  death.  He  recognises  the  rightfulness 
of  the  pursuit  if  his  statement  be  false.  —  6.  Let  him  pursue  me]  as 
he  is  doing,  v26,  and  furthermore,  let  him  overtake  me],  do  not  save 
me  from  him,  v.26,  and  let  him  tread  to  the  earth  my  life],  trample 
me  under  foot  and  kill  me  as  v.3a,  and  my  honour],  phr.  for  living 
soul,  life,  let  him  lay  in  the  dust],  throw  down  prostrate  in  the  dust 
of  death,  cf.  v.35.  A  later  editor,  adapting  the  Str.  for  congrega- 
tional use,  makes  the  pursuer  pi. :  "all  that  pursue  me"  v.26,  inserts 
"enemy  "  v.606,  and  makes  a  premature  renouncement  of  treachery. 

Nay,  I  used  to  rescue  them  that  were  my  adversaries  to  no  purpose  (v.56). 

7-12  constitute  a  series  of  glosses  separating  the  two  Strs.  of  the 
original  Ps.  They  take  a  wider  outlook  than  the  rescue  of  an 
individual  from  his  personal  enemy ;  they  contemplate  the  judg- 
ment of  the  nations,  and  of  the  wicked  adversaries  of  the  righteous 
in  Israel.     There  were  probably  three  separate  stages  in  these 


54  PSALMS 

glosses  v.7-8,  v.9a,  and  v.96"12.  7-8  were  probably  three  pentameters 
in  the  original  text.  They  are  syn.  lines  of  beauty  and  power 
written  by  a  real  poet. 

O  arise,  Yahweh,  in  Thine  anger;  lift  Thyself  up  in  outbursts  of  rage; 

O  rouse  Thyself,  Yahweh  my  God,  to  the  judgment  Thou  hast  commanded, 

While  the  congregation  of  peoples  assemble  around  Thee,  on  high  O  sit  enthroned. 

Yahweh  is  urged  in  a  pressing  appeal :  O  arise,  Yahweh,\\  lift 
Thyself  up  ||  O  rouse  Thyself,  Yahweh  my  God  ||  on  high  O  sit 
enthroned.]  These  were  probably  the  original  readings.  (For 
variations  see  textual  notes.)  It  is  an  invocation  of  the  congre- 
gation of  Israel  to  their  national  God  to  intervene  on  their  behalf; 
to  sit  on  His  throne  of  judgment  and  convoke  all  parties  to  His 
judgment  seat.  It  is  assumed  that  the  decision  will  be  in  favour 
of  His  people,  in  anger  I  outbursts  of  rage]  manifested  in  striking 
ways.  It  is  also  affirmed  that  such  a  judgment  has  been  already 
commanded.  The  people  of  God  were  sure  that  it  would  eventually 
take  place,  they  are  in  such  straits  that  they  urge  that  it  shall  be 
at  once.  —  Wliile  the  congregation  of  peoples  assemble  around 
Thee].  It  is  a  judgment  of  nations,  gathered  from  all  parts  about 
the  divine  throne  for  that  purpose.  This  reflects  an  entirely 
different  situation  from  that  of  the  original  Ps.,  and  a  state  of  mind 
represented  in  Pss.  96-100,  cf.  Jo.  3. 

9a,  a  trimeter  line,  Yahweh  judgeth  the  peoples],  is  entirely 
apart  from  previous  or  subsequent  context,  stating  a  fact  in  the 
midst  of  earnest  entreaties  for  judgment.     It  is  a  marginal  gloss. 

96-12  is  a  series  of  pentameters  of  a  different  type  from  the 
original  Ps.  and  also  from  v.7-8. 

JUDGE  me,  Yahweh,  according  to  my  righteousness,  according  to  the  integrity 
that  is  upon  me. 
O  let  the  evil  of  the  wicked  come  to  an  end,  and  establish  the  righteous. 
A  trier  of  hearts  and  reins  is  the  righteous  God. 
My  shield  is  upon  God,  a  Saviour  of  the  upright  in  mind. 
God  is  a  righteous  judge,  an  'El  taking  vengeance  every  day. 

The  antith.  is  now,  not  between  the  individual  and  his  pursuer, 
nor  between  Yahweh  and  the  nations,  but  between  the  righteous 
and  the  wicked  in  Israel  itself;  and  so  is  of  a  much  later  date. 
The  judgment  is  not  an  ultimate  one,  but  a  daily  testing  and  tak- 
ing vengeance ;  and  the  divine  name  is  Elohim  and  not  Yahweh. 


PSALM   VII.  55 

This  gloss  is  not  earlier  than  the  Greek  period  (cf.  Ps.  i).  The 
author  represents  the  righteous  in  Israel.  The  key  word  of  the 
five  lines  is  righteousness,  according  to  my  righteousness  v.96,  the 
righteous  v.10a,  the  righteous  God  v.105,  the  upright  in  mind  v.115, 
righteous  judge  v.12;  cf.  the  syn.  terms  for  judgment:  judge  me 
v.96,  establish  v.10a,  in  the  sense  of  vindicate,  cf.  99*;  trier  v.105, 
Saviour  v.11,  judge  v.12.  In  the  other  parts  of  the  lines  according 
to  the  integrity  that  is  upon  me  v.96  has  as  its  antith.,  O  let  the  evil 
of  the  wicked  come  to  an  end  v.10a ;  trier  of  hearts  and  reins  has 
as  its  antith.  taking  vengeance  every  day.  —  My  shield  over  me  is 
God],  protecting  me  from  all  enemies  as  34.  J^  "  upon  God  " 
makes  God  the  shield  bearer  of  His  people,  a  conception  which 
all  EV.8  shrink  from,  in  their  varied  modes  of  paraphrase.  It  is 
possible  that  the  text  of  (3  v.12a  is  correct :  strong  and  patient;  if 
so,  the  pentameter  line  is  complete  without  "  El  taking  vengeance 
every  day,"  and  that  must  be  regarded  as  a  minor  gloss.  But  it 
is  better  suited  to  the  context  than  the  additional  words  of  (3,  and 
gives  a  better  climax.     Rather  (3  is  a  gloss. 

Str.  II.  13  sq.  is  an  antistr.  The  condition  of  the  imprecation 
in  the  previous  Str.  is  taken  for  granted  as  false,  in  the  abrupt 
if  not]  without  vb.  in  the  original,  ("  if  it  is  not  so,  and  it  is  not "  ; 
explained  by  gloss,  if  he,  the  pursuer,  turn  not).  Yahweh  be- 
comes the  pursuer  of  the  poet's  pursuer.  This  is  expressed  in 
four  syn.  trimeters  in  antith.  with  v.2-3,  so  ancient  Vrss.  EV.B  and 
most  comm.,  but  many  moderns  Che.,  Ba\,  Du.,  Ehr.  make  the 
enemies  of  Str.  I.  the  actor  here  also.  — 13-14.  He  whets  His 
sword]  in  behalf  of  the  one  who  has  sought  refuge  in  Him  v.2a ; 
He  doth  tread  His  bow  and  make  it  ready],  to  save  from  the  pur- 
suer v.25 ;  He  doth  prepare  for  him  deadly  weapons],  to  kill  the  lion 
ready  to  tear  his  prey  v.3a;  His  arrows  He  makeih  into  fiery 
ones],  in  response  to  the  apparent  abandonment  of  W5*.  This 
tetrastich  is  followed  by  two  trimeter  tristichs  v.15_16a  v.165-17,  bringing 
out  the  true  character  of  the  pursuer  and  his  ultimate  ruin.  — 15- 
16a.  Lot  he  travaileth  with  iniquity],  over  against  the  false 
charge  against  the  poet  v.4a  ;  and  conceiveth  mischief  and  bringeth 
it  forth],  in  antith.  with  v.4&.  A  gloss  gives  an  object  "falsehood  " 
to  the  third  vb.,  but  that  makes  the  line  too  long  and  mars  the 
effect  of  the  single  word,  mischief,  syn.  with  iniquity.    The  pursuer 


56  PSALMS 

is  compared  to  a  woman  in  childbirth  :  mischief  is  the  babe  which 
is  born.  —  A  pit  he  hath  dug  and  dug  out],  passing  over  from  the 
metaphor  of  childbirth  to  the  metaphor  of  making  a  pit  to  ensnare 
animals,  common  in  if/.  This  is  antith.  to  v.5a ;  instead  of  the 
poet  being  the  treacherous  violator  of  covenant  and  friend- 
ship, the  man,  who  pursues  him  with  false  charges,  has  tried  to 
take  him  like  an  animal  in  the  covered  pit.  — 166-17.  The  final 
tristich  is  in  antith.  with  the  imprecation  v.6  j  the  imprecation  falls 
on  the  pursuer  and  not  on  the  pursued.  He  will  fall  into  the  hole 
he  is  making]  antith.  with  v.6*;  his  mischief  will  return  on  his  own 
head]  antith.  with  v.66 ;  and  upon  his  own  pate  will  his  violence 
come  down]  over  against  v.60.  And  so,  seeking  refuge  in  God,  the 
poet  sees  God  pursuing  his  pursuer,  and  bringing  upon  him  the 
retribution  which  he  demanded  for  the  wrong  which  he  himself 
had  done. 

18.  A  later  editor  added  a  liturgical  gloss  as  a  suitable  close 
of  the  Ps.  in  its  final  form  after  it  had  been  generalised  and 
adapted  for  public  worship. 

I  will  praise  Yahweh  according  to  His  righteousness 
And  I  will  make  melody  to  the  name  of  Elyon. 

This  liturgical  couplet  is  a  trimeter  like  the  original  Ps.  It  is  syn. 
■ — I  will  praise]  in  public  praise  ||  I  will  make  melody.  Yahweh  is 
the  object  of  the  first  line,  Elyon,  the  Most  High,  of  the  second 
line.  The  second  Yahweh  has  been  inserted  as  gloss.  The  name] 
of  the  second  line  is  syn.  with  according  to  His  righteousness  of 
the  first. 

2.    f  ^K  IWV]    72-  i  I34  I829  303?  H  3524  406  IQ41  I0926  JJu.  2218  (JE)  Dt.  48 

IS16  2614  Jos.  I48-  9  2  S.  2424  1  K.  37  518- 19  (  =  2  Ch.  23)  828  ( =  2  Ch.  619)  I720-  21 
Je.  3 118  Hb.  i1'2,  thus  phr.  of  D;  elsw.  Postex.  1  Ch.  2117  227  Ezr.  728  gs  Is.  251 
Dn.  9420  Jon.  27  Zc.  II*  139  146.  The  line  is  too  long  both  here  and  in  v.4, 
therefore  mrv  is  a  gloss;  so  also  Pss.  1829  35s4  1041.  —  S^p]  sr  is  intensifica- 
tion, only  T  is  original.  —  '?7S]  Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  1  s.;  pi.  later  interpretation  for 
an  original  sg.  J  VlT1  yh-  Qal:  (1)  pursue  enemy  in  war  1838  3116  35s-6 
7 111  8316;  so  here,  for  v.3-6  favour  reference  to  pursuit  of  warrior.  (2)  perse- 
cute 69s7  10916  1198*.  86. 157.  161  I427  j^s,  (3)  follow  after,  in  good  sense 
3415  3821,  in  bad  sense  119150.  (4)  follow  after  in  order  to  benefit  23°. 
Pi.  pursue  ardently,  possibly  v.6,  but  prob.  =  1433.  1TV  is  a  Massoretic 
conceit  prob.  giving  choice  of  q-n-  Qal  or  *jtv  Pi.,  Ges.§ 63n,  K6.L  § 160.  — ■ 
•jSwV]   i  coord.  Hiph.  imv.  sf.  1  p.  [v/J^]  not  used  *n  Qal,  but  Hiph. : 


PSALM  VII.  57 

(i)  snatch  away  words  from  mouth  11943;  (2)  deliver  from  enemies  and 
troubles,  c.  ace.  f  229  2520  313  4014  702  712  7212  10643  10921,  c.  p  i818-49  222i 

345.  18.  20  3510  549  592.  3  6915  9I3  joyC  I202i427  1438  144^  Tg   3^6  g24  97IO  144X1, 

ipp  181  (=2  S.  221),  abs.  Svsd  pw  7s  5022  7111  Is.  5s9  42s2  Ho.  5«  Mi.  s7; 
(3)  deliver  from,  c.  p  death  3319  5614,  Sheol  8613;  (4)  deliver  from  sin  and 
guilt  399  5116  799  119170,  Niph.  pass,  be  delivered,  abs.  33™,  c.  p  6915. — 
3.  «ra?-JB]  negative  final  clause,  lest.  %  rps  tear,  rend,  of  wild  beasts  Gn.  37s3 
4428  (J)  Ex.  2212  (E),  elsw.  only  in  metaphor  in  Fss.  y3  1712  2214  of  men  com- 
pared to  lions,  and  Ps.  5022  of  God.  —  X  T.'™]  H°n  73  iq9  i712  2214- 22,  cf.  n« 
2217(?).  —  v^dj]  me  (v.  j3).  —  pns]  Qal  ptc.  Jpifl:  (1)  tear  away  from, 
deliver,  c.  p  13624  La.  5s,  so  here  if  after  @,  /i?7  6ptos  \vrpovfx4vov,  we  read 
pnb  pn;  so  5,  Gr.,  We.,  Du.,  al.;  but  $}  interpreted  as  (2)  tear  in  pieces,  in 
same  sense  as  Pi.  1  K.  1911. — 4.  *ntferjraN]  is  Qal  pf.  I  s.  protasis  conditional 
clause  continued  in  v.465a  with  apod,  v.6  in  juss.  of  imprecation.  —  nw]  is 
neuter,  this  thing,  with  ntsty,  phr.  a.X.  \p,  but  Gn.  314  (J)  205-  6  4519  (E). — 
r;-ON]  conditional,  implying  neg.  answer.  J  vh  originally  n.  but  in  usage 
subst.  vb.  is,  are,  tvas,  etc.,  "  not  as  a  mere  copula,  but  implying  existence 
with  emphasis"  BDB.;  elsw.  (1)  affirmative,  vfr  ^H  5S12,  t^'"1  TN  13517  (pleon- 
astic). (2)  interrogative  ir;n  142  =  53s  without  n  7311.  —  J  Sip]  n.m.  injustice 
antith.  np-ix  yi  53*  822.  —  5.  V?Sdj]  Qal  pf.  1  p.  s.  J  y'pj  (1)  c.  "?•;  deal 
bountifully  with  136  1167  11917  1428,  so  prob.  572  as  @.  (2)  c.  ace.  pers.  et  rei 
requite  y5  1821;  elsw.  c.  h  pers.  1378  Dt.  32s,  hp  Ps.  10310  Jo.  44  2  Ch.  2011. 
(3)  wean  a  child,  only  ptc.  Ps.  I3I2- 2  Is.  II8,  jnfroj  elsw.  Pr.  3112,  cf. 
jnn  awn  Ps.  547.  —  p1?1^]  Qal  ptc.  oW  denom.  tfiStf  peace,  the  one  in 
covenant  of  peace  with  me;  but  prob.  error  for  piVtr  obj.  sf.  as  »dV?B?  tr>N  4110 
vdW  5521,  D^DiStf  69'23.  —  njVwn  ]  Pi.  impf.  cohort.  1  s.,  c.  1  consec.  y/yhn 
(v.  6s).  i  consec.  after  three  syn.  lines  with  dn  and  before  three  syn.  lines 
of  apodosis,  suspicious,  esp.  as  sense  of  vb.  rescue  is  antith.  to  the  protasis  and 
must  be  of  the  nature  of  a  parenthesis.  But  such  a  parenthesis  would  not  be 
expressed  by  1  consec,  and  has  more  of  the  nature  of  a  gloss  than  the  thought 
of  the  poet,  who  seems  to  balance  the  three  lines  of  apodosis  over  against  the 
three  of  protasis.  Such  a  parenthesis  would  use  1  coord,  and  perfect  for 
single  act,  or  imperfect  for  frequentative;  but  then  why  cohort,  form?  Ges., 
De.,  Ba.  think  of  a  derivative  mng.  spoil,  despoiled  not  known  to  Heb.  elsw.  exc. 
in  n.  r\ihr\  plunder  2  S.  221  Ju.  1419;  but  found  in  Aram.  %,  E,  Houb.,  Dy.,  Gr., 
Che.,  Du.,  rd.  nxn^x"<,  y/yrh  oppress  Pss.  56'2  10642.  But  this  is  not  in  accord  with 
other  lines  of  protasis,  where  the  one  supposed  to  be  injured  is  a  friend  and  ally, 
and  not  an  adversary,  still  less  an  adversary  who  has  not  succeeded  in  accom- 
plishing anything.  The  line  is  not  consistent  with  the  context.  It  is  really  an 
antith.  gloss  which  anticipates  the  apodosis.  The  glossator  means  to  say,  he  has 
done  the  very  reverse  of  injury  to  his  friend :  he  has  delivered  habitually  his 
adversaries,  while  they  have  vainly  and  without  result  striven  against  him.  — 
X  Dpn]  adv.  in  vain,  without  accomplishing  anything,  v.  Ps.  25s  2  S.  I22  Is.  5511. 
—  6.  3^n]  is  a  gloss,  v.  j8.  —  ''C'oj]  me,  as  v.3  —  rirn]  1  coord,  with  Hiph. 
juss.  3  s.     X  [J^,J]  VD>>  n°t  found  in  Qal.     Hiph.  overtake,  c.  ace.  after  rpi  in 


58  PSALMS 

Ex.  159,  often  J  Pss.  f  1858,  fig.  of  battle  4018  6925.  —  Dbl»l]  1  coord.  Qal 
juss.  \  Don,  elsw.  91 13  /raz*/  under  foot.  —  P*<^]  <&w«  to  the  earth  J41  8940,  the 
life  1433  ||  no>,s  4426.  —  >>n]  n.  pi.  sf.  1  m.  ///y  ///Jr.  Jo^n  only,  n.m.  pi.  abst. 
life  :  (1)  physical  f  17"  215  269  3111  3418  63*  642  669  884  1034,  71  n*  fc  23°'  27* 
1285,  712  during  life  4919  63s  10433  1462;  (2)  as  welfare,  happiness  306  1333, 
»»n  ■?*<  42°  (so  also  by  emendation  42s  84s),  71  ItyD  271,  Tl  "VpD  3610  Pr.  io11 
1314  1427  1622,  71  mx  Ps.  1611  Pr.  56  1524.  —  **?33]  *«y  honour,  J  of  seat  of 
honour.  ||  B^fij ;  as  169  1082  ||  2^,  cf.  3018  c.  nor,  57°  c.  rnqr. —  ",?"u>]  down  to 
the  dust,  of  death,  as  2280  3010,  cf.  Is.  2619  ;  or  possibly  of  humiliation,  as  44s0 
1137  11925,  as  Is.  471  Mi.  717.  —  7.  nwp]  Qal  imv.  cohort,  v.  j5.  so  my  v.7c, 
najtf  v.8*  —  Nfc^jn]  Niph.  imv.  cohort.  N'J'j  J  Niph.  of  God,  lift  oneself  elsw. 
942 ;  of  gates  personified  247.  —  nV^aga]  pi.  cstr.  obj.  against  adversaries. 
%  nnaj  overfloxv,  usually  of  anger  and  only  such  in  \f/,  and  of  divine  anger, 
rage,  fury  7849  85*  90°-  n  ;  pi.  outbursts  of  rage  here,  cf.  Jb.  2I30,  contr. 
rps  nn3?  Jb.  4011.  —  rwjj]  Qal  imv.  cohort.  J  "M?]  vb.  Qal  r<?«^  oneself  to 
action:  of  God  7~  44s4  59s;  of  man  57s,  as  Ju.  512 ;  harp  and  lyre  Ps.  577-9 
=  1083 ;  rage  Ps.  78s8.  Polel.  rouse,  incite  to  activity,  subj.  Yahweh  808. 
Hiph.  as  Qal  3523,  prob.  also  7320. —  ,sn]  usually  interpreted  as  prep,  ht* 
3  sf.  1  ad  me,  for  me,  but  <S  Kvpte  6  6e6s  fwv  —  »^K  nw  as  in  v.2a3a.  \"iSk  1 
gives  us  needed  word  for  pentameter  and  prob.  occasioned  the  v-iSn  "»  v.2a •3a, 
where  nm  was  not  needed.  —  8.  ti3.td.-i]  Polel  impf.,  might  be  juss.,  relating 
to  run"1,  ||  imvs. ;  but  is  prob.  circumstantial  clause,  while  they  assemble,  v. 
1711.  —  7^?]  over,  above  it,  sf.,  refers  to  the  congregation,  prob.  gloss  of  interp. 
—  X  av>;:]  n.m.  height;  poetic  (1)   on  high,  elevated  place  75°,  cf.  Jb.  3918; 

(2)  elsw.  yf,  height  of  heaven  io5  1817  (=  1447)  6819  7119  73s  93*  10220  1481, 
so  here  ;  (3)  without  prep.,  The  One  on  High,  pred.  of  nw  56s  92°.  —  naitr] 
Qal  imv.  cohort.,  of  God,  implies  His  absence  from  His  heavenly  throne  of 
judgment.  So  |^,  Vrss.  and  most,  but  this  seems  not  to  suit  context. 
Rd.  with  Ra.,  Dy.,  Oort,  Gr.,  al.  natf,  vb.  sit  enthroned,  which  suits  context 
better,  as  95,  and  was  prob.  in  original.  —  9.  wqv  p*v  *<\  is  a  gloss  from 
9610.  The  original  Ps.  thought  of  a  controversy  between  friends.  This 
is  generalized  into  a  conflict  of  Israel  with  the  nations.  %  pn  vb.  Qal : 
(1)  act  as  judge,  minister  judgment,  iDJJ  504  i3514  =  Dt.  32s6,  D^Dp  Pss.  J9 
96™,  o^n1'  99,  so  the  king  722;  (2)  execute  judgment,  vindicate  in  battle, 
of  God  548,  the  king  no6.  This  vb.  is  syn.  with  the  more  comprehensive 
$  Bsc  :  (1)  act  as  lazvgiver,  governor,  and  judge,  in  the  most  comprehensive 
sense,  of  early  date  before  Jehoshaphat  established  w*OBVt  —  only  of  men 
in  \f/,  px  >DDB>  210  14811;  (2)  decide  controversies,  discriminating  betw.  per- 
sons, of  God  712  95  821.     There  is  no  reference  to  judgment  by  men  in  \p. 

(3)  execute  judgment;  {a)  discriminating,  of  man  only  58s  822;  (b)  vindi- 
cating, of  God,  c.  ace.  pers.  io18  261  431  5812.  fr»J3  79  3524,  of  man,  c.  ace. 
724  828;  (c)  condemning,  punishing,  of  man  10931  I4i6(?),  of  God  516; 
(d)  esp.  of  God's  theophanic  advent  to  judge  50°  75s  94s.  Vb.  c.  ace.  San  9° 
9618  989,  ps  828  9618  989,  0*DP  67s,  onc^D  75s.  Niph.  be  judged  920  37s8  1097. 
For  DBPD  v.  i5.   A  series  of  pentameters  begins  here,  all  of  which  are  glosses. — 


PSALM   VII.  59 

*|yiX3]  cf.  I821-25  17*0  3527  376  and  v.  42. —  ty  *sr>3]  phr.  a.\.  Jon  n.m. 
integrity  79  2521  41 13.  t  C.  ~\hn  Ps.  26l-  n  Pr.  io9'  19I  '207  286.  f  »S  °n  Pss. 
78™  1012  Gn.  205-6  (E)  1  K.  94.  — 10.  Nr-\DJ;"|  Qal  impf.  juss.  with  particle. 
J  nj  particle  of  entreaty  or  exhortation:  (1)  attached  to  imv.  8015  u825-25 
119108,  ironically  502'2,  cf.  Is.  4712  Jb.  4010;  (2)  to  impf.  now  I  pray  Thee  Pss. 
yio  n82-3.4  II976  I228  I241=i291;  (3)  with  particles  1152  u614-18. — 
t  "in i  vb.  Qal:  (1)  come  to  an  end,  be  no  more  710  I22  77°;  (2)  bring  to  an 
end,  complete  57s  (?)  1388.  It  is  a  late  word.  In  New  Heb.,  Aram.,  and 
Syriac,  complete.  —  D>?Bh  jn]  phr.  a.X.  For>n  v.^O^tth  /*. —  n^Sp-i  rrtaS  fro] 
is  based  on  Je.  II20,  where,  however,  the  order  of  nouns  is  reversed,  and  21? 
is  used  for  rVaS,  which  has  been  here  assimilated  in  form  to  n^Sp.  n"»aS  is 
used  elsw.  only  Is.  4418  Ps.  1254  and  Pr.  4t.,  and  is  late.  %  n^Sa  n.f.  only  pi. : 
(1)  physical  organ,  kidneys  13913;  (2)  the  reins,  as  seat  of  affections  and 
emotions  167  7321  Je.  122,  and  so  obj.  of  divine  scrutiny,  alw.  ||  2"?  Pss.  710 
26'2  Je.  u20  1710  201'2.  —  tna  ptc.  with  nominal  force  J  VlJn:i]  examine, 
scrutinise,  test:  (1)  God  subj.  II5  262  6610  818  13923  Je.  cp,  eyelids  of  God 
Ps.  114,  c.  ace.  3^  172  Je.  123  and  nrSj  710  Je.  II20,  cf.  201'2  +  ;  (2)  subj.  man, 
test,  tempt,  God  Ps.  95s  Mai.  310- 15.  —  pn*  D^rtSw]  late  style,  as  v.11,  cf.  Je. 
1 120  |i>"is  Og^.  13  did  not  use  D^nSw  in  such  phrases.  — 11.  chSn  Sp]  cf.  62s 
that  is  resting  upon  God  as  shield-bearer.  <J£  attaches  p^W  to  this  v.,  and 
renders  diKaia  ij  fiorideia  fiov,  reading  *T?0  for  "OJr;.  But  as  Che.  exclaims, 
"  Yahweh,  his  servant's  shield-bearer !  "  hy  is  as  Ba.,  Dy.,  Gr.  for  ^hy  expl. 
as  »Si?  instead  of  »SvJ  i?wr  w<?,  covering  me,  cf.  34.  —  T^']  P^  cstr-  X  ~^\  adj.: 
(1)  straight,  of  a  way  1077  Je.  319;  (2)  just,  upright,  (a)  of  God  Pss.  25s  9216, 
His  laws  199  119187,  nil  334;  (b)  of  man  37s7,  yn  >?V]  3714  (<g  aS)f  S3  n«£ 
7-"  II2  3211  3611  6411  9415  9711,  cf.  1254;  (3)  as  noun  sg.  coll.,  of  men 
II7  (dub.),  cf.  Jos.  io13,  elsw.  pi.  of  the  upright  among  the  people  over 
against  the  wicked,  common  in  WL.  and  late  Pss.  331  4915  10742  in1  11224 
14014;  (4)  abstr.  uprightness  1 1 18,  prob.  error  ^  for  itf  <&,  £,{£,  3,  Hi.,  Ba.  — 
12.  DO^tr]  Qal  ptc.  nominal  force,  see  v.9;  (g  adds  *ai  i<rxvpbs  ical  p.aKpbdvjxos, 
PBV.  strong  and  patient,  which  makes  a  good  pentameter.  But  this  leaves 
D^'Sd^  DlU  7SO,  for  which  <3  ^77  dpyrjv  iirdywv  nad'  eK&crTrjv  T\p.£pav,  which 
would  need  still  further  enlargement  to  make  another  pentameter.  Sx,  if 
negative  would  require  juss.  and  could  not  be  with  ptc.  cj?'r  Sn  a.X.,  but  v. 
ff>  for  Sk.  cv'r  Qal  ptc.  nominal  force,  %  D>n,  vb.  be  indignant,  only  here  \}/,  but 
Zc.  I12  Is.  6614  Mai.  I4  +.  \  Dtf  n.m.,  indignation,  of  God  384  6925  7849  10211. 
|  d'i,'~Sd3  every  day,  as  8810  1452.  — 13.  :ntl'>  nS-dn]  is  suited  to  the  gloss. 
yc6\  was  inserted  as  a  seam.  It  is  not  suited  to  context  of  v.2-6  in  the  original  Ps., 
and  it  makes  the  line  tetrameter  instead  of  trimeter.  nS~ox  is  protasis  antith. 
to  dn,  cf.  v.4-6,  followed  by  apodosis.  —  B^O1?*  ">3"^n]  Qal  impf.  c.  s:nn  emph. 
in  position.  This  phr.  is  a.X.  f  B^oS  vb.  Qal:  (l)  hammer  Gn.4.22  ;  (2)  whet 
sword  here,  cf.  I  S.  13'20,  of  eyes  Jb.  169.  Pu.  ptc.  524,  sharpened  razor,  as 
sim.  of  tongue.  —  ~\y\  "intfpj  n.  emph.  'p  "|-yi  tread  the  bow,  the  ancient  method 
of  bending  it  with  the  foot  instead  of  with  the  arm,  y13  n2  3714,  cf.  Je.  518 
La.  24,  312  Zc.  913,  cf.  also  yn-j-n  58s  (?)  644.  —  ^.r^]  )  consec.    Polel  ]ia 


60  PSALMS 

impf.  3  m.  sg.  sf.  3  f.,  continuation  of  previous  action.  The  pf.  with  1  consec. 
impf.  instead  of  impf.  of  first  clause  was  to  emphasize  over  against  the 
repeated  action  of  whetting  a  sword,  the  immediateness  of  the  single  act  of 
treading  the  bow  and  getting  ready  to  shoot;  both  are  graphic  — 14.  ^1] 
emph.  i  sf.  3  sg.  refers  to  enemy.  —  nig-^a]  a.X.,  but  cf.  Den  '3  Gn.  495, 
mrwo  o  Ez.  91.  —  D',?S-i]  Qal  ptc.  pi.  nominal  force,  f  [p*«i]  burn,  hotly  pur- 
sue, either  mng.  suitable  here,  cf.  Ob.18,  of  Israel  ravaging  Edom,  Ps.  io2,  of 
enemies  as  La.  41*.—  hyo\\  Qal  impf.  freq.  as  in  v.13  of  whetting  of  sword.— 
15.  njn]  Io,  behold,  of  graphic  description  v.  BZ>B.  —  lu^am]  Retracted 
accent  on  acct.  of  monosyl.  that  follows,  so  "imV166  v.  212;  * both  accents  are 
needed  for  measure.  Vb.  Pi.  impf.  3  m.,  graphic  description,  \  ^n,  elsw. 
Ct.  85-6,  denom.  spn  birth  pangs,  and  so  writhe  in  travail. —  mm]  1  consec. 
Qal  perf.  3  m.  carries  on  "?3n\  \  rnn  conceive  only  here  \p,  but  in  fig.  sense 
also  Is.  594  Jb.  1535.     J  Spy  n.m. :   (1)  trouble,  of  sorrow  io14  2518  73s-  ™  9010; 

(2)  trouble,  mischief,  as  done  to  others  717  9420  14010  ||.     px  7^   io7  cc1*; 

(3)  /W,  A/^«r,  very  late  WL.  Pss.  105**  10712.— J  -*gg  n.m.  in  pause: 
(1)  falsehood,  in  testimony,  doing  one  hurt,  'ir  ip  2712  Ex.  20 16  Dt.  1918. 
•tf  -qi  Pss.  52s  6312  Mi.  612  Je.  9*  4016.  f  v  net  Pss.  3119  1202  Pr.  io18 
177.  t  '*  'JBO  Ps.  1  19™  Jb.  13*;  (2)  deceit,  fraud,  tr  o>«  Pss.  35™  3820,  cf.  69* 
II978. 86.     (-j)     deception,    what     deceives,    disappoints,    and    betrays    3317 

1IQ29.104.118.128.163    ,^8.11.      (4)    He%    of   speech     fa     genera]>    ,ate    u§age    IQl7 

109-,  as  WL.  Here  -»ptf  in  unusual  sense  makes  the  line  too  long,  and  is 
interpretative  gloss.  — 16.  J  -V»3]  emph.  The  early  mngs.  cistern,  well, 
dungeon  are  not  in  yp,  but  (i)  pit,  as  dug  out  716  408  +  ;  (2)  the  Pit,  in  local 
sense  ||  hwv,  not,  however,  another  name  for  Sheol,  but  a  distinct  place  in 
Sheol,  subsequent  to  Ez.,  Ez.  3223  La.  353-  55  Is.  I415- 19  Pss.  304  885-7,  no  ni^ 
281  1437  Is.  38'8  Ez.  2620  32-5-  29-  »  so  also  Ez.  2620  3iH-i6  32i8.-24  pr.~ii2 
2817.  —  i^o?!.1]  1  consec.  Qal  impf.  carrying  on  the  action,  still  further  con- 
tinued as  result  in  bb*\.  —  ^p?]  Qal  impf.  i.p.  rel.  clause,  rel.  omitted,  as 
frequent  in  Poetry.—  J  rnr]  n. :  (1)  sink,  hole,  pit,  elsw.  9™  (?)  35?  94I8 
-f  4  t. ;  (2)  Pit,  of  Sheol,  syn.  ma,  subsequent  to  Ezr.  1610  3010  4910  5524  1034 
+  lot.  — 17.  ^BMna  a  v.:1;]  phr.,  elsw.  1  K.  233  Ob.15;  Qal  impf.  of  future 
expectation.  air  in  the  sense  of  J  requital,  c.  2,  elsw.  c.  S?  3513  (?),  i;  9415, 
S  547  (Kt.).  —  Ji.-.n]  n.  /a*,  top  of  head,  as  68**.—  J  D=n]  n.m.  violence, 
wrong,  ||  Sdj?  7#,  an  5510,  nwj  73°  interp.  of  ^n  7214,  other  uses  115  2519  2712 
3511  583  7420-  fDCn  tr«  violent  man  1849  (=  CD-n  b*H  2  S.  2249)  14012 
Pr.  331  1629.  D'Dcn  e*K  Ps.  14026  men  of  violent  deeds.  —  18.  rrrm]  Hiph. 
impf.  ||  rngitn  Pi.  impf.,  both  cohort,  united  by  1  coord.  ID?  denom.  mor 
song  {v.  Intr.  §  31).  —  mm]  is  gl.,  makes  line  too  long,  and  is  not  needed 
with  f»S?  (v.  Intr.  %  32). 


PSALM  VIII.  6 1 


PSALM     VIII.,    2    STR.    83-f-RF.    23. 

Ps.  8  is  an  evening  hymn  in  two  synth.  trimeter  octastichs, 
contrasting  the  glory  of  man  as  creature  with  the  glory  of  the 
Creator.  The  Strs.  are  enclosed  by  identical  trimeter  couplets, 
praising  the  name  of  Yahweh  as  widespread  in  all  the  earth 
(v.2a10).  An  initial  prayer  that  Yahweh  would  set  His  splen- 
dour above  the  heavens,  is  followed  by  a  contemplation  of  His 
strength,  in  the  speech  of  sucklings,  overcoming  His  enemies; 
and  of  the  insignificance  of  man  when  compared  with  moon 
and  stars  (v.26'5).  Man  made  lower  than  the  gods  is  yet  sover- 
eign of  all  creatures  (v.6*9). 

"yAHWEH,  our  Sovereign  Lord, 

How  magnificent  is  Thy  name  in  all  the  earth. 
C\  SET  Thy  splendour  above  the  heavens ! 

Out  of  the  mouth  of  little  children  and  sucklings 
Thou  dost  establish  strength,  because  of  Thine  adversaries, 
To  still  the  enemy  and  the  avenger. 
When  I  see  the  work  of  Thy  fingers. 
Moon  and  stars  which  Thou  hast  prepared; 
What  is  man  that  Thou  shouldst  be  mindful  of  him? 
Or  the  son  of  mankind  that  Thou  shouldst  visit  him? 
"VlfHEN  Thou  didst  make  him  a  little  lower  than  the  Elohim, 
With  glory  and  honour  crowning  him, 

Making  him  to  have  dominion  over  the  works  of  Thine  hands; 
All  things  Thou  didst  put  under  his  feet ; 
Cattle  small  and  large,  all  of  them, 
And  also  beasts  of  the  field, 
Birds,  and  fish  of  the  sea, 
Those  that  pass  through  the  paths  of  the  sea. 

YAHWEH,  our  Sovereign  Lord, 

How  magnificent  is  Thy  name  in  all  the  earth. 

Ps.  8  was  originally  in  IB,  and  then  taken  up  into  iftfl  and  IBIft 
{v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  In  the  latter  it  received  the  assignment  hy 
mrun,  probably  to  be  sung  to  a  well-known  vintage  song  (v.  Intr.  §  30). 
The  linguistic  evidence  favours  the  Persian  period  wjin  ">  v.2- 10,  elsw. 
only  Ne.  io30;  the  glory  of  God  D^Dtfri  by  v.2,  cf.  57s  12  (=  1086)  8319+,  all 
late;  opjnoi  3">in  v.3  elsw.  4417,  njx  v.8  a.X.,  for  mis.  The  relation  of  v.6"9  to 
Gn.  i26"28  is  evident.  dtiSn  dSx3  Gn.  I27  and  dttSnd  v.6  must  be  interpreted 
in  the  same  way  as  referring  to  gods,  that  is  God  and  angels,  in  accordance 
with  usage;  cf.  Pss.  868  077  1362;  cf.  v.7  with  Gn.  I28.  We  can  hardly  sup- 
pose that  Gn.  1  derived  its  conception  from  Ps.  8,  for  it  is  there  part  of  the 


62  PSALMS 

larger  conception,  and  is  therefore  original  and  Ps.  8  derivative.  The  mode 
of  creation  is,  however,  different.  Moon  and  stars  are  not  created  by  com- 
mand, but  by  tht  ringers  of  God,  v4.  This  is  more  like  the  mode  of  creation 
in  Gn.  27>  19  ;  and  there  seems  to  be  a  reference  to  the  superiority  of  man  in 
speech  of  Gn.  216-2',  in  the  emphasis  upon  the  speech  of  sucklings  v3.  This 
free  use  of  both  of  the  poems  of  creation,  originally  in  separate  documents  ot 
the  Hexateuch,  but  first  compacted  in  the  age  of  Ezra,  is  best  explained  by 
the  supposition  that,  when  the  Ps.  was  composed,  the  Pentateuch  had  already 
been  compacted  in  essentially  its  present  form.  The  Ps.  must  therefore  be 
subsequent  to  Ezra.  The  Ps.  is  an  evening  hymn ;  with  no  personal  or  his- 
toric references,  but  entirely  general,  adapted  to  the  whole  congregation  of 
Israel ;  and  therefore  we  may  conclude  that  it  was  composed  for  the  con- 
gregation, and  for  purposes  of  public  worship.  It  is  admirably  suited  for 
this  purpose,  being  symmetrical  in  structure,  of  two  equal  Strs.,  having  an 
introductory  and  concluding  Rf.  The  Ps.  was  probably  composed  in  time 
of  peace  and  prosperity,  for  the  tone  is  peaceful  and  joyous. 


Rf.  2a,  b  is  a  trimeter  couplet,  the  first  line  however  without  the 
last  beat,  in  order  to  get  a  metrical  pause  before  the  utterance  of 
the  supreme  thought.  This  is  the  Rf.  which  also  closes  the  Ps. 
v10  and  so  encloses  it.  Our  Sovereign  Lord  ]  pi.  emph.  Heb., 
not  sufficiently  expressed  by  "Lord"  EV8. — How  magnificent^ 
the  majesty  of  God  in  its  wide  extent,  amplitude,  in  all  the  earth~\ 
throughout  its  entire  extent,  cf.  76s  93*.  "  Excellent,"  EV8.,  sug- 
gests ethical  rather  than  physical  extent ;  "  glorious,"  Dr.,  "  ma- 
jestic," Kirk,  are  too  general. —  Thy  name']  summing  up  God's 
manifestation  of  Himself  as  the  object  of  commemoration  and 
praise. 

St.  I.  is  a  trimeter  octastich,  composed  of  an  introductory  line  of 
petition,  a  synth.  tristich,  and  a  tetrastich  of  two  syn.  couplets,  the 
second  synthetic  to  the  first.  —  2c.  O  set]  so  most  easily  the  Heb. 
cohort,  imv.  But  a  later  scribe,  wishing  to  connect  with  previous 
lines,  and  overlooking  their  independence  as  the  Rf.,  inserted  the 
relative,  without  venturing  to  change  the  form,  and  so  has  given 
difficulty  to  interpreters  from  the  most  ancient  times.  —  Thy  splen- 
dour] rich  and  brilliant  display  of  majesty  ;  "  glory,"  EV8.,  "  maj- 
esty," Dr.,  JPSV.  are  too  general. — above  the  heavens]  PBV., 
AV.,  as  in  all  other  passages ;  "  upon  the  heavens  "  RV.,  Dr., 
JPSV.,  Kirk.,  al.,  though  grammatically  correct,  is  not  justified  by 
usage.     The  heavens  are  antith.  to  earth  of  the  Rf.     The  poet 


PSALM  VIII.  63 

would  say :  "Thy  name  is  widespread  in  all  the  earth,  magnify  it 
still  more,  set  it  above  the  heavens  in  the  splendour  of  its  mani- 
festations." —  3.  Out  of  the  mouth  of  little  children]  those  just 
able  to  speak,  and  in  this  respect,  notwithstanding  their  weakness 
especially  as  sucklings,  superior  to  all  other  creatures,  —  a  con- 
ception based  on  the  naming  of  the  animals  by  Adam  Gn.  219~20.  — 
Thou  dost  establish']  emph.  present.  "  Ordain  "  PBV.,  AV.  in  mod- 
ern usage  is  too  strong  and  specific.  —  Strength']  over  against  the 
enemies  of  God,  sufficient  to  silence  them  if  not  destroy  them. 
The  poet  may  have  been  thinking  of  the  creative  strength  of  God's 
speech,  of  Gn.  1,  and  so  of  the  strength  that  God  had  established 
in  human  speech  even  of  little  children  as  superior  to  physical 
prowess.  It  is  probable  that  he  was  thinking  of  the  divine  strength 
as  recognised  and  praised  by  children,  in  accord  with  the  render- 
ing of  (3.  —  because  of  thine  adversaries]  RV.,  in  accord  with 
Heb.,  and  not "  enemies,"  PBV.,  AV.,  which  so  translate  two  dif- 
ferent Heb.  words.  —  to  still]  to  silence  their  hostile  speech  by 
the  praise  of  children. — 4.  When  I  see  the  work  of  Thy  fingers^] 
The  poet  looks  up  to  the  heavens  by  night,  above  which  he  would 
have  the  splendour  of  Yahweh  set,  and  sees  there  the  work  of  His 
fingers.  —  the  moon  and  stars]  sufficiently  indicate,  in  the  ab- 
sence of  the  sun,  that  it  is  night,  and  that  the  author  is  thinking 
of  the  heavens.  A  prosaic  copyist  inserted  heavens  in  the  first 
line,  and  so  destroyed  its  measure.  Moon  and  stars  were  created, 
and  put  in  their  places  in  the  heavens  by  the  fingers  of  God. 
Gn.  27"19  seems  to  underlie  this  conception  of  the  mode  of  creation ; 
only  there  man  and  animals  were  formed  by  the  hand  of  God,  as 
a  sculptor  carves  out  images  or  as  a  potter  moulds  them  into  clay. 
Here  fingers  are  used  with  reference  to  moon  and  stars,  and 
the  verb  prepared  suggests  the  builder  of  24s  6$7  11990  Pr.  319  8s7, 
the  most  frequent  conception  of  the  mode  of  creation,  especially 
in  later  poets ;  only  the  builder  in  this  particular  reference  to 
moon  and  stars  is  an  artist  executing  the  finest  kind  of  work  by 
the  artistic  skill  of  his  fingers.  The  "  ordained  "  of  EVS.  is  not 
suited  in  modern  usage  (as  it  was  in  old  English)  to  the  concep- 
tion of  the  use  of  the  fingers  of  God.  —  5.  What  is  man.  II  The 
son  of  mankind]  not  any  particular  man,  but  the  human  kind, 
man  as  a  race.     When  compared  with  moon  and  stars  created  by 


64  PSALMS 

God  and  manifesting  His  splendour,  what  does  mankind  amount 
to,  that  God  should  take  any  account  of  him  ? —  that  thou  shouldst 
be  mindful  of  him.  ||  that  thou  shouldst  visit  him'].  These  in 
Heb.  are  final  clauses,  with  subjunctive  mood,  and  not  to  be 
rendered  with  EV8.  by  the  indicative  mood  as  statements  of 
fact. 

Str.  II.  is  also  a  trimeter  octastich,  composed  of  an  introduc- 
tory line  as  protasis,  and  an  apod,  consisting  of  a  syn.  distich, 
and  a  synth.  pentastich,  all  in  one  sentence.  —  6.  When  Thou 
didst  make  him].  The  Heb.  Waw  consec.  does  not  admit  of  the 
rendering  as  an  independent  clause,  "Thou  madest "  PBV.,  or 
causal,  "for  Thou  hast  made"  AV.,  RV.,  or  adv.,  "and  yet" 
JPSV. ;  but  requires  either  "and  thou  hast"  Dr.,  going  back  to 
the  historic  act  of  creation  of  moon  and  stars  of  v4,  and  carrying  it 
on  into  this  new  act  of  creation  of  man ;  or  else  protasis  of  tem- 
poral clause  as  given  above.  —  a  little  lower  than  the  Elohim] 
referring  to  the  creation  of  man  in  the  image  of  Elohim  Gn.  i27, 
and  the  consultation  of  God  with  other  Elohim,  "  Let  us  make  " 
Gn.  i26.  As  the  context  is  strictly  monotheistic,  and  the  whole 
passage  is  so  late  in  origin  that  polytheism  is  not  to  be  thought  of 
in  the  mind  of  the  poet,  we  must  think  of  the  Elohim  as  com- 
prehending God  and  angels,  the  latter  being  in  their  historic 
origin,  the  ancient  polytheistic  gods,  degraded  to  ministering  ser- 
vants of  the  one  God  Yahweh.  Therefore,  they  are  not  merely 
"angels"  Heb.  27,  PBV.,  AV.,  or  "God"  RV.,  JPSV.  and  most 
moderns,  or  "  divinity,"  as  abstract  Heng.,  Hu.,  Pe. ;  but  God  and 
angels,  divine  beings,  gods.  —  With  glory  and  honour  crowning 
him].  When  man  was  created  in  the  image  of  the  Elohim ,  Gn. 
i26"27,  he  was  crowned  with  their  glory  and  honour,  at  his  inaugu- 
ration as  sovereign  of  the  creatures.  The  splendour  of  Yahweh 
set  above  the  heavens  is  reflected  in  His  image,  man,  whom  He 
has  crowned  as  His  representative  to  rule  over  the  earth.  — Making 
him  to  have  dominion]  as  crowned  king  of  the  animal  and  vege- 
table kingdom  man  has  rule  over  them.  —  Thou  didst  put  under 
his  feet]  a  paraphrase  of  Gn.  i26"28;  two  different  but  syn.  verbs 
are  used  with  essentially  the  same  meaning.  —  Over  the  works  of 
Thine  hands  ||  all  things]  on  earth  antith.  moon  and  stars,  the 
work  of  Yahweh's  fingers  in  heaven.     These  works  are  described 


PSALM  VIII.  65 

by  specimens,  using  syn.  words  to  those  of  Gn.  i26"28.  —  those  that 
pass  through^  doubtless  refers  to  the  sea  monsters  of  Gn.  i21. 

2.    irjiN  nw]  line  shortened  for  metrical  pause  as  I1.     %  |nx  n.m.  lord 

(1)  master  125  10521,  intensive  pi.  1232;  (2)  husband  4512,  intensive  pi.; 
(3)  king  no1,  pi.  1363;  (4)  God  jhn  1147,  tP**n  Ss  pin  075  Jos.  311. 13  (j) 
Zc.  414  65  Mi.  413;  intensive  pi.  sovereign  lord  DunNn  >jnN  Ps.  1363  =  Dt.  io17, 
irj-w  1355  1475  Ne.  810,  u>j-\n  mm  Ps.  52-10  Ne.  io30.  For  »jt*  7/.  Intr.  §  32. 
—  +  "P^]  acU-  wzafe  spread,  magnificent,  majestic,  of  waters  of  sea  93*  Ex.  1510, 
of  kings  Ps.  13618,  of  Yahweh  76s  93*,  His  name  52-10;  of  nobles  163  (f^) 
(as  Ju.  513-25  Je.  143  25s4  Is.  io34),  but  better  4§  vb.  ■nN.-JfiNrb]  as 
v.10  195  457  1057.  —  nn— iu;n]  rel.  c.  Qal  imv.  cohort,  ^/jnj,  rel.  defined  by 
rpin.  Bo.  interprets  as  permissive  "  mayst  thou  set."  Ki.,  Genebr.,  al.  as  infin. 
cstr.  for  usual  nn,  as  mi  for  nvj  Gn.  46s,  "  the  setting  of  whose  splendour." 
3  qui  posuisti,  <§,  J&,  2,  Hu.,  De.,  Pe.,  Gr.,  al.,  RV.  This  would  imply  nnnj, 
Ammon,  Koster,  Oort,  al.,  unless  as  Ba.  these  Vrss.  interpreted  thus  an  inf. 
cstr.  @  6'rt  eirripOr]  suggested  to  Ew.,  Ri.,  al.  run  =  jjn,  extend,  stretch  out;  but 
these  vbs.  do  not  exist  in  Heb.,  and  this  mng.  does  not  correspond  with  (5f. 
Schultens  rd.  run  x\.  =  praise  ;  Michaelis,  njn  Qal  pf.  =  sonat,  Dy.  n_jn  =  Pu.pf. 
be  praised;  cf.  Ju.  511,  so  Ko.IL  ^  § 595  =  quod  narratur.  Buhl  suggests  the 
familiar  nsj,  but  this  would  be  so  difficult  textually  that  it  would  be  just  as 
easy  to  think  of  at':,  which  corresponds  exactly  with  @.  It  is  best  to  suppose 
with  Che.  that  "WH  is  gloss  of  a  prosaic  copyist  who  wished  to  connect  with 
previous  line,  not  knowing  that  it  was  a  Rf.,  and  therefore  should  be  as  inde- 
pendent here  as  in  v.10.  Then  the  cohort,  imv.  is  most  appropriate  at  be- 
ginning of  the  Str.  This  also  corresponds  with  the  usage  of  d^d^.tSj?, 
which  is  alw.  over,  above  the  heavens  576-12=io86  1134,  cf.  8319. — 
\  Tin]   n.m.  vigour,  splendour,  majesty,  (i)   of  king  -nm   1W  216  454  III3; 

(2)  of  God  82  14813,  11m  -nn  96s  1041;  cf.  1455  —  3.  Ping?]  Pi.  pf.  2  ms.  God 
subject,  possibly  aorist  referring  to  creation  of  man ;  but  prob.  pf.  of  general 
truth.  X  icp  vb.  Qal  fotmd,  of  creation  c.  ace.  earth  24s  ;  cf.  78s9  8912  10226 
1045,  cf.  v.8  sq.  S,  God's  commands  119152;  Pi.  establish  83. —  J  rj;]  n.m. 
strength,  (1)  material  and  physical  308  62s  6834  717  8911  no2  1501,  ry  S"up  614 
Ju.  951  Pr.  1810;  (2)  personal,  social,  political,  bestowed  by  Yahweh  1  S.  210 
Pss.  2911  6836  84s  8610  1 38s,  Yahweh  the  strength  of  His  people  812,  for  de- 
fence 287-8  462  5910- 18  84s  8918,  ||  nyvth  n814  =  Ex.  152  =  Is.  122,  cf.  1408 ; 

(3)  strength  of  Yahweh  as  attribute  6212  6835  931  994,  as  theme  of  praise  291 
967  (6  ri/ijw)  6835(<g  Ufrv),  so  83  (<g  alvov,  J},3,&,  2,  Bar.  Heb.,  Mt.  2116) 
5917,  in  connection  with  sacred  places  63s  (||  iUd),  cf.  96s,  exerted  against 
enemies  Ex.  1513  Pss.  2i2- 14  663  6829  7413  7716  78s6  9011  1054,  manifested  in  con- 
nection with  the  Ark  7861  1328  Aq.,  2  icpdros  83.  1&  Htvhp. —  Dgjnp*  a^t»] 
elsw.  4417.  2^;x  v.  j8.  D^nn  Hithp.  ptc.  nominal  force,  J  Dp)  vb.  Qal 
take  vengeance,  subj.  God  c.  S>'  99s.  Hithp.  ptc.  83  4417,  avenge  oneself,  of 
men.  —  4.  nN-iN~\:>]  Temporal  clause  apod.  v.5.  —  T5'f]  is  a  gloss;  it  makes 
line  too  long,  and  is  unnecessary  for  mng.  —  rpn'paXN  nn?c]   phr.    a.\.  nirprj 

F 


66  PSALMS 

work  of  God  in  creation  Pss.  10322  ic>418-24-31  13914,  of  God's  hands  87  192 

10226  1388. —  ">#*]   unnecessary  gl.,  it  makes  line  too  long. n/ijj  >a]  fully 

written  Polel  pf.  2  m.  i.p.  pr.  —  5.  no]  in  antithesis  to  re  v.2a;  cf.  i443(:nN). — 
X  "nj£  (0  co11-  f°r  mankind  85  903  1443,  antith.  D^nSn  73s,  cf.  10316  io415- 16, 
antith.  Yahweh  and  Israel,  mere  man  920-21  io18  562  6612;  (2)  of  individual 
man  5514,  pi.  269  5524  59s  76s  11924  13919.  —  ||  D^K-fa]  J  D^s  n.m.  (1)  ;«««■ 
*t»4  coll.  174  227  367  4918- 21  5612  5812  6013  6819  73*  761'1  78°°  827  9410-  n  I0414- 23 
10514  10813  1154  u86-8  119184  1242  i358-K  1402  1444,  dika  Sa  116",  onuSa 
396-12  6410,  also  cpn  ]2  85  (=  d^h  1443)  8o18  1463,  usually  07s  ya  n4  i22-9 
H2  (=  533)  21 n  3V20  '3313  3618  458  575  582(?)  666  8948  903  iojr8- 16'  »•  •>  115™ 
14512,  antith.  u;,s  >ja,  elsw.  49s  6210  to  D^Sn;  (2)  individual  man,  only  32s 
84s-13.  —  *a]  that,  introducing  final  clauses  with  Qal  impf.  2  s.  c.  sf.  3  m. 
"U7.-T7,  U^pn  in  rhyme.  J  "dt  vb.  remember,  recall  to  mind  I.  (1)  «««  subj. 
(a)  past  experience  42°  1371,  cf.  jf,  neg.  1376;  (b)  doings  of  Yahweh  7712 
(Qr.  Kt.  Hiph.  better)  1055  1435,  neg.  78"  1067,  obj.  clause  with  >z  7836, 
style  of  D ;  (2)  remember  persons  10916  ;  (3)  remember  Yahweh,  keep 
Him  in  mind  427  637  77*,  abs.  22^,  name  of  Yahweh  11955,  His  laws, 
10318  11952.  II.  God  subj.  (1)  remember  persons  with  kindness,  neg. 
886,  c.  ace.  913  742  1064  I1512,  mankind  85,  c.  V  pers.  257  13623;  (2)  re- 
member the  devotion  of  His  servants,  c.  ace.  204  1321  ;  (3)  His  cove- 
nant 1058  10645  in6  11949,  His  mercy  25°  98s,  His  word  10542,  extenuating 
circumstances  78s9  8948  10314 ;  (4)  sins  257  79s,  reproach  7418-  22  89^,  the  day 
of  Jerusalem  1377.  Niph.  be  remembered,  c.  sx  10914;  neg.  =  no  longer 
exist  83s.  Hiph.  (1)  cause  to  be  remembered,  keep  in  reviembrance,  c.  ace. 
rei  4518 ;  (2)  mention,  c.  a  208,  c.  ace.  8j*,  works  of  Jahweh  7712  (?),  His 
righteousness  7116;  (3)  make  an  Azkara,  titles  of,  381  701.  —  n,->5  vb.  Qal 
(1)  visit  graciously  85  65 10  8015  1064 ;  (2)  to  search  173,  punish  59°  89s3. 
Hiph.  (1)  entrust,  c.  T3  316;  (2)  appoint  over,  c.  <*?j?  1096.  —  6.  wnDHFij]  1  con- 
sec.  Pi.  impf.  2  s.  with  sf.  3  s.,  introduces  a  new  Str.,  and  is  a  change  of  tense 
and  cannot  carry  on  previous  impfs.,  protasis  of  temporal  clause  with  apod. 
v76  Tintf,  the  intervening  clauses  being  circumstantial.  —  3\"6nd]  <3,S&,  ?£,  Heb. 
27  AV.  angels  ;  Aq.,  2,  6,  3  God ;  so  most  moderns.  Hu.,  Pe.  divinity,  abst., 
but  there  is  no  usage  to  justify  it.  D^nSn  n.m.  pi.,  %  as  real  pi.:  (1)  rulers 
Ex.  216  227  8-8-27  Ju.  58  Pss.  821-6  1381;  (2)  superhuman,  divine  beings,  in- 
cluding God  and  angels.  This  is  the  most  natural  interp.  of  Gn.  I26- 27  with 
1  pi.  vb.,  so  here,  cf.  Jb.  387,  where  the  O^Sh  \n  take  part  in  the  creation ; 
(3)  angels  Ps.  977  =  DViSn(n)  ^a  Jb.  i«  2*  387  Gn.  62-  4  (J) ;  (4)  gods  Pss.  868 
1362,  D^Djyn  »nSn  96s  Dt.  614  138,  'n  Sd  Pss.  95s  964  977« 9  1356.  For  use  of  d\-iSn 
for  God  (v.  Intr.  §  32).  —  "nrn  T>aa]  phr.  a.\.,  cf.  TOT'  -v\n  216  of  king. — 
X  far]  n.m.  (1)  abundance,  riches,  4917- 18  Gn.  31 x  (J)  Is.  io3  +.  (2)  honour, 
splendour,  glory  :  of  extern,  conditional  circumstances,  (a)  of  man,  at  his  crea- 
tion as  crowned  by  God  with  -nrn  'a  Ps.  8s;  the  king  is  given  'a  (||  -nm  tin) 
216;  (b)  of  things:  the  restored  holy  land  8412  ;  (<r)  of  God's  glory  in  his- 
toric and  ideal  manifestations  to  the  pious  mind:  Yahweh's  name  is  a  name 
of  glory  7219;   in  the  temple  His  glory  is  seen  26s  63s;  it  is  D^Dtf  Sp  1134 ; 


PSALM  viii.  6y 

p«n  ^3  Sy  576-  n  =  1085  ;  in  a  thunderstorm  He  is  m33n  Sn  29s;  His  glory 
is  oSiyS  10481;  great  1385  ;  the  heavens  declare  *?H  'a  192;  with  refer,  to  the 
divine  reign  14^- 12  ;  He  is  1133P  tjSd.  247- 8-  9- 10.  He  will  appear  in  glory 
10217 ;  His  glory  wiil  dwell  in  the  land  8510  ;  the  earth  will  be  filled  with 
it  7219 ;  it  will  be  declared  among  the  nations  and  all  will  see  it  97s ;  and 
peoples  and  kings  revere  it  10216.  (3)  honour:  of  position,  '33  on  II29;  '3  np1? 
7324.  (4)  honour,  reputation,  of  character :  of  man,  antith.  noSp  4s  (also  2  Ch. 
2618  Ec.  io1  Pr.  203  2121  25s7).  (5)  »iy  honour:  poet,  of  seat  of  honour  in 
the  inner  man,  the  noblest  part  of  man,  ||  tfw  f  ;  ||  a?  169  1082 ;  called  upon 
to  idt  3013  (rd.  >ni33  for  "1133);  nil?  57s.  (6)  honour,  reverence,  glory  :  as 
due  or  ascribed  to  one:  (a)  of  man :  ||j:sr>  62s;  (0)  of  God:  rpv  '3  799; 
S  '3  pj  1151;   inSnn  '3  o^  662;   S  ryi  '3  am  291  967 ;  S  intf  '3  an>  29s  96s; 

M3tf  '3  "IDT  662 ;  0MJ3  MW3  13D  96s ;  fnttfeo  '3  1DN  I4511 ;  1133  1CN  299  ; 
'33  «Sr  exult  with  (ascription  of)  glory  1495.  (7)  glory :  as  object  of 
honour  and  reverence :  my  glory  (the  one  I  glorify)  34 ;  D1133  their  glory 
10620;  for  n-1133  v.  4514.  \  inn  n.m.  (1)  ornament,  Wp  *37?a,  priestly  robes 
as  sacred  ornaments  no3  (but  rd.  mn  mountains,  after  (5,  2).  (2)  splen- 
dour: majesty  conferred  on  man  8s,  king  216,  cf.  454-  5  ;  but  esp.  of  Yahweh 
Himself  29*  9016  96s  1041  in3  1455,  His  kingdom  14512.  (3)  honour, glory  : 
for  saints  of  Yahweh  1499.  —  *niB?n]  Pi.  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  s.  circumstantial.  — 
7.  -inWpn]  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  s.,  prob.  originally  at  end  of  line  for  rhyme, 
and  most  proper  for  circumstantial  clause.  %  S^_'?3  vb.  Qal,  rule,  have  do?nin- 
ion,  over:  c.  3  of  man  1914  10521  10641,  cf.  ptc.  D*1^.  S#D  I0520 ;  of  God  2229 
5914  8910  10319 ;  abs.  667.  f  Hiph.  cause  to  rule,  c.  ace.  pers.,  3  rei  87  Jb. 
25s  Dn.  II39.  —  Sb]  emph.  in  position;  abs.  without  article  elsw.  74s  145 16 
comprehending  all  that  context  suggests.  —  nn#]  fully  written  Qal  pf.  2  m. 
n^.  —  8.  tn.J*]  n.m.  flock,  cf.  DJKJi  Nu.  32s4  (JE),  variation  of  J*tt  small  cattle. 
—  to'flSs]  large  cattle,  oxen,  as  Dt.  713  284-18-61  Is.  3024  Pr.  144.  —  oVu]  sum- 
ming up,  "made  more  independent  and  emphatic  by  being  placed  .  .  .  after 
the  word  which  it  qualifies,"  BZ>B.  —  ^3  \  with  suffixes  8*  3420  62*  674- 6  826 
10227  io424-27  i394-16  1474 ;  1^3  "  referring  to  the  mass  of  things  or  persons 
meant,"  B£>B.  29s  534  (=  Van  I43).  —  Jan]  and  also  88  ji™  7821  84s 
14812.  —  nfe>   monaj   Jo.  222,  mfc  niona  Jo.  i20,  cf.  i  S.  1744.     %  nnna  n.f. 

(1)  &<m/,    antith.    man   367    1041*   1358,  as   inferior   to   man  4918  21   73s2; 

(2)  antith.  wild  beasts  14810,  associated  with  field  88,  mountains  5010,  cf. 
10738;  (3)  seldom  wild  beast  1479.  —  9.  o;p^  nsx]  phr.  a.X.  takes  place  of 
D^Dtfn  tyiy  Gn.  i26  to  which  it  is  assimilated,  wvy  is  unnecessary  here,  and 
makes  line  too  long.  —  13'j?]  Qal  ptc.  lap  vb.  pass  over,  through  :  large  body 
of  water,  Is.  ^21  of  ship;  here  of  water  animals.  It  is  a  poetic  substitute  for 
n^%  Gn.  121.28.  cf>  Lv#  Il46  (H)  Ps.  69s5.  —  3<K  plniK]  phr.  a.X.  Jni* 
n.m.  path:  (1)  literal,  of  sea-animals  89,  of  sun  196;  (2)  kg.,  path  of  life,  for- 
tune 1393  1424,  iieHp  'n  2711;  (3)  fig.,  »W«  0/life  1199,  ways  of  Yahweh 
215 10,  as  norm  for  man  25*  4419  11915,  D«n  nit*  i6u  Pr.  219  56  1524,  path  of 
wickedness  Pss.  174  119101. 104. 128 ;  cf#  svnt  ^-,  tim 


68  PSALMS 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.,   22  alphabetical  str.  4*. 

Pss.  9  and  10  were  originally  one.  The  congregation  thanks 
Yahweh  in  temple  worship  for  His  wondrous  works  of  deliverance 
from  the  nations,  and  that  He  has  become  a  high  refuge  to  His 
oppressed  people  (92-5'  10"n).  They  pray  that  He,  who  has  in  the 
past  lifted  them  from  the  gates  of  death,  may  be  gracious  and  ter- 
rorise the  nations  now  afflicting  them  (914"15'20-21).  He  seems  to 
stand  afar  off,  while  the  nations  are  contending,  and  ignoring  Him ; 
and  with  craft  are  crushing  His  host  with  impunity  (io1"11).  They 
plead  that  Yahweh,  their  everlasting  king,  will  arise,  destroy  the 
nations  from  the  land,  and  do  justice  for  the  oppressed  (io12~18). 
Later  editors  substitute  for  the  original,  detailed  statements  of  a 
more  external  and  dogmatic  kind :  that  Yahweh  had  given  over 
the  nations  to  everlasting  destruction  (9^7),  that  He  was  the  ever- 
lasting king,  ruling  in  justice  (9s"9),  that  the  nations  were  caught 
in  their  own  pits  and  snares  (916~17),  and  tnat  they  were  doomed  to 
Sheol  (918) ;  but  that  Yahweh' s  people  would  not  be  forgotten  (919) ; 
and  the  congregation  are  invoked  to  praise  their  king  enthroned  in 
Zion  (912-13). 

[   WILL  give  thanks  with  all  my  mind  unto  Thee, 
I  will  tell  all  Thy  wondrous  works, 
I  will  be  glad  and  I  will  exult  in  Thee, 
I  will  make  melody,  'Elyon  unto  Thy  name. 
"DECAUSE  mine  enemies  turned  backward, 

They  stumble  and  they  perish  at  Thy  presence; 

For  Thou  hast  done  judgment  and  right  in  my  favour, 

Thou  didst  sit  on  Thy  throne  judging  righteously. 


AND  so  Thou  art  become  a  high  refuge  for  the  oppressed, 
A  high  refuge  for  times  of  dearth ; 
And  they  that  know  Thee  trust  in  Thee; 
For  Thou  dost  not  forsake  them  that  seek  Thee. 

"RE  gracious  to  me,  see  my  affliction ; 

Thou  that  liftest  me  up  from  the  gates  of  death  ; 

In  order  that  I  may  tell  Thy  praise. 

In  the  gates  of  the  daughter  of  Zion  may  rejoice. 


*  These  marks  indicate  that  parts  of  the  Ps.  have  been  omitted.     V.  Comments 
and  notes. 


PSALMS   IX.  AND  X.  69 

YAHWEH,  let  not  (mere)  men  prevail; 

Let  the  nations  be  judged  before  Thy  face. 

O  appoint  Terror  for  them 

That  the  nations  may  know  that  they  are  (mere)  men. 

Yy  HY  standest  Thou  in  the  distance, 
Hidest  in  times  of  dearth  ? 
In  their  pride  they  hotly  pursue  the  afflicted; 
Let  them  be  caught  in  that  they  have  planned. 
HTHE  wicked  doth  contemn  Yahweh: 

"According  to  the  height  of  His  anger,  He  will  not  require, 
There  is  no  God,"  are  his  devices. 
His  ways  are  defiled  at  all  times. 
f")N  high  are  Thine  acts  of  judgment,  at  a  distance  from  him; 
As  for  his  adversaries,  he  puffeth  at  them  ; 
He  saith  in  his  mind,  "  I  shall  not  be  moved," 
(He  doth  swear)  "  In  all  generations  (I  shall  be)  without  evil." 
UIS  mouth  is  full  of  deceits, 
Under  his  tongue  is  mischief  ; 

He  sitteth  down  in  the  places  of  ambush  of  settlements, 
In  secret  places  he  slayeth  the  innocent. 
LJ  IS  eyes  spy  on  Thy  host, 

He  lieth  in  ambush  in  his  secret  place  as  a  lion, 
In  his  covert  to  seize  the  afflicted, 

That  he  may  seize  hold  of  the  afflicted,  dragging  him  away, 
(UE  doth  hunt)  the  oppressed  with  his  net,  and  he  sinks  down, 
And  Thy  host  falls  because  of  his  great  numbers  ; 
He  doth  say  in  his  mind,  "'El  hath  forgotten, 
He  hath  hidden  His  face,  He  doth  not  see." 
Q  ARISE,  lift  up  Thy  hand, 
Forget  not,  'El,  the  afflicted. 
Wherefore  doth  the  wicked  contemn, 
Say  in  his  mind,  "  Thou  dost  not  require  it "  ? 
"THOU  hast  seen  the  trouble  and  grief, 

Thou  beholdest  to  requite  with  Thy  hand ; 
Upon  Thee  Thy  host  leaveth  it, 
Of  the  orphan  Thou  art  the  helper. 
"D  REAK  the  arm  of  the  wicked, 

Let  his  wickedness  be  sought  out,  let  it  not  be  found ; 
O  King,  forever  and  ever, 
Destroy  the  nations  out  of  the  land, 
•y  HE  desire  of  the  afflicted  Thou  hast  heard, 

Thou  settest  Thy  mind  (upon  them),  Thou  harkenest; 
To  judge  the  orphan  and  oppressed, 
To  terrify  (mere)  man  from  the  land. 


Pss.  9-10  were  originally  one  as  in  ®,  U,  3.  They  were  separated  for 
liturgical  purposes  as  in  |§,  and  therefore  Ps.  10  was  left  without  title,  and  in 
modern  Protestant  and  Jewish  Vrss.  the  Pss.  are  numbered  one  higher  than 


JO  PSALMS 

in  the  Oriental,  Greek,  and  Roman  Churches  from  Ps.  10  to  Ps.  147  (v.  Intr. 
§  42).  The  .t?d  at  the  close  of  Ps.  9  is  an  additional  evidence  of  the  original 
unity  of  the  two  Pss.,  for  it  indicates  a  place  where  a  selection  might  close 
(v.  Intr.  §41).  The  Ps.  was  in  $3,  then  in  £H,  and  subsequently  in  J32& 
(v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33),  in  which  last  it  was  appointed  to  be  sung  by  male 
sopranos,  or  falsettos  (pS  pidS;?  [*?;?]  v.  Intr.  §  34).  As  Che.  says,  the  Ps. 
is  "  partly  trimeters,  partly  tetrameters,  indicating  either  the  imperfect  skill 
of  the  psalmist  in  the  management  of  his  metre,  or  the  interference  of  a 
second  writer  with  the  original  poem.  The  second  hypothesis  is  the  more 
probable.  Originally  the  poem  was,  no  doubt,  a  perfect  alphabetical  psalm, 
at  least  so  far  as  relates  to  the  consistency  of  the  metre  and  the  number  of 
stanzas."  The  nine  strophes  with  K,  3,  \  n,  S,  p,  -\,  v,  n  are  essentially 
in  their  original  form.  Six  others  may  be  recovered  from  the  present  text. 
(1)  Str.  *  in  the  present  text  is  9I8-19.  but  this  is  really  composed  of  a  trimeter 
couplet,  v.18,  and  a  tetrameter  couplet,  v.19,  and  is  a  late  addition.  The 
Str.  is  really  v.20-21,  disguised  by  the  prefixing  of  ncip  prematurely  before  io12, 
in  order  to  make  a  suitable  close  for  the  Ts.  (2)  Str.  j  is  disguised  in  $£?  in 
the  last  clause  of  io3,  but  in  <S  it  rightly  begins  v.4.  (3)  Str.  D  is  disguised 
in  the  midst  of  io5,  its  o'no  is  at  beginning  of  1.  2  of  v.5.  (4)  Str.  c  is  also 
disguised  as  second  word  of  io7.  nsN  is  vb.,  belonging  to  previous  line. 
(5)  Str.  y  is  disguised  at  beginning  of  1.  3  of  io8.  (6)  Str.  x  lacks  the  first 
word,  the  first  line  being  defective.  It  may  be  restored  by  conjecture  as  ix. 
Three  Strs.  have  been  displaced  by  others  which  have  been  substituted  for 
them.  It  is  possible  to  conjecture  originals  as  underlying  them  ;  but  only  by 
entire  reconstruction,  and  even  then  the  form  and  substance  of  the  thought  is 
different  from  the  original.  (1)  The  Str.  J  is  a  tetrameter  with  caesura, 
evident  in  the  midst  of  three  of  the  lines,  less  evident  but  probable  in  the 
other.  (2)  Str.  d  is  also  a  tetrameter  with  caesuras.  (3)  Str.  r  is  a  trimeter  ; 
a  call  to  praise,  not  suited  to  the  context  of  the  original  Ps.,  but  adapted 
to  later  liturgical  use,  and  using  late  liturgical  terms.  The  remaining  Strs.  are 
more  difficult  to  find.  Many  efforts  have  been  made  to  find  them  by  recon- 
struction and  conjecture.  I  have  made  several  such  efforts  myself,  accepting 
them  provisionally,  only  to  finally  abandon  them  as  unsatisfactory.  (1)  The 
Strs.  with  -1  and  n  have  disappeared.  In  place  of  them  is  a  trimeter  tetrastich, 
beginning  with  mm  in  third  person.  But  it  uses  terms  of  the  royal  Pss.  989, 
^510. 13^  anci  these  are  statements,  in  liturgical  language,  of  the  general  truth 
of  the  divine  dominion,  cognate  with  the  idea  of  the  Ps.,  but  in  more  objec- 
tive and  less  personal  relations.  (2)  Str.  3  is  missing.  Possibly  a  relic  of  it 
is  present  in  io3,  in  the  clause  beginning  Ssn  >d,  but  only  one  trimeter  line 
and  two  words  of  a  second  line  are  there;  and  it  is  out  of  place  between  S 
and  1.  It  is  therefore  more  probable  that  the  verse  is  a  prosaic  gloss. 
(3)  Str.  D  has  disappeared  entirely.  We  can  only  make  it  by  a  readjustment 
of  the  lines  about  where  it  should  come,  and  at  the  expense  of  other  Strs.  The 
order  of  the  Strs.  is  the  usual  one  of  the  Heb.  alphabet,  except  that  ';,  x  come 
together  as  in  La.  2,  3,  4,  probably  an  older  order,     i  and  d  are  transposed. 


PSALMS  IX.  AND  X.  7 1 

This  is  probably  an  editorial  change  and  not  original.  The  historical  situation 
of  the  Ps.  is  indicated  by  internal  evidence.  The  Temple  worship  was  carried 
on  92"15.  The  people  surfer  from  crafty  and  cruel  enemies,  who  ignore  and 
contemn  Yahweh.  These  are  nations,  920-21,  io16,  described  by  coll.  pen 
io2.  4. 13. w  ^1JN  920. 2i?  io18^  wh0  invade  the  land  and  imperil  its  existence. 
They  are  not  the  great  conquering  nations,  but  lesser  ones,  such  as  those 
which  troubled  Jerusalem  before  the  walls  were  built  by  Nehemiah  ;  Moabites, 
Ammonites,  Arabs,  and  Philistines,  Ne.  210,  47,  61.  The  glosses  indicate  a  later 
time  of  calm  historical  retrospect  and  confidence  in  Yahweh,  the  King  en- 
throned in  Zion;   and  therefore  probably  in  the  Greek  period. 


Str.  K.  2-3.  Each  line  begins  with  K  and  closes  with  kah. 
The  four  lines  are  syn.,  using  cohortatives,  expressing  resolutions 
or  determinations.  —  /  will  give  thanks  ||  tell  ||  exult  ||  make 
melody],  terms  indicating  in  their  usage  public  songs  of  praise. 
Each  vb.  has  syn.  obj.  —  unto  Thee~\,  so  (3,  adding  also  the  divine 
name,  Yahweh,  which  J^  substitutes  for  it,  and  so  destroys  rhyme. 
||  Thy  wondrous  works'],  as  context  shows,  of  deliverance  from 
enemies,  cf.  Ex.  320  (J)  Ju.  613  Pss.  267  7811  +•  ||  unto  Thy  name], 
cf.  Pss.  6 19  664  685.  The  qualifying  ideas  are  with  all  my  mind], 
better  than  "  heart,"  EV8.,  which  in  modern  usage  rather  suggests 
affections,  ||  all]  intensifying  wondrous  works,  ||  /  will  be  glad] 
intensifying  "  exult."  —  'Elyon],  divine  name,  "  Most  High,"  EV8., 
intensifying  Thy  name. 

Str.  3  has  two  syn.  couplets. — 4.  The  enemies  are  in  subse- 
quent context,  not  private  but  public  enemies,  nations.  —  Because] 
giving  a  reason  for  the  praise  of  the  previous  Str. — turned  back- 
ward], in  retreat.  The  context  indicates  a  historical  reference 
and  not  present  experience  or  general  truth.  It  is  true  stumble 
and  perish  are  impfs.,  but  they  give  graphic  description  of  past 
events.  They  intensify  the  retreat  as  disastrous.  —  At  Thy  pres- 
ence], the  presence  and  power  of  Yahweh  brought  about  the 
retreat;  the  whole  credit  of  it  is  due  to  Him.  —  5.  For],  causal 
particle  with  pf.,  either  syn.  with  v.4  as  second  ground  of  praise, 
emphasizing  Yahweh's  dealing  with  His  people  over  against  His 
dealing  with  their  enemies,  or  else  reason  of  previous  couplet, 
possibly  not  distinguished  in  author's  mind.  The  syn.  words 
judgment  and  right  intensify  the  idea.  The  sf.  is  objective,  and 
can  only  be  expressed  by  paraphrase:  in  my  favour],  that  is,  of 


72  PSALMS 

the  congregation  speaking  in  its  solidarity  as  an  individual.  — 
Thou  hast  done  judgment  ||  judging  righteously],  executed  it  on 
the  enemies. —  Thou  didst  sit  on  Thy  throne],  in  heaven,  as 
Pss.  ii4  457  479  8915  932  Q72,  from  which  God  executes  judgment 
on  earth  in  favour  of  His  people  and  against  their  enemies. 

Str.  J  is  a  syn.  tetrameter  tetrastich,  substituted  for  an  original 
trimeter,  giving  a  more  comprehensive  and  general  statement,  and 
so  differing  from  the  personal  experience  expressed  throughout 
the  original  Ps. 

Thou  hast  rebuked  the  nations.    Thou  hast  destroyed  the  wicked ; 
Their  name  Thou  hast  blotted  out  forever  and  ever. 
As  for  the  enemy,  they  have  come  to  an  end.     The  ruins  are  forever. 
And  cities  Thou  didst  uproot,  —  their  memory  is  perished. 

6.  Thou  hast  rebuked  the  nations].  This  was  probably  in  the 
original  Str.,  but  is  now  followed  by  a  caesura  and  a  comple- 
mentary phrase  :  Thou  hast  destroyed  the  wicked],  of  two  beats, 
instead  of  one  complementary  word,  as  in  the  original  Ps.  Both 
phrs.  are  further  expositions  of  v.4.  The  term  wicked  is  coll.  for 
nations,  as  917  io23-4  1315  554  13919  Is.  n4  Hb.  313  pi.  Pss.  9.18  38  710 
i79  +  . —  Their  name  Thou  hast  blotted  out],  so  utterly  have  they 
been  destroyed  that  their  names  are  no  longer  known,  save  to  the 
antiquarian.  The  author  was  thinking  probably  of  the  nations 
exterminated  by  Israel  at  the  Exodus,  as  it  is  a  phr.  of  D.,  Dt.  914 
2919  2  K.  1427.  —  7.  As  for  the  enemy],  coll.  for  nations.  The 
position  of  noun  and  the  article  are  emph.,  cf.  pi.  v.4.  —  they  have 
come  to  an  end],  so  that  they  exist  no  longer  as  nations.  The 
caesura  requires  an  independent  clause.  —  Their  ruins  are  for- 
ever], possibly  their  land,  as  Je.  7s4  44s2,  but  more  probably  cities, 
as  v.76  and  Je.  4913,  cities  of  Bosra ;  Ez.  2620,  of  Tyre ;  Is.  614,  of 
Judah.  There  is  no  sufficient  authority  in  usage  for  referring  these 
to  enemies. — And  their  cities],  the  possessive  here  and  above  is  not 
expressed  but  implied  in  the  context. —  Thou  didst  uproot],  only 
here  of  cities,  but  of  nations  Dt.  29s7  Je.  1214  -f ,  fig.  of  tree  or 
plant.  We  might  think  of  the  use  of  cities  for  inhabitants. — 
Their  memory  is  perished],  syn.  v.66,  cf.  Dt.  123  Is.  2614  Ps.  416. 

8-9.  This  Str.  is  a  syn.  trimeter  tetrastich,  generalising  v.5,  as 
the  previous  Str.  did  v.4.  It  takes  the  place  of  Str.  n  of  the  original 
Ps.    The  initial  n  might  be  gained  by  reading  r\:n  "  Lo,"  with  Du. 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.  73 

for  the  rtbn  at  close  of  previous  line ;  but  this  would  make  the 
line  too  long,  unless  we  reject  Yahweh  as  a  gloss.  But  in  any 
case  we  do  not  overcome  the  use  of  3  sg.  for  2  sg.  of  previous 
Strs.  and  the  generalisation  and  late  liturgical  phrasing. 

Yahweh  sitteth  enthroned  forever, 
He  hath  set  up  His  throne  for  judgment: 
He  judgeth  the  world  in  righteousness, 
He  governeth  the  peoples  with  equity. 

8.  He  hath  set  up  His  throne\  phr.  here  of  divine  throne,  cf.  10319, 
but  2  S.  713  of  David's.  —  He  judgeth  the  world  in  righteous  ness~] 
=  98° ;  |j  He  governeth  the  peoples  with  equity~\  cf.  9610 ;  both  im- 
plying a  late  comprehensive  view  of  Yahweh,  as  sovereign  of  all 
nations,  and  of  the  entire  habitable  world. 

Str.  1  is  a  syn.  trimeter  tetrastich.  — 10.  It  has  been  changed 
to  3d  pers.  and  assimilated  to  previous  Str.,  and  Yahweh  has  been 
inserted  as  gloss  ;  and  so  most  Vrss.  and  commentators,  "  Yahweh 
also  will  be,"  some  ignoring  the  juss.  form,  others  recognising  it, 
as  Dr.  "  So  may  Yahweh  be."  But  Du.  after  (3  reads  rightly 
1  consec. ;  but  then  better,  if  connected  with  original  Strs.  v.2-5-14"15, 
2d  pers. :  And  so  Thou  art  become~\  referring  to  historical  experi- 
ence, as  in  previous  Strs.  —  A  high  refuge"],  a  high  place  of  refuge, 
cf.  Pss.  183  46812  484  591017  623-7  9422  1442.— for  the  oppressed], 
coll.  referring  to  the  congregation,  as  so  oppressed  by  the 
enemies  as  to  be  literally  crushed,  elsw.  |  io18  7421  Pr.  2  628,  in  this 
form,  but  cog.  forms  also  io10  3419  5119  Is.  5715. — for  times  of 
dearth],  phr.,  elsw.  io1,  cf.  Je.  141  (v.  i?DB),  the  exact  mng. 
uncertain.  — 11.  They  that  knoiu  Thee,  so  originally,  syn.  them 
that  seek  Thee.~]  "Thy  name"  has  been  substituted  for  sf.  at 
such  an  early  date  as  to  appear  in  all  Vrss.,  but  it  makes  the  line 
too  long  in  its  measure,  and  is  in  accord  with  later  tendency  to 
interpose  something  between  God  Himself  and  His  people,  as 
obj.  of  knowledge,  cf.  9114  Is.  52s  Je.  48ir.  Knowing  Yahweh 
Himself  is  an  earlier  idea,  cf.  Ex.  52  (J)  Ho.  222  54  82  Ps.  796. 

Str.  1  is  composed  of  two  trimeter  couplets,  and  is  a  call  to  the 
congregation,  to  the  praise  resolved  upon  in  Str.  K.  It  is  the 
same  kind  of  a  generalised  explication  of  previous  Str.  as  we  have 
seen  in  v.6"8,  and  probably  came  from  the  same  later  hand. 


74  PSALMS 

Make  melody  to  Him  who  is  enthroned  in  Zion, 
Declare  among  the  peoples  His  doings; 
For  He  that  requireth  blood  doth  remember ; 
He  doth  not  forget  the  cry  of  the  afflicted. 

12.  To  Him  who  is  enthroned  in  Zion],  in  the  Holy  of  Holies  of 
temple,  the  throne  room  of  the  king  of  Israel,  cf.  Am.  i2  Mi.  42 
Pss.  76s  10222  13521  14712,  added  to  the  conception  of  throned  in 
heaven  of  v.8-9.  —  Declare  among  the  peoples  His  doings'],  universal 
proclamation  of  the  interposition  of  Yahvveh  in  behalf  of  His 
people.  — 13.  For  He  that  requireth  blood],  as  Ez.  336,  from 
the  enemies  of  His  people  as  their  avenger,  based  on  the  primi- 
tive conception  of  relationship  of  blood,  and  the  obligation  to 
avenge  blood. 

Str.  H  is  composed  of  two  couplets,  the  former  synth.,  the 
latter  syn.  — 14.  Be  gracious  to  me],  intensified  by  see  my  afflic- 
tion], the  past  experience  of  previous  Strs.  being  the  basis  for 
second  part  of  Ps.,  which  now,  as  Calv.,  becomes  petition  for 
deliverance  in  present  needs.  —  Thou  that  liftest  me  up],  past 
experience  renewed  to  enforce  the  plea. — from  the  gates  of 
death],  cf.  10718  Is.  3810  Jb.  3817,  all  referring  to  the  abode  of  the 
dead,  conceived  as  a  city  with  gates.  The  nation  had  been  in  peril 
of  death,  and  so  of  going  down  into  Sheol  the  place  of  the  dead ; 
but  Yahweh  hath  lifted  the  nation  up  from  that  awful  descent.  — 
15.  In  order  that],  final  clause,  expressing  object  of  lifting 
up  to  life.  —  In  the  gates  of  the  daughter  of  Zion],  the  gates  of 
Zion  or  Jerusalem,  over  against  gates  of  Sheol.  The  daughter  of 
Zion  is  a  personification  of  the  people  of  Zion,  cf.  Is.  i8  io'32  Mi.  i13 
Je.  43  Zc.  214 ;  cf.  daughter  of  Tyre  Ps.  4513,  daughter  of  Babylon 
1378  Is.  471,  daughter  of  Jerusalem  Is.  3722  Mi.  48  La.  21315.  The 
conception  here  is  as  Ps.  66  Is.  38™'™  that  the  public  praise  of  Yah- 
weh in  His  temple,  or  royal  residence  in  Jerusalem,  is  something 
unique,  and  of  such  special  acceptance  with  Him,  that  it  can  be 
had  nowhere  else,  not  in  Sheol  any  more  than  outside  the  Holy 
Land,  or  apart  from  the  divine  residence  in  Jerusalem. 

Str.  ID  is  composed  of  two  tetrameter  couplets,  and  is  the  same 
kind  of  substitution,  and  doubtless  by  the  same  editor,  as  Str.  j. 

The  nations  are  sunk  down  in  the  pit  that  they  made; 
In  the  net  which  they  hid  is  their  foot  caught. 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.  75 

Yahweh  hath  made  Himself  known,  He  hath  executed  judgment; 
In  the  work  of  His  hands  the  wicked  are  trapped. 

16.  The  nations  are  sunk  down  in  the  pit].  This  is  probably 
from  the  original  Ps.,  where  the  pit  referred  to  is  the  pit  of  Sheol 
as  usual  subsequent  to  Ez.,  Pss.  1610  3010  4910  5524 1034,  and  so  antith. 
to  the  lifting  up  of  the  congregation  of  Israel  from  Sheol  v.14. 
But  the  editor,  by  the  addition  of  that  they  made'],  refers  it  to  a 
pit  dug  by  the  nations  into  which  they  hoped  Israel  would  fall, 
cf.  716;  syn.  with  in  the  net  which  they  hid],  cf.  io°  315  357-8  1406. 
—  is  their  foot  caught],  the  nations  snare  themselves  instead  of 
Israel  and  receive  retribution  in  kind.  — 17.  Yahweh  hath  made 
Hi?nself  known],  reflex.,  cf.  484,  expl.  hath  executed  judgment], 
cf.  v.5,  so  RV.,  Pe.,  Dr.,  Ba.,  Kirk.,  cf.  JPSV.  as  emphatic  inde- 
pendent classes ;  better  than  AV.,  which  explains  the  second 
clause  as  dependent  and  so  relative  :  "  by  the  judgment  which 
He  executeth,"  cf.  PBV.  after  (3.  —  In  the  work  of  His  hands], 
Yahweh's  put  forth  in  judgment,  syn.  with  previous  line  of  the 
couplet  \  and  not  those  of  the  nation,  hiding  nets  and  digging  pits, 
of  previous  couplet,  as  EV8.,  though  sustained  by  Dr.,  Che.,  and 
JPSV.  —  are  trapped],  by  Yahweh's  hands,  who  lays  traps  for 
them. 

18-19.  This  Str.  begins  with  \  but  it  is  not  the  original  Str.  \ 
which  we  find  rather  in  v.20"21.  It  was  inserted  by  an  editor.  It  is 
composed  of  a  trimeter  syn.  couplet  and  a  tetrameter  syn.  couplet. 

The  wicked  shall  turn  back  to  Sheol, 
All  the  nations  that  forget  God. 
For  the  poor  shall  not  always  be  forgotten, 
Nor  the  hope  of  the  afflicted  perish  forever. 

18.  The  wicked],  pi.  for  sg.,  coll.  above,  v.17,  but  not,  however,  in- 
dividuals, but  syn.  with  all  the  nations.  —  turn  back  to  Sheol],  antith. 
v.14.  The  wicked  nations  turn  back  in  defeat  and  slaughter.  So 
disastrous  will  be  their  fate  that  they  will  surfer  national  death 
and  so  descend  as  nations  to  the  abode  of  the  dead.  There  is  no 
reference  in  this  passage  to  the  future  destiny  of  individuals,  cf. 
Is.  2614-19  Ez.  377-14  Ho.  1314  (v.  Br.^-176-276-307).—  That  forget 
God],  here  of  nations,  cf.  Ps.  5022  of  wicked  Israelites  ;  {v.  io411), 
an  ignoring  of  the  presence  of  God  and  His  interest  in  His 


y6  PSALMS 

people.  — 19.  For  the  poor  ||  the  afflicted  shall  not  be  forgotten'], 
by  God,  antith.  to  their  enemies  forgetting  Him.  —  Perish  for- 
ever], the  hope  of  God's  people  will  not  perish,  but  will  be  realised 
in  renewed  life  in  the  Holy  Land  when  the  nations  perish  in  death 
and  Sheol. 

20-21.  Str.  <  is  disguised  by  prefixing  O  arise  to  920  in  order 
to  make  a  suitable  close  for  the  Ps.  before  the  Selah ;  but  it 
destroys  the  measure.  It  is  a  trimeter  tetrastich,  having  three 
lines  syn.,  the  fourth  synth.  —  mere  men,  syn.  nations],  cf.  v.21 
io18  562  6612  all  referring  to  enemies  conceived,  over  against 
Yahweh  and  His  people,  as  mere  men.  The  congregation  plead 
that  the  nations  may  know  this  at  last,  through  the  exposure  of 
their  weakness. — prevail],  be  stronger  than  Israel,  cf.  52°  8914,  to 
prevent  which  let  them  be  judged,  cf.  v.5.  —  before  Thy  face],  the 
divine  face  looking  in  wrath  upon  them.  —  O  appoint  Terror] 
Their  defeat  will  be  that  of  a  panic-stricken  army.  Terror  is 
personified  as  an  angel  of  vengeance  appointed  by  God  to  drive 
them  on  to  their  doom.  (3,  F,  &,  RC.Vrss.  render  "  appoint  a 
lawgiver,"  with  a  slightly  different  text ;  so  Luther  " einen  Meister,>} 
which  is  usually  interpreted  in  a  bad  sense,  as  tyrant,  Genebr. ; 
Antichrist,  Aug.,  Cassiodorus ;  but  by  some  in  a  good  sense,  as 
Christ,  Theodoret,  Euthymius ;  as  Yahweh  Himself,  Ba. 

Str.  7  is  composed  of  two  trimeter  distichs,  the  first  syn.,  the 
second  synth.  It  expostulates  with  Yahweh  for  delay  in  inter- 
position, already  suggested  in  previous  Str. — X.  1.  Why  standest 
Thou],  as  looking  on  with  indifference,  ready,  but  slow  to  act. — 
in  the  distance],  phr.  only  here,  stronger  than  the  usual  afar 
off.  —  Hidest].  The  divine  presence,  not  being  manifest  when 
so  greatly  needed,  seems  to  imply  a  deliberate  hiding  from  His 
people.  —  in  times  of  dearth],  resuming  910.  —  2.  In  pride],  emph. 
in  position,  to  lay  stress  on  this  as  a  chief  characteristic  of  the 
enemies.  —  hotly  pursue],  cf.  La.  419,  RV.,  i?DB.,  so  essentially 
Kirk.,  al. ;  "persecute,"  PBV.,  AV.,  is  too  general;  "set  on  fire," 
Dr.,  Ba.,  after  Vrss.,  is  too  strong.  Most  think  of  the  heat  of 
anxiety,  but  some  of  the  heat  of  affliction.  —  Let  them  be  caught], 
the  wicked  nations,  in  accordance  with  the  expostulation  of 
previous  context,  so  EV8.,  JPSV.,  Ba.,  al.  But  (3,  U  render  as 
indicative,  "  they  (the  afflicted)  are  caught,  taken,"  so  Pe.,  Dr. ; 


PSALMS  IX.  AND   X.  *]*] 

"a  further  description  of  the  wrongs  of  the  poor,"  Kirk.  —  that 
they  planned] .  They  planned  to  catch  the  afflicted  ;  but  Yahweh 
is  entreated  to  catch  them  in  their  own  crafty  schemes. 

X.  3.  This  syn.  trimeter  distich  resembles  the  sentences  of  Heb. 
Wisdom,  as  Du.  suggests,  and  is  a  late  gloss.  Its  original  meaning 
was  obscured  by  an  early  copyist  who  by  dittog.  of  suffix  inserted 
the  conjunction  waw,  and  so  divided  the  sentence  after  the  fourth 
tone,  making  it  into  a  prose  sentence,  difficult  of  explanation. 

For  the  wicked  doth  boast  about  (his)  covetousness, 
The  robber  doth  congratulate  himself. 

3.  For  the  wicked,  syn.  the  robber]  so  Pe. ;  "  covetous,"  EV8.  is 
too  weak.  If  a  gloss,  then  it  is  no  longer  the  nations,  but  the  in- 
dividual Jew,  of  the  period  of  Heb.  Wisdom.  —  Doth  boast  about 
his  covetousness],  in  a  bad  sense,  as  11210,  Pr.  2I25"26,  cf.  Ps.  32s, 
"  desire"  of  EV8.  is  too  general.  —  congratulate  himself]  as  4919, 
on  his  success  in  gaining  what  he  coveted,  cf.  362"3. 

Str.  3  was  recognised  by  <3,  which  begins  with  p«,  but  ob- 
scured by  J^,  which  attaches  this  vb.  to  previous  line  with  Yahweh, 
prob.  in  order  to  avoid  a  blasphemous  expression,  and  get  the 
thought,  "whom  Yahweh  abhorreth,"  PBV.,  AV.  It  is  com- 
posed of  a  trimeter  tetrastich,  two  syn.  lines  enclosing  a  syn. 
couplet.  —  4.  The  wicked]  sg.  coll.,  refers  to  nations  of  orig- 
inal Ps.  as  v.2.  —  doth  contemn  Yahweh]  as  shown  in  their 
thoughts,  words,  and  deeds,  v.4"11,  cf.  v.13,  where  the  same  ex- 
pression is  resumed  in  expostulation.  —  According  to  the  height  of 
His  anger].  It  is  difficult  to  think  of  the  wicked  man's  anger  in 
such  a  connection,  and  therefore  most  moderns  think  of  loftiness 
of  nostrils  (Hochndsigkeit,  Ba\),  or  "face"  i?DB.,  or  "looks" 
Dr. ;  as  of  eyes,  1015,  mind,  Pr.  165,  disposition,  Ec.  7s;  but  Du. 
rightly  explains  of  divine  anger ;  and  so  as  included  in  the 
thoughts  of  the  wicked  as  well  as  the  phr. :  He  will  not  require] . 
Yahweh  may  be  very  angry,  as  His  people  claim ;  but  however 
great  or  exalted  He  may  be  in  anger,  He  will  not  interpose  on 
their  behalf,  He  will  not  require  satisfaction  from  their  enemies. 
—  There  is  no  God]  not  a  denial  of  the  divine  existence,  but  of 
His  presence  and  interposition.  The  PBV.  "  careth  not  for  God," 
and  AV.  "  will  not  seek  after  God,"  supply  the  object  of  vb.  and 


78  PSALMS 

take  the  wicked  as  subj.  after  most  ancients.  —  his  devices']  his 
evil  thoughts,  that  he  is  devising,  his  calculations,  what  he  is 
saying  to  himself,  in  self-flattery,  syn.  with  his  contemning. — 
5a.  are  defiled]  so  (3,  <£,  U  "  His  thoughts  and  counsels  are  un- 
clean," Aug.  "  He  always  acts  badly,"  Genebr.  This  is  well  suited 
to  context  though  resting  on  a  different  interp.  of  the  form  from  J^, 
which  may  be  read  parturiunt  as  3,  Aq.,  or  "  strong,"  "  sure,"  Pe., 
"stable"  Dr.,  "firm"  RV.,  "prosperous"  JPSV.  after  ft,  "His 
plans  succeed ;  he  is  never  harassed  by  the  vicissitudes  of  for- 
tune," Kirk. 

Str.  ft  is  disguised  by  J^,  which  puts  the  first  line  as  second,  in 
v.5 ;  and  also  in  all  texts  by  letting  it  follow  Str.  3.  This  order 
cannot  be  original,  but  is  due  to  editorial  transposition,  and  pos- 
sibly the  insertion  of  the  gloss  v.3.  It  is  composed  of  two  trimeter 
couplets,  the  one  synth.,  the  other  syn.  —  5b.  On  high]  in  heaven, 
cf.  92s,  where  Yahweh  is  standing  v.1,  not  yet  interposing  v.12. — 
at  a  distance  from  him],  cf.  v.1. —  Thine  acts  of  judgment],  they 
are  still  with  Yahweh,  not  yet  executed  on  earth  against  the 
wicked.  —  As  for  his  adversaries]  emph.  in  position.  —  He  puffeth 
at  them],  possibly  snorting,  as  gesture  of  contempt.  — 6.  He  saith 
in  his  mind],  so  v.11,  cf.  v.4,  syn.  he  doth  swear],  interp.  as  perf. 
vb.  and  not  as  noun,  "  cursing,"  as  beginning  of  v.7,  so  disguising 
Str.  S  and  destroying  its  measure.  —  I  shall  not  be  moved],  phr. 
frequently  used  of  the  righteous  155  168  218  62s"7  1126;  pre- 
sumptuous words  of  the  pious  when  in  prosperity  307;  here 
presumptuous  words  of  the  wicked  enemies  of  God  and  His 
people.  This  is  intensified  in  syn.  clause,  in  all  generations  with- 
out evil],  so  (©,  3.  ?^  has  another  reading  with  relative,  which 
is  disregarded  in  PBV.,  RV.,  Pe.,  Kirk.,  but  given  in  AV.  as 
causal  "  for,"  by  Dr.  "  I  who."  Both  these  are  interpretations 
and  were  not  original. 

Str.  £,  disguised  in  ancient  texts,  is  composed  of  a  tetrameter 
syn.  couplet,  and  a  syn.  trimeter  couplet,  the  former  stating  what 
seems  to  be  a  general  truth  in  a  proverbial  form ;  the  latter  speci- 
fying action  of  the  enemies  against  innocent  Israel.  The  former 
is  therefore  a  substitution  of  the  editor  for  the  original  couplet, 
which  doubtless  began  with  the  same  word,  and  set  forth  the  craft 
and  deceit  of  the  enemy,  but  hardly  in  this  form  and  in  this  gen- 


PSALMS  IX.  AND   X.  79 

eral  way.  —  7.  His  mouth  is  full  of  deceits  ||  mischief],  so  in  the 
original,  expressing  the  craft  of  the  enemy.  —  and  oppression 
||  trouble]  were  added  by  later  editor  to  indicate  the  actual  in- 
jury that  they  had  done  to  the  people  of  God.  —  Under  his 
tongue],  secreted  as  Aug.,  and  ready  to  spring  forth;  and  not  as 
Che.,  Dr.,  Kirk,  after  Jb.  2012,  as  a  delicious  morsel,  which  suits 
the  context  of  that  passage,  but  not  of  this.  — 8.  In  places  of  am- 
bush], as  Jos.  89  Ju.  g35  2  Ch.  1313,  enemies  lying  in  wait  to  sur- 
prise, syn.  in  secret  places],  where  they  remain  in  secret  until  the 
time  for  attack.  —  of  settlements],  that  is  near  settlements,  whether 
of  tents,  Gn.  2516  (P),  or  houses,  Lv.  2531,  referring  to  the  un- 
walled  villages  exposed  to  sudden  attacks  of  treacherous  foes.  — 
slayeth],  his  object  is  murder  as  well  as  robbery. —  the  innocent], 
those  who  have  done  them  no  wrong,  who  were  not  at  war  with 
them. 

Str.  2  is  disguised  by  the  ancient  texts,  because  its  first  line  is 
in  the  middle  of  the  verse.  It  follows  a  as  in  La.  2,  3,  4,  an 
older  order  of  the  alphabet.  It  is  composed  of  a  trimeter  tetra- 
stich of  stair-like  parall. — 9.  His  eyes  spy],  cf.  567,  carrying  on 
the  thought  of  previous  verse.  —  Thy  host],  as  v.1014,  the  people 
of  Yahweh  regarded  as  a  host  or  army,  however  small,  when  com- 
pared with  the  enemy. — He  lieth  in  ambush],  vb.  for  noun  of 
v.8a,  in  his  secret  place],  sing,  for  pi.  of  v.86,  article  for  possessive, 
thus  taking  up  both  previous  words  of  that  verse,  in  order  to  stair- 
like advance  in  thought.  This  is  made  still  more  definite  by  un- 
necessary insertions  of  later  editor.  —  as  a  lion],  frequent  simile 
for  enemies,  see  f  1712  2214,  and  accordingly,  in  his  covert],  cf. 
76s  Jb.  3840.  —  to  seize],  by  the  paws  of  the  lion. —  dragging  him 
away],  as  a  lion  does  his  prey  to  his  den.  J^  attaches  in  his  net 
to  this  vb.  and  is  followed  by  most  versions  and  interpreters,  thus 
adding  the  simile  of  the  hunter  to  that  of  the  lion,  and  so  losing 
the  force  of  the  stair-like  parall.,  graphically  describing  the  lion's 
mode  of  dealing  with  his  prey.  (3,  U  attach  it  to  subsequent  v., 
where  it  is  needed  for  measure, 

Str.  !£  lacks  initial  word  with  ¥  in  ancient  texts.  If  with  (3, 
"in  his  net "  goes  with  this  Str.,  we  may  supply  the  cognate  vb.  n^ 
"  hunt."  The  Str.  then  is  composed  of  two  syn.  trimeter  couplets 
resembling  v.5- 6.  In  the  first,  the  simile  of  the  hunter  takes  the  place 


80  PSALMS 

of  the  lion  of  the  previous  Str.  — 10.  The  oppressed]  as  o10  io13, 
the  Kt.  here  which  is  better  sustained  by  usage  and  context  than 
vb.  of  Qr.,  which  is  variously  rendered  "  he  falleth  down  "  PBV., 
"croucheth,"  AV.,  RV.,  (of  lion)  without  justification  from  usage 
of  vb.  ;  better  "  is  crushed,"  JPSV.,  Pe.,  Kirk.  But  Qal  is  not  used 
elsewhere,  and  so  is  improbable  here.  —  and  he  sinks  down],  cf. 
35u  3&7  10739,  that  is  overpowered,  because  of  his  great  numbers], 
in  accordance  with  usage  referring  to  great  numbers  of  the  enemy, 
rather  than  their  strength  and  prowess,  "  his  captains,"  PBV.,  "  his 
strong  ones,"  AV.,  RV.,  Dr.,  i.e.  ruffians,  Kirk. ;  or  with  reference 
to  the  claws  of  lion,  as  Ew.,  De.,  Che.,  Ba\,  i?DB.,  as  if  this  carried 
on  the  simile  of  previous  Str.  — 11.  The  enemies  now  say,  to  them- 
selves as  in  v.6""136,  'El  hath  forgotten],  cf.  v.13  19.  —Be  hath  hidden 
His  face],  cf.  the  expostulation  of  v.1,  where  the  congregation 
make  a  similar  statement  and  complaint ;  and  therefore  He  doth 
not  see],  cf.  914.  And  so  the  enemy  afflict  His  people  with  im- 
punity. 

Str.  p  is  preserved  in  its  original  form.  It  is  an  expostulation 
renewing  v.1,  and  taking  up  the  most  important  terms  in  the  inter- 
vening Strs.      It  is  composed  of  two  trimeter  syn.  couplets. — 

12.  lift  up  Thy  hand],  in  order  to  interpose  and  smite  the  enemy 
with  it.  —  Forget  not  *El],  plea  over  against  the  word  of  the 
enemies,  v.11.  On  account  of  this  exact  antith.,  as  well  as  the 
requirement  of  measure,  'El  belongs  in  this  line  and  not  in 
previous   one,   though    so   given  in  all  ancient  texts,   cf.   913. — 

13.  Wherefore  doth  the  wicked  contemn  ?]  taking  up  the  state- 
ment of  the  fact  v.4a,  and  also  the  words  of  the  wicked  to  them- 
selves, Thou  wilt  not  require],  already  given  in  third  person  v.45. 

Str.  *"|  is  composed  of  two  syn.  trimeter  couplets.  — 14.  Thou 
hast  seen,  ||  Thou  beholdest],  an  appeal  to  the  divine  knowledge 
over  against  the  words  of  the  wicked,  v.11  —  the  trouble  and  grief  ] 
that  caused  Yahweh's  host  by  the  crafty  enemies  described  above. 
—  To  requite  with  Thy  hand],  antith.  with  v.13.  —  Upon  Thee], 
emph.  in  position,  implying  reliance  on  their  God  only.  —  Thy 
host]  as  v.9"10,  —  leaveth  it],  that  is  in  trust  that  God  will  attend 
to  it,  strengthened  by  past  experience.  — Of  the  orphan],  emph. ; 
the  nation  is  conceived  as  fatherless,  without  a  ruler  of  their  own, 
dependent  upon  the  caprice  of  governors  appointed  by  the  world 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.  8 1 

power  Persia,  cf.  La.  53.  —  Thou  art  the  helper]t  cf.  3740  46s 
10926. 

Str.  Itf  is  composed  of  a  trimeter  tetrastich  with  introverted 
parall.  — 15.  Break  the  arm  of  the  wicked],  cf.  3717  Jb.  3815. 
make  them  powerless,  smiting  them  with  the  hand,  cf.  v.12"14. — 
Let  his  wickedness  be  sought],  as  most  ancient  Vrss.,  cf.  v.4  13,  tak- 
ing vbs.  as  Niphal,  that  is  in  vain,  let  it  not  be  found'],  it  will  no 
longer  exist ;  so  complete  has  been  the  requital,  that  further  requi- 
sition finds  nothing  more  to  be  requited.  But  EV8.  follow  J^,  J 
and  regard  the  vb.  as  Qal  with  juss.  force  and  render  "seek 
out  till  Thou  find  none,"  AV.,  RV.,  or  more  exactly  as  Dr., 
"mayest  Thou  require."  "When  God  '  makes  inquisition'  and 
holds  His  assize,  He  will  find  no  crime  to  punish,"  Kirk.  — 16.  O 
Xing'],  vocative,  in  order  to  give  force  to  the  plea,  and  not 
11  Yahweh  is  king,"  EV8.,  for  Yahweh  is  a  gloss.  The  conception 
of  Yahweh  as  king  is  frequent,  Pss.  2910  44s  477  48s  6825-}-.  — for- 
ever and  ever],  antith.  to  the  disappearance  of  the  wicked  nations 
when  called  to  account.  —  Destroy  the  nations].  Pi.  imv.  syn. 
" break,"  v.5  as  Du.,  cf.  57  g6  2111,  not  Qal  perf.,  "the  nations 
are  perished,"  as  f^,  AV.,  RV.,  and  most  Comm. ;  or  impf.,  "  will 
perish,"  as  (3,  IT,  Gr.  —  out  of  the  land],  as  v.18,  the  holy  land  of 
Israel. 

Str.  H  is  composed  of  a  syn.  trimeter  couplet  and  an  antith. 
trimeter  couplet.  It  expresses  confidence  that  the  plea  has  been 
accepted  by  Yahweh.  — 17.  Thou  hast  heard],  more  fully  :  settest 
Thy  mind],  as  78s,  and  so  preparatory  to  Thou  harkenest].  The 
sf.  "  their  "  with  mind  (J^)  is  a  mistake  of  an  early  copyist,  due  to 
the  desire  of  the  afflicted  in  previous  line.  It  has  given  trouble  to 
all  interpreters  by  a  phr.  not  known  elsw.  and  difficult  to  explain. 
— 18.  To  judge],  execute  justice  in  favour  of  as  g5,  the  orphan  as  v.15, 
and  oppressed  as  910 ;  to  terrify,  cf.  921 ;  mere  man,  cf.  920"21 ;  from 
the  la?id  as  v.16,  summing  all  these  up  in  the  final  Str.  An  early 
copyist  inserted  in  the  margin  a  cognate  thought  in  a  familiar 
phrase  "  he  shall  not  do  it  again,"  namely  the  mere  man,  that  is, 
what  he  had  done  as  described  in  the  Ps.,  because  he  will  no  more 
be  in  the  land.  This  was  subsequently  incorporated  in  the  text, 
destroying  the  measures  of  the  last  couplet,  and  so  confusing  the 
meaning  of  the  clause  as  to  give  trouble  to  all  subsequent  readers. 

G 


82  PSALMS 

2.  ^aS-Saa  rrtf*]  =  1381.  mm  is  substitute  for  an  original  r^  =  col  © 
which  should  be  for  rhyme  at  end  of  line.  m"iK  Hiph.  impf.  cohort.  1  p. 
v.&\\.    rnspN  Pi.  impf.  cohort.  1  p.,  v.  2\   f  a1?  ^a]  1  K.  823  =  2  Ch.  614  Pss.  9* 

,  IQ2.  10.  84.  58.  69.  145  ^  pr#  30  Je<  3IO   ^T.  _  ^D}]    Niph#  ptc>    pl#    f       ^(^ 

vb.  denom.  J  n^d  wonder  of  God's  acts  of  judgment  and  redemption  7712 
88>3  89<;,  'fl  nu7  '77M  78*2  8811  Ex.  15"  Is.  251,  of  Law  119I29.  +  [MSj]  vb. 
Niph.  (1)  &?  difficult  to  understand  1311  Dt.  178;  (2)  extraordinary,  won- 
derful, Pss.  11823  11918-27  I39u  pt,  pi.  mHSo;  wonderful  acts  of  Yahweh  in 
redemption  and  judgment  ?2  267  7117  752  78s2  96s  1052  1067  107s- 15-  21-24-  81 
in4  1455  Ex.  32°  (J)  Je.  212;  'j  niry  Pss.  40*  7218  784  8610  981  105*  10622  1364 
Ex.  341}  Jos.  35  (J);  'j  nN-n  Ps.  7811  Mi.  716.  Hiph.  make  wonderful  in  phr. 
*S  non  'Bn  Ps.  31-'2,  cf.  44  177.— 4.  -vnx  ^m  =  5610.  Qal  inf.  cstr.  not 
protasis  temporal  clause  as  AV.,  RV.  but  causal.  Pe.,  Dr.  turn  back  in  defeat, 
so  v.18  611  704,  Hiph.  4411.  —  iStsb*]  Niph.  impf.  3  pi.  apodosis.  %  Ws  Qal. 
(1)  stumble  sq.  Spa  272,  in  anxiety  and  distress  10712,  Is.  5910;  (2)  /0/fer  of 
knees  Ps.  10924.  Stf>3  tottering  one  10537  Jb.  44;  fig.  yfc*/ of  strength,  Ps.  3111 
Ne.  44.  Niph.  stumble  sq.  -as  Ps.  9^,  cf.  Ho.  55  Je.  615.  Hiph.  cause  to 
stumble  in  punishment  Ps.  6^.  —  i^sm]  1  coord.  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  v.  i6. — 
T.}??]  at  Thy  presence.  $\j?l?  (1)  /h?w  the  face  of,  because  of  peril  614,  ma 
31  571  (titles)  1397,  D^j  6o6(?)  683,  TPDn  179;  (2)  from  the  presence  of, 
enemies  banished  7s55  8924;  (3)  before,  at  Vie  presence  <?/God  9^  68-(3-  9+)  969, 
Je.  426  Na.  I5  Is.  6319,  of  fire  Ps.  683;  (4)  by  reason  of  because  <?/384-4-  6  4417 
554  10211.  —  5.  'IJSBta]  obj.  sf.  execute  judgment  in  favour  of  me,  cf.  1467 
Mi.  79.  For  BBB^p  v.  I5.  ||  %  pt]  n.m.  judgment,  cause  g5  76s  14013.  For  vbs. 
fn  and  dbk»  v.  f\  p-n;  /;  r:;  ^.  —  6.  fnns  Dtf]  phr.  elsw.  Dt.  914  2919 
2  K.  1427,  from  remembrance.  %  nns  vb.  Qal  blot  out,  elsw.  t  sins,  by  God, 
51s- n  Is.  43^  4422.  Niph.  (1)  be  wiped  out  from  a  book  69s9,  the  name 
10913,  sins  10914,  Ne.  337.  —  t  "»£  0*? '>'(?)]  9s  Iolc  2l5  457, 18  4-815  5210  1046 
11944  I451-2-21  Ex.  1518  Mi.  45  Dn.  123,  to  emphasize  long-continued  duration, 
cf.  oStyS  "ljrS  in8 1486;  other  uses  of  %  ny  in  \p  from  VnT^  advance, pass  on  and 
so  advancing,  passing  time,  (1)  of  future  time  ->;;s  forever,  during  lifetime 
919  21"  2227  619;  (2)  of  continuous  existence  ig  ng  8318  92s  Is.  264  6518; 
(3)  of  divine  attributes  iyh  Pss.  1910  37^  8930  in3-'10  11239,  also  <S  of  84s, 
=  1?  *"V  I3212- 14.  I  D^p  is  more  frequently  used  :  n.m.  <y/[thy].  II  may  be  tne 
same  as  D1?;*,  conceal,  as  many  suppose,  and  so  hidden,  mysterious  time ;  or 
possibly  dS;%  &?  mature,  ripe  sexually  and  so  fulness,  ripeness  of  lime  ;  or  an 
independent  stem  of  unknown  meaning.  The  n.  means  long  duration  :  (i)  of 
past  time,  ancient  gates  247,9,  the  long  dead  1433  La.  36,  former  acts  of  God 
dSi>-d  Ps.  25s  11962,  long  silence  Is.  4214  5711,  God's  past  existence  Ps.  932, 
years  of  ancient  time  77s.  (2)  (a)  indef  futurity,  always  at  ease  7312,  of 
King  7  ae*  618,  of  duration  of  pious  ^r;^>  128  155  307  37I8.  27.  28  ^ji3  ^28  y^26 
1126  (long  life),  sq.  ever  892  (as  long  as  I  live),  yS  mm  3013  44s  5211  7913, 
other  emotions  and  activities  during  life  512  312  711  7510  8612  H993-  98-  m- lx2; 
(b)  continuous  existence  of  things  78s9  1045  1486,  nations  8i16,  families  4912 
10631,  Jerusalem  48°  1251  Je.  1725,  reproach  Ps.  78°°.  memory  1126;    (c)  of 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.  83 

divine  blessing  and  praise  7219  13513,  of  Yahweh  Himself  89s3,  His  attributes 
ion  89s  1388,  HDn  oSipS  ioo5  1061  1071  H81-2-3-4-29  1^+^^,  y^  I043i> 
hdn  1172  1466,  p"tt  119142,  my  3311,  His  reign  io16  667  929  14610  Ex.  1518  (E) 
Je.  io10  Mi.  47,  yh  w  Ps.  98  2910  10213  La.  519,  His  covenant  Ps.  105s- 10 
in5-9  2  S.  235,  laws  Ps.  11989.144.152.^  pr0mise  to  David  1851  89s-29,  other 
blessings  1333,  7  ^"vr  13924,  God's  relations  with  His  people  V?  85s  1039  14521, 
oVl?  "v;  289,  Davidic  dynasty  45s- 7- 18  7217  89s7-38  no4.  (3)  indefinite  un- 
ending future  499  phr.  T(n)"V0)  oVy(n)D  4114  9°2  i°317  Io648>  "W  bSv  j« 
above,  oSiy  "ijn  r\p,yvs  from  now  on  and  forever  11518  1218  (as  long  as  one  lives), 
hope  in  God  1313,  God's  acts  and  words  1132  1252  Mi.  47  Is.  5921,  DV01  -\y"i 
Ps.  in8  1486.  PI.  f  D^dSw  abstr.  everlastingness,  eternity  615  77s  14513  1  K.  813 
=  2  Ch.  62  Is.  26*  4517  5 19  Ec.  I10  Dn.  924.  For  completeness  here  we  may 
consider  %  n$l  n.m.  y/msi  with  the  conception  of  preeminence,  so  that  the 
noun  is  time  as  enduring,  perpetuity,  '3  niNtro  perpetual  desolations  74s,  'j  "\y 
unto  perpetuity  4920  Jb.  34s6,  cf.  nxj  Ps.  132  1611  elsw.  m^  forever  <p7-19  io11 
4424  4910  527  6817  741- 10- 19  779  796  8947  1039.  None  of  these  terms  have  in 
themselves  the  conception  of  never-ending  and  always-enduring  existence. 
That  mng.  can  only  come  from  context  of  the  passages.  —  7.  3MKn]  emph.  in 
position  sg.  coll.  v.  v.4.  —  X  niann]  pi.  f.  ruins  1027  of  cities  Je.  25s  as  Bosra 
4913,  Tyre  Ez.  2620.  There  is  no  evidence  for  the  reference  to  nations  in  usage. 
Ps.  10910  ruined  dwellings.  —  -ion]  goes  with  aMKfl,  coll.  interpreted  as  pi.  It 
is  not  homogeneous  with  niann  which  requires  vb.  or  copula  understood.  Du., 
Marti,  suggest  ici  absorbed  in  similar  ion.    This  is  tempting  but  unnecessary. 

—  no?]  unnecessary  gl.,  supposed  by  Du.  to  be  relict  of  Str.  n  and  to  stand 
for  mn,  but  improb.  Besides,  it  is  difficult  to  explain.  It  cannot  be  copula, 
and  the  emphatic  definition  of  sf.  is  not  justified  by  any  example  in  \p  ;  v. 
163.  —  8.  mm]  1  adver.  mm  emphatic  in  antith.  with  jriNn.  —  9.  Nim]  un- 
necessary and  improbable.  —  ,"nx3  San  B9B*]  =  98°.  —  Dn«f»D3  D^DnV  pm]  = 
9610  (o\?v)-  X  ^:  n.f.  world  <?  1816  195  241  33s  50*2  7719  89*2  902  931  961013 
974  987-9.  —  %  [*^?]  n«m«  pl-  abst.,  in  \}/  alw.  ethical;  of  government  cf  58s 
753  9610  98s  994,  adv.  172. — 10.  wj]  i  coord,  juss.  Dr.,  but  this  is  against 
context,  an  abrupt  change.  Usually  juss.  form  is  interpreted  as  of  late  style 
and  without  force.  Du.  points  wi  after  (3  Kal  iytitero.  But  then  if  v.6-9  are 
glosses  of  late  editor,  it  is  best  to  return  to  2d  pers.  of  v.2-5  and  rd.  ">nm.  — 
mm]  is  an  unnecessary  gloss.  — 13|^?]  n-m«  inaccessible  place,  of  refuge  in 
physical  sense  Is.  2512  33™,  of  God  ^10  183  (  =  2  S.  223)  46s- 12  484  5910- 17- 18 
623. 7  94-22  l^2t —  frf-T]  adj.  crushed,  oppressed,  910  io18  7421  Pr.  2628 ;  cf.  Nn 
Ps.  3419,  na-ij  5119,  nai  io10.  —  nn-xa  rW>]  =  io1,  cf.  nv-wa  na^  Je.  141,  but 
mny  is  a.X.,  >nnp  316  for  usual  DVijf;  and  rnss  dearth,  destitution,  2?DB.  might 
be  interpreted  as  prep.  2  and  mx.  Gr.  would  rd.  nnxa  nnrjj1?  as  462. — 
11.  mtpaM]  1  coord.  Qal  impf.  3  p.,  v.  ^.  —  rjDtf  »jh"i*]  Qal  ptc.  nominal  force. 
JTV  2/.  A  Earlier  usage,  know  Yahweh  Ex.  52  (J)  Ho.  222  54  82  \ft  79s;  so 
shorten  here  to  TV"}"  to  get  proper  measure,    cv  ym  elsw.  9114  Is.  52s  Je.  4817. 

—  T*Tp]  Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  2  s.  X  &YI  vb.  (1)  resort  to  God  to  consult  or  in- 
quire of  Him  24°  78s4,  older  mng.  Gn.  2522  (J)  Ex.  1815  (E);    (2)  seek  in 


84  PSALMS 

prayer  and  worship  Pss.  g11  142  (=  53s)  2227  34s-  n  69s8  77s  1054  1 19s- 10  Am. 
54-6  Ho.  io12  Dt.  4"29;  (3)  ask  for,  demand,  require,  subj.  God  Pss.  913 
io4.  18. 16.  (j^  seek  wjtn  application,  study,  late,  3813,  cf.  Pr.  n27  in  bad  sense; 
Pss.  in2  n945.94.155  jn  good  sense;  (5)  seek  for,  care  for,  1425.  —  12.  nor] 
Pi.  imv.  3  pi.  c.  S  for  ace.  v.3.  —  vrvfrhy  d>dj?3  wjn]  cf.  1051  =  Is.  124  =  1  Ch. 
168  (lymn).  —  f>»j|  ;jr>]  phr.  a.X.;  cf.  24- 6.  — 13.  DM?"]  Bhfi]  Qal  ptc.  vyi 
nominal  force,  v.  v.11;  avenger  of  blood,  cf.  Gn.  95  (P)  Ez.  33s,  cf.  Ps.  io4- 13 
for  similar  mng.  with  d^di  omitted.  —  OH^k]  is  prosaic  gl.  —  %  nntr]  vb.  forget. 
(1)  God  subj.  :  abs.  io11,  c.  ace.  His  people,  their  cry  or  needs  913  io12  132 
42io  ^25  74i9.23  77io.  (2)  man  subj>:  (a)  forget  God  4418  5022  10621,  divine 
name  4421,  deeds  787- n  10613,  benefits  1032,  laws  U916  +  8t,  abs.  5912; 
(b)  forget  persons  4511,  things  1025  I376-5.  Niph.  be  forgotten  919  3113. — 
t"i^P»]  n.f.  cry  of  distress,  as  Ex.  37  (J)  2223  (E).  —  a"j;]  Kt.,  d\U]J  Qr.,  so 
io12  ;  the  reverse  919,  D*up  io17,  »w  sg.  coll.  io--  9-  9,  *jj>  abst.  914.  These  vari- 
ations illustrate  confusion  in  MT.  (3  has  913* 19  io12- 17,  for  the  pis.  of  both 
forms,  TrivrjTes;  elsw.  it  uses  for  both  pis.  without  discrimination  :  ir£vr)Tes  2227 
(o^y;)  7419  (o"jp)j  trruxol  69s3  (omj?)  126  722-4  (o"#);  irpQcts  25s-9  34s 
3711  7610  1475  1494  (only  for  D^up) ;  for  sg.  uniformly  irruxfo.  It  is  doubtful 
whether  the  difference  in  form  of  pis.  is  any  more  than  variation  of  same  pi. 
from  the  sg.  ^y;.  M%;,  the  supposed  sg.  of  DMJ?,  does  not  exist.  Nu.  123  Kt.  is 
improb. ;  v.  BDZ?.  However,  many  think  them  different  (cf.  Rahlfs,  *<y;  und 
UJJ  in  d.  Psalmen,  1892,  Dr.DB- art- Poor).  J»«  is  usually  coll.  for  Israel 
as  afflicted  by  enemies,  or  the  pious  in  Israel  afflicted  by  the  wicked,  the 
latter  later  than  the  former ;  not  alw.  easy  to  determine.  The  sg.  coll.  is 
usually  earlier  than  pi.  The  usage  of  \f/  is  (a)  coll.  sg.  as  above  io2-  9-  9  146  2225 
347  3510  °811  1021  (unless  n.  pr.)  Hb.  314,  jvaNi  »JJ  Pss.  3510  3714  4018 
(  =  7o6)  7421  861  log16-22,  llrras  14013,  3M131  <y;  0939,  chi  >y;  82s,  yui  >y;  88™, 
yjn  -prv  2516,  ||  ^  Is.  26s  Zp.  312,  cf.  naji  up  Is.  662,  n>iy  of  Zion  Is.  5121  54I1; 
pi.  in  this  sense  Pss.  913- 19  io12- 17  126  22'27  259-  9  34s  3711  69s3  7419  7610  1476  1494, 
cf.  Is.  1432  4117  4913  Zc.  ii7u;  (b)  of  the  people  as  subjects,  poor  and  needy 
Ps.  722-412;  (c)  humble,  over  against  proud  1828  (=  2  S.  22'28)  gl.  as  Pr.  3s4 
1619  Zc.  99.  — 14.  >n:n]  Qal  imv.  sf.  error  for  usual  UJn  42  +  nt.f  ks.11-1-*" 
BDB.,  but  v.  Ges.S2^,  EwJ251*.  n*n]  <g>,  £,  &,  in  accord  with  2d  pers.  of 
original  Ps.  But  Aq.,  J,  Ba.,  Now.,  Du.,  would  rd.  pf.  'jlin  and  nsn  in  accord 
with  immediate  context. —  J  >jv]  n.m.  affliction  44™  8810  1071041  119s0-92,  obj. 
njo  q11*  2518  318  119153  Gn.  3142  (E)  Ex.  37  481  (J).  —  ■•njc'd]  prep,  p  causal. 
Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  I  s.  i.p.  It  is  an  explanatory  gl.  —  mo  \"%T]  =  10718  Jb.  3817 
||  nipS|  'V,  Swtf  tr  Is.  3810.  For  niD  as  abode  of  the  dead  v.  W.  — 15.  rnsDK  VZ^~\ 
final  clause  Pi.  cohort,  impf.  1  p.  c.  ace.  as  v.2,  obj.  —  TnSnrrVs]  v.  Intr.S1. 
?3  is  gl.  as  often.  —  r>~ro  nptf]  phr.  a.X.,  cf.  \vx  'V  8j2.  ]V%  n:s  not  elsw.  in 
\j/,  but  Is.  I8  io32  Je.  431  Mi.  I13  +.  —  nnwe^a  n^M«]  is  vb.  Qal  cohort,  impf. 
1  p.,  also  dependent  on  jpoS,  v.  211.  The  line  is  complete  without  noun,  which 
is  a  gl.  —  16.  %  V30]  c.  2  as  69s- 15.  The  change  to  3  p.  and  tetrameter  indi- 
cates a  gl.  nntf  is  the  Pit  of  Sheol,  or  a  pit  dug  out,  v.  y16\  v.14  suggests  the 
former,  and  that  was  probably  the   original   mng.     But  when  the   Str.  was 


PSALMS   IX.  AND   X.  85 

changed  to  tetrameter  the  relative  clause  with  rev  made  the  latter  mng.  neces- 
sary. The  remaining  three  lines  of  the  Str.  were  in  no  part  original.  —  f  w] 
pron.  poetic:  (1)  demonstrative  128  Hb.  I11,  so  here  <g,  Aq.,  2,  PBV.;  but 
j$,  3,  and  most  moderns,  as  (2)  rel.  as  Pss.  io2  179  315  32s  6212  6829  1424  1438 
(all  13)  Ex.  1513.16  is#  4224  4321. _  17.  Xy^i]  vb.  Niph.  pf.  refl.  as  48*  76* 
and  not  pass,  as  elsw.  of  things  745  7720  7910  8813.  —  roa  Vd]  phr.  a.X.  sf. 
ref.  to  Yahweh  and  not  to  peh,  sg.  coll.  ||  w>m  as  io2-3-4-13  (v.  i1).  —  tfj^j] 
pointing  favours  Qal  ptc.  J  upl  vb.  knock  down,  c.  Yahweh  subj.  elsw.  Pi. 
3813  10911;  so  Hu.,3  De.  But  rd.  with  &,  Aq.,  &,  E,  Ols.,  Ew.,  Ba.,  We., 
Buhl,  tfg'U  Niph.  J  tf(*n  vb.  be  trapped;  elsw.  Qal  lay  snares  1247  1419. — 
18.  laitf']  future  ;  not  return  to  the  place  from  which  they  came,  but  as  v.4 
5610  turn  back  in  defeat ;  cf.  611  704.  —  nS">Kts>S],  S  of  late  style  with  local  ace, 
v.  £P.  —  ,nrf]  adj.  pi.  cstr.  elsw.  Is.  6511,  cf.  Ps.  50'22.  —  %  r^x]  adj.  needy, 
poor,  in  Hex.  J,  E,  D,  mostly  poetic;  as  adj.  10916,  elsw.  n.  49s;  subject  to 
oppression  and  abuse  3714 ;  to  be  cared  for  by  the  righteous  824  1129,  by  God 
3510  10741  1137  13215  14013,  by  king  724- 12- 13- 13  ;  needing  help  from  God  g19 
126  4018  (=  706)  7421  861  10922  (all  ||  >r;)  69s4  10931.  — 20.  nr»p]  imv.  cohort, 
is  a  gl.  adapted  to  io2,  destroying  measure  and  the  proper  beginning  of 
Str.  \  —  B?UK]  sg.  coll.  of  enemy  as  mere  man  antith.  Yahweh;  so  v.21  io18  562 
6612  (v.  8*).  —  T»"^]  "more  def.  and  distinct  than  T#%"  BDB;  cf.  1843 
Je.  67. —  21.  nw]  is  a  gl.  —  fvvc]  ctr.  nK"V>D  txt.  err.  for  J  nyi2  n.  terror  7612, 
so  3,  Aq.,  9,  t£,  £DB.,  Dr.,  Du.  But  6,  5,  voyjoBtr-qv  =  rn"»D  teacher,  so  Ba. 
after  Luther,  "  Meister."  But  there  is  no  usage  to  justify  the  use  of  teacher  in 
such  a  severe  sense.  — i""7."'.]  final  clause.  —  n.pn]  prosaic  gl.,  making  1.  too  long.  — 
X.  1.  TVuh~\  as  222  4210  432  741  8815  with  impf.  expostulation;  cf.  no^  21. — 
nirr>]  is  a  gl.  —  P"»rna]  adj.  c.  2,  a.X.  possibly  txt.  err.  for  p^rnr  (S,  3,  as  elsw. 
3812  1392.  —  2.  ?y-\  nwia]  )?8h  is  gl.  defining  subj.  vb.,  but  making  1.  too 
long;  rd.imN.ja. —  niDTDu]  is  an  explanatory  gl.  J  npyo  n.f.  devices,  alw.  in 
bad  sense,  elsw.  2112,  wickedness,  in  act  377  13920.  —  larri]  i.p.  $atfn  vb.  Qal 

(1)  devise,  plan,  c.  ace.  alw.  evil  in  \}/,  elsw.  2112  354- 20  36s  418  524  140s-5; 

(2)  c.  S  pers.  4018  (good?);  (3)  impute  iniquity  322.  Niph.  be  accounted 
4423  885,  imputed  10631.  Pi.  (1)  consider,  be  mindful  of  77s  11959  1443  ; 
(2)  devise,  c.  *?  inf.  7316  Pr.  24s. — 3.  SSn  *?]  might  begin  Str.  ?,  but  it  has  a 
different  tone  and  is  gnomic  in  character  (v.36).  —  ^p;  rjx~]  makes  a  prose 
sentence,  improb.  because  of  parall.  vbs.  and  gnomic  style.  Rd.  Snwr,  then 
"itfoj  is  its  syn.,  obj.  of  ^a  of  1.  2;  and  1  before  >xa  is  error  of  interpreta- 
tion.—  rpa]  syn.  SSn,  c.  ^DJ  as4919,  congratulate  self  (v.  j13).  ^  by  attaching 
'>  v^'J  to  this  v.  as  rel.  clause  mutilated  Str.  j  and  made  an  awkward  sentence. — 
It  is  possible  then  that  *pa  was  originally  interpreted  in  bad  sense  as  curse, 
euphemism  for  S*?p,  as  Gr.,  to  avoid  the  cursing  and  contemning  of  Yahweh 
even  by  the  wicked  (v.  Br.SIIS  p-  178).  But  all  these  difficulties  are  due  to 
err.  of  |§  in  arrangement  of  lines.  —  fMj]  Pi.  pf.  J  Y*<)  vb.  Qal  contemn  10711 
Je.  3?*  Dt.  3219,  Pi.  elsw.  v.13  7410-  18  Nu.  14"- 23  1630  (J)  Je.  2317  +.  It  begins 
Str.  }  as  (5. — 4.  1bk  najp]  phr.  o.X.  J  nai  n.m.  only  here  \p  interp.  i?DB.  of 
haughtiness  of  the  wicked;   cf.  D*rjJ  'J  ioi5,  vb.  a1?  'J   1311.     But  ©  Kara  rb 


86  PSALMS 

tt\t]6os  ttjs  dpyrjs  avrov;  3  secundum  altititdinem  fur  oris  sui ;  so  Du.,  who, 
however,  thinks  ©  rd.  ann,  but  this  is  improbable  ;  it  rather  interprets  the 
difficult  phr.  Du.  is  correct  in  thinking  of  the  greatness  of  divine  anger,  and 
these  as  words  of  wicked  just  as  in  next  clause.  —  d^Vn  pn]  141  =  53s,  not 
a  denial  of  the  existence  of  God,  but  of  His  presence  and  interest  in  the 
matter.  —  l»rftDJD"Sa]  the  noun  as  v.26;  but  is  is  a  gl.,  making  1.  too  long. 
(3  tv&Tuov  avrov,  as  92:)  is  prob.  interpretation.  —  5.  htv]  a.X.  Qal  impf. 
I  [>;n]  =be  strong;  cf.  s;n  strength  ;  so  RV.,  Ols.,  De.,  Pe.,  Che.,  Ba.,  Du.,  Dr. 
But  3  partureunt ;  so  Aq.,  Quinta  impf.  Sin.  <g  ^e^TjXolvrai,  so  &  be  pro- 
faned'  =  V?n\  Niph.  impf.  J  ^n.  %  pnSxn  is  followed  by  Gr.,  Lag.,  We.  in 
reading  rvSr,  but  that  was  probably  interpretation.  The  text  of  (3  best  suits 
context.  The  ways  of  Yahweh  are  defiled  here,  as  holy  places  Ez.  724  25s, 
name  of  God  Is.  4811  Ez.  209- 14-  22,  even  God  Himself  Ez.  2216-  >,-ffn]  Kt. 
err.  for  v:ni,  Qr.,  <g,  as  25*-  9  2711  37s4  5115  +,  term  of  D  for  divine  laws  (v.  i1). 

—  f  nySaa]  elsw-  342  629  lo63  "9*« —  D^o]  n.m.  height  {v.  ys)  begins  Str. 
D.  |^  wrongly  attaches  this  n.  to  the  previous  context.  —  Sa]  is  gl.,  spoiling 
measure. — 6.  ^3  nc«]  phr.  v.11-18  141  (=  532)  3526  74s.  —  63>si<-?aJ  Niph. 
impf.  %  01D  VD«  Qa^  totter,  slip  of  foot  381"  9418,  mts.  46s,  kingdom  467,  land 
604.  Niph.  made  to  totter,  be  shaken,  overthrown,  usually  with  neg.,  earth 
1045,  its  foundations  825,  ^a?  93I  9610,  the  holy  city  46s,  Mt.  Zion  1251, 
usually  of  men,  espec.  the  righteous,  with  neg.  sa,  elsw.  155  168  218  307  62s-7 
1126,  without  neg.  136  14011,  fig.  of  steadfast  obedience  175.  Hiph.  dislodge, 
let  fall  5s4  14011.  —  f  "Hi  1-6]  at  close  of  1.  3311  4912  779  85s  10218  13518  14610, 
at  beginning  icP  7913  892  10631  1 1990,  in  the  middle  895.  Therefore  Du.  is 
not  justified  in  saying  "gehort  das  mi  -nV  nach  stehendem  Sprachgebrauch 
zum  Vorhergehenden."  —  jna~«S  nu;N]  is  awkward.  <g  &vev  kolkov,  3  sine 
malo  =  jn  K^a  without  rel.  is  more  prob.  —  7.  nss]  is  vb.  swear,  syn.  iek, 
and  not  noun  cursing,  as  f*3  5918,  with  subsequent  clause,  which  makes  an 
awkward  sentence,  gives  a  line  too  long,  and  obscures  the  Str.  d  which  began 
with  irre. —  n^d  wo]  phr.  a.X.  —  «pni  rV»Dnc]  phr.  a.X.,  but  cf.  nipz?l  Tf»n  5512. 

—  ?>?}  ^DV]  Phr-»  elsw-  9°10  JD- 48  56  Is.  io1  ;  cf.  Ps.  5511.  For '  Vdj?  v.  715. 
px  v.  j6.  This  couplet  is  tetrameter  and  gnomic,  and  if  original  there  must  be 
a  gl.  But  it  takes  the  place  of  Str.  c,  and  deceit  is  suited  to  the  context.  The 
original  was  doubtless  without  "pm  and  pm,  which  were  amplifications.  — 
8.  J  O^sn]  n.  pi.  settlements  of  tents  Gn.  2516  (P),  or  houses  Lv.  2581  (H), 
so  Ba.,  Du.,  Dr.  (g  /J*ra  irXovaicov,  V  cum  divitibus  —  Dngga  (cf.  Is.  53°),  is 
improb.  QL  WVT)  suits  the  context,  but  would  be  prosaic. —  J  onnDJp]  n.  pi. 
secret  places  for  hiding,  elsw.  1712  646,  sg.  v.9  dub.  —  vrv]  begins  Str.  >•,  which 
follows  D,  as  La.  2,  3,  4  ace.  to  ancient  order  of  Heb.  alphabet.  MT.  neglects 
it  by  appending  this  1.  to  v.8.  —  naVrb]  =tyrb.  3  robustos  tuos,  Aq.  rrju 
eirrroplav  <xov,  as  4814,  na^ri  v.14;  cf.  D*K3  hn  Qr.  v.10;  this  last  as  Gr.  dittog. 
for  D'N  of  1DK  leaving  ySn.  But  &  els  rbu  tr^v-qra,  so  &,  UL  =  naSn  adj. 
Aap/ess,  BDB.;  n;Sn  Ew.S1*^);  rrSp  Ko.11-*1)"*.  But  these  are  the  only 
possible  passages,  and  the  derivation  from  y/^n  after  Arabic  is  dub. — 
I  >pj]  adj.  innocent,  elsw.  155  244  9421  106s8  Dt.  1910  2725. — 9.   naoa]  Kt.  a 


PSALMS   IX.  AND  X.  87 

c.  X  nap  n.  f.  thicket,  booth,  as  1812  3121  and  Kt.  275,  but  Qr.  ^rp,  sf.  c.  %  1D 
76s  Je.  25s8,  Qr.  Ps.  27s.  —  3*w]  repeated  1.  2  at  expense  of  measure. — 
rponS]  inf.  fully  written,  also  TBTP  impf.  \*pn  vb.  catch,  seize,  elsw.  Ju.  2121. — 
"Ottos]  inf.  cstr.  c.  3  temporal.  t~\??  vD-  C1)  drai  away;  cf.  283,  both  of 
lion;  (2)  draw  out,  prolong  3611  85s  10912.  —  ^^3]  is  usually  attached  to 
Wt^C,  but  the  use  of  a  net  is  not  suited  to  a  lion.  ©  attaches  it  to  next  Str. 
The  initial  x  of  Str.  is  missing.  We  might  supply  X  ■*  Qal  pf.  "ira  vb.  hunt 
as  14012  La.  352.  —  ro-n]  Kt.  adj.  rvr,  so  Aq.,  2,  3,  &,  Hu.3,  Ba.,  confractus ; 
cf.  jp  910  io18;  but  Qr.  ns-v.  Qal  impf.  ['13-]  =  K3"i  vb.  <rr«^,  elsw.  Pi. 
4420  5 110;  so  <§  TaTrei.vd:aei,  U  hwjiiliabit,  Gr.;  Niph.  &?  crushed  38°  5 119. 
Ew.,  Ols.,  De.  al.  interpret  nyn  as  i  consec.  Qal  pf.  =  and  he  is  crushed.  Such 
a  vb.  does  not  suit  the  use  of  a  net,  and  does  not  yield  the  needed  X,  It  is 
prob.  that  the  original  reading  was  n:jn  incn3  -p~ix.  The  "is  fell  off  owing 
to  haplog.  of  i.  The  1  is  txt.  err.  for  s  originally  in  the  Egyptian  Aramaic 
script.  The  n  added  to  "p  was  interpretation  of  form.  VHtna  was  transposed, 
and  thus  easily  went  into  previous  v.  —  VDWV3]  3  of  instrument  and  pi.  %  cixy 
adj.  ace.  to  usage  (1)  strong  numbers,  here  as  3518  Am.  51'2,  cf.  vb.  Ps.  3820 
40s- 13  69s  13917;  elsw.  (2)  mighty  13510.  — 11.  %  via  "Trip?]  phr.  elsw.  132 
2225  279  308  5 111  6918  8815  1023  1437;  cf.  4425  10429.  —  nxjS]  is  gl.,  destroys 
the  measure.  — 12.  PiD-ip]  Qal  cohort,  imv.  urgent  entreaty,  v.  f.  —  Sn  mm] 
makes  1.  too  long ;  the  former  is  a  gl.,  the  latter  goes  into  the  next  line.  It  is 
an  early  error,  for  ({§,  3  have  it.  —  Nfe'j]  Qal  archaic  strong  imv.  for  usual 
Ht'  from  Hfcl,  v.  47.  Lift  up  the  hand,  to  smite,  as  10626,  usually  in  prayer 
282  63s  1342.  —  D"j>?]  Kt.  dmj;*,  Qr.,  v.  gl3,  so  v.17,  □"•uj?  for  an  original  »jj?. — 
13.  X  nP"L,>?]  wherefore,  as  8g*s.  —  d\-iSn]  is  a  gl.  — 14.  hpn";]  Qal  pf.  2  m., 
fully  written  r,  defective  \s*.  —  nnx  '?  although  in  4§,  is  yet  dittog.  of  nnm. — 
d>*di  Scy]  phr.  a.X.,  cf.  jini  hvy  v.7  9010.  —  r\^2  nnS]  Qal  inf.  est.  of  jnj,  h  pur- 
pose, to  requite  with  the  hand,  the  hand  lifted  up,  as  v.12.  jru  in  the  sense  of 
requital  284-4  1203.  The  usual  rendering,  as  syn.  of  taking  into  the  hand,  has 
no  justification  in  usage. — :^J?p]  emph.  —  Join]  n.  (m.)  orphan:  (1)  of 
individuals  686  823  946  ic>99-  12i469  ;  (2)  of  nation  ioU-U  La.  5*.  — 15.  pm] 
is  a  gl.,  though  in  <3.  It  makes  1.  too  long,  is  dittog.  of  peh  v.j5.  —  E*n*in]  inter- 
preted by  |^,  3  as  Qal  impf.;  by  AV.,  Dr.,  JPSV.  as  juss.,  and  following  vb.  as 
in  final  clause;  by  <&,  U,  Aq.,  2,  j$,  0,  Gr.,  Du.  as  Niph.  impf.,  so  also  Nxcn. — 

16.  1\h$  but©  paaiXetiaei,!*!  regnabit;  so  Gr.  r\hr:\  —  nw]  is  a  gl.  defining 
7l,r:. —  ^3**]  Qal.  pf.,  v.  i6.  &  diroXriade,  U peribitis ;  so  Gr.  n3X%  better  as 
Du.,  Pi.  imv. —  '*"??<£]  The  sf.  is  an  interpretation  of  the  original  y~\i<^  v.  v.18.  — 

17.  mm]  is  gl.,  makes  the  1.  too  long.  —  337  pan]  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  J13  set 
the  mind,  give  attention  to,  as  78s  Jb.  II13  2  Ch.  1214.  The  sf.  is  a  misinter- 
pretation. Hi.,  Du.  would  rd.  2d  pers.  —  7}*N]  is  used  with  3'^pn,  elsw. 
only  Pr.  22,  and  is  here  an  unnecessary  gl.,  v.  $3  176.  — 18.  Tip  mp'T'-Ss]  is  a 
marginal  gl.  which  has  crept  into  the  text.  It  disturbs  the  sentence,  and 
makes  the  line  too  full.  —  PJ^]  ||  23tt:7  Qal  inf.  cstr.  expressing  purpose  of 
Yahweh.  Jpp  vb.  Qal  (1)  usually  intrans.,  tremble,  be  in  terror  Dt.  I29  721 
203  316  Jos.  i9Jb.  3134,  but  this  does  not  suit  context;    (2)  trans.,  cause  to 


88  PSALMS 

tremble,  terrify  Is.  219-  21  suits  this  passage  and  gives  intensity  to  v.166.  Niph. 
ptc.  of  'El,  as  terrible,  exciting  terror,  Ps.  89s.  —  cmjn]  as  930,21.  —  jnNn  ;d] 
(5  pNH  Sj?.     This  is  interpretation,  and  not  suited  to  v.166. 


PSALM   XL,  2  str.  81 

Ps.  1 1  is  a  guest  Ps.  The  Psalmist  has  taken  refuge  in  Yah- 
weh  (v.16),  and  expostulates  with  those  who  urge  him  to  flee  from 
his  enemies  to  the  mountains  (v.lc~3).  Yahweh  is  in  His  heav- 
enly temple  (v.4),  testing  the  righteous  (v.5a),  hating  the  wicked 
(v.56),  and  about  to  destroy  them  (v.6).  A  liturgical  couplet  states 
the  general  truth  that  Yahweh  loveth  the  righteous,  and  they 
will  behold  His  face  (v.7). 

JN  (Thee),  Yahweh,  have  I  taken  refuge. 
How  say  ye  to  me : 
"  Flee  to  (the)  mountain  as  a  bird ; 
"  For  lo  they  tread  the  bow, 
"  They  have  prepared  their  arrow  on  the  string, 
"  To  shoot  in  darkness  at  the  rightminded. 
"  When  the  foundations  are  being  thrown  down, 
"  The  righteous  —  what  has  he  done  ?  " 
YAHWEH  is  in  His  holy  temple; 
Yahweh  is  in  heaven,  His  throne ; 
His  eyes  behold  (the  world), 
His  eyelids  try  the  sons  of  mankind. 
Yahweh  trieth  the  righteous, 
But  the  wicked  His  soul  doth  hate; 
He  will  rain  upon  the  wicked  coals  of  fire, 
Brimstone  and  a  burning  wind  will  be  the  portion  of  their  cup. 

The  Ps.  was  in  Q  and  then  subsequently  in  331ft  (v.  Intr.  §§  27.  33).  It  is 
a  Ps.  of  refuge,  giving  the  experience  of  an  individual,  and  stating  it  objec- 
tively. It  was  generalised  by  glosses  and  a  concluding  couplet,  and  so 
adapted  to  public  worship.  The  following  are  the  evidences  of  date : 
(1)  There  is  no  reference  to  earlier  literature,  except  possibly  to  the  story 
of  the  destruction  of  Sodom:  Gen.  1924  (J),  in  the  original  v.6.  (2)  The 
words:  mnirn  v.3,  elsw.  Is.  204  2  S.  io4  in  a  different  sense;  rioySi  v.6,  elsw. 
La.  510  Ps.  11953;  and  syntax,  ine;  v.6  showing  neglect  of  juss.  characteristic 
of  Is.2  give  evidence  of  a  date  not  earlier  than  the  Exile.  (3)  The  pnx 
v3. 5. 7  js  one  wh0  Seeks  refuge  in  Yahweh  and  is  rightminded;  there  is  no 
trace  of  legal  or  gnomic  conceptions.  The  enemies  are  not  foreign  but 
domestic,  and  are  men  of  disorder.  (4)  (a)  The  reference  to  the  heavenly 
temple  and  neglect  of  the  earthly,  points  to  a  time  when  the  earthly  temple 


PSALM   XL  89 

had  little  religious  influence.  (b)  The  wide  outlook  of  the  divine  inspection 
of  the  world  implies  the  world-point  of  view  rather  than  the  provincial. 
(c)  The  conception  of  the  disciplinary  testing  of  the  righteous  and  the  sure 
destruction  of  the  violent  enemies  is  post-deuteronomic.  On  the  whole  the 
Ps.  seems  to  be  subsequent  to  J,  D,  and  Is.2,  and  to  precede  the  legal  attitude 
of  Ezra  and  his  times.  It  is  best  explained  as  from  the  circumstances  of  the 
feeble  community  in  Jerusalem  shortly  after  the  Restoration. 

Str.  I.  1.  The  Psalmist  states  emphatically,  /  have  taken 
refuge],  probably  in  the  original  less  objectively.  —  in  Thee, 
Yahweh],  as  312  711,  condensed  by  a  late  editor  to  "in  Yahweh," 
cf.  Vrss.  Therefore  he  is  not  dismayed  by  his  perils  or  the 
anxieties  of  his  advisers,  but  on  the  contrary  expostulates  with 
them.  —  How  say  ye  to  me  ?].  The  remainder  of  the  Str.  is  taken 
up  with  their  advice,  in  which  the  poet  describes  the  perilous 
situation. — Flee  (thou)],  so  all  ancient  Vrss.  and  Qr.,  over 
against  Kt.  "  flee  ye,"  which  originated  from  "  your  mountain," 
an  error  of  MT.,  for  mountain  as  of  Vrss.  —  as  a  bird\  This 
is  thought  to  be  a  proverbial  popular  phrase  by  Evv.,  Hu.,  al. 
Birds  flee  to  forests  when  in  peril,  and  as  these  in  Palestine  were 
on  mountains,  naturally  to  the  mountains.  The  mountains  of 
Judah  were  especially  places  of  refuge  on  account  of  numerous 
caves,  steep  cliffs,  and  inaccessible  rocks  ;  therefore  from  the 
earliest  to  the  latest  times  they  have  been  refuges  of  the  perse- 
cuted;  so  for  David  1  S.  24,  26;  for  Mattathias  1  Mac.  228. — 
2.  The  reason  for  this  advice  is  they  tread  the  bow  ||  they  have 
prepared  their  arrow  o?i  the  string].  The  enemies  are  archers, 
they  are  all  ready  to  shoot,  he  is  in  deadly  peril.  —  to  shoot  in 
darkness].  They  are  not  in  battle  array,  they  are  not  face  to  face 
with  him ;  but  they  are  hidden,  concealed  in  the  darkness,  so 
that  he  cannot  tell  when  they  will  shoot  or  from  what  direction ; 
they  are  secret,  treacherous,  though  deadly  enemies.  They  are 
probably  not  real  archers,  but  they  are  compared  to  bowmen  in 
ambush.  —  at  the  rightminded].  They  are  not  only  the  enemies 
of  the  Psalmist,  but  of  all  the  rightminded,  and  for  the  reason  that 
they  are  rightminded.  Their  purpose  is  to  destroy  the  righteous. 
The  poet  is  in  peril  just  because  he  is  righteous.  —  3.  When 
the  foundations  are  being  thrown  down]  :  the  foundations  are  the 
established   institutions,  the  social  and  civil  order  of  the  com- 


90  PSALMS 

munity.  (3,  SS,  V  interpret  as  vb.  with  rel. :  "  For  what  Thou  hast 
established  they  throw  down,"  which  thinks  of  the  institutions  as 
divine.  These  enemies  are  not  only  enemies  of  the  righteous, 
but  they  are  pulling  down  all  the  institutions  and  good  order  of 
society.  These  institutions  protect  the  rightminded  righteous : 
when  they  are  destroyed  the  righteous  are  exposed  to  violence 
of  all  kinds. —  The  righteous'],  emph.  in  position,  for  his  right- 
eousness is  the  real  issue.  That  describes  the  Psalmist  in  the 
statement  of  his  timid  advisers.  —  what  has  he  done],  so  PBV., 
Kirk,  rightly.  Experience  shows  that  he  has  not  accomplished 
anything  under  such  circumstances ;  therefore  in  such  a  time, 
and  in  such  peril,  the  best  advice  is  "  flee,"  take  refuge  in  the 
mountains  —  in  striking  antith.  to  the  Psalmist's  action  in  taking 
refuge  in  Yahweh.  The  translations  :  "  What  can  the  righteous 
do?"  AV.,  RV.,  though  sustained  by  Dr.§19;  "shall  do,"  JPSV., 
are  difficult  to  reconcile  with  the  Heb.  perfect  tense.  The 
eight  lines  of  this  Str.  are  synth.  each  to  the  previous  in  regu- 
lar order. 

Str.  II.  The  advisers  have  stated  strongly  what  the  enemies 
are  doing.  The  Psalmist  now  in  antith.  states  more  strongly  what 
Yahweh  is  doing,  as  a  justification  of  his  seeking  refuge  in  Him. 
It  is  therefore  an  antistr.  to  the  previous  one.  This  Str.  is  com- 
posed of  four  couplets,  three  syn.  v.4a- 6' 4c  ■* 6,  one  antith.  vA  — 
4.  Yahweh  is  in  His  holy  temple],  sometimes  Yahweh  is  con- 
ceived as  resident  in  His  holy  temple  in  Jerusalem,  in  the  throne 
room  of  that  temple,  as  5s  791  1382;  but  here  from  the  syn. 
Yahweh  is  in  heaven,  the  temple  is  the  heavenly  one,  as  Mi.  i2 
Hb.  220  Ps.  187.  —  His  throne],  either  in  apposition  with  heaven 
as  a  closer  definition  of  heaven  itself  as  the  throne,  cf.  Is.  66\  or 
local  accusative  on  His  throne  ;  in  either  case,  seated  on  His 
throne  in  His  heavenly  palace.  Enthroned  there  He  is  not  indif- 
ferent to  what  transpires  on  earth  and  among  men.  —  His  eyes 
behold],  the  object  has  fallen  out  of  J^,  but  is  given  in  some  Vrss. 
as  the  world,  which  is  most  appropriate  to  the  context.  It  is 
especially  favoured  by  the  syn.  His  eyelids  try  the  sons  of  man- 
kind]. The  eyelids  are  strained  in  the  severe  scrutiny,  which 
marks  closely  and  accurately  all  that  men  do  in  the  world.  This 
tetrastich  is  in  antith.  to  v.1,  the  statement  of  the  Psalmist  that  he 


PSALM  XL  91 

has  taken  refuge  in  Yahweh,  and  the  advice  to  seek  refuge  in  the 
mountains.  He  has  in  fact  sought  refuge  in  heaven,  a  place 
infinitely  higher  and  more  secure  than  the  mountains ;  and  in 
Yahweh,  the  heavenly  King,  who  is  investigating  just  this  situation 
in  which  he  is  involved.  —  5.  Yahweh  trieth  the  righteous'].  If, 
as  his  advisers  admit,  he  is  righteous  v.35  and  rightminded  v.2c, 
Yahweh  is  scrutinising  him,  trying  him  and  his  case  thoroughly. — 
but  the  wicked  His  soul  doth  hate].  This  exact  antith.  to  the 
previous  line  is  weakened  by  a  later  editor,  at  the  expense  also 
of  the  measure,  in  his  effort  to  describe  the  wicked  more  par- 
ticularly by  him  that  loveth  violence.  They  are  the  archers  of  v.2. 
Their  treacherous  preparations  to  shoot  the  righteous  are  all 
observed  by  Yahweh,  and  He  hates  them  from  His  very  soul. 
The  soul  is  the  seat  of  the  passion  of  anger  and  hatred,  for  God 
as  well  as  for  man.  If,  therefore,  Yahweh  is  trying  the  righteous 
man,  and  hating  his  deadly  enemies,  the  reason  given  by  the 
advisers  for  fleeing  to  the  mountains  is  not  a  sound  one ;  it  is 
rather  a  reason  why  he  should  do  what  he  has  done  :  take  refuge 
in  Yahweh.  —  6.  This  couplet  is  synth.  to  the  previous  one  and 
in  antith.  to  v.3. — He  will  rain  upon  the  wicked].  The  figure  of 
rain  is  suggested  by  the  fact  that  Yahweh  is  on  His  heavenly 
throne  and  is  looking  down  from  heaven  upon  the  earthly  situa- 
tion ;  and  also  by  the  fact  that  divine  interpositions  are  ordinarily 
conceived  as  coming  from  heaven.  —  Coals  of  fire],  so  after  2. 
For  an  image  of  lightning  flashes  and  thunderbolts  in  similar 
terms,  v.  Ps.  1813"15.  J^  snares  and  fire  gives  a  heterogeneous 
combination,  and  it  is  difficult  to  understand  what  snares  have  to 
do  with  this  storm  of  judgment.  The  syn.  brimstone  reminds  of 
the  destruction  of  Sodom  Gn.  1924  (J),  and  a  burning  wind  of 
the  Samum  or  Sirocco  of  the  East.  —  will  be  the  portion  of  their 
cup],  not  that  they  were  to  drink  in  their  cup  such  a  mixture  of 
brimstone  and  burning,  but  the  cup  is  fig.,  as  Ps.  165,  of  what  one 
enjoys  at  a  feast.  Yahweh  rains  from  heaven  upon  these  wicked 
men,  and  they  drink  their  portion.  Instead  of  a  draught  of  joy,  it 
is  a  draught  of  burning  judgment.  In  antith.  to  these  wicked  men 
casting  down  the  foundations  of  society  v.3a,  is  Yahweh  raining  fire 
from  heaven  upon  them ;  and  so  in  response  to  the  final  question 
of  the  previous  Str.  "  What  has  he  done "  v.36  is  the  answer  — 


92  PSALMS 

there  is  no  call  for  him  to  do  anything.  Yahweh  has  done  it  for 
him.     The  wicked  have  their  portion  already  in  hand. 

7.  The  Ps.  has  reached  its  splendid  climax.  There  was  nothing 
more  to  be  said.  But  a  later  editor,  thinking  he  might  give  it  a 
better  devotional  ending,  appends  an  appropriate  couplet.  — 

For  the  righteous  Yahweh  loveth ; 
The  upright  will  behold  His  face. 

This  is  a  synth.  couplet  enhancing  the  privileges  of  the  righteous 
of  the  Ps.  The  righteous  ||  the  upright]  are  the  "  rightminded  " 
(v.2c).  A  still  later  editor,  probably  on  account  of  the  unusual 
emph.  position  of  "  the  righteous,"  regards  it  as  predicate  of 
Yahweh,  or  adjective,  and  so  either  "  Yahweh  is  righteous "  or 
"  the  righteous  Yahweh,"  and  accordingly  supplies  an  object  to 
the  vb. :  "  righteous  acts"  which  may  be  interpreted  either  of 
righteous  acts  of  the  righteous  man,  as  Is.  64s,  or  of  the  righteous 
acts  which  Yahweh  Himself  loves  to  do. — behold  His  face~],  so 
RV.,  Dr.,  that  is,  see  the  face  of  Yahweh,  as  His  guest  in  the 
temple,  Kirk.,  cf.  5^,  or  after  death,  cf.  1611  1715.  That  is  the 
highest  privilege  of  the  one  whom  Yahweh  loves.  But  it  may  be 
rendered  "  His  face  beholdeth  the  upright,"  so  essentially  AV., 
JPSV.,  which  is  a  rather  tame  repetition  of  v.4c,  and  is  improbable, 
even  in  a  liturgical  addition  to  the  Ps. 

1.  rnn-o]  emph.  —  ^Dn]  Qal  pf.  action  completed  in  present,  v.  212.  This 
1.  is  defective.  It  is  probable  that  the  original  was  T^on  nvr>  *p  as  312  711. 
—  $T?]  a(^v*  (0  interr°g«  how?  in  expostulation  1374  as  Gn.  39°  44s'34 
Jos.  97  (J),  t  0)",ONn  T?  how  canst  thou  {ox  you)  Ps.  u1  as  Ju.  1615  Is.  1911 
Je.  2^;  (2)  exclam.  how!  in  satisfaction  Ps.  7319  Is.  I44- 12  Je.  48s9.  —  T?^] 
to  me,  v.  j3.  — n«]  Kt.  Qal  imv.  m.  pi.  originated  from  sf.  D^n  which  is  not 
sustained  by  context  nor  by  Vrss.  which  rd.  -ncx  ied  in.  Accordingly  »"»u  Qr. 
fs.  is  correct.  J  "nj  vb.  Qal  move  to  and  fro,  flutter  as  bird  //-*,  elsw.  in  sympathy 
69'21  Jb.  211  4211,  Hiph.  cause  to  wander  aimlessly  as  fugitives  3612  5912  v.  txt.  — 
ton]  is  fuller  archaic  form  of  prep,  r  sim.  v.  2(f.  —  2.  D^ytfin]  a  class  as  v.5-6 
antith.  pns,  v.  i1,  here  an  unnecessary  gl.  —  n#j5  fWi»]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  full 
form  in  p  descriptive,  v.  713. —  urr]  Polel  pf.  3  pi.  proper  perfect.  —  "^"V?] 
i.p.  without  pausal  vowel  as  indicated  by  Mas.  —  nn^]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  c.  7  pur- 
pose. X  n-v  vb.  Qal  (1)  shoot  arrows  c.acc.  p.  64s,  c.  S  p.  u2.  Hiph  (i)  same 
c.  ace.  p.  645-  8  prob.  also  45s  {v.  txt.).  (2)  direct,  teach  -p-ci  25s  32s,  of  God 
c.  ace.  p.  1 19102;  also  ace.  rei  2711  86n  1 1983,  -p-o  2512.  —  t  '•03]  poetic,  archaic 
for  3  elsw.  Is.  2510  (Qr.)  43s  4416- 19  Jb.  930  (Kt.)  i64-*  19I6  378.     Before  Son 


PSALM  XL  93 

more  euphonic  than  a.  —  f  aS  neh]  v.  y11  3211  3611  6411  9415  9711.  —  3.  *a] 
conj.  when.  —  rVmtfn]  n.  pi.  emph.  f  ntf  n. :  (1)  sitting  place,  buttocks  2  S  io4 
Is.  204.  This  does  not  suit  our  passage.  3  has  leges.  2.  de<r/AoL,  so  usually 
foundations,  Dr.  buttresses  (Is.  1910  J§  is  interpreted  as  same;  but  <J§,  9T 
n>ntf,  so  Bu.).  <g,  ^  interpret  6'ti  A  KarripTiaio  here,  n  article  for  relative  and 
verb,  rYintf  =  «//W  T/fow  ^tftf  established,  n>v  v.  87.  This  is  tempting  but 
improb.  —  piDnrr]  Niph.  impf.  3  pi.  full  form,  cf.  v.2  (3  interprets  as  Qal. 
I  D-p  Qal :  C1)  throw  down  285;  (2)  £?va/£  away  teeth  5s7.  Niph.  be  thrown 
down,  so  here  of  walls  of  city  Je.  5015,  cities  Ez.  36s5.  —  "?^B"noJ  cf.  Jb.  n8. 
Two  tones  are  needed;  there  should  be  no  Makkeph. — wn*  vr>]  phr.  a.X.; 
n.  emph.;  vb.  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  of  habitual  action.  The  obj.  is  needed  for  meas- 
ure. (3  has  els  rbv  irivrjTa  =  naSnS  as  io8- 10- 14  probably  assimilated  to  that 
passage;  6  Syr.  Hexapla  nSnS  to  world  is  better  suited  to  context  v.  i?U. — 
4.  %  nrn]  vb.  Qal  see,  behold:  (1)  (a)  c.  ace.  rei  58°-  n,  God's  face  n7  1715; 
(b)  God  subj.  His  eyes  iA  172;  {c)  c.  a  look  on,  ">  a;a  in  temple  27*.  (2)  see, 
perceive  c.  ace.  Yahweh  in  His  temple  633,  in  His  providential  working  469 
Is.  2611-  n  Jb.  239.  —  X  D*5';_D';J  n.m.  pi.  eyelids  1 I4  1324.  —  5.  jna">  pv«  ">].  |§, 
3  make  this  a  complete  sentence  attaching  jfBhl  to  next  line.  4§  followed  by 
Du.  attaches  it  to  previous  clause,  making  two  tetrameters.  But  the  testing 
is  more  appropriate  to  the  righteous,  and  we  get  a  better  antith.  by  contrasting 
God's  dealings  with  the  righteous  and  the  wicked  in  the  two  lines,  jneni  is 
the  proper  antith.  to  pnx.  Then  Don  anxi  must  be  a  gl.  of  specification.  — 
■itfDj  nNjir]  Qal  pf.  3  f.  trsj  subj.;  but  <§  fuaei  ttjv  eavrov  tyvxhv  (cf. 
Pr.  8s6)  must  have  rd.  n:t\  In  <g  itfBJ  is  himself;  in  $?  K^p3  is  the  seat 
of  anger.  <&  makes  the  antith.  in  the  person  of  the  wicked,  f^  with  the 
previous  line,  tfgj  n.f.  as  X  reflexive  4919  6911,  for  paraphrase  of  pers.  pronouns 
v.  j3,  as  seat  of  emotions  and  passions  v.  id3.  —  6.  nap?]  Qal  impf.,  in  form 
juss. ;  but  it  has  lost  its  juss.  force,  as  often  in  later  poetry  after  Is.2. 
$"V2D  vb.  denom.  rain,  Qal,  Am.  47.  Hiph.  in  \f/  only  fig.;  manna  jS24,  flesh 
7827,  cf.  bread  Ex.  164  (J)  and  coals  of  fire  Ps.  n6. —  DTO]  is  scribal  error  for 
ipns  after  2,  Ew.,  Ba.,  J3DK,  Du.  f  ^ns  coal  Pr.  2621.  ana  ex  Is.  5416,  cf.  4412. 
X  n?  n.m.  bird  trap,  in  i/'  only  fig.  of  calamities  and  plots  1 19110  1247  1406  1424 
Je.  1822,  u;ip>  's  Pss.  913,  cf.  1247  1419  Ho.  98;  as  source  or  agent  of  calamity 
Ps.  6923  Ho.  51  Is.  814  Jos.  2313;  so  here  if  correct,  but  altogether  improbable. 

—  X  tf*f]  n>f-  fire>  °f  conflagration,  antith.  D^D  6612,  as  consuming  683  747 
11812;  subj.  mpa  8315,  exa  «ptf  4610  8017,  ex  nun  2110;  (2)  of  lightning, 
(a)  natural  297  1044  10532  1488;  (b)  theophanic,  ex  >Sm  i813-14,  cf.  14011,  so 
here  if  ex  >Dnfl.  It  precedes  Yahweh  503  97s.  (3)  The  historic  theophanies 
of  the  Exodus  7814  10539,  consuming  Korah  ex  nyan  10618.  (4)  Fire  of  anger 
nSax  189  2110  78s3,  exa  mpa  795  =  8947,  cf.  7821,  of  strong  emotion  ex  nyan  394.— 
Jnnoj]  n.f.  brimstone,  fig.  of  judgment,  with  nnocn  also  Gn.  1924  (J)  Ez.  3822. 

—  fnW?}]  n.f.  pi.  raging  heat,  fig.  zeal  sg.  Ps.  11953,  pi.  of  the  wind  Samum 
116,  no  need  however  of  rvn,  which  makes  1.  too  long;  of  fever  of  famine  La.  510. 

—  t  njp]  n.f.  portion,  cstr.  n>jn.  y'njn  (v.  GesJ95"  Lag.5Ar81- 15°)  in  good  sense, 
of  Yahweh  165,  in  bad  sense  n6  6311,  cf.  6S24.     It  was  contr.  for  euphony  and 


94  PSALMS 

should  be  connected  with  cdid  by  a  Makkeph  for  a  single  tone.  J  Do  n.f. 
cup  in  good  sense  as  given  by  Yahweh  23s  11615,  Yahweh  Himself  165;  in 
bad  sense  given  the  wicked  to  drink  u6  75s  Je.  4912  La.  4'21  Is.  5117  Ez.  2333. 
—  7.  2ns  nin'  |-mx  >r]  cf.  v.5a.  The  position  of  pns  is  unusual.  Accordingly 
it  was  regarded  by  }fy,  (S,  3  as  an  attribute  of  Yahweh,  and  a  cognate  obj.  was 
supplied  in  rh\*Tt  righteous  ads,  of  divine  acts  1036  -f-  6  t.,  but  if  correct  here  of 
human  acts  as  Is.  64s  Je.  5110  +  4  t.  But  it  is  doubtless  a  gl.  making  the 
1.  too  long.  —  'idvio  vn\  "V£}].  ">&  v.  y11  here  only  coll.,  and  therefore  doubtful. 
<S  interprets  as  -vr\  The  vb.  may  be  pi.  if  connected  with  p>Ttt  coll.  as 
subj.;  if  not  it  may  be  an  interpretation  and  not  original  with  ir,  as  sub- 
ject. '•DVjO  archaic  suffix  for  vjo,  usually  pi.,  but  here  sg.  as  Jb.  2028  2j2:\  v. 
Ges.§103(2)n-3.  This  form  of  suffix  gives  a  more  melodious  ending  to  the  Ps. 
These  two  lines  expressing  a  general  truth  are  a  later  gl.  for  congregation, 
not  suited  to  the  original  Ps. 


PSALM   XII.,  4  str.  44. 

Ps.  12  is  a  prayer,  in  which  the  congregation  implores  Yahweh 
to  save  them,  for  the  faithful  vanish  away  and  liars  prevail 
(v.2-3)  j  and  to  cut  off  the  liars  (v.4~5).  Yahweh  Himself  says  that 
He  will  arise,  and  set  the  afflicted  in  safety  (v.6 -7b).  The  congre- 
gation finally  expresses  confidence  that  Yahweh  will  preserve  them 
from  the  wicked  round  about  (v.8-9) . 

r\  SAVE,  Yahweh,  for  (kindness)  is  no  more; 

For  (faithfulness)  is  vanished  from  among  the  sons  of  mankind; 

Empty  lies  they  speak,  each  with  his  neighbour, 

With  flattering  lip,  with  double  mind  they  speak. 
TyTAY  Yahweh  cut  off  every  flattering  lip, 

And  (every)  tongue  speaking  great  words  : 

Those  who  say,  "  To  our  tongues  we  give  might, 

Our  lip  is  our  own  ;  who  is  lord  over  us?  " 
"  RECAUSE  of  the  spoiling  of  the  afflicted,  because  of  the  sighing  of  the  poor, 

Now  will  I  arise,"  saith  Yahweh. 

"  I  will  set  (him)  in  safety,  I  will  (shine  forth  for)  him, 

(When  thrust  down)  to  the  earth  he  shall  be  purified  seven  times." 
'P'HOU,  Yahweh,  wilt  preserve  (his  life), 

Wilt  keep  (him)  from  this  generation  forever. 

(Though)  round  about  the  wicked  walk, 

(When  Thou  risest  up),  (Thou  dost  lightly  esteem)  the  sons  of  mankind. 

The  Ps.  was  in  B,  then  in  £H  and  E&  (v.  Intr.  §§27,  31,  33).  In  the 
latter  it  received  the  assignment  rirr^n"^,  indicating  that  it  was  to  be  sung 
an  octave  lower,  that  is,  by  the  bass  voice  (jv.  Intr.  §  34).    The  Ps.  is  unusually 


PSALM  XII.  95 

symmetrical  in  structure,  4x4x4.  This  is  disturbed  by  the  gnomic  gl.  in 
v.7.  The  date  of  the  Ps.  cannot  be  too  late  because  of  juss.  v.*,  cohort  v.'2; 
but  demonst.  1?  without  article  v.8  is  not  classic,  -idj  v.26  as  710  779  and  ids 
v.2  =  1D3N  779;  the  use  of  -pan,  D'UiDN  v.2,  D"jy,  DW3M  v.6,  for  the  righteous 
members  of  the  congregation  over  against  wicked  members,  all  indicate  a 
time  of  religious  declension,  in  which  the  pious  were  in  great  suffering  and 
peril,  especially  from  slander  and  violence.  It  was  a  time  of  external  peace 
and  internal  corruption.  The  great  stress  laid  upon  sins  of  speech,  v.3,  cf.  41 7 
1448  Pr.  624  1  Ch.  1233;  v.4  cf.  1311;  indicates  the  influence  of  Persian  ethics. 
V.6  gives  a  citation  from  Is.  3310,  and  not  the  reverse.  All  this  favours  the 
Persian  period,  at  the  time  when  the  people  were  corrupted  by  mingling  too 
freely  with  the  neighbouring  nations,  subsequent  to  the  building  of  the  second 
temple  and  prior  to  the  reforms  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  two  tetrameter  syn.  couplets.  The 
couplets  themselves  are  antith.  —  2.  O  save'],  cohort,  imv.,  earnest 
entreaty  to  Yahweh. — for],  giving  the  reason.  —  kindness  ||  faith- 
fulness] as  suggested  by  chief  ancient  Vrss.  and  best  suited  to 
context.  ^  and  other  Vrss.  followed  by  EV8.  have  "  godly  "  and 
"faithful."  —  is  no  more],  have  come  to  an  end  as  710  779.  —  is 
vanished],  has  disappeared,  ceased,  as  77s.  According  to  the  in- 
terpretation adopted,  kindness,  trustworthiness  seem  no  longer 
to  exist  in  the  community,  cf.  Ho.  41  Je.  728.  In  the  other 
case  the  persons  themselves  who  should  have  these  characteristics 
are  no  more,  cf.  Mi.  f  Is.  571.  —  3.  Empty  lies  they  speak],  fre- 
quentative, of  their  custom  or  habit,  cf.  417  144s- n. —  each  with 
his  neighbour].  Unfaithfulness  has  so  spread  throughout  the  con- 
gregation that  it  has  become  a  personal  matter  of  man  with  man. 
—  With  flattering  lip],  as  v.4,  cf.  Pr.  624. —  with  double  mind], 
with  two  different  minds,  cf.  1  Ch.  1233  Ja.  i8. 

Str.  II.  has  two  syn.  couplets.  —  4.  May  Yahweh  cut  off]. 
The  juss.  takes  place  of  imv.  of  previous  Str.  —  every  flattering 
lip  ||  every  tongue  speaking  great  words].  These  do  not  refer  to  the 
character  of  the  words  as  related  to  the  speaker,  and  so  "  proud 
things  "  PBV.,  boastful ;  but  as  related  to  the  hearer,  greater  than 
the  reality,  and  so  flattering,  deceiving,  and  misleading.  —  5.  Those 
who  say],  referring  to  persons  who  use  lip  and  tongue.  —  To  our 
tongue  we  give  might],  as  (3,  3,  Hi.,  De.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  that  it  may 
speak  these  great  words.  We  are  mighty,  with  no  one  mightier 
than  we  are.  —  who  is  lord  over  us  ?]  implying  negative  answer, 


g6  PSALMS 

no  one.  We  are  our  own  lord,  our  lips  are  our  own],  in  our  own 
possession  and  power,  and  therefore  we  may  make  them  as  mighty 
as  we  please.  "  Proud  hypocrites  are  meant,  putting  confidence 
in  their  speech  to  deceive  men,  and  not  submitting  themselves  to 
God,"  Aug.  The  translation  "with  our  tongue  will  we  prevail," 
EV8.,  JPSV.,  after  ft,  though  followed  by  Ba\,  Du.,  al.,  is  gram- 
matically not  so  easy  and  not  so  well  suited  to  context. 

Str.  III.  is  a  synth.  tetrastich  disordered  by  a  gnomic  gloss. — 
6.  Because  of  the  spoiling].  The  crafty  enemies  were  also  violent. 
They  had  attacked  the  people  unprepared  and  had  taken  spoils 
from  them. — sighing],  indicating  a  sad  condition  as  the  result  of 
this  grievous  wrong.  —  the  afflicted  ||  poor],  as  3510  3714  4018  (  =  706) 
7421  861  1091622;  the  prey  of  the  liars  and  flatterers  among  their 
neighbours.  These  are  the  words  of  Yahweh  Himself,  who  is  re- 
solved to  interpose  on  their  behalf —  the  reason  for  which  is  men- 
tioned first  for  emphasis.  —  Now  will  I  arise,  saith  Yahweh],  an 
exact  quotation  from  Is.  3310.  Yahweh  rises  up,  when  He  would 
interpose  on  behalf  of  His  people  or  the  righteous  among  them, 
cf.  io12.  —  /  will  set  in  safety],  phr.  only  here,  an  exact  response 
to  the  entreaty  v.2a.  —  /  will  shine  forth  for  him],  in  theophanic 
manifestation  as  Dt.  33s  Pss.  502  802  941,  in  accordance  with  Vrss. 
The  three  vbs.  without  conj.  give  emph.  utterance  to  the  purpose 
of  Yahweh.  But  J^  gives  a  vb.  that  occasions  great  difficulty, 
which  is  interpreted  as  a  relative  clause ;  "  from  him  that  pufifeth 
at  him  "  AV. ;  "  at  whom  they  puff"  RV.,  as  io5 ;  "  at  whom  they 
scoff"  JPSV.,  or,  "that  he  panteth  for"  RV.m,  Dr.,  or  temporal 
"  when  they  pant  for  him  "  Kirk. ;  none  of  which  are  satisfactory. 
—  7.  The  words  of  Yahweh  are  pure  words,  silver  refined].  This 
clause  constitutes  a  gl.,  interrupting  the  words  of  Yahweh  and 
destroying  the  structure  of  the  Str.,  which  has  its  fourth  line  at 
the  close  of  v.7.  It  is  a  glossator's  expression  of  admiration  of 
the  words  of  Yahweh  uttered  in  the  Str.  It  is,  moreover,  a  gnomic 
sentence,  cf.  Pr.  305  Pss.  1831  1910.  His  words  are  as  pure  as  re- 
fined silver.  —  When  thrust  down  to  the  earth],  referring  to  the 
afflicted  among  the  people,  continuing  the  words  of  Yahweh, 
cf.  747  1433  La.  22  Jb.  1615.  The  usual  interpretation,  referring 
this  clause  to  the  silver,  is  difficult  in  every  respect.  The  trans- 
lations :   "  As  silver  tried  in  a  furnace  of  earth "  AV ;  or  "  on 


PSALM   XII.  97 

earth"  RV. ;  "refined  in  an  earthen  furnace  "  JPSV.,  are  not  sus- 
tained by  etymology  or  syntax.  The  Vrss.  and  interpreters  differ 
greatly,  without  in  any  case  finding  the  sentence  appropriate  to 
the  context.  —  he  shall  be  purified],  that  is  the  afflicted,  by  suf- 
ferings j  cf.  Mai.  33.  —  seven  times],  the  holy  number  of  complete 
purification. 

Str.  IV.  is  composed  of  a  syn.  and  a  synth.  couplet.  The  pious 
now  express  their  confidence  in  Yahweh,  who  has  spoken  with  so 
great  promptness  and  decision. — 8.  Wilt  preserve  ||  wilt  keep~\. 
The  obj.  is  dub.  in  text.  The  suffixes  in  J^  are  3  pers.  This  is 
better  suited  to  context  than  1  pers.  of  (3,  J.  Probably  both  are 
interpretations,  the  Heb.  vbs.  being  without  suffixes  in  the  original 
text.  This  is  confirmed  by  the  absence  of  one  word  in  the  first 
line,  shortening  the  measure  without  reason.  We  should  supply 
the  usual  object  in  such  cases,  probably  his  life,  — fro?n  this  gener- 
ation^, the  class  of  men  described  above  as  liars  and  deceivers, 
cf.  Dt.  32s  Ps.  78s-8  Pr.  3011121314.  — 9.  Though'],  the  conjunction 
is  needed  for  measure  and  meaning.  —  round  about  the  wicked 
walk],  familiar  association  with  the  righteous  as  in  v.3,  close 
neighbourly  conversation,  and  also  publicity  and  boldness  of  their 
wicked  life. —  When  Thou  risest  up],  going  back  upon  the  promise 
of  Yahweh  v.6,  after  (3,  which  interprets  it  of  Yahweh,  though  re- 
garding the  form  as  noun.  It  is  usually  regarded  as  infin.  with 
prep,  in  a  temporal  clause,  referring  to  the  wicked,  according  to 
the  interpretation  of  the  subsequent  context  as  "  the  vilest  men  " 
3,  AV.  But  $f  makes  it  abstr.  "  vileness  "  RV.,  Kirk.,  "  worthless- 
ness  "  BDB.  Such  a  word  is,  however,  unknown  elsw.  in  Heb. 
It  is  best  therefore  to  follow  (3,  and  to  regard  it  as  vb.  and  refer 
it  to  Yahweh  :  Thou  dost  lightly  esteem],  so  Gr.,  cf.  La.  i8.  This 
gives  an  appropriate  climax  to  the  Ps. 


2.  njr^n]  Hiph.  cohort,  imv.  y/yw  v.  js.  (3  oCxrbv  fie,  so  Che.  is  prob.  inter- 
pretation.—  ">p.p?]  causal  conj.Qalpf.v/-)DJ  v.  7I0real  pf.,subj.  — Tpn]  |$,  @||. 
D^TOH  ?§,  3,  %,  pi.  ptc.  pass.  Qal,  y/]l2H,  cf.  31*24,  v.  19?  ;  but  (H  pi.  ai  aX-qdeiai 
=  V  veritates  —  truths,  cf.  &,  2,  RV.m.  \  JDK  n.m.  faithfulness  sg.  Dt.  3220,  pi. 
abstr.  Pr.  1317  145  206  Is.  262.  <g  and  |$  differ  also  Ps.  3124.  Probably  <g  is  cor- 
rect in  interp.  of  form,  but  they  were  both  abstract.  In  this  case  we  should  rd. 
-<cn  as  We.  For  similar  mistake  v.  4k  We  should  remember  that  in  original 
Mss.  only  iDn  was  written,  and  it  might  be  interpreted  either  as  vpn  or  ion. — 
H 


98  PSALMS 

ids]  is  prob.  error  for  f  D?x  fail,  come  to  an  end  as  77s  Gn.  4715  16  Is.  164  2920. 
(3  d}\iyu)dr)o-cip.  The  pi.  of  vb.  may  be  as  often  elsw.  an  interpretation. — 
3.  J  HUP]  emph. :  (l)  emptiness,  nothingness,  vanity,  a  vain  expectation  6o13 
(  =  io813)  8948  11937  1272.  'V  ""San  vanities,  mere  nothings,  idols  31"  =  Jon.  29; 
K">#7  tif  vain,  Ps.  13920,  so  n^  I271- J  Mai.  314;  (2)  emptiness  of  speech  here 
as  Pss.  24*  417  144s-11;  (3)  of  conduct,  'V  »HD  worthless  men  264  Jb.  II11. — 
w^Pi!  ***]  "«*  wi/54  another,  cf.  ^trnH  49s,  B^m  c\s  87°.  —  rnpSq  netr]  emph. 
=  'n  »nut?  v.4,  prob.  both  should  be  sg.  syn.  p£;S. —  f  [nj;Sn]  n.f. :  (1)  slippery 
place  7318;  (2)  smoothness,  flattery  i^-i  Pr.  G24  Is.  3010;  (3)  smoothness 
Gn.  2716. — aSi  aSa]  w/Z/i  too  minds,  cf.  8l\j/vx<>s  Ja.  I8. — 4.  rnir]  Hiph. 
juss.  X  n"33  Qa^  ***  or  conclude  a  covenant  505  83°  894  1059.  Niph.  be  cut  off,  of 
wicked  379- 22- 28- 84-  s8  Ho.  84  Is.  29^  Na.  21.  Hiph.  cut  off,  destroy  Pss.  7^4  1018 
10913,  p«D  3417  =  10916.  — V^~\  as  used  for  evil  purposes  v.  j10.  It  should 
have  S3  for  good  measure  as  in  syn.  1.  — HVHJ]  adj.  f.  pi.  great,  grand  words, 
<Q  ixcyaXoprj/jLova,  3  magniloquam,  cf.  nu;p  rough  words,  Gn.  42"' 3),  nnaj  proud 
words  1  S.  23,  rmj  friendly  words  Je.  126.  —  5.  "vaJJ  ur-^]  a.X.  n.  is  emph. 
vb.  is  Hiph.  impf.  I  pi.,  and  construction  difficult.  ©  ttjv  yXQao-av  rjfxQv 
/xeyaXwodfiev  =  3  lingua m  nostram  roboremus,  suits  context  and  is  followed  by 
Hi.,  De.,  Dr.  "  our  tongue  will  we  make  mighty,"  and  most.  &,  "through  our 
tongue  are  we  strong,"  so  Ba.,  Du.  But  Ew.,  Ols.  after  Dn.  927  would  supply 
jrna,  but  this  makes  1.  too  long.  jTSi  vb.  Qal :  (1)  be  strong,  mighty,  c. 
p  654;  (2)  prevail,  of  divine  "»Dn,  c.  7JJ  10311  1172.  Hiph.  here  only,  c.  *-. — 
WW]  prep,  rx,  c.  sf.  I  pi.  with  us,  on  our  side  or  in  our  own  possession. — 
6.  7#d],  ?D  causal.  t*ife>  n.  spoiling  as  Je.  67  208.  —  f  hpjn]  n.f.  groaning 
79II    10221    Mai.    213.  —  V^o]    in  jtf/£/j/.     Jj?t*    n.m.    elsw.:     (1)   salvation, 

jg8.86  271  5023  5I14  628  6914  85s-  10  951    I3216,   f  >J?B*   *7H     l847  (cf.    2    S.    2247) 

24s  25s  27s  656  799  85s  Mi.  77  Hb.  318  Is.  1710  1  Ch.:i635;"(2)  victory  Ps.  207.— 
^7  rvp*]  is  usually  taken  as  rel.  clause,  either  against  whom  one  puffs,  cf.  jo5, 
RV.,  Ges.,  Hi.,  or  that  he  panteth  for  Ew.,  De.,  Bo.,  Ols.,  Dr.,  RV.m.  Du. 
would  rd.  rPBK.  But  (S  Traprjaida-o/jLai  as  941  presupposes  ;*cx,  <£,  2,  >Din. 
Both  may  be  explained  as  interpretations  of  an  inf.  abs.  shine  forth,  in  theo- 
phanic  or  ideal  manifestation  as  Dt.  33'2  Pss.  502  802  941.  3  auxilium  eorum  — 
17  (n)-ttjf  is  probably  a  paraphrase.  — 7.  rVnon]  pi.  cstr.  %  ivvpN  n.f.  utterance, 
speech,  of  man  in  prayer  176,  elsw.  of  God's  word  I27-7  1831  10519  1 1911+211.  ^g2 
14715.  —  %  r^nv']  f.  pi.  T»na  adj.  ethically  clean,  pure,  of  the  heart  5112,  words 
of  Yahweh  127,  Law  1910.  —  TH*]  Qal  ptc.  pass.  X  T*  VD- :  (0  smelt,  refine,  of 
silver  127  6610,  words  of  Yahweh  1831  I19140  Pr.  305;  (2)  test,  the  mind,  Yahweh 
subj.  Pss.  173  262  6610  Je.  96  Is.  4810  Ze.  139;  (3)  lest,prove  Ps.  10519.  —  7^£3]  a.X. 
dub.  {£  Kliaa  interprets  as  a  loc.  and  bty  n.  furnace;  but  then  p«7  must  be 
pregnant,  Dr.,  Ba.,  flowing  dozvn  to  the  earth.  Gr.  thinks  the  last  S  dittog.  and 
rds.  "hy  as  Pr.  27*22.  Houb.  rds.  y-nm  for  ps1?;  Dy.,  Gr.  pns,  Oort,  Ehr.  pnn. 
Vrss.  had  a  different  text.  <g,  J5  doKLpuov  ry  777;  U  probatum  terrae ;  3  se- 
paratum a  terra;  Aq.  xwpouj'  7-77  77J.  All  seem  to  depend  on  "?7a  vb.  be 
divided,  separate,  not  used  in  Heb.  in  Qal,  but  only  in  N.H.  and  Aramaic.  In 
Egyptian  Aramaic  script  7  and  p  were  so  similar  that  interchange  was  easy- 


PSALM   XIII.  99 

We  might  retain  hhyn,  but  instead  of  interpreting  it  as  S'Vpa  interpret  as 
^Sipa,  Polal  inf.  cstr.  fy?p  with  3,  as  Jb.  i61&,  //*r«^  <fc«/»;  cf.  p*1?  S^n 
Pss.  747  8940,  ^-in1?  NDt  1433,  yMt*?  jpjn  Is.  2512  La.  22.  It  would  then  refer  to 
the  afflicted  of  v.6  and  introduce  the  last  line  of  the  tetrastich.  The  interven- 
ing six  words  would  then  be  a  gnomic  gl.  —  Pj5TD]  Pu.  ptc.  f  ppr  vb.  Qal, 
refine,  purify  Jb.  281  36'-" ;  Pi.  same,  Mai.  33;  Pu.  be  refined,  only  ptc.  of  metals, 
elsw.  1  Ch.  2818  294,  of  settled  wines  Is.  25s.  —  D]P?3r]  i.p.  dual  form  of 
%yy<B  adj.  seven  119104,  dual  sevenfold,  elsw.  7912,  pi.  seventy  9010.  —  8.  nrw] 
emph.  —  DnoB^n]  Qal  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  pi.  ||  u^SFi  sf.  3  sg.;  but  <3  in  both  cases 
has  7]/j.ds.  3,  Aq.,  9  agree  with  $%,  and  refer  sf.  of  the  first  vb.  to  the  divine 
words.  Probably  all  are  interpretations  of  originals  without  any  sfs.  at  all. 
The  first  line  lacks  a  tone.  The  missing  word  was  prob.  ^C'o],  as  2520  9710, 
either  his  life  or  as  poetic  paraphrase  of  pron.,  v.  j3.  —  v]  without  article  as 
adj.,  Ges.§126^,  v.  g16.  ({5  inserts  Kal  in  order  to  give  in  a  temporal  force. 
—  9.  avpp]  emph.,  v.  j~,  begins  the  line  too  abruptly,  slating  a  fact  which  is 
singular  in  view  of  d  before  0^;  moreover  a  tone  is  missing  from  the  line. 
Probably  an  original  n  has  fallen  out  by  copyist's  error.  —  ^^:>s??,,]  Hithp. 
impf.  3  pi.  full  form  in  conditional  clause  with  *3  though,  —  onr]  inf.  cstr. 
defectively  written  with  3  temporal.  —  t -'?!]  a.X.  worthlessness.  yT^7]  &e 
worthless  Je.  159,  3  vilissimi  filiorum  hominum.  (3,  vb.  iiroXvivprjaas,  Sexta, 
£%ov6tp7}cras.  Ba.,  building  on  xaPP-  °f  Origen's  Hexapla,  thinks  of  D^3  vine- 
yard, as  Is.  57  272  Je.  221  1210,  a  vineyard  lightly  esteemed  by  the  wicked. 
Gr.  rightly  rds.  n'^T,  pf.  2  sg.  f  [•?**?]  Qal,  trans.  Thou  dost  lightly  esteem, 
as  La.  i8  (Hiph.)  for  intrans.  La.  I11  Je.  159  and  trans,  lavish,  squander  Dt.  2120 
Pr.  2320-  21  287. 

PSALM   XIII.,  2  str.  44. 

Ps.  13  is  a  prayer  expostulating  with  Yahweh  for  long-con- 
tinued neglect  (v.2-3)  ;  and  petitioning  for  deliverance  from  deadly 
peril  from  an  enemy  (v.4-5).  A  liturgical  addition  rejoices  in  sal- 
vation already  enjoyed  (v.6). 

J-TOW  long,  Yahweh,  wilt  Thou  continually  forget  me? 
How  long  wilt  Thou  hide  Thy  face  from  me? 
How  long  (must)  I  put  (grief)  in  my  soul  ? 
How  long  shall  mine  enemy  be  exalted  over  me? 

VAHWEH,  my  God,  O  look,  answer  me  ; 
Lest  I  sleep  in  death,  O  lighten  mine  eye, 
Lest  mine  enemy  say,  "  /  have  prevailed  over  him," 
Lest  he  rejoice  that  I  am  moved  —  even  mine  adversary. 

Ps.  13  was  in  Q  then  in  f&  and  W&  {v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  In  its 
present  form,  it  has  three  Strs.  of  5,  4,  3  lines  in  H;  in  <&>  the  last  Str.  has 
an  additional  line.     It  is  tempting  therefore  to  think  of  gradually  decreasing 


IOO  PSALMS 

strophes  as  De.  "Das  Lied  wirft  gleichsam  immer  kiirzere  Wellen,  bis  es, 
zuletzt  nur  noch  freudig  bewegt,  still  wird  wie  die  spiegel-glatte  See."  But 
closer  examination  shows  that  the  man  responsible  for  the  present  form  of  the 
Ps.  had  not  such  a  fine  poetic  sense  for  form.  The  original  Ps.  was  composed 
of  two  tetrameter  tetrastichs,  rhyming  in  i,  the  first  Str.  also  in  its  four  lines 
begins  with  njK—ij?;  the  second  in  three  lines  with  ja.  In  the  Ps.  as  it  now 
is,  the  tetrameter  measure  is  changed  to  trimeter  in  v.6*16,  the  extra  line  in  v.36 
is  without  njN  "»j?;  the  assonance  of  ja  is  neglected  in  v.4;  je  is  omitted  alto- 
gether in  v.56;  and  rhyme  is  disregarded  in  an  unnecessary  change  of  order 
of  words  in  both  Strs.,  and  also  in  change  of  sg.  sf.  to  pi.  in  v.4-5.  It  is 
quite  easy  to  restore  the  Ps.  to  its  original  form  in  these  respects.  It  is  true 
njs  -t;  might  be  prefixed  to  v.36  (Br.SHS-  380),  and  it  is  possible  with  Du.  to 
make  over  the  trimeter  in  v.6  to  tetrameter;  but  even  then  there  is  a  lack 
of  harmony  between  v.°  and  v.2^5,  which  is  best  explained  by  regarding  v.6  as 
a  liturgical  gl.  In  that  case  the  rejection  of  v.3*  as  expl.  gl.  is  necessary. 
The  Ps.  in  its  present  form  is  doubtless  a  congregational  Ps.  of  prayer  closing 
with  praise.  But  if  v.6  be  a  gl.,  the  two  Strs.  are  most  naturally  explained 
as  the  prayer  of  an  individual;  and  in  that  case  the  evidences  favour  an  early 
date.  The  Ps.  was  not  composed  for  public  worship;  but  was  adapted  for 
the  purpose,  when  it  was  taken  up  into  IB.  There  is  no  evidence  of  late 
date  apart  from  gls.  There  is  no  intrinsic  evidence  against  as  early  a  date 
as  the  time  of  David.  The  Ps.  is  brief,  terse,  simple,  and  yet  symmetrical 
and  ornate  in  style  and  form.  The  author  of  2  S.  I1*-*7  might  have  written  it. 
The  use  of  ja  there  v.20  is  similar  to  its  use  in  this  Ps.  v.4-5.  Hi.,  De.,  Kirk., 
refer  it  to  Saul's  persecution  of  David,  and  it  admirably  suits  that  historic 
situation. 

Str.  I.  is  a  syn.  tetrastich.  —  2.  How  long?~\  emph.  repetition 
in  four  lines  ;  earnest  expostulation  with  Yahweh  because  of  long- 
continued  neglect  of  His  servant.  Wilt  Thou  forget  me?  ||  hide 
Thy  face  from  me?\  so  as  not  to  see,  as  io11,  where  we  have  same 
parall.  terms  in  mouth  of  the  enemy. —  Continually^  as  1611 
Pr.  2 128,  and  not  "forever,"  RV.  after  Vrss.  which  is  not  suited  to 
the  sentence.  There  is  no  sufficient  reason  to  break  the  sentence 
in  two  as  AV.  or  paraphrase  by  "utterly"  as  JPSV. — 3.  Must 
I  put  in  my  soul\  The  change  from  second  person,  referring 
to  Yahweh,  to  the  first  person  of  psalmist,  before  third  person  of 
enemy  is  striking  in  these  lines  of  expostulation.  We  may  be  sure 
this  action  was  not  a  simple  fact  feared  for  in  the  future,  but  in- 
voluntary action ;  and  so  the  mood  of  vb.  cannot  be  indicative 
as  EV8.,  but  must  be  juss. — griej f],  so  by  an  easy  emenda- 
tion of  many  scholars  in  accordance  with  context,  and  also  with 


PSALM   XIII.  10 1 

the  usual  meaning  of  nephesh.  But  the  conception,  of  a  person 
putting  grief  in  his  own  soul,  was  so  unusual,  that  an  early  scribe 
by  the  omission  of  a  letter  read  "  counsels,"  "  advices,"  so  EV\ 
This  is  thus  explained  by  Pe.  :  "  plan  after  plan  suggests  itself,  is 
resolved  upon,  and  then  abandoned  in  despondency  as  utterly  un- 
availing." But  nephesh  is  seldom  used  of  mental  states,  and  this 
thought  is  not  easy  to  adjust  to  the  context.  It  had  to  be  ex- 
plained by  the  gl. :  sorrow  daily  in  my  mind.  —  Mine  enemy], 
personal  in  the  original  Ps.,  but  congregational  in  the  present 
text.  —  be  exalted  over  me],  in  success,  supremacy,  and  triumph  : 
elsw.  of  God  or  His  people ;  here  only  of  enemy  over  a  pious 
man  :  all  the  more  therefore  emphasising  the  abnormal  situation, 
the  reverse  of  what  it  should  be. 

Str.  II.  is  a  tetrameter  tetrastich,  three  syn.  lines,  synth.  to  the 
first  line,  and  is  all  petition  to  Yahweh.  —  4.  My  God],  to  empha- 
sise personal  relation  of  psalmist  to  Him.  —  O  look]  earnest  en- 
treaty followed  by  imv.  answer  me,  without  conj.  expressive  of 
urgency,  antith.  to  v.2a.  —  Lest],  in  three  lines  antith.  "  how  long," 
Str.  I.  —  O  lighten  mine  eye],  cf.  199,  to  which  it  has  been  assimi- 
lated by  copyist  in  use  of  pi.  eyes  destroying  rhyme.  The  antith. 
with  "  hide  Thy  face  "  v.26  indicates  that  it  is  here  the  turning  of 
Yah  weh's  face  upon  the  psalmist  that  lightens  his  eye  as  41  3117  6f 
go4.  s.  20 1  lg27  T  I9i»  au  on  basis  of  the  High-priest's  blessing  Nu.  625. 
The  use  of  the  phr.  1  S.  I427-29  Pr.  2913  Ezr.  9s,  as  well  as  context, 
favours  the  enlightenment  of  the  eyes  in  the  sense  of  the  revival 
of  physical  strength  and  moral  energy.  But  it  is  due  here  to  the 
light  of  Yahweh's  countenance,  so  that  probably  lighten  is  here 
pregnant,  comprehending  both  conceptions.  —  /  sleep  in  death]. 
Death  is  often  conceived  as  sleep  76s  905  Je.  ^-hl  Jb.  1412,  not 
implying  that  the  dead  continue  in  a  state  of  sleep  in  Sheol,  but 
that  the  state  of  dying  is  a  falling  asleep  to  awake  in  another 
world.  The  psalmist  is  in  peril  of  death,  unless  the  favour  of  God 
shine  forth  from  the  divine  face  upon  him,  with  its  quickening 
power.  —  5.  Mine  enemy  say],  boastfully,  antith.  "  grief,"  which  the 
poet  was  obliged  to  put  in  his  own  soul  v.3a.  —  /  have  prevailed 
over  him],  have  the  ability  and  power  to  overcome  him,  slay  him, 
as  parall.  implies.  —  that  I  am  moved],  shaken,  overthrown,  re- 
moved from  my  place  :    the  theme  of  the  rejoicing  of  the  adver- 


102  PSALMS 

sary,  who  looks  upon  his  plans  as  already  accomplished.  The 
poet  is  in  grave  peril  of  this  result,  but  it  has  not  yet  transpired ; 
and  his  urgent  plea  to  Yahweh  is  that  he  may  be  delivered  in 
good  time.  Elsw.  in  \p  this  vb.  is  used  of  man  with  a  neg.  in  the 
assurance  that  one  "will  not  be  moved"  io6  155  168  218  307  62s-7 

II2fi. 

6.  An  editor,  desiring  to  make  the  Ps.  more  appropriate  for 
public  use,  adds  a  trimeter  couplet  of  faith  and  joy  : 

But  I  in  Thy  kindness  trust ; 

My  heart  rejoices  in  Thy  salvation. 

A  still  later  editor,  with  the  same  purpose,  adds  a  resolution  of 
public  praise  : 

I  will  sing  to  Yahweh,  because  He  hath  dealt  bountifully  with  me. 

(3,  IT  give  a  fourth  and  still  later  liturgical  line  from  718,  preserved 

in  PBV. : 

Yea  I  will  praise  the  name  of  the  Lord  Most  Highest. 

2.  X  fUK— lg]  4  t.  repeated  for  assonance  at  beginning  of  each  1.  of  original 
Str.;  elsw.  62*  Ex.  16-8  Nu.  1411  (J)  Jos.  i8;{  (E).  — nvjj  1611  Pr.  2I28  ever, 
continually,  and  not  contr.  of  nxj'?  forever,  v.  g~,  the  usual  term,  wh.  is  not 
suited  to  njN-ny.  —  3.  t^n]  c.  ^Di2,  a.X.  and  difficult.  MT.  is  an  erroneous 
interp.  connected  with  use  of  r^>,  wh.  is  not  suited  to  context,  or  the  ordi- 
nary use  of  u*o:,  often  the  seat  of  emotions  and  passions,  seldom  of  mental 
states ;  v.  BDB.  Although  this  text  is  so  ancient  and  universal  as  to  be  in 
most  Vrss.,  yet  it  is  better  after  &  with  Dy.,  Gr.,  Che.,  Bu.,  Du.,  to  rd.  ror: 
hurts, griefs  (y.  164  I47*)>  or  sg«  r2.*.'l  as  more  suited  to  VD)  and  context.  Then 
rd.  vb.  as  juss.  —  J?"^]  n.(m.)  grief,  sorrow,  elsw.  3111  10739  1163  Gn.  42s8 
4481  (J)  Je-  4  t->  is  an  early  word  ;  but  also  late,  Est.  c/22.  It  is  not,  however, 
suited  to  22^,  which  usually  is  seat  of  mental  and  moral  states,  seldom  of 
emotions  and  passions,  and  then  in  careless  style.  —  "2 3s?]  long  form;  cf. 
short  form  *aS  v.6*;  hardly  from  same  writer,  v.  BDB. —  dd^]  v.  i~,  where 
followed  by  nS»S  added  here  ®A,  so  Ba\,  Du.,  Gr.,  Che.,  al.  We.,  Lag.,  Hu.Now, 
Kirk.,  al.,  rd.  DV  DV.  We  must  choose  between  the  two,  ace.  to  Dr.  The 
whole  clause  is  a  gl.  of  emph.  repetition,  making  Str.  just  this  1.  too  long. 

—  4.  n^"3n]  Hiph.  cohort,  imv.,  sq.  imv.  emph.  coordination.  —  vjVn  ">"]  sel- 
dom in  \p,  v.  72.  Rhyme  requires  that  the  divine  names  should  begin  the  1. 
and  \^r;  close  it.  —  jo]  neg.  final  clause,  v.  212,  thrice  repeated,  the  last  time 
omitted  by  prosaic  editor ;  properly  sq.  subjunctive  cohort,  form,  but  combi- 
nation with  jo  requires  shortened  form  for  measure.  —  r^T1]  *s  acc-  °f  state. 

—  5.  vr^r;]  Qal  pf.  1  sg.  with  sf.  3  sg.  a.X.  J  St  vb.  (1)  be  able  to  do  a 
thing,  sq!  inf.  1839  3613  4013  7819-  -°,  abs.  2112  ;   able  to  endure  1016,  as  Is.  I18j 


PSALM  XIV.  103 

able  to  reach,  c.  S  Ps.  1396;  (2)  abs.  have  power  over,  prevail  Gn.  308  (E) 
3229  (J)  Ho.  125,  sq.  •?  Gn.  3226  (J)  Ps.  1292;  so  here,  as  <g  Trpds  avrdv,  %, 
and  measure  require.  Rhyme  requires  the  order  inSo1"  Is,  first  neglected  by 
copyist  and  then  by  later  copyist  reduced  to  sf.  —  ns]  pi.  improb.,  rd.  sg.  as 
':pn,  and  transpose  to  close  of  1.  for  rhyme.  —  ^^l]  is  improb.  without  }fl. 
Rd.  Vji-fD ;  pi.  due  to  double  error,  the  omission  of  |a  and  pi.  nx.  —  tf»BM  \p] 
temporal,  AV.,  Kirk. ;  causal,  Dr. ;  or  better  obj.,  subject-matter  of  exulting  ; 
v.  106.  —  6.  »}«i]  emph.  of  personal  determination;  here  for  congregation, 
in  liturgical  gl.  which  is  trimeter  couplet.  —  'FMTM  qipns],  pf.  state,  phr.  5210, 
elsw.  usually  in  God  Himself.  If  this  were  original  to  Ps.,  we  might  with  Du. 
insert  mrv,  and  so  get  tetrameter.  —  Sr]  juss.  with  modal  sense,  if  parall.  with 
nT>E?x  Qal  cohort.,  so  Dr.;  but  if  parall.  with  previous  line  has  lost  modal 
sense  as  usual  in  late  style.  Subj.  2^  Pr.  2417  Zc.  10",  more  properly  vol 
Ps.  359  Is.  6110,  iod  Ps.  169.  —  nnjnfc^a]  might  be  given  either  one  accent  or 
two,  ace.  to  good  usage  and  design  of  poet  as  to  measure  ;  v.  j3.  —  ^y  Spj_,|r] 
deal  bountifully  with,  as  116"  11917  1428,  v.  ?5.  >s  gives  ground  or  reason  of 
exultation.  This  1.  is  a  tetrameter  and  is  a  still  later  gl.  @  adds  a  tetrameter 
1.,  Kal  i^aXu)  tu)  ovbixari  Kvplov  rod  v\f/ia-rov  =  ]vh'j  7VW  QV  n-in?N"»,  a  liturgical 
addition  from  718.  ]vhy  nw  elsw.  47"*.  If  this  Str.  is  to  be  taken  as  original, 
this  line  is  needed  to  make  up  tetrastich.  But  it  is  difficult  to  explain  its 
omission  from  f§.  It  implies  public  worship  of  congregation.  But  if  it  be 
gl.,  the  previous  three  lines  are  also  gl.,  because  they  imply  the  same  situation 
and  a  later  date  than  the  previous  parts  of  Ps. 


PSALM   XIV.  =  LIU.,  5  str.  25. 

Ps.  14  describes  dramatically  the  impudent  nations,  acting 
abominably,  saying  to  themselves,  "  There  is  no  God  to  interfere  " 
(v.1)  ;  Yahweh  from  heaven  inspecting  them  (v.2),  and  declaring 
that  there  is  not  a  single  well-doer  among  them  (v.3)  ;  the 
devourers  of  His  people,  ignoring  Him  in  careless  indifference 
(v.4)  ;  Yahweh  suddenly  scattering  them,  and  putting  their  plan 
to  shame  (v.56).  At  a  later  date  the  congregation  prays  that 
salvation  may  come  forth  from  Zion  (v.7a)  ;  and  still  later,  sum- 
mons to  the  worship  of  Yahweh,  because  of  the  restoration  of 
prosperity  (v.76). 

HTHE  impudent  said  to  themselves,  "  There  is  no  God  (here)." 

They  corrupted  their  deeds,  they  acted  abominably,  there  was  no  well-doer. 

VAHWEH  looked  forth  from  heaven  upon  the  sons  of  mankind, 

To  see  whether  there  was  any  acting  intelligently  in  seeking  after  God. 

THE  whole  have  turned  aside,  have  drawn  back,  together  are  become  tainted. 
There  is  no  well-doer,  there  is  not  even  one. 


104  PSALMS 

J-J  AVE  the  workers  of  trouble  no  knowledge  —  devourers  of  my  people  ? 

They  eat  bread :  Yahweh  they  do  not  invoke. 
'pHERE  feared  they  a  fear ;  for  God  scattered  them  ; 

Their  plan  was  put  to  shame :  for  Yahweh  rejected  them. 

Pss.  14  and  53  both  have  -mS  and  nsjD1?,  and  so  were  in  Q  and  D&  (v.  Intr. 
§§  27>  33)-  Possibly  the  nxjD1?  of  14  was  a  later  assimilation.  To  53  is  prefixed 
V^K'D,  possibly  owing  to  the  use  of  ^otTD  in  v.!,  but  probably  original,  indicating 
that  the  Ps.  was  also  in  the  little  collection  of  Maskelim  (v.  Intr.  §  26).  Q3& 
added  a  direction  for  the  melody  n^no  ty  (v.  Intr.  §  34).  Ps.  53  was  also  in  £ 
(v.  Intr.  §  32),  where  dviSm  was  substituted  for  an  original  mm  throughout. 
Thus  the  Ps.  had  several  editings  before  it  received  its  present  positions  in  two 
different  texts.  There  are  several  minor  differences:  (a)  "?v;  53'2  =  nStSj?  141; 
(3)  the  insertion  of  1  before  w»jjnn  53'-';  (<:)  ^3  534  =  Ysn  143;  (d)  jd  53*  for 
id  143;  (e)  Sj  before  ^JJfl  144;  (/)  n^r;  53'Vor  np«h  147.  These  are  such 
variations  as  might  readily  occur  in  different  texts  without  changing  the  sense. 
In  most  cases  Ps.  14  seems  to  be  nearer  the  original.  Ps.  53'''  is  different 
from  145  after  the  first  clause  nne  nne  otf.  This  difference  is  due  not  to 
design,  but  to  different  interpretations  of  a  difficult  text,  for  the  same  con- 
sonant letters  lie  at  the  basis  of  both  texts  (v.  v.5  notes).  In  this  v.  Ps.  53  is 
nearer  the  original,  as  it  points  to  an  actual  event  of  experience,  where  Ps.  14 
generalises.  (§»•  *•  R  F,  Syr.  Hexapla,  PBV,  have  a  number  of  additional 
lines,  cited  in  Rom.  31°-18  from  Pss.  59  io7  361  1404  Is.  5c.7-  8.  They  came  into 
©  at  an  early  date  by  a  marginal  reference  to  Rom.  310-18,  and  in  cod.  Kenn. 
649  of  |^  were  translated  back  into  Heb. 

Their  throat  is  an  open  sepulchre; 
With  their  tongues  they  have  used  deceit; 
The  poison  of  asps  is  under  their  lips; 
Whose  mouth  is  full  of  cursing  and  bitterness. 
Their  feet  are  swift  to  shed  blood; 
Destruction  and  misery  are  in  their  ways, 
And  the  way  of  peace  have  they  not  known. 
There  is  no  fear  of  God  before  their  eyes. 

It  is  impossible  that  these  lines  should  be  original,  because  of  the  textual 
evidence.  They  are  absent  from  %  other  Vrss.,  <$*■  and  later  codd.  <S,  and 
are  rejected  by  Origen  and  Jerome.  Moreover,  they  do  not  accord  with  the 
thought  of  the  Ps.;  they  entirely  destroy  the  strophical  organisation,  and  are 
of  several  different  measures.  The  Ps.  reflects  the  same  situation  essentially 
as  Pss.  9-10;  cf.  141  with  io4-6-11-^.  The  hn:  here  is  the  same  as  the  yvh 
there.  It  was  a  time  when  the  congregation  of  the  Restoration  was  in  great 
peril  from  the  surrounding  nations  contemning  and  treating  with  contumely 
their  religion  and  their  God :  before  the  reforms  of  Nehemiah.  The  lan- 
guage is  in  general  similar  to  D,  Je.,  Zp.,  Ez.,  and  Is.  One  word  has  no 
example  in  this  list,  rV?w  v.3,  elsw.  Jb.  15™;   but  this  is  an  Arabism,  and  may 


PSALM  XIV.  105 

well  have  been  of  this  time  rather  than  later,  when  Aram,  influences  pre- 
vailed. The  divine  inspection  from  heaven  v.2  implies  the  doctrine  that 
Yahweh  is  not  merely  the  God  of  Israel,  but  the  God  of  the  nations,  the  only 
real  God;  and  therefore  the  triumph  of  monotheism  over  polytheism,  such  as 
is  evident  in  Is.2- 3.  The  original  reference  of  the  Ps.  to  the  nations,  which 
is  evident  in  53  because  of  the  more  general  interpretation  of  the  situation, 
became  in  14,  in  the  worship  of  the  congregation,  adapted  to  the  impudent 
contemners  and  ignorers  of  God  in  Israel  itself.  The  Ps.  is  composed  of  five 
pentameter  couplets,  but  there  are  three  lines  of  different  measure  at  the  end. 
These  represent  two  different  liturgical  additions :  the  one  a  petition  for  sal- 
vation from  Zion  the  capital  of  Yahweh,  as  in  no2;  the  other  a  call  to  vvor- 
ship  because  the  salvation  had  been  accomplished.  Both  imply  the  temple 
worship  of  the  Restoration. 

Str.  I.  A  synth.  couplet  describes  the  nations  in  their  attitude 
to  the  people  of  Yahweh.  —  1.  The  impudent].  They  ignore 
God,  treating  His  people  with  contempt,  and  acting  in  a  shame- 
ful manner  towards  the  religion  of  Yahweh  and  Yahweh  Himself. 
The  Nabhal  is  not  a  "  fool "  EV8.  in  any  of  the  meanings  of  this 
word,  but  a  more  aggressive  personality,  one  who,  in  an  earlier 
religious  stage,  represents  the  scorner  of  WL.  (v.  Ps.  i1).  He  is 
not  the  antith.  of  the  wise,  but  of  the  one  acting  intelligently  v.2. 
The  word  is  here  sg.  coll.,  and  so  is  followed  by  pi.  vbs.  In  Ps. 
14  there  is  a  generalisation  of  the  earlier  historical  situation, 
referring  to  impudent  nations  hostile  to  Israel  and  the  God  of 
Israel,  which,  while  not  altogether  destroying,  yet  so  obscures  it 
as  to  make  it  easy  for  the  congregation  in  later  worship  to  think 
of  the  impudent  in  Israel  itself,  who  act  contemptuously  towards 
the  pious  portion  of  the  congregation  and  their  religion  ;  and  later 
still  to  think  of  the  unbeliever  and  infidel.  — Said  to  themselves], 
in  their  mind,  as  io6.  —  There  is  no  God  (here)],  not  a  denial  of 
the  existence  of  God,  —  these  nations  were  polytheists  and  not 
infidels,  —  but  a  denial  of  the  presence  of  God,  to  interfere  with 
their  actions,  to  interpose  on  behalf  of  His  people,  as  io4;  inter- 
preted by  "He  will  not  require"  io14  and  by  "God  hath  for- 
gotten, He  hath  hidden  His  face,  He  doth  not  see "  io11. 
Accordingly  these  nations,  in  a  most  impudent  manner,  went  to 
the  utmost  length  with  apparent  impunity.  —  They  corrupted  their 
deeds,  they  acted  abominably].  Some,  even  Kirk.,  think  that  the 
psalmist  has  in  mind  the  corruption  that  preceded   the  deluge 


106  PSALMS 

Gn.  612  (P)  ;  indeed,  he  uses  the  first  of  these  vbs.,  but  in  a  dif- 
ferent phr.  The  phrasing  here  is  in  accord  with  Zp.  37,  all  the 
more  if  we  transpose  the  noun  to  be  the  obj.  of  the  first  vb., 
although  the  reference  in  Zp.  is  to  corrupt  Israel,  and  here  to 
the  nations.  The  reference  to  the  universal  sinfulness  of  mankind 
before  the  deluge  is  possible  only  by  a  generalisation  of  the  text 
of  the  original  even  beyond  the  changes  of  Ps.  14.  The  abomi- 
nable deeds  towards  Israel  are  more  fully  described  in  Ps.  io7"10.  — 
There  was  no  well-doer"],  among  these  hostile  nations;  there  was 
no  exception,  they  were  all  alike  ;  they  had  attained  a  climax, 
the  utmost  possible  limit  in  their  impudent  and  abominable 
actions. 

Str.  II.  A  synth.  couplet,  describes  Yahweh's  attitude,  antith. 
to  that  of  the  nations,  of  the  first  couplet.  —  2.  Yahweh  looked 
forth  from  heaven].  He  was  in  heaven,  cf.  io5,  at  a  distance 
from  the  nations.  They  could  not  see  Him  j  they  might  ignore 
Him,  and  contemn  Him,  and  to  themselves  deny  His  presence ; 
but  in  fact  He  was  there.  He  was  intensely  interested  in  what 
was  going  on ;  so  much  so  that  He  was  looking  forth  upon  the 
sons  of  mankind],  these  impudent  nations,  which  yet  belong  to 
the  race  of  mankind  and  not  to  the  order  of  divine  beings,  — to  see 
whether],  making  a  careful,  thorough,  scrutinising  inspection, — 
there  was  any  acting  intelligently],  in  order,  if  possible,  to  single 
out  one  from  among  these  impudent  ones  that  was  their  real 
antith.  in  seeking  after  God],  in  prayer  and  worship,  cf.  911. 

Str.  III.  A  synth.  couplet,  still  further  describing  the  char- 
acter of  the  impudent  nations.  The  result  of  the  divine  inspec- 
tion corresponds  entirely  with  the  psalmist's  description  (v.1). — 
3.  The  whole,  143  =  all  of  them,  534],  variations  of  style  merely, 
intensified  in  together,  of  joint  action.  They  all  alike  share  in 
the  same  characteristic  doings.  —  have  turned  aside  143  ||  have 
drawn  back]  53*:  syn.  vbs.,  both  needed  for  measure,  the  two 
different  prosaic  editors  preferring,  one  the  one  term,  the  other 
the  other  term  ;  both  further  explication  of  v.16.  Instead  of  seek- 
ing after  God  and  doing  good,  they  have  drawn  back  and  away 
from  God  and  good.  —  are  become  tainted],  corrupt,  spoiled,  alto- 
gether bad.  This  is  not,  as  has  been  commonly  supposed,  an 
assertion  of  universal  human  corruption ;  but,  as  the  context  shows, 


PSALM   XIV.  107 

of  the  total  depravity  of  the  impudent  oppressors  of  the  people 
of  Yahweh,  described  in  v.1, 4.  —  There  is  no  well-doer],  showing 
in  the  climax  the  exact  agreement  of  Yahweh  with  the  psalmist  as 
to  the  character  of  these  nations,  intensified,  however,  by  the 
additional  clause  :  there  is  not  even  one, 

Strs.  IV,  and  V.  are  synth.  couplets,  giving  the  psalmist's 
description  of  the  final  result  of  the  antithetical  situation  de- 
scribed in  the  previous  couplets. — 4.  He  first  expostulates  with 
these  nations :  have  {they)  no  knowledge  ?].  Is  it  possible  that 
they  do  not  know  that  Yahweh  is  inspecting  them,  and  declaring 
their  character  and  doom  ?  How  can  they  go  on  ignoring  God 
as  they  have  done  ?  It  seems  incredible  that  they  should  act 
so.  —  The  workers  of  trouble]  take  the  place  of  "  sons  of  man- 
kind "  v.2  and  "the  impudent"  v.1,  as  a  more  suitable  term  to 
sum  up  all  that  has  been  said  about  them.  —  Devourers  of  my 
people].  The  bitter  enmity  and  severe  attacks  made  upon  the 
people  by  their  enemies  to  destroy  them  are  compared  to  eating, 
devouring,  as  Hb.  314  Ps.  27*.  This  suggests  the  corresponding 
thought  resuming  that  of  v.1,  that  they  so  ignore  God,  are  so 
impudent  and  contemptuous  in  their  attitude  towards  Him,  that 
they  eat  bread],  partake  of  their  ordinary  food  without  regard  to 
Him,  without  at  all  considering  Him.  —  Yahweh  they  do  not  in- 
voke], renewing  the  thought  of  v.2  They  have  no  thought  of 
seeking  after  God,  or  of  recognising  Him  at  all,  even  in  the 
enjoyment  of  His  benefits.  —  5.  There],  pointing  to  a  place  and 
a  historic  event  known  to  the  original  psalmist,  but  not  indicated. 
— feared  they  a  fear].  This  is  mentioned  abruptly  and  dra- 
matically, as  if  they  were  taken  by  surprise.  It  is  still  further 
emphasised  by  the  gloss  53s,  "where  no  fear  was" ;  that  is, 
either,  when  there  was  no  apparent  reason  for  fear,  suddenly  it 
came  upon  them  without  warning,  or  they  were  seized  with  a 
panic  without  external  cause,  due  to  the  sudden  realisation  in 
their  minds  of  the  real  situation  described  above.  —  For  God 
scattered  {theni)\  so  53s,  in  accordance  with  the  panic  of  the 
previous  context.  The  vb.  admirably  suits  that  scattering  in  all 
directions  which  takes  place  whenever  a  sudden  panic  comes 
upon  a  body  of  men,  cf.  8911.  But  145,  by  error  of  copyist,  has  : 
"for  God  is  in  the  generation  of  the  righteous,"  which  gives, 


108  PSALMS 

indeed,  a  general  reason  why  the  nations  should  fear  Yahweh, 
and  stay  their  evil  deeds  against  His  people,  but  no  reason  for 
this  sudden  fear  that  has  come  upon  them.  Ps.  53°  gives  as  the 
obj.  of  "  scatter  "  :  u  the  bones  of  Thy  besiegers."  This  conceives 
of  the  nations  as  besieging  the  people  of  Yahweh  when  the  panic 
suddenly  came  upon  them.  This  admirably  suits  the  context  and 
is  tempting  as  a  historical  basis  of  the  Ps.,  but  in  fact  it  is  due  to 
a  misreading  of  the  original,  and  destroys  the  measure.  — 6.  Their 
plan  was  put  to  shame\  This  underlies  and  best  explains  both 
texts.  Their  plan  was,  as  the  previous  context  shows,  to  devour, 
utterly  destroy,  the  people  of  God ;  and  their  deeds  were  most 
impudent,  abominable,  and  corrupt.  Their  plan  was  frustrated 
and  put  to  shame,  because  they  were  scattered  in  a  disgraceful 
panic.  Ps.  14  misreads  so  as  to  give  either  a  statement  of  fact : 
"  Ye  put  to  shame  the  counsel  of  the  afflicted,"  or  a  hypothetical 
clause  :  "  Ye  may  put  to  shame  "  ;  but  in  either  case  it  is  difficult 
to  adjust  to  the  context.  It  is  true  that  this  clause  might  be 
regarded  as  a  reiteration  of  the  impudent  conduct  of  the  nations, 
but  there  is  no  apparent  reason  for  it  here,  and  we  still  lack, 
according  to  that  interpretation,  any  explanation  of  the  sudden 
panic  with  which  the  verse  began.  Ps.  53s  takes  the  vb.  as  abs. 
and  2  sg.  with  God  as  subject,  "  Thou  hast  put  to  shame,"  which 
suits  the  vb.  "  scattered,"  but  leaves  the  obj.  to  be  supplied  ;  while 
the  2  pers.  sg.  is  strikingly  out  of  place  in  the  midst  of  3  pers. 
sg.  in  previous  and  subsequent  lines,  all  pers.  alike  referring  to 
God.  —  For  Yahweh  rejected  them\  so  53°,  in  accord  with  its 
context;  146,  "is  his  refuge,"  is  due  to  the  mistake  of  a  single 
letter  of  the  original  word,  though  it  is  quite  well  suited  to  the 
previous  context.  The  original  Ps.  came  to  an  end  with  this 
couplet. 

7.  A  later  editor,  probably  of  ©,  adds,  as  a  liturgical  prayer,  a 
tetrameter  line. 

Oh,  that  the  salvation  of  Israel  might  come  forth  from  Zion ! 

Zion  is  here  conceived  as  the  capital  seat  of  Yahweh's  dominion, 
from  whence  therefore  salvation  comes.  This  implies  a  well- 
ordered  worship  in  the  temple  and  a  strongly  defended  city,  as  in 
Pss.  46,  47.     Here  is  an  entirely  different  situation  from  that  of 


PSALM   XIV.  109 

v.2,  where  salvation  comes  from  Yahweh  in  heaven ;  cf.  1  io2  for  a 
similar  gloss. 

A  still  later  liturgical  addition,  a  tetrameter  couplet,  was  made, 
probably  in  if/,  calling  upon  the  congregation  in  public  worship  :  — 

In  that  Yahweh  hath  restored  the  prosperity  of  His  people, 
Let  Jacob  rejoice,  let  Israel  be  glad. 

The  juss.  form  probably  has  juss.  sense,  although  at  this  late 
date  it  might  be  regarded  as  having  lost  its  distinctive  mng.,  and 
so  be  translated  as  indicative  future,  "  shall  rejoice,"  "  shall  be 
glad,"  EVS. ;  the  former  is  more  suited  to  a  liturgical  gloss,  the 
latter  is  tolerable  only  in  the  view  that  it  was  original  to  the  Ps., 
and  then  the  early  date  would  be  against  this  interpretation  of  the 
jussive.  —  In  that\  The  infinitive  cstr.  with  prep,  may  be  inter- 
preted as  temporal  clause,  "when"  3  and  most  Vrss.  and  inter- 
preters, but  better  as  giving  ground  or  reason  for  the  exhortation, 
cf.  94.  —  Yahweh  hath  restored  the  prosperity  of  His  people~\.  This 
is  to  be  preferred,  especially  at  this  late  date,  to  the  more  specific 
and  earlier  rendering  of  the  phr., "  bring  back  the  captivity,"  EV8., 
which  does  not  suit  a  late  liturgical  addition. 

1.  fSaj]  adj.;  not  dcppcov  <§,  stultus  3,  fool  EV8.,  but  impudent,  contu- 
melious, shameless,  as  impudens  with  the  double  sense  of  immodest  and  impu- 
dent :  (a)  towards  God  141  =  53s  74I8.22  jjt#  3221  all  of  heathen,  Dt.  32°  of 
Israel ;  (b)  towards  men,  antith.  to  3-7]  nobleminded,  and  so  shameless,  base- 
minded  Is.  32f)-6  2  S.  333  1313  Je.  1711  Ez.  133  (?);  coll.  of  the  contumelious 
Sai  n?nn  Ps.  39s,  cf.  Pr.  iy7-21  3022  Jb.  210  308.  This  mng.  is  confirmed  by 
nSaj  n.  f.  wanton,  immodest,  impudent  deed,  not  in  \f/,  but  Gn.  347  (J)  Ju.  1923 

2  S.  1312  +,  and  the  denom.  vb.  fSaj  not  in  \f>,  but  Qal  be  impudent  Pr.  3032, 
Pi.  treat  with  impudence  or  contumely  :  God  Dt.  3215,  father  by  son  Mi.  76, 
the  divine  throne  Je.  1421,  Nineveh  by  Yahweh  Na.  3°.  —  ir^nirn]   Hiph.  pf. 

3  pi.  action  completed  in  present.  %  nnt?  vb.  Hiph.  (1)  destroy  78s8-45  10623 
and  prob.  57,  58,  59,  75  (titles);  (2)  corrupt  in  moral  sense  Gn.  612  (P) 
Zp.  37,  act  corruptly  Ps.  14I  =  53s  Dt.  416  3129  Is.  I4  Je.  628.  —  ia^nn]  Hiph. 
pf.  pi.  3  m.  without  conj.,  emph.  coordination,  v.  j;7.  —  n^p]  v.  912.  Ps.  532 
has  Svj,  v.  j1*,  but  this  is  prob.  an  error  of  copyist.  The  conj.  1  between  the 
vbs.  in  532  is  prosaic  and  not  original.  The  resemblance  of  the  passage  to 
Zp.  37  favours  the  view  that  the  noun  is  really  obj.  of  both  vbs.  —  a'lErnfety  ps] 
=  v.36  antith.  to  c^nSs  p*.  The  phr.  =  532-  4,  cf.  37s  Ecc.  720.  The  ptc.  has 
nominal  force,  well-doer,  ara,  good  is  seldom  in  an  ethical  sense  3415  3727  52s, 
v.  4K   0  adds  ovk  €<xtiv  2ws  £i>6s,  assimilated  to  v.3  and  not  original.  —  2.  mrr] 


110  PSALMS 

emph.  antith.  Saj  ;  the  situation  is  dramatic  as  Ps.  2. —  d>db>d]  also  emph., 
the  heavenly  residence  in  antith.  with  earthly  men.  —  TRtfn]  Hiph.  pf.  emph. 
present.  X  *)£$  vb.,  Niph.  look  forth  from  heaven  8512,  %  Hiph.  same,  elsw. 
10220  La.  360  Dt.  2615;  cf.  B^an  same,  33™  8015  10220.  —  ^?frc]  Hiph.  ptc. 
nominal  force,  as  3W  nfe*?,  acting  with  understanding  ox  having  insight,  antith. 
to  V^j ;  cf.  210.  —  3.  S3n]  M«r  «//W<?  =  ^3  53*  the  whole  of  it.  @  in  both  irdv- 
res.  The  former  as  4918  10319  11991  1459,  the  latter  as  29A  —  -\d]  Qal  pf.  3  m. 
mo  v.  69,  of  r^W/  as  Dt.  u15  1717  Je.  523.  For  this  53*  has  jd  Qal  pf.  3  m. 
X  JiD  Qal  backslide,  prove  recreant,  to  Yahweh,  abs.  jji  Pr.  1414,  c.  }c  Ps.  8o19. 
Niph.  (1)  reflexive  turn  oneself  back,  prove  faithless,  c.  nnsn  Zp.  I6,  ninN 
Is.  505  Je.  38^  Pss.  4419  78"  (prep,  omitted) ;  (2)  passive,  be  turned  back, 
repulsed  by  foes,  with  iinx  35*  4016  ( =  703)  1 29s  Is.  4217  Je.  465.  This 
1.  lacks  a  tone.  We  might  think  that  in  the  original  both  vbs.  nD  and  jd 
stood,  as  two  vbs.  v.16 ;  and  that  one  copyist  took  one  vb.,  the  other  the 
other.  —  hit]  v.  49,  together,  of  joint  action.  —  VtSkj]  Niph.  pf.  3  pi.  f  [rV?N] 
an  Arabism,  be  tainted,  corrupt,  elsw.  ptc.  rHKJ  Jb.  1516.  —  nns  Dl  pK],  there  is 
not  even  a  single  one.  Z\  in  the  sense  of  Xeven  3%n  7820  13212,  0)1  v.  S8. — 
4.  «Sn]  intcrrog.  with  neg.  expostulation.  —  ijp*  ]  emph.  present,  v.  I6. — 
P«  '^■"^a]  so  @  of  535,  but  $?  omits  s3  there.  It  is  an  easy  and  frequent 
insertion,  v.  56  69,  and  it  makes  the  1.  too  long.  —  *DJ?  ^sk]  Qal  ptc.  pi. 
cstr.  nominal  force.  X  S-N  (0  "*'•'  man  subj.  1282;  (a)  manna  7s24-25,  birds 
7829,  cnS  *7DN  take  a  meal  14^  (=  53s)  4110  1026  1272  Gn.  319  3164  37s6  tf*-™ 
2  K.  48;  (&)  sacrificial  meals  Pss.  2227,  80  10628,  even  of  God,  in  question  5013; 
(c)  in  mourning,  fig.  ashes  10210,  cf.  806  (Hiph.);  (2)  animals  subj.:  insects 
yg45  io^35.  35j  dogs  5916,  ox  10620;  (3)  enemies,  devour,  oy  146  =  53s,  Jacob 
797,  the  flesh  of  the  people  27s;  (4)  subj.  things,  devour,  fire  189  2110  503 
78,;3,  zeal  6910.  Hiph.  give  to  eat,  God  subj.  rmn  aSrrc  8117,  fig.  nyvi  ovh  806. 
Usage  makes  it  plain  what  is  meant  here,  —  a  taking  of  the  ordinary  meal. 
—  5.  X  -£]  adv.  dem.  there:  (1)  simple  designation  of  place  after  3Bfc  69s6 
10736  1371,  defining  nvrx  10417;  "uJ  relative  1224;  (2)  pointing  to  a  place  at 
the  end  of  the  clause  487  874-6;  (3)  emph.  at  beginning  of  sentence,  point- 
ing to  a  place  where  something  important  had  happened  or  will  happen, 
especially  in  description,  145  (=  53s)  3613  where  defeat  had  taken  place,  666 
rejoicing,  6828  procession,  I0425-  '*>  movement  of  animals  or  ships  in  the  sea  ; 
other  conceptions  13217  1338  1373  139s- 10.  njtr,  same  with  n  local,  place  1225, 
emph.  764;  v.  BDB.  —  ttvj  nns]  vb.  Qal  pf.  3  pi.  aorist  t"V?$.  Vb.  dread, 
abs.  78s3  Dt.  28s6  Je.  36*0™!  -via  cog.  ace.  Pss.  14?  =  536  Dt".  28"  Jb.  325; 
c.  JD  Pss.  271  119161.  X  ""??  n-  elsw.  ^  (1)  dread,  before  Yahweh  10538  1 1 9120, 
the  enemy  64s2,  peril  at  night  915;  (2)  obj.  of  dread  3112  302  53s.  53s  adds 
nnc  rrn  nS,  an  explanatory  addition  to  emphasise  either  that  the  calamity 
came  when  there  was  no  apparent  reason  for  dread,  or  else  that  there  was  no 
real  reason  for  it. — The  great  difference  between  14  and  53  now  appears. 
dti^x  -o]  14^  5366  is  parallel  with  nw  "3  1466  =  D'n^s  *o  53^,  both  causal 
clauses  with  God  subj.  It  is,  however,  improbable  that  dti^n  was  in  the  orig- 
inal Ps.  of  IB.  —  «*an  *ty  TMV  P""rc  "Vnal  1456  **  for  which  nnthan  nan  nicsy  ms 


PSALM   XIV.  Ill 

5366-c.  These  variations  are  evidently  due  to  a  copyist's  error,  and  not  to 
intentional  change.     The  texts  were  written  originally  thus  in  pj : 

14.     tfan  >jy    my  pnj  -na 
53.    niton  -pn  nnxy  "us 

There  is  nothing  to  correspond  with  pis  in  53,  therefore  it  was  an  explanatory 
addition  to  Tn,  which  without  it  is  unintelligible.  "Ha  might  be  interpreted 
as  Aram.  "173  scatter  =  -its,  and  it  might  have  been  an  unconscious  substitu- 
tion or  interpretation  of  the  form  of  the  original  Jnrs  vb.  Niph.,  bones  are 
scattered  at  the  mouth  of  Sheol  1417.  Pi.  subj.  Yahweh,  scatter,  disperse, 
enemy  8911,  hoar  frost  14716;  subj.  man,  his  ways,  so  to  run  hither  and  thither 
to  other  gods  Je.  313,  scatter  money  Ps.  1129  Pr.  II24.  nra  in  the  sense  of 
scattering  enemies  is  most  suited  to  context,  and  in  all  probability  original 
here,  crv",  their  counsel,  plan  (v.  i1),  best  explains  both  readings.  In  the 
one  text  it  was  explained  as  against  the  \r,  the  afflicted  (v.  <?13) ;  in  the  other, 
it  was  rd.  as  rrtDSJ  bones  (v.  63),  due  possibly  to  14 17.  This  then  had  to  be 
explained,  and  so  the  gl.  originated  either  f|jn,  <3  avOpioiraplaKiov,  U  qui  homi- 
nes placet,  or  ^jn  thy  besieger,  Qal  ptc.  sf.  2  s.  Jnjn  vb.  Qal  enca??ip,  of  army, 
c.  S?  273;  S  aoD  metaphor  for  protection  34s;  here  c.  ace.  besiege.  But  sf. 
2  pers.  and  ace,  both  suspicious,  and  improbable  in  original.  14  has  iB^an 
Hiph.  impf.  2  pi.  e^a  (v.  611).  53  has  nnft^an  Hiph.  pf.  2  m.  fully  written 
form.  But  neither  of  these  is  suited  to  context,  which  requires  3  sg.  The 
Hiph.  in  the  sense  of  be  put  to  shame  is  common,  as  1 19s1- 116  Je.  226  615  4624 
431.1.20  5o2-2;   then  rvsy  might  be  subj.  and  the  form  have  been  B»an.     The 

2  pi.  is  a  later  interpretation.  The  2  sg.  pf.  is  also  an  interpretation.  —  iriDno] 
14"  for  wh.  CDxrp  53.  Here  again  the  resemblance  is  so  great  in  form  that  the 
difference  must  be  due  to  interpretation  and  not  intention.  The  sfs.  are  in 
both  cases  later  interpretations  ;  the  difference  between  Dm  and  D.xs  is  slight 
in  ancient  scripts  and  in  some  dialects  in  pronunciation.  J  ^vnv  n.m.  refuge, 
esp.  of  God,  elsw.  46s  614  62s-  9  717  73^  9129  94s2  1426,  rocks  for  conies  10418. 
This  is  suited  to  the  context  of  14  in  part,  but  not  to  the  original  Ps. — 
\  [DND]  Qal  reject,  refuse,  c.  ace,  subj.  God  53s  89s9,  subj.  men  365  11822; 
c.  2  subj.  God  78s9- 67  subj.  men  10624;   Niph.  be  rejected  ij^.     This  vb.  in  perf. 

3  m.,  suits  context  and  the  original  Ps.  —  7.  fn;~,p]  expressive  of  wish  =  537 
557  (y.  47)  and  introduces  a  liturgical  addition,  as  no2.  —  njne^]  sg.  cstr.  = 
53  rnyir^  pi.  cstr.,  the  former  salvation,  the  latter  saving  acts,  the  former  more 
probable,  v.  j3. —  ^"^)  ||  ap£*J  poetic  terms  for  the  nation  and  later  for  the 
religious  community,  v.  BDB.  —  a-lBto]  inf.  cstr.  temporal,  Hu.,  Ba.,  Du., 
Dr.,  Kirk. ;  but  this  is  not  so  well  suited  to  context  as  causal,  giving  reason 
of  rejoicing ;  cf.  94.  The  phr.  f  matf  310  is  technical,  14?  (  =  537)  852  I261- 4 
Dt.  303  Je.  2914  30s- 18  3 123  33™  4847  49s9  Ho.  611  Am.  914  Zp.  27  320  Ez.  1653 
2914  Jo.  41  Jb.  4210.  In  most  of  these  passages  we  might  render,  restore  cap- 
tivity, bring  back  captives ;  but  some  of  them  must  have  the  more  general 
mng.  restore  prosperity.  If  the  former  here,  the  liturgical  addition  muse  have 
been  very  early,  after  the  restoration  of  Zion  to  the  centre  of  the  Jewish  reli- 


112  PSALMS 

gion  ;  if  the  latter,  it  may  have  been  at  a  much  later  date.  Possibly  there 
are  two  stages  of  liturgical  addition  in  this  verse.  —  not?;]  v.  j12,  ||  ii\  v.  2ny 
both  juss.,  the  latter  in  form.  They  should  be  interpreted  as  real  juss.  If, 
however,  the  previous  clauses  be  temporal,  it  would  seem  necessary  to  inter- 
pret them  as  future  indicatives,  and  to  regard  the  juss.  form  as  having  lost  its 
significance. 

PSALM   XV.,  strs.  23  io3  i3. 

Ps.  15  is  a  didactic  poem,  inquiring  what  sort  of  a  man  is 
qualified  to  be  a  guest  of  Yahweh  (v.1)  ;  describing  him  in  ac- 
cordance with  a  decalogue  of  duties  (v.2-56)  \  and  declaring  such 
a  man  secure  (v.5c). 

yAH  VVEH,  who  shall  be  a  guest  in  Thy  tent? 
Who  shall  dwell  on  Thy  holy  mount  f 
l-JE  that  walketh  perfect  in  his  righteousness; 
He  that  speaketh  truth  in  his  mind; 
Who  hath  not  played  the  spy  upon  his  neighbour, 
Hath  not  done  harm  to  his  friend, 

Hath  not  taken  up  a  reproach  against  the  one  near  to  him 
Despised  in  his  eyes  is  the  reprobate  ; 
But  them  that  fear  Yahweh  he  honoureth. 
He  doth  swear  to  (his  friend)  and  changeth  not. 
His  silver  he  hath  not  given  in  usury, 
Nor  taken  a  bribe  against  the  innocent. 

TI/HOSO  doeth  these  things  shall  not  be  moved. 

Ps.  15  was  in  O  and  £ft  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  It  was  not  taken  up  into 
the  earlier  major  Psalters,  because  it  was  neither  hymn  nor  prayer,  but  simply 
didactic  in  character,  and  so  less  suited  for  public  worship.  It  resembles 
Ps.  24s-6,  which  has  a  similar  couplet  of  inquiry  and  a  similar  response;  now 
a  tristich,  but  probably  originally  a  couplet,  with  a  concluding  couplet;  and 
therefore  more  artistic  than  Ps.  15.  The  measure  of  Ps.  24  is  also  trimeter, 
the  response  is  simpler  and  earlier.  The  language  and  phrasing  are  so  dif- 
ferent that  there  seems  to  be  no  interdependence.  The  situation  is  entirely 
different  with  Is.  3314"16,  where  there  is  a  couplet  of  inquiry,  a  pentastich  of 
response  and  a  concluding  tristich.  These  are  tetrameters.  But  the  language 
and  phrasing  are  so  similar  to  Ps.  15  that  there  is  interdependence;  and  prob- 
ably the  briefer  ethical  conception  of  Is.8  is  earlier  than  the  more  complete 
one  of  the  Ps.  The  question  has  the  same  conception  of  guest  -\ij;  although 
in  Is.3  Yahweh  is  a  consuming  fire,  in  the  Ps.  He  has  a  hospitable  tent.  The 
different  situations  at  the  time  of  composition  explain  this  variation.  Three 
of  the  ethical  requirements  are  the  same:  (1)  Dnsn  "jSn  v.fa  =  nipTS  *|Sri 
Is.  3315a.    This  is  all  the  more  the  case  if  we  read  in  v.2a  ip*wa   d>dp  -rSn. 


PSALM  XV.  113 

(2)  nDx  "oi  v.a=onB»D  nai  Is.  33156.  (3)  npS  nS  ttwJ  v.56=:"inBb  "jdhd  ves  -ipj 
Is*  3315d-  The  conclusion  v.5c  may  be  regarded  as  a  summary  statement  of 
Is.  3316.  The  Gemara  {Makkoth  f.  24*7)  states :  "  David  compresses  the 
613  commands  of  the  Law  in  eleven,  Isaiah  in  six,  Micah  (68)  in  three; 
Amos  (54)  and  Hb.  (24)  each  in  one."  The  comparison  is  good  though  the 
conception  of  the  author  is  unhistoric.  V.26  shows  such  a  highly  developed 
sense  of  mental  truthfulness,  that  it  implies  the  influence  of  Persian  ethics,  and 
therefore  the  Persian  period.  The  form  of  the  decalogue  implies  familiarity 
with  its  use  in  the  earlier  Heb.  codes,  and  a  legal  habit  of  mind.  This  dec- 
alogue does  not  include  duties  to  God  as  the  primitive  Decalogue;  but  is 
rather  like  those  decalogues  of  E,  D,  H,  which  comprehend  duties  to  man. 
V.56  npS'KS  >j?j"Sp  intf  implies  ipi  on  #DJ  mon1?  nntf  npS  "ins  Dt.  2725,  one 
command  of  a  primitive  decalogue  among  the  sources  of  D;  cf.  also  Ex.  23s. 
V.5a  i#J3  jnj~«S  "\ddd  implies  "\v:2  iS  jnn  nS  1C03TH  Lv.  2537  out  of  one  of 
the  groups  of  laws  of  H;  cf.  Ex.  2224  (v.  Br.Hex-  224-  229- 239).  The  codes  of  D 
and  H  were  familiar  to  our  psalmist,  but  he  betrays  no  knowledge  of  P.  The 
Ps.  seems  to  give  an  appropriate  answer  to  the  demand  of  Samaritans  to 
participate  with  the  Jews  in  the  rebuilding  of  the  temple,  Ezr.  42  sq. 

Str.  I.  is  a  couplet  of  inquiry,  as  24s-8 10  Is.  3314.  —  1.  Who\ 
not,  what  person?  but  as  often,  what  sort  of  a  person?  what  shall 
be  his  character?  —  shall  be  a  guest  in  Thy  tent],  v.  Ps.  55.  The 
tent  is  a  poetic  term  for  the  temple  27^  615,  based  upon  the 
ancient  sacred  tent  of  Yahweh,  prior  to  the  building  of  the  temple 
786067.  The  temple  was  really  the  house  or  palace  of  Yahweh; 
sometimes  conceived  as  the  place  of  sacrifice  and  worship,  some- 
times as  the  place  of  His  royal  presence,  to  which  He  admits  His 
servants,  either  as  guests  or  to  shelter  them  from  their  enemies. 
—  dwell  on  Thy  holy  Mount],  parall.  with  previous  line,  but  not 
entirely  synonymous.  The  privilege  of  access  to  the  sacred  tent 
as  guests  is  one  thing;  the  privilege  of  a  residence  on  the  holy 
mountain  as  citizens  is  another.  The  holy  mount  is  here  as  else- 
where Jerusalem  or  Zion  {v.  26). 

Str.  II.  is  a  decalogue  composed  of  two  pentades  of  ethical 
requirements.  The  first,  2-3,  comprehends  a  couplet  and  a  trip- 
let. The  couplet  is  more  general,  requiring:  (1)  Moral  walk  or 
conduct.  In  this  the  guest  of  Yahweh  should  be  perfect  in  his 
righteousness'],  complete,  faultless,  so  probably  the  original,  to 
rhyme  with  the  other  lines  of  the  pentade.  These  two  kindred 
words  seemed  to  a  later  prosaic  editor  to  require  each  its  own 
verb,  and  so  he  inserted  "worketh"  before  "righteousness,"  and 
1 


1 14  PSALMS 

destroyed  the  measure.  (2)  Moral  speech.  —  He  that  speaketh 
truth],  not  merely  of  external  speech  to  others  as  1  K.  2216  Je.  9* 
Zc.  81'5,  where  truth  and  falsehood  are  conceived  in  the  preexilic 
sense  as  connected  with  injury  to  others;  but,  internal  speech,  to 
himself,  in  his  mind],  the  later  and  much  higher  conception 
of  truthfulness,  due  to  Persian  influence  j  the  Persians,  from  an 
earlier  date  than  their  contact  with  Israel,  being  distinguished 
above  all  other  ancient  nations  for  the  stress  they  put  upon  moral 
truthfulness.  The  more  general  attitude  of  this  first  pair  of  ethical 
requirements  passes  over  into  the  more  specific  negative  conduct 
in  the  triplet,  which  is  progressive  in  order  of  thought.  The  rela- 
tionship becomes  constantly  closer  in  the  order  :  his  neighbour,  his 
friend,  the  one  near  to  him,  so  also  in  the  actions,  — play  the  spy 
upon].  This  is  the  ordinary  meaning  of  the  Heb.  phr. ;  but  a 
copyist  in  the  omission  of  a  single  letter  of  the  original  "  neigh- 
bour," substituted  a  Hebrew  word  meaning  "  tongue,"  and  so  made 
an  obscure  and  unexampled  phr.  and  construction,  which  has  been 
rendered  in  various  ways.  Those  most  familiar  to  English  readers, 
are  :  "  He  that  hath  used  no  deceit  in  his  tongue  "  PBV.,  "  He  that 
backbiteth  not  with  his  tongue  "  AV.,  "  He  that  slandereth  not 
with  his  tongue  "  RV. ;  none  of  which  is  well  sustained.  —  Hath 
not  done  harm  to~\.  The  evil  disposition,  as  expressed  in  spying,  has 
passed  over  into  an  active  doing  of  injuries,  and  reaches  its  climax 
in  :  hath  not  taken  up  a  reproach  against  the  one  near  to  him. 

The  second  pentade,  4-5 b,  is  also  composed  of  a  couplet  and 
triplet,  the  couplet  general,  the  triplet  specific.  The  couplet  is 
antith.  —  The  reprobate],  the  one  rejected  by  Yahweh  (v.  146 
(revued  txt.)  =536),  antith.  them  that  fear  Yahweh],  His  worshippers, 
cf.  2224  25123410  1121  1151113  1184  12814  13520.  The  former  are 
despised  in  his  eyes],  his  eyes  look  upon  them  with  contempt;  the 
latter  he  honoureth.  The  triplet  is  progressive,  as  the  previous  one, 
in  the  rejection  of  degrees  of  wickedness.  —  He  doth  swear  to  his 
friend],  so  (3  "neighbour"  PBV. ;  which  is  easier  and  more  suited 
to  the  context  than  the  stronger  and  tempting,  "to  his  own  hurt" 
3,  AV.,  RV.,  JPSV.,  and  most  moderns.  This  rests  upon  a  dif- 
ferent interpretation  of  the  same  original  consonant  letters,  which 
in  the  unpointed  text  may  be  interpreted  by  two  different  words 
—  and  cha?igeth  not],  that  is,  adheres  to  his  oath  and  does  not 


PSALM  XV.  115 

violate  it.  This  probably  refers  in  accordance  with  the  subsequent 
context  to  a  promise  made  to  a  friend  of  some  benefit  or  help. 
The  violation  of  the  oath  of  promise  now  passes  over  to  the  more 
positive  usury,  and  more  guilty  bribery,  in  violation  of  the  ancient 
codes;  the  former  of  Ex.  2224  (E)  Lv.  25s7  (H)  Dt.  2320,  cf. 
Ez.  i88-13-17  Pr.  28s;  the  latter  of  Ex.  23s  (E)  Dt.  27-05  (Deca- 
logue) Dt.  io17  1619  1  S.  83,  cf.  Is.  i23  s23  3315  Ez.  2212  Ps.  2610 
Pr.  1723. 

Str.  III.  is  a  monostich,  summing  up  the  decalogue  in  final  re- 
sponse to  Str.  I.  —  5  c.  Whoso  doeth  these  things  shall  not  be 
moved'].  This  phr.  is  often  employed  to  indicate  the  firm,  secure 
condition  of  the  people  of  God,  in  Zion,  v.  io°.  A  later  editor 
thought  that  he  strengthened  it  by  adding  "  forever." 

1.  mrp]  unnecessary  gl.  —  1^7P  Via]  the  sacred  mountain  Zion;  see  2s. 
This  couplet  rhymes  in  ka.  and  is  syn.  throughout.  —  2.  JfSto]  ptc.  fully  writ- 
ten, rel.  indefinite,  so  na'"i.  "pn  of  moral,  religious  walk,  course  of  life;  v.i1. 
—  X  D^n]  adj.;  the  physical  mngs.,  whole,  entire,  sound,  are  not  in  \f/,  but 
only  the  ethical  mng.,  sound,  innocent,  having  integrity :  {a)  of  God's  way 
1831,  as  Dt.  32*,  law  Ps.  198;  (b)  of  man  1824,  his  way  ioi2-0  1191,  cf.  1833, 
without  "p/i,  o^Dna  8412,  d^dh  ace,  of  way  ij2  Pr.  2818.  Other  constructions 
Pss.  1826  11980,  adj.  for  noun  late  ;  pi.  3718  Pr.  221  2810 ;  v.  oh  79,  wn  cf.— 
PH*  ^"2]  antith.  ]Mt  ^pD§  v.  j6.  This  makes  a  tetrameter  with  caesura,  and 
also  a  double  requirement  at  the  beginning ;  whereas  in  every  other  line 
there  is  a  single  trimeter  requirement,  iyh  is  therefore  a  gl.  to  separate  p?* 
and  0>DD,  which  originally  belonged  together.  We  should  rd.  ^p*jjf  for  rhyme. 
For  p-ix,  v.  42 :  cf.  Is.  23^  ^p"ys  ^n.  —  X  n$K]  n.f.  (1)  faithfidness,  reliableness, 
(a)  of  man  45s  518  11943;  (b)  of  God:  nDNa  as  the  sphere  in  which  man  may 
walk  26s  8611,  cf.  25s;  (2)  attribute  of  God  3010  316  547  7122,  associated  with 
npn  2510  4011- 12  6914  8615  1151  1382  Gn.  2427  (J)  Is.  165,  as  messenger  of  God 
Pss.  574  618  8511  8915,  cf.  433;  His  faithfulness  endureth  forever  1172,  cf.  1466; 
it  reacheth  unto  the  skies  5711  1085,  is  shield  and  buckler  914;  used  with  "iBh 
in8,  pis  8512,  QD&D  in7;  (3)  seldom  truth,  and  then  not  in  an  abstr.  sense, 
but  rather  fa ithfully,  truly,  dcn  -on  /j2  I  K.  2216  Je.  94  Zc.  816;  so  the  divine 
laws  are  true,  reliable,  Pss.  1910  II9142- 151- 160  Mai.  26;  (4)  adv.  in  truth,  truly, 
Ps.  13211  Je.  io10,  PT2X2  Ps.  14518,  cf.  jdn  122,  ruicx  jji. —  '•ahSa]  the  long 
form  for  the  usual  "laSa  ;  c.  nai  only  here,  elsw.  c.  nnx,  v.  4s ;  cf.  aSa  nan 
Ec.  2I5,  aS  oy  Ec.  ii«,'aS  Sn  Gn.  2445  (J),  a1?  hy  1  S.  i13  (?);  cf.  Is.  3315.— 
3.  Sn~sS]  the  ptcs.  of  previous  v.  pass  over  into  Qal  pf.  of  general  truth, 
in  negative  rel.  clause,  nu;x  omitted  as  usual  in  poetry,  fhr)  a.X.  Qal  pf. 
denom.  brt  foot,  v.  87,  dub.  mng.  <g  iSSXua-ev  also  for  p^nn  36s  is  prob. 
interpretation;   so  3  non  est  facilis  in  lingua.     It  is  better  to  render  play  the 


Il6  PSALMS 

spy  upon.  This  is  urged  by  the  mng.  of  Pi.  in  Gn.  42°  + 6t-  (E)  Nu.  2132 
Dt.  i24  Jos.  21  6'2--  25  72- 2  147  (JE)  Ju.  i82- 14- 17  1  S.  264  2  S.  io3  1510  1  Ch.  19*, 
go  about  as  spy  or  explorer.  2  S.  1928  is  usually  rendered  slander,  but  it  might 
just  as  well  have  the  mng.  play  the  spy,  and  usage  urges  it.  The  only  other 
use  of  vb.  is  Tiph.  Ho.  n3  teach  to  walk  (dub.).  The  difficulty  with  Sri  is 
due  to  Wh  by,  which  is  not  homogeneous  to  the  vb.  The  context  suggests 
\}DVt  *?Jj|  upon  his  neighbour,  Che.  The  h  of  U'~,Ll  originated  from  dittog.  after 
the  omission  of  d.  We  should  probably  also  rd.  ^by  for  better  measure.  It  is 
possible  that  some  of  the  Vrss.  interpreted  S:n  as  Aram.  bit  lie,  deceive.  — 
\  r\y^\  n.  f.  (1)  evil,  distress,  3422  9015  9110  I0726-39,  T\yr\  DV  2f  412  Je.  I717-  *8 
5if,Tj*jn  evils  Pss.  3420  4013  7120  884  1416  Dt.  3228,'i  nj  Ps.  3719  Je.  227-28  n12 
1511  Am.  513;  (2)  evil,  injury,  wrong,  Pss.  2112  283  3520  5c)19  52s  1095, 
c.  S  nfrjj  153,  airn  35*  418  1408  Gn.  5020  (E)  Je.  363  482,  rpa  Pss.  71I324 
1  S5.  2410  2526,  Bhn  Ps.  3818,  ron  4015  =  708,  dW  3512  3821  Gn.  44*  (J)  Je.  1820 
5 124;  (3)  evil  in  ethical  sense  Pss.  9423  10734.  —  X  nsnn]  n.f.  emph.  (1)  reproach 
(a)  against  man,  taunt,  scorn,  of  enemy  6920-21  7 113  8961  11922,  nonn  Nirj 
Je.  3 119  Ez.  3615  Mi.  616  all  against,  so  Ps.  ij3  (no  reason  to  suppose  a  special 
sense  of  slander  here),  'n  Nt'j  c.  by  bear  reproach  for  69s  Je.  1515  Zp.  318, 
'n  l^apn  11939;  (3)  against  God  6910  7422  7912;  (2)  object  of  reproach  227 
399,  'S  'n  n>n  become  an  object  of  reproach  to  3112  794  894'2  10925,  cf.  4414  6911 
78s6. — Ktn]  in  the  sense  of  J /a&?  «/,  u/fer/  elsw.  rr.rr  813,  KltfS  13920,  cf. 
244,  names  164,  covenant  5016.  —  ^i?]  the  one  near  to  him,  of  relationship,  as 
3812,  cf.  Ex.  3227  neighbour.  —  4.  nrrn]  and  Dn^:  Niphs.  may  be  either  pfs.  or 
ptcs.  The  impf.  -or  does  not  help.  It  is  itself  doubtful.  The  connection 
of  vr>a  with  nop  and  the  antith.  with  -or  make  it  most  probable  that  this  is 
the  chief  vb.,  and  that  there  is  another  antith.  between  the  obj.  of  Dxcj  and 
'•n\  —  X  n*3  VD-  despise,  regard  with  contempt,  subj.  God  2225  5 119  69s4  7320 
10218;  ptc.  pass.  227  Je.  4915;  Niph.  be  despised  Pss.  yj-4  119141  Is.  533- 3 
Je.  2228.  —  1  *ip?~nKi]  emph.;  but  r«  dub.  in  measure.  K*v  v.f.  —  "»3?\). 
The  change  of  tense  was  due  to  change  of  order  of  words  in  sentence  and  is 
of  doubtful  originality.  —  >ap]  Niph.  pf.  3  m.  X  V*$  Niph.  (1)  of  man,  sivear 
a  solemn  oath,  abs.  119106,  TO^dS  244,  jnnS  154;  c.  a  by  God  6312,  by  man  in 
imprecation  io29,  nn>S  1322;  (2)  of  God,  abs.  no4,  inS  894-60  13211,  uhpa 
8^,  p|sa  9511.  —  pnnS]  may  be  to  his  hurt,  article  for  sf.  and  $n  hurt,  v.  j5; 
so  %,  Ew.,  Hu.;  inf.  Hiph.  pjn,  v.  2217,  Aq.,  9.  3  ut  se  affligat ;  so  De., 
Ba.,  as  Lv.  54.  (S  t#  irXrjo-Lov  avrov,  Ty  proximo  suo,  so  j$,  Gr.,  Dathe  ;  =  jrh 
as  v.36.  This  is  easier  and  more  suited  to  the  context,  though  not  so  noble 
a  conception  as  is  MT.  At  the  same  time  it  would  be  difficult  to  prove 
the  existence  of  such  an  ethical  conception  at  so  early  a  date  as  this  Ps. — 
nir]  Hiph.  impf.  3  m.  defectively  written  X  nic>  VD«  not  use^  m  Qa^  5  DUt 
Hiph.  change  of  earth  in  earthquake  46**  (?),  c.  ace.  pbn  Mi.  24,  here  abs. ; 
(2)  exchange,  Ps.  10620  Ho.  47. 


PSALM   XVI.  117 


PSALM   XVL,   3  str.  8\ 

Ps.  16  is  a  psalm  of  faith.  The  psalmist  has  sought  refuge 
in  Yahweh  his  sovereign  Lord,  and  supreme  welfare  (v.1-2) ;  whose 
good  pleasure  is  in  His  saints  (v.3).  The  apostates  have  many- 
sorrows,  and  he  keeps  apart  from  them  and  their  impious  wor- 
ship (v.4).  Yahweh  is  his  portion  and  his  inheritance  in  pleasant 
places  (v.5-6) ;  he  enjoys  His  counsel  (v.7)  and  continual  helpful 
presence  (v.8);  he  is  glad  and  secure  (v.9),  confident  that  Yahweh 
will  not  abandon  him  in  Sheol  (v.10),  but  will  grant  him  life  and 
joy  forever  in  His  presence  (v.11). 

X^EEP  me,  'El ;  for  I  have  sought  refuge  in  Thee. 

I  said  to  Yahweh  :  "  Thou  art  my  sovereign  Lord," 

For  my  welfare  is  not  (without)  Thee. 

To  the  saints  who  are  in  the  land, 

(Yahweh)  makes  wonderful  all  His  good  pleasure  in  them. 

They  shall  multiply  their  sorrows  who  hurry  backwards. 

I  will  not  offer  their  drink  offerings,  because  of  bloodshed; 

I  will  not  take  up  their  names  upon  my  lips. 
YAHWEH  is  my  share,  (my)  portion,  and  my  cup; 

(Yahweh  is)  the  maintainer  of  my  lot  (for  me). 

The  lines  are  fallen  for  me  in  pleasant  places ; 

Yea,  mine  inheritance  is  (mighty  over)  me. 

I  will  bless  Yahweh,  who  hath  given  me  counsel : 

Yea,  in  the  dark  night  my  reins  admonish  me. 

I  have  set  Yahweh  continually  before  me  : 

Since  He  is  on  my  right  hand,  I  shall  not  be  moved. 
THEREFORE  my  heart  is  glad  (in  Yahweh) ; 

(Also)  my  glory  rejoiceth  (in  Yahweh)  ; 

Also  my  flesh  dwelleth  securely : 

For  Thou  wilt  not  leave  me  to  Sheol; 

Thou  wilt  not  suffer  Thy  pious  one  to  see  the  Pit; 

Thou  wilt  make  known  to  me  the  path  to  Life. 

Fulness  of  gladness  is  in  Thy  presence; 

Loveliness  is  on  Thy  right  hand  forever. 

Ps.  16  was  in  Q  belonging  to  the  group  of  D^ron  (v.  Intr.  §§  25,  27). 
It  was  not  in  $3$L  That  is  the  reason  probably  why  it  was  separated  from 
the  other  Miktamim,  56-60,  which  have  been  preserved,  all  of  which  were  in 
332ft.  This  favours  an  early  date  for  the  Ps.  (1)  There  is  a  use  of  Je.  23°  33™ 
Dr..  3312,  nanS  ptf  in  v.96;  (2)  a  dependence  upon  Ez.  in  the  conception  (a) 
of  saints,  consecrated  ones,  for  faithful  Israelites  in  accordance  with  the  code 
of  H  v.3,  and  (h)  of  the  pit  in  Sheol  v.10;   (3)  a  much  greater  dependence  upon 


Il8  PSALMS 

Is.2,  8  (a)  in  the  phrase,  His  good  pleasure  in  them  v.,%,  cf.  Is.  4428  4610  4814; 
(ti)  apostasy  expressed  by  hurrying  backwards  v.4*1,  cf.  Is.  505;  (c)  the  drink 
offerings  v.46  if  of  blood,  correspond  with  the  abominations  described  in 
Is.  575Bq-  6511  663  ;  and  it  may  be  that  v.40  finds  its  best  illustration  in 
Is.  6515,  as  Ba.  suggests.  The  worship  there  repudiated  is  that  of  Palestine 
and  Syria,  not  that  of  Babylonia  or  Egypt.  If  the  situation  is  the  same,  we 
must  think  of  the  late  days  of  the  Exile  or  the  early  days  of  the  Restoration. 
But  it  is  more  probable  that  these  drink  offerings  were  repudiated  because 
those  who  made  them  were  guilty  of  bloodshed,  of  murder  of  innocent  per- 
sons. This  favours  a  time  when  there  was  no  strong  government  to  repress 
such  disorders.  (4)  The  reference  to  a  share  or  portion  in  the  land  (v.5) 
also  favours  one  who  has  recently  returned  to  the  Holy  Land.  The  ex- 
pression "  Saints  who  are  in  the  land  "  implies  an  antith.  to  those  who  were 
not  in  the  land,  those  still  in  exile,  such  as  would  be  quite  natural  for  one 
recently  come  to  the  land  from  among  the  exiles.  (5)  The  tone  of  the  Ps. 
is  one  of  calm  trust  in  Yahweh  and  the  enjoyment  of  prosperity  attributed  to 
Yahweh.  The  author  calmly  separates  himself  from  the  apostates  ;  but  there 
is  no  evidence  of  active  hostility,  still  less  of  peril  or  warfare.  This  does  not 
favour  the  times  of  hardship  and  poverty  described  by  Hg.  and  Zc,  or  the 
times  of  conflict  of  Ne.  and  Ezr.  The  Ps.  was  composed  either  between 
these  times  or  subsequent  thereto.  (6)  There  is  a  single  Aramaism,  v.66 
*VjJ  mrjr,  which  is  found  elsewhere  only  Dn.  This  might  have  been  used 
at  any  time  in  the  Persian  period;  but  most  likely  not  at  its  beginning. 
However,  it  is  a  copyist's  error.  <&  has  the  correct  text  in  a  common  word 
n-oj).  (7)  The  calm  view  of  death  and  the  expectation  of  the  presence 
of  God  and  blessedness  after  death  imply  an  advance  beyond  Is.  571"2;  but 
prior  to  the  emergence  of  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  of  the  righteous 
Is.  2619,  that  is,  in  the  Persian  period.  The  same  point  of  view  is  in  Pss.  1715 
4916  73^'^  Jb.  1 9s5-27.  (8)  The  author  was  one  of  the  anon  v.106,  the  pious 
who  distinguished  themselves  carefully  from  those  who  were  not  faithful  to 
Yahweh,  and  kept  apart  from  them.  (9)  There  is  no  trace  of  the  observance 
of  P,  or  of  the  practice  of  temple  worship,  in  this  profession  of  piety,  probably, 
therefore,  the  date  was  prior  to  these.  On  the  whole  the  composition  of  the  Ps. 
is  best  assigned  to  the  time  subsequent  to  Zerubbabel  and  prior  to  Nehemiah. 
The  Ps.  is  tetrameter  and  of  three  strophes.  It  is  doubtful  whether  these  are 
of  eight  lines  or  seven.  If  the  text  of  Str.  III.  v.9-11  is  the  test,  it  is  not  diffi- 
cult to  find  glosses  in  v.30-5"  with  Du.  If  these  are  regarded  as  original,  it  is 
not  difficult  to  reconstruct  v.9  into  three  lines  and  regard  v.9a6  as  condensed 
by  a  prosaic  scribe  into  one  line,  leaving  a  trace  of  it  in  having  one  word  too 
many.  V.*-116  is  cited  Acts  225-32  from  @,  and  applied  by  St.  Peter  to  the 
resurrection  of  Christ;  so  v.106  by  St.  Paul,  Acts  1335.  The  hopes  of  the 
Ps.,  which  apply  only  to  the  enjoyment  of  the  presence  of  God  after  death,  in 
view  of  the  subsequent  emergence  of  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection,  are 
realised  in  the  eternal  life  of  the  resurrection,  and  so  first  in  Christ,  the  first 
fruits  of  that  resurrection. 


PSALM   XVI.  119 

Str.  I.  is  a  tetrameter  octastich  j  three  synth.  lines  giving  the 
psalmist's  attitude  toward  God,  two  Yahweh's  attitude  toward 
the  saints  of  the  land,  and  three  the  attitude  of  both  toward  the 
apostates.  1-2.  Keep  me],  a  plea  for  protection  based  on: 
/  have  sought  refuge  in  Thee~],  cf.  212  512  y2  n1-^.  —  /  said  to 
Yahweh],  so  Vrss.,  RV.,  JPSV.,  Dr.,  Kirk. ;  and  not  "(O  my  soul) 
thou  hast  said,"  MT.,  PBV.,  AV.,  which  is  not  well  sustained  by 
text  or  context.  —  Thou  art  ?ny  sovereign  Lord],  "my  Master" 
JPSV.,  "  my  Lord  "  AV.  \  pi.  intensive,  as  24  81,  and  not  the 
divine  name  "  Adonay,"  "  the  Lord  "  RV.m  —  My  welfare],  pros- 
perity, is  to  be  preferred  to  "  my  goods,"  possessions,  (3,  U,  PBV., 
elsw.  only  Ec.  510 ;  or  to  "  goodness  "  AV.  "  Good  "  RV.  is  too 
general.  —  is  not  {without)  Thee],  as  3,  is  most  prob.  "Nothing 
unto  Thee"  PBV.,  "(extendeth)  not  to  Thee"  AV.,  cannot  be 
sustained.  RV.  "  beyond  Thee  "  is  dub.  (Dr.) ;  though  urged  by 
Ew.,  RS.,  Kirk. :  "  Not  merely  is  God  the  source  of  all  his  weal, 
but  everything  which  he  recognizes  as  a  true  good,  God  actually 
contains  within  Himself."  The  simpler  idea  that  the  psalmist  is 
entirely  dependent  on  Yahweh,  the  source  of  all  good,  for  his 
welfare,  and  cannot  prosper  without  divine  favour,  is  much  more 
probable.  —  3.  To  the  saints  who  are  in  the  land],  as  distin- 
guished from  those  abroad,  those  of  the  dispersion.  —  (  Yahweh) 
mahes  wonderful  all  His  good  pleasure  in  them'],  so  (3,  U ;  prefer- 
able to  f^,  which  is  so  difficult  to  interpret  that  there  is  no 
agreement  among  later  Vrss.  or  commentators.  Yahweh  takes 
good  pleasure  in  these  saints,  and  He  magnifies  His  good  pleasure 
in  them  in  a  wonderful  manner.  —  4.  They  shall  multiply  their 
sorrows,  who  hurry  backwards],  cf.  4419  Is.  505 ;  apostates  who 
turn  away  from  Yahweh  and  go  backwards  in  apostasy  from  Him. 
This  is  better  sustained  by  J^  and  Vrss.  than  "  hasten  after 
another  (God)"  AV.,  "  run  after  "  PBV.,  "  make  suit  unto  "  JPSV., 
which  are  not  sustained  by  Hebrew  usage ;  or  than  "  exchange 
(the  Lord)  for  another  (god)  "  RV.,  Kirk.,  so  essentially  Dr.,  which 
requires  unnecessary  emendation  of  text.  The  psalmist,  having 
represented  that  the  saints  enjoyed  the  wonderful  good  pleasure 
of  Yahweh,  now  turns  to  the  apostate  Israelites  who  have  gone 
backwards  from  Yahweh  to  the  worship  of  other  gods,  and  repre- 
sents that  they,  in  reverse  of  enjoying  Yahweh's  good  pleasure, 


120  PSALMS 

incur  a  multitude  of  sorrows.  —  I  will  not  offer  their  drink  offerings 
because  of  bloodshed]  j  that  is,  participate  with  them  in  their  drink 
offerings  to  Yahweh,  which  were  abominable  because  they  were 
associated  with  bloodshed,  the  murder  of  innocent  persons.  Ba. 
thinks  of  the  offering  of  children  Is.  575sq  6511 ;  Du.  of  the  blood- 
guiltiness  of  such  offerings  as  they  make,  cf.  Is.  668.  —  I  will  not 
take  up  their  names  upon  my  lips],  cf.  5016,  in  order  to  speak  to 
them  or  about  them,  —  not  the  names  of  the  gods  so  worshipped, 
according  to  the  law,  Ex.  2313  (E),  or  their  names  as  the  names 
these  apostates  take  on  their  lips,  Ri.,  but  the  names  of  the 
apostates  themselves,  Ba.,  as  Is.  6515.  The  poet  repudiates  them 
utterly,  he  will  have  nothing  to  do  with  them,  will  not  even 
mention  them  in  conversation.  The  psalmist  was  undoubtedly 
influenced  by  Is.2.  If  the  Ps.  belongs  to  the  Persian  period,  we 
may  think  of  the  apostates  to  idolatry  described  in  antith.  with 
the  pious,  the  saints,  v.3. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  four  syn.  couplets.  —  5.  Yahweh  is  my 
share],  in  assonance  with  (my)  portion  and  my  cup,  rather  than 
"  share  of  my  portion  "  %\,  though  sustained  by  Vrss.  and  most 
authorities.  —  Yahweh  is  the  ?naintainer  of  my  lot  (for  me)].  This 
was  probably  the  original  text,  according  to  the  context.  The 
change  to  the  2d  person  is  improbable.  It  was  doubtless  due 
to  supposed  editorial  improvement  of  style.  The  poet  here  en- 
larges upon  v.26.  Yahweh,  the  source  of  welfare,  also  embodies 
in  Himself  the  share  which  He  gives  to  His  people,  the  portion 
assigned  them,  the  cup  of  pleasure  which  they  enjoy;  and  all 
this  He  maintains  for  them  against  all  enemies  and  perils. 
"The  language  used  here  reminds  us  of  the  Levites  who  had 
no  portion  or  inheritance,  but  Jehovah  was  their  portion,  Nu.  1820 
Dt.  io9  181,"  Kirk.  "Let  others  choose  for  themselves  portions, 
earthly  and  temporal,  to  enjoy ;  the  portion  of  saints  is  the  Lord 
eternal.  Let  others  drink  of  deadly  pleasures,  the  portion  of  my 
cup  is  the  Lord,"  Aug. — 6.  The  lines],  the  measuring  lines  of 
the  portion,  or  share  in  the  land,  cf.  Ps.  78s5  Mi.  25  Am.  717. — 
are  fallen  for  me  in  pleasant  places],  the  lot  in  the  holy  land  is 
a  delightful  one. —  Yea,  mine  inheritance  is  (mighty  over)  me], 
the  inheritance  in  Yahweh,  Yahweh  Himself  as  the  inheritance,  || 
share,  v.5*,  as  (3,  and  so  similar  to  10311  n  f,  where  the  mercy  of 


PSALM   XVI.  121 

God  is  mighty  over  His  people.  The  "  goodly  heritage  "  of  EVB. 
is  a  paraphrase  based  on  J^  which  cannot  be  sustained. —  7.  I  will 
bless  Yahweh  who  hath  given  me  connsel~\.  The  psalmist  passes 
over  from  his  portion  in  the  land  to  his  more  intimate  relations 
with  Yahweh,  whom  he  has  sought  as  his  sovereign  Lord,  v.12a  ;  He 
has  counselled  him  in  his  life  and  conduct.  —  My  reins  admoiiish 
me~\.  The  reins  are  the  seat  of  the  emotions  and  affections, 
cf.  Jb.  1927  Pr.  2316  Ps.  7321  Je.  122  ||  mind,  Je.  n20  1710  2o12Pss.  710 
262.  His  own  experience  corresponds  with  Yahweh's  counsel. 
This  admonition  is  in  the  dark  night~\,  as  92s  1341,  intensive  pi., 
rather  than  "night  seasons,"  AV.,  RV.  —  8.  /  have  set  Yahweh 
continually  befoi'e  me],  before  the  mind,  keeping  Him  continually 
in  mind.  —  since  He  is  on  my  right  hand~\,  present,  near  at  hand, 
as  close  as  possible  to  help.  This  is  the  reason  why,  /  shall  not 
be  moved],  the  usual  expression  of  confidence  in  God,  Pss.  io6  155 
168  2 18  307  623-7  1126,  cf.  Pr.  io30  123. 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  a  syn.  couplet  between  two  syn. 
triplets.  —  9.  Therefore],  because  of  confidence  in  Yahweh's 
presence  as  sovereign  Lord  and  portion.  —  my  heart  is  glad  ||  my 
glory  rejoiceth].  In  both  lines,  in  Yahweh,  was  probably  in  the 
original,  completing  the  measures.  A  prosaic  copyist  condensed 
the  two  lines  into  a  simple  line,  too  long  for  the  measure  of  the 
Ps.  —  also  my  flesh~],  the  body  in  antith.  with  "heart"  and 
"  glory,"  so  making  up  the  entire  man,  body  and  soul.  —  dwelleth 
securely~],  liveth  without  anxiety,  without  fear  of  enemies,  cf.  Dt. 
3312  Je.  23s  33™.  — 10.  For  thou  wilt  not  leave  me  to  Sheol~\. 
Nephesh  is  here,  as  often,  the  person  of  the  man  himself.  The 
poet  is  not  thinking  of  the  soul  as  distinguished  from  the  flesh, 
but  of  himself  as  composed  of  both  soul  and  body.  It  is  true 
the  flesh  does  not  go  to  Sheol  at  death,  but  only  the  soul.  The 
psalmist  is  here  thinking  of  his  entire  self  and  not  specifically 
of  that  part  of  himself  which  goes  to  the  abode  of  the  dead. 
He  expects  to  die  and  to  go  to  Sheol,  but  he  prays  that  God 
will  not  abandon  him  there  ;  will  not  leave  him  in  the  power 
of  Sheol ;  but  will  go  with  him  and  remain  with  him  there.  — 
Thou  wilt  not  suffer  Thy  pious  one  to  see  the  Tit'].  The  Heb. 
nnt'  is  not  abstract  "  corruption,"  which,  though  given  in  (3  and 
3,  and  followed  by  EV8.,  has  no  authority  in  the  usage  of  OT. 


122  PSALMS 

The  Pit  is  not  the  tomb,  but  is  syn.  with  Sheol,  usually  under- 
stood as  another  name  of  Sheol  itself  as  a  pit  or  cavern  under 
the  earth  ;  but  usage  favours  the  opinion  that  it  is  a  Pit  in  Sheol, 
as  a  deeper  place  than  Sheol,  syn.  Abaddon,  the  dungeon  of  Sheol. 
The  psalmist  will  see  Sheol,  but  he  will  not  be  abandoned  there ; 
he  will  not  see  the  Pit,  the  dungeon  of  Sheol,  the  place  of  the 
wicked.  The  pious  could  hardly  go  there.  In  antithesis  with 
this,  the  psalmist  has  hope  and  confident  expectation  of  the 
presence  and  favour  of  God  after  death.  — 11.  Thou  wilt  make 
known  to  me  the  path  to  Life'].  This  might  imply  resurrection 
if  the  Ps.  were  late  enough,  a  path  leading  up  out  of  Sheol  to 
eternal  Life.  But  the  context  does  not  suggest  this;  the  path 
rather  leads  to  the  presence  of  God  in  the  abode  of  the  dead. 
The  path  to  life  is  antith.  to  the  Pit  in  Sheol.  —  Fulness  of  gladness 
is  in  Thy  presence].  The  presence  of  Yahweh,  to  which  the 
path  to  life  leads,  gives  gladness  to  the  full,  and  complete  satis- 
faction, leaving  nothing  more  to  be  desired.  It  is  possible  that 
the  glossator  had  this  in  mind  as  the  supreme  good  or  wel- 
fare, v.26, —  Loveliness  ||  gladness,  on  Thy  right  hand],  as  the 
place  of  honour,  ||  in  Thy  presence,  antith.  to  Yahweh's  being  on 
his  right  hand  in  life,  v.86. — forever].  Such  a  hope  he  could  not 
express  for  this  life ;  he  is  thinking  of  everlasting  life  in  the 
presence  of  Yahweh  and  on  His  right  hand,  after  he  has  departed 
this  life  and  gone  to  Sheol. 

1  .  ^Dtf]  Qal  imv.  sf.  I  sg.  notf,  see  /2s.  The  metheg  of  |^  interprets 
quametz  as  a,  but  this  is  erroneous,  and  should  be  corrected  to  o  as  Ges.§9v- 
Ko.1-9-101.  —  Sx  poetic  for  God  (v.  Intr.  §32).  — 2.  rnrs]  Qal  pf.  3  f.  imply- 
ing iroj  as  subj.,  so  %,  Rabb.,  RV.,n.  But  it  should  be  rncK,  defectively 
written  1  pers.,  as  22  codd.  De  R.,  <£,  IT,  £,  Houb.,  Ols.,  Ges.  §*»  K6.L»-1W 
Ew.,  al.,  cf.  Ps.  14018  Jb.  422  1  K.  84S  Ez.  1669.  3,  dicens  also  favours  this 
form.  —  mis]  refers  to  God  as  distinguished  from  mix  referring  to  men.  But 
it  is  not  necessarily  Adonay.  The  context  suggests  the  original  mng.  my 
sovereign  lord,  as  predicate  of  m*<  v.  2^. —  J  msa]  n.f. :  (1)  welfare,  pros- 
perity, happiness  162,  as  Dt.  237  Je.  33s,  obj.  n*-\  Ps.  1065  Jb.  925  Ec.  517  66; 
(2)  bounty,  good,  as  bestowed  by  God,  Pss.  65 12  6811  8617.  mis  nnn  n;n  351- 
3821 1095  Gn.  444  (J)  1  S.  2521  Je.  1820  Pr.  1718.  v.  ato  4'.  This  clause  is  not 
in  (§B,  but  in  (S>%  A' R,  where  rois  is  interpreted  as  my  goods,  U  bonorum,  a 
mng.  very  late,  Ec.  510.  3  translates  bene  mihi,  S  070^6^  /jloi,  IE  TOV£.  — 
:pSp]  is  difficult  and  is  variously  interpreted:    (1)  <j£s''  A<  R  8ti  ov  xp^^-v  exets, 


PSALM   XVI.  123 

thou  hast  no  need  or  advantage,  in  a  causal  sentence.  The  &tl  may  be  an 
interpretation  or  imply  >3  in  the  original.  The  h%;  is  interpreted  in  the  sense 
of  for  the  sake  of,  as  \  45s  79°  105 14.  (2)  3  sine  te,  2  &vev  <rov,  paraphrased  by 
sS  "  from  Thee,"  is  a  translation  of  Hjfra,  which  Houb.,  Hi.,  Du.  think  was 
in  the  original  text.  (3)  Over,  beyond,  Ew.  "  Thou  art  my  highest  good?  Dr. 
"  My  welfare  is  not  beyond  (?)  Thee."  BDB.  gives  in  this  mng.  of  excess  %  1382, 
above  all  Thy  name  (dub.),  in  the  sense  of  above,  beyond  Gn.  48'22  Ex.  165 
Nu.  346  Dt.  25s  Jos.  315  Ec.  i16  Dn.  I20,  in  local  relations,  Lv.  1525  of  time. 
But  none  of  these  have  precisely  the  sense  proposed  for  this  passage.  (4)  The 
more  usual  mng.  of  *?;-,  incumbent  on,  of  duty,  or  care  \  711  iqU  375  4°8  5613 
62s,  c.  yhvn  2211  55'23  716  is  adopted  by  Ra.  But  it  is  then  necessary  to 
make  the  clause  interrog.  or  get  a  mng.  the  reverse  of  the  context.  Pe. 
avoids  this  by  changing  "?3  to  "?D.  (5)  The  mng.  %  in  addition  to  617  6o/28 
7  iu  1 1514  is  adopted  by  Ri.,  Moll.,  but  it  is  improbable.  The  line  is  too  short 
in  p£.  It  is  better  to  rd.  as  the  original  a  real  tetrameter  "pij^a  *?3  »naiB  "O. 
This  explains  3.  The  err.  of  f^  is  chiefly  the  omission  of  ^a  of  nyVa  by 
haplog.  and  then  the  err.  of  q>Sy  for  qn;%.  —  3.  D^TpS]  is  also  difficult  and  is 
variously  interpreted:  (i)  S  in  the  sense  of  as  for,  as  regards  174,  <5,  3,  De 
W.,  Ew.,  Dr.;  (2)  belonging  to,  Calv.,  Hengst.,  Hu.,  Pe.,  Moll;  (3)  depend- 
ing on  1DN  as  a  second  indirect  obj.  in  antith.  rwrrh  Ki.,  De.,  RV.m.  This  is 
most  suitable  to  context  if  the  present  text  be  correct.  D^Hjp  pi.  \  unp  adj. 
sacred,  holy:  (1)  used  of  God,  as  exalted  on  theophanic  throne  224  Is.  63, 
exalted  in  victory  Ps.  99s-  5-  9  Is.  51G  I  S.  2'2,  His  name  Ps.  in9,  Sfcnfe"  ty'np, 
a  divine  name  originating  in  the  Trisagion,  Is.  63,  used  in  Is.  i4  +  iot.  js2  3 
4Ii4  +  i2t.j  elsw.  Je.  50295i5  2  K.  1922  Is.  3723  Pss.  7122  7841  8919;  (2)  of 
sacred  place  of  temple  in  Jerusalem  46s  65s;  (3)  of  persons,  Aaron,  10616, 
D>Khp  sacred  ones,  either  f  angels  89s-8  Jb.  51  1515  Zc.  145  Dn.  81313,  or 
Israelites  Dt.  33*  Pss.  163  3410  Dn.  824.  —  ?!?*?]  ©  <?"  ry  777  clvtov  =  nnK2  :  sf. 
is  doubtless  an  interp.,  as  io16.  —  $  n,on]  they ;  this  fuller,  more  euphonic 
form  is  alw.  in  \p,  except  3811  Dn~ai  and  9510c  on\  to  which  on  95IO&  has 
been  assimilated  by  copyist:  (1)  emph.  they,  (a)  antith.  to  other  persons 
>:n  1207,  urus  209,  n.nx  10227  10928,  with  1  adv.,  but  they  55s2  6310  10643,  at 
close  of  sentence  emph.  previous  sf.  even  theirs  g7  without  justification  in 
usage,  and  doubtless  txt.  err. ;  (2)  resuming  subj.  with  emphasis  at  the 
beginning  of  a  new  sentence  2218  234  272  37°  43s  48s  56"  5916  6210  10724, 
stronger  DiVDJ  3811;  (3)  as  copula,  properly  at  end  of  clause,  they  are  or 
were  921  (?)  25s  78s9  9411  9510  119111,  after  -\vx  only  16* ;  (4)  in  circum- 
stantial clause  noni  88*,  om  9510.  —  nn«t]  is  also  difficult.  3  et  magnificis  || 
D'BhpS,  but  the  word  is  too  distinct  to  dispense  with  the  prep.,  and  it  is  cstr., 
not  abs.,  unless  we  suppose  that  3  had  in«  sg.  coll.  "vus  (v.  82)  is  not  used 
elsw.  in  \f/  in  this  sense,  though  not  infrequent  in  early  poetry.  Ges.4§17Gd 
allows  an  occasional  cstr.  in  the  sense  of  abs.,  but  this  is  not  allowed  by  more 
recent  grammars.  We  might,  however,  regard  the  cstr.  as  before  a  rel. 
clause,  De  W.,  RV.,  Dr.,  and  1  as  introducing  an  apod.  <3  renders  as  vb. 
edav/JLaaTuxrev  iravTa  ra  OeX^jxara  aiirov  =  "ihn\     More  than  90  codd.  HP.,  so 


124  rSALMS 

Theodoret,  give  Kvpios  after  the  vb.  This  might  be  regarded  as  a  gl.  of  inter- 
pretation, but  it  may  also  be  an  interpretation  of  the  final  "•  as  an  abr.,  for 
nin\  This  would,  moreover,  give  us  a  needed  tetrameter  and  a  suitable 
couplet :  — 

nan  psa  i^n  D^tenp1? 
of  narr^S  mm  in«> 

t  [tin]  vb.  is  used  in  Niph.  ptc.  Ex.  1511  of  the  majesty  of  God,  cf.  v.6  and 
Is.  4221  in  the  Hiph.  make  glorious,  which  is  appropriate  to  this  passage. 
This  is  the  view  essentially  of  Koehler,  Schnurer,  Ba.,  Hu.3.  —  4.  DrV»a*g]  is 
regarded  by  W,  0,  Quinta,  3,  Mich.,  Ols.,  Ew.,  Du.  as  fpl.  for  usual  %  D\»P 
n.(m.)  images,  idols,  v.  io636- 38  1154  13515;  but  ni3*P  elsw.  pi.  t [•"•.?*?]  n.f. 
hurt,  injury  1473  Jb.  928,  sg.  Pr.  io10  1518,  so  doubtless  here  after  <S,  j$,  Aq., 
RV.,  and  most,  v.  133..  The  lack  of  agreement  between  n.f.  and  vb.  m.  still 
remains  difficult.  The  sf.  D_  cannot  refer  to  previous  context,  but  to  the  rel. 
clause  which  follows.  The  vb.  is  interpreted  by  S,  &  as  Hiph.,  and  so  the 
neglect  of  agreement  is  avoided,  and  this  is  to  be  preferred,  though  <&,  Aq., 
2,  0,  3  take  it  as  Qal.  —  nnN]  is  variously  interpreted:  (1)  by  J,  0  post 
tergum  as  Tnx  adv.  backwards,  v.  gi.  This  is  most  prob.  (2)  (5  /xerd  ravra 
iraxwav,  V  postea  acceleraverunt  "VW,  either  having  sf.  or  Vrss.  supplying  it, 
cf.  4918  5017  639.  (3)  J^,  Aq.  as  adj.  Aq.  refers  to  one's  neighbour.  But 
most  think  of  another  god  in  accordance  with  subsequent  context.  —  \  nnx 
adj.  another,  properly  one  coming  behind,  successors  4911,  aliens  1098,  nriN  oy 
i°513>  nD*  *™  Ex.  3414  (J),  nnx  Is.  42s,  so  Ps.  /&>  ($).  It  is  used  of  time 
nns  in  10918  Jo.  I8.  —  nno]  Qal  pf.  3  m.  i.p.;  J  ins  denom.  -inj  purchase 
price  of  wife  Gn.  3412  (J)  Ex.  2216  (E)  1  S.  1825,  so  vb.  acquire  by  purchase 
Ex.  2215  (E.)  But  there  is  no  evidence  of  such  a  generalisation  of  the  mng. 
as  is  necessary  if  that  is  to  be  used  here  with  De.,  Dr.  (2)  <J£,  3,  j$,  0,  2,  C 
take  it  as  Pi.  pf.  \  [tto]  vb.  Pi.  (a)  hasten  Gn.  186  Na.  26  Is.  4917.  It  is  not  used 
in  \p  unless  here  in  this  sense;  but  (b)  as  auxiliary  having  adv.  force,  sq.  perf. 
10613,  elsw.  imv.  »jjjr  "»?D  6918  1023  1437,  so  also  prob.  79s  sq.  impf.  (3)  Aq. 
ot  &\\ov  tKCLKuo-ev  implies  ^^r\  Hiph.  pf.  -no  act  bitterly  towards,  a  vb.  used 
nowhere  in  \f/  unless  here.  (4)  It  is  possible  to  think  of  such  a  transposition 
as  the  foregoing  and  then  rd.  ^Dn  Hiph.  pf.  "vc,  as  10620.  The  conception 
would  be  simila-  if  VIH  referred  to  another  god,  but  the  construction  would 
be  different,  and  so  condensed  as  to  be  necessarily  obscure.  This  is  the  view 
of  Gr.,  once  held  by  Ba.,  but  subsequently  abandoned.  (5)  Dy.,  followed  by 
Du.,  rds.  Tin  onns;  but  where  is  mm  used  for  worship  of  other  gods  ?  v.  (fi. 
We  must  choose  between  (2)  and  (4).  —  a?'9D)  T?£  ^1  Hiph.  impf.  1  p.  of 
resolution  in  classic  style  should  have  cohortative.  J  ^Dl  vb.  Qal  cog.  ace. 
pour  out  libation  Ex.  309  (P),  p  Ho.  9*,  Hiph.  same  cog.  ace.  Gn.  3514  (E) 
2  K.  1618  Nu.  287  (P),  so  prob.  here,  to  other  gods  Je.  718,  +  7  t.  Je.  The 
noun  %  IP).  onty  nere  $•  ©  crvvaydyw  t&s  cvvayuryas  clvtujv,  U  congregabo 
conventicula=  D^oDJ  r|DX  Qal  impf.  I  p.  p)DN  gather  together,  collect,  cf.  397, 
and  Niph.  ptc.  in  shortened  form,  as  ri3DJ  Is.  1315,  cf.  Gn.  49^  1  S.  1311,  inter- 


PSALM   XVI.  125 

preted  of  assemblages  in  accordance  with  nrps  NH.  3  and  a  were  easily  con- 
fused in  Egyptian  Aram,  script. — 0J9].  It  is  interpreted  by  RV.,  Dr.  as 
p  of  material,  consisting  of  blood.  Ba.  compares  Is.  57^  6511,  and  thinks  of 
drink  offerings  connected  with  the  sacrifice  of  children.  De.  thinks  of  the 
guilty  hands  of  the  offerer.  Moll,  and  Du.  refer  to  Is.  663  "  he  that  killeth  an 
ox  is  as  he  that  slayeth  a  man."  Kirk.,  "  their  libations  are  as  detestable  as 
though  they  were  composed  of  blood."  The  usage  of  DT3  favours  bloodshed 
and  not  drink  offerings  of  blood,  which  are  unknown  to  OT.  The  p  is  never 
used  of  material  in  connection  with  blood;  it  is  therefore,  in  the  common 
sense,  of  on  account  of,  because  of  bloodshed,  as  Hb.  28,  n.  For  this  mng.  of 
prep.  v. 511 126  10717.  —  ,n|5t,"Sy  DmDtf~n*»  n&x  S51]  phr.  a. A.  Nir  in  the  sense 
of  utter,  v.  ij3,  paraphrased  by  (3  fimjirdw,  U  memor,  so  j£,  3T.  The  sf.  may 
refer  to  gods,  in  accordance  with  Ex.  2313  (E),  if  we  interpret  nns*  of  foreign 
gods;  but  if  not,  it  must  refer  to  the  apostates,  in  accordance  with  Is.  6515. — 
5.  His]  v.  n6.  It  is  prob.  that  in  this  case  it  was  originally  ■•~je  my  portion, 
the  three  words  each  with  sf.  in  emph.  coordination.  %  p^n  n.m.  :  (1)  portion, 
acquired  possession,  of  Yahweh  as  the  possession  of  His  people  165  7326  11957 
1426;  (2)  chosen  portion,  in  bad  sense,  5018;  (3)  portion,  award  from  God, 
punishment  1714,  as  Is.  1714  Jb.  2029  2713.  —  T^n]  is  variously  explained.  It 
is  pointed  as  Hiph.  impf.  2  sg.  after  ms,  which  is  then  emph.,  but  without 
apparent  reason.  ^c>  is  not,  however,  used  in  OT.,  and  the  Arabic  stem  does 
not  sufficiently  explain  its  use  here.  <&  crv  e?  6  diroKadio-rCov  ttjp  Khr)povoixlav 
/xov  i/xot,  U  restilues  hereditatem  meam  mihi,  is  based  on  "h  *S*vj|  "ph,  which 
gives  the  missing  tone  of  the  tetrameter  line  and  a  form  which  is  known  and 
suits  the  context.  3  has  possessor  sortis  meae.  —  %  "|cn  vb.  Qal:  (1)  hold 
fast,  c.  ace.  Am.  I5- 8  as  here,  c.  3  Ps.  175  Is.  3315;  (2)  sustain,  subj.  God, 
c.  3  pers.  Pss.  4113  63s  Is.  4110  421.  The  conjectural  emendations  of  Ols. 
*pDW,  of  Hi.,  Bi.  TDH  are  not  so  suited  to  the  context  as  the  above.  —  ^^j] 
sf.  1  p.  —  \  S"vi\  n.m.  lot:  (1)  as  cast  over  garments  to  distribute  them  2219; 
(2)  as  portion  assigned  by  Yahweh  165,  espec.  the  land  of  the  righteous 
1 25s.  ^  of  the  original  has  fallen  out  by  haplog.  The  change  to  nrm  is  strik- 
ing and  out  of  harmony  with  context.  It  prob.  was  a  substitution  for  an 
original  mm. —  6.  op*;;]  defective  pi.  Jo'jnadj. :  (1)  delightful  1331  1353 
1471,  as  delightful  things  or  places  iff-11,  cf.  1414  2  S.  I25;  (2)  lovely, 
beautiful  Ps.  813  2  S.  231  Ct.  I16.  —  *\h]  also, yea, "introducing  emph.  a  new 
thought "  BZ>B.  —  r^m]  ace.  to  3,  E,  GesJ80?,  Ki.,  De.,  a  stronger  fern,  form 
for  usual  r£ni  (v.  2*).'  But  <g,  S,  Hu.3,  Ew.,  We.,  Ko.11^1)425,  Dr.  defectively 
written  >n^nj. —  rnog]  Qal  pf.  3  f.  lair  a.X.  in  Heb.;  in  Aram.  Dn.  424  62, 
be  agreeable,  acceptable,  beautiful ;  cf.  f  "1!>#  n.  beauty  Gn.  4921.  But  <g  Kpa- 
rla-Tr]  fxoi  =  ^3);  cf.  10311  1172.  <J|  gives  a  well-known  word,  a  usual  con- 
struction and  an  appropriate  meaning.  —  7.  "H"i>;]  Pi.  impf.  1  p.  resolution 
would  be  cohort,  form  in  classic  style.  Bless  Yahweh,  common  in  if/,  2612 
342  63s  I031-  «•».«.  22. 83  to4i-35  II5i8  I34i.2  I35i9.2o  1458.10,  D,nS»<  for  an 
original  mm  668  6827;  v.  313  for  other  uses  of  "pa. —  w]  Qal.  pf.  3  m.  i.p. 
sf.  1  pers.  X  Y'tl'    Vb.  Qal  advise,  counsel,  c.  ace.  pers.  167  sq.  inf.  625,  abs.  with 


1 26  PSALMS 

pjj,  secondary  subj.  32s.  Niph.  consult  together,  nm  7110  836.  Hithp.  sq.  Sy, 
conspire  against  $34.  —  n"^1?]  pi.  emph.  night  seasons,  better  dark  nights,  as 
pi.  abst.  intensive;  cf.  92s  1341.  —  ^D".]  Pi.  pf.  3  pi.  sf.  i.p.  ~\v\  v.  210, 
discipline,  correct,  as  9412  11818,  subj.  God.  —  8.  v^iir]  Pi.  pf.  1  s.  %  mtf  vb. 
Pi.  lay,  set  168  1 1930,  lay  upon  216  8920,  set  or  make  like  1834.  —  H|?*>]  in  front 
of,  before,  intellectually  and  morally  as  54s  8614,  v.  j6  105.  —  J  TDfi]  in  ^  only 
adv.  continually  2515  401-  69s*  718.6.14  7323  ^^  lo<\  I09i5. 19  ,^44. 109.  in. 
Ti  njj(s)  /6s  3818  508  515,  in  prayer  34s  7215;  TDn  now  3527  =  4017  =  705,  a 
favourite  term  of  Is.2  4916  4-  5  t.,  seldom  elsw.  apart  from  ritual,  Je.  67  Ho.  127 
L)t.  II12  4-  16  t  OT.,  common,  however,  in  P,  Ez.,  Ch.  for  the  perpetual  burnt 
offering.  —  9.  \jf\  therefore  "according  to  such  conditions,  that  being  so," 
BDK  200  t.  in  OT.,  i&  73s- 10  7821  119119,  v.  g  S\  A — aS  nrir]  same  phr. 
1053,  c.  ">3  33*21.  The  line  has  three  tones  unless  we  use  Makkeph,  which 
makes  rather  a  long  word  for  one  accent,  and  then  add  nNas  Sjm  to  complete 
the  tetrameter.  But  then  the  Str.  would  be  one  line  less  than  the  others. 
Du.  reduces  them  by  finding  a  gl.  of  one  line  in  each  Str.  We  may  easily 
complete  this  1.  after  ^21  by  adding  »a  for  nwa,  which  fell  out  by  haplog. 
of  o\ —  Si«]  i  consec.  Qal  impf.  Svi,  v.  211.  3  has  et  here  as  well  as  for  «]« 
of  next  line,  and  also  renders  by  future,  ignoring  the  )  consec.  It  is  the  only 
use  of  such  a  1  in  the  Ps.,  and  is,  indeed,  against  its  style.  Rd.,  therefore, 
?\P  i\h;  then  the  juss.  must  be  abandoned  for  the  indicative.  —  "T^r]  is  here 
used  for  the  inner  man,  as  f>  ||  vd:,  108'2  ||  aS,  3013  subj.  tDT,  579  subj.  mi?. 
We  should  add  also  mrra.  The  two  lines  have  been  condensed  into  one  by  a 
prosaic  copyist.  {•>£$,  n.m.  flesh  (1)  of  body,  (a)  of  animals  5013,  {b)  of 
man  27s  3s4-8  79s  1026  10924;  (2)  for  the  body  itself,  antith.  e»BJ  632  Is.  io18, 
Jb.  14-2,  antith.  aS  Pss.  i&  843  Pr.  1430,  subj.  trembling  Ps.  119120;  (3)  as 
frail  over  against  God  56s  7839;  (4)  -»jra  ■?£  all  flesh,  all  mankind  6f  13625 
14521  Je.  1212  2531  Ez.  2i4-  9- 10  Dt.  523.  —  npaS  \SV\]  v.  49,  f  phr.  Dt.  3312  Je.  23s 
3316;  cf.  Dt.  3328  Pr.  I33.  — 10.  *#pj]  my  soul,  vc)  is  usually  interpreted  as 
I  the  z'wwfr  being  of  man  as  distinguished  from  the  body,  3110.  <1D31  ^Di,  some- 
times conceived  as  resting  together  with  the  "tea  upon  a  common  substratum, 
,s%;  1312;  cf.  42s- 7,  and  especially  in  ^  as  in  need  of  deliverance  from  hwv 
/6l°  304  4916  8613  8949;  but  some  of  these  might  be  interpreted  of  another 
mng.  of  vol,  the  paraphrase  for  the  personal  pronoun,  me,  v.  j3. —  Sixr]  v.  W. 
—  I.?-?  «?]  Qal  impf.  2  m.  indie,  c.  neg.  pj  in  the  sense  of  permit,  c.  ace. 
+  infin.  Gn.  206  (E)  as  here,  or  ace.  4-  S  nomen.  Ps.  1324  Pr.  64.  —  TTPP] 
Kt.  pi.  is  scribal  interp.  of  ^7;Dn,  Qr.  and  Vrss.  sg.,  referring  to  an  individual 
pious  man,  v.  4I.  —  rnv]  the  Pit  in  Sheol  as  distinguished  from  Sheol  itself, 
v.  716,  and  not  another  name  for  Sheol,  or  the  abstract  dia<pdopdv  &,  corrup- 
tionem,  3,  corruption  or  destruction,  which  are  interpretations  of  the  name  of 
the  place.  — 11.  o»n  ms]  the  path  to  life.  It  might  imply  resurrection,  if  the 
Ps.  were  late  enough,  but  at  its  probable  date  it  implied  a  path  leading  to  the 
presence  of  God,  ||  yjB"nK;  a  joyous  state,  antith.  tt\z',  both  yet  conceived  as 
parts  of  the  more  comprehensive  Swtf. —  voir]  n.m.  fulness  1611  Dt.  23s25 
Ru.  218,  jjafcrS  Ex.  163  Lv.  2519  26s  Pr.  1325  Ps.  78*.  —  rrtrotf ]  pi.  nroft  v.  & 


PSALM   XVII.  127 

either  joy s,  or  abst.  pi.  gladness.  —  T.??~n?>']  2I?  M0"*  <S  A^™  T°v  Trpoauirov 
<rov,  in  association  with,  communion  with  the  divine  face  or  presence,  and  not 
ante  vultum  tunm  J,  a  weakened  explanation. 


PSALM   XVII.,  8  str.  35. 

Ps.  17  is  a  prayer  for  divine  interposition  in  behalf  of  the 
righteous  (v.1-2).  The  psalmist  has  been  tested  by  God  in  mind 
and  conduct,  and  approved  (v.*"4*) ;  he  has  kept  the  divine  ways 
and  avoided  wicked  deeds  (v.45-5),  therefore  he  invokes  God  with 
confidence  (v.6a).  He  prays  again  that  his  Saviour  may  show 
kindness  and  keep  him  as  the  pupil  of  the  eye  (v.66_8a);  that 
he  may  be  sheltered  from  his  greedy  and  arrogant  enemies 
(v.85-10),  who  surround  him  to  prey  upon  him  (v.11"12).  Again 
he  prays  for  the  divine  interposition  and  deliverance  by  the 
slaying  of  the  wicked  (v.13~14a) ;  that  penalty  may  be  visited  on 
them  to  the  third  generation,  but  that  he  himself  may  enjoy 
the  divine  presence  (v.145-15). 

r\  HEAR,  Yahweh  (a  righteous  man)  ;  attend  to  my  yell; 

0  give  ear  to  my  prayer,  which  is  without  lips  of  deceit ; 

Let  my  judgment  come  forth  from  Thy  presence,  that  mine  eyes  may  behold  it. 
TN  equity  Thou  hast  proved  my  mind;  Thou  hast  visited  me  by  night; 

Thou  hast  tested  me,  and  Thou  findest  no  evil  purpose  in  me;    my  mouth 
transgresseth  not. 

As  to  deeds  of  man,  (I  intend)  according  to  the  word  of  Thy  lips. 
T  ON  my  part  have  kept  from  the  ways  of  the  violent ; 

My  steps  hold  fast  to  Thy  tracks,  my  footsteps  slip  not ; 

1  invoke  Thee :  for  Thou  answerest  me,  'El. 
TNCLINE  Thine  ear  to  me,  hear  my  speech; 

Show  Thy  kind  deeds,  O  Saviour  from  those  who  rise  up  in  hostility; 

I  am  seeking  refuge  on  Thy  right  hand ;   keep  me  as  the  pupil,  the  daughter 
of  the  eye. 
J-JIDE  me  in  the  shadow  of  Thy  wings  from  the  wicked, 

Those  mine  enemies  that  assail  me,  with  greed  encompass  me. 

They  shut  up  their  gross  heart,  with  their  mouth  they  speak  arrogantly. 
(T^HEY  advance),  now  they  march  about,  they  fix  their  eyes; 

(They  purpose)  to  camp  in  the  land,  (they  maltreat)  as  a  lion  ; 

They  are  greedy  for  prey,  they  are  like  a  young  lion  lurking  in  secret  places. 
Q  RISE,  Yahweh,  confront  him,  cast  him  down  ; 

O  deliver  me  from  the  wicked,  destroy  with  Thy  sword ; 

May  they  be  slain  with  Thy  hand,  Yahweh ;  slain  from  the  world. 
J^ET  their  portion  be  during  life ;  their  belly  fill  Thou  with  Thy  stored-up  penalty 

May  their  sons  be  sated,  may  they  leave  their  residue  to  their  children  : 

But  as  for  me,  let  me  behold  Thy  face ;  let  me  be  satisfied  with  Thy  form. 


128  PSALMS 

Ps.  17  was  in  13,  but  not  in  any  of  the  subsequent  collections  until  \p.  It 
is  rightly  termed  a  nhuD,  prayer  (v.  Intr.  §  1).  This  probably  is  original, 
because  the  greater  portion  of  Pss.  of  $3  were  prayers,  and  there  could  have 
been  no  reason  why  the  editor  of  ©,  or  any  subsequent  editor,  should  have 
singled  out  this  Ps.  as  a  prayer,  rather  than  a  multitude  of  others.  The  Ps. 
resembles  Ps.  16  in  words  and  phrases :  \J"?.?£;  v.8  =  161;  communion  with  God 
at  night  v.3=  167;  the  use  of  *?n  in  prayer  v.6  =  161;  the  vb.  rpn  v.5  =  165; 
the  reference  to  the  hand  of  God  as  protecting  and  defending  v.7- 14  =  168; 
the  contrasted  portions  of  the  poet  and  the  wicked  v.14-15  =  162-6;  the  longing 
for  the  divine  presence  v.]5  =  1611.  All  this  favours  a  similar  situation,  if  not 
the  same  author.  The  use  of  nSn  v.14  is  the  same  as  that  of  49-,  cf.  Is.  3811, 
although  the  phr.  of  the  latter  and  the  conception  are  different.  There  is  a 
reference  in  the  use  of  D"jd  and  njinn  of  God,  v.15  to  Nu.  128  (E).  The 
visitation  of  penalty  on  the  third  generation  v.14  is  based  on  the  Ten  Words 
Ex.  205  =  Dt.  59.  The  conception  of  righteousness  v.4-5  is  that  of  D,  and  prior 
to  P.  And  yet  the  conception  of  truthfulness  v.1  and  the  testing  the  mind 
v.3,  show  the  higher  ethical  conception  of  the  Persian  period.  The  phr. 
iDn  nVon  v.7  =  44,  yoi2  Sxa  v.8  =  36s  57'2  63s,  cf.  615  914  (all  post-exilic 
Pss.)  Ru.  21'2,  implies  the  existence  of  the  temple  and  probably  the  cherubic 
throne.  The  pupil  of  the  eye  v.8  =  Dt.  3210.  The  Ps.  must  belong  to  the 
Persian  period  subsequent  to  the  Restoration  and  prior  to  the  reform  of  Ezra, 
a  time  of  greater  peril  than  that  of  Ps.  16,  and  therefore  later  than  Zerub- 
babel.  The  Ps.  was  originally  the  prayer  of  an  individual.  It  has  been 
generalised  and  made  into  a  congregational  prayer. 

Part  I.  has  three  pentameter  tristichs,  the  first  of  these  a  peti- 
tion in  two  syn.  lines  followed  by  a  synth.  line.  — 1-2.  O  hear  || 
a  fiend  ||  give  ear],  the  usual  terms  for  importunate  prayer,  v.  44  5*  3. 

—  {a  righteous  man)],  so  J  in  accordance  with  v.3"*,  more  prob- 
able than  "  my  righteousness,"  (3,  U,  or  simply  "  righteousness." 
%  Dr.,  or  inexactly  "the  right"  EV\,  "righteous  cause"  JPSV. 

—  my  yell],  shrill,  piercing  cry  for  help,  ||  my  prayer,  as  612  %%''. — 
without  lips  of  deceit].  The  lips  which  utter  the  prayer  are  sin- 
cere, entirely  truthful.  —  My  judgment],  either  my  just  cause,  or 
judgment  in  my  favour.  —  come  forth  from  Thy  presence],  from  the 
judgment  throne  of  Yahweh  in  heaven,  cf.  95.  —  that  mine  eyes 
may  behold  it].  He  desires  a  visible  manifestation  from  God  that 
He  has  vindicated  him.  —  ///  equity]  properly  goes  with  the  next 
line  as  qualifying  the  divine  proving.  To  make  it  an  object  of 
behold,  with  ^  and  Vrss.  destroys  the  measure  of  both  lines. — 
3-4a.  The  second  tristich  is  composed  of  three  lines  essentially 
syn. :  yet  there  is  synth.  in  part,  in  the  second  line,  and  in  greater 


PSALM   XVII.  129 

degree  in  the  third.  —  Thou  hast  proved  ||  hast  tested],  v.  710  127. 
This  has  been  by  a  personal  visitation.  Yahweh  has  not  remained 
afar  off  on  His  throne  in  heaven ;  but  has  come  down  in  spiritual 
presence  to  the  bed  of  the  psalmist.  —  visited  by  night],  during  the 
quiet  hours,  when  he  was  alone  by  himself,  and  so  most  open  to 
inspection ;  and  especially  so,  as  the  inspection  had  to  do  not  only 
with  acts  done  during  the  day,  the  usual  time  of  activity,  but  still 
more  searchingly  with  the  mind,  which  often  is  most  active  while 
the  body  is  at  rest. —  Thou  findest  no  evil  purpose  in  me],  as  io4 
2610  119150.  There  was  no  evil  in  the  mind  after  the  most  search- 
ing examination.  —  My  mouth  transgresseth  not]  .  This  statement, 
intermediate  between  the  purpose  of  the  mind  and  the  deeds  of 
man,  external  actions,  supplements  the  previous  clause  and  is  still 
connected  with  the  test  by  night.  It  probably  refers  to  private, 
secret  utterances,  rather  than  words  spoken  publicly  to  other  per- 
sons. And  so,  while  deeds  of  men  are  mentioned,  that  is  ordinary 
human  actions,  yet  these  are  deeds  not  as  done,  but  as  intended, 
purposed  ;  for  so  we  should  translate,  inserting  in  the  text  the  vb. 
(/  intend).  This  insertion  removes  the  difficulty  of  the  verse 
and  explains  the  antith.  between  "  deeds  of  man  "  and  according 
to  word  of  Thy  lips.  The  intent  of  the  psalmist  was  that  his 
deeds  should  be  according  to  the  word  which  came  forth  from 
the  lips  of  God.  Having  set  forth  the  righteousness  of  his  mind, 
as  attested  by  divine  inspection,  he  now  turns  to  a  justification  of 
his  conduct. — 4fc-6a.  The  third  tristich  is  composed  of  an  anti- 
thetical couplet  followed  by  a  synth.  line  returning  to  v.la,  the 
ground  of  assurance  in  prayer  having  been  given.  —  I  on  my  part], 
emph.  personal  asseveration,  on  the  negative  side,  have  kept  from 
the  ways  of  the  violent],  the  deeds  of  those  who  commit  robbery  or 
murder,  or  both.  On  the  positive  side,  My  steps  hold  fast  to  Thy 
tracks],  those  prescribed  by  God  in  the  Deuteronomic  laws. — My 
footsteps  slip  not].  The  context  suggests  the  complement  of  the 
previous  clause ;  the  steps  hold  fast  on  the  positive  side  and  do 
not  slip  from  the  divine  tracks  on  the  other.  Elsewhere  the  phrase 
is  used  for  the  firm  standing,  the  security  of  the  righteous  under 
the  divine  protection,  v.  io6.  If  we  follow  that  meaning  here,  we 
have  an  expression  of  confidence  in  accordance  with  v.6a. 

Part  II.  has  three  pentameter  tristichs,  setting  forth  the  rela- 


130  PSALMS 

tion  of  the  poet  to  his  enemies,  antith.  to  the  previous  part, 
setting  forth  his  relation  to  his  God.  The  first  tristich  is  petition 
||  v.1-2,  an  introductory  line  and  a  syn.  couplet  synth.  thereto. — 
6bSa.  Show  Thy  kind  deeds],  cf.  44,  literally  "  make  them  mar- 
vellous," or  "wonderful,"  in  accordance  with  v.26;  let  them  be 
visible  in  acts  of  vindication  of  the  righteous.  —  O  Saviour],  title 
of  Yahweh  as  one  whose  character  and  habit  it  is  to  save  His 
people  from  their  enemies;  especially  characteristic  of  Is.2 — / 
am  seeking  refuge].  By  an  unfortunate  transposition  of  the 
original  text  it  has  been  attached  as  an  object  to  the  ptc,  forcing 
the  rendering  with  verbal  force  as  ptc.  absolute  "  savest,"  and  then 
as  a  general  truth  applying  to  all  persons  seeking  refuge,  without 
specification  of  the  place  of  refuge.  This  also  destroys  the 
measure  of  the  two  lines  and  makes  their  interpretation  difficult. 
Attaching  it  to,  on  Thy  right  hand],  we  get  the  place  of  refuge, 
recover  the  measures,  and  find  an  easy  and  natural  explanation 
in  accordance  with  good  usage.  The  right  hand  of  God  is  often 
the  instrument  of  judgment  and  blessing,  but  also  the  place  of 
safety,  as  16811.  The  resemblance  of  Pss.  1 6  to  17  in  so  many 
other  respects  favours  the  same  meaning  of  right  hand  of  God 
here.  This  also  is  a  proper  basis  for  the  closer  and  affectionate 
care  indicated  in  the  phr. :  Keep  me  as  the  pupil  of  the  eye],  as 
Dt.  3210  Pr.  72 1|  the  daughter  of  the  eye,  a  Hebraism  as  La.  218,  ex- 
pressing a  filial  relation,  implying  affectionate  care.  The  second 
tristich  has  also  an  introductory  line  with  a  synonymous  couplet 
synthetic  to  it.  —  86-10.  Hide  me  in  the  shadow  of  Thy  wings], 
a  favourite  conception  of  poets  of  the  Restoration  36s  572  6$H, 
cf.  6 15  9 14  Ru.  212.  It  is  usually  referred  to  the  care  of  the 
mother  bird  for  her  young  j  not,  however,  the  hen,  Mt.  23s7,  which 
is  not  used  in  OT.,  but  rather  the  eagle,  cf.  Dt.  3211,  though  the 
working  out  of  the  simile  is  different.  It  probably,  however, 
refers  to  the  cherubic  wings  of  the  most  Holy  Place  of  the  temple 
in  accord  with  the  frequent  conception  that  the  temple  itself  is 
a  sure  refuge  for  the  people  of  God,  involving  the  idea  that  the 
protecting  cherubic  wings  extended  their  influence  to  the  holy 
temple  and  the  holy  city  and  its  inhabitants. — from  the  wicked]. 
These  are,  as  the  context  shows,  not  wicked  Israelites,  but  wicked 
nations,  who  oppress  and   maltreat   the  Israelites,  cf.   94-6-18. — 


tsalm  xvii.  131 

Mine  enemies  that  assail  me].  They  assault,  act  violently.  —  with 
greed],  cf.  1079.  They  are  not  only  violent,  but  greedy  for  their 
prey.  —  encompass  me],  surround  so  as  to  make  escape  impossible, 
v.  v.11. —  They  shut  up  their  gross  heart~\.  They  are  not  only 
greedy,  but  pitiless.  They  are  so  greedy  that  they  have  become 
fat  and  gross ;  their  midriff,  the  seat  of  feelings,  has  become  ex- 
ceedingly insensible.  "  They  have  closed  it  against  every  influence 
for  good  and  all  sympathy "  Kirk.  It  is  necessary  in  accordance 
with  English  usage  to  substitute  heart  for  midriff.  —  with  their 
mouth],  antith.  with  the  mouth  of  the  poet,  v.36.  —  they  speak  ar- 
rogantly'], v.  io2  for  the  same  kind  of  enemies  and  a  similar  situa- 
tion.— 11-12.  The  third  tristich  describes  the  action  of  these 
enemies  in  three  progressive  pentameters —  {They  advance)],  as 
J,  resuming  the  thought  of  v.9.  This  is  much  better  suited  to  the 
context  than  "  our  steps  "  MT.,  EV8.,  which  is  not  well  sustained, 
and  is  difficult  to  construct  and  understand  in  this  context.  The 
enemies  advance  to  the  attack. — now],  graphic  description. — 
they  march  about],  the  people  of  God,  probably  the  holy  city, 
as  5511.  —  they  fix  their  eyes],  watching  intently,  so  that  no  move- 
ment of  Israel  may  escape  them,  showing  their  greed  v.96.  —  (They 
purpose)  to  camp  in  the  land].  This  is  a  most  difficult  clause  in 
the  original,  and  is  variously  explained  in  Vrss.  and  commentaries. 
The  difficulty  may  be  removed  by  finding  the  verb,  missing  in  this 
line,  to  complete  the  measure.  The  infinitive  that  follows  then 
becomes  intelligible,  having  the  ordinary  meaning,  "pitch,"  which 
is  used  without  its  usual  object  "  tent,"  syn.  with  English  "  en- 
camp." We  then  have  the  enemy  purposing  to  encamp  in  the 
land,  and  so  besiege  the  people,  cf.  Jb.  1912,  and  a  very  natural 
and  appropriate  progress  in  the  activity  of  the  enemy.  The 
various  renderings  :  "  turning  their  eyes  down  to  the  ground " 
PBV.,  "  bowing  down  to  the  earth  "  AV.,  "  to  cast  us  down  to  the 
earth"  RV.,  "to  spread  out  in  the  land"  JPSV.,  all  depending 
on  MT.,  show  how  impracticable  it  is  to  get  a  good  sense  on 
that  basis.  —  they  maltreat  as  a  lion].  This  refers  to  the  acts 
of  violence  of  a  besieging  army  ravaging  for  prey,  seizing  it 
with  violence  and  abusing  it  without  pity.  —  They  are  greedy 
for  prey],  reiterating  v.96.  —  like  a  young  lion  lurking  in  secret 
places].     They  lie   in  ambush  and  lurk  for  their  prey,  to  fall 


132  PSALMS 

on  it  unawares.      This  situation  resembles  very  much  that  of 
Ps.  io8"10. 

Part  III.  has  two  pentameter  tristichs,  a  petition  that  Yahweh 
may  by  theophanic  interposition  destroy  the  wicked  enemies  and 
let  the  people  see  His  presence.  —  13-14a.  The  first  tristich  is 
syn. —  O  rise,  Yahweh],  as  frequent  in  such  prayers  38  f  920  io12. 
—  confront  Aim'],  in  hostility,  cf.  i86-19.  —  cast  him  down],  over- 
throw and  prostrate  in  death,  as  1840.  —  O  deliver  me  from  the 
wicked],  the  enemies,  cf.  v.9a.  —  destroy  with  Thy  sword].  Yah- 
weh interposes  as  a  warrior,  and  so  uses  His  sword,  as  713  (cf.  351"3 
for  God's  use  of  other  warlike  weapons).  It  is  necessary,  however, 
to  supply  a  missing  verb  to  complete  the  measure  of  line.  This 
was  probably  "  destroy."  The  omission  lies  back  of  Jfy  and  Vrss., 
several  of  which  take  "  sword  "  as  in  relative  clause,  "  who  is  Thy 
sword "  PBV.,  AV.  The  idea,  though  a  good  one  after  the 
analogy  of  Is.  io5,  is  yet  inappropriate  to  the  context,  and  calls 
attention  needlessly  from  the  main  thought  and  its  ready  advance 
to  a  climax.  RV.,  JPSV.  rightfully  render  "by  Thy  sword."  — 
May  they  be  slain  by  Thy  hand].  This  rendering  is  in  accord  with 
the  context,  the  use  of  the  sword  by  Yahweh,  and  with  a  strict  inter- 
pretation of  the  unpointed  Hebrew  text,  and  is  favoured  by  ancient 
Vrss.  The  MT.  is  pointed  so  as  to  give  the  rendering  "  men," 
both  here  and  in  the  next  clause,  "  from  men  of  Thy  hand  — 
from  the  men  "  PBV.,  "  from  men  which  are  Thy  hand "  AV., 
"  from  men  by  Thy  hand  "  RV.,  JPSV.,  none  of  which  are  satis- 
fying. — from  the  world],  away  from  the  world,  so  as  no  longer  to 
live  in  the  world,  v.  4Q2,  cf.  Is.  3811.  "  O  Lord,  destroy  them 
from  off  the  earth,  which  they  inhabit  "  Aug.  The  usual  rendering 
"from  the  evil  world"  PBV.,  "men  of  the  world"  AV.,  RV., 
implies  an  antith.  between  the  world  as  evil  and  the  righteous 
Israelite,  which  while  in  accord  with  the  NT.,  Jn.  1519,  is  not  in 
accord  with  the  OT.  religion  and  has  no  justification  whatever 
in  OT.  usage.  This  supposed  antith.  has  occasioned  a  general 
misinterpretation  of  the  subsequent  context,  as  if  it  contrasted 
the  earthly  joys  of  the  wicked  with  the  heavenly  joys  of  the 
righteous  j  which  also  is  a  later  Biblical  conception,  but  not 
justified  at  such  a  date  as  that  of  our  Ps.  The  idea  can  only 
be  gained  by  awkward  adjustments  and  renderings.     This  clos- 


PSALM   XVII.  133 

ing  tristich  is  indeed  a  continuation  of  the  petition  for  divine 
interposition,  and  contrasts  the  visitation  upon  the  wicked  in 
a  synth.  couplet  with  the  vindication  of  the  righteous  in  the 
closing  line,  and  so  is  harmonious  with  the  petition  with  which 
the  Ps.  opens.  — 146-15.  Let  their  portion  be  during  life]  ;  that 
is,  the  portion  allotted  to  them  as  penalty,  as  Is.  1714  Jb.  2029  2713, 
and  not  a  good  portion  enjoyed  by  them  in  this  life,  but  no  longer 
to  be  theirs.  —  their  belly  fill  Thou  with  Thy  stored-up  penally], 
as  Jb.  2 119;  and  not  treasures  of  wealth,  in  accordance  with  other 
interpretations.  This  penalty  they  are  to  partake  of  to  the  full 
extent  of  their  capacity.  Their  belly  is  to  be  filled  with  it,  and 
yet  it  will  not  be  exhausted.  It  passes  over  to  their  sons.  —  may 
their  sons  be  sated],  may  they  also  be  so  filled  that  they  cannot 
partake  of  any  more;  and  still  further  in  the  climax — may  they 
leave  their  residue  to  their  children].  There  still  remains  to  the 
sons  a  residue  of  this  penalty  that  they  cannot  appropriate.  This 
they  transmit  as  an  inheritance  of  woe  to  their  children ;  and  so 
the  ancient  law  is  fulfilled,  in  a  visiting  of  the  iniquity  of  the 
fathers  upon  the  children  unto  the  third  and  fourth  generation, 
Ex.  205  =  Dt.  59.  In  antith.  with  this  dreadful  punishment  of  the 
enemies,  the  poet  prays  for  himself — let  me  behold  Thy  face],  un- 
folding the  thought  of  v.2.  A  later  editor,  doubtless  influenced 
by  v.1,  inserts  "  in  righteousness  "  as  a  qualification ;  thereby  de- 
stroying the  measure,  making  the  first  half  of  this  line  of  four 
tones  instead  of  three.  —  let  me  be  satisfied  with  Thy  form],  the 
form  of  God;  that  is,  as  seen  in  the  theophanic  vindication, 
based  on  the  conception  of  the  privilege  of  Moses,  Nu.  128.  The 
form  of  God  gratifies  and  satisfies  the  psalmist,  while  the  wicked 
are  sated  with  the  divine  penalty.  This  conception  of  beholding 
the  face  and  form  of  God,  gave  difficulty  to  later  editors  ;  and  so 
(3,  U,  paraphrase  "  when  Thy  glory  appears,"  thus  interpreting  it 
correctly  as  theophanic  in  character.  In  ^  a  scribe  inserted 
"when  I  awake  "  so  EV8.,  which  he  probably  meant  to  be  inter- 
preted, as  awakening  from  the  sleep  of  death,  when  the  vision  of 
the  face  and  form  of  God  was  conceived  as  possible  to  the  highly 
privileged  righteous.  But  the  vb.  without  suffix  leaves  other  in- 
terpretations open,  such  as  awakening  from  the  sleep  of  anxiety 
and  sorrow,  or  awakening  in  the  morning  from  a  night  of  anxiety 


134  PSALMS 

and  petition.  The  insertions  of  (3  ana  $  make  the  last  half  of 
the  line  into  three  tones  instead  of  the  needed  two,  and  thus 
destroy  the  measure  of  the  closing  part  of  the  Ps.  as  well  as  the 
return  to  the  conception  of  the  petition  with  which  it  began. 

1.  |rgj  as  obj.  of  hearing.  »p-«  @,  F  is  novel  and  dub.,  rd.  with  3  justum 
pm,  v.  /6  42.  —  >pp-]  Sf.  i  pers.  J  nf\  n.f. :  (i)  jubilation,  antith  oa  30°, 
njran  126''6,  ||  mm  10722,  ptrfr  10543,  pynto  1262,  n|-i  "yp  42s  47s  u81&; 
(2)  ;r//  for  help  10644  119I69  i427,  ||  n^n  if  6l»  883.  — Ns?]  a.x.  y>  uniess 
possibly  10*  ace.  <S,  3;  but  Je.  2213  Is.  55I  +  in  the  sense  without  (Ps.  44I3 
ns3  is  different,  kS  belonging  to  DfiBto).—  2.  T^?]  emph.  compound  prep, 
with  sf.  2  m.  /hw  /;<?/t?r*\  J  *JfiSo  :  (i)  at  the  presence  of  God  97s-  6  1 14"-  7; 
(2)  away  from  5113,  cf.  use  with  maj  Je.  1617  3186  33I8  ls.  48^;  (2)  pro- 
ceeding from  Ps.  772.  —  iBsirc]  also  emph.,  my  just  cause  or  judgment  in  my 
favour,  v.  /S.  —  hvJ  juss.  continuing  petition,  as  Dr.,  Ba.  The  sentence 
coming  forth  from  the  decision  of  the  judge,  cf.  Hb.  I4-4  for  Qal  and  Ps.  376 
Je.  5 110,  Hiph.  —  rrrg]  emph.  <g  ^  prob.  both  interpretations  of  noun 
without  sf.  —  ^nrjn]  final  clause,  subjunctive  not  juss.  —  one^r]  makes  the 
1.  too  long  and  is  needed  in  next  1.  If  with  mn,  it  must  be  adv.  rightly,  a 
mng.  elsw.  Ct.  I4.  In  \J/  it  is  used  in  the  ethical  sense  of  equity  in  govern- 
ment, v.  <f>.  —  3.  K|pn]  statement  of  fact,  result  of  divine  inspection  as  Dr., 
rather  than  conditional  clause  without  usual  particles  as  Ba.,  Du. —  'nbr] 
Qal  pf.  1  m.  Ko.S"'""' p- 124  Ges>  §67«      j  CCT  vb#  de7)is£i  in  bad  sense  as  '^u 

3712,  cf.  Je.  4'-8.  Ba.  regards  it  as  inf.  cstr.  Ew.i238.  But  ©,  F,  Aq.,  2,  3 
and  most  comm.  rd.  >DQ)  or  »Pi3T,  better  o  no?  for  measure  as  &,  Grimme.  <S 
properly  attaches  it  to  nxo  as  obj.  J  npr  n.f.  evil  device,  purpose  elsw.  2610 
119150,  cf.  ri^tn  M-^pr^3]  the  two  Makkephs  enable  one  to  distribute 
the  two  accents  better  for  euphony.  >d  is  prob.  subj.  and  not  obj.  This  is 
not  a  final  clause,  as  Dr.,  but  statement  of  fact,  as  Ba.,  Kirk.  -ia;  is  then  in 
the  sense  of  transgress,  abs.  only  here,  but  c.  ace.  1486  Nu.  1441  Jos.  711-  15 
Dt.  I72  +  .  — 4.  o-nj  rn^pS]  the  prep.  S  has  the  force  of  as  for,  as  regards 
Dr.  This  is  to  be  preferred  to  the  temporal  force  at,  Ba.,  cf.  32s.  %  [nSos] 
n.f.:  (1)  work,  pi.  deeds  of  men  if,  of  Yahweh  285;  (2)  wages  in  punish- 
ment 10920.  It  is  a  favourite  word  of  Is.2,  of  actions  of  wicked  65%  of  wages 
4010  494  618  6211,  infrequent  elsw.  Dy.,  Du.  rd.  dMk  I  keep  silent.  The  1.  is 
defective;  a  word  is  missing;  rd.  o^k  q-<x,  the  latter  omitted  by  haplog.  D"U< 
is  contr.  of  np-iM  Pi.  impf.  1  pers.  Jnrn  Qal  be  like,  resemble  sq.  s  897  1027 
1444;  Pi.  liken,  imagine,  think  c.  ace.  4810,  obj.  clause  5021,  here  intend  as 
Nu«  33™  (J)  Ju.  206  Is.  io7.  This  gives  an  appropriate  sense.  <g  by  its  dif- 
ferent division  of  verses  increases  the  difficulty.  —  P"»mR]  v.  89.  &  prefixes 
jr.  This  may  be  explanatory;  and  yet  it  gives  us  the  missing  tone,  removes 
a  difficult  phrase,  and  enables  us  to  explain  after  Jos.  618,  cf.  Dt.  49  take  heed, 
beware  of  —  f  P"^]  n.m.  violent  one,  robber  or  murderer  elsw.  Is.  35s  Je.  711 
Ez.  722  1810  Dn.  1V4.  — 5.   -pn]  Qal  inf.  abs.  i?n  v.  itf.     <S,  %  2,  9,  3,  E 


PSALM   XVII.  135 

have  imv.  —  T£^?JJ?p]  f.  pi.  sf.  2  m.,  cf.  Pr.  521  from  sg.  —  J  Sjyc]  n.  track 
in  fig.  sense  of  snares  of  wicked  1406,  course  of  life  23s,  prescribed  by  Yahweh 
176,  those  traversed  by  Him  6512.  —  6.  :|JT»J-Bn]  vb.  imv.  Hiph.  TO  c.  ace. 
JTK;  phr.  elsw.  of  man  45"  49s  781,  of  God'  if  313  712  861  883  1023  1162.— 
7.  T"Dn  nSon]  v.  41*. — JPttftD]  should  be  connected  with  D^DipppD  (with  two 
tones).  —  cpn]  rd.  ntrn  and  attach  to  r#W*.  It  has  been  transposed  by 
txt.  err.  These  two  words  then  belong  to  the  next  line  in  v.8  to  make  both 
lines  of  normal  measure.  —  8.  pfc^N]  n.m.  diminutive  of  t^x  pupil  of  eye,  elsw. 
Dt.  3210  Pr.  72;  midst  of  night  Pr.  7°,  cf.  2O20(?).  —  ?:>7'n?]  syn.  term  elsw. 
La.  218.  —  Sxa]  emph.  %  h\  n.m. :  (1)  shadow,  shade,  protection  from  sun,  fig. 
8011,  of  Yahweh  911  1215,  -pfljo  "*  iy8  36s  57s  63s,  cf.  914  Ru.  212,  where  «]jd 
alone  is  used;  (2)  shadow  as  symbol  of  the  transitoriness  of  life  1444,  cf. 
10212  10923.  —  9.  D^Bh  ^8p]  depends  on  previous  context  to  complete  its 
line.  —  it]  rel.  as  g16.  —  ^-nr]  Qal  pf.  3  m.  pi.  sf.  I  sg.  J-nu;:  act  violently 
towards  iy9  ;  lay  waste  916  1378.  —  IPDJa]  with  greed  Ba.,  Dr.  tffij  in  this 
sense  J  as  seat  of  appetite :  (a)  hunger  7818  1079,  with  some  form  of  j?3B"  63° 
1079  Is.  5611  Je.  5019  Ez.  719,  with  other  terms  Pss.  10615  10718;  (b)  thirst  for 
God  422- 3  63s  1436;  (<:)  more  general  greed  iy9,  cf.  1075,  v.  103. — is"1^] 
Hiph.  impf.  3  pi.  J*|pj  Hiph.:  (1)  £»  round  abo tit  a  city  4813;  (2)  sur- 
round, encompass  c.  S;'  pers.  iy9  8818,  c.  ace.  pers.  2217.  — 10.  "*D3Vn]  emph. 
%  2^n  fat  (1)  of  human  body,  of  midriff,  v.  RS.  Religion  of  Semites  360;  so 
here,  unreceptive  mind;  sf.  archaic  for  c?  for  better  rhythm,  also  H970and 
prob.  73';  (2)  of  beasts  as  rich  food  63s ;  (3)  choicest,  best  of  wheat  81 1T 
14714,  cf.  Dt.  3214  Is.  340.  —  in-'s]  ns  c.  archaic  sf.  emph.  v.x.s —  $rwna]  n.f. : 
(1)  swelling  of  sea  8910;  (2)  majesty  of  God  931;  (3)  pride,  haughtiness, 
arrogance  iy10,  possibly  7420,  v.  nwa  io2.  — 11.  u*Ti#M~Jn.  sf.  1  pi.  so  %.  t  [mrs*] 
n.f.  step,  going  elsw.  Jb.  317.  It  is  improb.  that  it  is  different  from  nrs 
v.5;  the  pointing  here  might  be  either  txt.  err.  or  a  conceit  of  the  punctua- 
tors, but  is  prob.  a  relict  of  tradition  that  it  was  Pi.  of  vb.  Vrss.  have  vb.,  <S 
£kP&\\ovt£s  /xe,  U projicientes  me  =  ^Bhj,3  incedentes,  S.  naKapl^ovris  ^ce,  so 
£.  'jntta  in  both  mngs.  prob.  original  in  sense  of  3,  as  Cap.  —  >ji32D]  Kt. ,  6, 
3,  &  uuaD  Qr.  The  sfs.  with  both  vbs.  in  all  texts  and  Vrss.  are  interpreta- 
tions and  were  not  original.  J  a 3D  vb.  Qal  turn  about,  of  Jordan  -vimx1?  back 
Ii43-6;  c.  impf.  almost  auxil.  as  21$  7i21(?);  (2)  march  or  walk  about  a 
city  4813  so  here;  (3)  surround,  encompass,  fig.  c.  ace.  186  2213-  n  49s  8818 
ugio.  11. 11. 12  Ct  double  ace.  1093.  Polel:  (1)  encompass  c.  ace,  subj.  divine 
nDn  3210,  cf.  v.7(dub>;  (2)  assemble  round  c.  ace.  pers.  7s;  (3)  march  or  go 
about  a  place  5511  597- 15,  an  altar  26s. — Dfpjpr]  emph.  construe  with  lri'Bh 
graphic  impf,  cf.  4814  6211  (c.  ^). —  p«a  PUmS]  belongs  to  the  next  v.  to 
make  measures  correct.  The  inf.  cstr.  naj  with  S  is  emph.  dependent  on 
some  vb.  given  or  understood,  PiBJ  c.  y\X2  v.6,  cf.  Jb.  1529  c.  fMth.  It  is 
prob.  that  in  both  TOj  is  contr.  of  Snx  naj  pitched  the  tent  Gn.  128  2625  3521 
(J)  3319  (E).  To  pitch  the  tent,  camp  in  the  land,  suits  the  context  and 
is  especially  appropriate  after  previous  vbs.  as  I  have  interpreted  them. — 
12.   ^d-i]  n.  sf.  3  sg.     f  [r?"]]  «•*•  likeness,  so  3,  E,  Aq.,  &,  but  <&  vTrt\a(36u 


13^  PSALMS 

fxe,  F  susceperunt  me  =  ywi  Cap.  ncn  Pi.  think,  purpose  as  v.4.  A  word  is 
missing  in  the  line.  If  now  we  separate  U1  from  (i)ot  we  get  the  missing 
word  :  then  id-j  is  the  principal  vb.  upon  which  maj1?  depends,  coming  at  close 
of  clause,  as  frequent  in  this  Ps.  To  pitch  {their  tents)  in  the  land  they  in- 
tended or  thought,  v.  v.4.  Then  ir  is  Qal  pf.  3  pi.,  prob.  for  irn  Hiph.  %  fir 
vb.  Qal  o//r«j  1234  Qr.,  suppress  74s  (?).  Hiph.  ^m,  maltreat,  as  Is.  49^ 
Je.  228  Ez.  187.  — 1  Dp-]  txt.  err.  for  i£D^  by  transposition  of  \  f  rp3  vb.  Qal 
long for  c.  S  //**  Jb.  1415,  Niph.  same  Ps.  84s  Gn.  3180,  abs.  Zp.  21  (?).— 
Jvps  n.m.  young  lion  17™  10421,  ||  hrvff  91^,  of  bloodthirsty  enemies  34" 
3517  587-  — 13-  n97E]  Pi-  imv.  cohort.  J  B"»p  vb.  Pi.  denom. :  (1)  meet,  con- 
front c.  ace.  i86-i9  77^;  come  to  meet  as  friend  214  59"  (?)  798, ->  8814, 
face  of  Yahweh  952,  cf.  8915;  go  before,  in  front  of  6826 ;  be  beforehand I19147 '; 
anticipate,  forestall  119I48.  — Viynan]  Hiph.  imv.  cohort,  with  sf.  3  m.  %  >"P 
vb.  Qal  bow  down  in  worship  2230  72s  95s,  of  enemies  in  death  209.  f  Hiph! 
cause  to  bow  down  in  death  1713  78^,  c.  rm  1840  (=  2  S.  2240)  Ju.  n86  (in 
grief).  —  ne?»]  Pi.  imv.  cohort.  J  [oSfl]  vb.  Pi.  deliver  esp.  of  Yahweh,  c. 
ace.  pers.  22*- *  312  3?40  7,a  824  91I4,  c.  fD/hww  iyO  ^"-^i  71*,  ptc.  c.  sfs. 
188  4018  706  1442;  elsw.  in  this  sense  Mi.  614.  —  »tfai]  me>  v.j^  —  -;v<\  coll. 
as  cf,  v.  iK  —  ri^n]  ace.  instrument  with  sf.  7»  &  has  and  from  the 
sword;  but  ©,  3  take  it  as  relative  clause,  who  is  Thy  sivord.  The  line  is 
defective;  insert  3^n  Qal  imv.  as  Je.  5c21-27  omitted  by  haplog.  — 14.  D'HCD 
&V]  emph.,  so  3  has  <z  otWj  manus  tuae  interp.  as  prep.  p.  \  [no]  ///#&, 
maw.  itpa  >-?  w^«  0/  number  Gn.  3480  (J)  Dt.  427  Je.  44s8  Ps.  10512, 
men,  simply  if*- 14,  KW  *nc  264,  Jb.  u",  ps  T3  2215  niD  'D  1919.  The  testi- 
mony of  3  is  vitiated  by  the  rendering  qui  morlui  sunt  in  the  second  in- 
stance; 2  Airb  vtKpGiv,  so  &,  Aq.  d?rd  Tedv-qKbruv,  point  to  DV7§D  />0W  /V&<? 
dead.  @  d?r6  ixOp&v,  U  inimicis  for  the  first,  and  for  the  second  dXlyuv 
<SSAR,  U  paucis.  But  <gB  has  in  the  second  case  diroXtwv,  so  Aug.  It  is 
better  to  read  in  both  instances  Hoph.  ptc.  of  vb.  D^PDIC,  as  2  K.  n2  defec- 
tively written  as  D'DDD   may  they  be  slain  with    Thy  hand.     \  nc  vb.  Qal : 

(1)  die  of  natural  causes,  man  416  4911  827  1 1817,  no  dead  man  3113,  d>PD  886-  u 
11517,  csi;  \id  1433  =  La.  36,  D'PD  Tiar  Ps.  ioo28.  (For  nw  91  4815  v.  Intr.884.) 
Polel  kill,  put  to  death,  c.  ace.  3422  10916  Ju.  954  1  S.  1751  Je.  2017.  Hiph.  kill, 
put  to  death  Ps.  37s2  591  Ez.  1319,  fish  Ps.  10529.  Hoph.  be  put  to  death  would 
then  be  here  and  2  K.  u2+.— f-^n]  n.m.  duration:  (1)  of  life  39s  8948 
Jb.  1 117,  cf.  Ps.  395;  (2)  of  world  Ps.  17U  492,  cf.  1 14  Is.  3811.  iSnn  out  of  the 
world,  removed  from  it  by  death. —  Hfps]  a.X.  Kt.  n.(m.)  treasure,  but  Qr. 
1«M  Qal  ptc.  pass,  treasured,  in  either  case  stored-up  penalty  as  Jb.  2119  v.  /0s. 

—  irvjni]  1  conseq.  pf.  Hiph.  3  pi.  J  mj  Qal  r^/,  j*///*  down,  sq.  S;«  1258,  cf. 
Gn.  84  2  S.  21 10  Is.  72.     Hiph. :  (1)  let  remain,  leave,  bequeath  ijU,  cf.  Ec.  218; 

(2)  abandon  c.  S  pers.  Ps.  119121;  (3)  permit  c.  ace.  pers.  10514.  — 15.  >j*m 
emph.  — P"?M]  emph.  w.  v.1.     It  is  a  gl.  of  qualification,  making  line  too  long. 

—  r,i'?v'2]  Hiph.  inf.  cstr.  a  temporal,  pp  p.  j«,  here  sleep  of  death  as  Is.  2619 
Dn.  122.  It  is  a  gl.  of  interpretation.  <g  has  a  different  gl.  iv  ry  depdijvat. — 
t  f\HCn]  n.f.  :  (1)  likeness,  representation  of  idols  Ex.  204  =  Dt.  5s,  cf.  41G- 23- ,26; 


PSALM    XVIII.  137 

(2)  form,  semblance  of  Yahweh  here,  so  Aq,,  S  as  Nu.  128,  cf.  Dt.  412- 15,  of 
apparition  at  night  Jb.  416.  (3  interprets  Tr\v  86£au  crov,  37 gloria  tua,  6  8e£idv 
<rov  =  rjrp1  <£  ^"Ji^M  all  these  due  to  a  shrinking  from  the  thought  of  d./orm 
of  God.  Aqt>  2,  3,  QL  all  regard  rmcn  as  obj.  of  p2V  and  the  parall.  demands 
it. 

PSALM  XVIIL,  2  pts.  of  3  strs.  143. 

Ps.  18,  originally  an  ode  of  victory  of  David  over  his  enemies, 
was  subsequently  adapted  to  public  worship.  I.  David  praises 
Yahweh  as  his  Saviour  from  a  deadly  peril  described  under  the 
metaphor  of  drowning.  He  heard  his  cry  for  help  (v.3-7)  ;  His 
anger  caused  earth  and  heaven  to  quake;  He  descended  upon  a 
cherubic  chariot  in  a  storm  cloud  (v.8-13).  Thunder,  lightning, 
and  earthquake  were  His  weapons,  and  He  delivered  David  from 
his  peril  and  became  his  stay  (v.1420).  II.  David  praises  God 
as  his  lamp  and  shield,  who  girded  him  with  strength  for  war 
(v.29-35),  giving  him  a  broad  position  on  which  to  pursue  his 
enemies  and  exterminate  them  (v.3743)  ;  delivered  him  from  the 
strivings  of  his  own  people,  made  him  head  of  nations,  and 
doeth  kindness  to  the  anointed  seed  of  David  forever  (v.44-45"-47'49-51). 
The  ode  was  generalised  for  public  worship  by  several  changes 
in  the  body  of  the  song;  but  especially  (1)  by  prefixing  an 
assertion  of  love  to  Yahweh  (v.2)  ;  (2)  by  inserting  two  glosses, 
the  first  teaching  that  God  rewards  according  to  righteousness 
(v.21-24)  ;  the  second,  that  God  acts  towards  men  just  as  they  act 
towards  others,  especially  in  saving  the  humble  and  humiliating 
the  lofty  (v.25-28)  ;  (3)  a  reference  to  nations  cringing,  in  the 
spirit  of  later  times  (v.456-46)  ;  and  (4)  a  resolution  of  liturgical 
praise  (v.50). 

Part  I. 

TWTY  crag  and  my  fortress  and  my  deliverer, 
My  God,  my  Rock  in  whom  I  seek  refuge, 
My  shield  and  horn  of  my  salvation,  my  high  tower, 
(My  Saviour,  from  violence  Thou  savest  me). 
Worthy  to  be  praised  I  proclaim  Yahweh, 
Since  from  mine  enemies  I  am  saved. 
The  (breakers)  of  death  encompassed  me, 
And  torrents  of  Belial  fell  upon  me ; 
Cords  of  Sheol  came  round  me, 
fcnares  of  Death  came  to  meet  me : 


138  PSALMS 

In  my  distress  I  called  upon  Yahweh, 

And  unto  my  God  cried  lor  help ; 

And  He  heard  from  His  palace  my  voice, 

And  my  cry  for  help  (came)  before  Him  in  His  eais. 
THEN  the  earth  swayed  and  quaked, 

And  the  foundations  of  (the  heavens)  trembled, 

And  tossed  to  and  fro  because  He  burned  with  anger; 

Smoke  went  up  in  His  nostril, 

And  fire  from  His  mouth  devoured; 

Coals  were  kindled  from  Him. 

Then  He  bowed  the  heavens  and  came  down, 

Thick  darkness  under  His  feet; 

And  He  rode  upon  the  cherub  and  flew, 

And  swooped  down  upon  wings  of  wind ; 

And  put  darkness  round  about  Him, 

A  covering  (of)  darkness  of  waters, 

Thick  clouds  of  the  skies  without  brightness ; 

Before  Him  passed  His  thick  clouds. 
THEN  Yahweh  thundered  (from)  heaven, 

And  Elyon  gave  forth  His  voice; 

And  sent  forth  His  arrows  and  scattered  them, 

And  (flashed)  flashes  and  made  them  rumble; 

And  the  channels  of  the  (sea)  appeared, 

(And)  the  foundations  of  the  world  were  laid  bare. 

He  sends  from  on  high,  He  takes  me, 

He  draws  me  out  of  many  waters ; 

He  delivers  me  from  my  strong  enemy, 

And  from  those  hating  me ;  for  they  were  too  strong  for  vne: 

Who  came  to  meet  me  in  the  day  of  my  calamity. 

And  so  Yahweh  became  a  stay  to  me, 

And  led  me  forth  into  a  wide  place, 

And  rescued  me,  because  He  took  pleasure  in  me. 


Part  II. 

T70R  Thou  art  my  lamp,  Yahweh, 

My  God  who  lightens  my  darkness : 

For  in  Thee  I  run  up  to  a  troop, 

And  in  my  God  I  leap  a  wall. 

The  'El  whose  way  is  perfect, 

A  shield  is  He  to  the  one  seeking  refuge  in  Him. 

For  who  is  a  God  (like)  Yahweh  ? 

And  who  is  a  Rock  (like)  our  God? 

The  'El  who  girdeth  me  with  strength, 

And  made  my  way  perfect ; 

Who  setteth  my  feet  like  hinds, 

And  upon  high  places  made  me  hold  my  ground 

Who  teacheth  my  hands  for  war, 

And  maketh  mine  arms  bronze. 


PSALM   XVIII.  139 

'THOU  broadenest  my  steps  under  me, 

And  my  limbs  do  not  slip; 

I  pursue  mine  enemies  and  I  overtake  them ; 

And  I  return  not  until  I  have  finished  them. 

(And)  I  smote  them  down  so  that  they  could  not  rise, 

(And)  they  fell  under  my  feet. 

And  Thou  girdest  me  with  strength  for  war, 

Thou  causeth  them  that  rise  up  against  me  to  bow  down  under  me ; 

And  mine  enemies  Thou  madest  give  the  back  to  me, 

And  them  that  hate  me  I  exterminated. 

And  they  cry  for  help,  but  there  is  no  saviour, 

Unto  Yahweh,  but  He  doth  not  answer  them ; 

And  I  beat  them  small  as  dust  of  the  earth, 

And  as  clay  of  the  streets  pulverised  them. 
THOU  deliverest  me  from  the  strivings  of  (my)  people; 

Thou  settest  me  to  be  head  of  nations ; 

A  people  I  knew  not  serve  me, 

At  the  hearing  of  the  ear  shew  themselves  obedient  to  me. 

Liveth  and  blessed  is  my  Rock, 

And  the  God  of  my  salvation  is  exalted. 

The  'El  who  giveth  to  me  deeds  of  vengeance, 

And  who  bringeth  down  peoples  under  me, 

And  who  bringeth  me  forth  from  mine  enemies, 

And  lifteth  me  up  above  them  that  rise  up  against  me, 

From  the  man  of  violence  rescueth  me ; 

Who  magnifieth  acts  of  salvation  to  His  king, 

And  doeth  kindness  to  His  anointed, 

To  David  and  to  his  seed  forever. 

The  Ps.  is  described  in  the  title  as  nm^n  the  song,  just  as  other  odes  of 
victory  over  enemies  bear  this  title,  Ex.  151  (ode  of  victory  over  the 
Egyptians);  Dt.  3130  (Moses'  ode  of  the  triumph  of  Yahweh);  cf.  Ju.  51 
(Deborah's  ode,  where  vb.  "vtf  is  used).  The  original  form  of  the  title  is 
given  in  2  S.  221,  "  And  David  spake  unto  Yahweh  the  words  of  this  song 
in  the  day  that  Yahweh  delivered  him  from  the  hand  of  all  his  enemies  and 
from  the  hand  of  Saul."  This  has  been  adopted  by  an  editor  of  the  Ps.,  only 
changing  the  second  *p  to  the  familiar  T  for  richness  of  expression,  and 
removing  the  name  of  David  into  the  principal  clause,  making  the  rest  a 
relative  clause  and  prefixing  t^n  inS  mm  nay1'.  This  raises  the  question 
whether  miS  here  has  the  same  meaning  as  in  the  other  titles  of  Pss.,  all  the 
more  that  the  term  servant  of  Yahweh  precedes  it.  The  titles  both  represent 
David  as  the  speaker  in  the  ode,  and  probably  also  designate  him  as  the 
author.  It  is  doubtful,  therefore,  whether  the  ode  was  in  B.  It  was  in  Q2cl, 
and  was  probably  taken  from  2  S.  22.  The  text  of  2  S.  has  many  variations 
from  that  of  the  Ps.  It  lacks  its  Aramaisms :  Dm  v.1,  -15:1  v.26,  jnn  v.46,  "Di  v.48. 
It  also  uses  many  ">  consec.  impfs.  as  historical  aorist,  which  in  the  Ps.  are 
simply  impf.,  with  more  general  reference  to  present  or  future,  v.7c- 12- 39a"5. 
In  other  respects  the  text  of  2  S.  is  more  archaic.     The  ode,  in  both  forms 


I40  PSALMS 

of  the  text,  gives  many  evidences  of  late  date,  (i)  There  are  late  words 
>J?  oy  v.28,  nuy  v.366  (but  2  S.  r\y;),  nsj  »«  v.456-  46a;   but  these  are  all  in  glosses. 

(2)  The  ode  is  cited  (a)  Ps.  n61^*  in  the  text  of  Ps.,  niD  ton  v.5,  and 
»nan«  ||  qomx  v.2;  (b)  Ps.  1441"7  in  the  text  of  2  S.,  TVnn  1442  =  in:i  2  S.  2248, 
not  nrni  Ps.  1848;  ^  vshot:  1442  =  2  S.  222  =  vhon  Ps.  183;  (c)  Hb.  319  cites  v.84, 
only  changing  vbs.  nw,  TDJfn  into  more  common  ones,  D^fe%  Tp"nn;  (</)  Pr.  305 
cites  v.31,  giving  an  earlier  form  of  text,  ^  D^DvV?  for  w  a^Dinn  SaS,  and 
niSs  mss  for  "»  mDN;  (<?)  Is.  556  cites  v.44  in  two  lines  in  fuller  and  more 
comprehensive  style,  using  also  mj  for  o;\      The  Ps.  is,  therefore,  preexilic. 

(3)  The  ode  cites  {a)  Mi.  717  in  v.46;  the  texts  of  Ps.  and  2  S.  vary  as  to  the 
vb.,  both  best  explained  by  the  vb.  of  Micah  ?J1  as  the  original,  but  this  is  a 
gloss,  (b)  2  S.  712-1C  in  v.61.  (c)  It  is  not  easy  to  determine  whether  v.31  or 
Dt.  324  is  the  original.  The  evidence  of  citation  favours  a  preex.  date  for 
the  ode.  (4)  There  are  many  late  doctrinal  conceptions  in  the  ode  : 
(a)  The  affectionate  love  of  Yahweh,  v.2,  is  post-Deuteronomic ;  but  it  is  not 
in  text  of  2  S.,  and  was  a  later  addition  to  the  ode.  (£)  The  doctrine  of  the 
absoluteness  of  Yahweh  as  the  only  God  is  stated,  v.3-',  in  terms  of  Is.2;  but 
this  statement  is  incongruous  to  the  context,  which  favours  the  assertion  of  the 
incomparableness  of  God,  as  in  other  early  poetry.  This  couplet  has  probably 
been  adapted  to  later  conceptions.  (V)  The  legal  righteousness  and  its 
exact  retribution  of  v.21-24  with  the  terms  D'O-n  1D»  v.22",  'D  "vid  v.236,  charac- 
teristic of  D.2,  m  -o  v.216,  T3  Jfvh  v.226,  nv>n  v.236  still  later.  But  this  passage 
is  evidently  a  gl.  from  its  smoothness,  calmness,  and  didactic  character,  as 
compared  with  the  rapid,  passionate  movement  in  the  ode.  This  gloss  comes 
from  the  period  of  the  reign  of  Levitical  law,  and  states  the  doctrine  ques- 
tioned in  the  Book  of  Job.  (</)  The  gnomic  couplets,  v.25-28,  are  still  later, 
implying  the  supremacy  of  Hebrew  wisdom,  and  are  ethical  as  compared  with 
the  legal  character  of  the  previous  context.  They  begin  with  a  line  similar  to 
v.21°.  (*)  The  cringing  of  foreign  nations,  v.456-46,  suits  the  conceptions  of 
postex.  Judaism,  and  is  favoured  by  Is.2-  3.  This  is  a  gl.  also.  (/)  The 
liturgical  formula,  v.50,  is  similar  to  corresponding  liturgical  additions  to  other 
Pss.  This  is  a  gl.  (5)  On  the  other  hand,  («)  the  conception  of  the  cherubic 
chariot  in  the  storm  cloud,  v.11,  is  more  primitive  than  the  cherubic  chariot 
of  Ez.  1.  (6)  The  theophany  to  decide  battles  is  a  primitive  conception  in 
the  ancient  odes,  Ex.  15,  Ju.  5;  cf.  Jos.  io1214 ;  as  with  Moses,  Joshua, 
Deborah,  so  also  with  David.  (c)  The  high  places  as  battle  fields  is  also 
an  expression  of  the  old  songs,  2  S.  i™-2*  Dt.  3213  sj29.  If  the  ode  in  its 
present  form,  in  text  either  of  2  S.  or  of  Ps.,  is  regarded  as  a  unit,  one  com- 
position without  interpolation,  there  can  be  no  escape  from  the  opinion  that 
it  was  composed  at  the  earliest  in  the  late  Persian  period,  more  probably  in 
the  early  Greek  period.  But  if  we  remove  the  glosses,  which  have  adapted 
an  ode  of  victory  of  David  to  later  religious  uses,  the  ode  stands  out  in 
simple  grandeur  as  fitting  appropriately  to  the  historical  experience  of  David, 
whether  he  wrote  it  or  another  wrote  it  for  him  by  historic  imagination, 
entering  into  the  experience  of  the  heroic  king.     After  removing  the  glosses 


PSALM   XVIII.  141 

there  is  nothing  that  bars  the  way  to  his  authorship.  The  Ps.,  with  the  glosses 
removed,  is  divided  into  two  parts,  each  part  of  three  fourteen-lined  tri- 
meters; the  first  part  sets  forth  his  deliverance  by  theophany  from  peril  of 
death,  the  second  part  his  strengthening  for  war  by  his  God  and  his  victory 
over  all  his  enemies.  The  two  chief  glosses,  the  legal  gloss,  v.21"24,  and  the 
ethical  gloss,  v.25-28,  are  inserted  between  the  two  parts.  Remove  them,  and 
the  unity  and  harmony  of  the  ode  appear.  The  other  minor  glosses  are  easy 
to  distinguish.  Their  removal  improves  the  poetic  conception  and  movement 
of  the  poem.  There  are  very  few  departures  from  the  trimeter  measure,  and 
these  are  clearly  due  to  textual  errors. 


An  editor,  wishing  to  adapt  the  ancient  ode  to  congregational 
use,  in  view  of  the  entire  thought  which  follows,  prefixes  the 
exclamation  /  love  Thee,  Yahweh,  my  strength].  This  line  is  not 
in  the  text  of  2  S.,  taking  the  place  of  its  v.3c,  which  was  inten- 
tionally omitted  from  Ps.  The  words  for  love  and  strength  are  Ara- 
maisms,  and  the  conception  of  loving  Yahweh  is  post-Deuteronomic. 

Pt.  I.,  Str.  I.  The  Str.  is  composed  of  six  trimeters,  followed 
by  eight.  3.  Four  syn.  lines  heap  up  terms  to  emphasise  David's 
God  as  his  Saviour  from  an  enemy  in  war.  —  my  crag  and  my 
fortress ,  my  high  tower],  a  place  of  refuge  inaccessible  to  an 
enemy,  too  strong  for  him.  —  My  God  and  my  Rock  are  divine 
names,  Rock  being  an  ancient  term  for  God,  also  v.32-47  Dt.  324-31-37. 
—  My  shield].  God  is  a  warrior  with  a  shield  covering  David's 
body.  —  horn  of  salvation].  God  is  like  a  great  bull  guarding 
him  with  his  horns ;  cf.  Gn.  4Q24.  The  syn.  my  deliverer,  in  whotn 
I  seek  refuge,  attain  their  climax  in  my  Saviour,  Thou  savest  me. 
One  word,  from  violence,  or  possibly  in  the  earliest  txt.  of  the 
Vs.,  from  the  man  of  violence,  cf.  v.49,  is  the  only  indication  of  the 
peril  in  this  part  of  the  Str.  A  personal  enemy  who  sought  to 
use  violence  upon  him  and  put  him  to  death,  is  the  reason  of 
his  seeking  refuge  in  God.  This  situation  aptly  suits  that  of  David 
when  pursued  in  the  wilderness  of  Judah  by  the  violent  Saul. 
4.  A  synth.  distich,  synthetic  to  the  tetrastich  which  precedes,  in 
the  first  line  proclaims  Yahweh  as  the  one  worthy  to  be  praised], 
a  summing  up  of  all  the  titles  given  to  Him,  v.3 ;  and  in  the 
second  line  gives  the  reason  for  it. — Since  from  mine  enemies  I 
am  saved].  The  man  of  violence  was  accompanied  by  a  number 
of  enemies.  —  5-7.   Two  tetrastichs,  the  first,  v.5-6,  describes  the 


142  PSALMS 

peril  of  death,  the  second,  v.7,  the  cry  for  help  and  its  answer. 
The  peril  of  death  is  graphically  described  in  four  syn.  lines. 
David  conceives  of  himself  as  in  a  rushing  stream,  like  the  rapids 
of  the  Jordan  or  the  Kishon,  which  is  hurrying  him  on  to  death 
(cf.  Pss.  326  42s  69s).  These  are  the  agents  of  Death.  Death 
has  its  synonym  Belial  because  of  the  destruction  and  ruin  in- 
volved in  it,  and  Sheol,  the  ordinary  name  for  the  place  of  the 
dead.  David  is,  as  it  were,  in  the  stream,  rushing  on  to  death. 
He  says,  breakers,  agitated  waves,  breaking  on  me,  encompassed 
me  on  every  side,  torrents  fell  upon  me,  attacking  me  as  lines 
of  an  army  to  destroy  me.  And  under  the  surface  of  the  stream, 
cords  ca?ne  round  me,  the  waters  seemed  like  cords  binding  my 
limbs  fast  so  that  I  could  not  move  them  ;  snares  came  to  tneet  me, 
to  ensnare  me  like  an  animal,  draw  me  down  so  that  I  could  not 
escape.  —  7.  In  this  deadly  peril  he  cries  for  help  to  Yahweh  in 
1  syn.  couplet,  and  the  answer  is  stated  in  another  syn.  couplet.  — 
from  His  palace],  in  heaven,  where  Yahweh  was  enthroned  ;  some- 
times conceived  as  a  heavenly  temple,  where  He  is  worshipped 
by  heavenly  beings ;  but  here  as  a  palace  because  royal  help  is 
given,  rather  than  response  to  worship. 

Str.  II.  The  salvation  of  David  from  his  peril  of  death  was 
through  a  theophany.  —  8-9.  This  is  first  described  in  two  tri- 
meter tristichs,  the  first  of  syn.  lines  picturing  the  heaven  and 
earth  in  agitation.  Then  the  earth  swayed  and  quaked  ||  and  the 
foundations  of  the  heavens  trembled].  The  heavens  share  in 
the  agitation  as  in  subsequent  context  and  in  usage  in  connection 
with  theophanies;  see  Is.  139-1013  Jo.  415-16.  So  2  S.,  but  the  Ps. 
"mountains"  limits  agitation  to  earth. —  Tossed  to  and  fro], 
both  earth  and  heaven,  because  He  burned  with  anger,  in  behalf 
of  the  one  who  sought  refuge  in  Him  against  his  enemies.  The 
second  tristich  is  composed  of  two  syn.  and  one  synth.  line,  the 
former  describing  the  anger ;  He  breathed  hard  and  rapidly  and 
His  breath  like  smoke  went  up  in  His  nostril,  and  so  hot  was  it 
that  it  appeared  like  a  flame  of  f  re  from  His  mouth,  and  (like 
a  flame),  devoured  whatever  came  in  its  way.  The  last  line  in 
synthesis  represents  that  coals  we7-e  kindled]  ;  whatever  the  fiery 
breath  of  His  anger  reached  became  coals,  were  kindled,  and 
burned  like  coals  from  Him,  that  is,  from  the  breath  that  issued 


PSALM   XVIII.  143 

from  Him.  — 10-13.  The  theophany  itself  is  described  in  two 
tetrastichs ;  in  the  first  as  a  coming  down  of  God  from  heaven  to 
earth.  — 10.  He  bowed  the  heavens  and  came  dozen'].  God,  en- 
throned above  the  physical  heavens,  the  blue  expanse,  bends  them 
when  He  would  descend  in  theophany.  He  comes  down  on 
them.  So  Ex.  2410,  the  elders  of  Israel  "  saw  the  God  of  Israel ; 
and  there  was  under  His  feet,  as  it  were,  a  work  of  bright  sapphire, 
and  as  it  were  the  very  heaven  for  brightness."  The  very  heaven, 
its  sapphire-blue  expanse,  was  the  base  on  which  the  feet  of  the 
theophanic  God  stood.  Here,  however,  under  His  feet  was  thick 
darkness,  because  the  theophany  was  in  a  storm  of  wrath ;  there 
it  was  in  the  bright  sunshine  of  favour  to  establish  a  covenant  with 
His  people.  So  Solomon,  in  the  snatch  of  an  ancient  poem  pre- 
served from  the  book  of  Yashar  (according  to  0),  says,  "  Yahweh 
dwelt  in  thick  darkness,"  1  K.  812  =  2  Ch.  61 ;  cf.  Ps.  97s  and  the 
cloud  of  the  theophany  at  Horeb,  Ex.  2018  (E),  Dt.  411  522.— 
11.  And  rode  upon  the  cherub].  The  cherub,  coll.  sg.  for  usual 
pi.  cherubim,  is  conceived  as  the  living  chariot  upon  which  God 
rides  when  He  descends  from  heaven  to  earth.  So  Ez.  i4~28  9s 
10  1122,  describe  four  cherubim  inseparably  attached  to  the  living 
chariot  of  Yahweh ;  and  1  Ch.  2818  connects  the  cherubic  chariot 
with  the  cherubim  of  the  Holy  of  Holies  of  the  temple.  They 
were  the  guards  of  Eden,  Gn.  324  (J),  and  of  the  tabernacle  and 
temple,  in  which  two  of  them  with  outstretched  wings  sustained 
the  base  of  the  divine  throne.  They  always  have  wings.  The 
conception  of  the  Ps.  is  a  primitive  one,  but  harmonious  with  the 
other  representations.  —  And  flew~\.  The  cherubim  constitute  a 
winged  chariot.  —  And  swooped  down  upon  wings  ofwind~\.  The 
wings  of  wind  may  be  conceived  as  wings  which  the  wind  has,  in 
which  case  wind  and  cherub  seem  to  be  synonymous,  and  we  may 
think  of  Ps.  io4,V4.  But  the  thick  cloud  of  Ps.  1043  appears  in 
1813  as  "thick  clouds  of  the  skies,"  and  the  cherubim  are  the 
chariot  here  in  a  different  sense  from  the  thick  clouds  there. 
The  conception  here  is  that  heaven,  thick  darkness,  cherub,  wings 
of  wind,  are  all  under  the  feet  of  God,  all  constitute  the  platform  on 
which  He  descends  to  earth.  The  cherubim  are  the  living  beings 
of  the  theophany  as  in  other  passages  mentioned,  and  there  is  no 
sufficient  reason  to  identify  them  with  the  thick   storm  cloud. 


144  PSALMS 

The  second  tetrastich,  12-13,  in  three  syn.  lines  describes  what 
was  round  about  God  in  His  descent,  as  the  previous  lines  what 
was  under  His  feet.  The  texts  of  Ps.  and  2  S.  differ  greatly  here, 
and  it  is  difficult  to  find  the  original  text  and  interpret  it.  —  God 
put  darkness  round  about  Him],  enveloped  Himself  in  darkness 
when  He  descended  ||  a  covering  of  darkness  of  waters'],  a  dark 
mass  of  waters  was  the  covering ;  He  was  bringing  with  Him  a 
great  storm  cloud  heavily  heaped  up  with  waters,  ||  thick  clouds 
of  the  skies  without  brightness'].  The  Str.  concludes  with  a  line 
stating  what  preceded  Him  —  before  Him  passed  His  thick  clouds. 
Theophanies  in  storm  for  salvation  in  battle  are  reported  for 
Israel  under  Moses  at  the  crossing  of  the  Red  Sea,  Ex.  1419-25 
151"18 ;  Joshua  at  Bethhoron,  Jos.  io11;  Barak  and  Deborah  at  the 
Kishon,  Ju.  520"21 ;  and  so  also  for  David  against  the  Philistines,  for 
2  S.  520,  "Yahweh  hath  broken  forth  upon  mine  enemies  before 
me,  like  the  breaking  forth  of  waters,"  implies  the  breaking  forth 
of  a  storm  ;  524,  "  when  thou  hearest  the  sound  of  marching  in 
the  tops  of  the  mulberry  trees,"  the  onward  march  of  Yahweh 
in  a  storm  manifested  first  in  the  tops  of  the  trees. 

Str.  III.  14-16.  The  theophany  is  still  further  described  as  a 
storm  in  a  syn.  tetrastich  and  a  syn.  couplet  synth.  thereto.  The 
approach  of  Yahweh  in  the  storm  has  been  described  in  the  previ- 
ous Str.:  now  the  storm  bursts  forth. — Yahweh  thundered  from 
heaven  (so  2  S.  better  than  "  in  heaven  "  of  Ps.)  II  and  Elyon  gave 
forth  His  voice],  the  sound  of  thunder  as  Ps.  29s.  —  And  sent  forth 
His  arrows].  The  thunderbolts  are  compared  with  arrows  shot  forth 
from  a  bow  ||  flashed  flashes],  so  1446,  citing  this  passage,  prefer- 
able to  Ps.,  whose  text  was  corrupted  into  "many"  flashes.  The 
resulting  clause,  and  scattered  them,  is  usually  referred  to  the 
enemy  ;  but  the  enemy  has  not  been  mentioned  since  v.4  and 
does  not  appear  again  till  v.18,  so  the  reference  is  here  premature. 
It  is  rather  the  arrows  which  are  scattered,  so  many  are  the 
thunderbolts  in  this  great  storm.  —  made  them  rumble],  the  long 
reverberating  rumbling  of  the  thunder  which  accompanies  the 
flashes  of  lightning,  all  representing  a  terrible  thunder-storm.  The 
result  of  this  terrific  storm  is  described  in  the  closing  syn.  couplet. 
—  And  the  channels  of  the  (sea)]  2  S.  better  than  the  weaker 
"  waters  "  of  Ps.  —  appeared ;  ||  (and)  the  foundations  of  the  world 


PSALM  XVIII.  145 

were  laid  bare'].  This  is  a  return  to  the  thought  of  the  earth- 
quake as  preceding  the  storm,  and  now  renewed  during  the  storm. 
A  later  editor  added  a  gloss  corresponding  with  v.9c,  only  stronger  : 
because  of  Thy  rebuke,  Yahweh,  because  of  the  breathing  of  the 
breath  of  Thy  nostrils.  — 17-19.  The  second  section  of  the  Str. 
is  composed  of  a  couplet  and  two  triplets.  The  couplet  con- 
tinues the  description  of  the  theophany  and  gives  the  result  of  it. 
He  sends  from  on  high,  He  takes  me  ||  He  draws  me  out  of  many 
waters],  that  is,  the  waters  described  in  v.5.  —  The  first  triplet  of 
syn.  lines  then  explains  the  imagery.  He  delivers  me  from  my 
strong  enemy,  ||  from  those  hating  me  ;  for  they  were  too  strong  for 
me  ||  who  came  to  meet  me  in  the  day  of  my  calamity],  the  same 
as  the  enemies  and  man  of  violence  of  v.3-4.  —  The  last  triplet  is 
also  syn.  —  And  so  Yahweh  became  a  stay  to  me],  a  firm  prop  and 
support  referring  back  in  correspondence  of  thought  to  v.30. — 
and  led  me  forth  into  a  wide  place],  giving  breadth  and  freedom 
of  action  without  peril,  and  so  antith.  to  his  seeking  refuge  on  a  crag 
and  in  a  fortress  and  high  tower  v.3a- c.  —  and  rescued  me,  because 
He  took  pleasure  in  me],  the  climax  resuming  the  thought  of  v.36. 
Thus  this  part  of  the  Ps.  reaches  a  good  conclusion,  returning  on 
itself,  as  is  frequent  in  Hebrew  poetry. 

21-24.  An  entirely  new  conception  now  appears  which  is  ex- 
pressed in  four  syn.  couplets.  These  set  forth  the  doctrine  of  the 
reward  of  righteousness,  and  especially  of  legal  righteousness,  a 
doctrine  which  did  not  originate  till  after  the  Deuteronomic  Law 
and  which  did  not  attain  its  height  till  after  the  giving  of  the 
priestly  Law.  It  is  doubtless  a  gloss  from  the  Persian  period.  It 
has  nothing  in  keeping  with  the  previous  thought  of  the  Ps.  The 
original  Ps.  is  hot  with  passion ;  this  section  is  calm  and  placid. 

Yahweh  rewards  me  according  to  my  righteousness, 
According  to  the  cleanness  of  my  hands  returns  to  me ; 
Because  I  have  kept  the  ways  of  Yahweh, 
And  have  not  acted  wickedly  (in  departing)  from  my  God. 
For  all  His  judgments  are  before  me, 
And  His  statutes  I  did  not  depart  from  them  ; 
And  I  was  perfect  towards  Him, 
And  kept  myself  from  mine  iniquity. 

21.  Yahweh  rewards  me  ||  returns  to  me],  exact  retribution, 
according  to  my  righteousness  ||  according  to  the  cleanness  of  my 


146  PSALMS 

hands],  not  using  the  hands  for  unclean  purposes.  This  seems 
to  imply  not  Levitical  purity  or  purity  from  bribery,  which 
never  are  expressed  in  this  way  ;  but,  in  accordance  with  Jb.  930 
2230,  innocence  from  unrighteousness  and  so  ||  "righteousness."  — 
22.  The  ways  of  Yahweh],  ways  for  ways  commanded  Dt.  86  io12 
1 122  199  2617  289  3016  Jos.  225.  —  23.  For  all  His  judgments],  legal 
decisions  in  law  codes  ||  and  His  statutes],  f.  pi.  usage  of  code  of 
H.  —  depart  fro ?n],  Deuteronomic  expression  Dt.  912  -f  7  t. — 
24.  And  I  was  perfect  towards  Him  and  kept  myself  from  mine 
iniquity].  This  is  given  as  a  single  pentameter  line.  It  may  be 
arranged  as  two  trimeters  by  separating  the  preposition  from  its 
noun ;  but  it  was  probably  not  so  intended  by  the  glossator. 
These  verses  can  hardly  be  earlier  than  the  later  Deuteronomic 
writers. 

25-28.  This  section  constitutes  another  and  still  later  gloss, 
gnomic  in  character,  from  the  period  of  Hebrew  Wisdom,  and  so 
probably  as  late  as  the  Greek  period.  They  begin  with  a  couplet 
which  is  essentially  the  same  as  v.21.  The  retribution  in  the  fol- 
lowing couplets  is  ethical  rather  than  legal. 

And  Yahweh  returned  me  according  to  my  righteousness, 
According  to  the  cleanness  of  my  hands  before  His  eyes. 
With  the  pious  Thou  shewest  Thyself  kind ; 
With  the  perfect  Thou  shewest  Thyself  perfect ; 
With  the  clean  Thou  shewest  Thyself  clean ; 
But  with  the  crooked  thou  shewest  Thyself  crooked : 
For  Thou  savest  humble  folk ; 
But  (Thine)  eyes  are  (against)  the  lofty. 

26.  With  the  pious  Thou  shewest  Thyself  kind  \  with  the  perfect 
Thou  shewest  Thyself  perfect].  The  pious  are  those  who  are 
devoted  to  God  and  His  law  of  kindness ;  and  who  are  also  com- 
plete, entire  in  their  devotion  to  Him,  and  are  so  without  blame. 
To  such  God  is  kind  and  perfect  in  His  dealings.  —  27.  With  the 
clean  Thou  shewest  Thyself  clean  in  antith.  with  but  with  the 
crooked  (cf.  Pr.  22s)  Thou  shewest  Thyself  crooked.— 28.  For 
Thou  savest  humble  folk].  The  antith.  compels  the  meaning 
"humble,"  elsw.  only  Pr.  3s4  1619,  possibly  also  Zc.  99;  the  earlier 
sense,  "poor,  needy,  afflicted,"  is  not  appropriate  here.  —  But 
{Thine)  eyes  are  {against)  the  lofty].     The  texts  of  this  line  are 


PSALM   XVIII.  I47 

difficult  tQ  explain  :  "  lofty  eyes  Thou  humblest "  of  Ps.  is  too 
easy  and  does  not  explain  2  S.  :  Thine  eyes  are  upon  the  lofty  that 
Thou  mayest  bring  them  down.  The  translation  given  above  best 
explains  both  variations. 

Pt.  II.,  Str.  I.  begins  with  a  personal  reference  to  Yahweh 
reminding  one  of  v.3.  The  Str.  describes  what  God  had  done 
for  David  in  war,  in  two  parts  of  three  and  four  couplets.  — ■ 
29-31.  has  three  syn.  couplets  advancing  one  upon  another. 
—  For  Thou  art  my  lamp,  Yahweh~\,  changed  in  Ps.  to  "  lightest 
lamp  "  in  order  to  better  parallel,  with  :  My  God  who  lightens 
my  darkness.  Yahweh  was  the  lamp,  as  in  v.30,  horn  of  salvation  ; 
the  lamp  to  light  up  a  dark  path,  fig.  of  a  difficult  task,  so  of 
prosperous  way  through  it,  cf.  Ps.  13217,  probably  based  on  this 
passage. — For  in  Thee  (through  Thy  help)  /  run  up  to  a  troop], 
a  hostile  marauding  band  of  the  enemy,  to  attack  them.  —  and 
in  my  God  J  leap  a  waif],  to  get  at  them  behind  the  wall. 
These  expressions  seem  to  refer  to  some  difficult  campaign  in 
which  personal  courage,  strength,  and  valour  were  required.  — 
The  'El  whose  way],  providential  way  of  acting,  cf.  Dt.  324. — 
is  perfect],  in  help  and  defence,  as  appears  from  ||  a  shield  is  He 
to  the  one  (made  more  comprehensive  by  a  later  editor  by  inser- 
tion of  "all")  seeking  refuge  in  Him]  ;  cf.  v.36  for  both  expres- 
sions. —  32-35.  The  second  part  of  the  Str.  is  composed  of  four 
syn.  couplets,  setting  forth  in  relative  clauses  what  sort  of  a  God 
Yahweh  is  and  what  He  has  done  for  David.  The  first  couplet 
asks,  For  who  is  a  God  like  Yahweh  ?  ||  and  who  is  a  Rock  like 
our  God?],  implying  a  negative  answer:  there  is  none  like  Him, 
the  incomparable  One.  ('El  and  Rock  are  as  in  v.35.)  So  Ex.  1511, 
cf.  1  S.  22  Dt.  332G29.  A  later  editor,  adapting  the  Ps.  for  congre- 
gational use,  substitutes  for  the  comparison  the  terminology  of 
Is.2  4311  446  8  4521,  asserting  that  God  is  the  only  God  ;  that  is, 
monotheism,  a  doctrine  without  anything  to  suggest  it  in  the 
context,  which  rather  holds  up  Yahweh  as  the  incomparable  One  in 
what  He  has  done  for  David.  —  The  'El  who  girdeth  me  with 
strength].  Strength  is  compared  to  a  girdle  wrapt  about  him  by  his 
God.  —  Who  setteth  my  feet  like  hinds],  swift  to  run,  as  v.30  ||  And 
upon  high  places],  battlefields,  as  Dt.  3213  33^  2  S.  i™25.  —  made 
me  hold  my  ground],  stand  firm  in  battle,  cf.  Am.  215  2  K.  io4. — 


148  PSALMS 

Who  teacheth  mine  hands  for  war].  As  a  warrior  of  Yahweh  he 
has  been  trained  by  Yahweh  Himself.  —  And  maketh  mine  arms 
bronze].  The  arms  by  divine  discipline  become  so  strong  that 
they  are  like  bronze  weapons ;  so  essentially  ancient  Vrss.  The 
"  bow "  is  an  ancient  interpretation  which  spoiled  the  measure 
and  misled  as  to  the  sense,  and  in  J^  led  to  a  change  in  the  form 
of  the  vb.,  which  is  followed  by  AV.  "  so  that  a  bow  of  steel  is 
broken  by  mine  arms  "  and  RV.  "  mine  arms  do  bend  a  bow  of 
brass,"  neither  of  which  suits  the  context. 

36.  These  two  lines  are  doubtless  a  gloss.  They  are  not  in 
accord  with  the  previous  or  following  context,  which  describe  what 
God  enabled  David  to  do  and  not  what  God  was  to  David. 

And  Thou  gavest  me  the  shield  of  Thy  salvation, 

And  Thy  right  hand  supported  me,  and  with  docility  to  Thee  Thou  broughtest  me  up. 

The  shield  is  suited  to  the  previous  bronze  weapon  and  the 
hands  and  arms,  but  then  it  should  be  a  shield  of  victory  and  not 
shield  of  salvation.  But  the  glossator  was  evidently  influenced  by 
the  horn  of  salvation  v.3c  and  the  shield  v.31c.  The  last  two  lines 
vary  in  texts  and  Vrss.  2  S.  omits  :  And  Thy  right  hand  supported 
me  ;  and  the  first  word  of  the  next  clause  is  pointed  so  as  to  read 
"  Thy  response,"  or  "  Thy  docility,"  which  suits  better  the  vb.  than 
MT.  of  Ps.  " Thy  condescension  "  or  "Thy  humility."  So  also 
we  may  read  the  vb.  "  either  made  me  great "  or  brought  me  up. 
But  in  either  case  the  conceptions  are  later  than  those  of  the  Ps. 
as  a  whole.  Two  different  stages  of  glosses  are  represented  by 
the  two  texts. 

Str.  II.  describes  the  triumph  of  David  over  his  enemies.  It  is 
composed  of  a  couplet  followed  by  a  tetrastich  in  the  first  section, 
and  of  a  tetrastich  and  two  couplets  in  the  second.  —  37.  The 
first  section  begins  with  a  synth.  couplet :  Thou  broadenest  my 
steps  under  me],  taking  up  the  thought  of  v.34.  The  step  is  the 
place  on  which  the  feet  step  or  stand  ;  it  is  broadened  so  as  to 
give  ample  room  for  standing,  cf.  v.206,  plenty  of  room  for  exercise 
and  development.  —  And  my  limbs  do  not  slip].  They  stand  firm 
on  the  broad  stepping  place.  This  may  refer  to  the  enlargement 
of  the  power  of  David  after  his  final  defeat  of  the  Philistines.  — 
38.    David  now  describes  his  victorious  pursuit  of  his  enemies. 


PSALM   XVIII.  149 

He  is  no  longer  on  the  defence.  —  /  pursue  mine  enemies  and  I 
overtake  them']  ;  cf.  v.30  of  his  running  and  leaping  against  them ; 
||  and  I  return  not  (from  the  pursuit)  until  (I  have  overtaken 
them  and)  I  have  finished  them  (destroyed  them  completely). — 
39.  And  I  smote  them  down  so  that  they  could  not  rise  ||  and  they 
fell  under  my  feet~\.  This,  in  the  original  poem,  described  a 
historic  experience  of  David,  probably  in  his  wars  against  Edom 
and  Moab ;  but  an  editor,  wishing  to  make  future  triumphs  pos- 
sible to  the  thought  of  the  congregation,  omits  the  waws  con- 
secutive, so  that  the  verbs  may  be  either  futures  or  presents.  The 
second  section  opens  with  a  tetrastich  :  40-41.  And  Thou  girdest 
me  with  strength  for  war],  resuming  the  thought  of  v.330,  then 
synth.  as  result  of  this  warlike  strength,  Thou  causest  them  that 
rise  up  against  me  to  bow  down  under  me~\  ;  they  rise  up  only  to 
bow  down  under  my  blows  ;  ||  And  mine  enemies  Thou  madest  give 
the  back  to  me],  turn  the  back  of  their  necks  in  flight ;  ||  and  them 
that  hate  me  I  exterminated.  —  42.  The  pitiful  condition  of  the 
helpless  enemy  is  now  stated  in  a  couplet :  And  they  cry  for  help, 
but  there  is  no  saviour  ||  unto  Yahweh,  but  He  doth  not  afiswer 
them.  —  43.  The  Str.  concludes  with  a  couplet  bringing  to  a 
climax  the  final  victory :  And  I  beat  them  small  as  dust  of  the 
earth].  An  editor  substitutes  for  earth,  "  before  the  wind," 
thinking  of  pursuit.  —  And  as  clay  of  the  streets  pulverized  them]. 
This  is  probably  an  indirect  reference  to  captured  cities.  The 
entire  Str.,  describing  victories  over  enemies,  may  be  regarded 
as  a  poetic  representation  of  the  wars  of  David  described  in 
2  S.  8,  10. 

Str.  III.  sums  up  and  generalizes  all  that  has  gone  before ;  but 
it  is  mingled  with  two  glosses,  which  make  it  more  appropriate 
for  congregational  worship  in  later  times.  —  44-47.  The  first  sec- 
tion is  a  hexastich  as  usual. — 44-45a.  It  begins  with  a  single 
line:  Thou  deliverest  me  from  the  strivings  of  (my)  people], 
which,  if  the  text  of  2  S.  is  correct,  is  the  only  reference  in  the 
ode  to  civil  commotions.  This  is  generalized  in  the  text  of  Ps. 
to  "people,"  but  the  strivings  are  more  suited  in  usage  to  civil 
commotion  than  to  external  war,  cf.  Ps.  5510.  The  three  lines 
that  follow  are  syn.,  referring  to  foreign  nations.  —  Thou  settest 
me  to  be  head  of  nations]  ;  the  conquered  nations  submit  to  him 


150  PSALMS 

as  their  head  or  chief.  —  A  people  I  knew  ?iot  serve  me~\,  unknown 
distant  foreign  peoples,  such  as  the  Syrians  of  Hamath,  2  S.  8'J ; 
||  At  the  hearing  of  the  ear  shew  themselves  obedient  to  me~\ .  This 
is  followed  by  a  gloss,  in  the  hostile  spirit  to  foreign  nations  of 
later  times.  —  45&-46.  Foreigners  come  cringing  unto  me  ||  for- 
eigners fade  away  and  come  trembling  out  of  their  fastnesses] . 
These  lines  are  in  both  texts,  but  there  has  been  a  transposition 
of  v.45a"6  in  the  text  of  2  S.  There  is  nothing  in  this  part  of  the 
Str.  apart  from  the  gloss  that  transcends  the  experience  of  David ; 
although  naturally  in  later  times  it  was  given  a  more  general 
reference,  in  accordance  with  the  royal  Pss.,  to  a  world-wide 
dominion  of  the  Davidic  dynasty.  —  47.  A  concluding  couplet 
ascribes  life  and  blessedness  to  God.  —  Liveth  and  blessed  is  my 
Rock].  "  Yahweh  "  has  been  inserted  after  "  liveth,"  but  elsewhere 
"Yahweh  liveth"  is  the  formula  of  the  oath,  and  here  it  seems 
to  balance  two  clauses  with  two  beats  each,  making  a  tetrameter. 
It  is  not  expressive  of  a  wish,  as  one  says,  "  May  the  king  live  ;" 
but  is  a  statement  of  fact,  as  to  the  "Rock,"  the  divine  name 
of  the  Song.  —  And  the  God  of  my  salvation  is  exalted']  ;  cf.  v.30 
and  this  exclamation  of  the  fact  to  the  couplet  of  challenge,  v.32. — 
48-51.  The  second  section  is  constructed  somewhat  as  v.32"35  in 
relative  clauses.  —  48-49.  The  JEl  who  giveth  to  me  deeds  of 
vengeance],  such  as  those  described  in  v.38"43.  —  And  who  bringeth 
down  peoples  under  me]  ;  cf.  v.40"41.  An  editor  of  the  Ps.  sub- 
stituted a  later  Aramaic  word  "  subdueth  "  for  this  ptc.  —  From 
the  man  of  violence  rescue  th  me].  This  is  the  climax,  going  back  upon 
v.3**,  which  is  left  out  of  text  of  Ps.,  but  is  preserved  in  text  of 
2  S.,  probably  referring  to  Saul,  as  indicated  in  title.  It  was  quite 
natural  that  the  first  reference  in  the  ode  to  the  peril,  and  the  last, 
should  refer  to  him;  and  as  "a  man  of  violence"  rather  than  as 
classed  with  the  other  enemies.  —  This  is  followed  by  a  gloss,  50, 
which  is  left  in  the  text  as  a  hexameter,  a  liturgical  addition 
suitable  for  congregational  worship  at  this  point.  —  Therefore  will 
I  praise  Thee,  Yahweh,  among  the  nations,  and  to  Thy  name  will 
I  make  melody].  All  the  terms  are  common  liturgical  terms. — 
51.  The  final  triplet  of  the  Str.  is  individual  in  its  reference  to 
David  as  the  anointed  king  over  against  the  man  of  violence.  — 
Who  magnifieth  acts  of  salvation  to  His  king,  ||  And  doe  th  kindness 


PSALM   XVIII.  151 

to  His  anointed^.  There  is  a  reference  here  to  the  covenant 
of  David,  2  S.  715sq\  "My  kindness  shall  not  depart  from  him, 
as  I  took  it  from  Saul,"  cf.  also  Ps.  89s934;  and  so  the  climax  is 
appropriate  in  the  mouth  of  David,  To  David  and  to  his  seed 
forever. 

1.  riprnx]  /  love  thee,  Qal  impf.  1  p.  sf.  2  m.  of  }  Dm,  a.X.  in  Qal ;  Pi. 
have  compassion,  frequent  }  Pss.  10214  ic>313- 13  Ii65and  elsw.  However,  in 
As.,  Ar.,  Aram.,  Syr.,  used  in  Qal  with  mng.  love.  Possibly  an  early  and  rare 
use  in  Heb.,  but  prob.  a  later  one,  an  Aramaism.  The  idea  itself  is  not  earlier 
than  Hosea,  and  is  only  common  with  an*  subsequent  to  D.  This  1.  is  cited 
Ps.  1161;  but  vons  is  there  substituted,  or  else  gives  evidence  of  an  original 
"runs  in  poem.  This  vb.  is  not  found  in  2  S.  and  is  doubtless  a  gl.  —  'j5?p] 
my  strength  :  t  ptn  o.X.  (2  S.  22-  6L  has  icxvs  fwv,  but  this  is  gl.  from  Ps.)  ; 
cf.  ngjn  Is.  811,  tr^rn  2  Ch.  121  261"  Dn.  1 I2,  t  P.^  is  used  Ex.  if-  14- 16  Am.  613 
Hg.  222;  [rn  adj.  is  used  of  the  hand  and  arm  of  ">  in  delivering  Israel  from 
Egypt,  especially  in  D.  Cf.  Ps.  13612  and  Is.  4010  (prna  as  in  the  character 
of  a  strong  one). —  3.  ^Vd]  my  crag;  \  y^D  n.m.  fig.  of  "•  183  (=  2  S.  222)  ; 
also  314  =  713  (both  nrix  *rn«lM  'D);  4210  (vVp  Sn);  fig.  of  security  408;  in 
physical  sense  7816  10418  1379  1416.  —  f  i"HWE>]  nS.  fastness,  stronghold,  used 
in  ^  of  God  i83  (=  2  S.  222)  31s-4  =  713  (all  ||  ^d),  912  (||  *©ro),  6611  1442 
(both  dub.)  ;  elsw.  common  in  narrative  of  I  S.  224- 5  2423  2  S.  5T-  9-  n  (=  1  Ch. 
II5- 16)  2314;  also  in  Ez.  1213  1321  1720  Jb.  3928.  It  is  therefore  an  early  word, 
extremely  suitable  in  the  mouth  of  David.  —  H^OD]  my  deliverer,  Pi.  ptc.  sf. 
I  (v.  1713);  elsw.  in  this  ptc.  form  v.49  (for  which  2  S.  more  correctly  WtfD); 
4018  =  70%  1442,  as  above,  agreeing  with  2  S.  in  adding  »S,  which  is  doubtless 
original.  But  Ba.,  Du.,  rd.  HsScr,  as  Ps.  55°,  more  in  accord,  with  context. 
The  Ps.  is  without  doubt  a  trimeter ;  therefore  the  initial  nw>  must  be 
a  gl.,  though  in  both  texts.  —  ^»«]  my  God;  v?h*  of  2  S.  is  prob.  later;  cf. 
>>,l?D  Sn  421}.  —  nix]  my  rock,  here  as  in  Dt.  3237  sq.  "a  nDn.  In  that  poem 
it  is  a  divine  name,  given  in  @  there  as  elsw.,  v.18- 30- 81-  31-  37,  by  debs ;  so  <S 
of  2  S.  23s  Ps.  i832-47.  This  usage  and  the  personal  reference  favours  its 
interpretation  as  a  divine  name  here,  although  (g  renders  porjdds ;  ®  of  2  S. 
has  6  6e6s  /jlov  0tf\a£  carat  jxoi,  showing  that  (3  rd.  'JjVk.  J  iix  n.m.  rock; 
used  elsw.  (1)  in  late  Pss.  for  God  as  refuge  of  His  people  1915  281  313  (  = 
713)  623-7-8  73^  7835  892"  92I6  9422  95i  I44i.  (2)  in  physical  sense  27*  613 
7816-20  8117  10541  1148;  (3)  of  edge  of  sword  "i3"jn  'X  8944.  —  yvfr  pp]  phr. 
a.X.  horn  of  my  salvation.  J  fv  n.  horn  (1)  of  animal  2222  9211,  so  fig.  of 
God  here  ;  (2)  of  altar  11827;  (3)  fig.  of  exaltation,  'p  D^pn  lift  up  the  horn 
is  used  fig.  of  men  of  power  and  honour,  compared  with  the  wild  bulls ;  so 
of  wicked  75s-  6-n;  of  God's  people,  with  God  as  subj.  8918  14814;  intrans. 
'p  an  89s5  1129  1  S.  21;  so  of  the  king  nnS  'p  rvnxn  13217;  cf.  "irreto  'p  ay 
I  S.  210  (Song  of  Hannah).  —  H3J^c]  my  high  tower ;  always  fig.  of  God  ex- 
cept Is.  2512  3316  (of  forts).     2  S.  adds  ^dudi,  but  this  makes  line  too  long; 


152  PSALMS 

prob.  a  gl.  2  S.  22M  ^J?tfn  Dcnn  >;u;d  is  not  in  Ps.  We  need  it  to  make  up 
six  lines  of  Str.  It  was  doubtless  original,  01s.,  Ley,  Gr.,  Bi.,  Che.,  Ba.,  Ecker. 
Its  place  was  taken  by  the  first  line  of  Ps.  —  4.  SSno]  Pual  ptc.  gerundive, 
worthy  to  be  praised,  always  of  "> ;  elsw.  48s  96*  (=  1  Ch.  1625)  1453,  of  name 
of  1  1133.  For  SSn  vb.  v.  Intr.  §  35.  —  o;x  jpi]  is  to  be  preferred  to  2  S. 
*>:tndi  on  account  of  rhythm.  —  5.  \?]  of  2  S.  is  unnecessary;  not  in  Ps. — 
WfiDM]  Qal  pf.  3  pi.  sf.  1  S.  (of  past  experience)  f  p|DN  surround,  encompass  : 
waters  Jon.  26;  fig.  evils,  misfortune  rnjn  Ps.  4013,  niD  ^aeto  2  S.  22s  =  'd  *San 
Ps.  185  =  1163  (where  it  is  cited).  *San  of  Ps.  has  come  in  from  next  couplet 
v.6.  It  is  improbable  that  the  original  was  so  unnecessarily  tautological. — 
t  natfo]  n.  pi.  cstr.  breakers,  waves  breaking  on  the  shore,  gives  a  beautiful 
metaphor,  which  is  found  elsw.,  lit.  o^  ♦'jatfD  934  ;  fig.  of  D"»nn  42s  =  Jon.  24; 
of  rhws  Ps.  888.  2  S.  225  is  prob.  the  original  of  all  these  fig.  uses,  as  oinn 
and  nSixn  refer  to  niD  and  Swtf. — Sg»Sa  <Snii]  torrents  of  Belial.—  J.  Sru] 
n.m.  (1)  torrent  of  rushing  water,  ||  breakers,  so  sim.  of  foes  1244;  fig.  of  ruin 
here,  of  pleasures  36°;  elsw.  in  yp  lit.  7415  7820  8310  no7,  cf.  Ju.  521;  (2)  /i?r- 
rent  bed,  wady,  Ps.  10410.  J  h';^2  worthlessness  :  (1)  '3  "ia~  <fo.y<?,  wicked  thing, 
IOI8;  t(2)  ritti*,  destruction,  Na.  21;  '3  pgi  Na.  I11;  and  so  here  destruction 
||  mc  and  Swtf;  '3  iai  Ps.  419  (destructive  thing)  deadly  injury.  2  S.  omits 
)  without  reason.  —  Wipy]  Pi.  impf.  varies  from  pf.  of  previous  and  follow- 
ing lines  to  express  the  oft-repeated  action,  f  ppa  vb.  Qal  not  used.  Niph.  be 
terrified  1  Ch.  2130  Est.  76  Dn.  817;  not  in  \p.  Pi.  (1)  fall  upon,  overwhelm  t 
assail,  1  S.  i614- 15  prose,  elsw.  poetry,  Ps.  185  (=  2  S.  225)  Jb.  35  +  6 1.  Jb.  Is.214; 
(2)  terrify  Jb.  714  (|nnn).  — 6.  %  tf^D]  n.m.  snare  i&  (=  2  S.  226)  69s8 
10636,  of  plots  of  wicked  64s  1406  1419  (v.  917).  —  7.  »V— wa]  in  the  distress 
which  I  had  (v.  42). —  J£Cjn]  Pi.  impf.  1  p.  (v.  j3).  This  is  original;  inpN 
of  2  S.  2276  is  error  of  repetition  from  previous  line.  —  J7DB*]  impf.  (of  vivid 
description) ;  2  S.  has  better  JJDB*],  1  consec.  of  result.  —  Ps.  has  two  words, 
Mian  PloS,  which  are  not  in  2  S.,  inserted  betw.  the  two  words  vyr^i  and 
VJTtO.  2  S.  is  one  word  too  short.  Kian  may  be  explained  as  a  gl.  implied 
by  vjTNa  ;  but  Vioh  is  not  a  natural  gl.  and  is  therefore  probably  original.  — 
t  [nr'f ]  n-f-  cry  for  help;  not  found  abs.,  but  cstr.  1  S.  512  Je.  819,  »Pjntf 
Ps.  i&  (=  2  S.  227)  3918  402  1022  La.  356,  onjntf  Pss.  3416  14519  Ex.  223  (J). 
—  8.  tf.gJfiV]  Qal  impf.  3  f.  c.  1  consec.  of  result,  f  #?<!  Q&1  a'^->  Dr.  =  sway; 
but  2  S.  Qr.  Hithp.  tifyurm  which  is  found  also  of  waters  tossing  Je.  s22  467, 
and  of  mountains  (2  S.  heavens)  swaying  here,  v.86  =  2  S.  2280;  so  Hithpolel 
of  waters  Je.  46s,  and  of  drunken  men  reeling  Je.  25 16.  Pu.  Jb.  3420,  a  people 
convulsed.  There  is  no  sufficient  reason  to  doubt  the  Qal,  which  is  the  more 
difficult  form.  —  tfjnr»]  Qal  impf.  c.  1  consec.  quaked.  %  vy\  vb.  Qal  quake  : 
of  earth  188  689  7719,  mountains  464  7216  (dub.).  Hiph.  cause  to  quake,  earth 
604.  —  onn  ^O^w]  2  S.  omits  1.  In  that  case  it  is  difficult  to  explain  1  consec. 
with  1w7jt\  i  may  be  taken  as  circumstantial,  or  we  may  think  that  it  has 
consec.  power  notwithstanding  the  change  of  order.  It  certainly  would  be 
more  natural  to  read  BJ^«,  and  possibly  that  was  the  original.  There  was  a 
tendency  in  later  times,  when  1  consec.  had  lost  its  force  and  usage,  to  change 


PSALM   XVIII.  153 

order  of  vbs.  in  the  older  poems.  D^Dtfn  phdis  of  2  S.  is  a.X.  and  as  the  more 
difficult  reading  is  to  be  preferred ;  that  of  Ps.  is  favoured  by  the  use  of 
San  nnoiD  v.16  (  =  2  S.  2216),  and  p«  over  against  onn  Dt.  32s2.  —  nS  n^n] 
retracted  accent  (v.  212).  J  mn  vb.  Qal  burn  in  anger  :  of  man  *\x  subj.  1243, 
God  io64a ;  f|N  omitted,  impersonal  188.  Hithp.  heat  oneself  in  vexation 
371- 7- 8  Pr.  2419.  —  9.  1©N3  yc>~\  smoke  in  his  nostril,  because  of  hard  breath- 
ing in  anger.  So  vsp  #n  fire  from  his  mouth  ;  the  breath  of  his  mouth  in 
hot  anger  was  a  breath  of  fire.  —  SaMfl  at  end,  instead  of  with  1  consec.  at 
beginning. —  D^Sru]  n.m.  pi.  +  n^m  n.f.  coal;  in  \J/  only  pi.  n?3  'i  189  = 
2  S.  229;  so  tfx  "hn\  -np  2  S.  2213  —  d:n  iSrui  vis  nap  ray  Ps.  1813  (corrupt 
txt.),  cf.  v.14  (gl.).  &$  ^™  also  used  °f  cherubim  Ez.  Iw;  so  rd.  Ps.  14011; 
cf.  1204  (of  coals  of  broom  plant).  — 10.  DjDBf  E£i]  Qal  impf.  c.  1  consec. 
carrying  on  result ;  so  also  2  S.,  but  Ps.  1445  Hiph.,  and  this  is  the  more 
probable  pointing.  Cf.  Ex.  2410.  —  *n»]]  Qa^  impf-  c.  1  consec,  and  descended, 
as  context  shows,  in  theophany.  In  this  sense  only  here  1810  —  1445  in  \p,  but 
common  in  early  writers  Ex.  i9n-i8(E)«  38  u5-7  1821  (J)  Nu.  n17(JE); 
sq.  yjja  Ex.  34s  Nu.  n25,  cf.  125  (all  JE);  pillar  of  cloud  Ex.  33s  (JE);  his- 
torical references  in  later  writers  Ne.  913;  prophetic  anticipations  of  future 
theophanies    Mi.   I3  Is.  314  6319  64s  Jb.  2213.  —  fw?]    n.m.  heavy  cloud; 

1  K.  812  =  2  Ch.  61  (poet.),  God  dwells  in  it,  so  Pfc  97s.  It  is  used  of  the 
cloud  in  which  ">  descended  in  theophany  at  Sinai  Ex.  20'21  (E)  Dt.  411  519, 
so  to  David  Ps.  i810(=  2  S.  2210);  of  advent  in  judgment  Je.  1316  Zp.  I15 
Jo.  22;  in  more  general  sense  of  clouds  Jb.  2213,  as  swaddling  bands  of  sea 
Jb.  389;  of  a  stormy  day  Ez.  3412;  fig.  misery  Is.  602.  — 11.  33"vJ  and  rode, 
"s  consec.  carrying  on  the  thought.  \  aa~\  vb.  Qal,  ride  in  chariot ;  so  of  mon- 
arch into  battle  45s;  elsw.  in  \p  of  "<  in  theophany;  in  the  heavens  6834;  on 
a  highway  in  the  nan?  685;  so  here  the  3na  is  conceived  as  His  chariot  1811 
=  2  S.  2211;  cf.  use  of  313">  in  Ps.  1043  and  of  3an  collective  of  the  army  of 
God  in  theophany,  D^ron  a^n  6818.  Hiph.  cause  to  ride  6612.  J  an?  n.m.  only 
here  in  this  relation  as  chariot  of  ">  in  the  clouds ;  but  Ez.  describes  four 
cherubim  as  inseparably  attached  to  four  wheels  of  chariot  and  supporting  a 
throne  platform,  Ez.  i4"28  g3  10  II22;  so  1  Ch.  2818  connects  this  cherubic 
chariot  with  the  cherubim  of  the  Holy  of  Holies  of  the  temple.  They  are 
always  conceived  as  having  wings,  even  when  stationary  on  the  slab  of  gold 
constituting  the  throne  of  ">  in  the  tabernacle  of  P ;  and  also  in  the  temple 
cherubim.  They  are  also  conceived  as  guards  of  the  tabernacle  and  temple, 
and  so  woven  into  the  texture  of  the  curtains  and  carved  on  the  golden  planks  ; 
also  in  the  poem  of  J,  as  the  guards  of  Eden  Gn.  324  They  are  always  theo- 
phanic.  Elsw.  in  \p  802  991;  cf.  2  K.  1915  =  Is.  3716  I  S.  4*  2  S.  62  =  1  Ch. 
136  (refer,  to  the  cherubim  of  the  throne)  oonan  ar\  —  ni^ij  and  flew,  subj. 
God,  flew  by  means  of  the  wings  of  the  cherubic  chariot,  which  He  rode. 
X  IV  vb.  QsA,fi}> ;  in  \p  of  God  only  here  1811  =  2  S.  2211;  elsw.  fig.  of  arrow 
915,  of  a  man  as  a  dove  557,  of  men  as  birds,  at  end  of  life  9010.  —  n-»i]  =  in 

2  S.  N"v^  which  latter  is  an  error  of  transcription,  n  for  "i,  as  old  as  (SI.  n»r% 
as  rare  word  and  suited  to  context,  is  to  be  preferred  as  original,     f  nsi  vb. 


1 54  PSALMS 

Qal,  dart  through  the  air;  here  only  in  \J/ ;  elsw.  Dt.  2840  (of  eagle),  fig 
Je.  4840  49"'2.     Dr.  swoop  down  is  the  most  prob.  rendering.  — 

12.  Ps.  =  D"D  rwn  iroD  vmaoo  nno  -|&ti  ntf> 
2  S.  =  a^D  rnpn  niDD  vraoo         — Tw'n  ntp>i 

1  consec.  of  2  S.  is  evidently  correct,  for  the  movement  of  thought  goes  right 
on.  vpood  in  both  texts  suits  the  clause.  Then  nrp  of  Ps.  must  be  either 
an  addition  or  out  of  place.  It  was  prob.  a  gl.  to  get  a  synonym  of  in?D. 
n-p  in  this  sense  of  booth,  of  God  in  storm,  only  here  and  Jb.  36-°,  where  it  is 
prob.  borrowed  from  Ps.  cf.  io9.  In  Ps.  27s  (Kt.)  3121  Yahweh  is  booth  and 
shelter  to  the  psalmist.  The  idea  of  a  booth  on  a  chariot  of  cherubs  is  not 
congruous.  We  might  derive  roD  from  the  other  stem  "j:D  =  overshadow, 
screen  (v.  J12).  It  is  true  that  from  this  stem  no  form  rrp  is  known,  but  only 
r\D2  and  JVpr,  both  in  sense  of  covering ;  but  there  is  no  reason  why  nrp  cov- 
ering, screen,  should  not  be  derived  from  this  -|:D,  as  well  as  rvp  booth  from 
the  other  -pD.  Besides,  this  explanation  would  bring  into  comparison  La.  3**, 
where  of  Yahweh  it  is  said,  ^S  JJJ73  'D  Thou  hast  covered  Thyself  ivith  a  cloud; 
so  of  anger  La.  343. —  \  nrp]  n.m.  frequent  in  \f/  as  hiding-place.  DJH  'D  hid- 
ing-place of  thunder  818;  elsw.  in  sense  of  shelter  in  '<  27*  3121  615  911,  cf. 
327  119114,  secret  place  of  womb  13915,  secrecy  1015.  It  is  an  easy  gl.  here; 
so  airoi<pv(prjs  has  gone  into  <S>  of  2  S.  —  "^Bfn  of  2  S.  a  word  unknown  elsw., 
and  from  stem  unknown  in  Heb.;  mng.  conjectural,  collection,  mass.  As. 
aidru,  collect,  gather;  prob.  txt.  err.  for  npttfn,  Hi.,  Gr.,  a  mistaken  for  1,  all 
the  more  that  (3  has  <t/c6tos.  t>"i3#n  darkness:  opposed  to  light  13912;  of 
theophany  only  here  (1812),  cf.  Gn.  I512  (JE);  fig.  lack  of  understanding  825, 
distress  Is.  8-*2  5010.  Tjtfn  is  more  common.  rro  is  an  original  out  of  which 
both  1D30  of  Ps.  and  rflaD  2  S.  might  be  derived  ;  rd.  it,  therefore,  as  cstr.  sing, 
and  connect  it  with  next  word,  D*v  P?vn  rrp.  Then  the  covering  of  darkness 
of  waters  is  syn.  with  lie  put  darkness  about  Him,  i.e.  He  came  enveloped  in 
dark  storm  clouds,  as  in  subsequent  content.  D^pntf  »3P  goes  therefore  with 
next  v.  and  takes  as  its  complement  rujr. —  ^y]  pi.  cstr.  of  J  r:  n.m.  thick, 
dense  cloud :  (1)  rain  cloud  7718  1478  Ju.  5*  Is.  56;  (2)  cloud  mass ;  so  char- 
iot of  '1  Is.  191  Ps.  1043;  connected  with  theophany  i8n- 13.  —  J  D^fjntf]  skies, 
the  region  of  thin  clouds  ;  this  phr.  a.X. ;  elsw.  in  ^  pi.  Qipnvt  ip  (of  the 
divine  faithfulness  reaching)  36°  =  5711  =  1085,  '22  My  (God's)  68s5,  SpDD  r 
7828  Pr.  828,  ■?  unj  "?lp  Ps.  7718;  sg.  sky  89-  s8.  ffintf  vb.  Qal,  grind  to 
powder  or  dust :  of  the  fine  incense  of  sanctuary  Ex.  3036  (P),  of  waters  wear- 
ing away  stones  and  reducing  them  to  dust  Jb.  1419,  of  crushing  enemies  io?3 
Ps.  18&  =  2  S.  2243.  — 13.  nnc]  emph.  fr,  without  brightness,  referring  to 
the  dense  clouds  of  the  sky.  If  taken  as  beginning  next  line,  inconsistent 
with  context  and  only  to  be  justified  in  connection  with  a  new  conception 
of  lightning,  but  that  would  be  premature  here.  J  r\n  n.f.  brightness :  a.X.  in 
\p,  but  cf.  2  S.  234;  after  rain  Is.  603  621.  fnij  vb.  Qal,  shine,  of  light  Is.  91 
Jb.  185  2228.      Hiph.  cause  to  shine,  of  moon  Is.  1310;  enlighten  Ps.  1829  — 

2  S.  2229. 


PSALM   XVIII.  155 

Ps.  =  vh  nrui  nna  1  nap  rap  njj 
2  S.  =  eta  nm  npa        njj 

Ps.  gives  two  lines,  2  S.  one  line,  #M  nan  "in 3  is  given  again  in  v.14c,  but 
not  in  2  S.  It  is  an  easy  assimilation,  nap  Ps.  =  2  S.  n;'j,  a  transposition  of 
a  by  txt.  err.  rap  is  not  appropriate  to  npa,  but  is  needed  with  nap  and 
would  be  easily  suggested  by  "op  of  previous  line,  npa  is  more  appropriate  to 
vx  nru,  if  alone  without  nna,  and  goes  back  upon  v.9c,  coals  of  fire  zuere  kindled 
from  JJim.  This  reference  back  to  v.9c,  the  closing  line  of  first  six  lines  of 
Str.,  is  similar  to  the  reference  in  previous  Str.  of  v.7ab  back  to  v.4a&.  But  the 
reference  to  hailstones  and  coals  of  fire  here  seems  premature  in  connection 
with  the  descent  of  Yahweh  in  the  storm  cloud,  and  before  the  storm  bursts 
in  subsequent  Str.  It  is  best,  therefore,  to  think  that  the  Ps.  has  preserved 
the  original  of  the  first  line.  The  transposition  of  nap  into  npa  has  occa- 
sioned the  insertion  of  vn  ">Sm  from  v.90,  and  the  omission  of  raj?  is  by  error 
of  not  observing  similar  letters.  — 14.  D?jn»j]  Hiph.  impf.  c.  1  consec.  continu- 
ing the  movement  of  thought.  %  opn  vb.  Qal,  thunder:  of  the  sea  9611  987. 
Hiph.  let  it  thunder,  trans,  thunder  of  ">  18U  (=  2  S.  22u)  29s  I  S.  210;  cf. 
Vipa  1  S.  710  Jb.  374-5  409.  —  a:cy;a]  not  so  suited  to  nip  jm  as  2  S.  p. — 
vt*  'tell  n-ja]  not  in  2  S.,  is  a  gl.  — 15.  Dypi]  Hiph.  impf.  c.  1  consec.  X  no 
Qal  682,  where  enemies  are  scattered  by  God.  Hiph.  scatter,  only  here  (1815) 
and  1446  (quoted  from  this  Ps.).  Usually  sf.  is  referred  to  enemies,  but  these 
have  not  yet  appeared  in  Ps.  It  is  better  with  Gr.,  Du.,  to  think  of  the  scattering 
wide  the  arrows  (of  thunderbolts)  ;  Ps.  I44c  reverses  the  order  of  pna  and  yn  in 
the  verse.  The  1  of  Ps.  is  not  in  2  S.  and  not  original.  2  S.  has  DDh*i  pna  (Kt., 
D.T1  Qr.)  for  DD.iM  an  nn.nai  of  Ps.  2  S.  is  one  word  too  short.  But  Ps.  1446 
=  Donni  n;xn  rhyj  Djp$rvi  pna  pna.  We  may  explain  text  of  Ps.  18  as  an 
attempt  to  improve  pna  pna,  and  the  text  of  2  S.  as  resulting  from  the  omis- 
sion of  one  of  these.  When  Ps.  144°  was  written  the  text  must  have  been 
pna  pna,  so  Che.,  Bu.  X?1%  n.m..  flash  of  lightning  1815  (—  144'')  7719  97* 
1357.  —  an]  before  i  consec.  impf.  is  prob.  vb.  as  in  parallel  line,  (3  iir\y}dvvev, 
3  multiplicavit,  from  aan  vb.  be  many,  trans,  sense,  but  not  found  elsw.  It  is 
usually  taken,  after  Ki.,  Qal  pf.  of  f  aan  vb.  shoot,  cf.  Gn.  49s3;  also  cf.  Je.  5029 
Jb.  1613.  It  is  taken  by  Hu.,  De.,  al.,  as  an  adv.  much,  exceedingly,  as  Ps.  1233, 
but  it  is  doubtless  a  relict  of  pna,  as  Ba.,  Che.,  al.  —  d§hm]  Qal  impf.  c.  1  con- 
sec. \  DDfi  trans,  make  a  noise,  drive  with  rumbling  noise,  as  a  wagon  in 
threshing  Is.  2828;  so  here,  cause  thunder  to  rumble  (1815  =  2  S.  2215  = 
Ps.  1446),  necessarily  so  if  we  refer  sf.  to  thunderbolts,  and  the  conception  is 
much  more  poetic  than  the  usual  rendering  discomfort,  justified  by  usage, 
Ex.  1424  (J)  2327  Jos.  io19  (E)  Ju.  415  1  S.  719.  — 16.  mom]  Niph.  impf.  c.  ^ 
consec;   nxn  X  Niph.  appear :  of  God  84s  10217,  of  things  1816  9016,  of  men 

1  ^d  42s  Ex.  2315  (E)  3420-  23- 24  (J)  +  ;  possibly  all  originally  Qal.  —  djd  »B'$k] 

2  S.  DJ,  or  0>Ql  Ecker,  is  better  on  account  of  ||  Sa?.  X  D",,'?n]  n.m.  channel ; 
elsw.  d^d  Visn  Ps.  422  Jo.  i20  Ct.  512;  without  defining  word  Ps.  1264,  as 
Ez.  3112  326+.  —  ^\\\\  Niph.  impf.  1  consec;   this  better  than  lS^  of  2  S. 


1 56  PSALMS 

{  nSj  vb.  Niph.  be  uncovered,  a.X.  in  \f/.  Pi.  uncover  eyes  11918;  make  known 
righteousness  of  God  wpS  98''. —  rjmjJJD]  =  2  S.  rnjna,  in  accordance  with 
which  ^5N  =  >sn  2  S.  The  text  of  Ps.  changes  to  2  pers.  without  sufficient 
reason.  The  line  lacks  one  word.  This  we  may  get  by  reading  nin>  m?j  yc\ 
t  rnpj  n.f.  rebuke ;  alw.  of  God  in  \p,  1816  (=2  S.  2216)  767  8017  1047,  also 
Is.  502  5120  6615  Jb.  2611,  of  man  Pr.  I31-8  1710  Ec.  f  Is.  3o17-17.—  nn]  in 
sense  of  X  breath  of  mouth  or  nostrils  (=  2  S.  2216),  elsw.  Pss.  33s  13517;  cf. 
Ex.  158  Jb.  49.  — 17.  Wj£]  Qal  impf.  emph.  coordination.  —  V^?2]  Hiph. 
impf.  of  graphic  description,  fnttte  Qal,  draw  out:  of  water  Ex.  210;  Hiph. 
only  Ps.  1817  =  2  S.  2217.  —  Jean  D»p]  (=  2  S.  221T)  elsw.  Pss.  29s  32s  7720 
934  10723  1447.  — 18.  ^'v]  Hiph.  impf.  of  graphic  description.  —  rj?  o>n]  a.X. 
cf.  594,  where  alone  elsw.  in  \f/  v;  adv.  is  used.  — 19.  J^h]  n.m.  distress;  in 
^  only  in  this  phr.  which  is  found  also  Dt.  32s5  Je.  1817  4621  Jb.  2130  Pr.  2710. 

—  *•?*!]  1  consec.  in  place  of  previous  impfs.,  emph.  change  of  tense  to  express 
result.  —  t  ?P*te]  n-m-  prop,  support  (=  2  S.  2219),  elsw.  Is.  31.  —  20.  ^»ox  »>_] 
)  consec,  carrying  on  previous  line.  2  S.  has  -on  wm,  which  gives  proper 
measure  and  is  doubtless  original.  —  f  an*y£]  cf.  amoa  31s  ;  also  1185  Ho.  416 
Hb.  i6.  —  *}*Vrr]   Pi.  impf.  pVn  {v.  6s),  a  return  to  impf.  of  vivid  description. 

—  "3  yon  \a]  reason  of  previous  deliverance.  %  yon  vb.  Qal:  (1)  of  men 
(a)  take  pleasure  in,  delight  in;  c.  a  10917  1121  11935,  c.  ace.  6831  7326  Is.  58s 
Ec.  88;  (b)  delight,  be  pleased  to  do  a  thing,  Ps.  409  Dt.  257-8;  (2)  of  God, 
delight  in,  have  pleasure  in;  c.  a  pers.  /S-°  (=  2  S.  2220)  229  4112,  horse 
14710;  c.  ace.  3723  407  5i8- 18-21  115s  1356  Pr.  211.  —  21.  >fp,??]  =  2  S.  »£|ri»; 
so  also  same  variation  v.25;  pTj  is  the  older  form  (v.  42).  —  ni  nar]  cleanness 
of  my  hands  =  v.25  (contracted  in  2  S.  to  »"53a);  elsw.  *\}  na  Jb.  930  2230  (later 
usage);  cf.  aa^)"U  from  na  adj.  24*  731  (v.  212).  —  a^]  Hiph.  impf.  in 
sense  of  \  return,  recompense ;  c.  \  here  (=  2  S.  2221)  v.25  284  547  (Qr.)  7912 
11612;  c.  s;%  942-23  —  22.  ,n~)cu;  <a]  causal  clause,  Qal  pf.  of  action  completed 
in  present,  keep,  observe  :  laws  of  'i  (post-Deuteron.),  elsw.  in  this  sense  "j~n 
3784,  rrwi  1 1934. 44. 56.  im  nna  7810  10318  13212,  nny  7s66  997  11988.146.^ 
nan  ii917-  67- 101,  nn^N  11957158,  nwo  89s2  U96),  DHMtto  1063  119106,  D>pn  10545 
11958,  ompD  1194.63. 184. 168^  jn  general  1912;  all  late  Pss.  —  D^a^t]  pi.  of 
Yahweh's  commands  ;   Dt.  86  io12  u22  199  2617  289  3016  Jos.  225  (D.  v.  /*). 

—  'D  *n?Bh]  pregnant,  acted  xvickedly  (in  departing)  from;  vb.  denom.  JjTBh 
a.X.  in  this  phr. ;  elsw.  a  late  word,  in  Qal  1  K.  847  Dn.  915  2  Ch.  637  Ec.  717 
Jb.  9^  io7-15;  Hiph.  condemn  as  guilty  Pss.  37s8  9421,  as  Qal  1066.  For 
V^~>.  v.  s>  —  23.  D^giBte]  judgments  {v.  /5),  a  type  of  law  in  form  of  judicial 
cases  (introduced  by  as  or  »a,  with  protasis  and  apodosis  (v.  Br.Hex- pp- 252-255) . 
||  ao-n  (above);  earlier  usage  in  code  of  E  =  Ex.  21-23.  Kt.  of  2  S. 
WDBto  is  possible.  —  npn]  statutes,  in  fpl.  characteristic  of  the  code  of  f^ 
(v.  Br.H^-PP-251-252).  —  md  vox]  Hiph.  impf.  frequentative;  but  2  S.  = 
hid?  "WOK  depart  from  it,  is  simpler,  except  for  lack  of  agreement  in  number, 
which  might  be  explained  by  an  original  "ipjsn.  Departing  from  laws  of  God 
is  an  expression  of  D.  in  Qal  which  is  prob.  original,  Dt.  912  +  7  t.,  n'DBffDE 
Ps.  119102;   not  elsw.  in  \p  in  this  sense.  —  24.    ^nxi]  =  2  S.  rpn»n;  shortened 


PSALM  XVIII.  157 

form  is  earlier  and  more  suited  to  1  consec.  —  ^QJ? J  =  2  S.  v?,  the  latter  better, 
more  likely  uy  assimilated  to  subsequent  context.  —  rnen^in]  Hithp.  cohort, 
impf.  c.  1  consec.  idip  with  two  accents.  This  form  of  2  S.  is  older  and  better 
than  the  "igfJBM  of  Ps.  Two  accents  are  needed,  unless  we  separate  'D  and 
rd.  W)>  ID  ;  but  the  rhythm  is  not  so  good.  —  J  pjfl  n.m.  (1)  iniquity  1821*  (  = 
2  S.  2224)  10717,  as  recognised  y  Tin  3819,  y  hdd  nS  32s;  (a)  of  punishment  : 
'1  y  -ypD  89s3,  y  by  -ia>  3912,  rp^S  y  htf  908,  73  Sdj  10310,  y  iDtf  1303;  (t>)  of 
forgiveness  or  removal:  yh  rho  2511  1033  Ex.  34s  Nu.  1419  (J)  Je.  3134  33s 
36s,  y  xvi  Pss.  32s  853  Ex.  347  Nu.  1418  (J)  Is.  33s4  Ho.  143  Mi.  718;  (c)  of 
covering  over:  y  nso  Ps.  7838  Pr.  166  Is.  2214  27s  Dn.  924,  cf.  1  S.  314  Je.  1823; 
(d)  of  cleansing  from  :  yn  D2D  Ps.  514,  y  nnn  v.11;  (e)  of  imputing,  reckon- 
ing to  one:  b  y  atfn  32s  2  S.  1920,  (b)  y  nor  Ps.  79s  Is.  64s  Je.  1410  Ho.  813 
99i  y  "*?})  Ps.  10914;  (/)  of  ransoming  from  :  yn  mo  1308.  (2)  Guilt  of 
iniquity  (not  always  easy  to  distinguish  from  (1)),  7  nxd  Ps.  36s  Gn.  4416  (E), 
y  "hi  Ps.  595;  as  great,  increased,  38s  4013  49s  65*;  fas  a  condition  yi: 
c.  SSin  Ps.  517;  c.  jnj  Jos.  2220  P;  c.  mo  Je.  31s0  Ez.  31s-19  i817-18  33s-9. 
(3)  Consequence  of,  or  punishment  for  iniquity :  y  by  y  run  Ps.  6928,  y2 
c.  various  vbs.  3111  10643  Gn.  1915  (J)  Lv.  2639  (H)  Je.  516  Ez.  417  +  3  t.— 
25.  "»f7"7V?  *!?  nin'1  3#*l]  vb.  =  Hiph.  impf.  c.  )  consec.  of  aitf.  This  phr. 
repeats  essentially  v.21;  it  begins  another  and  still  later  gl.  of  a  gnomic  type, 
coming  from  the  Greek  period  of  WL  —  >*v  -02]  reduction  to  »*p  in  2  S.  is 
a  unique  expression  and  doubtless  txt.  err.  —  26.  TtKjnn]  Hithp.  impf.  2  m. 
iDn  vb.  denom.  (v.44). —  a^pn  laa]  =  2  S.  ccri  -naj.  Neither  13J  nor  niaj  is 
needed ;  in  all  other  lines  there  is  a  single  word.  naj  is  an  Aramaism  for 
naj.  and  not  original.  ni3J  is  an  interpretation  of  a  "DJ  which  has  come  in  by 
mistake  from  the  line  below.  —  27.  121]  Niph.  ptc.  of  %  *na  vb.  purify,  and 
so  Niph.  be  purified,  pure  ;  a.X.  in  ptc;  in  pf.  Is.  5211  of  ceremonial  purifica- 
tion of  those  bearing  sacred  vessels.  Hithp.  here  and  Dn.  1210.  These  three 
lines  are  in  exact  parallelism,  with  same  preposition  a;',  syn.  nouns,  and  syn.  vbs. 
reflexive  of  the  nouns,  nonnn,  DOfin,  "nann. —  ^nsnn  b^jj  d;;]  f  tfjW  adj.  twisted, 
perverted:  (1)  as  adj.  Dt.  325  Ps.  ioi4;  (2)  as  noun  masc,  of  persons  Ps. 
18W  -  2  S.  2227  Pr.  225,  of  things  Pr.  88,  cstr.  Pr.  1720  191  28°,  pi.  215  u20. 
Hithp.  of  vb.  &py  is  not  used,  so  the  glossator  substituted  the  kindred  Snsnn 
Hithp.  of  f  [^fi]  twist,  a.X.  in  Hithp.  and  only  usage  of  this  vb.  in  \p.  2  S. 
has  corrupted  it  to  *?9nn  =  shew  oneself  perverse,  or  crooked ;  elsw.  found  only 
in  Niph.  Gn.  308  (E)  of  struggling  in  a  circle,  Jb.  513  of  acting  falsely ;  so 
also  Pr.  88  (||  ^P>).  —  28.  nn«  >?]  =  2  S.  nx\  The  two  readings  may  best  be 
explained  on  the  basis  of  an  original  nxi.  The  1  is  intensive  and  so  expressed 
by  >a  in  the  Ps.,  and  the  nx  is  nx,  as  usual  in  most  ancient  Hebrew.  —  *>r;  uy] 
phr.  a.X.  For  *y;  v.  913.  —  r^nV]  =  2  S.  D^on,  Qal  ptc.  pi.  nn  (z/.  914)  for  the 
lofty, powerful  {v.  also  Jb.  2122,  where  Di.,  Bu.,  refer  to  angels);  of  enemies 
exalting  themselves  against,  c.  by  Ps.  133  27s;  c.  jo  Nu.  247  (poet.),  by  dtj? 
of  2  S.  here  is  justified  by  Ps.  32s.  It  is  impossible  to  explain  txt.  of  Ps.  from 
txt.  of  2  S. ;  but  if  we  start  with  the  latter,  D*D"1  by  rpj*p  thine  eyes  are  upon 
the  lofty,  we  may  regard  the  txt.  of  Ps.  as  a  paraphrase,  S'fitfn  being  exegetical 


158  PSALMS 

of  s;*  and  2  pers.  sf.  of  Yr>,  and  then  moi  owy  explanation  of  o*n"\  in  terms 
of  WL  The  line  is  complete  without  Swn  ;  we  may  suppose  that  it  came 
into  the  text  of  2  S.  from  text  of  Ps.     The  original  would  then  be : 

o^di  hy  r\wjn 

—  29.   Ps.  =  oar!  n^  >r^n  mni  m  *vNn  nnN  >3 
2  S.  =  wn  n\p  mm  mm  i-vj        nn«  ^ 

The  vb.  "VHP  in  Ps.  is  unnecessary  ;  it  is  doubtless  a  paraphrase.  >jjSk  is  the 
usage  of  the  Ps.,  and  is  more  probable  than  double  ron\  J -0  'lamp ;  in  ^ 
only  fig.;  of  prosperity  here  and  13217  (wpd1?  "U  T3V)i  latter  prob.  based 
on  this  passage  ;  of  the  Law  as  guide  119106.  "vnn  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  ~\iN  vb. 
shine  (v.  134).  Hiph.  light  a  lamp  only  here,  but  light  wood  Is.  27 ll,  altar 
fire,  Mai.  i1'. — 30.  r|3]  instrumental,  emph.  —  tfm  pw]  /f««  tip  to  a  band. 
Ba.,  after  Lag.,  Ki.,  rds.  tru  fW,  /  <$m//6  aW»  a  walled  (town)  ;  so  Lucian 
of  2  S.  irecppay/JL^vos ;  Du.  favours  pm,  but  doubts  nnj.  But  there  is  no 
usage  to  justify  inj  pxn.     There  is  more   to  justify   pn   vb.  Qal,  run;   in 

1  S.  1722  David  runs  c.  ace.  navon  up  to  the  army;  although  this  is  not  in 
hostility,  yet  there  is  no  reason  why  ace.  should  not  be  used  in  case  of  hos- 
tility, as  well  as  in  case  of  friendly  running  ;  so  fig.  Pss.  196  11932;  run  and 
prepare  (in  hostility)  59s.  —  %  "Wf  n-m«  troop,  or  band  of  marauders;  this  is 
suited  to  early  hostile  relations;  cf.  Gn.  4919  (poem),  also  vb.  Ps.  94'21. — 
"«tf  ^"!«]  vb.  =  Pi.  impf.  of  f  •>t,*<  Qal,  leap,  not  in  \p,  1  S.  5s  (6)  Zp.  I9.  Pi. 
leap  a.X.  in  \f/  (1830  =  2  S.  2230) ;  as  a  stag  Is.  35s;  c.  hy  loci  Ct.  28.  It  is 
nowhere  else  connected  with  -nr,  or  cstr.  with  ace.  fiitf  n.  Ttw//,  rare 
word  in  Heb.,  but  same  in  Ar.  and  Aram.  =  2  S.  2230;  elsw.  Gn.  492'2. — 
31.  ^-n  o^pn  *?n-i]  cf.  Dt.  32*  )Syc  D^on  nwn.  —  nens  mm  rnon]  although  in 

2  S.  also,  yet  an  early  gl.  from  Pr.  306.  —  "o  D*D^nn  SbS  Kin  jir]  It  might  be 
that  this  1.  was  taken  from  the  same  place.  Certainly  it  has  been  influenced 
by  Pr.  305,  although  S3  is  a  later  expansion,  marring  the  rhythm.  But  this 
section  of  Ps.  is  composed  of  couplets,  and  v.31°  needs  its  complement,  and 
that  is  found  in  v.31c;  v.'!16  is  a  late  gnomic  utterance,  out  of  harmony  with 
the  Ps.,  but  v.31c  is  suited  to  it.  God  as  a  shield  po  is  an  early  idea  (v.  j4). 
For  3  non  v.  v.36;  but  the  original  was  prob.  sg.,  as  context  is  I  sg. ;  rd. 
^3  «trrV\  —  32.  '^ao  m*?«  *D  »a],  2  S,  has  ^n,  an  earlier  form  of  the  divine 
name,  and  doubtless  correct.  —  'P^i?  ">w  *Dl].  2  S.  repeats  HjfSaD.  |  ,ipL,3 
(composite  Sa  neg.  and  "^  unto)  used  in  the  sense  besides,  except,  elsw. 
Jos.  2219  (P)  Is.  4311  446-  8  '452i#  j, pi,,,  is  more  common,  2  S.  722  Ho.  13* 
Is.  455-  21  64s.  The  term  is  monotheistic  like  Is.2,  and  not  like  D^K3  nsiD3  "«D 
Ex.  1511.  It  seems  prob.  that  the  original  was  r,  and  that  an  editor  under 
influence  of  Is.'2  adapted  it  by  inserting  nySac,  which  appears  in  both  11.  in 
2  S.,  while  the  second  1.  of  Ps.  in  better  style  uses  viSit.  The  11.  are  too  long 
with  these  words  inserted.  —  \  p^Sk]  God ;  used  Dt.  3215-17,  and  on  this  basis 
as  archaism  in  late  poetry  Pss.  50'22  1147  13919  Jb.  3*  +  40  t.  Jb.  Pr.  305  Is.  44s 


PSALM  XVIII.  159 

Hb.  33  Ne.  917  (v.  Intr.  §  32).  — 33.  >^tKDn]  Pi.  ptc.  of  im,  rel.  with  art. 
2  S.  \n>'D;  nix  is  sustained  by  *jnjKfl]  v.40a  of  Ps.  and  unirn  contr.  from  -uxn 
of  2  S.  "its  vb.  Qal,  gird,  gird  on,  not  in  \f/ ;  but  Pi.  i833-4°  (c.  ace.  h]r\); 
3012  (nncir);  elsw.  Is.  45s  5011.  Hithp.  Ps.  931  c.  ace.  ?;;  cf.  Is.  89- 9. — 
•o-n  ]n\\]  =  2  S.  °i~)1  nnn,  but  text  of  latter  uncertain  and  it  makes  no  good 
sense,  fro  in  sense  of  make  elsw.  v.41  39s  6912  13512,  etc.  tjti  here  is  the 
way  for  the  feet.  1  consec.  expresses  result  here  and  below,  and  so. — 
34.  r*S»«]  pi.  of  f  n^;N  n.f.  /h'^,  doe,  18U  (=  2  S.  2234)  299  (?)  Hb.  319  Jb.  391 
Gn.  4921  (j)  Ct  27  35T.  cf#  ns»M  Ps.  221  Pr.  519  Je.  145.  — >jy^P  »rJD3  ^]  emph. 
noun  first.  niDJ  for  battle-fields,  pi.  of  J  nna  n.f.  >&z£7&  //aw  2  S.  I19-  25  (poem) 
Ps.  7858,  of  Israel  Ps.  18U  =  28.  22s4  Dt."^13  Is.  5814,  cf.  Dt.  3329  Hb.  319; 
of  God  Am.  413,  cf.  Mi.  i3  Jb.  9*  Is.  I4M.  —  VjvpjP]  Hiph.  only  here  in 
this  connection  with  mng.  cause  to  hold  one's  ground  in  battle.  Qal  is 
used  in  sense  of  making  a  stand,  holding  one's  ground,  Am.  215  2  K.  io4 
Mai.  32,  'JfiS  Ju.  214  et  al.,  c.  by  for  one's  life  Est.  811  910.  —  35.  w  id|?D 
ncn^p^]  adopted  in  1441  and  enlarged  :  ncnSpS  vnyasK  anp?  >y  nnScn. 
—  >njnn?  ntf-iru  naff?  nnrui].  The  1.  is  too  long.  n#i2  is  a  gl.  explaining  nirim, 
copper,  bronze,  as  material  of  bow,  elsw.  Jb.  2024,  from  which  nfift»  may  have 
come  into  the  text,  nrrui  =  2  S.  nrm,  usually  explained  after  AE.  as  Pi.,  the 
latter  3  m.  sg.,  c.  1  consec.  for  3  f.  sg.  of  Ps.  —  %  [rrn]  vb.  Qal,^<?  down, 
descend:  to  attack  Je.  21 13,  into  Sheol  Jb.  21 13,  fig.  in  chastisement  (hand  of 
"*)  Ps.  38s;  c.  a  descend  into,  make  an  impression  (of  reproof)  Pr.  1710. 
Niph.  sq.  a  penetrate  Ps.  38^  (arrows  of"1).  Pi.  /r^5J  down,  furrows  of  land 
Ps.  6511,  so  £D~B  (but  with  doubt),  press  down,  stretch  bronze  weapon  (bow) 
1835  =  2  S.  2215,  but  bow  was  not  stretched  with  hands,  but  with  feet,  v.  713. 
Ki.  regards  the  forms  as  Niph.  of  nnn  be  broken,  cf.  Je.  5166.  (g  edov, 
U  posuisti ;  so  essentially  &,  3,  01,  all  suggest  nnro,  which  is  most  prob.  — 
36.  >S  ffjnij  1  consec.  as  v.336. — ir^,,i]  l  circumstantial. — uann  rpiJ>  ]  = 
2  S.  ^ann  nnjjn;  ®>  ©»  ^  ireuhda  <rov  ;  T5  et  disciplina  tua ;  so  j$,  Aq., 
17  irpabr-qs  aov ;  3  mansuetudo  tua ;  Ols.,  We.,  rd.  "]mr>?.  The  shorter  text 
of  2  S.  is  alone  sustained  by  both  Vrss.  and  the  unpointed  ijann  injyi ;  but 
this  makes  too  short  a  line.  —  t niJ:.]  n-f«  (')  humility,  meekness,  45s;  so  2225 
(Aq.,  3);  elsw.  Pr.  1533  1812  224  Zp.  23;  (2)  condescension,  usually  given 
here  is  without  authority,  and  to  be  rejected  ;  the  idea  itself  is  a  late  one. 
Jpjp  Qal  inf.  cstr.  c.  sf.  2  sg.  of  ny;  answer  (v.  35)  in  the  sense  of  response, 
in  docility  to  the  divine  guidance,  is  sustained  by  Ho.  217,  and  this  is  near  to 
@  of  2  S.  wraKor/.  <&  of  Ps.  iraifiela  suggests  nij"  afflicting,  disciplining ; 
cf.  Ps.  1321.  The  sf.  would  then  be  objective,  ^ann  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.,  c.  sf. 
1  sg.  of  nan  in  the  sense  of  educate,  found  in  Pi.  (of  the  bringing  up  of  chil- 
dren) La.  222  Ez.  192,  but  in  its  application  to  the  training  of  men  it  is  late ; 
so  that  in  this  case  also  we  get  a  late  conception.  The  <&  of  Ps.  gives  us  a 
conflation:  77  iraideia  aov  a.vibpduae'v  /xe  els  tAos,  kclI  tj  Taidela  aov  ami)  fie 
5i5ct£ei. —  37.  a'rnn]  enlarge;  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  (of  graphic  description, 
v.  42).  — Jngs]  nm-  steP>  so  2  S.  2237  for  place  of  stepping,  not  elsw.  in  \L>. 
X  V*  vb.  Qal,  step  Ps.   688  =  Ju.  54  of  1  stepping  in  theophany.     f  [*W*?] 


IbO  PSALMS 

n.[m.]  step  Dn.  II4G  {at  his  steps) ;  fig.  of  course  of  life  Ps.  37s23  Pr.  2024.— 
V70-9  nyn]  phr.  a.X.  t  ["'>-]  VD-  Qal,  to/ter,  *//#/£<?  :  of  ankles  Ps.  1837  = 
2  S."  2237  Jb.  125;  subj.  on-^N  Ps.  3731;  cf.  261.  Hiph.  cause  to  totter,  shake, 
Ps.  69s4  Ez.  297  (?).  Pu.  not  in  $,  but  Pr.  2510.  ^oy_  pi.  c.  sf.  1  sg.  of  [>D-\,->] 
n.f.  ankles  (BDB.)  a.X.  — 38.  Dn'ta  iy]  Pi.  inf.  cstr.  c.  sf.  3  pi.  J  ."to  vb.  be 
complete,  at  an  end,  finished.  Qal  in  \f/  only:  (i)  w^  away,  be  exhausted, 
fail,  3111  719  73'26  102*  1437;  pine,  languish,  69*,  cf.  119s-- 123;  with  longing 
84*  11981;  (2)  come  to  an  end,  vanish,  perish  (by  judgment  of  '*•)  7113; 
hyperb.,  by  severe  discipline  3720*  20  3911  907.  Pi.  (1)  put  an  end  to,  cause 
to  cease,  7881;  (2)  cause  to  fail,  use  up,  spend,  years  909;  (3)  destroy,  exter- 
minate, subj.  man  11987;  t  mV:)  i?  =  2  S.  2238,  also  1  S.  1518,  1  K.  2211  = 
2  Ch.  1810;  subj.  God,  abs.  Ps.  59"- 14  7411  (?).    Pual,  be  finished,  ended,  7220.— 

39.    Ps.  =    oip  -V?3>  kSl  osncN 

2  S.  =  pWp1  N^  D5™?£}  D^?^ 

(S  of  2  S.  has  *al  ^Xdcw  aurous  nal  ou/c  dvao-T^o'oj'Tcu.  D^3Kl  is  a  repetition 
of  m^a  by  error  of  enlargement  and  addition  to  the  text  ;  but  1  consec.  is 
possibly  expressive  of  result,  and  original.  *hy  nS)  is  also  an  interpretation 
of  the  modal  force  of  plMp*.  c*n?N  Hiph.  impf.  1  sg.  c.  sf.  3  pi.  of  X  t'no  vb. 
Qal,  smile  through  foes  ;  elsw.  in  Ps.  no5,  their  heads  6S22  no6  Hb.  313  Ju.  s26, 
loins  Dt.  3311;  cf.  Ps.  6824  (?).  — l'-'S']  in  2  S.  more  correctly  ftin;  the  Ps. 
would  make  it  future,  for  Israel ;  2  S.  makes  it  past,  of  David's  experience. 
40.  nsnSipS  S?n  'rimm  (=  2  S.  V?*™)  is  so  near  v.330  as  to  be  suspicious; 
however,  it  is  in  both  texts,  and  it  might  be  a  resumption  of  thought  at  begin- 
ning of  new  Str.  —  S^.3?]  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.,  1  consec.  omitted  here  and  in 
2  S.  also.  X  Hiph.  of  9*0  cause  to  bow  down  in  death;  in  \p  elsw.  /713  7831.  — 
••ruin]  2  S.  *jnnri  older  form.  —  41.  "?^],  1  is  either  emph.  or  circumstantial. 
—  H"y  FJ]  phr»  elsw.  Ex.  23s7  (E)  2  Ch.  29s;  of  hand  on  neck  of  fleeing 
foe  Gn.  498,  7  "ion  Jos.  78,  y  njo  712  (JE);  *\y  n.m.  not  elsw.  in  \p. — 
D^DJK  wlfeflDi]  =  2  S.  dp'-esni  *wfPD.  The  transposition  of  1  is  all  the  more 
significant  that  2  S.  attaches  »wfrD  to  «pjj  ;  but  that  makes  the  previous  line 
too  long.  If  2  S.  be  correct,  it  is  best  to  take  1  as  l  consec.  emph.  change  of 
tense,  so  making  two  tones  for  measure.  If  Ps.  be  correct,  1  is  probably  cir- 
cumstantial, but  a  tone  is  missing,  f  (>::x]  vb.  put  an  end  to,  exterminate .' 
Qal  only  La.  3s3.  Niph.  only  Jb.  617  2317.  Pi.  only  Ps.  119139.  Pilel  only 
Ps.  88l7(?).  Hiph.  only  in  ^  ;  of  man's  extermination  of  enemies  18U  (  = 
2  S.  2241),  of  wicked  ioi5-  8  096  (txt.  err.),  of  God's  exterminating  54?  73s27 
9423-  23  14312.  &  has  here,  both  in  Ps.  and  2  S.,  ifaXtdpevaas  ;  F,  3,  disper- 
didisti,  on^Din  refer,  to  God,  but  Aq.,  Sb,  2,  and  QL  1  p.  as  %—  42.  iyiir>] 
#<?/  <rry  /or  /&<•//,  Pi.  impf.  3  m.  pi.  (v.  j3),  for  which  2  S.  has  i?V)  impf.  of 
n;«c;  look  about  (for  help),  but  this  sense  elsw.  only  in  Hithp.  Is.  4110.  Du. 
suggests  r;v"  as  a  play  upon  jpb^d  ;  this  is  tempting  (v.  38).  —  s;*]  of  Ps.  err. 
of  late  style  for  "?n  of  2  S.  —  43.  DfWiBtel]  1  coord.;  but  original  was  1  consec. 
as  above.  —  irmn'hf  iDp]  of  Ps.  is  a  later  metaphor  for  the  simpler  ps  -idi?3 


PSALM  XVIIL  l6l 

of  2  S.  —  nixin  BMD3J  m»f/  of  the  streets,  always  sim„  of  ignominious  defeat  or 
treatment;  elsw.  Mi.  710  Zc.  93  io6;  cf.  Ps.  6915  of  a  bog,  fig.  of  distress; 
|i»n  -b  Ps.  403;  o»o  n.m.  not  elsw.  in  ^. —  OiTT*]  =  2  S.  DgjpM  Dg"W,  The 
second  word  in  2  S.  is  gl.  of  first.  (£  \eavC),  V  delebo  ;  so  &,  2T,  of  Ps.  give 
DjnN,  for  which  cpnx,  npnx  is  a  txt.  err.  pn  (z/.  35s)  does  not  suit  B^B,  but 
opix  does  =  Hiph.  impf.  1  sg.  c.  sf.  3  pi.  of  \  pp^.  Qal  not  in  \p.  Hiph. 
make  dust  of,  pulverise  :  "\Djt>  2  K.  23s  (of  Ashera)  ||  2  Ch.  344-7;  so  of  the 
nsj  2  K.  2315;  fig.  Mi.  413  (201  DMD?);  so  here  also.  — 44.  ^aSon]  =  2  S. 
*xhbF\i;  1  consec.  original,  makes  new  start  as  v.28-  33- 36- 40.  —  DJ  Onn] 
2  S.  iqy  is  original ;   the  Ps.  generalises.     JD  prep.,  "on  pi.  cstr.     J  an  n.m. 

(1)  strife:  mpa  "\  5510  ;  PUB'S  -\  3121;  (2)  a  cause  35'23  431  7422  119154; 
112'j  >an  2  S.  2244  seems  to  imply  civil  contention,  and  so  was  generalised  in 
Ps.  to  refer  to  foreign  peoples.  —  UgMrn]  =  2  S.  U/),D«fa  ;  the  latter  presup- 
poses David  already  chief  of  nations ;  the  former,  his  being  set  there  by 
Yahweh  for  the  first  time.  The  text  of  Ps.  is  simpler  and  more  probable. 
D*fe  is  also  more  suited  to  tfsnS.  —  trso]  in  sense  of  chief  not  elsw.  in  \f/,  but 
in  early  writers  Dt.  33s  I  S.  1517  Ju.  II8  Ho.  22 ;  cf.  Jb.  2925.  —  45.  J  nji] 
n.[m.]  that  which  is  foreign  :  t"^K"0  *#  18^'^  =  2  S.  2245- 46  Ps.  I447-  u 
Ez.  447  Is.  56°  6010  615  62s,  naj(n)  p  Gn.  1 712- 27  Ex.  I243(P)  Lv.  2225  (H) 
Ez.  449-  9  Ne.92  Is.  56s,  none  earlier  than  Ez.;  elsw.  in  \p,  '}  hs-jn  1374,  -nj  S« 
8110  Dt.  3212  Mai.  211.  t^?l  a  foreigner  69°.  This  phr.  implies  either  an 
insertion  not  earlier  than  the  Persian  Period,  or  else  that  the  whole  \j/  is  so 
late.  —  ^"ictt]  =  2  S.  *S~*tfr©m.  %  ^n:>  VD-  t  Qal»  grow  lean  (of  flesh)  only 
10924;  usually  Pi.  in  early  writers  deceive,  but  in  \J/  only  cringe  sq.  S  pers.  18& 
663  8i16.  Cf.  f  Niph.  cringe  sq.  •?  pers.  only  Dt.  3329.  f  Hithp.  only  2  S.  22$. 
—  46.  ">si,'J  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  of  Saj  (v.  i3)  sink,  drop  down  exhausted ;  elsw. 
in  this  sense  Ex.  1818  (E)  Jb.  1418.  —  M*y™]  =  2  S.  FUHM,  1  coord,  f  jnn  vb. 
Qal,  quake  ;  Aramaism,  a.X.  -un  of  2  S.  gird,  gird  on,  is  a  common  vb.,  but 
gives  no  sense  ;  rd.  either  warn  as  Mi.  717,  which  greatly  resembles  this  pas- 
sage (v.  45),  or  l-nrp  tremble,  which  is  often  used  pregnantly  with  JB,  come 
trembling  Ho.  n^.U  and  with  other  prep.  I  S.  137  164  212  Gn.  4228  (E). — 
DmnniDOB]  =  2  S.  DnnaDBB  has  two  accents  as  long  word  with  prep.  p. 
JrnaOB  n.f.  fastness;  in  this  sense  elsw.  Mi.  717,  but  in  sense  of  border,  rim, 
in  Historical  Books.  Cf.  %  "UpO  dungeon  Is.  2422,  fig.  of  exile  427  Ps.  1428. — 
47.  mm  ">n]  Yahweh  liveth,  elsw.  formula  of  oath  (Ju.  819  +)•  XV  a^J«  alive, 
living:  (1)  (a)  of  God,  as  the  living  One,  fountain  of  life;  so  here  = 
2  S.  2247;  cf.  n  ^n  Pss.  42s  84s  (rd.  «n  both  cases,  and  so  D"n),  also  Jos.  310  (J) 
Ho.  21;  cf.  >n  0'nSn  2  K.  I94- 16  =  Is.  374- 17,  D"n  h  Dt.  523  1  S.  i720- 36  Je.  io10 
2336-  (°)  Of  man>  usually  pi.  o^n  alive,  living,  Ps.  5516  1243;  D"n(n)  y\H 
land  of  the  living  Pss.  2713  527  1425,  also  Is.  3811  53s  Je.  II19  Ez.  2620  3223  +  5t- 
Jb.  2813;  m  nvroc  Ps.  1169;  Ti  -ibd  6929;  'nn  lis  5614  Jb.  3330.  (c)  Animals 
and  man,  phr.  for  either  or  both,  >n  Sd  Pss.  1432  14516  Gn.  320  821  (J)  Jb.  1210 
2821  3023;   cf.  Gn.  619  (P).     (d)  Vegetation,  as  thorns,  green  Ps.  5810  (dub.). 

(2)  Lively,  active  :  a  in  la*1**  Ps.  3820  (dub.) ;  elsw.  in  this  sense  only  2S.  2320 
(but  Qr.  preferable-,    -mm  comes  with  following  phr.  in  Ps.  1441,  which  has 


1 62  PSALMS 

nw  i  inn;  this,  being  in  a  pentameter  line,  one  word  must  be  omitted.  If 
mm  be  omitted,  we  have  the  citation  »*\W  T|n3.  mm  has  prob.  been  inserted 
after  fna  in  1441  and  before  it  in  1847.  *yru  Qal  ptc.  pass,  of  "pa  (v.  j13)  : 
J  1  inn  blessed  be  or  u  Ka/fcz^/fc  28s  3122  4114  7218  8963  10648  11912  1246  13521 
1441  (but  v.  above);  0>rbn  '2  6620  688G;  »nr  '3  6S2);  cf.  ]vhy  Sn  '3  Gn.  1420; 
n«  '3  Ps.  /<?#  =  2  S.  2247  (also  Ps.  1441,  z>.  above) ;  1*n33  Dtf  '2  Ps.  7219.  — 
cn;i]  =  2  S.  DTI  &  exalted,  of  God;  elsw.  2114  46"-  n  57s- 12  =  1086  113* 
1386  (v.  ptt). —  yth  ^mSx]  =  2  S.  yth  "MX  ^hSn.  mx  is  more  primitive  and 
the  term  of  original  Ps.  It  may,  however,  have  come  into  text  from  line 
above,  as  it  is  tautological.  Cf.  nw  »Sh  v.8,  y&  pp  v.8.  —  48.  rV»DM]  deeds 
of  vengeance,  pi.  of  \  nopJ  n.f.  vengeance  :  c.  jnj  Ps.  18&  =  2  S.  2248  48  Ez. 
25i4. 17  (0f  God);  Nu.  313  (P)  of  Israel  1  1  'J  jruj  elsw.  D1  'j  Ps.  7910; 
'j  ^n  941"1;  of  Israel  and  its  chiefs  'J  nfcp  1497.  —  ijpy]  =  2  S.  m-vc-i.  Text 
of  Ps.  gives  an  Aramaic  word,  Hiph.  of  nai  subdue,  elsw.  only  47*.  But  text 
of  2  S.,  Hiph.  of  TV,  gives  a  good  ancient  word  in  sense  of  bring  down,  lay 
prostrate,  Am.  31  Is.  io18  63s  Ps.  56s.  TW  is  favoured  by  1442,  which  is 
based  on  this  Ps.  and  reads  win  *oj  "nVVi  (Aq.,  3,  5>,  E,  all  have  pi.). — 
Win]  =  2  S.  »jpnn  as  above,  v.40.  — 49.  Hptao]  =  2  S.  wjtm.  This  is  inten- 
tional variation  HflkfiD  v.3",  "•joScn  v.44".  2  S.  gives  better  parallel  with  >JDD^nn, 
—  '3  wig]  contracted  from  "O^s  \x^  needed  for  third  beat  as  in  v.4u6.  —  *Dp  jo] 
for  2  S.  »pj|0  ;  only  ■)*  of  Ps.  is  explanatory  of  1  of  2  S.  —  Den  B^kd]  =  2  S. 
D'DDn  VfrHQ.  This  makes  third  1.  of  verse  and  is  suspicious.  The  sg.  is  usual 
14012  Pr.  331  16'29;  but  pi.  140- 6  man  of  violent  deeds.  The  pi.  is  favoured 
by  rV»D£J  v.48*,  n^JWtH  v.51°  (v.  j3) ;  but  the  sg.  by  the  individual  reference  of 
the  original  Ps.  —  51.  ntyw;  ^9]  phr.  a.\.  'ryo  Hiph.  ptc.  V-u  vb.  Qal, 
become  great  92*+,  be  magnified  3527 +.  Hiph.  (1)  make  great  4110  (?) 
Ob.12;  (2)  magnify,  here  as  Gn.  1919  (J)  Is.  4221  Ps.  1382.  2  S.  SnjD  Kt., 
but  Vnjp  Qr.  n.m.  tower,  a.X.  for  'j-ud  4818  614. 


PSALM   XIX. 

Ps.  19  is  composed  of  two  originally  separate  poems:  (A)  a 
morning  hymn,  praising  the  glory  of  'El  in  the  heavens  (v.2"5*), 
and  glorious  movements  of  the  sun  (v.w) ;  (2?)  a  didactic  poem, 
describing  the  excellence  of  the  Law  (v.*"n),  with  a  petition  for 
absolution,  restraint  from  sin,  and  acceptance  in  worship  (v.12"15). 

A.       V.2"7,    2    STR.    63. 

THE  heavens  are  telling  the  glory  of  'El, 
His  handiwork  the  firmament  is  declaring; 
Day  poureth  forth  speech  unto  day, 
Night  maketh  known  knowledge  unto  night; 
In  all  the  earth  their  voice  is  gone  out, 
And  in  the  rounds  of  the  world  are  their  words. 


PSALM   XIX.  163 

p  OR  the  sun  there  is  set  up  his  tent. 

As  a  bridegroom  he  is  going  forth  from  his  canopy. 

He  rejoiceth  as  a  hero  to  run  his  course. 

From  the  bound  of  the  heavens  is  his  going  forth, 

And  unto  their  bounds  is  his  circuit, 

And  there  is  nothing  hidden  from  His  sun. 

B.      V.8"15,    2    STR.    65. 

HPHE  Law  of  Yahweh  is  perfect,  refreshing  the  soul; 

The  Testimony  of  Yahweh  is  trustworthy,  making  wise  the  simple ; 

The  Precepts  of  Yahweh  are  right,  rejoicing  the  heart ; 

The  Commandment  of  Yahweh  is  pure,  enlightening  the  eyes; 

The  (Saying)  of  Yahweh  is  clean,  enduring  forever ; 

The  Judgments  of  Yahweh  are  true,  vindicated  altogether. 
TV/TOREOVER  Thy  servant  is  warned  by  them ;  in  keeping  them  there  is  much 
reward. 

Errors  who  can  discern  ?     Clear  me  from  hidden  ones. 

Moreover  from  presumptuous  ones  restrain  Thy  servant ;   let  them  not  rule 
over  me. 

Then  shall  I  be  perfect,  and  cleared  from  much  transgression. 

Let  the  words  of  my  mouth  be  for  acceptance,  and  the  musing  of  my  mind, 

Before  Thee  continually,  Yahweh,  my  Rock  and  my  Redeemer. 

Ps.  19  was  in  IB,  then  in  fffl  and  ©3&  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33) ;  but  this  only 
applies  to  the  first  half  of  the  Ps.  v.2-7,  for  the  second  half  was  originally  a 
separate  poem.  The  first  half  has  the  trimeter  measure,  the  second  half  the 
pentameter.  The  first  half  is  a  morning  hymn  of  praise  of  the  glory  of 'El  as 
witnessed  by  heaven,  and  especially  of  the  sun.  The  second  half  is  not  a 
hymn,  but  a  didactic  poem  in  praise  of  the  Law.  These  were  combined  in 
order  that,  in  public  worship,  a  synthesis  of  the  two  might  be  made,  and  that 
it  might  be  seen  that  the  glory  of  Yahweh  in  the  Law  transcends  His  glory  in 
the  heavens.  The  latter  is  used  as  a  foil  to  emphasize  the  former  by  its 
antithesis.  The  date  of  the  first  half  is  not  difficult  to  determine.  Its  con- 
ception of  the  creation  v.2,  as  the  work  of  God's  hands,  resembles  that  of 
Ps.  8,  yet  without  betraying  the  influence  of  the  conceptions  of  creation 
either  of  Gn.  1  or  of  Gn.  2.  It  has  a  single  Aramaism  n?o  v.5;  but  that  is 
found  in  2  S.  23'2,  and  cannot  therefore  be  regarded  as  very  late,  non  v.7  is 
also,  as  a  poetic  term  for  sun,  not  earlier  than  Is.  3026,  used  elsw.  Is.  2423, 
Jb.  30'28,  Ct.  610.  This  is,  however,  a  poetic  term  which  might  have  been 
used  first  in  this  Ps.,  and  may  be  due  to  the  circumstances  out  of  which  it 
was  composed.  The  author  was  a  true  poet ;  an  enthusiastic  admirer  of  the  sun, 
which  is  here  personified,  as  are  days  and  nights,  the  heavens  and  the  firma- 
ment. It  may  have  been  written  as  a  protest  of  a  monotheist  against  the 
worship  of  Shemesh  as  a  deity,  described  in  Ez.  816,  and  common  among  the 
Jews  in  the  Babylonian  period.  At  the  same  time  it  must  be  admitted  that 
the  sun  in  the  second  Str.  is  not  declaring  the  glory  of  '£/,  as  are  the  heavens 


1 64  PSALMS 

and  firmament,  days  and  nights  of  the  first  Str.,  but  is  himself  the  object  ot 
admiration;  and  therefore  it  is  quite  possible  that  in  the  original  the  Ps.  was  a 
hymn  to  the  God  Shemesh,  and  was  subsequently  adapted  to  the  worship  of 
Yahweh.  JLn  cither  case  we  must  put  the  composition  in  the  Babylonian 
period,  when  such  sun  worship  was  characteristic  and  prevalent  among  the 
Hebrews  and  the  nations  which  influenced  them.  Since  writing  the  above  I 
have  read  GunkeFs  Ausgew'dhlte  Psalmen,  s.  24,  and  find  that  he  has  inde- 
pendently come  to  a  similar  conclusion.  The  second  half  of  the  Ps.  v.8-15  is  of 
an  entirely  different  character.  It  is  a  pentameter  in  praise  of  the  divine  Law, 
using  six  different  terms  for  it.  In  this  respect  it  resembles  Ps.  119,  which  is 
also  a  pentameter,  but  uses  eight  terms.  The  limitation  in  Ps.  19  is  due  to 
the  number  of  lines  in  the  Str.  D.  H.  Miiller  (Strophenbau  unci  Kesponsion, 
s.  60),  followed  by  Che.,  supplies  the  other  two  terms  for  Law  by  prefixing 
them  to  the  two  tetrameter  lines  that  follow,  thus  making  them  pentameters. 
This  is  tempting  from  that  point  of  view.  But  it  would  be  difficult  to  explain 
their  omission  from  all  texts  and  Vrss.;  and,  furthermore,  as  will  appear  in 
textual  notes,  this  couplet  is  a  gloss,  making  the  Str.  just  so  much  too  long  as 
compared  with  the  subsequent  Str.  In  other  respects  these  Pss.  are  so  alike 
that  they  must  be  attributed  to  the  same  period,  when  the  legislation  of  P  was 
the  great  central  and  substantial  fact  in  the  Hebrew  religion.  The  term  and 
conceptions  of  the  priestly  legislation  are  evident :  BMW,  sins  of  ignorance  01 
inadvertence  ||  nnnto,  over  against  D"-*?,  2->  pro  v.13-  u.  The  use  of  the  sacri- 
ficial term  pxns  v.15  is  to  be  noted.  The  term  nnjj  v.8  is  characteristic  of  P, 
and  is  emphasised  by  having  the  second  place  after  mm.  cnips  v.9  is  used 
elsw.  only  Pss.  1 19*  +  2° (°) *•  10318  in7,  and  is  very  late.  This  part  of  the  Ps. 
cannot  be  put  any  earlier  than  the  Greek  period.  V.11  is  gnomic  in  character, 
using  terms  and  conceptions  characteristic  of  WL  If  original,  it  implies  the 
Greek  period  also.  But  it  is  a  tetrameter  couplet.  It  makes  the  Str.  just 
these  two  lines  too  long;  it  is  therefore  a  gloss.  This  part  of  the  Ps.  was 
probably  earlier  than  Ps.  119. 

PSALM   XIX.   A. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  three  syn.  couplets,  the  first  and  second 
syn.  to  each  other  v.2-3,  the  third  synth.  v.5  to  them.  A  prosaic 
gloss  has  been  inserted  between  them  v.4.  —  2-3.  The  heavens, 
the  firmament,  day  and  night,  are  all  personified;  as  the  heavens 
50°  97°,  the  morning  stars  Jb.  ^S7,  the  hills  and  trees  Is.  551-, 
and  nature  in  general  Ps.  i482sq-  Jb.  i27sq-. —  are  telling  ||  is 
declaring^.  The  participles  indicate  that  this  action  goes  on 
continually  without  interruption.  These  pass  over  into  imper- 
fects, poureth  forth  ||  maketh  known\  because  it  is  necessary  to 
express   the  oft-repeated   action  of  one  day  pouring  forth  unto 


PSALM   XIXo  165 

another  day,  and  one  night  making  known  to  another  night  \  and 
these  latter  taking  up  the  strain  and  passing  it  on  to  their  succes- 
sors in  an  endless  chain  of  praise,  which  Ros.  compares  to  a  ring 
of  dancers  repeating  the  song  in  a  series,  and  Home,  "  like  two 
parts  of  a  choir  chanting  forth  alternately  the  praises  of  God." 
These  are  illustrative  conceptions  from  usages  of  other  nations ; 
but  there  is  no  evidence  that  the  Hebrews  had  these  usages,  or 
that  the  poet  thought  of  them.  The  theme  is  the  glory  of*El, 
especially  as  manifested  in  His  handiwork.  The  firmament,  the 
expanse  of  heaven,  is  conceived  as  having  been  spread  out  by  the 
hands  of  God  at  the  creation,  as  elsewhere  the  earth  Is.  42*  4424 
Ps.  1366,  and  so  as  ever  after  exhibiting  and  praising  the  master 
workman's  power  and  honour.  This  is  a  different  conception  of 
their  creation  from  that  of  Gn.  1,  where  they  are  created  by  word 
of  command.  It  rather  resembles  Ps.  84.  It  is  tempting  under 
the  circumstances,  with  Ges.,  to  think  of  the  speech  in  the  more 
specific  sense  of  hymn  ;  but  this  has  no  authority  in  Hebrew 
usage,  and  is  too  specific  for  the  subsequent  as  well  as  the  pre- 
vious syn.  terms.  The  speech  and  the  knowledge,  though  unde- 
fined by  suffix,  must,  from  the  context,  mean  speech  about  'El, 
and  knowledge  of  'El.  —  4.  There  is  no  speech  and  there  are  no 
words,  their  voice  is  not  heard '],  so  most  naturally  translated,  is 
rather  a  tame  explanation  of  the  previous  lines.  "  This  seems  to  be 
a  kind  of  correction  or  explanation  of  the  bold  figure  which  had 
ascribed  language  to  the  heavens,"  Pe.  It  is  difficult  to  see,  then, 
why  Pe.  did  not  draw  the  reasonable  inference  with  Ols.,  followed 
by  Du.,  that  it  is  a  prosaic  gloss.  This  internal  reason  is  fortified 
by  the  external  one  that  these  two  lines  make  this  Str.  just  two 
lines  too  long  in  proportion  to  its  antistr.  The  numerous  attempts 
to  get  an  appropriate  meaning  out  of  the  verse  have  all  failed  to 
give  satisfaction  ;  as  indeed  they  are  all  awkward  and  entirely  out  of 
place  in  a  Ps.  of  such  wonderful  simplicity,  terseness,  and  graphic 
power.  There  is  no  agreement  of  EV\  in  their  translations. — 
—  5aZ>.  In  all  the  earth],  emph.,  in  antith.  to  the  heavens  v.2°. 
The  heavens  are  telling  to  the  earth,  and  their  message  extends 
throughout  the  earth  |[  in  the  bounds  of  the  world],  that  is  in  the 
extreme  limits  of  the  inhabited  world.  —  their  voice],  in  accord- 
ance with  the  parallel,  their  words'],  but  this  requires,  with  most 


1 66  PSALMS 

modern  scholars,  after  the  ancient  versions,  the  correction  of  the 
Hebrew  text,  which  by  the  change  of  a  single  letter  reads  "  their 
line,"  instead  of  "  their  voice."  The  Hebrew  word  translated 
"  their  line  "  admits  only  of  the  meaning  measuring  line,  which, 
while  it  is  suited  to  the  thought  of  extension  to  the  earth's  limits, 
and  might  spring  into  the  mind  of  a  copyist  whose  attention  was 
confined,  in  copying,  to  this  single  line,  is  yet  out  of  harmony  with 
the  thought  which  is  emphasised  in  each  of  the  other  five  lines  of 
the  Str.  The  proposal  to  render  the  Hebrew  word  "  string  "  of  a 
musical  instrument,  and  so  the  string,  for  the  sound  of  it,  though 
urged  by  Ew.  and  others,  and  possibly  in  accordance  with  usage 
in  other  languages,  is  not  justified  by  Hebrew  usage. 

Str.  II.  is  progressive  throughout,  and  is  an  antistr.  to  the 
previous  one.  As  the  previous  Str.  sets  forth  the  glory  of  'El,  this 
Str.  describes  the  glory  of  the  sun. — be.  For  the  sun  is  set~\. 
The  sun  is  personified,  as  were  heavens  and  firmament,  day  and 
night,  of  the  previous  Str.,  yet  not  as  praising  the  creator,  but  as 
the  theme  of  the  praise  of  the  poet.  The  *El  of  the  previous  Str. 
does  not  appear  at  all  in  this  Str.,  unless  we  suppose  Him  to  be 
the  unexpressed  subject  of  the  verb  "set,"  and  so  render"  He  hath 
set."  The  vb.  may,  however,  be  more  properly  regarded  in  the 
present  context  as  having  a  general  subject  expressed  in  English 
by  the  passive,  "  is  set."  The  sun  is  emphasised  at  the  beginning 
and  also  at  the  close  of  this  Str.  v.:i,  as  the  great  theme  of  its 
praise.  It  is  therefore  really  put  in  parall.  with  the  *El  of  the 
previous  Str.,  while  the  poet  puts  himself  in  parall.  with  the  per- 
sonified heavens,  firmament,  day  and  night.  It  seems  most 
natural,  therefore,  to  identify  the  sun  with  'El.  Was  the  Ps., 
then,  originally  a  hymn  in  praise  of  the  god  Shemesh,  who  was 
worshipped  in  Jerusalem  just  before  the  exile,  Ez.  816?  or  is 
Shemesh  used  for  the  God  of  Israel,  as  in  Ps.  8412?  The  praise 
of  God  by  the  sun,  so  conspicuous  in  1483,  is  here  conspicuous  by 
its  absence.  On  the  whole,  it  seems  probable  that  the  Ps.  was 
originally  composed  in  honour  of  the  god  Shemesh,  and  that  it 
was  subsequently  adapted  by  a  few  changes  to  the  worship  of  the 
God  of  Israel,  by  interpreting  'El  in  accordance  with  Hebrew 
usage,  and  by  interpreting  the  vb.  as  having  'El  as  subject,  and  so 
giving  the  sun  a  subordinate  position.      It  is  probable  that  the 


PSALM  XIX.  167 

preposition  b  was  prefixed  by  the  editor,  and  was  not  original. 
The  original  probably  read,  "Shemesh  has  set  up  his  tent." 
J^  makes  a  still  further  modification  of  the  original  in  order  to 
connect  with  the  previous  Str.  by  adding  "in  them,"  which  was 
not  in  the  original  of  (3,  and  makes  the  line  too  long  for  the 
normal  measure.  The  reference  to  the  heavens,  which  was  doubt- 
less designed  by  this  addition,  can  only  be  made  proper  by  fol- 
lowing |^,  and  attaching  this  line  to  the  previous  one,  and  so 
destroying  the  strophical  organisation  of  the  Ps.  All  other  ex- 
planations give  grammatical  difficulties.  De  W.  thinks  of  the 
End  of  the  world  as  the  dwelling  of  the  sun.  Thus  Helios  turns 
into  Thetis ;  and  Ossian  gives  the  sun  a  shady  cave  in  which  to 
pass  the  night.  But  all  this  is  in  the  realm  of  mythology,  and  in 
so  far  as  these  ideas  are  based  on  primitive  worship  of  the  sun, 
rather  favours  the  thought  that  the  Ps.  was  originally  a  hymn  to 
Shemesh  =  Helios.  We  may  think  of  the  tent  of  the  sun  as  in 
Hb.  311,  where  sun  and  moon  have  their  dwelling;  or  of  the 
tent  of  the  god  Shemesh,  in  accordance  with  the  constant  concep- 
tion of  the  heavenly  temple  or  abode  of  God.  —  6.  "  And  he," 
emph.  reference  to  the  sun,  is  unnecessary  and  difficult  to  justify 
from  the  context,  and  it  destroys  the  measure.  It  is  doubtless  a 
gloss  due  to  the  effort  to  distinguish  between  'El  and  the  sun.  — 
As  a  bridegroom],  not  implying  a  marriage  of  the  sun,  but  setting 
forth  the  freshness,  the  vigour,  and  the  joy  with  which  the  rising 
sun  appears  in  the  East.  —  He  is  going  forth  from  his  canopy]. 
During  the  night  he  has  been  in  his  tent,  or  abode,  and  behind 
and  beneath  his  canopy;  at  daybreak  he  comes  forth  from  the 
night's  retirement  with  fresh,  youthful,  full-grown  vigour.  —  He 
rejoiceth  as  a  hero  to  run  his  course].  The  path  of  the  sun  in 
the  heavens  is  conceived  as  a  racecourse.  The  ancient  warrior  or 
hero  was  a  runner  as  well  as  a  fighter,  and  he  enjoyed  running  as 
well  as  fighting.  —  7.  From  the  bound  of  the  heavens],  the  extreme 
East,  is  his  going  forth],  rising.—  -unto  their  bounds],  the  extreme 
limits  of  the  West,  is  his  circuit],  the  fully  rounded  course.  —  And 
there  is  nothing  hidden],  all  things  throughout  the  earth  come 
under  his  inspection  during  his  circuit ;  nothing  on  the  earth's 
surface  escapes  from  his  rays.  — from  His  sun],  that  is  God's 
sun ;  so  the  Hebrew  word  is  elsewhere  always  translated,  and  in 


1 68  PSALMS 

this  sense  it  gives  the  most  appropriate  climax  in  antith.  to  the 
beginning  of  the  Str.  The  usual  rendering,  "  from  his  heat," 
while  etymologically  possible,  has  no  usage  whatever  to  justify  it, 
and  unduly  limits  the  thought  to  heat,  when  the  term  "  hid"  would 
more  naturally  suggest  light  of  the  sun,  which  is  thought  of  also 
under  the  more  general  word  "  His  sun."  At  the  same  time  it 
seems  likely  that  the  editor,  who  adapted  the  Ps.  to  the  worship 
of  the  God  of  Israel,  was  responsible  for  the  addition  of  the  suffix, 
and  that  the  original  simply  used  Hamah  as  a  parallel  word  to 
Shemesh,  both  alike  referring  to  the  same  god.  This,  then,  gives 
us  the  most  appropriate  climax,  that  all  things  earthly  are  under 
the  eye  of  God,  in  accordance  with  a  conception  common  to  the 
OT.,  that  God,  enthroned  in  heaven,  sees,  knows,  and  inspects 
all  things  earthly.  It  is  also  common  to  the  hymns  to  the  god 
Shemesh,  that  he  is  the  great  inspector  and  judge  of  all  the  earth. 

PSALM  XIX.    B. 

Str.  I.  7-10  has  six  syn.  lines  in  praise  of  the  Law.  There  are 
six  different  terms  for  Law,  one  for  each  line  of  the  Str.,  each 
technically  expressing  some  one  special  type  of  Law  in  ancient 
usage ;  but  it  is  doubtful  how  far  those  distinctions  were  felt  in 
the  time  when  this  Ps.  was  composed.  The  Law  of  Yahweh 
is  the  Law  conceived  as  teaching,  doctrine,  and  is  especially 
characteristic  of  special  laws  of  priestly  origin.  The  Testimony  is 
a  term  characteristic  of  the  priestly  legislation,  and  is  the  Law 
conceived  as  giving  testimony  for  Yahweh,  and  so  is  appropriate 
as  a  mate  of  "  Law."  Precepts  are  types  of  Law  known  only  to 
late  psalmists.  They  are  divine  prescriptions  of  Law.  This  term 
is,  indeed,  a  late  syn.  for  Commandment,  which  is  characteristic 
of  the  prophetic  commands  of  the  Deuteronomic  code.  —  The 
Saying],  for  so  we  must  correct  the  text,  for  "The  fear  of  Yah- 
weh," which  is  unknown  elsw.  as  a  term  for  Law,  and  was  a  mistake 
for  the  similar  Hebrew  word,  which  is  a  poetic  synonym  of  "Word  " 
in  the  usage  of  Ps.  119,  a  characteristic  term  of  the  most  ancient 
type  of  prophetic  Law,  and  one  which  least  of  all  could  be  omitted 
from  the  series.  It  is,  moreover,  most  appropriate  as  a  mate  for 
Judgments,  which  is  also  an  ancient  pre-Deuteronomic  type  of 
Law,  characteristic  of  the  Code  of  the  Covenant,  Ex.  21-22,  and 


PSALM   XIX.  169 

also  of  the  recently  discovered  code  of  the  ancient  king  Hamu- 
rabbi.  The  only  terms  of  Ps.  119  absent  are  the  "Word,"  the 
syn.  of  "  Saying,"  and  the  "  Statute,"  an  earlier  type  of  the  "Judg- 
ment " ;  the  terms  most  likely  to  be  omitted  by  a  late  Hebrew 
poet,  if  he  must  make  an  omission,  due  to  the  limitations  of  his 
Str.  Each  one  of  the  terms  for  Law  has  its  adjective.  These  do 
not  seem  specially  appropriate  to  the  particular  terms.  There 
seems  to  be  no  good  reason  why  they  should  not  be  used  inter- 
changeably here,  as  in  Ps.  119  on  a  much  larger  scale,  extending 
through  twenty-two  strophes.  These  adjectives  are  :  perfect, 
complete,  entire,  without  defect,  v.  1831;  trustworthy,  firm,  re- 
liable, to  be  depended  upon  ;  right,  equitable,  just ;  pure,  spotless  ; 
clean,  without  impurity  or  contamination  ;  true,  in  their  exact 
conformity  to  justice.  Each  of  the  legal  terms  has  also  its  benefi- 
cent activity :  "  refreshing  the  soul,"  or  "  restoring  "  it,  RV.,  impart- 
ing refreshment  to  the  inner  man,  his  true  soul-food,  as  Dt.  83 
Mt.  44.  The  translation  "  converting  the  soul,"  PBV.,  AV.,  while 
true  enough  in  itself,  and  in  accordance  with  other  uses  of  the 
term,  is  too  specific  here  and  not  in  accord  with  the  context.  — 
making  wise  the  simple],  imparting  the  divine  wisdom  contained 
in  the  Law  to  those  who  are  so  open-minded  that  they  are  capable 
of  receiving  it.  —  ?'ejoici?ig  the  heart],  taking  hold  of  the  affections 
and  imparting  gladness  as  well  as  instruction.  —  enlightening  the 
eyes'],  the  eyes  of  the  mind,  so  that  they  may  see  and  understand, 
cf.  n^105130  Eph.  i18.  —  enduring  forever],  not  transient,  but  per- 
manent ;  not  changeable,  but  standing  firm  and  immovable.  — 
vindicated  altogether],  cf.  516  ;  so  in  accordance  with  all  the 
previous  lines,  and  not  "  righteous  "  as  a  quality  ;  for  statements  as 
to  quality  are  reserved  in  all  the  other  lines  for  the  first  half  of  the 
verse.  The  Str.  has  come  to  an  appropriate  conclusion.  If  it 
were  to  be  continued,  the  two  missing  words  for  Law  would  be 
used  with  appropriate  adjectives  and  verbal  clauses. 

11.  These  two  words  are  indeed  supplied  by  D.  H.  Miiller,  and 
Che.  at  the  beginning  of  the  two  lines  of  the  following  couplet, 
but  even  then  these  lines  would  be  entirely  different  in  character 
from  the  previous  ones. 

They  are  to  be  desired  more  than  gold,  yea  than  much  fine  gold ; 
They  are  sweeter  than  honey,  and  the  droppings  of  honeycombs. 


170  PSALMS 

A  similar  thought  to  v.lla  is  indeed  in  11972127;  but  the  couplet 
resembles  more  closely  Pr.  314-15  81(M1  Jb.  2815-19,  and  its  thought 
may  be  regarded  as  characteristic  of  Hebrew  Wisdom  rather 
than  of  Hebrew  Law.  The  use  of  it  here  was  doubtless  on  the 
basis  of  the  uses  of  Hebrew  Wisdom  and  from  a  glossator  whose 
enthusiasm  for  the  Law  justified  him  in  ascribing  to  it  the 
characteristics  also  of  Wisdom. 

Str.  II.  has  six  progressive  pentameters.  — 12.  Moreover],  em- 
phasizing following  words.  —  Thy  servant],  emphatic  in  position, 
whether  we  think  of  the  individual  Israelite  as  a  worshipper  of 
God,  or  of  the  nation  as  in  a  special  sense  the  servant  of  Yahweh, 
in  accord  with  the  conception  of  Is.2.  —  is  warned].  The  posi- 
tive benefits  of  the  Law,  in  the  previous  Str.,  now  pass  over  into 
negative  benefits,  in  relation  to  transgression,  in  warning  against 
it.  —  in  keeping  them],  observing  the  Law  by  obedience.  —  there 
is  much  reward],  in  consequence  of  a  beneficent  kindness. — 
13.  Errors],  transgressions  of  Law,  due  to  ignorance  or  inadvert- 
ence ;  characteristic  of  the  distinctions  of  the  priestly  legislation. 
These  committed  unconsciously  trouble  the  psalmist;  for,  who 
can  discern],  either  their  number  or  their  enormity,  and  the 
extent  of  their  departure  from  the  norm  of  duty.  —  Clear  me],  is 
the  prayer;  acquit,  absolve,  or  possibly,  as  often,  leave  me  un- 
punished.— from  hidden  ones],  those  errors  which  are  so  hidden 
from  the  psalmist  that  he  cannot  discern  them,  and  which  yet  he 
knows  are  not  hidden  from  God,  and  therefore  may  imperil  his 
relations  to  God.  He  knows  of  no  other  way  of  deliverance  from 
them  except  the  divine  gracious  acquittal.  — 14.  Moreover],  in- 
creased emphasis,  calling  attention  to  another  class  of  transgres- 
sions.— from  presumptuous  ones],  proud  ones;  known,  clearly 
discerned,  boldly  and  wilfully  committed,  corresponding  with  "  high- 
handed "  of  the  code  of  P,  Num.  1530.  —  restrain  Thy  servant], 
hold  him  back,  for  he  knows  his  peril  of  committing  them  and  the 
serious  consequences.  —  let  them  not  rule  over  me].  Such  trans- 
gressions overpower  the  man  and  reduce  him  to  servitude.  The 
phrase  so  greatly  resembles  that  of  Gn.  4'  that  it  is  probable  the 
author  had  in  mind  the  story  of  Cain,  where  sin  like  a  wild  beast 
couches  at  the  door  greedy  to  take  possession  of  him  and  rule 
him,  which  it  actually  did,  with  terrible  consequences.     So  here 


PSALM   XIX.  171 

the  presumptuous  sins  are  personified;  they  strive  to  dominate 
the  man,  cf.  36s  Jn.  834.  —  Then  shall  I  be  perfect],  that  is,  if 
cleared  from  sins  of  ignorance,  and  restrained  from  sins  of  know- 
ledge and  intention,  he  will  be  free  from  all  sin,  and  so  be  com- 
plete, entire,  faultless.  —  and  cleared  from  much  transgression]. 
This  does  not  naturally  refer  to  some  great  extreme  transgression 
as  parallel  with  the  presumptuous  ones,  but  rather  to  the  trans- 
gressions hidden  and  to  the  errors  to  which  he  is  so  sensitive 
that  he  fears  they  may  be  many,  and  in  their  sum  amount  to 
much ;  for  clear  in  the  passive  seems  to  refer  to  the  same  kind  of 
sins  as  clear  in  the  active,  and  to  those  from  which  he  would  be 
absolved,  rather  than  to  those  from  which  he  would  be  restrained. 
— 15.  Let  the  words  of  my  mouth  be  for  acceptance],  namely, 
those  of  the  prayer  which  accompany  the  sacrifice  made  in  the 
temple,  making  the  sacrifices  real  earnest  sacrifices,  and  so  accept- 
able to  God;  as  in  Ho.  142  the  calves  (or  fruit,  v.  Br.MP177)  of 
the  lips  are  thus  offered,  and  Ps.  1412  prayer  as  sacrifice.  —  and 
the  musing  of  my  mind],  the  mind  acting  in  harmony  with  the 
mouth,  as  the  mouth  with  the  hand  that  presents  the  sacrifice.  — 
Before  Thee],  all  the  activities  of  devotion,  of  mind,  mouth,  hand, 
tend  to  the  divine  presence  where  alone  acceptance  can  be  found. 
—  continually],  so  0,  as  the  measure  requires,  but  omitted  by  J^ 
and  most  Vrss.  by  error.  The  psalmist  is  not  thinking  of  one 
single  sacrifice,  but  of  oft-repeated,  continual  approaches  to  God 
in  sacrifice.  All  this  is  fortified  and  reaches  its  climax  in  the  plea 
which  gives  assurance  of  success;  my  Rock  and  my  Redeemer], 
cf.  1 83  6919.  The  Rock  is  the  negative  refuge ;  the  Redeemer  is 
the  one  who  grants  the  positive  redemption  from  the  sins  so 
dreaded  in  the  previous  context. 

XIX.  A. 

2.  anspp]  Pi.  ptc.  pi.  of  IfiD;  with  verbal  force,  are  telling  constantly; 
||  "PJD. —  \  T\>~\\  n.m.  firmament,  expanse  of  physical  heaven,  elsw.  in  \f/,  1501, 
||  D^Dtrn.  —  vr  nferpc].  Ba.  interprets  as  applying  to  God's  government  of  the 
world,  ||  1133;  but  usage  (87  10226  1388)  favours  creation.  The  measure  is 
most  easy  as  tetrameter,  although  first  line  is  pointed  as  trimeter.  )  is  prob.  a 
gl.  Possibly  dtiSn  stood  in  original;  it  makes  better  measure.  —  3.  ^3>] 
Hiph.  impf.,  habitual  action  for  ptc.  of  continuous  action  of  previous  clause. 
X  J?3J  vb.  Hiph.  pour  forth  as  from  a  spring,  bubble :  of  speech,  in  bad  sense 


172  PSALMS 

598  944J  in  good  sense  7812  119171  1457  and  here,  ||  nvi>  Pi.  impf.  f  [n*i]  vb. 
Pi.  poetic,  tell,  declare,  make  knozun  :  only  here  in  \J/  (unless  we  correct  5211 
with  Hi.,  Che.,  et  a/.);  but  Jb.  1517  32°- »• 17  362.—  -is*]  Ges.  renders  ?ttos 
hymn,  but  really  it  is  saying,  speech,  utterance,  as  v.4  ||  Dnai,  —  J  njn]  n.f. 
knowledge  :  here  =  their  knowledge  of  the  glory;  elsw.  in  \p  only  of  knowledge 
as  possessed  by  God  1396;  as  taught  by  God  to  man  9410  11966.  These  two 
lines  are  most  easily  tetrameters,  but  might  be  taken  as  trimeters  by  use  of 
Makkephs.  —  4.  -\r.n  pn  ||  D^rn  ps]  are  most  easily  explained  as  a  denial  of 
the  use  of  speech  and  words  in  this  praise  of  the  heavens;  then  potfj  ^a  would 
assert  the  same  thing  more  strongly.  X  **?a  neg.  adv.  with  vb.  only  here  in 
\p;  but  with  n.  =  without  59s  6$2  (v.  *Sa  15  727).  Their  voice  is  not  heard, 
M  inaudible,  i.e.  except  for  the  intelligent,  pious  mind.  But  why  this  qualifi- 
cation? It  seems  in  direct  antith.  to  v.3  and  6  and  is  tame.  <S  takes  it  as  a 
relative  clause :  ovk  eialv  XaXial  ovdt  \6yoi  &v  ovxl  anovovTat  al  (pcoval  clutQv. 
3  also :  non  est  sermo  et  non  sunt  verba,  quibus  non  audiatur  vox  eorum. 
This  seems  a  roundabout,  unpoetic  way  of  asserting  that  their  speech  was 
intelligible,  although  it  is  followed  by  De.,  Moll.,  Now.  Ew.  attaches  to  next 
v. :  "  without  talk,  without  words,  without  their  voice  being  heard,  their  sound 
becomes  loud  throughout  the  whole  earth."  The  measure  of  the  last  line  can 
be  only  trimeter.  This  Str.  is  just  the  two  lines  longer  than  the  second  Str., 
and,  therefore,  in  all  probability  they  are  a  gl.;    so  Ols.,  Bi.,  Ba.,  Du. — 

5.  n^'"1  ^  ||  San  nxpa]  emph.,  the  first  a  spreading  abroad,  the  second  a 
reaching  unto  the  utmost  limits.  p«n  S:a  also  in  8-- 10  457  1057.  —  dp]  sf.  of 
3  pi.  X  V2  n.m.  line*  string:  (1)  measuring  line,  extending  over  wide  ter- 
ritory, as  Je.  3189  Ez.  47s  and  elsw.  Aq.  kolvuv,  so  Ra.,  Ba.,  and  most  here. 
Hi.  =  "  line  or  chain  of  praise."  Others  think  of  (2)  string  of  musical  instru- 
ment, so  Ew.  3  sonus,  (f§  006770s,  2  ^xos>  but  there  is  no  usage  to  justify 
this  mng.  Cap.,  Ols.,  Ge.,  Bo.,  Dy.,  Bi.,  Gr.,  Che.,  Du.,  SS.,  BDB  rd.  oh'p,  but 
<S  renders  this  by  <pwrf  and  3  by  vox,  and  not  by  words  they  actually  use 
here.  —  X  n*pJ  ".[m.]  end,  bound,  extremity  :  y-\nn  rrcpo  613  1357  Is.  526  43° 
Dt.  2849;  pin  'p  ij>  Ps.  4610  Je.  2581  Is.  4820  496;  San  'pa  Ps.  i(p;  D'Dtfn  nxpn 
I97-  X  n?";]  n.f.  end,  bound,  in  \p  pi.  Dn^xp  Sjp  (of  D<D0)  ig7,  prob.,  therefore, 
only  pi.  of  n*P.  —  DrnSl?]  ||  Wp_  X  n^r  n.f.  word,  speech,  utterance:  elsw.  139* 
2  S.  23-  Pr.  239  Jb.  34  t.  This  line  is  trimeter  as  it  stands.  —  BfctfS]  emph., 
(3  iv  t£  -nXiif.  X  #?#  n.  sun:  $$9  7217  7416  1216  1368;  'tf  nni  rt«  of  sun 
501  10422  1133;  fig.  of  long  duration  r  3;  72s,  'tfa  Sg37;  personified  icp  10419 
1483;  fig.  of  God  8412.  —  ona]  f*M  ///<?/;/,  ?>.  d^DW  Hu.,  Pe.,  Ba.,  Kirk.,  not 
indefinite,  as  De  W.,  Ges.,  Hi.,  De.  But  ona  not  in  <g,  and  is  prob.  a  gl. 
auToO  with  o-Kr/vu/xa  of  ©  is  possibly  an  interpretation,  as  68bv  avrod  for  mn 
v.66;  but  as  most  of  the  lines  of  the  Str.  end  in  \  the  original  was  prob.  lSnn.  — 

6.  Nvn]  emph.,  referring  to  vfev  personified,  masc.  usually.  There  is  no  need 
of  it,  and  it  should  be  stricken  out,  if  verse  is  trimeter.  —  pns]  as  a  bride- 
groom, a.\.  \p. —  Tsn]  his  canopy,  a.X.  \f/;  elsw.  Jo.  216  (of  bride),  Is.  45 
(of  God's  protection).  —  fc^fr;]  Qal  impf.  of  tfc"tr,  vb.  Qal,  rejoice  :  usu.  with 
a  359  4017  684  705 1 1911;  c.  hy  1 1916'2.  — ntajs]  <«  a  //^-^,  J  -raj  (1)  adj.,  j//-^, 


PSALM   XIX.  173 

mighty  :  ynxa  'J  U22;  113J  Sn  (of  the  Messiah)  Is.  o.6;  attribute  of  God 
righting  for  His  people  Ps.  24s-8;  cf.  Dt.  io17  Is.  io21  +  .  (2)  n.m.  strong, 
valiant  man  Pss.  icf  3316  45*  52s  7865  8920  1204  1274;  nj  naa  10320.  — 
nnx  yn]  rzm  along  a  path:  ace.  of  measure;  cf.  'N  ma  £*?  <z  /#//&  Is.  413; 
@  imx,  prob.  correct.  —  7.  iwpe]  sf.  3  sg.  J  KtfD  n.m.  (1)  act  of  going  forth: 
of  sunrise  79%  so  of  the  place,  the  East  757;  Tpa  »KS1B  65°;  (2)  that  which 
goes  forth,  utterance  of  lips  89s5  Je.  1716;  (3)  place  of  going  forth,  source  of 
water  Ps.  I0733- 35  2  K.  221  Is.  5811.  —  *nMpra]  his  circuit  (^/^p),  a. A.  \p. 
BS.  437  (of  moon) ;  Ex.  34"  (J)  2  Ch.  24s"  (of  year) ;  I  S.  I20  (of  days  of 
year).  This  should  for  assonance  come  at  end  of  line.  —  Drrtlj?  Sr]  ©  ews 
<£/cpoi>  roO  ovpavov,  cf.  4811  pn  V8£  *?£,  SjJ  late  style  for  Sk.  The  measure  is 
difficult  with  MT.,  but  easy  if,  after  <3,  we  transpose  and  rd.  Mwpn  Dnwp  Sxi. 
The  roO  ovpavov  of  (£  is  interpretation.  —  *ViDl]  rel.  clause  as  @,  5.  —  Tionp] 
usually  /row  Aw  /W  (».  nrn  6*),  but  f  nsn  J*»  Jb.  3028  Is.  24s8  30s6- 26  Ct.V0; 
so  also  here  His  sun  —  'El's  sun,  but  originally  nnn  j|  Pots'. 

XIX.  B. 

8-10.  rrvn]  the  Law  as  instruction,  most  common  and  comprehensive 
term  from  earliest  time  (v./2).  —  J  pit;]  n.f.,  the  Law  as  testimony,  charac- 
teristic term  of  P,  so  785  816  upM+at (em.tat)  I224,  and  titles  601  801.— 
J  □>-nps]  n.  pi.,  the  Law  as  precepts,  only  pi.  cstr.  and  sfs.  elsw.  10318  in7 
U94  +  21t-  (em.  txt.).  —  t  n«p]  n.f.,  the  Law  as  command??ient,  characteristic 
of  D.;  elsw.  in  \J/  always  pi.,  787  89s2  1121  U96  +  21t-. —  nirv]  the  Law  as 
object  of  reverence,  only  here  in  this  sense,  but  frequently  for  piety,  reverence, 
3412  in10  +  (v.  211).  Though  |^  is  sustained  by  Vrss.,  it  is  improb.  A  term 
for  Law  is  needed.  Rd.  mOK,  as  Gr.,  D.  H.  Miiller,  Kau.,  Che.  —  DHpstfc] 
judgments,  decisions  of  rulers  in  the  cases  brought  before  them.  A  collection 
of  such  judgments  is  the  Covenant  Code,  Ex.  21-22.  They  are  also  scattered 
through  the  Deuteronomic  Code  (v.  i5).  We  notice  the  absence  of  the  most 
ancient  terms  anan  words,  and  o>pn  statutes,  given  in  the  Psalm  of  the  Law, 
119.  For  uses  of  these  technical  terms  v.  Br.Hex- 242  "1-,  and  BDB.  —  ne»on] 
adj.  f.  (v.  ij2),  whole,  sound,  having  moral  integrity, perfect;  of  God's  way  1831. 

—  HJDK3]  Niph.  ptc.  f.  %  PN  v^»  confirm,  support:  Qal  ptc.  pass.  D\MDN  in- 
trans.  faithful  (as  firm,  stable),  fas  subst.  m.  faithful  ones  122  (>  0,  j$,  al. 
faithfulness) ,  cf.  2  S.  2019;  faithful  ones  Yahweh  keepeth  Ps.  3124  (but  '«  is 
here  taken  by  <f§,  Ri.,  De.,  Che.  as  n.  abstr.,  v.  JDK).  Other  mngs.  not  in  \p. 
Niph.  (1)  be  verified,  confirmed :  precepts  of  God  in7,  His  testimonies  i<pS 
935,  covenant  8929.  (2)  be  reliable,  faithful,  trusty:  persons  89s8  ioi6; 
nn,  c.  pn  78s  (cf.  Pr.  n13);  c.  3  rei  Ps.  78s7.  Other  mngs.  not  in  rf/.  Hiph. 
trust,  believe:  abs.  11610;  c.  S  rei  10624;  c.  a  pers.  trust  in,  believe  in  (the 
usual  construction  with  God)  7822;  c.  a  rei  78s2  10612  11966;  c.  infin.  2713, 
cf.  Jb.  1522.  —  an;^]  adj.  pi.  m.,  right  {v.  711).  —  n^3]  adj.  f.,  pure  {v.  212). 

—  nTn;?]  adj.  f«i  clean  (v.  127).  —  DDK]  <&  a\rjdivd,  3  vera,  adj.  is  required, 
but  net*  has  frequently  force  of  an  adj.,  and  is  frequently  rendered  by  adj.  in 


174  PSALMS 

©;  cf.  Dt.  1315  17*  2220  Je.  426  (v.  152).  The  ptc.  clauses,  v.8"10,  constitute 
complementary  parts  of  pentameters,  with  two  tones.  —  tfjp]  pa^Bto]  Hiph. 
ptc.  cstr.  of  aitf,  may  be  taken  with  nominal  force  refresher  of,  or  with  verbal 
force  refreshing.  Hiph.  in  sense  of  \  restore,  recover,  elsw.  in  \J/,  c.  ace. 
go4.  8. 20.  c#  p  35^  u;gj  js  jjgjg  j^g  animai  iife  jn  the  sensuous  nature  (z/.  io3). 
—  np^np]  Hiph.  ptc.  cstr.  of  X  D^n  =  making  wise;  form  only  here;  why 
not  nprnp,  Pi.,  as  10522  11998  Jb.  3511?  Qal  not  in  \p.  Pu.  made  wise  58s, 
cf.  Pr.  3024.  —  f,J?§]  acl)-  simple :  as  subst.,  open  to  the  instruction  of  wisdom 
or  folly  Pr.  94- 16,  believing  every  word  1415,  needing  pa  Ps.  119130,  nc^n  /o* 
Pr.  2111,  lacking  npny  i4  85  1925,  in  good  sense  cnpd  "•  "»Dtf  Ps.  1166,  but  usual 
tendency  is  to  bad  sense  Pr.  I22  1418  +  6  t.  Pr.,  Ez.  4520.  —  aS  TiDfep]  Pi.  ptc. 
cstr.  of  r\i:t'  giving  Joy  to  (v.j12). —  dwj  rin*«N?:]  Hiph.  ptc.  cstr.  of -iin  /i^4/ 
«/,  <-a«j<r  to  shine;  also  £-i'z>£  /*£•///  to,  lighten  {v.  134).  —  -vpS  rnDty]  Qal  ptc. 
of  ir>  stand  firm,  endure.  —  •ip"]*]  Qal  pf.  3  pi.  Change  from  ptc.  is  striking 
and  improbable.  <S  has  deducaiufxtva,  3  justificata,  which  implies  ptc.  D'pTO. 
Hare  rds.  p^tx,  — 11.  This  verse  has  two  tetrameters.  These  appear  in  an 
awkward  change  of  construction.  —  D^rnpn]  Niph.  ptc.  pi.  of  J  ion  with 
article,  nominal  force  =  the  things  to  be  desired,  or  relative  force  =  they  are 
the  things  io  be  desired ;  only  here  with  the  article,  f  Niph.  ptc.  elsw.  = 
desirable  Gn.  29  f  (J)  Pr.  2120;  vb.  elsw.  in  $  only  Qal,  desire  6817  (of  God), 
desired,  taken  pleasure  in  3912.  —  tr?]  n.m.,  refined,  pure  gold :  of  crown  of 
king  214,  of  Law  19U  119127,  elsw.  La.  42  Jb.  2817  Is.  1312  Ct.  511- 15  Pr.  819.— 
3-)]  much  in  quantity,  also  v.14  2511  119162.  —  d^pdi]  pi.  of  %  p>nn,  adj.,  sweet: 
of  honey,  as  Ju.  1414,  here  ||  O^Dnin;  article  required  as  much  for  the  one  as 
for  the  other.  Du.  suggests  that  it  be  prefixed.  —  f  rpi\  n.m.,  flowing  honey, 
from  the  comb:  elsw.  Pr.  5s  2418  277  Ct.  411.  —  fowx]  pi.  of  «l«,  n.m., honey- 
comb :  elsw.  Pr.  1624.  This  verse  is  a  gl.  from  the  period  of  \VL.  It  makes 
the  previous  Str.  too  long,  if  attached  to  it,  and  mars  the  uniformity  of  its 
use  of  legal  terms.  It  is  not  suited  to  the  second  Str.  — 12.  oj]  moreover: 
J  as  emphasising  the  following  word  19M  7122  83*  1331;  as  emph.  and  37s26 
1075  1371;  also  88  143.  —  n"13?]  Thy  servant,  prob.  Israel  as  nation;  cf.Je.3010 
and  Is.2.  —  $"0>]  n.m.  (1)  slave  10517  1232;  (2)  worshipper,  map  34s3  69s7 
I359.i4  (=Dt  3*»);  ||rap  10526;  rpnap  792-10  8951  go18-16  I0215-29  1198I; 
Tpa?  n9i7  +  i2t.  14312;  ||  qpcK-ra  8616"cf-  2-  4  u616-16;  Abraham  I05«- 42 
Gn/2624  (J);  Moses  Ps.  io'^26"';  David  181  361  7870  894-21-40  13210  144™. 
(3)  in  special  sense,  Levitical  singers,  nin>  nap  1131  1341  1351.  (4)  Israel 
as  a  people  136'22,  as  Is.  41s- 9  4421  49s.  (5)  addressing  God  in  prayer,  some- 
times (4),  sometimes  (2),  and  sometimes  simply  honorary  address  i<?12-1* 
279  3117  35s27  6918  109*28  1432.  —  Vi?j]  Niph.  ptc.  of  X  V»T,  t  Niph.  be  instructed, 
warned:  elsw.  Ez.  321  334-  5-  6-  6  Ec.  418  1212.  —  X2V.l]  n-[m-]  consequence. 
(1)  adv.  ace,  in  consequence  of  4016  =  704;  (2)  reward,  gain  ic/2  Pr.  224; 
(3)  end  Vs.  U983-112. — 13.  r^jr]  a.X.,  doubtless  error  for  nVutf,  sins  of 
error,  inadvertence,  f  n*itit  n.f.,  error,  characteristic  of  P.  Lv.  42  +  16  t.  (P) ; 
elsw.  Ec.  55  io5.  X  ***>»  vb-  Qal  err>  from  Law  Ps-  "967«  X  ny^>  vb-  Qal  err* 
from  Law  U921-118.     Hiph.  let  err,  from  Law  11910.  —  pa»"*p]  exclamation, 


PSALM  XIX.  I/S 

implying  negative  answer  (v.  47). —  nnppsp]  Niph.  ptc.  pi.  with  fcf  from  -inD 
here  of  secret,  hidden  sins,  but  hide  oneself  5513  8947;  be  hidv?  3810  —  'Jgj] 
Pi.  imv.  sf.  of  \  npj.  Pi.  (1)  A?/i  innocent,  or  acquit  here  and  Jb.  9s8  io14, 
both  c.  JDj  Dr.  renders  absolve,  @  Kaddpiaov,  3  munda ;  elsw.  (2)  &tfz/<?  ««- 
punished,  by  God  Ex.  34?  =  Na.  1418  (J)  =  Na.  I3;  c.  ace.  Ex.  207  =  Dt.  511 
Je.  3011  =  46'28.  Niph.  be  clean,  free  from  guilt,  innocent,  wpj  v.14,  only 
here  ^;  cf.  Nu.  531  (P)  Je.  235;  <§  Kadapi<rdri<rofxou,  3  mundabor.  — 14.  Dj] 
begins  second  couplet,  dealing  with  grosser  sins,  used  as  $  introducing  the 
climax  here  and  in  25s  41*0  844- 7  8513  11811  II923-24  139^  12  («,.  v.^)._ 
D,7-]  pl«  °f  t  "lt»  a4J«»  proud,  presumptuous,  here  of  men,  Ew.,  Ols.,  Hup.,  Che., 
RV.,  BDB.,  Ba.,  Du.,  but  De.,  Dr.,  AV.  of  sins ;  elsw.  in  \f/  of  men  8614 
II92i  +  5t.#  —  r^frn]  Qal  imv.  of  X  l\fn,  vb.  Qal,  restrain,  hold  bach,  nco  7850. — 
o'iSc'o^^n]  Qal  juss.  of  Wd  (v.  87),  involving  personification  of  d^t  just  as 
in  Gn.  47,  where  riNan  is  personified  as  wild  beast  with  same  vb.  and  same 
construction,  in,  implying  a  condition  (v.  25).  —  ornN]  Qal  impf.  I  sg.,  fully 
written,  d.-n;  odd  intrans.  Ges.§  ^  (3>  (z/.  97).  —  >rnjy]  Niph.  pf.  of  r\p),  free 
from,  innocent  of,  Dr.  absolved  (v.  v.13).  —  2~\  JJK's]  much  transgression 
(iniquity),  so  31  in  I911-12  2511  119162.  ptf»  (v.511). — 15.  pSH1?]  the  sacri- 
ficial term  for  acceptance  by  Yahweh  of  sacrifices  Lv.  I3  +  ;  cf.  Ho.  143 
Ps.  1412.  —  $0  ,1D^!]  words  of  my  mouth:  elsw.  544  781  1384  Dt.  32*+. — 
pun]  cstr.  of  f  ?^?>  n.m.,  meditation,  or  musing,  of  prayer,  so  here;  cf.  La,  3s2 
(in  bad  sense  of  plotting);  elsw.  Pss.  917  924  (dub.,  v.  Intr.  §  34);  cf.  nun 
494.  —  2^~]  n.m.,  inner  part,  midst:  f  I.  seldom  of  things,  D^ep  3J?3  46s. 
0>x  aj?3,  m  /$<?  »«*^/  0/  /^<r  enemies  of  Vs.  45s.  II.  Of  men:  J  (1)  (a)  the 
inner  man  in  contrast  with  the  outer  55s2  647  84s  1025,  as  within  the  breast, 
2^2  3715  11911  2  S.  1814,  cf.  Ps.  4011;  (b)  the  inner  man,  indef.  soul,  compre- 
hending mind,  affections,  and  will,  3315,  with  occas.  emphasis  of  one  or  the 
other  by  means  of  certain  vbs.,  faS  Saa  92  1 192. 10.  34.  58.69. 145  I3gi  ,  K#  323 
=  2  Ch.  614  Pr.  35  Je.  310  247 ;  secrets  of  the  heart  Ps.  44s2.  J  (2)  specif, 
reference  to  mind :  (a)  knowledge,  c.  nsn  6618  Ec.  I16  ;  (b~)  thinking,  reflexion, 
Pss.  3311  494  83*  1403,  so  here,  cf.  45s;  f  ^  ntf  6211  Pr.  2217  24s2,  c.  7  Ps.  4814 
Ex.  72}  JE,  1  S.  420  Pr.  2723  Je.  3121,  and  c.  ■?«  Jb.  717;  (c)  memory  Pss.  3118 
3731;  (d)  spec,  refer,  to  inclinations,  resolutions,  determinations  of  the  will: 
t  2b  pan  set  the  mind  on  io17  78s  2  Ch.  1214  Jb.  u13;  f  aS  paa  Ps.  57s- 8  (=  1082) 
78s7  1127;  other  phrs.  4419  10525  1128  11936.112  I4I4#  por  0ther  uses  of  a1? 
v.  48  70s  123.  —  TJ.o1?]  goes  with  last  line.  (H  has  5td  iravrds  =  Tpn  or  tfojh, 
which  is  required  by  measure,  soDu.,Ba\,  Che.  —  "^j]  my  redeemer,  cf.  Jb.  1925. 
X  ^NJ  vb.  Qal,  redeem,  act  as  kinsman :  in  \p  only  redeem  with  God  as  subj., 
implying  pers.  relationship  :  (a)  individuals  from  death  Ps.  1034  La.  358 
Ho.  1314,  jn  San  Gn.  4816  (Epoem),  eta  Pss.  6919  7214,  titan  on  nan  119154, 
^kj  /^5  Jb.  i925;  (b)  Israel,  from  Egyptian  bondage  Ex.  66  (P?)  1518  (song) 
Pss.  742  7716  78s5,  a"N  td  10610;  f  (c)  from  exile  (chiefly  Is.2-3  the  vb.,  not 
in  Is.1),  Is.  431  +  5  t.  Is.,  Mi.  410,  td  Ps.  1072  Je.  3111, 1  is  Snj  Is.  4114  +  12 1, 
Is.,  and  the  people  o^wi  Ps.  1072  Is.  35s  5110  6212  634(?). 


1 76  PSALMS 


PSALM     XX.,    2    PARTS    83  +  RF.    2s. 

Ps  20  is  a  Litany  before  a  battle,  in  two  parts  :  (i)  During  the 
offering  of  sacrifice,  the  leaders  of  the  choir  make  a  petition  for 
the  king  that  he  may  be  victorious  in  the  day  of  trouble  (v.M),  and 
a  chorus  sums  it  up  with  a  vow  of  exultation  and  praise  (v.6)  ; 
(2)  the  leaders  make  a  declaration  of  the  certitude  of  victory, 
accomplished  by  Yahweh's  hand  rather  than  by  the  army  (v.7-9), 
which  is  enthusiastically  reaffirmed  by  the  chorus  (v.10). 

TN  the  day  of  trouble  may  He  answer  thee, 
May  the  God  of  Jacob  set  thee  on  high ; 
May  He  send  from  the  sanctuary  help  10  thee, 
And  from  Zion  sustain  thee  ; 
May  He  be  mindful  of  all  thy  grain  offerings, 
And  accept  as  fat  (all)  thy  whole  burnt  offering(s)  ; 
May  He  give  thee  according  to  thy  mind, 
And  fulfil  all  thy  plan. 

We  will  be  jubilant  in  thy  victory \ 

And  in  the  name  of  our  God  will  we  {rejoice), 
MOW  (the  hand  of  Yahweh  is  made  known)  ; 
Yahweh  hath  given  His  anointed  victory. 
He  answereth  him  from  His  sacred  heavens, 
By  the  mighty  deeds  of  victory  of  His  right  hand. 
These  by  chariots  and  by  horses  ; 
But  by  Yahweh  our  God  are  we  strong. 
They,  on  their  part,  bow  down  and  they  fall ; 
We,  on  our  part,  stand  and  are  established. 

Yahweh  hath  given  victory  to  the  king ; 

He  answereth  us  in  the  day  we  invoke  Him. 

Ps.  20  was  in  D,  then  in  fH  and  Q2&  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  It  is  a  prayer 
for  a  king  going  forth  to  battle  ;  implying  the  existence  of  the  Hebrew 
monarchy  v.".  It  is  a  prayer  at  a  sacrifice  in  the  temple,  with  whole  burnt 
offerings  and  accompanying  grain  offerings,  and  the  use  of  ritual  language  v.4. 
The  use  of  22^  v.5  indicates,  in  preex.  literature,  the  period  prior  to  Je.  The  use 
of  chariots  and  horses  by  the  enemy  v.8  might  refer  to  the  Syrians,  Assyrians, 
or  Egyptians,  and  therefore  gives  no  evidence  of  date.  Theodore  of  Mop- 
suestia,  and  many  since  his  time,  have  thought  of  Hezekiah;  but  the  history 
of  Hezekiah  gives  us  no  such  situation  as  that  described  in  the  Ps.  The 
victory  of  Jehoshaphat  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Jerusalem,  cf.  2  Ch.  20,  gives 
us  a  most  appropriate  historical  situation;  and  the  promise  of  victory,  given 
by  the  prophet,  gives  an  appropriate  explanation  of  the  change  from  petition 
to  certitude  in  the  two  parts  of  the  Ps. 


PSALM   XX.  177 

Pt.  1.  is  composed  of  five  couplets,  sung  by  the  choir.  Lead- 
ing voices  make  the  petition  for  the  king,  in  eight  trimeter 
lines,  arranged  in  four  synonymous  couplets,  all  rhyming  in  Ka, 
which  in  English  must  be  expressed  sometimes  by  the  personal 
pronoun  thee,  sometimes  by  the  possessive  thy.  The  reference  to 
the  king  is  not  evident  in  this  petition,  but  comes  out  clearly  in 
the  chorus  v.10.  Although  we  cannot  suppose  that  the  Levitical 
choruses  were  organised  at  so  early  a  date,  in  accordance  with 
the  usage  projected  by  the  chronicler  back  even  into  the  time  of 
David,  we  may  yet  suppose  that,  with  the  institution  of  temple 
worship,  some  kind  of  an  official  choir  was  also  instituted  among 
the  priests  in  Jerusalem,  as  in  the  ancient  temples  of  other  reli- 
gions.—  2.  In  the  day  of  trouble'],  implying  a  serious  situation. 
The  nation  was  in  straits  and  in  peril,  and  victory  doubtful  so  far 
as  their  own  ability  to  repel  the  invaders  was  concerned ;  their 
only  hope  was  in  divine  assistance.  —  The  God  of  Jacob].  The 
reference  to  the  God  of  the  ancestor  of  the  nation,  often  used  in 
such  pleas,  enforces  the  petition,  especially  as  the  name  of  their 
national  and  ancestral  God  was  the  pledge  and  security  for  their 
national  existence  and  perpetuity.  The  honour  of  their  God  was 
necessarily  involved  in  the  honour  of  His  people,  according  to  the 
conception  of  the  ancient  Biblical  writers.  —  set  thee  on  high],  in 
the  exaltation  of  victory.  —  3.  From  the  sanctuary  ||  from  Zion], 
the  source  of  divine  assistance,  according  to  the  conception  that  it 
was  God's  place  of  residence  among  His  people,  the  place  of  His 
theophanic  presence,  and  therefore  not  only  the  place  of  prayer 
and  sacrifice,  but  also  the  place  from  which  His  people  may 
expect  help  in  answer  to  prayer.  —  4.  all  thy  grain  offerings], 
specific  offerings  of  some  kind  of  grain,  which  usually,  especially 
in  public  sacrifices,  accompanied  all  kinds  of  sacrifices  of  animals ; 
the  kind  of  grain  offering  differing,  whether  the  simple  grain,  or 
roasted  in  the  ear,  or  ground  into  meal  for  wafers  or  cakes  or 
loaves,  all  depending  upon  the  kind  of  sacrifice  as  discriminated 
in  a  later  priestly  legislation,  not  probably  applicable  at  this  early 
date.  —  all  thy  whole  burnt  offerings],  special  kinds  of  sacrifice 
of  animals  which  differed  from  all  other  sacrifices  of  animals  in 
that  the  entire  victim,  or  rather  all  the  parts  that  were  in  their 
nature  clean,  or  that  could  be  cleansed  by  washing,  were  entirely 


178  PSALMS 

consumed  on  the  altar  and  went  up  in  the  flame  to  God.  This 
ancient  form  of  sacrifice  of  animals,  with  its  associated  sacrifice  of 
grain,  was  appropriate  for  the  expression  of  worship,  in  the  form 
of  prayer.  The  nation  were  assembled,  led  by  priests  and  choirs 
of  singers,  to  participate  in  the  sacrifice  and  prayer  for  the  vic- 
tory of  their  king  and  army.  —  May  He  be  mindful].  There  is 
little  reason  to  doubt  that  this  is  a  sacrificial  term  as  truly  as  the 
||  accept  as  fat],  for  it  was  characteristic  of  the  grain  offerings 
that  they  were  offered  Azkarah,  to  bring  the  offerer  to  the  remem- 
brance of  Yahweh.  For  that  service  in  the  later  ritual  various 
Psalms  were  assigned  (3&1  701,  v.  Intr.  §  39).  There  is  no  good 
reason  why  we  should  not  think  that  this  conception  of  the 
grain  offering  was  ancient.  Such  a  conception  does  not  by  any 
means  involve  the  numerous  distinctions  of  the  later  priestly  legis- 
lation. So  also  the  phrase,  "  accept  as  fat,"  is  a  sacrificial  term, 
which  indicates  the  essential  thing  in  the  sacrifice  of  animals, 
already  recognised  in  the  primitive  story  of  Cain  and  Abel,  Gn.  44, 
that  fat  ones  should  be  selected  in  order  to  find  acceptance  with 
God,  implying  that  sacrifices,  without  such  selection,  would  be 
regarded  as  niggardly  and  unacceptable.  To  accept  or  recognise 
the  whole  burnt  offerings  of  animals  as  fat  is,  therefore,  saying,  in 
ritual  terms,  that  they  are  entirely  acceptable  to  God.  —  5.  Accord- 
ing to  thy  mind  ||  all  thy  plan],  the  plan  devised  already  in  the 
mind  of  the  king  for  conducting  the  campaign  or  making  the 
battle.  —  6.  The  chorus  now  sings  as  it  were  a  refrain,  summing 
up  the  contents  of  the  petition  in  a  vow  of  jubilation  and  praise. 
That  the  chorus  speaks  is  evident  from  the  introduction  of  the 
first  person  plural,  now  for  the  first  time,  into  the  Psalm  ;  as  well 
as  by  the  change  of  tone.  —  in  thy  victory].  The  Hebrew  word 
often  means  salvation  from  enemies,  and  so  victory,  which  alone 
is  appropriate  to  the  context.  The  word  may,  however,  be  ren- 
dered "  salvation,"  in  general,  as  Vrss.,  which  was  preferred  for  a 
liturgical  use  of  the  Ps.  —  will  rejoice].  So  some  ancient  codd.  of 
(3  and  many  modern  scholars,  which  is  more  natural  than  the 
unusual  word  of  ^,  which  is  due  to  a  copyist's  mistake  of  a  single 
letter.  The  word  of  J^  is  used  elsewhere  Ct.  6410;  but  here  it 
can  only  be  interpreted  in  a  different  sense,  whether  as  "  set  up 
our  banners,"  AV.,  RV.,  or  "  wave  "  them,  Kirk,  and  most.    A  later 


PSALM  XX.  179 

editor  appended  a  line,  "  may  Yahweh  fulfil  all  thy  askings,"  which 
is  only  a  repetition  of  v.56,  in  the  use  of  an  unusual  word  of  late 
formation  and  out  of  harmony  with  the  thought  of  the  couplet. 
It  might,  however,  be  more  appropriate  for  later  congregational 
use  to  resume  the  tone  of  prayer,  as  indeed  the  editor  aims  to  do 
at  the  close  of  the  Ps.  v.10. 

Pt.  II.  7.  The  leading  voices  again  sing,  not  a  soloist,  as  a  late 
editor  supposed,  who  wrote  the  first  singular  in  place  of  the  first 
plural  of  the  chorus  in  an  introductory  statement  which  is  prosaic. 
This  destroys  the  symmetry  of  the  couplets  of  the  Ps.  It  is 
doubtless  a  textual  error  for  the  original  line,  which  we  have  ven- 
tured to  restore  by  conjecture.  —  Now],  as  the  result  of  the  peti- 
tion. The  time  has  come  in  which  certitude  takes  the  place  of 
anxiety.  —  The  hand  of  Yahweh  is  made  known].  We  may  think 
of  certitude  born  of  internal  evidence  of  answer  to  prayer,  or  due 
to  the  promises  of  a  prophet  intervening  between  the  parts  of  the 
Ps.  in  accordance  with  2  Ch.  2014-17,  or  to  some  external  token  of 
the  acceptance  of  the  sacrifice  just  offered.  This  last  is  most 
probable,  if  the  restoration  of  the  line  given  above  is  correct. 
The  hand  of  Yahweh  is  displayed  in  behalf  of  His  people  j  cf.  for 
the  use  of  the  hand  Is.  6614,  of  the  arm  Is.  5210,  and  of  both 
Ps.  981.  This  also  makes  the  tetrastich  one  of  introverted  paral- 
lelism. —  Yahweh  hath  given  victory],  not  that  the  victory  has 
actually  taken  place,  but  that  it  has  already  been  given  to  the 
king  in  answer  to  the  prayers  of  his  people,  and  will  surely  take 
place.  —  His  anointed'],  as  anointed,  installed  on  his  throne  by 
Yahweh,  in  accordance  with  22. — from  His  sacred  heavens'],  the 
heavens  as  the  sacred  place  in  which  God  resides,  and  from  which 
He  gives  victory  to  His  people,  especially  in  theophanic  mani- 
festations, when  He  would  throw  His  enemies  into  a  panic,  such 
as  those  described  in  2  Ch.  20,  at  the  crossing  of  the  Red  Sea 
Ex.  14-15,  at  the  battle  of  Bethhoron  Jos.  io12-14,  at  the  battle  of 
the  Kishon  Ju.  5,  at  the  battle  of  Rephaim  2  S.  522-25;  cf.  also 
Ps.  18,  Hb.  3,  Jb.  3823.  This  turning  toward  heaven  is  not  incon- 
sistent with  the  previous  turning  toward  the  sanctuary  as  the  source 
of  help,  for  the  conception  of  theophanic  residence  in  sacred 
places  on  earth  did  not,  from  the  earliest  times  of  the  Hebrew 
religion,  lead  them  away  from  the  thought  that  the  real  residence 


1 80  PSALMS 

of  Yahweh  was  in  heaven.  —  mighty  deeds'],  by  acts  of  God  Him- 
self putting  forth  His  might.  —  of  victory'],  gained  by  those  acts  of 
might  and  overwhelming  strength.  —  His  right  hand],  theophanic 
and  anthropomorphic  expressions,  frequent,  especially  in  poetic 
literature,  in  connection  with  the  divine  deliverance  of  His  people 
and   judgment    upon    their    enemies,  from    Ex.   15612  onward. — 

8.  These  by  chariots  and  by  horses].  These  were  the  chief  reli- 
ance of  the  ancient  enemies  of  Israel  in  their  wars  from  the 
earliest  times.  Israel,  living  chiefly  in  hilly  and  mountainous 
districts,  had  little  use  for  them.  The  law  of  the  king  (Dt. 
1716)  forbids  them,  although  Solomon  and  other  luxurious  mon- 
archs  made  use  of  them.  The  sentiment  of  the  prophets  was  ever 
against  their  use.  —  Bui  by  Yahweh  our  God].  Yahweh  is  the 
chief,  if  not  the  sole,  author  of  victory  to  His  anointed  king  and 
people,  cf.  3316"1<J. — are  we  strong],  suited  to  the  context,  so  (g 
and  many  critics.  %,  followed  by  "  we  will  remember "  PBV., 
AV. ;  "  we  will  make  mention  "  RV.,  does  not  suit  the  context.  — 

9.  They  on  their  part],  the  enemy,  in  strong  antith.  to  we  on  our 
part],  the  worshipping  people  of  God.  —  bow  down  and  they 
fall],  a  graphic  description  of  the  enemy  as  the  mighty  hand  of 
God  lays  hold  upon  them,  bending  them  down  to  the  ground  and 
prostrating  them  on  the  ground  ;  frequent  expressions  for  humilia- 
tion of  enemies  in  defeat,  v.  716  1713  1840.  —  stand  and  are  estab- 
lished], stand  firm,  upright  and  immovable.  Each  verb  is  in 
direct  antith.  to  its  mate  in  the  previous  line,  to  set  forth  the 
exaltation  of  the  victorious  king  and  people.  — 10.  The  chorus 
now  bursts  forth  in  a  couplet  of  enthusiasm,  the  climax  of  the  Ps. 
Yahweh  hath  given  victory],  a  renewal  of  the  statement  of  the 
leading  voices  v.7a.  —  to  the  king],  taking  the  place  of  "  His 
anointed,"  in  accordance  with  the  context.  A  later  editor, 
whether  because  of  dittog.  of  a  copyist,  changing  a  perfect  into 
a  cohortative  imperative,  or  by  intentional  alteration  to  make  the 
close  of  the  Ps.  more  appropriate  for  public  worship,  as  in  v.&, 
changes  the  certitude  as  to  the  victory,  which  pervades  and  domi- 
nates the  entire  second  half  of  the  Ps.  up  to  this  verse,  into  a 
petition  for  victory,  in  accordance  with  the  first  half  of  the  Ps.  — 
The  texts  vary  in  the  second  line.  But  ^  is  doubtless  correct  in 
the  impf.  He  answereth  us,  which  resumes  v.76,  and  asserts  the 


PSALM   XX.  l8l 

assuring  fact  that  Yahvveh  habitually  answers  His  people  in  their 
need.  —  in  the  day  we  invoke  Him'],  in  the  very  day,  at  the  very 
time,  they  call  upon  Him  in  their  distress.  The  whole  Ps.  is  thus 
included  between  the  day  of  trouble  v.2  and  this  day  of  prayer. 

2.  r^v]  juss.  of  ny;  (v.  j5). —  mrv]  is  a  gl.  making  line  too  long. — 
nnx  o'"3]  in  the  day  of  trouble,  %  n-j|  n.f.  strait,  distress :  sg.  2212  7849  1163 
1387  1423,  pi.  2517  7120,  mx  ^jd  549,  nns  ^jd  25s2  347-18,  m»D  14311,  -x  or 

^02  5015    ^3    g67  Gn-  353  (E)}  <s   n>.    ps<  3739    Is#    33^  ^j    ps.   g^  cf,    3^  462 

9115  1201,  also  910  io1  (?).  —  ^?.-?t"!]  Pi-  Juss«  °f  t  *&  be  high,  inaccessible,  in 
\p  only,  Niph.:  (i)  be  exalted  in  glory  14813,  cf.  Is.  124;  (2)  be  inaccessible, 
of  divine  knowledge  1396,  Pi.  ;##&?  inaccessible  to  an  enemy,  unassailable,  c. 
ace.  <?o3  6930  9114,  c.  p  592  10741.  — cr]  «d7#<?  of  God  (v.  j12),  is  a  gl.,  as 
Hare,  making  line  too  long,  so  v.8  from  a  late  point  of  view.  —  f  3PJP  ^"i*?*] 
2  S.  231  Ps.  i?03  46s-12  (5914  ©)  7510  767  8i2-5  84s  947  Is.  23  =  Mi.  42,  cf. 
apjp  hiSn  Ps.  1147,  spy  "?n  1465,  2pp  ion  I322-5  Gn.  4924  Is.  49'26  6o16. — 
3.  T)!"]  obj.  sf.  =  help  to  thee.  %  in  n.m. :  (1)  help,  succour,  from  "»  20s 
I2I1-2  1248,  cf.  8920  (?);  (2)  concrete,  one  who  helps,  espec.  ''  Dt.  337,  with 
pD  Pss.  3320  U59- 10-  n,  b^bc  706,  -\v;2  1465  Dt.  3326.  —  P»*d]  should  be  written 
for  measure  px  JD"),  cf.  24s  63s  68'25.  —  H^VD']  juss.  strong  sf.  v.  1836.  —  4.  -Vrr] 
Qal  impf.  juss.  continued,  "D?  (v.  85).  This  has  doubtless  a  sacrificial  mng., 
corresponding  with  the  term  m:)?N,  which  belongs  espec.  to  the  nnj2  in  P,  and 
is  expressed  in  the  Torn  in  titles  of  Pss.  38,  70.  — Tl?jug  ^;]  the  grain  offering 
accompanying  the  nS'v,  both  expressing  worship  and  prayer.  The  offering 
here  is  a  special  one  for  the  king,  and  not  a  sacrifice  which  he  might  make 
during  his  reign.  The  use  of  pi.  for  grain  offering  and  sg.  for  whole  burnt 
offering  is  improbable,  the  one  accompanied  the  other;  rd.  either  both  sg.  or 
both  pi.  ^d  is  also  needed  for  measure  in  2d  line.  —  %  nnl??  n-f« :  (0  gift* 
present  4513  Gn.  3214  (E)  Is.  391  +  ;  (2)  tribute  Ps.  7210  Ju.  315  Ho.  io6  -f ; 
(3)  offering  made  to  God,  of  any  kind,  Ps.  96s;  (4)  grain  offering  (as  ||  nViy 
and  accompanying  it)  201*  in  common  use  OT.,  so  also  407  14 12;  the  special 
grain  offering  of  P  not  in  \p  unless  in  1412.  J  r^jj  n.f.  whole  burnt  offering 
201*  407  508  6613,  nSy  nm  5i18-21,  nSy  rhyn  6615. — nnf^]  cohort,  (unusual 
form  in  Heb.  in  3  pers.)  Ges.  §48d  De. ;  but  Hare,  Hi.,  Ba.  sf.  nj  or  p»>.  In 
this  case  sf.  is  a  later  addition  of  glossator  after  the  order  of  the  words  was 
changed.  |  Jtfh  vb.  Qal  be  fat,  gr  02a  fat,  not  in  \f>.  Pi.  make  fat,  JDB»2  anoint 
23s;  of  offering  rich  in  fat  parts  and  so  acceptable  20^.  Gr.,  Che.  rd.  nnn; 
accept  as  zvell  pleasing ;  AE.,  Ki.  make  it  denom.  fjBh  reduce  to  ashes.  It 
may,  however,  be  conflation  of  two  readings,  nnaN  Pi.  imv.  and  ]&y  juss.,  the 
latter  alone  suited  to  context.  —  5.  ^aaS?]  long  form  for  usual  2s,  doubt- 
less original  to  this  Ps.  =  according  to  thy  mind. — 1?xj?]  counsel,  design,  pur- 
pose (v.  /*),  here  for  war,  as  Is.  36s.  These  eight  lines  are  in  syn.  parall. 
r\  is  in  each  one  and  also  juss.  of  vb.  This  gives  assonance,  and  it  is  probable 
that  the  lines  all  began  or  else  closed  with  words  ending  in  r\t  most  probably 
the  latter.     I  pi.  now  takes  the  place   of  3  sg.;   there  is  prob.  a  different 


1 82  PSALMS 

speaker,  a  chorus.  —  6.  qn^w^]  in  thy  victory,  i.e.  the  victory  given  thee  (by 
"').  rxyafr  (v.  j3). — *?jhj]  Qal  impf.  i  pi.  of  t  D'-n]  vb.  denom.  from  Sri 
standard  (not  in  \p)  only  here  in  Qal  =  set  up  standard,  in  Niph.  Ct.  64- 10. 
Gr.,  Che.,  Ehr.  rd.  "?VT1»  after  (gB.  a.  b.  na  dyaWiaadjxeda,  which  best  suits 
parall.  <5B  fxeyaXwdrjad/xeda,  U  magnijicabimur,  so  J5.  *?TH  ^^//  he  be  mag- 
nified Ecker.,  Houb.,  Lowth.  Ew.,  Bi.,  Du.,  We.  2  "ryj  (Pi.)«  Ba.  objects 
that  there  is  no  Heb.  usage  to  justify  the  construction  of  Pi.  with  2,  but  Du. 
refers  to  the  use  of  the  syn.  hin  44?,  cf.  v.26  (v.  1851).  —  f  TH^l^P]  askings, 
form,  elsw.  37"*,  late.  The  whole  clause  is  a  mere  repetition  of  v.56.  —  7.  nnj;] 
=  now,  temporal  (v.  210).  This  part  of  Ps.  was  sung  later  than  the  first  part, 
after  the  sacrifice.  —  ^jHj]  I  know,  present  emph.  (v.  i6).  ^n  should  be 
added  to  complete  the  measure.  1  pers.  sg.  for  I  pers.  pi.  is  striking  here. 
Does  it  indicate  a  soloist,  or  should  we  read  UJ7T?  This  is  certainly  prosaic 
and  not  at  all  suited  in  the  parall.  of  poetry.  The  original  was  prob. 
njn>  nvn  -v,  cf.  Is.  125  njn»E,  6614  1  t  njnu.  mrv  was,  as  often  in  ancient 
codd.,  abbreviated  to  '^;  this  by  haplog.  fell  out  before  nyi\  -p  still  later 
fell  out  for  a  similar  reason.  r>"r  Pu.  ptc.  f.  without  r,  as  often  in  Pi.  and 
Pu.,  was  wrongly  interpreted  as  pf.  Qal  1  sg.  "o  was  inserted  as  often. — 
P'j/i-i]  Hiph.  pf.  sure  anticipation,  assured  future  (v.  j8).  —  'irvtrc]  His 
anointed  one  =  king  (v.  22). —  i"U"l]  impf-  freq.  (v.  v.*2).  —  '•Bhp  *CBta]  phr. 
a.X.  ||  Bh^p  v.8;  more  suited  to  the  giving  of  victory  on  battlefield,  as  the 
sanctuary  was  more  suited  to  the  offering  of  sacrifices. — nnon]  =  acts  of 
might,  pi.  of  \  moj  n.f.  in  xf/  only:  (1)  strength,  might,  of  horse  14710,  body 
of  man  9010;  (2)  might,  of  God  2114  54s  65'  667  7118  803  8914  1068  14511,  pi. 
mighty  deeds  207  7116  1062  I454- 1>2  1502  Is.  6315.  —  8.  nSs,  nSn)]  in  antith. 
UnjM.  But  there  is  too  much  emphasis  for  the  measure.  The  second  hSn 
and  urns  are  glosses  of  intensification.  —  "V?T|]  Hiph.  impf.  1  pi.  mention, 
c.  ace.  7 116  7712  874,  here  only  with  p.  (S  has  fMyaKwdrjo-d/Aeda,  as  in  v.66  = 
Sijj,  so  &,  Aug.,  Cassiodorus,  Psalt.  Rom.,  Lowth.  Now.,  Ba\,  Du.,  Oort, 
Che.  rd.  -vajj  we  are  strong.  All  other  Vrss.  agree  with  $%,  even  (SNc-», 
and  most  Greek  fathers.  —  9.  iSoii  ijrr]  1  coord,  with  pf.,  referring  to  the 
defeat  of  enemy,  cf.  1840. — "^Hii]  Hithpol.  impf.  with  1  consec.  t  [TV-] 
only  intensive:  Pi.  surround  11961,  Pol.  restore,  relieve,  c.  ace.  pers.  1469 
(antith.  rv;),  1476  (antith.  S^ltfn),  both  dvaXanfUdvu  (g.  Hithpol.  be  restored 
209,  and  so  are  established,  stand  upright,  AV.,  RV.,  PBV.,  Dr.;  apupOudti/jjep 
<g,  vwofxtvo/xev  2,  erecti  sumus  3.  — 10.  njPB*n]  cohort,  imv.  O  save,  give 
victory,  but  the  pf.  without  n  is  more  prob.,  as  v.7.  n  of  cohort,  is  dittog.  — 
*1?pn]  =  "»rrfeM?  v.76,  cf.  22,  obj.  of  vb.,  as  <S,  U,  and  most  moderns.  MT.  and 
other  Vrss.  refer  'D  to  God  as  king  and  attach  it  to  uip\  However,  Jerome 
(Com.)  says  that  in  the  Heb.  text  of  his  time  it  was  Domine  salvum  fac 
regem.  —  WJPj  impf.  freq.,  as  v.76.  <S  has  wjpi  imv.,  so  Hare,  Bi.,  Che.,  Ba., 
al.,  which  is  an  assimilation  to  previous  imv.  and  less  prob.  The  uncertainty 
of  the  interpretation  of  this  text  in  |^  and  the  Vrss.  is  due  probably  to  an 
editorial  change,  making  an  original  statement  of  the  assurance  of  victory 
into  a  petition  more  appropriate  for  later  congregational  use. 


PSALM  XXL  183 


PSALM     XXL,    2    PARTS    I23  +  RF.    23. 

Ps.  21  is  a  Te  Deum  for  the  victory  won  by  the  king  through 
divine  help  ;  composed  of  two  parts,  each  of  twelve  trimeters,  and 
a  couplet  of  refrain;  the  former  during  sacrifice  rehearsing  the 
reasons  for  thanksgiving  (v.27),  with  a  chorus  asserting  the  king's 
trust  in  Yahweh  (v.8) ;  the  latter  after  sacrifice,  expressing  certitude 
of  future  victories  of  the  king  (v.9-13)  with  a  fresh  chorus  of  praise 

(v.»> 

yAHWEH,  in  Thy  strength  the  king  is  glad, 
And  in  Thy  victory  he  greatly  rejoiceth  ; 
Thou  hast  given  him  his  heart's  desire, 
And  the  request  of  his  lips  Thou  hast  not  withheld  ; 
For  Thou  earnest  to  meet  him  with  blessings  of  good  things; 
Thou  settest  on  his  head  a  crown  of  fine  gold. 
Life  he  asked  Thee,  Thou  gavest  it  him, 
Length  of  days  forever  and  ever. 
His  glory  is  great  in  Thy  victory; 
Honour  and  majesty  Thou  layest  on  him  ; 
For  Thou  givest  him  everlasting  blessings ; 
Thou  makest  him  joyful  in  Thy  presence  with  gladness. 

Yea,  the  king  is  trusting  in  Yahweh, 

And  through  the  kindness  of  'Ely on  he  cannot  be  moved. 
Thine  hand  will  find  all  thine  enemies, 
Thy  right  hand  find  all  those  hating  thee ; 
Thou  wilt  put  them  in  a  furnace  of  fire, 
In  the  time  (of  the  setting)  of  thy  face  (against  them). 
Yahweh  will  swallow  them  up  in  His  anger, 
And  the  fire  (of  His  rage)  will  devour  them  ; 
Their  offspring  thou  wilt  destroy  from  the  earth, 
And  their  seed  from  among  the  sons  of  men. 
Though  they  have  extended  evil  unto  thee, 
Thought  an  evil  device,  they  shall  not  prevail ; 
For  thou  wilt  make  them  turn  their  shoulder  in  flight, 
With  thy  bowstrings  thou  wilt  aim  against  their  faces. 

Be  Thou  exalted,  Yahweh,  in  Thy  strength; 

We  will  sing  and  we  will  praise  Thy  might. 

Ps.  21  was  in  $B,  then  in  |H  and  I91&  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  It  is  a  royal 
Ps.  like  the  20th  and  its  complement :  the  former  a  litany  before  a  battle, 
the  latter  a  Te  Deum  after  a  victory.  It  was  therefore  probably  composed 
for  the  same  occasion.  That  which  was  the  theme  of  the  petition  was  after- 
ward the  theme  of  the  thanksgiving.  As  Ps.  20  it  has  two  parts :  one  of 
thanksgiving  made  during  sacrifice,  one  of  certitude  after  the  sacrifice;  each 
with  its  chorus.     Some  have  thought  of  a  Coronation  Ps.  because  of  the 


1 84  PSALMS 

reference  to  the  crowning  v4.  But  it  is  not  necessary  to  think  of  that  corona- 
tion as  connected  with  the  thanksgiving;  we  may  suppose  that  it  was  at  an 
earlier  date,  as  was  the  request  that  follows  it.  It  was  only  natural  that  the 
poet  should  go  back  to  the  coronation,  a  previous  experience  of  blessing  on 
the  part  of  the  king,  as  a  prelude  to  the  additional  blessing  of  victory  now 
enjoyed. 

Part  I.  has  six  couplets,  all  syn.  except  v.  5,  which  is  synth. — 
2.  In  Thy  strength],  God's,  exerted  against  the  enemy  in  defeating 
them,  and  for  the  king,  in  giving  him  the  victory,  in  which  he 
greatly  rejoiceth.  The  second  line  has  been  intensified  by  the  in- 
sertion, by  a  later  editor,  of  the  exclamation  "  how  "  which  was 
not  in  (3,  3,  <£.  —  3.  His  heart's  desire  ||  the  request  of  his  lips], 
that  specified  in  205,  for  victory  over  enemies.  —  4.  For  Thou 
earnest  to  meet  him].  This  causal  clause,  with  imperfects  between 
perfects,  changes  the  tense  as  well  as  construction,  in  order  to  go 
back  to  the  inauguration  of  the  king  which  it  vividly  describes. 
The  poet  conceives  that  Yahweh  Himself  came  to  that  festival 
with  appropriate  gifts.  —  blessings  0/ good  things],  the  general  wel- 
fare of  the  monarch  in  property  and  government.  —  Thou  settest 
on  his  head].  Yahweh  Himself  was  the  chief  actor,  though  the 
ceremonial  was  performed  by  His  agents,  probably  the  priests. 
The  king  was  Yahweh's  king,  His  son,  in  accordance  with  the 
covenant  of  David,  making  David's  seed  an  everlasting  dynasty  for 
His  people.  —  a  crown  of  fine  gold],  the  choicest  gold  for  the 
royal  crown.  —  5.  Life  he  asked],  not  because  of  previous  illness 
or  peril,  but  length  of  days],  a  petition  for  a  long  reign,  undisturbed 
by  perils  of  succession,  as  expressed  in  the  usual  address  to  kings, 
not  only  in  Hebrew,  cf.  7215  1  S.  io24  2  S.  1616  1  K.  i25  2  K.  n12 
Ne.  23,  but  also  among  Egyptians,  Babylonians,  and  other  ancient 
nations. — forever  and  ever],  not  in  the  absolute  sense  of  a  never- 
ending  life,  and  so  realised  alone  in  the  Messiah,  according  to  later 
conceptions  ;  but  in  the  ordinary  concrete  sense  of  a  very  long 
time. — 6.  His  glory  ||  honour  and  majesty],  heaping  up  terms  to 
represent  the  exaltation  and  renown  of  the  king  due  to  Thy  victoty], 
recognising  that  it  was  Yahweh's  gift  to  the  king  and  that  all  this 
majesty  was  put  upon  him  by  his  God.  —  7.  For  Thou  give st  him], 
returning  to  the  causal  clause  of  v.4,  in  order  to  make  a  more  gen- 
eral reference  to  the  king's  entire  career  j  now  in  the  climax  de- 


PSALM   XXL  185 

parting  from  the  specific  reference  to  the  victory.  —  everlasting 
blessings'],  sums  up  the  blessings  of  good  things  of  v.4,  and  the  life, 
forever  and  ever  of  v.5.  —  in  Thy  presence].  The  king  as  the  son  of 
God  is  conceived  as  not  only  enjoying  the  presence  of  Yahweh  at 
his  coronation  and  in  the  hour  of  victory ;  but  also  as  living  in  the 
presence  and  favour  of  Yahweh,  and  so  as  ever  joyful  and  with 
gladness.  —  8.  The  chorus,  in  a  couplet  of  refrain,  asserts  that  the 
king  is  trusting  in  Yahweh],  the  reason  for  all  his  experience  of 
divine  favour  and  blessing.  It  is  through  the  kindness]  as  thus  ex- 
hibited that  he  has  the  confidence  that  he  cannot  be  moved ;  he 
will  be  in  the  future,  as  in  the  past,  firm  and  immovable,  and  not 
be  shaken  by  any  wars  or  troubles  that  may  arise  in  his  realm.  — 
%Elyon],  the  name  of  God  as  the  most  High,  the  Exalted,  is  most 
appropriate  in  the  mouth  of  the  chorus,  in  the  exaltation  of  His 
victory. 

Part  II.  is  an  antistr.  to  the  first  part.  It  seems  to  have  been 
sung  after  the  sacrifice  had  been  made.  It  thus  resembles  the 
second  part  of  Ps.  20.  On  that  account  it  probably  expresses 
certitude  with  reference  to  the  future,  and  the  imperfects  should 
be  conceived  as  futures ;  although  they  might  grammatically  be 
rendered  as  jussives,  expressing  wish,  as  many  interpreters  would 
have  them.  Where  the  grammar  does  not  decide,  we  have  to  de- 
pend upon  the  context  and  the  circumstances  of  the  Ps.  This 
Str.  has  the  same  number  of  lines  as  the  previous  one,  although  ^ 
has  abridged  one  of  them ;  there  are  also  six  couplets,  all  syn.  but 
v.10,  which  is  synth.  —  9.  Thine  hand  ||  Thy  right  hand  .  .  .  find], 
in  pursuit  in  battle,  overtaking,  laying  hold  of  thine  enemies  ||  those 
hating  thee.  — 10.  Thou  wilt  put  them  in  a  furnace  of  fire],  not  as 
some,  fig.  of  fiery  indignation  as  expressed  by  the  ||  in  the  time  of 
the  setting  of  thy  face~].  This  is  the  angry  countenance,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  conception  of  God's  wrath  as  a  consuming  fire,  Is.  316, 
and  the  fiery  furnace  of  the  day  of  judgment,  Mai.  319 ;  but  inasmuch 
as  these  passages  refer  to  God's  anger,  and  this  Ps.  to  the  kings,  the 
furnace  is  probably  literal,  in  accordance  with  the  cruel  methods 
of  war  of  the  early  Davidic  monarchy,  as  shown  in  David's  treat- 
ment of  the  Ammonites,  2  S.  1231.  "  He  put  them  under  saws, 
and  under  harrows  of  iron,  and  under  axes  of  iron,  and  made  them 
pass  through  the  brick  kiln."     What  David  did  to  the  Ammonites 


1 86  PSALMS 

his  successors  in  the  monarchy  might  be  conceived  as  doing  to 
other  enemies.  This  interpretation,  which  is  confirmed  by  v.11, 
was  softened  by  a  later  editor  into  a  simile,  whether  by  mistaking 
2  in  for  3  as,  or  intentionally,  we  may  not  be  able  to  deter- 
mine. V.10  in  the  present  text  and  Vrss.  is  two  pentameters.  We 
cannot  regard  it  as  a  gloss  because  the  entire  conception  of  the 
verse  is  primitive,  and  not  such  as  a  glossator  would  insert.  The 
loss  of  this  verse  would  reduce  the  Str.  by  four  lines,  and  so  destroy 
the  exact  proportion  of  the  two  parts  of  the  Ps.  The  difficulty 
originated  by  the  condensations  of  a  prosaic  copyist,  if  not  by 
mistakes  of  copying.  The  verb  has  fallen  out  of  the  clause  :  In 
the  time  {of  the  setting)  of  thy  face  (against  them);  and  the  noun 
has  fallen  out  of  the  clause  :  and  the  fire  (of  His  rage)  will  devour 
them.  The  poet  emphasizes  the  angry  face  of  the  king  by  putting 
in  parall.  with  it  the  divine  activity  :  Yahweh  will  swallow  them 
up  in  His  anger.  — 11.  Their  offspring  ||  their  seed~\.  The  cruelty 
of  ancient  warfare,  based  on  the  principle  of  blood  vengeance, 
which  required  children  to  avenge  the  blood  of  their  parents,  and 
descendants  of  a  tribe  to  avenge  the  blood  of  their  tribe,  involved 
the  apparent  necessity  of  putting  to  death  all  male  children  in  war 
in  order  to  make  such  vengeance  impossible.  The  poet  simply 
shares  these  ancient  conceptions,  as  expressed  in  the  wars  of  ex- 
termination of  the  Canaanites  at  the  conquest,  Jos.  621  io28-39  n14, 
and  even  in  Pss.  g6  1379.  — 12.  Though  they  have  extended  unto 
thee  ||  thought"],  completed  action  in  the  future,  in  a  hypothetical 
clause.  —  evil  ||  evil  device],  the  plan,  the  purpose,  the  attitude  of 
enemies  in  the  future  may  be  evil.  Even  if  they  have  planned  a 
campaign  of  injury,  they  shall  not  prevail],  they  cannot  succeed 
any  more  in  the  future  than  they  have  in  the  past.  They  will  be 
defeated  with  humiliation.  — 13.  For  thou  wilt  make  them  turn 
their  shoulder  in  flight].  The  reason  for  their  flight  is  given  in  the 
parallel  clause  which  otherwise  would  be  inconsistent  with  it. — 
With  thy  bowstrings].  The  bow  was  one  of  the  chief  weapons  of 
Israel  in  the  royal  period,  especially  of  the  king,  v.  2  S.  i18,22, 
Ps.  455-6.  —  thou  wilt  aim  against  their  faces].  This  deadly  peril 
to  the  faces  of  the  enemy,  as  the  king  and  his  army  advanced 
against  them,  is,  in  the  climax,  in  antith.  to  their  backs  as  seen 
in  retreat.  — 14.     The  chorus  appropriately  concludes  the  festival 


PSALM   XXI.  187 

by  praising  the  strength  ||  might  of  Yahweh,  which  has  given  the 
king  the  victory.  They  are  impelled  therefore  not  only  to  honour 
and  magnify  their  king,  but  also  to  recognise  that  honour  is  due  to 
Yahweh,  and  therefore  they  sing  a  glad  choral :  Be  thou  exalted, 
Yahweh. 

2.  Sijj  -id j  Kt.,  hg~r\iD  Qr.  But  nn  is  not  translated  by  <&,  &,  3;  prob.  as 
Hare,  gl.  to  strengthen  the  text:  original  reading  =  isd-1?.];.  —  3.  nwn] 
cstr.  of  niso  n.f.  v.  1017,  in  f  usually  of  physical  appetite;  but  thing  desired 
in  bad  sense  782,  here  in  good  sense.  —  ^f]  <5  has  rrjs  if/vxys  ai)roG  =  ^DJ 
more  suitable  to  usage  (v.  48  io3).  nrina]  fully  written  for  pr\:  so  v.5.  I*?  is 
poss.  a  gl.;  no  more  needed  here  than  in  v.36,  but  cf.  v5a;  if  original  must 
have  Makkeph  ^~nnj. —  fnEhK]  n.f.  cstr.  request  a.X.  ^BhH  not  in  Heb  , 
but  cf.  As.  erelu. —  \  njMB]  vb.  Qal  withhold;  usually  sq.  p  8412,  sq.  S. — 
4.  un"i|?n  13]  Pi.  impf.  referring  to  past  between  pfs.  v.35,  come  to  meet,c.  2 
952  Dt.  235;  double  ace.  here.  Hare  thinks  the  2  has  fallen  off  by  haplog. — 
a"ia  rVD*n]  blessings  consisting  of  welfare,  prosperity  Ps.  47  23s  3411  30/5  8513, 
or  better,  good  things  1035  10428  1079  v.  39  41.  — nn03|l  crown  a.X.  \f/  for  n-joj^ 
—  5.  D\»n]  emph.  /?)£,  /<?«£•  life.  —  ?|DD]  a  gl.,  explanation  not  needed,  im- 
pares  measure ;  for  an  original  ^Sne>,  <@>  777-170^x6  <re.  —  f  0^  Hs]  Dt.  3020 
Jb.  1212  Pr.  32- 16  La.  520  Pss.  zfi  23s  9116  93s.  —  i^i  o^p]  9^/0**  215  457-18 
4815  5210  1045  11944  I451-2-2!  Ex.  1518  Mi.  46  Dn.  123.  — 6.  mtfn]  impf.  de- 
scriptive of  past  victory,  cf.  168.  —  7.  ViP^rv^s]  cf.  v.46  here  c.  double  ace. 
in  sense  of  give  to;  c.  S  pers.  921.  —  n^S  rflana]  blessings  forever  ||  3H3  ni3"U, 
therefore  blessings  given  to  the  king  and  not  "  most  blessed  forever  "  AV., 
RV.,  taking  n)313  as  abst.  pi.  intensive.  The  usual  sense  of  rvtf  (87)  with 
double  ace.  is,  however,  to  make  a  thing  over  into  another  1812  2113  847  889 
no1;  and  c.  ace.  +  a  2110  831'2-14. —  irmn]  Pi.  impf.  3  f.,  c.  sf.  3  sg.  of  f  n-n 
vb.  Qal  rejoice  Ex.  189  (E)  Jb.  f  (dub.)  Pi.  make  joyful  a.X.  here.— 
9.  N*pn]  Qal  impf.  3  f.  of  nxd  come  or  light  upon  (often  unexpectedly) ;  so 
here  c.  S;  befall,  c.  ace.  1163  119143,  cf.  8921.  Return  to  2d  pers.,  referred  to 
Yahweh  by  some,  to  king  by  others,  the  latter  better.  The  repetition  of  nxd 
in  this  sense  is  rather  tautological.  Du.  would  change  to  man.  <5£  has  Sd 
before  TNlfr,  this  prob.  the  correct  text.  — 10.  lon^n]  Qal  impf.  2  m.,  c.  sf. 
archaic  3  pi.  as  v.13.  —  trs  nuns]  a.X.  as  an  oven  of  fire,  2  improb.  rd.  2. 
■vnn  ftirnace,  a.X.  \J/;  but  not  uncommon  elsw. — rpji  nj?S]  a/  the  lime  of 
thy  presence,  i.e.  in  anger,  from  context,  cf.  La.  416.  The  line  is  defective. 
Insert  nn  as  Lv.  20s-  6  2617  Ez.  148,  w:b  jnj  of  angry  looks,  mm  is  attached 
to  previous  words  to  complete  the  line  against  $%  by  Ba,  but  Vrss.  and  most 
scholars  attach  it  to  subsequent  words.  —  e;n  ctasrn  vy'yii  "<3N3  mm]  as  it  stands 
is  of  a  different  measure,  also  3d  pers.  appears  for  2d  pers.  of  preceding  and 
following  context.  It  interrupts  either  as  gl.,  so  Ba.,  Be.,  or  as  another  voice, 
as  above  v.8.  Two  lines  are  needed  here  to  make  the  second  half  of  Ps.  equal 
with  the  first  half.     We  have  only  five  words  in  the  text  where  we  need 


1 88  PSALMS 

six.     The  second  1.  might  easily  be  restored  by  inserting  imap  as  Ez.  2I38 

2231  3819. 

DJ,'1?^   1«3N3   mm 

wnap  rs  dSsn™ 

t^a]  vb.  Qal  swallow  up,  engulf;  subj.  pK  10617  as  Ex.  1512  Nu.  1680, 
etc.;  of  devastation  of  enemy  Ps.  1243  Ho.  87  Je.  5 184;  of  calamity  Ps.  6916. 
Pi.  swallow  tip,  engulf  2110  5510  subj.  '»,  35'2&  subj.  enemies.  Hithp.  />*? 
swallowed  up,  their  wisdom  Ps.  107-7.  — 11.  ''DnsJ  archaic  sf.  3  pi.  of  "no 
n.m.  //-«//.  — 12.  njn  W']  antith.  to  nonnoj :  stretch  out,  extend  hand,  so  <?.*- 
/*>*/  ***  in  the  hand,  cf.  non  Gn.  39-1  (J),  mktf  Is.  6612.  —  %  n;n  n.f. :  (1)  «*/, 
misery,  distress  34^  9110  I0726-89;  n;n  tf»  27s  41-  Je.  I717- 18  512;  p"»j?n  «///y 
Pss.  3420  4013  7I»  884  1416  (cf.  Dt.  3223);  «n  np  Ps.  3719  Je.  227  +  3  t.  Am.  5" 
Mi.  28  Ec.  912;  njn  nxn  Ps.  9015,  cf.  Je.  4417.  (2)  Evil,  injury,  wrong  Pss.  2/12 
2S3  35^  52*  1095,  -1  nfrj?  c>  1 53  + .  Obj.  vbs.  t  3»n  354  418  1403  Gn.  5020  (E) 
Je.  36s 48*  Mi.  2;!;  tip2  Ps.  71182*,  cf.  1  S.  2410  2526  I  K.  207;  vhi  Ps.  3813;  fen 
4o15  =  703;  fa*?*  3512  38^1  Gn.  44*  (J)  Je.  iS2j  51-'*.  (3)  Evil  in  ethical 
sense:  "\2  rr?:j>  5019  of  speech,  9423  10734.  —  •it,,vv~s?]  relative  clause,  which 
they  cannot  or  could  not,  e.g.  mirpS;  ^  (v.  135).  — 13.  D3#  toP^n  ";]  vb. 
with  double  ace.  v.  Ges.§117lV,  Dr.§189ob9-.  The  shoulder  here  for  back,  cf. 
r\y  nju  Jos.  712  Je.  4839  (Hiph.);  »p?  ?nj  Ps.  1841;  oatf  njon  1  S.  io9.  —  npip] 
n.  bowstring,  a.\.  in  this  sense;  elsw.  tent  cords,  but  not  in  ^,  cf.  nP>  112. 


PSALM   XXII.,  5  str.  io3. 

Ps.  22  is  the  lamentation  of  a  great  sufferer  in  peril  of  deadly 
enemies.     In  five   strophes,  the  situation   is   vividly   described : 

(1)  He  is  forsaken  by  God  in  his  extremity  (v.2-3),  notwith- 
standing  the   fathers   had   ever   been  delivered   by   Him    (v.4^). 

(2)  He  is  despised  by  the  nations,  as  a  mere  worm,  and  mocked 
for  his  trust  in  God  (v.7"9),  who  has  cared  for  him  hitherto 
since  his  birth  (v.10-11).  (3)  He  is  abandoned  to  bulls  and  lions 
(v.12-14),  and  is  wasting  away  body  and  soul  in  agony  (v.15). 
(4)  He  is  about  to  die  by  the  cruelty  of  dogs  (v.16-17),  who  are 
greedily  gazing  on  him,  anxious  for  their  prey  (v.18-19).  (5)  His 
life  is  abandoned  to  all  these  enemies,  and  in  despair  he  prays 
for  deliverance  (v.20-22),  with  the  vow  to  praise  Yahweh  in  the 
congregation  of  the  temple  (v.2326).  A  later  editor  makes  the 
deliverance  more  distinct  by  stating  it  as  a  fact  (v.24'2527).  A 
still  later  editor  gives  the  deliverance  a  world-wide  significance, 
with  a  meaning  to  subsequent  generations  (v.2*-32). 


iJSALM   XX1J.  189 


TV/TY  'El,  why  dost  Thou  forsake  me? 
Far  from  my  salvation  is  my  roaring. 
I  cry  in  the  daytime,  but  Thou  answerest  not; 
And  in  the  night,  there  is  no  respite  for  me. 
But,  O  Thou  (Yahweh),  Holy  One, 
Enthroned  upon  the  praises  of  Israel; 
In  Thee  our  fathers  trusted, 

(In  Thee)  they  trusted,  and  Thou  didst  deliver  them, 
Unto  Thee  they  cried  and  they  escaped, 
In  Thee  they  trusted  and  were  not  ashamed. 
"DUT  I  am  a  worm,  and  no  man, 

A  reproach  of  mankind,  and  despised  of  peoples. 

All  seeing  me  deride  me ; 

They  let  out  (words),  they  shake  their  head, 

(Saying)  "  Roll  on  Yahweh,  let  Him  deliver  him  ; 

Let  Him  rescue  him,  seeing  that  He  delights  in  him." 

But,  O  Thou  who  drewest  me  forth  from  the  belly, 

(My  trust)  upon  the  breast  of  my  mother; 

Upon  Thee  was  I  cast  from  the  womb. 

From  the  belly  of  my  mother  Thou  art  my  'Eh 

II. 

"RE  not  far  from  me,  for  there  is  distress; 
Be  near,  for  there  is  no  helper. 
Many  bulls  encompass  me, 
Mighty  ones  of  Bashan  encircle  me. 
They  open  wide  upon  me  their  mouth, 
As  a  lion  rending  and  roaring. 
As  water  I  am  poured  out ; 
Yea,  all  my  bones  are  parted  ; 
My  heart  is  become  like  wax. 
It  is  melted  in  the  midst  of  mine  inwards. 
TVTY  strength  is  dried  up  like  a  potsherd. 

And  my  tongue  is  made  to  cleave  to  my  jaws* 

And  in  the  dust  of  death  (they)  lay  me. 

(Many)  dogs  encompass  me, 

An  assembly  of  maltreaters  enclose  me; 

They  dig  into  my  hands  and  my  feet. 

I  count  all  my  bones; 

While  they  look,  they  stare  upon  me. 

They  divide  my  garments  among  them, 

And  on  my  clothing  they  cast  lots. 

III. 

QH  Thou,  put  not  afar  off  my  (hind)  ; 
Yahweh,  O  haste  to  my  help; 
O  deliver  from  the  sword  my  life, 
From  the  power  of  the  dog  mine  only  one. 


J90  rSALMS 

From  the  mouth  of  the  lion  save  me, 

From  the  horns  of  the  yore  ox,  mine  afflicted  one. 

Then  will  I  declare  Thy  name  to  my  brethren ; 

In  the  midst  of  the  congregation  will  I  praise  Thee. 

From  Thee  will  be  my  praise  in  the  great  congregation ; 

My  vows  will  I  pay  in  Thy  presence. 

Ps.  22  was  in  JB;  then  in  ffl  and  Eft  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  The  latter 
designated  the  melody  to  which  it  was  to  be  sung  -trwn  nW  (v.  Intr.  §  34)  : 
a  hind  in  the  dawn  {leaps).  This  is  referred  by  some  Rabbins  to  the  dawn 
itself  as  a  hind  leaping  in  fresh  vigour;  by  others  to  the  hind  hunted  in  the 
early  morning  {v.  De.,  Psalmen^  s.  225).  The  former  would  be  a  joyous 
melody  not  suited  to  the  Ps.;  the  latter  is  most  suitable,  especially  if  there  be 
a  connection  between  the  hind  in  the  title  and  the  rV?>K  v.'20.  The  Ps.  is 
composed  of  five  trimeter  decastichs,  each  of  two  sections,  hexastich  and 
tetrastich  v.2"6'  7~n'  12~^  16"19'  ^^  ^  These  are  arranged  in  three  parts,  each 
characterised  by  the  use  of  pm  v.2- 12-  *.  The  first  two  parts  consist  of  Str. 
and  Antistr.,  the  third  of  a  single  Str.  It  is  possible  that  the  third  also  had  an 
antistr.  whose  place  has  been  taken  up  by  the  later  additions  to  the  Ps.  The 
Ps.  is  a  simple,  graphic,  and  powerful  description  of  a  sufferer,  trusting  in  God, 
though  apparently  forsaken  by  Him  and  left  in  the  hands  of  cruel  enemies, 
who  have  already  brought  him  to  the  point  of  death.  He  yet  continues  his 
plaintive  cry  for  deliverance,  and  concludes  with  a  vow  of  thanksgiving  in  the 
congregation  assembled  in  temple  worship.  The  description  is  too  varied  for 
any  individual  experience.  It  heaps  up  similes  and  situations  which  are  not 
always  consistent,  and  which  cannot  be  attached  to  any  real  historical  event, 
either  of  a  heroic  sufferer,  or  of  the  pious  part  of  the  community,  or  of  the 
nation  itself.  It  is  indeed  an  ideal  situation  such  as  that  described  in  Lam. 
with  reference  to  Jerusalem,  and  that  of  Is.2  with  reference  to  Mother  Zion 
and  the  servant  of  Yahweh.  In  these  writings  many  different  situations  are 
described  in  which  individuals  might  be  conceived  as  suffering,  and  are  com- 
bined with  national  experiences,  and  the  whole  made  into  a  mosaic  of  afflic- 
tion to  represent  the  woes  of  a  pious  community,  abandoned  by  God  to  their 
cruel  foes.  The  ideal  of  the  Ps.  is  so  nearly  related  to  the  suffering  servant 
of  Is.2  that  there  must  be  dependence  of  the  one  upon  the  other:  vrnp  v.4, 
cf.  Is.  4026;  njrSin  v.7,  cf.  Is.  4114;  op  nra  v.7,  cf.  Is.  497  53s;  wh  nSi  v.7,  cf. 
Is.  5214;  din  ncnn  v.7,cf.  Is.  517.  But  the  poet  is  also  independent;  for  his  use 
of  animals,  lions,  bulls,  dogs,  for  enemies,  and  probably  also  of  the  hind  for 
himself  is  characteristic,  and  while  not  without  example  in  Pss.,  is  yet  beyond 
anything  else  in  the  OT.  The  authors  cannot  be  the  same.  The  poets  use, 
however,  the  same  trimeter  measure,  and  in  the  main  the  same  ideals;  and 
the  historical  situation  which  occasioned  the  poems  is  similar.  If  the  suffer- 
ing servant  of  Is.2  is  exilic,  that  of  the  Ps.  is  post-exilic,  for,  (1)  the  reference 
to  the  fathers  v.5  is  in  the  style  of  post-ex.  writers,  (2)  the  existence  of  the 
temple  is  implied  in  the  assembly  for  worship,  v.23- 26;  the  payment  of  vows, 


PSALM   XXII.  191 

v.26;  and  probably  also  the  cherubic  throne  idealised  in  the  niSnn  of  Israel, 
v.4,  which  in  itself  seems  to  imply  the  temple  hymns.  But  we  cannot  go  too 
far  from  the  exile  because,  (1)  Ps.  715-6  cites  from  v.10-11.  (2)  The  use  of  ns 
v.23  for  the  brethren  of  the  Snp,  cf.  1331,  Pr,  619,  implies  a  time  when  the  people 
were  compacted  by  persecution  into  a  brotherhood.  (3)  The  kingdom  or 
nation  no  longer  exists.  The  persecutors  are  foreign  nations,  o^no  my  v.17, 
an  organised  body,  over  against  the  bnp  of  the  people  of  God.  They  are 
compared  to  bulls  v.13-22,  lions  v.14-22,  and  yet  also  to  dogs  v.17-21;  thus  im- 
plying a  number  of  enemies,  and  enemies  of  different  characteristics.  This 
is  the  situation  of  the  infant  community  of  the  restoration,  when  they  were 
exposed  to  the  cruel  and  treacherous  attacks  of  the  minor  nations  as  described 
in  many  Pss.  of  the  period  {v.  Pss.  9-10  and  Ne.).  There  is,  in  the  fifth  Str., 
the  same  kind  of  a  distinction  between  the  poet  and  the  sufferer  that  we  find 
also  in  Is.  53.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  poet  is  not  speaking  altogether 
for  himself,  but  for  the  pious  community  as  the  servant  of  God.  And  so  he 
speaks  of  my  hind  ||  mine  only  one  ||  mine  afflicted  one,  as  of  my  help,  my  life, 
and  me,  v.20-22.  The  sufferer  is  thus  the  ideal  community,  and  the  sufferings 
are  idealised  in  a  mosaic  of  varied  experiences.  The  Ps.  received  additions 
in  order  to  give  it  a  wider  outlook:  (1)  the  fact  that  the  sufferer  was  heard 
and  answered,  and  that  the  entire  seed  of  Jacob  united  in  the  praise  of  Yah- 
weh  in  sacrificial  meals,  is  stated  in  v.24-25- 27.  In  this  section  v.27  in  its  use  of 
W\r>,  at  the  sacrificial  meals  at  the  temple,  particularly  in  public  praise,  and 
the  use  of  the  phrase  D33aS  tv  for  D3PDJ  »nn,  Is.  55s,  implies  a  later  period 
of  composition.  The  vbs.  in  v.27  have  been  changed  from  original  imvs.,  as 
v.24,  into  3  pi.  in  accordance  with  the  subsequent  pentameter.  This  was 
made  easier  by  the  separation  of  v.27  from  v.24- 25  by  v.'26.  (2)  The  world-wide 
significance  of  this  deliverance  is  brought  out  in  a  pentameter  heptastich. 
This  addition  was  probably  earlier  than  the  other,  and  is  similar  to  the  com- 
bination of  the  trimeter  and  pentameter  poems  in  Is.2  {v.  Br.MP339).  This 
heptastich  also  has  features  of  resemblance  to  the  last  parts  of  Is.3,  especially 
in  the  conversion  of  the  nations  and  their  participation  in  the  worship  of 
Yahweh  in  sacrificial  meals  in  Jerusalem,  v.28-30,  cf.  Is.  6619-23.  The  concep- 
tion of  Yahweh  as  the  universal  king,  v.29,  is  in  accordance  with  that  of  the 
royal  group  of  Pss.  93,  95-100.  For  in:t  ih,  nSu  ay,  v.31"32;  cf.  jnnx  -m, 
n-dj  oj?,  10219.  All  this  indicates  a  period  in  which  the  minor  persecuting 
nations  have  passed  out  of  view,  and  the  greater  and  more  distant  nations, 
who  are  not  persecutors,  but  friendly,  have  come  into  the  range  of  thought 
as  hopeful  converts  to  the  God  of  Israel.  This  addition  gave  the  earlier  Ps. 
a  wider  outlook  and  made  the  deliverance  of  the  sufferer  of  world-wide  im- 
portance. The  Ps.  has  been  regarded  by  the  Church  from  the  most  ancient 
times  as  the  great  Passion  Ps.,  and  it  is  the  proper  Ps.  for  Good  Friday.  This 
was  due:  (1)  to  the  use  of  v.2  by  Jesus  Himself  when  dying  on  the  cross, 
Mt.  2746  Mk.  1 5s4;  and  the  remarkable  resemblance  in  the  situation  of  Jesus 
at  that  time  to  the  situation  described  in  the  Ps.;  (2)  the  casting  lots  for  His 
garments,  v.19,  Mk.  1524  Jn.  1923-24;    (3)  the  parching  thirst,  v.1G,  Jn.  ig28~^; 


192  PSALMS 

(4)  the  agony  of  the  stretched  bones  on  the  cross,  v.16,  and  the  digging  into 
the  hands  and  feet  by  the  nailing  to  the  cross,  v.17;  (5)  the  cruel  gazing  on 
His  sufferings,  v.18,  Mt.  273tM4;  (6)  the  mocking  of  His  enemies  in  the  words  of 
the  Ps.,  v.9,  cf.  Mt.  2T43  Lk.  2$*.  It  seems  to  the  Christian  that  the  psalmist 
indeed  gives  a  more  vivid  description  of  the  sufferings  of  Christ  on  the  cross 
than  the  authors  of  the  Gospels.  Has  the  psalmist's  description  of  the  suffer- 
ing servant  of  Yahweh  an  accidental  coincidence  with  the  sufferings  of  Christ, 
or  is  the  coincidence  due  to  prophetic  anticipation  ?  We  cannot  think  of 
direct  prophecy.  The  reference  to  a  historical  situation  is  unmistakable.  But 
inasmuch  as  the  poet,  like  the  author  of  the  conception  of  the  suffering  servant 
of  Is.'2,  idealises  the  sufferings  of  Israel,  and  gives  his  sufferer  a  mediatorial 
relation  to  the  nations,  and  does  this  in  order  to  hold  up  to  the  pious  a  com- 
forting conception  of  a  divine  purpose  in  their  sufferings,  we  may  suppose 
that  this  ideal  was  designed  to  prepare  the  minds  of  the  people  of  God  for 
the  ultimate  realisation  of  that  purpose  of  redemption  in  a  sufferer  who  first 
summed  up  in  his  historical  experiences  this  ideal  of  suffering.  In  this  sense 
the  Ps.  is  Messianic  {v.  Br.*"*82*"*). 


Pt.  I.,  Str.  I.  is  composed  of  a  trimeter  tetrastich  antith.  to  a 
trimeter  hexastich.  In  the  tetrastich,  the  experience  of  the  suf- 
ferer is  described,  as  the  reverse  of  the  experience  of  the  fathers. 

—  2-3.  My  'El\  the  ancient  poetic  name  of  God,  intensified  by 
repetition  by  a  later  editor,  but  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  — 
why  dost  Thou  forsake  me],  expostulation  with  God  for  a  situation 
which  to  the  sufferer  seems  inexplicable,  cf.  Is.  4914.  EV8.  con- 
tinue the  question  through  the  next  line,  so  Dr.,  Kirk. ;  but  it 
makes  a  difficult  construction  in  Hebrew.  The  ancient  Vrss. 
regard  the  second  line  as  the  beginning  of  the  description  of 
suffering,  and  this  is  easier  and  more  natural.  It  begins  a  syn. 
tristich  as  the  basis  of  the  expostulation.  —  Far  from  my  salva- 
tion^. There  is  an  awful  gap  and  appalling  distance  between  the 
agony  and  the  salvation  from  it.  It  is  this  long  distance  in  time, 
this  prolonged  postponement  of  salvation,  which  the  psalmist  can- 
not understand.  —  is  my  roaring'],  the  loud  continued  outcry  of 
intense  suffering,  lengthened  by  a  prosaic  copyist  at  the  expense 
of  the  measure,  and  weakened  into  "  words  of  my  roaring."  ||  I  cry 
in  the  daytime,  which  passes  over  into,  and  in  the  night,  all  day 
and  all  night  long.  A  later  editor  inserted  "  O  my  God,"  to 
emphasize  the  appeal  to  God,  but  at  the  expense  of  the  measure. 

—  Thou  answerest  not].     God  is  silent  in  this  long  interval. — 


PSALM   XXII.  193 

—  there  is  no  respite  for  me].  His  agony  continues  without  inter- 
ruption, his  cry  for  help  has  no  pause.  —  4-6.  The  expostulation  is 
strengthened  by  a  reference  to  the  past  experience  of  the  fathers 
which  was  so  different ;  an  appeal  to  Yahweh  in  a  syn.  couplet, 
and  a  statement  of  the  experience  of  the  fathers  in  a  syn.  tetra- 
stich.—  O  Thou  {Yahweh),  Holy  One],  an  exclamation,  not  a  state- 
ment of  fact,  "Thou  art  holy,"  which  is  tame  and  unpoetical,  and 
not  in  accord  with  the  state  of  mind  of  the  sufferer.  The  divine 
name  "Yahweh"  is  necessary  to  the  measure;  it  was  omitted  by 
an  unpoetic  copyist.  The  term  "  Holy  One  "  is  characteristic  of 
Isaiah,  and  represents  God  in  His  majestic  aloofness,  a  concep- 
tion peculiarly  appropriate  here  ;  rather  than  in  accordance  with 
later  ideas,  God  as  the  ethically  complete  and  perfect  Being. — 
Enthroned  upon  the  praises  of  Israel r],  a  poetical  spiritualisa- 
tion  of  the  more  physical  idea  that  He  was  enthroned  upon  the 
cherubim  in  the  Holy  of  Holies  of  the  temple,  cf.  Ps.  802. 
Thither  the  praises  of  Israel  were  directed  in  temple  worship  ; 
thither  they  were  conceived  as  entering,  with  the  clouds  of  incense 
from  the  altar  of  incense,  which  stood  in  front  of  this  most  sacred 
place.  This  incense,  whose  very  idea  is  to  give  efficacy  to  prayer 
and  praise,  sweetens  them  and  makes  them  acceptable  to  Yahweh, 
goes  up  and  envelopes  the  cherubic  throne  so  that  the  throne 
of  Yahweh  is  conceived  as  sustained  by  them.  (3,  U,  3  give  a 
simpler  text,  "  O  Thou  enthroned  in  the  sanctuary,  the  praise  of 
Israel,"  which  is  tempting,  and  followed  by  Genebr.  and  R.  C. 
scholars  generally  ;  but  not  by  modern  Protestants,  who  follow  Calv. 
in  the  interpretation  given  above.  Aug.,  Euthymius,  al.,  interpret 
the  holy  as  of  holy  persons.  Horsley  follows  (3  except  that  he 
thinks  of  the  abstract  "  holiness  "  instead  of  holy  place.  PBV. 
"  And  Thou  continuest  holy ;  O  Thou  worship  of  Israel,"  is  an 
intermediate  rendering,  which  though  advocated  by  the  older 
English  scholars  such  as  Ham.,  Jebb,  "  is  based  on  an  untenable 
construction  of  the  words,"  Kirk.  —  In  Thee],  emphatic  in  posi- 
tion, repeated  in  the  second  line,  though  omitted  in  J^  by  a 
copyist's  mistake  at  the  expense  of  the  measure ;  so  also  in  the 
fourth  line,  with  the  syn.  unto  Thee],  required  by  its  verb  in 
the  third  line.  —  our  fathers],  the  common  subject  of  the  verbs 
of  the  four  lines,  and  so  emphasized  over  against  their  suffering 


194  PSALMS 

descendants.  —  trusted '],  repeated  for  emphasis  in  the  second  and 
fourth  lines,  with  the  intervening  cried,  of  the  third  line,  so  plain- 
tively expressed,  in  view  of  the  present  situation.  The  fathers 
were  not  forsaken,  as  is  their  son.  Thou  didst  deliver  them  || 
they  escaped  ||  they  were  not  ashamed.  This  is  the  climax ;  the 
shame  of  his  present  position  was  in  its  being  so  much  the  reverse 
of  theirs. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  a  hexastich,  describing  his  miserable 
situation,  and  a  tetrastich  of  expostulation,  based  on  his  own 
previous  experience.  —  7.  But  I  am  a  worm,  and  no  man],  tak- 
ing up  the  sense  of  shame,  expressed  in  the  last  vb.  of  the  previous 
str.     He  has  lost  his  manhood  and  is  become  a  miserable  worm. 

—  a  ?'eproach  of  mankind],  an  object  of  reproach  to  mankind  in 
general.  —  despised  of  peoples'],  the  nations  by  whom  he  was  sur- 
rounded. Such  is  also  the  description  of  the  servant  of  Yahweh 
in  Is.2:  "thou  worm  Jacob"  4114,  "whom  man  despiseth,"  "de- 
spised of  person,"  "  abhorred  of  the  nation  "  497,  "  the  reproach 
of  men  "  5 i7,  "  so  disfigured  more  than  man  was  his  appearance 
and  his  form  than  the  sons  of  men"  5214,  "despised,  and  for- 
saken of  men  ;  a  man  of  sorrows,  and  acquainted  with  grief"  53s 
(v.  Br.MP  349_;357) .  — 8.  All  seeing  me].  These  same  nations,  looking 
upon  the  affliction  of  the  people  of  God,  have  no  compassion,  but 
deride  in  word  and  gesture ;  they  let  out  {words'),  so  essentially  <&, 
words  that  they  would  not  venture  to  speak  to  a  self-respecting 
people  able  to  vindicate  themselves ;  they  do  not  restrain  them- 
selves, but  give  full  vent  to  their  maliciousness.  This  seems  more 
appropriate  to  the  use  of  the  Hebrew  term,  and  more  in  accord- 
ance with  their  words  given  in  v.9,  than  the  usual  rendering, 
"  shoot  out  the  lip  "  EV\,  explaining  the  original  as  an  insulting 
gesture,  although  apparently  sustained  by  similar  expressions  3521 
Jb.  1610.  This  interpretation  was  due  to  the  insertion  of  the  word 
"with  the  lip"  in  the  text,  with  the  same  motive,  at  the  expense 
cf  the  measure.  But  this  is  difficult  to  reconcile  with  the  other 
uses  of  the  Hebrew  word,  or  with  any  known  gesture  of  that  time. 

—  they  shake  their  head].  This  is  the  gesture  of  derision  accom- 
panying their  words.  The  same  gesture  appears  in  those  who 
mocked  the  crucified  Jesus.  "And  they  that  passed  by  railed 
on  him,  wagging  their  heads,  and  saying"  Mt.  2  739.  —  9.  Roll  on 


PSALM   XXII.  195 

Yahweh],  so  %  imv.  j  "commit  thyself"  RV. ;  "cast  thyself" 
JPSV. ;  which  is  better  than  ancient  Vrss.,  which  render  as  pf., 
so  "  He  trusted  "  PBV.,  AV.  The  enemies  say  this  in  derision. 
The  burden,  to  be  rolled  off  on  Yahweh,  for  Him  to  bear  for  His 
people,  was  the  agony  and  reproach.  —  Seeing  that  He  delights  in 
him].  The  people  were  well  known  to  be  trusting  in  Yahweh, 
their  God,  and  as  therefore  presumably  acceptable  to  Him,  and 
delighted  in  by  Him,  cf.  Wisd.  216sq-.  The  derision  of  suffering 
Israel  is  here,  as  ever,  accompanied  with  the  derision  of  Yahweh 
their  God  by  the  hostile  nations.  — 10.  But,  O  Thou],  emphatic 
repetition  of  personal  address  to  Yahweh  in  antithesis  to  But  I 
v.7 ;  better  than  the  usual  interpretation  stating  a  fact,  "  Thou  art 
He."  This  syn.  tetrastich  emphasises  the  previous  experience, 
that  Yahweh  had  not  only  taken  an  active  part  at  the  birth  and 
during  the  infancy  of  the  nation,  but  had  continued  to  be  their 
God  without  ceasing  until  the  present,  cf.  Is.  46H  —  11.  My  'El], 
at  the  close  of  this  Str.  and  at  the  beginning  of  the  Ps.,  incloses 
the  entire  first  part  within  this  most  comprehensive  relation. 

Pt.  II.,  Str.  III.  begins  with  a  description  of  the  external 
situation  in  three  couplets,  and  concludes  with  the  effect  upon 
the  person  himself  in  two  couplets.  — 12.  Be  not  far  from  me], 
renewing  v.26,  and  renewed  in  v.20a  ||  Be  near],  the  negative 
transformed  into  a  positive,  more  probable  than  the  present 
text,  which  makes  "near,"  an  adj.  predicate  of  distress,  at  the 
expense  of  the  measure  and  parallelism.  — for  there  is  distress 
\for  there  is  no  (other)  helper],  the  reason  for  the  plaintive 
appeal  to  God.  — 13.  Many  bulls],  intensified  in  mighty  ones  of 
Bashan],  Bashan  was  famed  for  its  rich  pastures,  fat  cattle,  and 
powerful  and  fierce  bulls.  The  enemies  are  compared  to  them, 
cf.  Am.  41.  They  encompass  ||  encircle],  enclose  and  shut  in  on 
every  side  with  their  horns,  cf.  v.22,  so  that  there  is  no  escape,  no 
one  within  that  enclosure  to  help.  — 14.  Leaving  the  bulls  and 
reverting  to  the  enemies  :  they  open  wide  upon  me  their  mouth], 
in  order  to  devour,  swallow  up.  This  statement  is  appropriate 
not  to  bulls,  but  to  beasts  of  prey,  and  so  as  a  lion  rending  and 
roaring],  opening  the  mouth  to  roar  as  well  as  to  devour.  Cruel 
enemies  are  frequently  compared  to  lions,  see  v.22  f  io9  1712. — 
15.  As  water  I  am  poured  out'],  so  Jos.   f,  "  the  hearts  of  the 


196  PSALMS 

people  melted  and  became  as  water."  —  all  my  bones  are  parted], 
each  one  distinct  in  pain,  all  aching  and  seeming  as  if  they  had 
broken  apart  ;  both  graphic  descriptions  of  feverish  anxiety. 
The  reference  to  the  heart  is  renewed  and  enlarged  as  the  prin- 
cipal thing.     It  melts  as  if  it  were  wax  within  him,  cf.  683. 

Str.  IV.  The  antistr.  is  composed  of  two  tristichs  and  two 
couplets.  — 16.  The  agony  of  the  previous  tetrastich  is  continued, 
the  result  of  the  feverish  anxiety  is  still  further  described.  —  My 
strength  is  dried  up],  is  sapped  ;  the  blood  is  dried  up  and  the 
body  is  become  brittle  and  breakable,  like  a  potsherd,  a  piece  of 
pottery.  —  My  tongue  is  made  to  eleave  to  my  jaws].  By  intense 
thirst,  the  tongue  adheres  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth  so  that  he 
cannot  use  it,  cf.  Jn.  1928.  —  In  the  dust  of  death],  a  phrase 
especially  appropriate  not  only  to  the  previous  context,  the  dry, 
brittle  potsherd,  but  also  because  it  involves  the  idea  of  the  for- 
mation of  the  original  man  out  of  dust,  as  a  potter  makes  his 
pottery,  Gn.  21,  and  also  the  conception  of  death  as  a  return  of 
the  body  to  the  dust,  Gn.  319.  This  is  probably  the  reason  why 
the  2  pers.  sg.  is  given  in  J^,  "  Thou  layest  me,"  referring  to  God 
as  the  primary  agent,  instead  of  the  simpler  and  more  natural  3  pi. 
referring  to  the  enemies,  cf.  v.13.  —  they  lay  me].  The  enemies 
have  been  active  against  the  sufferer,  while  his  God,  through  it 
all,  has  remained  afar  off.  — 17.  {Many)  dogs],  so  (3,  U,  PBV. 
||  "  many  bulls "  v.13  more  suited  to  parallel.  "  For  dogs,"  J^, 
AV.,  RV.  The  enemies  are  now  compared  to  the  more  ignoble 
animals.  Dogs  in  the  OT.  are  the  fierce  prowlers  of  the  night 
and  scavengers  of  the  streets,  v.  2  K.  935"36  Pss.  $g7  15  6824  Je.  15s. 
They  come  in  a  pack,  and  so  are  called  an  assembly  of  mal- 
treaters],  cf.  8614,  greedy  to  seize,  maul,  and  in  every  way  maltreat 
their  victim.  —  They  dig  into],  the  dogs  with  their  teeth.  —  my 
hands  and my  feet].  The  extremities  are  first  gnawed  by  the  dogs. 
This  is  the  translation  best  sustained  by  the  Vrss.  and  the  context. 
EV8.  "  pierce  "  is  not  justified  by  the  Hebrew  word,  and  was  due 
to  a  desire  for  a  specific  reference  to  the  crucifixion.  ^  "  as  a 
lion,"  used  a  word  for  lion  not  found  elsewhere  in  \p  for  the  usual 
word  given  above  v.14,  and  not  suited  to  the  previous  mention  of 
dogs,  or  of  hands  and  feet.  The  sufferer  here  v.1Gc  is  lying  in  the 
dust  in  extreme  peril  of  death,  and   his  enemies   have   already 


PSALM  XXII.  197 

begun  to  devour  him.  — 18.  I  count  all  my  bones'],  renewing  v.156. 
Each  one  stands  out  with  its  own  special  ache.  —  While  they  look 
||  they  stare],  a  circumstantial  clause.  While  the  enemies  are 
looking  with  intense  eagerness,  staring  greedily  upon  him,  he  is 
aching  all  over  from  head  to  foot,  in  all  his  framework  of  bones. 
The  usual  rendering,  as  an  independent  and  emphatic  clause, 
makes  two  lines  in  this  verse,  in  no  proper  relation  of  parallelism, 
and  justifies  in  a  measure  the  proposal  of  some  moderns  to  trans- 
fer v.18a  to  the  beginning  of  the  Str.  — 19.  They  divide  ||  cast  lots], 
returning  from  the  dogs  to  the  enemies  they  represent,  as  above 
v.16c.  They  have  stripped  him  of  garments  ||  clothing,  and  they 
divide  these  as  their  spoil  in  the  usual  way  by  lots. 

Str.  V.  is  composed  of  a  hexastich  of  petition  and  a  tetrastich 
of  vows.  —  20-22.  The  Str.  begins  with  a  plea  similar  to  that  of 
v.12.  —  O  Thou,  put  not  far  off],  as  (3,  required  by  the  object  and 
to  be  preferred  to  J^  "  be  not  far  from."  Yahweh  has  been  trans- 
posed with  my  hind,  because  of  a  misconception  of  the  meaning 
of  the  Hebrew  word,  which  is  usually  interpreted  after  (3  as  "  my 
help  "  or  "  succour,"  by  EV8.  and  most  after  3  as  "  my  strength." 
But  really  it  is  the  same  word  as  that  in  the  title  translated  by 
(3  as  "  help,"  but  pointed  by  J^  as  "  hind."  Indeed  the  suffix,  in 
accordance  with  Hebrew  usage,  which  regards  the  soul  as  well  as 
the  body  as  resting  on  a  common  substratum,  the  person  himself, 
(v.  42s-7  1312)  objectifies  the  soul  as  the  seat  of  his  suffering.  It 
is  first  compared  to  a  hind,  hunted  until  its  strength  fails  and  it 
pants,  ready  to  perish,  cf.  42s ;  just  as  in  the  parallel  v.21ct  my  life, 
v.215  mine  only  one  (cf.  3517),  as  his  unique  priceless  possession, 
and  again  in  v.226  after  (3,  mine  afflicted  one.  Here  also  later 
copyists,  not  understanding  the  original  usage,  interpret  it  in  MT. 
as  vb.  pf.  2  m.  "Thou  hast  answered  me,"  making  a  very  abrupt 
conclusion  to  the  petition,  by  a  single  word  of  divine  response, 
and  making  it  difficult  to  explain  the  phrase  from  the  horns  of  the 
yore  ox,  which  occasions  great  difference  of  opinion  among  inter- 
preters. In  fact  the  six  lines  all  rhyme  in  i.  Each  couplet  has 
its  verb.  —  O  haste  to  my  help],  a  phrase  frequent  in  Pss.  of 
lamentation  ||  deliver  ||  save.  The  four  kinds  of  enemies  of  the 
previous  Str.  appear  also  in  this  climax  of  petition  :  the  sword  of 
the  enemies  themselves,  the  dog,  the  lion,  the  yore  ox.     The  latter 


198  PSALMS 

is  an  intensification  of  the  bulls  of  Bashan,  and  refers  to  that  large, 
fierce  bull  of  ancient  times  which  has  now  become  extinct. — 
23,  26.  The  petition  is  sustained  by  a  vow  in  four  lines :  /  will 
declare  Thy  name],  make  it  known  as  a  saving  name,  praise  ||  pay 
vows],  make  votive  offerings.  The  declaration  is  to  be  to  my 
brethren],  those  associated  in  the  community  of  God's  people. 
See  Heb.  212,  where  these  words  are  put  in  the  mouth  of  Christ.  — 
the  great  congregation]  assembled  for  worship  in  the  temple. — 
in  Thy  presence],  before  the  sacred  place  where  Yahweh  dwelt,  in 
the  most  Holy  Place  of  the  temple.  The  phrase,  From  Thee]  is 
probably  to  be  interpreted  as  the  source  of  the  deliverance,  and 
therefore  of  the  praise  for  it.  This  last  couplet,  which  is  parallel 
to  the  previous  couplet,  has  been  separated  by  the  insertion  of  a 
gloss  v.24-25  which  changes  the  reference  to  God  to  the  3d  pers., 
and  so  makes  awkward  changes  to  and  from  2d  to  3d  pers.,  and 
also  destroys  the  organisation  of  the  Str.  The  original  Ps.  comes 
to  an  appropriate  close  here  with  a  vow  of  public  recognition  and 
thankoffering  in  the  temple  for  the  deliverance,  the  prayer  for 
which  has  been  the  theme  of  the  Ps. 

24-25.  This  piece  is  composed  of  two  syn.  trimeter  triplets. 
It  is  a  call  upon  the  congregation  to  praise  Yahweh  because  of 
His  deliverance  of  the  afflicted  people.  It  is  a  generalisation 
of  the  situation  by  a  later  editor. 

Ye  that  fear  Yahweh  praise  Him, 

All  the  seed  of  Jacob  glorify  Him, 

All  the  seed  of  Israel  stand  in  awe  of  Him  ; 

For  He  hath  not  abhorred  to  answer  the  afflicted, 

And  He  hath  not  hid  His  face, 

But  when  he  cried  unto  Him  He  heard. 

24.  Ye  that  fear  Yahweh],  those  that  have  the  religion  of 
Yahweh  and  are  in  the  habit  of  doing  reverence  to  Him.  —  All 
the  seed  of  Jacob  ||  seed  of  Israel],  phrases  for  the  people  Is.  45 1925 
Je.  3 136-  *  ^y6. — praise  \\  glorify  ||  stand  in  awe],  usual  phrases 
of  public  worship.  —  25.  For  He  hath  not  abhorred].  This  strong 
and  unusual  term,  in  this  connection,  received  a  milder  variant  in 
the  margin,  "  He  hath  not  despised,"  which  subsequently  came 
into  the  text  by  conflation  and  so  destroyed  the  measure.  The 
uncommon  expression  is  weakened  in  the  following  line  to  the 


PSALM  XXII.  199 

usual  one,  hath  not  hid  His  face,  and  the  ordinary  one,  heard.  — 
to  answer  the  afflicted].  This  seems  to  be  the  best  interpretation 
of  the  unpointed  text,  taking  the  first  word  as  infin.  construct  of 
the  vb.  "  answer  "  after  (&.  But  J^  points  it  as  abstract  noun  from 
the  stem  meaning  affliction,  which  gives  us  the  tautological  "  afflic- 
tion of  the  afflicted,"  AV.,  RV.,  3  modestiam,  so  Aq.  takes  it  as 
another  abstract  noun,  PBV.  "  low  estate,"  which  gives  a  better 
sense,  but  is  not  suited  to  the  context. 

27.  This  tristich  resembles  in  form  the  previous  two,  v.24-25,  of 
which  it  was  originally  a  continuation ;  but  it  changes  from  2d  to 
3d  pi.,  and  in  this  respect  agrees  with  subsequent  context. 

The  afflicted  will  eat  and  be  satisfied ; 
Those  who  seek  Him  will  praise  Yahweh, 
Saying,  "  Let  your  heart  live  forever." 

The  afflicted"],  pi.  for  the  sg.  v.25a.  —  will  eat  and  be  satisfied], 
partake  of  the  thankofferings  in  the  temple,  as  Calv.,  Ges.,  De  W., 
Hi. ;  and  not  to  be  understood  in  a  merely  spiritual  sense,  as  Ew., 
De.,  or  in  the  still  more  general  sense  of  refreshment  by  divine 
blessing  Hu.,  cf.  23s. —  Those  who  seek  Him]  are  worshippers  in 
general  ;  they  praise  Yahweh.  —  Let  your  heart  live  forever]. 
Owing  to  the  change  of  person  this  can  only  be  words  of  those 
who  seek  Yahweh,  addressed  to  the  afflicted ;  and  therefore  con- 
gratulatory, and  wishing  perpetual  health  and  prosperity  to  them, 
as  an  antidote  to  their  previous  affliction.  The  heart  stands  here 
for  the  man  himself,  in  late  usage,  confounding  zb  with  ttfB3. 

28-32.  This  is  a  pentameter  heptastich,  a  later  addition  to  the 
Ps.,  composed  of  a  triplet  and  two  couplets. 

All  the  ends  of  the  earth  will  remember,  and  they  will  turn  unto  Yahweh, 

And  all  the  families  of  the  nations  will  worship  before  Him; 

For  unto  Yahweh  belongs  the  kingdom,  and  He  rules  over  the  nations. 

Have  all  the  fat  ones  of  earth  eaten  and  worshipped, 

Then  will  bow  down  all  about  to  descend  to  the  dust,  and  he  who  doth  not  keep 

himself  alive. 
A  seed  will  serve  Him.     It  will  be  told  to  a  generation  to  come; 
And  they  will  declare  His  righteousness  to  a  people  to  be  born,  that  He  hath 

done  (it). 

28.  All  the  ends  of  the  earth],  as  28  67s  72s  Is.  4522  5210,  to 
comprehend  the  entire  earth.  —  all  the  families  oj  the  nations],  cf. 


200  PSALMS 

Ps.  96* :  all  the  families  or  clans  into  which  the  nations  may  be 
subdivided,  with  a  probable  reference  to  the  patriarchal  blessings, 
Gn.  123  2814.  —  will  remember],  call  to  mind  their  obligations  to 
Yahweh,  whom  they  have  forgotten  in  going  after  other  gods,  and 
so,  will  turn,  in  repentance  for  previous  neglect,  in  entire  change 
of  attitude,  unto  Yahweh,  so  that  Yahweh  will  be  recognised  as 
the  universal  God.  —  and  worship  before  Him'],  unite  in  the  pre- 
scribed worship  in  His  temple.  J^  "  before  Thee  "  is  certainly  an 
error  of  a  copyist.  (@>  has  the  correct  text.  —  29.  For  unto  Yah- 
weh belongs  the  kingdom].  The  reason  for  the  conversion  of  the 
nations  is  that  they  all  are  in  His  kingdom,  subject  to  His 
dominion.  He  rules  over  the  nations  as  the  universal  king. — 
30.  Two  classes  of  worshippers  are  brought  into  sharp  antithesis  : 
all  the  fat  ones  of  earth],  the  rich,  prosperous,  powerful  nations, 
and  all  about  to  descend  to  the  dust],  those  decaying,  dying,  who 
are  going  down  to  the  Pit  281  304  10  885  1437,  to  Sheol  55™,  an 
expression  used  frequently  of  dying  nations,  Is.  1415  Ez.  2620 
3218-30.  —  He  who  doth  not  keep  himself  alive],  the  nation  unable 
to  protect  its  life  against  more  powerful  neighbours  seeking  to 
destroy  it.  The  Vrss.  and  interpreters  have  many  suggestions 
here,  but  none  of  them  are  so  simple  as  Jff,  which  gives  an 
explanatory  complement  to  the  previous  clause.  This  does  not 
refer  to  the  nations  in  Sheol  after  death,  in  contrast  with  those 
still  alive  on  earth,  for  this  would  leave  us  with  only  the  rich 
nations  worshipping  Yahweh  on  earth.  The  context  demands 
poor,  feeble  nations,  and  that  is  admirably  expressed  in  the  terms 
above  where  they  are  represented  as  dying.  The  ptc.  represents 
rather  the  process  than  the  result.  The  rich  and  prosperous 
come  first,  in  a  clause  which  is  conditional  in  form.  Have  they 
eaten  and  worshipped],  taken  part  in  the  sacrificial  meals  of  the 
temple,  and  worshipped  in  connection  with  these  sacrifices ; 
then  will  bow  down],  in  the  prostration  of  worship,  the  other 
class  also,  the  poor  and  perishing  nations,  and  so  the  worship  of 
Yahweh  will  be  universal.  The  universality  of  worship  having 
been  stated  as  to  its  comprehending  all  nations  and  classes,  it  is 
now  represented  in  temporal  forms.  —  31.  A  seed  will  sewe  Him], 
a  seed  descending  from  the  nations  mentioned  above,  their  next 
generation.  —  7/  will  be  told  to  a  generation  to  come],  either  the 


PSALM   XXII.  20 1 

seed  previously  mentioned,  or  more  probably  a  generation  to 
come  after  them,  a  second  generation.  The  measure  and  paral- 
lelism requires  the  exclusion  of  "  of  the  Lord"  as  a  gloss,  and  the 
attachment  of  "  come  "  to  this  line  with  (H,  rather  than  to  the 
next  with  Jfy.  —  32.  And  they  will  declare  His  righteousness'],  His 
vindication  of  His  suffering  servant,  His  salvation  of  His  people, 
in  accordance  with  the  usual  meaning  of  righteousness  in  \\i  and 
Is.23.  —  to  a  people  to  be  born],  a  people  in  the  distant  future, 
beyond  the  second  generation,  after  this  universal  conversion  of 
the  nations ;  a  people  not  yet  born,  but  ultimately  to  be  bom, 
probably  conceived  as  summing  up  all  the  nations  in  itself,  in 
accordance  with  concept,  cf.  Ps.  87,  where  one  after  another  is 
born  in  Zion  and  all  inscribed  as  citizens.  —  That  He  hath  done 
(it)],  the  salvation  He  has  wrought;  in  the  full  sense  of  this 
universal  conversion,  and  worship  of  Yahweh  in  Jerusalem.  This 
ideal  is  a  Messianic  ideal,  as  connected  with  a  sufferer  whose 
suffering  is  mediatorial,  and  whose  salvation  mediates  universal 
salvation. 

2-3.  unary  nth  *hx  'hvt],  <&  has  6  0e6$  6  0e6$  fiov  7rp6<r%es  fxoi  =  ^-r\fm  >hn  h*t 
v.  v.20.  Che.  and  Du.  think  that  $%  has  been  shortened  and  rd.  *h  nan^pn;  but 
(S  gives  the  clue  to  the  insertion,  if  one  is  thought  necessary.  Toy  thinks  <f§ 
rd.  second  •'Sn  as  a  prep.,  My  God  unto  me  (attend),  so  Hare  >Sk  Bn.  This 
would  make  two  trimeter  lines  instead  of  one  in  first  half  of  v.  — »njpe^p]  Hi., 

Dy.,  Gr.,  Ehr.  rd.  ^ntntato, 'riKtf  *"].;n]    ©   has  ol   \6yoi   tQp  it a  pair r W fidr uv 

p.ov  =  ipiotf  na'l  affairs  of  my  errors,  so  U,  cf.  1913.  —  ^Sn]  is  a  gloss.  It 
certainly  does  not  go  with  v.3.     V.2a  is  given  in  NT.  in : 

Mt.  2746|       *Xw£  *Xw*  Xe^<*  o-a^axdapei; 

\  —  Gee"  fiov  Bee"  fiov,  tva  tL  fie  iyKartXnres;    (as  ©). 
Mir    tcS*/       A«£  iXcai  Xafioi.  o-a.j3ax0ct.vel; 

\  =  0  Qe6s  fiov  [6  0e6s  fiov~\,  els  tL  e'yKare'Xure's  fie; 

&  ynpav  no  "?WD  J?*  *h«.  Cod.  D  for  Mt.  and  Mk.  rds. :  r/Xel  Xafia  fa<p0avel, 
which,  according  to  Resch,  implies  a  Heb.  original  unajP;  for  Aram.  pas\ 
If  Ps.  is  a  trimeter,  it  is  not  difficult  to  explain  the  glosses,  which  destroy  the 
measure.  It  was  natural  that  ^n  should  be  repeated  for  greater  emphasis. 
The  pirn  is  sustained  by  its  use  in  v.12-20;  therefore  we  must  regard  n:n  as 
an  unnecessary  addition.     tiSn  is  the  usual  insertion  of  the  divine  name. 

Therefore  read : 

•unary  ncS  *>Sn 

vuk*  >njne»D  pirn 


202  PSALMS 

irpbs  at  of  <S  after  K€Kpd£o/xai  is  a  prosaic  addition,  "v  nan  is  taken  by  AV. 
as  ||  t;?V£">  and  so  the  force  of  nnS  is  retained.  It  is  better  to  regard  the  1. 
as  statement  of  fact  upon  which  the  anxious  plea  is  based :  so  (Jg,  3,  9,  Aq.,  {£, 
2,  Quinta  and  Sexta,  also  Horsley,  Ba.,  al.  —  f  nnttf  n.f.  roaring  in  agony,  of 
person  Ps.  222  32s,  pi.  Jb.  324;  elsw.  of  lion  Is.  5>29  Ez.  19"  Zc.  II8  Jb.  410 
(v.  vb.  in  v.14).  —  f  n;r^]  n-f-  «/**« :  elsw.  39s  622  65s  (all  dub.)  ;  3  silentium, 
<S  ei's  Avoiav  =  folly.  Hatch  {Essays  in  Biblical  Greek,  p.  174)  rds.  avdav 
(from  dvl7]/j.i,  rare  word,  not  in  Lex.  of  Liddell  and  Scott) ;  not  silence  from 
groanings  or  complaint,  but  from  trouble;  no  remission  of,  no  respite  from, 
pain. — 4.  tfnq  nrixi]  shortened  1.  in  ffi.  But  <J§  ait  ot  ly  07^  KaroiKeTs  6 
eiraivos  rod  'iapa^X;  U  »«  sancto  habitas,  laus  Israel:  3  <f/  /#  sancte  :  habi- 
tator,  laus  Israel,  rd.  vhjp  and  nSnn  sg.,  "  habitans  in  loco,  nempe  tabernaculo, 
quae  Israelis  laus  est,"  Hare;  S  iv  ay  Lois  KaroiKeis;  Du.  follows  this  and 
adds  after  Israel  "p,  omitted  because  of  rja  in  next  1.  Gr.  inserts  dotoi  after 
3B^  and  Nnu  before  PlVnn.  But  this  is  unnecessary,  t^  is  a  favourite  term 
for  God  in  Is.1- 2-  8  (37.  /#),  cf.  Fss.  7122  7841  8919.  Insert  mm  as  Bi.  to  make 
up  1.  as  in  v.20.  —  rY^nn]  praises  regarded  as  a  cloud  upon  which  Yahweh  is 
enthroned  (v.  2^  and  Intr.  §  1).  —  5.  inog],  r\2  should  be  prefixed  tov.56 
before  VIM  as  in  5°  and  6h  to  make  up  measure;  in  all  these  cases  it  is  emph. 
n'J2  (v.  46  911).  —  ^DO^pni]  1  consec.  expressing  result;  full  sf.  for  D_.  For  oso 
v.  1718.  —  6.  whppj]  1  coord.,  Niph.  pf.  3  pi.  of  \  2S£.  Niph.  slip  away,  escape 
I247-7,  as  often  in  early  Lit.  Ju.  3>29  1  S.  1910  Am.  91;  so  here,  no  sufficient 
reason  for  later  pass.,  be  delivered  (WL.  and  Dn.  121).  Pi.  deliver  Ps.  412, 
c.  JD  10720.  u;dj  137D  .raz*  life  8949  1164  1  S.  1911  Je.  48s  Am.  214-15;  vbi 
omitted  Ps.  3317,  as  Am.  216.  —  7.  *3Jn]  emph.  antith.  nnx  v.4;  full  form  as 
4611  507  8111  9116  10434  14110  (v.  Br!H«™).—  Xr^n]  worm,  cf.  Is.  4114 
apy  nj^in.  —  B^K'kSi]  to  make  it  more  emph.:  no  man  as  he  should  be 
(antith.  with  animals),  cf.  14710.  —  D*in  rsnn]  object  of  reproach  by  mankind, 
cf.  399  *9fl  'n,  also  6  nfl-in  31 12  794  8942  10926  Je.  610(+  5  t.  Je.),  v.  also  153. 
—  ojrvin]  ptc.  pass,  of  nra  one  despised,  cf.  Is.  497  vdi  fits,  53s  c,2",n  Snm  noj, 
Je.  4915  2"<N2  VV3.  —  8.  »S  iJi7:]  Hiph.  impf.,  J  j;'S  miafc,  deride,  cf.  ^  59° 
807  for  Qal.,  not  elsw.  in  \f/  but  Hiph.  Ne.  219  3s8  + ;  Qal  is  early,  Hiph.  late. 
There  is  no  good  reason  for  pointing  Hiph.  here;  ugj?i  is  just  as  good  here  as 
in  Ps.  8oT.  Hiph.  pointing  assimilated  to  next  vb.  n»BD*  Hiph.  Impf.  of 
X  "VJD  Hiph.  separate  with  the  lip,  open  wide  with  an  insulting  expression,  only 
here  (228),  elsw.  Qal.  set  free  from  duty  2  Ch.  23s,  let  out  waters  Pr.  1714 
(eg.  in  strife).  <S  i\d\7](Tav  h  x^l-Xeaiv,  U  locuti  sunt  labiis :  "  blasphemy  " 
Genebr.,  cf.  rip  out  (an  oath),  3  dimittunt  labium,  n^fra  is  a  gl. ;  without 
it  the  mng.  is  simply  let  out.  —  vx^  v;\r]  phr.  10925  2  K.  1921  =  Is.  3722,  sq. 
S;  Jb.  164,  of  mocking,  cf.  Mt.  27s9;  form  of  vb.  Hiph.  impf.  3  pi.  of  $  jnj. 
Hiph.  in  above  phr.  and  in  5912  (dub.)  cause  to  stagger  along,  elsw.  Qal  stagger, 
as  a  drunkard  10727,  as  a  vagabond  I0910- 10,  cf.  5916  Am.  48.  — 9.  Sj]  imv.  of 
Vm  vb.  roll,  so  De.,  Ba.,  Dr.,  but  <g,  3,  &,  Mt.  2748,  Ew.,  Bi.,  Du.,  AV.,  RV." 
hi  pf.  3  m.  K6.s.vntax  n7c  inf.  abs.,  J  S^j  in  \j/  only  11922  (sq.  Sj?D)  37s  (c.  1  Sj?), 
and  here,  Sn  incorrect  for  "?£.     Vb.  TOnS  is  implied  as  often  in  poetry. — 


PSALM   XXII.  203 

10.   nnN-o]  begins  a  new  Str.,  cf.  v.4a  antith.  v.r°,  3  autem,  <g  6'rt,  so  Aq.,  V. 

—  •■ru]  =  >v*  716  (derived  from  this  passage,  but  prob.  error  for  Mil*).  *ru 
ptc.  of  nru  draw  forth,  so  <§,  &:  ||  rpj  Jb.  38s  burst  forth  of  babe  from  womb; 
propugnator  meus  3,  similarly  Aq.  is  after  Aram.  mng.  of  rvi  also  transitive. 
But  K6.L 505  regards  it  as  ptc.  rvj. —  ,ryto:ir!]  Hiph.  ptc.  of  naa  (cf.  v.5),  but  <g 
has  i]  iXiris  /jlov,3  fiducia  mea  =  TMD3B,  so  H,  <S,  PBV.,  cf.  715  *]vi?JD  ">noai?  and 
that  is  doubtless  correct.  %  H33D  n.[m.]  in  i/'  only,  obj.  of  confidence  elsw.  405  65s 
715.  — 11.  rpS"]  emph.  as  v.5.  —  nn«  <Sk]  Du.  would  rd.  *3K  for  >Sx,  but  that 
would  be  an  anachronism  in  biblical  theology.  The  1.  is  too  long,  unless 
we  connect  with  Makkeph,  rw»oSH.  — 12.  nanp  n'vpa  prnn  Sn]  ;  juss.  of 
pm,  cf.  v.26.  %  pm  vb.  Qal  ^  or  become  distant,  Yahweh  subj.  2212-2<>  35s2  3822 
7112,  blessing  10917,  elsw.  10312  119150.  Hiph.:  (1)  intr.  remove  889- 19  10312; 
(2)  trans.  55s.  L.  I  is  too  long  and  1.  2  too  short.  Du.  inserts  mm  to  get 
three  lines,  but  1.  3  still  has  but  four  syllables  for  three  tones.  Better  divide 
at  ms  and  rd.  nanp  imv.  of  anpj  then  we  have  antith.  parall.  — 13.  "onnr] 
enclose  me  :  Pi.  pf.  %  [",n:3]  v^-  surround,  Pi.  elsw.  Ju.  2043,  of  surrounding 
enemy.  Hiph.  Hb.  I4  (as  Pi.)  Ps.  1428  (?).  —  f#3  **V3K]  bulls  of  Bashan. 
J"V3N  adj.  mighty,  valiant :  (1)  3^  n^3«  Ps.  76s  Is.  4612;  (2)  of  angels 
Ps.  7825,  cf.  10320;  (3)  of  bulls,  elsw.  for  princes  6831,  and  so  in  sacrifice  5013. 
\  fttb  n.  pr.  country  E.  of  Jordan,  esp.  between  sea  of  Galilee  and  Mts.  of 
Hauran,  and  from  Jabbok  north  to  Hermon,  elsw.  in  \f/,  6816- 16,  23  13511  13620. 

—  15.  '$3»0J  d:P5]  cf.  Jos.  y5,  also  La.  219  Ps.  58s.  The  1.  is  too  short.  Pre- 
fix vjjni  as  v.7a  or  let  -ojn  follow.  —  n^snni]  1  coord  Hithp.  pf.  X  Tia  divide. 
fHithp.  be  divided,  separated,  parted  from  each  other,  elsw.  Jb.  419  of  scales 
of  crocodile,  Jb.  411  Ps.  9210  be  scattered,  dispersed.  — aria]  like  wax,  alw.  sim. 
of  melting,  cf.  683  975  Mi.  I4.  —  Dpi]  Niph.  pf.  of  X  DD~]  VD-  melt,  not  used  in 
Qal  except  Is.  io18,  but  Niph.  melt  away  683  97s  11210,  fig.  faint,  grow  fearful 
2215,  as  frequently  in  D.  Hiph.  cause  to  melt,  intimidate  Dt.  I28,  elsw.  Hiph. 
formed  from  HDD  (v.  67). — J  [nJJS]  n'm-  onty  pl«  inwards,  intestines,  usual 
mng.  not  in  \p,  but,  (1)  womb  716;  (2)  ||  31?  inner  man,  elsw.  409.  — 16.  "nr]  sf. 
1  pers.  J  n~,  n.m.  strength,  power:  (1)  human  strength:  (a)  physical  vigour 
in  general  3111  3811  719  10224,  so  here  <&,  3;  but  Ols.,  Ew.,  Ba.,  Kau.,  Oort, 
Ehr.,  JPSV.  rd.  >an  palate,  on  account  of  ||  \xih\  power  opp.  to  that  of  God 
3316;  (2)  strength  of  'angels  10320;  (3)  power  of  God  in  creation  657;  PfcrjJD  na 
III6;  God  is  np  3"]  1475,  cf.  Ina  an  Is.  631  Jb.  23s,  ns'a  1  S^p  Ps.  294  (of 
thunder). —  'rnpSc]  a.X.  pi.  sf.  yftlpS:  jaws  as  taking,  seizing  food. — 
ni.D  nay]  <aW  <?/  death,  phr.  a.X.,  but  cf.  nay  mr  v.30,  7  \2a1r  Is.  2619, 
y  ddin  yen  Dn.  122,  aarx  '?S  Jb.  721,  c.  hy  Jb.  2011  2i2C.  —  W?ft<fo]  Qal 
impf.  2  m.,  c.  sf.  I  sing,  of  t  niHP  vb.  Qal  .&?/,  ^/lr,  /«/,  /ay :  here  impf.  for 
present,  referring  back  to  God  as  primary  agent,  thou  art  laying  me  ;  this  seems 
strange  in  the  midst  of  the  description:  rather  rd.  3  pi.  as  above;  vb.  elsw. 
Is.  2612  2  K.  438  Ez.  24s-  3.  — 17.  \  3*3^3]  dogs,  as  ignoble  animals,  elsw.  in  \f/, 
V-2i  597.15  6g24.  here  ||  ana  as  noble  ones  v.13a.  <3  has  Ki^es  -rroXXoi  =  doi  DoSr, 
so  Jer.  in  Com.,  Hare,  Horsley;  this  prob.  correct,  but  then  >a  should  be  striken 
out. — 3^p  rnp]  fig.  passes  over  into  reality,  cf.  o^ny  *p  8614,  rpn  *j?  Jb.  1534, 


204  PSALMS 

D'van  7  Ps.  6831  (fig.  nobles),  rn?  (v.  /5).  D»jTJD  Hiph.  ptc.  pi.  Jwn  vb. 
Qal  ^  injurious,  evil,  c.  s  10632.  Hiph.:  (i)  do  an  injury,  hurt,  here  abs., 
c.  S  105 15  (=  c.  1  1  Ch.  16'22),  c.  ace.  pers.  Ps.  44s,  c.  3  74*.  jn.-i*?  do  something 
to  one's  own  hurt  154  (cf.  Lv.  5*  P),  but  improb.  rd.  jr£  as  <S;  (2)  do  evil 
wickedly  abs.  37s,  pi.  ptc.  27s  371,9  9212  9416  119116,  no  Snp  266,  no  i  D  64s. 
— n??]  ^  '7  ^w»  Rabbins,  Hi.,  Koster,  Hu.,  Ehr.,  al.;  but  ns  is  not  elsw.  \f/ 
only  nns  as  v.14.  Moreover  the  fig.  of  lion  and  bulls  has  been  left  for  that  of 
ignoble  dogs.  (S  &pv%av,  1J  foderunt  —  nN3  =  ro  or  no  i?DB,  Bu.  dig,  so 
Compl.,  Cap.,  Ham.,  De.,  Ba\,  Oort,  al.  Others  as  Pocock,  Phillips,  Pe.,  Moll, 
Ko.'y  tax-  p-  m,  interpret  as  ptc.  pi.,  either  cstr.  nitb  or  defective.  3  vinxerunt, 
Aq.'2  lirtbyaav,  2  ws  ftrovvres  5^<rai  =  nNj  =  they  bound ;  so  J5  and  among  mod- 
erns Ew.  Aq.1  tfaxvvav>  Aram.  ">S3  =  1JJ3  they  soiled,  or  marred,  so  Du.,  who  rds. 
nNr.  (£  has  a  conflation  of  noun  and  vb.  showing  an  uncertainty  in  early 
Jewish  opinion.  Ols.,  Bruston,  We.  regard  the  1.  as  a  gl.,  but  without  ground, 
for  it  is  needed  to  complete  the  Str. — 18.  "v?px]  Pi.  impf.  1  sg.  The  1.  is 
||  v.156.  The  interposition  of  1  sg.  between  lines  of  3  pers.  leads  some  to  trans- 
pose 1.  to  the  beginning  of  Str.  v.16a;  but  it  is  more  forceful  as  it  is.  —  hep] 
emph.  summing  up,  or  better,  to  indicate  circumstantial  clause.  —  *b*;p]  impf. 
of  description  ||  wy  — 19.  ^"yj  ^Pl]  cast  lot,  cf.  165  lot  for  portion  assigned 
by  \  also  1258  c^nsn  Sm —  20.  nnsi]  emph.  introducing  a  new  section, 
cf.  v.1-  "a.  —  ^-Vvn]  0:\.  (&  tt)p  fiorfdeidv  fiov,  obj.  of  firj  iia.Kpvvrj$.  3  fortitudo 
mea  connecting  with  *mr?S  as  |^.  The  word  is  abstr.  in  form,  but  improb. 
in  itself  and  difficult  to  explain,  whether  from  ^in  or  S'N.  This  v.  is  used  in 
essentially  the  same  terms : 


n 

''JIN 

•mryS  riBhn 

^CD 

prnn 

Sn 

^dSn; 

40" 

= 

702 

nuhn 

*m?pS 

nw ; 

7I12 

nehn 

*m?p 

>n^N 

'JDD 

pmr 

iSn 

DVI^N. 

In  3823  "jin  stands  for  an  original  nw;  therefore  the  last  clause  has  always 
nw  except  in  711'2  E,  which  has  changed  an  original  nw  in  the  first  clause  to 
dviSn.  The  nvT  in  the  original  of  the  first  clause  here  would  sufficiently 
account  for  the  *n*?H  in  the  second.  Accordingly  Gr.  thinks  the  original  here 
was  nrm  nx  compressed  into  Tnw.  It  is  noteworthy  that  (3  interprets  n'vK 
of  title  as  vwtp  7-77$  avriX-fixf/ews,  the  same  word  that  it  uses  for  *mTJ7  here. 
This  shows  that  in  the  original  text  the  two  words  were  regarded  as  syn.,  and 
that  the  1  of  v.20  is  fully  written  1  of  interpretation.  If  the  original  was  pSk, 
we  might  in  both  cases  rd.  p^»n  and  think  of  the  vol  as  the  r^s  in  accordance 
with  42s.  In  this  case  it  goes  with  1.  1  ||  *rnw  of  v.216,  and  we  would  have  a 
rhyme  in  V  for  each  1.  of  this  Str.  if  »m?p  also  is  transposed  to  the  end  of  1. 
nw  would  then  go  with  neftn  *nnrpS  as  in  the  other  similar  passages.  We 
must  then  follow  (5  and  make  the  vb.  Pi.  or  Hiph.  with  hind  the  obj. — 
I  -n?::]  n.f. :  (1)  help,  succour  from  \  elsw.  3823  4014  702  7112,  mo  6013  =  10813; 
(2)  embodied  help,  one  who  helps,  of  "•  27s  352  4018  44s7  462  63s  9417.  — 
nrrn  ^nnr^]  phr.  elsw.  4014  =  702  7112  with  words  transposed  3823.  %  u;n  vh. 
Qal  haste,  make  haste  119"'0;  imv.  as  above,  elsw.  sq.  »S  706  1411.     Hiph.  trans. 


PSALM   XXII.  205 

hasten  55s. —  21.  *rnw]  my  only  one.  %  "vrv  adj.  ||  vd),  also  3517  as  the  one 
unique  and  priceless  possession,  elsw.  in  \J/  solitary,  alone  2516  687  14110  (<g).  — 

22.  ,J>?/t£;''i]  Hiph.  imv.  (v.38)  should  go  to  the  end  of  1.  for  rhyme.  —  ETCH]  = 
Dip  the  yore  ox,  the  gigantic  bull  of  ancient  times,  cf.  29°  9211  Nu.  2322  24s  (E) 
Dt.  3311,  <&  /j.ovoic4pu)s,  unicorn,  so  3.  —  ^JS,]  pf-  statement  of  fact :  thou 
hast  heard  me,  so  Aq.,  %,  cf.  v.16°  impf.;  <&  tt)v  Tairelvualv  /jlov,  &,  3J,  cf.  2 
tt]v  k&ku<jIv  ixov,  cf.  nuy  i836  (?)  a  late  word.  Thrupp,  Oort,  We.,  Ba.  »n»w 
#zy  /<?cr  soul.      This  is  doubtless  correct   and  was  prob.    in  text  of  <3. — 

23.  nnsDN]  Pi.  impf.  cohort,  expressing  resolution  (v.  v.18a),  obj.  Dtf  of 
Yahweh  (v.  512),  so  10222,  nnj  192  96s,  niNSoj  92  267-f.  —  Jnx]  n.m. : 
(1)  real  brother  49s  5020  699;  (2)  friend  3514  1228  2  S.  I26  I  K.  913  2032-33; 
(3)  me?nber  of  the  congregation  Pss.  2223  I331'  of  the  unity  of  the  brother- 
hood Pr.  619.  This  is  public  worship  in  the  \  *?np  n.m.  assembly,  convocation, 
congregation  :  (1)  of  evil  doers  265,  cf.  2217;  (2)  assemblage  for  worship,  so 
here,  10732,  2~\  bnp  v.26  3518  4010-11;  (3)  of  the  pious  1491;  (4)  of  angels 
89°.  —  24.  "1  W'v]  =  the  god-fearing  (v.  j7).  A  change  here  to  3  pers.  from 
2pers.;  not  original. — 3pS^  JHT  Ss]  phr.  a.X.,  cf.  apjP  jnr  Is.  4519  Je.  3326. 
||  •jjofen  jpr  S;,  elsw.  2  K.  1720  Is.  4525  Je.  3137,  without  Sd  Ne.  92  Je.  3136 
1  Ch.  1613;  Post-deuteron.  usage  shewing  influence  of  Je.  and  Is.2.  —  «DD  rvm] 
i  coord.  Qal  imv.  J  ~vu  vb.  Qal  stand  in  awe  of,  c.  fC,  elsw.  33s,  usually  ^ 
a/h«V  0/  sq.  ^dd  Nu.  223  Dt.  i1T  1  S.  1815,  }D  Jb.  1929;  but  Dt.  3227  c.  ace, 
therefore  rd.  here  v>nu  in  assonance  with  -inro:>  and  imSS-i.  A  later  copyist 
followed  the  more  common  prosaic  usage  with  JD.  The  measure  requires  the 
change.  —  25.  htn1?  ^r].  nr 2  (154)  usually  despise,  regard  with  conte?npt :  so 
5 119  69s4  7320  10218,  cf.  v.7.  This  is  either  a  defective  1.  in  which  nay  should 
be  inserted,  or,  as  Du.,  an  explanatory  gl.  to  next  vb.  —  f  fplff"]  vb.  denom. 
abhor,  elsw.  Lv.  nil.  13.43  2o25  Dt.  726, 26.  —  njy]  a.X.  usually  explained  as 
n.f.  affliction;  <S  be-qaei,  £>,  @E  imply  another  word  such  as  npJJS  ||  v;r&.  But 
npj?S  is  not  easily  changed  into  nwp  in  any  transliteration.  We  might  take  it 
as  mjj? ,  inf.  cstr.  of  njp  answer,  abhor  to  answer,  paraphrased  into  the  petition 
answered.  3  modestiam,  prob.  rd.  PW  from  n>v::  humility,  meekness,  so  Aq. 
V?  (z\  9i3).  —  d^jd  -\TDn]  subj.  '",  c.  p  5 111,  abs.  io11,  withdraw  from  132  2225 
279  6918  8815  1023  1437,  abs.  308.  —  MOD]  so  J,  <!I  has  d7r'  i/xov,  Y  a  me,  prob. 
both  gl.  of  interp.  —  '•jwa]  Pi.  inf.  cstr.  sf.  3  m.,  c.  3  temporal  {v.  j3).  <3,  V 
i';Y£'2,  better  suited  to  their  interpretation  of  rr;.  Sfs.  in  all  cases  interp. — 
26.  ^nx?]  from  thy  presence,  of  God,  cf.  10920  11823.  Jn«p  from  proximity 
with  —  de  chez,  cf.  Djrp :  pxd  Hiffl  24s,  bear  away  from,  as  a  gift;  pno  Snc;  27* 
Ju.  i14  1  K.  2!6  ask  from  ;  n«D  TDn  Ps.  6620  remove  from ;  HMD  rpn  u8'23 
come  from ;  source  in  Yahweh  a?*  10920.  This  return  to  the  2  pers.  is  diffi- 
cult in  the  midst  of  the  3  pers.  It  seems  to  go  with  v.23;  if  so,  the  intervening 
matter  is  a  gl.  —  3*>  Vnna]  phr.  elsw.  3518  4010-11  (v.  v.23)  numerous  con- 
gregation.—  0W5]  Pi.  impf.  fahv  vb.  be  completed,  finished.  Pi.  in  \j/  only 
(1)  pay  or  perform:  c.  ace,  vows  omj  Iff  22^  619;  c.  h  of  God  5014  6613 
Ii614-18,  obj.  omitted  7612;  S  rnT^n  'tf  (to  God)  5613.  (2)  requite,  recom- 
pense, reward :  subj.  man,  c.  *?  pers.  4111  1378;   c.  ace.  pers.  et  rei  njn  'ttf 


206  PSALMS 

row  nnn  3512,  cf.  3821;  c.  ace.  pers.  of  God,  hinj  nt?  'tf  3124;  c.  S,  c^nS  'tf 
fclfcrjHM  6213.  (3)  Repay  debt  3721.  Vw.  be  paid  ox  performed :  vow  65s.  — 
J  inj]  n.m.  wft'w  offering  22-6  5014  5613  6i6-  9  652  6618  n614- 18  (class  of  peace 
offerings).  The  ||  requires  2  pers.  here:  rd.  t^j:  ||  r|ns^.  The  editor  has 
assimilated  to  v.24  by  insertion  of  vnt.  —  27.  *rv]  Qal  impf.  juss.  J  irn  vb. 
Qal.  live :  (1)  continue  in  life,  antith.  die  4910  Sc)49  1181";  (2)  live  in  divine 
favour  11917.  77.  lie.  144.  (3)  nve  prosperously,  of  king  7215,  others  22^  69  ^ 
Pi.  (1)  preserve  alive  3319  413  1387,  u;dj  71  2230;  (2)  quicken,  restore  to  life 
304  7120;  (3)  revive,  by  divine  favour  8o19  857  u925. 37.40.  so.  88.  93. 107. 149. 15*. 
156. 1&9.175  14311.  —  DpaaS]  full  form,  33"?  {v.  4s)  in  the  sense  of  selves,  syn.  VD2, 
a  late  and  dub.  usage,  sf.  refer,  to  the  worshippers,  participants  in  the  feast, 
who  are  the  objects  of  congratulation  and  good  wishes  by  all  without.  <&  al 
Kap5iai  clvtQv,  U  cor  da  eorum,  is  doubtless  a  correction  of  the  awkward 
change  of  persons,  making  the  1.  syn.  with  the  previous  1.  But  it  neglects 
the  juss.,  and  also  would  require  ZD2^,  not  so  easy  to  explain  as  2222^.  The 
long  form  may  be  due  to  the  sf.  This  awkwardness  is  removed  by  Gr.,  who 
changes  all  the  previous  vbs.  into  imvs.,  and  so  makes  this  triplet  harmonious 
with  the  other  two.  —  28.  Here  begins  a  series  of  pentameters,  certainly  a 
later  addition  to  the  Ps.  —  or;i]  Qal  impf.  1  coord,  may  be  juss.  or  predic- 
tive.—  ps  'Ddn  Vr]  (v.  28). — iirnrM]  Hithp.  impf.  3  pi.  of  nntf  (v.  s8) 
i  coord.,  possibly  preceded  by  talc,  as  v.80,  c.  "OD1-,  also  869  Dt.  2610  1  S.  I19 
Is.  6623,  here  "pjcS  |&,  but  <@>  vjdS  U  in  conspectu  eius,  so  Du.  —  29.  noV-^n] 
=  royalty,  not  elsw.  in  \}/,  but  Ob.21  1  S.  io1G-  M  Is.  3412  -f. —  30.  linnet]  iS:>k] 
eating  and  so  worshipping  in  the  festal  sacrifice,  as  v.27;  either  a  predictive 
pf.,  which  is  difficult  here,  or  pf.  of  protasis  of  condition,  prob.  latter.  vjcS 
should  be  attached  to  vb.  in  first  half  of  1.,  as  in  v.29.  There  is  no  good 
reason  to  change  iSjn  to  V?  *|X,  as  Oort,  Bruston,  Ba.,  Du.,  Kau.,  Kirk.,  al. 
With  this  goes  the  substitution  of  'th  for  \:zn  in  Du.,  but  \>eh  is  quite  appro- 
priate; pi.  cstr.  of  f  ]Vh  adj.  =fat  ones,  rich,  prosperous,  flourishing,  cf.  9216 
for  fat  trees,  Is.  3023  for  fat  grain.  —  1M  nl"~S:>]  phr.  a.X.  ||  the  dying,  cf. 
113  *TW  281  304  885  1437,  IB?  V2V  Is.  2619,  mo  icy  Pr.  2216.  This  is  explained 
by  rvn  sS  Wbi  who  doth  not  preserve  alive  his  life,  vb.  with  this  mng.,  revive 
8019  857  +,  cf.  3319  413  1387.  This  does  not  satisfy  many  scholars.  <3  has 
kclI  i)  if/vxrf  fJiov  avr$  {rj  =  rvn  ">S  >VDr,  3  anima  eius  ipsi  vivet,  so  Quinta, 
Sexta  ;  <S,  £,  V  ^OJ;  2,  0,  3,  %  ic;dj;  @,  Aq.,  V,  2,  9,  3,  &  lS.  All  the 
Vrss.  take  the  vb.  as  Qal  pf.  3  f.  "n,  so  Ba.  " aber  meine  Seele  lebt  ihm"  Du. 
retains  the  neg.  and  translates  "  dessen  Seele  kein  Leben  hat."  There  is 
antith.  in  this  couplet  —  two  classes,  the  rich  and  prosperous,  and  the  poor 
and  perishing.  —  31.  jnr]  indefin.,  so  3,  2,  &,  E,  but  6,  0,  F  'j?iT>  the  latter 
is  explanatory.  —  mi^]  is  striking  here;  nw  and  *?K  are  used  in  the  original 
Ps.,  so  nw  v.28-29  in  this  addition.  The  word  is  prob.  a  gl.  —  *^"^]  is  diffi- 
cult as  undefined.  &  adds  from  next  line  W3'  and  rds.  it  ij  tpxoiitvr},  Ni3% 
so  T5 generatio  ventura,  cf.  pins  -n  10219,  so  Hare,  Ba.,  Du.,  Ehr.,  al.  ||  iSu  D?1?. 
For  in  v.  12s.  —  32.  nbv  '?]  statement  of  the  fact  that  he  hath  done  it, 
(S.   £>  add  mrr,  so  Ba.      It  is  not,  however,  in  other  Vrss.,  is  explan.  and  not 


PSALM   XXIII.  207 

needed  for  sense  or  measure,  nfrp  in  this  emph.  sense,  of  God's  accomplish- 
ing something,  is  common  in  \J/,  elsw.  375  3910  5211  109'27  in8  1153  119126  1356 
14720. 

PSALM  XXIIL,  3  strs.  43,  44,  45. 

Ps.  23  is  a  guest  psalm.  It  expresses  calm  confidence  in 
Yahweh:  (1)  as  shepherd,  providing  His  sheep  with  plentiful 
pasture  and  water  (v.1_3°)  ;  (2)  as  guide,  conducting  His  com- 
panion safely  in  right  paths  through  a  gloomy  ravine  (v.364)  ; 
(3)  as  host,  anointing  His  guest  for  the  banquet  and  granting 
him  perpetual  hospitality  (v.5"6). 

VAHWEH  is  my  shepherd,  I  have  no  want. 

In  grassy  pastures  He  maketh  me  lie  down  ; 

Unto  refreshing  waters  He  leadeth  me  ; 

He  restoreth  (forever)  my  soul. 
T-TE  guideth  me  in  right  tracks  for  His  name's  sake. 

Yea,  when  I  walk  in  a  gloomy  ravine, 

I  fear  no  evil,  for  Thou  art  with  me  ; 

Thy  rod  and  Thy  staff,  they  comfort  me. 
T^HOU  spreadest  before  me  a  table  in  the  presence  of  mine  adversaries. 

Hast  Thou  anointed  my  head  with  oil ;  my  cup  is  exhilarating. 

Surely  goodness  and  kindness  pursue  me  all  the  days  of  my  life  ; 

And  I  shall  dwell  in  the  house  of  Yahweh  for  length  of  days. 

Ps.  23  was  in  $B  and  |H  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  No  other  statement  appears 
in  the  title.  Its  structure  is  artistic.  The  three  Strs.  are  tetrastichs,  with 
parallel  themes :  shepherd  v.1_3a,  guide  v.36-4,  host  v.5-6.  It  is  a  mistake  to 
suppose  that  the  theme  of  the  shepherd  extends  into  the  2d  Str.  While  it  is 
true  that  the  shepherd  may  conduct  his  flocks  through  the  gloomy  wadys 
safely,  yet  there  is  nothing  in  any  terms  used  to  suggest  a  flock.  The  flock 
is  conducted  into  safety  in  Str.  I.  Why  take  the  flock  back  to  a  gloomy 
wady  in  Str.  II.  ?  The  new  and  parallel  figure  of  the  guide  takes  the  people 
to  the  same  safety  as  that  to  which  the  shepherd  had  taken  his  sheep  already 
in  Str.  I.  We  then  have  three  syn.  Strs.,  each  with  its  own  simple  and 
beautiful  imagery  to  set  forth  the  central  idea  of  the  Ps.  The  Strs.  have 
the  unusual  feature  that  the  measure  changes  from  a  trimeter  in  the  first 
Str.  to  a  tetrameter  in  the  second,  and  a  pentameter  in  the  third.  This  is  an 
advance  towards  a  climax  of  joyous  faith  in  Yahweh.  The  language  and 
syntax  of  the  Ps.  and  all  its  ideals  are  early.  There  is  not  the  slightest  trace 
of  anything  that  is  post-deuteronomic.  The  historical  circumstances  of  the 
poet  must  have  been  peaceful  and  prosperous.  We  cannot  go  down  so  late 
as  the  prosperous  times  of  the  Greek  period,  or  the  late  Persian  period. 
We  cannot  think  of  the  Exile,  or  early  Restoration,  for  the  literature  of  those 


208  PSALMS 

times  is  fall  of  trial  and  sorrow.  Absence  from  the  temple  is  indicated  by  $|. 
but  that  is  due  to  a  textual  error.  The  temple  was  the  habitual  resort  of  the 
poet.  He  was  a  guest  there.  We  cannot,  therefore,  think  of  the  Exile,  or 
of  the  time  of  David,  the  traditional  author  of  the  Ps.  That  he  was  a  shep- 
herd before  he  became  king  affords  no  evidence,  for  the  conception  of  Yahweh 
as  shepherd  is  as  early  as  the  story  of  Jacob,  Gn.  4816  4921,  is  used  in  Mi.  714 
Zc.  1 14  of  the  early  prophets,  Is.  4011  6311,  and  especially  in  %  741  78s2  7913  801, 
and  in  the  royal  Pss.  957  ioo3,  and  also  in  the  NT.  Lk.  150'-7  Jn.  io1"10.  In 
fact,  the  three  figures,  shepherd,  guide,  host,  are  all  simple,  natural,  and  char- 
acteristic of  the  life  in  Jerusalem  and  its  vicinity  at  any  period  in  Biblical 
history.  A  short  walk  from  Jerusalem  at  any  time  would  lead  to  gloomy 
wadys  and  the  pastures  of  shepherds.  We  cannot  think  of  the  period  of 
conflict  with  the  Assyrians  and  Babylonians.  We  must,  therefore,  go  back 
to  an  earlier  and  simpler  period,  the  days  of  the  early  monarchy,  not  earlier 
than  Solomon,  or  later  than  Jehoshaphat. 

Str.  I.  is  a  trimeter  tetrastich  expressing  the  confidence  and 
joy  of  the  sheep  in  the  shepherd.  —  1.  Yahweh  is  my  shepherd '], 
as  frequently  in  OT.,  a  conception  which  doubtless  originated 
in  the  pastoral  life  of  the  early  Israelites,  especially  that  of  the 
ancestor  Jacob,  which  was  also  the  employment  of  David  when 
a  youth,  and  which  was  ever  one  of  the  chief  occupations  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Bethlehem;  cf.  1  S.  1611  Lk.  28.  Yahweh  was  con- 
ceived as  taking  the  same  patient,  unwearying  care  of  His  people 
as  the  shepherd  of  his  flock.  —  /  have  no  want'],  because  the 
shepherd  has  provided  for  all  wants.  The  imperf.  is  not  future, 
but  a  present  of  habitual  experience.  —  2.  In  grassy  pastures'], 
those  where  the  tender  grass,  the  young  herbage,  was  abundant. 
—  makes  me  lie  down],  in  the  midst  of  plenty,  so  that  it  may 
be  enjoyed  with  ease  and  comfort. —  Unto  refreshing  waters], 
not  "beside,"  "along  side  of,"  AV.,  RV.,  thinking  of  a  stream, 
which  is  not  easy  to  find  in  the  grazing  lands  of  Palestine  except 
in  the  rainy  season ;  but  "  unto,"  thinking  of  the  wells,  or  foun- 
tains, from  which  flocks  are  usually  watered,  Gn.  2910"11  Ex.  216"21 
(v.  Tristram,  Natural  History  of  the  Bible,  142).  These  waters 
are  not  merely  drinking  water,  but  choice  water ;  not  only  satis- 
fying thirst,  but  giving  refreshment,  implying  the  same  kind  of 
rich  provision  for  the  sheep  as  the  grassy  pastures.  —  He  leadeth 
me].  The  shepherd,  in  the  East,  leads  his  flock,  and  they  follow 
him.    He  does  not  drive  them  as  in  the  West,  v.  Jn.  io4 ,5  (Thorn- 


PSALM   XXIII.  209 

son,  The  Land  and  the  Book,  202  sq.).  —  3  a.  He  restoreth  (for- 
ever) my  soul~\.  By  the  rich  provision  for  eating  and  drinking, 
He  revives,  strengthens,  restores  to  full  activity  and  enjoyment ; 
passing  over  from  the  figure  of  the  sheep  to  the  man  himself. 
The  soul  is  here,  as  usually  in  Hebrew,  the  seat  of  the  appetites 
and  desires.  The  original  text  has  but  two  tones,  when  three 
are  needed  for  measure.  It  has  also  an  unusual  verbal  form  for 
the  usual  one  in  this  phrase.  This  was  probably  due  to  a  copyist's 
error  in  condensing  two  similar  words,  the  infin.  absolute,  ex- 
pressing temporal  intensity,  "for  ever,"  after  its  verb,  and  the 
usual  Hiph.  imperf.  form. 

Str.  II.  is  a  progressive  tetrameter  tetrastich  with  a  caesura  in 
each  line.  The  guide  takes  the  place  of  the  shepherd  in  a 
parallel  conception.  —  3  b.  He  guide th  me],  on  a  journey,  in  which 
it  is  easy  to  stray  from  the  right  path.  A  guide  was  needed. 
Yahweh  is  the  guide.  —  in  right  tracks'],  those  that  lead  directly 
and  safely  to  the  place  of  destination,  as  distinguished  from  wrong 
tracks  that  would  lead  astray.  The  moral  and  religious  reference 
is  involved  in  the  whole  figure,  and  is  not  to  be  gained  by  de- 
parting from  it  in  the  rendering  "righteousness"  of  EV8.,  after 
the  ancient  Vrss.  —  For  His  name's  sake].  The  divine  name, 
or  honour  is  involved  in  guiding  rightly.  —  4.  Yea,  when  J  walk 
i?i  a  gloomy  ravine].  The  hill  country  of  Judah  is  broken  up 
by  narrow  and  precipitous  ravines,  or  wadys,  difficult  to  descend 
and  ascend,  dark,  gloomy,  and  abounding  in  caves,  the  abode 
of  wild  beasts  and  robbers  {v.  1  S.  24).  To  pass  through  these 
wadys  was  still  more  difficult  than  to  find  the  right  path  over 
the  hills.  The  desire  to  depart  from  the  figure  of  speech  too 
soon  is  probably  responsible  for  the  pointing  of  J^,  so  as  to  get 
"  death  shade,"  "  shadow  of  death,"  as  if  it  implied  the  peril 
of  death ;  which  interpretation,  through  the  EVS.  and  Bunyan's 
use  of  it  in  his  Pilgrim's  Progress,  has  become  well  nigh  universal 
in  English  Literature  until  recent  times.  —  I  fear  no  evil],  harm, 
or  injury  of  any  kind,  either  from  falling  or  going  astray,  or  from 
wild  beasts,  or  robbers. — for  Thou  art  with  me].  The  com- 
panionship of  his  trusty  guide  removes  all  fear. —  Thy  rod  and 
Thy  staff].  The  rod  for  giving  blows  in  defence,  the  staff  for 
support   in   walking.     The   reference   to   the   shepherd's   crook, 


2IO  PSALMS 

though  justified  by  an  occasional  use  of  the  word  translated  "  rod," 
has  no  usage  to  justify  it  in  connection  with  the  word  translated 
"staff."  It  involves  the  continuation  of  the  figure  of  the  shep- 
herd throughout  this  Str.,  which  is  improbable.  —  they  comfort 
me~\.  The  presence  of  the  guide  with  rod  and  staff  in  hand 
ready  for  use  in  his  defence,  assures  him  of  safety,  of  true  guid- 
ance, and  of  eventually  reaching  his  destination.  Any  tendencies 
to  fear  are  at  once  checked,  and  any  agitation  or  anxiety  is 
soothed  and  calmed. 

Str.  III.  is  a  progressive  pentameter  tetrastich,  in  which  the 
host  takes  the  place  of  the  shepherd  and  the  guide  of  the  previous 
Strs.  —  5.  Thou  spreadest  before  me  a  table].  The  host  welcomes 
his  guest  to  a  feast  all  prepared  for  him  on  the  table.  —  in  the 
prese?ice  of  mine  adversaries].  The  psalmist  is  not  without 
adversaries,  but  they  are  not  dangerous.  He  has  guest-right 
with  Yahweh.  He  is  safe  and  secure,  because,  in  accordance  with 
Oriental  customs,  the  host  is  obliged  to  protect  his  guest  from 
all  enemies,  at  all  costs.  —  Hast  Thou  anointed  my  head  with  oil]. 
A  temporal  clause  with  an  apodosis  subsequent  thereto.  It  was 
the  custom  in  the  Orient  to  honour  guests  by  anointing  the  head 
with  oil,  or  scented  grease,  before  entering  the  banqueting  room  ; 
cf.  Am.  66,  v.  also  Lk.  74C.  It  was  also  the  custom  to  sprinkle  the 
guests  with  perfumes  (Lane,  Modern  Egyptians,  p.  203).  The 
entertainment  here  conceived  is  royal.  — My  cup  is  exhi/a rating], 
the  cup  given  to  me  by  my  host,  the  wine  cup  of  welcome. 
It  is  conceived  here  not  so  much  as  a  cup  full  to  overflowing, 
as  EV\  and  most  moderns,  but  as  one  whose  wine  saturates, 
drenches,  or  soaks  the  one  who  drinks  it,  so  excellent  its  quality 
and  so  ample  its  quantity,  intoxicating,  as  the  ancient  Vrss. ;  so 
Aug.,  explaining  inebrians,  "  And  Thy  cup  yielding  forgetfulness 
of  former  vain  delights."  "  Inebrians,  irrigans,  laetificans,  con- 
solatione  plenus,  exuberans,  redundans  excellentissimo  liquore," 
Genebr. ;  cf.  Ps.  10415  "wine  that  maketh  glad  the  heart  of  man." 
The  Fathers  generally  find  here  a  mystic  reference  to  the  cup 
of  the  Eucharist.  —  6.  Surety  goodness  and  kindness],  of  the  host 
to  his  guest. — pursue  me].  These  attributes  are  personified,  as 
attendants  waiting  upon  the  guest,  just  as  other  attributes, 
433  8511-1214 ;  cf.  Is.  3510.  —  all  the  days  of  my  life  \\  for  length   oj 


PSALM  XXIII.  211 

days'].  This  one  is  not  a  guest  who  is  to  be  entertained  once, 
and  then  depart ;  or  one  who  is  permitted  occasionally  to  return  ; 
but  a  guest  who  is  to  have  a  permanent  and  perpetual  place  at 
the  table  of  Yahweh.  Kindness  is  to  follow  him  about,  to  wait 
on  him  continually  throughout  his  life ;  and  so  in  the  parallel.  — 
/  shall  dwell  in  the  house  of  Yahweh].  He  takes  up  his  con- 
tinual residence  as  guest  in  Yahweh's  house.  This  which  is  given 
in  <&,  3  is  more  suited  to  the  context  than  J^,  which  by  another 
pointing  of  the  same  consonant  gives  another  vb.  and  construc- 
tion, "and  I  will  return."  This  is  difficult  to  explain  gram- 
matically, and  also  is  not  in  accordance  with  the  context  which 
emphasises  presence  in  the  house  and  not  absence  from  it.  The 
house  of  Yahweh  is,  indeed,  the  temple,  and  the  feasts  are  the 
sacrificial  feasts  continually  provided  in  the  temple.  The  con- 
ception that  Yahweh  is  the  host  to  those  partaking  of  the  sacri- 
ficial meals  in  His  temple  is  not  uncommon,  v.  55  151  27*  615  84s. 

1.  \p]  Qal  ptc.  c.  sf.  I  sg.  njn  {v.  2s) ;  taken  by  <f§,  3,  with  verbal  force, 
TTotixalvei  fie,  pascit  ?ne,  as  parall.  requires.  It  is  prob.  that  for  rhyme  in  >_  it 
originally  stood  last  in  1.  like  the  other  vbs.  of  the  Str.  For  Yahweh  as 
shepherd  cf.  Gn.  4815  4924  Mi.  7I4  Ez.  ZAn~12  Is.  499-10  Ps.  802.  — 2.  rYsKi]  pi. 
cstr.  of  \  rvy  n.f.  pasture,  meadow,  mj  Zp.  26,  nsxj  I2t.;  elsw.  in  Pss.  6513  7420 
8313,  cf.  Je.  99  2310  25s7.  —  %  N#i]  n.m.  tender  grass,  young  herbage,  as  37s2 
Dt.  32'2.  —  ^x;3"v]  Hiph.  impf.  3  m.  c.  sf.  1  sg.  of  f  *pn  vb.  Qal  lie  down,  of 
lion  10422  Gn.  49°,  Hiph.  cause  to  He  down,  of  flock  Ps.  23%  Je.  3312  Ez.  3415. 
—  Vy]  for  Sn  of  late  style,  unto,  as  (J|  i-rrl,  not  by,  alongside  of,  or  even  down  to 
from  above.  —  rV»njE"]  pi.  abstr.,  rest,  refreshment,  cf.  Is.  2812.  %  nrrnn  n.f., 
elsw.  resting  place  9511  132s-14  Is.  n10.  —  ^bin  Pi-  impf.  X  Snj  yb.  Pi-  lead 
ox  guide,  of  flock  here,  prob.  after  Is.  4910,  cf.  Is.  4011;  subj.  Yahweh  Ps.  314 
Is.  5118.  —  3.  ^Di]  not  soul  as  distinguished  from  body,  but  paraphrase  for 
pers.  pron.  me  (v.  j3),  or  soul  as  seat  of  emotion  and  passion,  v.  BDi?. — ■ 
aaiBh]  :  Polel  impf.  of  aitf  (v.  18'21)  phr.  a.X.,  but  cf.  trsj  3*>tfn  Pr.  2513  Ru.  415 
La.  ill- 16- 19  ps#  jg8#  This  js  a  defective  1.,  rd.  prob.  atf  2Vfr  (inf.  abs.  after 
the  vb.,  intensifying  its  temporal  idea,  forever,  cf.  Ju.  523),  and  put  '•itdj  at 
end.  We  have  thus  far  four  trimeter  lines  with  rhyme.  —  "^JTC?]  cstr.  pi.  of 
Sjyr,  track  (of  waggon  or  cart),  of  snares  of  wicked  1406,  course  of  life  Pr.  426 
521,  here  pin  *D  in  physical  sense,  right  as  ||  leading  to  the  proper  place.  — 
■iDltf  13?nS]  supplementary;  phr.  also  in  2511  314  79°  1068  10921  14311  Is.  48° 
Ez.  2044.  —  4.  13  cj]  even  when,  or  if,  ox  yea  though  (Dr.),  3  sed  et,  cf.  Is.  I16 
Ho.  810  9i6;  v.  for  other  uses  of  0)  88  143  ig12-  1J>.  —  J  loa]  n.m.  valley,  wady, 
elsw.i/'  only  602,  nSc  'j>,  as  2  S.  813.  —  HTO1??]  compound,  Sj  shadotv  and  nio  death, 
as  pointed  ;   but  this  is  a  rabbinical  conceit.     It  should  be  pointed  X  nwSjf 


212  PSALMS 

n.m.  dense  darkness,  elsw.  4420  I0710-  14  Ew.i270'  K6.n,1-P-»*a).4M qrintfD] 

n.  sf.  i.p.  $  PttlfD  n.f.  (^  j;c;)  ///a/  <?w  w/&*V^  <?«<?  r«/j,  walking-stick,  staff, 
not  elsw.  f,  but  Ex.  2119  Nu.  2118  Is  36s  Ez.  29s  Zc.  84.  —  n^n]  resuming 
subj.  with  emph.,  so  272  37s  ic>72A  (z/.  i&).  —  'j:nr]  Pi.  impf.  3  pi.  c.  sf.  1  sg. 
J  [oru]  vb.  Niph. :  (1)  be  sorry,  have  compassion,  c.  hy  9013  =  Sk  Ju.  216; 
(2)  r;^,  ty^tv/  one's  doings  Pss.  10645  no4  Je.  2010  Ex.  1317  (E);  (3)  com- 
fort oneself  Vs.  jys  Gn.  3812  (J);  Pi.  comfort,  console,  abs.,  Ps.  6921,  c.  ace. 
pers.  23I  71*  1 1 9-6. 82  ||  ^r;  86i7#  Hithp.:  (l)  &  wrj,  have  compassion, 
c.  S;  i3514  =  Dt.  32^;  (2)  comfort  oneself  Vs.  11952  Gn.  37**  (J).  These 
four  lines  are  tetrameters. —5.  J  jnStf]  n.m.  table,  mat  or  piece  of  leather 
spread  on  ground,  elsw.  O9-3  7819  1283.  —  })tf-t]  Ti.  pf.  2  m.,  prut,  conditional 
clause,  hast  thou  made  fat,  greased,  cf.  Lk.  7**.  ]Vh  (v.  20^),  here  of  anoint- 
ing with  oil  for  banquet.  —  f  n;n]  n.f.  saturation,  elsw.  6612  (?).  J  nn  Qal 
</r///£  to  satiety  36°,  Pi.  drench  6511.  <S  /cai  rd  ttottjpiov  aov  padvaKov,  F  *;*- 
ebrians,  so  5$.  These  two  lines  are  pentameters.  —  6.  2^  }«].  In  $,  5,  3 
begins  v.6,  but  in  (5  us  Kpariarov,  V  quam  praeclarus  est,  are  at  the  end  of 
v.5.  They  are  needed  for  measure  in  v.6.  The  phr.  -<Drn  31a  is  a.\.  For  3'B 
(v.  4?),  -<cn  (v.  ji).  They  are  personified  and  so  subj.  of  vb.  »jwtv. —  vor  ] 
Qal  pf.  1  sg.  c.  )  consec,  3ic;  pregnant  return  to  divell,  Maurer,  Baur,  Roster, 
De.;  but  (S  rb  KaroiKeiv  /xe,  so  2,  U,  as  27*  84A  ">  n*33  V*3tf,  1  coord,  inf. 
cstr.  c.  sf.  1  sg.  of  3U»>  (v.  2i)  my  dwelling,  so  Ros.,  Geier,  De  W.,  IIu., 
Heng.,  Dr.,  Kirk.  3  habitabo,  so  &,  &,  *7UV>\  Hare,  De  Muis,  Hi.,  Oort, 
Che.,  Ba.,  Ew.§234<3),  Ges.  I®m(i).  —  nw  no],  no  £««*  J  for  dwelling  of  God, 
temple  369  5210  65s  9214  93s  118*26  1229;  'an  nrin  dedication  of  301  (title), 
'3  nnxn  1 1619  1352,  'a  pjna  26s,  a  nxjp  6910;  of  entrance  for  worship,  ace.  after 
N3  58  6613;  of  processions,  ace.  after  "\hn  1221,  c.  3  5515,  '3  ip  mi  42s, 
'33  DnDP  1341  1352;  of  permanent  residence  for  worship,  ace.  after  iv\2j*>  27* 
84s,  cf.  8411,  D^pj  TQ*  {v.  2/5).     This  verse  is  a  pentameter. 


PSALM   XXIV. 

Ps.  24  combines  two  Pss.,  originally  independent,  in  the  one 
theme,  entrance  into  the  holy  temple  and  city.  The  first  is  a 
didactic  choral.  A  choir  within  the  court  of  the  temple  praises 
Yahweh  as  creator  and  owner  of  all  things  (v.1"8).  A  choir  at  the 
gate  inquires  what  sort  of  a  man  may  enter  the  holy  place  (v.3). 
The  choir  within  responds,  giving  both  the  characteristics  of  the 
man  and  the  benefits  he  will  receive  (v.4-5).  The  choir  without 
asserts  the  claims  of  Jacob  to  such  a  character,  and  to  an  entrance 
(v.6) .  The  second  Ps.  is  a  triumphal  choral.  Yahweh  has  come 
to  the  holy  city  after  a  victory.  The  choir  without  the  city  de- 
mands that  the  gate  be  raised  that  the  glorious  king  may  enter 


PSALM   XXIV.  213 

into  Jerusalem  (v.7) .  The  choir  within  inquires  who  he  is ;  and 
is  answered  that  it  is  the  victorious  Yahweh  (v.8).  Entrance  is 
again  demanded  (v.9),  the  same  inquiry  is  renewed,  and  the  effec- 
tual reply  is  made  that  it  is  Yahweh,  God  of  hosts  (v.10) . 

A.     V.1"6,    2    STR.  43  +  23. 

TO  Yahweh  belongs  the  earth  and  its  fulness, 
The  world  and  those  that  dwell  therein  ; 
For  He  founded  it  upon  the  seas, 
And  upon  streams  establisheth  it. 

Who  may  ascend  the  hill  of  Yahweh  ? 

Who  may  stand  in  His  holy  place  f 
(~\NE  clean,  and  pure  of  mind, 

Who  hath  not  lifted  up  his  soul  to  a  lie ; 
He  shall  bear  away  a  blessing  from  Yahweh, 
And  righteousness  from  the  God  of  his  salvation. 

This  is  a  generation  which  resorts  to  Him  ; 

Those  who  seek  His  face  are  Jacob. 

B.     V.7-10,    2    STR.  33  -f   I3  -f-  23. 

T  IFT  up,  O  gates,  (your)  heads ; 

And  exalt  yourselves,  ye  ancient  doors  : 

And  the  King  of  giory  will  enter. 
Who,  then,  is  the  King  of  glory? 

Yahweh,  strong  and  mighty, 

Yahweh,  mighty  in  battle. 
TIFT  up,  O  gates,  (your)  heads; 

And  (exalt  yourselves)  ye  ancient  doors : 

And  the  King  of  glory  will  enter. 
Who,  then,  is  the  King  of  glory  f 

Yahweh,  (God  of)  hosts, 

He  is  the  King  of  glory. 

Ps.  24  was  in  $3  and  fft  {y.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  <&  adds  to  the  title  an 
assignment  to  the  first  day  of  the  week,  which  corresponds  with  the  statement 
of  the  Talm.  as  to  its  liturgical  use  {v.  Intr.  §  39).  In  Christian  usage  it  is 
a  proper  Ps.  for  Ascension  day.  The  Ps.  is  composed  of  two  Pss.  of  entirely 
different  character,  composed  at  widely  different  periods.  The  older  of  these 
is  evidently  the  second,  v.7-10,  which  probably  alone  bore  the  title.  The  first, 
v.1-6,  was  probably  inserted  subsequent  to  the  prefixing  of  the  title  to  the 
second.  The  combination  was  made  in  order  to  make  a  Ps.  appropriate  to 
some  special  occasion  in  the  late  Greek  or  the  Maccabean  period,  otherwise 
the  Ps.  would  have  been  taken  up  into  15  and  132ft  (v.  Intr.  §§  32,  33).  The 
second  Ps.  alone  would  hardly  be  suitable  for  worship  either  in  the  temple  or 
synagogue.    The  second  Ps.  in  its  use  of  niNax  ("t^n)  nvr,  v.10,  and  its  em- 


214  PSALMS 

phasis  upon  I  lis  warlike  characteristics,  v.8,  implies  the  warlike  Yahweh  of 
David's  time.  The  entrance  into  the  city  is  that  of  Yahweh  at  the  head  of  a 
victorious  army,  which  suits  the  removal  of  the  ark  to  Jerusalem ;  cf.  2  S.  6. 
There  is  no  mention  in  the  history  of  any  subsequent  going  forth  of  the  ark 
to  war,  and  it  is  improbable.  From  that  time  on,  Jerusalem  was  the  holy  city, 
the  capital  of  Yahweh  the  king,  from  whence  He  granted  victory  ;  cf.  Ps.  203. 
Put  He  is  not  conceived  as  going  forth  from  the  city  to  make  war.  Moreover, 
the  entrance  is  into  the  city,  and  not  into  the  temple,  as  we  would  expect 
in  later  times  after  the  temple  was  built.  The  tib)y  tod,  v.7-  9  the  ancient 
gates,  are  the  gates  of  the  city,  which,  though  a  recent  conquest  of  David, 
had  been  a  royal  city  for  centuries  earlier  than  his  time,  and  whose  gates 
might  justly  be  named  ancient,  reaching  back  into  an  antiquity  beyond  the 
memory  of  man.  There  is  nothing  in  the  Ps.  which  requires  a  later  date. 
It  is  difficult  to  see  how  a  Ps.  could  better  fit  a  historical  situation.  V.16  are 
entirely  different.  It  is  the  temple,  not  the  city,  which  is  to  be  entered.  It 
is  not  Yahweh  who  enters,  but  men  into  His  presence.  He  is  enthroned  in 
the  city,  and  is  not  at  its  gates.  The  mountain  is  the  mountain  of  Yahweh, 
His  sacred  place,  v.3.  His  face  they  seek,  v.°,  from  Him  they  are  to  receive 
a  blessing,  v.5  But  not  only  is  the  city  His ;  the  earth  and  all  the  inhabit- 
ants of  the  world  are  His,  v.1.  That  implies  the  later  postex.  conception  that 
Yahweh  is  king  of  the  whole  world,  and  that  His  temple  is  the  central  place 
of  worship  for  the  world.  The  conception  of  creation  is  that  of  the  erection 
of  a  building,  an  idea  which  we  find  Pss.  8912,  1045,  Jb.  38*  "i-  Is.  4813,  although 
here  it  is  conceived  as  upon  subterranean  seas.  The  characteristics  of  the 
one  privileged  to  enter  the  sacred  place  are  not  external  conformity  to  Law, 
but  internal,  in  the  mind  and  soul,  v.4,  implying  a  lofty  ethical  conception, 
not  earlier  than  the  late  Persian  period,  and  sufficiently  late  to  be  influenced 
by  Heb.  Wisdom  rather  than  Law.  The  emphasis  upon  Jacob  as  the  name 
of  the  nation  is  based  upon  the  Is.2  ;  but  the  implication  that  he  has  such 
ethical  characteristics  as  are  required  by  Yahweh,  is  a  conception  which  could 
only  have  originated  in  peaceful  times,  when  Pss.  of  lamentation  and  peni- 
tence were  no  longer  written,  and  when  the  pious  might  attend  to  their 
internal,  ethical  development.  On  the  whole,  this  Ps.  seems  to  belong  to  the 
Greek  period  subsequent  to  Qft,  the  early  time  of  Heb.  Wisdom. 

PSALM   XXIV.  A. 

Str.  I.  1-2  was  sung  by  a  choir  within  the  outer  court  of  the 
temple,  praising  Yahweh  as  creator  and  owner  of  all  things.  It 
is  a  trimeter  tetrastich  of  two  syn.  couplets,  the  latter  giving  the 
reason  for  the  former.  —  1.  To  Yahweh  belongs].  He  is  the 
possessor  and  owner,  cf.  8912.  —  the  earth  and  its  fulness],  all  that 
fills  it,  its  contents,  its  creatures.  —  the  world'],  with  the  special 
signification  that  it  is  habitable,  and  accordingly  associated  with 


PSALM   XXIV.  215 

it  are  those  that  dwell  therein],  its  inhabitants.  Thus  is  asserted 
the  universal  ownership  of  Yahweh,  in  accordance  with  the  post- 
exilic  conception  that  Yahweh  is  the  universal  God  and  the  only 
God  for  the  whole  earth.  His  ownership  is  based  upon  the  fact 
that  He  had  created  them.  The  creation  is  conceived  as  the  erec- 
tion of  a  great  building,  as  in  8912 1045  Jb.  384sq-  Pr.  8a5w>-.  —  2.  For 
He],  emphatic,  He  and  no  other. — founded  it  ||  establisheth  it]. 
The  single  act  of  creation  passes  over,  as  usual  in  OT.,  into  the 
habitual  act  of  God's  sustaining  providence  ;  both  later  and  more 
comprehensive  ideas  than  those  given  in  the  poems,  Gn.  1-2, 
although  the  primitive  conception  of  subterranean  seas  and 
streams  is  still  retained,  cf.  Gn.  711  Ex.  204  Ps.  1366.  For  vari- 
ous other  conceptions  of  the  relations  of  sea  and  dry  land,  cf. 
Gn.  i9  Pr.  82!'  Jb.  267fiq-.  —  3  is  a  trimeter  couplet  sung  by  a  choir 
outside  the  gate,  inquiring  the  conditions  of  entrance. —  Who 
may],  not  what  person,  but  what  sort  of  a  person,  as  151. — 
ascend],  go  up  the  hill,  which  is  called  the  hill  of  Yahweh,  be- 
cause His  temple  or  residence  was  upon  it,  as  Is.  23  =  Mi.  4* 
Is.  3029.  —  may  stand],  among  the  accepted  worshippers,  admitted 
to  the  sacred  precincts.  —  in  His  holy  place],  as  consecrated  to 
His  worship. 

Str.  II.  4-5  is  the  response  of  the  choir  within,  in  two  syn. 
couplets,  the  first  giving  the  characteristics  of  the  one  who  might 
be  admitted  to  Yahweh's  presence.  These  are  two  in  number. 
—  4.  One  clean].  An  innocent  man,  as  io8 156.  This  one  is  still 
further  defined  as  pure  of  mind.  He  is  characterized  by  internal 
innocence,  cleanness,  and  purity.  This  has  been  weakened  in 
the  ancient  texts  by  the  insertion  of  "  hands  "  after  "  clean,"  which 
makes  it  refer  to  action,  giving  two  characteristics  and  making  the 
line  into  a  tetrameter.  —  Who  hath  not  lifted  up  his  soul],  in 
desire,  cf.  251  864  1438.  —  to  a  lie],  falsehood,  in  accordance  with 
123  417  144811.  This  is  an  internal  desire,  harmonious  with  the 
previous  purity  of  mind.  This  explanation  is  favoured  not  only 
by  the  parallel,  of  the  previous  line,  but  also  by  the  subsequent 
line,  J^,  and  Vrss.  —  and  hath  not  sworn  to  deceit].  This  was 
doubtless  an  explanatory  gloss  ;  but  it  changes  the  tetrastich  into 
a  pentastich,  and  so  destroys  the  symmetry  of  the  Ps.  —  5.  The 
second  couplet  sets  forth  the  benefits  to  be  derived  from  Yahweh 


2l6  PSALMS 

in  His  house.  —  He  shall  bear  away],  take  with  him,  when  he 
departs  from  the  temple.  —  a  blessing],  suited  to  the  pure  in  mind, 
||  righteousness,  suited  to  the  sincere  desire.  This  latter  is  not  in 
the  sense  of  alms,  as  (3,  a  meaning  not  known  to  OT. ;  or  in  the 
sense  of  that  which  is  ethically  right,  which  could  hardly  be 
bestowed  upon  him ;  but  in  the  meaning  urged  by  the  phr.  God 
of  his  salvation,  saving  righteousness,  righteousness  of  vindication, 
as  usual,  Pss.  59  2  232  36u  +  and  Is.2  45s  4613  5 16  + .  —  6.  The  choir 
without  claims  the  right  of  entrance  in  a  couplet  responding  to  the 
demand  as  to  character,  by  stating  the  privilege  belonging  by 
inheritance  to  the  seed  of  Jacob.  They  are  not  strangers  who 
seek  access  to  Yahweh,  but  His  own  people.  —  This  is  a  genera- 
tion^, a  class  of  men  whose  characteristic  it  is,  that  they  resort  to 
Him  ||  seek  Bis  face'].  The  ptcs.  express  continual  resort  to  the 
sacred  place  for  worship.  J^  has  "Thy  face,"  which  gives  an 
abrupt  change  of  person  and  makes  it  difficult  to  explain  the 
context.  "  O  Jacob,"  PBV.,  is  an  adaptation  to  %}  of  some  texts 
of  3  which  have  "  face  of  Jacob."  But  the  context  makes  it  evi- 
dent that  these  are  not  strangers  seeking  Jacob,  but  Israel  resort- 
ing to  his  God.  "Thy  face,  O  God  of  Jacob,"  RV.,  adapts  Jff  to 
(§»,  which  gives  "  the  face  of  the  God  of  Jacob,"  but  the  insertion 
of  "God"  looks  like  an  interpretation  and  it  leaves  the  subj.  out 
of  the  parall.  The  subj.,  syn.  with  generation,  is  exceedingly  for- 
cible in  the  climax  if  it  is  defined  as  Jacob,  with  all  the  historic 
rights  to  the  covenanted  promises  contained  in  the  name.  Inas- 
much as  the  suffix  "  they  "  is  not  in  (3,  <&,  U,  it  is  an  interpreter's 
addition.  It  is  easy  to  correct  the  text  after  the  parall.  and  read 
"  His  face,"  and  to  regard  the  couplet  as  inclusive,  "  generation  " 
beginning  and  "Jacob"  closing  it. 

PSALM   XXIV.  B. 

Str.  I.  is  a  trimeter  tristich,  the  first  two  lines  syn.,  the  third 
synth.  A  triumphal  army,  with  Yahweh  at  its  head,  is  at  the 
gates  of  Jerusalem  demanding  entrance.  The  choir  summons  the 
gates  to  open  to  admit  the  king.  —  7.0  gales],  personified  and 
addressed  as  persons,  ||  Ye  ancient  doors],  as  reaching  back  in 
history  into  hoary  antiquity.     Jerusalem  was  a  very  ancient  city 


PSALM   XXIV.  217 

before  David  captured  it,  whose  origin  is  so  remote  that  it  is 
earlier  than  all  historical  accounts  of  it.  —  lift  up  your  heads  || 
exalt  yourselves].  The  reflexive  is  more  in  accord  with  the  par- 
allelism than  the  passive  "  Be  ye  lift  up,"  EV8.  It  is  well  explained 
by  Ewald  :  "  A  new  king  is  about  to  enter  the  ancient  and  venerable 
city,  and  indeed  the  highest  and  mightiest  conceivable,  Yahweh 
Himself,  enthroned  upon  the  ark  of  the  Covenant.  Such  a  king 
has  never  entered  this  city,  and  the  gray  gates,  although  venerable 
with  age,  are  too  small  and  mean  for  Him."  — And  the  King  of 
glory"],  a  phr.  only  here;  but  Yahweh  is  frequently  conceived  as 
king,  Ex.  1518  Pss.  5s  io16  2910  44*  47s7-8  48s  68^  7412  844  95s  986 
994  1451  1492;  and  glory  is  one  of  the  most  common  attributes  of 
Yahweh,  29s  7219  14512.  Here  the  glory  is  that  of  warlike  achieve- 
ments, such  as  that  ascribed  to  the  king  of  David's  dynasty,  216. 
—  8.  The  choir  within  the  gates  responds  to  the  summons  in  a 
monostich  of  inquiry.  It  is  not  necessary  to  think  of  the  gates 
as  speaking.  It  is  the  challenge  of  the  sentinels,  who  must 
demand  the  password  officially,  even  if  they  know  what  the 
answer  will  be.  It  is  the  poet's  art  to  thus  get  a  reason  for  the 
glorification  of  Yahweh  the  king.  The  choir  without  respond 
in  a  couplet  setting  forth  who  the  king  is. —  Yahweh],  the  God 
of  Israel,  is  this  king,  and  not  David,  God's  son,  the  divine  repre- 
sentative in  kingship.  —  strong  and  mighty].  These  attributes  are 
those  of  a  warrior,  as  defined  in  the  stairlike  parall.  mighty  in 
battle.  The  king  is  a  valiant  hero,  victorious  in  battle,  a  great 
conqueror.  He  has  returned  from  a  glorious  war ;  cf.  "  Yahweh 
is  a  man  of  war"  Ex.  1523;  cf.  also  Num.  io35  1  S.  421sq-  for  the 
warlike  character  of  the  Ark,  as  bearing  the  divine  presence. 

Str.  II.  9-10.  The  choir  of  the  army  repeats  the  trimeter  trip- 
let, renewing  the  demand  for  entrance  in  identical  terms. 

10.  The  sentinels  make  an  identical  challenge.  The  choir 
respond  in  terms  that  cannot  be  questioned,  by  giving  the  divine 
name,  characteristic  of  the  Davidic  dynasty.  The  longer  and  more 
ancient  title,  Yahweh  {God)  of  Hosts,  is  required  by  the  measure. 
It  was  shortened  by  an  early  editor  at  the  expense  of  the  measure, 
in  accordance  with  the  usage  of  his  time,  into  "Yahweh  Sabaoth," 
and  so  in  all  Vrss.  after  (3  "Lord  of  Hosts."  The  original' title 
of  Yahweh,  given  as  the  countersign  or   military  password  for 


2 1 8  PSALMS 

entrance  to  the  royal  city,  is  used  here  in  accordance  with  the 
original  meaning  of  this  divine  name  as  given  in  i  S.  1 7",  "  God 
of  the  battle  array  of  Israel."  It  was  especially  appropriate  if  we 
suppose  that  the  entire  army  of  Israel  was  then  at  the  gates  of 
Jerusalem  with  king  David  at  their  head,  conducting  the  Ark 
of  Yahweh  to  the  sacred  place  consecrated  for  it.  —  He\t  emphatic, 
and  no  other,  is  the  King  of  glory,  cf.  v.7-  9. 

XXIV.  A. 
1.  nvnS]  S  of  possession,  emph.  —  \  n«st?w  fn«n]  phr.  Dt.  3316  Is.  341 
Mi.  i2  Je.  816  472  Ez.  197  3012;  cf.  TN  "jan'Pte.  so12"  8912,  'Dl  D\n  9611  Q87.— 
na  ♦at/')]  retracted  accent  because  of  final  monosyl.  @  inserts  iravTes  = 
Va;  but  it  is  absent  in  this  same  phr.  987  10784,  and  is  interp.  Van  (v.  9s). 
3B*  (v.  2*).  V.1-2  rhymes  in  final  n_. —  3.  *pi],  l  is  a  prosaic  addition  im- 
pairing the  measure.  — nw  in]  the  temple  mount,  elsw.  Is.  23  (  =  Mi.  42)  3029; 
of  Horeb,  Nu.  10™  (JE),  nwax  1  nn  Zc.  8*,  cf.  Ps.  /j'.  — 4.  o:§3  »bj]  a.X., 
but  'pj  used  for  innocent  person,  v.  108.  D^oa  is  a  gl.  of  interpretation,  mak- 
ing the  1.  tetrameter.  —  3aV*na]  cf.  aaS  »na  731,  aa1?  v.  <f.  —  nrn]  rel.  is  a 
gl.  balanced  with  coa,  making  this  1.  also  tetrameter.  A  tetrameter  couplet 
in  the  midst  of  trimeters  is  altogether  improbable.  —  lBtoj  NiirS  Nirj  n'?]  Kt.f 
<S,  3.  But  Qr.  ""irpj,  as  if  it  were  a  citation  from  Ex.  207  =  Dt.  511.  re:  for 
cr,  cf.  Ps.  13920.  nvj*  z/.  /^3.  Syn.  is  nonnS  patfj  kSV].  For  patf  v.  75*. 
nDnE  v.  y.  This  favours  falsehood  in  the  previous  1.  rather  than  the  dis- 
honouring of  the  name  of  God.  It  is  prob.  that  this  1.  is  an  explanatory  gl., 
so  Bi.,  Ba.  It  makes  the  only  tristich  in  the  Ps.  @  adds  the  gl.  ry  irXrjaiov 
airrov,  IB  proximo  suo.  —  5.  np**x],  @  has  iXerjfjLoavvrjv,  but  this  is  a  late  mng. 
of  rip-ix  not  used  in  OT.  Here  npTt  \\  nana  is  ||  yvfr,  as  in  Is.2  (espec.)  and 
subsequent  writers,  v.j9.  —  tyt/>  vJSk]  cf.  1847  25s  27s  65s  79°  85s,  and  for 
other  uses  of  yr.'.  v.  126.  ©  awTrjpos  is  concrete  for  abstr. — 6.  ^"n]  Kt.,  PBh'i 
Qr.,  both  ptc.  as  rel.  clauses,  ||  'tfpac,  <S,  3,  both  pi.,  as  in  911.  Bhl  vb.  seek, 
consult,  by  resorting  to  a  sacred  place,  so  ace.  of"-  7834  Gn.  2^  (J)  Ex.  1815 
(E)  +.  —  app  ?\\}D  'f/pao].  Jacob  is  not  vocative,  the  suffix  cannot  refer  to 
him.  It  is  not  the  face  of  Jacob  that  is  sought,  but  God's  face.  It  is  possible 
to  make  app  an  independent  clause,  it  is  Jacob,  but  that  is  harsh.  @  has 
rod  GeoO  'IaAcw/3,  so  £>,  IB,  and  most  moderns,  which  makes  the  1.  too  long 
unless  with  Hare  and  Grimme  Stoao.  It  gives  good  sense  in  accordance 
with  parall.  3  in  text  of  Lag.  has  faciem  tuam  Jacob,  as  |^,  but  in  text  of 
Nestle,  faciem  Jacob,  apjn  *1D,  cf.  PBV.  But  it  is  not  foreign  peoples  seeking 
the  face  of  Jacob,  as  in  the  conception  of  second  Isaiah  and  Zechariah,  but 
faithful  Israelites  seeking  the  presence  of  their  God  in  the  temple  in  Zion. 
A  simple  and  natural  interpretation  would  be  to  regard  this  1.  as  in  introverted 
parall.  with  previous  1. : 

This  is  a  generation  which  resorts  to  Him ; 

Those  who  seek  His  face  are  Jacob. 


PSALM  XXV.  219 

r\  in  t»jd  is  txt.  err.,  not  in  <&,  £,  rd.  v:a  \\  Ptht.  >  has  been  omitted  in  the 
one  place,  1  in  the  other,  and  -\  has  been  inserted  in  |^,  3  as  interpretation. 
—  7.  dd^ni  onytf  wir]  so  Aq.,  3,  <£,  C  <&,  2  make  D3Mtrm  =  ol  dpxovres 
bfiuv  here  and  in  v.9  the  subj.,  and  an;^  obj.,  so  "B  principes;  the  chiefs  are 
to  lift  the  gates  instead  of  their  spreading  themselves  open;  but  the  sf.  with 
DD^m  is  not  easy;  in  this  case  it  ought  to  be  with  gates.  Prob.  both  sfs.  were 
interp.  and  the  original  had  none.  —  ^ajj].  The  1  might  be  subordinate  with 
subjunctive,  that  he  may  enter  :  better  introducing  apod,  of  imv.,  and  he  will 
enter,  v.  Dr.§152.  —  8.  npc]  enclitic,  who  then,  so  v.10  2512.  —  mjj]  adj.  only 
here  of  '\  and  Is.  4317  of  army;  vb.  for  ">  Ps.  6829,  cf.  y;  j?nr  8911,  and  Tj?  as 
attributive  6212  63s  68s6  931  96s,  ^So  ?>'  99*.  —  "V>33]  adj.  for  might  of  God 
fighting  for  His  people,  elsw.  Dt.  io17  Ne.  932  Is.  io21  Je.  3218;  of  valiant 
man,  v.  icf. —  ncn^D  "V3?]  stairlike  parall.,  for  this  1.  completes  what  the 
previous  1.  began,  defining  mighty  as  mighty  in  battle.  —  9  =  v.7  save  that 
iKfenn  gives  place  to  ixr;  but  this  is  doubtless  txt.  err.,  for  there  is  no  obj. 
<f§  had  Niph.,  so  Hare,  al.  3  changes  to  erigite  from  elevamini.  But  a 
change  is  improb.  in  this  word  only.  — 10.  nr  wn  *p].  The  inquiry  is  repeated, 
differing  only  from  v.8a  by  insertion  of  KVl,  but  this  makes  the  1.  too  long. 
Nin  is  copula  and  interpretative.  <&  is  same  as  v.8*,  so  also  3. —  rvxnx  mrp] 
so  <&  and  3,  makes  a  dimeter.  This  is  possible,  but  it  is  more  likely  that  it 
was  a  copyist's  shortening  of  the  older  phr.  nix^s  tiSn  nw,  which  gives  a 
good  trimeter,  into  the  phr.  used  in  his  own  time.  —  J  N3v]  n.m. :  (i)  army, 
organised  for  war  4410  6012  6813  10812;  (2)  of  angels  10321  1482;  (3)  fig.  of 
heavenly  bodies  33s;  (4)  war  6812  (?),  others  fig.  (1);  (5)  nwas  as  name  of 
God  of  David  and  dynasty,  based  on  1  S.  1746,  S*oir,>  ni3"tyD  "K  'X  '\  originally 
nwasn  ^nSx  "»,  Am.  614  Ho.  126, .usually  nwax  tiSn  1  Ps.  89°,  reduced  to 
nixas  1  24M  46s-12  489  842-4  13,  preceded  by  \nN  697  Is.  315  Je.  219 +. 
niN3$  O^hSn  Ps.  8o8-15,  preceded  by  nw  59s  8o5- 20  84s;  in  all  cases  Qirh*  for 
an  original  mrp  and  where  preceded  by  mm  conflation.  —  "113311  "|Sd  Hin] 
emph.  conclusion.     <&  has  avrds  iariv  oDros  =  nr  Nin. 


PSALM   XXV.,  3  str.  76. 

Ps.  25  is  a  prayer  of  the  congregation  in  three  parts.  (1)  Peti- 
tion, that  they  that  trust  in  Yahweh  may  not  be  shamed,  but 
rather  those  dealing  treacherously  (v.13)  ;  that  Yahweh  will  teach 
His  ways  (v.4-5),  and  remember  His  compassion  rather  than  sins 
of  youth  (v.^7).  (2)  Confidence,  that  Yahweh  will  teach  the 
afflicted  His  way  (v.8-9)  ;  that  His  paths  are  kindness  and  faith- 
fulness (v.10)  ;  and  that  He  will  instruct  and  give  His  intimacy 
to  those  fearing  Him  (v.12-14).  (3)  Petition,  that  Yahweh  will 
bring  out  of  distresses  (v.15-17)  ;  that  He  will  see  his  enemies  (v.19)  ; 


220  PSALMS 

and  that  He  will  deliver  those  that  wait  on  Him  (v.2*-21).  Peti- 
tions for  pardon  were  inserted  by  an  editor  in  place  of  lines  which 
he  threw  out  (v.1118).  A  liturgical  addition  makes  a  general  plea 
for  the  ransom  of  Israel  (v.22). 

TJNTO  Thee,  Yahweh,  I  lift  up  my  soul ;   (O  my  God,)  let  me  not  be  ashamed. 
In  Thee  I  trust,  (therefore)  let  not  mine  enemies  exult;  even  mine; 
Yea,  let  none  that  wait  on  Thee  be  ashamed ;  let  them  be  ashamed  that  deal 

treacherously  without  effect. 
Thy  ways  make  me  know,  Yahweh,  (and)  Thy  paths  teach  me; 
Lead  me  in  Thy  faithfulness  and  teach  me ;  for  Thou  art  the  God  of  my  salvation. 
Remember  Thy  compassion,  Yahweh,  and  Thy  kindness,  for  they  are  of  old. 
The  sins  of  my  youth  remember  not ;  according  to  Thy  kindness,  remember  me. 
(TIOOD  and  upright  is  Yahweh :  therefore  will  He  instruct  in  the  way  : 

He  will  lead  the  afflicted  in  (His)  judgment,  and  He  will  teach  the  afflicted 

His  way. 
All  the  paths  of  Yahweh  are  kindness  and  faithfulness  to  them  that  keep  His 

covenant. 
* 

Who  then  is  (he)  that  feareth  Yahweh  ?     He  will  instruct  him  in  the  way  He 

chooseth ; 
He  himself  will  dwell  in  prosperity;  and  his  seed  will  inherit  the  land. 
The  intimacy  of  Yahweh  have  they  that  fear  (His  name),  and  His  covenant, 

to  make  them  know  it. 
A/TINE  eyes  are  continually  unto  Yahweh,  that  He  may  bring  forth  my  feet. 
Turn  unto  me  and  be  gracious  unto  me;  for  desolate  and  afflicted  am  I. 
As  for  the  troubles  of  my  mind,  O  make  room  from  my  distresses ;  O  bring  me 

forth. 
* 

O  see  mine  enemies;  for  they  are  many,  and  they  hate  me  with  a  hatred  of 

violence. 
O  keep  me  and  deliver  me  ;  let  me  not  be  ashamed,  for  I  seek  refuge  in  Thee. 
Let  integrity  and  uprightness  {deliver  me)  ;  for,  Yahweh,  I  wait  on  Thee. 

Ps.  25  was  in  Q  (v.  Intr.  §  27).  <S  has  if/aXfids ;  but  it  is  not  in  f$,  and 
it  is  improbable  that  it  would  have  been  omitted  if  original.  The  Ps.  is  an 
acrostic  hexameter ;  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  appear  except  1  and  p. 
The  1  might  be  found  if  with  @  we  read  fnKi  for  |§  -jniN  v.50;  but  then  only 
three  of  the  six  words  would  be  given,  and  that  at  the  expense  of  the  strophi- 
cal  organisation  of  the  Ps.  These  words  are  more  like  a  gloss  of  intensifica- 
tion. The  analogy  of  Ps.  34  favours  the  opinion  that  the  omission  of  1  was 
intentional.  With  twenty-two  letters  it  was  impracticable  to  get  symmetrical 
Strs.  without  such  an  omission.  The  p  Str.  might  be  restored  by  substituting 
nxnp  for  n«n,  v.18,  regarding  the  repetition  of  the  latter  word  as  due  to  dit- 

*  This  indicates  the  omission  of  an  original  line.  The  words  italicised  indicate 
the  stairlike  parallelism  characteristic  of  this  Ps. 


PSALM   XXV.  221 

tography.  But  it  is  probable  that  this  line  was  a  later  substitution  for  the 
original  line,  as  was  v.11,  in  order  to  introduce  into  the  Ps.  two  petitions  for 
forgiveness  of  sins.  For  these  two  lines  are  awkward  in  their  relation  to  their 
context,  interrupting  the  movement  of  the  thought;  and  they  lack  the  catch- 
word of  the  stairlike  parallelism  (v.  Intr.  §  12  A)  characteristic  of  the  Ps.  in 
every  other  line :  trn  v.1- 8,  IdS  v.4-  5,  ~ot  v.6- 7,  "pi  v.8- 9,  nt>  v.12-14,  N">xin 
v.15- 17,  and  it  is  probable  Ssj  v.20,  21,  the  "ixj  v.21  being  due  to  a  copyist's  error 
or  a  stylistic  change.  It  is  noteworthy  that  the  catchword  is  in  both  lines  of 
the  distichs,  but  only  in  first  and  third  lines  of  the  tristichs,  vx~3- 12"14- 15_17. 
V.22,  as  Ps.  3423,  is  a  liturgical  addition.  It  is  improbable  that  any  writer  would 
omit  a  letter  of  the  alphabet  from  his  acrostic,  and  then  add  a  supplementary 
line  to  rectify  the  omission.  Moreover,  the  use  of  dtiSn  for  nirp  of  the  Ps.  is 
evidence  of  a  later  hand,  as  well  as  the  use  of  hH"\V  by  way  of  generalisation  of 
the  petition  and  confidence  of  the  Ps.  The  Ps.  has  three  Strs.,  the  first  and  the 
third  petitions,  separated  by  the  second,  expressing  trust  in  Yahweh.  It  shows 
no  dependence  on  earlier  writings.  It  is  entirely  original  as  a  composition. 
The  language  is  not  early  and  not  very  late.  The  phrase  mj?J  nixan  v.7, 
cf.  Ez.  2321  Jb.  1326,  looks  back  on  the  youth  of  the  nation.  The  terms 
("P*0  y-'in  v.4- 14,  mmx  -teh  v.4,  ymn  v.5-  9,  mv  v.8- 12,  all  show  the  influence 
of  D.  There  is  no  evidence  of  the  influence  of  P  save  in  rmj  v.10,  which  is 
a  gloss,  nna  nxj  v.10  is  elsewhere  only  Dt.  3^,  and  may  be  regarded  as  a 
poetic  synonym  of  nna  "ictf.  The  use  of  22S  v.17,  as  152  244  9012  10415,  is 
that  of  the  Prophets  of  the  Restoration  Zc.  1-8  Hg.,  Jo.  There  are  phrases 
and  words  peculiar  to  the  Ps.  :  '<  "»8"l  2)t3  v.8,  the  ethical  use  of  310  for  God 
elsw.  \p  11939.08 .  nna  for  alliance  or  friendship  with  God  v.14,  Dm  rsjfc'  v.19, 
■vi»i  an  v.21  personified  attributes.  Other  noteworthy  words  and  phrases 
are:  2V22  pVn  v.13,  cf.  Jb.  2113  3611  Ec.  714;  1  -hd  v.14,  cf.  Jb.  294  Pr.  332; 
rjjm  ihn  nj3  v.16  8616  119132;  t^  alone,  solitary  v.16  68";  3*mn  v.17  dubious 
meaning,  cf.  Ps.  42;  f  ^pi^D  v.17  107s- 13- 19-  28  Jb.  1524  Zp.  I15.  These  tend  to 
the  terminology  of  Job.  The  language  and  style  favour  the  Persian  period 
prior  to  Nehemiah. 

Str.  I.  is  a  hexameter  heptastich  of  petition,  composed  of  a  tristich 
and  two  distichs,  each  with  its  catchword,  in  stairlike  parallelism.  — 
1-3.  Unto  Thee  ||  in  Thee~\,  both  emphatic  in  position,  to  indicate 
that  Yahweh,  ||  my  God,  was  the  only  person  to  whom  it  could  be 
said,  /  lift  up  my  soul,  in  longing  desire,  ||  /  trust,  of  confidence 
and  reliance,  ||  wait  on  Thee,  cf.  v.21,  hoping,  expecting  help.  —  let 
me  not  be  asha7ned\  by  being  overcome  by  enemies  :  the  catch- 
word of  the  tristich,  repeated  both  negatively  and  positively  in 
v.3.  —  let  not  mine  enemies  exult~],  in  triumph.  These  two  vbs., 
originally  in  synonymous  clauses  in  two  different  lines,  were  by 
a  prosaic  editor  brought  together  in  one  line  in  ^  and  so  in  EV8., 


222  PSALMS 

at  the  expense  of  the  parall.,  the  measure,  and  the  acrostic  of  the 
second  line.  —  them  that  deal  treacherously],  they  are  crafty,  in- 
triguing, treacherous  enemies. — without  effect],  without  accomplish- 
ing anything,  as  f,  "disappointed  of  their  expectations,"  Ham.; 
"  without  cause  "  of  EV9.  is  not  justified  by  usage.  All  this  is  not 
the  prayer  of  an  individual,  but  of  a  community  in  peril  from  crafty 
enemies. — 4-5.  Thy  ways  ||  Thy  paths],  terms  of  the  legislation 
of  D.,  in  which  the  people  were  to  walk  in  their  course  of  life.  — 
make  ??ie  know  ||  teach  me],  the  latter  the  keyword,  reappearing 
therefore  in  v.5  ||  lead  me ;  all  bringing  out  the  divine  discipline 
of  Israel  on  its  positive  side  of  instruction  and  guidance  in  the 
Law.  This  is  enforced  by  an  appeal  to  historic  experience,  in 
Thy  faithfulness],  that  is,  to  the  promises  of  the  covenants  with 
the  fathers.  —  God  of  my  salvation'],  whose  character  it  is  to  save, 
and  from  whom  salvation  comes.  A  later  editor  adds,  either  to 
the  text  or  originally  on  the  margin,  so  that  it  subsequently  came 
into  the  text,  on  Thee  do  I  wait  all  the  day].  This  is  parallel  in 
thought  to  the  previous  clause,  and  a  repetition  of  that  of  v.3,  with- 
out any  proper  motive  in  the  Ps.  itself,  and  at  the  expense  of 
the  measure  and  strophical  organisation.  —  6-7.  Remember],  the 
keyword  of  the  distich,  repeated  therefore  in  both  negative  and 
positive  form  in  v.7;  cf.  v.3. —  Thy  compassion],  the  sympathetic 
attitude  of  Yahweh  towards  His  people  as  their  Sovereign  and 
Father ;  ||  kindness,  as  in  v.7,  which  is  the  only  measure  of  the 
remembrance.  This  is  more  probable  than  the  pi.  "  loving  kind- 
nesses "  EV8.,  more  properly  "  loving  deeds  "  JPSV.,  which,  though 
sustained  by  J^  and  Vrss.,  is  a  late  and  uncommon  usage,  and  is 
probably  an  assimilation  to  the  previous  plural,  which,  however, 
is  an  abstract  plural  and  not,  as  this  would  be,  a  plural  of  number. 
The  difference  is  one  of  interpretation  and  not  of  an  originally 
different  text. —  They  are  of  old].  These  gracious  attributes  of 
Yahweh  have  characterised  Him  from  the  most  ancient  times  in 
the  historical  experience  of  His  people.  This  suggests  in  antithe- 
sis, The  sins  of  my  youth  remember  not],  the  sins  that  the  people 
had  committed  in  former  generations,  in  the  beginning  of  the 
national  existence,  as  in  Ez.  2321  in  connection  with  the  abode  in 
Egypt.  —  and  my  transgressions]  is  a  gloss  of  amplification,  mak- 
ing the  line  over  full.    "  Remember  not  sins  "  is  a  prophetic  term, 


PSALM  XXV.  223 

Je.  3 134  Ez.  1822  3316  Is.  43^  Ps.  79s  -f,  to  indicate  that  Yahweh, 
in  His  sovereign  grace,  puts  them  out  of  mind,  treats  them  as 
if  they  had  never  existed.  It  is  parallel  to  "  not  impute  "  Fs.  32s2, 
"not  reward  according  to"  10310.  It  is  also  syn.  with  "passing 
over,  overlooking,  ignoring  "  them,  Acts  1 730  Rom.  tf5.  —  O  Thou 
for  Thy  goodness  sake~\.  This  is  a  gloss,  introducing  an  additional 
plea,  and  adding  a  prosaic  short  sentence  to  a  line  and  a  Str. 
which  are  already  complete. 

Str.  II.  expresses  trust  and  confidence  in  Yahweh,  intervening 
between  Strs.  of  petition.  It  is  composed  of  a  distich,  v.8-9,  and 
a  tristich,  v.12-14,  with  catchwords  and  stairlike  parallelism,  and  two 
intervening  lines,  v.10-11.  —  8-9.  Good  and  upright  is  Yahweh']. 
The  ethical  character  of  Yahweh  is  here  emphasised,  at  the  begin- 
ning, in  order  to  indicate  that  His  disciplinary  guidance  is  ethical. 
Usually  God  is  good,  as  benignant;  here,  as  119s9-68,  seldom  else- 
where in  OT.,  ethically  good.  —  Therefore],  on  the  basis  of  this 
character  of  Yahweh. — will  He  instruct  ||  lead  ||  teach"],  stating 
as  a  fact  what  was  prayed  for  in  v.4'5.  —  the  way],  the  keyword 
of  this  distich,  therefore,  repeated  in  v.9,  which  also  takes  up  the 
term  of  v.4"5,  the  afflicted ;  pious  Israel,  as  afflicted  by  enemies,  v.2 ; 
v.  913.  Therefore  sinners  v.8  is  improbable  in  the  parallelism.  It 
is  a  later  gloss,  making  the  line  over  full,  and  preparatory  to  the 
petition  for  pardon  v.n  — 10.  All  the  paths  of  Yahweh],  not  the 
paths  in  which  Yahweh  goes,  but  the  paths  which  Yahweh  teaches 
His  people,  as  v.4  —  are  kindness  and  faithfulness],  as  in  v.5, 7.  He 
leads  in  faithfulness,  and  kindness  is  the  norm  of  His  remembrance 
of  His  people.  —  to  them  that  keep  His  covenant],  the  covenant 
between  Yahweh  and  His  people,  whose  substance  is  the  Deutero- 
nomic  instruction  in  those  ways  and  paths  already  spoken  of.  The 
keeping  of  this  covenant  is  a  walking  in  its  ways  under  the  guid- 
ance of  Yahweh.  —  and  His  testimonies],  a  gloss  of  amplification 
from  the  point  of  view  of  the  later  priestly  legislation,  making  the 
line  over  full.  We  should  now  expect,  in  accordance  with  the 
method  of  this  psalmist,  a  synonymous  line  with  the  catchword 
of  this  line  repeated,  and  that  covenant  would  be  this  word.  In 
fact  the  expression  of  trust  and  confidence  which  characterises 
this  Str.  is  suddenly  abandoned,  and  petition  abruptly  appears.  — 
11.   For  Thy  name's  sake],  an  urgent  plea,  as  the  basis  of  the 


224  PSALMS 

petition,  thrown  before  for  emphasis,  that  the  good  name,  the 
honour  of  Yahweh  may  not  suffer  in  His  people.  — pardon  mine 
iniquity],  lift  it  up  as  a  burden,  and  bear  it  away  from  me  and 
from  Thee;  syn.  "  forgive,"  as  v.18. — for  it  is  great],  not  in 
intensity,  but  in  amount,  cf.  1914.  All  this  is  well  suited  to  a 
worshipping  congregation ;  but  it  is  not  in  accord  with  the  con- 
text, or  the  course  of  thought  of  the  Ps.  It  doubtless  was  a 
liturgical  substitution  for  the  original  line,  which  was  parall.  with 
v.10  —  12.  Who  then  is  he  ?]  This  inquiry  is  in  order  to  prepare 
the  mind  for  the  emphatic  answer,  thatfeareth  Yahweh\  the  key- 
word of  this  tristich,  reappearing  therefore  in  v.14  —  He  will  in- 
struct him  in  the  way,  as  v.8,  ||  make  them  know  it,  as  v.4.  —  He 
chooseth],  relative  clause  with  Yahweh  subj.,  as  i^1  65'\  It  is 
usually  interpreted  as  "  he  should  choose,"  with  man  as  subject. 
The  context  favours  the  former  interpretation.  — 13.  He  himself] 
antith,  to  his  seed,  or  posterity  ;  the  former  will  dwell  in  prosperity, 
in  accordance  with  the  blessedness  and  prosperity  promised  to 
those  who  fear  Yahweh  and  walk  in  His  ways,  cf.  Dt.  28;  the 
latter  will  inherit  the  land,  the  promised  land  of  Canaan,  as  Pss. 
379~34444,  in  accordance  with  Gn.  157  Num.  1330  212435  Jos.  183  (JE) 
Dt.  i8- 21- w  + .  — 14.  The  intimacy  of  Yahweh],  the  intimate,  secret 
fellowship  granted  to  those  admitted  to  the  inner  circle  of  friend- 
ship or  alliance,  cf.  Pr.  $*,  Jb.  294 ;  II  covenant,  which,  while  refer- 
ring to  the  Deuteronomic  covenant,  as  above  v.10,  has  yet  in  this 
connection  the  more  fundamental  meaning  of  an  alliance,  as  Ps. 
5521.  —  they  that  fear  {His  name)],  as  6iG  8611  i021G,  for  so  the 
text  originally  read,  as  the  measure  requires,  instead  of  "  fear 
Him  "  of  ty,  followed  by  EV8.,  which  leaves  the  measure  defective 
by  just  one  word,  which  appears,  however,  in  (£>,  although  "  His 
name  "  is  there  expanded  into  a  clause,  practically  identical  in 
other  respects  with  the  previous  one. 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  a  tristich,  v.15"17,  and  a  distich,  v.20-21* 
with  the  usual  catchwords  and  intervening  lines,  v.18"19,  of  a  differ- 
ent character ;  cf.  v.10-11.  — 15.  Mine  eyes]  in  antithesis  with  my 
feet.  The  former  look  continually  unto  Yahweh ;  the  latter,  Yah- 
weh on  His  part,  in  response  to  the  pleading  look,  brings  forth 
irom  a  place  of  peril.  —  that  He  may  firing  forth],  in  accordance 
with  the  petition  which  is  characteristic  of  the  entire  Str.,  as 


PSALM   XXV.  225 

distinguished  from  the  calm  statement  of  fact  which  is  charac- 
teristic of  the  previous  Str.  The  EV8.  and  interpreters  generally 
regard  the  clause  as  causal  in  accordance  with  previous  context, 
"  for  He  shall  pluck,"  a  loose  but  poetic  rendering  of  vb.  meaning 
"  bring  forth,"  which  is  the  keyword  of  the  tristich.  — from  the 
net~\  in  J^  and  Verss.  is  due  to  an  interpretative  gloss  after  916 ; 
but  it  is  at  the  expense  of  the  measure  and  has  nothing  to  suggest 
it  in  the  context,  and  really  is  too  specific,  leading  away  from  the 
more  general  thought  of  the  tristich.  — from  my  distresses^,  the 
parallel  of  v.17,  where  the  vb.  is  repeated,  also  syn.  with  the  adj. 
desolate,  abandoned  to  enemies,  left  alone  (v.  2221  687),  and 
afflicted,  suffering  from  words  and  deeds  of  the  enemies,  as  v.2,9; 
so  also  with  troubles  of  my  mind,  mental  distress,  anxiety  caused 
by  the  treachery  of  the  enemies.  — 16.  Turn  unto  me  and  be 
gracious  unto  me~\.  The  turning  unto  the  people  on  the  part 
of  Yahweh  is  an  appropriate  response  to  their  eyes  continually 
directed  unto  Him.  — 17.  O  make  room\,  in  accordance  with  the 
usage  of  42 ;  give  breathing-place,  breadth  of  position,  in  contrast 
to  the  straits,  the  cramped  and  narrow  position,  in  which  they  were 
now  situated,  a  mng.  entirely  appropriate  between  the  verbs  "  bring 
forth."  The  rendering  of  (3,  J,  EV8.,  al.,  "  the  troubles  of  my 
heart  are  enlarged,"  has  no  usage  in  Heb.  to  justify  it ;  and  the 
interpretation  of  the  vb.  as  perfect,  while  justified  by  J^,  is  against 
the  context,  and  due  to  an  ancient  misreading  of  the  text,  attach- 
ing the  letter  Waw  to  the  preceding  instead  of  the  following  word. 
— 18.  O  see  mine  affliction  and  my  travail '].  This  line  is  ren- 
dered suspicious  at  the  start  by  its  substitution  of  a  vb.  with  "1,  and 
indeed  the  same  as  that  of  v.  19,  for  the  expected  one  with  p, 
which  should  appear  here  in  the  order  of  the  alphabet.  An  easy 
emendation  would  give  us  this ;  but  there  remain  the  same  objec- 
tions that  we  have  found  against  v.11,  namely,  the  unexpected  plea, 
and  forgive  all  my  sins,  and  the  absence  of  the  catchword  of  the 
distich.  It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  we  have  a  liturgical  substi- 
tution for  the  original  line  syn.  with  v.19.  — 19.  O  see  mine  ene- 
mies^, the  same  as  those  mentioned  v.2,  only  there  they  were 
treacherous,  and  so  dangerous  \  here  they  are  many,  numerous, 
and  so  outnumbering  the  people  of  Yahweh  that  they  need  rein- 
forcement.—  and  they  hate  me].  This  is  probably  the  catchword 
Q 


226  PSALMS 

of  the  distich,  and  was  to  be  found  in  the  original  mate  to  this 
line  ;  intensified  by  with  a  hatred  of  violence,  a  hatred  that 
prompts  to  deeds  of  violence.  —  20-21.  O  keep  me  and  deliver 
me],  the  latter  probably  the  keyword  of  the  distich,  reappearing 
in  v.21  in  the  original  text;  but  an  early  copyist  by  the  mistake 
of  a  single  letter  read  it  "  preserve  me,"  which  really  implies  a 
previous  deliverance,  and  is  not  so  well  suited  to  wait  on  Thee 
II  seek  refuge  in  Thee,  which  imply  that  the  deliverance  has  not 
yet  been  granted.  —  Let  me  not  be  ashamed]  goes  back  to  the 
beginning  of  the  Ps.  v.1"3,  and  implies  the  continuance  of  the  same 
situation.  —  Let  integrity  and  uprightness],  personified  as  messen- 
gers of  God  sent  forth  to  deliver  His  people,  cf.  23°  43s. —  Yah- 
weh~\  concludes  as  well  as  begins  the  Ps.,  according  to  (0> ;  but  J£f 
omits  it,  and  so  loses  one  tone  from  the  measure.  —  22.  This  is 
a  liturgical  addition  by  a  late  editor,  as  3423.  —  O  God~\  is  charac- 
teristic of  !£  and  an  Elohistic  period  of  composition.  Yahweh 
was  this  psalmist's  God.  —  ransom  out  of  all  his  troubles'],  cf.  78^ 
1308.  —  Israel],  the  name  of  the  people  of  God,  cf.  147.  This 
final  petition  was  suited  for  the  congregation  in  worship  at  all 
times  j  it  generalises  the  Ps.,  which  was  based  upon  a  particular 
historical  experience. 

1-2.  tS*<]  emph.,  so  also  Mttel  as  the  seat  of  desire;  vq:  xz'i  lift  up  the 
soul,  in  desire,  nvn  ^n  864  1438 ;  Sk  rei  24k  Dt.  2415  Ho.  48  Pr.  1918.  The 
1.  is  defective,  lacking  two  words  to  make  up  the  hexameter  characteristic 
of  this  alphabetical  Ps.  One  of  these  is  ^nSy,  after  (@l ;  the  other  is  the 
superfluous  nros^x  of  next  1.,  which  a  prosaic  editor  has  attached  to  the 
juss.  that  follows,  bringing  the  two  together.  Then  1.  2  begins  with  its  letter, 
H3,  also  emph.,  and  has  its  right  measure,  ro  is  the  keyword  of  the  first 
tristich,  thrice  repeated  (v.  611),  this  poet  showing  a  liking  to  the  stairlike 
parallelism  {v.  Intr.  §  12  a).  —  'JVW3]  emph.  present  (v.  j6).  —  uSg  S']  Qal 
3  pi.  neg.  juss.  ~>n  should  be  ?ki  as  (@>  in  order  to  be  a  separate  word  with 
tone.  <3  also  has  KarayeXaa-druxxdv  /jlov,  JJ  irrideant  me,  i?vs*,  so  Che.  *S  is 
not  constructed  with  the  vb.,  which  elsw.  is  always  with  2,  but  with  the  noun, 
to  intensify  personal  reference.  —  3.  TP'Vr]  vb.  Qal  ptc.  pi.  sf.  2  m.  \  nip. 
t  Qal  ptc,  those  waiting  for  Yahweh  2j3  379  6c;7  Is.  4031  4923  La.  3'-15.  Pi. 
(i)  wait,  look  eagerly  for,  c.  ace.  rei  Ps.  39s  La.  216,  sq.  inf.  Ps.  6921  Is.  52-  4, 
c.  ace.  Yahweh  Ps.  2J5-21  402  1305;  ov  5211(?);  abs.  1305;  c.  L,s  Yahwel 
27U.H  3734  ts#  ^5#  (2)  Lie  in  wait  for,  c.  ace.  Ps.  567,  c.  S  pers.  11995. 
*?3  should  be  attached  by  Makkeph  to  01  and  not  to  following  ptc.  for  better 
euphony.  —  itfai  ns]  Qal.  impf.  3  pi.  indie,  with  neg.  K*7  is  not  suited  to  con- 


PSALM   XXV.  227 

text.  (3  had  juss.  with  Sn,  which  is  much  more  probable.  The  "?H  should  be 
attached  by  Makkeph  to  the  vb.  to  make  one  tone.  —  D**wan]  Qal  ptc.  pi., 
article  with  force  of  rel.  |  -U3,  vb.  Qal,  act  or  deal  treacherously,  ptc.  pi., 
2j3  ngi58  js#  212  2416  331  Je.  38- n  91  +  ;  px  HJ3  Ps.  59°,  abs.  78s",  c.  ace. 
pers.,  7315,  elsw.  c.  3  pers.  —  Dpn],  not  without  cause,  for  which  no  usage  can 
be  shown;   but  without  accomplishing  anything,  as  ?5;   cf.  2  S.  i22  Is.  5511.  — 

4.  TiPl]  emph.  Str.  -■,  pi.  sf.  2  m.  ?pT  ways  for  laws,  so  v.9  (v.  i1),  term 
of  D.  —  ^nms]  pi.  sf.  2  m.,  m*<  (v.  89),  paths  for  laws.  This  word  has  to 
bear  two  beats  in  the  measure,  therefore  it  should  be  preceded  by  \  as  <&.  — 
ij^g1^]  Pi.  imv.  sf.  1  p.  no1?  (v.  1835),  teach,  the  keyword  of  the  distich,  v.4-5. — 

5.  This  v.  is  overfull.  The  three  words  of  the  last  clause  are  suspicious.  Are 
they  a  gl.  or  part  of  the  missing  Str.  i  ?  If  with  <g  we  read  rp^m  we  might 
begin  with  ).  However  tempting  it  may  be  to  find  Str.  1  here,  yet  the  argu- 
ments against  it  are  irresistible.  The  last  clause  is  a  gl.  —  6.  "Vjr]  (v.  S5), 
the  keyword  of  the  distich,  v.6-7.  —  T£nn]  pi.  sf.  2  m.  J  cm,  n.m.  only  abst. 
intensive  pi.:  compassion,  (1)  usually  of  God  771J  79s  H977-153,  ||  non  23s 
4012  1034  Ho.  221  Je.  165;  phr.  -pern  a-o  Pss.  513  6917;  c.  ty  1459;  (2)  of  man 
10646.  —  T?.p£)]  Thy  deeds  of  kindness  (v.  4^) ,  pi.,  mostly  late  1 77  Sg2- 50  10743  La. 
3s2  Is.  637,  improb.  in  view  of  its  use  with  an  attribute  here  and  the  use  of  the  sg. 
in  parall.  1.;  rd.  ^idh.  It  has  been  assimilated  to  "pcm.  —  >r]  though  sustained 
by  (!I  8ti,  is  prob.  a  gl.  of  interpretation.  —  7.  *7>J?J  risen]  pi.  emph.,  phr. 
a.X.,  but  cf.  Jb.  I32G  Ez.  2321.  J  -n>*j,  n.m.,  only  pi.  abst.,  youth,  elsw.  1035 
I274,'js  7i6- 17 1291- 2,  from  youth  up,  cf.  'ja  14412.  —  '?^»]  pi-  sf.  I  sg.  (v.  ig1^). 
(3  has  dyvolas,  which  is  better  suited  to  context;  but  both  are  probably 
glosses,  as  are  also  the  words  that  follow  ^,  for  the  1.  is  just  so  much  overfull. 
nnN  is  not  in  <&,  3.  It  is  an  emph.  reference  to  Yahweh  in  connection  with 
the  imv.,  due  to  the  insertion  of  ^2V2  Jj?oS,  which  is  only  an  emph.  reiteration 
of  -pcro.  X  3V-°  n-m-  (0  i°°d  things,  coll.  as  given  by  Yahweh  2710  65°; 
(2)  abst.  prosperity  of  Jerusalem  1 28s,  goodness  of  taste  11966;  (3)  goodness 
of  God,  in  salvation  of  His  people  251  1457,  cf.  Is.  637;  stored  up  for  His 
saints  Ps.  3120.  —  8.  nw  ip>  aMo]  phr.,  a.X.  %^c,  adj.  (1)  good,  pleasant 
452  I331;  (2)  excellent  of  its  kind,  oil  1332;  (3)  appropriate,  becoming  7328 
922  1471;  (4)  c.  jr,  comp.  better  than  3716  634  8411  n88-9  11972;  (5)  well, 
prosperous  1125;  (6)  good,  understanding  in10,  as  2  Ch.  n10  Pr.  34+; 
(7)  benign,  of  God  865;  phr.  aw  »3  34s  1061  1071  118129  1353  1361  Je.  33n+  ; 
cf.  Ps.  ioo5;  c.  S  731  1459;  attribute  of  divine  Spirit  14310  =  Ne.  920,  of  divine 
name  Pss.  5211  54s,  of  divine  kindness  6917  10921;  (8)  good,  right,  ethically, 
{a)  of  man  1254,  the  way  365;  (b)  of  God  2j8  ii939-68.  nr  (v.  711),  13~hl 
(v.  /5).  —  O'H^n]  {v.  i1)  is  prob.  gl.,  as  the  1.  is  overfull  and  the  thought 
of  sinners  is  not  suited  to  the  context,  for  v.8  begins  the  second  heptastich 
of  the  poem  and  is  closely  related  not  to  v.7  but  to  v.9,  and  37.7  is  the  key- 
word of  the  tristich  ||  my,  v.  v.4.  — 9.  *n^]  Hiph.  juss.  form,  but  improb.  that 
it  has  juss.  mng.,  v.  v.5.  —  a«w]  v.  913.  —  »«jtfo}]  in  the  Law  of  the  type  of 
judgment;  usually  in  pi.  (v.  i5).  — 10.  ppjo  "«Dn]  phr.,  Gn.  24s7  (J)  Pss.4011-12 
574  618  8511  8615  8915  1151  1382  (v.  4I  /j^».'— Vnna  n«]  phr.,  elsw.  Dt.  33s, 


228  PSALMS 

usually  nna  IDtf  Pss.  7810  10318  13212.  J  nna,  n.f.  (1)  />w/y,  alliance,  league, 
of  nations  against  Israel  83s  Ho.  122  Ez.  1713-19-  (2)  alliance  of  friendship 
Ps.  55'21  1  S.  183  208  2318,  so  with  God  ||  niD  Ps.  2jU;  (3)  covenant,  (a)  with 
patriarchs  105s-10  Gn.  1518  (J)  I72-21(P),  (b)  with  Israel  at  Horeb  Pss.  2s10 
4418  50s- 16  7420(?)  7810-37  10318  10645  in5-9,  0)  with  David  89*.  29.  85. 40 
13212;  cf.  2  S.  7  =  1  Ch.  17  Je.  3321.  —  wn;?i]  makes  1.  overfull  and  is  a  late 
gl. :  a  late  term  characteristic  of  P,  and  found  only  in  writers  subsequent  to 
P  (v.  i<f).  — 11.  nDBf-fgpS]  emph.,  as  23*  314  79s  1068  10921  14311.  —  nrrSo>] 
l  consec.  pf.  carrying  on  juss.  implicit  in  previous  clause.  %  n^D>  VD-»  pardon 
(syn.  of  Ht'i  forgive),  Qal,  c.  i  of  sin  2311  1033  Ex.  34s  Nu.  1419  (J)  Je.  3134 
338  308.  —  *T>]  ^«  /^-  This  1.  was  probably  a  later  substitution  for  an  earlier 
1.  that  has  been  thrown  out.  It  lacks  the  catchword.  — 12.  nt  *d]  ?</^,  /^« 
(v.  24s)  should  be  connected  by  Makkeph.  —  B^Kri]  (v.  4s)  is  unnecessary. 
The  1.  is  more  euphonic  without  it.  —  U"Y"]  Hiph.  impf.  3  m.  strong  sf.  3  s. 
•ij_  for  in_.  There  is  word  play  here  with  previous  nv.  —  "via?]  Qal  impf. 
i.p.  rel.  clause,  without  rel.  J  VD,  vb.,  Qal  choose:  (1)  c.  3,  divine  choice, 
Aaron  10526,  not  Ephraim  78c7,  espec.  David  78™,  Zion  13213;  (2)  rel.  clause, 
subj.  God  2512  3312  65s;  (3)  c.  ace.  and  %  choose  something  or  some  one  for, 
divine  choice  47s  1354;  (4)  c.  ace.  divine  choice  78c8,  human  choice  8411 
H9S0. 73.  (5)  ptc>  -,in2,  chosen,  of  ruler  8920;  cf.  ^N-\ty  nwa  7831  =  1  S.  262.  — 
13.  3>B3]  in  prosperity  Jb.  2113  3611  Ec.  714  (z/.  47). —  pSn]  vb.,  Qal  future.  J  pS, 
vb.,  Qal,  lodge,  dwell  306  5916<?);  c.  3  2j13  55s;  abs.  continue,  endure  4913. 
Hithp.,  </zf<?//,  a£t<&,  c.  2  of  man  911,  of  eagle  Jb.  3928.  —  Bh^]  Qal  impf. 
\  Bh%  vb.,  Qal,  (1)  ta^  possession  of  as  an  inheritance,  usually  Israel  subj., 
c.  ace.  the  land  of  Canaan  2313  378. 11. 22.  ».  a*  444,  cf.  10544;  enemies,  subj. 
8313;  (2)  dwell  and  inherit  69^.  Hiph.,  dispossess  44s.  — 14.  Jtd]  n. 
(1)  council,  of  a  divan,  in  bad  sense  64s,  good  sense  Jb.  158  1919;  assembly, 
of  angels  Ps.  89s;  (2)  counsel,  intimate  friendship,  of  men  5516  in7,  with 
God  2jU  Pr.  332  Jb.  294,  in  bad  sense  of  crafty  plotting  Ps.  834.  @  tid*1  is 
misinterpretation.  @  has  a  parall.  clause,  kolI  rb  6vo/xa  Kvpiov  tQv  (pofiovixtvwv 
avrbv,  which  might  be  regarded  as  a  variant ;  but  a  word  is  missing  from  1., 
and  it  is  probable  that  the  clue  to  it  is  given  in  6vofia  =  QV;  then  we  should 
rd.  >Dtf  »jn*S,  the  l  in  vn-p  bejng  dittog.  from  tnnai;  cf.  616  8611  10216. — 
15.  ,r>]  c.  ",-L,n,  as  1232  antith.  to  "»Sr\  —  *s]  not  causal  for,  as  usual,  but 
final  that,  as  85,  as  the  subsequent  context  requires.  —  nnc]  is  doubtless  a 
gl.,  making  1.  too  long.  It  is  not  suggested  by  the  context.  —  16.  nj9]  Qal 
imv.  X  ™->  vb-»  QaU  *«>*»»  (1)  of  days  of  life  909;  ipan  nuflS  a/  ///<?  /«r«  0///^ 
morning  46s  Ex.  1427  Ju.  1926;  (2)  /«r«  and  look,  c.  Vn,  man,  subj.  Ps.  406; 
Yahweh,  subj.  6917;  *janj  »Sh  njp,  the  two  imvs.  with  1  coord,  ^j26  8616  119182; 
nSon  Sn  10218  1  K.  828  =  2  Ch.  619.  Pi.,  turn  away,  put  away  8010  (?).— 
n^n>]  adj.,  solitary,  as  687  14110  (<S)  {v.  2221);  w  (z/.  913).  — 17.  n'nx]  emph. 
v.22  (v.  2d2),  not  elsw.  connected  with  33S  as  the  seat  of  anxiety  and  trouble 
(v.  4P).  This  clause  is  not  the  obj.  of  vb.  o^nnn.  Hiph.  pf.  3  m.  indef.  subj., 
and  so  passive,  they  have  enlarged,  increased,  for  the  vb.  is  not  elsw.  in  this 
sense,  but  only  in  the  sense  of  increase  extent,  make  more  room,  and  so  in  the 


PSALM   XXVI.  229 

sense  of  deliverance  from  troubles  (v.  42).  The  1  should  go  with  the  next 
word,  and  then  the  form  is  Hiph.  imv.  ||  soxin,  and  so  make  room,  as  Lowth, 
Horsley.  The  previous  clause  is  then  ace.  abs.,  as  for,  as  regards  the  troubles. 
—  *nip«sc],  JD  prep,  out  of  with  f  pijttcc,  n.f.  straitness,  straits  2317  I076- 13- 19- 28 
Jb.  1524  Zp.  I15.  —  18.  rmn]  at  the  beginning  of  1.  where  we  would  expect  p 
is  suspicious,  especially  as  it  is  repeated  v.19.  It  was  either  an  intentional 
change  of  editor  or  txt.  err.  Various  suggestions  have  been  made  as  to  the 
initial  word  of  Str.  p,  so  Dip  Du.,  29p  Che.,  *wp  Houb.,  Kenn.,  Horsley;  but 
the  easiest  and  most  suitable  is  nN-\p,  cohort,  imv.  J  Nip,  vb.,  Qal  meet : 
(1)  in  hostility  35s,  (2)  in  helpfulness  59s;  so  prob.  here.  —  Mfen]  1  coord.  Qal 
imv.  sirj  forgive,  syn.,  n^D  pardon  v.11.  The  1.  lacks  the  catchword  so  charac- 
teristic of  the  Ps.,  and  it  is  probably  a  later  substitution  for  a  1.  that  has  been 
thrown  out.  —  nwan]  n.f.  in  \p  alw.  sin  against  God  v.7  32s  38*- 19  515  59*, 
of  the  mouth  5913;  ace.  after  hv:  32s,  nno  Ps.  10914  Is.  44s2  Je.  1823,  hdo 
Ps.  85*,  with  prep.  TiS  X9i  2j18,  n  Sy  -123  Ps.  79°,  tid  nno  514.  rtrj  is  not  used 
in  this  sense  in  D,  P,  Je.,  Is.2,  La.,  Ch.,  and  is  therefore  either  before  D  or  else 
later  than  P.  — 19.  Den  nxptr*]  phr.  a.X.,  but  J  riKifc  n.f.,  hatred  2519  109s-5 
13922.  —  20.  *rn5n]  Qal  pf.  1  p.s.  emph.  present,  retracted  accent  because  of 
following  monosyllable  {v.  212).  —  21.  nc"i  oh]  phr.  a.X.,  personified  qualities. 
ah  (v.  79).  X  n^1  n.m.,  straightness,  Tightness,  right,  elsw.  aaS  "Vtfr  1197  Dt.95 
1  Ch.  2917. —  ",|i~i^]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  sf.  juss.,  nxj.  But  this  prob.  an  err.  for 
the  catchword  ^v,  txt.  err.  n  for  S  in  Egyptian  Aram,  script.  —  T?v}p]  Pi-  pf- 
1  s.  sf.  2  m.  emph.  present  (v.  v.3).  ©  has  nm>  omitted  by  H,  but  necessary 
to  the  measure.  —  22.  179]  Qal  imv.  %  PH9  vb.,  Qal  ransom  from  violence 
and  death,  man  subj.  49s  I  S.  1445;  God  subj.,  from  enemies  and  troubles 
Pss.  2s22  2611  316  3423  4427  5519  6919  7123  7842  119134,  from  Sheol  4916,  from 
iniquities  1308.  This  is  a  liturgical  appendix.  The  Ps.  has  come  to  an  end 
with  Str.  n.  Str.  1  was  omitted  by  design,  and  therefore  there  was  no  reason 
to  complete  the  alphabetical  number  of  lines.  Ps.  34  has  the  same  situation. 
otiSn  is  not  the  divine  name  of  the  Ps.,  but  of  a  later  editor. 


PSALM   XXVI.,  4  str.  43. 

Ps.  26  is  a  profession  of  integrity  by  a  Levite,  engaged  in  wor- 
shipping Yahweh  in  the  temple  choir.  ( 1 )  He  professes  integrity 
in  walk,  and  unwavering  trust  in  Yahweh,  as  attested  by  Yahweh 
Himself  (v.12).  (2)  Ever  conscious  of  the  divine  kindness  and 
faithfulness,  he  abstains  from  all  association  with  the  wicked  (v.3^). 
(3)  He  hates  the  company  of  the  wicked  and  purifies  himself  for 
sacrifice  (v.5-6).  (4)  He  loves  the  temple  (v.8),  and  stands  in 
its  choir  blessing  Yahweh  (v.12).  A  later  editor  by  additions 
and  changes  introduces  the  elements  of  prayer  (v.la' iW1)  and  wor- 
ship (v.7). 


230  PSALMS 

T  HAVE  walked  in  mine  integrity; 

In  Yahweh  I  have  trusted  without  wavering. 

Yahweh  hath  tested  me  and  proved  me ; 

Tried  out  are  my  reins  and  my  mind. 
"V"EA,  Thy  kindness  is  before  mine  eyes; 

And  I  walk  in  Thy  faithfulness. 

I  do  not  sit  down  with  worthless  men ; 

And  with  dissemblers  I  will  not  come. 
T  HATE  the  assembly  of  evildoers, 

And  with  the  wicked  I  will  not  sit  down. 

I  will  wash  my  hands  in  innocency, 

And  I  will  march  around  Thine  altar,  Yahweh. 
J  LOVE  the  habitation  of  Thine  house, 

And  the  place  of  the  tabernacle  of  Thy  glory. 

My  foot  doth  stand  in  the  level  place, 

And  in  the  choirs  I  bless  Yahweh. 

The  title  has  only  inS,  as  the  entire  group  25-28.  This  Ps.  was  not  taken 
up  into  £H,  QH,  or  3E.  It  was,  in  its  original  form,  not  appropriate  for  wor- 
ship in  the  synagogue,  for  it  was  a  profession  of  right  conduct  from  an  ethical 
point  of  view,  as  required  by  Pss.  15,  24s-6,  rather  than  from  the  legal  of  Ps.  I, 
which  in  other  respects  it  resembles  in  v.4-5  by  repudiation  of  any  association 
with  the  wicked.  D^«h  v.5  are  not  wicked  nations,  but  wicked  Israelites 
JOB^DD,  dtS;*:  v.4;  D^jno  ?np  v.5,  whom  the  author  is  only  anxious  to  avoid. 
The  cs-jn,  cm  >^jn  v.9,  with  their  nsr  and  tfltf  v.10,  are  of  an  entirely  different 
type,  who  are  in  deadly  hostility.  These  terms  represent  a  different  situation 
and  come  from  a  later  editor.  The  author  of  the  Ps.  is  in  no  other  peril  than 
that  of  ethical  contamination.  Therefore  he  purifies  himself  by  Levitical 
purifications  for  participation  in  the  service  of  the  altar  v.6,  and  worship  in 
the  temple  choir  v1-.  "n#>D  v.12  is  probably  the  level  place  of  the  court  before 
the  temple  where  the  choir  took  its  stand.  The  D^SnpB,  elsw.  only  6827,  might 
mean  assemblies  but  more  probably  choirs.  This  ethical  and  religious  situa- 
tion in  times  of  peace  and  prosperity  is  best  suited  to  the  middle  Persian 
period,  before  Hebrew  Wisdom  had  become  the  mould  for  Hebrew  ethics. 
This  profession  of  integrity  is  not  so  inappropriate  as  many  moderns  think. 
It  is  not  self-righteousness.  It  is  not  so  much  self-conscious,  as  conscious  of 
the  divine  presence  and  the  requirements  that  invoke  it.  It  is  the  ethical 
answer  to  the  requirements  of  Pss.  15,  24s-6,  Is.  3314-16.  It  reminds  us  also  of 
Dt.  261-11  on  the  one  side  and  of  Jb.  31  on  the  other.  The  language  of  the 
Ps.  has  no  other  special  features  than  those  mentioned  above.  The  Ps.  is  a 
trimeter.  The  first  line  has  prefixed  a  petition  which  makes  the  line  too  long, 
or,  if  regarded  as  an  abbreviated  line,  makes  the  Str.  too  long.  It  is  an 
editorial  change  in  order  to  begin  with  a  petition.  It  is  also  probable  that 
original  perfects  v.'2  as  implied  by  the  Kt.  now,  have  been  changed  by 
pointing  as  imv.  for  the  same  reason.  V.7,  for  similar  reasons,  introduces 
praise,  and  v.9-11  urges  petition  again,  all  of  which  make  the  Ps.  more  suited 
to  public  worship  in  the  synagogue,  and  so  later  in  the  church;   but  spoil  the 


PSALM   XXVI.  231 

simplicity  and  symmetry  of  the  original,  which  was  two  pairs  of  trimeter 
tetrastichs. 

Str.  I.  la.  Judge  me,  Yahweh],  This  in  the  present  context 
must  be  interpreted  in  the  sense  of  vindication.  But  it  is  difficult 
to  see  in  what  respect  vindication  was  needed.  The  context 
shows  that  the  psalmist  was  assured  of  his  integrity,  and  all  that 
he  really  needed  was  divine  recognition  and  acceptance  in  wor- 
ship. This  petition  is  not  in  harmony  with  the  context ;  but  it  is 
an  appropriate  one  in  liturgical  worship,  where  various  emotions 
of  the  congregation  mingle  together,  and  logical  consistency  is  the 
last  thing  that  is  thought  of.  It  is  an  editorial  gloss.  The  first 
half  of  the  Ps.  is  composed  of  two  trimeter  tetrastichs,  as  Str.  and 
Antistr.,  each  composed  of  two  syn.  couplets.  —  \b.  I  have 
walked],  the  course  of  life,  conduct.  This  has  been  in  mine  in- 
tegrity^, in  entire  accord  with  ethical  requirements,  complete  and 
perfect ;  not  in  the  absolute  sense,  but  in  the  plain,  popular  sense 
that,  so  far  as  he  knew,  he  was  unconscious  of  any  wickedness  in 
his  conduct.  This  he  asserts  as  a  fact,  professes  it  in  the  presence 
of  his  God.  He  makes  not  a  profession  of  faith,  but  a  profession 
of  morals,  as  Job  31.  The  ancient  Hebrew  was  not  a  philosopher 
and  had  no  thought  of  speculative  ethics.  The  editor  is  obliged 
to  introduce  this  by  "  for "  and  make  it  a  reason  for  the  plea  for 
vindication;  but  the  connection  is  remote.  —  In  Yahweh  I  have 
trusted],  inner  disposition,  as  parallel  with  outward  conduct;  the 
God-ward  attitude  of  soul,  corresponding  with  the  man-ward 
attitude  of  body,  faith  and  works  united  in  one.  —  without  waver- 
ing'], steady,  unshaken,  uninterrupted  was  his  communion  with 
Yahweh,  in  faith,  as  the  counterpart  of  the  integrity,  completeness 
of  conduct.  The  faith  and  the  works  were  both  alike  complete, 
entire,  unimpeachable. — 2.  Yahweh  hath  tested  me],  with  its 
complement,  proved  me,  and  its  parallel,  tried  out,  as  by  the  re- 
fining of  metals,  v.  1 73.  A  most  searching  examination  has  been 
made  by  Yahweh  Himself,  and  that  has  been  complete,  for  it  has 
extended  to  my  reins  and  my  mind],  v.  710  Je  n20  1710  2012,  the 
seat  of  emotions  and  passions  as  well  as  the  seat  of  the  intellectual 
and  moral  nature.  The  profession  of  faith  and  morals  therefore 
rests  upon  the  divine  examination  and  approval.  This  assertion  of 
fact  did  not  suit  the  requirements  of  a  later  worship,  and  therefore 


232  rSALMS 

probably  the  Ps.  was  left  out  of  the  collection  made  by  I33i£  and 
32.  But  by  changing  the  pfs.  of  the  vb.  to  the  imvs.  "  test  me 
||  prove  me  ||  try  out,"  especially  when  introduced  by  "judge  me," 
the  Ps.  was  made  more  suited  to  the  worship  of  the  synagogue  and 
so  also  for  the  Christian  congregation. 

Str.  II.  3.  Yea],  if  our  interpretation  of  the  foregoing  is  correct ; 
but  doubtless  the  editor  interpreted  it  as  "for"  in  accordance 
with  v.16  which  it  resumes  ;  so  all  Vrss.  —  Thy  kindness],  as  usual 
parallel  with  Thy  faithfulness ;  the  former  in  accordance  with  the 
trust  of  v.lc,  although  it  is  before  ?nine  eyes;  the  latter  in  accordance 
with  the  walk,  which  is  indeed  expressed  in  this  clause.  This 
latter  is  not  a  qualification  of  the  psalmist,  or  of  the  way  in  which 
he  walks, and  so  to  be  rendered  "Thy  truth  "  as  EV\  because  this 
Hebrew  word  seldom  has  the  meaning  of  "  truth,"  and  never  when 
it  is  connected  with  the  divine  kindness.  The  "  faithfulness  "  is 
syn.  with  the  "  kindness,"  both  of  which  divine  attributes  as 
present  with  him,  before  the  eyes  of  his  mind,  enable  him  to  walk 
in  his  integrity. — 4.  /  do  not  sit  down  with~\.  In  this  and  the 
syn.  line,  so  also  in  v.5,  the  poet  repudiates  any  association  whatever 
with  the  wicked.  This  reminds  us  of  Ps.  i1,  where  walking,  standing, 
and  sitting  down  with  the  wicked  are  repudiated.  Here  only  two 
of  these  actions  are  mentioned.  The  action  of  sitting  down  with, 
is  greatly  emphasised  here  because  it  is  repeated  in  v.*,  as  indeed 
it  is  the  climax  of  the  actions  in  Ps.  i1.  Such  a  sitting  down  with 
them  would  imply  prolonged  association  and  greater  intimacy 
and  responsibility  for  companionship,  than  walking  with  them  or 
standing  with  them.  —  /  will  not  come  with],  that  is,  be  seen 
approaching  in  company  with.  The  vb.  has  been  intentionally 
changed  from  that  of  v.1636  and  implies  a  movement  the  reverse 
of  going  ;  therefore  it  is  improbable  that  it  should  have  the  specific 
meaning  "  go  in  "  of  EV8.  implying  entrance  to  a  house  or  assembly, 
which  is  awkward  without  designation  of  place.  —  worthless  men~], 
men  whose  speech  and  conduct  is  empty,  false ;  their  speech  and 
professions  empty  of  reality ;  with  nothing  in  them  that  is  reliable  ; 
and  so  parallel  with  dissemblers,  those  who  conceal  their  thoughts 
so  that  they  may  appear  differently  from  what  they  are. 

Str.  III.  The  second  part  of  the  Ps.  is  composed  of  two  tri- 
meter tetrastichs,  Str.  and  Antistr.,  contrasting  what  the  psalmist 


PSALM   XXVI.  233 

loves  and  hates,  the  first  couplet  of  each  syn.,  the  second  couplet 
of  each  synth.  —  5.7  hale],  in  antithesis  with  "  I  love  "  v.8.  The 
object  of  the  former  is  the  assembly,  or  congregation  of  evildoers 
||  wicked,  more  general  and  positive  terms  for  those  of  v.4 ;  the 
object  of  the  latter  is  the  assembly  of  the  worshippers  of  Yahweh 
in  the  temple  choir,  although  that  is  not  brought  out  distinctly 
until  the  closing  line  of  the  Str.  —  6.  I  will  wash  my  hands'], 
doubtless  referring  to  the  ceremonial  purifications  prescribed  by 
the  Law  for  those  who  were  to  serve  in  the  temple  worship ;  the 
use  of  pure,  running  water  from  the  sacred  lavers  of  the  temple 
courts.  This  washing  was  not  made  symbolical  by  the  use  of  the 
ethical  term,  in  innocency,  which  recurs  to  the  integrity  of  v.15 ; 
but  in  order  to  show  that  the  external  ceremonial  purification  was 
only  expressive  of  an  internal  purity  of  mind,  as  indeed  the  Law 
and  the  Prophets  require.  —  And  I  will  ?narch  around  Thine  altar], 
in  festal  procession,  with  music  and  song,  while  the  sacrifice  was 
being  made  by  the  priests.  There  is  no  good  reason  to  doubt 
this  ceremonial  among  the  Hebrews,  although  the  direct  evidence 
for  it  is  slight.  But  there  are  many  indirect  references,  cf.  42* 
11827  1  S.  1611  3016;  and  the  usual  meaning  of  the  Hebrew  word 
favours  this  interpretation,  as  well  as  the  reference  to  choirs  v.12. 
There  is  still  less  justification,  from  anything  we  know  of  Hebrew 
customs  at  sacrifice,  to  interpret  it  of  the  psalmist's  taking  his 
place  in  the  ring  of  worshippers  around  the  altar. 
7.   This  v.  is  a  couplet  of  gloss. 

To  cause  the  sound  of  thanksgiving  to  be  heard 
And  to  tell  of  all  Thy  wondrous  deeds. 

This  couplet  is  attached  to  v.6  as  an  explanation  of  the  march 
about  the  altar,  to  show  that  it  was  accompanied  with  song  and 
music.  The  contents  of  the  song  were  thanksgiving  and  praise ; 
thanksgiving,  sounding  forth  from  human  voices  and  musical  in- 
struments so  as  to  be  heard  far  and  near.  The  wondrous  deeds  of 
Yahweh,  especially  in  the  redemption  of  His  people,  are  what  these 
Pss.  of  praise  commonly  tell.  This  addition  is  quite  appropriate 
and  in  accordance  with  v.12 ;  but  it  is  hung  on  to  v.6  by  an  infinitive, 
so  that  it  must  go  with  v.5-6.  It  makes  the  Str.  just  these  lines  too 
long,  as  compared  with  other  Strs. ;  and  it  is  also  overfull  in  state- 


234  PSALMS 

ment  as  compared  with  the  simplicity  of  thought  and  expression 
of  the  previous  context.  The  motive  of  the  addition  was  evidently 
to  introduce  the  missing  element  of  praise  to  Yahweh,  and  so 
make  the  Ps.  more  appropriate  for  public  worship. 

Str.  IV.  8.  /  love  the  habitation  of  Thi?ie  house],  that  is,  the 
divine  abode  itself  in  the  temple,  the  Debir  or  Holy  of  Holies, 
behind  the  curtain  of  which  Yahweh  was  conceived  as  in  resi- 
dence ;  and  so  syn.  with  place  of  the  tabernacle  of  Thy  glory].  The 
glory  of  the  divine  presence  was  centred  there. 

A  late  editor  inserts  a  hexastich  gloss  — 

Gather  not  my  soul  with  sinners, 
Or  with  men  of  blood  my  life; 
In  whose  hands  is  an  evil  device, 
And  whose  right  hand  is  full  of  bribery. 
Since  I  in  mine  integrity  walk, 
Redeem  me  and  be  gracious  to  me,  (Yahweh). 

This  hexastich  is  composed  of  a  tetrastich  of  two  syn.  couplets, 
the  latter  synth.  to  the  first,  followed  by  an  antith.  synth.  couplet. 
This  is  also  a  gloss  introduced  for  the  purpose  of  making  the  Ps. 
more  appropriate  for  public  prayer.  —  9.  Gather  not'],  as  the 
context  shows  in  order  to  take  away  the  soul  in  death  ||  life, 
cf.  10429,  antith.  v.116  Redeem  me,  and  its  complement,  be  gracious 
to  me.  Yahweh  is  needed  here  for  the  measure,  unless  we  are  to 
regard  v.11  as  a  pentameter  appended  still  later  than  v.9"10,  without 
regard  to  the  measure  of  the  previous  or  subsequent  context. — 
With  sinners  ||  men  of  blood],  violent  men  who  shrink  not  from 
bloodshed,  implying  a  different  set  of  men  from  the  false  and  dis- 
sembling of  v.4  — 10.  In  whose  hand]  emphasised  in  the  parallel 
right  hand,  as  stretched  out  to  give  an  evil  device,  or  plan.  In  the 
hand  it  is  something  tangible,  defined  by  full  of  bribery,  a  gift  of 
money,  or  jewels,  or  something  valuable,  to  purchase  immunity 
from  crime.  These  are  probably  criminals  who  bribe,  and  not 
judges  or  rulers  accepting  bribes.  — 11.  Since  I  in  mine  integrity 
walk],  a  repetition  of  v.16  in  order  to  get  an  antith.  with  the  blood- 
thirsty men,  as  a  basis  for  the  final  plea  for  redemption.  The 
construction  is,  however,  changed  from  the  perfect  to  the  imper- 
fect of  the  habit  of  life,  and  the  whole  is  put  in  a  circumstantial 
clause. 


PSALM   XXVI.  235 

12.  My  foot  doth  stand  in  the  level  place"].  This  couplet  is 
closely  associated  with  v.8  as  its  complement,  although  separated 
by  the  intervening  gloss.  The  psalmist  is  standing  on  his  feet 
in  the  levelled  place  of  the  court,  where  the  sacrifices  were  made 
at  the  divine  altar.  —  A?id  in  the  choirs'],  the  group  of  singers, 
who  unite  in  the  chorus  of  the  benediction.  This  is  more  probable 
than  assembly  of  worshippers  in  general,  especially  as  /  will  bless 
Yahweh  is  not  merely  an  attitude  of  the  soul  in  worship,  but 
doubtless  refers  to  the  benedictions  as  sung.  These  benedictions 
were  sung  in  full  chorus  at  the  close  of  every  Ps.  or  liturgical 
selection  (v.  Intr.  §  40).  We  may  either  think  of  them  or  of  the 
entire  liturgy  as  sung  by  the  choir. 

1.  wpSn  ^na  ox]  ox  emph.;  vp^a  also  emph.  (v.  y9).  V.11  has  ^M, 
otherwise  the  clause  is  the  same.  The  1.  is  too  long.  Du.  thinks  this  v.  has 
been  assimilated  to  v.11,  and  therefore  rds.  \jN~an  mrp  »jBDtf.  But  the 
parall.  1.  requires  iroSn  "»DP3  •on,  and  therefore  o  1  >JQDVt  is  the  gl.  —  nino] 
emph.,  antith.  ox.  —  "^BN  x1*]  not  future  of  independent  clause,  but  circum- 
stantial, without  slipping,  shaking,  wavering.  —  2.  or 3]  Pi.  imv.  %  [<~idj] 
vb.  only  Pi.  test,  prove:  (a)  God  subj.  26*  Dt.  33s  Ex.  1525  +;  f  (b)  Israel 
tests,  tries,  God  Pss.  7818-41-5o  95s  10614  Ex.  if-'  Nu.  1422  (J)  Dt.  616,  so 
Ahaz  Is.  71'2.  ||  njnx]  Qr.  Qal  imv.  cohort,  of  *px  (v.  127  173),  Kt.  nw*W  Qal 
ptc,  prob.  implies  an  original  txt.  in  which  previous  vbs.  were  pfs.  — *aVl  »n^S?] 
v.  710  Je.  1120  17W  2012.  — 3.  :|p9H3  tjgiafonrn]  cf.  25s  8611,  1  coord'.;'  Hithp. 
pf.  1  p.  of  T]S-i,  as  v.1.  <3  ev-qptvT-qaa  is  prob.  paraphrase.  —  4.  KlB^rjD]  cf. 
Jb.  II11,  men  of  emptiness  of  speech,  falsehood ;  worthless  men.  —  D^EHJtt]  Niph. 
ptc.  pi.  a.X.,  those  who  conceal  themselves  or  their  thoughts,  dissemblers.  — 
xox]  Qal  future,  not  go,  for  which  there  is  no  certain  usage,  but  come.  The 
rendering  of  EV8.  go  in,  though  possible,  is  without  example  apart  from  desig- 
nation of  place,  and  to  have  force  should  be  emphasised  by  some  such 
particle  as  21  v.  14.3.  —  5.  D^JPD  *?np]  phr.  a.X.,  assembly  of  evildoers,  cf.  T  my 
2217,  'C  T>D  64s.  For  Snp  v.  2223,  D^JHD  Hiph.  ptc.  of  Jfjn  v.  2217.  — 
6-  $2  V^)}  frnnj  =  7313,  of  purification  before  sacrifice.  J  fm  Qal  wash, 
elsw.  \p  5811  (feet  with  blood  in  vengeance).  J  fwp j  n.[m.]  innocency,  in  \f/ 
only  in  this  phr.,  cf.  Gn.  205  (RJE).  —  ^q3?p-nH  naaD«]  march  about  in 
solemn  procession,  cf.  1  S.  1611.  %  riDtp  n.m.  altar,  as  place  of  sacrifice,  elsw. 
43*  5 121  84*  11827.  — 7.  £DE»S]  Hiph.  inf.  cstr.,  defectively  written  for  jnctfnS 
=  to  cause  to  be  heard,  the  song  of  thanksgiving;  here  gerundive,  but  then  the 
Str.  must  be  six  lines.  Du.  proposes  to  transpose  v.7  with  v.8,  and  then 
inf.  becomes  dependent  on  \-anx.  This  seems  necessary  because  of  the 
antith.  of  3HN  and  x:t\  But  it  looks  like  an  expansive  gl.  We  would,  how- 
ever, expect  Sip,  as  668.  Slpa  is  elsw.  connected  with  Qal,  and  it  may  be  that 
was  the  original  txt.  as  interpreted  by  <g.     3  interprets  as  Hiph.,  and  Sipa 


2  $6  rSALMS 

as  clara  voce.  — \  fTfifi]  n.f. :  (1)  thanksgiving  in  song,  Ti  iy>  2&  42s  Jon.  210, 
||  •vir  Ps.  6931,  nnnr  9512,  nSin  ioo4,  nu?  1477;  (2)  thankoffering  mm  corar 
10722  11617,  mm1?  ioo1  (title),  min  nar  5o14-  -3,  ti  c^ir  5613. —  r^rYiK^-Sa  ^?ds] 
contents  of  rnin  sung  by  procession,  as  o2  73'-8  752.  —  8.  mn>]  gl.,  makes  1.  too 
long,  due  to  the  insertion  or  transposition  of  the  previous  distich.  —  %  ppo] 
n.[m.]  dwelling,  of  1  in  heaven,  thp  'D  686  Dt.  2615  Je.  2530  Zc.  217 ;  in  the 
temple,  n*a  T3  Ps.  ^6*;  usually  718  901  91°  are  interpreted  fig.  of  1  as  the 
abode  of  His  people,  but  all  dub.  <J5  evirpiireiav  =  d>j,  error  of  transposition 
of  original  \jns. —  Tls*3  ]--^1  Thy  glorious  tabernacle,  poetic  for  temple. 
Jp#D  n.m.  dwelling-place,  tabernacle,  of  P,  not  used  in  f ;  of  Shilo  7860; 
elsw.  (a)  of  temple  in  a  more  general  sense  as  dwelling-place  of"1;  in  sg. 
rpiaa  *D  .26s,  qou;  td  747,  cf.  46s;  (b)  pi.  nuaBte,  used  of  tabernacles  of  Israel 
78s8  87s;  of  the  tomb  4912  (cf.  sg.  Is.  22lc);  of  divine  residence  in  Zion 
I325-7;  holy  mountain  43s;  courts  of  temple  84s.  —  9.  onyi  ^jk]  elsw.  55s4 
593  I3919  Pr.  2910,  cf.  D*»DT  B^K  57.  — 10.  nu;N]  rel.,  referring  back  to  men  of 
blood,  defined  by  Dn^a.  V.9-10  are  a  late  gl.  — 11.  A  repetition  of  v.la. — 
*JNi]  1  circumstantial  since,  or  in  that,  seeing  that. — n^x]  Qal  freq.,  antith. 
to  actions  of  men  of  blood.  —  *}im  *pjf\  both  Qal  imv.  1  coord.  The  1.  is 
defective  in  the  midst  of  trimeters.  Supply  nvv  unless  it  be  a  gl.,  and 
possibly  even  then.  This  1.  may  have  been  added  subsequently  to  v.9-10,  and 
so  have  been  really  pentameter.  —  12.    »Sn]  emph.  subj.  vb.  —  n*»Dtf]  Qal  pf. 

3  f.,  c.  3  loci  as  usual,  take  one's  stand,  cf.  rnaa  1341  1352.  —  f  ^•:;>>:]  n.m.: 
f  (1)  a  level  place  2612  2711  14310,  prob.  also  687  (for  nntha);  f  (2)  abstr., 
uprightness  457  67s  Is.  n4  Mai.  26;  (3)  the  prose  mng.,  level  country,  not  in 
\f/.  —  f  D^Snpo]  n.[m.]  pi.  2612  =  6827,  either  choirs  or  assemblies  for  worship. 
—  "H™]  Pi*  impf.  I  sg.  i~\D  (v.  513).  This  distich  seems  to  be  the  comple- 
ment of  v.8. 

PSALM   XXVII. 

Ps.  27  is  composite.  (1)  A  guest  Ps.  expresses  confidence  in 
Yahweh  in  time  of  war  (v.1-3),  and  in  the  security  afforded  by 
the  temple  to  worshippers  (v.4-6).  (2)  An  anxious  petition  urges 
Yahweh  to  answer  prayer  (v.78),  not  to  forsake  His  servant 
(v.9),  but  to  give  instruction  and  deliverance  (v.1112).  (3)  Glosses 
adapt  the  Ps.  for  congregational  worship  (v.10 -126-13-14). 

A.    V.1_fi,    2    STR.    65. 

YAHWEH,  my  light  and  my  salvation,  of  whom  shall  I  be  afraid  ? 
Yahweh,  the  refuge  of  my  life,  of  whom  shall  I  be  in  dread  ? 
When  evildoers  drew  near  against  me  to  eat  up  my  flesh, 
Those  who  were  mine  adversaries  and  enemies  to  me,  stumbled  and  they  fell. 
Though  a  camp  encamp  against  me,  my  heart  will  not  be  afraid ; 
Though  battle  rise  up  against  me,  I  shall  be  trusting. 


PSALM   XXVII.  237 

QNE  thing  I  ask  from  Yahweh,  that  will  I  seek  after; 

To  gaze  on  the  loveliness  of  Yahweh  (in  the  morning)  in  His  temple. 

For  He  will  conceal  me  in  His  covert  in  the  day  of  distress ; 

Hide  me  in  the  hiding-place  of  His  tent,  (in  straits)  lift  me  up. 

Now  therefore  He  will  lift  up  mine  head  above  mine  enemies  round  about  me; 

And  I  will  sacrifice  in  His  tent  sacrifices  of  shouting  to  Yahweh. 

B.    v.7"911"12,    3    STR.    43. 

T-JEAR,  Yahweh,  my  voice. 

I  call,  therefore  be  gracious  to  me  and  answer  me. 

To  Thee  said  my  heart : 

"  Thy  face,  Yahweh,  (do)  /  seek." 
T-TIDE  not  Thy  face  from  me ; 

Turn  not  in  anger  (against  me) . 

My  help,  abandon  me  not; 

Forsake  me  not,  my  salvation. 
TN  Thy  Way  instruct  me, 

In  an  even  path  lead  me; 

Give  me  not  over  to  the  greed  of  mine  adversary, 

He  that  breatheth  out  violence  to  me. 

Ps.  27  was  in  JB.  There  is  nothing  else  in  the  title  of  f^,  but  <S 
has  in  addition  irpb  rod  xPLa'^Vvai  ^  priusquam  liniretur.  Jerome  in 
his  Commentary  has  antequam  ungueretur ;  but  says  that  it  was  not  in 
|$  and  omits  it  from  3.  Since  Kenn.  the  Ps.  has  been  generally  regarded 
as  composite,  the  second  Ps.  beginning  v.7.  So  Horsley,  Che.,  Kirk., 
Dy.,  Ew.,  Ols.,  Reu.,  De.,  al.  As  De.  says :  "  Aber  auch  iibrigens  sind  die 
zwei  Halften  einander  sehr  unahnlich.  Sie  bilden  ein  Hysteronproteron, 
idem  die  fides  triumphans  der  1  in  der  2  in  fides  supplex  umschlagt  und  mit 
Beginn  der  dtrjais  v.7  der  Stil  schwerfallig,  die  strophische  Anlage  unklar 
und  sogar  die  Begrenzung  der  Verszeilen  unsicher  wird."  The  first  Ps.  v.1"0 
has  two  pentameter  hexastichs.  It  was  composed  in  time  of  war,  when  the 
army  of  the  enemy  was  to  be  feared  v.3.  The  enemies  were  national  "MP3  S:jn 
v.2  as  144.  The  refuge  was  the  hyn  v.4,  rno  v.5<%  Shn  nno  v.55.  The  worship 
was  carried  on  by  sacrifice  ror  with  nynn  v.6.  Tp3*?  v.4,  if  a  verb,  is  an 
Aramaism  and  implies  post  ex.  date;  but  it  is  doubtless  a  noun,  in  the  morn- 
ing, referring  to  morning  sacrifice  as  54,  and  the  -\in  of  v.1  may  be  compared 
with  47.  The  Ps.  is  then  preexilic.  The  calm  confidence  in  connection  with 
extreme  peril  from  enemies,  apparently  besieging  the  city,  reminds  us  of  the 
situation  of  Jerusalem  in  the  time  of  Hezekiah  and  Isaiah,  v.  2  K.  18-19. 
The  second  Ps.,  v.7"9-1112,  has  three  trimeter  tetrastichs  of  prayer  for  deliver- 
ance. Nothing  indicates  any  particular  occasion.  It  was  probably  added  to 
the  first  Ps.  in  the  Persian  period  at  the  time  of  the  editing  of  IB  in  order 
to  make  this  ancient  Ps.  appropriate  for  synagogue  worship.  The  difficulties 
to  which  De.  alludes  are  due  to  glosses  of  a  still  later  date,  adapting  the  Ps. 
by  generalisation  for  later  situations,     (a)  The  forsaking  of  a  person  by  his 


238  PSALMS 

parents,  v.10,  suits  a  time  of  persecution  such  as  the  Maccabean  period,  when 
families  were  divided.  (f>)  v.13-14,  at  the  conclusion,  seem  to  be  an  effort  to 
harmonise  the  two  parts  by  combining  the  elements  of  trust  and  petition. 
They  bring  the  composite  Ps.  to  a  more  appropriate  conclusion.  This  was 
probably  the  work  of  the  final  editor. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  three  syn.  pentameter  couplets,  progres- 
sive one  to  another  in  their  order.  —  1.  Yahweh],  not  probably, 
"is"  EV. ;  but  vocative.  —  my  light],  light  to  me,  that  is  light 
coming  forth  from  the  face  of  Yahweh,  turned  toward  the  people 
in  favour,  in  accordance  with  the  priestly  blessing,  Nu.  624-26, 
cf.  47  444  8916 ;  here  conceived  as  in  its  source,  the  face  of  Yah- 
weh being  itself  a  light-giving  body  or  luminary,  as  in  8412  Yahweh 
is  a  sun.  The  light  is  a  saving  light,  and  so  the  source  of  it  is, 
my  salvation  ||  refuge  of  my  life],  or  for  my  life.  The  people  seek- 
ing refuge  in  Yahweh  found  their  life  secure,  safe  from  the  enemy. 
—  of  whom'],  is  therefore  a  triumphant  challenge,  implying  a 
negative  answer,  of  none.  —  shall  I  be  afraid  \  be  in  dread]. 
However  great  the  external  reasons  for  fear,  because  of  the  num- 
bers and  strength  of  the  enemies ;  under  divine  protection  His 
people  are  sure  that  they  are  absolutely  safe.  We  are  reminded 
of  the  sublime  challenge,  Is.  3721"35.  —  2.  When  evil  doers],  here 
as  elsw.  referring  to  cruel,  ruthless  enemies,  who  maltreat  their 
foes  j  ||  mine  adversaries  ||  enemies  to  me],  not  private  enemies, 
individuals;  but  public  enemies  engaged  in  war. — drew  near 
against  me],  in  hostility  and  probably  to  besiege.  —  to  cat  up  my 
flesh],  as  in  144,  as  beasts  of  prey  to  devour,  consume  utterly. 
What  the  enemies  expected  did  not  come  to  pass,  but  the  reverse. 
The  latter  is  reserved  therefore  for  stronger  antith.  in  the  com- 
plementary section  of  the  second  line  of  the  couplet.  —  stumbled], 
over  obstacles  they  did  not  anticipate,  and  they  fell,  that  is  to  the 
ground  in  defeat  and  death.  —  3.  Though  a  camp  encamp  against 
me],  surround  the  people  of  God  in  siege,  as  the  army  of  Assyrians, 
2  K.  i817seq-  It  is  better  to  preserve  the  identity  of  words  in  Eng- 
lish than  to  use  the  syn.  "host"  EV8. —  Though  battle  rise  up 
against  me].  The  specific  meaning  is  more  probable  here  than 
the  general  meaning  war.  The  battle  was  something  to  be  feared 
as  the  consequence  of  the  siege  already  begun.  In  these  circum- 
stances, justifying  fear,  my  heart  will  not  be  afraid],  resuming  v.1 ; 


PSALM   XXVII.  239 

but  the  reverse,  /  shall  be  trusting],  the  ptc.  expressing  the  unin- 
terrupted, unbroken  continuance  of  the  trust  in  Yahweh. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  two  synth.  couplets,  and  an  intermediate 
syn.  couplet.  —  4.  One  thing],  emph.  at  the  beginning.  He  is 
confident  of  deliverance  from  the  enemy  j  he  need  not  ask  for 
that ;  but  there  is  one,  and  one  only  thing,  he  desires  :  /  ask], 
emph.  of  present  experience  and  not  of  past  experience,  or  ex- 
perience just  completed.  —  that],  resuming  the  one  thing  with 
the  syn.  vbs. :  ask  ||  seek  after.  —  To  gaze  on],  defining  the  one 
thing,  the  privilege  of  beholding  steadfastly,  contemplating  with 
a  joyous  gaze,  the  loveliness  of  Yahweh],  His  glory  as  manifested 
to  the  devout  mind  in  public  worship.  —  in  His  temple],  the  place 
where  Yahweh  resides  and  where  He  manifests  Himself  to  His 
worshippers.  This  worship,  especially  in  early  times,  was  chiefly 
in  the  morning,  the  chief  time  of  sacrifice,  as  54  5917  8814.  This  He- 
brew word  has  been  interpreted,  by  a  difference  of  vowel  points, 
as  a  vb.  which  properly  means  "inquire"  AV.,  RV. ;  but  this  is 
so  unsuited  to  the  context  and  so  difficult  to  explain  satisfactorily 
that  Vrss.  are  compelled  to  resort  to  speculative  mngs. :  "  visit " 
PBV.,  "  consider  "  RVm.,  "  contemplate  "  ^DB.  \  some  such  mean- 
ing being  required  to  suit  the  parall.  A  later  editor,  not  satisfied 
with  this  designation  of  the  one  thing,  proposes  another,  though 
similar  thing,  from  23s :  dwell  in  the  house  of  Yahweh  all  the  days 
of  my  life,  at  the  expense  of  the  strophical  organization.  —  5.  For 
He  will  conceal  me  ||  hide  me],  renewed  expression  of  confidence. 
—  in  His  covert  ||  the  hiding-place  of  His  tent],  both  referring  to 
the  temple  as  a  place  of  refuge ;  not  that  the  enemy  might  cap- 
ture the  city,  but  be  compelled  to  respect  the  sacred  right  of 
refuge  in  the  temple ;  for  no  such  respect  for  the  temple  appears 
among  the  historic  enemies  of  Israel.  The  conception  is  rather 
that  the  temple  is  such  a  covert  and  hiding-place  that  it  protects 
the  entire  city  in  which  it  is  situated,  so  that  God's  people,  when 
they  resort  to  the  temple  for  worship,  will  be  kept  in  safety  from 
all  enemies.  Accordingly,  this  is  definitely  asserted,  in  the  day 
of  distress].  The  siege  has  caused  distress,  notwithstanding  the 
courage  and  confidence  of  the  people.  —  in  straits'],  as  the  parall. 
suggests ;  but  an  early  editor  has  interpreted  the  Hebrew  word  by 
a  different  pointing,  as  "  upon  a  rock  " ;  and  this  has  gone  into 


240  PSALMS 

Vrss.  ancient  and  modern,  introducing  a  thought  which,  however 
appropriate  in  itself,  is  difficult  to  reconcile  with  the  context. 
The  people  have  their  refuge  in  the  temple.  The  rock  was  the 
refuge  of  those  who  were  pursued  by  enemies  away  from  the  city 
and  temple,  in  the  country,  where  by  climbing  a  lofty  rock  they 
would  be  inaccessible.  —  lift  me  up],  in  victory,  the  same  antith. 
to  the  previous  vbs.,  as  is  found  in  the  couplet  v.2.  —  6.  Now 
therefore],  logical  sequence  and  not  temporal.  —  He  will  lift  up 
mine  head  above  mine  enemies],  in  victory,  repeating  the  previous 
vb.  in  stair-like  parall.  in  accordance  with  (3,  3,  PBV.,  Pss.  34  no7, 
interpreting  it  as  Hiphil  of  vb.,  which  is  much  more  probable  than 
J^,  though  sustained  by  other  ancient  and  modern  Vrss.  "  shall 
mine  head  be  lifted  up,"  interpreting  it  as  Qal.  —  round  about 
me].  The  enemies  are  besieging  the  city,  in  accordance  with  v3; 
so  most  Vrss.  to  be  preferred  to  (3,  interpreting  it  as  vb.  "go 
about  in  procession  "  as  26s,  attaching  it  to  the  next  line,  at  the 
expense  of  the  measure  of  both  lines.  —  And  I  7vill  sacrifice]  in 
the  morning  hour  of  worship,  as  v.46.  —  in  His  tent],  poetic  for 
temple  as  v.5,  including  the  court  of  the  brazen  altar,  the  place  of 
sacrifice.  —  Sacrifices  of  shouting],  sacrifices  of  peace-offerings  in 
the  form  of  thank-offerings  for  the  victory  granted  by  Yahweh, 
whose  chief  characteristic  was  feasting  on  the  flesh  of  the  victims 
together  with  bread  and  wine  in  joyful  festivity,  and  therefore  ac- 
companied with  the  sacred  shout  to  Yahweh.  A  later  editor,  at 
the  expense  of  the  measure,  inserts  two  vbs. :  "  I  will  sing,  yea 
I  will  sing  psalms,"  more  appropriate  to  the  fully  developed  temple 
service  of  later  times. 

PS.  XXVII.  B. 

Str.  I.  is  a  syn.  tetrastich.  —  7.  The  first  two  lines  are  composed 
of  usual  phrases,  v.  3s  424. — /  call]  is  attached  by  MT.,  (3,  3, 
and  all  Vrss.,  to  the  first  line,  usually  as  a  relative  or  temporal 
clause  ;  but  they  differ  as  regards  the  connection  of  my  voice. 
(3,  3,  PBV.  make  it  the  object  of  hear,  but  AV.,  RV.,  and  most 
moderns  attach  it  to  call.  The  former  is  required  by  the  measure, 
and  then  it  is  better  to  attach  call  to  the  second  line  as  the  ante- 
cedent of  the  two  vbs.,  and  so  the  first  trimeter  couplet  is  simple 
and  harmonious.  —  8.    To  thee],  emph.,  referring  to  Yahweh. — 


PSALM   XXVII.  241 

said  my  heart],  a  late  expression  instead  of  the  usual  "  in  my 
heart."  We  would  expect  at  once  what  was  said.  —  Thy  face, 
Yahweh,  do  I  seek],  that  is,  resort  to  the  temple,  the  place  of  the 
divine  presence.  This  simple  trimeter  couplet  was  disturbed  by 
an  early  marginal  exclamation  "  seek  ye  My  face."  This  marginal 
exhortation  eventually,  as  in  so  many  other  cases,  came  into  the 
text  at  the  expense  of  the  rhythm. 

Str.  II.  is  a  syn.  tetrastich.  —  9.  Hide  not  Thy  face],  in  indif- 
ference, not  looking  at  me,  ignoring  my  need  of  Thee ;  ||  abandon 
me  not  ||  forsake  me  not~\  \  so  the  intermediate,  turn  not,  as  (3,  3, 
interpreting  the  verb  as  Qal.  But  ^  followed  by  EVS.  and 
most  moderns  interpret  it  as  Hiphil,  "  cast  away "  PBV. ;  "  put 
away  "  AV.,  RV.  None  of  these  has  any  sure  warrant  in  Hebrew 
usage,  and  all  are  against  the  parall.  —  in  anger  against  me~\,  so 
probably  in  the  original.  But  as  often  "  Thy  servant "  has  been 
substituted  for  "  me  "  by  an  editor.  This  is  more  natural  than 
to  take  "  servant "  as  obj.  of  verb,  in  accordance  with  the  inter- 
pretation rejected  above,  or  "from  Thy  servant"  of  (3,  3,  which 
requires  the  insertion  of  a  preposition  in  the  original  text.  —  my 
help  ||  my  salvation]  :  the  assertion  of  past  experience  is  the  basis 
of  the  plea. 

10.  When  my  father  and  my  mother  have  forsaken  me~],  as 
PBV.,  AV.  is  more  probable  than  "  for  "  RV.,  though  sustained 
by  (3,  3.  It  is  then  the  protasis  with  perfect  of  vb.  This  most 
naturally  is  to  be  referred  to  a  time  of  religious  persecution,  such 
as  the  times  of  Antiochus  and  the  early  Maccabees,  when  families 
were  divided,  and  subsequently  when  parties  in  Israel  became 
bitterly  antagonistic  even  in  families,  an  idea  hardly  suited  to  the 
Ps.  in  this  context.  The  apodosis  is  :  then  will  Yahweh  take  me 
up].  This  is  a  late  meaning  of  the  Hebrew  word.  The  verse 
may  be  regarded  as  a  pentameter,  but  more  probably  is  a  mere 
prose  sentence.  In  either  case  it  does  not  correspond  with  the 
rhythm  of  the  simple  trimeter  in  which  it  is  embedded,  or  the 
construction  of  its  Strs.  This  verse  is  therefore  a  gloss,  not  earlier 
than  the  Maccabean  period. 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  two  syn.  couplets  in  antith.  — 11.  In 
Thy  way  instruct  me~\.  In  25s-12,  this  phr.  refers  to  the  Deute- 
ronomic  legislation ;  but  that  does  not  suit  the  present  context, 


242  PSALMS 

which  suggests  rather  a  way  of  safety  from  enemies.  This  is 
favoured  by  the  |j  hi  an  even  path  lead  me],  a  path  leading  to  a 
level  place,  a  place  upon  which  one  can  stand  securely.  This  was 
certainly  the  interpretation  of  the  glossator,  who  at  the  expense 
of  the  measure,  added  from,  5° :  because  of  those  lying  in  wait 
for  me.  — 12.  Give  me  not  over'],  taking  up  the  abandonment 
of  v.9  and  putting  it  in  another  syn.  form.  —  to  the  greed ~\.  The 
soul  of  the  adversaries,  as  the  seat  of  greedy  desire,  is  all  greed. 
Parallel  with  this  is,  he  that  breathe th  out],  the  greed  is  expressed 
by  excited,  eager,  hot  breath.  The  greed  of  soul  is  expressed  in 
violence  of  word  and  deed.  The  same  glossator,  probably,  as  the 
one  who  inserted  v.10,  also  inserted  between  the  two  lines  of  the 
couplet  the  words  :  For  false  witnesses  have  risen  up  against  me, 
which  suits  quite  well  the  situation  in  the  strife  of  parties  in 
the  Maccabean  times. 

13-14.  An  editor,  probably  earlier  than  the  glossator  mentioned 
above,  possibly  the  one  who  combined  the  prayer  with  the  original 
Ps.,  made  that  combination  more  appropriate  by  summing  up  the 
essential  ideas  of  both  parts  in  these  verses. 

I  believe  that  I  shall  look  on  the  good  things  of  Yahweh  in  the  land  of  the  living. 
Wait  on  Yahweh.     Be  strong  and  let  thy  heart  take  courage. 

J^  "  unless  "  followed  by  EV8.  is  marked  in  MT.  as  doubtful  by 
extraordinary  points,  and  it  is  not  justified  by  most  ancient 
Vrss. 

13.  /  believe,]  emphatic  present  with  infin.  const,  of  obj.  — 
that  I  shall  look  on  the  good  things  of  Yahweh],  those  given  by 
Yahweh  j  which  takes  the  place  of  the  loveliness  of  Yahweh  of 
v.4  as  a  practical  interpretation  of  it.  —  in  the  land  of  the  living]  : 
cf.  1426,  as  distinguished  from  the  realm  of  the  dead,  emphasising 
continuance  of  life  on  the  earth.  This  also  generalises  the  more 
specific  and  devout  thought  of  v.4.  — 14.  Wait  on  Yahweh],  in 
faith,  confidence,  and  hope  ;  paraphrased  in  PBV.  "  the  Lord's 
leisure  "  ;  repeated  at  the  close  of  the  verse  for  emphasis,  probably 
added  by  a  much  later  hand.  As  the  previous  line  expressed  the 
confidence  of  the  first  Ps.  by  the  perfect  of  the  vb.,  this  line  ex- 
presses the  prayer  of  the  second  Ps.  by  imperatives  :  Be  strong, 
intensified  in,  let  thine  heart  take  courage],  cf.  3125,  which  is  a 


PSALM   XXVII.  243 

more  probable  interpretation  of  the  vb.,  as  (3,  J,  RV.,  Dr.,  Kirk., 
al.,  than  PBV.  "  He  shall  comfort  thine  heart,"  interpreting  the 
vb.  as  apodosis  of  imv.  and  giving  it  a  causative  force. 

XXVII.  A. 

1.  »jNShi  i-yx]  phr.  a.X.  sfs.  obj.  mlN  v.  4?  ;  pt£  v.  126.  —  «n  rtyo]  phr.  a.X.; 
%  r>'E  n.m.  place  or  means  of  refuge,  safety  :  (1)  place,  not  in  \j/ ;  but  (2)  fig. 
of  God  as  refuge  271  315  37s9  52°  Is.  254-4  Na.  i7  Jo.  416,  nipr>  ra  Ps.  28s, 
T3  nra  318  Is.  1710,  'D  vi^X  Ps.  432;  (3)  fig.  of  human  protection  ">p:xn  'D  609  = 
1089.  D"n  v.  J6.  —  2.  a^iTn]  Qal  inf.  cstr.,  2  temporal,  apod.  iVtfs  pf.  past  ex- 
perience ||  iSor,  i  coord. — >S]  attached  to  ^N,  emphasising  the  sf.,  was 
doubtless  original,  completing  the  pentameter.  —  nan]  is  a  gl.  to  emphatically 
resume  the  subj.  (v.  /6s).  —  3.  cn]  protasis  of  condition,  parall.  with  previous 
temporal  clause,  with  apodosis  nt»\ —  ~kt3]  gl.,  either  emph.,  to  call  atten- 
tion to  the  object  of  trust ;  or  in  spite  of  this,  even  then,  as  RV.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  al. 
— 1^13]  Qal  ptc.  (v.  <f)  continuous  action,  with  verbal  force,  and  subj.  \ik 
completing  the  1.  —  4.  T7\*~\  emph.,  one  thing.  — ^Ntf]  Qal  pf,  emph.  pres- 
ent.—  T\~*vC\  emph.  object,  that  thing.  —  mm  maa  >patf]  gl- from  2365;  *naB> 
inf.  cstr.,  c.  sf.  1  s.  from  2V>  without  *?  is  striking  in  view  of  S  with  the  subse- 
quent infs.  The  glossator  did  not  assimilate  it  to  the  context. — '»n  w  ?r] 
gl.  from  236a.  —  PiinS]  Qal  inf.  cstr.,  obj.  of  previous  vbs.  :  behold,  usually  c. 
ace.  (v.  111*),  here  more  intense  with  a,  look  intently,  gaze  on.  —  t -"']  n-m- 
delightfulness,  loveliness  ;  f  of  '",  in  temple  here,  in  His  favour  9017,  elsw.  Zc. 
II7-10  Pr.  317  1526  1624. —  IjaSi]  is  a  second  inf.  Pi.  cstr.  of  Jnpa,  Aramaism, 
rare  in  Heb.,  Lv.  1336  c.  *?  seek,  look  for  ;  Ez.  3411  c.  ace.  seek  flock,  to  care  for 
it ;  Pr.  2025  is  difficult.  Toy  renders  make  inquiry.  The  proper  mng.  of  the 
vb.  is  improper  here.  What  was  he  to  seek  in  the  temple  syn.  with  gaze  ? 
i?DB.  contemplate  suits  context,  but  Toy  says  there  is  no  authority  for  such 
a  rendering.  Point  it  therefore  "V^aS  in  the  morning,  the  hour  of  prayer,  as 
54  5917  8814.  — 5.  v]  is  causal  and  the  vbs.  are  futures.  — pcd]  >:D  Qr.  [?|b] 
thicket,  covert,  lair  (v.  109)  not  suited  to  context ;  better  Kt.  nrp  booth,  a 
refuge  in  storm,  as  1812.  —  n;n  3113]  in  the  day  of  distress,  as  412  {v.  2112). — 
"^St  n~?a]  P^r-  a-^->but  nro  hiding-place  (v.  1812).  Sns  lent,  for  the  temple. 
—  11x3]  (v.  182)  not  suited  to  the  situation  in  the  courts  of  the  temple,  though 
pj  is  sustained  by  ancient  Vrss.  Rd.  nxa  in  straits.  An  ancient  editor  inter- 
preted it  as  nx  and  wrote  it  fully  "VIS.  —  6.  nnyji]  not  temporal,  but  logical 
(y.  210). — on;]  Qal  impf.  f$;  but  <&,  3,  PBV.,  D>n>  Hiph.  more  prob.  in 
accord,  with  previous  context,  as  34  no7. —  >no>3p]  ^  and  all  Vrss.  except 
4§,  U,  as  1812  793  (v.  j7).  It  then  has  two  tones  as  the  complement  of  the 
line.  d§  rd.  vb.  TiaaiD  Polel  pf.  I  s.  go  about  in  procession,  as  266  {v.  1711), 
and  attached  it  to  next  vb.,  which  is  then  interpreted  as  i  consec.  impf. ;  but 
the  obj.  of  vb.  in  this  sense  could  hardly  be  missing,  and  no  adjustment  of  the 
measure  is  practicable.  —  ^roTNi]  1  coord.,  with  Qal  cohort,  expressing  resolu- 
tion.   For  nai  vb.  and  noun,  v.  4s.  — J  njn-in]  n.f.  shout,  in  \p  (1)  religious  shout 


244  PSALMS 

in  temple,  in  connection  with  sacrifices  ;  so  here,  333  47°  8916;  (2)  clashing, 
of  cymbals  1508;  cf.  vb.  j?n,  v.  4112.  The  1.  needs  a  word  to  complete  its 
measure.     That  is  probably  mrpS.     Then  iTVBW  and  moTKi  are  expansive  gls. 

XXVII.  B. 

7.  A  new  measure,  trimeter  ;  and  doubtless  another  Fs.  begins  here,  which 
was  pieced  on  to  the  previous  Ps.  ;  cf.  Pss.  19,  24. —  pptf]  Qal  imv.  of  peti- 
tion, sq.  ace.  typ,  as  187  5518  642  119149;  so  @,  PBV.  —  >^p]  does  not  go  with 
tnpH  as  AV.,  RV.,  for  this  vb.  belongs  with  1.  2.  —  'JJjn  'Jam]  vbs.  in  emph. 
coordination  preceded  by  i  of  consequence  ;  both  Qal  imvs.  c.  sf.  1  s.  For 
pn  v.  42;  ny;  v.  j5. —  8.  qS]  emph.  —  *aS  nrN]  phr.  a.X.,  elsw.  aVa  io6-  n- 13 
141  (=  532)  3525  74^  33S3  45 .  but  cf.  31?  nvi  287.  — >jo  Wjw]  2  pi.  is  striking 
here  in  the  midst  of  2  sgs.  referring  to  God,  and  1  sg.  referring  to  the  poet. 
But  Vrss.  had  a  different  text :  <SB  i^e^rrjaa  rb  irpbawirbv  aov,  so  Roman  Psal- 
ter quaesivi  facie m  tuam,  t^jd  'fltfga  ;  U  exquisivit  te  fades  mea,  3  qnaesivit 
vultus  metis,  so  2  and  <gxc.a.T.  an(j  ^g  other  codd.,  HP.  Compl.,  Theodoret, 
"OD  *tfjpa.  <£  has  the  shorter  text  po  >JB  11:70  and  attaches  mm  to  the  next  1. 
The  latter  is  tempting,  but  improbable.  All  but  jo  agree  in  this  1.,  which  is 
entirely  appropriate  to  context.  All  but  <§  in  the  oldest  codd.  agree  in  "^d  K;p3 
which  is  best  explained  in  f£|  and  then  regarded  as  a  marginal  pious  gl. — 
9-  V.??  1**3  ■*T,J?]  Pnr«  a-^'  and  difficult.  Vb.  Hiph.  of  |^  improb.  <g,  Y, 
3,  take  it  as  Qal,  as  if  with  "pa>::,  so  Horsley.  "pa?  is  prob.  a  later  substitu- 
tion for  "O,  which  is  required  by  rhyme.     The  vb.  is  best  interpreted  as  Qal. 

—  ,J?^I?J  emph.  (v-  2220).  —  y.\f\  aorist  of  past  experience  in  order  to  get  a 
basis  for  plea.  It  makes  the  1.  too  long  and  is  gl.  — pu/arr^N]  juss.  with  neg., 
two  tones.  %  ^»  vb-  Qa*  abandon,  elsw.  7860  9414.  —  ^yh  ^i*]  v-  I2G>  fuller 
for  original  ^";1;,  as  v.1  — 10.  mm]  emph.  —  "JOD^]  Qal  impf.  f\0H  in  sense 
of  take  up,  care  for,  late  {v.  2tP}.  This  v.  is  a  general  statement,  not  in 
accord  with  the  urgent  petition  of  the  psalmist  in  a  real  situation  of  difficulty. 
It  has  five  tones  and  is  not  in  accord  with  the  rhythm.  It  disturbs  thestrophi- 
cal  organisation.  It  is  a  generalising  gl.  to  make  the  Ps.  more  appropriate 
for  synagogue  worship,  when  such  breaking  up  of  families  took  place  as  in 
Maccabean  times.  — 11.    mB^tJ  rn«a]  phr.  a.X.;   for  m_«  v.  89,  mfc^p  v.  2612. 

—  **vfl*'  f>,PL']  gl.  from  j9,  which  was  in  the  mind  of  the  copyist.  The  vbs. 
\11,,n»  ^O?*  were  originally  at  end  of  line  for  rhyme  in  %  characteristic  of 
the  Ps.  —  12.  *"«]  pi.  sf.  i.p.  Rhyme  and  ||  nc  require  sg.  \  — *Df5]  real  pf. 
3  pi.  c.  3  pers.,  elsw.  c.  hy  27s  545  (?)  8614  9212  1242;  evidence  of  another  and 
later  hand.  —  f  T«TV2?]  as  Ex.  2016  Dt.  I918-18  Pr.  619  145,  cf.  1217  19s-9  (pi.), 
a  legal  term  of  generalisation  ;  there  is  nothing  in  the  rest  of  the  Ps.  similar 
to  it.  X  i?  n.m.  in  f  elsw.  phr.  f  Drn  n?  3511,  as  Ex.  231  (E)  Dt.  1916;  and 
of  the  moon  Ps.  89s8.  This  clause  disturbs  the  thought  and  is  a  gl.  —  no"]  dub., 
j9DB.  adj.  f  0?}  a.X.  \/nD''  onty  Je-  481»  botn  dub.  5  better  n.  formed  by  *  from 
nw,  which  vb.  is  used  in  D,  Pss.  io5  126,  in  the  same  sense  as  here.  —  13.  nSiS] 
marked  as  doubtful  in  MT.  by  extraordinary  points  (v.  Intr.  §  3).  J  K?*S  if 
not,  unless ;  in  \p  elsw.  »SV?  9417  io623  1 1992  I241-*.     (g  has  eavrrj  =  ^,  and 


PSALM   XXVIII.  245 

the  measure  requires  another  word  with  the  previous  clause.  nSiS  is  proba- 
bly a  conflation  of  two  readings,  "h  and  vh.  But  the  original  was  doubtless  "h 
in  rhyme,  as  all  other  lines  of  this  Ps.  The  Ps.  is  complete  here.  The 
remaining  lines  are  liturgical  additions.  —  D^n  H???]  Pnr-  elsw»  *n  S2"7  l42* 
Is.  3811  538  Je.  1119  Ez.  2620  3223  (+  5  t.  Ez.)  JbV  2813.  — 14.  rnp_]  Pi.  imv. 
repeated  in  last  clause  (v.  2jj3),  c.  Ss  here,  as  in  37*1  Is.  515;  usually  c.  ace, 
as  in  25s. 

PSALM  XXVIIL,  3  str.  45. 

Ps.  28  is  a  prayer :  (1)  expostulating  with  Yahweh  for  aban- 
doning His  people  in  peril  of  death,  and  crying  aloud  for  help,  with 
hands  uplifted  towards  the  holy  shrine  (v.1-2)  \  (2)  urging  that  He 
discriminate  between  them  and  their  enemies,  visiting  the  latter 
with  retribution  for  their  deeds  (v.3^)  ;  (3)  blessing  Yahweh,  the 
strength  and  shield,  and  rejoicing  in  Him  as  the  refuge  for  king 
and  people  (v.6-8) .  Glosses  give  a  reason  for  the  imprecation  upon 
enemies  (v.5)  and  a  liturgical  petition  for  salvation  (v.9) . 

T  JNTO  Thee  I  call,  my  Rock :  be  not  silent  (turning)  from  me ; 

Lest,  if  Thou  be  still  (turning)  from  me,  I  be  compared  to  them  that  go  down 

to  the  Pit. 
Hear  the  voice  of  my  supplication  for  grace,  while  I  cry  unto  Thee  for  help; 
While  I  lift  up  my  hands,  (my  God)  unto  Thy  holy  Shrine. 
■P)RAG  me  not  away  with  the  wicked,  and  with  workers  of  trouble ; 

Who  are  speaking  peace  with  their  neighbours,  while  wrong  is  in  their  minds. 
O  give  them  according  to  their  deed,  and  according  to  the  badness  of  their  doings ; 
According  to  the  work  of  their  hands,  render  them  their  recompense. 
"DLESSED  be  Yahweh,  because  He  hath  heard  the  word  of  my  supplication  for 

grace ! 
Yahweh,  my  strength  and  my  shield,  in  whom  my  heart  doth  trust! 
And  I  am  helped,  and  my  heart  doth  exult,  therefore  with  my  song  will  I  praise 

Him, 
Yahweh,  the  strength  (for  His  people),  and  the  refuge  for  victorious  deeds  for 

His  anointed. 

Ps.  28  was  in  13.  It  received  two  important  glosses:  (1)  v.5,  a  mosaic 
from  Is.  512  and  Je.  246  4210  45*;  (2)  v.9,  a  liturgical  addition.  The  Ps.  is  a 
prayer  for  help  in  time  of  war,  closing  with  a  certitude  of  victory.  It  resembles 
Pss.  20,  21 :  iitw'd  v.7  =  207;  v;  v.7-  8  =  2i2- 14;  mjnts"  v.7  =  2i2- 6;  ~\>v  v.7=2ili. 
The  lifting  up  of  hands  towards  the  "vai  v.2,  is  similar  in  situation  to  the 
sacrifices  offered  in  204.  The  Davidic  monarchy  was  still  in  existence  v.8, 
and  the  temple  worship  was  carried  on  v.2.  The  wicked  are  foreign  enemies 
who  are  treacherous,  professing  peace,  but  really  bent  on  mischief  v.3.  The 
situation  is  one  of  extreme  peril.     The  nation   is  in  danger   of  perishing. 


246  PSALMS 

nn  »VW  v.1  is  a  phrase,  of  which  no  earlier  usage  can  be  assigned  than  Ez. 
and  the  exilic  apocalypse  Is.  14.  The  Pit  is  the  Pit  of  Sheol.  We  are  led  to 
think,  therefore,  of  the  late  Babylonian  period  shortly  before  the  exile.  The 
king  was  probably  Jehoiakim.  The  wicked  nations  were  probably  the  Moab- 
ites,  Ammonites,  and  Syrians  of  2  K.  24-. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  two  stair-like  couplets.  —  1.  Unto  Thee], 
emph.  in  position,  Thee,  and  no  other,  defined  by  my  Rock,  which 
in  the  earlier  literature  is  a  divine  name ;  but  which  has  become 
in  the  time  of  composition  of  this  Ps.  a  concrete  expression  for 
Yahweh  as  the  safe  refuge  of  His  people  (7;.  1915  73^  9216  1441), 
an  idea  taken  up  again  in  syn.  phrases  in  v.7"*.  A  later  editor  in- 
serted Yahweh,  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  —  I  call],  em- 
phatic present,  what  is  now  being  done,  and  not  as  EVe.  "  will  call  " 
future  action.  —  be  not  silent],  changed  in  the  syn.  line  into  a 
conditional  clause,  //  Thou  be  still;  that  is  ignoring,  neglecting 
the  prayer,  and  the  serious  situation  of  the  people.  These  verbs 
have  a  pregnant  construction  in  Hebrew  involving  the  insertion 
of  an  appropriate  verb  turning  from  me.  —  I  be  compared  to],  not 
only  become  like,  resemble,  but  in  the  eyes  of  others,  before  the 
enemies,  be  compared  to  the  other  nations  they  have  conquered 
and  destroyed.  —  that  go  down  to  the  Pit].  The  Pit  is  the  deep 
dark  dungeon  in  Sheol,  to  which  the  wicked  nations  descend, 
according  to  Is.  141519  Ez.  2620  322520-30,  cf.  Ps.  716,  and  not 
another  name  for  Sheol  itself.  So  the  people  of  God  would  lose 
their  national  existence,  just  like  the  other  nations  destroyed  by 
the  Babylonian  empire,  unless  Yahweh  their  God  saved  them.  — 
2.  Hear  the  voice  of  my  supplication  for  grace].  The  prayer  is  a 
supplication  for  favour  and  bestowal  of  gracious  deliverance.  It 
is  aloud,  the  voice  of  the  petitioners  sounding  forth  in  the  court  of 
the  temple  in  plaintive  tones ;  defined  by  while  I  ay  unto  Thee 
for  help.  These  public  prayers,  recited  aloud  by  priests  and 
people,  doubtless,  as  always,  accompanied  the  sacrifice  of  whole 
burnt -offerings  in  the  courts,  and  the  burning  of  incense  in  the 
temple  itself.  At  the  same  time,  the  attitude  of  supplication  is  ex- 
pressed in  the  gesture,  /  lift  up  my  hands,  the  ancient  and  natural 
attitude  of  invocation  and  supplication,  stretching  forth  the  hands 
to  call  and  to  receive.  So  in  La.  34i  "  Let  us  lift  up  our  heart  to 
our  hands  unto  God  in  the  heavens."     The  heart  goes  up  to  the 


PSALM   XXVIII.  247 

uplifted  hands  and  from  them  upward  to  God  in  heaven.  But  to 
the  author  of  La.  there  was  no  temple ;  it  had  been  destroyed. 
This  Ps.  was,  however,  sung  in  the  temple,  and  the  hands  were 
lifted  up  towards  the  place  where  Yahweh  was  conceived  as 
resident.  —  Unto  Thy  holy  Shrine"],  the  Debir,  the  throne  room, 
otherwise  called  the  Holy  of  Holies  of  the  temple.  The  measure 
requires  the  insertion  of  My  God,  which  was  omitted  by  copy- 
ist's mistake,  due  to  the  similarity  of  the  Hebrew  word  with  the 
preposition  that  follows. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  a  synth.  couplet  and  one  of  introverted 
parallel.  —  3.  Drag  me  not  away].  The  petition  for  discrimination 
between  the  people  of  Yahweh  and  the  nations  that  have  perished, 
or  are  ready  to  perish,  at  the  hands  of  the  Babylonian  empire,  now 
passes  over  into  a  plea  for  discrimination  between  them  and  the 
minor  surrounding  nations,  who  are  in  similar  peril,  lest  they  be 
involved  in  the  common  ruin.  Israel  would  not  be  dragged  along 
and  away  as  captives  with  them.  —  with  the  wicked].  These  are, 
as  frequently  in  the  preexilic  Pss.,  wicked  nations  ||  workers  of 
trouble,  the  trouble,  mischief,  injury  that  they  were  doing  to  the 
people  of  God  in  their  extremity.  They  are  also  treacherous, 
speaking  peace  with  their  neighbours].  They  pretended  to  be 
friendly  and  in  alliance  against  a  common  foe ;  but  in  reality  they 
were  hostile,  ready  to  betray  Israel  on  the  first  opportunity. — 
wrong  is  in  their  minds],  their  real  intent  was  to  take  advantage 
of  the  troubles  of  Israel,  to  unite  with  their  enemies  and  prey 
upon  them.  This  is  exactly  what  Moab  and  Ammon,  the  Syrians 
and  Edomites,  did,  according  to  2  K.  242 ;  cf.  also  Ez.  25  for  the 
prophet's  denunciation  of  them.  —  4.  O  give  them  ||  render  them 
their  recompense],  an  imprecation,  in  introverted  parallel.,  not  upon 
individuals,  but  upon  the  treacherous,  cruel,  neighbouring  nations, 
calling  upon  Yahweh  to  give  them  exact  retribution.  —  according 
to  their  deed  ||  the  badness  of  their  doings  ||  the  work  of  their  hands], 
the  treachery  of  which  they  have  been  guilty  and  the  trouble  which 
they  have  wrought  upon  His  people.  A  later  editor  feels  con- 
strained to  add  a  reason  for  this  imprecation,  which  was  evident 
enough  to  the  author  of  the  Ps.  in  the  historical  situation  in  which 
he  wrote,  but  not  so  evident  in  later  times: — 5.  Because  they 
regard  not  the  works  of  Yahweh,  nor  the  operation  of  His  hands, 


248  PSALMS 

He  breaketh  them  down  and  buildcth  them  not  again~\.  The  first 
of  these  clauses  is  a  free  citation  from  Is.  512,  contrasting  the  work 
of  Yahweh's  hands  with  the  work  of  the  hands  of  the  wicked 
nations,  and  His  work  with  their  work ;  with  the  implication  that, 
if  they  had  paid  attention  to  His  work  they  would  not  have  done 
their  work,  and  because  of  this  neglect,  retribution  comes  upon 
them.  The  second  clause  is  a  free  citation  of  a  favourite  expres- 
sion of  Je.  246  4210  454.  Yahweh  will  break  them  down,  destroy 
their  national  existence,  and  not  build  them  up  again ;  their  ruin 
will  be  complete  and  final. 

Str.  III.  is  a  tetrastich  with  introverted  parallel.  It  expresses 
certitude  that  the  previous  petition  has  been  granted,  and  that  by 
using  again  the  exact  words  of  v.2a.  This  certitude  was  probably 
due,  as  in  Ps.  20,  to  some  external  evidence,  given  either  by  a 
prophetic  utterance,  or  by  some  sign  of  the  acceptance  of  the 
sacrifice ;  and  so  the  Ps.  changes  its  entire  tone  to  a  bless- 
ing.— 6-7.  Blessed  be  Yahweh'].  Such  benedictions  subsequently 
became  the  ritual  conclusion  of  every  Ps.  or  liturgical  selection 
(7'.  Intr.,  §  40).  Yahweh  is  repeated  for  emphasis  in  the  second 
line  in  order  to  attach  to  Him,  in  apposition,  the  attributes 
already  involved  in  "  my  Rock  "  v.1,  namely,  my  strength  and  my 
shield.  This  phrase,  only  found  here,  combines  the  usual  concep- 
tions that  Yahweh  is  the  source  of  strength  to  His  people  {v.  211 
462  84°),  and  that  He  is  the  shield,  interposing  between  them  and 
their  enemies  (as  3*  711  183).  —  in  whom  my  heart  doth  trust~\. 
The  calm  confidence  to  which  the  psalmist  has  now  come,  is  in 
striking  antithesis  to  the  expostulation  for  neglect  and  the  cry  for 
help  with  which  it  begins.  —  And  J  am  helped],  the  help  has  been 
given  and  is  now  enjoyed,  and  as  a  necessary  consequence,  my 
heart  doth  exult].  The  trust  of  the  heart  has  passed  over  into 
exultation,  and  the  vow,  with  my  song  will  J  praise  Him],  the 
song  of  thanksgiving  which  is  to  accompany  a  thank-offering  for 
the  victory  over  enemies,  now  regarded  as  certain.  The  whole  is 
summed  up  in  the  common  experience  of  king  and  people.  — 
8.  YaJnveh],  in  apposition  with  the  object  of  the  previous  verb, 
and  not  an  independent  clause ;  and  therefore  having  in  apposi- 
tion, as  v.7,  and  not  as  predicates,  the  strength,  as  v.7,  explained 
more  fully  as  the  refuge.  —  victorious  deeds],  from  whom  deeds 


PSALM   XXVIII.  249 

of  victory  come  as  a  gift,  as  in  212. — for  His  people],  the  nation, 
as  (3 ;  but  J^,  by  error,  has  "  for  them,"  which  must  have  the 
same  interpretation,  although  there  is  nothing  to  which  the  3d 
plural  refers. — for  His  anointed],  their  king,  anointed  by  Yah- 
weh  over  His  people,  and  so  His  representative,  belonging  to 
Him  as  His  own. 

9.  When  the  Ps.  was  adapted  for  public  worship,  probably  in 
the  final  Psalter,  a  liturgical  addition  was  made  in  order  to  gen- 
eralise this  warlike  situation.  This  is  a  tetrameter  couplet.  — 
O  save],  in  the  later  situation  more  probable  than  "  give  victory," 
which  would  be  necessary  in  accordance  with  v.8  if  original  to  the 
Psalm.  But  then  we  miss  the  reference  to  "Thine  anointed," 
which  would  be  expected  rather  than  "Thy  people,"  as  in  v.8; 
||  thine  inheritance,  which  also  must  refer  to  the  people,  conceived 
as  the  special  divine  possession.  The  absence  of  reference  to  the 
king  here  can  hardly  be  explained  otherwise  than  that  this  couplet 
was  appended  when  Israel  had  been  so  long  without  a  king  that 
it  was  not  natural  to  think  of  him  any  more.  —  And  be  Thou  shep- 
herd], and  as  a  shepherd  lifts  up  and  carries  in  his  bosom  the 
lambs  of  the  flock,  carry  them  forever.  The  author  probably  had 
in  mind  Yahweh  the  shepherd  of  Is.  4011. 

1.  mrr]  makes  1.  too  long,  and  is  a  gl.  —  nix]  for  Yahweh,  as  182 ;  in  early 
literature  as  name,  later  as  archaism,  fig.  of"1  as  refuge,  v.  1915  73s6  9216  1441. 
(&,  U,  as  usual,  6  0e6s  fxov,  Deus  mens.  —  BhTW  Sm]  Qal  juss.  2  m.,  with  neg. 
X  \vyf\  VD«  t  Qal  be  silent :  (1)  alw.  of  God  keeping  silence  or  neglecting 
prayer  3522  503  832  1091,  c.  Sx  3913,  p  281;  (2)  subj.  D"jtn  Mi.  716  (be  deaf). 
Hiph.  keep  silence,  neglecting  evil  Ps.  5021  Hb.  I13  Is.  4214,  neglecting  repent- 
ance Ps.  32s.  —  \JDn]  is  pregnant,  turning  from  me,  cf.  2222  431.  —  'T^nn] 
final  clause.  %  [ntfn]  vb.  Qal  be  silent,  inactive,  still,  of  Yahweh  281 ;  of 
waves  10729.  Hiph.  exhibit  silence,  be  silent  393,  2130  preg.  away  fro?n  good.  — 
^nWpji]  1  consec,  Niph.  pf.  I  sg.,  conj.  introducing  the  apod,  of  the  condi- 
tional clause,  f  *?tfD  VD-  represent,  be  like,  in  \p  only  Niph.  be  like,  similar, 
be  compared;  c.  Dy  281  =  1437,  c.  3  4913-21;  cf.  c.  Sx  Is.  1410;  elsw.  Hiph. 
Is.  46s;  Hithp.  c.  a  Jb.  3019.  —  2.  '^ajqn  Vip]  V^r.,  elsw.  ^  v.6  3123  866  1302 
140",  cf.  1161.  %  [junn]  n.[m.]  only  pi.  abstr.,  supplication  for  favour,  alw. 
in  \p  to  God;  elsw.  1431 ;  alw.  vrnnn,  except  866  v^runn.  —  <jntfa]  Pi.  inf. 
cstr.  sf.,  c.  2  temporal  (v.  j3).  —  "h>  »KlPja]  inf.  cstr.,  n  temporal,  cf.  for  this 
gesture  63s  La.  219;  cf.  also  Sn  vqi  xt)  Pss.  251  864  1438.  —  J  "v:n]  n.m.  the 
hindmost  room  of  the  temple  I  K.  65-31;  the  earlier  name  for  D^Bhpn  v~\p, 
only  here  in  \p,  translated  oracle,  AN.,  RV.,  after  2,  Aq.,  3,  on  the  incorrect 


250  PSALMS 

theory  that  it  was  derived  from  "Ot  speak.  "  Chancel,"  Dr.,  is  tempting,  but 
does  not  really  correspond  with  the  mug.  of  the  word.  (&  eh  vabv  ayidp  o~ov, 
cf.  PBV.,  is  correct,  distinguishing  the  va6s  as  the  inner  sanctuary,  the  shrine, 
from  the  Up6v,  the  temple  as  a  whole.  —  Tl";"! ;]  might  be  interpreted  of  the 
larger  sanctuary,  as  in  74s;  but  better,  as  in  58,  as  attribute  of  the  "vat. 
The  1.  is  defective;  prob.  add  »Sh  omitted  because  of  similarity  to  h*. — 
3.  -jr^'prr'TN]  Qal  ]uss.,  c.  neg.  "]#D  (v.  /o9)  drag  along  and  away.  We  must 
give  these  two  words,  though  connected  by  Makkeph,  two  beats.  <S  sub- 
stitutes for  sf.  tt)v  ^vx^v  /xov,  which  is  more  prob.,  for  then  "]^Dn"S«  would 
have  but  one  tone  and  »Btej  the  other.  —  T?'1]  Qal.  ptc.  pi.  cstr.,  verbal  force, 
rel.  clause,  c.  c>,  usage  of  JED  and  earlier  writers;  P  and  later  writers  prefer 
PH  "Q-t. —  I  D^r]  n.m. :  (1)  soundness,  health  38*;  (2)  -welfare,  prosperity 
733  i22°-7-8;  f  2,S;:i  3i  3711  72";  (3)  quiet,  peacefulness,  tranquillity,  security 
49  37!7>  (4)  peace,  friendship,  alliance,  between  men,  ">D'iL,ir  w;,n  man  of  my 
friendship  4110,  cf.  Je.  2010  ?$n  Oh.  7,  vfry  (||  nna)  Ps.  5521,  cf.  f  69'23, 
DJ?  v  -\2-y  28s  3520  Je.  97,  'V  tfpa  Ps.  3415,  ||  npnx  72s;  (5)  peace  with  God  in 
establishment  of  covenant  relations  (common  in  Je.,  Ez.,  Is.2,  P)  2911  3521 
85s- n,  cf.  Is.  5413  6o17;  invoked  upon  Jerusalem  ^-;  'tf  Pss.  1255  1286,  31  'tf 
119165;  (6)  peace  from  war  (freq.  in  hist,  and  prophet,  bks.)  5519  14714, 
antith.  n-ns^  I206-7. —  D33^]  long  form  (v.  f5),  cf.  with  "S^  v.7  short  form 
used  twice,  is  dub.;  prob.  due  to  dittog.  of  3. —  4.  Dns~JPi].  The  Makkeph 
reduces  the  tones  of  the  1.  to  four.  This  is  impossible.  We  would  natur- 
ally expect  here  cohort,  n^n,  as  69,2S  8616.  But  the  txt.  must  have  been 
changed  at  an  early  date,  for  the  same  phr.  has  been  inserted  by  copyist's 
error  in  next  1.  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  For  jnj  in  the  sense  of  requite 
v.  io1!*.  — ?*>]  a.X.  y,  but  in  this  phr.  found  also  in  Dt.  28'20  Is.  I16  Je.  44  -f  6  t. 
Ho.  915,  cf.  1  S.  253,  evil,  badness,  for  n;n  v.8.  —  DjvSSgE]  pi.  cstr.  sf.  3  pi. 
+  ("I"*2.)  n-m«  deed:  (1)  of  God  7712  787 ;  (2)  wanton  deeds  of  men  28^ 
io6'29-  89  and  passages  given  above  in  other  Liter.  —  dh1  fife^c]  of  God,  as  v.6, 
925  III7  1435,  v.  8'-*\  of  men,  as  here,  9017  1 154  13513.  —  %  S-idj]  n.m.:  (1)  re- 
quital, recompense  281*  942  1378;  (2)  benefit  from  God  1032,  v.  vb.  ^cj  (75)- — 
5.  irr]  prob.  Hiph.,  as  3315,  where  ^n  is  used.  Qal  in  \p  alw.  c.  ace.  or  s, 
although  Qal  form  is  the  same  and  the  mng.  essentially  the  same.  —  riVjte]  pi. 
cstr.  of  nr;p  {v.  17^)  deeds  of  Yahweh,  change  from  ^"D  of  v.4.  The  use  of 
this  word  together  with  v-n  ntrjna  shows  an  intentional  antith.  between  human 

°  ATT  • 

deeds  and  divine  deeds.  The  sentence  resembles  Is.  512,  and  is  a  loose  cita- 
tion from  it. —  DJ3J  nl,i  Dtn?v]  (5  Kad€\€?s,olKoSo/j.^o-€is,V,3  deslrues,aedificabis. 
Possibly  an  older  txt.  had  ptc,  as  Je.  45*.  This  clause  is  free  citation  from 
Je.  24s  4210  454.  The  v.  has  most  naturally  a  sentence  of  4  +  3  tones  from 
Is.  512,  and  a  sentence  of  3  tones  from  Je.  The  first  sentence  is  too  long,  the 
second  too  short,  and  they  cannot  be  properly  arranged  in  accordance  with 
the  measure  of  the  Ps.  They  are  glosses,  so  Che.  —  7.  »331M  m>]  phr.  a.X.,  but 
v;  as  strength  of  Yahweh  bestowed  for  the  defence  of  His  people  also  462  84° 
(v.  83).  —  Va]  defines  rel.  clause  with  rel.  omitted.  —  >*??!}]  1  consec,  Qal 
impf.,    result   of  previous   pf.     t  ty  vb.   exult,  only  Qal,  alw.  abs.  28?  60* 


PSALM   XXIX.  251 

(=io88)  685  943  9612  1495,  elsw.  Is.  2312  Je.  n15  1517  5011  5139  2  S.  I20 
Zp.  314  Hb.  318  Pr.  2316.  Here  subj.  3*7  as  seat  of  emotions,  cf.  4?  136.  —  *TlftV] 
with  my  song,  v.  Intr.  §  24. — ttTtow]  strong  form  of  Hiph.  impf.  I  sg.,  c. 
strong  sf.  3  sg.  (v.  Ges.S5311-7).  ht  (v.  Intr.  §39)  expressing  resolution, 
future  purpose  of  praise.  (3  has  a  variant  txt.  here:  Kal  avidaXev  ij  trapi- 
ftov  '  Kal  £k  6e\^fxaT6s  fiov  i^ofwXoyricroficu  airry,  so  5J.  <&  agrees  with  <3  in 
the  first  clause,  but  with  ^  and  other  Vrss.  in  the  second.  @  had  nfc'3  or 
nNtf  for  n^B'D,  and  prob.  >aS  was  transposed  with  it,  and  possibly  ^L,n  was  read 
for  i1?;'.  — 8.  '•dSt?]  <S,  &,  F  have  icy,  so  Horsley,  Jebb,  Dathe,  Koster,  Che., 
Ba.,  al.;  more  prob.,  espec.  in  view  of  the  use  of  DJJ  in  v.9  and  its  parall.  with 
utet,  so  mentioning  both  king  and  people.  —  mn]  emph.,  at  end  of  1.,  Str., 
and  Ps.,  is  unnecessary,  and  as  it  makes  1.  too  long,  it  is  doubtless  a  gl. 


PSALM   XXIX.,  5  str.  44. 

Ps.  29  is  a  hymn,  describing  the  advent  of  Yahweh  in  a  storm. 

(1)  The  angels  worship  Yahweh  in  the  heavenly  temple  (v.1-2); 

(2)  the  thunder  of  Yahweh's  voice  is  a  great  power  (a)  on  the 
waters  (v.3-4);  (6)  upon  Lebanon  and  its  cedars  (v.5-6)  ;  (c)  upon 
the  wilderness  and  its  forests  (v.8"9)  ;  (3)  Yahweh,  enthroned 
over  the  Flood,  reigns  forever  and  bestows  blessings  on  His 
people  (v.10-11). 

^SCRIBE  to  Yahweh,  ye  sons  of  gods, 

Ascribe  to  Yahweh  glory  and  strength  ; 

Ascribe  to  Yahweh  the  glory  of  His  name  ; 

Render  worship  to  Yahweh  in  holy  ornaments. 
'T'HE  voice  of  Yahweh  is  upon  the  waters, 

(The  voice  of)  Yahweh  is  upon  great  waters; 

The  voice  of  Yahweh  is  in  power, 

The  voice  of  Yahweh  is  in  majesty. 
T^HE  voice  of  Yahweh  breaketh  cedars, 

Yahweh  breaketh  in  pieces  the  cedars  of  Lebanon. 

And  He  maketh  Lebanon  skip  like  a  calf, 

Sirion  like  a  young  yore-ox. 
'"rHE  voice  of  Yahweh  whirleth  the  wilderness  about, 

Yahweh  whirleth  about  the  wilderness  of  Kadesh. 
£  The  voice  of  Yahweh  whirleth  about  the  (terebinths), 

(The  voice  of  Yahweh)  strippeth  bare  the  forests. 
yAHWEH  sat  enthroned  (over)  the  Flood, 

Yahweh  (will  sit)  enthroned  forever ; 

Yahweh  giveth  strength  to  His  people, 

Yahweh  blesseth  His  people  with  peace. 


2  52  PSALMS 

Ps.  29  was  in  ©  and  £H  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  In  ©  a  liturgical  as- 
signment appears  ^odiov  <rKT)vi}s,  the  msp,  coming  in  the  Jewish  year  the 
next  day  after  the  seventh  day  of  Tabernacles,  so  Bar  Hebraeus.  But  the 
earliest  Palestinian  tradition  knows  nothing  of  this.  So/rim,  c.  18,  §  3,  assigns 
it  to  Pentecost.  The  Ps.  for  the  mjp  is  65  (v.  De.,  Psalmen,  pp.  266-267)  • 
The  advent  of  Yahweh  in  a  storm  may  be  compared  with  i88b(K  The  d^Sn  ^2 
angels,  v.1  =  89/,  cf.  Jb.  38%  implies  the  influence  of  Persian  angelology. 
Ehp  mm  v.2,  the  holy  ornament,  or  vestment  of  angelic  priests,  implies  a  fully 
developed  priesthood  as  expressed  in  P.  The  use  of  V12D  v.10  for  the  ancient 
Flood  is  also  in  accordance  with  P.  V.1-2  are  cited  in  967-9a  except  that 
cny  nmoPD  is  used  for  d^Sn  >J3,  an  intentional  change.  Ps.  29  must  be 
earlier  than  this  royal  Ps.,  which  is  used  in  1  Ch.  i623b(i-.  The  Ps.  seems  to 
belong  to  the  Persian  period  subsequent  to  Nehemiah. 

Str.  I.  The  parall.  of  this  tetrastich  is  stairlike ;  though  syn.  in 
the  main,  each  line  gives  an  additional  idea.  — 1-2.  Ascribe  to 
Yahweh],  thrice  repeated;  the  recognition  of  Yahweh  and  the 
giving  utterance  to  this  recognition  in  worship.  —  Render  wor- 
ship^ expressed  usually  by  bowing  down  or  prostration.  — ye  sons 
of  gods],  a  term  for  angels  as  belonging  to  the  class  of  divine 
beings ;  and  yet  in  Hebrew  conception  the  servants  and  wor- 
shippers of  Yahweh,  cf.  Ps.  8g7  Jb.  387.  That  which  is  ascribed 
is  glory  and  strength,  the  former  intensified  in  the  next  line,  the 
glory  of  His  name'],  manifested  in  His  revelation  of  Himself  in 
His  name,  or  that  which  is  made  known  and  is  known  of  Him. 
The  latter  is  the  theme  of  praise  as  83,  and  so  in  (3  conceived  as 
the  praise  itself.  —  in  holy  ornaments].  The  angels  are  conceived 
after  the  manner  of  ministering  priests  in  the  earthly  temple  as 
clothed  in  sacred  vestments. 

Three  tetrastichs  describe  the  voice  of  Yahweh,  the  thunder- 
storm, in  its  effects  upon  nature,  upon  the  sea,  the  mountains,  and 
the  wilderness.  Str.  II.  The  thunder-storm  is  first  described  on 
the  sea.  —  3^4.  The  voice  of  Yahweh],  eight  times  repeated  in  the 
original,  but  omitted  by  copyists  in  v.3*,  v.96,  inserted  m  gloss  v.7, 
leaving  seven  times,  the  symbolical  holy  number.  In  accordance 
with  ancient  conceptions  the  thunder  is  the  voice  of  God.  Yahweh 
descends  in  theophany  to  earth,  in  a  storm,  either  for  vengeance 
upon  His  enemies  or  for  the  deliverance  of  His  people,  v.  i88Bq\ 
—  upon  the  waters  ||  upon  great  waters],  in  accordance  with  usage 
of  the  phrase,  the  waters  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  producing,  as 


PSALM   XXIX.  253 

is  suggested,  by  in  power  ||  in  majesty,  powerful,  majestic  waves, 
cf.  934.  An  ancient  scribe  inserted  an  explanatory  gloss  in  different 
measure  :  "  The  God  of  glory  thundered,"  which  destroys  the  sym- 
metry of  the  Str.  —  Str.  III.  5-6.  The  thunder-storm  is  next  de- 
scribed in  the  mountains.  —  breaketh],  is  intensified  into,  breaketh 
in  pieces  the  cedars],  intensified  into  cedars  of  Lebanon,  the  giant 
trees  growing  in  that  region,  famed  in  antiquity.  The  storm  is 
of  such  extreme  violence  that  it  breaks  off  the  limbs,  breaks 
down  the  trees  themselves  and  breaks  them  in  pieces.  —  He 
maketh  to  skip~\,  implying  an  earthquake  accompanying  the  storm, 
as  i88sq-  1144"6  as  usual  in  connection  with  theophanies.  It  shakes 
the  mountains  on  which  the  cedars  grew.  J^,  0,  and  all  Vrss. 
make  the  obj.  them  refer  to  cedars,  which  would  not  be  harmonious 
with  breaking  them  in  pieces.  The  suffix  is  therefore  a  copyist's 
error.  Lebanon  is  the  object  in  this  line,  as  Sirion  in  the  next.  — 
Lebanon],  the  range  of  mountains  along  the  coast  dividing  Syria 
from  Phoenicia.  —  Sirion],  the  Phoenician  name  for  Mt.  Hermon, 
the  giant  of  the  parallel  range  of  Anti-Lebanon,  as  Dt.  39.  These 
great  mountain  ranges  skip  and  dance  about  under  the  power  of 
the  earthquake  ;  like  a  calf  ||  a  young  yore-ox],  leaping  and  danc- 
ing about  when  they  are  excited. 

7.  The  voice  of  Yahweh  divide  th  the  flames  of  fire],  so  (3,  U,  3, 
PBV.,  AV.,  referring  doubtless  to  the  forked  lightning;  but  pf, 
followed  by  RVm.,  has  "  heweth  out,"  which  is  difficult  to  under- 
stand and  is  probably  erroneous.  This  line,  in  any  case,  inter- 
rupts the  thought,  is  isolated,  having  no  place  in  the  strophical 
organisation  of  the  Ps.,  and  is  a  gloss. 

Str.  IV.  8-95.  The  author  now  turns  to  the  wilderness  to 
describe  the  storm  there.  —  whirleth  about],  thrice  repeated,  an 
appropriate  term  for  the  whirling  effect  of  a  severe  storm  ;  so  (3. 
3  takes  the  alternate  meaning  of  the  vb.  "  make  writhe,"  in  pangs, 
especially  of  childbirth,  so  Dr.  for  the  three.  It  is  improbable  that 
the  meaning  would  change.  The  difficulty  is  in  the  Hebrew  word 
rendered  "hinds,"  which  seems  to  favour  the  latter  rendering,  the 
thought  being  that  the  storm  so  frightens  them  that  it  brings  a 
premature  delivery.  But  it  is  difficult  to  see  why  hinds  should  be 
mentioned  rather  than  other  animals,  or  why  they  should  be  men- 
tioned alone,  when  this  Ps.  is  so  striking  in  the  use  of  parallelism. 


254  PSALMS 

It  seems  better  therefore  to  read  by  a  different  interpretation  of 
the  same  original  form,  terebinths,  and  so  ||  with  forests ;  the 
former  being  the  great  trees  characteristic  of  this  region.  This 
makes  the  entire  Str.  simple  and  harmonious.  The  power  of  the 
storm  is  emphasised  in  whirling  them  about.  —  strippeth  bare], 
the  leaves,  boughs,  and  probably  also  barks  of  trees.  —  the  wilder- 
ness], as  we  would  suppose  from  the  antith.  to  Lebanon  would 
be  in  the  South,  the  wilderness  of  the  wanderings,  when  Israel 
came  up  out  of  Egypt ;  more  specifically  Kadesh,  that  part  of 
the  wilderness  which  centres  in  the  ancient  sacred  place,  where 
Israel  sojourned  a  long  time  prior  to  their  entrance  into  the  Holy 
Land,  elsewhere  known  as  Kadesh  Barnea. 

9  c.  A  copyist  introduced  a  line,  taking  up  in  part  the  ideas 
of  the  first  Str. :  and  in  His  temple,  probably  referring  to  the 
heavenly  temple,  although  this  is  not  certain ;  especially  as  all  of 
them  pj,  all  i3,  3,  seems  to  refer  to  the  angels,  and  saith  glory 
is  a  repetition  of  v.162a.  But  the  difficulty  which  then  arises  is, 
that  this  line  comes  in  here  without  any  apparent  propriety.  It 
has  no  manner  of  connection  with  the  twelve  previous  lines,  mak- 
ing three  tetrastichs,  and  none  with  the  tetrastich  that  follows. 
The  original  author,  if  he  wished  to  introduce  that  thought,  would 
have  used  a  tetrastich  for  that  purpose.  It  is  evidently  a  litur- 
gical gloss,  and  in  that  case  may  refer  to  the  earthly  temple. 
Doubtless  the  thought  is  an  appropriate  one,  if  it  were  expressed 
in  the  style  and  method  of  the  author  of  the  Ps.  As  Umbreit 
says,  "  Whilst  we  still  hear  the  voice  of  the  Lord  in  the  rushing 
of  the  storm  through  the  forests  stripped  of  their  leaves,  the  poet 
snatches  us  away  at  once  from  the  tumult  of  earth,  and  places  us 
amid  the  choirs  of  the  heavenly  temple,  which  above,  in  a  holy 
silence,  sing  glory  and  praise  to  the  Eternal."  But  the  difficulty 
is  that  this  idea  is  not  clearly  brought  out,  and  the  single  line 
tacked  on  here  is  too  indefinite  to  give  such  a  grand  conception. 

Str.  V.  10-11  describes  Yahweh  on  His  throne  bestowing 
strength  and  blessing  on  His  people  in  a  stairlike  tetrastich.  — 
Yahweh]  is  repeated  four  times,  once  in  each  line,  in  accordance 
with  the  style  of  the  Ps.  —  sat  enthroned'],  historical  aorist. — over 
the  Flood],  so  by  an  easy  emendation  of  a  separable  preposition 
for  an  inseparable  one,  regaining  thereby  the  lost  tone  for  the 


PSALM   XXIX.  255 

measure.  The  inseparable  preposition  might  be  rendered,  "at 
the  Flood  "  RV.  j  but  (3,  3,  give  it  a  local  sense  which  is  more 
probable.  —  will  sit  enthroned^  future,  in  accordance  with  (3,  3, 
which  is  more  probable  than  Pf  with  1  consec,  making  the  second 
use  of  the  vb.  of  the  same  tense  as  the  first,  which  can  hardly  be 
reconciled  with  forever.  There  is  indeed  an  antith.  between  His 
reigning  in  the  past,  at  the  time  of  the  greatest  of  all  traditional 
storms,  the  Flood,  directing  and  controlling  it,  as  He  did  the 
storm  described  above,  and  His  perpetual  reign  in  the  future. 
The  reign  of  Yahweh  is  here  conceived  of  as  on  earth,  and  so  we 
have  an  antistrophe  to  v.1"2,  the  worship  in  the  heavenly  temple. 
Accordingly  as  the  King  of  Israel,  He  giveth  to  His  people  ||  blesseth 
them  with  the  gifts  of  strength  and  peace.  The  storm  has  passed 
away  and  the  last  word  of  the  Ps.  is  peace.  "The  beginning 
of  the  Psalm  shows  us  the  heavens  open  and  the  throne  of  God  in 
the  midst  of  the  angelic  songs  of  praise,  and  the  close  of  the 
Psalm  shows  us  on  earth,  in  the  midst  of  the  angry  voice  of  Yah- 
weh shaking  all  things,  His  people  victorious  and  blessed  with 
peace.  Gloria  in  excelsis  is  the  beginning,  and  pace  in  terris 
the  end."  De. 

1.  ian]  Qal.  imv.  %  am  vb.  Qal:  (1)  give ;  c.  ace.  help,  c.  h  pers.  6o13  = 
10813;  (2)  ascribe  glory;  so  here  and  v.2,  elsw.  96"- 7- 8  =  I  Ch.  i628-28-29; 
cf.  Sy  Dt.  32s.  —  o,L»N  "ua]  as  897  {v.  Intr.  §  36)  =  DVlV*  *oa  angels.  j&,  3, 
adferte  filios  arietum,  D^N  »J3.  <S  has  conflation  of  both  readings.  —  ;;•] 
<g  ri/xi/jv,  cf.  83.  —  2.  iDtf  "fop]  as  662  79°  96s.  —  trip  rn^na]  rn*in  cstr.  of 
I  [n*vvi]  n.f.  (1)  adornment :  c.  tTip  always  in  connection  with  worship,  elsw. 
969  =  1  Ch.  1629  2  Ch.  2021;  cf.  Bhp  mn  Ps.  no3.  Cf.  Tin  v.4,  as  qualifying 
the  thunder  (v.  S6).  <&  has  vhp  nnxna,  in  the  sacred  courts,  i.e.  of  the  temple 
(cf.  (3  of  96s) .  Ps.  967_9a  is  the  same  as  291-2,  except  that  D^DJ?  nviee>D  takes 
the  place  of  d^Sn  ^3,  and  a  line  is  inserted  96s5.  It  should  be  said  that  nvwn 
is  more  suited  to  96°,  and  there  is  no  more  impropriety  in  thinking  of  the  courts 
of  the  heavenly  temple,  where  angels  worship,  than  of  the  heavenly  temple 
itself.  At  the  same  time  there  is  no  usage  to  justify  it.  2  Ch.  2021  justifies 
f§,  and  as  the  more  difficult  reading  it  is  to  be  preferred.  —  3-4.  D*Dn"?j?] 
||  d»31  D>D  hy;  rd.  for  Sp,  *hy  to  get  the  fourth  beat,  and  prefix  Sip  to  mm  in 
v.3c  as  in  4a-6.  Then  rd.  na  ica  for  naa,  and  Tin  1D3  for  Tina,  as  in  v.6.  Sn 
D^jnn  maan  is  a  gl.  explaining  mm  Sip.  —  5.  nat?']  Qal  ptc.  of  continuous  ac- 
tion, breaketh  in  pieces,  possibly  should  be  impf.,  repeated  in  v.55;  but  not 
1  consec.  impf.  after  ptc.  or  impf.,  which  would  make  an  emph.  change  of 
tense  difficult  to  explain;    rather  simple   1   with   impf.  —  pjaSn  mx]    phr. 


256  PSALMS 

10416  +,  cf.  9213;  Sn  »nn  8011.  X  pjaS  n.pr.,  mountain  range  extending  along 
the  coast  of  Syria;  elsw.  v.6,  7216.  —  6.  D-rp-vi]  not  1  consec.,  but  1  coord.; 
c.  Hiph.  impf.  of  npl  with  sf.  3  pi.  referring  to  trees  ;  so  %},  attaching  juaS 
to  next  1.,  but  (3,  U,  make  junV  second  object  of  vb.  vitulum  Libani.  The 
sf.  was  prob.  due  to  disarrangement,  and  should  be  regarded  as  gl.  \  npi  Qal 
*/£*)>,  of  mountains  1 14*- 6.  Hiph.  only  here.  —  lDa]  is  a  separate  word  ;  if  it 
had  been  meant  to  be  attached,  we  should  have  had  Sjya.  —  %  pnfe]  n.pr., 
name  of  Hermon  among  the  Sidonians  ;  cf.  Dt.  39.  —  a^DNn  p]  young  of  the 
yore-oxen,  as->  (v.  22s2).  —  7.  This  v.  stands  so  by  itself  that  it  is  prob.  a  gl. 
of  addition.  —  a**n]  after  nat?  (v.5)  is  become  ptc.  \  32tn  vb.  Qal  /;«?o/  ow/ 
stone  esp.,  metaph.  hezv  in  pieces  Ho.  65;  here  u\v  manS  dub.  because  it  is 
difficult  to  get  divide,  cleave  from  hew  out,  and  there  is  no  justification  in 
usage.  Che.,  Du.,  think  we  must  emend  the  text  by  inserting  the  word  rocks 
and  making  two  lines  here,  the  flames  of  fire,  the  lightning,  being  the  instru- 
ment of  the  cleaving  of  the  rocks.  But  the  effect  of  lightning  upon  rocks  is 
not  that  of  hewing  out.  (3,  Y,  3,  JO,  prob.  rd.  psft  dividing,  but  this  is  not 
a  good  idea.  Better  originally  lmn  man1?  vxn.  This  a  natural  gl.  as  1815  Hb. 
311.  —  u\s  man1']  for  lightning,  also  nanS  #K  10532;  cf.  La.  23.  |  ron1'  n.f. 
flame;  elsw.  \j/  8315  10618.  —  8.  S>n;]  Hiph.  impf.  }  Sin  Qal,  (1)  whirl,  dance, 
969  1147;  (2)  twist,  writhe,  as  in  anguish  55s  7717  97*.  Polel,  (1)  dance  877  ;, 
(2)  writhe,  bring  to  birth,  902 ;  (3)  whirl  about  29°.  (4)  Polal,  &?  brought  fortJi, 
51".  Hiph.  whirl  about  2cfi-8.  3  in  v.8  parturire  faciens,  so  Dr.,  and  in  v.9  ob- 
sletricans  ;  (3  in  v.8  avvaelovTos  and  in  v.9  KarapTL^o^vov,  make  to  whirl  about, 
suited  to  the  wilderness.  — *  Bfy"1]  n.  pr-  only  here  in  \j/,  the  Kadesh  of  the 
wilderness  of  wandering.  —  9.  S^PP]  is  taken  by  ©  as  ptc.  Karapri^ofx^vov,  as 
if  |J3  j  but  it  is  Polel  impf.  in  the  mng.  wAsW  about,  as  above.  —  n"»S»K]  v.  /S3\ 
so  (S  Ad0ous,  3  cervas ;  but  this  not  suited  to  the  context.  Therefore  rd. 
r,sN  terebinths,  Lowth.,  Horsley,  Seeker,  Venema,  Dy.,  Che.,  al.  (||  P"njr 'for- 
ests); elsw.  alw.  single  tree.  —  T^'iT..]  the  )  cannot  be  1  consec,  but  conj.  It 
was,  however,  a  gl.,  for  nvn  Sin  must  be  prefixed  for  measure.  X  t)^n  VD«  Qa^> 
strip,  make  bare,  only  here  in  \f/ ;  cf.  Jo.  I7  of  locusts.  —  n"nj^]  elsw.  pi.  = 
Dnj7\  Jnv^n.m.  (1)  wood,  forest,  wooded  height ;  prob.  7216;  (2)  as  hiding- 
place  for  wild  beasts  5010  8ou  10420  ;  (3)  as  stripped  by  thunderstorm  2(f, 
in  metaph.  of  Yahweh's  judgments  8315;  (4)  trees  of  forest  "»JP  **?  fig-  as  sing- 
ing before  Yahweh  9612  =  1  Ch.  1633  Is.  4423;  np  »7Jr  Ps.  1326  seems  to  be 
n.pr.  =  a">n>  nnp. —  '^S^nai]  used  sometimes  of  heavenly  temple,  sometimes 
of  temple  in  Jerusalem  ;  if  the  former  here,  a  return  to  v.1;  if  the  latter,  a 
general  statement  not  congruous  to  the  context,  and  so  a  gl.  —  iSr]  (3  ttSs  tis, 
rd.  prob.  nsN>  ^d  for  -naa  ncx  iSa  as  in  v.2.  — 10.  3«H  Sins':]  as  ndsS  g5,  sit 
enthroned ;  but  vb.  usually  c.  ace.  or  SjJ.  But  another  word  is  needed  here. 
Du.  *S  Sjrr,  but  >hy  is  sufficient.  J  Sap  elsw.  only  of  the  deluge  Gn.  617  76  + 
911+  io1-82  1110  (P);  therefore  prob.  so  here.  i?DB  regards  the  etymology 
as  dub.  The  historic  reference  to  the  deluge  is  suited  to  a  thunderstorm, 
and  is  antithet.  with  aSi>,L\  —  3":n]  1  consec,  Qal  impf.  of  atf";  it  is  improb- 
able that  this  refers  to  past  also.  Point  )  conj.  and  future  as  3,  3,  Che.,  3S£l. 
It  is  prob.  that  the  order  was,  as  in  the  other  lines,  aeh  nin\ 


PSALM   XXX.  257 


Ps.  30  is  a  thanksgiving:  (1)  exalting  Yahweh  for  raising 
up  the  nation  from  death  (v.24)  ;  (2)  contrasting  the  momen- 
tary anger  of  Yahweh  with  the  lifetime  of  his  favour  (v.6, 8) ; 
(3)  giymg  the  plea  that  had  been  made  for  deliverance  (v.9-11)  j 
in  order  to  the  climax ;  (4)  the  contrast  of  the  previous  mourn- 
ing with  the  present  gladness  expressed  in  festal  dances  and 
songs  of  thanksgiving  (v.12-13) .  The  glosses  (v.3  5- 7)  adapt  the 
Ps.  to  more  general  use. 

T  EXALT  Thee,  Yahweh,  for  Thou  hast  drawn  me  up; 

And  hast  not  let  mine  enemies  be  glad,  even  mitie. 

Yahweh,  out  of  Sheol,  Thou  hast  brought  me  up, 

From  among  them  that  go  down  to  the  Pit,  Thou  hast  quickened  me. 
A    MOMENT  (passeth)  in  anger;  a  lifetime  in  favour; 

At  even  weeping  cometh  in  to  lodge ;  but  in  the  morning  a  shout  of  joy. 

In  favour  Thou  didst  cause  (mine  honour)  to  stand  firm  in  strength ; 

Didst  Thou  hide  Thy  face,  I  became  dismayed. 
TJ  NTO  Thee  I  was  crying,  and  unto  (my  God)  I  was  making  supplication  for  favour : 

"  What  profit  is  there  in  my  blood,  when  I  go  down  to  the  Pit? 

Will  the  dust  praise  Thee,  declare  Thy  faithfulness? 

Hear  and  be  gracious,  become  helper  to  me." 
'THOU  hast  turned  my  mourning  into  dancing  for  me, 

Thou  didst  loose  my  sackcloth  and  gird  me  with  gladness ; 

That  my  glory  might  make  melody  to  Thee  and  not  be  still. 

Yahweh,  my  God,  forever  will  I  give  thanks  to  Thee. 

Ps.  30  was  in  ©  and  later  in  £H  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  A  liturgical  assign- 
ment appears  in  mm  rojn  *vb\  It  is  evident  that  this  cannot  refer  to  the 
house  of  David,  2  S.  511,  as  <gB-  rod  Aaveid  (but  r£  AavelS  <gN.A.R.U). 
the  texts  of  3  also  differ);  or  to  the  site  of  the  temple,  I  Ch.  2i26s<i-  221, 
whether  the  temple  of  Solomon,  or  the  second  temple,  Ezr.  616,  even  if  the 
composition  of  the  Ps.  could  be  put  so  early;  but  it  is  a  liturgical  assignment 
to  the  Feast  of  Dedication,  instituted  by  Judas  Maccabaeus  165  B.C.  to  com- 
memorate the  purification  of  the  temple  after  its  desecration  by  Antiochus 
Epiphanes,  I  Mac.  4s2  8<J-  2  Mac.  iol8i-,  mentioned  as  observed  Jn.  io22.  This 
is  indeed  the  liturgical  use  of  the  Ps.  according  to  Sopherim,  c.  18,  §  2 
(v.  Intr.  §39).  <&  has  also  els  rb  WXos  =  iixjdS  (but  not  in  (gs-A-T).  Such 
an  insertion  would  be  more  difficult  than  its  omission  by  scribal  error.  It  is 
indeed  the  kind  of  Ps.  we  should  expect  to  be  taken  up  into  132ft  (v.  Intr. 
§  33)«  The  Ps.  is  exceedingly  poetic  in  conception  and  also  in  form,  after 
the  glosses  have  been  removed.  It  is  artistic,  arranged  on  the  scheme  of 
s 


258  PSALMS 

four  tones,  four  lines,  and  four  strophes.  The  glosses  v.T  *• "  make  it  more 
appropriate  for  liturgical  use.  The  Ps.  is  national  and  not  individual.  The 
use  of  in  W  v.4,  and  PTW  TV  v.10,  is  not  earlier  than  Ez.,  referring  to  the 
resurrection  of  the  nation  from  the  death  of  the  Exile.  V.8  resembles  i8M; 
v.10,  Is.  3818,  cf.  Ps.  66;  H133,  v.13  =  >rDJ,  characteristic  of  Pss.  7*  169  579  108'2, 
all  33.  V.86  =  I0429a.  V.56=97126;  but  the  latter  is  probably  original,  this 
v.  in  our  Ps.  being  a  gl.  It  is  probable  that  v.60  depends  upon  Is.  547-8; 
and  v.12  upon  Je.  3i1!;  and  therefore  the  Ps.  must  belong  to  the  Restoration; 
then  not  to  the  earlier  days  of  distress  and  trial  from  enemies,  but  to  the 
more  prosperous  times  subsequent  to  Nehemiah,  when  the  nation  had  revived 
and  its  perils  were  past. 

Str.  I.  is  a  tetrastich,  syn.  in  the  first,  third,  and  fourth  lines ; 
but  the  second  line  is  synth.  to  them  all.  —  2-4.  I  exalt  Thee, 
Yahweh],  cf.  Ex.  1521  Ps.  34s,  in  thanksgiving  and  praise;  re- 
sumed in  v.13,  the  last  word  of  the  Ps.  "I  will  give  thanks  to 
Thee,"  thus  enclosing  the  whole  Ps.  within  this  resolution,  making 
it  a  song  of  thanksgiving. — for  Thou  hast  drawn  me  up],  from 
what,  is  not  mentioned  here,  so  that  some  think  of  a  cistern,  or 
pit,  in  accordance  with  Je.  386"13,  misled  by  the  gloss  v.3,  which 
separates  v.2  from  its  syn.  v.4,  where  this  clause  is  taken  up  and 
defined  in  the  clause  :  out  of  Sheol  Thou  hast  brought  me  up; 
the  conception  being  not  of  peril  of  death  to  the  individual  or 
nation,  from  which  Yahweh  had  delivered  him ;  but  of  real  death, 
the  nation  having  in  fact  suffered  death  in  its  exile  and  gone 
down  into  Sheol,  the  abode  of  the  nations  destroyed  by  their 
conquerors,  in  accordance  with  the  conception  of  Ez.  37.  This 
is  also  sustained  by  the  constant  usage  of  the  phrase :  them 
that  go  down  to  the  Pit],  referring  to  conquered  nations  de- 
scending to  the  Pit  in  Sheol,  under  the  wrath  of  God  against 
them  as  His  enemies  and  the  enemies  of  His  people.  And 
accordingly  we  must  render  the  parallel  Hebrew  word,  not  "  kept 
me  alive  "  EV8.,  but  quickened,  restored  to  life,  revived  ;  referring 
to  the  nation  in  exile,  already  dead  in  Sheol.  This  Str.  has  an 
unusual  kind  of  parall.,  in  that  the  two  lines  of  v.4  are  syn.  with 
v.2a  whereas  v.26  is  synth.  not  only  to  v.2a  but  also  to  v.4  as  well. 
—  And  hast  not  let  mine  enemies  be  glad"],  because  of  the  final 
overthrow  and  death  of  the  Jewish  people.  —  even  mine],  empha- 
sising the  enemies  as  personal  enemies  to  the  nation.  "  Over  me," 
EV8.,  is  indeed  implied  in  the  sentence,  but  is  not  expressed,  and 


PSALM   XXX.  259 

certainly  is  not  a  proper  translation  of  the  original,  which  I  have 
rendered  as  above. 

3.  Yahweh,  my  God,  I  cried  unto  Thee  for  help,  and  Thou 
didst  heal  me~\.  This  is  a  pentameter  line  in  the  midst  of  tetram- 
eters, and  is  difficult  to  adjust  to  the  other  lines  in  any  scheme  of 
parall.  It  mars  the  beauty  of  the  parall.  as  stated  above.  It  adds 
a  line  to  a  Str.  already  complete  without  it.  It  interrupts  the 
harmony  of  the  thanksgiving  and  is  doubtless  a  gloss.  It  reminds 
us  of  63  Is.  389"20,  both  of  which  were  probably  in  the  mind  of  the 
editor,  who  conceived  that  a  petition  introduced  here  would  be 
more  suited  for  public  prayer. 

5.  This  verse  is  a  trimeter  couplet,  a  call  to  the  pious  to  make 
melody  in  temple  worship. 

Make  melody  to  Yahweh,  ye  pious, 

And  give  thanks  in  a  sacred  commemoration  of  Him. 

It  is  an  anticipation  of  v.13,  and  the  second  line  probably  a  cita- 
tion from  97125.  —  in  a  sacred  commemoration].  This  is  more  in 
accordance  with  Hebrew  usage  than  "  remembrance  of  His  holi- 
ness," PBV.,  AV.,  although  favoured  by  (3,  3.  This  couplet  is  a 
liturgical  addition,  disturbing  the  order  of  thought,  the  measure 
and  the  strophical  organisation. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  two  couplets,  the  first  syn.,  the  second 
antith.,  but  so  that  the  antith.  really  extends  to  that  which  is 
already  given  in  the  antith.  halves  of  the  two  syn.  lines  of  the 
previous  couplet.  —  6.  A  moment'],  a  single  moment  of  time,  the 
briefest  time  that  is  known  to  usage. —  (passeth)  in  anger].  So 
brief  is  Yahweh's  anger  against  His  people ;  antith.  with  a  lifetime, 
a  long  life  in  favour],  so  long  does  His  favour  towards  them  last. 
All  this  is  relative  and  may  be  compared  to  Ps.  904,  where  God's 
measurement  of  time  is  so  different  from  that  of  men.  It  is  a 
nation's  experience  the  psalmist  has  in  mind,  doubtless  that  given 
in  Is.  547-8,  where  the  prophet  describes  Yahweh's  dealings  with 
Zion  {v.  Br.MP398s(J-) 

For  a  small  moment  have  I  forsaken  thee:  but  with  great  compassion  will  I 

gather  thee. 
Tn  a  gush  of  wrath  I  hid  my  face  from  thee  for  a  moment; 
But  with  everlasting  kindness  I  have  compassion  on  thee,  saith  Yahweh  thy 

Redeemer. 


260  PSALMS 

—  Weeping],  personified  as  a  traveller,  a  messenger  from  Yah- 
weh,  parallel  with  anger,  cometh  in  to  lodge  as  a  guest  to  pass  the 
night,  when  the  day  is  over,  at  even  ;  but  another  traveller  is  also 
on  the  way  from  Yahweh  as  a  messenger  of  favour.  He  comes 
with  the  break  of  day,  in  the  morning.  He  is  a  shout  of  joy,  and 
this  guest  comes  to  stay.  The  last  antithesis  is  taken  up  first  in 
its  application  to  the  salvation  of  the  nation.  —  8.  In  favour], 
the  favour  of  Yahweh  extended  to  the  nation  through  its  long 
history  prior  to  the  Exile. —  Thou  didst  cause  to  stand  firm].  As 
Ps.  1834  king  David  on  the  high  places  of  the  battle-field,  so  here 
the  nation.  —  mine  honour],  as  (3,  U,  5.  The  honour  of  the 
nation  was  in  peril  through  the  attacks  of  the  enemy.  Yahweh 
had  restored  that  honour  by  bringing  them  back  from  exile,  and 
had  made  it  to  stand  firm  against  repeated  assaults.  —  in  strength  ], 
adverbial  accusative  intensifying  the  idea  of  the  vb.  \  so  as  to  re- 
sist all  enemies.  AV.,  RV.,  attach  strength  to  the  "  mountain  "  in 
the  rendering  "  made  my  mountain  to  stand  strong,"  as  essentially 
3,  PBV.  j  similarly  "  established  strength  for  my  mountain  "  Dr. 
"  Perhaps  '  Thou  didst  place  a  fortress  upon  my  mountain  '  "  Pe. 
"  Zion,  strong  by  position  and  art,  may  be  thought  of,  partly  in 
itself,  partly  as  an  emblem  of  the  Davidic  kingdom  "  Kirk.  The 
variant  readings  of  Vrss.  and  interpreters  make  the  exact  meaning 
of  the  passage  doubtful.  In  antith.  to  "  showing  favour  "  is  the 
alternative,  Didst  Thou  hide  Thy  face],  in  disfavour,  during  the 
moment  of  anger.  —  I  became  dismayed],  in  the  night  of  weep- 
ing, v.6b. 

7.  An  editor  inserts  here  as  above  v.3-5  a  pentameter  line. — 
7,  on  my  part,  said  in  my  ease :  I  shall  never  be  moved].  This 
disturbs  the  strophical  organisation,  the  beautiful  parall.  of  the 
Str.,  as  well  "as  the  measure.  The  author  thinks  of  a  careless, 
sinful  ease,  because  of  continued  prosperity ;  and  of  the  presump- 
tuous assurance  that  this  would  continue  forever;  and  that  the 
people  would  never  be  shaken  or  disturbed  from  their  strong  situ- 
ation. This  doubtless  was  an  experience  not  uncommon,  stated 
in  order  to  be  rejected  in  public  prayer ;  but  it  is  difficult  to  see 
what  connection  it  has  with  the  fine  antitheses  of  this  Str. 

Str.  III.  is  synth.  throughout. — 9.  Unto  Thee],  emphatic,  un- 
necessarily defined  by  Yahweh  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  — 


PSALM   XXX.  26l 

my  God],  so  (3,  for  which  J^  substitutes  Adonay,  which  is  not 
so  probable.  —  /  was  crying  ||  /  was  making  supplication  for 
favour],  both  imperfects  referring  to  the  past  experience,  and 
therefore  frequentatives  implying  oft-repeated  importunate  prayer. 
This  is  referred  to  in  this  Str.  in  order  to  the  strong  statements 
of  its  antistr.  It  was  only  implied  in  the  first  Str.  The  remain- 
ing lines  now  give  the  contents  of  that  pleading.  — 10.  What 
profit  is  there],  what  advantage  or  benefit  of  any  kind?  implying 
a  negative  answer.  —  in  my  blood],  my  death  by  bloodshed;  in 
the  defeat  and  slaughter  of  the  battle-field,  or  of  the  capture  of 
the  city  and  extermination  of  its  inhabitants.  —  When  I  go  down 
to  the  Pit],  syn.  v.4  referring  to  the  Pit  in  Sheol.  The  profitless- 
ness  of  this  is  set  forth  in  the  expostulation  :  Will  the  dust], 
those  whose  bodies  have  returned  to  dust,  praise  Thee,  in  the 
ritual  worship  of  the  temple  service  as  66  Is.  3818.  This  is  not  an 
absolute  denial  of  the  possibility  of  the  dead  praising  God.  The 
nation  is  meant  here  and  not  the  individual.  It  is  the  national 
ritual  worship  that  would  cease  if  the  nation  perished.  —  declare 
Thy  faithfulness],  in  Pss.  of  thanksgiving ;  the  faithfulness  of  Yah- 
weh  to  His  covenant  and  His  people.  The  prayer  now  changes 
from  negative  expostulation  to  positive  entreaty.  — 11.  Hear  and 
be  gracious,  become  helper  to  me],  by  delivering  me  from  the 
deadly  peril. 

Str.  IV.  is  an  antistr.,  composed  of  two  syn.  couplets.  — 12.  The 
first  couplet  reminds  us  of  that  of  the  second  Str.,  with  which 
it  is  parall.  The  same  antith.  is  drawn.  —  my  mourning  ||  my 
sackcloth],  the  garment  of  sorrow  and  especially  of  mourning  for 
the  dead.  Mourning  is  appropriate  here,  because  of  the  situation 
of  the  nation,  mourning  over  the  death  of  a  great  portion  of  the 
population.  Those  remaining  in  exile,  while  capable  of  mourning, 
still  felt  that  their  nation  was  dead.  Over  against  this,  dancing  || 
gladness,  imply  a  festival  in  celebration  of  a  national  deliverance. 
This  transformation  has  been  accomplished  by  Yahweh.  —  Thou 
hast  turned  for  me  ||  Thou  didst  loose  ||  gird  me].  The  psalmist 
probably  had  in  mind  that  great  prophecy  of  the  Restoration  of 
Zion,  Je.  30-31,  and  especially  3113 :  "Then  the  virgin  will  rejoice 
in  the  dance,  and  the  young  men  and  old  men  together :  and  I 
will  change  their  mourning  into  joy  and  I  will  comfort  them,  and 


262  PSALMS 

cause  them  to  rejoice  more  than  their  sorrow"  (v.  Br.MP247sq). 
This  prediction  of  Jeremiah  had  been  fulfilled  in  the  experience 
of  the  people,  and  has  its  recognition  in  their  thanksgiving. — 
13.  This  transformation  had  a  purpose,  and  indeed  the  same  one 
that  the  people  had  so  much  at  heart  in  their  expostulation  with 
Yahweh  v.106 :  might  ?nake  melody  to  Thee~\  with  songs  in  the 
temple  and  synagogue ;  ||  give  thanks  to  Thee,  in  the  Hallels  of 
worship  (7/.  Intr.  §  35).  —  fny  glory\t  the  name  for  the  soul  as  the 
seat  in  man  of  honour  and  glory,  peculiar  to  33,  7°  169  57s  1082. 
—  not  be  still\  or  silent;  but  keeping  these  songs  of  praise  ever 
resounding,  and  so,  forever.  —  Yahweh  is  here  claimed  by  the 
people  most  appropriately  as  their  own  personal  God ;  my  God. 
The  Ps.  closes  as  it  began  with  thanksgiving. 


2.  nDD>nK]  Polel  impf. ;  present,  not  future  of  resolution.  —  "^,l?"!]  Pi. 
proper  perfect  t  rh^  vb.  Qal,  draw  water  Ex.  216-19-19;  counsel,  from  mind 
Pr.  205;  cf.  26*.  Pi.  draw  out  or  up,  prob.  from  Sheol,  so  here  ;  cf.  v.4. 
— >{?  *2\*]  ,l?  strengthens  the  sf.  of  »3^H  and  does  not  go  with  the  vb. — 
3.  viSm  nvn]  as  v.13;  seldom  in  \f/t  style  of  D.  or  late  (v.  y2).  This  1.  is  a 
pentameter  and  doubtless  a  gl.  —  4.  P^Sgn]  Hipf.,  proper  perfect  c.  p,  as 
403  7120  81".  "?W  (v.  (?).—  *tf»j]  =  me,  v.  J*.  — ^n«n]  Pi.  pf.  (v.  22^), 
c.  fO  pregnant,  implying  deliverance.  —  "va  »"Vfl»]  Kt.,  <&,  U,  O,  Sb,  Horsley, 
Bo.,  Dr.,  Kau.,  as  281  1437  (v.  716) ;  better  than  Qr.,  2,  3,  £,  Houb.,  *-nj  inf. 
cstr.,  sf.  1  s.  for  usual  ^rn~\^  v.10,  which  is  improbable.  This  1.  is  a  trimeter. 
A  word  has  fallen  out.  This  is  prob.  'tfw  at  close  of  line  for  rhyme.  — 
5.  ^ihp  n:?]  =  9712  [v.  6s)  commemoration.  This  v.  is  a  trimeter  couplet, 
a  liturgical  gl.  — 6.  "o]  causal,  prob.  not  original,  but  an  interpretation.  The 
new  Str.  is  more  independent  of  the  previous  Str.  —  pr>]  a  moment  of  time, 
v.  611.  —  ^N3]  during  His  anger  {v.  2s).  Suffix  of  3  sg.  is  strange  ;  it  is  an 
interpretation  due  to  the  gls.  v.5-  7,  originally  without  sf.  ;  so  in  ||  Uflna.  — 
|^j]  should  be  attached  by  Makkeph  to  'M.  —  7.    'jm]  emph.  before  ^mDN. 

—  mSbt]  sf.  1  sg.  flStf  n.[m.]  ease,  a.X.,  cf.  mSef  I227  same;  ^Stf  pi.  cstr. 
tStf  7312.  This  v.  is  a  pentameter,  if  not  prose,  and  is  a  gl.  —  8.  mrr]  is  a 
gl.,  making  1.  too  long.  Its  insertion  was  due  to  previous  gl.  —  Tirana]  emph. 
in  position,  a  resumption  of  v.6.     Prob.  the  sf.  is  here  also  an  interpretation. 

—  "IVipjn]  Hiph.  pf.  2  m.  fully  written  of  id?.  — fp  T)0^]«  ®  makes  t;  the 
object  of  vb.  and  renders  irapdax0XJ  Suvafj.iv,  so  3  posuisti  fortitudinem.  But 
they  differ  as  to  the  indirect  object:  the  former  t£  KdWei  /juov  =  mn,  so  ,S, 
U,  Thou  didst  prepare  strength  for  my  majesty  (either  of  king  or  of  people)  ; 
the  latter,  monti  meo  —  '"VjnS  as  $?,  i.e.  Zion  as  the  firm,  sure  refuge  of  the 
people  of  God.  Ham.,  Houb.,  Lowth,  Horsley,  al.,  follow  <S  ;  Dr.,  Ba\,  al.,  |^. 
But  C  has  hast  made  me  stand  firm  on  the  strong  mountains,  pointing  "?nri ; 


PSALM   XXXI.  263 

so  Dy.,  Hu.,  Kau.  The  difficulty  with  |^  is  the  failure  of  an  object  for  the 
vb.  and  the  use  of  the  prep.  V  for  *??.  The  prep,  may,  however,  be  a  scribal 
interpretation.  O  is  less  difficult  and  intrinsically  more  prob.  For  nn  v.  8s  ; 
cf.  1499  for  honour  or  glory  of  saints.  —  q\jn  rnnpn]  hypothetical  clause  (v. 
jo11).  —  9.  T*?n]  emph.  ||  uin  Sn.  This  divine  name  improb. ;  <3  has  <h* 
(v.  Intr.  §§  32,  36).  —  mm]  is  a  gl.  —  KnpK]  Qal  impf.  (v.  j5),  ||  ^nrs;]  Hithp. 
(v.  42),  as  142*2,  frequentative  of  importunate  petition.  — 10.  ~rr_]  indirect 
question  expecting  a  negative  answer,  as  85  II3.  —  $P!$]  n.m.  unjust  gain  ; 
elsw.  11936,  cf.  jnsa  io3. — 11.  mm]  twice  in  this  v.;  unnecessary  gls.,  de- 
stroying the  measure.  —  'S  "try]  =  54s,  Qal  ptc.  n?;\ — 12.  n?DH]  Qal  pf.  2  m. 
either  aorist  or  proper  pf.  J  rpri  vb.  Qal :  (1)  turn,  change,  transform,  c.  ace. 
414  10525;  (2)  /w«  m/<?,  c.  double  ace.  H48;  c.  ace.  +  S  3012  666  7844,  cf. 
10529;  (3)  /«r»  back  789  Ju.  2039  2  K.  526.  Niph.  turn  aside  Ps.  78s7;  pass. 
be  turned  into  324.  —  f -12D2]  n.m.  wailing:  (1)  for  the  dead  Gn.  5010  (J) 
Zc.  1210;  (2)  for  calamity  Am.  516- 16- 17  Mi.  I8-  n  Je.  48s8  Ez.  2731,  anticipated 
Je.  626  Est.  43;  (3)  in  contrition  Is.  2212  Jo.  212  Zc.  I211-  n;  (4)  in  general ; 
indef.  here.  —  t^nn]  n.m.  dancing ;  elsw.  Je.  3i4-13  La.  516;  sacred  dance 
Ps.  1493  1504.  —  \  pr]  n.m.  sackcloth,  used  in  mourning  and  penitence  ;  elsw. 
3513  6912.  — 13.    "Vos]  for  H133  my  glory  —  soul,  as  169. 


PSALM   XXXI.,  5  str.  56. 

Ps.  31  is  a  prayer:  (1)  importunate  plea  for  deliverance  of 
the  people  from  national  enemies  (v.2-5)  ;  (2)  confidence  in  the 
deliverance  as  already  accomplished  (v.69)  ;  (3)  petition  based  on 
complaint  of  abandonment  (v.10-13)  ;  (4)  confidence,  with  prayer 
for  salvation  (v.  14"17)  ;  (5)  praise  of  Yahweh  for  the  salvation 
(v.20-21-23"24").  There  are  liturgical  glosses  (v.22- 246"25)  and  a  gloss 
of  imprecation  (v.18-19). 

TN  Thee,  Yahweh,  I  seek  refuge;  let  me  never  be  shamed,  O  rescue  me ; 

In  Thy  righteousness  bow  down  Thine  ear  unto  me,  speedily  deliver  me  ; 

Be  Thou  to  me  a  rock  of  stronghold,  a  house  of  fortress  to  save  me  ; 

For  Thou  art  my  crag  and  my  fortress,  therefore  lead  me  and  guide  me  ; 

Bring  me  forth  out  of  the  net  they  privily  laid  for  me  ;  for  Thou  art  my  stronghold. 
TNTO  Thy  hand  (Yahweh)  I  commit  my  spirit  ;  Thou  hast  ransomed  me. 

Yahweh,  God  of  faithfulness,  them  that  regard  false  idols  /hate  ; 

I  will  rejoice  and  will  be  glad  in  Thy  kindness ;  and  I,  on  my  part,  unto  Thee  do 
/  trust ; 

Thou  who  dost  see  mine  affliction,  dost  know  the  destitution  of  my  soul  ; 

And  hast  not  delivered  me  up  into  the  hand  of  the  enemy,  in  a  broad  place  hast 
made  firm  my  foot. 
jD  E  gracious  to  me,  Yahweh ,  for  /  am  in  distress  ;  wastes  away  my  soul  and  my  body, 

B'or  consumed  in  sorrow  is  my  life,  my  years  in  (my)  groaning; 


264  PSALMS 

My  strength  doth  fail  in  mine  affliction,  and  my  bones  waste  away  because  of 

my  distress ; 
I  am  become  a  terror  to  mine  acquaintance,  in  the  street  they  flee  from  me  ; 
As  a  dead  man  out  of  mind  am  /  forgotten,  like  a  lost  vessel  am  /. 
■pOR  the  defaming  of  many,  terror  all  around  me  /  hear  ; 

While  they  consult  together  against  me,  devise  to  take  my  life, 
I,  on  my  part,  upon  Thee  do  trust;  Yahweh,  Thou  art  my  God. 
In  Thy  hand  are  my  times ;  from  the  hand  of  mine  enemy  and  pursuer  deliver  me. 
O  let  Thy  face  shine  upon  Thy  servant ;  in  Thy  kindness  give  me  victory. 
C\  HOW  great  is  Thy  goodness  (Yahweh),  which  Thou  hast  treasured  up  for  them 

that  fear  Thee  I 
(Which)  Thou  hast  done  before  the  sons  of  men,  for  them  that  seek  refuge  in 

Thee! 
Thou  treasurest  them  in  a  shelter  from  the  harshness  of  men ;  Thou  hidest 

them  in  the  covert  of  Thy  presence. 
I,  on  my  part,  said  in  mine  alarm  :  I  am  (driven  away)  from  before  Thine  eye. 
Nevertheless,  Thou  didst  hear  the  voice  of  my  supplication,  when  I  cried  for 

help  unto  Thee. 

Ps.  31  was  in  Q  and  £H  and  QE  {v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  &  adds 
iKaTaaeus,  doubtless  due  to  iv  ttj  iKa-rda-ei  /xov,  v.23.  The  comparison  of  this 
with  1  S.  2320  led  to  the  association  of  the  Ps.  with  that  incident  in  David's 
life.  The  Ps.  has  an  unusual  number  of  passages  showing  connection  with 
other  Pss.  and  prophecies.  It  has  also  lost  its  original  metrical  and  strophical 
form.  This  is  due  to  many  glosses,  partly  explanatory,  partly  marginal  refer- 
ences, partly  liturgical.  (1)  V.2_4a  are  essentially  the  same  as  711-3,  a  Ps. 
which  is  a  late  mosaic  without  title.  Doubtless  our  Ps.  gives  the  original. 
(2)  V.7a  is  essentially  the  same  as  Jon.  29a,  and  v.23*1  is  the  same  as  Jon.  2,,a, 
where,  indeed,  the  correct  text  is  preserved.  Jon.  2  is  a  mosaic  Ps.  also,  and 
doubtless  our  Ps.  gives  the  original.  (3)  V.4a  may  be  compared  with  183, 
v.9  with  182034;  undoubtedly  18  is  original  and  31  dependent.  (4)  V.5  is 
similar  to  916,  v.8  to  910.14  io1;  probably  31  is  dependent  on  that  Ps.  also. 
(5)  V'16  may  be  compared  with  Is.  33s  in  its  use  of  niTJJ;  v.21  with  Is.  404  in 
its  use  of  the  word  D»D3^;  and  v.20  with  Is.  631  in  its  use  of  3ito  :n.  Is.2  is 
earlier.  (6)  V.11  seems  to  be  based  on  Je.  2018,  and  v.18  in  its  use  of  IDT  on 
Je.  also;  cf.  Je.  814  482  4926  5030  516,  and  v.19  in  its  use  of  dSn  on  Ez.  3^  2427 
3J22'  (7)  v-14  was  derived  from  Je.  2010.  (8)  V.236  is  similar  to  282,  and 
probably  derived  from  it.  (9)  Moreover,  there  are  a  number  of  uses  of  other 
passages  in  what  seem  to  be  glosses,  v.46  from  23s,  v.106  from  68;  v.22,  cf.  44  177 
in  the  phr.  iDn  loSon,  and  6011  in  the  phr.  mxD  n>p3.  V.25  is  derived  from 
2714.  (10)  V.6  in  its  use  of  nn  for  WM  is  not  early.  (11)  The  high  priest's 
blessing,  Nu.  625,  underlies  v.17,  as  Pss.  47  672  8o4-  8-20  11827  119135.  (12)  V.11 
ro  Sea  elsw.  Ne.  44  La.  i14.  (13)  V.12  *S  nc-in  n>n,  as  794  8942  10926,  is 
probably  a  gloss.  The  author  certainly  knew  Je.,  Is.,  Ez.,  and  many  Pss. 
of  the  Persian  period.  We  cannot  put  the  composition  earlier  than  the 
troubles  of  Israel  preceding  the  reforms  of  Nehemiah.  The  Ps.  is  national 
and  not  individual.     It  is  a  lamentation  reminding  us  of  22,  69.     It  is  hex- 


PSALM   XXXI.  265 

ameter  in  three  parts,  v.2-9,  v.10-17,  v.20~21  2&"24a;  the  first  and  second  of  two 
pentastichs  each,  the  last  of  a  single  pentastich.  Undoubtedly  v.10-19  seem 
inconsistent  with  v.6"9-  2°-24,  as  Kirk,  says,  and  might  be  a  later  insertion. 
They  can  only  be  explained  as  a  resumption  of  the  thought  of  v.2-5  on  the 
principle  of  strophical  parallelism.  In  favour  of  their  originality  is  the 
rhyming  in  i  which  runs  through  v.10-19  as  well  as  v.2-9,  changed  to  a  rhyme 
in  ka  in  v.20"21- 23. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  five  syn.  lines  rhyming  in  i. — 2-3.  In 

Thee,  Yahweh],  emphatic  in  position.  —  /  seek  refuge'],  from 
enemies,  as  usual.  —  let  7Tie  never  be  shamed],  put  to  shame  in 
defeat  by  enemies,  cf.  v.18.  —  O  rescue  me],  earnest  entreaty,  im- 
plying real  peril  from  enemies ;  ||  deliver  me  ||  save  me.  —  In  Thy 
righteousness],  not  ethical,  but  redemptive,  vindicatory  of  the 
cause  of  His  people,  as  usual  in  Pss.  and  Is.2.  —  bow  down  Thine 
ear  unto  me],  listening  to  my  plea,  in  response  to  my  prayer. — 
speedily],  there  is  need  of  haste;  delay  is  perilous. — Be  Thou 
to  me  a  rock  of  stronghold],  a  rock  serving  as  a  stronghold, 
affording  strength  for  defence  against  the  enemy,  cf.  Is.  1710, 
||  house  of  fortress],  a  house  fortified  so  as  to  serve  as  a  fortress. 
These  terms  are  repeated  singly  in  the  parall.  of  the  subsequent 
lines,  where  what  is  begged,  is  stated  as  a  fact.  —  4-5.  For  Thou 
art  my  crag],  syn.  term  to  "rock,"  ||  my  fortress  and  my  strong- 
hold. Thus  far  the  Ps.  is  quoted  in  essentially  the  same  language 
in  Ps.  7 11"3.  Apparently  a  new  thought  begins  with  v.45,  therefore 
lead  me  and  guide  me].  This  is  favoured  by  the  insertion  of  the 
gloss  from  2^,  for  Thy  name's  sake,  which  gives  it  a  more  general 
reference  to  safe  guidance  through  perilous  places.  But  really 
the  preceding  as  well  as  the  subsequent  context  implies  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  plea  for  deliverance ;  and  inasmuch  as  the  guid- 
ance is  connected  with  Yahweh  as  the  fortress,  we  must  think  of 
a  leading  and  guiding  to  this  fortress,  and  so  we  get  a  suitable 
transition  to  the  clause:  Bring  me  forth  out  of  the  net].  The 
peril  is  conceived  as  a  net,  or  a  snare  which  the  enemies  privily 
laid,  as  in  916,  by  their  intrigues  and  treachery,  out  of  which  Yah- 
weh alone  can  give  an  escape  by  taking  them  out  and  conducting 
them  to  a  sure  refuge. 

Str.  II.  is  an  antistr.  to  the  first  Str.    It  is  a  pentastich  of  intro- 
verted parall.     The  first  line  is  a  strong  statement  of  confidence 


266  PSALMS 

in  Yahweh,  followed  by  an  antith.  couplet,  emphasising  the  relation 
of  mutual  faithfulness  between  Yahweh  and  His  people,  in  order 
to  mediate  the  advance  in  confidence,  of  the  final  couplet. — 
6.  Into  Thy  hand],  as  a  sacred  trust. —  Yahweh']  is  required  by 
the  measure  in  the  first  line,  and  emphasised  by  Yahweh,  God  of 
faithfulness,  in  the  second  ;  because  it  was  just  this  faithfulness 
of  God  to  His  people,  in  covenant  relation  with  Him,  that  was 
the  basis  of  confidence.  —  I  commit  my  spirit].  The  extreme  peril 
of  the  previous  Str.  is  now  summed  up  in  the  peril  of  death. 
The  nation,  ready  to  perish,  entrusts  to  Yahweh  its  spirit,  as  that 
imperishable  part  which  continues  to  exist  in  spite  of  every  peril 
to  the  body,  even  if  it  should  be  laid  in  the  grave.  In  the  most 
desperate  condition  of  national  depression,  even  in  death  and 
the  grave,  Yahweh  will  faithfully  keep  Israel's  trust.  Cf.  Is.  38™. 
These  words,  expressing  the  experience  of  the  nation  in  extreme 
peril,  were  especially  appropriate  to  Jesus  when  dying  on  the 
cross,  Lk.  2346,  and  have  also  been  found  appropriate  in  all  ages 
to  pious  individuals,  such  as  Polycarp,  Bernard,  Luther ;  for  the 
generic  experiences  of  Israel  were,  in  the  unfolding  of  the  divine 
purpose  of  redemption,  preparatory  to  the  personal  experiences 
of  individuals.  This  firm  and  unwavering  trust  has  its  immediate 
reward  in  the  certitude  of  salvation,  which  comes  at  once,  enabling 
the  psalmist  to  say  :  Thou  hast  redeemed  me].  The  PBV.  "  For 
Thou  hast  redeemed  me,"  as  if  it  were  a  reason  for  the  trust,  is 
an  interpretation  which  has  no  justification  in  J^  or  ancient  Vrss. 
—  7-9.  them  that  regard  false  idols],  cited  Jon.  29,  evidently  refers 
to  idolaters,  worshipping  idols  who  are  not  real  beings,  but  unreal 
and  false  to  their  worshippers.  This  meaning  is  obscured  by  the 
too  general  and  indefinite  rendering  "  lying  vanities,"  AV.,  RV. 
PBV.,  "superstitious  vanities,"  is  better.  —  /  hate],  Jfy  as  the 
rhyme,  and  antith.  with  "  do  I  trust "  require  ;  although  (3,  3,  5k, 
followed  by  many  scholars,  have  "  Thou  hatest,"  thinking  of  God 
as  the  subject.  —  I  will  rejoice,  strengthened  by  and  I  will  be  glad, 
as  often  in  the  style  of  the  Ps.,  cf.  v.3486+;  both,  as  the  antith. 
implies,  to  be  interpreted  of  the  public  worship  of  Yahweh  with 
songs  of  praise.  —  In  Thy  kindness],  antith.  with  the  idols,  is 
interpreted  by  Jon.  29  as  a  name  of  God  ;  made  possible  by  a 
change  of  the   suffix,   which    prevents    that   interpretation    here. 


PSALM   XXXI.  267 

At  the  same  time  the  reality  and  the  faithfulness  of  Yahweh  in 
His  kindness  is  invoked  over  against  the  unreality  and  unreliable- 
ness  of  the  idols.  —  And  I  on  my  part ']  emphasises  the  personal 
character  and  the  fact.  —  unto  Thee  do  I  trust '].  The  justifica- 
tion for  this  trust  is  given  in  the  closing  couplet  in  a  progressive 
relative  clause  :  Thou  who  dost  see  ||  dost  know],  the  practical, 
personal,  interested,  and  redemptive  seeing  and  knowing,  which 
advances,  therefore,  on  the  negative  side  into ;  hast  not  delivered 
me  up  into  the  hand  of  the  enemy,  who  had  brought  the  nation 
into  this  extreme  peril ;  explained  in  the  previous  line  as  mine 
affliction  ||  destitution  of  my  soul;  summing  up  the  more  con- 
crete representations  of  the  first  Str.  —  On  the  positive  side,  the 
climax  is  attained  in  the  statement,  in  a  broad  place],  over  against 
the  narrow  place,  the  straits,  the  net,  in  which  they  had  been 
trapped  by  their  enemies.  —  hast  made  firm  my  foot],  to  stand 
firm,  as  182034,  so  as  not  to  be  shaken,  or  displaced  from  the 
position  it  had  taken ;  implying,  therefore,  the  defeat  of  the 
enemy  and  the  victory  of  the  people. 

Str.  III.  is  a  syn.  pentastich,  heaping  up  terms  to  describe  the 
miserable  condition  of  the  nation.  It  is  certainly  out  of  harmony 
with  the  previous  Str.,  which  is  so  firm  and  assured  in  its  certitude 
of  deliverance.  This  can  only  be  explained  on  the  principle  of 
the  parall.  of  Hebrew  Poetry,  which  extends  to  the  strophes  as 
well  as  the  lines  (v.  Intr.  §  12  D).  The  psalmist  goes  back  to  the 
experiences  described  in  the  first  Str.  in  order  to  strengthen  the 
confidence  in  God  expressed  in  its  antistr.  In  the  first  Str. 
the  emphasis  was  laid  upon  the  place  of  refuge,  with  the  peril  in 
the  background  ;  here  the  peril  itself  is  described  in  detail,  the 
whole  introduced  by  the  single  word  of  prayer  :  10.  Be  gracious 
to  me,  Yahweh'].  All  the  rest  of  the  Str.  is  embraced  under  the 
clause  giving  the  reason  for  the  plea,  for  I  am  in  distress.  This 
general  statement  is  broken  up  into  a  number  of  specifications.  — 
wastes  away],  a  term  used  elsewhere  only  v.11  68,  implying  the 
image  of  the  moth  eating  away  garments.  The  proper  subject  of 
the  vb.  is  the  comprehensive,  my  soul  and  my  body,  comprehend- 
ing the  entire  man,  his  entire  nature ;  but  the  influence  of  68  has 
brought  into  the  text  its  own  phr.,  mine  eye  in  vexation,  which 
makes  the  line  just  these  words  too  long.  — 11.    For  consumed  is 


268  PSALMS 

my  life'],  in  the  sense  of  lifetime,  as  is  shown  by  the  comple- 
mentary, my  years.  The  cause  of  this  consuming  away,  which 
is  syn.  with  the  previous  "  wastes  away,"  is  expressed  in  the 
complementary  terms,  in  sorrow,  in  my  groaning.  It  is  necessary 
to  add  the  second  suffix  here,  because  of  the  rhyme.  Ancient 
copyists  left  it  off,  as  unnecessary  to  the  sense.  —  in  mine  afflic- 
tion], so  <£,  IT,  2,  in  accordance  with  v.8,  which  is  better  suited  to 
the  context  than  "  in  mine  iniquity  "  of  JLf ,  3,  followed  by  EV8., 
which  has  nothing  to  suggest  it  in  the  context,  though  doubtless 
it  made  the  Ps.  more  appropriate  for  public  worship.  —  my 
strength  doth  fail],  strictly,  stumble  over  an  obstacle,  implying 
such  a  loss  of  strength  that  the  man  instead  of  walking  steadily 
along,  stumbles  and  staggers  in  his  gait.  This  is  intensified  by  a 
reversion  to  the  first  line  of  the  tristich,  on  the  principle  of  inclu- 
sion.—  and  my  bones  waste  away],  the  bones  for  the  framework 
of  the  body.  This  favours  the  opinion  that  we  should  read  here, 
because  of  my  distress,  the  same  word  as  v.10a,  which  in  the  original 
Hebrew  so  much  resembles  the  word  translated  "  mine  adver- 
saries," that  this  interpretation  may  be  easily  explained,  especially 
in  view  of  the  gloss  which  follows.  In  any  case  the  "  all "  is,  as 
quite  frequently  in  the  Pss.,  an  intensifying  insertion,  making  the 
measure  less  easy.  — 12.  /  am  become  a  terror  to  mine  acquaint- 
ance], so  the  original  read,  in  all  probability ;  the  acquaintance 
being  the  friendly  peoples,  a  thought  which  we  may  compare  with 
Is-  531"3-  This  received  an  interpretative  gloss  in  terms  of  later 
Pss.  794  8q42  ioq25,  "a  reproach  and  unto  my  neighbours  exceed- 
ingly." This  can  hardly  be  adapted  to  the  measures  or  the  stroph- 
ical  organisation  of  the  Ps.,  and  indeed,  in  itself,  is  difficult 
to  explain  satisfactorily,  unless  we  suppose  with  many  scholars 
that  "  exceedingly,"  although  sustained  by  (S>,  J,  is  a  copyist's 
error  for  some  such  word  as  "  fear,"  "  wagging  of  head,"  or  "  con- 
tention," readings  suggested  by  various  scholars.  But  this  diffi- 
culty reenforces  the  other  reasons  for  regarding  it  as  a  gloss. — 
in  the  street  they  flee  from  me].  These  are  doubtless  the  same 
persons  as  those  mentioned  in  the  first  part  of  the  line ;  they  flee 
from  Israel  in  order  not  to  become  involved  in  the  peril,  in  terror 
lest  the  overpowering  enemies  may  attack  them  also.  The  words, 
those  that  see  me,  are  a  prosaic  gloss,  generalising  the  subject  at 


PSALM   XXXI.  269 

the  expense  of  the  measure.  — 13.  I  am  forgotten'],  abandonment 
leads  inevitably  to  forgetfulness  of  the  person  abandoned.  —  as  a 
dead  man],  one  whose  acquaintance  was  once  enjoyed,  but  whom 
one  knows  no  longer,  because  he  is  in  the  realm  of  forgetfulness. 
—  out  of  mind],  so  long  dead  that  the  thought  of  him  no  longer 
comes  into  the  mind.  This  reaches  its  climax  in,  like  a  lost  vessel, 
which  is  more  suited  to  the  first  part  of  the  line,  to  which  it  is  an 
emphatic  complement,  than  the  weaker  paraphrase  "  broken  ves- 
sel "  of  EV8. 

Str.  IV.  is  the  antistr.  to  the  previous  one,  and  is  chiefly  peti- 
tion ;  not  importunate,  but  calm  and  confident,  distributing  itself 
in  several  phases  in  the  succeeding  lines.  The  psalmist  begins 
with  a  synth.  couplet,  14,  emphasising  the  peril.  The  first  line 
was  taken  from  Je.  2010,  for  the  defaming  of  many,  terror  all 
around  me  I  hear].  The  enemies  were  active  in  slanderous  words 
and  threatening  deeds. —  While  they  consult  together  against  me], 
as  in  22  against  the  king,  so  here  the  wicked  nations  plot  against 
the  people.  —  devise  to  take  my  life].  As  suggested  in  the  first 
Str.,  the  people  are  in  deadly  peril,  in  need  of  a  safe  refuge ;  here 
the  purpose  of  the  enemy  is  nothing  less  than  to  utterly  destroy 
them.  But  while  they  are  thus  plotting,  the  people  are  not  in 
despair ;  they  have  confidence  in  God,  which  is  affirmed  in  the 
concluding  tristich  of  the  Str.  — 15.  I  on  my  part],  emphatic 
personal  experience.  —  upon  Thee  do  I  trust],  as  v.76,  the  object 
of  trust  emphasised,  as  in  v.66. —  Yahweh,  Thou  art  my  God].  A 
later  scribe,  thinking  to  make  it  more  emphatic,  inserted  "  I  said," 
at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  — 16.  In  Thy  hand],  as  in  v.6a. — 
are  my  times],  the  "times"  for  experiences,  fortunes,  as  Is.  33*, 
doubtless  thinking  of  their  issue  whether  in  adversity  or  prosperity. 
The  people  are  in  Yahweh's  hands  here,  as  their  spirit  has  been 
committed  to  His  trust,  v.6.  This  resumption  of  the  thought  of 
Str.  II.  is  in  order  to  the  following  petition,  which  in  rapid  succes- 
sion adds  one  thing  to  another.  —  deliver  me],  naturally  comes 
first,  resuming  the  thought  of  the  first  Str. — from  the  hand  of 
mine  enemy],  with  the  complementary  pursuer,  in  accordance 
with  the  style  of  the  Ps.  — 17.  O  let  Thy  face  shine  upon],  think- 
ing of  the  priestly  benediction,  Nu.  624s%  as  Ps.  41,  the  light  of 
favour  and  prosperity.  —  in   Thy  kindness],  resuming  v.8a. — give 


27O  PSALMS 

me  victory],  as  complementary  to  the  positive  favour.  The  ordi- 
nary "  save  me,"  EV8.,  is  not  suited  to  this  line.  That  victory  in 
war  is  longed  for,  is  evident  from  the  interpretation  of  the  glos- 
sator in  v.18"19.  — 18.  Yahweh,  let  ?ne  not  be  shamed],  that  is,  by 
defeat  and  disaster ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  let  the  wicked 
nations,  the  enemy  and  the  pursuer  above,  be  shamed  in  defeat 
and  slaughter,  and  so  be  made  silent,  dumb ;  not  merely  speech- 
less, but  helpless,  unable  to  say  or  do  anything,  going  down  to 
Sheol  in  national  death,  cf.  66  918.  The  imprecation  is  not  upon 
personal  enemies,  but  upon  enemies  in  arms  against  the  people  of 
God.  —  19.  Let  lying  lips  be  dumb].  This  suits  the  citation  from 
Je.  2010,  but  not  the  situation  of  the  Ps.  in  general.  These  lying 
lips  are  represented  as  those  that  speak  arrogantly  against  the 
righteous'].  The  righteous  here  do  not  seem  to  be  righteous 
Israel,  but  the  righteous  as  distinguished  from  the  arrogant  in 
Israel.  This  is  still  further  defined  as,  with  pride  and  contempt,  a. 
situation  appearing  often  enough  in  the  Greek  period  and  subse- 
quently. The  verse  is  prosaic,  as  is  the  previous  one.  They  can 
only  be  made  poetic  by  reductions  and  other  changes. 

Str.  V.  corresponds,  in  its  confidence  in  God,  with  the  antistrs. 
of  the  two  previous  parts.  It  rhymes  in  ka,  referring  to  God,  the 
previous  Strs.  in  /,  referring  to  the  nation.  It  begins  with  an 
exclamation  of  praise.  —  20.  O  how  great  is  Thy  goodness], 
reminding  of  Is.  6$7.  This  goodness  is  conceived  as  a  treasure, 
which  Thou  hast  treasured  up],  reserved  in  heaven  in  the  divine 
presence,  to  be  given  at  the  appropriate  time ;  for  them  that  fear 
Thee],  them  that  have  that  reverence  which  constitutes  true 
religion,  ||  for  them  that  seek  refuge  in  Thee,  resuming  v.2.  That 
which  was  treasured  up  with  Yahweh  was  reserved  for  a  special 
occasion.  —  Thou  hast  done],  goodness,  good,  in  the  bestowal  of 
good  things,  not  in  private,  but  in  public ;  not  before  the  people 
of  God,  but  before  the  sons  of  ?nen,  as  the  context  shows,  the 
wicked  nations.  —  21.  This  verse,  by  glosses  and  transposition, 
has  lost  its  measure,  rhyme,  symmetry,  and  simplicity,  but  it  is 
not  difficult  to  restore  it  to  its  original  form.  The  strife  of  tongues 
is  suited  to  v.10.  If  that  be  a  gloss,  this  is  a  gloss  also.  This 
removes  the  chief  difficulty  at  once.  The  only  other  difficulty  is 
removed  by  transposition  of  the  two  clauses.  —  Thou  treasure st 


PSALM    XXXI.  271 

them  ||  Thou  hides t  them'].  The  thought  of  the  first  Str.  is 
resumed ;  only  what  was  importunately  prayed  for  there  is  here 
taken  for  granted  as  a  fact.  The  seeking  refuge,  of  the  previous 
line,  passes  over  into  being  kept  safe  in  that  refuge  as  a  hidden 
treasure.  The  place  of  refuge  is  a  shelter  ||  the  covert  of  Thy 
presence.  This  is  probably  conceived,  as  in  27s,  in  the  temple 
courts.  The  need  of  this  refuge  is  briefly  indicated  in  the  clause, 
from  the  harshness  of  men],  a  term  used  elsewhere  only  Is.  404, 
of  rugged  places,  but  sustained  by  0,  3.  There  is  no  need  of 
any  of  the  changes  suggested  by  modern  scholars  to  avoid  this 
unusual  phrase.  The  previous  tristich  was  supplemented  by  a 
later  editor  in  the  use  of  the  liturgical  phrase  :  22.  Blessed  be 
Yahweh,  the  usual  form  of  benediction,  with  the  reason,  taken 
from  44  177,  For  He  doth  show  extraordinary  kindness  to  me]. 
The  additional  phrase,  in  a  fortified  city,  cf.  6011,  seems  to  refer 
to  Jerusalem  during  a  siege,  but  may  be  only  an  explication  of  the 
covert  of  the  previous  context,  extending  it  to  the  city  of  Jerusalem 
as  well  as  the  temple  precincts.  Such  an  addition  might  have 
been  made  quite  naturally  during  the  Maccabean  wars.  —  23.  1  on 
my  part],  as  v.715.  —  said  in  mine  alarm],  when  so  intensely 
agitated  that  I  hardly  knew  what  I  was  saying.  —  /  am  driven 
away  from  before  Thine  eye].  This  is  quoted  in  Jon.  25,  which 
undoubtedly  gives  the  true  vb.  The  vb.  of  %,  mistaking  a  single 
letter,  gives  the  weaker  meaning,  "  I  am  cut  off."  The  people  in 
their  extreme  peril  were  at  first  despairing,  feeling  that  their  God 
had  not  only  forsaken  them,  but  actually  expelled  them  from  His 
presence.  The  psalmist  may  be  thinking  here  of  the  first  thoughts 
of  the  nation  when  in  exile  long  before  his  own  time.  It  is 
national  experience  that  is  here  described,  and  not  that  of  an 
individual.  But  this  despair  as  expressed  in  the  alarmed  utter- 
ance of  the  people  did  not  stay  their  prayer  nor  Yahweh's  help.  — 
Nevertheless],  in  spite  of  all  things,  strong  asservation  of  the 
antith.,  Thou  didst  hear,  in  the  pregnant  sense,  implying  answer, 
the  voice  of  my  supplication,  a  phrase  of  28s- 6.  —  when  I  cried  for 
help  unto  Thee].  With  this  statement  of  fact  the  Ps.  comes  to  its 
appropriate  conclusion. 

A  later  editor,  wishing  to  make  a  practical  exhortation  based 
upon  the  Ps.,  for  public  use,  gives  a  general  statement  of  doctrine 
and  a  liturgical  conclusion. 


272  PSALMS 

Love  Yahweh,  all  ye  His  pious  ones; 

The  faithful  Yahweh  preserved), 

But  rewardeth  the  proud  doer. 

Be  strong  and  let  your  mind  take  courage, 

All  ye  that  wait  on  Yahweh. 

24.  Love  Yahweh,  all  ye  His  pious  ones'].  This  is  a  most 
appropriate  exhortation  here,  and  indeed  everywhere.  But  it  has 
no  manner  of  connection  with  the  context  and  is  really  a  prose 
sentence.  —  The  faithful  Yahweh  preserveth,  But  rewardeth  the 
proud  doer\.  So  probably  originally  an  antith.  trimeter  couplet, 
but  its  measure  was  destroyed  by  the  insertion  of  the  emphatic 
"  plentifully."  —  25.  Be  strong  and  let  your  mind  take  courage,  All 
ye  that  wait  on  Yahweh~\.  This  liturgical  addition  is  essentially 
the  same  as  2714,  save  that  the  2  sg.  has  been  changed  into  the 
2  pi. 

2-4  a  is  cited  in  the  later  mosaic  Ps.  71  in  v.1-3  with  minor  variations.  V.'2 
is  identical  with  711  as  far  as  and  including  oSijT;  but  312  has  two  words  addi- 
tional, making  the  1.  overfull;  these  are  in  712.  711  is  defective  by  one  word 
and  that  the  one  bearing  the  rhyme.  It  is  easy  to  find  that  missing  word  in 
\:bSd  312,  which  makes  that  1.  overfull  and  which  also  appears  in  712  in  juss. 
"•^DP  ||  "j^sr.  @  of  31-  also  has  pvcai  /xe  kclI  ££e\ov  p.e  =  712.  —  2.  "|npixa] 
emph.  (v.  j9).  This  goes  into  1.  2,  as  712.  —  "JJTK  nan]  =  7126,  usually  c. 
S  if  495  781  883  1162,  only  318  (=  7126)  1023  with  Sx.  But  one  word  is 
needed  for  measure.  313  has  »jSin  mn;:.  712  has  «jp<Pim,  (S  aai  aQadu  tie. 
<S  of  313  has  t&xwov  toO  ifaXtadai  yue,  taking  vb.  as  inf.  cstr.  without  1  and  so 
||  with  next  1.  rod  cOxral  /xe  =  »jjPBhnS.  This  fluctuation  shows  uncertainty  of 
reading.  —  J  mrjD]  n.f.  haste,  speed,  usually  adv.  hastily,  quickly  before  vb., 
elsw.  372  Is.  58s  Jo.  44;  'D  "i?  Ps.  14715,  cf.  nnp  Ps.  6^.  —  -n*S  h  run  is  the 
same  in  both  Pss.,  but  it  is  followed  by  pj?r>  313,  by  \x;n  713.  nj?D  place  of 
refuge,  with  SXS  also  Is.  1710;  apart  from  ntt  Pss.  271  28s  315  3739  432  529.  It 
is  better  suited  to  the  context  here  than  pj?r,  which  is  with  nrc  only  713;  but 
alone  901  919  of  Yahweh  as  dwelling  place,  (O  Kara<pvyrj)  all  dub.:  un- 
doubtedly 313  is  the  correct  reading.  —  n"HWD  noS]  cf.  n>ix  T»on  KiaS  713, 
both  variations  of  interpretation  of  a  common  original:  mxo  r^;  the  only 
difference  being  the  transposition  of  x  and  n  due  to  txt.  err.  The  pi.  is 
dub.  as  a.X.,  prob.  should  be  *n-TOD  as  183  =  2  S.  222  =  314  =  713,  cf.  1442. 
■ven  N12S  a  rel.  clause  with  rel.  omitted,  referring  to  pj?D.  mix  must  then  be 
Pi.  pf.  2  m.  with  *jptivh  dependent  upon  it.  But  ©  has  here  els  rdirov  dxvpbv 
rod  aCxral  /xe,  essentially  as  in  313  els  oIkov  Karaipvyrjs  rod  <rGxral  fxe,  indicating 
the  same  reading  as  313.  |^  of  713  is  then  txt.  err.  The  form  ^jPB^nS  in  all 
texts  gives  the  needed  rhyme  and  parallel  term,  and  is  undoubtedly  original. 
4.    nn«  vn«Di  >jho  ^]  is  the  same  in  both  Pss.,  but  it  closes  the  v.  in  713 


PSALM   XXXI.  273 

and  begins  it  in  314.  It  is  derived  from  183  except  its  framework  or  construc- 
tion iinifO.  The  last  part  of  314  does  not  appear  in  71,  for  the  latter  Ps.  from 
this  clause  on  is  independent  of  31.  But  this  is  needed  to  complete  the  hex- 
ameter 1.  —  -\vv  T>  dSi]  is  derived  from  23s  as  gl.  appended  to  vb.  —  •oSnjni]  is 
cognate  to  ^run  and  emphasises  it.  — 5.  WDB  it  n^hc]  =  unto  -it  nun:)  9** 
from  which  it  was  taken;  only  put  into  the  frame  of  '•JN^in.  —  nij?D  nnN  *o] 
cf.  v.4  <g->'-c.a.A.  Ra.  a  have  Kvpios  after  *njflD.  Prob.  nw  originally  preceded 
rpo  of  v.6.  —  6.  Tva]  emph.  —  >m-\  "VpD*].  For  ipu  (v.  85).  nn  spirit  in 
sense  of  J  (3)  that  which  breathes  quickly  or  hard  in  animation  or  agitation 
of  any  kind  —  te??iper,  disposition  (this  is  the  distinctive  mng.  of  "\  as  cf.  with 
Btoj  and  aaS)  :  courage  7613,  '-\  «J»JMV1  774  1424  1434  (^.  BD;9),  crushed  spirit 
1 43",  %  spirit  of  the  living,  breathing  being,  dwelling  in  the  "lira  of  men  and 
animals  ||  vdi  :  departing  at  death  316.  2)&  ah\  ^Sn  ~i  78s9  (Ihira),  cf. 
10429-30  1464.  X  (5)  occasionally  as  seat  or  organ  of  mental  acts  ||  or  syn.  aS, 
late  writers  777  (?). —  f  (6)  rarely,  referring  to  inclinations,  resolutions,  de- 
terminations of  the  will  =  aS:  foj  -•)  5 112  (cf. 'j  a1?  578-8  (  =  1082)  78s7  1127); 
nanj  -1  5114  (?)  (cf.  Ex.  3521  andaS  35s-  22  (P),  2  Ch.  2931).  X  (7)  referring 
to  moral  character  —  aS:  Pss.  322  78s,  '-1  wa^  3419  (cf.  a1?  Is.  5715),  n"J3^.  -\ 
Ps.  5119  (cf.  Is.  6514,  aS  Pss.  5 119  3419  Is.  611)'.  For  other  mngs.  of  r\r\  v.  1816 
5113.  —  nnni]  Qal  pf.  2  m.  fully  written;  not  aorist,  but  emph.  present 
(v.  2j22).  —  ^n]  emph.  ace.  sf.  in  order  to  measure  and  rhyme.  —  nig*"*?*] 
cf.  pdx  inSx  2  Ch.  1513,  njirx  Sn  Dt.  324.  For  Sn  v.  Intr.  §  32,  pdx  ij2. 
This  clause  goes  with  next  1.  —  7.  WMJfcr]  Qal  pf.  I  sg.  But  <&,  3,  <&,  HL,  2  pers. 
Vw:r,  so  Dy.,  Horsley,  Ba.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  favoured  by  nnnc,  but  opposed  by  I  pers. 
in  all  lines  thus  far.     |^  is  correct,  but  the  vb.  should  be  transposed  to  end  of 

1.  for  assonance  with  other  lines.  —  Niir  ^an  onnirnj  =  Jon.  29  only  in  latter 
Pi.  □■nsirp  which  is  a  difference  of  interpretation  of  original  unpointed  text. 
It  is  doubtful  which  is  original,  prob.  not  Jonah  as  Du.  but  our  Ps. ;  although 
both  are  mosaics,  yet  this  Str.  seems  original  to  the  poet  in  other  respects. 
X  San  n.m.  vapour,  breath,  in  \f/  fig.  (1)  of  man:  evanescent,  unsubstantial 
396-7.12  6210-10  1444,  his  days  78s3,  thoughts  9411;  (2)  of  idols,  other  gods 
than  Yahweh,  mtf  ^an  317  =  Jon.  29,  cf.  D^an  Dt.  3221,  -o;  iSan  Je.  819, 
D^vin  tSan  Je.  io8  1422.  For  Niir  v.  123.  —  ijni]  emph.  over  against  Dncrn. — 
innaa  mm  Sn]  cf.  v.15  mm  'a  "^hy,  so  here,  but  without  m,T;  nea  of  trust  in 
God,  c.  Sn  elsw.  46  564  862,  c.  hy  elsw.  37s,  for  usual  a  as  911  +  21  t.  \J/. 
This  clause  has  been  transposed  with  first  clause  of  v.8;  making  this  change 
of  order  gives  an  easier  explanation  for  svtt  and  also  the  rhyme  characteristic 
of  the  lines  thus  far.  —  8.  rpDna].  The  use  of  this  word  here  in  antith. 
HW  tSan  reminds  of  Jon.  29.  The  conception  of  the  Ps.  is  simpler,  for  the  sf. 
in  Jon.  seems  to  make  "idh  practically  a  name  of  God.  —  nrs]  refers  to  mni 
and  is  not  causal,  although  that  interpretation  is  sustained  by  <&,  3,  and 
followed  by  most  interpreters,  owing  to  the  transposition  mentioned  above. — 
iVDi  nnxa  nj?m]  jrv  ||  n*n  seems  to  require  that  '1  nnxa  should  be  ||  »w,  so 

2,  3  take  it  as  obj.  cognovisti  tribulationes  animae  meae,  and  the  paraphrase 
of  <3  ecroxras  £k  tCov  avayicGiv  tt)v  ^vx^v  fxov,  favours  it.      For  nixa  v.  910  io1 

T 


274  PSALMS 

Je.  141.  The  relation  of  this  Ps.  to  Ps.  9  in  other  respects  also  favours  it. — 
9.  ^n]  prob.  ^n  not  »[jn  as  $%;  all  other  lines  end  in  sg.  sf.  \_«  This  v.  is 
dependent  upon  Ps.  i820-34. — 10.  T)?  D?33  r\vv-;]  =  *y;  D;r?p  nvhtty  ^doubt- 
less the  original  passage  from  which  it  is  derived  here,  simply  changing  the 
prep.,  cf.  v.11.  This  1.  has  two  words  too  many  for  measure.  The  last  two 
are  favoured  by  v.11,  then  y*p  d;d  would  be  gl.  from  6s.  — 11.  "n  ihs  "o  is 
based  on  n>*  ne>33  V?:n  Je.  2018,  which  uses  in  previous  context  pj»,  preferred 
by  our  psalmist  to  nra.  nSj  (v,  /8s8),  in  sense  of  exhaustion  719  7326  1024 
1437.  —  nru»o]  but  rd.  for  rhyme  *rrun  (z/.  6~  3810).  —  ^r;]  totter,  fail,  fig.  of 
n:,  also  Ne.  44  and  Hiph.  La.  I14,  but  /0//6*r  of  knees  Ps.  10924  and  of  persons 
10537.  —  ^W]  has  no  propriety  in  this  Ps.,  though  supported  by  Aq.,  0,  £,  3; 
<3  ev  TTTwxetv,  ^93,  so  "B,  £>,  Du.;  Ba.,  2  "j?3,  as  v.8.  —  itftfy]  takes  up  nr:;; 
v.10.  — 12.  mj  Ssd]  is  attached  to  previous  1.  by  Ew.,  after  £;  if  so,  rd.  nns, 
as  75,  for  assonance,  and  not  ♦'VUf,  as  23s  4211  6920.  These  words  are  really 
needed  to  make  two  hexameters  in  this  v.  fD  is  here  irapa  in  (S,  apud'vtx  3; 
prob.  here  at  the  hands  of,  as  742'2,  not  causal,  as  Dr.,  because  of  {v.  BZ?B  jd 
2d).  But  this  is  difficult  whether  we  connect  with  the  previous  or  the  subse- 
quent context.  It  is  prob.  txt.  err.  for  *S"*WC,  which  suits  the  rhyme  and  the 
parall.  —  nrnn  »n".i]  as  794  8942  10925,  cf.  6911  (v.  /j3).  —  ix^]  is  sustained 
by  (5,  3,  but  in  this  case  it  is  better  to  rd.  ^y^  at  end  of  1.,  and  sf.  1  sg. 
instead  of  1  pi.,  which  destroys  rhyme.  A  noun  seems  necessary.  Horsley 
suggests  ins  nuisance ;  Krochmal  niJD;  Hi.,  Ols.,  Lag.  nuo  abr.  vx~\  "lUD,  so 
Che.;  Gr.  DWD.  nur,  terror,  is  favoured  by  v.14,  and  -no,  nun  by  usage  of 
4415,  cf.  228  Je.  1816.  fnr  object  of  contention,  is  easier,  cf.  in  the  same  phr. 
U>J3b6  jnn  Ps.  807.  But  in  fact  this  thought  does  not  suit  the  context, 
nso  <J3fSl  nfjnn  is  prob.  a  gl.  from  a  later  situation,  the  original  being  ins  \-p\-i. 
—  ^pS]  Pu.  ptc,  sf.  1  pi.,  so  889- 19;  but  rd.  *JTPD  as  5514.  —  **p]  a  gl.,  un- 
necessary and  destroying  the  measure.  —  13.  *n"n]  should  be  removed  to  the 
end  of  the  1.  for  rhyme.  — 14.  The  1.  3*3DD  .  .  .  *npD8>  <3  is  from  Je.  2010. 
The  phr.  3^3DD  Tun  is  peculiar  to  Je.  6126  20-  w  46s  49s9,  cf.  La.  2'22.  Tjratf 
goes  to  the  end  of  1.  for  rhyme.  — s;'  mr  D^Djns]  Niph.  inf.  cstr.,  in  that; 
cf.  2?  -nt  nDU.  —  i^dj  rnj^]  —take  my  life,  phr.  elsw.  1  K.  194  Jon.  4s 
Pr.  I19.  — 15.  then]  is  gl.,  unnecessary  and  making  1.  too  long.  —  *nsv]  for 
an  original  *S«  required  for  rhyme  and  transposed.  — 16.  nys]  cf.  v.6. — 
♦Pfljj]  my  times,  experiences,  fortunes,  as  Is.  33°;  (3  ol  nXrjpol  fxov  is  a  para- 
phrase.—  »j?»xn]  should  go  to  the  end  of  the  1.  for  rhyme.  —  *?^h]  should 
be  sg.,  as  v.9,  and  not  pi.;  so  also  -n-n,  not  »«n\  — 17.  T.?5  ^-n?]  Pnr- 
derived  from  the  high  priest's  blessing  Nu.  626;  so  Pss.  672  8o4-  8-  20  119135, 
and  in  variant  form  47  118'27.  —  *jjpBhn]  should  come  at  the  end  for  rhyme. 
— 18.  nu;ON  Sn  mrv]  a  resumption  of  v.2,  to  emphasise  an  imprecation  upon 
enemies.  —  i^t]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  dst  be  still  =  perish,  so  Je.  814  48s.  It  is 
probable  that  it  should  be  Niph.  wr,  as  1  S.  29  be  made  silent  Je.  492C  5030 
5 16.  <J£  has  KaTax0et7j<rav,  prob.  a  paraphrase,  but  Gr.  vw.  —  SiNir1?]  is  preg- 
nant, cf.  918.  This  1.  has  eight  tones,  lacks  rhyme,  and  with  following  v.  shows 
a  harsher  spirit  than  the  Ps.  as  a  whole.  — 19.    ^dVkp]  Niph.  impf.  J  dSn  not 


PSALM   XXXI.  275 

in  Qal,  Niph.  =  be  made  dumb,  elsw.  39s- 10,  cf.  Ez.  32°  2427  33s2.  —  nn:in] 
Qal  ptc.  f.  pi.  agreeing  with  Tar,  article  for  rel.  (v.  j7).  — tPnP]  adj.  for- 
ward, arrogant;  so  I  S.  28,  elsw.  \p  75s  94*.  —  tM3]  n>m-  (0  contempt; 
elsw.  11922  123s-4  Gn.  3823  Jb.  126  3134  Pr.  128  183;  (2)  as  poured  out  by 
God  Ps.  10740  Jb.  1221. — 20.  qa-iB  3n  no]  cf.  1457  pvg  an  "D?j  goodness  of 
God,  kindness  in  doing  good  to  one  ;  cf.  Is.  637  Smfcn  ma?  310  an.  <JI  inserts 
mm  here,  which  makes  better  measure  and  sense.  —  IBto  is  needed  in  1.  2  also 
to  complete  the  measure.  —  "]Z  D"Din]  should  be  at  end  of  1.  for  rhyme. — 
21.  rpjs  nrDaJ  cf. TBJanno  6i6,  m?j?  'D  911,  *S  'D  nns  32%  hrw  'D  27s.  —  %?a^] 
a.X. ;  cf.  D^cnn  Is.  404,  and  vb.  Warn  Ex.  28'28  3921  (P),  meaning  foW.  But 
it  is  difficult  to  connect  either  noun  with  this  vb.  BDB  regards  both  as 
dubious,  and  gives  no  decision  as  to  mngs.  (3  renders  both  the  same  way, 
rapaxVf  rough,  so  3  duritia.  We  might  then  think  of  roughness  of  places, 
and  roughness,  harshness,  hardness,  rudeness  of  conduct.  Ols.,  Oort,  Du., 
change  the  text  here  to  ^?n.  This  v.  is  difficult  in  structure.  Its  two  parts 
have  5+4  tones,  and  seem  to  be  in  syn.  parall.  It  cannot  be  original  in 
this  form.  It  must  either  be  reduced  to  6  tones  or  enlarged  to  12,  or  else 
it  is  a  gl.  But  one  1.  is  needed  for  measure,  rpjfl  is  necessary  for  rhyme,  and 
must  come  at  close  of  v.  This  requires  a  transposition  of  clauses.  The  words 
HUB'1?  anD  are  unnecessary,  and  prob.  a  gl.  —  22.  "<  TJVO]  Ptc-  as  adj.,  ex- 
clamation (v.  18W).  —  <S  i-ion  toSen]  so  (*?)'n  nSan  46  177. — nixn  mpa]  in  an 
entrenched  city  ;  so  6011  (=  nxaD  vy  10811),  cf.  2  Ch.  85.  If  correct,  the  for- 
tified city  is  Jerusalem,  and  the  city  and  its  defender  have  been  protected  from 
their  enemies  by  Yahweh.  It  is  possible  that  they  have  been  besieged  by 
enemies.  We.  would  change  to  n>,  cf.  32s  nxd  nyS.  Du.  takes  mp  as  in  7320 
Je.  158  excitement,  terror  (\/"v,>)'  The  v.  is,  however,  a  gl.  —  23.  "oxi]  emph. 
as  v.7- 15.  —  \TDna]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  sf.  1  s.  in  my  haste  or  alarm  ;  so  11611,  which 
has  the  whole  phr.  \  ran  elsw.  in  \f>  only  Niph.  hurry  away  in  alarm  48s 
1047.  —  ,|i?H^]  a.X.  Niph.  pf.  1  sg.  n;  improb. ;  rd.  »n«njj  as  Jon.  25,  which 
has  the  same  line,  omitting  the  inf.  because  Jon.  2  is  pentameter.  J  PTJ  vb. 
Pi.  drive  away  341  7855  809.  —  %  fa**]  as  adv.  asseveration,  surely ;  in  \(/  only 
emphasising  a  contrast,  but,  in  fact,  nevertheless,  so  here,  6619  827.  —  ijunn  Vip] 
elsw.  in  \f/  28s-6  866  1161  1302  1407;  28*  is  same  as  here,  save  that  imv.  of 
J7re>  is  used  and  px  omitted.  The  use  of  pN  is  due  to  the  different  measure 
of  the  Ps.  — 24.  won  Sa  mm  ns  «nn]  this  is  a  gl.  For  an*  v.  j-i2,  TDn  ^. 
—  D>>1DN]  is  Qal  ptc.  pi.  faithful,  and  not  abst.,  as  <t§  a.\t)delas,  Du. ;  cf.  Is.  262 
'N  "\nw  (v.  1 22  icf).  —  nm-^]  abundantly,  prob.  gl.  —  25.  coa::?  fDHji  ipm] 
VDN^  Hiph.  of  pnn  exhibit  strength,  £DB.  Hiph.  only  here  and  2714,  where 
there  is  a  similar  1.  —  mm?  cSrvcn  Sr]  n  rel.  with  Pi.  ptc.  %  [Sm]  vb.  Pi. 
wait  for,  hope  for  ;  c.  V  j/25  i^-  22  69*  II943-  49- 74-  81- 114- 147  14711;  c.  Sn  1307 
1313  Is.  515,  abs.  Ps.  7114.  Hiph.  wait,  tarry  (shew  a  waiting  attitude);  c.  *? 
3816  42s- 12  435  1305  Mi.  77  La.  324.  This  line  is  dependent  on  Ps.  2714,  chang- 
ing 2  sg.  into  2  pi.,  and  is  a  gi. 


276  PSALMS 


PSALM   XXXIL,  2  str.  55. 

Ps.  32  was  a  penitential  Ps  :  (1)  proclaiming  the  blessedness 
of  the  one  whose  sins  are  forgiven,  covered  over  and  not  imputed 
(v.12),  especially  in  view  of  the  great  suffering  in  body  and  soul 
during  the  long  time  that  Yahweh's  punitive  hand  rested  upon 
him  (v.3-4).  (2)  The  confession  of  sin  is  followed  by  forgiveness 
(v.5)  and  the  exhortation  to  the  pious  to  pray  to  Yahweh  in  time 
of  distress  (v.6).  Later  additions  represent  Yahweh  as  the  hiding- 
place  (v.7);  exhort  earnestly  to  walk  in  the  right  way  and  not  be 
stubborn  as  the  mule  (v.8-9) ;  and  contrast  the  sorrows  of  the 
wicked  with  the  joys  of  the  righteous  (v.10*11). 

IJAPPY  the  one  whose  transgression  is  forgiven,  whose  sin  is  covered! 

Happy  the  one  unto  whom  Yahweh  imputeth  not  iniquity ! 

When  I  kept  silent,  my  bones  waxed  old  through  my  roaring; 

For  day  and  night  Thy  hand  was  heavy  upon  me ; 

I  was  changed  (into  misery,  as  when  thorns  smite  me). 
"JV/TY  sin  I  make  known  to  Thee,  and  mine  iniquity  I  do  not  cover; 

I  said,  "  I  will  confess  concerning  my  transgression  to  Yahweh"; 

And  Thou  forgavest  mine  iniquity,  my  sin  dids*  ^pardon). 

For  this  let  the  pious  pray  unto  Thee  in  time  of  distress ; 

At  the  outburst  of  many  waters,  they  will  not  reach  unto  him. 

A  S>D2>D  {v.  Intr.  §  26)  of  S,  not  taken  up  into  Q2&  or  35  (v.  Intr.  §§  27, 
32>  33)'  It  was  separated  from  the  Maskelim  by  the  editor  of  \p,  owing  to 
the  fact  that  the  others  were  used  in  15.  The  Ps.  was  originally  of  two  pen- 
tameter pentastichs  v.1-6.  In  this  form  it  belongs  to  the  Persian  period.  It  was 
enlarged  by  a  series  of  additions :  at  first  v.7,  then  a  tetrameter  tetrastich  of 
advice  v.8-9,  and  a  liturgical  trimeter  tetrastich  of  a  general  character  v.10-11. 
"The  influence  of  the  individualising  educational  movement  recorded  for  us 
in  Proverbs  is  unmistakable,"  Che.  In  v.*9  there  are  Aramaisms :  dSd  and 
nx;'  after  <S,  required  for  measure  and  confused  with  fjp.  This  gloss  was  of 
late  date,  probably  in  the  Maccabean  period.  The  Ps.  in  its  present  form  is 
the  second  penitential  Ps.  of  the  church. 

Str.  I  is  composed  of  a  syn.  couplet,  a  synth.  line,  and  an  em- 
blematic triplet.  — 1-2.  Happy  the  one~\,  an  exclamation  of  con- 
gratulation, repeated  at  the  beginning  of  two  lines  for  emphasis. 
In  Ps.  i1  the  righteous  man,  who  was  entirely  conformed  to  the 
Law,  was  thus  congratulated  ;  here,  the  one  who  has  been  a  trans- 
gressor, but  now,  after  a  period  of  divine  chastisement,  enjoys 


PSALM   XXXII.  277 

forgiveness  and  reinstatement  in  the  divine  favour.  The  three 
chief  syn.  terms  for  sin  are  used  to  comprehend  it  in  all  its  forms  : 
transgression,  the  violation  of  divine  command  whether  oral  or 
written  in  Law ;  sin,  the  failure  from  the  normal  aim  or  purpose 
in  life ;  iniquity,  the  perverse  turning  aside  from  the  proper  course 
of  life.  These  forms  of  sin  had  incurred  the  divine  displeasure, 
and  had  to  be  removed  in  order  to  a  restoration  to  favour.  Each 
term  for  sin  has  its  appropriate  predicate,  which  is  not  to  be  re- 
garded as  peculiar  to  that  conception  of  sin  rather  than  any  other, 
but  is  in  order  to  balance  the  threefold  sin,  with  a  threefold  deliv- 
erance from  it.  —  is  forgiven].  This  is,  according  to  the  Hebrew 
conception,  the  taking  up  of  transgression  as  a  burden,  a  heavy 
load,  resting  upon  the  sinner  and  bearing  it  away  from  him  to  a 
place  where  it  will  trouble  him  no  more.  The  English  "  forgive," 
"give  away,"  is  syn.  to  it  and  sufficiently  near  to  the  Hebrew  idea 
of  take  away,  to  translate  it,  agreeing  as  they  do  in  the  essential 
thing  of  removal.  The  same  Hebrew  term  is  used  v.5c  in  connec- 
tion with  iniquity ;  and  probably  also  in  the  original,  if  the  pro- 
posed change  of  text  is  correct,  the  syn.  Hebrew  word  rbc,  having 
the  same  essential  meaning,  which  may  appropriately  be  rendered 
by  the  syn.  English  word  "pardon."  —  is  covered],  a  syn.  term,  used 
also  85s  for  the  technical  Hebrew  word  "iss,  "cover  over  sin" 
{v.  65*  78s8  799).  It  is  commonly  used  in  connection  with  sacri- 
fices, where  the  sin,  as  staining  and  defiling  the  divine  altars,  was 
covered  over  by  the  application  to  them  of  the  blood  of  the 
victim  of  the  sin-offering.  But  the  word  is  also  frequently  used 
apart  from  sacrifices,  when  God  is  conceived  as  covering  the  sin 
over  so  as  to  hide  it  and  obliterate  it.  This  Yahweh  does  in  ac- 
cordance with  His  sovereign  good  pleasure.  There  can  be  no 
doubt  that  here,  as  in  other  Pss.,  the  latter  is  the  true  conception ; 
for  there  is  no  hint  of  any  sacrifice  in  any  of  these  Pss.  —  i?nputeth 
not],  that  is,  does  not  estimate,  consider,  think  of,  in  connection 
with  the  sinner.  Far  otherwise,  Yahweh  thinks  of  him  as  without 
iniquity,  deals  with  him  as  no  longer  having  any  connection  with  it. 
We  should  beware  of  attaching  to  these  terms  the  technical  mean- 
ings of  modern  dogmatic  theology.  This  syn.  couplet  makes  a 
simple  and  comprehensive  statement.  But  a  later  legalist  thought 
that  something  more  was  required,  and  this  he  supplied  by  adding  : 


278  PSALMS 

And  in  whose  spirit  there  is  no  deceit.  This  may  be  explained 
in  accord  with  modern  ideas  :  u  Who  conceals  his  sin  neither  from 
God  nor  from  himself,"  Dr. ;  especially  if  we  weaken  the  term 
with  EV8.  to  "guile  "  ;  but  this  renunciation  of  deceit  of  spirit  is 
a  very  high  ethical  ideal,  not  appearing  elsewhere  in  the  Old  Tes- 
tament. 1  John  i8  rises  to  a  higher  ethical  conception,  and  may 
be  cited  against  self-deception  in  the  matter  of  neglecting  to  con- 
fess sin,  but  hardly  against  one  who  has  so  completely  confessed 
his  sin  and  has  been  so  entirely  relieved  of  it,  as  stated  in  the 
previous  couplet  of  our  Ps.  Such  an  one  needs  no  exhortation 
to  sincerity  of  spirit.  This  clause  adds  a  defective  line  to  a  Str. 
complete  without  it ;  and  also  imports  a  disturbing  thought,  to 
the  effect  that  such  a  man  must  not  only  be  accepted  by  God 
as  without  any  more  sin  attached  to  him,  but  must  also  have  the 
more  positive  characteristic  of  a  spirit  without  deceit.  The  clause 
is  a  gloss  from  the  school  of  Hebrew  Wisdom.  It  is  probable 
that  man  is  also  a  gloss,  in  order  to  give  the  experience,  which 
was  originally  national,  a  more  personal  and  individualistic  turn, 
in  accordance  with  the  glosses,  v8"11.  —  3.  When  I  kept  silent], 
refrained  from  making  the  confession,  stated  in  v.5,  and  assumed 
as  the  basis  of  v.1"2.  —  my  bones  waxed  old],  as  in  other  Pss.  of 
penitence  and  lamentation,  aching  in  sympathy  with  the  distress 
of  the  soul;  cf.  63  221518  384  5110.  —  through  my  roaring].  The 
agony  was  so  great  that,  although  he  did  not  cry  to  God  for  help 
in  penitential  prayer,  he  did  cry  aloud  with  so  much  noise  and 
so  little  self-restraint  that  he  lost  his  manhood  and  became  a  mere 
animal.  This  has  been  intensified  by  the  additional  clause,  all  day 
long,  an  insertion  probably  not  designed,  but  due  to  dittography 
of  the  following  words.  —  4.  For  day  and  night],  continuously, 
all  day  and  all  night  without  interruption. —  Thy  hand],  God's 
hand,  put  forth  in  chastisement.  —  was  heavy  upon  me],  not 
merely  by  its  pressure  of  weight,  but,  as  the  context  implies, 
heavy  because  of  heavy  strokes,  smiting  him  again  and  again 
with  His  powerful  hand,  so  as  to  make  him  roar  with  the  agony 
of  suffering.  Although  he  did  not  in  fact  suffer  scourging  of  his 
body,  he  did  in  fact  suffer  from  the  bruising  of  his  soul  by  the 
experience  of  the  divine  anger,  so  that  his  bones  felt  as  if  they 
had  been  severely  scourged.  —  /  was  changed]  ;  so  0,  3,  trans- 


PSALM   XXXII.  279 

formed  from  a  former  condition  of  comfort  into  misery,  by  the 
severe  divine  discipline.  This  is  much  better  suited  to  the  context 
than  f^,  followed  by  EVS.,  "  my  moisture  is  turned  into,"  AV.,  or 
"is  like,"  PBV.,  or  "changed  as  with,"  RV.,  which  have  no 
Hebrew  usage  to  justify  them  and  which  are  difficult  to  construct 
with  the  following  words.  These  again  are  different  in  (3  from  J^. 
(3  is  here  also  to  be  preferred  in  its  rendering,  as  when  thorns 
smite  me'] .  The  blows  of  God's  hands  are  very  appropriately  com- 
pared with  the  smiting  of  the  body  with  thorns,  especially  as  in 
ancient  times  thorns  were  used  for  the  purpose  of  scourging. 
Thus  Gideon  "took  the  elders  of  the  city  [of  Succoth],  and 
thorns  of  the  wilderness  and  briers,  and  with  them  he  threshed 
[or  taught]  the  men  of  Succoth,"  Ju.  816.  Jer.  and  Aug.  think 
of  pricking  of  the  conscience.  The  reading  of  J^,  "  droughts  of 
summer,"  is  difficult  to  connect  with  the  previous  clause,  because 
the  Hebrew  prep,  is  not  appropriate  to  the  verb ;  and  the  word 
rendered  "  droughts "  is  not  used  elsewhere  in  J^,  though  the 
meaning  is  possible,  as  being  in  a  similar  word  from  the  same 
stem. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  a  triplet  of  two  syn.  lines,  with  a  third 
line  synth.  thereto,  and  an  emblematic  couplet.  —  5.  My  sin], 
emph.  in  position,  ||  iniquity  ||  transgression,  resuming  the  three 
terms  of  v.1-2,  in  order  now  to  state  the  confession  presupposed  in 
these  verses.  The  confession  is  also  in  three  syn.  terms,  make 
known  ||  not  cover  ||  confess.  The  first  term  is  in  appropriate 
antith.  to  forgive.  The  objectifying  of  the  sin,  by  making  it 
known,  is  in  order  to  taking  it  away.  The  second  term,  the 
uncovering  the  iniquity,  is  that  Yahweh  might  cover  it  again. 
The  third,  confessing,  a  term  not  used  elsewhere  in  \f/,  but  in 
other  writings,  is  properly  acknowledging,  possibly  calling  atten- 
tion to  by  a  gesture,  in  order  that  Yahweh  on  His  part  might 
refuse  to  look  at  it,  ignore  it,  not  consider  it,  or  think  of  it.  All 
this  confession  is  in  personal  address,  to  Thee  ||  to  Yahweh,  and 
meets  with  the  response,  Thou  forgavest  mine  iniquity,  using  but 
one,  and  that  the  oldest,  simplest,  and  most  important  of  the  three 
terms  of  v.1"2.  J^  and  the  Vrss.  all  agree  in  attaching  two  words 
for  sin  together,  "  iniquity  of  my  sin."  But  this  is  against  the 
usage  of  the  previous  context,  and  is  probably  due  to  the  omission 


280  PSALMS 

of  a  verb,  which  is  indeed  necessary  to  complete  the  measure. 
This  verb  is  probably  the  synonym,  pardon,  which  has  been 
omitted  by  copyist's  error,  because  of  its  similarity  in  form  to 
Selah,  here  used  at  the  close  of  the  line.  Thus  we  may  perfect 
the  measure,  and  separate  the  terms  for  sin,  and  render  the  last 
clause,  my  sin  didst  pardon.  —  6.  For  this],  namely,  forgiveness. 
—  let  the  pious],  probably  collective  in  the  original  text,  but  made 
individual  by  a  later  editor  to  correspond  with  v.7-11,  by  prefixing 
"  every."  Only  the  pious,  who  were  in  a  covenant  relation  to 
Yahweh,  and  so  entitled  to  His  kindness,  could  ask  for  forgive- 
ness of  sin.  But  all  such  should  be  encouraged  by  past  experience 
to  pray  for  it  in  time  of  distress,  such  as  that  described  in  v.3-4. 
So  the  original  text  should  probably  read.  But  it  has  been  changed 
by  copyist's  error  into  "  time,  when  Thou  mayest  be  found."  This 
limits  the  petition  to  a  particular  time,  and  so  is  against  the  con- 
text, which  exhorts  to  pray  in  time  of  sin  and  trouble,  which  would 
not  be  usually  considered  as  a  time  when  God  would  be  most 
favourable.  It  is  probable  that  the  copyist,  who  made  the  mis- 
take, was  thinking  of  a  fast  day,  or  possibly  of  the  day  of  atone- 
ment, and  it  suits  quite  well  the  Christian  use  of  Ash  Wednesday. 
This  mistake  of  the  copyist,  seeing  two  words,  where  only  one  was 
designed,  gives  the  second  as  an  introductory  particle  to  the  next 
clause,  sometimes  translated  "But,"  PBV.,  "Surely,"  AV.,  RV., 
for  which  there  is  no  sufficient  reason  in  the  parallelism.  —  At  the 
outburst  of  many  waters'].  The  distress  is  compared  to  a  sudden 
flood,  as  in  Pss.  186  6916.  —  they  will  not  reach  unto  hi?n],  because 
he  has  been  put  into  a  safe  refuge  by  Yahweh,  in  answer  to  his 
prayer.  The  original  Ps.  came  to  an  end  here,  in  a  most  appro- 
priate climax.  And  this  was  probably  all  of  the  Ps.  when  it  was 
used  in  ©. 

Later  editors  made  additions  to  the  Ps.  for  various  reasons ; 
and  first,  7,  which  returns  to  the  first  person  and  is  hexameter.  — 
O  Thou,  my  hiding-place"].  This  thought  was  not  suggested  by 
the  idea  of  the  Ps.  in  general,  but  by  the  specific  thought  of  the 
previous  line  with  reference  to  the  flood  of  waters.  The  voca- 
tive is  better  suited  to  the  following  context  than  the  usual,  "  Thou 
art  my  hiding-place."  This  phrase  has  probably  come  into  the 
Ps.  from  3 121;  cf.  27s  911.     But  the  reference  is  here  more  gen- 


PSALM   XXXII.  28l 

eral  and  later,  for  we  can  hardly  think  of  the  courts  of  the  temple 
in  this  context.  —  From  straits  may  est  Thou  presence  me],  not  an 
expression  of  confidence  in  Yahweh,  but  a  jussive  of  petition.  — 
O  deliverer,  mayest  Thou  encompass  me  about~\ .  This  clause  is 
thus  parallel  with  and  complementary  to  the  previous  one.  $fy,  (3, 
J,  all  differ  very  much.  The  text  has  been  disturbed  by  a  dit- 
tography  which  caused  the  insertion  of  "  songs  " ;  f^,  EV8.,  more 
properly,  "jubilation,"  "  shouts  of  joy  "  ;  but  (3,  3,  have  "  my  jubi- 
lation ||  my  hiding-place."  The  rendering  of  EV8.,  "Thou  wilt 
compass  me  about  with  songs  of  deliverance,"  is  to  be  rejected. 
A  second  gloss  was  added,  v.8"9. 

I  will  instruct  thee  and  teach  thee  in  the  way  thou  shouldst  go ; 
I  will  counsel  thee,  (I  will  fix)  mine  eye  upon  thee. 
Be  not  as  the  horse,  the  mule,  without  understanding, 
With  bridle  and  halter,  its  harness,  to  be  muzzled. 

This  is  a  tetrameter  tetrastich.  It  is  a  warning  which  most 
of  the  older  interpreters  and  many  moderns  regard  as  the  words 
of  God ;  but  most  moderns  think  that  they  are  the  words  of  the 
psalmist.  In  either  case  they  are  not  suited  to  the  Ps.,  because 
the  second  person  throughout  the  Ps.  has  been  God,  and  the 
exhortation  of  the  previous  context  has  been  addressed  to  the 
pious  in  the  3d  person.  It  is  a  supplementary  advice  of  a  later 
editor  to  all  who  listen  to  the  Ps.  It  is  furthermore  of  different 
measure  and  strophical  organisation.  —  8.  /  will  instruct  thee 
and  teach  thee].  This  is  in  accordance  with  the  legal  attitude 
of  mind  subsequent  to  Nehemiah.  —  in  the  way  thou  shouldst  go~\, 
the  way  of  the  Law,  the  legal  way  or  course  of  life  and  conduct ; 
more,  therefore,  in  the  spirit  of  Ps.  1  than  of  Ps.  32.  —  /  wiL 
counsel  thee],  intensifying  the  previous  verbs.  —  A  word  is  missing 
in  J^  and  also  in  most  Vrss.  5?  gives  it,  instead  of  the  verb  pre- 
served in  J^,  the  one  using  one  verb,  the  other  the  other  verb. 
These  are,  indeed,  so  much  alike  that  one  of  them  was  omitted 
in  the  old  codices.  This  verb  is  probably  original  and  should  be 
rendered  /  will  fix,  which  then  gives  an  appropriate  construction 
to  the  otherwise  difficult  phrase,  mine  eye  upon  thee'],  the  eyes  of 
the  teacher  being  fixed  upon  the  pupil  so  as  to  watch  his  every 
step  in  the  way  of  life.     The  positive  teaching  is  followed  by  an 


282  PSALMS 

antith.  couplet  of  warning.  —  9.  Be  not  as  the  horse],  intensified 
by  the  more  obstinate  animal,  the  mule.  —  without  understanding], 
lacking  the  capability  of  receiving  instruction  and  counsel ;  there- 
fore they  have  to  be  guided  by  physical  means,  with  bridle  and 
halter,  its  harness,  to  be  muzzled~\.  This  was  the  original  comple- 
tion of  the  tetrastich  ;  but  a  brief  marginal  note,  indicating  a 
reason  for  the  muzzling,  has  come  into  the  text  and  given  diffi- 
culty. 2^,  followed  by  most,  has  "  it  will  not  come  near  unto 
thee,"  but  various  other  renderings  are  given  by  ancient  and 
modern  versions,  which  will  not  repay  consideration. 
10-11  are  a  still  later  liturgical  gloss. 

Many  sorrows  has  the  wicked  man ; 

But  kindness  has  he  that  trusteth  in  Yahweh. 

Be  glad  and  exult,  ye  righteous, 

And  be  jubilant,  all  ye  right-minded. 

This  is  a  trimeter  tetrastich.  —  Many  sorrows'],  as  the  antith. 
of  kindness,  suggests  that  they  were  due  to  divine  punishment  or 
chastisement.  The  former  belong  to  the  wicked  man  ;  they  are 
his  by  right  of  earning  them  ;  the  latter  belongs  to  the  man  that 
trusteth  in  Yahweh.  This  was  probably  the  exact  antith.  of  the 
original  text,  but  it  has  been  changed  by  a  later  editor  through 
the  addition  of  the  verb  "  compasseth  him  about,"  to  correspond 
with  v.7 ;  and  so  the  measure  has  been  destroyed,  without  any 
important  addition  to  the  meaning. —  11.  Be  glad  and  exult  \\  be 
jubilant],  liturgical  terms  implying  worship  in  the  temple.  In 
the  first  line  "  in  Yahweh  "  is  an  unnecessary  gloss,  destroying  the 
measure.  — ye  righteous],  the  class  of  people  in  Israel  living  in 
conformity  to  the  Law  ||  ye  right-minded. 

1«  *1*Hj]  =  v.2  pi.  cstr.  before  rel.  clause  (v.  i1);  exclamation.  —  ^irj] 
Qal  pass.  ptc.  Nirj,  for  sr;,  assimilated  to  V'D^  as  if  nrj  forgiven,  as  v.6  2518 
85s  998.  %  [pOjf]  vb.  f  Qal  pass.  ptc.  covered,  in  respect  of  sin  only  here. 
Pi.  (1)  cover,  clothe  :  earth  with  great  deep  1046;  heaven  with  clouds  1478; 
(2)  conceal:  transgressions  Jb.  3183  Pr.  179  2813;  iniquity  Ps.  32s;  righteous- 
ness of  God  4011,  cf.  I439(?);  (3)  overwhelm  :  the  waters  of  the  sea  78s3 
10611  Jos.  247  (E)  ;  waters  Ps.  1049  Jb.  2211  38s4;  shame  Pss.  4416  69s  Je.  5151 
Mi.  710;  horror  Ps.  55s  Ez.  718;  mischief  Ps.  14010,  c.  "?p  4420  10617;  (4)  cover 
over  sin  Ps.  85s  (by  God).  Pu.  be  covered  Ps.  8011.  Cf.  usage  of  ids  cover 
over  sin,  v.  63I  78s8  79°  BDB.  — ptf»]  transgression,  v.6  191*. —  friMon]  n.f. 


PSALM   XXXII.  283 

sin;  rare,  only  in  phr.  nVru  71  Gn.  2D9  (E)  Ex.  3221-  *>-  »  (jE)  2  K.  i;2*  and 
Pss.  j^1  407  1097  (v.  nstOT  -?ys,  stan  j/7).  — 2.  D";n]  is  a  gl.;  the  only  other 
use  for  individual  in  \p,  84s- 13.  —  nw]  comes  in  between  vb.  and  lh  in  an  awk- 
ward way  and  should  be  transposed.  —  airrv]  Qal  impf.  present  j  2vn  (v.  102), 
here  in  sense  of  impute,  cf.  Niph.  10681.  —  pj?  f>.  /*«).— mm  mm  I^Ki]  is 
a  gl. :  a  denial  of  sin  and  the  reverse  of  the  confession  of  sin  in  its  three 
forms  in  previous  context,  and  of  the  forgiveness,  the  covering  over,  the  non- 
imputation  of  it.  Besides,  the  phr.  itself  is  late,  rvn  (v.  j/6),  here  in  sense 
of  ^  ffor  moral  character,  elsw.  $  3419  5119  78s.  —  J  n*o-|]  n.f.  deceit  32*  52* 
ioi7,  "\  Dfi?,  deceitful,  treacherous  bow  78",  "\  ptfS  I202-3,  v.  nsnD  j~.  This 
can  hardly  be  softened  down  to  internal  truthfulness  to  God.  —  3.  *s]  tem- 
poral, but  <S,  3,  causal.  —  T^rn]  Hiph.  perf.  I  sg.  aorist ;  Bhn  be  dumb, 
keep  silence,  neglecting  response  (v.  281). —  %  [nSa]  vb.  Qal  wear  out:  of 
garment  Dt.  84  294-4;  fig.  heavens  Ps.  10227  Is.  509;  bones  through  suffering 
here.  Pi.  causative,  wear  out,  consume  away  :  fig.  flesh  and  skin  La.  34;  form 
in  Sheol  Ps.  4915.  —  ,ds>']  for  the  bones  in  a  similar  state  of  pain  v.  6s  2215- 18 
3111  384  4211  5110  io24-6.  —  ^vn-1?^]  makes  the  1.  too  long;  dittog.  as  Du.; 
cf.  DDT  >3  at  beginning  of  next  v.  —  4.  ntfS]  fUS^  n.m.  juice,  sap;  life  blood 
a.X.  in  this  sense  ;  Nu.  II8  (J)  taste  of  manna.  But  (§  has  here  iarpdcp-qv  e/s 
TaXanrwpLav  ;  *B  conversus  sum  in  aerumna  mea  ;  3  versatus  sum  in  miseria 
mea.  These  Vrss.  rd.  rtf  oppression,  and  vb.  as  1  sg.  which  if  inf.  Tf»fi;Jl  01 
ptc.  ^sni  must  have  >Btej.  "^sn  is  followed  by  ^  in  the  sense  of  to  be  turned  ox 
changed  into  something  {v.  jo12) .  —  f  T^n]  n.m.  drought ;  only  here  for  usual 
yy\.  But  ©  ^  xtp  imrayijvai  &Kavdav,  U  </#/#  configitur  spina,  3  cum  ex- 
ardesceret  messis.  ©  must  have  read  y\p  for  y*P  and  ^ann,  sf.  *j  and  inf. 
cstr.  of  s^n  /&  attack,  smite,  as  Je.  5c)21-27  (z>.  /7i3) ;  3  as  inf.  cstr.  of  3in  vb. 
A?  a'rj/.  J5  interprets  itf  breast  and  ijann  as  inf.  cstr.  sf.  1  sg.  ann  /#y  waste, 
destroy.  <3  on  the  whole  seems  most  probable.  *J3"K1  in  pj  is  late  change 
for  3"in,  which  makes  all  the  readings  easy  in  the  different  interpretations. — 
5.  \iNtan]  so  Uty,  emph.  — 1P't,N]  Hiph.  impf.  present,  jn».  ^  aorist  as  next 
vb.  improbable.  —  vpdd]  emph.  present  (r>.  v.1).  —  thcn]  is  in©  and  3,  and 
seems  to  be  original,  although  it  would  seem  more  natural  at  beginning  of 
previous  clause.  It  must  therefore  be  emphatic  and  express  previous  resolu- 
tion.—  *Sp]  is  taken  by  (@>  as  kcit  i/mov,  TB  adversum  me,  hv\  but  this  is  cer- 
tainly incorrect.  It  is  a  poetic,  archaic  prep.,  lengthened  for  measure.  —  nnio] 
emph.  —  TiNton  }r;~]  guilt  of  my  sin  {v.  v.1-  2).  Du.  is  prob.  correct  in  reading 
nnSD  Tston  >jiy;  the  rrrSo  was  confused  with  n^D  and  so  omitted.  Then  it 
was  necessary  to  connect  the  words  for  sin.  This  restoration  makes  the  pen- 
tameter complete  and  the  construction  easy.  —  6.  nn?"Sp]  for  this  thing,  eg. 
pardon,  or  on  this  account,  therefore,  as  p  h';.  ©  virkp  raijrrjs,  3  pro  hac.  — 
nxd  nyS]  cf.  Is.  556  u«Dna;  but  this  is  not  suited  to  the  context,  which  em- 
phasises the  fact  that  God  is  to  be  found  by  the  penitent,  and  not  any  special 
time  of  finding.  —  %  p~±]  conj.  only,  as  918,  or  in  the  sense  assuredly,  does  not 
seem  appropriate  to  the  context.  Therefore  with  Du.  rd.  for  pn  nxd,  piXD, 
which  has  been  confused  with  mxn  and  so  brought  about  p*WD.     piXD  P?S  time 


284  PSALMS 

of  distress,  f  f^xn  n.[m.]  straitness,  straits:  TD1  ns  119148  1  S.  222  Dt.  28s3-  65-  57 
Je.  199.  This  phr.  is  then  further  defined  by  i  *\nv  n.m.  flood,  outburst ;  elsw. 
Na.  I8  Jb.  3825  Dn.  9-26  1122  Pr.  274.  — 7.  »|n]  is  a  difficult  form,  pi.  cstr.  of 
1 1"1  n.[m.]  a.X.  jubilation  =  n;-\ —  f^?]  n.[m.]  deliverance  ;  elsw.  56s  both 
dub.  For  vb.  z>.  1713.  But  <S  is  very  different,  dirb  dXtyews  rijs  irepiexoio-rjs 
/xe  rb  dyaWta/xd  jjlov  Xvrpwaal  /xe  dirb  tQp  KVKhuadvTwv  /xe.  (Q  takes  "'js^iDn 
and  »J*wn  as  alike  relative  clauses  referring  to  the  affliction  or  distress,  nx 
being  n.f.  as  if  mx.  It  points  *p  ||  >S  irD  ;  this  is  most  likely,  unless  with 
Houb.,  Horsley,  Hi.,  Du.,  >n  is  dittog.  for  last  letters  of  mxn.  3  is  somewhat 
different,  tu  es  protectio  mea,  ab  hoste  custodies  me,  laus  mea  salvans,  circum- 
dabis  me.  "W  =  adversary^  toSs  is  ptc.  |Q,  3,  both  take  vbs.  as  expressing 
confidence.  <5  regards  the  verse  as  essentially  petition.  The  vb.  *)"\%r\  is 
||  *jaaiDr,  and  must  be  interpreted  in  the  same  way.  It  is  improb.  that  bSo 
is  a  noun.  The  difficulty  with  ©  is  in  taking  -\x  as  fern,  and  in  the  lack  of 
prep,  p  after  B^B.  It  is  better  to  follow  3  and  take  toSo  as  ptc,  as  183  4018 
706  1442,  referring  to  God,  and  to  regard  the  impfs.  as  jussives. — 

8.  rpwi]  i  coord.,  emph.  addition  to  previous  vb.  —  it]  rel.  (v.  g16).  —  ?)Sn] 
Qal  impf.  modal,  should  go.  —  rep*]  Qal  impf.  cohort.  1  sg.  (v.  /67).  <S  ^7ri- 
cTT)piQ  =  mrpH  Qal  impf.  1  sg.  of  nx;%  as  Pr.  1680;  so  Ba.  A  word  is  miss- 
ing from  the  measure,  y^'j  implies  a  vb.  which  should  prob.  be  that  of  (S 
in  addition  to  that  of  $%,  as  Du.  —  9.  vnrrSs]  Qal  juss.  2  pi.  with  neg.  — 
|  j-?]  n.m.  bridle,  as  Pr.  263  Is.  3J'29.  —  J  jcn]  n.m.  halter,  as  Is.  3028  Jb.  3011. 
—  X  *"!£]  n.[m.]  ornament,  trapping,  harness  ;  only  here  in  this  sense  ;  <g  rds 
ataybvas  clvtGjv,  3  maxillas  eorum  ;  in  \J/  elsw.  only  1035  (dub.).  Hu.,  Pe., 
Moll,  take  the  clause  as  rel.,  "  whose  harness  consists  in  bridle  and  bit  to  tame 
it";  then  Moll,  "  they  will  not  approach  thee,"  Pe.  "or  else  they  will  not 
come  nigh  unto  thee";  Ew.,  Ri.,  AV.,  inf.  with  S  "  must  be  muzzled,  or  there 
is  no  drawing  near  to  thee."  But  vb.  0^2  is  an  Aramaic  word,  not  used  in 
OT.,  and  is  late.  Du.  then  takes  vb.  as  Hiph.  inf.  an|jS  '•a.  S3  is  dittog.,  so 
we  get  anp1?. —  10.  DOiNaD]  pi.  J  aixan  n.m.  pains,  sorrows,  grief;  elsw.  3818 
69s7  Is.  533- 4  Je.  45s  518  La.  I12- 12- 18.  Bi.,  Du.,  insert  ltf«  before  pen  wicked 
man.  But  we  might  rather  omit  U221D'',  and  so  get  a  trimeter  couplet.  The 
omission  of  nim  in  v.11  would  then  give  a  trimeter  tetrastich. — 11.  u»jV»] 
Hiph.  imv.  2  pi.  requires  after  it  k  as  Du.  — aVntf*-f»]  as  711  II2  3611  6411 
9415  97n. 

PSALM   XXXIII.,   4  str.  io3. 

Ps.  33  is  a  song  of  praise.  (1)  A  call  to  worship  in  the  temple 
with  song,  music,  and  shouting  (v.1-3),  because  of  the  righteousness 
and  kindness  of  Yahweh  (v.4^5).  (2)  All  mankind  are  called  to 
fear  Yahweh,  the  creator  of  all  things,  and  disposer  of  all  nations 


PSALM   XXXIII.  285 

(v.6-10).  (3)  Yahweh  from  His  heavenly  throne  inspects  all  man- 
kind (v.13-15)  ;  and  victory  is  not  due  to  armies  or  warriors  (v.16-17). 
(4)  He  delivereth  those  who  fear  Him  (v.18-19) ;  therefore  His 
people  long  for  Him,  are  glad  in  Him,  and  trust  in  His  name  for 
victory  (v.20-22).  A  gloss  praises  the  plans  of  Yahweh  as  everlast- 
ingly secure,  and  also  the  happiness  of  His  people  (v.11-12). 


CHOUT,  ye  righteous  in  Yahweh, 

Praise  is  becoming  to  the  upright ; 

Give  thanks  to  Yahweh  with  the  lyre, 

With  the  ten-stringed  harp  play  to  Him ; 

Sing  to  Him  a  new  song, 

Play  skilfully  with  shouting ; 

For  the  word  of  Yahweh  is  upright ; 

And  all  His  work  is  with  faithfulness; 

He  loves  righteousness  and  justice, 

The  earth  is  full  of  His  kindness. 
13 Y  His  word  the  heavens  were  made, 

And  by  the  breath  of  His  mouth  all  their  host; 

He  gathereth  in  a  flask  the  waters  of  the  sea, 

Putteth  in  treasuries  the  primeval  deep. 

Let  all  the  earth  be  in  fear  of  Yahweh, 

Let  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  world  stand  in  awe ; 

For  He  spake  and  it  came  to  pass, 

He  commanded  and  it  stood  forth. 

He  doth  bring  to  naught  the  counsel  of  nations, 

He  doth  make  of  none  effect  the  plans  of  the  peoples. 
T7ROM  heaven  Yahweh  doth  look, 

See  all  the  sons  of  mankind ; 

From  the  place  where  He  sits  enthroned  He  doth  glance, 

At  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth ; 

He  that  formed  their  mind  altogether, 

He  that  discerneth  all  their  works. 

The  king  doth  not  gain  a  victory  by  his  great  army, 

The  mighty  man  cannot  be  delivered  by  his  great  strength, 

The  horse  is  a  delusion  for  victory, 

And  by  his  great  army  he  cannot  deliver. 
gEHOLD,  the  eye  of  Yahweh  is  toward  them  that  fear  Him, 

Toward  them  that  hope  in  His  kindness ; 

To  deliver  their  life  from  death, 

And  to  preserve  their  lives  in  famine. 

Our  soul  doth  wait  for  Yahweh, 

Our  help  and  shield  is  He ; 

For  in  Him  our  heart  is  glad, 

For  in  His  holy  name  we  trust. 

Let  Thy  kindness,  Yahweh,  be  upon  us 

According  as  we  hope  in  Thee. 


286  PSALMS 

Ps.  33  is  an  orphan  Ps.  without  title,  and  therefore  was  not  in  any  of  the 
minor  or  major  Psalters.  It  was  inserted  in  its  present  position  by  the  final 
editor.  The  r£  Aaveld  of  @  is  a  late  conjecture.  The  Ps.  indeed  shows  the 
influence  of  many  writings:  v.3**  of  Is.  4210;  v.36  of  Is.  2316;  v.7  of  Jb.  38'22; 
v>  of  Gn.  13;  v.11  of  Is.  408  4610  5i6-8  55s *•;  v.18  of  Pss.  u4  14*;  v.16  of 
Zc.  121;  v.16-206  of  Dt.  33*>;  v.17  of  Pr.  2131;  v.2'2  of  Ps.  9017.  1  Mac.  319  is 
probably  based  on  v.16.  The  use  of  the  participles,  v.5- 7,  for  the  finite  verb 
is  in  late  Aramaic  style.  The  Ps.  cannot  be  earlier  than  the  late  Greek  period, 
and  probably  is  Maccabean  on  account  of  its  reference  to  divine  aid  in  victo- 
ries v.16- 17- 19-  20-  21;  the  joyous  temple  worship  with  song,  music,  and  shouting 
v.1-3;  and  universalism  of  outlook  v.8- 10- 18-  14.  The  Ps.  is  composed  of  22 
couplets,  corresponding  with  the  number  of  the  letters  of  the  Hebrew  alpha- 
bet, but  without  the  use  of  the  alphabetic  letters  at  the  beginning  of  the  coup- 
lets, therein  differing  from  Ps.  34.  There  is  always  difficulty  in  arranging 
such  Pss.  in  Strs.,  and  scholars  differ  in  this  regard.  It  is  probable  that  the 
correspondence  of  the  number  of  couplets  with  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  was 
due  to  the  insertion  of  two  couplets,  v.11"12,  into  the  original  Ps.  for  that  pur- 
pose. These  couplets  may  be  taken  out  without  being  missed  —  indeed,  to 
the  improvement  of  the  course  of  thought  in  the  Ps.,  which  they  interrupt. 
It  is  then  easy  to  divide  the  Ps.  into  four  trimeter  decastichs. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  five  syn.  couplets,  three  of  which  are 
a  call  to  worship  in  the  temple,  two  giving  the  reason  for  it.  — 
1.  Shout  ye~\,  the  sacred  shout  expressing  the  enthusiasm  of 
praise  in  the  temple  worship,  which  was  appropriate  to  the  place 
and  becoming  to  those  entitled  to  worship  there.  These  are  the 
righteous  ||  upright,  in  the  later  sense  of  those  zealous  for  the  Law 
and  institutions  of  Israel,  and  living  in  strict  conformity  thereto. 
—  2.  Give  thanks'],  implying  a  song  of  thanksgiving  accompa- 
nied with  instrumental  music  of  the  lyre  and  larger  ten-stringed 
harp.  The  three  forms  of  praise  are  summed  up  in  3  :  Sing,  play 
skilfully,  with  shouting.  That  which  is  to  be  sung  is  a  new  song, 
a  fresh  outburst  of  praise  ;  not  in  the  sense  that  a  new  composi- 
tion was  rendered,  but  that  a  fresh  experience  of  divine  favour 
had  been  enjoyed,  and  was  acknowledged  in  a  new  festal  assem- 
bly in  the  temple  for  this  particular  purpose.  —  4.  The  reason  for 
this  summons  is  the  word  of  Yahweh  and  His  work.  This  com- 
prehends all  the  divine  activity,  as  it  has  been  experienced.  The 
word,  in  its  instruction  and  promises,  is  upright,  as  His  people 
who  conform  to  it  are  upright ;  His  work  in  judgment  upon 
enemies  and  redemption  of  His  people   is  with  faithfulness  to 


PSALM   XXXIII.  287 

His  covenant,  cf.  Dt.  32*.  But  back  of  all  His  word  and  work 
is  His  love  in  its  more  ancient  form  of  kindness  and  its  later  form 
of  affection.  —  5.  He  loves  righteousness,  probably  the  doing  of  it 
on  His  part  as  the  context  suggests,  and  justice,  incorrectly  ren- 
dered "judgment  "  in  EVS.  here  and  elsewhere  in  this  combination. 
—  The  earth  is  full  of  His  kindness]  in  action,  in  His  work  as  above, 
cf.  1 1964.  These  divine  attributes  are  conceived  as  working  through 
all  the  earth.  That  is  the  background  of  their  particular  working 
in  the  experience  which  calls  for  the  fresh  song  of  praise. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  two  parts  of  syn.  couplets,  giving  the 
reason  for  the  intervening  syn.  couplet,  summoning  the  world  to 
stand  in  awe  of  Yahweh.  —  6.  The  psalmist  goes  back  in  thought 
to  the  creation,  especially  of  the  heavens  and  all  their  host;  that 
is,  the  heavenly  luminaries,  sun,  moon,  and  stars,  in  accordance 
with  the  conception  of  Gn.  21  Is.  4026  4512,  and  not  the  angels  as 
Pss.  10321  1 48s.  These  were  made,  the  most  general  term  for 
creative  activity,  not  implying  any  particular  mode  or  theory  of 
creation.  —  By  His  word],  the  instrumental  means  here  em- 
ployed; that  is,  by  command,  as  v.9  in  accordance  with  Gn.  1. 
With  this  is  parallel :  By  the  breath  of  His  mouth'],  the  words 
breathed  forth  in  speech.  Some  have  thought  of  the  divine  Spirit 
here  in  accordance  with  Gn.  i2,  the  same  Hebrew  word  being 
used  for  "  breath  "  and  "  spirit " ;  but  if  the  reference  were  to 
the  divine  Spirit  it  would  be  Spirit  of  Yahweh,  and  not  Spirit  of 
His  mouth.  —  7.  The  creation  of  the  waters  of  the  sea  is  now 
described.  —  the  primeval  deep],  probably  only  the  depths  of  the 
sea,  in  accordance  with  Jb.  38s"11- 22,  and  not  the  more  compre- 
hensive mass  of  waters,  including  the  subterranean  and  terranean 
waters  before  their  separation,  of  Gn.  i0-9.  —  He  gathereth  in  a 
flask],  after  (3  and  most  ancient  Vrss.,  as  more  suited  to  the 
putteth  in  treasuries,  than  ^  followed  by  EV8.,  "  as  a  heap." 
The  conceptions  of  treasuries,  where  God  stores  up  the  snow  and 
hail,  and  of  a  flask,  literally  water-skin,  in  which  the  Orientals 
carry  their  water  and  wine,  where  God  stores  up  the  waters  of 
heaven,  are  in  Jb.  3822  37.  Inasmuch  as  in  Jb.  388"10  the  baby  sea  is 
conceived  as  shut  in  safely  in  its  place  at  the  creation  with  bars 
and  doors,  it  is  most  probable  that  all  these  terms  of  Job  are  at 
the  basis  of  this  description,  rather  than  the  heaping  up  of  the 


288  PSALMS 

waters  of  the  Red  Sea  for  the  passage  through  them  of  Israel, 
according  to  Ex.  158,  which  is  another  and  heterogeneous  figure 
of  speech  to  that  of  treasuries  and  the  permanence  of  the  sea 
in  its  place.  The  verbal  forms  are  participles,  but  not  on  that 
account  to  be  referred  to  "  the  continual  action  of  maintenance 
as  well  as  the  original  creation,"  Kirk.,  because  the  participles  are 
of  the  late  Aramaic  style,  used  for  the  finite  verb,  and  refer  to  the 
creation  itself  as  in  the  passage  of  Job  mentioned  above.  —  8.  The 
fact  of  the  creation  of  heavens  and  sea  by  Yahweh  is  a  ground  on 
which  the  psalmist  summons  mankind  to  fear  such  a  Creator.  — 
Let  all  the  earth  ||  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  world],  all  mankind 
wherever  they  may  be.  This  is  an  universal  summons.  —  be  in 
fear  of  Yahweh  ||  stand  in  awe].  It  is  not  probable  that  the 
psalmist  is  thinking  of  fear  here  in  the  religious  sense  appropriate 
to  the  people  of  God,  as  in  v.18,  where  the  accusative  is  used ; 
but  in  the  more  external  sense  of  awe  and  submission  to  the 
divine  sovereignty.  —  9.  The  reason  is  reenforced  by  a  return  to 
the  conception  of  the  creation,  which  is  stated  in  terms  of  the 
primitive  creation  of  the  light,  according  to  Gn.  i3.  —  For  He 
spake  and  it  came  to  pass],  the  very  words  of  Gn.  i3,  expressing 
by  the  Waw  consec.  the  immediateness  of  the  obedience  of  the 
creature  to  the  creative  word  ;  paraphrased  in  the  syn.  clause  : 
He  commanded,  with  the  same  immediateness  of  result,  and  it 
stood  forth]  ;  that  is,  it  sprang  into  existence  and  presented  itself, 
or  stood  forth  as  a  host,  using  the  imagery  of  v.6  and  Gn.  21,  as  an 
army  stands  forth  in  array  when  the  sovereign  issues  the  com- 
mand. — 10.  The  creative  power  has  been  mentioned  as  a  warn- 
ing to  the  nations ;  it  is  therefore  appropriate  in  the  climax  that 
the  providential  power  should  be  referred  to.  This,  as  we  would 
expect  from  the  purpose  of  the  statement,  is  on  its  negative  side, 
with  reference  to  the  nations  \\  the  peoples.  They  may  take  counsel 
and  make  plans  against  the  people  of  Yahweh,  but  in  vain ;  for 
He  doth  bring  them  to  naught  ||  make  of  none  effect.  He  frus- 
trates all  their  schemes  of  hostility  against  His  people ;  and  this 
is  the  climax  which  justifies  the  inclusion  of  the  entire  Str.  in 
this  Ps.  of  praise. 

A  later  editor,  wishing  to  emphasise  the  thought  of  the  last 
couplet,  adds  a  tetrastich  to  the  Str.,  and  interrupts  thereby  the 
progress  of  thought  in  the  Ps. 


PSALM  XXXIII.  289 

The  counsel  of  Yahweh  standeth  forever, 
The  plans  of  His  mind  to  all  generations. 
Happy  the  nation  whose  God  is  Yahweh, 
The  people  He  has  chosen  for  His  inheritance ! 

11-12.  The  counsel  of  Yahweh  j|  the  plans  of  His  mind'],  the 
plans  formed  in  His  mind,  God  being  conceived  as  having  a 
mind,  just  as  man,  His  image.  These  words  are  in  striking  antith. 
to  the  counsel  and  plans  of  the  nations  of  the  previous  couplet. 
As  Yahweh  frustrates  their  counsel  and  plans,  He  maintains  His 
own  counsel ;  it  standeth  firm,  not  capable  of  frustration,  unchange- 
able, permanent,  and  indeed  forever  ||  to  all  generations.  This  is 
a  ground  for  congratulation  to  the  people  of  Yahweh,  for  it  ren- 
ders them  secure  in  the  hands  of  their  God ;  therefore  they  may 
sing  :  Happy  the  nation  ||  the  people,  antith.  to  all  the  other  nations 
and  peoples,  because  they  have  the  inestimable  privilege  of  one 
whose  God  is  Yahweh ;  and  this  not  simply  because  they  have 
chosen  Him  to  be  their  God,  but  because  He  has  chosen  them 
for  His  inheritance,  His  own  special  property  in  accordance  with 
the  original  covenant,  Ex.  195;  cf.  Dt.  420  920-29  32s  Mic.  71418  Is. 
1925  Je.  io16  Pss.  289  6810  74s  786271  94514  106540.  A  still  later  edi- 
tor inserts  in  the  Mss.  underlying  (3  an  addition  to  v.10,  followed 
by  U  and  PBV.,  "and  casteth  out  the  counsel  of  princes,"  which 
makes  the  couplet  into  a  triplet  by  a  third  syn.  clause.  It  cer- 
tainly was  not  in  the  original  Ps.,  which  was  composed  entirely 
of  couplets,  although  it  is  an  idea  entirely  appropriate  in  itself. 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  three  synth.  couplets,  describing  the 
divine  inspection  of  mankind,  followed  by  two  syn.  couplets  draw- 
ing the  consequences,  that  victory  and  safety  are  not  due  entirely 
to  human  powers.  — 13-14.  F?-om  heaven],  emphatic,  ||  the  place 
where  He  sits  enthroned],  the  divine  throne  in  the  heavenly  pal- 
ace, v.  98  2910  5520  10213  Is.  6315  661. —  Yahweh  doth  look  ||  see 
||  glance],  the  divine  inspection  of  mankind,  as  n4  142. — all  the 
sons  of  mankind  ||  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth].  His  inspec- 
tion is  universal,  a  resumption  of  the  thought  of  the  universal 
warning  of  v.8.  The  inspection  is  a  thorough  one,  nothing  escapes 
it.  — 15.  He  that  formed  their  mind],  created  the  mind  of  man, 
constructed  or  formed  it  as  truly  as  He  formed  the  body;  cf. 
Gn.  27-8  Zc.  121  Ps.  949.  It  is  possible  that  the  second  story  of 
u 


29O  PSALMS 

the  creation  was  in  the  mind  of  the  psalmist  as  well  as  the  first, 
and  that  he  extends  the  construction  of  the  body  of  man  to  that 
of  the  mind  also.  But  inasmuch  as  he  thinks  of  the  minds  of  his 
contemporaries,  the  formation  of  the  mind  is  not  that  of  the  prim- 
itive man,  but  that  of  all  men  the  world  over.  The  psalmist  does 
not,  any  more  than  Is.2,  distinguish  the  creative  activity  from  the 
providential.  He  certainly  does  not  conceive  the  later  distinction 
between  creationism  and  traducianism.  He  thought  that  each 
and  every  individual  man  originates,  mind  and  body,  as  a  result 
of  divine  activity;  cf.  Ps.  13913"16.  The  divine  construction  of 
the  mind  was  not  partial  but  total,  altogether.  Therefore  Yahweh 
knows  it  already  in  all  its  powers  and  activities,  its  capacities  and 
its  limitations.  Nothing  whatever  in  the  mind  of  man  can  escape 
His  inspection.  He  knows  the  inner  man.  He  is  one  that  dis- 
cerneth  all  their  works.  The  result  of  all  this  is  that  the  mind 
and  works  of  men  are  very  much  limited ;  they  are  under  the 
entire  control  of  Yahweh.  —  16-17.  The  king~\,  thinking  probably 
of  the  king  of  Syria,  the  great  enemy  of  the  Maccabean  times, 
||  the  mighty  man,  the  trained  warrior,  ||  the  horse,  the  cavalry 
of  the  army.  These  are  conceived  as  with  a  great,  a  numerous, 
army,  coming  up  against  Israel  and  relying  upon  their  overwhelm- 
ing power  for  victory.  The  renderings  of  EV8.,  "save,"  "salva- 
tion," or  "  safety,"  are  too  general,  and  not  suited  to  the  context. 
The  beauty  of  the  synonymous  thought  is  spoiled  by  rendering 
the  same  word  "  host  "  or  "  army  "  in  v.16  and  "  strength  "  in  v.17, 
as  if  the  latter  referred  to  the  horse.  This  would  be  an  exaggera- 
tion of  the  horse,  giving  it  a  couplet  to  itself,  and  indeed  in  the 
climax  of  the  Str.,  as  compared  with  the  king  who  would  have 
but  one  line,  although  he  is  emphasised  by  the  position  of  the 
word  in  v.16a.  The  king  is  really  the  subject  of  v.176,  as  well  as  of 
v.16a.  The  king  thinks  he  can  gain  a  victory  by  his  great  army. 
His  cavalry,  in  which  he  chiefly  trusted,  proves  a  delusion.  In- 
stead of  winning  victory,  he  is  defeated,  and  in  his  defeat  the 
strength  of  his  warriors  cannot  deliver  them,  and  the  king  himself 
cannot  find  deliverance  by  his  army.  The  context  indicates  that 
all  this  is  due  to  the  divine  inspection  and  interposition  so  fully 
stated  in  the  previous  couplets.  For  this  situation  in  history,  cf. 
1  Mac.  319. 


PSALM   XXXIII.  291 

Str.  IV.  is  composed  of  two  syn.  couplets,  setting  forth  the 
experience  of  deliverance,  followed  by  three  synth.  couplets  of 
joyous  prayer.  — 18.  Behold],  calling  particular  attention  to  what 
is  to  be  said.  —  the  eye  of  Yahweh],  taking  up  the  inspection  of 
the  previous  Str.  Yahweh's  eye  is  resting  upon  His  people  as 
well  as  upon  the  nations,  only  with  a  different  motive.  He  had 
inspected  the  nations  to  frustrate  their  plans  and  to  give  them 
defeat  instead  of  victory.  He  inspects  His  people  with  favour. — 
toward  them  that  fear  Htm'],  with  the  reverential  fear  of  worship, 
||  toward  them  that  hope  in  His  kindness'],  look  up  to  Him  for  it, 
expect  it,  wait  to  receive  it ;  recurring  to  the  kindness  of  v.5, 
praised,  as  exhibited  throughout  the  earth.  That  which  the  peo- 
ple of  Yahweh  hoped  for,  looking  unto  Yahweh  in  godly  fear,  they 
received.  — 19.  His  eye  had  a  redemptive  purpose  when  directed 
upon  them  :  To  deliver  their  life  from  death.  The  nation  had 
been  in  extreme  peril  because  of  the  great  army  of  the  king  of 
Syria,  threatening  to  destroy  them.  Yahweh  delivered  them  by 
giving  them  the  victory.  —  And  to  preserve  their  lives  in  famine]. 
If  this  is  historical,  it  may  refer  to  the  famine  of  a  besieged  city 
in  which  the  great  army  of  Syria  had  shut  up  Israel,  and  then 
probably  to  a  siege  of  Jerusalem,  or  else  to  a  peril  of  famine  in 
the  land,  owing  to  the  devastation  wrought  by  the  Syrian  army. 
—  20.  The  psalmist  now  turns  to  the  final  prayer. —  Our  soul]. 
The  people  are  conceived  as  having  but  one  soul ;  only  they 
speak,  not  as  an  individual,  "  my  soul,"  but  as  an  aggregate  of 
individuals  in  one  nation.  —  doth  wait  for  Yahweh],  not  here  in 
the  sense  of  anxiously  looking  for  an  exhibition  of  kindness  in 
deliverance  ;  but  in  the  temple,  in  reliance  upon  His  kindness 
as  already  bestowed.  —  21-22.  For  in  Him  our  heart  is  glad  ||  we 
trust  ||  we  hope  in  Thee,  all  alike  syn.  expressions  of  joyous  confi- 
dence in  their  God  who  had  done  such  great  things  for  them. — 
Our  help  and  shield],  shield  for  defence,  help  to  deliver;  cf. 
Gn.  151  Pss.  34  203.  —  His  holy  name],  the  majestic  name  that 
secures  victory  in  accordance  with  20s- 8.  The  Ps.  concludes  with 
a  petition  that  the  kindness  just  experienced  in  deliverance,  v.18, 
and  which  now  fills  the  earth  with  its  renown,  v.5,  may  ever  abide 
upon  His  people. 


292  PSALMS 

1.  fniNj]  adj.  (i)  comely:  of  woman  Ct.  I5  64,  so  Ps.  6813;  cf.  Je.  62; 
face  Ct.  214;  mouth  Ct.  43.  (2)  seemly  :  of  nSnn  here  as  1471  (cf.  935);  elsw. 
Pr.  177  1910  261.  — 2.  Tfa$,  Saj,  Tir;,  v.  Intr.  §  34.  — 3.  fBHn  Tr]  is  based 
on  Is.  4210;  elsw.  Pss.  404  961  981  1449  1491,  a  fresh  outburst  of  song.  —  O^n] 
Hiph.  pf.  3  m.  pi.  X  [rJ"]  vb.  Qal,  be  pleasing;  c.  h  69™;  elsw.  c.  h  be  well 
for,  go  well  with,  Gn.  1213  (J)  4014  (E)  Dt.  8  t.  Je.  4  t.  +.  Hiph.  (1)  c.  S  do 
good  to,  deal  well  with,  Pss.  4919  1254  Ex.  l'-°  (E)  Gn.  I21G  (J)  +  ;  c.  ace. 
Ps.  5i2)  Dt.  816  Je.  1810  +  ;  (2)  do  thoroughly,  prob.  36*,  as  Mi.  f  f  IJj(S)  »" 
play  well,  skilfully,  here  as  1  S.  1617  Is.  2316  Ez.  33s-;  (3)  do  well,  right: 
ethically  Ps.  11968.  —  ]if]  Pi.  inf.,  v.  Intr.  §  34.  —  njn-vi]  sacred  shout,  v.  2J6. 
—  4.  ir;]  right  {v.  711),  as  predicate  of  the  ia*i  only  here,  but  cf.  for  the 
commands  of  the  Law  in  other  terms  199  119187.  J  -on  n.m.  (1)  speech,  dis- 
course, saying:  v>nov  "\  174  5913;  nc  "1  36*;  njNiy  '-1  222;  -10  1  bitter  speech 
64*;  3V3  "1  goodly  speech  in  poem  452;  *n  njj?  11942  Is.  3621  Je.  4420;  spoken  com- 
mand of  God  Yss.  33*- $  I0320-20  10528  1488,  prob.  56s-  n-u;  ~i  nSp  10720  14718 
(cf.  v.15)  Is.  97  Je.  42s;  promise  Pss.  ic>519- 42  io612-24.  (2)  Saying,  sentence 
as  written,  lines  of  song,  181  137s  Dt.  3244;  the  Law  as  divine  sentence  Pss.  5017 

IO58    I  I99'  16,  17-  2&-  28'  42-  48-  49>  67-  ^  74-  81-  89-  101-  105-  107-  114-  13°-  139-  147-  160.  161.  169 

1305  14719.  (3)  Words,  as  parts  of  sentence,  71  194  526  5522  56s  1093.  (4)  Mat- 
ter, affair,  about  which  one  speaks,  pi.  654  10527  1456  ( ?) ;  sg.  >n  "\  64°  1414; 
SjpSa  'i  419  1013;  mono  "1  352);  «»««  in  judgment  1126.  (5)  Prep,  -0-1  "?? 
because  of,  for  the  sake  of,  45s  79°  Gn.  2011  (E)  Ex.  82  (J).  —  VtfP»D~V3)]  should 
be  without  Makkeph  for  measure.  —  n^DK?J  not  2  essentiae,  PBV.,  Pe.,  but 
either  in  as  <g,  3,  De.,  Hu.,  Che.,  Dr.,  or  with,  Ew.  %  ^VtDH  n.f.  firmness, 
steadfastness,  fidelity ;  in  ^  only  faithfulness,  trust:  (a)  of  human  conduct 
373  (?)  ;  'H  T,-n  11980.  f  (£)  as  divine  attribute  881'2  89-  3-  c-  9;  shewn  in  works 
33I ;  commands  119s6;  in  affliction  11976;  in  oath  to  David  8950;  reaching 
unto  skies  36s;  unto  all  generations  ioo5  11990;  God  will  not  belie  it  89:54; 
"IKD  rmDH  II9138  (cf.  jps  'N  Is.  251);  closely  associated  with  "»pn  0925  92s  98s 
(cf.  Ho.  222),  p"vt  njyrt  9618  1431  (cf.  Is.  n5),  salvation  Ps.  4011  (elsw.  of  God 
only  Dt.  324  La.  328).  —  5.  :hn]  Qal  ptc.  Yahweh  subj.  —  npnx]  righteousness 
(v.  j9). — 'JDU;^]  justice  (v.  i5). —  -Dr.]  kindness,  as  v.18-22  {v.  4^).  —  mn>] 
unnecessary  gl.  —  6.  "*  "on]  is  only  a  variation  of  ">  1DH  of  Gn.  ic,  which  the 
author  had  in  view  (v.9).  This  is  evident  also  from  the  K3J,  which  in  Gn.  21 
refers  to  the  whole  organised  creation,  but  here  specifically  to  the  heavenly 
bodies  (7;.  2410).  —  vo  ran]  {v.  1816  31s)  =  breath  of  his  mouth  is  syn.  with 
-o-,  the  uttered  word,  as  most  interpreters  of  modern  times.  The  majority 
of  the  older  interpreters,  however,  think  of  the  D^nSa  nn  of  Gn.  I2.  But  this 
seems  excluded  by  vc,  which  is  nowhere  used  in  connection  with  the  divine 
Spirit.  Pe.  suggests  that  there  is  here  a  usage  parallel  to  Ps.  10429-30,  where 
the  nn  of  God  is  the  source  of  life  as  it  enters  into  the  animals  with  quicken- 
ing power  and  imparts  to  them  their  nn.  So  in  Jb.  33*,  the  divine  nn  and 
nnsw  are  in  men  the  source  of  life.  But  this  would  lead  us  beyond  Pe.  to  the 
doctrine  of  Gn.  27,  where  the  0"n  nc'^J  is  breathed  into  Adam's  nostrils  by 
Yahweh,  and  Gn.  722  implies  that  the  D"n  nn  PDPJ  of  all  animals  was  also 


PSALM   XXXIII.  293 

imparted  by  the  breath  of  God.  This,  however,  would  lead  to  the  thought 
that  the  *os  of  heaven  are  here  regarded  as  living  beings,  like  the  morning 
stars  of  Job,  and  the  reference  here  would  be  to  orders  of  angels.  This  would 
widen  the  doctrine  of  creation  to  the  extent  that  all  living  beings  in  heaven 
and  on  earth  owe  their  life  to  the  breath  of  the  divine  mouth.  —  mm  nana]  is 
prob.  for  an  original  nana;  otherwise  the  1.  is  too  long.  —  7.  Diir]  Qal  ptc. 
t  [djd]  vb.  Qal,  gather  ;  people  1  Ch.  222  Est.  416;  waters  here  ;  stones  Ec.  35; 
wealth  Ec.  28,  cf.  v.26;  portion  for  priests  Ne.  1244.  Pi.  gather  together:  for 
punishment  Ez.  2221;  for  restoration  Ps.  1472  Ez.  30/28.  Hithp.  gather  oneself 
together  Is.  2820.  —  f -u]  heap;  as  in  Ex.  158  Ps.  7813,  of  Jordan  Jos.  313- 16 
(Is.  1711  dub.),  so  pj,  Hu.,  Pe. ;  but  Hare,  Lowth.,  Horsley,  Houb.,  Ew.,  Ols., 
Che.,  al.,  follow  the  Vrss.  (except  Quinta)  in  reading  "fj  =  "inj  bottle  (v.369). 
The  sea  is  represented  as  shut  up  as  water  in  a  bottle  or  water  skin  ;  cf. 
Jb.  38s-11,  where  the  baby  sea  is  shut  in  with  doors  and  bars.  It  is  tempting 
to  think  of  the  bottles  of  the  clouds ;  in  this  case  the  upper  as  well  as  the 
lower  waters  were  in  the  poet's  mind.  —  d^d]  (v.  1812)  used  frequently  of 
waters  of  the  clouds  ;  but  D>  (v.  24s)  either  of  seas  on  the  earth's  surface  or 
subterranean.  —  J^tfN]  n.m.,  in  \f/  only  pl.f.  for  the  storehouses  of  God  for 
rain,  snow,  hail,  etc.;  elsw.  1357  Dt.  2812  Jb.  38*2.22  je.  io*3  =  5iM.  — nMDWi] 
pl.f.  of  X  D^n^  n.m.  deep  place  :  always  of  waters  :  (1)  of  a  great  sea  367  10726 
1356  1487;  (2)  of  the  Red  Sea  at  the  crossing  7717  1069;  (3)  of  a  river,  giving 
drink  7815,  with  waterfalls  42s-8;  (4)  of  subterranean  waters  7120  (?);  (5)  of 
the  primeval  sea  here,  as  1046.  —  8.  UDD]  prosaic  gl.,  makes  1.  too  long. — 
9.  Kin  "oj  13  here  as  in  v.4  giving  reason  of  praise,  mn  emph.  as  in  parallel 
line.  —  >rm  idn]  is  based  on  the  creation  of  the  light  Gn.  i3,  pf.  followed 
by  1  consec.  impf.  immediate  result.  — 10.  "von]  Hiph.  pf.  3  m.  for  usual 
ten,  assimilated  in  form  to  N^n.  %  [*^s]  vb.  Hiph.  (1)  break,  the  Law  1  19126; 
(2)  frustrate,  here  ;  (3)  annul  85s  89s4  both  dub.  —  f  [nu]  vb.  Qal  only 
Nu.  327  Kt.  (but  Hiph.  Qr.).  Hiph.  (1)  restrain,  forbid,  vow  Nu.  30s- 6-  »•  12; 
frustrate,  thoughts  here;  refuse  {DC  (but  dub.)  1415;  (2)  restrain  from 
Nu.  327-9.  —  \  natfno]  n.f.  (1)  thought:  din  'd  9411;  of  God,  ia?  'd  3311; 
c.  *?«  406;   are  exceeding  deep  92s;    (2)  device,  plan,  purpose,  here  and  566. 

—  11-12.  These  are  tetrameters  in  their  present  form,  a1?  of  God  is  as  a? 
of  man,  the  seat  of  the  thoughts  and  counsels,  or  plans  (v.  ig15) ;  cf.  Is.  408 
4610  5i6-8  558s(i.  — 13.  o^DBto]  emph.,  cf.  142.  —  aran]  Hiph.  pf.  emph.  pres- 
ent aaj. — 14.  "inatf]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  sf.  3  s.  ;  2Vh  pregnant  sense,  sit  enthroned 
(v.2*).  —  rvsttfci]  Hiph.  Pf.  frw  glance  at;  elsw.  Is.  1416  Ct.  29.  — 15.  02S  -iX"1] 
Here  God  forms  the  aS,  the  intellectual  and  moral  nature  of  man,  as  in  Zc.  121 
He  forms  the  rm,  the  disposition  or  temper.  —  "wn]  Qal  ptc;  paon  Hiph. 
ptc;  both  with  article  and  so  rel.  clauses.  — 16.  p«]  is  constructed  with  ptc. 
yb  <&,  3,  Hu.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  but  with  the  noun  by  EV8.;    the  former  is  the  better. 

—  iSon]  generic  article  (v.  2s).  —  yvfr}]  Niph.  ptc  ^  (v.  j8)  has  the  mng. 
of  gaining  victory,  as  Ew.,  Hi.,  De.,  Hu.,  Pe.,  Kirk.  — 17.  Wen]  generic 
article:  the  horse  is  nptf  (j15),  a  deception,  delusion,  as  Pr.  2131.  —  nyi^n] 
victory,  for  older  nyrtfr  (v.  j3).     J  npu'n  n.f.  (1)  deliverance,  usually  by  God 


294  PSALMS 

through  human  agency,  esp.  from  oppression  and  in  battle,  and  so  victory 
here  as  14410;  of  deliverance  from  personal  troubles  37s9;  or  of  national 
deliverance  under  fig.  of  personal  4011-  n  7116;  *njntfn  "»  38s3;  of  man,  r';v?^ 
dtn  deliverance  of  or  through  man  6013  =  10813,  cf.  1463;  (2)  more  exclu- 
sively spiritual  in  sense  5116  H941-81. — B^]  Pi.  impf.  modal  (v.  22P) ; 
<S  Niph.  pass.  These  four  lines  afford  a  fine  example  of  distributed  parallel- 
ism, pahj  of  a  has  its  parallel  in  fijntfn  of  c.  ssr  of  b  is  balanced  with  ti~*w 
of  d ;  but  Sti  31  is  in  a  and  d,  although  3,  EVB.  regard  the  second  as  the 
strength  of  the  horse.  — 18.  This  1.  is  a  pentameter  as  it  stands,  but  the  change 
of  *?n  to  S  in  b  is  improb.;  rd.  D*SlVD  Ski.  D«Snvp  Pi.  ptc.  pi.,  Sit  (v.ji25); 
so  v.22.  — 19.  This  is  also  a  pentameter  line  most  naturally,  but  DnvnS  is 
strange;  it  is  a  condensation  of  onrn  nwiS.  The  trouble  of  famine  is  instead 
of  the  battle  of  v.1***.  — SmhS]  Hiph.  inf.  hn  as  v.w,  ||  n>«nS  Pi.  inf.  of  rvn 
(v.  2Z27),  both  expressing  purpose.  n»n  in  the  sense  of  life  is  only  in  poetry ; 
cf.  7419  7850  1433.  —  20.  UVfoi]  emph.  paraphrase  of  personal  pronoun  we 
(v.  j3).  —  nv:"]  ***•  P^  3  *•  J  [n:)n]  v^-  Qa^»  wait  for,  only  Is.  3018  (c.  t>). 
Pi.  long  for :  c.  •?  here  as  io61?,  also  Is.  817  64s  Zp.  38  +. 


PSALM  XXXIV.,  3   str.  76. 

Ps.  34  is  a  thanksgiving.  (1)  A  vow  of  praise  in  which  all 
are  invited  to  unite  (v.2-4) ;  because  Yahweh  has  answered  the 
prayer  of  His  afflicted  people  and  delivered  them  by  their  guar- 
dian angel  (v.5-8)  ;  (2)  an  exhortation  to  seek  Yahweh,  the  source 
of  all  good  (v.9"11),  with  instruction  that  prosperity  depends  upon 
good  conduct  (v.1-"15) ;  (3)  a  contrast  of  the  watchful  care  of 
Yahweh  over  the  righteous  (v.16-18-21)  with  His  destruction  of  the 
wicked  (v.17  22).     A  liturgical  gloss  was  added  (v.23). 

T  WILL  bless  Yahweh  at  all  times,  continually  shall  His  praise  be  in  my  mouth. 
Of  Yahweh  will  my  soul  boast;  let  the  afflicted  (make  it  heard)  and  be  glad. 

0  magnify  Yahweh  with  me;  and  let  us  exalt  His  name  together. 

1  sought  Yahweh,  and  He  answered  me,  and  from  all  my  terrors  He  delivered  me. 
They  looked  unto  Him  and  beamed,  and  their  face  was  not  abashed. 

This  same  afflicted  people  cried,  and  Yahweh  from  all  his  distresses  saved  him. 
The  angel  of  Yahweh  encamped  about  them  that  fear  Him,  and  rescue  them. 
C\  TASTE  and  see  that  He  is  good  ;  happy  the  man  that  taketh  refuge  in  Him. 
O  fear  Yahweh,  His  holy  ones ;  for  there  is  no  lack  to  them  that  fear  Him. 
Young  lions  are  in  want  and  they  suffer  hunger;  but  they  that  seek  Him  lack 

not  any  good. 
O  come,  sons,  hearken  to  me;  the  fear  of  Yahweh  I  will  teach  you. 
Who  is  the  man  that  taketh  pleasure  in  life?  loveth  days  that  he  may  see  good? 
Keep  thy  tongue  from  evil,  and  thy  lips  from  speaking  deceit ; 
Depart  from  evil  and  do  good ;  seek  peace  and  pursue  it. 


PSALM   XXXIV.  295 

"THE  face  of  Yahweh  is  against  them  that  do  evil,  to  cut  off  their  memory  from 
the  land. 

The  eyes  of  Yahweh  are  unto  the  righteous,  and  His  ears  unto  their  cry  for  help ; 

They  cry  and  Yahweh  heareth,  and  delivereth  them  out  of  all  their  distresses. 

Yahweh  is  nigh  unto  the  broken-hearted,  and  the  crushed  in  spirit  He  saveth. 

Many  are  the  misfortunes  of  the  righteous :  but  out  of  them  all  Yahweh  deliv- 
ereth him ; 

He  keepeth  all  his  bones,  not  one  of  them  is  broken. 

Misfortune  shall  slay  the  wicked,  and  they  that  hate  the  righteous  shall  suffer 
punishment. 

Ps.  34  was  in  13,  but  not  in  any  of  the  major  Psalters.  The  title  has  a 
reference  to  the  life  of  David,  "  when  he  changed  "  or  disguised  "  his  judg- 
ment," feigned  madness  "  before  Abimelek,  and  he  sent  him  away  and  he 
departed,"  in  accordance  with  the  story  1  S.  2illb(J-,  except  that  the  Philistine 
king  is  there  called  Achish  (v.  Intr.  §  27).  This  change  might  have  arisen 
from  defective  memory  of  the  editor,  or  from  substituting  the  common  name 
of  the  Philistine  kings  for  the  specific  one.  Ps.  56  is  also  referred  in  the  title 
to  the  same  period  of  David's  life  at  Gath.  The  editor  did  not  mean  to  imply 
that  David  composed  these  Pss.  on  that  occasion,  but  that  they  might  be  sup- 
posed to  represent  his  spiritual  emotions  at  that  time.  Ps.  34  is  an  acrostic 
of  22  hexameters,  and  like  all  such  poems  more  or  less  artificial.  There  seems 
to  have  been  a  transposition  of  lines  >  and  D.  This  was  due  to  an  editor  who 
changed  the  earlier  order  of  these  letters  (v.  La.  2,  3,  4,  and  <&  of  Pr.  31)  to 
the  later  order  of  his  time.  The  Ps.  is  original,  and  shews  little  dependence 
on  other  writings.  The  conception  of  the  guardian  angel,  v.8,  resembles  that 
0f  350-6  qIiij  an(j  js  probably  an  earlier  conception  of  a  special  angel,  having 
Israel  in  charge,  which  subsequently  develops  into  the  one  named  Michael, 
and  implies  the  Persian  period.  The  term  jnn  11D,  v.15,  is  common  to  WL.,  but 
elsw.  only  here  Ps.  37s7  Is.  5915.  The  contrition  of  v.19  is  dependent  on  Is.  5710 
611  and  resembles  Ps.  5119.  The  Ps.  implies  the  beginning  of  WL.  and  the 
Persian  period,  but  shews  no  dependence  on  P.  The  Ps.  omits  the  line  \  as 
Ps.  25,  in  order  to  get  a  division  into  three  Strs.  of  seven  lines  each.  It  has 
also  a  supplementary  liturgical  addition  which  is  essentially  the  same  as  that 
in  Ps.  25.  On  account  of  v.9  the  Ps.  was  used  in  the  Holy  Communion  in  the 
ancient  Church  ;  cf.  Apostolic  Constitutions,  813;  Cyril,  Cat.  myst.  517;  Bing- 
ham, Antiq.  V.  460. 

Str.  I.  is  a  heptastich,  composed  of  a  syn.  tristich  and  a  syn. 
tetrastich.  —  2-3.  I  will  bless  YahweK],  in  the  benedictions  char- 
acteristic of  Hebrew  worship,  ||  His  praise,  the  praise  of  Him,  by 
the  use  of  the  hallels,  characteristic  of  festivals  (v.  Intr.  §  35). — 
boast],  in  these  hallels,  by  describing  Yahweh's  wondrous  deeds 
of  salvation  and  judgment.  This  is  to  be  at  all  times  ||  cojitinu- 
ally,  perpetual  worship  in  the  temple.  —  in  my  mouth],  the  sacred 


296  PSALMS 

songs,  not  only  written  and  read,  but  sung  aloud.  —  Let  the  afflicted 
make  it  heard],  namely,  the  praise  of  v.2,  taking  their  share  in  it ; 
so  by  an  easy  change  of  vowel  points  giving  an  excellent  parall. 
instead  of  the  usual  "  will  hear  and  will  be  glad  "  of  ^  and  Vrss. 
—  4.  O  magnify  Yahweh],  tell  of  His  greatness  and  His  great 
deeds,  ||  exalt  His  name,  His  supreme  majesty  as  King  of  Israel 
and  the  nations,  cf.  302  99s-9  10732  1451.  —  with  me  ||  let  us  to- 
gether]. The  afflicted  are  exhorted  to  unite  with  the  psalmist 
in  this  thanksgiving.  It  is  common  praise,  worship  of  the  whole 
people,  and  not  merely  of  individuals.  —  5-6.  The  reason  for 
the  praise  is  now  given  as  an  encouragement  to  the  afflicted. — 
/  sought  Yahweh~\.  The  veteran  sage  gives  his  own  personal 
experience.  —  and  He  answered  me].  His  answer  was  not  in 
word,  but  in  deed,  He  delivered  me  from  all  my  terrors'],  due 
probably  to  the  aggression  of  a  powerful  enemy.  On  the  basis 
of  this  personal  experience,  the  afflicted  taking  part  in  the  temple 
worship  are  reminded  of  their  own  experience  :  They  looked  unto 
Him],  that  they  might  catch  the  light  of  His  countenance,  cf. 
271  4,  and  so  beamed],  their  face  lighted  up  by  the  light  from  Yah- 
weh's  face;  antith.  with  their  condition  as  the  afflicted.  —  and 
their  face  was  not  abashed],  no  longer  clouded  with  gloom, 
humiliation,  and  shame.  The  chief  ancient  Vrss.,  (S>,  <&,  U,  3, 
and  many  moderns,  take  these  verbs  as  imperatives,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  jussive  at  the  close  of  the  line.  But  Ji|,  EV8.,  and 
other  scholars,  rightly  regard  these  verbs  as  perfects,  and  the  line 
as  syn.  with  the  previous  and  following  lines.  —  7-8.  This  same 
afflicted  people  cried].  The  psalmist  points  to  the  nation  in  its 
organic  unity,  combining  himself  with  all  the  afflicted. —  Yahweh 
from  all  his  distresses  saved  him],  in  response  to  the  nation's 
prayer,  cf.  v.5.  —  The  activity  of  Yahweh  now  passes  over  into 
that  of  the  angel  of  Yahweh,  which  might  be  interpreted  as  refer- 
ring to  the  theophanic  angel  of  the  ancient  history  in  accordance 
with  Is.  63s,  and  as  implying  the  conception  of  the  angelic  camp 
which  met  Jacob  Gn.  322.  But  it  is  most  probable  that  the  author 
here,  as  in  Pss.  35s  6  9111,  is  thinking  of  the  guardian  angel  of 
Israel,  who  in  later  times  received  the  name  of  Michael,  Dn.  io1321 
1  a1.  This  angel  is  represented  as  chief  of  an  army  encamped 
about  Israel  to  protect  them  from  enemies,  and  who,  in    such 


PSALM   XXXIV.  297 

perils  as  described  above,  rescued  them  ;  cf.  2  K.  617.  —  them  that 
fear  Him],  with  the  reverence  of  His  people  for  Yahweh. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  a  tristich  of  stairlike  parall.  and  a  synth. 
tetrastich.  — 9.  O  taste  and  see],  make  a  trial,  test  by  experience. 
—  He  is  good],  kind,  benignant,  as  bestowing  good  things  upon 
His  people.  This  is  used  in  1  Pet.  23  and  applied  to  Christ  as 
Lord ;  cf.  also  Heb.  64'5,  where  it  is  applied  to  the  good  things 
of  the  Holy  Spirit.  —  happy  the  man],  an  exclamation  of  congratu- 
lation, as  i1.  —  that  take th  refuge  in  Him],  as  212.  — 10.  O  fear 
Yahweh],  taking  up  v.8  and  reiterating  it  in  v.106.  —  them  that  fear 
Him,  ||  His  holy  ones],  His  people  as  consecrated  to  His  service, 
cf.  163  Dt.  33s,  an  idea  especially  prominent  in  the  Holiness  code 
{v.  Br.Hex152). — for  there  is  no  lack]  of  good  things,  because  Yah- 
weh is  good  to  them.  This  is,  then,  the  basis  for  the  antithesis, 
11,  between  young  lions  and  they  that  seek  Him;  the  former,  not- 
withstanding their  strength  and  greed  as  active  beasts  of  prey, 
are  in  want,  because  they  do  not  always  find  prey,  or  cannot, 
if  they  find  it,  take  possession  of  it,  and  accordingly  they  suffer 
hunger ;  but  they  that  seek  Yahweh,  however  feeble  and  afflicted 
they  may  be,  and  unable  to  supply  their  own  wants,  lack  not  any 
good,  because  their  wants  are  supplied  by  Yahweh,  whose  charac- 
teristic is  that  He  is  good.  — 12  begins  a  second  exhortation,  in 
the  style  of  a  teacher  or  sage  to  his  disciples ;  only  here  in  if/,  but 
characteristic  of  WL. ;  cf.  Pr.  i8  1  Jn.  21. —  O  come,  sons],  a  call 
to  attention,  followed  by  a  coordinate  imperative,  hearken  to  me. 
He  has  an  important  lesson  to  give  :  /  will  teach  you].  That 
which  is  taught  is  first  stated  in  its  summary  form,  the  fear  of 
Yahweh].  This  is  not  in  the  more  ancient  sense  of  religion,  but 
in  the  ethical  sense  of  Pr.  i7,  characteristic  of  WL.,  as  the  sub- 
sequent context  indicates.  — 13.  The  lesson  is  to  be  imparted 
through  the  answer  to  a  question  :  Who  is  the  man  ?]  as  2512,  that 
taketh pleasure  in  life],  would  not  only  live,  but  enjoy  life;  antith. 
with  the  afflictions  of  the  afflicted  of  the  previous  Str.,  as  sug- 
gested by  the  beaming  face  of  v.6.  —  loveth  days],  days  of  life, 
many  days,  a  long  life.  —  that  he  may  see  good],  the  vb.  "see," 
based  upon  the  exhortation  "  taste  and  see,"  v.9,  and  the  obj. 
"good"  upon  v.11,  in  the  sense  of  good  received,  prosperity  in 
life.     He  who  would  have  so  good  a  blessing  from  Yahweh  must 


298  PSALMS 

have  the  ethical  qualifications,  14-15.  These  are  both  of  speech 
and  conduct. — Keep\  in  the  sense  of  "watch,"  "guard."  It 
concerns  both  tongue  and  lips  as  the  organs  of  speech,  but  is  only 
on  the  negative  side  of  restraint,  from  evil  ||  from  speaking  deceit. 
This  is  not  in  the  older  ethical  sense,  against  neighbours  to  do 
them  injury,  but  in  the  later  sense  of  avoiding  evil  and  deceitful 
speech  as  such,  as  in  Pr.  424  133  2123  BS.  2Z"5  Ja.  32sq-,  based  on 
Persian  ethical  conceptions.  The  conduct  must  be  good,  both 
positively  and  negatively;  negatively,  depart  fro <m  evil~\,  a  phrase 
characteristic  of  WL.,  Pr.  37  1319  16617.  The  evil  is  doing  evil  in 
an  ethical  sense,  as  implied  by  the  antith.,  do  good,  as  in  Ps.  37s7, 
where  the  entire  phrase  is  used.  The  positive  side  of  doing  good 
is  more  specifically  defined  as  seek,  emphasised  by  pursue, — 
peace~\,  with  neighbours,  probably  implying  friendship ;  cf.  Rom. 
i419Heb.  1214. 

Str.  III.  encloses  five  synonymous  lines,  setting  forth  Yahweh's 
salvation  of  the  righteous,  between  an  initial  and  a  concluding 
line,  affirming  the  destruction  of  the  wicked.  The  former  has 
been  transposed  with  the  following  line  by  a  late  editor,  who 
wished  to  follow  the  alphabetical  order  of  his  day,  at  the  expense 
of  the  congruity  of  the  lines  with  their  context.  The  enemies  are 
described,  17,  22,  as  them  that  do  evil,  v.17,  in  antithesis  with  the 
exhortation,  "  do  good,"  v.15,  and  also  by  the  ordinary  term,  the 
wicked  and  they  that  hate  the  righteous,  v.22,  the  latter  doubtless 
antith.  to  v.15.  Their  punishment  is  that  the  face  of  Yahweh  is 
against  them  in  anger,  as  8017,  with  the  purpose  to  cut  off  their 
memory  from  the  land,  v.17,  so  utterly  to  destroy  them  that  they 
will  no  longer  be  remembered  ;  they  will  pass  into  oblivion,  as  g7. 
V.22  gives  the  synonymous  misfortune  shall  slay.  This  is  in  strik- 
ing antithesis  to  v.20,  where  it  is  stated  that  Yahweh  will  deliver 
the  righteous  out  of  misfortunes,  however  many  they  may  be. 
The  climax  is  given  in  the  comprehensive  term,  shall  suffer  pun- 
ishment, v.22,  which  is  to  be  preferred  to  "  shall  be  desolate,"  PBV., 
AV.,  which  is  paraphrase  and  not  translation;  or  "condemned," 
RV.,  which  is  a  possible  translation,  but  is  too  mild  for  the  climax. 
— 16,  18-21  set  forth  the  deliverance  of  the  righteous.  The  eyes 
of  Yahweh  are  unto  them,  antith.  with  the  face  of  Yahweh  against 
the  wicked,  v.17,  and  so  in  the  syn.  clause,  Bis  ears  unto  them ; 


PSALM    XXXIV.  299 

both  eyes  and  ears  are  attentive  to  their  necessities,  and  accord- 
ingly He  is  nigh  unto  them,  v.19.  They  are  described  as  in  great 
trouble  :  all  their  distresses,  v.18,  many  are  the  misfortunes,  v.20 ; 
they  are  broken-hearted  and  crushed  in  spirit,  v.19,  conceptions 
based  on  Is.  5715  611,  cf.  also  Pss.  5119  1473;  and  it  is  suggested 
that  their  bones  are  also  in  pain,  as  221518  3111  42".  All  this 
describes  the  sufferings  of  the  afflicted  of  v.3,  whom  this  psalmist 
is  cheering  by  his  instruction  and  good  counsel.  In  this  situation 
Yahweh  does  not  disregard  their  cry  for  help,  v.16 ;  they  cry  and 
Yahweh  heareth,  v.18;  and  this  hearing  is  effective,  as  in  the 
psalmist's  experience,  v.5.  The  usual  terms  describe  their  salva- 
tion :  He  delivereth  them,  v.18-  w ;  saveth  them,  v.19 ;  keepeth  all 
their  bones,  v.21,  and  so  completely  and  safely  that  not  one  of  them 
is  broken. 

23.  The  Ps.,  like  25,  has  a  liturgical  addition,  which  makes  it 
end  in  salvation  instead  of  punishment.  This,  in  its  present  form, 
is  composed  of  two  tetrameters,  but  it  may  be  reduced  to  a  hex- 
ameter by  omission  of  unnecessary  words  inserted  in  brackets. 

(Yahweh)  ransometh  the  life  of  His  servants, 

And  (none)  of  them  that  take  refuge  in  Him  shall  suffer  punishment. 

This  is  a  general  statement,  appropriate  as  a  summing  up  the 
thought  of  the  entire  Ps.,  and  certainly  makes  a  better  conclusion 
for  religious  use  in  the  synagogue. 

2.  njH?33]  in  or  at  all  times  {v.  /o5),  n.  def.  by  usage.  —  3.  V?nnn]  Hithp. 
impf.  3  f.  make  boast  (v.  j6),  as  1053;  cf.  6312.  — ^cj]  paraphrase  of  person, 
/  (v.  j3).  —  tyDtsH]  Qal  impf.  connected  by  1  coord,  with  VlDfc^.  But  it  makes 
an  awkward  change  in  construction  and  parall.  Rd.  Hiph.  tyqih  with  nSnn  un- 
derstood =  make  it  to  be  heard,  cf.  668  1062.  —  ~y^'f\  the  afflicted  {v.  1017). — 
4.  nrpnj]  Polel  impf.  cohort.  1  pi.  on,  exalt :  only  here  name,  elsw.  God 
Himself  30'2  99s-9  10732  11828  1451.  —  5.  'PHf^]  Qal  aorist,  past  experience. 
—  >j:vi]  1  coord.  Qal  pf.  —  f  [mlJD]  n.f.  terror  ;  elsw.  Is.  664  Pr.  io24;  cf.  -iud 
Ps.  3114  and  vb.  iij  2224.  — 6.  «F3n]  Hiph.  pf.  3  m.  D3J.  —  nn^i]  )  conj.,  Qal 
pf.  3  m.  i.p.  f-nj  vb.  beam,  be  radiant;  elsw.  only  Is.  605.  But  (3,  5b,  IB,  3, 
imv.;  so  Che.,  Ba.,  Dr.,  Du.,  Kirk.  This  is  in  accord  with  nam  ha,  which 
with  this  neg.  can  only  be  juss.  Qal  of  %  -\cn,  vb.  only  here  with  subj.  cjd; 
elsw.  with  jd  354,  ena  3526  4015  (=  703)  7124  83™.  It  is  then  necessary  to  fol- 
low Vrss.  and  rd.  DD^Jfl  for  orpjo  |^,  unless  we  suppose  that  both  sfs.  are,  as 
often,  interpretative  of  the  noun  in  an  original  text  without  them.  But  a 
change  to  imv.  is  abrupt  and  impairs  the  parall.     It  is  more  prob.  that  Sn  is 


300  PSALMS 

an  error  of  transposition  for  s?,  and  that  the  vbs.  are  aorists  as  in  context. 
The  subj.  of  vbs.  is  D'U?,  v.3.  The  i  Str.  was  omitted  as  in  Ps.  25  in  order  that 
the  alphabetical  Ps.  might  be  divided  into  three  heptastichs.  —  7.  nr]  emph., 
pointing  to  him,  this  same,  referring  to  the  people  in  whose  name  the  psalmist 
speaks  (v.  24?).  *!?  sg.  coll.  for  the  people;  cf.  DMJJJ,  v.8  (v.g13). —  mm] 
either  the  divine  name  or  jratf  must  be  a  gl.  The  latter  may  be  explained  as 
adapted  to  v.18,  and  r»W  seems  to  be  needed  in  the  sentence.  —  nnx]  straits, 
distresses ;  as  v.18  25s2  {v.  202).  —  8.  mn]  Qal  ptc.  as  finite  vb.  of  late  style, 
encamp  (v.  2?3)  ;  but  this  is  not  in  accord  with  1  consec.  in  D»Srvi  Pi.  impf. 
3  m.  sf.  3  pi.  v?n  deliver,  rescue  {v.  6s).  Either  therefore  run  as  pf.  aorist 
(as  v.7),  referring  to  a  past  deliverance  ;  or  else  the  1  as  coord.,  referring  to 
a  continuous  experience.  The  context  and  parall.  urge  the  former ;  so  Che. 
—  X  l^o]  n»m-  (0  messenger  :  the  winds  1044,  D*jn  T3  7849;  (2)  angels  10320 
1482,  having  care  of  the  pious  91 n  (all  pi.);  (3)  mm  JJkSc,  the  angel  champion 
of  Israel  35s-  6;  so  here  (348)  either  as  the  guardian  angel  of  Israel,  the  Michael 
of  later  times,  or  else  as  the  theophanic  angel  of  J.  and  Ju.  5'23,  constantly  called 
mm  "|nSd.  In  the  latter  case  it  might  be  a  reference  to  the  history  of  the 
Exodus,  as  Is.  639,  where  this  angel  is  called  the  angel  of  His  presence.  But 
the  context  favours  a  more  general  reference,  and  then  we  have  to  think  of  the 
guardian  angel  of  Israel  before  the  time  when  he  received  the  name  Michael, 
Dn.  io13-21  1  a1. — 9.  1DJ0]  Qal  imv.  2  pi.  \  0';v  vb.  Qal  taste;  in  physical 
sense,  1  S.  1424,  not  in  yp,  but  in  psychological  sense,  perceive  by  experience, 
here.  \  o>3  n.m.  not  in  \p  in  physical  sense,  but  only  as  discernment,  discre- 
tion oyo  3-10  ||  njn  11966;  D"'J  nja>  change,  disguise  the  discernment,  feign  mad- 
ness 341  (title)  =  1  S.  2114.  —  mm  3*3-^3  ism]  has  one  too  many  tones.  The 
divine  name  is  as  usual  gl.  3sa  as  good  m  the  sense  of  benignant  (y.  2j8).  — 
U'ncm]  relative  clause  Qal  impf.  frequentative,  also  v.23  (v.  212). — 10.  Vth("?] 
His  consecrated  ones,  of  holy  men,  as  /&  Dt.  33s.  —  J  "Adhd]  n.[m.]  lack,  want; 
a.X.  \p,  but  Ju.  1810  1919  +  .  Vb.  ion  v.11.  — 11.  D>mor]  emph.  (v.  1712), young 
lions,  so  3,  @T.  (&  irXovcioi,  U  divites,  so  ,£,  prob.  interpretation  as  figurative. 
There  is  no  good  reason  for  emendation  here.  —  V0~(\  Qal  pf.  %  irn  vb.  be  in 
%vant;  elsw.  ptc.  eh  poor  man  82s  2  S.  128  Pr.  137  4-  15  t.  Pr.  —  W?m]  '\  coord. 
Qal  pf.  3  pi.  i.p.  X  a;n  be  hungry  ;  elsw.  in  \p  5012:  v.  Tn  n.  3319.  —  mm  <B*n] 
ptc.  cstr.  pi.  (v.  v.5) ;  measure  requires  v:m  as  Ba.  —  a^o]  good  in  the  sense 
of  welfare,  happiness  (v.  4?). — 12.  D\n  wS]  Qal  imv.  2  pi.  of  isn,  exhorta- 
tion to  attention,  as  46°  665- 16  83s  95 1.  Sons,  not  children  but  young  men, 
addressed  by  an  experienced  wise  man,  as  in  WL.,  v.  Pr.  832;  only  here  \p  in 
this  sense.  —  '1  n«"v]  the  fear  of  Yahweh,  the  act  of  fearing,  piety  whether 
religious  or  ethical,  as  5s  9011  in10  11938  {v.  211).  — 15.  y->^  mD].  This  phr. 
is  characteristic  of  WL.  Jb.  2828  Pr.  37  1319  i66- 17;  in  -p  elsw.  37127.  —  a'HD  nferp] 
in  ethical  sense  I41- 3  (=532-4)  373. 27  (Vm  /). —o^Stf  tfg3]  a.X.  — 16.  hn 
should  be  ?n  with  separate  tone  and  Dnpw"7«  for  nywH?H,  which  makes  better 
measure.  Sfs.  were  often  added  by  scribes.  — 17.  "•  \Js]  c.  a,  of  hostility, 
anger,  as  8017  (v.  47). —  jn  \;;"]  antith.  with  3-,a  nt-j  v.16,  »tfp  variation  of 
writing,  not  of  form.  —  nnanS]  Hiph.  inf.  cstr.  with  S  purpose  as  v.13,  ma  (v. 


PSALM   XXXV.  301 

12I),  with  hnd  also  10915  Na.  214,  based  on  penalty  of  P.,  H.,  Dp  anpD  Lv. 
1710  203-5-6,  D-or  their  remembrance ;  cf.  Ps.  g?  Ex.  1714  (E)  Dt.  2519  3226. 
For  word  z/.  (fi.  —  18.  ip>i*]  Qal  pf.  emph.,  continuation  of  v.16.  %  pys  vb.  <rry 
0#/;  as  772  882  107s-28;  v.17  intervenes  and  makes  the  connection  difficult. 
This  v.  cannot  refer  to  the  person  of  v.17.  In  fact,  v.16- 17  have  been  trans- 
posed in  order  to  conform  an  earlier  alphabetical  order  to  a  later,  at  the 
expense  of  the  thought.  For  the  older  order  v.  La.  2,  3,  4  Pr.  31  (©). 
@  overcomes  the  difficulty  of  change  of  subj.  by  inserting  oi  Skcuot,  but  at 
the  expense  of  the  measure.  —  mm]  subj.  emph. — 19.  3>  *!3tfj]  phr.  elsw. 
Is.  611;  cf.  nac'j  nV  Ps.  5 119,  aS  matf  1473.  —  nn  »i«l]  cf.  d-wo  d1?  Is.  5716, 
also  Ps.  5 119.  The  dependence  upon  Is.2  can  hardly  be  questioned.  As  to 
forms  natfj  Niph.  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  latf,  v.  also  v.21:  *M3^  pi.  cstr.  of  f  n?"]  adj. 
elsw.  Is.  5715.  —  21.  npir]  Qal.  ptc.  as  v.8-23  of  late  'style.  —  22.  tDjfw]  Qal 
impf.  as  v.23,  fotfr  punishment.  Cf.  Pr.  3010  Is.  24s  Je.  23  Ho.  515  io2  141 
Zc.  115  Ez.  66  (z/.  j^).  — 23  is  a  supplementary  line  with  0  ;  cf.  2522. 


PSALM   XXXV.,  3  str.   io5. 

The  Ps.  is  a  national  prayer:  (1)  petition  that  Yahweh  may- 
interpose  as  the  champion  of  His  people,  and  especially  by  His 
angel,  against  enemies  who  without  cause  have  sought  to  entrap 
them  (v.1-6-9"10**)  j  (2)  complaint  against  the  neighbours  as  false 
friends  who  reward  evil  for  good,  and  antipathy  for  sympathy, 
with  petition  for  deliverance  (v.11-18)  ;  (3)  petition  that  these 
enemies  may  not  be  permitted  to  go  on  in  their  treacherous  con- 
duct and  that  Yahweh  may  interpose  in  judgment  (v.1925  276~28). 
Each  part  concludes  with  a  vow  of  praise.  Glosses  emphasise 
the  imprecations  (v.78-26-27"). 

C\  YAHWEH,  plead  my  cause,  fight  with  them  that  fight  me ; 

Take  hold  of  shield  and  buckler,  and  rise  up  as  my  help; 

Draw  out  spear  (and  javelin)  to  encounter  him  that  pursues  me  ; 

Say  unto  me,  (Yahweh)  :  Thy  salvation  am  /, 

Let  them  be  ashamed  and  brought  to  dishonour  together  that  seek  my  life; 

Let  them  be  turned  back  and  confounded  that  devise  my  hurt; 

Let  them  be  as  chaff  before  the  wind,  (thine)  angel  pursuing  them; 

Let  their  way  be  in  darkness  and  slippery  places,  (thine)  angel  thrusting  them 
down. 

Then  my  soul  will  be  joyful  in  Yahweh,  will  rejoice  in  His  salvation ; 

All  my  bones  will  say :  "  Yahweh,  who  is  like  Thee  ?  " 
"Yy  I TN  ESSES  of  violence  rise  up,  that  of  which  I  am  not  aware  they  require  of  me; 

They  reward  me  evil  for  good,  bereavement  to  me. 

But  as  for  me,  when  they  were  deadly  wounded,  I  made  sackcloth  my  clothing; 


302  PSALMS 

I  afflicted  my  soul  with  fasting,  my  prayer  was  upon  my  bosom  ; 

As  for  a  friend,  as  for  mine  own  brother,  I  went  in  procession,  in  black  /  bowed 

down. 
But  when  I  halted,  they  rejoiced,  and  they  gathered  together  (in  throngs) 

against  me. 
Smiters  tore  me,  for  that  of  which  I  am  not  aware,  without  cessation; 
In  my  pollution  they  mocked,  they  gnashed  upon  me  with  their  teeth. 
O  recover  my  life  from  roarers,  from  lions  mine  only  one ; 
And  I  will  give  thee  thanks  in  the  great  congregation,  among  a  numerous 

people  I  will  praise  Thee. 
J^ET  not  them  that  hate  me  without  cause,  rejoice  over  me,  winking  with  the  eye ; 
For  it  is  not  peace  that  they  speak,  but  against  my  tranquillity; 
Deceitful  things  they  devise,  and  they  open  wide  their  mouths  against  me; 
They  said  :  "  Aha,  aha !  our  eye  hath  seen  it." 
Thou  hast  seen,  Yahweh  ;  keep  not  silence,  keep  not  afar  off; 
Stir  up  Thyself  for  my  judgment,  my  God,  and  awake  unto  my  cause; 
Judge  me  according  to  my  righteousness,  my  God,  and  let  them  not  rejoice 

over  me ; 
Let  them  not  say  in  their  mind  :  "  Aha,  our  desire  !  we  have  swallowed  him  up." 
May  Yahweh  be  magnified,  who  hath  delight  in  the  peace  of  His  servant; 
My  tongue  will  murmur  Thy  righteousness,  all  day  long  Thy  praise. 

Ps.  35  was  in  Q,  but  not  in  any  of  the  other  Psalters.  They  were  right. 
It  is  not  well  suited  to  public  worship.  It  is  a  pentameter,  with  many  glosses 
from  other  Pss.  and  Prophets.  These  being  removed,  it  appears  to  be  com- 
posed of  three  symmetrical  decastichs,  each  concluding  with  a  Refrain  vowing 
public  praise.  V.'26-27  is  a  gloss  from  7038<J-;  v.8  from  Is.  4711;  v.106  from 
Je.  3111.  In  the  original  Ps.,  v.3  is  possibly  dependent  on  33;  v.4  cited  from 
703  =  4015;  v.12  reminds  of  Is.  47s-  9;  v.6  of  Je.  2312;  v.25  of  La.  216;  v.13  of 
Ps.  6911-12;  v.18  31  Snp  of  2226  4010.  These  do  not  show  dependence,  but 
a  similarity  of  situation  and  language,  which  suggests  nearness  of  time  of 
composition.  V.10  "pea  "-D  implies  Ex.  1511,  and  the  singing  in  the  temple 
some  such  song  of  praise.  The  ange),  v.5,  probably  the  guardian  angel  of 
Israel,  resembles  34s,  9111,  and  suggests  the  earlier  stages  of  that  idea.  The 
use  of  *pn,  v.16,  for  pollution  of  land  is  similar  to  Je.  31  Mi.  411  Ps.  10638.  All 
this  favours  the  situation  of  the  feeble  community  of  the  Restoration,  owing 
to  the  hostility  of  the  neighbouring  nations. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  a  syn.  triplet  with  a  line  synth.  thereto, 
a  syn.  tetrastich  and  a  syn.  couplet.  —  1.  O  Yahweh,  plead  my 
cause\  so  probably  in  the  original,  using  the  common  phrase, 
which  sometimes  implies  judicial  process ;  at  other  times,  as  here, 
vindication  in  battle,  and  so  ||  fight  with  them  that  fight  me.  An- 
cient texts  were  misled  by  the  last  clause  to  find  a  parall.  with  it 
in  the  previous  clause,  and  so  by  a  slight  change  of  form  made  a 


PSALM   XXXV.  303 

doubtful  word  with  the  meaning  "with  them  that  contend,"  or 
strive,  "with  me."  The  people  are  in  peril  from  warlike  ene- 
mies; they  are  unable  to  defend  themselves,  and  so  appeal  to 
Yahweh  to  interpose.  Yahweh  is  conceived  as  a  champion,  a 
heroic  warrior,  as  Ex.  153  Dt.  3241  Ps.  24s.  Accordingly,  He  is 
implored  to  arm  Himself  as  a  warrior  :  2-3.  Take  hold  of  shield, 
as  34;  and  buckler,  as  513 ;  |j  draw  out  spear  (and javelin)'].  The 
latter  word  is  a  conjectural  emendation,  in  accordance  with  the 
association  of  these  words  in  usage,  and  therefore  to  be  preferred 
to  the  emendation  of  many  scholars,  "  battle  axe,"  which  is  a  for- 
eign word,  unknown  to  Hebrew  usage  elsewhere,  and  all  the  more 
dubious,  that  upon  it  is  based  an  argument  for  a  later  date  for  the 
Ps.  than  other  evidence  will  allow.  The  imperative  of  J^,  "  stop," 
in  the  pregnant  sense,  supplying  "  the  way,"  though  sustained  by 
ancient  and  modern  Vrss.,  is  not  suited  to  the  subsequent  words, 
which  imply,  not  resistance  to  attack,  but  aggression,  an  advance 
to  meet,  to  encounter  him  that  pursues  me  ||  rise  up  as  my  help. 
In  the  climax,  the  poet  turns  from  the  enemies  to  Yahweh :  Say 
unto  me:  Thy  salvation  am  I~\.  The  personal  God  and  vindi- 
cator of  Israel  is  their  salvation  from  the  enemies  who  make  the 
present  peril.  —  4.  The  poet  begins  his  imprecation  with  a  coup- 
let from  703  =  4015. 

Let  them  be  ashamed  and  brought  to  dishonour  together  that  seek  my  life ; 
Let  them  be  turned  back  and  confounded  that  devise  my  hurt. 

He  imprecates  upon  the  enemies  a  shameful  defeat,  involving 
all  the  hurt  and  even  death  they  had  planned  against  Israel.  — 
5-6.  The  psalmist  now  introduces  the  angel  as  in  34s.  This,  in 
the  text,  is  "  angel  of  Yahweh,"  but  probably  in  the  original  was 
Thine  angel,  because  of  measure ;  not  the  theophanic  angel  of 
the  ancient  tradition,  who  led  up  Israel  out  of  Egypt  into  the 
Holy  Land,  overthrowing  all  their  enemies  ;  but  the  angel  of  Israel, 
whom  Yahweh  had  given  charge  over  Israel,  cf.  9111,  a  conception 
which  subsequently  developed  into  the  Michael  of  Daniel.  This 
angel  takes  up  the  pursuit  of  the  enemy  after  Yahweh  Himself 
had  defeated  them,  pursuing  them  ||  thrusting  them  down.  These 
words  have,  in  all  the  texts,  been  transposed,  as  most  modern 
interpreters  think  j  for  pursuit  is  best  suited  to  the  simile  as  chaff 


304  PSALMS 

befo7'e  the  wind ;  and  thrusting  down  to  the  darkness  and  slippery 
places  into  which  in  their  flight  their  way  leads  them. 

The  reason  for  the  petition  is  now  given,  in  which  the  groundless- 
ness of  their  hostility  is  emphasised,  and  it  is  followed  by  renewed 
imprecation.  This  disturbs  the  course  of  thought  and  the  struc- 
ture of  the  Str.,  and  indeed  v.7  is  premature.  It  is  therefore  a 
gloss. 

For  without  cause  they  hid  for  me  their  net; 
A  pit  without  cause  they  dug  for  me. 
Let  desolation  come  upon  them  unawares, 
And  let  his  net,  that  he  hid,  catch  him, 
And  in  the  pit  let  him  fall. 

7.  For  without  cause],  with  no  sufficient  reason,  gratuitously, 
implying  already,  what  is  more  fully  brought  out  in  Str.  II.,  that 
the  conduct  of  the  enemies  was  unreasonable  and  contrary  to  what 
ought  to  have  been  anticipated.  It  was  indeed  treacherous  :  they 
hid  for  me  their  net  ||  a  pit  they  dug  for  me],  implying  the  same 
situation  as  that  in  916,  the  image  of  hunters  seeking  to  trap  ani- 
mals. —  8.  The  imprecation  is  condensed  partly  from  Is.  4711  and 
partly  from  Ps.  916.  The  former  is,  let  desolation  co?ne  upon  them 
una7vares  ;  the  latter  probably  in  the  original,  and  let  his  net,  that 
he  hid,  catch  him  ;  and  in  the  pit  let  him  fall,  the  last  clause  of 
which  has  been  preserved  by  <£,  but  in  J^,  (3,  and  other  Vrss.  has 
been  obscured  by  a  copyist  mistaking  the  word  rendered  "pit" 
for  that  rendered  "  desolation,"  and  so  the  texts  read  either  "  in 
the  desolation,"  or  "with  the  desolation  let  him  fall  therein." 

The  Str.  concludes  with  a  vow  of  praise  which  may  be  regarded 
as  a  couplet  of  refrain,  as  it  reappears  in  varied  terms  at  the  close 
of  each  Str.  —  9-10  a.  Then  my  soul].  The  conjunction  implies 
temporal  consequence  with  the  subject  of  verb  emphatic.  The 
inner  nature  is  syn.  with  the  outer  nature,  the  bodily  frame,  all 
my  bones,  which  sympathise  with  the  emotions  of  the  soul,  and 
thrill  with  joy  here,  as  they  ache  with  sorrow  elsewhere.  —  will 
be  joyful  ||  will  rejoice\  This  was  doubtless  to  be  expressed 
in  public  praise,  and  is  indeed  a  vow  of  such  praise.  The  theme 
is  His  salvation,  that  is,  as  wrought  by  Him,  in  the  defeat  of  the 
enemies,  and  therefore  to  be  celebrated  in  an  ode,  as  Ex.  15. — 
Who  is  like  Thee],  possibly  referring  to  that  ode  itself,  used  at 


PSALM    XXXV.  305 

the  period  of  the  psalmist  for  this  very  purpose,  in  the  liturgy 
of  the  temple. — 10  be.  A  later  editor,  failing  to  see  this  reference, 
and  thinking  the  conclusion  of  the  Str.  too  abrupt,  appends  what 
he  thinks  an  adequate  explanation,  based  on  Je.  3111 : 

Deliverer  of  the  afflicted  from  him  that  is  too  strong  for  him ; 
Yea,  the  afflicted  and  needy  from  him  that  spoileth  him. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  a  synth.  couplet  and  a  syn.  triplet  en- 
closing a  syn.  triplet,  concluding  with  a  synth.  couplet. — 11.  Wit- 
nesses of  violence],  not  violent  witnesses,  but  such  as  testify  of 
violence  ;  they  rise  up  to  testify ;  require  of  me,  demand  satisfac- 
tion, retribution  for  violence  of  which  I  have  no  knowledge,  of 
which  I  am  not  aware ;  with  the  implication  that  it  was  alto- 
gether a  false  accusation.  — 12.  They  reward  me  evil  for  good~\. 
Israel  had  done  his  neighbours  good,  and  only  good ;  and  yet  they 
charged  him  with  evil,  and,  taking  for  granted  that  he  was  guilty, 
requited  him  with  evil.  This  evil  is  emphasised  as  bereavement, 
not  to  be  generalised  into  "  discomfort "  of  soul,  PBV.,  or  spe- 
cifically "  spoiling  of  my  soul "  AV. ;  for  which  there  is  no  author- 
ity in  Hebrew  usage ;  but  bereavement  of  children,  implying  the 
slaughter  of  the  children  of  the  people  by  these  enemies,  as  in 
Is.  47s  9;  and  this  as  requited  to  me,  as  Pss.  4111  1378,  the  soul 
here,  as  elsewhere,  being  a  paraphrase  for  the  person.  —  13.  The 
psalmist  now  in  two  triplets  brings  out  the  kindness  of  his  people 
in  emphatic  contrast  with  the  unkindness  of  the  enemy.  —  But  as 
for  me~\,  emphatic  assertion  of  personal  conduct.  —  when  they  were 
deadly  wounded],  by  their  enemies  in  battle,  resulting  in  the  death 
of  the  children  of  their  people,  antith.  with  v.12,  and  so  in  mourn- 
ing and  funeral  processions.  This  is  weakened  into  "  when  they 
were  sick,"  in  MT.,  which  does  not  suit  the  context  or  the  thought 
of  the  Ps.  The  context  sets  forth  graphically  the  ancient  method 
of  mourning  for  the  dead.  —  I  made  sackcloth  my  clothing'],  insert- 
ing the  verb  to  complete  the  measure  from  the  cognate  Ps.  6912. 
—  /  afflicted  my  soul  with  fasting],  cf.  Is.  58s- 5.  —  my  prayer  was 
upon  my  bosom],  prayer,  as  the  context  suggests,  of  supplication 
for  the  bereaved.  This  was  conceived  as  heartfelt,  resting  upon 
the  bosom,  or  upon  the  heart,  while  it  pulsated  with  sympathy,  as 
AE.,  Luther,  al.     This  is  certainly  an  unusual  expression ;  but  it 


306  PSALMS 

was  made  more  difficult  by  an  ancient  editor,  who  inserted  a  verb, 
without  regard  to  the  measure,  usually  rendered  "  returned,"  which 
was  probably  meant  to  imply  that  the  prayer,  notwithstanding  its 
sincerity,  returned  to  the  one  who  made  it  without  effect,  Bar 
Heb.,  Ri.,  al.,  with  the  suggestion  of  a  reward  from  God,  instead 
of  a  reward  from  those  for  whom  it  was  offered.  This  seems  to 
be  the  interpretation  of  (&,  J,  Ra.,  Hu.,  Ki.  The  reference  to  the 
head  bowed  down  upon  the  bosom,  De.,  Ba.,  for  which  i  Kings 
1842  is  cited,  does  not  suit  the  situation  or  the  language.  It  would 
be  more  natural  to  think  of  beating  the  breast,  or  bosom,  as  the 
usual  accompaniment  of  mourning,  Na.  27,  if  the  phrase  could  be 
so  interpreted.  — 14.  /  went  in  procession],  the  usual  funeral  pro- 
cession, clad  in  black,  the  colour  of  mourning.  —  I  bowed  down], 
the  posture  of  the  mourner,  cf.  387,  that  is,  with  head  bowed  and 
face  turned  downward.  This  mourning  was  as  sincere  and  intense, 
as  for  a  friend ;  and  still  more  as  for  mine  own  brother.  It  has 
become,  however,  a  little  too  much  by  the  insertion  of  "  as  one 
that  mourneth  for  his  mother,"  by  a  later  editor,  at  the  expense 
of  the  measure,  making  the  line  as  well  as  the  thought  by  so  much 
overfull.  — 15-16.  In  antith.  with  this  sympathetic  sorrow  of 
Israel  for  its  neighbours  when  they  were  bereaved  of  their  children 
in  war,  is  the  unsympathetic  conduct  of  these  neighbours.  —  But 
when  I  halted],  or  limped,  as  Je.  2010;  as  injured  in  the  feet  and 
so  in  a  perilous  situation  ;  intensified  by  in  my  pollution],  pollution 
of  the  land  with  the  blood  of  the  slain,  cf.  Nu.  35s3  Je.  31  Mi.  411. 
This  has  been  interpreted  in  MT.  as  a  late  adj.  with  the  mean- 
ing "  profane,"  referring  to  persons,  making  the  construction  and 
meaning  difficult.  (3,  having  either  a  different  text,  or  else 
paraphrasing,  at  all  events  regarded  it  rightly  as  a  verb.  The 
conduct  of  the  enemies  is  graphically  described.  —  they  rejoiced] 
antith.  the  wearing  of  sackcloth.  —  and  they  gathered  together  in 
throngs].  All  were  interested  in  the  humiliation  of  Israel,  and 
none  would  be  absent  on  this  occasion.  —  Smiters],  so  essentially 
3,  2,  Pe.,  Moll.,  Kirk.,  better  than  "  smitings,"  blows,  (3,  &.  The 
"abjects"  of  EV8.,  based  on  Ki.,  Calvin,  Grot.,  explained  by  De. 
as  "  dregs  of  the  people,"  has  nothing  to  justify  it  in  usage.  — 
They  tore  me  without  cessation].  This  v.  is  antith.  with  the 
fasting  and  prayer  of  Israel.  —  they  mocked],  as  (3,  whether  the 


PSALM   XXXV.  307 

kindred  noun  "a  mocking"  be  original  or  due  to  dittog.  J^,  by 
an  early  error  of  text,  made  a  phrase  unknown  elsewhere,  which 
has  ever  been  regarded  as  difficult  to  explain.  Ra.  first  suggested 
"  mockers  for  a  cake,"  that  is,  parasites,  fawning  flatterers,  who 
make  jests  and  witticisms  against  others,  in  order  to  please  the 
rich  and  powerful,  and  so  secure  entertainment  from  their  table. 
This  has  been  followed  by  EV8.  and  most  moderns,  who  have 
adhered  to  J^.  But  it  is  not  suited  to  the  context,  and  indeed 
is  far-fetched ;  so  that  most  recent  critics  prefer  to  follow  (3  or 
seek  a  better  text.  —  They  gnashed  upon  me  with  their  teeth],  as 
3712;  the  mocking  passing  over  into  this  manifestation  of  bitterest 
enmity.  This  is  in  fine  antith.  to  the  intense  grief  and  mourning 
expressed  by  black  garments  and  the  funeral  procession  for  a 
brother  of  v.14.  —  17  a.  A  later  editor  inserts  at  this  point  an  ap- 
peal to  Yahweh,  —  Yahiveh,  how  long  wilt  Thou  look  on],  that  is, 
with  indifference,  while  such  things  are  happening,  such  wrong  is 
done.  This  line  not  only  is  apart  from  the  measures  of  the  Ps.  and 
its  strophical  organisation,  but  really  expresses  an  impatience  which 
is  foreign  to  its  robust  confidence.  —  17  b.  O  recover  my  life  ||  mine 
only  one],  as  2221  — from  roarers],  an  emendation  admirably  suited 
to  the  previous  context  ||  lions,  so  We.,  Du. ;  a  common  figure  for 
powerful  and  greedy  enemies.  The  "from  their  desolations"  of 
5^,  followed  by  ancient  and  modern  Vrss.,  does  not  suit  the  con- 
text, even  if  the  form  of  the  Hebrew  word  could  be  sustained. 
It  requires  no  greater  change  in  the  text  to  get  the  appropriate 
meaning,  "  roarers,"  than  to  get  the  same  word  as  v.8,  and  the  lat- 
ter is  improbable  in  the  original  text,  if  v.8  be  a  gloss.  — 18.  The 
petition  for  recovery  is  followed  by  the  refrain,  cf.  v.9"10 :  And 
I  will  give  Thee  thanks  in  the  great  congregation,  among  a  numer- 
ous people  I  will  praise  Thee],  the  public  thanksgiving  in  the 
temple  for  national  deliverance,  as  in  2  226  4010. 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  an  introverted  tetrastich,  a  syn.  tetrastich 
in  antith.  thereto,  and  a  concluding  syn.  couplet.  The  common 
term  of  both  is  the  prayer :  let  not  the  enemies  rejoice  over  me, 
v.19,24,  that  is,  continue  to  do  as  they  are  represented  as  doing  in 
v.15;  and  then  saying,  Aha,  v.21-25.  — 19.  Hate  me  without  cause], 
resuming  the  thought  of  v.11"12,  explained  unnecessarily  by  a  late 
editor  through  the  insertion  of  the  syn.  :  "  mine  enemies  wrong- 


308  PSALMS 

fully,"  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  —  winking  with  the  eye], 
a  circumstantial  clause  expressing  their  malicious  insincerity. 
This  is  explained  as  craftiness.  —  20.  For  it  is  not  peace  that  they 
speak~\,  as  they  probably  professed,  but  the  reverse  of  peace  j 
against  my  tranquillity],  so  probably  rather  than  "  the  quiet  in  the 
land,"  J^,  followed  by  most  interpreters,  which  is  not  sustained 
by  (3,  and  is  a  phrase  unknown  elsewhere  and  improbable  in 
itself,  making  a  distinction  between  the  quiet  and  others  in  the 
land,  when  the  antith.  of  the  Ps.  is  between  the  people  of  the  land 
and  their  enemies.  Omitting  "  the  land,"  which  is  not  in  (3,  and 
maintaining  the  remaining  word  of  f^  over  against  that  of  (3,  we 
get  the  personal  reference  to  the  tranquillity  of  the  people,  who 
speak  as  usual  in  the  first  person,  and  in  fine  parallelism  to  the 
peace  of  the  previous  clause.  —  Deceitful  things  they  devise]  ;  their 
plans  are  crafty  and  deceitful.  — 21.  They  open  wide  their  mouths 
against  me],  in  much  hostile  speaking,  in  accordance  with  their 
deceitful  plans,  in  false  accusations ;  resuming  the  thought  of  v.11, 
and  accordingly  changing  the  tense  to  the  perfect,  in  citing  their 
testimony  :  They  have  said :  "  Aha,  aha  !  our  eye  hath  seen  //"'], 
namely,  the  deeds  of  violence  charged  against  the  people  of 
Yahweh  in  v.11.  In  striking  antith.  to  this  conduct  of  the  enemy 
Yahweh  is  exhorted  to  interpose,  resuming  the  thought  of  Str.  I. 
—  22.  Thou  hast  seen,  Yahweh],  an  appeal  to  Him  as  an  eye- 
witness over  against  the  false  eye-witnesses  of  the  enemies.  — 
keep  not  silence],  in  Thy  testimony  on  my  behalf.  — keep  not  afar 
off],\n  my  need,  cf.  2221220  3822  7112.  "O  Lord"  and  "from 
me  "  are  both  unnecessary  glosses,  making  the  line  overfull.  On  the 
positive  side  the  plea  continues.  —  23.  Stir  up  Thyself  ||  awake], 
strong  terms  for  active,  prompt  interposition.  — for  my  judgment  || 
unto  my  cause],  as  v.1.  A  prosaic  copyist  has,  by  transposition, 
attached  the  verbs  together  and  then  the  nouns,  the  latter  being 
separated  by  the  divine  name  :  My  God,  to  which  "  Lord  "  is 
added  as  a  gloss.  Poetic  usage  gives  each  verb  its  appropriate 
noun  in  parall. — 24.  Judge  me],  in  the  sense  of  vindication,  as 
above,  —  according  to  my  righteousness],  as  3  ;  best  suited  to  the 
context  and  the  course  of  thought  in  the  Ps.,  which  asserts  right- 
eous conduct  over  against  the  false  charges  of  the  enemy.  But 
J^,  (3,  and  most  Vrss.  have  "Thy  righteousness,"  an  appeal  to 


PSALM   XXXV.  309 

this  divine  attribute.  Probably  here,  as  often,  the  original  text 
had  no  suffix,  so  that  either  interpretation  was  possible.  —  25.  Let 
them  not  say'],  repeated  in  the  next  clause  for  emphasis,  but  by 
editor  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  —  in  their  mind],  to  them- 
selves, in  their  congratulatory  thoughts,  antith.  with  their  previous 
testimony,  which  they  now  suppose  has  had  its  effect  in  the  ac- 
complishment of  their  crafty  plans.  —  Aha,  our  desire"].  We  have 
attained  it. — we  have  swallowed  him  up],  implying  both  the  greed 
of  the  enemies  and  the  overwhelming  completeness  of  destruction, 
cf.  i243La.  216. 

26-27  b.  A  Maccabean  editor  inserts  an  imprecation  taken 
from  70s-5  with  slight  modifications. 

Let  them  be  ashamed  and  confounded  together  that  rejoice  in  my  hurt. 
Let  them  be  clothed  with  shame  and  dishonour  that  magnify  themselves  against  me. 
Let  them  shout  for  joy  and  be  glad  (in  Thee)  that  delight  in  Thy  righteousness. 
Yea,  let  them  say  continually,  "  May  Yahweh  be  magnified !  " 

Besides  the  desire  for  an  imprecation,  the  editor  was  probably 
moved  to  insert  this  particular  one  because  of  the  wish — 27  b.  May 
Yahweh  be  magnified,  which  was  probably  original  to  our  Ps.  and 
therefore  common  to  both.  This  is  the  beginning  of  the  final 
refrain,  cf.  v.9-10"- 1S.  It  is  the  magnifying  Him  in  the  celebration 
of  His  deeds  of  salvation  and  judgment  in  public  worship.  —  who 
hath  delight  in  the  peace  of  His  servant],  resuming  the  thought  of 
peace  of  v.20,  and  emphasising  the  fact  of  the  personal  relation 
of  the  people  to  Yahweh,  as  His  servant,  in  accordance  with  the 
conceptions  of  Jeremiah  and  Is.2.  Yahweh  takes  pleasure  and 
delight  in  His  people,  as  now  appears  with  propriety  after  the 
storm  has  passed,  and  the  interposition  has  been  triumphantly 
accomplished.  — 28.  My  tongue  will  murmur],  give  vocal  expres- 
sion in  the  melody  of  sacred  song.  —  all  day  long],  continuously. 
—  Thy  righteousness],  the  theme  as  exhibited  in  the  vindication 
of  the  righteousness  of  His  people  ||  Thy  praise. 

1.  nan]  Qal  imv.  cohort.  Jan  vb.  Qal  (1)  strive:  of  battle  here; 
(2)  plead  a  cause :  of  God  T3  an  n  431;  without  prep.  7422  119154;  abs. 
without  an  1039.  —  u>t]  sf.  1  pi.  ffan;]  n.[m.]  adversary;  elsw.  Is.  40/25 
Je.  1819  (but  dub.  in  last  two;  <*|  has  an),  prob.  here  also  nn  nan  as 
1  S.  2415  Mi.  79  Je.  5034  5 186  +  =  take  my  part.  —  zxh]  imv.  and  'Err?  ptc. 


3IO  PSALMS 

i.p.  X  cnS  fight,  do  battle ;  in  \f/  elsw.  562-  3.  Niph.  common  in  OT.,  but  in  \p 
elsw.  1093.  Rd.  also  *DriS  (coll.)  for  |$  pi.  *DriS  in  order  to  rhyme.  —  2.  p?nn] 
Hiph.  imv.  take  hold  of,  grasp;  a.\.  \p,  but  Na.  314  Je.  623  Zc.  1413. —  jjc] 
small  shield  (v.  jt).  —  n«]  large  shield;  elsw.  j13  914.  —  *n*wp].  3  essentiae, 
introducing  the  predicate  (BZ?B.),  aj  .•  my  help,  as  embodied  in  a  person, 
27s  4018  44'27  +. — 3.  PTJJi]  Hiph.  imv.  \  [pn]  vb.  Hiph.  empty t  draw  out, 
sword  Ex.  159  Ez.  5s-12  1214  287  3011,  possibly  in  original  text  of  Ps.  1843, 
lance,  only  here.  1  needless  gl.  —  J  n^n]  nS.  spear,  lance  ;  elsw.  \p,  4610  and 
metaph.  (lion's  teeth)  575. —  -ud]  Qal  imv.  *ud  vb.  close  up  (the  way)  ,*/<?/ ; 
so  ©,  3,  Aq.,  2,  0,  Jebb,  Ols.,  De.,  Ba.  Hare,  Kenn.,  Grotius,  Street,  De  W., 
Ew.,  Now.,  Dr.,  take  it  as  adyapis  battle  axe.  This  is  certainly  tempting. 
Du.  bases  on  it  argument  for  late  date  of  Ps.  The  early  date  of  Ps.  is  rather 
an  argument  against  this  unknown  Heb.  word.  BDB.  thinks  text  corrupt. 
Schwally  njn  is  improbable.  Halevy  miy  (Ps.  59s)  is  too  easy.  Che.  would 
rd.  nbu:  javelin,  as  Ass.  iukudu.  A  change  from  a  common  word  is  improb- 
able. The  original  was  prob.  f»T3  dart,  javelin,  Jos.  818  I  S.  17s-45  Jb.  3923, 
usually  associated  with  nun.  In  unpointed  text  fo  might  have  been  mistaken 
for  -ud,  if  letters  were  transposed  "U3.  —  HKnpS]  inf.  cstr.  J  mp  encounter, 
enemies  here  ;  meet,  of  God  59s,  prob.  also  2518.  —  'D"^]  Qal  ptc.  sf.  1  pi. 
should  be  1  sg.  coll.,  so  v.c.  —  ^;ojS]  to  me  (v.33).  mm  should  be  inserted 
to  complete  the  line.  —  4.  =  4015  =  703.  Insert  in  1.  1,  after  4015,  tv  to 
complete  pentameter.  The  second  vb.  in  4015  703  is  i^sn*,  which  is  transposed 
here  with  VsSd^  in  next  1.  So  also  in  next  1.,  4015  703  have  ^nn  for  "'VwVi.  This 
change  is  probably  intentional.  The  original  of  4015,  which  is  a  late  addition 
to  that  Ps.,  is  in  703. —  isSsyi]  Niph.  juss.  3  pi.,  1  coord,  t  [s^d]  Niph. 
(1)  be  humiliated,  ashamed,  before  men  7421;  (2)  be  put  to  shame,  dishon- 
oured, 69T;  also  here  =  4015  =  703.  Hiph.  put  to  shame  —  insult,  humiliate, 
by  defeat  4410-  —  TW  *#f?3D]  phr.  elsw.  3818  4015  54s  6310  703  8614  Ex.  419(J) 
Je.  430 +. — Uty]  Niph.  juss.  3  pi.,  v.  148.  —  'nn  otfn]  phr.  elsw.  418  1403 
Gn.  5020  (E)  Zc.  710  817  Je.  36s  48s  Mi.  23.  —  5.  nW^Vw]  also  v.»;  so  j/, 
cf.  9 111.  mrp  is  a  later  insertion  in  both  verses  for  tpnSd  Thy  angel.  —  nrft] 
Qal  ptc.  nm  vb.  push,  thrust;  rd.  Drh  as  <S,  Horsley,  Houb.,  Ols.,  De.,  Du., 
||  ae-n  (v.  v.8).  These  have  probably  been  transposed,  Hu.,  Bi.,  Ba.  —  6.  *im] 
prob.  a  later  addition;  not  necessary,  and  makes  1.  too  long.  —  t  nspS(*5Sn"J 
n.f.pl.  slippery  places  =  Je.  2312;  elsw.  flattering  promises  Dn.  II21,  cf.  il84. 
—  7.  z\r\  <s]  so  v.76.  Jo:n  adv.  (VPn)  out  of  favour,  gratis,  gratuitously  ; 
with  vb.  tea  357,  nan  v.7,  Kjfr  v.19  69s,  orh  1093,  n-n  119161.  —  ^~ijdo].  The 
proper  obj.  is  D.rn  (9I6)  ||  non  dig  out,  elsw.  716;  obj.  mv,  which  should 
then  be  transposed,  making  two  syn.  lines ;  so  S>,  Hare,  Houb.,  Che.,  Hors- 
ley. This  couplet  is  a  tetrameter  gl.,  giving  a  premature  reason.  —  8.  =  Is. 
47llc,  which  is  original :  »jnn~nS  .-istf  osna  y^V  Nam,  changed  here  from  sec- 
ond to  third  pers.,  abbreviated  by  sf.  in.  instead  of  v1?;*,  and  omission  of  SNra. 
The  change  from  3  pi.,  v.  4~~,  to  3  sg.,  v.8,  is  striking.  <&  and  &  have  pi.  cor- 
rectly; sg.  originated  from  attaching  n  to  vb.  from  noun.  —  nirtBte]  rd.  nneta, 
as  v.T     (J5  has 


PSALM   XXXV.  311 

iXOiroi  aureus  wayls  fy  ov  yivitxrKOvcriu, 
Kai  i]  drjpa  $\v  eupvif/av  <ruXXa/3^To>  avrods, 
Kal  iv  rrj  7rayi8i  irecrovvrat  kv  aiiTrj. 

irayls  here  stands  for  ntOiP,  which  could  hardly  be  mistaken  for  nan,  possibly 
tor  nn£>  Horsley,  or  nnia>  Gr.  dijpa  stands  for  *pa  or  TO  in  (S£,  but  neither 
suitable  here  in  place  of  DBh.  nnv&  in  v.8"  is  verified  by  Is.  4711,  but  in  v.86 
one  would  expect  same  terms  as  in  v.7,  nan  and  nns»,  and  the  vbs.  suggest 
them.  friKltf  n.f.  desolation;  elsw.  Ps.  6310  Is.  io3  4711  Ez.  38°  Zp.  I15  Jb. 
30s- 14  3s27  Pr.  i27  3'25.  These  are  three  trimeter  lines  of  gl.  —  9.  Wi  ^dj] 
=  Is.  6110,  cf.  tou  Ps.  169,  a1?  136.  — 10.  rf>C3  *r]  cf.  Ex.  1511,  implying  the 
singing  in  public  praise  such  a  hymn  to  God  (v.  47  29s);  for  this  phr.  v.  7119 
89°.  —  UBE  pm]  =  Je.  3111,  is  gl.  and  Up  also,  to  resume  »jp  with  emph.  at 
expense  of  measure.  This  v.  returns  to  the  sg.  for  enemy  ;  not  so  <&  ;  rd. 
'D  D>pinc,  D  omitted  by  slip  of  eye,  and  rd.  also  vhu. —  %  pir\~\  adj.  (1)  strong, 
stout,  mighty ;  esp.  of  hand  of  ">  delivering  Israel  from  Egypt  np?n  io  13612 
Ex.  3211  (JE)  Dt.  434  +  4  t.  Je.  3221;  (2)  as  subst.,  a  strong  one  :  c.  p  comp. 
=  one  too  strong  for  Ps.  jj10  Je.  3111;  of  ">  Is.  4010.  Other  mngs.  not  in  \j/. 
—  "iVp]  Qal  ptc.  verbal  force  ;  J  vb.  elsw.  -ty,  69s,  noun  J  *?Ti  robbery  6211. — 
11.  pcip^]  Qal  present,  archaic  form.  —  DDn  ng]  witnesses  of  violence,  who 
testify  to  violence  that  has  never  been  done.  —  iitn]  rel.,  unnecessary  gl.  to 
make  construction  more  distinct.  —  ^njm-KS]  here  in  special  sense  of  not  to 
be  conscious  of  aware  of  so  v.15;  cf.  5 15.  —  w£B^]  Qal  present.  Snit  in  the 
special  sense  demand,  require,  cf.  1373.  — 12.  ^DVt/*]  Pi.  present  (v.  22^), 
in  special  sense  requite,  reward,  cf.  3821  with  following  phr.  H318  nnn  rtjn 
(v.  21M  i62);  this  phr.  elsw.  1093  Gn.  444  (J)  I  S.  25s1  Je.  1820  Pr.  1713.— 
fVot?]  bereavement  of  children,  childlessness,  elsw.  Is.  478-9;  the  more  gen- 
eral mng.  given  here  by  some,  abandonment,  cannot  be  shown  in  language. 
The  vb.  is  not  used  in  \p.  The  proper  mng.  would  not  be  so  bad  for  a  national 
Ps. ;  the  slaughter  of  warriors,  the  children  of  the  nation,  suits  the  putting 
on  mourning  of  subsequent  context.  (§  has  "?Bb  stumbling,  not  so  gooa. — 
^fljV]  must  then  be  taken  as  periphrastic  personal  pronoun  (j2). — 13.  "ONi] 
emph.  antith.  —  an^na]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  sf.  $  nSn  vb.  be  weak,  sick ;  only  here 
in  \f/,  unless  we  change  7711  "O^n  into  »n^?n,  which,  though  urged  by  Hu.,  Pe., 
Bi.,  is  improb.,  as  ©  sustains  pointing  of  |§,  while  deriving  from  other  stem 
hhr\  in  the  sense  of  begin.  The  mng.  sick  is  not  suited  to  this  context ;  point 
on^na,  as  suggested  by  (S>  irapevox^civ,  when  they  were  mortally  wounded. 
The  vb.  jSSn  pierce,  wound;  elsw.  \p,  10922.  —  pfe  ^a1*]  cf.  for  phr.  6912. 
A  word  is  needed  for  measure;  after  6912  supply  njnx\ —  ^apj  Pi-  pf-  I  s. 
1  njj?  vb.  III.  be  bowed  down,  afflicted;  in  \p  only  Qal,  f  be  afflicted  Ps.  1 1610  1 1967 
Zc.  io2.  Niph.  f  be  afflicted  Ps.  119107  Is.  537  5810.  Pi.  (1)  humble,  mishandle, 
afflict:  individual  (by  imprisonment  and  bonds)  Ps.  10518;  a  nation  (by  war 
or  in  bondage)  945;  dynasty  of  David  8923;  f  (2)  afflict,  as  a  discipline  (God 
agent)  888  9015  1 1975  Dt.  82-  8- 16  1  K.  1 139  Is.  6411  Na.  i12- 12  La.  333;  f  (3^  hum- 
ble t  weaken  :  obj.  rp  Ps.  10224;    Btoj  oneself  hy  fasting  3312  Lv.  1629  -f  4  t.  (P) 


3 1 2  PSALMS 

Is.  58s-5;  elsw.  in  this  sense  Nu.  3014  (P)  Jb.  3723.  Pu.  f  be  afflicted,  in  dis- 
cipline by  God  Pss.  11971  1321  Is.  53*.  Ilithp.  f  be  afflicted,  in  discipline  by 
God  Ps.  10717.  —  ''Vp:  D^a]  phr.  6911  with  vb.  rua.  X  oix  fasting,  elsw.  dixd 
10924,  characteristic  of  late  usage,  subsequent  to  Ne. ;   cf.  Ne.  91  Dn.  9s  Est.  48. 

—  VO"^"]  resting  upon:  not  of  head  bowed  on  the  breast,  Ba.,  Du.,  the 
prayer  going  to  the  bosom  instead  of  upward  or  outward  ;  not  with  Hiph. 
3Vn  instead  of  Qal,  and  so  requital  as  i?DB.  as  Ps.  7912  Is.  65s- '  Je.  3218; 
but  of  the  prayer  resting  upon  the  bosom,  as  it  were  pressing  upon  it  while 
agitated  with  the  pulsation  of  the  heart.  The  vb.  is  a  gl.,  which  doubtless 
implied  retribution  in  sense  of  later  editor,  but  is  not  suited  to  context  and 
makes  1.  too  long.  Other  uses  of  %  p*n  n.[m.]  in  \j/  are:  c.  2  8951,  with  anpa 
74.11.  —  14.  ^■^:P;,^■,•■?]  as  in  432  for  funeral  processions.  —  ox  Vnsr]  J  S|3N  adj. 
mourning,  only  here  \p;  cf.  Gn.  37s5.  @  has  "?3K,  without  dn.  Phr.  is  a  gl. 
of  explanation,  due  to  adaptation  of  national  Ps.  to  personal  relations. — 
X  "Hp]  as  387  4210  43'2,  all  with  -|Sn  in  some  form,  be  in  black  as  mourner.  — 
15.  ^Ssdi]  prep.  2  temporal;  emph.  in  position,  in  antith.  f>s-f  n.[m.]  limp- 
ing, stumbling;  elsw.  3818  Je.  2010  Jb.  1812. —  lepxii]  Niph.  pf.  3  pi.  1  coord., 
repeated  for  emph.,  but  improb.;  rd.  inf.  abs.  of  intensification  for  second, 
rpDx?. —  a^5?]  pi.  of  t  n-31  adj.  a.X.;  i?DB  smitten  ones  improb.;  Ki.,  EV8., 
Calv.,  De.,  al.,  objects  has  nothing  to  justify  it ;  Ols.,  Bi.,  Ba.,  Kau.  onaj  aliens 
seems  justified  by  following  vb.,  but  not  by  antith.  triplet;  <g,  &,  /i&ffTtyes 
blows,  wounds  =  ooj  for  DOB  ptc.  PJ33,  so  3  percutienles,  2,  &,  Horsley,  HuA 

—  >njn>  nSi]  rel.  clause,  "what  I  am  not  aware."  —  idt  nVi]  circumstantial 
clause,  without  cessation.  — V"^]  Qal  pf.  X  SHp  VD-  usually  tear  garments,  but 
also  various  other  subordinate  mngs.;  only  here  in  \J/.  Hu.,  Dr.,  al.,  as  Ho. 
138  tear,  as  wild  beasts  or  cruel  foes,  most  probable  ;  (3  huax^QfJ^o-v,  $  scin- 
dentes.  01.,  Ba.,  We.,  al.,  tear  with  words,  rail,  which  has  no  usage  to  justify 
it.  — 16.  'fijna]  cstr.  pi.  Jijiri  adj.  profane,  irreligious  persons.  This  form 
elsw.  Jb.  36i3  a*?  >ajn;  pi.  Is.  3314,  sg.  Is.  io6  of  nation,  916  of  a  man  ;  cstr.  pi. 
here  before  cstr.  pi.  is  strange.  Bi.,  Du.,  rd.  f]:n2  and  attach  to  previous  1. 
<S  iireipacrav  pue  =  ^jro,  so  Gr.,  tempting,  yet  not  suited  to  context ;  rd.  'fijna 
inf.  cstr.  X  H^n,  in  my  pollution,  as  10638;  cf.  Je.  31- 1  Mi.  411.  —  j^d  UP1?].  The 
first  word  pi.  cstr.  of  j^  adj.  a.X.  mockers,  f-Tj:?  cake,  elsw.  only  I  K.  171"2 
for  n  K*,  and  so  mockers  for  a  cake  ;  Greek  k viaoKdXaKes,  \f/u)p.oi<6\aK€s,  Medi- 
aeval Latin  buccellarii.  All  this  is  improb.  (@  £&p.vKT-f)pi<rav  fie  p.vKT7)pi(rp.6v, 
V  subsannaverunt  me  subsannatione,  r;h  upS  is  doubtless  correct;  so  Du.; 
Ba.  j>*S  vjh  not  so  good.  It  is  then  prob.,  as  1.  is  too  long,  that  y;i  originated 
in  dittog.  — p*v»]  inf.  abs.  flWi  vb.  gnash,  grind:  c.  hy  CiVf  elsw.  3712;  also 
abs.  without  "?j;  11210  La.  216,  c.  3  Jb.  169.  — 17.  *Jin]  is  suspicious. — nnr] 
how  long;  only  here  in  \p,  also  Jb.  719.  This  trimeter  1.  is  a  gl.  —  cn^xrc]. 
(3  dirb  tt]s  KCiKovpylas  olvtGjv  ;  Ols.,  Dy.,  Gr.,  DfONiPS  from  their  roaring;  but 
neither  suited  to  ||  on^MB ;  We.,  Du.,  dmnco  roarers,  prob.  correct ;  cf. 
hrvff  ■.  r\HMtr  v.8,  improbable  if  latter  gl.  as  above,  ifltf  a.X.  with  same  mng.  is 
doubtless  txt.  err.;  d  here  is  possibly  dittog.  from  Dn*l>aD. — 19.  Iptf  ••itn  |j 
ajn  'Njir.    695  has  both  phrs.  (cf.  "iptr  \sjf  38'20).    The  one  is  a  gl.  to  the  other. 


PSALM   XXXV.  313 

Probably  the  latter  is  original  on  account  of  3jn  as  in  v.7.  —  py  wnp>].  <3  and 
3  take  it  as  rel.  clause  and  translate  by  ptc.  pp  c.  pp  =  pinch  the  eye,  wink 
maliciously,  so  Pr.  613  io1(J. — 20.  '2]  causal.  ©  has  **?,  doubtless  err.  for 
n1?  |^,  3,  2,  Aq.,  &.  — 'W  pN  *]?jn  tyi].  @Bhas  koX  tir  opyrj  56\ovs  dieXoyl- 
$ovto  (opy-qv  <J5s-"-R);  3J  <?/  in  iracundia  terrae  loquentes,  dolos  cogitabant  ; 
3  sed  in  rapina  terrae  verba  fraudnlenta  concinnant.  These  rest  on  different 
texts  from  $?.  px  >yjm\  a.X.  and  improb.  (§  had  prob.  r>\  but  not  pN,  which 
is  explanatory  gl.,  though  in  J5  and  other  Vrss.  Rd.  yjn  my  tranquillity. — 
>n2^]  not  in  (&,  &,  and  doubtless  gl.  —  pafc;m]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  archaic  form. 

—  21.  la^rno]  1  consec.  err.  for  l  coord.,  Hiph.  impf.  3  pi.  2m  open  wide, 
here  of  much  hostility  in  speaking,  as  Is.  57*.  The  last  two  words  of  v.20 
make  with  first  clause  of  v.21  a  complete  line.  —  f  nNn  nN~>]  interject,  aha  ! 
always  introduced  by  1DN  ;  cf.  v.25  4016  =  704,  also  Is.  4416  Ez.  25s  262  36s 
Jb.  3925.  — 22.  n^so]  Qal  pf.  2  m.  fully  written,  referring  to  mm,  antith.  to 
nto  of  adversaries.  —  *jn«]  is  gl.  —  ^cc]  is  also  a  gl.  —  23.  nr>jjn]  Hiph. 
imv.  cohort.,  ||  nmyn  (same  form),  should  go  from  prosaic  order  to  its  noun 
>anS  ||  WBVfoh.  —  >jini]  gl.  as  v.22.  —  24.  ip-<i-]  so  <g,  |^,  but  3  'P"TC ;  prob.  sf.  not 
in  original,  but  must  be  interpretation.    Either  mm  or  mSn  gl.,  prob.  the  former. 

—  25.  nNn]  is  repeated  in  (3,  U,  Syr.  Hex.,  but  improb.  —  UPJU]  =  our  desire, 
as  2712  413.  — nDN">  Sn]  is  repeated  for  emph.,  but  destroying  the  measure. — 
26-28  to  be  compared  with  4014-18  =  703-6.  First  1.  of  701  =  4014  not  in  35426, 
either  prefixed  in  those  passages  or  omitted  here.  V.26a  has  variation  of 
WDi  *B>p3E,  703  =  4015:  TVDV  is  in  accordance  with  3519-24  and  so  better  suited 
to  the  Ps.;  therefore,  if  an  addition,  not  a  mechanical  one  without  assimila- 
tion. V.265  is  not  in  7036  =  40156,  but  they  substitute  3546,  excepting  that 
vip  ixcn  takes  the  place  of  inp  >38>n.  This  favours  the  originality  of  v.266, 
which  is  a  good  syn.  v.26°. —  ^hy  Dillon]  Hiph.  ptc.  pi.;  of  enemies,  phr. 
of  3817  5513  Je.  4826-42  Jb.  195,  cf.  Ez.  3513.  704«  is  not  in  3S26-27,  but  nrN 
nNn  nNn  reminds  us  of  35s1- 25.  —  vcbS>]  Qal  juss.  J  etoS  vb.  Qal,  put  on  (one's 
own) garment,  clothe  oneself;  lit.  not  in  \p,  but  fig.  often:  pasture  with  flocks 
6514;  Yahweh  puts  on  majesty  931,  strength  931,  honour  and  majesty  1041; 
priests  put  on  righteousness  1329;  men  put  on  shame  jj26  10929,  cursing  10918. 
Hiph.  clothe,  array  with;  Yahweh  clothes  priests  with  salvation  13216,  ene- 
mies with  shame  13218. — %  nun]  n.f.  shame,  elsw.  4016  (  =  704)  4418  6920 
13218  Jb.  8-2;  phr.  'i  nvy  Ps.  10929.  —  27.  um]  for  ifc^tn  705;  q^  has  fallen  out 
of  v.27a  by  txt.  err.  TPp3D  S3  7055  =  >p-tx  ^xon  here ;  the  change  has  been 
made  in  70,  for  *p-\?  is  suited  to  the  context  of  35s4  and  the  antith.  of  v.27c. 
V.276  =  7055,  except  that  1.  here  lacks  complement  given  in  7056  fnjW  >anN, 
which  takes  the  place  of  nay  DlSw  ffinn.  —  28.  This  v.  has  nothing  to  corre- 
spond with  it  in  706;  but  the  latter  has  jv3ni  vy  as  3510,  and  concludes  with 
1.  similar  to  its  beginning.  — njnn  pif1?]  cf.  for  phr.  7i24  Is.  59s  Jb.  274. 


314  PSALMS 


PSALM   XXXVI. 

Ps.  36  is  composite.  (1)  A  didactic  Ps.  describing  the  wicked 
under  the  inspiration  and  flattery  of  personified  transgression,  and 
without  terror  of  God,  plotting,  speaking,  and  doing  all  manner 
of  evil  (v.2'5).  (2)  A  Ps.  of  praise:  (a)  comparing  the  four 
chief  attributes  of  Yahweh  to  the  four  great  objects  of  nature, 
as  a  basis  for  praising  Him  for  saving  man  and  beast  (v.6-7)  \ 
(b)  praising  His  precious  kindness  as  manifested  in  the  delights 
of  worship  in  the  temple,  and  in  the  life  and  light  that  issue  from 
Him  (v.8-10).  Glosses  (a)  pray  for  His  kindness,  righteousness, 
and  help  against  the  wicked  (v.1112),  (ib)  and  point  to  the  place 
where  the  enemies  are  fallen  to  rise  no  more  (v.13). 

a.   wr-\  6*. 

AN  utterance  of  Transgression  (comes)  to  the  wicked  man  in  the  midst  of  his 
mind : 
There  is  no  dread  of  God  before  his  eyes  : 

For  it  doth  flatter  him  as  regards  the  finding  out  of  his  (hateful)  iniquity. 
The  words  of  his  mouth  are  trouble  and  deceit,  he  hath  ceased  to  act  circum- 
spectly. 
To  make  trouble  thoroughly  he  plans  upon  his  bed  ; 
He  takes  his  stand  in  a  way  that  is  not  good,  evil  he  refuseth  not. 

B.    V.6"10,    2    STR.    5s. 

VAHWEH,  in  heaven  is  Thy  kindness, 

Thy  faithfulness  (reacheth)  unto  the  skies, 

Thy  righteousness  is  like  the  mountains  of  'El, 

Thy  justice  is  a  great  deep ; 

Man  and  beast  Thou  savest. 
YAHWEH,  how  precious  is  Thy  kindness. 

They  are  refreshed  with  the  rich  things  of  Thy  house, 

And  of  the  brook  of  Thy  dainties  Thou  makest  them  drink; 

For  with  Thee  is  the  fountain  of  life ; 

When  (Thou  shinest,  light  doth  appear) . 

Ps.  36  was  in  13  and  E&  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  33).  The  term  mm  napS  with 
David  corresponds  with  181.  It  seems  therefore  to  suggest  some  original 
connection,  or  association  with  Ps.  18.  This  could  hardly  come  from  QK. 
It  must  have  come  from  S,  if  not  already  attached  to  the  Ps.  when  he  used 
it.  There  is  no  historical  situation  suggested  in  the  present  title,  but  it  seems 
probable  that  the  man  who  proposed  these  words  was  thinking  of  Saul's  mad- 


PSALM   XXXVI.  315 

ness  as  a  suggestion  of  evil,  according  to  1  S.  i614-23  1810-11.  But  he  must 
have  lived  at  a  much  later  date  than  the  author  of  these  passages,  or  indeed 
the  author  of  the  similar  1  K.  222)-28,  where  the  suggestion  of  evil  is  attributed 
to  the  divine  Spirit;  for  this  editor  interprets  the  story  of  Saul  and  David  in 
accordance  with  v.1,  where  Transgression  itself  as  a  personified  evil  makes  the 
suggestion.  This  conception  is  certainly  earlier  than  that  of  Satan,  who 
appears  first  in  Zc.  31-2.  The  Ps.  is  therefore  probably  from  the  time  of  Jere- 
miah, when  prophets  of  falsehood  abounded.  This  does  not  apply  to  the 
whole  Ps.,  but  only  to  the  pentameter  hexastich,  v.2A  The  remainder  of 
the  Ps.  is  much  later.  The  original  Ps.  also  is  similar  in  v.6  to  Mi.  21.  No 
other  writings  have  been  used,  although  in  some  respects  the  situation  and 
tone  of  the  Ps.  resemble  9-10,  14,  and  on  that  account  it  might  be  referred 
to  the  early  days  of  the  Restoration.  But  the  wicked  here  seem  not  to  be 
enemies  of  the  nation,  but  wicked  men  among  the  people ;  and  the  use  of 
mouth  and  tongue  is  injurious,  and  not  simply  false ;  and  so  it  implies  ethics 
of  speech,  earlier  than  the  period  of  Persian  influence.  The  Ps.  in  its  present 
form  is  composite.  A  Ps.  of  two  trimeter  pentastichs  has  been  added,  v.6-10. 
This  uses  the  Miktam  572  in  v.8  and  5711  in  v.6.  It  also  is  based  on  the 
conception  of  Eden,  Gn.  210,  in  v.9,  especially  as  applied  to  the  temple  in 
Ez.  47lB(i-  (upon  which  also  Zc.  148  Jo.  418  depend).  It  is  also  probable  that 
Je.  213  1713  underlie  v.10.  The  humanitarianism  of  v.7  is  post-Deuteronomic. 
The  author  of  v.7  was  familiar  with  Lebanon  and  Hermon  and  the  Mediterra- 
nean Sea,  and  possibly  had  his  home  in  northwestern  Galilee,  where  these 
were  ever  in  view.  The  similes  are  so  graphic  that  they  could  best  be 
explained  by  an  author  standing  on  one  of  the  summits  of  Lebanon,  where 
all  these  things  would  come  naturally  into  his  mind.  These  two  Pss.  were 
brought  into  a  sort  of  unison  by  a  trimeter  tetrastich  of  petition,  v.11-12.  The 
Ps.,  as  thus  constructed,  was  probably  made  for  IB.  A  later  editor,  probably 
Maccabean,  gave  the  Ps.  a  reference  to  national  enemies  by  the  addition  of 
v.13,  which  was  probably  based  on  Ps.  145. 

PSALM   XXXVI.  A. 

The  Ps.  is  composed  of  two  synth.  tristichs.  —  2.  An  utterance 
of  Transgression^.  Transgression  is  personified  as  sin  in  Gn.  41 
(cf.  Ps.  1914).  There,  like  a  beast  of  prey,  it  tries  to  get  possession 
of  the  man  and  rule  him ;  here  it  has  already  taken  possession  of 
him,  and  as  the  spirit  of  prophesy,  suggests  to  him  as  to  a  prophet. 
In  all  other  passages  this  utterance  comes  from  Yahvveh  to  a  real 
prophet ;  here  only,  transgression  takes  the  place  of  Yahweh,  and 
so  becomes  a  god  to  the  wicked  man,  inspiring  him  with  wicked- 
ness, so  that  he  becomes  a  prophet  of  transgression.  This  is  all 
the  more  impressive  to  him  that  it  does  not  come  upon  him  as 


3l6  PSALMS 

an  external  energy  from  without,  as  in  the  case  of  Saul,  i  S.  1614"23 
1810"11,  but  as  already  within  him  :  in  the  midst  of  his  mind,  domi- 
nating his  mind  from  its  very  centre.  Thus  (3,  <£,  U,  3.  But  J^, 
followed  by  EV8.,  has  changed  the  reading  to  "  my  heart"  either 
by  copyist's  error,  or  to  avoid  the  unparalleled  conception  of  an 
inspiration  of  a  wicked  man  in  any  sense  of  the  term.  It  is  prob- 
able that  in  J^  transgression  was  originally  interpreted  as  in  an  ob- 
jective construct  relation,  as  2,  followed  by  Ges.,  De  W.,  al. :  "an 
utterance  concerning  the  transgression  of  the  wicked  is  within  my 
heart,"  making  the  psalmist  inspired,  rather  than  the  wicked  man. 
But  such  a  construction  of  the  word  "  utterance  "  is  against  all 
usage.  —  There  is  no  dread  of  God],  an  explanation  of  the  situa- 
tion by  the  psalmist,  implying  that  God  is  not  present  and  will  not 
call  to  account,  as  io4  141  532.  Transgression  has  taken  the  place 
of  God  and  is  become  the  god  of  this  wicked  man.  —  before  his 
eyes].  He  ignores  God,  can  no  longer  see  Him  as  present;  for 
he  is  so  absorbed  in  the  presence  of  transgression  and  the  expe- 
rience of  its  suggestions.  —  3.  For  it  doth  flatter  him].  Trans- 
gression does  this  in  its  utterance  to  him ;  so  most  naturally,  Ra., 
De.,  Ba\,  Kirk.  "  He  flattereth  himself,"  EV8.,  has  little  to  justify 
it.  —  in  his  eyes  is  a  gloss,  not  in  <3.  —  as  regards  the  finding  out 
of  his  {hateful)  iniquity],  by  God,  in  accordance  with  the  previous 
context.  He  had  no  dread  of  God,  of  His  presence,  or  of  His  in- 
vestigation of  his  conduct ;  implying  therefore  that  God  would  not 
find  out  his  iniquity.  This  iniquity  the  psalmist  emphasises  as 
something  which  one  is  bound  to  hate,  taking  it  as  gerundive, 
dependent  on  iniquity,  so  essentially,  "  abominable  sin,"  PBV. 
But  "to  be  hateful"  AV.,  "to  be  hated"  RV.,  emphasise  the 
discovery  of  the  iniquity  by  God.  It  is  also  difficult  to  see  why 
the  finding  out,  which  has  been  pushed  into  the  background  of 
his  mind  by  the  flattering  voice  of  transgression,  should  now  be 
emphasised  in  the  climax.  The  various  efforts  to  improve  the 
text  have  all  alike  proved  unsatisfactory. — 4.  The  words  of  his 
mouth'].  The  description  passes  over  from  the  mental  state  of 
the  wicked  man  into  his  external  behaviour :  and  first  his  speech, 
his  words  ;  these  are  trouble  and  deceit.  His  speech,  as  under  the 
inspiration  of  a  flatterer,  is  flattering,  and  so  deceives  and  makes 
trouble   to   those  who   depend  upon   it.     The  wicked  speech  is 


PSALM   XXXVI.  317 

accompanied  by  wicked  deeds ;  he  hath  ceased  to  act  circum- 
spectly']. He  has  laid  aside  all  prudence  in  action,  because  he 
has  no  dread  of  consequences.  — 5.  To  make  thoroughly].  The 
measure  requires  the  attachment  of  this  infinitive  to  the  noun, 
trouble  ;  in  accordance  with  Mi.  y3.  This  is  favoured  by  the  use 
of  Mi.  21.  The  usual  rendering,  "  to  do  good,"  as  explanation  of 
act  circumspectly,  Dr.,  or  as  dependent  upon  it,  Kirk.,  not  only 
makes  that  line  too  long,  but  also  gives  an  awkward  tautological 
close  to  the  sentence.  —  he  plans  upon  his  bed].  The  description 
goes  back  to  the  mental  state,  the  plans  suggested  by  Transgres- 
sion. These  are  carefully  matured  during  the  quiet  of  the  night, 
to  be  thoroughly  carried  out  in  the  morning.  —  He  takes  his  stand]. 
The  time  for  action  has  come,  and  he  is  determined  to  carry  out 
his  plans.  He  takes  his  position  with  decision  and  firmness.  —  in 
a  way  that  is  not  good],  a  way  of  life,  a  course  of  conduct,  which 
is  the  negative  of  the  good  way  required  by  God's  Law.  This  in 
the  climax  is  :  evil  he  refuseth  not],  which  is  as  much  as  to  say, 
from  no  evil  does  he  shrink,  he  undertakes  it  all,  without  reluctance 
and  without  remorse. 

PSALM  XXXVI.  B. 

Str.  I.  is  a  syn.  trimeter  tetrastich,  with  a  synth.  monostich.  The 
four  chief  attributes  of  Yahweh  are  compared  with  the  four  great 
objects  in  nature.  Doubtless  the  psalmist,  either  in  imagination 
or  in  reality,  stood  upon  one  of  the  summits  of  Lebanon,  where  all 
these  were  in  full  view.  — 6.  Kindness],  the  usual  meaning  of  the 
Hebrew  word,  especially  when  in  syn.  relation  with  "  faithfulness." 
Yahweh's  kindness  is  in  heaven,  so  most  naturally,  thinking  of 
heaven  as  at  once  its  source  and  as  illustrating  its  immeasurable 
and  all-comprehending  relations.  This  is  an  Old  Testament 
prelude  to  the  knowledge  surpassing  love  of  Eph.  317"19.  The 
phrase  is  doubtless  based  on  Ps.  5711  (cf.  10311)  "unto  the 
heavens  " ;  but  this  does  not  justify  us  in  interpreting  the  Heb. 
preposition  here  in  an  unusual  sense,  "  to  the  heavens,"  as  do 
Ba\,  Kirk.,  al.,  or  in  paraphrasing,  "  as  the  heavens,"  Pe. ;  for  the 
author  doubtless  made  the  change  for  the  purpose  of  giving  a  new 
turn  to  the  thought.     He  changes  the  prepositions  for  variety  of 


318  PSALMS 

imagery. —  Thy  faithfulness  (reacheth)  unto  the  skies].  Faithful- 
ness is  an  attribute  that  may  be  compared  to  a  long  reach,  rather 
than  to  comprehensive  extent.  It  is  therefore  conceived  as  reach- 
ing far  up  into  the  expanse  of  the  skies,  which  extend  one  above 
another  in  mysterious  and  sublime  heights.  There  is  probably 
here  an  antith.  in  the  poet's  mind  as  in  8512,  kindness  coming 
down  out  of  heaven,  faithfulness  ascending  the  heights  of  heaven. 
—  7.  Thy  righteousness  is  like].  This  is  a  real  simile  —  the 
mountains  of  *El],  the  great,  the  giant  mountains,  such  as  Her- 
mon  and  Lebanon,  whose  lofty  summits,  covered  with  snow  the 
greater  part  of  the  year,  suggest  to  the  pious  mind  the  special 
presence  and  power  of  God.  So  the  gigantic  cedars  of  Lebanon 
are  called  the  cedars  of  God,  8010  10416.  The  psalmist  is  doubt- 
less thinking  of  the  mountains  as  firm,  stable,  enduring,  everlasting, 
majestic,  and  all-commanding. —  Thy  justice].  As  the  three  other 
syn.  terms  are  all  singular  and  all  attributes,  an  attribute  in  the 
singular  is  required  here.  But  it  has  been  changed  by  an  early 
copyist  to  the  plural :  "acts  of  judgment,"  and  so  it  appears  in  J^ 
and  3. —  the  great  deep].  A  metaphor  taking  the  place  of  the 
similes,  so  3.  This  is  more  poetical  than  the  sameness  of  a 
particle  of  comparison  here,  as  urged  by  We.,  al.,  after  (3.  Al- 
though this  exact  term,  great  deep,  is  found  elsewhere,  Gn.  711 
Am.  74  Is.  5 110,  in  the  story  of  the  deluge,  yet  this  does  not  justify 
the  rendering  "  great  flood,"  as  Moll.,  Ba\,  thinking  of  that  great 
historic  act  of  judgment.  This  might  be  thought  of  if  the  plural 
judgments  were  to  be  retained,  and  their  irresistible  power  of 
destruction,  from  which  none  can  escape,  might  then  have  been 
in  the  mind  of  the  poet.  But  that  would  be  inconsistent  with  the 
emphasis  upon  kindness  which  characterises  this  little  Ps.,  and 
with  the  climax  of  salvation  in  the  last  line  of  the  Str.  The  great 
deep  is  indeed  metaphorical  of  the  divine  justice,  not  on  its 
retributive  side,  but  on  its  vindicatory  side ;  because  of  its  un- 
fathomable depths,  its  mysterious  movements,  and  its  vastness  of 
extent.  —  Man  and  beast],  comprehending  the  animal  with  man, 
in  the  scope  of  Yahweh's  attributes,  cf.  10427"28. —  Thou  saves f]. 
The  four  attributes  are  all  summed  up  in  the  work  of  salvation. 

Str.  II.  has  a  syn.  tristich  and  a  syn.  couplet.  —  8.   Yahweh  is 
attached  to  the  previous  line  in  J^,  making  it  too  long.     It  also 


PSALM  XXXVI.  319 

appears  at  the  close  of  this  line  in  3,  where  ]ty,  (3  have  Elohim. 
Elohim  is  improbable  in  this  Ps.  The  measure  allows  of  but  one 
divine  name,  and  that  in  v.8a.  —  How  precious],  exclamation  of 
admiration  and  wonder,  explained  in  subsequent  context,  —  is  Thy 
kindness],  resuming  the  thought  of  v.6°,  kindness  at  the  beginning 
of  the  previous  Str.  being  the  most  prominent  attribute,  as  shown 
also  by  the  climax  of  salvation.  J^  and  Vrss.  have  a  tetrameter 
line  :  And  the  children  of  men  take  refuge  in  the  shadow  of  Thy 
wings.  This  is  a  familiar  idea  from  57s,  cf.  615  914  Rev.  212,  with 
a  subj.  which  is  striking  and  difficult  to  explain  in  this  context. 
It  is  doubtless  a  gloss. — 9.  They  are  refreshed].  The  subj.  is 
general,  indefinite,  referring  to  worshippers  of  Yahweh.  It  is 
unnecessary  to  supply  a  subject.  —  with  the  rich  things  of  Thy 
house].  Probably  the  sacrificial  meals  of  the  worship  in  the 
temple  at  the  festivals  are  in  the  mind  of  the  psalmist  j  but  these 
have  certainly  been  generalised  so  as  to  include  all  spiritual  bene- 
fits. —  And  of  the  brook  of  Thy  dainties'].  The  dainties  are  re- 
garded as  so  copious  that  they  are  like  an  overflowing  stream. 
It  may  be  that  the  river  of  Eden  underlies  the  thought,  especially 
in  the  form  in  which  it  appears  in  Ez.  47l8q-,  as  a  river  of  life 
flowing  forth  from  the  temple,  and  similar  to  the  river  of  the  city 
of  God,  Ps.  465. —  Thou  makest  them  drink],  Yahweh  Himself 
is  the  host  and  they  are  His  guests.  He  gives  them  their  meat 
and  drink.  — 10.  For  with  Thee],  that  is,  in  Thy  house,  Thy 
presence,  is  the  fountain  of  life],  probably  an  abbreviation  of 
fountain  of  living  waters  of  Je.  213  1713,  a  perennial,  never-failing 
stream  flowing  forth  from  Yahweh's  presence  as  a  well-spring  or 
original  source. —  When  Thou  shinest],  lettest  the  light  shine 
from  Thy  face,  as  Pss.  47  44*  8916,  taking  the  Heb.  word  as  inf. 
cstr.  in  a  temporal  clause,  instead  of  the  usual  interpretation  as 
a  noun,  "  in  Thy  light,"  which  seems  rather  tame,  and  involves  the 
repetition  of  the  same  noun  without  any  new  idea.  —  light  doth 
appear],  that  is,  shine  forth  upon  the  worshippers,  giving  them 
light  and  joy,  taking  the  form  as  Niphal  pf.  The  usual  transla- 
tion, as  Qal,  "  We  see  light,"  introduces  for  the  first  time  1st 
pers.  pi.  into  the  Ps.,  which  everywhere  else  uses  the  3d  pers. 
This  interpretation  is  doubtless  due  to  the  1st  pers.  in  the  gloss 
that  follows. 


320  PSALMS 

r\  draw  out  Thy  kindness  to  them  that  know  Thee, 
And  Thy  righteousness  to  the  right-minded ; 
Let  not  the  foot  of  pride  come  against  me, 
Let  not  the  hand  of  the  wicked  make  me  a  fugitive. 

11-12.  This  trimeter  tetrastich  is  a  petition  which  combines 
the  thought  of  the  two  Pss.  The  first  couplet  is  a  petition  for  the 
kindness  and  righteousness  of  the  second  part  of  this  Ps.,  both 
combined  with  the  same  verb,  draw  out,  prolong,  in  the  bestowal. 
—  To  them  that  know  Thee],  with  the  practical,  experimental 
knowledge  of  worship  in  the  temple  and  the  enjoyment  of  its 
good  things,  cf.  v.9"10.  —  to  the  right-minded']  as  711 1 12  3211  -f,  those 
whose  minds  are  upright  in  His  worship  and  in  obedience  to  His 
commands.  The  second  couplet  is  a  petition  for  deliverance 
from  the  wicked  man  of  the  first  Ps.  —  The  foot  of  pride],  lifted 
up  in  haughtiness,  strutting  along  with  scornful  indifference  of 
others  ||  hand  of  the  wicked],  the  plural  taking  the  place  of  the 
singular  of  v.2.  —  come  against  me].  The  petition  is  that  Yahweh 
will  prevent  the  feet  from  moving  forward  to  the  attack.  —  make 
me  a  fugitive],  overcome  me  and  put  me  to  flight,  so  that  I  will 
have  to  wander  away  in  exile  from  the  sacred  place. 

13.  A  later  editor,  probably  a  Maccabean,  wishing  to  interpret 
the  wicked  of  the  Ps.  as  national  enemies,  and  justified  in  some 
measure  by  the  figurative  language  of  the  previous  petitions,  adds 
a  trimeter  couplet  setting  forth  the  fulfilment  of  the  expectations 
of  the  people  in  the  downfall  of  the  enemy. 

There  are  the  workers  of  trouble  fallen ; 
They  are  thrust  down  and  cannot  rise. 

There],  pointing  to  the  place,  as  in  Ps.  145,  —  are  the  workers 
of  trouble  fallen],  on  the  battle-field. —  They  are  thrust  down], 
by  blows  from  weapons  —  and  cannot  rise],  they  have  fallen  in 
death  to  rise  no  more. 

XXXVI.   A. 

2.  jrrjrsNj]  phr.  a.X.  \  3K}  n-m-  utterance  elsw. :  (1)  of  a  prophet  Nu. 
243.4.6. 15  2  g#  231  Pr.  301;  (2)  before  divine  names  (except  Je.  2331)  Ps.  no1 
Is.  56s,  where  alone  it  begins  sentence,  elsw.  often  in  middle,  but  most  fre- 
quently at  the  end  ;  found  in  all  the  prophets  except  Hb.,  Jon.,  but  not  in 
H.,  D.  (except  when  parall.   Kings),  Chr.,  Dn.,  Job,  or  Megilloth.     ptfg  is 


PSALM   XXXVI.  321 

personified,  as  DM8M1  Gen.  47,  cf.  Ps.  1914.  But  <§  has  6  jrapdvofws,  U  injustus 
=  p«te,  implying  a  person,  probably  an  evil  spirit,  or  possibly  fOfr  of  the  later 
theology,  as  Horsley.  $?  has  the  more  primitive  idea  and  is  more  probable 
in  itself.  —  j?BhS]  as  usual,  the  person  to  whom  the  utterance  came,  3  impii. 
<J|  has  rod  a/j-aprdpeiv,  TrJ  ut  delinquat  —  V&~^t  which  is  against  usage  and  im- 
probable in  itself.  —  »J^  a^a]  referring  to  psalmist,  improbable,  error  of  copy- 
ist. <§,  "F,  &,  3,  have  iaV,  which  is  favoured  by  the  parall.  r*ry  and  is  doubtless 
correct,  as  most  moderns.  ^  for  the  man  himself,  as  58s.  —  rota]  because 
deity  was  before  the  mind,  as  141.  —  3.  rta  P>j?nn]  Hiph.pf.  pVn  (j10)  flatter ; 
subj.  j?Bte,  explaining  the  2x2,  c.  prep.  ta,  cf.  hy  Pr.  29s.  (§  has  4i>u)inov  avrov, 
which  might  be  a  condensation  of  vh*  with  wya;  but  ffi  prob.  gives  us  a 
conflation  of  two  earlier  readings,  due  to  the  influence  of  vy;  -ujS  above,  one 
of  which,  prob.  the  latter,  is  incorrect.  —  NSD^]  Qal  inf.  cstr.,  may  be  inter- 
preted either  of  finding,  in  the  sense  of  attaining,  acco7?iplishing,  or  in  the 
sense  of  discovery.  Most  interpreters  take  the  latter,  after  <3,  3  ;  cf.  Gn.  4416. 
—  sofrS]  Qal  inf.  cstr.,  may  be  taken  with  (5  as  syn.  with  NXr,  and  intensify- 
ing the  discovery  of  the  iniquity  by  the  hating  of  it,  that  is,  by  God,  the  terror 
of  whom  is  absent  from  the  wicked  man  ;  so  RV.,  and  most  interpreters  ;  or 
as  gerund  ad  odiendum  3,  qualifying  the  iniquity,  abominable  PBV.,  to  be  hate- 
ful AV.,  which  is  preferable  if  the  text  be  correct.  The  construction  is, 
however,  in  either  case  so  awkward  that  emendation  is  tempting.  Dy.,  Gr., 
propose  Mth  p?  iniquity  of  his  tongue;  Du.  thinks  Hivh  an  Aramaic  gl. — 
4.  ve  "Ha"!]  as  o>rw  "iai  174  5913,  and  ">d  no*  1915  54*  781 1384.  —  rvo'V^  fM<] 
phr.  a.\.  \f/ ;  cf.  jini  Soy  io7  9010,  cf.  5511.  —  J  S^n]  Qal  pf.  (1)  cease,  come  to 
an  end,  cease  to  be,  Dt.  1511  Ju.  56-7-7;  (2)  cease,  leave  off,  desist;  here  as 
Ps.  499  Dt.  2323  Gn.  4149  (E)  Je.  4418.  —  S»?fenS]  Hiph.  inf.  cstr.  objective, 
act  with  circumspection  (v.  210).  Cf.  142  for  a  similar  thought.  —  anp^nS] 
Hiph.  inf.  cstr.,  usually  interpreted  as  syn.  with  previous  vb.,  so  EVS.,  or  as 
a  subordinate  inf.  to  it,  giving  s,DlMn  the  meaning  of  consider  or  regard ;  so 
<3,  IB,  3,  Kirk.  But  this  word  makes  1.  too  long  and  is  needed  to  complete 
the  next  1.  Give  it  therefore  the  sense  of  do  well,  thoroughly  (v.jj3),  and 
attach  it  to  ps,  as  it  is  attached  to  jn  Mi.  73.  —  5.  atJfrn]  Qal  impf.  {v.  io2), 
plan,  devise ;  cf.  Mi.  21,  where  also  33B>D  h'j  (j.5)  is  used,  making  it  prob.  that 
the  psalmist  used  the  prophet's  thought. 

XXXVI.   B. 

The  Ps.  now  changes  from  pentameter  to  trimeter,  and  has  an  entirely  differ- 
ent tone.  Another  independent  Ps.  is  added. — 6-7.  The  quartette  of  attri- 
butes iDn  (4I),  njiEN  (jj4),  !"i|-nx  (j9)  favours  DD#D  (/5)  also.  The  pi.  yvovn 
is  a  later  interpretation,  not  consistent  with  context.  V.6  is  similar  to  5711 
(=  1085),  D^etfna  for  DTr  "i>  there,  is  an  intentional  change,  not  txt.  err.  as 
Du.  It  is  a  more  difficult  reading  than  -<>,  which  is  in  syn.  clause  and  which 
would  have  favoured  assimilation  rather  than  the  reverse.  —  ta^?*^]  cf.  5010 
mountains  of'El,  for  gigantic  mts.  which  He  alone  could  make  and  where 
v 


322  PSALMS 

He  dwelt ;  cf.  Vn  *rw  8011,  h*  »33\a  Is.  1413.  For  Sn  v.  Intr.  §  32.  ®  wad 
repeats  3  before  DVtn,  so  We.  It  is  possible  that  it  has  fallen  off  after  sf.  -\. 
—  DVtn]  v.337.  —  mm]  makes  1.  too  long,  and  is  needed  in  next  1.  —  8.  np*] 
=  pretiosa  3,  rlfiiov  Aq.,  2,  Quinta,  so  1&,  is  a  more  difficult  reading  and 
therefore  more  probable  than  3"v,  iirX^dvvas  of  (J§,  multiplicasti  3J,  so  essen- 
tially jo,  which  is  common  with  iDn.  $  1f£  adj.  (1)  precious,  highly  valued  ; 
usually  of  stones,  in  \p  elsw.  4510  11616;  (2)  glorious,  splendid  (cf.  Aram.),  in 
^  only  as  subst.  3720,  cf.  Jb.  3126.  —  DViSn].  The  next  clause  with  din  »jai 
(85)  is  one  word  too  long  and  is  striking  in  view  of  din  above;  and  dtiSn 
in  this  Yahwistic  Ps.  is  improbable.  3  had  mrv,  showing  variant  text.  Either 
both  glosses  or  a  1.  must  be  found  underlying  them.  Du.  rds.  D1K"iJ3  wa>  yh* 
after  65s.  But  we  should  rather  expect  something  suggested  by  context,  such 
as  "pjIDK.  Then  we  might  regard  d^hSn  as  for  an  original  Sn  prep,  interpreted 
as  Sx,  God.  But  the  clause  fVDrv  tdm  Ssa  is  similar  to  572,  cf.  615  914  Ru.  212, 
and  not  altogether  appropriate  to  context  here ;  it  is  probably,  with  the  fore- 
going, a  gl.  — 9.  pn?]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  full  form,  be  refreshed,  satisfied.  \  r\y\ 
vb.  Qal  only  here  in  \f/,  cf.  Pr.  718.  Pi.  saturate,  drench,  Ps.  6511,  cf.  23s. — 
arpg  fc;i]  fatness,  rich  things,  the  festival  meals  in  the  temple,  cf.  Is.  432t 
Je.  3114.  %  V$ ?.  n-m-  fatness,  fertility,  63s  6512;  spiritual  blessings  here,  as 
Is.  552,  (5  of  Ps.  6816- 16.  —  rprtj  Sro]  phr.  a.X.  f  [??.?]  n.[m.]  luxury,  dainty  : 
pi.  2  S.  I24  (dub.  o\jid  Gr.,  HPS.)  Je.  5 184  (dub.  ij-ipa  Gie),  elsw.  only  here, 
<g  rpv<pT)S,  3  deliciarum.  Cf.  f  [?"WD]  only  pi.  Gn.  4920  (poem)  La.  46  Pr.  2917. 
It  is  possible  that  there  may  be  a  reference  to  the  Eden  of  Gn.  210  and  its 
river  of  life,  if  the  Ps.  is  postexilic.  For  the  stream  of  life  from  the  temple, 
cf.  Ps.  46s  Ez.  471  "i-  Jo.  418  Zc.  148.  — DCBto]  Hiph.  impf.  2  m.  sf.  3  pi.  X  [nptf] 
vb.  Qal  not  used.  Niph.  Am.  88.  Pu.  jb.  2124.  Hiph.  give  to  drink  :  abs. 
Ps.  7815;  c.  ace.  rei  Snj  j^9,  pi  605,  fen  6922,  nwu  806;  ace.  pers.  or  thing 
given  drink  ich11-  13.  — 10.  D>>n  -Vpn]  =  Pr.  io11  1314  1427  L622,  spring  or 
fountain  of  life,  cf.  D"n  0"D  -npo  Je.  218  1713.  J  -npo  elsw.  Ps.  6827  has  same 
mng.  D"n  {v.  j6).  Yahweh  as  iw,  cf.  light  of  His  face  4?  44*  8916,  D"nn  tn 
5614  Jb.  3330.  —  nN"u]  Qal  impf.  1  pi.,  @,  3  ;  introduction  of  1  pers.  for  3  pers. 
of  remainder  of  Ps.  improbable.  Rd.  rather  Niph.  pf.  nio}.  Then  it  is  better 
to  take  :pwa  as  Qal  inf.  cstr.  of  vb.  -iin  shine.  — 11.  Tjn">']  those  knowing 
thee  with  the  knowledge  of  righteous  adherents.  >"v  (v.  i6)  \\  2S  nr  y11  n2 
3211  6411  9416  9711,  only  in  \f/t  not  in  prophets.  — 12.  m*|  Sn]  proud  foot. 
niNJ  io2  3ii9-24y26  Is.  98  1311  2511  Pr.  143  29s3.  —  'PJJOk]  Hiph.  juss.,  -nj 
cause  to  wander  aimlessly  as  fugitives,  as  5912  (v.  u1).  — 13.  ou;]  as  z^5, 
place  of  defeat.  —  ini]  Pu.  pf.  a.X.  nm  thrust  down. 


PSALM   XXXVII.,  7  str.  66. 

Ps.  37  is  a  didactic  Ps.  —  Exhortation  (1)  not  to  envy  evil- 
doers, but  to  trust  in  Yahweh,  who  will  ultimately  make  a  just 
discrimination  (v.1"6)  ;   (2)   to  be  resigned  and  not  excited,  for  in 


PSALM   XXXVII.  323 

a  little  while  the  wicked  will  be  no  more  and  the  afflicted  will 
inherit  the  land  (v.7-11).  (3)  Yahweh  laugheth  at  the  devices 
of  the  wicked.  Exact  retribution  will  come  upon  them;  their 
weapons  will  be  turned  against  them,  but  the  righteous  will  be 
upheld  (v.12"17).  (4)  Yahweh  knoweth  the  days  of  the  perfect, 
but  the  wicked  shall  perish,  however  exalted  they  may  be.  They 
will  be  cursed  and  cut  off,  while  the  righteous  are  blessed  and 
enjoy  their  inheritance  (v.18-22) .  (5)  A  man's  steps  are  established 
by  Yahweh  ;  the  righteous  are  never  forsaken,  for  Yahweh  loveth 
justice  (v.2328a).  (6)  The  wicked  and  their  seed  are  cut  off;  but 
the  righteous  have  wisdom  and  the  divine  Law,  and  Yahweh  will 
not  let  them  be  condemned  (v.286-33).  (7)  Though  the  wicked  be 
strong  and  flourishing,  they  will  be  destroyed ;  while  the  upright 
and  their  posterity  will  enjoy  peace.  Yahweh  will  save  all  who 
seek  refuge  in  Him  (v.35-40).     A  liturgical  gloss  was  inserted  (v.34). 


T7RET  not  thyself  because  of  evildoers,  and  be  not  envious  against  them  that  do 

wrong; 
As  grass  they  will  speedily  wither,  and  like  the  fresh  grass  fade. 
Trust  in  Yahweh  and  do  good,  inhabit  the  land  and  pasture  in  confidence ; 
And  take  delight  in  Yahweh,  and  He  will  give  thee  the  requests  of  thine  heart. 
Roll  upon  Yahweh  and  trust  in  Him,  and  He  will  do  it ; 

And  He  will  bring  forth  as  the  light  thy  right,  and  thy  just  cause  as  the  noonday. 
jRE  resigned  to  Yahweh  and  wait  patiently  for  Him,  and  fret  not  thyself  (because 

of  evildoers)  ; 
(Be  not  envious)  against  him  that  maketh  his  way  prosperous,  against  the  man 

that  doeth  evil  devices  ; 
Desist  from  anger  and  forsake  heat,  fret  not  thyself  at  the  doing  of  evil ; 
For  evildoers  will  be  cut  off,  but  those  that  wait  on  Yahweh  will  inherit  the  land ; 
Yet  a  little,  and  the  wicked  will  be  no  more,  and  thou  wilt  attentively  consider 

his  place  and  he  will  be  no  more ; 
But  the  afflicted  will  inherit  the  land,  and  take  delight  in  abundance  of  peace. 
'pHE  wicked  deviseth  against  the  righteous,  and  gnasheth  his  teeth  at  him. 
The  Lord  laugheth  at  him,  for  He  seeth  that  his  day  cometh. 
The  wicked  draw  the  sword,  and  they  tread  the  bow  for  slaughter; 
Their  sword  shall  enter  their  own  heart,  and  their  bows  shall  be  broken  in  their 

arms. 
Better  is  a  little  that  the  righteous  hath  than  the  roar  of  many  wicked  men ; 
For  the  arms  of  the  wicked  shall  be  broken,  seeing  that  Yahweh  upholdeth  the 

righteous. 
YAHWEH  knoweth  the  days  of  the  perfect,  and  their  inheritance  shall  be  forever; 
They  will  not  be  ashamed  in  time  of  evil,  and  in  days  of  hunger  they  will  be 

satisfied. 
Yea,  the  wicked  shall  perish,  and  the  enemies  of  Yahweh  (shall  be  cut  off) ; 


324  PSALMS 

Yea,  (while  in  high  esteem,  while  exalted)  they  do  vanish,  in  smoke  they  do 

vanish  away. 
While  the  wicked  borroweth  and  restoreth  not,  the   righteous   dealeth  gra- 
ciously and  giveth ; 
Yea,  those  blessed  of  Him  will  inherit  the  land;  but  those  cursed  of  Him  shall 

be  cut  off. 
(")F  Yahweh  are  a  man's  steps  established,  and  in  his  way  He  takes  pleasure ; 

Though  he  fall,  he  shall  not  be  cast  headlong,  for  Yahweh  upholdeth  his  hand. 
A  boy  I  have  been,  now  I  am  old,  and  I  have  not  seen  the  righteous  forsaken ; 
All  the  day  he  dealeth  graciously  and  lendeth,  and  his  seed  will  become  a 

blessing. 
Depart  from  evil  and  do  good,  and  abide  forever; 
For  Yahweh  loveth  justice,  and  forsaketh  not  His  pious  ones. 
/THE  unjust)  are  destroyed  forever,  and  the  seed  of  the  wicked  is  cut  off; 
^       The  righteous  will  inherit  the  land,  and  they  will  dwell  forever  upon  it. 

The  mouth  of  the  righteous  uttereth  wisdom,  and  his  tongue  speaketh  justice; 

The  Law  of  his  God  is  in  his  mind,  and  his  goings  will  not  totter. 

The  wicked  spieth  upon  the  righteous,  and  seeketh  to  put  him  (to  a  violent) 

death ; 
Yahweh  will  not  forsake  him  in  his  hand,  and  will  not  condemn  him  as  guilty 

when  he  is  judged. 
T   HAVE  seen  the  wicked  (terrifying  and  making  himself  bare)  ;  he  was  like  a 

luxuriant  (cedar)  ; 
And  then  I  passed  by,  and  lo,  he  was  no  more ;  and  I  sought  him,  but  he  could 

not  be  found. 
Watch  the  perfect  man,  and  see  the  upright ;  for  ^a  posterity)  hath  the  man  of 

peace : 
But  transgressors  are  destroyed  together,  the  posterity  of  the  wicked  is  cut  off. 
The  salvation  of  the  righteous  is  from  Yahweh,  and  their  refuge  in  the  time  of 

distress ; 
And  Yahweh  will  help  them,  and  He  will  deliver  them  from  the  wicked,  and 

He  will  save  them,  because  they  have  sought  refuge  in  Him. 

Ps.  37  was  in  13,  but  in  no  other  Psalter  until  the  final  Psalter.  This  was 
because  of  its  didactic  character  and  its  length,  making  it  of  less  value  for 
public  worship  than  many  others.  It  is  a  series  of  alphabetical  hexameter 
couplets.  As  Pss.  25  and  34  omitted  the  Str.  i  in  order  to  get  three  Strs.  of 
seven  letters  each,  so  this  Ps.  omitted  Str.  p  in  order  to  get  seven  Strs.  of  three 
letters  each.  The  Ps.  is  compared  by  Amyrald  to  "  many  precious  stones  or 
pearls  which  are  strung  on  one  string  in  one  necklace."  Delitzsch  says  with 
approval,  "  Tertullian  names  this  Psalm  providentiae  speculum ;  Isodorus, 
potio  contra  murmur;  Luther,  vestis  piorum,  cui  adscriptum  :  Hie  sancto- 
rum patieniia  estP  The  Ps.  deals  with  the  same  problem  as  the  book  of  Job  ; 
only  it  takes  the  earlier  position  of  the  friends  of  Job  in  their  discourses,  and 
does  not  rise  to  the  higher  solution  of  the  discourses  of  Job  himself.  The 
hexameter  couplets  have  for  the  most  part  remained  unchanged.  Strs.  1  and 
d  have  been  condensed  at  the  expense  of  the  measure,  2  and  P  have  been 
enlarged.     But  it  is  easy  to  restore  them  to  their  correct  form.     fQ  has  lost 


PSALM   XXXVII.  325 

Str.  ",  but  it  is  given  in  (S.  ^  prefixes  1  to  Str.  r.  There  are  several  passages 
similar  to  those  of  other  writings:  nnnn  "?H  v.1-  7-  8  Pr.  2419;  v.2,  cf.  90°  Jb. 
142;  v.4,  cf.  Jb.  2710;  v.18,  cf.  Ps.  i6.  In  all  these  cases  our  Ps.  was  probably 
earlier,  but  in  the  following  cases  our  Ps.  was  later :  1  h'j  Su  v.5  229,  cf.  Pr. 
i6?;  v.13a,  cf.  Ps.  24.  The  language  of  the  Ps.  is  in  some  respects  peculiar 
and  original:  (1)  ct.X.  nsh  (?T  v.2,  njiDN  njn  v.3,  S  SVmnfl  v.7  in  this  sense, 
firm  pin  v.21,  "pi  yon  v.23;  (2)  terms  elsw.  seldom :  run  hd  v.30  Pr.  87, 
by  jjiann  v.10  Jb.  311,  nSi?  *e»j?  v.1  Zc.  35-13,  nw  =  j««  v.6  Hb.  34  Jb.  3i2G, 
nna  3™  v.14  Ez.  2i33,  maa1?  v.14  La.  221  Ez.  2115,  njwo  v.23  Pr.  2024  Dn.  n43, 
bw  nS  v.24  Je.  2228  Jb.  4 11.  Linguistic  evidence  favours  the  same  period  as 
the  thought;  namely,  the  situation  of  the  Jerusalem  community  before  Nehe- 
miah,  exposed  to  bitter  enemies,  who  are  in  prosperity  while  the  people  of 
Yahweh  are  in  adversity.  The  people  are  under  the  influence  of  D.,  and  do 
not  yet  know  P.  They  are  beginning  to  be  influenced  by  the  principles  of 
Hebrew  Wisdom,  but  the  WL.  had  not  yet  been  written. 

Str.  I.  is  composed  of  three  synth.  couplets.  —  Couplet  K. 
1-2.  Fret  not  thyself],  as  v.78  Pr.  2419,  with  the  heat  of  passion, 
the  excitement  of  anger,  indignation,  or  discontent  ||  be  not 
envious],  with  the  ardour  of  jealousy,  making  such  comparisons 
of  one's  lot  with  that  of  evildoers  ||  them  that  do  wrong,  as  to 
unduly  excite  oneself  with  the  sense  of  injustice  and  wrong.  The 
reason  why  this  excitement  should  be  avoided  is  a  practical  one  : 
it  is  needless  ;  the  situation  will  be  of  brief  duration.  The  reason 
is  stated  in  the  form  of  a  simile.  The  prosaic  insertion  of  "  for  " 
was  unnecessary,  especially  as  it  injured  the  measure.  —  As  grass  || 
like  the  fresh  grass],  as  in  906  Jb.  142  Is.  40^,  a  natural  image  of 
frailty  and  perishableness.  —  they  will  speedily  wither  \  fade]. — 
Couplet  2.  3-4.  The  negative  warning  gives  place  to  the  positive 
exhortation,  turning  the  attention  from  the  evildoers  to  Yahweh. 
Trust  in  Yahweh  and  do  good'],  in  antith  with  "do  wrong,"  v1. 
—  Take  delight  in  Yahweh],  the  comfort,  satisfaction,  and  joy 
of  continued  trust.  —  inhabit  the  land],  the  land  of  promise, 
the  land  of  inheritance,  as  v.9,  in  possession  of  the  returned 
exiles,  implying  that  they  would  not  be  driven  from  it  by 
their  enemies.  —  and  pasture],  as  the  flock  of  Yahweh,  partake 
of  the  good  things  of  the  land,  in  confidence],  in  security  under 
the  divine  protection.  This  meaning  is  given  essentially  in  para- 
phrase by  AV.,  "  so  shalt  thou  dwell  in  the  land  and  verily  thou 
shalt  be  fed."    RV.  "follow  after  faithfulness,"  although  sustained 


326  PSALMS 

by  De.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  al.,  gives  the  Heb.  word  an  unusual  meaning, 
and  emphasises  the  ethical  character  of  the  v.  at  the  expense  of 
the  parall.  with  the  following  context.  —  Couplet  1  5-6.  Roll 
upon  Yahweh],  as  2  29,  cares,  anxieties,  and  troubles. —  Way,  for 
the  whole  course  of  life,  is  a  prosaic  addition,  at  the  expense  of 
the  measure,  and  gives  the  thought  too  ethical  a  turn.  The  climax 
is  reached  in:  and  trust  in  Hi?n],  as  3115,  a  stronger  expression 
than  the  idea  of  personal  leaning  upon,  resting  upon  Yahweh,  with- 
out any  further  care  or  anxiety.  The  Str.  reaches  its  climax  in 
v.6,  which,  in  a  beautiful  simile,  sets  forth  the  speedy  triumph  of 
the  righteous.  —  And  He  will  bring  forth],  from  the  obscurity  in 
which  their  right  ||  Just  cause  had  been  pushed  by  the  evildoers, 
the  cruel  and  crafty  enemies. — as  the  light],  the  sunshine  ||  as 
the  noonday,  the  full  light  of  the  noontide  sun. 

Str.  II.  has  a  syn.  tristich  and  a  tristich  in  which  the  second 
line  is  syn.  with  the  first  half  of  the  first  line,  and  the  third  line  is 
syn.  with  its  second  half.  Couplet  *1  is  supplemented  by  the  first 
line  of  couplet  Pi.  —  7.  Be  resigned,  quiet,  still,  calm,  and  peace- 
ful ||  wait  patiently  for  Hint],  the  steadfast,  longing  looking  unto 
Yahweh  for  help,  both  in  antith.  with  :  fret  not  thyself,  repeated 
from  v.1  and  given  again  v.8,  with  its  parall.  :  be  not  envious,  also 
from  v.1 ;  not  in  J^  or  Vrss.,  but  needed  for  completeness  of 
measure;  still  further  intensified  in  8,  desist  from  anger  and  for- 
sake heat].  The  exciting  influence  here,  as  in  v.1,  was  because  of 
evildoers,  which  must  be  repeated  from  v.1  to  supply  the  missing 
word  of  the  measure,  although  not  in  J£f  or  ancient  Vrss.  —  him 
that  7naketh  his  way  prosperous,  as  the  context  shows,  succeed- 
ing and  prospering  in  his  wickedness  ||  the  man  that  doeth  evil 
devices,  not  only  planning  them  but  also  accomplishing  them  || 
at  the  doing  of  evil],  as  the  parall.  requires.  But  J^  inserts  a 
particle  in  order  to  emphasise  its  interpretation,  "only  to  do  evil," 
followed  by  EV8. ;  which  thus  becomes  a  warning  not  to  carry 
their  impatient  fretting  so  far  as  to  be  evildoers  themselves ;  an 
idea  true  and  important  enough  in  itself,  but  an  intrusion  into 
this  context.  — 9-11.  The  antith.  between  the  evildoers  and  those 
that  wait  on  Yahtveh,  in  the  two  parts  of  v.9  appears  in  the  antith. 
v.ia~u,  where  the  former  are  simply  the  wicked,  the  latter  the 
afflicted,  as  those  suffering  for  righteousness'  sake.     These  antith. 


PSALM   XXXVII.  327 

classes  have  their  antith.  lots ;  the  former  will  be  cut  off,  by  sudden 
violent  death.  In  a  very  little  while,  and  yet  a  little,  cf.  "  speedily," 
v.2,  they  will  be  no  more'],  will  pass  out  of  existence,  cease  to 
exist ;  and  this  so  entirely  in  the  emphasis  of  the  complementary 
part  of  the  line  that  they  cannot  be  found  by  the  most  careful 
search  for  them  :  thou  wilt  attentively  consider  his  place~\ .  In  his 
own  place,  where  he  was  accustomed  to  be,  and  where  he  could 
be  found  if  anywhere,  he  will  no  more  exist.  On  the  other  hand, 
those  afflicted  for  Yahweh's  sake  will  inherit  the  land,  will  con- 
tinue to  inhabit  the  land,  cf.  v.3,  as  its  rightful  heirs  who  cannot 
be  dispossessed ;  repeated  in  v.11  in  order  to  the  climax,  take 
delight  in  abundance  of  peace"].  The  enemies  having  been  de- 
stroyed, war  has  disappeared  with  them,  and  there  is  peace,  so 
full  and  entire  that  it  is  conceived  as  in  abundance,  and  after 
the  experience  of  affliction,  affording  delight,  cf.  v.3-4. 

Str.  III.  has  two  antith.  couplets  and  a  synth.  one,  all  describ- 
ing sure  retribution  upon  the  wicked.  —  Couplet  t.  12-13.  The 
wicked  devise th  against  the  righteous],  cf.  v.76.  His  wicked  plans 
are  accompanied  with  such  intense  hostility  that  like  a  beast  of 
prey  he  gnasheth  his  teeth  at  him].  This  is  not  an  individual 
enemy,  but  collective  for  warlike  enemies,  nations.  —  The  Lord 
laugheth  at  him],  doubtless  a  citation  from  24,  where  He  laugheth 
at  the  nations  plotting  to  overthrow  the  rule  of  the  Messianic  king. 
The  reason  for  this  scorn  of  the  enemy  is,  for  He  seeth],  foreseeth 
the  impending  evil.  —  that  his  day  cometh],  the  day  of  the  judg- 
ment upon  him,  the  day  of  his  death.  —  Couplet  17.  14-15.  The 
wicked  draw  the  sword  ||  they  tread  the  bow,  with  the  purpose  of 
slaughter.  This  is  enlarged,  at  the  expense  of  the  measure,  in 
ancient  texts  at  the  basis  of  f^  and  the  Vrss.  to  read,  "  cause  to 
fall,"  that  is,  in  death,  from  sword  and  bow ;  and  the  righteous  are 
still  further  described  as  "  afflicted  and  needy,"  ||  "  upright  in  the 
way,"  the  latter  a  phrase  only  here  for  the  usual  "  upright  of 
mind,"  which  indeed  is  given  in  (3.  3  has  a  conflation  of  both 
"mind"  and  "way."  All  these  are  glosses,  for  which  there  is  no 
place  in  the  measure  of  the  lines  or  the  Str.  The  retribution  is  an 
exact  one.  Their  own  sword  and  bows  will  be  used  against  them. 
—  shall  enter  their  otvn  heart],  pierce  them  to  the  heart,  and  so 
slay  them ;  and  their  bows  shall  be  broken].  —  Couplet  10.    16-17. 


328  PSALMS 

The  last  clause  of  16  should  be  rendered,  in  accordance  with  the 
previous  context,  as  the  roar  of  many  wicked  men],  the  noise  and 
confusion  of  their  multitudes  during  the  attack,  rather  than  with 
Vrss.  "abundance,"  or  "great  riches,"  wealth,  which  introduces 
a  gnome  of  Wisdom,  suitable  enough  in  itself,  but  intrusive,  and 
disturbing  to  the  progress  of  the  thought.  Then  the  little  that  the 
righteous  hath  is  not  property,  but  strength  and  ability  to  resist 
the  enemy.  This  is  better,  not  in  itself,  but  because  such  men  may 
rely  upon  the  superabundant  strength  of  Yahweh.  The  climax  of 
the  Str.  is  :  seeing  that  Yahweh  upholdeth  the  righteous"],  a  circum- 
stantial clause  with  ptc,  which  is  more  probable  in  this  context 
than  the  usual  interpretation,  making  it  an  adversative  clause. 

Str.  IV.  has  two  synth.  couplets,  and  one  introverted  couplet. 
—  Couplet  \  18-19.  YaJweh  knoweth],  with  a  practical  interest 
and  redemptive  attention,  as  i6.  —  the  days'],  the  duration  of  life 
in  %],  but  (3,  "  ways,"  as  i6.  —  of  the  perfect],  those  who  are  com- 
plete and  entire  in  their  conduct  ||  righteous,  v.21.  —  their  in- 
heritance], in  the  land,  repeated  v.9112229.  —  shall  be  forever], 
they  will  never  be  removed  from  it  by  their  enemies.  On  the 
negative  side  :  they  will  not  be  ashamed],  be  put  to  shame  by  their 
enemies,  even,  —  in  time  of  evil,  when  everything  is  threatening; 
but  on  the  positive  side,  —  they  will  be  satisfied],  have  enough 
and  to  spare  even  when  the  times  are  so  evil  that  they  are  days 
of  hunger].  When  they  are  besieged,  or  their  enemies  have  left 
them  only  a  devastated  land,  they  will  still  have  plenty.  —  Coup- 
let 3.  20.  This  is  in  antith.  with  the  previous  couplet.  —  Yea,  the 
wicked,  who  are  at  the  same  time  enemies  of  Yahweh,  shall  perish 
||  they  shall  be  cut  off.  The  latter  is  inserted  in  v.20*  for  measure, 
where  it  has  been  omitted  by  copyist's  error ;  cf.  v.226,  where  it  is 
still  preserved.  —  while  in  high  esteem  ||  while  exalted],  so  after 
(3,  which  is  to  be  preferred  to  J^,  whether  interpreted  as  the  "  fat 
of  lambs,"  E,  PBV.,  AV.,  or  "excellence  of  fields,"  RV.,  "splen- 
dour of  the  meadows,"  Kirk.,  or  "  glorying  as  yore-oxen,"  3.  The 
reference  to  animals  is  not  suited  to  the  verb  vanish,  repeated 
in  the  simile,  in  smoke  vanish  aivay].  The  reference  to  the 
flowers  and  the  glory  of  the  meadows  is  favoured  by  v.2,  but  by 
none  of  the  ancient  Vrss. —  Couplet  b.  21-22.  These  verses  are  in 
introverted  parall.,  but  at  the  same  time  there  is  antith.  between 


PSALM   XXXVII.  329 

the  halves  of  both.  The  reference  to  the  wicked,  as  one  that 
borroweth  and  restoreth  not,  in  the  context,  must  refer  to  the 
humiliation  of  poverty,  which  reduces  him  to  the  necessity  of 
borrowing  and  makes  it  impossible  for  him  ever  to  repay  his 
debt.  This  is  antith.  with  the  prosperity  of  the  righteous,  who  are 
able  to  give  generously  to  the  poor  and  needy.  The  righteous 
are  blessed  of  Yahweh,  the  wicked  are  cursed  of  Him. 

Str.  V.  has  three  synth.  couplets.  —  Couplet  ft.  23-24.  Of 
Yahweh],  emphatic  in  position.  He  is  the  original  source  from 
whom  a  man's  steps  ||  his  way,  the  whole  course  of  his  life  in 
which  he  walks,  are  established,  made  firm  and  secure.  This  is 
Yahweh's  own  work,  gives  Him  gratification,  and  He  takes  pleas- 
ure in  it.  In  this  walk,  though  he  fall,  as  he  may  sometimes, 
owing  to  stumbling-blocks  and  impediments  of  various  kinds,  yet 
he  shall  not  be  cast  headlong].  It  shall  not  be  a  hurtful,  danger- 
ous, fatal  fall,  for  Yahweh  upholdeth  his  hana].  He  has  such 
a  hold  on  his  hand  that  He  does  not  permit  him  to  fall  down 
or  suffer  injury.  —  Couplet  1  25-26.  The  psalmist's  experience  is 
now  given  to  fortify  his  testimony  :  A  boy  I  have  been].  He  re- 
calls his  youth  and  his  long  life  of  varied  experiences.  —  now  I  am 
old~\.  In  all  my  life  /  have  not  seen  the  righteous  forsaken],  by 
Yahweh.  Such  a  thing  has  never  come  under  his  observation,  or 
formed  any  part  of  his  experience,  whether  as  to  himself  or  others. 
A  later  editor,  not  realising  the  power  of  this  terse  statement, 
seeks  to  improve  it  by  the  addition,  "  or  his  seed  seeking  bread," 
which  is  well  suited  to  the  context,  it  is  true,  but  which  is  intrusive 
here,  making  the  line  much  too  long  for  the  measure,  and  also  is 
premature  in  its  reference  to  seed,  which  comes  first  with  pro- 
priety in  the  next  line.  —  All  the  day  he  dealeth  graciously  and 
lendeth~\.  He  is  so  prosperous,  as  in  v.21,  that  he  has  enough  and 
to  spare  ;  and  so  can  be  generous  in  his  dealings  with  others,  and 
yet  leave  an  abundance  to  his  own  children,  and  so  his  seed  will 
become  a  blessing.  It  is  probable  that  the  psalmist  has  in  mind 
the  blessings  of  those  who  keep  the  Law  of  D.,  and  especially 
Dt.  2811-12.  —  Couplet  D.  27-28  a.  On  the  basis  of  this  testimony 
and  experience  an  exhortation  is  appropriate.  This  is  in  terms 
which  become  characteristic  of  the  piety  of  Hebrew  Wisdom, — 
Depart  from  evil  and  do  good],  both  on  the  negative  and  positive 


330  PSALMS 

sides  of  ethical  conduct ;  with  the  imperative  of  apodosis,  —  and 
inhabit  forever,  as  v.3,  the  /ana7'].  The  last  word  was  omitted 
in  the  text  by  copyist's  mistake,  at  the  expense  of  the  measure. 
This  exhortation  is  fortified  by  the  reason,  which  sums  up  much 
of  the  previous  context  of  the  Str.  and  the  Ps. :  For  Yahweh  loveth 
justice],  that  is,  the  doing  of  justice,  in  the  vindication  of  His 
people,  as  v.6.  —  and  forsake th  not],  as  v.25  —  Bis  pious  ones], 
another  term  for  the  righteous  and  the  afflicted  people,  as  305  3124. 
Str.  VI.  has  two  antith.  couplets,  with  an  intervening  synth. 
couplet.  —  Couplet  2?.  28  Z?— 29.  The  unjust  are  destroyed],  so  (3 
and  many  recent  scholars,  giving  the  2  of  the  couplet,  missing  in 
2^,  and  also  making  a  fine  antith.  The  text  of  Jif,  "  they  are  pre- 
served forever,"  though  followed  by  3  and  modern  Vrss.,  is  due  to 
the  mistake  of  a  copyist,  and  occasioned  many  unnecessary  diffi- 
culties. The  retribution  of  the  wicked,  as  usual  in  the  OT., 
comes  upon  their  seed  also  ;  they  will  be  cut  off,  cf.  v.9.  In  antith. 
with  the  punishment  of  the  wicked  is  the  reward  of  the  righteous 
in  terms  of  v.3- 91118-22-27.  — Couplet  B.  30-31.  The  character  of 
the  righteous  is  more  fully  described  :  as  to  speech  ;  the  mouth  and 
tongue,  the  organs  of  speech,  on  the  positive  side,  —  uttereth  wis- 
dom], the  ethical  wisdom  based  on  the  fear  of  Yahweh,  which  is 
here  in  its  early  beginnings,  and  so  associated  with  speaketh  justice] 
as  the  previous  context  indicates,  that  of  the  Law  of  D.  —  the  La7v 
of  his  God  is  in  his  mind],  in  accordance  with  Dt.  3014  Je.  3133. 
Such  a  man,  whose  mind  and  speech  are  alike  ruled  by  wisdom 
and  the  Law  of  Yahweh,  is  secure  in  his  course  of  life ;  his  goings 
will  not  totter],  cf.  v.23  24.  —  Couplet  X.  32-33.  The  wicked  are 
so  treacherous  toward  the  righteous  that,  like  a  crafty  foe,  they  spy 
upon  him,  seeking  in  every  way  to  entrap  him  in  some  kind  of 
violation  of  Law  that  will  involve  a  judicial  investigation ;  and  so 
seek  to  put  him  to  a  violent  death],  to  involve  him  in  crime  and 
its  penalty,  capital  punishment.  The  original  phrase  has  been 
abbreviated  by  an  editor  at  the  expense  of  the  measure,  and 
to  the  disguising  of  the  technical  meaning,  which  is,  however, 
attested  by  the  following  line  :  Yahweh  will  not  forsake]  the 
righteous,  as  v.25- a ;  strengthened  here  by  reference  to  the  specific 
danger,  —  in  his  hand],  leaving  him  alone  in  the  hand  of  his  spying 
enemy,  to  do  what  he  will  with  him.     On  the  contrary,  Yahweh 


PSALM   XXXVII.  331 

is  with  him ;  He  Himself  takes  control  of  the  proceedings,  and 
when  he  is  judged,  instead  of  giving  the  sentence  of  death  desired 
by  the  adversary,  —  will  not  condemn  him  as  guilty],  an  emphatic 
suggestion  of  the  opposite,  will  declare  him  righteous. 

Str.  VII.  has  a  synth.,  an  antith.,  and  a  syn.  couplet.  An  early 
editor,  not  discerning  that  the  author  had  intentionally  omitted 
the  couplet  p  for  strophical  reasons,  and  finding  the  alphabetical 
structure  defective,  sought  to  improve  it  by  inserting  34,  a  couplet 
with  p.  But  this  is  prosaic  in  style  and  an  interruption  of  the 
thought,  turning  it  into  an  exhortation,  suitable  enough  for 
liturgical  purposes,  but  not  suited  to  the  purpose  of  the  original 
author. —  Wait  on  Yahweh,  as  25s  2714,  and  keep  His  way  and 
He  will  exalt  thee  to  inherit  the  land,  as  v.  u- 22.  —  When  the  wicked 
are  cutoff,  as  v. ^,  thou  shall  see  it,  as  v.25-35. —  Couplet"!.  35-36.  / 
have  seen  the  wicked\  This  experience  is  the  antith.  of  that 
given  in  v.25.  —  terrifying,  so  (&,  taking  it  as  ptc,  cf.  io18,  which  is 
to  be  preferred  to  the  noun  of  Jif,  "as  a  terrible  one,"  or  the  para- 
phrase of  EV8.,  "in  great  power."  —  and  making  himself  bare~\, 
throwing  away  his  garments,  stripping  himself  to  display  his 
strength  and  threaten  combat,  cf.  Is.  5210;  or  as  Dr.  paraphrases, 
"  putting  forth  his  strength."  "  Flourishing,"  PBV. ;  "  spreading 
himself,"  AV.,  RV.,  are  conjectures  without  support  in  the  usage 
of  word.  <&,  "  lifting  himself"  up,  had  a  different  reading,  which 
is  followed  by  Du.  These  and  other  interpreters  are  misled  by 
connecting  this  last  ptc.  with  the  simile,  when  in  fact  it  belongs 
to  the  first  part  of  the  line ;  all  the  terms  of  which  set  forth  the 
terrifying  strength  of  the  wicked  enemy.  The  simile  gives  an 
additional  idea,  namely,  wealth  and  luxuriance,  and  in  this  the 
enemy  is  compared  to  a  luxuriant  cedar,  following  (3  in  the  pref- 
erence for  cedar  to  the  "  native  tree,"  "  tree  in  its  native  soil  .  .  . 
one  that  has  never  been  transplanted  or  disturbed,  that  has  there- 
fore struck  its  roots  deep,  and  shot  out  with  luxuriant  strength," 
Pe.  This  is  certainly  a  suitable  idea  of  3,  followed  by  RV.,  Dr., 
Kirk.,  al.,  although  there  is  no  support  for  this  rendering  in  the 
usage  of  the  Heb.  word.  The  rendering  "green  bay  tree,"  PBV., 
AV.,  has  no  authority  behind  it,  but  was  mere  conjecture.  —  And 
then  /passed  by,  so  (3,  Sb,  3,  PBV.,  which  is  best  suited  to  the  per- 
sonal experience  of  the  psalmist,  and  therefore  to  be  preferred  to 


332  PSALMS 

f^,  "  and  he  passed  away,"  in  death,  AV.,  or  as  RV.,  "  one  passed 
by,"  which  is  an  awkward  effort  to  preserve  the  text  of  ^  and  at 
the  same  time  get  the  meaning  demanded  by  the  context.  —  and 
lo,  he  ivas  no  more"],  as  v.10 ;  the  experience  emphasised  by,  —  and 
I  sought  him,  as  in  v.10,  but  he  could  not  be  found,  so  utterly  had 
he  perished  that  no  trace  of  him  was  left  behind.  —  Couplet  tT. 
37-38.  Watch  ||  and  see],  in  order  to  have  the  same  experience 
as  the  psalmist.  —  the  perfect,  the  upright],  intensified  into  the 
man  of  peace],  the  man  in  the  possession  of  peace  and  in  the 
enjoyment  of  it,  rather  than  the  peacemaker.  Such  a  man 
has  a  posterity  in  accordance  with  v.26  and  the  antith.  in  v.28;  for 
the  same  Hebrew  word  must  have  the  same  meaning  in  these 
antithetical  lines,  v.3738.  But  3  misled  EV8.  to  the  rendering, 
best  given  in  RV.,  "  the  latter  end  of  (that)  man  is  peace,"  in- 
troducing an  eschatological  ideal  alien  to  the  thought  of  the  entire 
Ps.,  which  emphasises,  after  D.,  peace  and  prosperity  in  this  life. 
It  also  destroys  the  fine  antith.  of  the  couplet,  and  cannot  easily 
be  reconciled  with  the  syntax  of  the  passage. — But  transgressors], 
another  term  for  the  wicked  of  the  Ps.  —  are  destroyed],  as  v.28, 

—  together],  in  one  common  disaster.  And  this  will  extend  to 
their  offspring  :  their  posterity  will  be  cut  off,  as  v.28.  —  Couplet  T\. 
39-40.  The  salvation],  summing  up  all  the  benefits  of  the  Ps., 
and  emphasised  in  the  several  syn.  vbs.,  help,  deliver,  save.  —  is 
from  Yahiueh],  as  v.23,  the  ordering  and  establishing  of  their  steps. 

—  He  is  their  refuge,  as  271  3ia5.  —  in  the  time  of  distress],  as  in 
time  of  evil,  v.19.  The  last  word  is  appropriately  :  they  have  sought 
refuge  in  Him. 

1.  nnnrr^N]  so  v.7- 8,  Hithp.  juss.  mn  (188).  Hithp.  heat  oneself  in  vexa- 
tion, elsw.  Pr.  2419,  which  has  same  1.  except  for  last  two  words,  for  which 
D^sna.  The  Ps.  is  original.  —  K-Jpn"1??].  <@  has  /xrj8^  =  Sni  required  by  meas- 
ure, for  Ss  without  conj.  would  have  Makkeph  in  both  cases.  J  [*Op]  vb. 
denom.  Pi.  be  envious  of;  c.  2  pers.  here,  as  73s  Gn.  301  (E)  3711  (J) ;  c.  s 
pers.  Ps.  10616.  f  Hiph.  provoke  to  ardour  of  jealousy  and  anger  Ps.  78s8 
Dt.  3216-21  Ez.  83(?).  —  nhn  >VV]  wrongdoers,  phr.  elsw.  Zp.  f- 13.  JnSip 
n.f.  (1)  deed  of  violence  and  injustice ;  rhyp  p  So/23,  cf.  Ho.  io9  2  S.  3s4  710; 
nSiyi  nmn  &n  Ps.  431;  y  ntry  jyi;  7  Sj?d  58s  1193  Jb.  36s3;  cn>  nSipa  Ps. 
1 25s;  (2)  injustice  of  speech  10742  Mai.  26  Is.  59s  and  WL;  (3)  injus- 
tice in  general  Pss.  64J  9216  Ho.  io13  2  Ch.  197  and  WL.  —  2.  ^r] 
causal,  dub.  dittog.  of  prep.  2.  —  NBn  pi  j  phr.  a.X.  f  P?.".  n.m.  elsw.  227  p*v 


psalm  xxxvu.  333 

Gn.  I30  93  (P);  mm  pi'  Nu.  22*  (E);  p"V  alone  Ex.  IO'5  (J)  Is.  156.— 
3.  njiDN  rijn]  syn.  with  pN  tf*V  v.9.  Most  ancient  Vrss.  give  njn  the  usual 
mng.  of  feed  as  a  flock;  but  many  moderns  think  of  n;-\  either  as  another 
stem  or  as  another  mng.  of  same  stem,  and  render  as  syn.  *|-n  follow  after, 
as  £  (nya),  De.,  Moll.,  Hu.3,  RV.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  cherish  BDB. ;  but  the  older 
view  is  preferable  (v.  v.11).  hjidk  adv.  ace.  m  confidence  (v.jj^).  Seeker, 
Horsley,  Ew.,  Ba.,  make  njiDK  =  security,  stability,  as  Is.  33s  =  nDN  Is.  39s, 
and  render  _/&?</  m  security.  <&  has  ^7rl  t<?  7rXoi/ry  cu/ttJs  or  rtfon  v.16,  so 
Hare,  Houb.,  Lowth.  —  4.  M^n>]  (so  v.11)  Hithp.  f  [«>]  vb.  Pu.  fo  daintily 
bredje.  62.  Hithp.  (1)  &?  of  dainty  habit  Dt.  2856;  (2)  fo>&?  exquisite  delight 
in;  Ys.3?1'11  c.  S;',  so  Is.  5814  6611  Jb.  2226  2710;  c.  a  rei  Is.  552;  (3)  wa£<? 
merry  over :  c.  Sy  Is.  57*.  —  5.  r\yv\  S^]  fully  written  for  Vj  from  V?j  re//, 
c.  S>';  cf.  <?^  Pr.  163,  both  hn  for  S;\  rpm  is  explan.  gl.,  not  in  other  passages; 
Ps.  22  certainly  oldest  of  the  three.  <&  has  nSa  uncover,  manifestly  wrong. 
—  vhy  ma]  as  3115,  possibly  with  meaning  bn  j>,  variation  of  a  naa  v.3. — 
N-irn]  emph.  —  6.  J  on**]  n.[m.]  only  pi.  midday,  noon:  as  time  of  prayer 
5518;  as  time  of  full  heat  916;  as  full  sunshine,  and  so  sim.  of  greatest  bless- 
ing, here  as  Is.  5810.  —  7.  SV»nnn]  Hithp.  wait  longingly;  a.X.  in  this  sense, 
cf.  Polel  Jb.  3514  (Elihu)  (v.  2(f),  prob.  both  a  different  vb.,  a  variation  of 
Sit  (j/25).  (&  has  luirevaov,  Aq.  airoirapadoKei,  3  expecta.  —  "MOTH-Sk]  as  v.1; 
we  should  either  prefix  1  to  get  separate  accent,  or  supply  D^JHDa  as  v.1,  cf.  v.8 
>nnS;  in  the  latter  case  we  should  insert,  from  v.1,  tupn  Sx. —  u;,Na]  is  un- 
necessary, except  for  measure.  —  8.  ^n]  Dr.  "only  to  do  evil."  <3  has  only 
&<tt€  =  Li.  ~|N  is  gl.  of  intensification.  —  "J.^l  Hiph.  inf.  cstr.  pjn  with  S, 
either  gerundive  as  interpreted  by  ~|X,  or  better  as  v.1- 8  at  the  doing  of  evil. 
It  is  not  necessary  with  Gr.  to  rd.  JHdS.  —  9.  fVns/J  Niph.  impf.  full  form, 
ma  (v.  /**)  be  cut  off  by  death  (from  land),  so  v.  *•*•*•*  js#  2920  Ho#  g* 
Na.  21  Pr.  222.  It  is  the  technical  phr.  of  II  and  P  c.  JO,  but  in  this  Ps.  it 
is  abs.  without  |C,  antith.  p«  B>"V.  —  nrn]  unnecessary  emph.,  impairs  the 
measure  and  is  a  gl.  — 10.  Ml>anrn]  )  consec.  Hithp.  pf.  pa  consider  dili- 
gently, attentively ;  c.  hy  only  here  and  Jb.  311;  c.  ace.  Pss.  10743  11995  Jb. 
3714 +>  c.  Sh  Is.  1416.  — 12.  csr]  devise  against,  plot ;  only  here  c.  S  pers., 
abs.  if  Pr.  3032,  sq.  inf.  Gn.  n6  Dt.  1919  Pr.  3114.  — 13.  iS  pnt"  vw]  cf.  **, 
on  whjch  it  depends.  — -idv  Na^]  phr.  1  S.  2610  Ez.  2i30-  34  Jb.  1820  Je.  5027-  31, 
only  here  in  \j/,  day  of  disaster  or  death.  — 14.  inns  ann]  phr.  emph.  in 
position,  cf.  Ez.  2133;  with  other  vbs.,  pnn  Ex.  159  +,  tfrv  Nu.  2223+. — 
|Va«l  ity  ?^Bn*?].  This  clause  is  a  gl. ;  it  makes  1.  overfull  and  destroys  the 
measure.  —  matoS]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  J  naB  vb.  slaughter,  butcher,  usually  of  ani- 
mals, but  here  poet,  of  men,  elsw.  La.  221  Ez.  21 15.  —  *nn  n«^]  phr.  a.X.,  cf. 
"\  -\t'\  Pr.  29'27;  elsw.  2^  ntfc  (711);  so  here  4§,  but  it  is  certainly  a  gl. — 
15.  Dmntfpi]  has  two  accents.  — 16.  F»Dno]  p  comparative  c.  J  pen  n.m. 
(1)  murmur,  roar :  of  multitude  of  people  42s  65s;  (2)  late  usage,  abun- 
dance, wealth,  Is.  605,  cf.  Ec.  5°;  so  usually  here,  cf.  <g  of  v.3,  but  the  context 
favours  (1).  — 18.  >r?]  so  3,  &  ;  <S  65oi>s  =  >a-n,  so  Gr.,  We.,  Che.,  but  prob. 
assimilated  to  I6.  —  DJp$n]  defective  pi.  a^ri  {/J2). —  nw]  unnecessary  gl. 


334  PSALMS 

—  20.  nw  "'ZTn]  phr.  a.\.,  but  idea  common  (v.  j8).  A  vb.  is  needed  for 
sense  as  well  as  for  measure,  prob.  imzr,  as  v.9-  22-  28-  84-  38,  omitted  by  error, 
because  of  similarity  to  -»p"o. —  ons  "NT?]  i?DB.,  Dr.,  =  like  the  glory  of  the 
pastures,  a.X.  in  this  sense,  dub.  <g  &fxa  t£  do^aa-dijvai  clvtovs  /ecu  v^wdrjvai, 
so  U,  taking  both  as  vbs.  inf.  D*»3  np-a;  Aq.,  VL,  take  D^3  =  lambs ;  2,  3, 
C(K)n3.  ~o  in  sense  of  pasture  is  dub.  here  and  Ps.  6514  Is.  3023,  elsw.  lamb. 
Burgess,  We.,  Ba.,  rd.  ipo  Is.  io16,  followed  by  D'*v  Burgess,  D^.3  t>z/<f«.y  We., 
Ba.  (g  gives  the  key,  np^S  inf.  cstr.  ^p"1  while  being  highly  esteemed,  and  C^3 
also  inf.  cstr.  (9^)  while  being  exalted  (y.  v.8),  prefix  "o  causal  as  in  previous 
1.,  omitted  by  error  because  of  following  prep.  2.  So  essentially  Houb.,  Hors- 
ley,  "  As  soon  as  they  are  in  honour  ;  as  soon  as  they  are  exalted."  —  21.  D^&K] 
Pi.  frequentative,  repay,  mng.  only  here  \j/ ;  for  other  mngs.  of  vb.  v.  22™.  — 
tr'W  ?M  Pnr«  «•*.,  cf.  v.26  1125.  For  pn  z\  ^2. —  22.  tJ  not  causal,  @,  3, 
and  most,  for  which  there  is  no  propriety  in  context;  but  asseveration. — 
23.  nm*c]  emph.,  p  of  source  of  direction.  —  M1N-]  t  Polal,  ^<?  established, 
elsw.  Ez.  2813,  both  dub.     Bi.,  Du.,  Polel  M^3  as  710,  but  unnecessary  change. 

—  pom  "u-n]  vb.  (1S20)  phr.a.X.;  but  vb.  c.  ncN  518,  nu;N  S3  1153  135°,  (3<)nai 
407  5i18-21.  — 24.  W  n^]  Hoph.  J  [>*)]  vb.  f  Hoph.  be  hurled,  fall;  elsw. 
Je.  2228  (unto  exile),  Jb.  411  (man,  at  sight  of  crocodile),  Pr.  1633  (cast  of 
lot).  —  DnS  tfp3D  i;nn]  expl.  gl.  making  1.  overfull.  —  26.  na"oS]  for  a  bless- 
ing {v.  j9)-,  that  is,  source  for  others,  as  217.  The  1.  lacks  a  word  ;  supply 
t\>t\>  vb.  as  usual  with  S  in  the  sense  of  become.  —  27.  >^D  *T)D]  phr.  of  WL. 
as  3415  (v.69);  also  its  complement  3^~nir\M  as  v.8  (v.47),  Makkeph  with 
two  accents.  —  28.  llDBfa  DTtyS].  This  cannot  belong  to  Str.  D,  which  is  already 
complete.  The  >  of  the  next  Str.  is  missing  in  ft?.  @B  has  els  rbv  alQva  <pv- 
Xax^coiTat  &fj.v/jx)i  iKSLK-rjOrjaovrai.  This  is  conflation,  (gx.  c.  a.  a.  R.  T.  T(\, 
dvonoi,  so  "B.  As  Avo/j.01  =  D,Ln;*,  this  might  be  a  misinterpretation  of  u^r;, 
but  a  word  is  missing  in  any  case.  It  is  prob.  that  the  original  read  both 
words  dSij?  D,Ln",  one  of  which  having  been  omitted  by  txt.  err.,  <g  and  |Q 
taking  different  ones ;  so  Lowth.,  Ba.,  Dr.,  Du.  The  s  of  ty  would  then  be 
a  subsequent  addition,  f  ^?  n.m.  a.X.  \J/,  but  Zp.  35  Jb.  1821  2j"  2911  313. 
•inrirj  f^  Niph.  pf.  3  pi.  pause  ;  but  rd.  after  (g  i^crj  as  v.38.  So  most  mod- 
erns. X  ["TOtf]  vb.  Niph.  &?  destroyed ;  elsw.  v.88  8311  92s.  Hiph.  destroy 
io623-  M  14520.  —  30.  J  •"iiDpn]  n.f.  wisdom  :  in  ^  only  (1)  skill,  of  sailors  10727; 
(2)  wisdom, prudence,  in  religious  affairs,  here  as  518  9012;  (3)  wisdom,  ethi- 
cal and  religious:   (a)  of  God,  as  a  divine  attribute  or  energy,  10424,  cf.  Je. 

I012_5I15.     (£)   0f  man    ps#   ujM     cf.    pr.    I5%    Jb>   2828.     ||    p^p    ps.  49*.  _ 

31.  nS]  ^,  but  <g  kSi  required  for  measure.  — 32.  VJVDnS]  Hiph.  inf.  sf.  3  *g. 
/«/  to  aW/*,  kill,  as  59*  (».  /714).  A  word  is  missing,  probably  rrn  inf.  ahs. 
of  the  phr.  to  put  to  a  violent  death,  the  penalty  as  suggested  by  the  judgment 
of  following  context.  —  34.  rnr>]  Pi.  imv.  (2J3),  c.  Sn  as  2714.  This  1.  is  defec- 
tive by  two  words.     p"-ix  is  suggested  by  antith.  yvn,  but  prob.  the  v.  is  a  gl. 

—  35.  X  rT?]  acU.  awe-inspiring,  terror-striking,  ruthless;  of  formidable 
adversaries  elsw.  54s  8614;  but  (g  virepvxf/ov/jievov,  U  super ex altalum,  take 
it  as  ptc,  which  is  better  suited  to  the  context,  striking  xvith  awe,  as  io18 


psalm  xxxviii.  335 

Is.  4712. —  rrcnc]  Hithp.  ptc.  %  [,TV]  vb.  Qal  lay  bare  foundations  Ps.  iyf- 7, 
life  in  death  1418.  f  Hithp.  elsw.  La.  421  wa^  oneself  naked,  of  drunken 
woman.  The  word  here  is  dub.  (3  £ircup6/j.evov  implies  another  word  ;  Du. 
suggests  n^j?nn  lifting  himself  ttp,  form  elsw.  only  Je.  513  and  dub.  there;  Gr. 
denom.  nSy  leaf  foliage,  but  not  in  Bibl.  Heb.;  3  fortissimum  is  also  dub., 
although  possible  in  implying  what  Dr.  suggests,  putting  forth  his  strength, 
laying  it  bare  ;  none  of  the  other  suggestions  are  so  good  as  this.  Cf.  ynr  ijtrn 
Is.  5210  as  a  warrior  strips  himself  for  battle.  —  Jrnrij]  n.m.  one  rising  from 
the  soil,  native ;  common  in  OT.,  not  in  \p.  The  word  here  is  usually  inter- 
preted of  native  tree,  after  3,  3T,  but  this  dub.;  &,  F,  Houb.,  Dy.,  Gr.,  Ba., 
Du.,  rd.  ns  cedar.  —  Jp5n]  adj.,  luxuriant,  fresh  :  of  trees  nn  5210,  ifna 
Ho.  149;  of  persons  Ps.  9215  (fig.  as  trees);  of  oil  9211;  here  (3  has  JU3*?,  so 
Dy.,  Hi.,  Gr.,  Hu.3,  Ba.,  Kau.,  Du.;  but  as  Dr.,  We.,  Kirk.,  pjn  is  appropri- 
ate to  HH.  At  the  same  time  these  nouns  do  not  suit  the  ptc.  If  the  image 
of  the  cedar  is  retained,  the  two  ptcs.  go  together  as  making  up  image  of 
warrior,  and  the  cedar  is  a  separate  image. — 36.  "fav^]  Qal  impf.  iconsec.= 
and  then,  sequence  in  time  ;  but  (&,  B,  U,  3,  Houb.,  Horsley,  Kenn.,  Ba., 
Du.,  Dr.,  Che.,  najNO,  which  is  certainly  correct. — 37.  Jon]  adj.  for  noun, 
elsw.  64s,  cf.  Jb.  i1  820  920-  21-  22  Pr.  2910.  —  J  nnnx]  as  v.38,  posterity,  so  10913; 
thus  Ba.,  Dr.  (||  jnr),  but  Du.  future,  latter  end,  as  7317  Dt.  32s0- 29;  elsw.  f 
of  place  1399.  —  39.  njntfn]  (3317),  1  of  ^  error,  not  in  0,  F,  &,  jf ;  n  Str. 
begins  here.  —  40.  Dfl^fiM]  1  consec.  Pi.  impf.;  repeated  in  f§  without  1,  but 
not  in  3  ;  is  gl.  or  variant.  —  DJ£tf"l]  Hiph.  impf.  (j8),  1  coord,  after  1  con- 
sec,  ungrammatical  and  inconsistent ;  4§,  3,  all  futures  and  1  coords.,  most 
probable.  —  m  ion  >d]  as  212. 


PSALM   XXXVIII.,  5  str.  63. 

Ps.  38  is  a  Lamentation  :  (1)  Israel  complains  of  great  sufferings 
of  body  (v.7-9)  ;  discouragement  and  abandonment  by  friends  (v.10"12)  j 
enemies  craftily  seeking  his  ruin,  while  he  is  compelled  to  remain 
silent  (v.13-15).  His  only  hope  is  in  Yahweh  (v.1<M8),  therefore  the 
final  petition  for  salvation  from  his  unprincipled  enemies,  who 
repay  him  evil  for  good  (v.20"23).  Later  additions  connect  the 
suffering  with  sin,  and  make  it  into  a  Penitential  Ps.  (v.1-6 19). 

T  AM  bent,  I  am  bowed  down  exceedingly ; 

I  go  about  in  black  all  the  day. 

Yea,  my  loins  are  full  of  that  which  is  contemned ; 

And  there  is  no  soundness  in  my  flesh. 

I  am  benumbed  and  crushed  exceedingly ; 

I  growl  with  the  growling  of  a  lion. 
A  LL  my  desire  is  before  Thee, 

And  my  groaning  is  not  hid  from  Thee. 


336  PSALMS 

My  heart  in  a  ferment  forsaketh  me, 

And  the  light  of  mine  eyes  is  not  with  me. 

Lovers  and  friends  are  at  a  distance  from  me, 

And  my  neighbours  stand  afar  off. 
HTHEY  also  that  seek  my  life  lay  snares. 

Of  my  distress  they  speak,  of  ruin  ; 

And  utter  deceits  all  the  day. 

But  I  am  like  a  deaf  man  that  heareth  not, 

And  as  a  dumb  man  that  openeth  not  his  mouth, 

And  in  whose  mouth  are  no  arguments. 
pOR  in  Thee,  Yahweh,  I  hope; 

Thou  wilt  answer,  O  my  God ; 

Lest  (mine  enemies)  rejoice  over  me, 

When  my  foot  is  moved,  do  great  things  against  me: 

For  I  am  ready  for  limping, 

And  my  sorrow  is  continually  before  me. 
CINCE  mine  enemies  (without  cause)  are  numerous, 

And  they  are  many  that  hate  me  lyingly, 

And  are  repaying  me  evil  for  good ; 

Forsake  me  not,  Yahweh ; 

O  my  God,  be  not  far  from  me ; 

O  haste  to  my  help,  my  Salvation. 

Ps.  38  was  inQ  and  then  in  fH  {v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31).  It  was  finally  assigned 
for  the  mar*  of  the  nnj^  {v.  Intr.  §  39).  @  has  els  dydfxvrja-tv  irepi  <ra#3drou, 
still  more  specifically  defining  the  liturgical  use  as  for  the  sabbath.  It  is  the 
third  of  the  seven  Penitential  Pss.  But  this  is  entirely  due  to  glosses:  v.'J 
from  Ps.  62;  v.4-6  from  Is.  i6;  v.8,  cf.  Jb.  64;  v.5,  cf.  4013;  v.19,  cf.  32s. 
Removing  these  glosses,  the  Ps.  is  a  complaint  to  Yahweh  because  of  perils 
from  cruel  and  unscrupulous  foes,  and  is  a  prayer  for  salvation.  V.8  is  depend- 
ent on  Is.  I6;  v.12  on  Ps.  8819;  v.14,  cf.  Is.  53?;  v.21,  cf.  Ps.  3512;  v.22,  cf. 
35s2;  v.23,  cf.  706.  There  are  an  unusual  number  of  a.X. :  tjidj  v.9;  "vnnc 
v.11,  but  probably  error  for  "\Dlcn  La.  I20  211;  >ry  iin  v.11,  but  cf.  47.  There 
are  several  unusual  words  and  phrs.  :  wpj  v.13,  10911,  but  error  for  rypy; 
Sr\  bid  v.17,  Dt.  32s6  Ps.  9418;  jrVj  v.18,  3515  Je.  2010;  2x2*2  v.18,  as  3210  6927. 
There  is  no  evidence  of  late  date,  apart  from  glosses.  The  Ps.  is  the  com- 
plaint of  the  afflicted  community  of  the  Restoration,  before  Nehemiah. 

The  original  Ps.  has  prefixed  to  it  a  gloss  of  five  pentameters, 
attributing  the  sufferings  to  divine  discipline  because  of  sin. 

Yahweh,  correct  me  not  in  Thy  wrath,  nor  in  Thy  heat  chasten  me ; 
For  Thine  arrows  are  gone  down  into  me,  and  Thy  hand  resteth  upon  me; 
There  is  no  soundness  in  my  flesh,  because  of  Thine  indignation  ; 
There  is  no  wholeness  in  my  bones,  because  of  my  sin. 
My  wounds  stink,  they  fester,  because  of  my  folly. 


psalm  xxxviii.  337 

2  is  a  loose  citation  from  62.  —  3.  For  Thine  arrows'],  Yahweh's 
visitation,  as  Jb.  64, —  are  gone  down  into  me],  have  penetrated 
my  flesh  and  so  gone  deep  into  my  body,  causing  me  intense  pain 
and  suffering.  —  Thy  hand  resteth  upon  me],  by  elision  of  the  last 
letter  of  the  Hebrew  word,  which  probably  originated  from  dittog- 
raphy,  getting  thus  a  syn.  and  common  conception ;  whereas  the 
repetition  of  the  same  word  in  the  original  text  is  not  only  tauto- 
logical, but  is  inappropriate  to  the  use  of  the  hand  of  Yahweh,  and 
compels  the  Vrss.  to  resort  to  variations  in  paraphrase,  without 
any  sort  of  justification  in  Heb.  usage.  —  4,  6  are  based  upon 
Is.  i6  in  their  description  of  the  wounds  resulting  from  the  divine 
scourging. —  There  is  no  soundness  in  my  flesh],  given  again  v.86, 
where,  however,  it  is  without  the  reason  given  here,  although  it 
probably  induced  the  fuller  description  here.  This,  then,  has  as 
its  syn. :  there  is  no  wholeness  in  my  bones,  which  is  still  further 
explained  by,  —  my  ivounds  stink  ||  they  fester;  they  are  become 
running  sores,  so  foul  by  mortification  that  they  are  offensive  to 
the  person  himself  and  to  all  who  come  near  him.  The  reason 
for  this  state  of  things  is  given  in  three  parallel  clauses  :  because 
of  Thine  indignation],  God's  hands  and  arrows,  moved  by  His 
anger  and  indignation  and  wrath,  have  brought  about  this  serious 
situation  —  because  of  my  sin  ||  of  my  folly] ,  the  reason  on  the 
human  side.  Their  sin  and  folly  have  provoked  the  divine  wrath 
and  indignation  against  His  people.  —  5.  A  later  scribe  inserts 
before  the  last  two  lines  a  tetrameter  couplet  describing  the  sin 
from  an  entirely  different  point  of  view.  This  must  have  ccme 
from  a  marginal  statement,  because  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  it 
could  have  been  inserted  in  this  place,  except  by  one  who  was 
inattentive  to  the  meaning  of  what  he  was  copying.  This  couplet 
conceives  of  iniquities  as  a  flood  of  waters  which  have  suddenly 
overwhelmed  the  man  and  are  gone  over  his  head,  so  that  he  is 
drowning  in  them,  cf.  18s-6  69s- 16;  and  also  as  a  heavy  burden,  too 
heavy  for  him,  from  the  point  of  view  that  sin  rests  upon  the 
sinner  as  an  external  load  which  has  to  be  lifted  and  carried 
away  from  him,  in  order  that  he  may  be  rid  of  it ;  a  conception 
upon  which  the  OT.  doctrine  of  forgiveness  rests.  This  gloss 
makes  the  Ps.  appropriate  for  penitence,  especially  to  the  nation 
in  its  appointed  seasons  of  repentance. 


338  PSALMS 

Str.  I.,  in  three  synth.  couplets,  describes  a  terrible  condition  of 
suffering,  which  may  have  been  individual,  but  more  probably  was 
national,  as  in  so  many  other  Pss.  of  this  oeriod.  —  7.7  am  bent  || 
bowed  down],  by  a  weight  of  care,  anxiety,  and  suffering,  and  this, 
exceedingly,  to  the  utmost  degree  of  intensity. — I  go  about  in  black], 
as  a  mourner,  lamenting  the  loss  of  dear  friends,  and  especially 
of  children,  cf.  3514;  probably  implying  just  such  bereavements  at 
this  time  of  many  of  the  people,  because  of  the  enemies  described 
in  the  third  Str.  This  continues,  —  all  the  day,  because  of  the 
prolongation  of  these  bereavements.  —  8.  Yea],  intensive,  con- 
tinuation of  the  description  ;  and  not  for,  as  EV8.,  which  interpret 
the  description  without  sufficient  reason.  —  my  loins'],  as  the  seat 
of  strength  ||  my  flesh,  to  emphasise  the  physical  side  of  the  suffer- 
ing, —  are  full  of  that  which  is  contemned],  regarded  as  ignomini- 
ous, disgraceful,  thinking,  probably,  of  physical  weakness  in  the 
seat  of  strength,  which  is  in  general  accord  with  the  ancient  Vrss., 
and  is  more  suited  to  the  parall.  —  there  is  no  soundness],  referring 
to  physical  exhaustion  and  soreness  of  the  flesh  from  suffering. 
Many  moderns,  because  of  the  dependence  on  Is.  i6,  especially  in 
v.4"6,  think  of  another  and  similar  verb,  and  so  of  the  loins  as  full 
of  "  burning,"  the  fever  of  the  festering  wounds.  But  the  reference 
to  such  wounds  is  in  the  gloss,  and  not  in  the  original  Ps. ;  and 
there  is  nothing  in  the  immediate  context  to  suggest  divine  dis- 
cipline. Indeed,  the  description  moves  in  somewhat  different 
lines.  —  9.  I  am  benumbed  and  crushed].  Strength  has  so  de- 
parted from  him  that  he  has  become,  as  it  were,  paralysed  and 
incapable  of  effort;  his  energy  and  vital  power  have  been 
crushed,  and  this  has,  as  in  v.7,  become  intense  —  exceedingly. 
He  is  altogether  helpless,  and  the  only  thing  he  can  do  is  to 
growl,  as  an  animal,  in  a  state  of  helpless  pain,  —  with  the 
growling  of  a  lion],  so,  by  an  easy  addition  of  a  single  letter, 
which  has  apparently  fallen  off  the  Heb.  word,  because  of 
assimilation  to  v.lla.  The  word  "  heart  "  is  incongruous  with 
"growling,"  and  the  various  Vrss.  based  upon  it  are  necessarily 
paraphrases.  "  Disquietness  of  heart,"  EVB.,  is  weak  and  unjus- 
tifiable. This  Str.  has  only  to  do  with  the  physical  frame ;  the 
more  internal  suffering  of  heart  appears  as  characteristic  of  the 
second  Str. 


psalm  xxxviii.  339 

Str.  II.  also  has  three  couplets  only  describing  the  sufferings 
with  reference  to  the  soul.  —  10.  All  my  desire],  for  relief,  as  is 
evident  from  the  context  ||  my  groaning.  —  is  before  Thee],  in  Thy 
sight,  altogether  seen  and  known  ||  is  not  hid  from  Thee.  This  is 
a  strong  appeal  to  Yahweh's  knowledge  of  the  terrible  situation 
of  His  people,  in  order  to  a  continuation  of  the  description. 
There  is,  indeed,  a  sort  of  introverted  parall.  between  the  Strs. 
in  that  the  growling,  which  closes  the  previous  Str.,  begins  this 
Str.  with  its  syn.,  groaning.  — 11.  My  heart  in  a  ferment],  so 
by  an  easy  change  of  Heb.  text,  after  La.  i20  au,  to  avoid  an  un- 
justifiable interpretation  of  the  Heb.  word  used  in  the  text,  which 
is  incongruous  with  its  noun  in  any  meaning  to  be  found  else- 
where. The  various  renderings  proposed  :  "  panteth,"  PBV.,  AV., 
JPSV.,  "throbbeth,"  RV.,  Kirk.,  Dr., "  palpitates,"  ^DB.,  are  purely 
conjectural. — forsaketh  me],  in  extreme  discouragement,  so  that 
I  have  no  heart  any  more.  —  And  the  light  of  mine  eyes],  the  light 
that  illumines  the  eyes,  enabling  them  to  see  what  is  to  be  done, 
giving  confidence  and  courage.  —  is  not  with  me],  is  no  longer 
in  my  possession,  I  am  destitute  of  it.  — 12.  Lovers  and  friends 
||  my  neighbours],  those  upon  whom  I  could  ordinarily  rely  for 
sympathy  and  aid.  —  are,  or  remain  at  a  distance  from  me  ||  stand 
afar  off].     They  have,  in  fact,  abandoned  him  to  his  lot. 

Str.  III.  now  brings  the  enemies  into  view,  who  were  in  the 
background  of  the  previous  Strs.,  yet  the  real  cause  of  the  suffer- 
ings and  terrible  situation.  They  are  described,  13,  as  they  that 
seek  my  life].  They  were  mortal  enemies.  A  gloss  duplicates  it 
in  "  they  that  seek  my  hurt,"  which,  however,  makes  the  measure 
overfull.  The  activity  of  these  enemies  is  described  in  a  synth. 
triplet,  and  the  inability  of  the  people  to  defend  themselves  in  an 
anti-triplet.  The  enemies  lay  snares],  cf.  917.  —  Of  my  distress 
{they  speak)  of  ruin  ||  utter  deceits].  All  their  activity  of  speech  is 
treacherous,  seeking  in  every  way  to  destroy  the  life  of  the  people 
of  God. — 14-15.  The  people  have  become  so  weak  and  paralysed, 
as  set  forth  in  the  previous  Strs.,  that  they  are  not  only  incapable  of 
resistance,  but  they  are  incapable  of  speaking  in  their  own  defence. 
—  /  am  like  a  deaf  man  ||  as  a  dumb  man],  not  that  they  are 
altogether  unconscious  of  the  machinations  of  the  enemy,  but  that 
their  senses  are  so  benumbed  and  paralysed,  with  the  other  parts 


340  PSALMS 

of  their  bodies,  that  they  must  behave  as  one  that  hcareth  no/]. 
This  is  repeated  in  a  variant  gloss,  "  I  am  like  a  deaf  man  that 
heareth  not,"  making  the  Str.  overfull.  —  that  openeth  not  his 
mouth] ,  which  is  explained  in  the  climax  :  in  whose  mouth  are  no 
arguments],  that  is,  in  reply,  in  defence  against  calumnies  and 
false  accusations.  The  author  probably  had  in  mind  the  suffering 
servant  of  Yahvveh  of  Is.  537. 

Str.  IV.,  in  three  synth.  couplets,  resumes  the  description  of 
sufferings,  in  order  to  show  that  the  only  hope  is  in  God,  to  whom 
the  plea  is  made  for  salvation.  — 16.  For  in  Thee],  emphatic, 
Thee  only,  Yahweh  ||  my  God,  emphasised  by  the  gloss,  "  O 
Lord."  —  I  hope],  in  a  waiting  attitude,  looking  for  and  expecting 
help  ;  and  therefore  with  its  appropriate  result :  Thou  wilt  answer], 
not  with  words,  which  were  hardly  expected,  but  with  deeds  of 
salvation.  — 17.  The  motive  for  this  on  the  negative  side  was: 
lest  they  rejoice  over  me.  The  ancient  texts  prefix,  "  For  I  said," 
at  the  expense  of  the  measure,  in  order  to  put  the  subsequent 
context  as  a  plea  in  the  mouth  of  the  psalmist.  (©  retains  the 
subject  enemies,  omitted  by  J^,  required  by  context.  —  do  great 
things  against  me],  as  35^  5513;  taking  advantage  of  their  oppor- 
tunity, when  the  people  were  in  grave  trouble.  —  when  my  foot  is 
moved],  as  9418  Dt.  32^,  and  so  unstable,  insecure.  — 18.  For  I 
am  ready  for  limping],  about  to  limp  because  of  injury  to  the 
knee ;  and  so  unable  to  stand  firm  in  resistance,  not  to  speak  of 
advance  to  attack.  This  is  all  summed  up  in  the  last  line  of  the 
Str. :  and  my  sorrow  is  continually  befoi-e  me] .  I  cannot  escape 
it,  and  cannot  see  or  think  of  anything  else.  — 19.  A  later  editor, 
probably  the  same  as  the  one  who  prefixed  v.2"*,  inserted  here  a 
confession  of  sin,  unsuited  to  the  context,  which  does  not  suggest 
any  such  thing  by  any  sort  of  implication.  This  was  in  order  to 
adapt  the  Ps.  to  public  worship  by  connecting  the  sufferings  with 
sin,  and  to  suggest  that  their  removal  could  come  only  through 
confession  and  penitence.  —  For  mine  iniquity  I  declare],  to  Yah- 
weh, cf.  335  Is.  39.  —  I  am  anxious],  in  a  state  of  anxiety  which 
involves  a  dread  of  the  consequences.  —  By  reason  of  my  sin]. 
There  is  no  suggestion  of  what  the  sin  might  be.  It  is  entirely 
a  general  statement.  The  Ps.  is  an  assertion  of  the  innocence 
and  guiltlessness  of  the  people  over  against  their  enemies.     But 


PSALM   XXXVIII.  34I 

this  would  not  be  thought  of  by  the  glossator,  who  is  moved  by 
general  and  accepted  principles  in  the  worship  of  his  own  time. 

Str.  V.  is  essentially  a  petition  for  salvation,  beginning  with  a 
reason  in  a  tristich,  put  in  a  circumstantial  clause.  —  20-21.  Since 
mine  enemies  are  nu??ierous  ||  are  many'].  These  are  public  and 
not  private  enemies,  cf.  3s"3.  They  are  described  in  $fy,  i&,  and 
all  ancient  texts  as  being  "alive  "  or  "lively";  but  most  recent 
scholars  think  this  was  an  error  for  the  Heb.  word  of  similar 
letters  :  without  cause,  cf.  357  ||  hate  me  lyingly\,  that  is,  in  their 
hatred  telling  lies,  bearing  false  witness  ||  repaying  me  evil  for  good, 
cf.  3512.  This  latter  is  emphasised  in  a  gloss,  "  They  are  my  ad- 
versaries because  of  my  pursuing  good,"  so  EV8.,  which  is  explained 
by  (3  as  "  righteousness,"  all  giving  the  reason  of  the  persecution  ; 
which  is  introducing  a  later  situation  into  this  Ps.  —  22-23.  The 
final  petition  is  now  given  in  a  tristich  antith.  to  the  previous  one. 
Forsake  me  not  ||  be  not  afar  from  me  ||  O  haste  to  my  help]. 
Each  one  of  these  vbs.  is  emphasised  by  a  divine  name  :  Yahweh 
||  O  my  God,  and  the  climax,  my  Salvation.  A  later  glossator, 
not  realising  this  significant  climax,  inserts,  "  O  Lord,"  and  thus 
makes  a  difficulty  in  measure  and  construction. 

2.  This  v.  is  cited  loosely  from  62.  The  second  Vn  was  either  omitted  by 
prosaic  scribe  as  unnecessary,  or  the  measure  is  pentameter  and  the  1.  a  gl. 
The  only  other  change  is  the  use  of  *\xp  for  the  earlier  »)K.  —  X  P|?P]  n.m. 
wrath;  elsvv.  \f/,  10211;  only  in  P  of  Hex.  and  Dt.  2927;  not  in  Is.i,  but  Je. 
io10  +  3  t.  Je.,  Is.  342  548  6010  Zc.  I2- 15  712  +.  —  3.  T?n]  emph.  thine  arrows, 
for  God's  visitation  of  wrath,  as  Jb.  64;  similar  idea,  but  so  differently  ex- 
pressed that  no  dependence  is  evident.  —  -mm]  Niph.  pf.;  cf.  Pi.  1835  = 
2  S.  22%  of  the  bow  pressed  by  the  arms  (but  dub.),  Ps.  6511  of  pressing  down 
furrows  of  land.  Niph.  a.X.  penetrate,  i?DB.  dub.;  Du.  rds.  Qal  <nqi  descend 
into,  cf.  Pr.  1710,  which  is  probable;  so  v.36  rrurn  Qal  impf.  1  consec,  subj. 
hand  of  Yahweh.  But  these  are  differently  translated  in  <g,  heira-yyaav  for 
first,  but  iwearripLaas,  U  confirmasti,  for  second.  Du.  suggests  naan  as  32*, 
but  Gr.  nm.T,  so  Che.  This  Hiph.  of  mj  with  *r,  cf.  Ec.  718;  but  Qal  as  njni 
Is.  2510  is  preferable  here.  The  final  n  probably  originated  from  assimilation 
to  previous  vb.  —  4,6.  V.4  has  two  pentameters  and  v.6  one  pentameter. 
These  three  lines  are  based  on  Is.  I6  and  are  glosses.  Each  end  in  the  same 
way,  -pjn  *>jde,  ">nNt3n  >)dv,  tiSin  \jod.  *>jdd  (9^).  —  J  r^Six]  n.f.  folly;  espe- 
cially guilty,  here  as  69s,  elsw.  Pr.  23  t.  —  nt'33  ddd  px]  same  as  v.86;  no 
reason  for  repetition,  f  Dhp  n.m.  soundness;  elsw.  Is.  I6. — uhtf  ps]  syn. 
expression,     vhti  health  ;  cf.  adj.  D^  Gn.  3318,  vb.  Jb.  9*.  —  Nt^Han]  Hiph. 


342  PSALMS 

pf.  J  vki  vb.  Hiph.  emit  a  stinking  odour  ;  same  idea  as  Is.  I6,  but  varied 
expression;  not  elsw.  ^,  but  cf.  Ex.  1624  1  S.  2712. —  ipcj]  Niph.  pf.  f  ppn 
vb.  Niph.  fester ;  a.X.  in  this  sense  ;  but  rot  Zc.  I412- 12  of  plague,  and  of 
heavens  mouldering  away  Is.  34*,  pining  away  in  divine  punishment  Ez.  417 
2423  33io  lv>  2639.  39.  Hiph.  Zc.  1412.  —  t  ™an]  from  Is.  I6  stripes,  wounds  : 
elsw.  Gn.  423  Ex.  212525  Pr.  2030  Is.  53s.  — 5.  ^ni  nay  tji;']  phr.  a.X.,  but 
idea  of  peril  by  drowning  69s- 16_17,  so  also  i85-6.  ]v;  (/82^),  for  great  guilt 
v,  4013.  —  J  HfrD]  n.m.  burden;  only  here  of  iniquities,  but  idea  familiar  in 
mng.  of  vb.  KtW  remove  sin,  conceived  as  a  burden  ;  noun  common  elsw.  for 
real  burdens  as  carried  by  men  or  animals,  but  not  in  \ft. —  J  "or]  adj.  heavy  ; 
a.X.  in  \p,  but  common  elsw.  —  na:r]  Qal  impf.  The  adj.  is  only  needed  for 
tetrameter.  It  might  have  originated  from  dittog.  But  this  v.  looks  like  two 
tetrameters,  in  which  case  it  is  a  gl.  —  7.  WW]  Niph.  pf.  %  mp  Niph.  be  bent, 
bowed  down ;  so  Is.  213  ||  ^naj,  of  aS  Pr.  128.  —  8.  t]  not  causal,  but  inten- 
sive, yea.  —  t  "???.]  n.m.  (1)  loins  Jb.  1527  Lv.  3*- 10- 15  49  7*,  so  here  ||  -ifra,  cf. 
V.4j  @  t)  ^\>xh  fwv  prob.  depends  upon  *?aD  =  ^air  =  understanding;  (2)  confi- 
dence Pss.  4914  787  Pr.  32°  Jb.  814  3124  Ec.  725.  —  nS,^]  Niph.  ptc.  f  rbp  vb.  roast, 
i>DB.,  here  burning,  a.X.,  so  De.,  Dr.,  Du.,  Kirk.,  al.,  the  burning  of  feverish 
wounds,  based  on  Is.  I6.  The  vb.  is  used  in  Qal  Je.  2922  Lv.  214  Jos.  511  (P) ; 
but  denom.  »Sp  and  improb.  here.  @,  U,  Aq.,  2,  3,  all  take  it  as  Is.  3s  1614, 
Niph.  \  rhp  be  lightly  esteemed.  Cf.  \  pS|5  n.m.  Ps.  8317  Je.  4612  Ho.  47- 18  Hb. 
216,  so  Ba.  This  is  most  probable.  — 9.  \">ibj]  a.X.  Niph.  pf.  t  [Jis]  vb.  Qal, 
grow  numb :  of  hand  77s  (dub.);  of  aS  Gn.  4525,  of  Thorah  Hb.  I4  be  ineffec- 
tive. Niph.  be  benumbed:  of  person  Ps.jc?9  (prob.  also  8816  rmsN  for  f^  rmDK 
a.X.).  — »n'3"Ui]  1  coord.,  Niph.  pf.  nai  fNiph.  be  crushed:  of  physical  dis- 
tress here,  of  contrition  5119;  v.  1010. — t[n^^]  n.f.  usually  interpreted  as 
groaning,  but  only  here  in  this  sense  (yet  cf.  vb.  in  Pr.  511  Ez.  24s3) ;  elsw. 
growling,  Is.  530  of  sea  as  lion,  so  rd.  here  koS  for  *aS  (n  before  ^in  has 
fallen  off),  as  Hi.,  Ols.,  Gr.,  Ba.,  Du.,  Kau.  — 10.  »nn]  not  in  (3,  is  a  gl.  as 
1.  is  sufficiently  long  without  it.  — 11.  nmnD]  a.X.  Pilp.  -inD  palpitates,  BDB., 
but  Qal  does  not  justify  this  rendering  ;  improb.,  rd.  after  Gr.  as  in  La.  I20 
211  nnnnn  Pe'al'al  of  ncn,  there  of  bowels,  in  ferment  of  distress  (||  aS).  The 
1.  is  too  long ;  either  aV  is  inserted  for  explanation,  or  m  is  gl.,  prob.  the 
latter. — *rp  -nn]  phr.  a.X.,  but  cf.  D"JD  -\in  light  of  face,  of  bright,  cheerful 
face  Jb.  2924,  v.  41.  —  an-^j]  not  in  <f§,  is  gl. ;  makes  1.  too  long.  —  "nx  pNJ 
phr.  a.X.  in  \p,  but  p«  with  •?  and  a  frequent.  — 12.  nsp  *>yjj  "IJJD]  (5  has  ^ 
ivavrlas  /xov  Tjyyi<rav  teal  icT^aav,  so  U,  J5  ;  this  implies  a  text  HDJP  v^jj  njjD. 
But  only  one  word  of  these  is  needed  to  complete  the  1.  HDJP  has  been  in- 
serted as  prosaic  explanation  ||  HDJJ  v.126;  it  is  tautological  and  improbable 
for  a  poetic  writer.  This  leaves  of  $$  >}})}  "\3}V,  of  @  v?)i  njJD;  both  ^'jj 
of  |$  and  i-'jj  of  <S>  are  dittog.  The  original  was  prob.  njjo  #/rt  distance  from 
me,  as  io5,  ||  p'rnn  io1  1392.  —  J  jy j]  n.m.  j/ro/k,  plague,  as  3911  8933  9110 
Is-  538-  — 13-  ^p^;:]  Pi-  impf-  ^DB.  j/r»^  a/,  only  here  and  10911  (of  cred- 
itor, c.  *■>).  But  obj.  is  lacking  ;  cf.  Hithp.  c.  *tf|»a  strike  at  my  life  I  S.  289. 
This  is  favoured  by  <S,  3.     But  most  moderns,  Bu.,  Dr.,  Ba.,  Du.,  Pi.  of  »>pj, 


psalm  xxxviii.  343 

lay  snares,  cf.  B>pi  (v.  g17).  Bu.  thinks  the  form  denominative.  This  idea  is 
better  suited  to  the  context.  There  is  evidently  an  ancient  corruption  of  the 
text,  for  (3  supports  f$.  i  consec.  is  improb.;  rd.  1  conjunctive.  *pjn  »«hl1 
is  suspicious  immediately  after  <£;DJ  '#p3B,  the  latter  a  common  expression, 
the  former  only  Pr.  n27  and  late.  It  is  a  gl,  so  Ba.  *njn  (z\  2112)  is  in  ^ 
attached  to  Uii'n  354  418  1403  or  fon  4015  =  703,  vpi  Jils-  24. —  nun  nan]  we 
should  read  •1-1:111  II  1jrp  (/2)«  ,n>?")  was  Put  before  the  vb.  for  emphasis,  as 
||  D1D10.     This  misled  copyist  to  insert  ptc.  *Bh*i,  which  made  all  the  mischief. 

—  nun]  engulfing  rtiin,  destruction,  v.  310,  so  5512;  here  as  obj.  "0"ij  cf.  52* 
obj.  3&>n.  The  subj.  cannot  be  >njn  >emi,  for  that  makes  the  1.  too  long  ; 
besides,  subj.  is  evident  in  previous  1.     Rd.  nun  na*v  >njn. — 14.  ^ni]  emph. 

—  J7DPN  n1?]  rel.  clause.  —  Jl^nn]  adj.  deaf,  as  585,  |JoV«  adj.  dumb;  elsw. 
Ex.  411  Is.  356  5610  Hb.  23  Pr.  318.  —  vd  nnc  n1?]  as  in  Is.  537,  which  is  in 
mind  of  author.  — 15.  yD2>  vh  tj>n  e»N3  ^n*o]  is  dittog.  of  v.  14",  an  awk- 
ward, prosaic  sentence. —  n'^n^n]  pi.  fnns^n  n.f.  t(0  argument,  impeach- 
ment, here  as  Jb.  136  23*  Hb.  21;  (2)  correction,  rebuke  Pss.  3912  7314  Pr.  2916 
Ez.  515  2517.  — 16.  ^n*?H  ^jin]  so  (3;  one  divine  name  is,  however,  sufficient. 
y*W  gl.  — 17.  *nn»K  'o]  this  is  parenthetical  gl.  —  *S  incu">  ffi]  needs  subj. 
It  is  given  by  @  ^K. — 18.  '•jx  >j]  emph.  —  J?S»S]  yfrr  limping,  stumbling, 
as  3515  Je.  2010.  —  joi]  Niph.  of  no  A?  prepared,  ready ;  in  this  sense  only 
here  \p.  For  the  phr.  cf.  lpSxS  p3j  tn  Jb.  1812.  —  dindd]  sorrow,  as  3210  69s7. 
— 19.  "imn  WJT*3]  ||  iPNiOnn  J«nx.  The  1.  as  it  stands  is  a  tetrameter.  Du. 
supplies  nin>  and  "•nSs  to  get  better  measure.  For  ]v;  v.  /82l.  y>2H  Hiph. 
impf.  "uj  con/ess,  only  Is.  39;  cf.  p-nn  Ps.  32s.  We  might  separate  »3  and  pa 
from  nouns,  and  so  get  trimeters.  At  the  same  time,  confession  of  sin  inter- 
rupts the  thought  here,  is  abrupt  and  isolated. — jnin]  Qal  impf.  fjNi  Qal 
(i)  be  anxious  for  :  c.  |D  here,  as  Je.  4216  ;  c.  S  I  S.  95  io2;  abs.  Je.  178; 
(2)  dread :  c.  ace.  Is.  5711  Je.  3819.  —  20.  0"n]  is  not  suited  to  ||  nptf  (715); 
rd.  therefore  D3PI,  as  JS7'19  ^95>  so  Houb.,  Gr.,  Ba.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  al.  —  lEsy]  Qal 
pf.  i.p.  X  Di7  vb.  Qal  be  numerous,  here  as  40s- 18  69s  1397.  f  Hiph.  be  made 
strong  10524.  —  21.  *dWdi]  Pi.  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  (22^),  before  njn  not  good 
usage;  rd.  "»_.  Cf.  33;12  for  phr.  —  mita  nnn]  should  be  prob.  awnnn. — 
WJBtP?]  Qal  impf.  3  m.,  sf.  I  sg.  be  my  adversary ;  f  fDtP  elsw.  7113  io94-20-29 
Zc.  31.  —  ^Tj]  Kt.,  ^"n  Qr.  («/.  72).  The  latter  inf.  cstr.  because  of  my  pur- 
suing good,  for  which  &  8i.Kai.o(TtJvr]v,  which  is  probable  explanation  of  31B  here 
as  ethical.  The  latter  is  more  suited  to  context,  the  former  a  more  natural 
change  in  later  times.  Ba.  inserts  here  1.  of  @  in  Syr.  Hex.  <gR-  * :  ko.1  airtp- 
pL\j/dv  /j,€  tov  aycnn]T6t>  uxrei  veupbv  i(38e\vyfx£vov,  which  he  translates  into 
Hebrew  thus:  3}?nj  "uea  Tm  »JW»S«fei;  so  Gr.,  but  Du.  objects  rightly.  It  has 
a  different  measure.  It  is  doubtless  a  1.  from  some  ancient  piece,  and  not  a 
gl.  composed  by  a  scribe.  Such  a  1.  is  not  known  elsw.  But  Is.  1419  has 
a  similar  thought  with  reference  to  the  king  of  Babylon :  *papD  noStpn  nnxi 
oma  njss  wmii-Sk  nnv  ann  >jj?bd  D\nn  paS  a^ro  n«3.  Doubtless  this  was 
in  mind  of  glossator  or  author,  as  we  may  decide.  The  former  is  more  prob- 
able, because  the  previous  Str.  is  complete  without  this  1.,  and  the  codd.  (5 


344  PSALMS 

which  have  it  are  the  old  corrupt  texts.  It  is  not  found  in  any  of  the 
other  Vrss.  It  is  too  strong  for  its  context,  and  it  is  not  suited  to  begin  a 
new  Str. —  22.  mm  yarpn  Vn]  closing  petition  usual  in  \j/ ;  cf.  27s  71s- 18. 
—  »JDD  pmn  Sn]  =  3522  7112.  This  we  may  take  as  two  trimeters,  espe- 
cially if  we  read  Sni  in  1.  2.  —  23.  *m?jjS  nsnn]  cf.  706  nrp  »S  nann,  also 
7112  nsnn  \-nr>,L\ —  ^tn]  before  »npwn  is  either  Adonay  my  salvation  or 
»njwn  tiSn;  ©  /cupte  t-^j  awT-qpias  fxov,  3  Doming,  salutis  meae.  Probably 
>jin  is  a  gl.  and  the  1.  the  concluding  trimeter. 


PSALM   XXXIX.,  2  str.   75  +  RF.   i5. 

Ps.  39  is  an  elegy:  (1)  A  resolution  to  repress  complaint  for 
suffering  in  the  presence  of  the  wicked,  which  can  only  partly  be 
carried  out  because  of  internal  excitement,  and  which  therefore 
takes  the  form  of  prayer  that  Yahweh  may  make  him  know  the 
brevity  of  life  (v.2_6a).  (2)  A  statement  of  the  unsubstantial 
character  of  man  in  his  life  and  activity,  with  a  petition  to  Yah- 
weh, the  only  hope,  for  deliverance  from  transgression.  He  has 
suffered  in  silence,  recognising  that  he  was  afflicted  by  Yahweh ; 
but  now  prays  for  relief  lest  he  melt  away  under  his  severe  chas- 
tisement (v.7"12a).  The  refrains  assert  that  man  in  the  presence 
of  God  is  altogether  unsubstantial  (v.65, 126) .  Glosses  are  petitions 
of  a  more  general  character  (v.13-14) . 

T  SAID,  "  I  will  take  heed  to  my  ways,  that  I  sin  not  with  my  tongue. 

I  will  take  heed  to  my  mouth  (that  I  do  no  wrong),  while  the  wicked  are  in 

my  presence." 
In  stillness  I  kept  silent,  apart  from  comfort,  and  my  sorrow  was  stirred. 
My  heart  became  hot  within  me,  during  my  musing  the  fire  kindled. 
I  spake  with  my  tongue:  "  Yahweh,  make  me  know  mine  end, 
And  the  measure  of  my  days,  what  it  is,  what  my  duration  is." 
Behold,  my  days  are  handbreadths,  and  my  duration  is  as  nothing. 

In  Thy  sight  surely  altogether  vapour  every  man  doth  stand. 
CURELY  as  a  semblance  man  walketh  about,  surely  as  vapour  he  bustles  about. 
And  he  heapeth  up,  and  he  knoweth  not  who  he  shall  be  that  will  gather. 
And  now  what  wait  I  for?     My  hope  is  in  Thee. 

From  my  transgression  deliver  me ;  make  me  not  a  reproach  for  the  impudent. 
I  am  dumb,  I  open  not  my  mouth,  because  Thou  hast  done  it. 
Remove  Thy  stroke  from  off  me  :   I  come  to  an  end. 

Wouldst  Thou  chasten  a  man  with  rebukes,  as  a  moth  Thou  dost  make  him 
melt  away. 

{In  Thy  sight)  surely  altogether  vapour  every  man  doth  stand. 


?SALM   XXXIX.  345 

Ps.  39  was  in  $3  and  fR.  It  was  also  taken  up  into  B3&  (v.  Intr.  §§  27, 
31,  33),  and  given  the  superscription  primly)  (v.  Intr.  §  34).  In  its  original 
form  it  was  two  pentameter  octastichs,  the  last  line  of  each  being  the  same 
refrain.  There  are  two  liturgical  additions,  —  a  tetrameter  couplet,  probably 
from  the  editor  of  133ft,  and  a  trimeter  quartette  of  later  date.  This  last  is 
dependent  on  Jb.  io'20"21.  Whether  I  Ch.  2915  is  earlier  or  later  is  not  so 
evident,  but  probably  earlier  also.  The  original  Ps.  shows  no  dependence  on 
other  literature,  (a)  There  are  several  a.X. :  DiDnn  v.2,  "oyj  v.3,  ,|D'»  mo  v.5, 
Ssj  nciri  v.9.  (6)  There  are  also  forms  not  elsw.  in  \p  :  TPt^nn  v.3,  but  Is.  4214 
5711;  ono  v.3,  but  Is.  1711  Je.  1518;  ninsto  v.6,  but  1  K.  725;  nar  v.7,  but  Gn. 
4I35.49  (E)  Ex.  810  (J);  nSmn  v.8,  but  La.  318,  Jb.  411.  (c)  There  are  forms 
rarely  used  in  \p :  tdVw  v.3-  10  3119  Is.  537;  ">jpjn  v.  4,  elsw.  only  Ps.  52;  nVn 
v.6,  8948  Jb.  1117.  The  vocabulary  favours  an  early  date  ;  so  does  the  syntax: 
{a)  cohort.  v.2-2-5(?);  the  conditional  clause  with  change  of  tense,  v.12.  The 
sin  with  the  tongue,  v.2,  is  not  lying,  but,  as  context  indicates,  murmuring 
against  God  because  of  afflictions,  an  early  idea  of  La.,  Je.  The  conception 
of  the  brevity  of  life,  v.5  8<*-,  is  also  characteristic  of  the  age  of  Je.  The  idea 
of  v.7  implies  conscious  existence  after  death,  but  ignorance  of  what  transpires 
in  the  world,  such  as  Jb.  14.  The  recognition  of  the  divine  chastisement, 
v.10-11,  is  like  Jb. ;  but  it  is  the  idea  of  Is.2  also.  The  Ps.  is  not  earlier  than 
Je.,  and  probably  later  than  La.  and  Is.2  It  has  the  experience  of  the  exile  be- 
hind it,  and  is  a  national  Ps.,  composed  just  before  the  reforms  of  Nehemiah. 


Str.  I.  is  composed  of  a  syn.  couplet,  a  synth.  couplet,  a  syn. 
triplet,  and  a  monostich  of  refrain.  —  2.  /  said],  introducing  a 
resolution,  or  purpose,  the  contents  of  which  are  given  in  this 
couplet.  —  I  will  take  heed],  repeated  for  emphasis,  —  to  my 
ways'],  moral  action  and  character,  as  59  4914  5023,  although,  as 
the  context  shows,  the  reference  was  to  watchful  restraint  of 
speech,  and  not  to  conduct,  and  so  ||  to  my  mouth.  The  purpose 
of  this  self-control  is  :  that  I  sin  not  with  my  tongue],  as  the  con- 
text indicates,  by  murmuring  against  God  on  account  of  sufferings. 

—  that  I  do  no  wrong].  This,  as  5,  is  required  by  parallel.  But 
2^,  by  error,  has  a  noun  unknown  elsewhere,  which  has  occasioned 
the  ungrammatical  rendering,  "  I  will  keep  my  mouth  with  a 
bridle,"  EVS.  Most  moderns  who  retain  the  word  follow  (3  in 
its  use  of  another  verb,  and  render  "  put  a  muzzle  to  my  mouth." 

—  while  the  wicked  are  in  my  presence].  This  does  not  imply  a 
contrast  of  his  lot  of  suffering  with  the  prosperity  of  the  wicked,  as 
many  suppose ;  but  that  he  would  not  give  the  wicked  any  ground 
for  reproaching  the  God  of  Israel  as  unable  to  save  His  people.  — 


346  PSALMS. 

3.  In  stillness,  intensified  by,  /  kept  silent,  still  further  intensi- 
fied in  all  texts  by  prefixing,  "  I  was  dumb,"  from  v.10,  at  the  ex- 
pense of  the  measure  ;  all  this  in  fulfilment  of  the  resolution  of  v.2. 
However,  he  was  still  apart  from  comfort'],  so  essentially  RV.m, 
JPSV.,  Dr.  His  self-repression  only  made  him  still  more  uncom- 
fortable. But  there  is  room  in  the  ambiguous  text  for  other 
explanations:  "even  from  good  words,"  PBV.,  or  "even  from 
good,"  AV.,  RV.,  after  (3,  explained  by  Kirk.,  "  speaking  neither 
good  nor  bad."  —  and  my  sorrow  was  stirred].  He  could  not 
repress  his  internal  excitement.  — 4.  My  heart  beca?ne  hot  within 
me].  Repression  makes  the  reaction  so  great  that  —  during  my 
musing  the  fire  kindled].  The  effort  at  self-restraint  kept  the 
attention  fixed  upon  the  wrong,  and  so  all  the  musing  tended  to 
increase  the  passion.  It  could  no  longer  be  restrained,  it  must 
find  vent  in  the  flame  of  words  —  spake  with  my  tongue].  This 
speech  is  not,  however,  the  murmuring  which  he  had  repressed, 
but  a  prayer  to  God  for  instruction  and  guidance,  and  therefore 
not  sinful  or  provocative  of  the  scorn  of  the  wicked,  but  rather  a 
mark  of  righteous  resignation.  —  5.  Yahweh,  make  me  know],  cf. 
9012.  This  is  virtually  repeated  in  the  text  of  J^  "  that  I  may 
know,"  or  "  let  me  know,"  as  the  verb  may  be  variously  rendered  ; 
but  it  is  an  unnecessary  addition,  making  the  line  overfull.  —  mine 
end],  that  is,  the  end  of  my  life,  how  short  a  time  will  elapse  before 
the  end  ||  the  ?neasure  of  my  days,  the  measure  of  time  compre- 
hended in  the  days  of  life. — what  it  is],  emphatic  reiteration, — 
what  my  duration  is],  so  by  a  correction  of  the  text  to  correspond 
with  the  same  word  of  the  next  clause,  cf.  (3,  J,  on  which  is 
based,  "  How  long  I  have  to  live,"  PBV.  The  transposition  of  a 
single  letter  has  given  in  J^  a  word  which  is  rendered  "  how  frail 
I  am,"  AV.,  RV.,  for  which  there  is  no  linguistic  authority. — 
6.  Behold],  emphatic,  calling  attention  to  the  fact  in  the  climax  : 
my  days  are  handbreadths],  measured  by  the  shortest  measure, 
the  span  of  the  hand.  This  is  relatively  so  short  that,  in  the 
climax,  the  psalmist  feels  justified  in  saying  :  my  duration  is  as 
nothing].  It  amounts  to  nothing  at  all;  it  is  hardly  worth  con- 
sidering. This  simple  and  strong  line  has  been  modified  at  the 
cost  of  the  measure  by  a  copyist  who  inserts  the  verb,  "  Thou  hast 
made,"  to  emphasise  divine  activity  and  responsibility  as  to  the 


psalm  xxxix.  347 

length  of  human  life ;  and  then  he  softens  the  assertion  that  the 
duration  of  life  was  as  nothing,  by  attaching  to  it,  "  in  Thy  sight," 
making  it  relative  in  the  point  of  view  of  God.  But  this  last  word 
really  belongs  to  the  last  line  of  Refrain  as  necessary  to  complete 
its  measure. — Surely],  strong  asseveration  characteristic  of  this 
Ps.,  v.712,  also  cf.  2  36.  —  altogether  vapour  every  man  doth  stand]. 
Man,  standing  before  God,  in  the  divine  presence,  has  no  sub- 
stantial existence.  He  is,  as  it  were,  composed  of  vapour,  which 
is  so  slight  and  unsubstantial  that  the  least  wind  will  drive  it  away. 
There  is,  indeed,  a  serious  irony  involved  in  the  very  thought  of 
such  an  unsubstantial  vapour  standing  in  the  divine  presence,  and 
it  is  just  this  that  makes  it  so  suitable  as  the  Refrain  of  the  elegy, 
reappearing  in  v.12&,  though  a  careless  scribe  has  there  abbrevi- 
ated it. 

Str.  II.  has  two  synth.  couplets,  a  synth.  triplet,  and  a  monostich 
of  Refrain.  —  7.  Surely  as  a  semblance],  that  is,  an  image  rather 
than  the  thing  itself,  and,  as  the  context  shows,  a  shadowed  likeness, 
—  as  vapour],  an  unsubstantial,  vaporous  body.  This  is  so  even 
in  his  activity,  as  he  walketh  about  ||  bustles  about.  The  change  of 
persons  in  J^,  followed  by  some  Vrss.,  is  exceedingly  improbable. 
It  was  due  to  a  copyist's  mistake  in  attaching  the  conjunction  1  to 
the  previous  verb,  so  making  it  3  pi.  —  And  he  heapeth  up],  in  his 
bustling  activity.  The  object  is  not  given ;  to  supply  it  makes  the 
line  overfull.  In  the  antith.,  —  he  knoweth  not  who  he  shall  be 
that  will  gather].  The  last  verb  should  also  be  without  its  object. 
It  has,  however,  been  supplied  by  a  copyist  in  the  suffix  "  them," 
which  compels  its  use,  in  thought,  at  least,  as  the  object  to 
the  previous  verb.  But  the  line  is  more  forceful  without  objects 
in  either  case.  —  8.  And  now]y  the  logical  consequence  of  the 
foregoing, —  What  wait  I  for  ?].  There  is  no  relief  through  my- 
self or  any  other  to  be  expected.  There  is  but  one  thing  to  be 
thought  of  under  the  circumstances  :  My  hope  is  in  Thee].  It  is 
fixed  on  Yahweh  and  on  Him  alone.  From  Him  the  relief  will 
come.  Accordingly  prayer  springs  forth.  —  9.  From  my  trans- 
gression deliver  me].  The  psalmist  recognises  that  the  sufferings 
of  the  people  are  due  to  their  transgression  against  God,  so  that 
first  of  all  freedom  from  transgression  must  be  secured.  This  is 
conceived  as  rescue.     This  vb.  is  used  ordinarily  with  reference 


348  PSALMS 

to  enemies  and  troubles,  seldom  with  reference  to  sin,  elsewhere 
only  5 116  799,  probably  also  no170.  Doubtless  in  these  cases  trans- 
gression is  conceived  in  the  guilt  and  the  misery  that  it  has  in- 
volved. —  make  me  not  a  reproach].  If  left  in  his  miserable 
condition  of  suffering  for  transgression,  he  would  be  exposed  to 
the  reproach  of  the  enemies.  These  enemies  are  described  as 
impudent],  cf.  141.  They  would  also  reproach  his  God.  — 10.  / 
am  dumb  ||  /  open  not  my  mouth] .  The  reason  is  a  different  one 
from  that  given  v.2"3,  and,  indeed,  an  additional  one  not  inconsistent 
therewith  :  because  Thou  hast  done  it].  The  suffering  was  due  to 
the  divine  discipline  for  transgression  j  and  therefore  there  was 
no  room  for  complaint,  but  only  for  confession  and  penitence.  — 
11.  This  is  then  explained  as, — Remove  Thy  stroke],  intensified 
by  the  gloss,  "  contention  "  %  "  strength  "  (3,  "  of  Thy  hand," 
both  at  the  expense  of  the  measure.  —  /come  to  an  end],  I  have 
about  reached  the  limit  of  endurance ;  I  am  ready  to  perish.  — ^ 
Wouldst  Thou  chasten  a  man  with  rebukes].  The  divine  disci- 
pline, though  wholesome  in  leading  to  repentance,  may  yet  be 
carried  so  far  as  to  be  destructive.  This  is  what  the  psalmist 
apprehends  in  the  present  case.  —  as  a  moth],  who  eats  away 
garments  and  so  destroys  them.  —  Thou  dost  make  him  melt 
away].  Gradually,  but  surely,  his  vital  sap  is  exhausted,  and  he 
dies  away.     The  Ps.  concludes  with  the  same  Refrain  as  6\ 

13  a.  This  fine  elegy,  when  taken  up  into  23&,  was  probably 
given  a  more  general  application  to  congregational  worship  by  the 
petition,  O  hear  my  prayer,  and  O  give  ear  to  my  cry  for  help.  At 
my  tears  be  not  silent.  Here  three  syn.  verbs,  calling  upon  Yahweh 
to  give  help,  have  three  corresponding  terms  for  prayer.  It  is  suffi- 
cient to  cite  Kirk. :  "  It  is  a  Rabbinic  saying  that  there  are  three 
kinds  of  supplication,  each  superior  to  the  other,  prayer,  crying,  and 
tears.  Prayer  is  made  in  silence,  crying  with  a  loud  voice,  but  tears 
surpass  all  "  ;  and  De. :  "  Alongside  of  the  words  of  prayer  appear 
the  tears  as  a  prayer  understood  by  God,  for  when  the  doors  of 
prayer  appear  to  be  closed,  the  doors  of  tears  remain  open." 

A  still  later  editor  appended  a  trimeter  tetrastich :  13  6-14. 

For  I  am  a  guest  with  Thee, 

A  sojourner  as  all  my  fathers ; 

O  look  away  from  me  that  I  may  be  cheerful, 

Before  I  depart  and  be  no  more. 


psalm  xxxix.  349 

This  addition  is  elegiac,  in  the  spirit  of  the  original  Ps.,  but 
from  a  later  point  of  view.  The  conception  that  Israel  was  Yah- 
weh's  guest  ||  sojourner,  and  always  had  been  such,  the  present 
generation,  as  all  my  fathers,  is  emphasised  in  the  prayer  of  David, 
i  Ch.  2915,  which  is  probably  at  the  basis  of  this  couplet.  The  last 
couplet  is  based  on  Jb.  io20"21.  It  is  a  petition  for  a  little  respite 
from  suffering  before  death,  which  is  not  altogether  in  keeping 
with  the  original  Ps. 


2.  mcc;N]  Qal  cohort.  1  sg.  repeated  in  1.  2  in  $%.  (§  nccs',  so  Ols.,  Dy., 
Gr.,  Ba.,  Du.,  Che.,  al.,  Qal  cohort  Q>p  which  alone  is  suited  to  use  of  %  cf. 
ifiS  pic  1413.  —  D^Dnc]  n.m.  muzzle,  BDB.  a.X.  and  dub.;  cf.,  however,  juon 
vb.  Dt.  25*  Ez.  3911.  <f§  <pv\a.K7]v ;  U  custodiam,  paraphrase  ;  j&  implies  inf. 
cstr.  prob.  Done  ||  NionD.  This  best  suits  parall.  and  the  vb.  of  f^.  In  this 
case  S  is  an  interpretative  gl.,  and  |§  is  to  be  followed.  —  3.  ."vd-ii]  silence ; 
elsw.  622  (dub.)  652  (dub.)  22s  ;  (3  has  vb.  nal  iTairei.vu)6r}v.  —  ^t^rn]  Hiph. 
pf.  nu>n  be  silent ;  Hiph.  exhibit  or  keep  silence  only  here  \p,  but  Qal  Pss.  281 
10729.  —  ^tor]  apart  from  good,  pleasure,  comfort.  The  1.  is  overfull ;  of  the 
three  syns.  the  easiest  tdSnj  is  the  most  probable  gl.  —  t  2sr]  n.m.  pain,  sor- 
row ;  only  here  in  \j/,  but  Jb.  213  166  Is.  1711  6514  Je.  1518;  cf.  sinod  Pss.  3210 
3818  6927.  —  "opp]  Niph.  pf.  J  "op  vb.  stir  up,  disturb.  Niph.  =  pass,  be  stirred 
up;  elsw.  Pr.  15°.  but  text  of  latter  dub.  (Toy,  i?DB.,  reject  it);  ©  d^e/ccu- 
vlo-Qt] ;  7B  renovatus  est,  paraphrase.  So  Aq.,  2,  averapaxdr],  3  conturbatus 
and  J5,  VL.  —  4.  Dn]  Qal  pf.  J  ODn  be  or  grow  warm;  here  fig.,  cf.  Dt.  196 
Ho.  77  Je.  5139. —  5.  »jpnin]  Hiph.  imv.  followed  by  h;hn  Qal  cohort.  1  sg. 
either  subjunctive  as  ($,  3,  or  apodosis.  It  is  really  tautological  and  impairs 
the  measure.  —  ^p>  rnr]  phr.  a.X.,  cf.  Jb.  II9  fig.  \  nip  n.f.  measure ;  common 
Ez.,  Je.  2214  3189,  of  garment  Ps.  1332,  usually  of  size,  distance.  — Snrrnc]  cf. 
adj.  Is.  533  lacking;  here  si  vera,  cessation,  but  improb. ;  rd.  *iSn  {if11*)  as 
v.6  duration  of  life,  cf.  8948.  It  is  possible  that  we  should  read  •nSn  as  below, 
v.6,  which  takes  up  both  M3>  and  nSn,  f$  using  UN  because  of  its  mistaken  S^n. 

—  6.  X  ninoa]  spans,  handbreadths  ;  only  here  in  \p,  but  in  measures  1  K.  79-  26. 

—  nnnj]  is  prob.  gl.,  as  the  1.  is  overfull  and  it  is  unnecessary.  —  pw]  as  noun 
=  as  nothing,  rare  usage,  cf.  73s  692;  v.  33.  —  :pj|j]  belongs  to  next  1.,  where 
it  is  needed  for  measure.  It  is  not  needed  here.  —  2*3]  Niph.  pf.  (v.  22). 
rpjj  must  be  attached  to  this  vb.,  otherwise  it  is  difficult.  (3  $G>v ;  i?DB.,  Dr., 
"though  standing  firm."  —  7.  %?&t\  n.m.  image  ;  in  \J/  only  fig.  of  emptiness, 
instability,  and  so  prob.  semblance  of  man  esteemed  by  God,  here  c.  2  essentiae, 
and  7320.  —  pvjj£]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  full  form  ;  pi.  in  the  midst  of  sg.  is  strange. 
\  [nnn]  vb.  Qal  (1)  growl,  like  a  dog  597- 16;  (2)  murmur,  moan,  42s- 12  43^ 
in  prayer  5518  774;  (3)  roar,  of  waves  464  (?) ;  be  tumultuous,  of  peoples  467 
83s  (also  <&  65°);  (4)  bustle  about,  of  noise  of  streets  397  Is.  222  1  K.  I41. — 
nar]  Qal  impf.     f-2*  vb.  Qal,  heap  up;  c.  ace.  Gn.  4i35-49  (E)  Ex.  810  (J), 


350  PSALMS 

Hb.  i10  Zc.  93  Jb.  271G;  here  abs.  but  wealth  implied  by  subsequent  sf. — 
8.  nnjn]  and  now,  logical  sequence,  210  27s. —  ^n]  is  gl.  —  'nVrfin]  f^n 
n.f.  hope  (cf.  716);  elsw.  Jb.  411  Pr.  10-8  n7  131'2  La.  318. —  >rn]  is  emph.  for 
copula.  —  9.  >yVD  Sac]  emph.;  Vo  makes  the  phr.  too  long  for  a  single  accent, 
and  is  prob.  a  gl. — 'jaynDnn]  phr.  a.X.,  but  cf.  din  *n  22"  (z/.  ij3  /41). — 
11.  yv  mjnc]  a.X.,  as  phr.;  makes  1.  overfull  and  is  gl.;  and  as  to  form 
t  rnin  n.f.  contention,  as  J.,  but  d  tVxfo  =  moj  more  probable.  —  12.  pp  Sjf] 
explanatory  gl.  —  '"HEn]  pass.  ptc.  nrn,  elsw.  Jb.  20-0  Is.  44°//^  desired  things  ; 
usually  fern.  mi:n  but  later  style :  <S  vj;dj;  prob.  both  interp.  glosses.  The 
Rf.  is  abbreviated,  but  must  be  restored  as  in  v.6.  — 13.  nw]  not  in  <S,  is  gl. 
to  the  v.,  which  is  throughout  a  liturgical  gl.  Indeed,  it  shows  three  stages 
of  glossification.  —  »3Jn]  fuller  form  for  ^n,  because  needed  for  euphony. — 
X  atftn]  sojourner  (y/2\th)  only  P  and  late,  not  elsw.  in  \p.  — 14.  )?cri]  Hiph. 
imv.  X  n>^  QaU  1 19117>  c-  -  look  on  attentively.  Hiph.  a.X.  c.  JE  look  away  from. 
—  nr^px]  Hiph.  cohort.  fjSa  (1)  look  cheerful;  so  here  and  Jb.  c/27  io20; 
(2)  cause  to  flash  Am.  59. 

PSALM   XL. 

Ps.  40  is  composite:  I.  A  thanksgiving.  (1)  After  patient 
waiting  the  people  have  been  delivered  by  Yahweh,  and  have 
praised  Him  with  a  fresh  outburst  of  song,  to  the  great  encourage- 
ment of  many  (v.2-4)  j  (2)  those  happy  ones  are  congratulated 
who  trust  in  Yahweh  rather  than  idols  ;  and  the  impossibility  of 
adequately  setting  forth  the  wondrous  deeds  and  thoughts  of  Yah- 
weh is  asserted  (v.5^)  ;  (3)  sacrifices  of  various  kinds  would  have 
been  offered  if  acceptable  to  Yahweh,  but  the  preference  has  been 
given  to  hearing  His  Law  as  prescribed  in  the  book  roll,  and 
preaching  it  to  the  great  congregation  (v.7~10a)  ;  (4)  the  praise 
of  Yahweh  will  not  be  withheld  in  the  congregation,  and  there- 
fore He  will  not  withhold  His  compassion  and  kindness  (v.10fr~12). 
II.  A  prayer  for  speedy  help  against  enemies  ;  that  they  may 
be  shamed  by  defeat,  while  the  people  rejoice  in  Yahweh  and 
magnify  His  name  (v.14-18).  These  Pss.  are  combined  by  a  seam 
connecting  the  great  number  of  evils  with  the  numerous  iniquities, 
which  have  brought  great  discouragement  (v.13) . 

a.     v.212,  4  str.  55. 

J  WAITED  steadfastly  on  Yahweh,  and  He  inclined  unto  me; 

And  brought  me  up  from  the  pit  of  desolation,  from  the  clay  of  the  mire; 
And  set  my  feet  upon  a  rock ;  He  established  my  steps ; 


PSALM   XL.  351 

And  gave  a  new  song  in  my  mouth,  a  song  of  praise  to  my  God. 

Many  see  and  they  fear,  and  they  trust  in  Yahweh. 
T-JAPPY  the  man  who  has  made  Yahweh  his  trust, 

And  who  hath  not  turned  to  (vain  idols) ,  or  turned  aside  falsely ! 

Many  things  hast  Thou  done,  O  Thou,  Yahweh,  my  God. 

Thy  wonders  and  Thy  thoughts,  —  there  is  no  setting  in  order ; 

Should  I  tell  or  should  I  speak,  they  are  too  numerous  to  be  counted. 
pEACE  offering  and  grain  offering  hast  Thou  no  delight  in;   then  had  I  the 
covenant; 

Whole  burnt  offering  with  sin  hast  Thou  not  asked ;  then  didst  Thou  com- 
mand me. 

Lo,  I  am  come,  in  the  book  roll  it  is  prescribed  to  me. 

Thy  will  I  delight  in,  and  Thy  Law  is  within  me. 

I  have  preached  righteousness  in  the  great  congregation ;  behold  my  lips. 
T  WILL  not  withhold,  Yahweh,  Thou  knowest,  Thy  righteousness  ; 

I  have  not  covered  in  my  mind  Thy  faithfulness  and  Thy  salvation. 

I  say,  I  have  not  concealed  Thy  kindness  and  Thy  faithfulness  from  the  great 
congregation. 

Thou,  Yahweh,  on  Thy  part,  wilt  not  withhold  Thy  compassion  from  me : 

Thy  kindness  and  Thy  faithfulness  (they)  will  continually  preserve  me. 

B.      V.14"18,    2    STR.    45. 

VAHWEH,  to  deliver  me,  my  God,  to  my  help,  O  haste. 

Let  them  be  shamed  and  confounded  together,  who  seek  my  life ; 

Let  them  be  turned  back  and  let  them  be  dishonoured  who  delight  in  my 
distress. 

Let  them  be  desolate  by  reason  of  their  shame,  who  say  "  aha,  aha !  " 
T   ET  them  exult  and  let  them  be  glad  in  Thee,  all  who  seek  Thee. 

Let  them  say :  "  May  Yahweh  be  magnified,"  those  who  love  Thy  salvation. 

Since  I  am  afflicted  and  poor,  Yahweh,  O  haste  to  me; 

O  Thou  my  helper  and  my  deliverer,  my  God,  tarry  not. 

Ps.  40  is  a  composite  Ps. :  v.2-12,  connected  by  a  seam,  v.13,  with  v.14-18,  which 
is  the  same  as  Ps.  70;  so  Street,  Che.,  al.  Only  v.2-12  belong  to  the  original 
Ps.,  with  the  title  stating  that  it  was  in  IB,  and  that  it  was  also  in  jjft  and 
Q2£  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  Ps.  70  has  its  own  title,  which  was  original  to 
it  before  it  was  attached  to  Ps.  40  as  v.14-18,  stating  that  it  also  was  in  13  and 
SK,  but  it  subsequently  received  the  liturgical  assignment  ■varnS  for  the 
offering  of  the  nruo  (v.  Intr.  §  39).  The  two  Pss.  were  connected  by  a  seam 
which  explains  the  evils  suffered  as  due  to  the  great  number  of  iniquities. 
V.2-12  show  dependence  on  Je.  Is.2  and  Ps.  22 :  v.3,  cf.  Je.  386;  v.7,  cf.  Je.  721 8(J.; 
v.9,  cf.  Je.  3133;  v.4,  cf.  Is.  415  4210;  v.6,  cf.  Is.  558"9;  v.1011,  cf.  Ps.  2.2*>.  It 
therefore  must  be  postexilic.  V.14-18  =  70  =  354- 26"28  indicates  a  more  troublous 
time.  Both  Pss.  belong  to  the  community  of  the  Restoration,  the  latter  to 
the  times  of  trouble  due  to  the  persecution  of  the  minor  nations  before  Ne- 
hemiah,  the  former  to  the  more  prosperous  times,  when  perils  might  be  looked 
upon  as  past,  and  probably,  therefore,  subsequent  to  Nehemiah.     The  com- 


352  PSALMS 

bination  of  the  two  Pss.  by  the  seam  must  have  been  subsequent  to  IB,  other- 
wise the  two  Pss.  would  not  have  had  separate  titles  and  have  existed  apart  in 
that  Psalter.     Besides,  Ps.  70  belongs  to  f£,  which  did  not  use  Ps.  40. 


PSALM   XL.   A. 

Str.  I.  is  a  progressive  pentastich.  —  2.  /  waited  steadfastly'], 
with  intensity  of  waiting ;  not  the  continuance  of  it,  or  the  patient 
quality  of  it,  but  its  persistence,  the  steady  adherence  to  the  atti- 
tude of  waiting  until  the  relief  came.  —  on  Yahweh],  from  whom 
it  would  come,  — and  He  inclined],  usually  with  ears,  which  are 
doubtless  understood  here,  and  implying,  therefore,  answer.  — 
unto  me].  The  answer  is  a  practical  one.  —  3.  He  brought  me 
up  from  the  pit],  into  which  the  psalmist  conceives  the  nation  as 
having  fallen,  cf.  La.  3s3-55.  This  is  described  as  desolation,  a  more 
probable  reading  than  the  similar  word  of  J^,  which  has  usually 
the  meaning,  "  roaring,"  as  Ki.,  Calv.,  Dr.,  but  is  paraphrased  in 
EV8.  as  "  horrible,"  without  any  justification  in  the  usage  of  the 
word.  —  the  clay  of  the  mire],  as  69s  and  Je.  38° ;  the  pit  into 
which  Jeremiah  had  been  cast,  where  the  foot  slips  and  slides, 
and  there  is  no  sure  footing.  —  and  set  my  feet  upon  a  rock],  that 
is,  a  lofty  rock,  a  crag  high  above  danger,  in  antith.  with  the  pit 
into  which  he  had  fallen.  —  He  established  my  steps],  made  them 
firm  and  secure  upon  the  rock.  —  4.  The  deliverance  having  been 
completed,  praise  follows  :  and  gave  a  new  song  in  my  mouth],  a 
fresh  outburst  of  song,  with  a  new  theme,  the  deliverance  just 
experienced,  as  333  961  981  1449  1491  Is.  4210.  —  a  song  of  praise 
to  my  God].  This  praise  is  public  praise,  in  the  temple  or  syna- 
gogue, cf.  v.10U;  and  therefore  many],  not  as  distinguished  from 
few,  but  the  many,  those  constituting  the  great  congregation.  — 
see  and  they  fear],  as  the  context  shows,  with  reverential  fear,  and 
they  trust  in  Yahweh].  The  three  vbs.,  joined  by  1  coordinates, 
do  not  give  a  sequence  of  dependence,  but  a  parall.  of  contemporary 
actions. 

Str.  II.  is  the  anti-str.  of  the  previous  one.  It  begins  with  an 
antith.  couplet,  congratulating  those  who  have  had  the  experience 
described  in  the  previous  Str.  —  5.  Happy  the  man],  cf.  I1.  This 
man,  collective  for  the  nation,  on  the  positive  side,  has  made  Yah- 


PSALM   XL.  353 

weh  his  trust],  as  v.45,  noun  for  verb ;  on  the  negative  side,  hath 
■not  turned  ||  turned  aside],  the  latter  by  an  easy  emendation,  to 
vain  idols],  as  (3  \\  falsely.  This  in  f^}  by  an  error,  has  become  a 
difficult  word,  only  used  here,  which  is  variously  explained  ;  "  unto 
the  proud,"  EV8.,  referring  to  wicked  men,  and  the  next  clause 
is  then  interpreted  as  also  referring  to  these  men,  in  various  modes 
of  rendering  :  "  such  as  go  about  with  lies,"  PBV. ;  "  such  as  turn 
aside  to  lies,"  AV.,  RV. ;  "fall  away  treacherously,"  RVm. ;  none 
of  which  can  be  regarded  as  any  better  than  conjectural  para- 
phrases ;  whereas  (3  and  the  emendation  suggested  above  give  us 
an  easy  and  natural  thought  appropriate  to  the  context  and  in 
accordance  with  good  usage.  —  6.  The  tristich  resumes  the  new 
song  of  v.4,  and  the  theme  of  the  song  is  placed  first  for  emphasis. 
—  Many  things  hast  Thou  done  ||  Thy  wonders].  To  these  deeds 
are  added,  Thy  thoughts,  cf.  Is.  55s"9.  This,  in  a  gloss  of  ^  (not 
in  (H),  is  defined  as  "  to  usward."  That  they  are  Yahweh's  and 
belong  to  no  one  else,  is  emphasised  by  the  use  of  pronoun  Thou, 
the  personal  name  of  God,  Yahweh,  and  the  statement  of  personal 
relation  to  God,  my  God.  The  "many  things,"  now  extended  to 
"  wonders  "  and  "  thoughts,"  are  too  numerous  for  human  estima- 
tion. —  There  is  no  setti?ig  them  in  order] .  f||,  by  the  insertion 
of  "unto  Thee  "  (not  in  (&),  has  given  the  verb  an  unnecessary 
interpretation,  followed  by  EV9. ;  but  has  also  suggested  another 
meaning  of  the  vb.  as  8q7,  "  there  is  none  to  be  compared  unto 
Thee,"  RVm.,  which,  however,  does  not  suit  the  context.  —  should 
I  tell  or  should  I  speak],  modal  imperfects  coordinated,  implying 
that  it  was  venturesome  so  to  do,  under  the  circumstances,  de- 
manding a  strong  determination,  which,  nevertheless,  would  fail 
because  they  were  too  numerous  to  be  counted. 

Str.  III.  has  two  synth.  couplets  and  a  synth.  monostich. 
7-8.  Peace  offering],  the  sacrifice  whose  chief  characteristic  was 
communion  by  eating  of  the  flesh  of  the  victim,  Yahweh  having 
His  part  at  the  altar.  This  was  accompanied  by  grain  offering. 
This  offering  in  some  cases  consisted  of  the  raw  grain,  or  roasted 
ears,  at  others  of  the  meal,  but  in  connection  with  peace  offerings 
of  various  forms  of  cakes  or  bread,  in  which  also  there  was  com- 
munion by  eating  of  the  most  of  it,  only  a  small  portion  going 
to  the  altar  for  God.  —  whole  burnt  offering],  whose  chief  char- 


354  PSALMS 

acteristic  was  that  the  entire  victim  went  up  in  the  flames 
to  God  expressing  worship.  —  with  sin'],  associated  with  sin  and 
the  guilt  of  sin,  as  Is.  6i8,  where  robbery  associated  with  the 
whole  burnt  offering  is  hated  by  Yahweh.  Sin  vitiated  all  sacri- 
fices ;  sacrifices  were  of  value  only  as  expressive  of  righteousness. 
EV.  and  most  scholars,  ancient  and  modern,  think  of  sin  offering 
here  rather  than  sin.  This  is  tempting  in  order  to  complete  the 
enumeration  of  the  great  classes  of  offerings ;  but  the  sin  offering 
is  not  known  in  the  Psalter  elsewhere  j  it  is  not  known  to 
the  literature  upon  which  this  Ps.  depends,  especially  in  this 
verse ;  the  Hebrew  word  used  here  nowhere  else  has  that  mean- 
ing j  and  even  with  the  sin  offering  the  list  of  offerings  would  be 
incomplete  without  the  Asham  already  used  Is.  5310.  —  Hast  Thou 
no  delight  in\.  Protasis  of  interrogative  clause  in  order  to  the 
apodosis  of  the  last  clause  of  v.  This  is  based  on  Ho.  6° :  "  For 
I  delight  in  kindness  and  not  in  peace  offering ;  and  in  the 
knowledge  of  God  rather  than  whole  burnt  offerings;"  cf.  Is.  i11 
Ps.  5 118,  and  especially  1  S.  1522 :  "  Hath  Yahweh  as  great  delight 
in  burnt  offerings  and  peace  offerings  as  in  obeying  the  voice  of 
Yahweh?"  —  Hast  Thou  not  asked '].  This  is  based  on  Je.  y22-23, 
"  For  I  spake  not  unto  your  fathers  nor  commanded  them  in  the 
day  that  I  brought  them  out  of  the  land  of  Egypt,  concerning 
burnt  offerings  or  peace  offerings  ;  but  this  thing  I  command  them, 
saying :  Hearken  unto  my  voice,"  cf.  Ps.  508"10  Mi.  66-8.  This  is 
essentially  true  so  far  as  its  antith.  is  concerned,  but  it  needs 
qualification,  for  not  only  the  code  of  D,  Dt.  12,  16,  upon  which 
this  Ps.  relies,  but  also  the  code  of  E,  Ex,  2314"19,  which  antedates 
Hosea  and  Micah,  prescribes  just  these  sacrifices  as  an  essential 
part  of  the  ritual  of  worship  from  the  earliest  times.  At  the  same 
time,  all  these  sacrifices  are  primitive,  and  antedate  all  Hebrew 
Law,  and  are  common  to  the  worship  of  Israel  and  all  his  neigh- 
bours ;  so  that  they  are  not  as  sacrifices  in  any  way  distinctive  of 
the  religion  of  Yahweh,  or  to  be  regarded  as  for  the  first  time 
commanded  in  His  Law.  They  are  incorporated  in  His  Law  and 
given  a  meaning,  and  that  meaning  is  His  command,  rather  than 
the  sacrifices  themselves.  This  is  the  unanimous  consensus  of  the 
prophets  from  Samuel  onwards.  These  questions  as  to  sacrifices 
as  such,  as  external  ritual  ceremonies,  not  being  required,  are  in 


PSALM  XL.  355 

order  to  the  statement  in  the  apodosis  of  what  Yahweh  did  require. 

—  Then  didst  Thou  command  me].  This,  by  a  slight  emenda- 
tion of  form,  gives  us  the  appropriate  apodosis  parall.  and  in 
assonance  with,  —  then  had  I  the  covenant],  which  is  probably 
the  original  of  a  difficult  passage,  in  which  (3,  followed  by  Heb. 
io5,  translates,  "a  body  didst  Thou  prepare  for  me,"  which  rests 
on  a  text  variant  from  that  of  H.  ®,  2  have  the  same  verb  as 
(&,  which  could  not  have  been  the  same  as  the  verb  of  J^.  ^ 
and  Vrss.,  however,  rd.  in  the  last  clause,  Then  I  said,  which  is 
tame  and  unsuited  to  the  context,  and  the  parallel  J^,  "  ears  didst 
Thou  bore  me."  This  strange  statement  is  variously  explained. 
Some  of  the  older  interpreters  fancied  that  there  was  a  reference 
to  the  ancient  usage  of  boring  the  ear  of  a  slave  as  the  sign  of 
bondage,  Ex.  216  Dt.  1517,  and  therefore  with  the  implication  that 
Israel  was  made  a  slave  of  Yahweh.  But  this  is  improbable.  The 
reference  is  rather  to  the  creative  power  of  God,  who  dug  out  the 
ears  and  made  them  organs  of  hearing,  in  order  that  His  people 
might  hear  and  obey  Him,  cf.  Ex.  411  Mt.  139.  The  emendation 
that  I  have  proposed  gives  fine  parall.,  and  is  especially  appro- 
priate to  the  book  of  the  covenant  in  the  subsequent  context.  — 
Lo,  I  am  come],  calling  attention  to  prompt  obedience.  —  in  the 
book  roll],  the  Deuteronomic  Code  as  written  on  the  roll,  cf. 
Je.  3624.  —  it  is  prescribed  to  me],  as  RVm.,  Ba.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  al., 
rather  than  "  written  of  me,"  concerning  me,  of  0,  3,  EVS.  — 
9.  Thy  will  I  delight  in],  is  in  emphatic  antith.  to  the  offerings 
of  v.7.  The  psalmist  delights  in  what  Yahweh  delights  in,  and  not 
in  what  He  does  not  delight  in.  The  will  of  Yahweh  is  expressed  in 
the  Law,  which  is,  as  the  previous  context  indicates,  recorded  in 
the  book  roll.  A  scribe  has  made  it  more  emphatic  by  prefixing, 
"To  do,"  which,  however,  makes  the  line  overfull.  It  is  an  un- 
necessary gloss.  The  Law  of  Yahweh  was  written  in  the  book 
roll;  but  more  than  that,  the  psalmist  says,  "it  is  within  me"], 
literally  in  the  midst  of  my  inwards,  v.  2215;  the  intestines  being 
the  seat  of  the  emotions,  affections,  and  passions,  according  to  the 
Heb.  conception;  and  so,  "within  my  heart,"  EV8.,  in  accord 
with  the  teaching  of  Dt.  3011"14.  —  10.  I  have  preached],  heralded 
as  glad  tidings,  in  accordance  with  the  usage  of  Is.2  40s- 9  4127  527,7, 

—  righteousness],  which  is  interpreted  by  J^,  3,  as  Yahweh's,  but 


356  PSALMS 

by  (3  as  the  psalmist's ;  the  former  alone  correct  as  referring  to 
Yahweh's  vindicatory  righteousness  in  the  salvation  of  His  people, 
and  so  repeated  in  the  opening  line  of  the  antistr.,  and  ||  Thy 
faithfulness  and  Thy  salvation],  which  appear  again  in  the  con- 
cluding tristich  in  Thy  kindness,  Thy  faithfulness],  repeated,  Thy 
compassion  in  the  great  congregation,  the  congregation  of  Israel 
assembled  in  great  numbers  for  worship  as  in  2226  3518.  —  behold 
my  lips~\,  which  have  moved  in  preaching,  and  which  give  visible 
evidence  of  what  they  have  uttered,  so  that  Yahweh  is  invoked  to 
see  the  evidence  that  His  people  have  in  fact  fulfilled  His  will. 

Str.  IV.  has  a  syn.  tristich  and  a  syn.  couplet  antith.  thereto. 
—  10b.  I  will  not  withhold].  The  change  of  tense  is  in  order 
to  a  vow  as  to  future  action.  In  antith.  with  it  is  :  Thou,  Yahweh, 
on  Thy  part,  wilt  not  withhold],  the  one  the  exact  counterpart  of 
the  other.  What  the  people  in  their  worship  will  not  withhold 
is  the  praise  of  Yahweh's  vindicatory,  saving  righteousness. — 
11-12.  I  have  not  covered  in  my  mind],  kept  to  myself  ||  /  have 
not  concealed.  The  psalmist  appeals  to  Yahweh  Himself  as  wit- 
ness :  Thou  knowesf],  and  parallel  therewith  makes  a  solemn 
asseveration,  J  say.  What  Yahweh  on  His  part  will  not  withhold, 
is  the  use  of  His  attributes  in  salvation,  and  that  continually. 
They  are  indeed  personified,  as  often,  as  guardian  angels,  and  they 
will  prese?-ve  His  people.  The  Ps.  here  reaches  an  appropriate 
conclusion.  But  a  later  editor  for  liturgical  reasons  attaches  an- 
other Ps.  to  it  by  a  seam. 

For  evils  encompassed  me  until  there  was  no  number. 
Mine  iniquities  overtook  me,  and  I  was  unable  to  see. 
They  were  more  numerous  than  the  hairs  of  my  head,  and  my  courage  forsook  me. 

13.  This  v.  goes  back  to  the  situation  described  in  v.3  and 
enlarges  upon  it,  in  the  use,  however,  of  other  images.  — Evils], 
are  here  personified,  and  are  represented  as  innumerable.  They 
encompassed  me],  probably  based  on  185,  and  therefore  implying 
the  image  of  a  flood.  The  evils  have  as  their  parallel,  —  mine 
iniquities],  because  it  is  in  the  mind  of  the  psalmist  that  the  evils 
are  due  to  the  iniquities  that  the  people  have  committed.  These 
are  also  personified,  and  represented  as  more  numerous  than  the 
hairs  of  my  head.     They  pursued   the   people,  and  so  overtook 


PSALM   XL.  357 


the?n,  and  in  such  a  way  that  they  were  dazed,  paralysed,  and 
unable  to  see,  and  courage  forsook  them.  They  had  no  heart  left, 
as  they  had  no  eyes  to  see. 


PSALM  XL.  B. 

This  was  originally  a  separate  Ps.,  preserved  apart  in  Ps.  70  :  an 
importunate  plea  for  speedy  deliverance  from  mortal  enemies,  in 
lines  1,  7,  8,  enclosing  a  tristich  of  imprecation  upon  enemies,  and 
an  antith.  couplet  of  petition  for  the  righteous.  The  divine  names 
vary.  The  original  was  a  Yahwistic  Ps.,  using  Yahweh  for  the 
divine  name,  with  a  variation,  —  my  God.  The  uses  of  "  God  " 
in  Ps.  70,  and  Adonay  4018  are  due  to  editorial  changes. 

Str.  I.  is  a  monostich  of  petition  and  a  syn.  tristich  of  impreca- 
tion.— 14.  To  deliver  me'],  emphatic  in  position,  because  of 
intense  feeling  of  immediate  need  ||  to  my  help,  repeated  in  the 
climax,  v.18,  in  nominal  forms,  —  my  helper  and  my  deliverer.  This 
is  softened  in  v.14 :  "  Be  pleased,"  which  makes  the  line  overfull, 
and  is  improbable  in  itself,  especially  as  it  is  not  in  701.  —  O 
haste],  repeated  in  v.18  with  ||  tarry  not.  —  15-16.  Let  them  be 
shamed],  by  defeat.  They  are  public,  not  private  enemies,  —  who 
seek  my  life],  to  destroy  it  ||  who  delight  in  my  distress],  disasters 
of  various  kinds. — who  say,  "aha,  aha"],  congratulating  them- 
selves, and  gloating  over  the  shame  of  the  people  of  God.  Accord- 
ingly, the  syn.  imprecations,  —  let  them  be  confounded  together,  let 
them  be  turned  back,  forced  to  retreat,  and  let  them  be  dishonoured, 
let  them  be  desolate  by  reason  of  their  shame,  defeated,  disgraced, 
made  desolate. 

Str.  II.  has  two  syn.  couplets.  — 17.  In  antith.  to  the  impreca- 
tion is  the  exhortation  to  the  people  of  Yahweh,  described  as,  — 
all  who  seek  Thee],  the  worshippers  of  Yahweh  ||  those  who  love 
Thy  salvation],  enjoy  it  and  so  love  it,  and  Yahweh,  who  gives 
salvation,  and  is  Himself  salvation.  The  exhortation  is  that  these 
may  exult  and  be  glad  in  Thee],  in  public  praise,  and  so,  —  Let 
them  say],  in  the  songs  of  praise  :  May  Yahweh  be  magnified.  — 
18.  The  ground  of  this  importunate  plea  is, —  Since  1 am  afflicted 
and  poor],  the  feeble,  afflicted  community  of  Yahweh,  at  the 
Restoration,  encompassed  by  bitter  enemies. 


35$  PSALMS 


XL.  A. 

2.  nip']  Pi.  inf.  abs.  with  *rnjf)  Pi.  pf.  intensifies  the  idea  of  waiting,  wait 
patiently  or  persistently  (v.  2j3  5).  — ^s  dm]  l  consec.  Qal  impf.  ntw.  This 
is  explained  by  »njntf  jrots^i,  which  has  crept  into  text  as  gl.  (v.  187).  —  3.  finer] 
a.X.  in  the  sense  of  desolation,  improb.;  cf.  65s  D"1^  pxe%  rd.  n*oe>  as  Gr.  {v. 
Sj8). —  fi^o]  mud,  mire  ;  cf.  6915  Je.  38s.  —  f  J v ]  n.[m.]  mi>«;  elsw.  69s. — jrr] 
Polel  pf.  JO  instead  of  1  consec.  c.  impf.  makes  an  independent  parall.  clause. 
—  ^u'n]  fig.  mode  of  life  j5  175  3731.  The  situation  is  common  to  Je.,  La., 
and  the  Pss.  of  lamentation.  —  4.  Bhn  1^]  new,  fresh  outburst  of  song 
Is.  4210  Pss.  jj3  961  981  1449  1491.  —  irnSs]  for  original  tiSk,  although  <J5, 
3,  also  have  I  pi.;  a  liturgical  adaptation.  —  int]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  n»n  fol- 
lowed by  i  coord,  for  emph.  coordination.  Cf.  Is.  415  wvji  d\»H  im;  here 
W>2"\  takes  the  place  of  0"N. —  5.  'I^k]  (f.  z1)  with  -qj  34°  941'2  1275.  —  Dtr] 
Qal  pf.  rel.  clause ;  so  3,  but  <3,  J5,  H,  cu;  name.  —  noac]  obj.  of  confidence, 
Z.S2210  65°  715.  —  D,?n")]  a.X.  suspicious;  3  superbias,ci.  D.inn  a.\.  go10  pride  ; 
but  prob.  err.  for  am.  snn  is  a  monster  of  a  mythical  character  8911  Jb.  2612 
Is.  519,  especially  of  sea  Jb.  918;  and  so  as  name  of  Egypt  Ps.  87*  Is.  307.  It 
is  difficult  to  see  any  connection  with  Egypt  here.  <J5  (JiaTcudTrjTas,  H  vani- 
tates,  so  &  =  D*San,  so  Ols.,  Gr.,  Che.  ;  cf.  Dt.  3221  and  Ps.  317,  Jon.  29 
NIP  >*?an. —  *&>]  pointed  as  Qal  ptc.  pi.  cstr.  Bit?  a.X.  similar  to  nafr  turn 
aside  Pr.  415  Nu.  $12- 19-  20-  -9  (P).  The  construction  is  then  to  be  explained 
as  \m  »"iia  Ps.  596,  construct  of  quality,  ».  Ges.128<3).  It  is  then  dependent 
on  S»,  after  (3  iiavlas,  3  pompas,  neither  of  which  is  easy  to  understand.  It 
is  better  to  regard  the  original  as  rosn,  1  coord.  Qal  pf.  ||  njc,  and  273  (v.  4s) 
as  ace.  of  manner.  —  6.  n^:n]  emph.  position,  ||  rpnnSfij  (v.  g2).  —  nr«] 
emph.  —  viSn  nin>]  divine  name  emphasised. — wSn]  is  an  explan.  gl.,  not 
in  ©.  —  "pSx]  is  gl.  of  interpretation,  not  in  <S,  but  in  3.  —  i~i';]  Qal  pf.  3  pi. 
(v.  v.13  3820),  c.  ja  comparative,  which  should  be  separated  for  measure.  Is. 
55s-9  is  at  the  basis  of  this  v.  —  7-8.  nar]  peace  offering  (v.  4P),  ||  nnjo  grain 
offering  (v.  20^),  \\  nhv;  whole  burnt  offering  (v.  20^).  It  is  tempting,  there- 
fore, to  render  ns^n  sin  offering,  as  most  Vrss.,  Ges.,  SS.,  al.,  but  there  is  no 
usage  to  justify  it.  Sin  offering  is  always  nKBTi,  the  intensive  noun,  which, 
however,  is  nowhere  used  in  \p  in  this  mng.,  not  even  in  the  penitential  Ps.  51. 
risen  is  always  sin  (v.  321),  so  here  $$.  The  1  is  the  i  of  accompaniment,  zuit/i, 
in  both  connections.  —  nxen]  Qal  pf.,  technical  term  for  acceptance  of  sacri- 
fice, as  5 118-21.  —  h  nna  OWN].  <5  and  Heb.  io5  rd.  aQfxa  5t  Ko,ry]pri<jw  /xoi  ; 
Aq.,  2,  0,  rd.  urla,  which  has  passed  over  into  some  Mss.  ©.  Possibly  <S 
rd.  uv;  for  d^tn,  as  Agellus,  Che.,  the  latter,  however,  thinking  st;  a  corrup- 
tion of  D^Dtf  and  so  making  the  same  emendation  as  Gr. ;  but  j?n  is  more 
suited  to  vb.  nnn,  so  V,  3,  J&.  Pierce,  Lowth,  Street,  would  rd.  nu  tn,  but  this 
does  not  explain  ">S  nn:.  Gr.  would  rd.  >S  *nna.  It  is  easy  to  rd.  >S  pna  tn, 
"Then  had  I  the  covenant."  <S  translates  as  if  it  rd.  FUjto  and  had  supplied 
the  obj.    |^  mistook  2  for  d,  and  tn  for  jtn.    This  passage  is  based  on  Je.  721  •«■ 


PSALM   XL.  359 

where  the  prophet  tells  them  that  God,  when  He  brought  their  fathers  out 
of  Egypt,  gave  them  no  command  respecting  sacrifices  ;  cf.  also  I  S.  1522, 
2it3  naiD  j:de>  run.  $%  of  this  v.,  and  also  Vrss.,  make  this  last  1.  defective  ;  but 
the  next  v.  is  too  long  just  by  \iidn  m.  Many  changes  have  been  suggested. 
Rd.  iS  rpDK,  then  we  have  two  lines  in  assonance,  say  to,  in  the  sense  of  com- 
mand, as  10634;  cf.  339  105s1- 3i  10623  (?)  10725  and  2  Ch.  20/24  nSiyn  ySnn  nns 
PKDnn\  —  tn]  then,  logical  sequence,  as  II96,92.  The  previous  vbs.  are  then 
prob.  in  protasis  of  interrog.  clause.  —  nan]  begins  the  1.,  calling  emph.  attention. 

—  i£D  rV?JD]  as  Je.  362- 4  Ez.  29  book  roll,  %  idD  n.m.  book;  elsw.  69s9  I39lc. 
2  not  with,  but  as  &,  3,  in.  —  ">Sy  airo]  Qal  ptc.  pass.,  not  qualifying  book, 
but  as  vb.  it  is  written,  prescribed,  as  (3,  3.  ^7J?  =  irepl  ifxov  0,  de  me  3,  so 
<£?,  U,  © ;  better  y#r  w<?  or  /<?  w^,  as  Dr.,  Ba.  This  is  the  Deuteronomic  roll, 
setting  forth  the  divine  instruction  for  Tsrael.  J  an3  vb«  ^r^/  Qa^  only  ptc. 
pass,  here  and  1499.  Inf.  cstr.  as  enrolled  87s  (?).  Niph.  be  written  or  en- 
rolled hy  in  a  book,  c.  DJ?  with  others  6929  13916;   recorded  10219.  —  9.    nicy1?] 

emph.  in  position  ;  Qal  inf.  cstr. jno  "pna]  for  3?  (z/.  ^^5),  cf.  oS  -pna  v.11. 

This  1.  is  overfull.  >nhx  is  an  unnecessary  gl.  There  is  still  one  word  too 
many.  The  inf.  me>>?7  is  unnecessary,  and  is  therefore  prob.  the  gl.  The 
idea  is  based  on  Dt.  6°  Je.  3133. — 10.  Wt{ra]  Pi.  pf.  Jlfra  vb.  Pi.  herald 
glad  tidings  ;  so  also  6812  962,  after  Is.  409-9  4127  527- ".  —  pnx]  righteousness, 
as  vindicated  (42),  ||  np"vt  v.11  (which  in  ^,  J,  has  suffix  r],  in  (g  »_,  both 
probably  interpretations),  also  ||  "injioN  (jj^)  and  "jnjnrn  (jj17)-  Under 
these  circumstances  it  is  improb.  that  pis  was  original ;  rd.  np-vs.  —  2"\  Snp] 
as  v.11,  elsw.  2226  3518.  —  nVdn  n^]  cannot  be  dependent  on  previous  context, 
for  it  makes  the  1.  overfull.  The  impf.  is,  however,  difficult  in  the  midst  of 
perfects.  But  it  is  evidently  antith.  n^jp,  v.12,  and  is  therefore  probably  an 
expression  of  resolution,  at  the  beginning  of  a  new  Str.  J  [n^3]  vb.  Qal 
(1)  shut  up,  or  in,  antith.  with  KJ'  889;  (2)  restrain:  c.  p  119101;  (3)  with- 
hold: c.  ace.  np-vi  here,  "pom  4012.  — 11.  then]  is  in  !$,  <g,  3,  attached  to 
•jnpwn,  but  it  makes  1.  too  long.  Besides  there  is  no.  usage  which  justifies 
such  a  construction  as  is  given  here.  It  is  really  an  emph.  asseveration  at 
the  beginning  of  the  next  1.,  where  the  measure  requires  it.  —  "T^nr]  Pi.  pf. 
X  [to]  vb.  Niph.  be  hidden  :  c.  p  69s  13915.  Pi.  hide :  c.  p  78*,  c.  S  pers. 
4011.     Hiph.  hide,  efface,  annihilate,  ">"UD  83s.  — 12.    mrn  hdn]  emph.  antith. 

—  "O'1"^]  Qal  frequentative.  The  1.  is  defective.  Inasmuch  as  the  subjects 
precede  the  vb.,  insert  for  emphasis  nron,  as  23*  43s.  The  Ps.  ends  with  this  1. 
— 13.  There  is  a  return  to  the  sad  condition  of  v.3,  which  is  intensified  in 
description.  —  <a]  causal.  —  isdo  px  ij:]  phr.  elsw.  Jb.  59  910.  J  "^D?  n.m. 
number :  of  persons  cf.  with  stars  1474  (37  t.  P,  H);  'D  pH  1475;  'D  p«  "<y 
4013  (v.  above)  ;  'D  pKl  10425  10534  Jo.  I6;  'D  *r»D  feiv  men  Ps.  10512  Gn.  3430  (J) 
Dt.  427  Je.  4428  1  Ch.  1619.  —  >tfm  nnptro]  =  69s,  not  elsw.  —  >J3TJ?  oS]  as 
3811,  cf.  2215. 


360  PSALMS 


XL.  B  =  Ps.  70. 

14.  rnn]  Qal  imv.  is  prefixed  to  the  first  1.,  making  it  a  hexameter,  which 
is  contrary  to  the  measure  of  both  Pss.  %  ny\  vb.  Qal  (1)  be  pleased  with,  be 
favourable  to  :  (a)  of  God,  c.  ace.  pers.,  His  people  44*;  those  fearing  Him 
14711;  c.  ace.  rei,  land  of  Israel  85'2;  f  c.  3  pers.  1494;  f  c.  2  rei  14710,  also 
Hg.  i8;  taDS-  fs-  778J  (^)  °f  men,  c.  ace.  rei  62s  10215;  c.  2  rei  4914,  also 
1  Ch.  29s;  c.  0?  pers.  Ps.  5018  (?),  cf.  Jb.  34s.  (2)  accept :  of  God,  c.  ace.  sac- 
rifice Pss.  5 118  II91J8,  cf.  Mai.  I10- 13  Dt.  33n(?).  t  (3)  be  pleased,  determined: 
c.  inf.  Ps.  joU,  elsw.  only  c.  2  pers.  1  Ch.  28*.  Other  mngs.  and  parts  of  vb. 
not  in  \p.  — nw]  v.14a- 17  for  dti^n  of  702a-5.  The  nw  of  v.146  70266  is  copy- 
ist's substitute  for  an  original  viSn  preserved  in  4018.  —  ^V^n1^]  Hiph.  inf. 
cstr.  (v.  72),  emph.  in  position,  dependent  upon  nu;in  Qal  imv.  cohort,  v.n 
(2220),  which  is  repeated  in  700  with  its  secondary  object  \-n?j?  (2220),  changed 
there  into  m;  by  txt.  err.  as  it  is  cited  in  our  Ps.  as  \-nr;\  — 15  =  703.  W2* 
norm]  also  jj35,  where  nrr  takes  place  of  "irv,  which  is  lacking  in  703  yet 
needed  for  measure,  and  omitted  by  txt.  err.  —  vj*dj  MPpac]  also  jjt.  —  nr'iDD^] 
Qal  inf.  cstr.,  not  found  in  703,  added  with  same  effect  as  in  preceding  v. 
X  [hcd]  vb.  Qal.  sweep  or  snatch  away ;  cf.  Gn.  i823-24  Dt.  2918  Is.  720. — 
-nnx  UD"1]  also  jj^,  where  is^i  is  used  as  well.  —  »njn  ^on]  (55)  cf.  >njn  *>nw 
35*26. — 16  =  70l.  iDfc';]  Qal  impf.  3  pi.  substituted  for  *aw*  of  704,  which  is 
certainly  older  and  original ;  the  latter  is  juss.,  turn  back  in  defeat,  as  611  94 
5610.  \  [3£i£]  vb.  Qal,  be  desolate  ;  so  here  of  persons,  as  La.  I13- 16.  Niph. 
made  desolate  Ps.  6926.  Hiph.  devastate :  c.  ace.  place  797.  Hithpolel  be  made 
desolate:  of  ^  1434. — nNn  nNn  c^:nh]  also  with  variations  jj21- 21>.  >S  is 
appended  to  anDNn  here.  — 17  =  705,  except  for  use  of  nywn  for  npits*  (j3), 
due  doubtless  to  the  use  of  the  former  in  v.11  — 'jnjp  -vsn  ii:n>  ]  also  Jj27  ; 
TDn  must  be  a  gl.  — 18  =  706.  *j*o]  emph.  —  »nn]  for  an  original  ni.-v  = 
OtiSn  70°,  doubtless  through  substitution  of  Qr.  for  Kt.  by  late  copyist. — 
arm]  Qal  juss.  (102),  for  renn  of  70r>.  —  mry]  (2220)  for  -\r;  (203)  of  706, 
which  latter  is  probably  err.  from  use  of  mr;-  702.  —  ti^n]  for  mm  of  706,  the 
former  doubtless  original.  —  ->^N-,]  Pi.  juss.  2  m.  Jinx  vb.  Qal  only  Gn.  32s. 
Pi.  delay ;  so  here  Pss.  70'*'  and  1272. 


PSALM   XLL,  4  str.  54. 

Psalm  41  is  a  prayer  :  (1)  Petition  to  Yahweh  to  deliver  from 
enemies  and  make  happy  in  the  land  (v.2_4a).  (2)  The  enemies 
look  for  Israel's  utter  ruin,  and  they  visit  him  as  false  friends  to 
slander  him  (v.6"7)  ;  (3)  they  devise  evil,  they  talk  of  his  speedy 
death,  and  violate  treaties  to  do  the  greatest  injury  (v.8-10).    (4)  A 


PSALM   XLI.  361 

final  petition  that  Yahweh  will  raise  him  up  to  stand  in  His  pres- 
ence, and  will  not  permit  his  enemies  to  triumph  (v.11-12) .  Glosses 
assert  that  Yahweh  hath  restored  health  (v.46),  and  attribute  suffer- 
ings to  sin  (v.5). 

T-IAPPY  be  he  that  acteth  circumspectly,  though  weak  (and  needy) ! 

In  the  day  of  evil  may  Yahweh  deliver  him  ; 

May  Yahweh  preserve  him,  (make  him  happy)  in  the  land; 

And  may  He  not  give  him  over  unto  the  greed  of  his  enemies; 

May  Yahweh  support  him  upon  the  couch  of  his  illness. 
A/TINE  enemies  say  that  it  is  bad  with  me  : 

"  How  long  ere  he  die  and  his  name  perish." 

Even  if  one  come  to  see  me,  falsehood  he  speaketh ; 

His  mind  gathereth  trouble  to  itself; 

He  goeth  abroad,  he  speaketh  it  altogether. 
A  GAINST  me  all  that  hate  me  whisper ; 

Against  me  they  devise  that  it  is  bad  with  me : 

"  A  deadly  thing  is  poured  out  within  him ; 

He  has  lain  down  and  he  will  no  more  rise." 

Yea,  the  one  in  covenant  with  me  (has  spoken  great  things)  against  me. 
"RUT,  O  Thou  Yahweh,  be  gracious  to  me  and  raise  me  up. 

By  this  I  know  that  Thou  delightest  in  me ; 

That  mine  enemy  will  not  shout  over  me. 

But  as  for  me,  in  mine  integrity  Thou  dost  hold  me  fast ; 

Thou  (on  Thy  part)  wilt  station  me  before  Thy  face  forever. 

Ps.  41  was  in  B,  then  in  fH  and  Blft  (v.  Intr.  §§  27,  31,  33).  It  shows  no 
dependence  upon  other  Literature,  and  is  therefore  doubtless  early.  It  is 
remarkable  for  its  reference  to  the  treachery  of  a  familiar  friend  in  the 
expressive  ^DiW  tt"N  v.10,  further  explained  by  glosses  as  one  in  whom  he 
trusted,  and  as  eating  at  his  table.  This  is  traditionally  referred  to  Ahithophel, 
the  false  counsellor  of  David,  2  S.  15-17;  and  is  cited  by  Christ,  Jn.  1318,  as 
applicable  to  Judas  the  traitor,  cf.  Acts  i16sq.  Both  of  these  references  are 
quite  appropriate.  But  the  Ps.  is  national,  and  the  false  friend  is  a  treacher- 
ous neighbour  who  violated  treaties  of  alliance  and  friendship,  and  there  is  no 
reference  to  an  individual.  The  people  are  dwelling  in  their  land,  v.3,  after 
the  Restoration,  and  lament  to  God  the  serious  troubles  which  they  suffer 
from  the  crafty  minor  nations  of  Palestine,  in  the  time  of  Sanballat  and 
Nehemiah,  before  the  building  of  the  walls  of  Jerusalem. 

Str.  I.  is  a  pentastich  of  petition,  as  is  evident  from  the  negative 
of  the  jussive,  v.35;  and  it  cannot  be  regarded  as  a  statement  of 
fact,  AV.,  ignoring  this  jussive  ;  or  as  beginning  with  fact,  v2,  and 
continuing  in  petition,  v.3-4,  PBV. ;  or  as  all  fact  except  the  jussive, 
v.3ft,  RV.,  which  is  grammatically  correct,  but  disturbs  the  sim- 


362  PSALMS 

plicity  and  harmony  of  the  Str.  — 2-4.  Happy  be  he'],  may  he  be 
happy,  cf.  i1  212  321  405  —  that  acteth  circumspectly],  as  210  142  36*, 
taking  the  preposition  as  an  interpretive  gloss.  If  the  preposition 
be  original,  it  is  necessary  to  interpret  as  ancient  and  modern 
Vrss. :  "that  considereth  the  weak,"  that  is,  is  attentive  and  con- 
siderate in  dealing  with  them  ;  an  idea  which,  however  appropriate 
in  itself,  is  not  in  accord  with  anything  whatever  in  the  rest  of  the 
Ps.,  and  is  in  a  strange  sort  of  isolation,  especially  as  thus  intro- 
duced.—  The  weak,  to  which  we  must  add,  after  (5),  the  needy, 
are  rather  in  apposition  with  the  previous  participle.  Notwith- 
standing they  are  in  this  sad  condition,  they  have  yet  acted  cir- 
cumspectly, and  will  be  happy.  —  In  the  day  of  evil,  or  adversity. 
This  is  still  further  explained  as  exposure  unto  the  greed,  the  greedy 
desire  of  his  enemies.  The  nation  is  so  reduced  in  strength  that 
it  is  compared  to  a  sick  man,  upon  the  couch  of  his  illness.  The 
petition  continues  in  the  syn.  clauses  :  May  Yahweh  deliver  him  || 
preserve  him  ||  may  Yahweh  support  him  ||  make  him  happy  in  the 
land].  The  land  is  the  holy  land  of  Israel.  "  Upon  the  earth," 
EV8.,  is  a  misconception.  A  glossator  adds  a  line  stating  the  ful- 
filment of  the  prayer,  —  all  his  bed  Thou  hast  changed  in  his  sick- 
ness]. This  is  not  the  tempting  thought  that  Yahweh  made  his  bed 
over  fresh  and  clean  while  the  man  continued  to  be  sick,  as  would 
a  nurse,  which  has  no  usage  to  justify  it ;  but  that  He  changed  the 
bed  of  sickness  into  one  of  health  by  giving  recovery  from  sick- 
ness. This  perf.  can  be  explained  as  a  part  of  the  original  Ps. 
only  with  great  difficulty  and  arbitrariness.  —  5.  A  glossator  adds 
a  distich  to  make  the  transition  from  the  third  person  to  the  first 
person  easier,  and  also  to  explain  the  affliction  as  due  to  sin,  in 
accordance  with  3819.  —  I,  on  my  part,  said:  Yahweh  be  gracious 
to  me],  taken  from  v.11  ||  O  heal  me,  for  I  have  sinned  against 
Thee].  Sin  is  conceived  as  a  disease  in  its  consequences  upon 
the  sinner  himself,  and  as  guilt  to  be  removed  by  a  healing  remedy, 
cf.  513-*. 

Str.  II.  in  a  synth.  pentastich  sets  forth  the  peril  from  the 
enemy.  —  6.  Mine  ene?nies  say].  They  talk  about  him,  gloating 
over  his  troubles,  —  it  is  bad  with  me],  I  am  in  a  bad  way.  This 
condition  of  the  nation  is  hopeless.  —  Hotu  long  ere  he  die].  They 
hope  that  he  will  soon  die,  and  yet  long  that  it  may  be  sooner. 


PSALM   XLI.  363 

—  and  his  name  perish].  They  wish  that  Israel  may  be  so  entirely 
destroyed,  that  no  memory  of  his  existence  will  remain  to  pos- 
terity. —  7.  Even  if  one  come  to  see  me],  make  a  visit,  ostensibly 
friendly,  but  really  to  spy  upon  him  and  report  his  serious  con- 
dition. The  hostility  is  chiefly  in  what  they  say :  falsehood  he 
speaketh  ]|  he  speaketh  it  altogether.  —  His  mind  gathereth  trouble 
to  itself].  He  gathers  up  every  kind  of  trouble  in  order  to  re- 
member it  and  talk  about  it ;  and  accordingly,  —  he  goeth  abroad, 
in  streets  and  public  places,  in  order  to  tell  all  about  it. 

Str.  III.  continues  the  description  of  the  activity  of  the  ene- 
mies in  a  pentastich  of  introverted  parall.  —  8-10.  Against  me  all 
that  hate  me  whisper  ||  has  spoken  great  things  against  me~\.  This 
latter  rendering  is  better  suited  to  the  context  than,  "  hath  lifted 
up  his  heel  against  me,"  AV.,  RV.,  which  may  be  explained  as  en- 
deavouring to  kick  me  or  trip  me  up ;  a  speculative  interpretation 
without  usage  to  justify  it,  and  which  has  nothing  to  suggest  it  in 
the  context.  The  word  "  heel "  is  a  gloss  to  give  the  verb  an 
object.  The  object  was  omitted  in  the  original  on  account  of 
measure,  as  1  S.  2041,  cf.  Ez.  3513,  and  the  context  suggests  words 
rather  than  deeds.  The  other  activities  were  all  in  order  to 
speech.  —  Against  me  they  devise'],  meditate,  plan,  not  in  order  to 
do  anything,  but,  as  the  context  indicates,  in  order  to  say  falsely 
that  the  people  were  in  a  bad  condition.  —  it  is  bad  with  me], 
A  repetition  of  v.6  ||  A  deadly  thing],  a  ruinous  trouble,  a  mortal 
injury,  —  is  poured  out  within  him],  infused  in  him. — He  has  lain 
down,  on  his  bed  in  mortal  wounds,  and  he  will  rise  no  more,  in 
health  and  life.  —  The  one  in  covenant  with  me],  not  to  be  inter- 
preted as  an  individual,  Ahithophel  or  any  other,  but  as  nations  in 
covenant,  who  have  treacherously  broken  covenant  and  become 
bitter  enemies.  This  is  enlarged  upon  by  glosses,  —  in  whom  I 
trusted,  which  did  eat  of  my  bread. 

Str.  IV.  is  a  synth  pentastich,  and  is  essentially  petition,  in 
introverted  parall.  with  Str.  I.  — 11.  Bid  O  Thou  Yahweh], 
emphatic,  —  be  gracious  to  me  and  raise  me  up],  in  antith.  to  the 
hope  of  the  enemies,  v.9.  A  marginal  gloss  of  vengeance  :  "  And 
I  will  repay  them,"  came  into  the  text  at  the  expense  of  the 
measure  and  the  harmony  of  the  thought.  — 12-13.  By  this], 
defined  in  the  parall. :  that  mine  enemy  will  not  shout  over  me],  in 


364  PSALMS 

triumph,  as  they  hoped  to  do  in  the  previous  Str. — /  know\ 
having  such  good  evidence.  —  Thou  delightest  in  me],  dost  look 
upon  me  with  favour  and  acceptance.  —  in  mine  integrity],  going 
back  upon  v.2.  —  Thou  dost  hold  me  fast],  keep  a  firm  hold  on  me 
||  Thou  wilt  station  me],  place  me  and  make  me  stand  firm,  — 
before  Thy  face  forever],  in  Thy  presence  in  the  land  and  in  the 
temple.  The  doxology  at  the  close  of  this  Ps.,  v.14,  does  not  belong 
to  the  Ps.,  but  indicates  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  the  Psalter.  It 
was,  indeed,  the  doxology  to  be  used  at  the  close  of  every  Ps.  in 
the  book,  and  also  at  the  close  of  any  section  of  the  Pss.  that  might 
be  selected,  at  places  indicated  by  Selah  (v.  Intr.  §  41). 

2.    nrs]  pi.  cstr.  abstr.,  exclamation  of  congratulation,  v.  i1  212  321  -f . 

—  ^airo]  Hiph.  ptc.  verbal  force,  rel.  clause  (210),  c.  ^x  here,  for  usual  ace, 
so  Vrss.;  but  this  gives  a  mng.  entirely  apart  from  thought  of  \f/.  Sn  prob. 
gl.  for  ace,  as  Ne.  813,  due  to  misinterpretation.  —  J  *?i]  adj.  weak,  lowly; 
||  |V3K  (919)  in  7281  824  1137  Am.  41  86  + ;  @  adds  \V2H  here,  and  the  meas- 
ure requires  it,  so  Gr.,  Bi.,  Ley.,  Du.,  Ba.  Cf.  also  Ps.  821.  — njn  ova]  as  27s 
Je.  17I"-  is  5 1*. — mota']  Pi.  impf.  prob.  juss.,  as  all  subsequent  impfs.  in  Str. 

—  3.  VWVj]  1  coord.,  Pi.  juss.  sf.  3  sg.  mn  (v.  2227);  not  in  (gB,  but  in 
<g>\A.R.T  from  |q  .  an  evident  gl.,  making  1.  too  long.  —  "WW"]  Kt.  a.X.  Pu. 
juss.,  Qr.  -c;!0,  1  consec.  pf.  }  1**  Pu-  be  made  happy,  as  Pr.  318,  so  2,  3  ; 
but  <S  kclI  /xa/cap/crai  avrdv  =  Pi.  vntfwi  as  jg»,  Y,  C  changed  when  $}  inserted 
vrrm.     Cf.  li™,  pronounce  happy,  Gn.   3013  (J)   Mai.  31--15+. —  injnrrSro] 

1  coord,  c.  neg.  of  juss.  2  sg.  sf.  3  sg.  ;  but  (£,  S,  3,  2,  3  sg.  vb.,  so  Street, 
Dathe,  Gr.,  Du.,  al.,  which  is  better  suited  to  the  context.     The  change  to 

2  pers.  might  be  due  to  the  interpretation  of  previous  impfs.  as  futures  indica- 
tive. In  favour  of  the  2  pers.  is  the  difficulty  of  reconstruction,  and  so  most 
adhere  to  it.  —  tfoi]  in  the  sense  of  desire,  as  2712  3525  7818  10522;  ©  els  x^Pa^ 
is  prob.  a  paraphrase.  — 4.  i:","D*]  Qal  juss.  strong  sf.  3  sg.  %  "">D  Qal  sustain, 
support ;  elsw.  1856  203  9418  II9117,  with  food  10415.  —  f  'I"*]  n-  illness,  rd.  with 
&  "n  ||  "Sn;  cf.  Jb.  67  (txt.  dub.);  adj.  nn  La.  I13  517  Is.  3022  (?)  Lv.  1533 
2018  and  v<n  Is.  I5  Je.  818  La.  I22.  —  ????]  turn  or  change,  transform  ;  here 
bed,  not  elsw.  ;  to  change  the  bed,  as  maid  or  nurse,  improb. ;  to  restore  to 
health  as  i?DB  conjectural ;  change  of  subj.  striking,  though  sustained  by  © 
improb.  ;  most  likely  a  txt.  err.  Previously  the  whole  clause  was  a  gl.  — 
"•^na]  in  his  sickness,  a.X.  \p,  but  Dt.  715  28s9- 61  Is.  38s  533-4,  metaphor,  of 
land  Ho.  513  Is.  I5  Je.  io19. — 5.  ^n]  emph.  with  'rnDK  of  asseveration. 
This  v.  is  gl.  — 6.  "h  jn]  it  is  bad  with  me,  I  am  in  a  bad  way.  Rd.  n;n  as 
v.8  for  better  measure  ;  so  Hare.  — f^Oj]  after  Tr,  final  clause.  —  7.  Kl  dni] 
conditional  clause,  even  if  (pf.  in  prot.,  impf.  in  apod.);  indef.  subj.  —  .sir] 
emph.,  emptiness  of  speech,  falsehood  with  "»3"i  123  144s-  n,  cf.  24*  26*.  — t3L'] 
emph.,  his  mind  (/915). —  8.    in-]  in  ©  this  goes  to  previous  1.,  thus  making 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLI1I.  365 

better  measure  and  leaving  the  next  two  lines  both  to  begin  with  *Sj7,  making 
assonance;  so  Hare.  —  utfrfcrp]  Hithp.  present  f  Vfb  vb.  whisper.  Pi.  58s  of 
serpent  charmers.  Hithp.  whisper  together  ;  elsw.  2  S.  1219.  —  <■?  n;n  lairrv  »Sp]. 
The  vb.  is  c.  ■??,  as  Gn.  5020  (E)  Je.  482  Na.  I11 ;  »S  belongs  to  njn  as  v.6,  and 
not  to  vb.  as  most.  — 9.  iyhl  nan]  ruinous,  deadly  thing  (f85),  so  De.,  Che., 
Dr.,  al.  —  u  p«*]  Qal  ptc.  pass.  Jpr  Qal,  usually  with  iy  upon,  here  with 
3  within,  a..\.  of  disease.  Hiph.  be  poured  out :  of  anointing  Ps.  45s  Lv.  2110. 
—  2W  "V^ni]  3  qui  dorftiivit,  <3  \ii]  6  Koi/uavfxevos,  Aq.  kcu  6's  ct^  K0ifj.7]6y.  The 
rel.  is  not  in  <f§,  and  the  negative  is  peculiar  to  <g.  Both  are  glosses.  —  kS'] 
should  be  nS)  for  a  tone.  — 10.  *DnS  Soin  12  'nnoa  TPk]  is  a  gl.  of  exaggera- 
tion. —  Sy  Wi]  elsw.  with  nwyh  35s6  3817  5513  Jb.  195  Je.  4826- 42,  cf.  Ez.  3513, 
here  inf.  omitted  because  speech  is  referred  to  and  not  doing.  —  2p>  ]  is  given 
as  obj.  in  MT.  and  (&,  but  this  phr.  not  used  elsw.,  and  the  noun  is  not  cognate 
to  vb. :  lifted  high,  Ges.,  not  elsw. ;  gave  insidiously  a  great  fall,  De.,  Now., 
not  justified  by  usage.  Ipy  is  prob.  ancient  gl.  to  give  vb.  an  object.  — 
11.  nn*o]  emph.  —  orh  nnW*n]  is  doubtless  gl.  — 12.  yn>  xS]  J  [>n]  vb. 
Hiph.  shout:  war  cry,  signal,  not  in  yp,  but  (1)  in  triumph,  c.  Hy  here,  as 
Je.  5015;  (2)  in  public  worship,  c.  %  to  God  Pss.  47s  661  81'2  951-2  98*  ioo1, 
"•jd1?  98s.  Hithp.  ^o«/  (1)  in  triumph  6010  10810;  (2)  in  joy  6514  (meadows). 
13.  ••jni]  emph.  —  ",J5,?n>]  1  consec.  Hiph.  impf.  2XJ  station,  set.  This  1.  is 
too  short.     The  antith.  suggests  nnKT. 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLIIL,  3  str.  95,  rf.  35. 

Pss.  42-43  are  the  lament  of  an  exile  :  (1)  Intense  longing  to 
return  to  the  sacred  places  of  divine  presence,  saddened  by  the 
recollection  of  pilgrim  processions  and  ritual  worship  (422-5). 
(2)  Description  of  the  condition  of  the  exiles  looking  back  to 
Jerusalem  from  the  region  of  the  upper  Jordan,  with  the  sensation 
that  they  were  drowning  in  its  depths ;  and  expostulation  with 
God  because  of  the  taunts  of  the  enemy  (427"11).  (3)  Petition  for 
vindication,  with  renewed  expostulation,  and  supplication  that 
Yahweh  may  restore  to  the  sacred  places  (431"4).  The  Refrains 
are  exhortations  to  confidence  in  Yahweh  (426  M  435). 

AS  a  hind  that  longeth  after  channels  of  water, 
So  longeth  my  soul  for  Thee  (Yahweh). 
My  soul  doth  thirst  for  Yahweh,  for  the  God  of  (my)  life. 
When  may  I  come  to  appear  in  the  presence  of  (Yahweh)? 
My  tears  are  my  food  day  and  night, 

While  they  say  unto  me  all  the  day :  "  Where  is  thy  God  ?  " 
These  things  I  would  remember,  ant1  J  would  pour  out  my  soul  upon  me: 


366  PSALMS 

How  I  used  to  pass  on  (to  the  majestic  tabernacle) ,  unto  the  house  of  Yahweh, 
With  the  sound  of  jubilation  and  thanksgiving,  (the  roar)  of  the  pilgrim  band. 

Why  art  thou  cast  down,  O  my  soul,  and  moanest  upon  me  ? 

Hope  thou  in  (  Yahweh)  ,/or  yet  shall  I  sing  His  praise  ; 

{I  shall  sing  the  praise  of)  the  saving  acts  of  the  presence  of  (  Yahweh)  my  God. 
TJPON  me  my  soul  is  cast  down  ;  therefore  I  would  remember  Thee, 
From  the  land  of  Jordan  and  the  Hermons  and  from  Mount  Mizar. 
Deep  calleth  unto  deep  at  the  sound  of  Thy  cataracts  : 
All  Thy  breakers  and  Thy  billows  are  gone  over  me. 
Day  by  day  is  with  me  prayer  unto  the  God  of  my  life. 
I  would  say  to  the  God  of  my  crag :  "  Why  dost  Thou  forget  me  ? 
Why  must  I  go  in  mourning  because  of  the  oppression  of  the  enemy  ?  " 
While  (the  slayer)  crushes  in  my  bones,  mine  adversaries  do  reproach  me, 
While  they  say  to  me  all  the  day:  "  Where  is  thy  God  ?  " 

Why  art  thou  cast  down,  O  my  soul,  and  moanest  upon  mc  t 

Hope  thou  in  (  Yahweh) ,  for  yet  shall  I  sing  His  praise  ; 

{I  shall  sing  the  praise  of)  the  saving  acts  of  the  presence  of  ( Yahweh)  my  God. 
C\  JUDGE  me  and  plead  my  cause  against  unkind  nations. 
From  deceitful  and  unjust  ones  deliver  me  (Yahweh). 
For,  O  Thou,  the  God  of  my  refuge,  why  dost  Thou  reject  me  ? 
Why  must  I  go  in  mourning  because  of  the  oppression  of  the  enemy  ? 
(While  they  say  to  me  all  the  day :  "  Where  is  thy  God  ?  ") 
(O)  send  forth  Thy  light  and  Thy  faithfulness  :  let  them  lead  me ; 
Let  them  bring  me  unto  Thy  holy  Mount,  unto  Thy  dwelling  places; 
I  would  come  unto  the  altar  of  Yahweh,  to  the  God  of  my  gladness. 
My  Rejoicing,  I  would  sing  Thy  praise  with  the  lyre,  (Yahweh)  my  God. 

Why  art  thou  cast  down,  O  my  soul,  and  moanest  upon  me  f 

Hope  thou  in  (  Yahweh) ,  for  yet  shall  I  sing  His  praise  ; 

{I  shall  sing  the  praise  of)  the  saving  acts  of  the  presence  of  {Yahweh)  my  God. 

These  Pss.  begin  Bk.  II.  They  were  originally  one,  as  is  evident  from  the 
dependence  of  43  upon  42,  the  repetition  of  4210  with  slight  variations  in  43'2, 
and  especially  from  the  Rf.  426, 12  43s,  which  divides  the  Pss.  into  three  equal 
Strs.  The  separation  was  made  for  liturgical  purposes.  Ps.  43  is  accordingly 
without  title,  the  only  orphan  in  the  group  of  |£ :  42-49.  This  is  possibly  the 
reason  why  37  Codd.  Kenn.  and  9  De  R.  combine  them,  for  the  ancient  Vrss. 
give  them  apart.  The  title  of  42  shows  that  it  was  a  ^23>B,  originally  in  i£, 
and  subsequently  in  £  and  Dft  {v.  Intr.  §§  26,  28,  32,  33).  It  begins  the 
usage  of  the  group  42-83  of  employing  dvtSm  instead  of  nin\  This,  in  the 
case  of  the  Pss.  of  3£,  was  due  to  IE  and  not  to  the  author.  The  structure  of 
the  poem  is  artistic  and  elegant.  The  author  uses  poetic  language,  chiefly 
classic  or  early.  There  are  an  unusual  number  of  cohortatives  425- 10  43*- 4. 
What  is  peculiar  is  -von  vh  mj  431,  and  the  stress  laid  on  the  combinations  of 
*?n  with  nouns:  0)*n  <?n  42s-9,  '•ySo  ht<  4210,  nij?D  ctdSn  432,  corner  Sn  434. 
The  a.X.  "'D  and  D"2"?n  42s  are  txt.  errs,  for  well-known  words.  There  is  a  close 
connection  with  44:  yvh  4210  43s  4425;  Bto  Tinmen  426-7- 12  437,  cf.  4426  La. 
3-0 ;  njT  Pss.  432  4410-  24;  but  so  far  as  can  be  traced  with  no  other  Literature. 
rv;  422,  cf.  Jo.  i20j  d>d  ^Dt<  42s  1816,  cf.  1264;   pen,  roar  of  crowd,  42s  65s; 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLIII.  367 

-pnux  42s,  as  2  S.  58;  nitttfB  Pss.  43s  I325-  7;  np  4210  43s,  as  3514  387;  trcj  -|aa> 
42s,  cf.  La.  212;  the  taunt  Pss.  424-  n  7910  115'2  Mi.  710  Jo.  217;  the  conception  of 
tears  as  food  Pss.  424  806;  of  divine  attributes  as  messengers  43s  85n- 12;  and 
of  billows  of  trouble  42s  185  691"2;  —  all  show  resemblance  with  a  variety  of 
literature,  but  without  sufficient  evidence  of  dependence.  The  poet  was  cer- 
tainly an  independent  writer  of  a  high  degree  of  talent.  The  ancient  tradition 
that  David  was  the  author  or  editor  of  the  entire  Psalter,  led  the  older  inter- 
preters to  think  of  David  as  the  author  of  this  Ps.  in  the  time  of  his  flight 
before  Absalom.  The  later  theory,  that  the  Pss.  of  It  were  composed  by 
members  of  the  Davidic  choirs,  made  them  contemporaries  of  David,  and 
thought  of  the  same  occasion  for  our  Ps.  But  Mount  Hermon  and  the 
sources  of  the  Jordan  seem  to  be  the  place  of  sojourn  of  the  poet,  v.",  and 
this  does  not  suit  the  locality  of  David's  flight;  and  his  situation  at  that  time 
was  quite  different  from  that  described  in  this  Ps.  The  internal  evidence 
points  to  a  Levitical  singer  who  had  been  accustomed  to  share  in  the  festival 
processions  in  the  holy  places  at  Jerusalem,  42s;  who  was  especially  at  home 
in  the  region  of  the  upper  Jordan  and  Mount  Hermon,  427;  and  whose 
reminiscences  are  so  fresh  and  vivid  that  he  could  hardly  have  been  long 
absent  from  them.  The  altar  and  the  holy  places  are  still  in  existence,  for 
the  author  longs  to  return  to  them,  422,  and  again  take  part  in  the  ritual 
of  worship,  42s-  6  43s* 4.  He  seems  to  have  been  one  of  the  earlier  exiles, 
before  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  one  of  the  companions  of  Jehoiachin. 


Str.  I.  is  composed  of  an  emblematic  tetrastich,  a  synth.  distich, 
and  a  synth.  tristich.  —  2-3.  As  a  hind\  emphatic.  The  exiles 
are  compared  to  the  thirsty  hind.  This  is  not  the  subject  of  verb, 
as  AV.,  RV.,  but  the  verb  is  in  a  relative  clause  :  that  longeth  after 
channels  of  water],  to  sate  the  thirst.  AV.,  RV.,  "  panteth  after 
the  water  brooks  "  is  sufficiently  near,  and  certainly  more  poetical, 
but  it  is  not  an  exact  translation  of  the  original.  —  So  longeth  my 
soul'],  present  experience  ||  doth  thirst],  emphatic  present.  The 
tt?£3,  in  Heb.,  is  the  seat  of  appetites,  emotions,  and  passions, 
cf.  6$2  84s.  —  For  thee,  Yahweh],  so  doubtless  in  Sfc;  but  IE 
changed  Yahweh  into  Elohim,  here  and  elsw.  j  and  so  it  appears 
in  all  Vrss.  The  proper  name  Yahweh  is  more  suited  to  the  con- 
text, and  so  is  used  here  and  throughout  the  Pss.  of  this  group. 
Yahweh  is  in  the  same  relation  to  the  thirsty  soul,  as  the  channels 
of  water  to  the  thirsty  hind.  —  the  God  of  my  life],  as  v.9 ;  by  slip 
of  copyist  changed  to  "  God  of  life,"  so  EVS.,  the  latter  as  the  pos- 
sessor and  source  of  life,  the  former  as  the  source  and  sustainer 
of  the  life  of  the  people,  as  the  living  waters  of  the  rivers  sus- 


368  PSALMS 

tain  the  life  of  the  hind. —  When  may  I  come~\,  longing  for  the 
time,  in  the  form  of  a  plea  for  a  speedy  return  from  exile.  —  to 
appear  in  the  presence  of  Yahweh],  in  the  courts  of  the  temple, 
taking  part  in  the  ceremonies  of  public  worship,  cf.  Ex.  34^ 
Ps.  84s.  It  is  probable  that  in  the  original  it  was,  "  see  the  face 
of  Yahweh,"  in  accordance  with  the  conception  of  His  theophanic 
presence  in  the  temple ;  but  later  writers,  shrinking  from  this 
primitive  idea,  modified  it  as  above,  owing  to  undue  awe  of  God 
and  the  exaggeration  of  His  transcendence.  —  4.  My  tears  are 
my  food],  taking  the  place  of  living  water  and  the  living  God,  who 
refuses  His  presence,  cf.  806  Jb.  324  La.  315.  —  day  and  night], 
long-continued,  uninterrupted  weeping.  —  While  they  say  unto 
me],  the  enemies,  v.1011,  who  have  taken  the  people  captive, — 
all  the  day"],  constantly  taunting  with  the  absence  of  the  God  for 
whom  they  thirsted. —  Where  is  thy  God '  ?],  as  7910  11  y  Mi.  710 
Jo.  217,  urging  the  impotence  of  the  national  God  of  Israel  to  save 
His  people  from  their  enemies.  This  taunt  is  really  the  occasion 
of  the  Ps.,  repeated  in  v.11,  and  probably  also  in  the  original  text 
of  432.  —  5.  These  things'],  not  those  which  precede,  but  those 
which  follow.  —  I  would  remember].  The  cohortative  form  ex- 
presses subjective  resolution.  The  only  relief  is  in  tearful  recol- 
lection of  the  past.  —  and  I  would  pour  out  my  soul],  give  vent  to 
sorrow  of  soul,  which  is  here,  in  connection  with  tears,  conceived 
as  melting  in  liquid  form,  cf.  1423  1  S.  i15  La.  219  Jb.  30™,  —  upon 
me],  connected  not  with  verb,  and  so  incorrectly  "  within  me," 
AV.,  but  with  "soul,"  which  in  Heb.  psychology  is  conceived  as 
resting  upon  the  conscious  self,  cf.  1424  La.  320  Jon.  28.  —  How 
I  used  to  pass  on],  frequentative,  of  habitual  worship,  cf.  551'. — 
to  the  majestic  tabernacle],  after  #,  the  temple  in  Jerusalem. 
MT.,  "  with  the  throng,"  the  crowd  of  worshippers  ;  and  "  go 
solemnly  with  them,"  cf.  Is.  3815 ;  or,  as  otherwise  pointed,  "  lead 
them  solemnly,"  are  difficult  to  justify  in  etymology,  syntax,  or 
usage;  and  are  probably  due  to  errors  of  early  copyists. —  With 
the  sound  of  jubilation  and  thanksgiving],  loud  festal  worship  with 
song  and  music,  cf.  47s  11815.  —  the  roar],  as  65s,  of  the  crowd 
of  people  in  the  procession,  —  the  pilgrim  band],  coming  up  to 
the  pilgrim  feasts  and  taking  part  in  the  processions  in  the  temple 
which  characterised  them.  —  6.    Rf.,  as  v.12  43s.      Why  art  thou 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLIII.  369 

cast  down  ?],  under  the  weight  of  grief  and  longing,  heavy  and 
grievous  though  it  be.  —  O  my  soul],  vocative ;  the  soul  as  the 
seat  of  sad  recollection,  present  sorrow,  and  longing  for  the 
future.  —  and  moanest  upon  me?].  The  soul  is  in  great  pain; 
cf.  v.11,  where  the  bones  of  the  body  ache  as  if  by  crushing,  and  v.10 
432,  where  one  goes  about  clad  in  black  as  in  funeral  procession ; 
and  so  the  soul  moans,  groans,  and  cries  out.  There  is  reason 
enough  for  all  this.  And  yet  there  is  much  greater  reason  against 
it,  for  the  expostulation  is  really  based  on  the  antithetical  ex- 
hortation :  Hope  thou  in  Yahweh~\.  Though  absent  apparently, 
He  will  not  abandon  His  people. — for  yet'],  the  time  will  surely 
come  again  when  I  will  sing  His  praise  in  the  Hallels  of  temple 
worship,  as  above,  v.5.  The  verb  was  probably  repeated  in  the 
original,  as  the  measure  requires  it,  but  was  left  off  by  a  prosaic 
copyist.  The  second  object  is  pi. :  saving  acts,  as  usual  with  such 
plurals,  and  not  abstract,  "salvation,"  Dr.,  "health,"  AV.,  RV. — 
of  the  presence],  the  divine  interposition  for  the  vindication  of  His 
people.  The  variations  in  the  Rf.  of  J£f  at  this  point  may  thus  be 
best  explained  by  taking  the  form  as  cstr.  rather  than  as  with  sf. 
3  pers.,  42°,  or  1  pers.,  4212  43s.  —  of  Yahweh  my  God].  "Yah- 
weh  "  is  needed  for  measure,  and  is  more  probable  in  itself,  as  in 
accord  with  usage  before  "my  God."     It  was  left  off  by  IE. 

Str.  II.  is  composed  of  an  embl.  tetrastich,  a  synth.  tristich,  and 
a  synth.  distich.  It  begins  with  a  recognition  of  the  actual  state  of 
soul,  against  which  the  poet  expostulated  in  v.6",  and  bases  on  it  a 
resolution.  —  7.  Therefore  I  would  remember] ,  which  reiterates  v.5a, 
only  what  would  now  be  remembered  is  not  so  much  the  ritual  of 
worship  as  Yahweh  Himself,  who  used  to  accept  it  and  grant  favour 
to  His  worshippers.  In  this  case  also  there  is  a  looking  back  to 
former  experiences  in  Jerusalem,  from  the  place  in  which  the  exiles 
are  now  tarrying.  — from  the  land  of  Jordan],  the  region  of  the 
upper  Jordan,  its  sources  in  the  Hermons,  the  several  peaks  of  this 
giant  mountain,  more  particularly  defined  as,  from  Mount  Mizar, 
a  peak  not  yet  identified,  probably  a  summit  in  antith.  with  the 
giant  peaks,  known  for  its  littleness,  possibly  on  the  West  Jordan 
range  (v.  Guthe,  Paldstina,  I.  S.  217  seq.).  This  situation,  at  the 
sources  of  the  Jordan,  suggests  the  rapids  as  a  metaphor  of  the 
trouble,  cf.   185  6912. — 8.    Deep  calleth  unto  deep].     The  deep 


370  PSALMS 

waters  are  personified  and  represented  as  calling  aloud  to  one 
another  in  their  noisy  descent.  —  at  the  sound  of  Thy  cataracts'], 
the  waterfalls  of  the  upper  Jordan.  There  is  no  usage  to  justify 
"  waterspouts,"  AV.,  RV.,  which  introduces  a  novel  idea,  alien  to 
the  context.  —  All  Thy  breakers  and  Thy  billows'].  The  waves 
of  the  river,  in  their  agitated  condition,  break  over  and  roll  over 
the  man  who  is  struggling  against  their  power.  They  are  all  con- 
ceived as  Yahweh's,  because  the  river  of  trouble  in  which  the 
people  are  struggling  is  His ;  and  He  has  agitated  it  against  His 
people  with  disciplinary  purpose.  — are  gone  over  me].  The  exiles 
are  submerged  in  their  troubles  and  are  drowning.  The  nation  is 
in  deadly  peril.  —  9.  Day  by  day],  day  after  day,  continually,  since 
the  trouble  came,  pf,  "  By  day,"  followed  by  EVS.,  was  due  to  the 
gloss,  "by  night,"  to  assimilate  it  to  v.4.  —  is  with  me  prayer  unto 
the  God  of  my  life],  as  v.3.  This  is  in  accord  with  the  painful  situa- 
tion described  above.  But  a  scribe  probably  inserted  a  marginal 
petition  :  "  May  Yahweh  command  His  kindness,"  which,  when  it 
became  a  part  of  the  text,  had  to  be  regarded  as  an  expression  of 
confidence  in  God  :  "  will  command."  A  later  glossator  inserted 
"  His  song,"  a  song  to  Him  to  correspond  with  the  emphasis  on 
ritual  worship,  v.5.  —  10.  /  would  say],  in  the  remembrance  of 
Yahweh,  cf.  v.7.  —  to  the  God  of  my  crag],  the  God  who  is  my 
crag,  to  whom  I  resort  as  a  refuge ;  doubtless  suggested  also  by 
the  situation  in  the  highlands  of  the  upper  Jordan.  —  Why  dost 
Thou  forget  me  ?].  So  apparently  from  the  troubles  to  which  He 
has  given  them  over.  —  Why  must  I  go  in  mourning],  as  one  be- 
reaved, and  clad  in  dark  and  dirty  garments,  3514  s&7  43*. — 
because  of  the  oppression  of  the  enemy  ?]  The  enemy  have  defeated 
the  people  of  Yahweh,  have  slain  them,  and  carried  into  captivity 
a  remnant  of  mourners. — 11.  While  the  slayer  crushes  in  my 
bones],  so,  by  a  conflation  of  (3  and  3,  each  of  which  uses  one 
of  two  similar  forms,  both  needed  for  measure,  one  omitted  by 
mistake  by  each  Vrs.  The  enemy  slays  the  people  of  God, 
crushing  their  bones  by  iron  maces  and  other  weapons.  This 
is  real  and  not  figurative.  At  the  same  time  mine  adversaries 
do  reproach  me],  taking  advantage  of  their  victory  and  of  the 
weakness  of  their  captives  in  taunting  them,  as  v.4*. 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLIII.  37 1 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  a  syn.  couplet,  a  synth.  tristich,  and 
a  synth.  tetrastich.  —  431.  O  judge  me  and  plead  my  cause],  both 
should  be  cohortatives  of  urgent  petition  for  vindication.  —  deliver 
me],  jussive,  at  close  of  the  syn.  couplet.  The  divine  name  has 
by  a  prosaic  copyist's  mistake  been  removed  from  the  latter  verb, 
where  the  measure  requires  it,  and  inserted  between  the  two 
imvs.,  making  the  line  too  long.  —  against  unkind  nations],  in  the 
earlier  sense  :  cruel,  vindictive,  the  enemies  of  the  previous  Str.  || 
deceitful  and  unjust  ones],  not  only  cruel,  but  crafty  and  wicked. 
AV.,  RV.  give  the  later  sense,  "ungodly  nation."  —  2.  For  O 
Thou,  the  God  of  my  refuge].  Who  art  my  refuge,  the  same 
idiom  as  42s- 10,  suggested  by  the  saving  acts  of  the  presence; 
cf.  Rf.  —  Why  dost  Thou  reject  me?],  stronger  than  forget,  4210, 
the  statement  of  the  previous  Str.,  followed  by  the  same  line 
as  42106,  to  which  should  be  added  42116  to  complete  the  number 
of  lines  of  the  Str.,  and  also  to  repeat  the  significant  taunt.  — 
3.  O  send  forth],  probably  cohort.,  as  other  imvs.  of  Str.  — 
Thy  light],  shining  from  the  divine  presence  in  the  temple,  cf. 
47  271  3610  444  8916,  joined  with  Thy  faithfulness,  both  personi- 
fied, as  angel  messengers,  cf.  S^u' 12.  —  Let  them  lead  me  ||  bring 
me],  out  of  exile,  away  from  the  divine  presence,  back  to  the 
divine  presence  in  the  temple,  —  unto  Thy  holy  Mount],  Zion,  the 
sacred  place  of  Yahweh  ||  unto  Thy  dwelling  places],  the  precincts 
and  various  buildings  of  the  temple  on  the  sacred  mountain,  cf. 
84s  132s- 7.  —  4.  /  would  come],  following  the  lead  of  Yahweh's 
messengers,  promptly  responding  to  their  call,  —  unto  the  altar 
of  Yahweh],  in  the  temple  court,  —  to  the  God  of  my  gladness], 
who  is  my  gladness,  the  source  and  object  of  it.  This  is  the  same 
idiom  as  that  in  v.2.  By  a  copyist's  mistake,  omitting  the  suffix, 
"  gladness "  has  become  construct  before  my  Rejoicing],  mak- 
ing the  one  line  too  long,  the  other  too  short.  The  latter  is  really 
an  epithet  of  God  beginning  the  last  line  emphatically.  The  Str. 
closes  before  the  Rf.  with  the  same  vow  as  in  the  Rf.  itself,  making 
a  proper  climax  to  the  Ps.,  —  /  would  sing  Thy  praise],  in  the 
ritual  worship  of  song,  —  with  the  lyre],  to  the  accompaniment  of 
this  musical  instrument  which  is  most  commonly  used  in  such 
worship,  cf.  $y. 


372  PSALMS 


XLII. 


2.  s;st]  a.X.  \f/,  vb.  2  f.  requires  P^»K  221  Je.  146  Pr.  519,  01s.,  Bo.,  Bi.,  We., 
Oort,  Che.,  Du.;  haplog.  because  of  r  of  following  vb.  The  1.  needs  an  addi- 
tional word;  rd.  ^dd  for  :  <f:..  —  J*Vgp]  Qa*  irnpf.  in  rel.  clause,  fjnj  elsw. 
Jo.  I23  of  niir  nisro  c.  sn.  BDB  long  for, 1&  iiwrodec,  V  desiderat,3  praeparata 
ad.  ,£,  Rabb.,  Luth.,  Calv.,  Ham.,  al.,  think  of  the  cry  of  the  animal ;  cf.  r\-;\ 
of  the  bull,  )HV  of  the  lion  ;  tempting,  but  dub.  —  "?;•]  ||  ^n,  error  of  late  style, 
which  confuses  the  two  preps.,  v.  BDB.  iroj  is  often  elsw.  the  seat  of  appe- 
tites {v.  179),  and  J  of  emotions  and  passions:  (a)  desire;  with  terms  ex- 
pressing desire,  ':  pinh  10 3  Is.  26s,  'J  nn'w  Pss.  84s  11981,  cf.  v.20;  used  alone 
2712,  cf.  3525  413;  'jS  according  to  one's  desire  7818  Dt.  21 14  Je.  341G;  '11  at 
one's  desire  Ps.  10522  Ez.  i62T;  'j  KtPj  lift  up  the  soul,  desire,  Pss.  24*  251  86* 
1438  Dt.  2415  2  S.  1414  Je.  2227  4414  Ho.  48  Pr.  198.  (b)  sorrow  and  distress 
in  various  phrs.  Pss.  64  57?  10726  11928;  'j  njnp  884,  cf.  1234;  'j  n:>«  3513 
Is.  58?-5;  'J  ^';  nsBVH  Ps.  42s,  cf.  Jb.  3016  La.  212;  ':  ^nmntyn  Pss.  42s-12  43s, 
(*p)  42",  cf.  44^  La.  j*.  (c)  joy  Pss.  86*  94™  1383;  Sun  j  359  Is.  61™. 
(</)  /tfw  Ps.  63s,  cf.  Gn.  343  (J),  (e)  hatred,  'j  nwfr  Ps.  ii5  Is.  i14,  cf.  2  S.  5s. 
(/)  soothing,  refreshment,  Ps.  1312,  'J  a»swi  198  3517  (?)  Ru.  415  Ps.  2513  La. 
I11-16-19,  cf.  Ps.  23:?.  —  3.  'n  sxs]  deum  fortem  viventem  3,  irpbs  rbv  Qedv 
t6v  $C)vtol  <{£,  are  condensation  ;  rd.  for  better  measure  "Pi  Vn1?  as  v.9,  cf.  843, 
so  Du.,  Che.  —  ™"w]  1  subordinate,  Niph.  impf.;  so  4§,  3,  c.  ace.  ue,  cf. 
Ex.  2315  34^  Dt.  1616  3111  1  S.  i22  Is.  i12,  all  regarded  by  Ges.,  Bu.,  SS.,Che., 
as  for  original  Qal,  see  the  face  of,  changed  for  dogmatic  reasons  to  Niph. 
appear  in  the  presence  of;  so  Ba.,  Du.,  We.,  al.,  rd.  Qal,  see  the  face  of  Yah- 
weh  in  the  temple.  —  4.  nn\-i]  emph.  present.  —  *nj?D"|]  sg.  coll.;  chiefly  poetic 
in  Je.  and  cotemp.  —  ">b*o]  Qal.  inf.  cstr.,  3  temp.,  cf.  v.11  c-cso,  where  sf. 
is  interpretive  and  not  original.  —  5.  n^s]  emph.  —  ^nsTK]  Qal  cohort,  sub- 
jective resolution,  followed  by  1  coord,  with  cohort.  hddc;n,  Dr.§52.  —  »•??].  The 
•J'-::  in  Heb.  Psychology  is  concerned  equally  with  the  body  as  resting  upon 
the  basis  of  the  person,  v.  BDB. —  -oi\v  t]  frequentative,  v.  Dr.§ 80.  —  ica] 
a.X.  in  the  throng,  improb. ;  (5  iv  rdwcf  (tktjvtjs  ;  V  in  locum  tabernaculi  — 
lb  booth,  so  0,  2  ;  3  ad  umbraculum,  so  Aq.,  &,  cf.  76*  Qr.  27s.  The  com- 
plement rna  "ip  favours  reference  to  temple.  — "T!*]  =  DTPK  Ges.L-5426  ^mi 
but  sf.  unusual  and  difficult,  Ges.L121  4;  elsw.  Is.  3815  D-jth  -walk  deliberately 
in  life,  Schnurer  ;  Dy.,  Bi.,  Ba.,  Kau.,  Dr.,  would  rd.  Pi.  D"HN  lead  slowly,  but 
without  support  in  classic  Heb.  N.H.  uses  Pi.  for  lead  slowly .  3  tacebo  usque 
favours  D"HK.  <S  davfiaarris  as  adj.  c.  ffKtjVTJs ;  U  tabernaculi  admirabilis,  so 
Kenn.,  Street.  Du.  is  followed  by  Ba.  in  the  conjecture  Dnn«  n'D3,  D*vtN  as 
163;  but  more  prob.  n*n«  n.f.  majesty,  Lowth,  adj.  rry'iN  majestic  tabernacle  ; 
this  gives  excellent  sense  and  is  to  be  preferred.  —  pen]  (jj16)  croivd,  multi- 
tude, BDB  ;  as  3,  Aq.,  J5,  Ba.,  al.,  not  elsw.  \p  in  this  sense  ;  but  in  Je.,  Ez., 
Ps.  65s  +  in  the  primary  mng.  murmur,  roar,  made  by  a  crowd  of  people, 
so  Du.  here,  as  ©  vxov>  5J  sonus,  Aug.     The  previous  context  favours  noise. 


PSALMS   XLII.-XLIII.  373 

—  Jisn]  ptc.  X  jjh  keep  a  pilgrim'' s  feast,  celebrated  by  processions  and  dances; 
so  prob.  7611  (6),  also  Ex.  51  2314  (JE)  Na.  21  +j  cf.  Ps.  10727  reel  on  sea, 
as  if  in  festival  excesses.  —  6.  =  v.1'2  =  43s,  Rf.  —  *nr]  (j2)  =  why  v.12-12 
435'6  523,  unusual  for  noS  v.10  (21). — ntftntfn]  fHithp.  impf.  v.6- 7- 12  43s; 
nnv  be  cast  down,  despairing,  cf.  Ps.  3514  387.  —  '9J|^]  1  consec.  Qal  impf. 
nsn  after  impf.  is  difficult.  It  would  indicate  emph.  change  of  tense,  but  it 
is  not  original.  Rf.  v.12  =  43s  'DiirrnDl  is  tempting,  as  Ko.syntax>§366n-,  as  <£§, 
U,  2,  j$,  but  it  would  make  1.  too  long;  rd.  1  coord.  —  mp  "o]  two  accents 
required ;  Makkeph  of  v.12  43s  is  incorrect.  —  n^'v^]  =  pyw\  v.12  43s,  pi. 
cstr.  njna"  saving  acts,  acts  of  salvation  ;  so  11613:  3  pi.,  but  <S  n>nus>  (v.j3). 

—  vjd]  is  due  to  a  mistaken  separation  of  lines,  >nht*  beginning  next  Str. 
V.12  and  435  have  \~rViO  \]fl;  but  1  was  not  in  text  of  <&  in  v.6  43s.  It  is  a  later 
insertion.  Rd.  therefore  tiSn  >jc,  then  better  \|9  than  vi^,  the  latter  inter- 
pretation of  form  has  forced  the  insertion  of  \  It  is  difficult  to  see  a  good 
reason  for  such  a  short  1.  We  may  restore  the  two  missing  beats  by  prefixing 
miN,  omitted  as  a  repetition,  and  reading  \~iSn  '\  '1  having  been  omitted  by  U. 

—  7.  Di^Dnn]  a.X.,  pi.  jmnn,  two  or  three  peaks  of  Hermon,  one  of  which 
may  be  "Vjfc>  (Rob. m-  357,  Badeker,  Palestine,  301)  ;  c_  may  have  arisen  from 
dittog.,  as  Gr.  —  n?XD]  proper  name  of  unknown  mountain.  <&  iiucpov,  3  mi- 
nimo,  as  adj.  from  -^/n?*,  /z7//<?,  insignificant,  Gn.  1920  Jb.  87.  It  prob.  indi- 
cates more  definitely  the  locality  of  the  poet,  a  smaller  mt.  in  the  upper  Jor- 
dan region,  of  the  East  Jordan  range.  Ba.  interprets  fD  as  far  fro?n,  and 
thinks  of  Zion  as  the  little  mountain  ;  but  this  seems  to  be  far  fetched.  Ba. 
also  interprets  '2  of  previous  clause  as  far  from,  and  thinks  of  the  psalmist  as 
stating  his  absence  from  the  holy  land :  Hermon  in  the  north  and  Zion  in  the 
south.  But  it  is  most  probable  that  he  indicates  his  temporary  sojourn.  The 
following  context  refers  to  the  rapids  of  the  Jordan.  —  8.  t  T*?."1*?]  elsw.  2  S.  5s 
gutter,  water  course ;  here  waterfall,  cataract,  Hu.,  De.,  Pe.,  Du.,  as  <&,  3  ; 
not  water  run  as  Gr.,  Ba.,  or  water  spouts  as  Dr.  —  9.  DD^]  (/2)  by  day,  cf. 
v.4;  rd.  with  Du.  dv  dv.  —  mm]  only  here  in  a  Ps.  of  IE  is  a  gl.  —  '•non  nw^] 
change  of  subj.  from  2  sg.  to  3  sg.  is  suspicious  ;  it  is  prob.  a  gl.  of  confidence 
of  later  editor,  or  possibly  of  petition,  TDfl  nix  phr.  a.X.  This  coming  into 
text,  it  was  natural  to  insert  rh^  as  v.4,  only  in  the  later  style  rhhi.  This 
called  for  another  insertion,  which  ace.  to  $%  is  nmtf  =  ">mtJ>  his  song.  The 
Levitical  singer  sings  the  songs  of  Zion  in  his  banishment.  (g  S^Xwcrei  =  mm 
he  instructs,  teaches  me,  as  2514  5 18  14719,  is  variation  of  gl.  Ols.,  We.,  Be., 
Du.,  regard  the  whole  as  gl.  The  Str.  is  just  this  one  1.  too  long.  — 10.  mCw] 
fully  written  cohort.  Qal  n^N  I  would  say,  as  v.5  maw.  —  >yfco  ShS]  either  God 
of  my  crag  (sS3)  as  "God  of  my  life,"  or  as  4§  paraphrase  dvriXrjTTTojp  fiov  e'i 
thou  art  my  helper,  3  vocative  petra  mea ;  or  in  apposition,  as  Pe.,  Dr. — 
pnSa]  amidst  (Dr.)  or  because  of  (Pe.)  oppression  by  an  enemy  ;  cf.  432 
4425.  tyrh  n.m.  not  elsw.  in  \p,  but  Ex.  39  (E)  2  K.  134. —  11.  f "?"?.]  elsw. 
Ez.  2I27  as  noun,  both  dub.  <*£  iv  r£  KaradXaordai  ra  6<ttcL  fiov,  so  jg»,  6  ;  3  cum 
me  interfcerent  in  ossibus  meis.  nxn  as  vb.  always  kill,  murder.  <JH  must  have 
had  a  different  text,  prob.  y-\2  inf.  cstr.  pin  crush.     The  reference  to  bones 


374  PSALMS 

in  agony  of  suffering  is  common  in  \f/  {v.  63).  mn  is  not  harmonious  with 
bones,  and  can  only  be  interpreted  with  suffix  as  pregnant  with  another  word. 
The  1.  lacks  a  word.  It  is  improb.  that  this  word,  so  needed  for  sense  and 
measure,  was  omitted  in  original  text.  If  3  depends  on  runs  and  ©  upon 
pna,  it  is  easy  to  find  an  original  run  7-0,  the  p  being  omitted  because  of  its 
repetition  =  while  the  slayer  crushes  in  my  bones. 

XLIII. 

1.  cnSs]  has  been  transposed  from  close  of  v.,  making  1.  1  too  long  and 
1.  2  too  short.  —  *ud]  Dr.,  Ba\,  pregnant  (so  as  to  rescue  from) ;  >u  coll.  (v. 
21)  10513  14720;  so  B*K.  —  2.  *nj7D  T^n]  dub.,  cf.  l,n  elsw.  42s-  9- 10  43*.  <S  6 
Geds  KpaTaidifid  fiov,  3  deus  fortitndo  mea.  Sn  might  be  interp.  either  as 
constr.  or  abs.,  but  not  so  tv-n;  therefore  rd.  ^n.  —  ^nru?]  Qal  pf.  emph.  pres- 
ent. \  n:r  Qal,  reject,  in  \f/  sub),  always  God;  elsw.  4410  (=6o12=  1081*2) 
4424  603  741  778  8815  8939.  —  *]SnnK]  for  jSn;  prob.  originally  the  same.  This 
Str.  lacks  a  line.  Du.  suggests  4246  =  Uh;  the  same  in  each  Str.  —  3.  nStf] 
prob.  cohort.  nn^L",  the  use  of  Makkeph  without  reason  crushing  out  final  n. 
—  n^n]  emph.  demonstr.  summing  up.  —  -pnp  in]  2P  35  151  48s  g<f. — 
4.  nsos*>]  cf.  n-ojN  42s,  rnDW  4210.  Is  it  here  the  same,  or  is  it  apod,  of 
imv.,  or  with  1  subordinate?  It  is  dub.  whether  )  is  original,  and  whether  it 
may  not  be  interpretive.  —  rryzt;  Ss]  with  ,S,j)  makes  1.  too  long.  >S,J  is 
needed  in  next  1.  We  would  expect  \~nic»  as  42s- 9- 10  432  unto  God  (of)  my 
gladness.  But  (3  rbv  eixppalvovra  ttjv  vedrrjrd  fiov  =  ni>'j  notrj  3  exsultationis 
meae.  It  is  hard  to  see  how  (55  and  |^  can  be  traced  to  same  original ;  prob. 
<5  paraphrases.  The  et  of  3  may  be  interpretation  or  be  based  upon  »S\n, 
prob.  former ;  but  (5  has  no  conj.  before  spin,  prob.  it  was  not  original  any 
more  than  el  of  3  in  previous  1.  Therefore  there  is  no  obstacle  to  reading 
qiw  ,s,j;  then  jS^i  n.  as  45 16  6513  is  an  ascription  to  God  ||  'nnDC  e.g.  my 
rejoicing.  —  \T?N  dtiSn]  (g  wpie  6  0e6s  fiov  ;  3,  1T,  deus,  deus  mens;  rd. 
>nsN  mm  as  required  by  measure. 

PSALM   XLIV.,  4  str.  83. 

Ps.  44  was  a  national  prayer  during  the  Exile:  (1)  relating 
the  divine  favour  to  the  fathers  at  the  conquest  of  the  Holy  Land 
(v.2a  3~4)  ;  (2)  the  present  distress  from  powerful  and  cruel  ene- 
mies (v.1113"15)  ;  (3)  expostulating  with  Yahweh  for  breach  of  the 
covenant  (v.18-20-23) ;  (4)  pleading  that  He  will  interpose  to  help 
(v.24-27).  To  this  glosses  were  added  at  various  times :  (a)  con- 
fidence in  God,  with  the  sense  of  great  shame  (v.57  16"17)  ;  (6)  ex- 
ultation and  laudation  of  God  for  victory  (v.6 ■8"9)  ;  (c)  sense  of 
shame  from  recent  defeat  (v.1012),  and  plea  of  innocence  of 
idolatry  (v.2122). 


tsalm  xliv.  375 

YAHWEH,  with  our  ears  we  have  heard, 

Our  fathers  have  told  it  to  us ; 

Nations  Thou  didst  dispossess,  and  plant  them  ; 

Peoples  Thou  didst  afflict,  and  cause  them  to  spread  out. 

For  not  by  their  own  sword  did  they  possess  the  land, 

Neither  did  their  own  arm  give  them  victory ; 

But  it  was  Thy  right  hand  and  Thine  arm  : 

And  with  the  light  of  Thy  face  Thou  didst  favour  them. 
HT HOU  makest  us  turn  back  from  the  adversaries, 

And  they  that  hate  us  plunder  at  their  will. 

Thou  sellest  Thy  people  for  no  wealth, 

And  dost  not  make  great  gain  by  their  price. 

We  are  a  reproach  to  our  neighbours, 

A  scorn  and  a  derision  to  them  that  are  round  about  us. 

Thou  makest  us  a  taunt  song  among  the  nations, 

A  shaking  of  the  head  among  the  peoples. 
""THIS  has  come  upon  us,  and  we  have  not  forgotten  Thee. 

We  have  not  dealt  falsely  against  Thy  covenant. 

Our  mind  is  not  turned  backward, 

And  our  steps  have  not  declined  from  Thy  path. 

Thou  hast  crushed  us  down  in  the  place  of  jackals, 

And  overwhelmed  us  in  dense  darkness. 

Yea,  for  Thy  sake  we  were  killed  all  the  day, 

We  were  counted  as  sheep  for  the  slaughter. 
r\  arouse  Thyself,  why  sleepest  Thou  ? 

O  awake,  cast  not  off  forever. 

Why  hidest  Thou  Thy  face, 

Forgettest  our  affliction  and  our  oppression  ? 

For  our  soul  doth  sink  down  to  the  dust, 

And  our  body  doth  cleave  to  the  earth. 

O  arise  for  help  for  us, 

And  ransom  us  for  Thy  kindness'  sake. 

Ps.  44  was  first  a  S>3e»D,  then  in  I&,  &,  and  IBlfc  (v.  Intr.  §§  28,  32,  33). 
It  was  regarded  as  prophetic  of  Maccabean  times  by  the  ancient  Antiochean 
school,  Theodore  of  Mopsuestia,  Theodoret,  and  Chrysostom ;  so  by  an  early 
Commentary  wrongly  ascribed  to  Bede,  from  which  the  prefaces  of  the  Paris 
Psalter  were  derived  (v.  Bruce,  Anglo-Saxon  Version  of  the  Book  of  Psalms, 
commonly  known  as  the  Paris  Psalter,  1894).  So  also  Nicolaus  de  Lyra,  Calv., 
al.  Gr.,  Now.,  Ba.,  We.,  Kau.,  Venema,  Dathe,  Ros.,  Ols.,  regard  the  Ps.  as 
Maccabean.  Hi.  thinks  of  the  defeat  of  Joseph  and  Azarias  at  Jamnia, 
1  Mac.  55(ML>;  Bu.  of  the  defeat  of  Judas  at  Beth  Zacharias,  1  Mac.  628s(i-. 
But  neither  of  these  defeats  suits  the  situation  implied  in  this  Ps.  The 
reasons  adduced  for  so  late  a  date  are:  (1)  the  reference  to  the  ancient 
history  of  the  nation,  v.2-4.  But  the  reference  to  the  dispossession  of  the 
Canaanites  and  taking  possession  of  the  land  was  suitable  at  any  date  sub- 
sequent to  it.  It  is  indeed  characteristic  of  D;  cf.  2  S.  718-24  Is.  637s(i-. 
(2)  The  emphasis  upon  fidelity  to  God  and  denial  of  idolatry.     But  there  is 


376  PSALMS 

no  evidence  of  a  consciousness  of  P.  The  covenant,  v.'8,  is  a  term  of  D. 
The  denial  of  idolatry,  v.21,  is  a  gloss.  (3)  Religious  persecution,  v.28,  which 
was  not  before  Antiochus,  168  B.C.  But  the  persecution  is  yhy  as  in  69s,  and 
of  Israel  by  the  nations,  which  was  true  enough  in  preexilic  as  well  as  in 
exilic  and  early  postexilic  times.  It  is  not  a  persecution  of  the  righteous  by 
the  wicked.  There  are  several  phrases  which  are  connected  with  other  lit- 
erature:  (1)  D.-VD^a  rhyo  SjJfl  v.-6,  cf.  lib.  I5.  This,  with  its  complement 
anp  >D*0,  makes  a  pentameter  in  the  midst  of  trimeters.  Besides,  it  is  too 
strong  a  statement  at  the  beginning,  making  an  anticlimax.  It  is  a  gloss. 
(2)  V.106  irnwasa  nxh  kSi=  6012  =  10812.  Doubtless  6012  is  the  original, 
and  the  couplet  is  a  gloss  here;   it  is  not  suited  to  the  context.     (3)  V.14 

The  only  difference  is  that  n&vr  stands  for  U"n.  But  the  former  has  been 
assimilated  by  copyist's  error  to  v.15,  and  u«n  was  doubtless  original.  Ps.  79 
is  a  mosaic  of  earlier  pieces,  and  it  is  improbable,  therefore,  that  in  this  v.  it 
should  have  the  original  of  44.  The  first  clause  is  given  in  the  3  sg.  in  8942 
and  in  I  sg.  in  3112,  of  which  89  is  the  earlier.  89 A  and  44  have  a  similar 
historical  situation,  and  the  phr.  is  common  to  them  from  this  common  situa- 
tion. V.15a  ^rc,  as  in  691'2,  is  based  on  Je.  249.  V.156  pm  "MD,  cf.  228,  is 
based  on  Je.  1816.  V.16  >is  nca  phr.  of  2  Ch.  3221  Ezr.  97  Dn.  g1- 8  (but  also 
Je.  719).  This  is  a  couplet  using  1  sg.  instead  of  1  pi.,  and  is  doubtless  a 
gloss.  V.176  opiPDl  3MN  \}D3  =  83;  phr.  nowhere  else,  doubtless  derived  from 
Ps.  8  and  a  gl.  V.196  yns  »jd  ij-cn  qt\\  cf.  Jb.  317  -|-nn  >jd  nam  nan  cn. 
These  are  similar  phrases,  but  of  different  construction,  and  there  is  no 
evidence  of  dependence.  V.20  D*jn  DlpO  =  Don  pjno  Je.  910  io22  49s3  5 137. 
Y.~  niD^n  n.f.  hidden  thittgs,  elsw.  Jb.  u6  2811  (sg.).  This  v.  is  a  gloss. 
V.23  nnao  fKia  =  Je.  123  nnao1?  fNX2.  V.*27  -pon  fpcS  =  65;  the  latter  doubtless 
is  earlier.  So  far  as  this  line  of  evidence  goes,  it  shows  nearness  to  Je.,  Ps. 
89A,  and  favours  the  early  exile.  The  reference  to  the  ancient  history  of  the 
nation,  v.  '2"4,  is  in  the  style  of  225  809-16  2  S.  J22'2*  Is.  63  and  Je.;  the  refer- 
ence to  the  jm?  in  style  of  Is.2  and  Ps.  8911-  22;  and  -p:o  -\in  reminds  of  Is.  63s. 
The  selling  of  Israel,  v.13,  as  Dt.  3230  Is.  501.  nna  "\pv  nS  v.18,  cf.  Is.  63s. 
In  Ps.  89s4  it  is  the  covenant  with  David,  here  the  covenant  with  Israel  at 
Iloreb  ;  but  the  two  are  parallel  and  the  situation  is  similar.  The  evidence 
from  these  references  favours  a  similar  situation  to  Pss.  22,  80,  89,  dependence 
on  Je.  and  connection  with  Is.2.  The  Ps.  is  not  homogeneous.  In  its  pres- 
ent form  it  has  four  parts:  (1)  v.2"9,  20  1. ;  (2)  v.1(M7,  16  l.j  (3)  v.18"23,  12  1. ; 
(4)  v.25-27,  8  1.  There  are  many  glosses.  We  have  already  seen  that  v.lc  is 
a  gloss ;  it  changes  the  1  pi.  of  Ps.  to  1  sg.  Two  other  couplets  having  1  sg. 
are  likewise  glosses,  v.5-  7,  the  latter  a  tame  repetition  of  v.4.  These  three 
glosses  doubtless  came  from  the  same  hand.  But  these  glosses  carry  with 
them  several  others :  v.16  has  v.17  dependent  upon  it,  which  for  another  reason 


PSALM   XLIV.  377 

may  be  regarded  as  a  gloss.  These  two  couplets,  v.5- "  and  v.16-1-,  with  I  pcrs. 
express  deep  shame  for  the  situation  in  which  the  people  is  placed  and  a 
confidence  in  the  divine  King.  These  may  have  come  from  IE.  V.5-  7  as  gl. 
carry  with  them  the  intervening  v.°,  which  must  have  been  inserted  between 
the  two  halves  of  this  tetrastich.  Indeed,  this  v.  is  of  a  different  tone  from 
that  of  the  Str.,  introducing  the  triumphant  and  defiant  strain  which  appears 
in  v.8-9  also.  These  three  verses  doubtless  were  inserted  by  the  same  hand. 
We  have  seen  that  the  pentameter  v.25  is  also  a  gloss  of  intensification  which 
may  have  come  from  the  same  hand.  Thus  Part  I.  is  reduced  to  a  simple, 
homogeneous  octastich,  just  the  same  as  Part  IV.  It  is  altogether  probable, 
therefore,  that  the  intervening  parts  have  been  enlarged  from  this  normal 
length  to  their  present  form.  A  critical  examination  makes  this  evident.  As 
we  have  seen  already,  v.10- 16- 17  are  glosses.  V.12  is  a  pentameter  ;  either  it  is 
a  gloss  or  a  word  is  missing,  probably  the  former.  Thus  Part  II.  is  reduced 
to  an  octastich.  V.10- 12  have  a  different  tone  from  the  glosses  just  considered, 
and  imply  a  recent  defeat,  possibly  the  defeat  of  Judas  the  Maccabee.  In 
Part  III.  v.21-  22  are  complementary  and  interrupt  the  simple  order  of  thought 
by  a  conditional  clause,  which  reminds  us  of  the  protestations  of  innocence 
characteristic  of  the  book  of  Job  and  without  analogy  in  early  Literature. 
It  is  probably  Maccabean.  Thus  the  Ps.  has  four  equal  parts:  (i)  Historical 
retrospect  of  divine  favour  to  Israel.  (2)  Experience  of  present  disaster. 
(3)  Protest  and  appeal  based  on  the  covenant.  (4)  Petition  for  speedy  help. 
The  original  Ps.  is  best  explained  from  the  troublous  times  of  the  late  Persian 
period,  as  Ew.,  RS. 

Str.  I.  has  four  syn.  couplets.  —  2.  Yahweh~\,  for  which  15 
substituted  Elohim,  —  with  our  ears  we  have  heard],  oral  in- 
struction over  against  written ;  not,  however,  depreciating  the 
latter,  or  implying  ignorance  of  such  narratives.  —  Our  fathers 
have  told  it  to  us],  the  story  of  the  conquest  of  the  Holy  Land, 
v.3"4;  cf.  Ex.  io2  i226sq-  Dt.  620sq-  Pss.  2231  78s.  This  was  empha- 
sised by  the  insertion  by  an  editor  of  the  clause  :  "  The  work 
Thou  didst  work  in  their  day,"  after  Hb.  15,  victories,  as  Ps.  7412, 
wrought  by  divine  power  in  the  lifetime  of  the  fathers  of  the 
nation,  the  story  having  been  transmitted  orally  through  their 
posterity.  This  editor  also  added,  —  in  days  of  old~\,  as  Mi.  720 
Is.  3726  Je.  4626,  the  forefront  of  the  history  of  Israel.  The  same 
editor  prefixed,  —  Thou,  with  Thy  hand,  to  v.3"  to  emphasise  that 
it  was  God's  hand  that  did  it.  But  this  is  premature.  A  term  of 
J  and  Is.  is  used  instead  of  those  of  v.4  and  the  measure  is  de- 
stroyed.—  3.  Nations  ||  Peoples'],  the  inhabitants  of  Canaan  at  the 
Conquest.  —  Thou  didst  dispossess  ||  afflict'],  by  defeat  and  slaugh- 


378  PSALMS 

ter,  as  the  context  suggests.  —  and  plant  them],  the  fathers  of  the 
nation,  as  a  vine,  8o9  16,  or  as  a  tree  in  the  ground,  cf.  Am.  915.  — 
cause  them  to  spread  out],  continuing  the  figure  as  8012.  It  is 
possible,  however,  to  regard  the  nations  as  the  obj.  of  the  verb 
with  <&,  3,  and  translate,  "  send  forth,"  "  cast  them  out,"  as  PBV., 
AV.  —  4.  For  not  by  their  own  sword  \  their  own  arm],  the 
strength,  number,  and  discipline  of  their  armies,  cf.  208  3316~17, 
strongly  stated.—  Thy  right  hand '],  phr.  of  Ex.  15°  12  Is.2  ||  Thine 
arm"],  phr.  of  D,  Je.,  Is.2. — did  they  possess  the  land],  win  the 
victory,  by  which  the  land  became  theirs. — And  with  the  light 
of  Thy  face],  2  subj.  of  following  verb,  as  3* ;  wrongly  attached  to 
the  previous  line  by  Vrss.,  destroying  the  measures.  —  Thou  didst 
favour  them],  the  divine  face  shining  with  the  light  of  favour 
upon  His  people,  cf.  47  43s  804  8$2. 

5-9  are  insertions  between  v.1-4,  telling  of  the  conquest  of 
Canaan,  and  v.10"17,  telling  of  present  distress.  Their  strain  is 
victory  in  the  present  and  future,  and  not  in  the  past ;  and  so 
is  inconsistent  with  the  following  context.  The  one  using  1  sg. 
belongs  to  a  period  of  renewed  confidence,  possibly  35,  the  other, 
using  1  pi.,  to  times  of  victory,  probably  Maccabean. 

Thou  art  my  King,  O  God, 
Commander  of  victories  for  Jacob. 
For  not  in  mine  own  bow  do  I  trust, 
And  mine  own  sword  cannot  give  victory. 

5.  Thou  art  my  King,  O  God~\.  Elohim  here  is  probably 
original.  God  is  King  of  Israel,  frequently  in  if/;  cf.  io16  2910, 
and  especially  the  royal  Pss.,  96-100 ;  ||  Co?nmander],  as  (3, 
more  probable  than  the  imv.  "  command  "  of  %}  and  other  Vrss. 
—  of  victories'],  as  the  context  implies,  of  God  in  the  long  history 
of  Israel  until  the  Exile,  cf.  1851  28s  7412. — Jacob],  poetic  name 
for  Israel  frequent  in  I&  and  &.  7  is  a  needless  repetition  of  v.4, 
without  its  fine  antith. 

In  Thee  will  we  butt  our  adversaries ; 

In  Thy  name  will  we  tread  under  foot  those  who  rise  up  against  us. 

For  Thou  hast  saved  us  from  our  adversaries, 

And  them  that  hate  us  Thou  hast  put  to  shame. 

Yahweh  we  praise  all  the  day, 

And  Thy  name  we  laud  forever. 


PSALM   XLIV.  379 

6.  In  Thee  ||  in  Thy  name],  instrumental,  for  presence,  as 
2068  3321  8913  17,25, —  will  we  butt],  as  a  bull  or  ram,  cf.  Dt.  3317 
Ez.  3421;  ||  tread  under  foot],  trample;  probably  continuing  the 
figure,  as  in  the  rush  of  a  herd  of  cattle,  cf.  Ps.  6014  Is.  1425  63s. 
This  boastful  confidence  in  victory  seems  to  imply  the  Maccabean 
successes. —  8.  Thou  hast  saved],  implying  victory ;  put  to  shame, 
by  defeat,  cf.  146.  The  enemies  are  national  and  not  personal. 
—  9  uses  liturgical  phrases  of  national  thanksgiving  for  victories, 
implying  continuous  musical  service  of  God  in  the  temple. 

Str.  II.  10-17  shows  evidence  of  three  hands.  The  original  was 
four  syn.  couplets,  v.11, 13"15.  —  11.  Thou  makest  us  turn  back  from 
the  adversaries']  ;  the  armies  of  Israel  have  been  defeated  disas- 
trously.—  And  they  that  hate  us  plunder  at  their  will],  none 
can  resist  them.  — 13.  Thou  sellest  Thy  people],  a  phr.  of  Ju.  214 
38  Dt.  3230  Is.  501,  giving  them  into  the  hands  of  their  enemies  as 
captives,  who,  in  accordance  with  ancient  usage,  sell  them  for 
slaves.  —  their  price],  paid  for  them  in  the  sale. — for  no  wealth], 
for  a  price  which  was  not  wealth,  so  poor  was  it.  —  And  dost  not 
ntoke  great  gaiti],  so  trifling  that  it  amounted  to  nothing.  This 
implies  the  captivity  of  the  people,  after  they  had  been  thor- 
oughly defeated  and  plundered,  which  suits  their  situation  in  the 
great  Exile.  — 14.  We  are  a  reproach],  for  so  we  must  correct 
the  text  after  3112  794  8942;  ||  a  scorn  and  derision],  original  here, 
cited  by  794,  cf.  Je.  208.  — 15.  Taunt  song],  as  6912,  sung  by  their 
adversaries  to  torment  them  for  their  weakness  and  dishonour.  — 
A  shaking  of  the  head],  as  22s  Je.  1816,  a  gesture  of  contempt  and 
mocking.  Those  who  indulge  in  these  manifestations  of  bitter 
hostility  are  the  neighbours,  the  lesser  nations  of  Palestine,  who 
rejoiced  in  the  misfortunes  of  Israel ;  such  as  Moab,  Ammon,  the 
Philistines.  —  The  nations  ||  peoples],  probably  refer  to  the  greater 
nations,  such  as  Babylon  and  Egypt. 

An  early  Maccabean  editor,  in  times  of  defeat  and  disaster, 
inserted  the  following  three  lines  at  what  he  supposed  to  be 
appropriate  places  in  this  Str. 

But  now  Thou  dost  cast  us  off  and  put  us  to  shame, 

And  Thou  goest  not  forth  with  our  armies, 

Thou  makest  us  meat  like  sheep,  and  among  the  nations  dost  scatter  us. 


380  PSALMS 

10.  But  now],  an  additional  statement  of  a  new  and  antithetical 
situation.  —  Thou  dost  cast  us  off],  reject,  as  432  6o3.  —  and put  us 
to  shame],  the  shame  of  defeat  j  some  Maccabean  disaster,  which 
was  the  occasion  of  this  gloss. —  Thou  goest  not  forth  with  our 
armies'],  citation  from  6o12.  The  armies  of  Israel,  going  forth 
without  their  God  as  the  supreme  commander,  went  to  certain 
defeat  and  dishonour.  — 12.  Thou  makest  us  meat].  War  devours 
the  people,  as  144  27s  79/. — like  sheep],  weak,  helpless,  and  in- 
capable of  defence,  cf.  Is.  537. —  and  among  the  nations  dost 
scatter  us],  captured  and  sold  as  slaves  wherever  their  purchasers 
would  take  them. 

The  earlier  editor,  possibly  IE,  who  inserted  v.57,  also  inserted 
v.16"17. 

All  day  long  mine  ignominy  is  before  me, 

And  the  shame  of  my  face  doth  cover  me ; 

Because  of  the  voice  of  him  that  reproacheth  and  revileth, 

Because  of  the  enemy  and  the  avenger. 

16.  All  day  long],  continually,  —  mine  ignominy],  or  sense  of 
insult,  as  69s  Je.  5151  ||  shame  of  my  face],  late  phr.  implying 
probably  Greek  period.  —  17  gives  the  reason  of  v.10.  The  enemy 
is  one  that  reproacheth  and  revileth,  or  blasphemeth,  suggesting 
to  many  Antiochus,  the  great  oppressor  of  Israel,  who  provoked 
the  Maccabean  revolt ;  but  more  probably  collective  of  the  enemies 
of  Israel  ||  the  enemy  and  the  avenger,  cited  from  83. 

Str.  III.  has  two  syn.  tetrastichs,  v.18-20,23,  with  gloss  inserted 
v.21-22.  — 18.  This],  referring  to  the  distress  of  previous  Str., 
intensified  by  a  later  copyist  by  the  prefixing  of  "all,"  which 
injures  the  rhythm;  defined  more  fully  again,  v.2023.  —  has  come 
upon  us],  from  without,  coming  up  against,  attacking  as  a  calamity 
that  could  not  be  resisted.  —  and  we  have  not  forgotten  Thee], 
fidelity,  not  previous  to  the  affliction,  but  subsequent  to  it,  in 
spite  of  it,  and  therefore  one  which  continues  in  the  present  || 
have  not  dealt  falsely  against  Thy  covenant],  the  covenant  with 
the  nation  at  Horeb,  Ex.  24  Dt.  413,  renewed  Dt.  28G9  29  30,  cf. 
Pss.  2510  505  16  7810  37.  The  people  in  captivity  and  affliction  have 
not  forsaken  Yahweh  their  God  ;  but  have  remained  faithful  not- 
withstanding all  their  disadvantages.  — 19.  Our  mind],  the  in- 
ternal thought  and  purpose  ||  our  steps],  the  external  walk  and 


PSALM   XLIV.  381 

conduct.  —  is  not  turned  backward],  away  from  Yahweh  and  His 
covenant  ||  have  ?iot  declined],  bent  aside  from  the  path  of  the  Law 
of  D,  cf.  Is.  23  Ps.  11915  Jb.  3 17. — 20.  Thou  hast  crushed  us 
down'],  the  nation,  by  the  heavy  weight  of  disasters  which,  though 
coming  from  their  national  enemies,  have  yet  been  inflicted  by 
their  God ;  ||  and  overwhelmed  us],  as  a  drowning  man  with  a 
flood,  or  one  going  down  to  death,  covered  over  by  the  earth,  cf. 
10617.  All  this  is  not  of  a  disaster  long  ago  experienced,  but  of 
one  which  has  come  upon  them  and  still  abides  with  them.  The 
introductory  "  though  "  is  due  to  dittog.  —  in  the  place  of  jackals], 
a  variation  of  a  phr.  of  Je.,  implying  a  desert  place,  the  resort  of 
these  wild  animals.  —  in  dense  darkness],  a  place  where  dense 
darkness  dwells.  The  people  are  in  a  desolate  wilderness  and  in 
a  dark,  gloomy  waddy,  cf.  Pss.  23*  io710, 14  Is.  427- M  49s.  —  23.  Yea, 
for  Thy  sake],  because  of  fidelity  to  Yahweh  and  His  covenant,  as 
69s,  emphatic  to  indicate  that  this  was  the  chief,  if  not  the  only 
reason,  they  were  killed.  —  We  were  counted  as  sheep  for  the  slaugh- 
ter], a  phr.  of  Je.  123;  defenceless  as  sheep,  whose  only  use  is  to 
be  slaughtered  for  meat,  cf.  Is.  537.  —  all  the  day],  continuously, 
and  not  merely  on  some  historic  battle-field. 

21-22.  A  late  Maccabean  editor  emphasises  the  fidelity  in 
accordance  with  the  conception  of  his  own  times,  by  putting  it 
in  the  protasis  of  a  conditional  clause,  and  appealing  to  the  divine 
vindication  in  the  apodosis  after  the  manner  of  Jb.  31. 

Have  we  forgotten  the  name  of  our  God, 
Or  spread  forth  our  palms  to  a  foreign  god  ? 
Will  not  Yahweh  search  this  out? 
For  He  knoweth  secrets. 

21.  Have  we  forgotten  the  name  of  our  God],  that  is,  to  honour 
His  name  in  worship,  and  so  somewhat  different  from  the  for- 
getting of  v.18.  —  spread  forth  our  palms],  the  gesture  of  invocatory 
prayer,  cf.  Jb.  n13  Ezr.  g5,  —  to  a  foreign  god],  as  8110,  implying 
idolatry.  The  question  is  asked  only  to  be  answered  in  the  nega- 
tive by  an  appeal  to  the  knowledge  of  God  Himself.  —  22.  Will 
not  Yahweh  search  this  out?],  implying  a  positive  answer,  cf. 
Jb.  *?,  2827  Ps.  1391;  —  For  He  knoweth],  that  is,  practically,  by 
such  searching  of  men.  —  secrets],  hidden  from  men,  but  which 
cannot  be  hidden  from  God. 


382  PSALMS 

Str.  IV.  is  a  final  appeal  to  Yahvveh  Himself  to  interpose,  in  four 
syn.  couplets.  — 24.  O  arouse  Thyself],  from  silence,  inattention, 
and  apparent  slumber;  ||  Why  sleepest  Thou  ||  O  awake].  It  is 
quite  true  that  Yahvveh  does  not,  and  cannot  sleep,  1214;  yet  He 
seems  to  sleep,  when  inattentive  to  His  people's  necessities  ;  and 
awakes  as  one  out  of  sleep,  78'",  when  He  interposes  as  a  warrior 
in  their  behalf.  —  cast  not  off  forever].  Thou  hast  cast  us  off, 
now  a  long  time  ;  let  it  not  continue,  lest  it  be  forever.  —  25.  Why], 
continuation  of  the  plea,  with  variant  verbs,  —  hidest  Thou  Thy 
face],  awake,  indeed,  but  not  seeing  and  not  being  seen,  cf.  io11 
22^. — forgettest],  having  seen,  but  so  long  ago  that  Thou  hast 
forgotten,  —  our  affliction],  as  914,  and  our  oppression],  as  4210  432 ; 
that  described  in  the  previous  Str.  and  now  emphasised. — 26.  For 
our  soul],  the  seat  of  internal  distress  ||  our  body,  the  seat  of  ex- 
ternal suffering,  —  doth  sink  down  to  the  dust],  in  prostration; 
II  doth  cleave  to  the  earth],  unable  to  rise  up  again,  cf.  11925  — 
27.  The  final  plea, —  O  arise],  stand  up  from  sitting,  an  inactive 
posture,  to  interpose, — for  help  for  us],  specific  application 
of  the  help  ;  ||  And  ransom  us],  that  is,  from  enemies  and  dis- 
tresses, v.13.  —  For  Thy  kindness1  sake],  as  65. 

3.  TV  n*™]  emph.  gl.  of  intensification.  <S,  U,  j&,  omit  r\ra.  Prob. 
there  is  here  a  conflation  of  two  readings,  as  Street.  —  jnn]  Hiph.  impf.  >;n 
used  of  God  Ex.  5-22  Je.  25s  Zc.  814;  between  pf.  and  dependent  1  consec. 
impf.  improb. ;  1  consec.  omitted  by  copyist's  error.  There  is  no  justification 
in  txt.  of  Vrss.  for  m:»n  Lag.,  or  g*»n  We.,  Du.,  or  f*vi  Che.  —  4.  '•dS]  archaic 
sf.  for  rhythm.  —  DP'p  ">r]  dittog.,  q  making  an  awkward  clause,  forcing  the 
attachment  of  -pjD  m«  to  previous  1.  at  the  cost  of  the  measures  of  both  lines, 
when  it  really  is  second  subj.  of  cr^xi  as  36,  Ges.§144-4. —  5.  Nin]  dem.  for 
copula.  — rvtx]  Pi.  imv.  |$,  3,  2,  C;  but  <S,  <S,  nixn  ptc.  is  to  be  preferred 
with  Kenn.,  Horsley,  Bi.,  We.,  Che.  —  9.  uS^n]  Pi.  usually  praise,  as  (3,  3, 
but  with  ace.  pers.;  here  only  with  3  as  Hithp.  and  Qal  boast ;  cf.  io3  c.  7J7. 
Prob.  2  is  interp.  of  late  copyist.  The  parall.  mm  favours  praise.  —  10.  in] 
usually  addition,  also,  even,  yea  ;  ©  vvvl,  3  verum  ;  rarely  antith.  nay,  but,  as 
58*.  —  11.  *}■?']  archaic  form  of  |p  for  euphony.  —  "idS]  archaic  sf.  for  euphony  : 
at  their  will,  BDB,  cf.  64s  8313.  — 13.  c^-vrc]  obj.  sf.  the  prices  paid  for 
them,  cf.  Je.  1513.  — 14.  "U^n]  tautological  of  v.15;  probably  assimilated  by 
ocular  error;  3112  7c.4  8942  ail  favour  M«n,  so  Du.,  Che.  — 19.  \3D]  makes 
one  beat  too  many  for  measure  ;  error  of  assimilation  to  Jb.  317,  for  "|nns^. — 
20.  v-]  prob.  gl,  dittog.  after  n,  difficult  in  context.  — c^n]  jackals,  as  Je.  910 
io22  4933  Is.  3413;  but  3  draconum  QWP,  referring  to  monster  nations,  tempt- 


PSALM   XLV.  383 

ing,  but  improb. ;  (&  /ca/cw<rea>s,  doubtless  interp.  — ninSx]  here  as  elsw.  error 
for  n-ioSi",  place  of  dense  darkness  2j^.  —  22.  f  H^dVjhj]  n.f.  pi. ;  elsw.  Jb.  n6, 
sg.  2811.  —  2^]  gl.  of  definition,  making  1.  too  long.  —  25.  ""Jin]  is  gl.  making 
1.  too  long.  —  27.  nmrv]  old  ace.  ending  for  euphony,  in  order  to  retract 
accent  before  uK  as  63s  941",  cf.  212. 


PSALM   XLV.,  3  str.  24  63  i84- 

Ps.  45  is  a  song  celebrating  the  marriage  of  Jehu.  (1)  The 
king  is  the  fairest  of  men  (v.3"- 5).  (2)  He  is  a  warrior  who  rides 
forth  in  his  chariot  and  pierces  the  heart  of  his  enemies  with  his 
arrows  (v.4-6).  (3)  He  embodies  all  precious  ointments  in  him- 
self. He  and  his  queen  at  his  right  hand  are  royally  arrayed 
(v.8c_1°).  She  is  urged  to  forget  her  people,  and  in  her  beauty  be 
satisfied  with  her  godlike  lord  and  the  homage  of  the  people  (v.11-13). 
Her  virgin  companions,  arrayed  in  all  their  glory,  are  conducted  to 
her  in  the  king's  palace  (v.14-16).  Rfs.  congratulate  the  king  on 
the  divine  blessing  (v.3c)  and  his  anointing  (v86),  and  everlasting 
praise  (v.186).  Glosses  set  forth  the  perpetuity  of  the  throne 
of  God  and  His  sceptre  of  righteousness  (v.7_8a) ,  and  wish  the  king 
a  goodly  posterity  of  kings  (v.17"18a).  An  Introduction  states  the 
emotions  stirred  by  such  a  theme  (v.2.) 

HTHOU  art  very  fair,  above  the  children  of  men; 

Grace  has  been  poured  on  thy  lips ; 

Therefore  Yahzveh  hath  blessed  thee  forever, 
QIRD  thy  sword  on  thy  thigh, 

O  hero,  thy  splendour  and  thy  majesty ; 

Tread  the  bow,  have  success,  ride  on  ; 

And  thy  right  hand  will  shew  thee  terrible  deeds. 

O  hero,  thine  arrows  are  sharp, 

In  the  heart  of  the  king's  enemies. 

Therefore  Yahweh  thy  God  hath  anointed  thee. 
Q  OIL  of  joy  above  thy  fellows, 

Myrrh  and  aloes,  cassia  (thou) . 

All  thy  garments  are  from  ivory  palaces, 

Whence  kings'  daughters  gladden  thee. 

In  thy  costly  things  the  queen  doth  stand  at  thy  right  hand, 

In  golden  attire,  her  clothing  of  embroidery. 

Hear,  see,  and  incline  thine  ear, 

And  forget  thy  people  and  thy  father's  house : 

For  the  king  desires  thy  beauty. 

Worship  him  for  he  is  thy  sovereign  lord. 


384  PSALMS 

The  daughter  of  Tyre  will  do  homage  with  a  gift  for  thee  ; 

The  richest  peoples  will  court  thy  face. 

In  all  glorious  things  the  king's  daughter  is  within ; 

Inwrought  with  gold  is  her  clothing. 

In  embroidery  are  conducted  to  the  king  her  attendants; 

Virgins,  her  companions,  (are  brought  to  her)  ; 

With  gladness  and  exulting  they  are  conducted  (to  her)  ; 

Into  the  king's  palace  they  are  brought  (to  her). 

Therefore  the  peoples  will  praise  thee  forever . 

Ps.  45  was  originally  in  fat,  and  was  then  subsequently  taken  up  into  I3& 
(v.  Intr.  §§  28,  S3)-  ^  belonged  to  the  class  b^&D  {v.  Intr.  §  26).  Eut 
prior  to  this  was  an  older  title  nTT  Ttf,  a  song  of  marriage  love,  an  epitha- 
lamium  (v.  Intr.  §  24),  which  is  an  exact  designation  of  its  contents.  It  was 
adapted  for  public  use  when  it  was  included  in  f&.  It  may  have  received 
then  the  liturgical  addition,  v.18a,  and  the  gloss  referring  to  the  reign  of  Yah- 
weh,  v.:_So.  When  it  was  used  in  Q &  it  was  assigned  for  rendering  after  the 
melody  Lilies  (v.  Intr.  §  34).  Messianic  significance  was  given  to  the  Ps. 
because  of  v.7"8a,  which,  when  applied  to  the  king,  ascribes  to  him  godlike 
qualities,  such  as  the  Messiah  alone  was  supposed  to  possess.  But  this  gloss 
was  later  than  the  Ps.,  and  its  Messianic  interpretation  later  still.  There  are 
two  Aramaisms  in  the  Ps.  :  (1)  one  of  etymology,  v.2,  -^m  only  here  as  verb 
in  OT.;  (2)  one  of  syntax,  v.2,  ^jn  ~\cn,  also  late  Ileb.  However,  both  of 
these  might  be  explained  from  the  dialect  of  North  Israel,  which  was  tend- 
ing to  the  Aramaic  earlier  than  the  dialect  of  Judah,  owing  to  proximity  to 
Syria  and  constant  association  with  Syrians  in  war  and  commerce.  There  are 
several  words  which  are  urged  as  late :  »tPPD,  v.2,  my  work,  of  lines  of  poem, 
a.\.  in  this  mng.  It  is  not  certain  whether  this  is  a  usage  late  or  early,  or 
peculiar  to  North  Israel.  •vno  idid,  v.2,  elsw.  only  Ezr.  70.  These  evidences 
of  late  date  heaped  up  in  v.2  suggest  that  the  Introduction  may  be  a  later 
prefix  to  the  Ps.  nuj?,  v.5;  this  is  dubious,  and  is  probably  interpretive  by 
error  of  late  scribe.  Sjp,  v.10,  in  late  Heb.  and  Aram.;  but  probably  Ju.  53) 
by  emendation.  It  belongs  to  the  dialect  of  the  North.  -pdin  on  a,  v.10,  elsw. 
Is.  1312  Jb.  2816,  but  misinterpretation  of  late  scribe.  (S  preserves  the  earlier 
text.  Thus  the  language  does  not  favour  a  late  date,  but  the  dialect  of  North 
Israel.  The  Ps.  shows  no  dependence  on  other  Scriptures.  This  favours  an 
early  date,  and  also  North  Israel  as  a  place  of  composition.  The  Ps.  is  re- 
ferred by  Ols.  to  the  Syrian  king  Alexander  and  his  marriage  with  Cleopatra, 
1  Mac.  io57-68,  by  Du.  to  Aristobulus  I.,  by  Ros.  to  a  Persian  monarch  ;  but 
of  none  of  these  could  the  poet  say,  Yahweh,  thy  God,  hath  anointed  thee,  v.8. 
The  older  view,  still  maintained  by  Kirk.,  held  it  to  represent  the  marriage 
of  Solomon  with  Pharaoh's  daughter,  I  K.  31;  but  there  is  no  support  in  the 
Ps.  for  this  opinion.  De.  thought  of  the  marriage  of  Joram  and  Athalia  ; 
Hi.,  of  Ahab  and  Jezebel ;  Ew.,  of  Jeroboam  II.  V.4-6  favour  a  reference  to 
Jehu,  2  K.  9-10.  He  was  a  well-known  hero,  v.46-  Ga,  anointed  by  a  prophet 
of  Yahweh,  v.86,  to  overthrow  the  house  of  Ahab  and  the  worship  of  Baal, 


PSALM   XLV.  385 

and  right  the  wrongs  of  the  people ;  cf.  v.56.  He  was  at  once  proclaimed  by 
the  army,  showing  his  popularity  and  probable  grace  of  form  and  speech,  v.3. 
He  rode  forth  in  his  chariot  to  meet  the  king  and  overthrow  him,  v.5.  He 
was  a  famous  charioteer,  and  killed  the  king  by  piercing  his  heart  with  an 
arrow,  v.5a  6a.  He  wrought  fearful  deeds  upon  Jezebel,  the  royal  household, 
and  the  worshippers  of  Baal,  v.5c.  No  more  graphic  presentation  of  the  vic- 
torious ride  of  Jehu  could  be  composed  than  v.4-6.  We  know  nothing  of  the 
wife  or  marriage  of  Jehu,  but  the  marriage  of  such  a  hero  might  well  be  the 
theme  of  a  poet  of  the  time  of  Elisha.  There  is,  moreover,  in  the  descrip- 
tions of  the  marriage,  reference  to  ivory  palaces,  which  were  first  erected  by 
Ahab,  1  K.  2239,  and  mentioned  elsewhere  only  in  Am.  315  in  reign  of  Jero- 
boam II.,  both  in  North  Israel.  A  poet  of  Jehu's  court  would  be  most  likely 
to  mention  them,  v.96.  Am.  64-6,  speaking  of  the  luxury  of  the  nobles  of  the 
North  in  the  reign  of  Jeroboam  II.,  alludes  to  ivory  beds,  to  their  anointing 
themselves  "with  the  chief  ointments,"  cf.  v.8-9,  and  to  their  singing  songs  to 
the  accompaniment  of  musical  instruments,  evidently  as  court  poets  and  musi- 
cians. There  is  nothing  in  the  Ps.,  apart  from  the  two  glosses,  that  is  opposed 
to  this  time  of  composition,  and  there  are  many  striking  coincidences  with 
Jehu's  career.  In  the  Roman,  Sarum,  and  Anglican  uses,  the  Ps.  is  assigned 
to  Christmas  ;   in  the  Gregorian,  to  the  Annunciation. 

A  late  editor,  who  regarded  the  Ps.  as  Messianic,  and  probably 
the  final  editor  of  the  Psalter,  gave  this  ancient  Ps.  an  introduc- 
tion in  a  syn.  tristich,  expressing  the  emotions  of  the  poet  in  com- 
posing such  a  poem. 

My  mind  moves  with  a  goodly  word  ; 

I  am  saying  my  poem  of  a  King ; 

My  tongue  is  the  pen  of  a  ready  writer. 

2.  My  mind  moves],  "  is  astir,"  Dr.,  so  after  Aram,  usage,  of 
movement  of  lips,  to  be  preferred  to  "  overfloweth  with,"  RV., 
a  speculative  interpretation  after  cognate  Heb.  stems.  —  With  a 
goodly  word],  a  choice,  excellent,  beautiful  song,  and  not "  matter," 
AV.,  RV.,  as  if  it  were  the  theme  or  subject  matter  of  the  poem. 

—  My  poem],  literally,  "my  work,"  RV.m.  —  of  a  king],  without 
article  in  Heb.,  and  so  emphatically  indefinite.  —  My  tongue  is  the 
pen],  metaphor  for  rapid  movement,  as  we  say  the  "  tongue  runs." 

—  ready  writer],  elsw.  only  of  Ezra  the  scribe  Ezr.  f. 

Str.  I.  is  a  synth.  couplet,  with  the  Rf.  —  3.  Thou  art  very 
fair],  in  form  and  stature.  —  above  the  children  of  men],  surpassing 
all  men,  all  kings,  superhuman,  cf.  v.7.  —  Grace  has  been  poured  on 
thy  lips],  grace  of  speech  as  a  gift  of  Yahweh,  added  to  beauty  of 

2C 


386  PSALMS 

face  and  form.  —  Therefore  Yahweh  hath  blessed  thee  forever].  35 
has  changed  an  original  Yahweh  into  Elohim,  which  change  has 
been  perpetuated  by  the  texts  and  Vrss.  Grace  of  speech  and 
beauty  of  person  are  evidences  of  a  perpetual  blessing  of  Yahweh. 
Str.  II.  has  three  synth.  couplets  and  a  line  of  Rf.  Glosses 
make  two  of  the  couplets  triplets.  —  4.  Gird  thy  sword  on  thy 
thigh],  arm  for  battle. —  O  hero],  attached  to  second  line  on 
account  of  assonance,  which  extends  to  the  three  words  of  the 
couplet.  The  king  is  a  renowned  warrior.  —  thy  splendour  and 
thy  majesty],  the  royal  state;  usually  of  God,  96"  1041  in3;  but 
of  the  king  2ie. —  5.  Tread  the  bow],  so  i3,  which  suits  the  con- 
text v.Ca ;  the  MT.,  "  in  thy  majesty,"  followed  by  EV8.,  is  dittog. 
of  previous  word.  —  have  success],  prosper.  —  ride  on],  in  the 
chariot.  The  three  imvs.  without  conj.  are  an  emphatic  expres- 
sion of  rapidity  of  action,  as  also  the  trimeter  measure  of  the  Str., 
which  here,  as  elsw.  in  Ps.,  takes  the  place  of  the  usual  tetram- 
eter for  that  purpose.  We  are  reminded  of  the  chariot  ride  of 
Jehu  after  he  had  been  anointed  king  by  a  prophet  and  acclaimed 
by  the  officers  of  the  army,  2  K.  920"-4.  —  Because  of  faithfulness 
and  the  afflicting  of  righteousness].  So,  by  an  easy  change  of  a  let- 
ter of  text,  cf.  Ps.  1836.  2^  gives  an  interpretation  of  a  late  scribe, 
thinking  of  the  D^TO  of  his  own  time  ;  but  the  absence  of  a 
conjunction  after  "humility"  in  ^  (supplied  in  (3)  and  the  unex- 
ampled form  render  it  suspicious.  —  And  thy  right  hand  will  shew 
thee  terrible  deeds].  This  probably  refers  to  the  terrible  deeds 
described  in  the  killing  of  Jezebel,  all  the  royal  seed  of  Ahab,  and 
the  priests  of  Baal,  2  K.  930  io30.  —  6.  O  hero],  so  (3,  as  required 
by  measure,  omitted  by  copyist  of  J£f ;  a  term  aptly  fitting  Jehu.  — 
thine  arrows  are  sharp].  Jehu  was  a  famous  charioteer  and  bow- 
man.—  in  the  heart  of  the  king's  enemies].  So  Jehu's  arrows 
pierced  the  heart  of  Joram,  2  K.  g24.  — peoples  fall  tinder  thee] , 
This  implies  victory  over  various  nations.  It  does  not  suit  the 
history  of  Jehu,  and  it  is  probably  a  gloss  of  a  later  writer  who  de- 
sired to  give  the  Ps.  a  universal  reference.  —  8  b.  Therefore  Yah- 
weh thy  God  hath  anointed  thee].  This  is  the  second  Rf.  The 
blessing  of  Yahweh  passes  over  into  his  anointing  by  Yahweh. 
The  anointing  is  not  thought  of  as  subsequent  to  the  victorious 
ride  ;  but,  as  in  v.30,  as  the  ground  or  reason  for  the  whole  Str, 


PSALM  XLV.  387 

Yahweh  was  especially  the  God  of  Jehu  over  against  Baal  j  and 
Jehu  was  anointed  by  the  prophet  of  Yahweh,  and  commissioned 
by  Yahweh  to  do  the  work  he  did. 

The  description  of  the  victorious  chariot  ride  of  the  king  is 
followed  by  a  syn.  tristich  before  the  Rf.,  7-8  a.  There  is  nothing 
in  the  context  that  has  any  relation  whatever  to  the  thought  of 
these  lines.  When  they  are  removed  they  are  not  missed.  The 
reference  of  this  throne  to  the  king  of  the  Ps.  has  given  endless 
difficulties  of  interpretation. 

Thy  throne,  Yahweh,  is  forever  and  ever; 

A  sceptre  of  equity  is  the  sceptre  of  Thy  royalty ; 

Thou  dost  love  righteousness  and  hate  wickedness. 

7.  Thy  throne,  Yahweh,  is  forever  and  ever].  The  divine 
name  Elohim  stands  for  Yahweh,  as  throughout  the  Ps.  All  the 
Vrss.  regard  Elohim,  God,  as  vocative ;  all  refer  it  to  the  king 
except  2T,  which  thinks  of  God.  The  reference  to  God  has 
against  it  the  2  pers.  v.5-6,  and  again  v.8,  "Yahweh  thy  God." 
None  of  the  many  explanations  of  scholars  satisfy,  and  so  new 
opinions  are  constantly  emerging,  equally  unsatisfactory.  Yah- 
weh's  throne  is  a  common  theme  in  Pss.  9s8  n4  47°  8915  (=y]2) 
932  10319;  that  of  the  king  of  Israel,  89s- 30-3745  1225  13211.  —  a 
sceptre  of  equity]  phr.  a.A. ;  but  uprightness  of  divine  reign,  67s  is 
similar,  cf.  75s  9610  989  994.  —  is  the  sceptre  of  Thy  royalty],  cf. 
10319  I45n  i2.i3.i3  for  royalty  of  Yahweh.  — 8  a.  Thou  dost  love 
righteousness],  always  of  God,  n7  33s  3728  994,  —  and  hate  wicked- 
ness] ;  for  hatred  of  evil  by  God  cf.  56  n5;  by  men,  cf.  26s  317 

363    (?)    9710  IOI3   II9™4.113.128.163    I3921.22> 

Str.  III.  is  composed  of  three  times  the  number  of  lines  of  the 
previous  Str.,  and  may  be  subdivided  into  three  parts,  v.8c~10  v.11-13 
v.14-16,  each  of  six  lines.  Part  I.  has  two  syn.  couplets  enclosing 
a  synth.  couplet.  —  8  c.  O  oil  of  joy],  vocative,  cf.  Ct.  i3  410; 
the  king  addressed  by  metaphor  as  "  oil  of  joy  "  ;  and  not  obj. 
of  verb  in  previous  clause  of  Rf.,  "  with  the  oil  of  joy,"  and  so 
attached  to  the  previous  Str.,  which  referred  to  the  anointing  of  a 
king  to  reign,  and  not  to  the  anointing  of  him  for  feast  or  festival. 
—  above  thy  fellows],  fellow  kings,  cf.  v.3a,  "above  the  sons  of 
men." — 9.  Myrrh  and  aloes,  cassia],  the  three  chief  spices,  mixed 


388  tsalms 

with  the  oil  and  making  it  more  precious.  The  king  is  addressed 
as  himself  the  embodiment  of  such  precious  oil,  because  he  had 
been  anointed  with  it  for  the  bridal  feast.  For  a  similar  profusion 
in  the  anointing  of  Aaron,  cf.  1332.  Amos  reproves  the  nobles  of 
Samaria  for  their  luxury,  and  mentions  their  anointing  themselves 
with  the  chief  ointments,  Am.  6G. —  Thou~\.  This  pronoun  has 
been  condensed  with  the  previous  noun  into  a  fern.  pi.  of  that 
noun  by  error  of  copyist.  This  occcasioned  the  usual  interpreta- 
tion, "myrrh  and  aloes,  cassia  are  all  thy  garments,"  or  "all  thy 
garments  smell  of  myrrh,"  making  it  the  beginning  of  a  new  Str. 
But  this  makes  the  line  too  long,  and  is  an  awkward  way  in  which 
to  begin  a  Str.  —  All  thy  garments  are  from  ivory  palaces'].  Ivory 
palaces  are  mentioned  in  OT.  only  1  K.  2  239,  as  built  by  Ahab; 
and  Am.  315,  as  in  Northern  Israel  in  the  time  of  Jeroboam  II., 
suiting,  therefore  the  intermediate  time  of  Jehu.  The  king's  gar- 
ments have  been  brought  to  him  from  these  ivory  palaces. — 
10.  Whence  kings'  daughters  gladden  thee'].  These  were  the 
princesses,  the  secondary  wives  and  concubines,  who  dwelt  there, 
and  they  gladden  their  lord  and  king.  "  Whence  "  is  the  inter- 
pretation of  a  difficult  form  as  given  by  (£>  and  J.  But  most 
moderns  think  of  a  defective  form  of  a  word  used  elsewhere  only 
in  Ps.  1504,  meaning  "  stringed  instruments,"  and  they  attach 
"  kings'  daughters  "  to  the  next  line.  Such  a  term  for  stringed 
instruments  is,  however,  doubtful.  Am.  65  speaks  of  the  nobles  of 
Israel  singing  songs  to  the  accompaniment  of  the  harp.  We  would 
expect  the  same  word  here,  if  music  of  stringed  instruments  was 
referred  to.  Such  a  word  is  all  the  more  excluded  if  the  Ps.  be 
an  early  one.  —  /;/  thy  costly  things],  a  term  referring  usually  to 
precious  stones  and  jewels,  but  which  may  be  referred  to  persons, 
and  attached  to  kings'  daughters.  "  Kings'  daughters  are  among 
thy  honourable  women,"  RV.,  "  thy  precious  ones,  dear  ones," 
BDB.  (3  and  3  understand  it  of  the  reverence  given  their  hus- 
bands by  women.  But  such  an  arrangement  spoils  the  measure 
of  lines  and  Strs.,  and  introduces  the  kings'  daughters  prematurely 
before  the  queen  in  a  principal  clause  ;  whereas  in  the  interpreta- 
tion given  above  they  are  mentioned  with  the  ivory  palaces  and 
the  king's  garments,  and  so  make  up  the  closing  line  of  a  tetrastich 
referring  to  the  king.  —  the  queen  doth  stand  at  thy  right  hand], 


PSALM   XLV.  389 

adorned  with  the  precious  stones  and  jewels  the  king  has  given 
her.  —  in  golden  attire],  so  <3,  &  (golden  crown,  3),  adding,  to 
complete  the  line,  her  clothing  of  embroidery,  as  v.14615a.  The  last 
clause  is  omitted  by  Jf,  and  the  word  rendered  attire  is  read 
"Ophir,"  and  so  "gold  of  Ophir,"  followed  by  AV.,  RV. ;  else- 
where Is.  1312  Jb.  2816  only.  These  two  words  attached  to  previous 
line  make  it  too  long.  The  arrangement  and  interpretation  adopted 
above  give  four  lines  of  the  Str.  to  the  king  and  two  to  the  queen, 
all  describing  their  adornment  for  the  marriage. 

In  Part  II.  three  syn.  couplets  are  addressed  to  the  queen. 
— 11.  Hear,  see,  and  incline  thine  ear].  The  assonance  of  the 
three  imperatives  is  destroyed  by  the  insertion  of  "daughter," 
after  "hear,"  to  make  the  reference  to  the  queen  more  evident. 
It  gives  ground  for  the  opinion  that  the  poet  was  a  venerable 
court  official.  Such  alone  would  address  the  young  queen  in  this 
way.  But  it  is  error  of  a  copyist  who  was  not  capable  of  such 
nice  distinctions.  —  And  forget  thy  people  and  thy  father's  house~\. 
She  was  a  foreign  princess  who  had  left  her  people  and  her  father 
to  become  queen  of  Israel.  It  was  doubtless  jealousy  of  foreign  re- 
ligious influence  which  was  the  basis  of  this  exhortation. — 12.  For 
the  king  desires  thy  beauty].  Her  beauty  had  won  the  love  and 
desire  of  the  king,  and  as  his  queen  she  has  in  him  a  great  ad- 
mirer and  proud  possessor.  —  For  he  is  thy  sovereign  lord~\.  As 
in  the  previous  line  the  beauty  of  the  queen  is  praised,  so  here  the 
majesty  of  the  king.  — 13.  The  daughter  of  Tyre  will  do  homage']. 
So  (3,  but  pj,  3  attach  the  verb  to  previous  line  referring  to  the 
queen,  and  worship  thou  him  ;  but  that  leaves  the  next  line  with- 
out verb.  The  verb  really  belongs  to  both  lines,  only  in  the 
second  it  has  no  direct  object. —  With  a  gift  for  thee],  supply- 
ing the  suffix,  because  assonance  in  2  fern.  sg.  is  characteristic  of 
the  closing  words  of  this  Str.  in  every  other  line.  It  is  improbable 
that  this  would  be  the  only  exception  in  six  lines.  This  gives  the 
queen  an  interest  in  the  gift ;  it  is  for  her,  and  as  the  bride,  and 
so  a  special  act  of  homage  to  the  king  also.  (§  has  "  daughters 
of  Tyre,"  suggesting  that  the  queen  is  a  Tyrian  princess.  3  also 
takes  it  as  pi.,  "  daughters  of  the  mighty  "  ||  "  richest  peoples,"  but 
J^  makes  it  sg.,  referring  therefore  to  the  city  or  nation.  —  The 
richest  peoples  will  court   thy  face].     Some  who   interpret   the 


3Q0  PSALMS 

sg.  as  "  people,"  think  of  the  rich  merchants  of  Tyre  j  but  i&  adds 
"  of  the  land,"  referring  to  the  land  of  Israel.  The  parall.  with 
"  the  daughter  of  Tyre,"  of  J^,  favours  a  reference  of  the  phr.  to 
neighbouring  commercial  nations,  the  richest  peoples,  taking  the 
sg.  as  collective. 

Part  III.  has  two  syn.  and  a  synth.  couplet.  — 14.  In  all  glorious 
things'],  by  an  easy  emendation  of  the  text  to  bring  the  form  into 
assonance  with  the  other  lines:  not  "  in  all  her  glory,"  <& ;  "  in 
his  glory,"  U,  or  "  all  glorious,"  EV'.,  none  of  which  can  be  well 
sustained  by  usage  of  Heb.  words.  —  The  king's  daughter],  the 
queen  as  the  daughter  of  a  foreign  king,  cf.  v.116.  — within],  within 
the  palace,  where  she  stands  at  the  right  hand  of  the  king.  —  in- 
wrought with  gold],  cf.  Ex.  28llBq-  39° 8q',  for  the  setting  of  stones 
on  the  shoulder  piece  of  the  high-priest.  —  is  her  clo thing],  cf.  v.10c. 
— 15.  In  embroidery],  cf.  v.10c.  —  are  conducted  to  the  king],  pi.,  so 
(3 ;  MT.,  "  is  conducted,"  referring  to  the  queen,  is  against  the 
context,  which  represents  her  as  already  within,  and  v.10,  where 
she  stands  at  the  right  hand  of  the  king,  and  therefore  could  not 
be  conducted  to  him  now.  The  subj.  is  therefore  her  attendants, 
those  following  after  her,  which  also  on  the  ground  of  the  assonance 
in  -ah,  14°  b,  belongs  to  this  line  and  closes  it.  J^  has  transposed 
this  word  with  "  virgins,"  which  begins  the  next  line,  thus  con- 
tinuing assonance  in  -oth.  —  Virgins,  her  companions,  are  brought 
(to  her)],  so  assonance  requires,  and  parall.  to  the  king,  and  into  the 
king's  palace :  "  to  thee,"  of  %},  (3 ;  EV8.,  involving  a  change  of 
person  without  reason,  is  copyist's  error.  — 16.  With  gladness 
and  exulting  they  are  conducted  (to  her)],  continuing  the  double 
assonance.  — Into  the  king's  palace  are  they  brought  to  her]. 
—  18  b.  The  Rf.  represents  that  the  people  of  coming  generations 
will  praise  the  king  forever. 

An  editor,  probably  the  one  who  arranged  232&,  thinking  that  the 
Ps.  should  conclude  with  a  reference  to  the  perpetuity  of  the 
dynasty,  inserts  17,  a  wish  that  the  king  may  have  a  numerous 
posterity,  and  that  he  may  be  a  universal  king,  with  his  sons 
reigning  as  princes  in  all  the  earth. 


Instead  of  thy  fathers  may  thy  sons  appear, 
Whom  thou  wilt  set  princes  in  all  the  earth. 


PSALM   XLV.  391 

A  still  later  liturgical  addition  was  made,  18  a,  probably  by  the 
final  editor  of  the  Psalter,  to  make  the  Ps.  suitable  for  the  con- 
gregation, which  continues  to  exist  in  all  generations. — /  will 
celebrate  Thy  name  in  all  generations^.  This  was  not  suited  to 
a  poet  speaking  for  himself  or  addressing  the  king  at  the  time  of 
his  marriage. 

2.  tt:m]  a.X.  N.H.  be  moved,  Aram.,  Syr.,  of  movement  of  lips.  E^rn,  cf. 
rwwrn,  thoughts  that  move  within  ;  n#rr)D  n.f.  Lv.  27  79,  boiling-vessel,  stew- 
pan.  The  reference  seems  to  be  to  the  movement  of  the  lh  in  sympathy  with 
the  lips.  —  "jx  ip«]  ptc.  with  pron.  for  tense,  Aramaism.  —  ^?]  a.X.  in  mng. 
lines  of  a  poem.  —  ^SpS]  i  with  reference  to,  and  not  to,  unto.  —  f  '®i\  n-m« 
stylus,  the  reed  pen  of  the  Orient ;  elsw.  Je.  88,  iron  pen  for  use  on  stone  or 
metal  Je.  171  Jb.  1924.  — 3.  n^;e;]  a.X.  <g,  U,  Aq.,  2,  &,  3,  Quinta,  had 
two  words  rvfl^  <D\  Rd.  nss;  no;  inf.  abs.  with  Qal  pf.  nj>%  which  indeed  is 
required  by  the  measure.  —  TD^^a]  has  two  poetic  accents,  cf.  59s.  —  ll'^Vj 
as  v.86- 186  Rf.  —  4.  ,n?''"L'>]  rd.  r\yy  for  assonance  with  T)?Q  as  ~^**  at  begin- 
ning of  second  1.  in  assonance  with  "run,  and  indeed  Jpin  with  T\yr\. —  5.  H"}"^-] 
assimilated  in  |^  to  previous  word.  (3  ZvTeivov,  Iff  intende  =  ^"H^i  Hiph.  imv. 
•p-i,  span  the  bozv,  is  better  suited  to  the  context,  so  Horsley.  3,  B,  omit  it, 
and  it  is  regarded  as  dittog.  by  Street,  Ols.,  Gr.,  Now.,  al.  But  it  is  needed 
for  measure  and  these  Vrss.  are  rather  guilty  of  haplog.  —  -121  Sjp]  either  be- 
cause o/Gn.  2011- 18  (E)  1217  4318  (J)  Nu.  1714  (P)  Ps.  799,  or  less  frequently  on 
behalf  of  Ex.  88  (J).  —  P?*~"»Ujn]  dub.,  usually  explained  as  shortened  because 
of  Makkeph  for  mw,  but  improb.  mj?,  humility,  is  a  rare  and  late  word,  Pr. 
1533  1812  224  Zp.  23  Ps.  1836  (txt.  err.  for  rpjy  2  S.  2230),  so  prob.  here  err.  for 
n'uj?.  —  ^pTo]  i  subordinate,  that,  or  1  with  apodosis  of  imv.  —  rrtin>j] .  <3  Qav- 
/xao-rws,  3  terribiliter ;  elsw.  of  God  65s  10622  13914  1456.  —  6.  crutf  T^C1] 
dimeter  improb.,  (§  dvvari  =  nuj  is  demanded  for  measure.  —  7.  smS.n  ^M>?] 
Vrss.  take  D^n^N  as  vocative  referring  to  the  king,  except  {£,  which  rightly 
refers  it  to  God.  If  v.7  is  original  to  Ps.  the  2  pers.  v.6-6- 8  urge  the  former; 
the  latter  can  be  sustained  only  by  regarding  it  as  a  gl.  Hu.,  Moll.,  regard 
qsDp  as  cstr.,  thy  divine  throne,  notwithstanding  sf.,  cf.  I  Ch.  29s3;  but  such 
usage  improb. ;  there  is  no  sufficient  evidence  for  it,  v.  Ges.L- 128- Anm- 6.  AE., 
Ew.,  Hi.,  Ba.,  make  cnSx  predicate,  thy  throne  is  divine  ||  n>'i  dSij?,  "  a  throne 
of  God,"  JPSV.  Bruston,  Giesebrecht,  We.,  Du.,  think  that  dtiSn  represents 
an  original  mrv  which  should  be  interpreted,  not  as  the  divine  name,  but  as 
Qal  impf.  will  be  rnn*.  This  is  rather  tame,  and  we  would  expect  \\T  in  that 
case.  The  usage  of  the  terms  of  this  v.  favour  a  reference  to  God.  —  *»fc"D] 
for  the  usual  "v^n  (9s).  —  8.  pt'ir  fpt?]  elsw.  Is.  613,  referring  to  marriage  ; 
usually  taken  as  second  obj.  of  n#D,  making  a  long  prose  sentence  and  pro- 
longing the  Rf.  against  other  examples  in  Ps.  It  is  really  vocative,  cf.  Ct.  I3 
410.  —  t^3n]  adj.  associate,  fellow,  cf.  11903.  —  9.  f^c]  myrrh,  as  perfume 
Pr.  717,  incense  Ct.  3°,  ointment  Est.  212,  ingredient 


392  PSALMS 

of  sacred  oil  Ex.  3023  (P).  —  f  n^ns]  pi.  aloes,  elsw.  Ct.  414  of  bride  as  odo- 
riferous tree,  pi.  D<  Nu.  24e  of  trees,  Pr.  717  of  perfume  of  bed.  —  fttjpjp]  a.\. 
cassia;  pi.  form  may  have  arisen  from  assimilation,  but  prob.  represents  a 
missing  nrix,  needed  for  measure  and  distinctness  of  reference  of  these  lines 
to  the  king.  Its  compression  into  the  previous  word  caused  the  misinter- 
pretation of  v.86.  —  T~"U?~^]  is  suspicious;  pi.  f.  a.X.,  pi.  m.  155  t.  OT. 
Talm.  Pea  i1C6  interprets  it  by  H*v»ja  y'-ua  of  treacherous  actions,  cf.  Zp.  3*. 
But  this  does  not  suit  context.  (3  d-rrb  rwv  ifxariioy  aov,  3  in  cunctis  vesti- 
mentis  tuis.  PI.  f.  prob.  originated  from  assimilation  to  previous  words. — 
*??]  archaic  form  of  jr,  as  4411-19  68*»  7422  ^- «  88i°;  before  rel.  clause 
whence,  <3  ti;  &v,  TB  ex  quibus,  3  quibus.  According  to  Ew.,  Hu.,  De.,  Ra., 
Pe.,  Du.,  Ba.,  Kirk.,  BDB.,  it  is  defective  pi.  fo^D  stringed  instruments  ; 
Aramaism  elsw.  1504.  &  n.pr.  Armenia.  &  rd.  prob.  pen  principal,  for  yw 
and  regarded  ^2  as  prep,  with  sf.  I  sg.  Ainsw.,  Bo.,  regard  JD  as  compara- 
tive, more  than,  but  it  is  improb.  (3  is  simpler  and  to  be  preferred,  as  Ra., 
Calv.,  Ham.,  Genebr.,  al.,  after  all  ancient  interpreters.  — 10.  t^T?"11*  D?.?] 
phr.  elsw.  Is.  1 31"2  Jb.  2810.  (3  £v  t/xartcr/iy  5iaxpv<rv  irepi^e^X-q^vir}  ireiroiKiX- 
fitv-r),  3  diademate  aureo,  shew  that  ^dn  was  in  the  original  text  and  that 
$)  has  serious  omissions.  3  rd.  ~\hd;  (3,  JO,  ">**,  covering,  attire,  as  in  1  K. 
2038. 41^  cf#  Ass.  epartu,  garment,  i?DB.  The  original  was  doubtless  as  in  (3 
niEi-nS  nenaS  "U>n  onaa. — 12-13.  wnjV]  1  of  apod,  of  imv.,  shortened  juss. 
Hithp.  nix.  (5  6Vt  liredufXTjaep  implies  "o  which  is  needed  for  measure;  rightly 
followed  by  Gr.,  Du.  —  ^y*w  wn  >r]  goes  to  the  end  of  the  1.  for  assonance 
in  "].  —  V?""*innc»n]  belongs  to  the  next  1.  -urna*  according  to  (3.  It  prob. 
belongs  to  both,  and  has  been  once  omitted  by  haplog.  1  with  na  is  therefore 
dittog.  <S  rd.  pi.  vb.  and  Pja  for  ra;  cf.  Saa  na  1378,  JVS  na  915  referring  to 
the  nation.  Aq.,  3,  take  na  as  vocative,  3  filia  fortissimi,  S  Ovydr-qp  y\  tcpa- 
Tcud.  —  'TV"']  pl«  cstr-  superlative.  <S  interprets  ol  ir\ov<rioi  rod  Xaou  ttJs  777s, 
3  divites  popidi.  —  nnjpa].  (3,  3,  have  pi.  Homage  to  the  king  is  improb. 
here,  where  all  else  refers  to  the  bride.  Rd.  TpnjD  with  a  gift  for  thee,  which 
then  gives  all  the  lines  the  same  ending  in  ~\- :  tjjtn,  ton,  "^D",  i;_nN,  ^nruo, 
and  then  by  change  of  order  r\)}9. — 14.  rn-iaiH??]  is  dub.  (3  iraaa  r\  d6£a 
avTTjs  dvyarpbs  =  ma?,  so  U  omnis  gloria  eius  filiae,  but  sf.  with  cstr.  is  dub. 
<&*■  c-  a- A  T- A,  3,  have  it  not.  f  rroas  adj.  f.  elsw.  only  Ez.  2341  of  a  bed.  As 
we  shall  see,  every  other  line  of  Pt.  3  of  Str.  begins  with  a  form  in  n\  so  prob. 
here.  Rd.  nnaa,  glorious  things,  referring  to  her  ornaments ;  cf.  nna3J  Ps. 
87s.  —  J  ni?N?]  within,  after  vbs.  of  motion  Lv.  ioX8  2  Ch.  29^,  and  so  of 
being  within  I  K.  6i8  2  K.  jn.  <3B-  x  'Eaepuv,  v.  Jer.  Ep.  LXV.,  err.  for 
tawOev  <gA.  R.  T.  B.  a.  t>.  s.c.a#  There  is  no  sufficient  reason  to  rd.  irrJC,  her 
corals  or  pearls,  as  Krochmal,  Gr.,  Bu.,  Du.  —  n^jatfpo]  two  accents.  fThe 
word  elsw.  setting  of  the  onyx  stones  on  the  high  priest's  shoulders  Ex. 
2gil.  13. 14.  25  396. 13. 16. 18  (p)._  15.  Saw].  <g  a^v^Movrai,  as  v.™*,  njSaw, 
is  doubtless  correct ;  and  the  subj.  is  nnrw,  which  has  been  transposed  with 
nninn,  which  should  begin  the  next  1.  —  -^]  is  altogether  improb.;  rd.  rh,  as 
Street,  in  assonance.  — 16.    p'nclra]  should  begin  1.  for  assonance.  —  ?w$*an] 


PSALM   XLVI.  393 

rd.  as  above  rV>Ka)D  for  assonance,  followed  by  rk,  which  is  needed  at  the  end 
for  the  same  reason.     Pt.  3  of  this  Str.  as  restored  is  as  follows : 

nanaS  anj  nixacoD 

nnns  iSdS  njSam  niDpnS 

nV  nwaiD  rnmjn  mSina 

nS  njSain  "?\n  ninDB>a 

— 13.   iDP^n]   archaic  sf.,  but  without  sufficient  reason,  and  improb. 


PSALM   XLVI.,  3  str.  64,  rf.  24. 

Ps.  46  is  a  national  song  in  the  early  days  of  Josiah  :  (1)  ex- 
pressing confidence  in  Yahweh,  the  sure  refuge,  in  troubles  that  can 
only  be  compared  to  the  effects  of  an  earthquake  (v.2-4)  ;  (2)  as- 
serting the  sure  refuge  in  the  city  of  Yahweh,  gladdened  by  His 
gracious  presence,  and  unshaken  by  the  tumultuous  nations  (v.5-7)  ; 
(3)  a  call  to  behold  the  wonders  of  Yahweh,  especially  in  causing 
wars  to  cease  (v.9-11).  The  Rfs.  assert  that  Yahweh  is  with  His 
people  as  their  high  tower  (v.812). 

/VAHWEH)  is  ours,  a  refuge  and  strength, 
A  help  in  troubles  to  be  found  abundantly; 
Therefore  we  will  not  fear  though  the  earth  (roar), 
And  though  mountains  totter  into  the  heart  of  the  sea' 
The  (seas)  roar,  their  waters  foam, 
Mountains  shake  with  the  swelling  (of  its  stream). 

Yahweh  (  God  of)  Hosts,  is  with  us, 

The  God  of  Jacob  is  our  high  tower. 
T-JIS  brooks  make  glad  the  city  of  (Yahweh), 

The  holy  place  of  the  tabernacle  of  (Yahweh)  "Elyon. 
(Yahweh)  is  in  her  midst;   she  cannot  be  made  to  totter; 
(Yahweh)  will  help  her,  at  the  turn  of  the  morn. 
Nations  roared;   kingdoms  tottered; 
Has  He  uttered  His  voice,  the  earth  melteth. 

Yahweh  (  God  of)  Hosts,  is  with  us, 

The  God  of  Jacob  is  our  high  tower. 
QOME,  behold  the  works  of  Yahweh, 

What  desolations  He  hath  set  in  the  earth ; 

He  is  causing  wars  to  cease  unto  the  ends  of  the  earth, 

The  bow  He  breaketh,  and  cutteth  the  spear  in  sunder. 

Desist  and  know  that  it  is  I,  (Yahweh)  ; 

I  shall  be  exalted  among  the  nations,  I  shall  be  exalted  in  the  earth. 

Yahweh  (  God  of)  Hosts,  is  with  us, 

The  God  of  Jacob  is  our  high  tower. 


394  PSALMS 

Ps.  46  was  composed  as  a  *pc',  exceedingly  artistic  in  structure.  It  was 
then  taken  up  into  I£t,  and  subsequently  into  both  J33&  and  35  (v.  Intr.  §§  28, 
32,  33).  In  the  former  it  received  the  assignment  HlDSp  hy  (v.  Intr.  §  34).  In 
the  latter  nvv  was  changed  to  ovi^n  or  omitted,  except  in  refrains  ("«  v9.  txt. 
err.).  V.9  is  cited  665.  The  language  is  early,  "ojn  v.11,  1  consec.  pf.  v.10 
pins*  (n)  ">  v.8- 12.  mSyDC,  v.9,  txt.  err.  for  earlier  niV^D.  The  author  was 
familiar  with  the  effects  of  an  earthquake  on  mountains  and  sea,  probably  at 
the  base  of  Mt.  Carmel,  v.3-4.  The  city  of  God  was  still  the  secure  refuge 
against  the  nations,  v.5-7,  cf.  Zp.  315-17.  The  song  may  well  express  the  con- 
fidence with  which  the  young  Josiah  began  his  reign  amidst  the  commotions 
among  the  nations  due  to  the  Scythian  invasions  of  Western  Asia  as  described 
in  Zp.  The  destruction  of  the  instruments  of  war  is  in  the  style  of  Ho.  2'20 
Is.  94  Mi.  41-4  =  Is.  22"4,  and  WDJ?,  v.8- 12,  reminds  of  Is.  714.  The  poet  has  been 
influenced  by  the  early  prophets.  The  nnj  v.5a,  according  to  |Q  and  Vrss.,  is 
the  river  of  Zion,  with  its  canals,  D^Sc,  and  reminds  of  Is.  858(i-  and  3$n;  but 
it  was  prob.,  as  attached  to  v.4,  the  stream  of  the  sea,  and  the  n^o  were  used 
figuratively,  as  Ps.  I3,  although  the  watercourses  of  Hezekiah,  2  K.  2020  were 
prob.  in  the  poet's  mind.  This  Ps.  is  used  in  the  Latin  Church  in  the  ritual 
of  the  consecration  of  a  church  or  altar.  Luther's  choral,  Ein  feste  Burg  ist 
unser  Gott,  is  based  on  it. 

Str.  I.  has  three  couplets  ;  the  second  line  of  each,  starting  from 
the  syn.  idea,  amplifies  and  intensifies  it  in  stairlike  advance.  — 
2.  Yahweh],  original  divine  name  of  Ps.,  for  which  God  was  sub- 
stituted in  15,  also  v.5&ab  n.  —  is  ours],  belonging  to  us,  our  own; 
weakened  in  EV.  into  "our,"  which,  moreover,  obscures  the  force 
of  the  caesura  in  the  middle  of  the  line.  —  a  refuge],  to  whom  His 
people  may  resort,  ||  strength],  the  place  of  it,  the  source  of  it,  || 
help~\.  Yahweh  Himself  is  all  this,  in  troubles,  as  subsequently 
explained,  first  as  caused  by  a  severe  earthquake,  and  then  by 
warlike  commotions  of  the  nations.  —  to  be  found  abundantly], 
that  is,  not  to  be  anxiously  sought  and  difficult  to  reach,  but 
accessible,  to  the  full  extent  of  the  need.  —  3.  Therefore  we  will 
not  fear],  because  there  is  a  sure  resort  from  all  danger.  —  though 
the  earth  roar],  with  the  loud  rumbling  sound  of  earthquake.  By 
an  early  coypist's  mistake,  the  verb  was  mistaken  for  another, 
meaning  "  change,"  $f,  EV8.,  moved  from  one  place  to  another 
||  mountains  totter],  so  severely  shaken  that  they  totter  and  fall 
into  the  heart  of  the  sea.  The  poet  had  probably  witnessed  such 
an  earthquake,  and  seen  portions  of  Mt.  Carmel  falling  into  the 
Mediterranean  Sea.  —  4.    The  seas  roar,  their  waters  foam],  by 


PSALM   XLVI.  395 

the  effect  of  the  earthquake  itself,  and  the  masses  of  rock  and  soil 
falling  into  them.  By  an  ancient  copyist's  mistake  the  measure 
has  been  destroyed  by  the  omission  of  "  seas,"  because  of  its 
closing  the  previous  line ;  and  the  remaining  noun  has  thus  be- 
come the  subject  of  both  verbs,  as  in  EV8.  —  Mountains  shake], 
those  portions  that  have  not  tumbled  into  the  sea.  —  with  the 
swelling  of  its  stream].  Great  waves  come  in  from  the  sea,  pro- 
duced frequently  by  such  an  earthquake,  and,  swelling  up  against 
the  mountains,  dash  against  them  with  so  much  power  as  to  shake 
them  to  their  foundations.  An  ancient  copyist  has  made  an  error 
in  dividing  the  verses,  attaching  "  stream  "  to  the  following  verse, 
destroying  the  measure  of  both  verses  and  changing  their  thought. 
The  Rf.  has  been  omitted  after  v.4,  because  unimportant  in 
liturgical  use ;  but  it  was  originally  at  the  close  of  this  Str.  as  well 
as  of  the  others,  v8- 12.  —  Yahweh]  has  been  preserved  in  the  refrains 
by  15,  though  changed  for  God  in  the  Strs. ;  but  God  of  Hosts, 
the  older  form,  is  also  needed  for  the  measure.  God  was  probably 
omitted  by  the  editor  of  1&,  otherwise  IS  would  have  preserved  it. 

—  God  of  Jacob],  the  ancient  poetic  title  of  God,  characteristic 
of  l2t,  &. —  is  with  us],  companionship,  especially  for  help.  In- 
deed, that  was  the  original  meaning  of  the  divine  name,  "Yah- 
weh," ace.  to  Ex.  312"15  (E),  BDi?.,  cf.  Is.  810,  and  "Immanuel," 
Is.  714.  —  our  high  tower],  as  Pss.  910  183,  RV.m.  The  "  refuge"  of 
EVS.  weakens  the  metaphor. 

Str.  II.  has  also  three  couplets  which  are  stairlike  in  character. 

—  5.  His  brooks],  not  those  of  the  stream,  which  latter  really 
belong  to  the  previous  Str.,  as  the  stream  of  the  sea ;  but  those  of 
Yahweh  Himself;  and  thus  figurative  of  the  rich  blessings  of  His 
favour  to  His  city.  The  poet  had  in  mind  the  watercourses  built 
by  Hezekiah,  bringing  water  from  the  Wady  Urtas  to  Jerusalem, 
and  distributing  it  into  several  brooks  and  ponds,  cf.  Is.  85sq- 
2  K.  2020,  also  Ps.  i3.  —  make  glad  the  city  of  Yahweh],  Jerusalem, 
the  capital  of  the  Davidic  dynasty  and  of  Yahweh  Himself,  whose 
temple,  or  palace,  made  it  sacred. —  The  holy  place  of  the  taber- 
nacle], combining  the  two  ideas  of  the  dwelling-place  and  the 
consecrated  place.  —  'Elyon],  most  High,  the  poetic  divine  name, 
as  473,  cf.  5  73  78s6.  —  6.  Yahweh  is  in  her  midst],  dwelling  in  her 
in  His  palace  and  capital.    The  poet  has  the  same  thought  here  as 


396  PSALMS 

Zp.  315,  and  the  historical  situation  is  probably  the  same.  —  she 
cannot  be  made  to  totter],  resuming  the  thought  of  the  earthquake 
of  v.36,  preparatory  to  that  of  the  commotion  of  the  nations.  —  at 
the  turn  of  the  mom],  as  the  morning  turns  in  to  take  the  place 
of  the  night.  The  night  is  the  time  of  gloom,  the  morn  of  re- 
demption, as  30°  9014.  —  7.  Nations  roared].  The  Scythian  hosts, 
by  their  rapid  invasion  of  Western  Asia,  were  like  the  waves  of  an 
earthquake  in  the  effect  upon  the  nations,  Zp.  1-2. — kingdoms 
tottered],  falling  into  ruins.  It  was  all  the  work  of  Yahweh  Him- 
self, as  Zp.  declares.  —  Has  He  uttered  His  voice],  in  this  the 
great  day  of  His  historic  judgment  upon  the  nations,  cf.  68,,M. — 
the  earth  me/teth],  in  terror,  as  Am.  9s,  cf.  Ez.  2120,  Pss.  75*  10720. 
Str.  III.  has  three  couplets  of  the  same  stairlike  parall.  — 
9.  Come,  behold],  emphatic  summons.  —  the  works  of  Yahweh], 
the  works  He  has  wrought,  the  deeds  He  has  done.  These  are 
defined  as  desolations  in  the  earth,  the  destruction  of  kingdoms 
and  nations  by  the  invading  hordes.  All  this  is  preparatory  to 
a  better  future,  in  which  universal  peace  will  prevail.  — 10.  He  is 
causing  wars  to  cease],  by  destroying  the  warlike  nations  and  the 
kingdoms  which  have  waged  war  against  the  city  of  God  in  the 
past.  —  unto  the  ends  of  the  earth],  to  remote  regions  this  destruc- 
tion has  extended.  The  instruments  of  war  are  destroyed,  as  in 
earlier  prophets,  Ho.  220  Is.  gA  Mi.  41"4,  cf.  Ez.  399"10,  which  refers 
to  an  eschatological  invasion  of  a  similar  kind.  An  additional 
line  has  been  added  by  a  later  editor  to  emphasise  this  destruc- 
tion, but  at  the  expense  of  the  measure  and  symmetry  of  Str., 
Wagons  He  burnetii  in  the  fire.  —  11.  Desist],  that  is,  from  war. 
These  are  the  words  of  Yahweh  addressed  to  the  nations,  —  and 
know],  the  fact  that  it  is  I,  Yahweh,  who  am  doing  all  this,  and 
it  is  vain  to  resist  me.  This  is  not  a  recognition  of  God  as  God, 
which  in  Vrss.  is  due  to  the  substitution  of  "  Elohim  "  for  Yah- 
weh by  15.  —  I  shall  be  exalted],  repeated  for  emphasis  ;  that  is, 
in  majesty,  and  the  exhibition  of  it  in  the  deeds  above  described, 
—  among  the  nations  ||  in  the  earth],  among  all  nations  and 
throughout  the  entire  world. 

2.  nsdj]  Niph.  ptc,  Ew.,  De.,  Moll.,  Ba. ;  but  IIu.,  Pe.,  Du.,  pf.  <S  ra?s 
evpovaais  tj/jlcIs  is  paraphrase.  —  3.  "vpna]  inf.  cstr.  -no  not  used  in  Qal ;  Hiph. 
change,  alter,  BDB.     Ba.  supplies  in  thought  ihre  Statte ;  Du.  n\js.     Aq.,  2, 


PSALM   XLVII.  397 

dWdaaeaOai,  3  cum  fuerit  translata  terra.  But  (f§  h  r$  Tapd<r<re<r6a.L  t))v 
yrjv  favours  nbna  here  as  id<t  v.4,  icn  v.7.  This  gives  a  better  mng.,  the  roar 
of  the  earthquake.  —  3S3]  into  the  midst,  as  Ex.  158  Ez.  2727,  cf.  Jon.  24. — 
4.  ffini]  Qal  impf.  concessive,  carrying  on  inf.  with  2.  For  rcn  v.  39/. — 
•ncrv]  in  emph.  coordination,  t  "inn  vb.  Qal,  ferment,  boil,  foam,  elsw.  of 
wine  752(?).  Pe'al'al  of  bozvels  La.  I20  211.  The  1.  is  defective  in  measure. 
Both  vbs.  need  subjs.  in  tetrameter.  D^  has  been  omitted  by  haplog.  be- 
cause of  its  occurrence  at  close  of  previous  1.  —  Tinna]  for  nnj  nnoa,  neces- 
sary for  measure,  inj  has  been  attached  by  error  to  next  1.,  making  it  too  long. 
-»nj  is  the  stream  of  the  sea,  as  93s  98s.  —  5.  Bhfi]  holy  place,  for  Bhp,  as  2,  3; 
J5  Bhp  as  adj.  ;  4§  ijyiacrep  =  trip,  consecrate,  with  p^Vp  subj.,  so  Ba.,  Du.,  is 
opposed  by  usage  of  Pss.  —  \}3#d]  a.X.  for  rvjrc'p  improb.  (3,  IB,  Houb., 
Horsley,  Ba.,  Du.,  U38>D  still  leaves  1.  defective;  rd.  mm  p>fa;  mm  omitted 
by  15.  —  6.  rvupV]  inf.  cstr.  "?  temporal. — 7.  "^p3  fni]  as  6834  for  usual 
Sip  jnj  1814.  —  8.  nwax  mm]  so  v.12,  shortened  by  IS  from  older  mxax  t6n  '», 
which  the  measure  requires.  —  9.  mm  mSpoD  Wl  1DS]  cited  by  665  wii  toS 
dtiSn  nV?j?flD.  Imv.  without  copula  more  emphatic,  irn  more  graphic  than 
l*n.  f  n^SpDD  not  used  elsw.  dtiSx  was  probably  in  text  of  46s  IE  when  cited 
by  665  ;  but  in  3&  it  was  mm,  and  singularly  enough  a  later  copyist  restored  it, 
doubtless  because  of  its  use  in  Rfs.  —  mstf]  J  nsir  n.f.  (1)  obj.  of  astonish- 
ment and  horror,  Dt.  2837,  <&  r^para,  J5,  Hu.,  Ew.,  Pe.,  Ba. ;  (2)  better,  deso- 
lations Ps.  7319  Is.  59  Ho.  59  Je.  215,  3,  Calv.,  Dr.  — 10.  n^w]  carts,  always 
for  transportation,  i?DB.,  dub.  <3  dvpeotis,  U  scuta,  %  pSjf,  cf.  Aram.  S^;*, 
round  shield.  This  1.  is  trimeter  and  excessive  to  the  Str.  and  is  doubtless  a 
gl.  of  intensification. 


PSALM   XLVII.,  5  str.  4s. 

Ps.  47  is  a  temple  hymn  for  the  Feast  of  Trumpets :  (i)  a  call 
to  the  festival  in  praise  of  Yah  wen,  the  great  King  (v.23),  who  has 
subdued  the  nations  and  chosen  Jerusalem  as  His  inheritance  v.4"5). 
In  triumphal  procession  He  enters  the  temple,  with  singers  and 
musicians  (v.6-7).  The  call  is  renewed  to  make  melody  to  the 
enthroned  King  of  nations  (v.8-9).  The  nobles  of  the  nations  unite 
with  the  people  of  Yahweh  in  exalting  Him  (v.10) . 

_/\LL  ye  peoples,  clap  the  hand, 

Shout  to  (Yahweh)  with  the  sound  of  jubilation; 

For  'Elyon  is  awe-inspiring, 

A  great  King  over  all  the  earth. 
J-JE  subdued  peoples  under  (Him), 

And  nations  under  (His)  feet. 

He  chose  (His)  inheritance, 

The  excellency  of  lacob  which  He  icves. 


398  tsalms 

/ Y"AHWEH)  came  up  with  a  shout, 

Yahweh  with  the  sound  of  the  horn  : 

Make  melody  to  (Yahweh),  make  melody; 

Make  melody  to  our  King,  make  melody. 
TV/TAKE  melody  to  Yahweh  with  a  Maskil; 

For  He  is  King  of  all  the  earth. 

(Yahweh)  reigns  over  the  nations. 

He  is  enthroned  on  His  holy  throne. 
'THE  nobles  of  the  people  assemble, 

(With)  the  people  of  the  God  of  Abraham  ; 

For  to  (Yahweh)  belong  the  shields  of  the  earth, 

Greatly  exalted  is  ('Elyon). 

Ps.  47  was  in  1st,  £¥l,  £,  and  Qlft  {v.  Intr.  §§  28,  31,  32,  33).  Tt  was  prob. 
composed  for  the  procession  in  the  temple  at  the  Feast  of  Trumpets.  V.4 
depends  on  1S48  =  1442;  the  Aramaism  na-p,  prob.  a  substitution  for  an  earlier 
■nv,  as  in  1S48,  cf.  2  S.  2248,  apjr  ]wi.  V.5  depends  on  Am.  68  87  Na.  23. 
anK,  "Via,  v.6,  are  terms  of  D.  n;nn,  nj)W,  v.6,  the  new  moon  of  seventh  month, 
cf.  Lv.  25s.  70ST3  "^tt,  v.8,  implies  a  kind  of  Ps.  known  only  to  the  earlier 
Minor  Psalters,  before  £,  BE.  whjj  ND:,  v.9,  cf.  Pss.  8915  (=  072)  c.32  10319. 
Oman  v-iSn,  v.10,  phr.  of  3  elsw.  I  K.  1836  1  Ch.  2918  2  Ch.  306.  wc,  v.10,  for 
nobles  cf.  8919.  The  D^;  take  part  in  temple  processions,  as  Ps.  87.  The 
conception  of  Yahweh  as  king  of  nations  is  as  Pss.  96-10x3.  The  hymns  of 
Is.-  are  at  the  basis  of  all  these.  The  Ps.  implies  peaceful  times  of  friendli- 
ness with  the  nations,  subsequent  to  Nehemiah,  but  in  the  Persian  period.  It 
is  the  New  Year's  Ps.  of  the  Synagogue,  the  proper  Ps.  for  Ascension  day  of 
the  Church. 

Str.  I.  has  two  syn.  couplets.  —  2.  All  ye  peoples'],  vocative,  Israel 
calling  upon  the  foreign  peoples,  cf.  v.4a 10a ;  ||  nations,  v.46- ya,  to 
unite  with  him  in  celebrating  the  triumph  of  Yahweh,  for  which 
3E  substituted  the  divine  name  Elohijn.  The  celebration  is  to  be 
in  the  temple,  with  rhythmic  accompaniment,  expressed  by,  — 
clap  the  hand  ||  shout  with  the  sound  0/  jubilation],  42s  661  812 
951' 2  9&4  ioo1  1 1815.  —  3.  The  reason  for  this  festival  is  that  'Elyon, 
the  poetic  name  of  Yahweh,  as  Most  High,  is  exalted  in  majesty, 
and  indeed  over  all  the  earth.  He  is  awe-inspiring],  to  be 
revered  and  regarded  as  majestic.  —  A  great  King],  not  only 
of  Israel,  but  of  all  nations,  universally,  cf.  95s  97°  98s  99*. 

Str.  II.  also  has  two  syn.  couplets.  —  4.  The  nations  are  to 
celebrate  a  recent  victory  of  Yahweh,  which  He  has  won,  doubt- 
less, in  overcoming  some  great  oppressor  of  His  people,  and  of 
other  nations  also,  who  are  now  rejoicing  over  their  deliverance 


PSALM   XLVII.  399 

from  the  yoke.  —  He  subdued  peoples  under  Him  ||  tinder  His 
feet],  so  probably  in  3&,  as  more  suited  to  the  context  than 
"  under  us,"  "  under  our  feet,"  fff,  making  the  triumph  that  of  the 
people  of  Israel,  which  certainly  would  have  been  no  ground  for 
the  rejoicing  of  foreign  nations,  and  which  in  fact  had  no  historic 
realisation  until  the  Maccabean  times.  Then  the  victories  were 
so  exclusively  national  and  hostile  to  other  nations,  that  no  one 
would  have  thought  of  asking  them  to  share  in  Israel's  triumph. 

—  5.  He  chose  ||  He  loves'],  terms  of  D,  Is.2,  to  indicate  Yahweh's 
free,  sovereign  choice  of  Israel  and  Zion,  out  of  love.  —  His  in- 
heritance'], which  He  would  occupy  as  His  residence,  changed  by 
the  editor  to  "our  inheritance,"  "for  us."  —  excellency  of  Jacob], 
as  in  Am.  68  87 ;  the  Holy  Land  as  a  land  of  which  Jacob,  the 
poetic  name  of  Israel,  might  be  proud,  because  of  its  association 
with  the  majestic  exaltation  of  Yahweh  Himself. 

Str.  III.  has  two  syn.  couplets.  —  6.  Yahweh  ca?ne  up],  the 
ascent  of  the  hill  of  Zion  into  the  temple  in  triumphal  procession, 
cf.  247"10  6825-28. —  with  the  sound  of  the  horn],  blowing  the  sum- 
mons to  take  part  in  the  triumph.  —  7.  Make  melody],  five  times 
repeated  to  emphasise  the  instrumental  accompaniment. 

Str.  IV.  has  a  tetrastich  of  three  syn.  lines,  synth.  to  the  first. 

—  8-9.  With  a  Maskil],  a  contemplative  song  (v.  Intr.  §  26)  ; 
describing  graphically  and  contemplatively,  with  practical  reverence 
and  praise,  the  triumph  above  referred  to.  The  lines  in  v.8  have 
been  transposed  by  copyist's  error.  The  first  line  resumes  the 
thought  of  v.7,  the  last  introduces  that  of  v.9.  —  King  of  all  the 
earth],  as  v.35,  ||  reigns  over  the  nations  ||  enthroned  on  His  holy 
throne].  It  is  not  clear  whether  the  poet  is  thinking  of  the 
heavenly  throne,  or  the  throne  room  of  the  temple  ;  probably  the 
latter,  because  of  the  procession  up  into  the  temple  of  v.6,  and 
the  assemblage  in  the  temple  of  v.10. 

Str.  V.  has  two  synth.  couplets.  — 10.  The  nobles],  foreign 
nobles,  ||  shields] ,  for  shield  bearers,  the  princely  warriors,  cf.  8919. 

—  with],  together  with,  omitted  by  early  copyist  because  of  iden- 
tity of  letters  with  following  word,  and  so  the  connection  became 
difficult,  and  is  variously,  but  unsatisfactorily,  explained.  —  the 
people  of  the  God  of  Abraham],  the  people  of  Israel,  who  by  in- 
heritance serve  the  God  of  their  first  father,  Abraham.  —  'Elyon\ 


400  PSALMS 

in  the  last  line  has  been  omitted  by  prosaic  copyist  at  the  expense 
of  the  measure.  —  He  is  greatly  exalted  \  as  the  great  King,  v.3, 
victorious,  v.4,  and  making  His  triumphant  entrance  into  His 
sanctuary,  v6,  and  to  His  throne,  v.9. 

3.  jvSy  nw]  mrp  in  £  is  always  suspicious.  It  is  not  needed  for  measure, 
and  is  doubtless  a  later  insertion.  So  also  in  v.66  it  was  substituted  for  DvV?K 
of  IE  by  the  same  hand.  The  mm  of  the  original  Ps.  of  1st  elsw.  \.'^.Ga.7a.8b.9a.i0c 
was  changed  to  dviSx.  —  4.  -Q-v]  Hiph.  juss.  Aram,  -qi,  lead,  elsw.  i848,  txt. 
err.  for  Hiph.  TV  as  2  S.  2248  Ps.  144- ,  so  here  vv\  —  wpnn]  later  Maccabean 
change  for  the  original  rrm  which  the  context  demands;  so  whys  for  \hr\. 
—  5.  wnSru]  f$,  3;  <S,  U,  have  preserved  mSnj  the  original  form.  —  7.  D^JtVn] 
<S5  ijvtVn,  was  assimilated  to  u^c.  The  original  of  It  was  mn\  —  9.  dntSx]. 
The  first  is  for  an  original  mm  as  usual,  but  the  second  is  gl.,  making  1.  too 
long.  —  lBh(5  Nr;]  phr.  a.X. — 10.  Dn^ax  *nS«  c;]  ft?,  3,  but  O  /xerd  =  c;;; 
both  needed  for  sense  and  prob.  original,  the  texts,  because  of  identity  of 
letters,  retaining  variously  one  of  them.  —  H^"^.1?]'  <S  °*  Kparaiol,  U  fortes, 
the  warrior  shield-bearers,  for  the  shields  themselves,  doubtless  correct. — 
n^p  -in*:].  The  measure  requires  another  word,  prob.  a  divine  name,  which 
must  have  fallen  out  very  early,  for  (3,  Aq.,  3,  translate  vb.  as  pi.  agreeing 
with  ps  \UD.  Gr.,  Bi.,  Ba.,  Du.,  add  from  97s  cn^N  ^  L";;  but  this  could 
have  been  omitted  with  difficulty,  and  would  make  the  1.  too  long. 


PSALM   XLVIII.,  4  str.  4". 

Ps.  48  is  a  temple  song  of  the  late  Persian  period  :  Praise  of 
Yahweh,  the  high  tower,  in  His  royal  city  (v.2"4)  ;  who  in  olden 
times  had  put  to  flight  hostile  kings,  giving  assurance  that  He 
establisheth  it  forever  (v.5~9)  ;  praise,  extending  throughout  the 
earth,  of  His  kindness  and  righteousness,  giving  joy  to  the  city 
and  its  daughters  (v.10-12)  ;  admiration  of  its  fortifications,  telling 
to  posterity  that  such  is  Yahweh  forever  (v.13-15) . 

riREAT  and  highly  to  be  praised  in  the  city  is  our  God. 

His  holy  Mount  is  beautiful  in  elevation,  the  joy  of  the  whole  earth  ; 

Mount  Zion  on  the  northern  ridge  is  a  royal  city ; 

Yahweh  doth  strive  in  her  citadels,  is  known  for  a  high  tower. 
"pOR  lo,  the  kings  assembled ;  they  passed  on  together; 

They  saw,  so  they  were  amazed ;  they  were  dismayed,  they  fled  in  alarm. 

Trembling  seized  them  there,  writhing  as  a  woman  in  travail. 

We  heard,  so  we  saw ;  Yahweh  establisheth  it  forever. 
VyE  ponder  Thy  kindness,  Yahweh,  in  the  midst  of  Thy  palace. 

As  is  Thy  name,  so  is  Thy  praise  unto  the  ends  of  the  earth. 


PSALM   XLVIII.  4OI 

Thy  right  hand  is  full  of  righteousness;  Mount  Zion  rejoices, 
The  daughters  of  Judah  exult  because  of  Thine  acts  of  judgment. 
f~*  O  about  Zion  and  encircle  her,  count  her  towers, 

Set  your  mind  upon  her  ramparts,  distinguish  her  citadels ; 
That  ye  may  tell  (this)  to  the  generation  following, 
That  such  is  Yahweh  our  God  forever  and  ever. 

Ps.  48  was  originally  a  TiP,  then  used  by  fH,  It,  and  subsequently  by  IE  v 
Intr.  §§  24.  28,  31,  32.  In  (g  it  is  assigned  to  the  second  day  of  the  week  for 
the  Jewish  Egyptian  rite.  V.2  is  cited  in  96*  1453,  v.12  in  97s.  V.3  is  dependent 
on  La.  215,  v.7  on  Ex.  1515  Je.  1321,  but  Is.  33u  is  probably  later.  V.9  runy  = 
Ps.  87s,  of  similar  date  if  not  same  author.  V.14  =  78*,  both  dependent  on  Dt. 
2921.  It  is  therefore  subsequent  to  D  and  Je.  It  is  a  royal  Ps.,  as  46-47  and 
96-100,  but  earlier  than  the  latter  group.  The  terms  v.2"3- 10- 12- 13  14  indicate  that 
the  temple  was  standing  and  the  city  well  fortified  and  strong.  The  phrases  v.3 
imply  an  author  accustomed  to  admire  the  temple  mount  from  the  south.  The 
city  had  been  in  peril  from  kings  who  had  been  thrown  into  a  panic  and  dis- 
astrous flight,  v.5-7.  This  is  an  historical  reference  to  the  army  of  Sennacherib, 
2  K.  19.  There  is  no  ground  for  descending  later  than  the  late  Persian  times. 
The  Ps.  is  a  proper  Ps.  for  Whitsunday. 

Str.  I.  has  a  syn.  and  a  synth.  couplet.  — 2-3.  Great],  in  the 
magnitude  of  His  power  and  authority,  and,  as  v.3  implies,  in  His 
royalty,  cf.  47s  95s.  —  and  highly  to  be  praised],  as  96*  1453, 
for  reasons  to  be  assigned.  —  in  the  city  ||  Mount  Zion  ||  royal 
city],  v.3,  cf.  v.912-13;  Jerusalem,  the  capital  and  residence  of 
Yahweh.  By  misinterpretation,  at  an  early  date,  our  God,  the 
proper  subject  of  the  clause,  was  connected  with  the  city  in  J^ 
and  all  Vrss.,  probably  owing  to  the  influence  of  the  gloss,  v.9 ; 
and  so  it  became  necessary  to  insert  a  new  subject,  "Yahweh," 
which  in  15  is  always  dubious.  The  capital  city  suggests  the  royal 
residence  in  the  palace  or  temple,  cf.  v.10,  and  so  His  holy  Mount, 
the  sacred  mountain  on  which  the  temple  was  situated,  —  Mount 
Zion  on  the  northern  ridge],  the  temple  being  on  the  northeastern 
corner  or  back  of  Mount  Zion,  —  is  beautiful  in  elevation],  looked 
at  from  the  south.  The  temple  rises  up  in  lofty  majesty  and 
lordly  beauty,  the  royal  city  by  eminence,  because  it  was  the  exact 
place  in  the  city  where  Yahweh  Himself  resided  in  the  throne-room 
of  the  temple.  There  are  no  good  reasons  for  thinking  of  spiritual 
elevation,  as  Is.  22  =  Mi.  41,  or  of  a  comparison  with  the  Oriental 
Olympus,  Is.  1413,  as  Hi.,  Ew.,  Kirk.  —  the  joy  of  the  whole  earth], 
cf.  La.  215  Is.  6015,  giving  joy  to  all  nations,  and  invoking  praise  unto 

2D 


402  PSALMS 

the  ends  of  the  earth,  v.11 ;  not  to  be  confined  to  the  land  of  Pales- 
tine. —  4.  Ji|  and  Vrss.  all  have  "  great  king,"  but  such  a  phr.  is 
unknown  elsewhere  with  y~\,  and  there  was  no  sufficient  reason  to 
abandon  the  usual  phr.  with  ^rtf.  The  word  is  indeed  needed  for 
the  measure  of  the  next  line,  and  so  it  is  best  explained  as  Qal  pf. 
of  verb.  —  doth  strive],  of  the  warlike  king  striving  with  the  hostile 
kings,  and  so  introductory  to  Str.  II.  —  is  known],  not  by  reputa- 
tion, but  practically  by  valiant  deeds  in  defeat  of  the  enemy  and 
in  defending  His  people,  — for  a  high  tower],  in  which  they  have 
obtained  sure  refuge  and  defence,  cf.  46s  12,  where  the  same  meta- 
phor is  used  in  the  same  circumstances.  —  in  her  citadels],  where 
the  real  defence  is  made  by  warlike  bravery  and  skill,  cf.  v.14. 

Str.  II.  has  a  synth.  tetrastich.  — 5.  For  to],  introducing  graphic 
description  of  the  campaign  of  hostile  kings  against  Jerusalem, 
doubtless  referring  to  the  siege  by  the  army  of  Sennacherib,  2  K.  19. 
The  several  stages  of  the  campaign  are  represented  by  the  several 
verbs,  which  follow  one  another  in  rapid  succession.  —  assembled], 
by  appointment,  gathering  from  different  parts  at  a  designated 
place  to  undertake  the  campaign.  — passed  on],  of  the  onward 
march,  —  together],  as  a  united,  organised  host,  moving  under 
one  direction  and  with  one  purpose.  —  6.  They],  the  very  ones, 
emphatic,  demonstrative, — saw]  the  city,  its  defences,  its  de- 
fenders, and  something  more  which  is  not  indicated,  that  made 
them  pause.  —  so  they  were  amazed],  the  amazement  is  balanced 
with  the  seeing,  corresponding  with  it,  implying  that  they  saw  with 
amazement  something  that  seriously  alarmed  them,  some  mani- 
festation of  Yahweh.  The  author  is  thinking  of  a  theophany 
that  frightened  them  and  threw  them  into  a  panic.  —  they  fled 
in  alarm],  cf.  Caesar's  veni,  vidi,  vici,  Calv.,  of  which  this  is  the 
very  reverse.  The  poet  has  in  mind  panics  caused  by  theophanies, 
cf.  Ex.  15  Ju.  5,  as  is  evident  also  from  his  dwelling  on  their 
terror. — 7.  Trembling  seized  them],  as  it  did  the  nations  of 
Canaan,  Ex.  1514"16.  —  writhing  as  a  woman  in  travail],  as  it  did 
Damascus,  Je.  49s4,  and  Judah  before  the  conquering  armies  of 
Babylon,  Je.  1321.  The  description  is  complete  and  perfect;  but 
a  glossator  thought  to  enrich  it  by  another  exhibition  of  the  power 
of  Yahweh,  not  connected  with  the  previous  history.  —  8.  With 
the  east  wind  Thou  breakest  the  ships  of  Tars  his  h],  which,  how- 


PSALM   XLVIII.  403 

ever,  is  the  use  of  God's  power  on  the  sea,  rather  than  in  warlike 
deeds.  —  9.  We  heard],  that  is,  by  tradition  from  our  fathers; 
strengthened  by  prosaic  copyist  by  prefixing  "  as,"  or  "  according 
as,"  to  emphasise  more  strongly  the  resemblance  in  present  ex- 
perience as  described  in  v.2-4.  —  so  we  saw"].  The  past  and  the 
present  entirely  correspond. —  Yahweh  establisheth  it  forever],  as 
in  the  past  and  in  the  present,  so  in  the  future,  the  city  of  Yahweh 
will  stand  firm  and  be  a  sure  stronghold  against  its  enemies.  A 
late  editor,  at  the  expense  of  the  measures,  inserts,  in  the  city  of 
Yahweh  Sabaoth  ||  in  the  city  of  our  God. 

Str.  III.  has  a  synth.  and  a  syn.  couplet.  — 10-12.  We  pon- 
der], literally,  compare  things  that  are  like,  and  so  consider  them. 
—  Thy  kindness],  as  exhibited  to  the  people,  for  it  is  in  the  midst 
of  Thy  palace,  the  temple ;  and  yet  the  renown  of  it  extends  unto 
the  ends  of  the  earth],  throughout  all  the  earth,  cf.  v.3.  —  As  is 
Thy  name]  ;  the  divine  honour  and  glory  as  celebrated,  balanced 
as  coequal  and  coextensive  with  Thy  praise.  —  Thy  right  hand], 
as  stretched  forth  to  bestow,  its  palms  filled,  full  of  righteousness, 
probably  vindicatory  and  redemptive  of  His  city,  antith.  acts  of 
judgment  against  the  enemies,  so  comprehending  as  the  grounds 
of  praise  both  Strs.  I.  and  II.,  and  thus  the  reason  why  Mount 
Zion  ||  the  daughters  of  Judah,  the  dependent  cities,  rejoice  || 
exult. 

Str.  IV.  has  a  syn.  and  a  synth.  couplet.  — 13-14.  Go  about] 
round  about  ||  encircle,  make  a  complete  round  of  the  city0  The 
reason  for  this  circuit  is  the  inspection,  the  thorough  examination 
of  the  defences,  her  towers  ||  her  ramparts,  or  bulwarks  ||  her  cita- 
dels, as  v.4.  The  inspection  is  graphically  described  as,  —  count], 
their  number,  —  set  your  mind  upon],  give  close  attention  to, — 
distinguish],  give  separate  consideration  to  each  one,  noting  its 
special  characteristics,  so  probably  the  original,  as  (3  ov  3.  But 
owing  to  textual  error  a  form  appears  in  J^  which  is  variously 
explained  as  "  traverse,"  RV.m  ;  "  pass  between,"  i?DB. ;  "  go  to 
and  fro  between,"  Dr.  But  some  such  word  as  consider,  of  AV., 
RV.,  Kirk.,  is  required  by  context.  —  that  ye  may  tell],  relate,  as 
2231.  This  is  required  for  measure  and  sense,  referring  to  previous 
contents  of  Ps.  —  to  the  generation  following],  as  Dt.  2921  Ps.  784,6 
10219;  transmit  it  from  one  generation  to  another.     As  the  poet's 


404  PSALMS 

generation  has  heard  it  from  the  fathers,  cf.  44s,  so  they  are  to 
tell  it  to  their  children.  — 15.  That  such  is  Yahweh  our  God\ 
such  as  has  been  described  above, — forever  and  ever],  a  sort  of 
Rf.,  as  v.9.  The  closing  words  of  %  "  He  will  be  our  guide  unto 
death,"  are  not  in  (3,  and  are  a  gloss. 

2.  nw]  in  £  as  usual,  late  insertion.  —  "iv?a]  should  not  be  cstr.  before 
irnSs,  but  abs.  and  pointed  tj,;3.  uni^n  was  the  original  subj.,  displaced  by 
mn\  And  so  the  pentameter  is  restored.  —  iishf?  nn]  begins  second  1. — 
3.  «fij  noj  phr.  a.X.  ©  evplfav,  Aq.  kcl\$  p\a<jTT)na.Ti,  3  specioso  germini  as 
Aram,  rpj,  branch  of  tree,  bough.  It  might  be  rendered  beautiful  plant,  cf.  nnx 
for  the  fertile  land  Is.  42,  and  for  the  king  Je.  23s  23Vo  cf.  Zc.  69"15;  but  more 
prob.  in  accord,  with  context  T>J  is  elevation,  BDV>.  after  Arab,  analogies  ; 
cf.  >&  nS^Sj  La.  215.  —  ^dx  >rp^]  cf.  Is.  1413,  where  t^d  in  is  the  Oriental 
Olympus ;  here  most  prob.  northern  back  of  Mt.  Zion,  the  seat  of  the  temple, 
contemplated  from  the  south.  —  2<\  %,  Vrss.,  adj.  with  -|^c,  but  without  sup- 
port in  usage  and  against  the  measure.  It  is  needed  as  Qal  pf.  vb.  an,  strive, 
in  the  next  1.  — 4.  \  ^^jcns]  her  citadels,  rather  than  palaces,  as  v.14,  cf. 
I227  Am.  68  La.  25-7  Ho.  814  Mi.  5*.  —  5.  c^pn]  U  reges  terrae  is  interpre- 
tation.—  8.  B^Bhri  rYi»;n]  as  Is.  21G  23!+,  destroyed  by  divine  judgment; 
not  ships  belonging  to  or  bound  for  Tarshish,  but  great  ships  such  as  made 
this  distant  voyage.  This  v.  is  a  gl.  —  9.  npts]  prosaic  addition,  injuring 
the  measure  ;  no  more  needed  here  than  in  v.6.  —  rYmax  nin>  "vpa]  is  a  gl. 
enlarging  the  1.  without  reason  and  introducing  the  divine  name  nvr>  against 
the  usage  of  E.  —  imSs  -vya]  also  a  gl. — 10.  iTDl]  Pi.  pf.  nc-»,  compare, 
liken,  ponder,  5021  (prob.  if1*)  Is.  io7.  —  rjSyrj  an?}]  ty,  3;  but  ©  iv  fxtay 
tov  Xaov  aov  improb. ;  Xaov  early  error  in  ©  for  vaov. —  11.  f  pM  iwg]  f[wp] 
n.[m.]  only  this  phr.,  elsw.  65°  Is.  2615,  both  with  sd.  — 12.  Jl»3rnn  PiDtP>]  be- 
longs to  previous  clause  ||  nnw  nua  njSjn,  phr.  elsw.  97s  which  has  cited  this 
1.,  adding  nw,  given  here  also  by  <S,  but  not  by  |§,  3. — 13.  -la'D]  Qal  imv. 
aaD  in  sense  of  go  about,  only  here  and  1711  in  ^  ;  elsw.  turn  about  11435, 
surround  186  2213- 17  49°  -f  ;  in  Po.  however,  march,  go  about,  5511  597- 16,  in 
processions  26°.  — 14.  rrS»n]  a.X.  err.  for  n^n  ;  &  els  ttjv  dvva/xiv  avrrjs. — 
v)-p]  a.X.  traverse,  pass  between,  i?DB.,  cf.  Aram.  yDD,  tread ;  but  <§  Acara- 
ditXeade,  3  separate  =  ison,  Iliph.  nSo,  distinguish ;  Gr.,  Che.,  npfi  improb. 
—  15.  ma  Sj?  lxrn^  Nin]  ^,  3,  but  not  O  ;  is  a  gl.  niD  "?J?  might  be  for 
maSp  Sp  as  461,  a  musical  direction,  appended  as  lib.  3  ;  but  this  Ps.  was  not 
in  QK,  which  alone  makes  these  additions.  It  might  belong  to  Ps.  49  BB, 
as  Horsley,  Ba\,  Che.,  al.,  if  it  could  be  thought  suitable.  The  other  words 
would  then  be  expl.  addition. 


PSALM   XLIX.  405 


PSALM     XLIX.,    2   STR.    I43,    RFS.    2*. 

Ps.  49  was  a  lament  of  the  pious  over  the  riddle  of  death. 
(1)  Complaint  to  God  of  experience  of  the  iniquity  of  the  rich 
(v.^7),  who  yet  cannot  ransom  themselves  from  death  (v.8 10)  •  the 
wise  and  the  foolish  alike  die  and  their  graves  become  their  ever- 
lasting home  (v.11-12) .  (2)  Those  who  are  self-satisfied  are  assigned 
to  the  dominion  of  death  in  Sheol,  and  continually  waste  away 
(v.14"15)  ;  therefore  the  rich  should  not  be  feared,  for  they  must 
abandon  their  wealth  in  death,  however  much  they  may  have  con- 
gratulated themselves  on  their  possessions ;  and  never  more  shall 
they  see  the  sunlight  (v.17-20).  The  Rf.  states  the  enigma  :  man 
like  the  beasts  abideth  not  (v.13,21).  An  introductory  gloss  calls 
all  the  world  to  meditation  upon  the  enigma  (v.2'5).  Intermediate 
glosses  represent  that  the  ransom  from  death  is  too  costly  for  man 
to  pay  (v.9),  but  that  Yahweh  will  ransom  the  righteous  (v.16). 

Vy'HY  should  I  fear  in  evil  days, 

When  my  deceitful  (foes)  encompass  me  with  iniquity; 

They  that  trust  in  their  wealth, 

And  boast  of  the  abundance  of  their  riches. 

Man  cannot  at  all  give  ransom, 

Cannot  give  to  Yahweh  His  price, 

That  he  should  live  forever, 

(And)  not  see  the  Pit. 

The  wise  die  together, 

The  stupid  and  brutish  perish, 

And  abandon  to  successors  their  wealth ; 

Their  graves  are  their  homes  forever, 

Their  dwelling  places  to  all  generations, 

Theirs  whose  names  are  upon  lands. 
Man  in  worth  abideth  not, 
He  is  to  be  compared  to  beasts  that  are  no  more. 
'"THIS  is  the  way  of  them  that  have  self-confidence, 

And  the  latter  end  of  them  that  are  pleased  with  their  portion. 

They  are  as  a  flock  that  are  put  in  Sheol, 

Death  is  their  shepherd  and  their  ruler ; 

Every  morning  their  form  wasteth  away, 

In  Sheol,  far  from  the  lofty  dwelling. 

Fear  not,  when  one  groweth  rich, 

When  the  glory  of  the  house  is  increased; 

For  he  cannot  take  it  all  in  his  death, 

His  glory  cannot  descend  after  him. 

Though  in  his  life-time  he  congratulated  his  soul, 


406  PSALMS 

And  lauded  it  because  it  was  doing  well  to  itself; 
It  will  go  to  the  generation  of  his  fathers, 
Who  forever  see  not  daylight. 

Man  in  worth  abidetk  not, 

He  is  to  be  compared  to  beasts  *hat  are  no  more. 

Ps.  49  was  taken  up  into  £H,  then  into  f£  and  I32&  from  i-t  (v.  Intr.  §§  28, 
31*  32>  33)-  ^  resembles  73:  (a)  v\ti  ^//w  v.15,  elsw.  only  739;  (£)  (0')T5^ 
v.15,  prob.  same  use  as  7314;  (c)  cn-nriN  v.14,  piob.  error  for  DnnnK  =  73"; 
(d)  use  of  nga  v.11  =  73*»;  (*)  i^ona  v.'13-21,  cf.  7322;  (/)  use  of  njis  v.1G,  for 
taking  of  righteous  by  God,  prob.  a  gl.;  cf.  7324;  (g)  besides,  there  is  the 
same  essential  tone  and  situation  throughout  the  Ts.  V.1-5  also  resemble 
781-3  in  the  general  appeal,  and  especially  in  the  use  of  Ws  and  rwn, 
although  in  the  former  the  appeal  is  to  the  world,  in  the  latter  to  the  people 
of  God.  This  introductory  Str.  has  also  terms  of  WL.  rV>D3n,  rYuon,  v.4;  but 
spr,  S^pp,  D^ppn,  v.11- 14  do  not  imply  WL.  V.2  nj?n  as  in  17I4,  the  antith.  of 
i^N  >)2  and  oi*  >33  as  6210.  But  these  are  in  introductory  Str.,  which  shows 
most  of  the  evidence  of  dependence  on  other  Literature.  The  only  other 
case  of  dependence  is  v.7,  which  implies  52s  13.  Ps.  49  is  so  different  from 
all  others  of  It  and  so  much  more  like  Pss.  of  &,  that  it  would  be  classed  with 
the  latter  rather  than  the  former,  were  it  not  for  ny>  rpS  in  title.  But  it  is 
quite  possible  that  an  early  copyist  unconsciously  made  this  mistake,  because 
this  Ps.  followed  42-48,  all  It,  notwithstanding  that  it  was  followed  by  50  of  <&. 
The  antith.  between  the  wicked  rich  and  the  pious  poor  implies  a  commercial 
situation,  either  the  Greek  period,  if  the  writer  lived  in  Palestine,  or  possibly 
a  late  Persian  period,  if  he  lived  in  the  Diaspora.  The  latter  is  more  proba- 
ble, if  it  be  a  Ps.  of  £.  The  former  is  difficult  to  reconcile  with  the  date  of 
I9t  as  determined  from  a  study  of  all  the  other  Pss.  of  It.  J  inserts  in  title 
appropriately  vox  ecclesiae  super  lazaro  et  divite  purpurato.  The  use  of  nnir 
v.10  for  the  Pit  of  Sheol  with  n«n  as  1610  is  not  earlier  than  Ez.  ;  but  Sjt  v.15 
is  an  early  word,  1  K.  813  Hb.  311  Is.  6315.  On  the  whole  the  Ps.  is  best 
explained  as  originally  of  %. 

The  Ps.  has  an  introductory  Str.  of  a  later  date.  It  is  com- 
posed of  two  syn.  tetrastichs. 

Hear  this,  all  ye  peoples ! 

Give  ear,  all  ye  inhabitants  of  the  age! 

Both  sons  of  mankind  and  sons  of  men, 

Rich  and  poor  together  ! 

My  mouth  will  speak  holy  wisdom, 

And  the  meditation  of  my  mind  will  be  sound  understanding; 

I  shall  incline  mine  ear  to  a  parable, 

I  shall  open  upon  the  lyre  mine  enigma. 

—  2-5.    Hear  this,  all  ye  peoples,  ||  all  ye  inhabitants  of  the  age\  of 
the  duration  of  the  world,  1714 ;  analysed  in  antith.  classes ;  both  sons 


PSALM   XLIX.  407 

of  mankind,  the  common  people,  ||  poor ;  and  sons  of  men,  those 
of  position  and  station,  ||  rich,  cf.  6210;  and  all  these  together,  in  a 
like  situation,  needing  common  instruction.  They  are  summoned 
to  hear  this~],  that  which  is  to  follow,  ||  give  ear  to  —  the  holy  wis- 
dom^, wisdom  in  its  abstract,  intensive  sense,  as  summed  up  in 
sacred  things  and  relations,  |j  sound  understanding],  complete, 
entire,  and  perfect,  to  be  set  forth  in  a  parable'],  which,  in  the  OT. 
sense,  is  a  comparative,  emblematic,  shrewd  saying,  ||  mine  enigma], 
one  that  involves  a  difficult,  puzzling  question,  such  as  the  Rfs., 
v.1321.  The  poet  is  about  to  give  utterance  to  such  a  poem. — 
My  mouth,  emphatic,  will  speak,  \  the  meditation],  not  internal 
of  the  mind,  but  the  murmur  of  the  voice  in  giving  expression  to 
the  reflection  of  the  mind.  On  the  one  side,  the  poet  himself 
says  :  /  shall  inclifie  mine  ear],  to  catch  the  inspiration  from  the 
parable,  and  on  the  other  side,  —  I  shall  open],  explain  it,  render 
it  as  a  song  to  the  accompaniment  of  the  lyre,  with  instrumental 
as  well  as  vocal  music. 

Str.  I.  is  divided,  as  usual  in  four  teen-lined  Strs.  (cf.  Ps.  18), 
into  two  parts,  of  eight  and  six  lines,  the  former  having  two  tetra- 
stichs,  the  latter  two  tristichs.  —  6.  Why  should  I  fear],  remon- 
strance with  oneself.  While  fear  has  apparent  justification,  it  has 
no  real  basis,  as  is  now  to  be  explained,  cf.  v.17. —  in  evil  days]. 
It  is  quite  true  that  the  times  are  bad ;  when  my  deceitful  foes  en- 
compass me  with  iniquity],  so  essentially  5b ,  Origen,  Hi.,  De.,  Ba. ; 
"iniquity  of  them  that  would  supplant  me,"  RV.m,  JPSV.,  Dr.,  Kirk., 
in  accordance  with  context ;  but  (3, 3, 3,  PBV.,  AV.,  refer  the  iniquity 
to  the  singer  as  a  confession  of  sin,  "iniquity  of  my  heels."  It  is 
possible  that  this  may  have  been  the  interpretation  in  later  Heb. 
liturgical  use ;  for  such  confessions  of  sin  are  not  uncommon  as 
glosses  to  Pss. ;  but  certainly  this  idea  is  altogether  foreign  to  the 
context  and  thought  here.  An  intermediate  position  is  taken  by 
RV.,  Pe.,  "  iniquity  at  my  heels,"  which  is  a  possible  translation 
of  MT.,  but  not  probable  in  itself.  —  7.  They  that  trust  in  their 
wealth].  They  had  become  wealthy  by  craft  and  deception,  as  well 
as  by  their  iniquity,  and  having  been  successful,  as  such  men  always 
are,  they  had  an  unlimited  confidence  in  their  ability  to  purchase 
any  and  every  thing.  Accordingly  they  boast  of  the  abundance 
of  their  riches],  cf.  52°.     If  the  rich  were  correct  in  their  self- 


408  PSALMS 

confident  boasting  (v.  v.19),  the  poor  would  have  sufficient  ground 
for  fear ;  but  they  are  not  correct,  for  wealth  cannot  purchase  the 
most  essential  thing,  the  life  of  its  possessor,  or  the  ability  to  enjoy 
wealth,  or  to  direct  who  else  shall  enjoy  it,  cf.  Ec.  513-17.  —  8.  Man 
cannot  at  all  give  ransom],  emphatic  denial  by  adding  inf.  abs.  to 
the  impf.  tense  of  verb.  This  has  been  generalized  by  an  early 
copyist  through  the  interpretation  of  "man"  as  the  object  of  the 
verb;  which  then  seemed  to  require  the  insertion  of  the  subj. 
"  brother  "  ;  but  this  is  awkward,  and  most  moderns  give  various 
unsatisfactory  explanations.  Man  might  pay  ransom  according  to 
the  Law  for  his  life,  Ex.  2130,  when  his  carelessness  had  been  the 
occasion  of  the  death  of  his  neighbour.  And  it  was  not  uncommon 
for  the  rich  to  purchase  exemption  from  the  crime  of  murder, 
though  it  is  prohibited  in  the  Law,  Num.  35"1 ;  but  when  Yahweh 
demands  his  life  from  a  man,  no  ransom  is  possible  :  He  cannot 
give  to  Yahweh  His  price].  Yahweh  cannot  be  purchased  by  any 
price  whatever  to  relinquish  His  purpose.  — 10.  That  he  should 
live  forever],  continue  to  live  and  enjoy  his  riches  in  this  life, 

—  and  not  see  the  Pit],  the  Pit  in  Sheol,  1610  3010  5  s24  1034,  the 
dark,  gloomy  abode  of  the  wicked  dead,  who  suffered  punishment 
there.  EV\  perpetuate  ancient  mistakes  in  regarding  the  term 
as  abstract,  " corruption,"  AV.,  RV.,  or  "grave,"  PBV.  —  9.  A 
later  gl.,  wishing  to  emphasise  this  still  more,  inserted  :  "  Indeed, 
the  ransom  of  life  is  too  costly,"  even  for  the  rich  man  to  pay  ;  and 
therefore  he  warns  him  :  "  desist  forever  "  from  such  a  vain  effort 
and  from  confidence  in  its  success.  If  this  v.  came  from  the  au- 
thor it  must  be  parenthetical,  but  no  good  explanation  of  it  has 
been  given.  It  is  of  a  different  measure  from  the  previous  and 
subsequent  lines,  and  makes  the  Str.  too  long.  — 11.  The  wise 
die]  =  not  the  wise  rich  men,  but  the  pious  wise.  This  is  as  much 
as  to  say,  that  even  those  possessed  of  holy  wisdom  die,  and  that 

—  together],  all  together,  all  alike  in  a  death  common  to  all.  A 
prosaic  copyist,  wishing  to  bring  this  statement  of  fact  in  closer 
connection  with  the  rich  men  of  the  previous  context,  prefixed  : 
"  for  He  seeth  that,"  namely,  the  wise  die ;  but  this  spoils  the 
measure  of  both  lines,  forcing  MT.  and  Vrss.  to  attach  "  together  " 
to  the  next  line,  thus  making  it  a  tetrameter.  —  Stupid  and  brut- 
ish], in  antith.  to  the  wise,  those  who  are  stupid  and  dull,  and 


PSALM   XLIX.  409 

so,  gross  and  dumb  like  the  brute,  they  perish],  probably  in  the 
sense  of  descending  to  Abaddon,  a  syn.  of  the  Pit  in  Sheol ;  and 
they  abandon  their  wealth],  cf.  v.18.  They  cannot  take  it  with  them, 
can  no  longer  use  it ;  it  has  become  of  no  value  to  them.  —  to  suc- 
cessors], any  one  that  may  succeed  to  their  property ;  not  even 
denned  by  a  suffix,  as  it  might  have  been,  to  indicate  their  own 
successors,  their  descendants.  —  12.  Their  graves],  so  after  (3, 
U,  <£?,  3E,  and  most  moderns ;  "  their  inward  thought,"  of  J^,  3, 
followed  by  EVS.,  is  due  to  a  copyist's  transposition  of  letters  of 
Heb.  word.  The  former  is  so  suited  to  the  context,  and  the  latter 
is  so  unsuitable,  that  there  should  be  no  doubt  as  to  the  original. 
—  are  their  homes  forever],  taking  the  place  of  their  temporary 
earthly  homes,  cf.  Ec.  125  Tobit  38.  —  Their  dwelling  places  to  all 
generations]  ;  and  this  not  merely  for  the  poor  and  pious  wise 
men,  and  the  dull,  dumb,  brutish  men,  who  have  no  ability  to 
acquire  wealth  ;  but  also  for  those  who  have  been  so  exceedingly 
rich,  that  they  have  become  great  landed  proprietors  ;  whose  names 
are  upon  lands],  having  their  names  attached  by  public  recognition 
to  their  lands.  This  has  been  strengthened,  at  the  expense  of  the 
measure,  by  prefixing  the  verb  "call."  — 13.  The  Rfs.  here  and 
v.21  sum  up  the  real  enigma  of  the  situation  :  Man],  the  general 
term  for  mankind,  comprehending  all  of  the  race ;  and  no  longer 
men,  as  v.8,  referring  to  men  of  position  and  wealth.  —  in  worth], 
preciousness  ;  carrying  on  the  idea  of  price  of  v.8,  and  not  honour, 
EV8.,  which  is  less  exact  and  from  a  different  point  of  view.  — 
abide th  not],  does  not  continue  to  lodge  or  abide  in  his  lodging 
place  in  the  world,  so  f^,  2,  3,  %  ;  but  i§,  5b,  "understandeth  not," 
as  v.21,  J^,  and  all  Vrss.  It  is  improbable  that  the  Rf.  would  differ 
in  this  verb.  The  difference  in  Heb.  is  of  a  single  letter,  which  is 
an  easy  copyist's  mistake.  Though  the  weight  of  external  testimony 
is  strongly  for  the  latter  rendering,  the  former  is  supported  by  still 
stronger  evidence ;  for  it  is  much  better  suited  to  the  context  and 
thought  of  the  entire  Ps.,  and  it  gives  the  less  frequent  Heb.  word, 
and  on  that  account  the  most  difficult  reading.  —  He  is  to  be  com- 
pared], or  likened  in  a  simile,  —  to  beasts].  In  the  matter  of  death 
the  difference  between  them  is  slight,  if  at  all. —  that  are  no  more], 
both  man  and  beast  alike  are  cut  off  from  life  in  the  world,  and 
have  no  further  existence  apart  from  the  abode  of  the  dead. 


4IO  PSALMS 

Str.  II.  has  the  same  structure  as  Str.  I.,  save  that,  on  the  prin- 
ciple of  inclusion,  the  first  six  lines  are  in  general  correspondence 
with  the  last  six  lines  of  Str.  I.  —  14.  This  is  the  way  of  them], 
the  course  of  life  which  they  pursue,  leading  on  to  its  goal,  —  And 
the  latter  end  of  them],  as  7317,  best  suited  to  the  context.  But  a 
copyist's  error  of  a  single  letter,  ,1  forfl,  made  a  difficult  text,  which 
is  explained  in  various  ways  by  Vrss.,  all  unsatisfactory  ;  EV8.,  "  their 
posterity,"  after  2,  least  of  all.  —  that  have  self- confidence],  as  RV.ni, 
JPSV.,  Dr.,  Kirk.,  the  earlier  and  usual  meaning  of  Heb.  word, 
more  suited  to  the  context  than  the  later  meaning,  "  folly,"  of 
EV8.  —  that  are  pleased  with  their  portion],  literally  their  mouth- 
ful, the  portion  for  their  mouth  to  enjoy  as  a  delicious  morsel ;  a 
conception  more  frequent  in  the  phrase,  "double  portion,"  assigned 
usually  to  the  first-born  son,  Dt.  2117.  The  Vrss.  and  interpreters 
generally,  overlooking  this  meaning  of  the  Heb.  word,  and  think- 
ing of  the  more  usual  meaning,  "  mouth,"  paraphrased,  as  (3,  or 
thought  of  speech  of  the  mouth,  as  EV8.  after  2 ;  or  interpreted 
the  Heb.  verb  as  another  form,  with  the  meaning  "  run,"  as  Aq. ; 
all  thinking  of  others  than  the  wicked  'rich  men  of  the  previous 
line,  and  so  impairing  the  strength  of  the  syn.  couplet.  — 15.  They 
are  as  a  flock],  simile,  as  421,  followed  by  relative  clause.  —  that 
are  put  in  Sheol],  the  abode  of  the  dead  being  conceived  as  their 
fold,  in  which  they  are  shut  up  for  the  night.  —  Death],  personi- 
fied,—  is  their  shepherd],  as  (3,  RV.,  JPSV.;  possibly  antith.  to 
Yahweh  Himself,  as  the  shepherd  of  His  people,  231  802  Q57.  AV., 
"  feed  on  them,"  is  a  slight  improvement  on  PBV.,  "  gnaweth," 
which,  though  possible,  as  justified  by  a  rare  usage  of  the  verb, 
8014,  with  the  conception  that  death  is  a  wild  beast,  is  not  suited 
to  the  context,  and  is  improbable  in  itself.  —  and  their  ruler],  hav- 
ing dominion  over  them.  A  later  glossator,  misled  by  a  copyist's 
mistake  in  writing  sg.  "  morning,"  for  pi.  "  mornings,"  and  thinking 
of  the  morning  of  the  Messianic  day  of  the  redemption  of  Israel, 
and  then  interpreting  the  verb  as  referring  to  the  dominion  of  the 
righteous  over  the  wicked,  inserted  his  explanation  in  the  text,  at 
the  expense  of  the  measure  and  the  syntax,  making  the  passage 
a  crux  to  all  subsequent  interpreters.  The  original  was  really, 
every  morning,  continually,  as  7314,  belonging  to  the  next  line  to 
complete  its  measure.  —  their  form],  figure,  the  shape  and  appear- 


PSALM   XLIX.  411 

ance  of  their  disembodied  being;  not  to  be  paraphrased  into 
"  beauty,"  EV8.,  or  to  be  regarded  as  a  poetic  reference  to  their 
bodies,  mouldering  in  the  grave,  Kirk.  —  wasteth  away],  becom- 
ing old  and  worn  out  by  age  and  decay,  cf.  Jb.  i410~22.  —  Sheol] 
belongs  to  the  following  line,  0,  3,  PBV.,  AV.,  as  the  measure 
requires ;  and  is  not  the  subject  of  verb,  as  RV.,  Pe.,  Dr.,  Kirk. 
— far  from  its  lofty  dwelling],  that  of  the  form  j  paraphrased 
by  (©,  U,  and  referred  to  the  glory  of  the  rich  men  themselves. 
The  dwelling  in  Sheol,  where  they  are  doomed  to  waste  away,  is 
contrasted  with  the  lordly  dwelling  of  the  rich  in  this  life,  as  in 
v.12,  with  which  v.15  is  parallel.  RV.,  "  that  there  be  no  habitation 
for  it,"  is  not  justified  by  the  usage  of  the  Heb.  word  or  the  con- 
text.— 16.  A  later  editor,  possibly  15,  wishing  to  make  the  Ps. 
more  useful  for  public  worship,  inserted  this  gloss,  asserting  the 
antithetic  beatitude  of  the  righteous,  in  what  is  really  a  prose  sen- 
tence :  "  But  God  will  ransom  my  life  from  the  hand  of  Sheol,  for 
He  will  take  me."  The  interpretation  of  this  passage  depends  in 
great  measure  upon  the  view  taken  of  its  relation  to  the  context. 
The  first  clause  may  be  interpreted  either  of  ransom  from  death, 
or  of  ransom  from  Sheol  after  death ;  but  the  last  clause  defines  it 
as  a  taking  by  God,  which  is  suited  not  to  the  former,  but  only  to 
the  latter.  The  verse  probably  is  based  on  7324,  and  both  Pss.  on  the 
story  of  Enoch,  Gen.  5s4  (P),  which  preceded  both  Pss.  in  its  date 
of  composition  ;  cf.  also  2  K.  2910  Is.  53s.  It  implies  the  assump- 
tion of  the  righteous  dead  by  God  to  Himself,  to  the  paradise  of 
the  departed,  which  developed  in  later  Judaism  in  antith.  to  Abad- 
don or  the  Pit.  Du.  and  Charles  agree  with  De.,  among  recent 
commentators,  in  this  opinion.  Most  moderns,  even  A.  B.  David- 
son and  Salmond,  minimise  the  Eschatology  of  the  ancient  He- 
brews, so  as  to  reduce  it  much  below  the  level  of  that  of  the 
ancient  neighbouring  nations.  — 17.  Resuming  v.6  with  a  self- 
exhortation,  —  Fear  not,  when  one  groweth  rich  ||  when  the  glory 
of  the  house  is  increased],  as  the  context  indicates,  and  as  good 
usage  occasionally  allows,  referring  to  wealth,  which  indeed  is  sub- 
stituted in  RV.m,  but  without  sufficient  reason.  — 18.  For  he  can- 
not take  it  all],  with  him  in  his  death,  when  he  dies  and  descends 
to  Sheol.  —  His  glory  cannot  descend  after  him],  in  his  train,  as 
baggage,  as  it  would  in  his  travels  in  this  world.    The  text  resumes 


412  PSALMS 

the  word  "  glory  "  in  this  clause,  and  this  favours  the  opinion  that 
all,  the  whole,  of  the  previous  clause,  refers  to  all  his  riches ;  not 
with  the  implication  that  he  might  take  some  of  it  with  him,  but 
that  he  must  leave  it  all  behind  as  no  longer  of  any  real  worth  to 
him,  as  v.7"8  ll. — 19.  Though  in  his  life-time],  in  antith.  to  his  death- 
time,  v.18  j  resuming  the  thought  of  v.7.  —  he  congratulated  his  soul], 
cf.  62s ;  blessing  himself  for  what  he  had  acquired  in  the  wealth  in 
which  he  trusted,  v.7a  ;  ||  lauded  it],  the  soul,  the  self,  as  such  men 
usually  do,  taking  all  the  praise  to  themselves  for  their  success  in 
life.  —  because  it'],  the  soul,  the  self,  —  was  doing  well  to  itself]. 
This  had  been  and  continued  to  be  its  habit  during  its  life-time, 
boasting  of  the  abundance  of  riches,  v.76.  All  this  really  amounts 
to  nothing,  so  far  as  prevention  or  consolation  is  concerned  ;  it 
only  makes  the  antith.  all  the  more  striking  and  distressing.  — 
20.  //],  this  very  soul,  or  self,  —  will  go  to  the  genei-ation  of  his 
fathers],  not  simply  to  the  ancestral  tomb,  for  this  was  not  always 
the  case  j  but  to  the  gathering  of  the  fathers  in  the  realm  of  the 
dead,  who  were  regarded  as  living  as  nations,  tribes,  and  families, 
a  shadowy  existence,  reflecting  the  associations  of  this  world,  cf. 
Gn.  1515. —  Who  forever],  these  fathers,  all  departed  souls.  —  see 
not  the  daylight],  which  shines  in  this  world,  but  does  not  shine 
in  the  dark  and  gloomy  cavern  of  Sheol,  or  its  Pit,  whither  the 
wicked  rich  must  go. 

2.  l^n">a^-Sr]  combined  for  two  tones,  n^n,  v.  iy11*.  —  3.  B^lOja  .  .  . 
D~is  *J3]  men  of  low  degree,  common  men,  antith.  men  of  high  degree,  of  posi- 
tion and  influence,  as  6210,  v.  4s. — 4.  run]  a.\.  meditation,  musing,  as  jvjn  1915; 
why  not  nun  Qal  inf.  cstr.  vb.?  v.  i2. —  n>D3n,  rV»JWn]  abstr.  intensive  pis.,  terms 
of  YVL.,  v.  \  nvia.n  n.f.  in  \p  only  (1)  act  of  understanding  7s7-  1365;  (2)  object 
of  knowledge,  here  and  1475.  For  nr:rn  v.  3730.  —  5.  ^Bto]  may  refer  to  Ps. 
as  a  whole,  the  original  conception  of  its  author,  cf.  yS2  Nu.  2127"30  1  K.  51-, 
or  to  the  proverbial  saying  in  Rf.  v.13-  -1,  v.  4415.  —  %  n"'/r?]  n-f-  riddle,  obscure 
saying,  enigma,  such  as  the  Rf. ;  elsw.  7S'2  Nu.  128  (JE)  Ez.  17'2  Pr.  i6. — 
6.  JP  ^]  as  9413;  but  ©,  Du.,  a',,  as  Am.  63,  prob.  only  inexactness  of  trans- 
lation.—  »ja»i  *ar»9  V".]-  <5i  3,  2,  PBV.,  AV,  \t-v-,  my  heels,  with  p?  cstr. 
of  subj.,  iniquity  of,  or  attached  to  my  heels,  implying  confession  of  iniquity  ; 
an  unexampled  phr.,  difficult  to  understand,  modified  by  RV.,  Pe.,  as  cstr.  of 
obj.  at  my  heels,  in  vindictive  pursuit,  no  less  unexampled.  />DB  interprets 
an"  adj.  vb.  overreacher,  but  while  possible  as  a  form,  it  is  not  used  elsw. 
Origen,  followed  by  Ba.,  Ecker,  aicovfipaei  =  »ap£,  my  insidious,  deceitful 
(foes),  as  Je.  179,  paraphrased  by  j$,  mine  enemies,  is  most  probable.     Origen 


PSALM   XLIX.  413 

gives  also  leo-ovfifiovvei  i)2&  3  pi.  for  3  sg.  pj:  is  therefore,  as  the  context  sug- 
gests, the  iniquity  of  these  enemies. — 7.  D^n-1?;;]  'hv  is  needed  for  measure. 
D^n,  their  wealth,  as  v.11  G211  7312.  —  8.  ns]  is  suspicious.  Usage  requires 
rm  .  .  .  nx  or  &n  .  .  .  B^K.  Houb.,  Ew.,  Du.,  Ba.,  Che.,  rd.  ^x  as  v.10,  but  it  is 
probably  a  gl.  due  to  the  interp.  of  »;,|N  as  obj.  of  vb.  Moreover  it  makes  1. 
too  long.  —  i-p]  inf.  abs.  to  intensify  vb.  *0  is  uncommon  before  the  com- 
bination, but  cf.  Gn.  3*  Am.  98.  (Sf  has  two  clauses,  ade\<pbs  ov  XvTpovrai, 
XvrpucreTai  dvdpioiros,  taking  nx  ||  t""K.  —  9.  n|r^]  1  intensive,  asseverative 
with  Qal  impf.  [■»£;]  be  precious,  of  life  7214  1  S.  2621  2  K.  i13- 14;  here  its 
redemption.  0§  tt)v  rifirjv,  U  pretium  =  "li^  n.,  so  J5. —  -£?!]  so  3>  but  © 
"ttfej;  both  sfs.  interpretations.  —  *?yn]  1  consec.  pf.  after  n|r«,  but  improb. 
It  should  be  pointed  as  imv.  of  exhortation,  as  <£.  The  whole  1.  is  a  prose 
gl.  or  pentameter,  which  Du.  makes  into  two  trimeters  by  adding  from  v.10 
iv;  TVl  at  the  cost  of  syn.  parall.  of  next  couplet.  —  tv;]  l  subord.  with  juss. 
of  purpose,  dependent  on  v.8.  — 11.  ns-p  >.p]  introductory  gl.  to  connect  the 
two  11.  more  closely,  makes  this  1.  too  long.  —  I3tyi]  )  consec.  pf.  — 12.  D3"ip] 
<&,  Y,  &,  K,  D"Up,  so  Houb.,  Kenn.,  Lowth,  Street,  Ba.,  Du.,  Dr.,  Kirk., 
Charles,  alone  suited  to  context.  —  "'SVia]  archaic  sf.  for  euphony.  —  m~)p~] 
interpretive  and  expansive  gl.  inconsistent  with  ^",  archaic  and  euphonic  for 
7?,  which  therefore  is  original.  — 13.  C"w]  1,  not  in  v.'21  and  not  suited  to 
Rf.,  is  a  gl.  —  f  V*.]  n-m»  preciousness,  as  Pr.  2015  Jb.  2810  Je.  205  (om.  (H) 
Ez.  22'25,  of  price  Zc.  n13,  not  honour  as  Est.  I4  +  9  t.  Est.  —  pSj]  so  2,  3, 
QL  ;  but  (g,  S,  Cap.,  Houb.,  Kenn.,  Lowth,  Horsley,  Dathe,  Ew.,  p3*,  as  v.21. 
Rfs.  must  have  been  alike.  External  evidence  favours  the  latter,  internal  the 
former.  —  ^Dpj]  Niph.  pf.  rel.  clause.  J  nci,  £•#/  0^*,  early  word  Ho.  4s  Zp.  iu 
Ob.5  of  people,  Ho.  io7  of  king,  Is.  151'1  Je.  47s  of  city.  — 14.  rw]  emph. 
subj. — scL']  archaic  sf.  euphonic.  —  J  L,p~]  3  insipientiae,  folly,  as  Ec.  725; 
cf.  v.11;  not  so  prob.  as  self-confidence  Ps.  787  Pr.  326  Jb.  814  3124.  ©  CKavda- 
~Kov,  Y  scandalum  =  7l?3  improb.  —  Ep^pns].  ©  /xera  raura,  Y  postea,  3  post 
eos,  2  01  5£  /ier*  airroi>s,  all  improb.  Rd.  with  We.,  Du.,  nnnnx  ||  D3"H,  as  7317 
Dt.  3220-29  Je.  I24  3117.  —  DH>ea]  O  ^  t£  <jrbp.aTi  avrCbv,  3  juxta  os,  Aq. 
D.tsj.  nu  is  usually  interp.  as  referring  to  speech,  after  \6yov  of  2.  It  is 
rather  portion,  as  mouthful.  DJJfc'  'B  Dt.  2117  2  K.  29  Zc.  138. — «"v].  <3 
evXoyrjo-ovaiv,  interp.  of  nm  as  119108,  but  ©ART,  2,  evboK-qaovaiv ;  Aq.,  3, 
current,  «">>  ^/,'n.  — 15.  I«S^]  simile,  followed  by  rel.  clause,  as  42s.  —  inr] 
Qal  pf.  fnntf,  elsw.  73°,  =  pr.  (g  iBevro,  3  positi  sunt,  so  Aq.,  Ki.,  al. — 
1J237  Dnt'''  D3  H1*j]  (H  kcu  KaraKvpievaovaiv  clvt&v  oi  evdecs  rb  irpial,  so  3. 
This  sentence  is  tetrameter  and  leaves  the  previous  and  subsequent  lines  de- 
fective, therefore  improb.  Rd.  mp^,  and  attach  it  to  previous  1.  to  complete 
it.  J  mi,  have  dominion,  c.  2  Gn.  I26  (P)  Ez.  2915,  c.  3np3  Ps.  no2,  ace. 
pers.  Ez.  344,  Dpi  Ps.  6828,  abs.  72s.  The  change  was  due  to  the  insertion 
of  the  interpretative  ons"  as  gl ,  and  the  interp.  of  ~\p2h  as  the  morn  of  the 
Messianic  day  when  the  righteous  would  rule,  an  idea  much  later  than  our  Ps. 
">p3?,  then,  belongs  to  the  next  1.  to  complete  it,  and  we  should  rd.  pi.  Dnp3<?> 
as  7314  101s.  — o-yy]  Kt.  f["V?]  n.m.  image,  idol,  Is.  4516.     Qr.  D*vi3  =  omw, 


414  PSALMS 

their  form,  \  n.f.  as  Ez.  4311,  so  %,  3,figura.  <S  17  /So^fcta  clvtCjv,  2  r6  Kpare- 
pbv  =  tis,  r^r^,  is  improb.  —  n^a*?]  Pi.  inf.  cstr.  purpose.  @  TraXaiojOrjaeTat, 
"B  veterascet,  3  conteretur.  Rd.  prob.  Qal,  for  iwvf  is  not  connected  with  this 
vb.  and  is  needed  for  next  1.,  as  <3,  3,  in  SheoL  —  "»S  Sate],  3  post  habitacu- 
lum  suum.     f  ^a?  n.m.  is  elevation,  lofty  abode,  of  sun  and  moon  I   K.  81?  = 

2  Ch.  62  Hb.  3U,  of  God  in  heaven  Is.  6316.  It  is  improbable  that  it  could 
refer  to  the  abode  in  Sheol.  It  probably  refers  by  antith.  to  the  glorious  abode 
of  the  rich  in  this  world  ;  so  that  (S  iic  ttjs  86^rjs  clvtuv,  Jj  a  gloria  eorum,  in 
their  paraphrase  are  essentially  correct.  ?D  in  the  sense  of  far  away  from, 
v.  BZ>B. —  iS]  3  sg.  refers  to  W\M.  &,  U,  pi.  interpret  as  referring  to  the 
rich  \vh,  so  Street,  Horsley,  Ew.,  Hi.,  al. — 19.    :p^i].    The  3  pi.  between 

3  sg.  m.  and  f.  is  awkward  and  improb.  rj  is  dittog.  of  *a.  Rd.  7\"\s>\  so  rh 
for  *iS  which  has  been  assimilated. 


PSALM    L.,   3   STR.    6\   RF.    26. 

Ps.  50  is  a  didactic  poem.  (1)  God  shines  forth  from  Zion  in 
theophany,  summoning  earth,  and  heaven,  and  His  godly  ones  to  be 
present  at  the  judgment  of  His  people  for  infidelity  to  the  covenant 
at  Horeb  (v.1-7).  (2)  He  declines  to  accept  their  ritual  sacrifices, 
which  they  had  offered  in  sufficient  numbers,  for  He  has  no  need 
of  them  ;  the  animals  belong  to  Him  already.  He  will  accept,  how- 
ever, thank-offering  and  votive-offering,  and  will  rescue  His  people 
in  their  trouble  (v.8-15).  (3)  He  convicts  them  of  professing  fidelity 
to  the  covenant,  while  at  the  same  time  they  were  violating  the 
seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth  Words.  He  warns  them  not  to  forget 
Him  j  but  rather  to  glorify  Him  by  thank-offerings  ;  and  then  He 
will  let  them  see  His  salvation  (v.1*"23). 

VAHWEH  doth  speak,  and  call  the  earth  from  the  rising  of  the  sun  unto  the 
going  down  thereof. 
Out  of  Zion,  the  perfection  of  beauty,  Yahweh  cometh  shining  forth; 
Fire  devoureth  before  Him,  and  round  about  Him  it  storms  exeeedingly. 
He  calleth  to  the  heavens  above,  that  He  may  judge  His  people: 
"  Gather  my  godly  ones  to  Me,  they  that  made  a  covenant  by  peace-offering; 
And  let  the  heavens  proclaim  righteousness,  that  (Yahweh)  Himself  is  about 
to  judge." 

"  Hear,  My  people,  and  I  will  speak  ;  Israel,  and  I  will  protest  to  thee  ; 
I,  (  Yahweh)  thy  God,  {who  brought  thee  up  from  the  land  of  Egypt) ." 
(<  T^JOT  for  thy  peace-oflferings  will  I  reprove  thee,  nor  for  thy  whole  burnt-offerings 
which  are  before  Me  continually ; 
I  will  take  no  bullock  out  of  thine  house,  nor  he-goats  out  of  thy  flocks ; 
For  Mine  are  all  the  beasts  of  the  forest,  the  cattle  upon  mountains  where 
thousands  are ; 


PSALM    L.  415 

I  know  all  the  birds  of  (the  heavens),  and  that  which  moveth  in  the  field  is  in 

My  possession. 
If  I  were  hungry,  I  would  not  tell  thee ;  for  the  world  is  Mine  and  the  fulness 

thereof. 
Shall  I  eat  the  flesh  of  the  mighty  bulls,  or  drink  the  blood  of  he-goats?  " 

"  Sacrifice  to  (  Yahwefi)  thank-offering,  and  pay  thy  vows  unto  '  Ely  on  ; 
And  call  upon  Me  in  the  day  of  trouble  ;  I  will  rescue  thee  and  thou  shall 
glorify  A/e." 
a  V\7"HAT  hast  thou  to  do  with  telling  My  statutes,  and  taking  My  covenant  by 
thy  mouth? 
Seeing  thou  hatest  discipline,  and  hast  cast  My  words  behind  thee. 
When  thou  sawest  a  thief,  thou  wast  pleased,  and  with  adulterers  was  thy 

portion ; 
Thy  mouth  thou  hast  put  forth  for  evil,  and  thy  tongue  frameth  deceit; 
Thou  sittest  down  to  speak  against  thy  brother,  against  thy  mother's  son  thou 

allegest  fault. 
These  things  thou  hast  done,  and  I  have  kept  silence ;  thou  didst  deem  that 
I  was  like  thee." 

"  /  will  convict  thee,  and  set  it  forth  before  thine  eyes  ;  consider  this,  ye 

for  getters  of  Me. 
Whoso  offer eth  a  thank-offering  glorifieth  Me.    I  will  let  him  see  the 
salvation  of  (  Yahweh) ." 

Ps.  50  was  in  %  and  £H  before  it  was  taken  up  into  IE  (v.  Intr.  §§  29, 31,  22). 
The  author  uses  in  v.1,  Dt.  32l8<i-  Is.  I2;  in  v.2"3.  Dt.  3f,  cf.  Ps.  8o2"3  (21); 
the  Ten  Words  (7,  8,  9)  in  v.18"30;  the  preface  of  the  Ten  Words  in  v.7; 
Dnan  for  the  Ten  Words  in  v.17;  the  D*pn  of  E,  D,  in  v.13;  nna  mo  in  v.5,  phr. 
of  J,  E,  D,  not  used  in  P;  rot  Vy  of  Ex.  24  in  v.5.  The  limitation  of  sacrifices 
to  mr,  nSiJ?,  mm,  ~i"U,  v.5, 8- u,  is  Deuteronomic.  All  this  favours  dependence 
on  D  and  priority  to  P.  V.1  inud  t;  CDtt'  mrn  =  1133  Mai.  I11,  but  earlier, 
because  it  refers  to  the  earth  in  antith.  to  the  heavens,  and  not  to  its  own 
inhabitants  in  a  universalistic  sense.  V.2  ^  "??3D  is  related  to  La.  215,  and  is 
probably  a  proverbial  expression  used  of  Zion  in  preexilic  times,  and  so 
attached  to  it  that  it  persisted  in  postexilic  usage,  even  though  the  later  tem- 
ple could  not  compare  in  beauty  or  grandeur  with  the  former,  cf.  Ps.  48s. 
V.7  is  related  to  819  in  its  citation  of  the  preface  to  the  Ten  Words,  and  v.2-3 
to  8o2-3,v.n  to  8014  (both  ft)  and  v.9  hnS^d  to  78™,  cf.  Hb.  317.  \vhf  in  v.14  is 
characteristic  of  ft.  The  Ps.  is  thus  similar  to  others  of  ft.  The  heaping  up 
of  divine  names  v.1  as  Jos.  2222  is  redactional;  "ojn  v.7  is  in  citation;  vthn  v.22 
is  a  late  gl. ;  *poK  jo  v.22  is  a  gl.  citing  from  73.  These  give  no  evidence  of 
date,  idid  v.17  is  used  in  the  earlier  sense  of  Je.,  and  not  in  the  later  sense 
of  WL.  The  syntax  is  early :  1  consec.  impf.  v.1- ll- 18,  cohort,  v.7- 8.  The  other 
examples,  v.3- 6-  7,  are  glosses  or  misinterpretations  of  MT.  The  judgment  is 
of  the  people  of  Yahweh  as  Dt.  32,  and  not  of  the  nations.  The  people  are 
apparently  dispersed  in  the  earth,  though  the  temple  is  standing  and  Yahweh 
is  present  there.  The  Ps.  was  prob.  composed  in  the  Eastern  Diaspora  in  the 
late  Persian  period  subsequent  to  Nehemiah. 


416  PSALMS 

Str.  I.  has  a  tetrastich  with  introverted  parallelism,  and  a  synth. 
couplet.  —  1.  Yahweh],  doubtless  original  to  the  Ps.  throughout, 
for  which  3£  substituted  E to  him,  which  by  dittog.  became  El 
Elohim  ;  finally  a  later  editor  restored  Yahweh,  thus  heaping  up 
divine  names,  as  elsewhere  only  Jos.  22".  This  destroyed  the 
measure  and  induced  various  explanations.  — doth  speak  and  call], 
in  the  sense  of  summon  to  attend  at  the  seat  of  judgment.  —  the 
earth],  personified,  and  repeated  in  gloss  after  the  heavens  above], 
v.4 ;  based  on  Dt.  321"2  Is.  i2.  They  are  summoned  as  witnesses 
or  assessors  at  the  judgment,  they  taking  their  part  in  commotions 
such  as  usually  accompany  theophanies.  — from  the  rising  of  the 
sun  unto  the  going  down  thereof],  from  the  extreme  East  to  the 
extreme  West,  for  the  entire  earth  between  these  two  extremities ; 
and  not  as  1 133  Mai.  i11,  for  the  nations  inhabiting  the  entire  earth  ; 
for  they  have  no  place  whatever  in  this  judgment  of  Israel.  — 
2-3.  The  theophany  for  judgment  is  now  described  :  Out  of  Zion], 
the  royal  residence  of  Yahweh,  implying  that  the  temple  was  stand- 
ing and  the  ceremonies  of  worship  were  carried  on  there.  —  the 
pe?fection  of  beauty*],  the  proverbial  description  of  Zion  as  it  ap- 
pears in  La.  215,  not,  however,  implying  a  preexilic  situation.  That 
the  second  temple  was  not  equal  in  beauty  to  the  first  might  well 
have  been  the  feeling  of  the  old  men  who  had  seen  the  ancient 
temple  and  could  compare  them  ;  but  not  of  their  posterity,  still 
less  of  the  Diaspora  to  whom  Zion  was  a  glorious  ideal,  cf.  4s3  (ISt) 
1  Mac.  212.  —  Yahweh  cometh  shining  forth].  The  measure  requires 
this  combination.  The  coming  is  the  theophanic  coming  forth 
from  the  throne-room  of  the  temple ;  it  is  a  shining  forth  of  the 
light  of  the  Glory,  cf.  802  (&)  Dt.  $y.  A  copyist  inserted  in  the 
margin,  "  let  Him  not  keep  silence,"  in  a  time  when  the  advent 
of  Yahweh  was  longed  for  by  His  people.  This  eventually  became 
a  part  of  the  text,  and  occasioned  the  separation  of  "  come  "  from 
the  previous  line  and  the  insertion  of  its  subject,  "  our  God,"  giving 
four  tones  of  an  incomplete  line  additional  to  the  Str.,  and  making 
the  negative  jussive  in  its  context  a  crux  of  Heb.  syntax. —  Fire 
devoureth  before  Him],  as  frequently  in  theophanies ;  the  light  of 
the  glory  accompanied  by  devouring  fire,  cf.  97s.  —  and  round 
about  Him  it  storms  exceedingly],  cf.  the  advent  in  a  storm,  189"16 
Jb.  381.  —  4.    that  lie  may  judge  IJ is  people].     The  theophanic 


PSALM    L.  417 

advent,  the  summoning  of  the  witnesses,  is,  as  the  subsequent  con- 
text shows,  for  testing  them  by  the  covenant  to  which  they  had 
pledged  allegiance.  The  nations  are  not  to  be  judged  at  this  ad- 
vent, as  in  the  royal  Pss.  96-100,  cf.  9-10;  but  the  people  of  Israel 
alone,  as  Dt.  32s6.  —  5.  Gather  to  Me],  assemble  from  various 
places.  Yahweh  Himself  speaks,  addressing  the  heavens,  Hu., 
Ba. ;  not  the  angels  understood,  Moll.,  Kirk.,  which  do  not  appear 
in  this  Ps.  —  My  godly  ones'],  usually  referred  to  pious  Israelites, 
scattered  about  over  the  earth,  which  is  apparently  favoured  by 
the  addition  of  the  gloss,  "  earth,"  to  "  the  heavens  above,"  in  the 
previous  clause.  If,  however,  the  heavens  are  the  agents,  it  is 
more  probable  that  others  than  pious  Israelites  are  in  view,  espe- 
cially as  it  is  the  people  as  a  whole  that  are  to  be  judged,  and 
not  merely  wicked  Israelites.  It  is  probable  that  the  anciept  wor- 
thies, Moses  and  the  elders,  are  summoned  from  the  gathering 
place  of  the  departed  to  witness  this  judgment  of  Israel.  This  best 
suits  the  context,  for  they  were  the  ones  that  made  a  covenant  by 
peace-offering\  at  the  institution  of  the  covenant  at  Horeb,  Ex.  24s. 
The  later  generations  inherited  the  covenant  with  its  obligations, 
but  did  not  share  in  the  peace-offerings  in  connection  with  which 
it  was  made.  —  6.  Let  the  heavens  proclaim  righteousness],  make 
the  solemn,  public  proclamation  that  righteousness  is  about  to  be 
administered,  ||  that  Yahweh  Himself  is  about  to  judge],  decide 
the  case  of  His  people  as  regards  their  fidelity  to  covenant  obliga- 
tions. Even  J^  attaches  the  suffix  "  his  "  to  righteousness,  although 
it  is  not  suited  to  the  words  of  Yahweh,  which  continue  here  and 
throughout  the  Ps.  The  suffix  is  an  interpretation,  as  probably 
also  in  the  previous  verse,  in  both  J^  and  (3,  the  one  using  the 
1st  pers.,  the  other  the  3d  pers.  —  7.  Hear,  My  people].  Now 
for  the  first  time,  in  presence  of  the  witnesses  and  assessors,  Yah- 
weh addresses  His  people.  This  is  a  couplet  of  Refrain,  as  v.14-15 
v.21c"23.  —  And  I  will  speak]  :  what  I  have  to  say  as  judge  of 
the  case  in  hand  ||  and  I  will  protest  to  thee],  solemnly  bear  wit- 
ness. —  I,  Yahweh,  thy  God],  asserting  His  right  as  the  God  who 
had  taken  them  into  covenant  at  Horeb,  who  brought  thee  up  from 
the  land  of  Egypt,  reaffirming,  therefore,  the  introductory  sanction 
of  the  Ten  Words.  The  measure  requires  this  clause,  which  is 
indeed  cited  in  8111,  and  which  was  probably  omitted  here  by  an 


4l8  PSALMS 

early  copyist  as  an  abbreviation,  the  introductory  words  sufficiently 
suggesting  it  to  the  pious  Jew. 

Str.  II.  has  three  syn.  couplets.  —  8.  Not  for  thy  peace-offerings] 
emphatic  in  position,  the  festal  offerings  with  their  communion 
meals,  ||  whole  burnt-offerings],  those  entirely  consumed  on  the 
altar,  expressive  of  worship. — which  are  before  Me  continually], 
because  offered  daily  in  the  Levitical  ritual,  morning  and  evening, 
so  that  in  later  times  these  offerings  gained  the  name  Tamidh  ;  cf. 
Nu.  28s,  which  Kirk,  thinks  is  alluded  to  here  ;  but  this  is  improba- 
ble, because  the  Ps.  depends  on  J,  E,  D,  and  shows  no  knowledge  of 
the  institutions  of  P.  —  will  I  reprove  thee],  that  is,  because  these 
were  insufficient  or  not  in  proper  form,  in  accordance  with  the 
ritual  Law.  The  reproof  has,  as  the  subsequent  context  shows,  not 
ritual,  but  ethical  reasons.  —  9.  I  will  take],  in  the  sense  of  ac- 
cept as  satisfactory.  —  no  bullock],  the  most  valuable  of  the  offer- 
ings of  the  herd.  —  nor  he-goats],  the  most  valuable  of  the  offerings 
of  the  flock.  —  out  of  thine  house],  in  the  larger  sense,  including 
the  out-houses  where  the  cattle  were  stalled.  These,  the  most 
valuable  of  all  offerings,  were  not  acceptable  because  they  were 
not  offered  by  a  people  in  right  relations  with  their  God. — 
10.  For],  giving  as  a  reason  of  the  previous  couplet,  that  God  has 
no  need  of  such  offerings,  preparatory  to  the  chief  reason,  which  is 
reserved  for  Str.  III.  —  Mine],  emphatic  in  position  and  statement, 
—  are  all  the  beasts  of  the  forest],  the  wild  animals  roaming  there 
in  free  and  vigorous  life.  —  the  cattle],  grazing  upon  mountains 
where  thousands  are],  so  Aq.,  3,  RV.m,  and  most  moderns ;  in 
vast  numbers,  and  not  "  thousand  hills,"  as  PBV.,  AV.,  or,  "  and 
oxen,"  (3,  U. — 11.  /  know],  as  a  shepherd  knows  his  herd  and 
flock  ||  in  My  possession.  —  all  the  birds  of  the  he  averts],  as  (&,  j$, 
3D,  more  probable  than  "of  the  mountains,"  J^,  3,  EV8.  ||  and  that 
which  moveth  in  the  field],  as  8o14 ;  possibly  reptiles,  but  uncertain 
in  reference.  All  kinds  of  animals  belong  to  God,  and  He  can 
use  them  at  His  pleasure  without  receiving  them  from  men. — 
12.  If  I  were  hungry],  a  conditional  clause  implying  a  negative 
answer.  —  1  would  not  tell  thee],  as  if  I  had  need  of  anything  the 
people  could  give  me ;  for  the  world  is  Mine],  all  belonging  to 
me,  as  its  proprietor.  —  and  the  fulness  thereof],  all  its  inhabitants, 
all  living  things  and  all  vegetation,  everything  in  it  that  could  be 


PSALM    L.  419 

eaten.  — 13.  Shall  I  eat  ||  drink],  implying  an  indignant  negative, 
—  the  flesh  of  the  mighty  nulls],  those  of  Bashan,  the  strongest  and 
most  valuable,  —  the  blood  of  he-goats],  as  offered  in  sacrifice  and 
given  to  God  as  His  share,  in  the  flame  of  the  altar.  If  God  ac- 
cepted His  share  of  the  sacrifices  in  this  way,  it  did  not  imply  the 
gross  idea  that  He,  like  men,  ate  and  drank  these  things.  — 
14.  The  Rf.  is  a  couplet  of  exhortation,  after  the  previous  remon- 
strance. —  Sacrifice  to  Yahweh  thank-offering],  usually  interpreted 
of  thanksgiving  expressed  in  prayers  and  songs,  in  antith.  to  a 
sacrifice  of  animals  ;  but  this  is  improbable,  as  the  ||  pay  thy  vows 
unto  l  Ely  on],  can  only  be  understood  of  votive  offerings;  both 
characteristic  of  ©,  and  regarded  as  voluntary  offerings,  expressive 
of  a  real,  pious  disposition  of  the  offerer ;  as  distinguished  from 
prescribed  ritual  offerings,  which  too  often  become  perfunctory, 
and  merely  empty  ceremonial  forms.  This  is  as  much  as  to  say : 
make  real,  sincere,  and  voluntary  offerings,  and  pay  the  votive 
offerings  you  have  vowed ;  get  into  right  relations  with  your  God ; 
and  then,  — 15.  Call  upon  Me,  in  petition  or  intercession,  —  in 
the  day  of  trouble,  when  divine  help  is  especially  needed  ;  /  will 
rescue  thee,  from  the  trouble,  and  then  thou,  on  thy  part,  shall 
glorify  me,  in  public  thanksgiving  and  praise. 

Str.  III.  has  all  its  lines  in  synth.  relations  with  their  predeces- 
sors, in  pressing  home  one  serious  charge  after  another,  until  the 
climax  is  reached.  — 16.  A  glossator,  wishing  to  separate  this  Str. 
more  distinctly  from  the  previous  one,  prefixes  the  clause:  "and 
to  the  wicked  God  said,"  which  gives  but  half  a  hexameter,  and 
one  line  too  many  for  the  Str.,  or  else,  if  attached  to  the  first  line, 
make  that  much  too  long.  The  context  makes  the  address  suffi- 
ciently obvious  without  this  prosaic  addition.  —  What  hast  thou 
to  do],  an  idiomatic  phrase  :  is  it  thine  affair,  or  business?  —  with 
telling  My  statutes],  the  brief,  terse  sentences  of  Law,  usually  with 
the  penalty  attached  (v.  Br.IIex-239)  ;  proclaiming  them  and  teach- 
ing them,  when  they  do  not  obey  them  themselves,  addressing  the 
people  in  their  solidarity,  as  in  the  Ten  Words,  and  not  as  indi- 
viduals. —  taking  My  covenant  by  thy  mouth],  taking  up  the  ances- 
tral covenant,  renewing  it  by  oral  assumption  of  its  obligations, 
as  was  done  by  the  nation  in  the  times  of  Hezekiah  and  Josiah. — 
17.   Seeing  thou  hatest  discipline],  instead  of  loving  it  as  a  true 


420  PSALMS 

child  of  God,  in  the  earlier  sense  of  prophetic  instruction,  as  in 
Je.  1723  32s3  3513  Zeph.  327.  — My  words'],  as  v.18-20,  the  sentences 
of  the  Ten  Words,  Ex.  20  Dt.  5  {v.  Br."ex- 181) .  —  hast  cast  behind 
thee],  of  positive,  scornful,  and  determined  rejection.  The  speci- 
fications of  the  charge  follow  rapidly  :  — 18.  (a)  When  thou  saw- 
est  a  thief],  instead  of  visiting  him  with  punishment  according  to 
the  Eighth  Word,  thou  wast  pleased],  accepted  him  with  gratifi- 
cation. —  (b)  and  with  adulterers'],  the  violators  of  the  Seventh 
Word,  was  thy  portion,  sympathising  with  them  in  their  unlawful 
acts,  instead  of  putting  them  to  death  as  the  Law  required.  — 
19.  (c)  Thy  mouth  thou  hast  put  forth],  in  utterance;  let  it  loose 
in  speech,  —  and  thy  tongue  frameth],  deliberate  construction  ; 

—  evil  \  deceit],  to  the  injury  of  neighbours,  by  false  witness  in 
violation  of  the  Ninth  Word  ;  and  this  even  against  near  kindred. 

—  20.  Thou  sittest  down] ,  of  deliberate  action,  —  to  speak  against 
||  allsgest  fault],  of  complaint  before  the  ministers  of  justice,  in 
false  witness,  —  against  thy  brother],  the  son  of  the  same  father, 
and,  still  worse  in  a  polygamous  society,  —  against  thy  mother's 
son].  These  three  Words  were  doubtless  taken  as  specimens  of 
violation  of  the  primitive  tables  of  the  Covenant,  just  as  in  the 
discourse  of  Jesus,  Mt.  521"37.  They  are  sufficient  to  lead  to  the 
summary  statement,  —  21 .  These  things  thou  hast  done,  and  I  have 
kept  silence],  not  visiting  them  with  punishment,  apparently  not 
noticing  them  or  caring  for  them  ;  and  so,  from  this  seeming 
neglect ;  thou  didst  deem  that  I  was  like  thee],  in  caring  for  none 
of  these  things,  or  in  being  pleased  with  them.  A  kind  but  firm 
rebuke  is  now  given  in  the  climax.  —  /  will  convict  thee],  make 
the  matter  so  plain  and  distinct  that  it  cannot  be  evaded,  —  and 
set  it  forth  before  thine  eyes],  so  clearly  that  it  must  be  seen. — 
22-23.  The  Rf.  summons  to  serious  reflection  :  Consider  this,  ye 
forgetters  of  Me].  Only  forgetfulness  of  Yahweh  could  let  them 
think  that  He  would  act  so  contrary  to  His  covenant  as  to  over- 
look the  persistent  violation  of  its  fundamental  Words.  A  later 
editor,  dissatisfied  with  the  mildness  of  the  rebuke,  inserted  at  the 
expense  of  the  measure,  from  f  :  "lest  I  tear  you  in  pieces  and 
there  be  none  to  deliver  "  ;  and  at  the  same  time  makes  the  pre- 
vious word  more  objective  by  substituting  "  God  "  for  the  suffix 
"Me."  —  The  Ps.  concludes  with  essentially  the  same  thought  as 


PSALM   L.  421 

v.14 ;  only  the  exhortation  is  changed  into  a  statement  of  fact : 
whoso  off  ere  th  a  thank-offering  glorifieth  Me\  The  last  clause  is 
made  more  difficult  by  the  insertion  of  a  sentence  evidently  de- 
signed to  make  it  more  definite  :  "  There  is  the  way  wherein  "  j  as 
(3,  5&  ;  otherwise  explained  by  other  Vrss.,  ancient  and  modern, 
but  without  agreement  or  satisfactory  results.  The  clause  is  indeed 
essentially  the  same  as  v.15.  If  Israel,  on  his  part,  offers  the  ac- 
ceptable thank-offering,  Yahweh,  on  His  part,  will  let  him  see\ 
look  upon  with  gratification,  the  salvation  of  Yahweh. 

1.  nirp  DV&M  *?*«]  three  distinct  divine  names,  cf.  Aq.,  2,  9,  3 ;  but  <§>,  V, 
J5,  Sn  cstr.  debs  dewv  Kvptos.  nim  in  15  improb.  dti^n  is  a  simple  variant 
of  the  poetic  ^n. — —ly]  (3  iffy  makes  a  separate  tone.  —  2.  ">p*«  SVapJ  a.X. 
ifl>  pS'S-  La_  215  of  Zion,  Ez.  27s  of  Tyre  ;  final  n  has  been  elided  by  txt.  err. 
D  is  prosaic  repetition  of  ]~.  — £,o'i;"1]  rightly  attached  by  <f§  as  adv.  ifupavQs 
to  S3',  as  the  measure  requires.  —  3.  Bhrp-1?*^]  no  good  explanation  of  neg. 
juss.  here,  except  as  gl.  of  petition.  It  is  rendered  by  Vrss.  ancient  and  mod- 
ern as  indicative  with  N*?.  —  n","^'J]  Niph.  pf.  3  m.  impersonal,  it  storms,  f  yflff 
for  n;-D,  elsw.  Qal  j8*o,  Pi.  Jb'  '2721,  Hithp.  Dn.  n40.— 4.  ^>r.]  for  SyDD,  as 
Gn.  2739  4925  (JE);  so  Houb.,  Lag.,  We.,  Che.,  here.  —  fiNn  ^ni]  is  a  gl. — 
5.  "'S-'iflDN]  elsw.  c.  "?n.  (g  "iS  or  via,  so  &.  The  difference  of  sfs.  extends  to 
■>TDn  or  wDn,  <nna  or  lnna.  "lpn*  v.6  $?,  <&,  favours  3  sg.;  but  all  these  sfs. 
are  prob.  gls.  of  interpretation,  the  originals  being  without  any  of  them. 
The  interp.  of  |§  is,  however,  correct  in  all  save  ^p"tt;  for  God  is  speaker. — 
6»  ^J-.1]  1  consec.  impf.  must  go  back  to  pfs.  of  v.1,  as  the  response  of  heaven 
to  the  divine  call.  But  (3  rd.  simple  >,  as  apodosis  of  imv.  It  is  best  to  take 
it  as  "i  coord,  and  the  vb.  as  juss.  — x-in]  is  a  copula  in  <3,  3.  Ew.,  Pe.,  take 
it  as  emph.  demonst.,  self.  —  ooir]  Qal  ptc.  may  have  nominal  force,  as  <&,  3, 
Ba.,  Du.,  or  verbal  as  Dr.  —  7.  rnaiNi]  i  apod,  of  imv.,  cohort,  impf.  <3  has 
aoi  =  qS  against  the  measure.  —  *?Jn]  older  form  in  citation  from  Ex.  202.  — 
9.  :pnK?:5DE]  has  two  accents,  f  [n*!jPJ?]  enclosure,  fold,  v^—j  7%~°  Hb.  317. 
— 10.  'S]  S  of  possession,  emph.  —  "W^rnn]  as  10420  Is.  569,  cf.  Gn.  i24  (P) 
Pss.  792  10411,  v.  Ges.§90n;  archaic  case  ending,  merely  euphonic.  —  ^n"1*?.!}?] 
fuller  form  cstr.  for  >"\p,  poetic  and  euphonic.  Cstr.  before  number  is  unex- 
ampled ;  so  Du.  ^Sx  onn.  But  Aq.,  3,  in  montibus  milium;  so  De.,  Ba., 
RV.m,  al.  <3  xal  /36es,  V  etboves,  so  &,  =  r^io,  elsw.  always  pi.  Ps.  88,  cf.  14414. 
Ols.,  Oort,  Bi.,  We.,  Ecker,  rd.  Sv  nnn. —  11.  D*vi  W]  %  3,  improb.  phr. 
due  to  error  of  eye  of  copyist  taking  nnn  from  previous  1.;  given  correctly 
d^dbh  <3,  £>,  &,  Street,  Du.,  Che.  —  fvifcr  pt]  =  8014,  cf.  As.  zizdnu,  coll. 
reptiles,  i?DB.  moving  things.  — 15.  M^am]  as  v.23;  the  1.  is  defective,  pre- 
fix nnm — 16.  d\-iSn  -\dn  pBhSi]  is  expl.  gl.  —  sfrn;)]  1  consec.  impf.  after 
inf.  makes  both  aorist.  — 18.  ,prn]  1  consec.  impf.  Qal.  nm  Dr.,  Du.;  but 
(g,  S,  3T,  Luther,  Gr.,  Oort,  Ba.,  p"vv,  fH  run.  —  iDy]  is  prob.  dittog.  of  the 


422  PSALMS 

ojn  that  follows ;  it  makes  1.  too  long.  — 19.  Tcxn]  Hiph.  impf.  f  "*EJ  vb. 
Niph.  c.  j»,  attach  oneself  to,  io628  Nu.  25^  6  (JE).  '  Pu.  be  bound,  of  sword  on 
loins  2  S.  208.  Hiph.  bind  together,  frame,  here.  Gerber  thinks  it  is  denom. 
of  TD|.  —  20.  ar;]  impf.  frequentative;  variation  from  previous  aorists. — 
f  >?i]  i.p.  elsw.  BS.  4419,  cf.  N.H.  >dv ,  blemish,  fault:  @  <rK&v8a\ov,  Aq.,  2, 
3,  opprobrium. — 21.  *l«Hrn>]  1  coord,  emph.  antith.  of  man's  actions  and 
God's.  —  n^r]  Qal  inf.  cstr.  with  vb.  unexampled  and  improb.  There  is 
conflation  of  two  variants,  as  1.  is  one  word  too  long.  Inf.  cstr.  as  more  diffi- 
cult is  prob.  original.  One  only  is  known  to  3.  <8,  8,  £>,  avo^lav  6'rt  to-opai 
=  nvM  pin  ;  p"*n  =  dvofxia  57*.  —  n^TOr]  tAt.  err.  for  nprw,  &.  —  22.  *nai? 
^*]  makes  the  1.  too  long,  f*Sh  is  a  late  insertion;  rd.  -npj;. — 23.  na>] 
ptc.  MT.,  j&,  2,  3  ;  but  @  nar  n.  subj.  vb.  —  ^r-n  ]  cf.  v.16  >}12d~\  The 
second  :  is  dittog.  The  3  of  the  energetic  form  is  improb.  —  ^yi  Din]  @,  5, 
Luther,  Lowth,  //^r<?  is  the  way.  De.,  Dr.,  expl.  1  consec.  pf.  z^t,  and  prepare 
a  way.  Hare,  Street,  Gr.,  Oort,  Kau.,  bp  .  It  makes  1.  long,  and  is  doubtless 
an  expl.  gl. 


Briggs,  C.  A* 
Book  of  Psalms. 


BS 

.16 

T.15 
pt.I